Skip to main content

Full text of "American anthropologist"

See other formats 


Google 


This  is  a  digital  copy  of  a  book  that  was  preserved  for  generations  on  library  shelves  before  it  was  carefully  scanned  by  Google  as  part  of  a  project 

to  make  the  world's  books  discoverable  online. 

It  has  survived  long  enough  for  the  copyright  to  expire  and  the  book  to  enter  the  public  domain.  A  public  domain  book  is  one  that  was  never  subject 

to  copyright  or  whose  legal  copyright  term  has  expired.  Whether  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  may  vary  country  to  country.  Public  domain  books 

are  our  gateways  to  the  past,  representing  a  wealth  of  history,  culture  and  knowledge  that's  often  difficult  to  discover. 

Marks,  notations  and  other  maiginalia  present  in  the  original  volume  will  appear  in  this  file  -  a  reminder  of  this  book's  long  journey  from  the 

publisher  to  a  library  and  finally  to  you. 

Usage  guidelines 

Google  is  proud  to  partner  with  libraries  to  digitize  public  domain  materials  and  make  them  widely  accessible.  Public  domain  books  belong  to  the 
public  and  we  are  merely  their  custodians.  Nevertheless,  this  work  is  expensive,  so  in  order  to  keep  providing  tliis  resource,  we  liave  taken  steps  to 
prevent  abuse  by  commercial  parties,  including  placing  technical  restrictions  on  automated  querying. 
We  also  ask  that  you: 

+  Make  non-commercial  use  of  the  files  We  designed  Google  Book  Search  for  use  by  individuals,  and  we  request  that  you  use  these  files  for 
personal,  non-commercial  purposes. 

+  Refrain  fivm  automated  querying  Do  not  send  automated  queries  of  any  sort  to  Google's  system:  If  you  are  conducting  research  on  machine 
translation,  optical  character  recognition  or  other  areas  where  access  to  a  large  amount  of  text  is  helpful,  please  contact  us.  We  encourage  the 
use  of  public  domain  materials  for  these  purposes  and  may  be  able  to  help. 

+  Maintain  attributionTht  GoogXt  "watermark"  you  see  on  each  file  is  essential  for  in  forming  people  about  this  project  and  helping  them  find 
additional  materials  through  Google  Book  Search.  Please  do  not  remove  it. 

+  Keep  it  legal  Whatever  your  use,  remember  that  you  are  responsible  for  ensuring  that  what  you  are  doing  is  legal.  Do  not  assume  that  just 
because  we  believe  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  the  United  States,  that  the  work  is  also  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  other 
countries.  Whether  a  book  is  still  in  copyright  varies  from  country  to  country,  and  we  can't  offer  guidance  on  whether  any  specific  use  of 
any  specific  book  is  allowed.  Please  do  not  assume  that  a  book's  appearance  in  Google  Book  Search  means  it  can  be  used  in  any  manner 
anywhere  in  the  world.  Copyright  infringement  liabili^  can  be  quite  severe. 

About  Google  Book  Search 

Google's  mission  is  to  organize  the  world's  information  and  to  make  it  universally  accessible  and  useful.   Google  Book  Search  helps  readers 
discover  the  world's  books  while  helping  authors  and  publishers  reach  new  audiences.  You  can  search  through  the  full  text  of  this  book  on  the  web 

at|http: //books  .google  .com/I 


232  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

only  possible  explanation  of  these  holes  is  that  they  are  the^work  of  man. 
The  end  of  the  fragment  has  also  two  or  more  slight  notches,  the  margin 
of  which  is  like  that  of  the  incomplete  hole  mentioned.  These  also  are 
probably  of  artificial  origin  and  can  hardly  be  explained  by  natural  splin- 
tering of  the  bone,  or  as  the  work  of  carnivora  or  rodents. 

'*  We  therefore  endorse  without  question  Professor  Putnam's  view 
that  this  bone  certainly  shows  the  handiwork  of  man,  and  we  take  pleas- 
ure in  expressing  our  acknowledgments  for  the  privilege  of  examining  it. 

[Signed]  **W.  D.  Matthew,  J.  W.  Gidlev. 

"American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
February  second^  '905'^^ 

As  the  musk-ox  is  unknown  in  the  Shasta  cave  fauna  it  is  not 
probable  that  this  specimen  represents  a  bone  of  one  of  these 
animals.  There  were,  however,  in  these  caves  abundant  remains 
of  the  new  genus  Eucerat/urium^  a  large  sheep-like  animal  related 
to  the  musk-ox  and  possessing  bones  quite  similar  in  form  and 
size.  Euceratherium  was  one  of  the  more  common  ungulates  at  the 
period  when  the  cave  deposit  was  forming  and  would  have  served 
as  one  of  the  principal  food  supplies  for  early  man  if  he  were  living  in 
this  region  at  the  time.  The  form  of  this  fragment  agrees  as  closely 
with  that  of  the  distal  end  of  the  humerus  of  Euceratherium  as  it 
does  with  that  of  Ovibos^  and  there  is  good  reason  for  believing  that 
it  represents  that  bone.  In  the  humerus  of  Euceratherium  the  fora- 
mina are  similar  to  those  in  Ovibos^  and  there  are  no  natural  openings 
that  correspond  to  the  perforations  seen  here. 

The  smaller  completely  enclosed  perforation  in  the  specimen 
(pi.  XV,  figs.  2,  3,  4;  pi.  XVI,  fig.  4)  is  almost  circular  in  outline, 
is  nearly  normal  to  the  surface  of  the  bone,  and  is  slightly  beveled 
on  the  margins.  The  cutting  of  the  hole  and  the  beveling  are  not 
accompanied  by  much  cutting  of  the  natural  canals  of  the  bone, 
but  the  form  and  direction  of  the  holes  are  not  comparable  with 
those  of  ordinary  natural  foramina. 

Close  to  the  smaller  perforation  is  an  exceedingly  small  open- 
ing, about  half  a  millimeter  in  diameter,  indicated  in  the  illustra- 
tions (pi.  XV,  fig.  4  ;  pi.  XVI,  fig.  4)  by  a  bristle.  It  may  represent 
a  natural  foramen  or  it  may  be  artificial ;  it  is  difficult  to  determine 
its  true  nature. 


BONE  FRAaMENTS  FROM  POTTER  CREEK  CAVE 
{  Drp^nment  of  Anihropology,  Univcnily  of  Calironik.     Nilun 
of  splinTFKd  fragnifnl  (in  (he  tipper  end  (here  l>  a  nearly  circuli 


I 


f 


I 


i 


\ 


1 

« 


AMERICAN 
ANTHROPOLOGIST 


NEW  SERIES 

ORGAN  OF  THE  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  ASSOCIATION, 

THE  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  SOCIETY  OF  WASHINGTON, 

AND  THE  AMERICAN    ETHNOLOGICAL 

SOCIETY  OF  NEW  YORK 


PUBLICATION   COMMITTEE 

F.  W.  PUTNAM,  Chairman  ex-officio ;  F.  W.  HODGE,  Secretary  ex-officio ;  JUAN 

B.  AMBROSETTI,  FRANK  BAKER,  FRANZ  BOAS,  DAVID  BOYLE, 

ALEXANDER  F.   CHAMBERLAIN,   ALFREDO   CHAVERO, 

STEWART  CULIN,  GEORGE  A.  DORSEY,  J.  WALTER 

FEWKES,  ALICE  C.  FLETCHER,  GEORGE  BYRON 

GORDON,  W.  H.  HOLMES,  H.  von  IHERING, 

A.  L.  KROEBER,  RUDOLFO  LENZ, 

W  J  McGEE,  CHARLES 

PEABODY. 

F.  W.  HODGE,  Editor,  Washington,  D.  C. 


VOLUME  8 


LANCASTER,  PA.,  U.  S.  A. 

PUBUSHED  FOR 

THE  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  ASSOCLITION 

Z906 


I 


A 


I 

.r 


V 


CONTENTS  OF  VOLUME  8 
ARTICLES 

PACB 

Relics  of  Early  Man  in  Western  Switzerland.     D.  I.  Bushnell,  Jr. 

(Plates  I-III) I 

A  Stone  Ruin  at  Se-tsak,  Guatemala.     Robert  Burkitt.     (Plates 

A  »  *^      y  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  '3 

Cheyenne  Stream  Names.  George  Bird  Grinnell  .  .  •  15 
The  Powhatan  Name  for  Virginia.     William  Wallace  Tooker. 

(Plate  VI) 23 

A  Puberty  Ceremony  of  the  Mission  Indians.     Horatio  N.  Rust. 

(Plate  VII) 2S 

A  Remarkable  Pipe  from  Northwestern  America.  Harlan  I.  Smith.  33 
Notes  on  the  Pima  of  Arizona.  Ales  Hrdlicka.  (Plates  VIII-IX)  39 
Traditions  of  Precolumbian  Earthquakes  and  Volcanic  Eruptions  in 

Western  South  America.  Adolph  F.  Bandelier  .  .  .47 
Tang'-ga,  a  Philippine  Pa-ma' -to  Game.     Albert  Ernest  Jenks. 

(Plate  X) 82 

The  Sun's  Influence  on  the  Form  of  Hopi  Pueblos.     J.  Walter 

Fewkes.     (Plate  XI).         . 88 

Certain  Notched  or  Scalloped  Stone  Tablets  of  the  Mound-builders. 

W.  H.  Holmes.  (Plates  XII-XIII)  .  •  .  .  .  loi 
Preservation  of  American  Antiquities;    Progress  during  the   Last 

Year ;  Needed  Legislation.  Edgar  L.  Hewett  .  .  .  109 
Houses  and  Gardens  of  the  New  England  Indians.     Charles  C. 

WiLLOUGHBY II5 

Some  Unsolved  Problems  in  Mexican  Archeology.  Zelia  Nuttall  133 
Hjalmar  Stolpe.     Stewart  Culin.     (Plate  XIV)  .         .         .150 

Recent  Cave  Exploration  in  California.     John  C.  Merriam  .  221 

Evidence  of  the  Work  of  Man  on  Objects  from  Quaternary  Caves  in 

California.  F.  W.  Putnam.  (Plates  XV-XVII)  .  .  .229 
Note  on  the  Determination  of  Sex  in  Man.  E.  T.  Brewster.  .  236 
North  American   Ethnographical    Material  in   Italian   Collections. 

David  I.  Bushnell,  Jr.  (Plates  XVIII-XXII)  .  .  .243 
Ruins  of  the  Cerro  de  Montezuma.  A.  H.  Blackiston  .  .256 
The  Icelandic  Colony  in  Greenland.     Vilhjalmur  StefAnsson       .   262 

>  •  •  m 

lU 


V 


165041 


IV  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 

FAGS 

Unwritten  Literature  of  Hawaii.  Nathaniel  B.  Emerson  .  .271 
Exploration  of  the  Lower  Amur  Valley.     Gerard  Fowke  .276 

Noteworthy  Archeological  Specimens  from  Lower  Columbia  Valley. 

Harlan  L  Smith.  (Plates  XXIII-XXIV)  .  .  .  .298 
Helen  Keller.  John  Hitz.  (Plate  XXV)  .  .  .  .308 
Some  Notes  on  Anthropology  and  Archeology.     Charles  Peabody  325 

Pawnee  War  Tales.     George  A.  Dorsey 337 

^^     Hopi  Shrines  near  the  East  Mesa,  Arizona.     J.  Walter  Fewkes. 

(Plates  XXVI-XXVIII) 346 

Recent  Progress  in  American  Anthropology.      A   Review  of  the 

Activities  of  Institutions  and  Individuals  from  1902  to  1906  .  441 
The  Monaco  Meeting  of  the  International  Congress  of  Anthropology 

and   Prehistoric  Archeology.      Adela  C.    Breton.      (Plates 

XXVIII  A-c) 559 

The  Story  of  the  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington.     Daniel 

S.  Lamb 564 

The  Music  of  the  Filipinos.     Frances  Densmore.  .         .611 

An  Ancient  Megalith  in  Jalapa,  Vera  Cruz.     J.  Walter  Fewkes. 

(Plate  XXIX)     .........  633 

Remains  of  Prehistoric  Man  in  the  Dakotas.     Henry  Montgomery. 

(Plates  XXX-XXXIV) 640 

The  Dialectic  Divisions  of  the  Moquelumnan  Family  in  Relation  to 

the  Internal  Differentiation  of  the  Other  Linguistic  Families  of 

California.     A.  L.  Kroeber.         .         .  .         .         .652 

Hopi    Ceremonial     Frames    from    Cafion    de     Chelly,     Arizona. 

J.  Walter  Fewkes 664 

.  The  Sloane  Collection  in  the  British  Museum.     David  I.  Bushnell, 

Jr.     (Plates  XXXV-XXXIX) 671 

A  Cache  of  Stone  Bowls  in  California.     Horatio  N.  Rust.     (Plate 

XL) 686 

A  Pima-Maricopa  Ceremony.  Herbert  Brown  ....  688 
The  Fifteenth  International  Congress  of  Americanists.      George 

Grant  MacCurdy 691 

Alfredo  Chavero.     Marshall  H.  Saville.     (Plate  XLI)       .         .  701 

BOOK   REVIEWS 

Frazer  :  Lectures  on  the  Early  History  of  the  Kingship  {Swanion).  157 
Lang  :  The  Secret  of  the  Totem  {Swanton)  .  .  .  .  x6o 
SCHEERER :  The  Nabaloi  Dialect  (^Safford) 165 


CONTENTS  OF  VOLUME  8  V 

West:  The  Aboriginal  Pipes  of  Wisconsin  {^McGuire)  .         .170 

Avery  :  A  History  of  the  United  States  and  its  People,  from  their 

Earliest  Records  to  the  Present  Time  (^Mooney)      .  .  376 

Krauss  :  Anthropophyteia :  Jahrbiicher  fiir  Folkloristiche  Erhe- 
bungen  und  Forschungen  zur  Entwicklunggeschichte  der  gesch- 
lechtlichen  Moral,  etc.,  II  Band  {Mooney)  .  -381 

Krauss  :  Bibliothek  auserwahlten  serbischer  Meisterwerke,  mit 
literarhistorischen  Einleitungen  ;  Vukasovic  :  Band  V  —  Die 
Blume  von  Cannosa  —  Mater  Dolorosa ;  Corovic  :  Band  VI 
—  Liebe  imd  Leben  im  Herzogland  (Mooney)         .  .382 

Friederici  :    Berittene  Infanterie  in   China  und  andere  Feldzugs- 

Erinenmgen  {Mooney)  .......  383 

Brigham  :  Mat  and  Basket  Weaving  of  the  Ancient  Hawaiians,  De- 
scribed and  Compared  with  the  Basketry  of  the  other  Pacific 
Islanders  (^Mason) 385 

Hartman  :  Archaeological  Researches  in  Costa  Rica  (  Gordon)       .  580 

Koch-GrCnberg  :  Anfange  der  Kunst  im  Urwald.  Indianer- 
Handzeichnungen  auf  seinen  Reisen  in  Brazilien  gesammelt 
{Feabody) 581 

Levinstein  :  Kinderzeichnungen  bis  zum  14.  Lebensjahr.  Mit  Par- 
allelen  aus  der  Urgeschichte,  Kimstgeschichte  und  Vdlker- 
kunde  {Feabody) 582 

LeDouble  :  Traits  des  variations  des  os  de  la  face  de  Thomme,  et  de 
leur  signification  au  point  de  vue  de  Tanthropologie  zoologique 
(^Hrdlickd) 704 

Lewis  :  Tribes  of  the  Columbia  Valley  and  the  Coast  of  Washing- 
ton and  Oregon  {Swanton) 705 

Moore  :  The  Universal  Kinship  (^Swanton)  ....   706 

Dixon  :  The  Northern  Maidu  ( Goddard) 706 

ANTHROPOLOGIC   MISCELLANEA 

Indian  ceremonies  in  Oklahoma  and  Indian  Territory,  192.  Origin  of  the  name  Navaho, 
193.  Philippine  Ethnological  Survey,  194.  Measurementsof  Igorotes,  194.  Some 
suggestions  concerning  anthropological  bibliography,  196.  Saint  Louis  Public 
Museum,  197.     Death  of  William  Clement  Putnam,  199.     A  remarkable  stone  ax, 

200.  Death  of  Swan  Moses  Burnett,  200.    Publications  of  Dr  V.  Giuffrida-Ruggeri, 

201.  Death  of  Dr  Richard  Hodgson,  202.  Dr  Max  Uhle's  researches,  202.  Dr 
Friederich  S.  Krauss'  studies,  202.  California  branch  of  the  American  Folk- Lore 
Society,  203.  Berkeley  Folk- Lore  Club,  203.  First  chair  of  anthropology  in  South 
America,  203.  Missouri  Historical  Society,  204.  Lieut.  Georg  Friederici' s  studies, 
204.     Death  of  Roland  B.  Steiner,  204.     Minor  notes,  205.     International  Bureau 


VI  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 

of  Ethnography,  416.  Catalog  of  the  Bishop  Jade  CollectioD,  420.  American 
Association  of  Musenms,  424.  Mesa  Verde  National  Park,  426.  Field  Mnseum  of 
Natural  History,  428.  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  429.  The  San 
Francisco  disaster,  431.  Professor  Putnam  and  the  History  of  Religions  Clnb,  43a. 
Preservation  of  antiquities,  433.  Missouri  Historical  Society,  434.  Folk-Loire 
meetings  in  California,  435.  Earthquakes  and  tribal  movements  in  the  Southwest, 
436.  Death  of  Weston  Flint,  436.  Death  of  Woodbury  Lowery,  437.  Berkeley 
Folk-Lore  Club,  437.  Minor  notes,  438.  The  Agamemnon  of  i^Ischylns,  605. 
Recent  Researches  by  the  University  of  California,  606.  The  American  Ethnological 
Society,  606.  Virginia  Manuscripts,  607.  German  Anthropological  Societies,  607. 
Death  of  Edouard  Piette,  608.  Minor  notes,  608.  The  Archeological  Congress  at 
Vannes,  731.  The  « Omaha  Man,"  734.  Death  of  Robert  C.  H.  Brock,  735. 
£cole  d*  Anthropologic  lectures,  736.  Joint  meeting  of  anthropologists,  736.  Ex- 
ploration of  the  Station  at  La  T£ne,  737.  Death  of  Horatio  Nelson  Rust,  737. 
Death  of  George  W.  H.  Stonch,  738.     Minor  notes,  739. 


American  Anthropologist 


NEW  SERIES 


Vol.  8  January-March,   1906  No.  i 

RELICS  OF  EARLY  MAN  IN  WESTERN  SWITZERLAND 

By  D.  I.  BUSHNELL  Jr 

During  the  winter  of  1853,  as  a  result  of  the  extremely  low 
stage  of  the  water  of  the  Lake  of  Zurich,  much  of  the  bottom  of 
the  lake  along  the  shores  and  in  the  shallow  bays  was  exposed  to 
view.  In  places  groups  of  piles  were  noticed  extending  above  the 
mud  and  sand.  An  examination  led  to  the  discovery  that  these 
had  been  the  supports  of  ancient  habitations,  and  search  among 
them  brought  to  light  many  implements  and  weapons  of  prehistoric 
origin.  This  led  to  the  examination  of  the  shores  of  other  lakes 
throughout  Switzerland,  which  resulted  in  the  discovery  of  numer- 
ous ancient  sites,  including  many  on  the  lakes  of  Geneva,  Morat, 
Bienne,  and,  probably  the  most  important  of  all,  Neuchatel. 

It  soon  became  known  that  there  were  made  *'  stations,"  dating 
from  both  the  Stone  and  the  Bronze  age,  on  the  margin  of  the  Lake 
of  Neuchatel,  but  the  depth  of  water  made  it  very  difficult  to  ex- 
plore them,  consequently  very  little  work  was  done  until  some  years 
later.  Six  years  after  the  discoveries  on  the  Lake  of  Zurich,  while  a 
railway  embankment  was  in  process  of  construction  near  the  village 
of  Concise,  on  the  southwestern  shore  of  Neuchatel,  the  dredg- 
ing of  sand  and  mud  from  the  bottom  of  the  bay  brought  to  the 
surface  many  implements  and  utensils  as  well  as  vast  quantities 
of  broken  piles,  revealing  the  site  of  an  extensive  settlement.  The 
great  number  of  objects  recovered  at  that  time  and  also  as  the 
result  of  subsequent  explorations,  now  preserved  in  various  collec- 
tions and  museums  in  Europe  and  America,  are  evidence  of  the 
importance  of  the  settlement  in  prehistoric  time.    Concise  has  since 

AM.  ANTH  ,  N.  S.,  8-X.  I 


2  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

become  one  of  the  best  known  of  the  many  stations  on  the  Lake 
of  Xeuchatel. 

In  1877  the  construction  of  a  canal  and  the  changing  of  the 
outlet  of  the  lake  resulted  in  the  permanent  lowering  of  the  water 
more  than  three  meters.  This  caused  many  more  sites  to  be  ex- 
posed, and  the  great  number  of  objects  collected  at  that  time  is  be- 
yond conception. 

According  to  the  Swiss  archeologists  there  arc  on  the  mai^[in 
of  the  I^kc  of  Ncuchatel : 

44  stations  of  the  Stone  age  (Neolithic), 

I  station  of  the  Transition  period  (Eneolithic), 
24  stations  of  the  Bronze  age, 
I  station  of  the  the  Iron  age, 
making  a  total  of  seventy  stations  on  a  single  lake  a  little  more 
than  twent>'  miles  in  length.     But  in  reaching  this  conclusion  they 
seem  to  have  counted  as  distinct  sites  what  appear  to  be  only  parts 
of  a  large  settlement.     For  example,  in  the  bay  of  Auvemier  they 
counted  four  stations  within  a  space  of  about  700  meters,  yet  it  is 
evident  that  these  were  contemporaneously  occupied  and  should 
be  considered  rather  as  parts  of  one  village.     The  separation  of  a 
settlement  into  groups  of  habitations  would  be  a  natural  precaution 
against  fire,  especially  when  the  huts  were  constructed  of  wood  and 
the  coverings  of  thatch. 

The  stations  of  the  Bronze  age  were  built  over  deeper  water  and 
at  a  greater  distance  from  the  shore  than  were  those  of  the  earlier 
or  Stone  age.  This  is  attributed  to  the  possession  of  better  tools, 
which  enabled  the  builders  to  procure  more  easily  the  necessary 
piles;  but  it  may  also  have  resulted  from  necessity  —  to  insure 
greater  protection  against  attacks  from  the  shore.  The  settlements 
during  the  later  period  were  erected  over  five  or  six  meters  of 
water.  Now,  considering  the  piles  to  have  extended  about  two 
meters  above  the  surface  of  the  water  and  to  have  been  driven  a 
meter  or  more  into  the  sand  or  mud  bottom,  their  total  length  must 
have  approximated  ten  meters.  Even  with  the  improved  and  better 
implements,  the  construction  of  a  platform  covering  several  acres, 
upon  which  were  erected  the  habitations,  must  have  been  an  exten- 
sive undertaking.     At  that  time  a  dense  oak  forest  covered  all  the 


BUSHNELL]       EARLY  MAN  IN  WESTERN  SWITZERLAND  3 

hills  and  valleys  and  extended  to  the  shores  of  the  lakes.  Prob- 
ably the  clearing  made  by  the  cutting  of  timber  for  the  building  of 
a  village  afterward  served  as  the  garden  spot  for  its  inhabitants. 

As  a  result  of  the  lowering  of  the  lake  level,  the  earlier  or 
oldest  sites,  which  were  built  in  comparatively  shallow  water  a  short 
distance  from  the  shore,  are  now  high  and  dry.  Many  piles  may 
yet  be  seen,  some  on  shore  but  more  along  the  margin  of  the 
water.  In  the  bay  of  Auvemier,  at  a  distance  of  from  10  to  20 
meters  from  the  shore,  they  may  be  counted  by  the  score.  It  is 
an  interesting  fact  that  since  the  lowering  of  the  water  the  vegeta- 
tion that  has  sprung  up  along  the  lake  shore  is  more  luxuriant  on 
the  sites  of  the  anciejit  settlements  than  else  were. 

The  Stone  and  Bronze  stations  occur  along  the  entire  shore 
line,  no  part  of  it  being  occupied  solely  by  the  sites  dating  from  one 
epoch.  With  the  exception  of  a  very  few  points  the  entire  shore  of 
Neuchatel  was  well  adapted  to  the  purpose,  the  water  being  rather 
shallow  for  quite  a  distance  from  the  shore.  For  the  greater  part 
the  bottom  is  sandy,  though  in  certain  localities  there  are  large 
glacial  bowlders. 

The  only  known  settlement  on  the  shores  of  Neuchatel  during 
the  latest  or  Iron  age  was  situated  near  the  northeastern  end  of  the 
lake,  at  the  end  of  the  water  course  known  as  La  Tene,  leading  to 
the  Lake  of  Bienne.  The  greater  part  of  the  site,  which  was  rather 
extensive,  has  already  been  explored  and  many  objects,  including 
weapons  and  ornaments,  utensils  and  implements,  have  been  recov- 
ered. A  very  interesting  collection  is  preserved  in  the  museum  at 
Neuchatel,  while  other  specimens  have  gone  to  enrich  various  col- 
lections in  Europe  and  America.  The  material  from  La  Tene  was 
described  by  Vouga  in  1885,^  and  in  the  following  year  by  Dr 
Gross.'  Both  works  contain  many  plates  showing  the  most  im- 
portant of  the  numerous  interesting  objects  discovered  on  the  site 
prior  to  that  time. 

Like  the  settlement  on  Neuchatel,  the  only  known  village  dur- 
ing the  Iron  age  on  the  shore  of  the  Lake  of  Geneva  was  situated 
at  the  outlet  of  the  lake,  on  the  site  of  the  present  city  of  Geneva. 

» Z«  HelvkUs  d  la  T^ne,  Notice  Historiquf,  par  E.  Vouga,  Neuchatel,  1885. 
^  La  Tine :  Un  Oppidum  Helvitey  par  Victor  Gross,  Paris,  1886. 


4  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  selection  of  these  sites  may  have  been  a  coincidence,  but  they 
were  probably  chosen  for  a  definite  reason. 

The  Stone  Age 

The  stone  implements,  weapons,  and  ornaments  recovered  from 
the  numerous  sites  on  the  Lake  of  Neuchatel  show  in  many  cases  a 
high  degree  of  workmanship.  The  majority  of  the  polished  imple- 
ments appear  to  have  been  made  from  natural  pebbles,  the  hardest 
and  toughest  variety  of  stone  being  selected  for  the  purpose.  The 
theory  is  still  held  by  certain  Swiss  archeologists  that  all  the  jade 
or  nephrite  used  in  making  implements  was  brought  from  Asia. 
Nothing  however  could  be  more  out  of  reason,  for  pebbles  of 
nephrite  have  been  found  along  the  foot  of  the  Alps.  Nephrite  is 
but  one  of  the  many  hard  materials  used  in  the  making  of  imple- 
ments, and  probably  in  no  part  of  the  world  was  a  greater  variety 
utilized. 

As  the  southern  part  of  the  Lake  of  Neuchatel  belongs  to  the 
canton  of  Vaud,  the  majority  of  the  objects  discovered  on  the  sta- 
tions in  that  section  have  been  deposited  in  the  Musee  Cantonal 
Vaudois  in  the  city  of  Lausanne.  The  collection  is  very  rich  and 
complete,  especially  in  implements  of  bone  and  stone  remaining  in 
the  original  handles  of  wood  or  antler  —  in  some  cases  a  combina- 
tion of  both.  Of  particular  interest  is  a  series  of  celts  hafted  in 
wooden  handles.  These  may  be  separated  into  five  distinct  types  : 
In  the  first  and  most  primitive  the  celt  is  set  directly  into  the 
wooden  handle  ;  in  the  second  there  is  a  short  socket  or  foreshaft 
of  antler  between  the  celt  and  the  handle  ;  in  the  next  type  the  celt 
is  set  into  a  section  of  antler  perforated  to  allow  the  handle  to  pass 
through  ;  while  in  the  fourth  type  this  is  reversed,  the  antler  fore- 
shaft  passing  through  a  perforation  in  the  handle.  In  some  cases  a 
large  piece  of  antler  served  as  the  handle,  the  celt  being  set  directly 
into  it ;  this  may  be  considered  as  the  fifth  and  last  type. 

The  first  two  are  the  more  common  types  ;  the  third  is  one  of 
the  rarest  in  Switzerland,  although  it  occurs  in  France  and  else- 
where in  central  Europe.^  Four  forms  of  the  first  type  are  shown 
in  figure   i,  from  sketches  made  by  the  writer  from  specimens  in 

*Sir  John  Evans,  Ancient  Stone  Implements ^  p.  161. 


BUSHNELL]       EARL  Y  MAN  IN   WESTERN  SWITZERLAND  S 

the  museum  at  Lausanne.  The  handles  average  about  500  mm.  in 
length.  These  specimens  are  of  special  interest  as  suggesting  the 
method  employed  by  the  Indians  of  North  America  in  hafting  sim- 
ilar implements.  That  most  interesting  and  probably  unique  speci- 
men now  preserved  in  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
New  York  City,  is  similar  to  form  c  in  figure  I.  It  was  found  in 
the  bed  of  a  brook  near  Thomdale,  N.  Y.,  in  1850.  The  wooden 
handle  was  probably  thick  and  heavy,  terminating  in  a  large  knob ; 


Four  Ibniu  of  the  first  type  of  mouDted  celts. 


but  during  the  many  years  it  lay  under  water  the  wood  gradually 
wore  away  until  it  assumed  its  present  shape,  as  shown  in  figure  2.' 
Lar^e  celts  mounted  similar  to  form  a  arc  now  used  by  the 
Guayaquil  Indians  of  Paraguay,  while  form  b  closely  resembles  the 
mounted  battle  ax  of  the  Kaingaud  Indians  of  Brazil.  Examples 
of  both  are  in  Professor  Giglioli's  collection  in  Florence  and  have 
already  been  figured  and  described  by  him.'  A  similar  form  of 
balling  is  used  by  the  natives  of  New  Gumea.  We  may  assume 
that  in  America  the  celt  was  mounted  as  an  ax  and  not  as  an  adz. 

>  1  un  iadebted  to  Mr  Harlan  I.  Smitfa,  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  HUtorj, 
tat  %  ^iat<q^ph  of  and  inlbmutiol]  conceming  tbis  specimen. 

*lnttmai.  ArckivJSir  Ethnog.,  suppl.  zu  Bd.  IX,  1S96,  p.  35. 


r-zz-r.r.,./  ,./r^.?  •j'.M.'i'^r 


H.   5^  I 


1     iL£C 


luamirr  zi  zrr/Ksn 


hasziif 


i^v^h^C^MMk 


nrm^  tic  imcsss  :i  acmsj  —  f-iCBncc:  « 


Is  n  :izaay  .ccL.*  i  i'-TiiciL  ilio 

iseo.   numir  rie    an*  Vteiiirrnr    iipjugfc  t&e 
2::ic;v.innc    ind   innnmitTT   x    be  niadc  aid 

BjnmE  n^     ?  :r  zns  reason   c  ^   rlflu:  iiiY  tD 

ar  lutrn^.      Hlinur  jnraenais    af 
lUTTc  2sai'-  Tiarr  am  irrsaxiiw^  Tnrre 
aiiC:  r  £   mrrrranig  nac  BiT^aBnie 
sav:  i.inii2iue:i  ne  ■=;t:;t-itt^  aiii 


*.    :. 


I  i.nt     >. 


4i' 
Jf 

It 

r 

*  mun    fwar:.      Tict"   mnri    :r:iiL 

.. --  «^TOt^    ii-:2T-5    rnaisr-ii^ET  r:  rre  jnr^  7^71:  vi±  LaJug 

Z  1  i.inrjTi  a*ms  nnrini^  v.xxncr.  r^i^r-d*;  ~—  -er  sssrirsh*  iatD 


irr-iiu,:.   --.r:!  "^^  vn:?  ^V-uni  forr»i   "i*ci*^  i^c-^"  i^ru-r  3v»»'art.     3i  is 


■,  Hy  Hull^w  Drill.     5.  ByS..liJ  [>.ill.     6,  iiy 


BUSHNELL]      EARL  Y  MAN  IN  WESTERN  SWITZERLAND  7 

which  passes  through  the  center  is  oval,  and  not  circular  as  are  all 
the  others  in  the  collection.  The  diameters  of  the  opening  are  1 5 
nun.  and  25  mm.;  the  longer  follows  the  median  line  between  the 
edges. 

The  int^esting  question,  so  often  discussed,  is,  How  were  the 
perforations  made  ?  When  a  tubular  drill  was  used  a  solid  core  was 
produced,  as  in  the  case  of  the  modem  diamond  drill.  Many  of 
these  cores  have  been  found  on  the  different  sites,  some  of  which 
are  cylindrical,  others  conical.  An  interesting  example  of  the  latter 
found  at  Prefargier,  near  La  Tene,  on  the  Lake  of  Neuchatel,  is 
shown  in  plate  i,  2.  This  is  the  entire  core.  The  boring  having 
been  made  from  the  opposite  sides,  met  near  the  middle,  though 
overlapping,  producing  a  core  in  the  form  of  two  cones. 

By  experimenting  I  have  been  able  to  produce  the  same  effect, 
although  the  material  was  much  softer  than  that  of  which  the  axes 
are  made.  First  a  block  of  plaster  of  Paris,  44  mm.  in  thickness, 
and  several  cylindrical  tubes  of  the  same  material  were  prepared. 
The  latter,  which  served  as  drills,  were  3 1  mm.  in  diameter ;  the 
diameter  of  the  opening  being  1 5  mm.  made  the  thickness  of  the 
tube  8  mm.  In  drilling,  dry  sand  was  used.  The  boring  was  first 
made  in  one  side  to  a  depth  of  about  22  mm.,  then  on  the  opposite 
side  until  the  two  met.  During  the  process  of  boring  the  sand  was 
fed  to  the  drill  from  within  the  cylinder ;  this  tended  to  wear  away 
the  core,  causing  it  to  assume  the  conical  form.  The  core  produced 
(pi.  I,  3)  was  of  the  same  form  and  proportion  as  the  one  from 
Prefargier;  the  smaller  end  became  just  one-half  the  diameter  of 
the  opening  in  the  drill.  Another  interesting  result  of  this  boring 
was  the  gradual  wearing  away  of  the  outer  surface  of  the  drill, 
causing  the  hole  to  become  smaller  as  it  advanced.  This  may 
explain  the  occurrence  of  biconical  perforations  in  many  objects ; 
whether  the  drill  used  was  hollow  or  solid  the  effect  would  be  the 
same. 

Assuming  the  above  to  have  been  one  method  of  perforation, 
what  were  the  means  employed  ?  This  question  has  often  been 
discussed,  and  many  are  the  theories  that  have  been  advanced  in 
answer  to  it.  I  would  suggest  a  hollow  reed,  or  possibly  a  bone, 
used  with  sand  and  water ;  possibly  small  pieces  of  quartz  could 


BUSHNELL]      EARLY  MAN  IN  WESTERN  SWITZERLAND  g 

The  adz  is  another  type  of  implement  that  is  rare  in  Switzer- 
land. One  in  its  original  wooden  handle  is  in  the  museum  at  Lau- 
sanne. The  blade  is  about  2cx>  mm.  in  length  and  the  cutting  edge 
about  40  mm.  in  width.  The  blade  passes  entirely  through  the 
handle,  which  is  about  500  mm.  in  length  and  not  unlike  form  c  in 
figure  I ,  except  that  the  cutting  edge  is  placed  at  a  right  angle  to 
the  handle. 

The  arrowpoints,  which  usually  were  made  of  chert,  include 
several  distinct  types,  but  comparatively  few  specimens  are  found 
and  the  museums  possess  very  small  collections.  In  attaching  the 
stone  point  to  the  shaft  a  notch  was  made  into  which  the  point  was 
fitted  and  held  with  bitumen.  There  are  several  such  specimens  in 
the  collections.  There  is  also  in  the  Lausanne  Museum  an  antler 
tip,  similar  to  the  American  specimens,  about  50  mm.  in  length, 
which  may  have  been  a  point  for  an  arrow.  But  if  this  form  of 
point  had  been  widely  used  in  Switzerland  more  examples  would 
undoubtedly  have  been  discovered  on  the  various  sites. 

The  chipped  saws,  or  knives,  are  numerous,  and  many  speci- 
mens in  their  original  handles,  some  of  wood,  others  of  antler,  have 
been  found  on  various  sites.  These  have  often  been  figured  and 
described.  While  at  Prefargier  I  procured  a  very  interesting  small 
saw  made  of  dark  green  jade ;  it  is  oval  in  form,  35  mm.  in  length 
and  less  than  2  mm.  in  thickness  (pi.  11,  3). 

The  chipped  daggers,  while  inferior  in  workmanship  to  either 
the  Danish  or  the  Italian  weapons,  are  the  most  interesting  of  the 
chipped  objects  found  in  the  lakes.  The  largest  example  in  the 
Neuchatel  museum,  which  with  many  smaller  ones  was  found  near 
Bevaix,  is  225  mm.  long  and  34  mm.  wide.  There  are  two  ex- 
tremely interesting  specimens  in  Lausanne  which  were  recovered 
from  the  station  at  Chevroux  on  the  Lake  of  Neuchatel  at  the  time 
the  lake  was  lowered.  They  are  of  particular  interest  as  they 
retain  portions  of  the  original  wrapping  which  served  as  the  handle. 
These  and  many  other  rare  objects  were  illustrated  in  an  album 
published  by  the  Lausanne  Museum  in  1896  under  the  title  Antt- 
quites  Lacustres. 

The  daggers  were  of  two  types.  In  the  first  only  one  end  was 
chipped  to  a  point ;  in  the  second  and  rarer  type  both  ends  were 


I O  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOL OGIST  [n.  s.,  8, 1906 

pointed  Plate  11,  9,  shows  a  very  good  example  of  this  type ;  it  is 
of  translucent  yellow  flint  and  was  found  at  Prefargier.  In  the 
same  plate,  i,  2,  6,  and  7  are  typical  examples  of  the  small  chisel. 
The  first  three  are  of  a  dark  green  jade  or  nephrite,  and  the  fourth 
is  a  light  bluish-green  quartzite.  The  very  beautiful  example  of  an 
amber  bead  (4)  is  a  comparatively  rare  specimen.  The  triangular 
cutting  implement  (10)  is  made  of  a  dark  mottled  jade ;  it  was  prob- 
ably never  mounted,  but  was  used  in  the  hand  ;  the  shortest  side  is 
ground  to  an  edge  which  has  remained  remarkably  sharp.  Figure 
8  of  the  same  plate  is  a  perforated  pendant,  made  of  a  soil  material, 
from  the  same  site. 

During  the  Stone  age  bone  and  antler  were  also  extensively  used 
for  making  ornaments  and  implements  of  various  sorts.  Some 
interesting  examples  are  figured  in  plate  in.  Nos.  i,  2,  3,  and  5 
are  forms  of  bone  chisels  having  one  sharp  edge.  Nos.  6  and  7 
may  be  classed  as  perforators.  The  long  curved  object  (4)  is  called 
a  hair-pin  or  ornament,  but  it  is  difficult  to  say  for  what  purpose  it 
was  designed.  The  cylindrical  projection  at  the  side  is  perforated. 
The  object  is  highly  polished  from  use,  and  appears  to  be  a  very 
rare  type,  as  only  one  or  two  similar  specimens  are  in  the  Lausanne 
collection.     The  harpoon  head  (8)  is  of  antler. 

The  Eneolithic  or  Transition  Period 

The  Eneolithic  or  transition  period  between  the  Neolithic  and 
Bronze  ages  is  not  clearly  defined  on  Neuchatel,  and  if  such  a 
period  actually  existed  it  was  of  brief  duration.  There  are  but 
fourteen  objects  in  the  Neuchatel  museum  that  are  regarded  as 
having  been  made  of  copper  without  an  alloy,  while  there  are  prob- 
ably as  many  hundreds  made  of  bronze.  In  form  they  do  not 
differ;  all  appear  to  have  been  made  during  the  same  time.  In 
mixing  the  metals  a  greater  or  less  quantity  of  tin  was  used,  for  it 
is  not  reasonable  to  suppose  that  with  the  primitive  means  and 
methods  then  in  use  it  was  possible  to  have  always  the  same  pro- 
portions. If,  then,  some  object  happens  to  contain  a  very  small 
percentage  of  tin,  or  if  the  alloy  is  entirely  lacking,  why  should 
those  objects  be  considered  to  have  been  made  during  a  distinct 
period  ? 


OejECTS   OF    BONE    AND   A 


BUSHNKLL]       EARLY  MAN  IN  WESTERN  SWITZERLAND  1 1 

The  Bronze  Age 

The  vast  numbers  of  bronze  objects  that  have  been  recovered 
from  the  twenty-four  stations  of  the  Bronze  'age  on  the  margin  of 
the  Lake  of  Neuchatel  show  the  great  skill  and  ability  of  the 
makers.  In  workmanship,  form,  and  decoration  they  cannot  be 
surpassed  in  any  other  part  of  Switzerland.  Axes  of  various  types, 
javelins  and  arrows  tipped  with  bronze  points,  and  thin-bladed 
swords  and  daggers  of  bronze  were  the  principal  weapons  of  that 
era. 

The  narrow,  curved  knives,  often  decorated  with  incised  lines 
forming  various  designs,  are  quite  numerous,  [many  having  been 
found  still  attached  to  their  original  antler  handles.  The  massive> 
highly  decorated  bracelets  and  pins  or  hair  ornaments,  large  buttons 
and  needles,  pendants,  rings,  and  many  other  objects,  all  of  bronze, 
that  have  been  found  in  great  quantities  are  now  to  be  seen  in  many 
museums  and  collections. 

Probably  the  rarest  and  most  interesting  bronze  objects  are  the 
large  kettles  and  bowls  {situlce)  which  appear  to  have  been  made  of 
a  single  piece  of  metal  hammered  into  shape.  There  are  several 
such  bowls  in  the  Lausanne  collection,  well  formed  and  beautifully 
decorated ;  they  average  about  200  mm.  in  diameter  and  60  mm. 
in  depth.  During  April  of  the  present  year  (1905)  two  large 
bronze  kettles,  250  mm.  in  diameter  and  depth,  were  found  near 
Cudrefin,  across  the  lake  from  the  city  of  Neuchatel.  Both  are 
without  decoration  of  any  sort.  Having  handles  for  suspension, 
they  probably  served  as  cooking  utensils. 

During  the  same  period  the  art  of  pottery  making  became 
greatly  improved.  The  rough  undecorated  ware  of  the  earlier 
epochs  was  no  longer  made  except  as  cooking  vessels,  and  the 
characteristic  examples  of  the  potter's  art  during  the  Bronze  age  are 
rather  small  cups  and  bowls,  well  shaped  and  often  elaborately 
decorated  with  incised  lines  in  geometric  patterns.  Many  entire 
specimens  have  been  recovered  from  the  ancient  site  near  the  present 
town  of  Corcelettc  on  the  I^ke  of  Neuchatel.  From  the  same  site 
were  taken  a  few  pieces  of  ware  decorated  in  red,  cream,  and  black. 
Another  method  of  decorating  the  smaller  pieces  was  by  attaching 
narrow  strips  of  tin,  usually  about   5  mm.  in  width,  in  simple  geo- 


12  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

metric  patterns,  to  the  surface,  often  as  a  border  near  the  mouth  or 
edge.  There  are  a  number  of  specimens  decorated  in  this  manner 
in  both  the  Neuchatel  and  Lausanne  collections.  It  has  not  yet 
been  ascertained  by  what  means  the  tin  was  attached,  but  the  work 
was  skilfully  done,  and  after  the  lapse  of  many  centuries  often  re- 
mains so  firm  as  to  appear  a  part  of  the  vessel  itself. 

Fragments  of  pottery  are  numerous  on  many  sites.  Evidently 
few  have  been  removed,  as  only  entire  pieces  are  sought  and  pre- 
served. At  the  station  near  Haute- Rive,  between  Neuchatel  and 
Prefargier,  the  bottom  of  the  lake  for  a  distance  of  fifty  meters  or 
more  was  strewn  with  fragments  of  pottery  and  broken  bones,  with 
here  and  there  an  implement.  On  that  site  I  collected  some  inter- 
esting pieces.  The  part  still  remaining  under  water  was  the  outer 
edge  of  the  settlement ;  the  rest  is  now  dry  and  covered  with  vege- 
tation, the  result  of  the  lowering  of  the  water. 

The  Iron  Age 

As  has  already  been  stated,  there  is  but  one  Iron  age  station  on 
the  Lake  of  Neuchatel,  that  at  La  Tene,  which  has  been  so  thor- 
oughly explored  and  has  yielded  so  many  objects,  chiefly  swords 
and  spearheads. 

Thus  we  have  on  the  margin  of  this  lake  evidence  of  long- 
continued  occupancy  by  man.  Many  centuries  must  necessarily 
have  elapsed  between  the  time  the  first  settlements  were  made  dur- 
ing the  early  Neolithic  epoch  and  the  final  subjugation  of  Helvetia 
by  the  Roman  army,  when  Aventicum,  less  than  ten  miles  distant 
from  the  lake,  became  the  Roman  capital. 

Florence,  Italy. 


I.  S.,  VOL.  a,  PL.  IV 


s 
i 


onjeciDiml ;  clth«  loully  cuintd  or  not  cicucd. 


A  STONE  RUIN  AT  SE-fSAK,  GUATEMALA 

By  ROBERT  BURKITT 

This  brief  description  and  the  accompanying  diagrams  are  of  a 
stone  ruin  at  Se-tsak,  in  the  land  of  Sepacuite,  about  four  leagues 
east  of  the  village  of  Senahu,  province  of  Alta  Vera  Paz,  Guate- 
mala, which  was  visited  by  the  writer  in  1 896.  The  ruin  blocks 
the  summit  of  a  narrow  pass,  and  the  woods  in  the  immediate  vicin- 
ity are  of  old  growth,  and  not  pines.  The  western  approach,  which 
is  very  steep,  is  cut  square  across  by  the  outlying  wall,  at  a  in  plate 
IV  and  figure  3.  This  wall,  or  stair,  lies  due  north  and  south,  or 
very  nearly,  and  forms  the  edge  of  a  sort  of  terrace  behind  the  main 


Bank 


Fu;.  3.  —  Situation  of  the  ruin. 

structure.  The  main  structure  is  not  parallel  with  that  wall,  but 
faces  the  opening  of  the  wall  on  the  other  side ;  the  pass  shifts 
round  at  the  top,  as  indicated  in  the  figure.  The  banks  are  steep 
on  both  hands  and  abut  against  the  sides  of  the  structure  to  the 
height  of  the  first  platform,  as  shown  by  the  profile  l,  m,  in  plate  iv. 
At  the  front  comers  the  space  left  between  the  receding  bank  and 
the  side  of  the  structure,  on  each  hand,  is  filled  across  with  tiers 
of  stone,  now  covered  with  rubbish  and  not  shown  in  the  drawings. 
The  front  of  the  ruin  is  sunk  toward  the  middle,  and  the  size  of 
the  steps  is  averaged.  The  front  view  of  the  main  structure  in  out- 
line, restored,  is  shown  in  plate  v.  The  point  of  view  is  p,  shown 
on  the  plan  (pi.  iv),  fifteen  feet  from  the  base,  on  a  line  with  the 

13 


14  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

side,  and  level  with  the  top  (c),  the  center  of  perspective  —  to  be 
four  inches  from  the  eye. 

The  stone  of  which  the  structure  is  built  is  limestone,  and  not 
hard.  Squared  stones  are  found  only  in  the  front,  or  easterly  side, 
of  the  ruin,  where  the  stones  are  larger  than  in  other  parts.  The 
largest  are  not  more  than  two  and  one-half  feet  long.  No  mortar 
was  used.  The  interior  was  not  explored.  The  back  terraces  ap- 
pear to  have  been  paved,  at  least  along  the  foot  of  the  main  struc- 
ture.    The  stair  behind  was  probably  much  deeper  than  the  present 

surface  at  a. 

Measurements  (Jn  English  feef) 

Main  structure.     Eastern  side  :  Total  height,  near  b 14.2 

Length  from  north  to  south 37 

Width  from  east  to  west  upper  surface.  35.3 

Height  of  lower  terrace 2.2 

Height  of  four  upper  terraces 3 

Breadth  of  terraces 1.3 

Length  of  steps 9 

Height  of  steps 1.5 

Breadth  of  steps 65 

Western  side:   Height 6.5 

Base  of  main  structure  to  western  steps 

near  A 29.5 

Height  of  two  comer  steps  2 

Height  of  third  step 3 

Height  of  upper  step 2 

From  eastern  end  of  main  structure  to 

base  of  upper  structure 10.7 

From  western  end  of  main  structure 

to  base  of  upper  structure 3.8 

From  northern  and  southern  banks 

to  base  of  upper  structure 3 

Upper  structure  :  Length  of  lower  platform 31 

Width  of  lower  platform 20.8 

Height  of  lower  platform  4. 8 

Length  of  upper  platform 26 

Width  of  upper  platform 15.7 

Height  of  upper  platform 2 

Width  of  terrace  around  base  of  upper 

platform 2.5 

Total  height  of  ruin,  eastern  side 21 

Total  height  of  ruin,  western  side 11.5 

Senahu, 

Guatemala. 


CHEYENNE   STREAM    NAMES 
By  GEORGE  BIRD  GRINNELL 

In  primitive  America  descriptive  names  were  applied  to  physio- 
graphic features.  A  valley  might  be  named  from  some  animal 
abundant  ^about  it,  a  butte  or  a  mountain  from  its  shape,  a  river 
from  the  taste  of  its  waters,  from  the  trees  that  grew  by  it,  or  from 
some  historical  event  that  had  happened  near  its  banks ;  in  other 
words,  among  the  Indians  each  place-name  had  its  meaning. 

In  the  West  these  meanings  have  in  some  cases  been  preserved 
in  translation  —  the  only  practical  way,  since  the  Indian  term  is 
often  too  long  and  its  pronunciation  too  difficult  for  the  average  white 
man.  Over  much  of  the  United  States,  however,  place-names  are 
to  the  last  degree  commonplace.  Athens,  Rome,  and  Utica  for 
cities,  Olympus  and  the  Matterhom  for  mountain  peaks.  Smith's  river 
and  Jones*  creek  everywhere  are  familiar  enough. 

The  names  given  to  geographical  features  by  the  Indians  of  dif- 
erent  regions  should  be  recorded,  and  I  present  here  a  number  of 
names,  with  their  meanings,  given  by  the  Cheyenne  Indians  to  some 
of  the  rivers  in  the  country  over  which  they  formerly  ranged.  This 
country  extended  from  the  Yellowstone  southward  to  and  beyond 
the  Arkansas,  and  from  the  headwaters  of  the  Platte  and  the  Arkan- 
sas eastward  to  about  where  the  North  and  South  Platte  unite  and 
the  Arkansas  is  met  by  the  Cimarron.  This  was  the  country  which 
the  Cheyenne  regarded  as  theirs — with  the  Black  hills  as  its  center 
—  although  it  was  constantly  invaded  by  the  Pawnee  from  the  east, 
by  the  Blackfeet  from  the  north,  by  the  Crows,  Ute,  and  Shoshoni 
from  the  west,  and  by  the  Kiowa,  Comanche,  and  Apache  from  the 
south.  The  Arapaho,  their  friends  and  allies  from  very  early  times, 
occupied  it  in  common  with  the  Cheyenne. 

In  these  names  the  word  river  {ohe')  commonly  appears,  but  this 
is  not  always  the  case  in  Cheyenne,  any  more  than  in  English. 

It  will  be  observed  that  in  the  case  of  certain  rivers,  as  the  Platte 
and  the  Canadian,  the  name  of  the  main  stream  is  carried  up  one  of 

15 


l6  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  tributary  branches  to  its  head.     It  will  also  be  noted  that  in 
several  places  there  are  streams  of  the  same  name  in  the  country  of- 
the  Northern  and  the  Southern  Cheyenne. 

These  stream  names  are  offered  for  what  they  are  worth,  in  the 
hope  that  the  work  may  be  taken  up  by  other  students  in  the  Indian 
field. 

Missouri  river:  E'dmttd't,  *It  gives  (us,  or  the  people)  fat,'  {hi- 
ycfniy  'fat*;  nd'mit,  *I  give  to  him').  Usually  translated  'greasy.' 
It  is  said  that  long  ago,  when  the  Cheyenne  first  reached  Missouri  river, 
they  found  on  its  banks  many  recently-drowned  faX  buffalo.  They  named 
the  river  from  this  welcome  food  supply. 

Some  of  the  Southern  Cheyenne  say  that  when  they  first  saw  the  Mis- 
souri river  it  was  risi^,  and  that  great  masses  or  lumps  of  froth  were 
floating  down.  This  foam  resembled  the  froth,  VtdVy  or  ttdn/t,  which 
formed  in  the  water  on  their  kettles,  when  boiling  pounded  bones  to  ex- 
tract the  grease  —  greasy  =  ^-^/«'  —  and  the  name  was  given  to  the 
stream  from  these  masses  of  greasy  looking  foam. 

It  is  said  also  that  the  name  was  given  it  because  when  they  first 
reached  the  river  they  had  found  the  branches  on  some  of  the  trees 
greasy,  because  fat  meat  had  been  hung  on  them ;  hence  '  greasy  timber  ' : 
idm'  +  matd'i.     The  first  derivation  is  probably  the  right  one. 

Yellowstone  river:  Mdthi^ybe\  'Elk  river'  {mdty  'elk'  (ntoehi^ 
pi.),  +  ohty  ' river ').  So  called  by  most  of  the  northern  plains  tribes, 
from  the  abundance  of  elk  found  in  its  valley. 

Bighorn  river:    Ksaiyd^he\    'Sheep  river'  (^kos,  'a  wild  sheep' 

{kdsdn'y  pl.)>  +  ohi^). 

Little  Bighorn  river  :  Ksalyd^ hikts' ^  '  Little  Sheep  river '  (kos, 
'  a  wild  sheep  '  pi. ;  +  ohi'  +  kls,  diminutive  suffix) . 

Tongue  river:  W\fdnowVyohe\  'Tongue  river  {wit'tdnowi^  pi. 
'  tongues,'  +  ohif^. 

Rosebud  RIVER :  Hininiyohl\  '  Roseberry  river '  {hini'n*^\  '  rosebud' + 
ohi').     From  abundance  of  wild  rose  bushes  in  its  bottom. 

Powder  river:  Paiyd^he\  'Powder  river'  {pat,  'gunpowder,' 
'coal,*  or  any  black  dust,  ^■ohi').  So  named  from  the  seams  of  lignite 
along  its  banks.  The  word  is  said  to  have  been  used  for  coal  (lignite) 
before  gunpowder  was  known. 

Little  Powder  river  :  PaVyohekis,  '  Little  Powder  river '  (as  above, 
+  diminutive  suffix  kis). 

Crazy  Woman's  river  :    Tun* shinuwtybhe\  '  Foolish  woman  river  ' 


GRINNELL]  CHEYENNE  STREAM  NAMES  1/ 

(JUnshanuhkf  a^  *  foolish  woman/  +  ohi!^.  Many  years  ago  a  large  village 
of  Sioux,  Cheyenne,  and  Arapaho  were  camped  on  this  stream,  when  on 
the  return  of  a  successful  war  party  a  scalp  dance  was  held,  and  in  the 
enthusiasm  and  excitement  certain  women  hitherto  above  reproach  gave 
themselves  up  to  the  members  of  the  successful  war  party. 

Tunshinuhk' a  means  strictly  a  'dandy,'  a  'dude,'  a  well  dressed  or 
stylish  person,  male  or  female,  and  conveys  also  the  idea  of  light-headed- 
ness,  lack  of  balance,  likelihood  to  do  foolish  things.  It  is  not  however 
like  massafy  a  crazy  female,  nor  like  mdssa^ni,  crazy  or  foolish.  The 
idea  is  not  that  these  women  permanently  fell  from  grace,  but  merely 
acted  foolishly,  led  away  by  excitement.  The  belief  still  exists  that  if  a 
camp  is  made  for  any  length  of  time  on  this  river,  some  of  the  young 
women  are  sure  to  make  run -away  matches.  The  Cheyenne  declare  that 
the  Sioux  gave  it  this  name,  and  it  is  so  called  by  Cheyenne,  Sioux,  and 
Arapaho. 

Musselshell  river:  Ihkowdmf iyif he\  'Musselshell  river'  (jhko 
wdm,  '  musselshell '  [  Unto] ,  +  ohi' ) . 

Little  Missouri  river:  WokaMyunWhiy  'Antelope-pit  river' 
{wokai'f  '  antelope,'  +  hiyUn' y  '  pit,*  +  M^').  It  was  on  this  river  especi- 
ally that  the  Cheyenne  captured  antelope  in  pitfalls. 

White  river:  Wdhk^pom:  'White  water'  {wdh'kdniy  'white,* + 
tna!piy  'water'). 

North  Platte  river:  MtnntVyohe\  'Moon  Shell  river*  {min- 
m,  'shell,'  i.  e.  'moon  shell,'  circular  white  shell  ornaments  obtained 
from  traders,  T<?^^').  It  sounds  also  like  Dove  river,  from  himtn'y 
'dove,'  'pigeon,'  pi.  hemtn'i) -,  and  doves  (^Zenaidura  macrourd) 
abound  on  the  North  Platte  river ;  but  in  making  the  sign  for  the  stream 
all  Indians  make  the  sign  for  water  and  circular  ornament.  The  first 
derivation  seems  the  right  one. 

Platte  river.     (Same  as  North  Platte.) 

South  Platte  river:  W'lf dnV yohe\  'Fat  river'  {wifdfi^  'fat,* 
'  tallow, '  +  oh^  ) . 

Horse  CREEK  :  MdhVnddmVyohi\  '  Horse  river  \mdhi'nddm^  'horses,' 

LoDGEPOLE  creek:  ObhkoVyoJic* y  'Lodge-pole  river*  {hoohk! y 
'  lodge-pole, '  +  ohe'^. 

Republican  river:  Md* hdhevd* ohe\  '  Red  Shield  river'  {nidhohe'vay 
'  Red  Shield,'  +  ohf!^.  So  named  because  the  young  men  were  collected 
there  for  a  meeting  of  the  "  Red  Shield  soldiers." 

Solomon  river  :  MahkVnedhCy  '  Turkeys  creek, '  or  '  Creek  of  Tur- 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  8-2. 


1 8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

keys'    {tnahiki,    'turkey'    {mahkV  mo,  ^\,^,  ^-oh^^.     Tributary  of  Re- 
publican river.     Named  from  the  abundance  of  turkeys  found  on  it. 

Smoky  Hill  river  :  Mdnc^iyc^  he\  'Bunch  of  Trees  river'  (Jsemanot 
'grove'  (of  trees),  +  ohi^^.  So  called  because  formerly  at  the  stream's 
head  there  was  a  large  grove  of  cottonwood  trees,  among  which  no 
underbrush  grew. 

Arkansas  river  :  Mutsitsbdnt'yohey  '  Flint  Arrowpoint  river '  {mufsi' 
slfoHy  'flint  arrowpoint,*  -^ohe').  They  once  found  there  many  manu- 
factured flint  arrowpoints.     There  is  no  flint  stone  in  that  country. 

Cimarron  river:  Hotu^ac^hiy  'Bull  river'  (Jiotu'a,  'bull,'  -^ohi'). 
The  name  Bull  river  was  given  to  this  stream  by  the  Comanche, 
Kiowa,  and  Apache,  and  adopted  by  the  Cheyenne.  The  original 
name  was  Nddtsi'ohe!  —  a  Sioux  name  and  dance  adopted  by  the 
Cheyenne — 'many  pipe  dance  river,'  referring  to  great  pipe  dances 
given  there  by  various  tribes.  Up  to  forty  years  ago,  it  is  said  that  the 
river  was  so  called,  and  only  in  later  times  changed  to  Bull  river.  In 
telling  stories  the  old  men  still  refer  to  it  by  its  ancient  name. 

North  Canadian  :  Hdriih!  hiyi/ he\  'Wolf  river'  (Jioriih!  y  'wolf,'  + 
ohe). 

South  Canadian  :    Mdh!dtn,  'Red  water'   {emahb,   *  rcdy*  +  md'^\ 

'  water  ' ) . 

Canadian  river.     (Same  as  South  Canadian.) 

Washita  river:  ObhkdVydhe\  'Lodge-pole  river.'  (See  Lodge- 
pole  creek,  above. )  Name  said  to  have  been  given  by  the  Kiowa  and  Co- 
manche and  adopted  by  the  Cheyenne. 

Sweetwater  river  (of  the  South)  :  Wluhkhimdp,  '  Bitter  water  ' 
{wiuhh^'tiriy  '  bitter,' +»i5'//). 

Red  river  (of  the  South):  Mdh'dm  {Num' hdstoh* ) ,  'Red  water' 
('Southern'). 

Punished  Woman's  fork  :  AmddhktsVyohey  '  Driven  (back  and  forth) 
river*  na'madzf,  'I  drive,'  +  ohi').  Tributary  of  the  Smoky  Hill  river; 
scene  of  battle  with  Dull  Knife's  band,  in  which  Colonel  Lewis  was 
killed.  The  name  is  given  from  a  battle  between  Pa^Tiee  and  Cheyenne 
about  1835,  when  the  Pawnee  finally  chased  the  Cheyenne  for  a  long 
distance  along  the  banks  of  the  stream.  The  word  conveys  the  idea  of 
driving  back  and  forth  alternately  by  either  party  to  the  battle,  as  was  so 
much  the  custom  in  intertribal  fighting. 

Fountain  river:    E'islvufiyohe,  'Boiling  river'    {/esivufauy    'it 

boils,'  +  oM). 

Milk  river:  SkVlyd^he,  '  Little  river '  {iskiV^  little,  ^ohe'). 


GRINNELL]  CHEYENNE  STREAM  NAMES  1 9 

Mud  creek  :  Hikd^m&Vyohi,  *  Miry  creek  '  (JiieMmay '  mirji:,'  +  ohi^). 
Tributary  of  the  Arkansas  below  Fort  Lyon,  Colorado. 

Stillwater  creek  :  Ihkkd^mdi/yohi,  '  Greasy  creek  *  (^e'tkom,  '  rich ' 
or  '  oily,'  +  md^i,  '  grass,*  +  o/ii').  Tributary  of  Cimarron  river  in  north- 
eastern Oklahoma.  The  Northern  Cheyenne  call  this  stream  HiMmdi'- 
yoke,  with  the  same  derivation,  and  apply  the  same  name  to  Greasy 
Grass  creek,  a  tributary  of  Little  Bighorn  river  in  Montana.  The  grass 
along  this  stream  is  said  to  look  greasy,  "  as  if  a  frying  pan  had  been 
emptied  on  it.  * '     Horses  get  very  fat  on  this  pasturage. 

Niobrara  river:  Hissed ydvi^yoiy  'Sudden,  or  Unexpected,  river,' 
'Surprise  river*  (JiissVyowoiVy  'suddenly,*  -\-ohe').  It  is  said  that  the 
Cheyenne,  crossing  a  wide  flat  on  which  there  grew  no  timber  or  willows, 
were  astonished  when  they  came  on  the  stream  flowing  through  this 
flat.  This  is  said  to  be  the  character  of  Niobrara  river  between  the  head- 
waters of  Snake  creek  and  White  river  to  the  north.  Without  this  tra- 
ditional explanation  the  name  of  the  Niobrara  might  perhaps  be  trans- 
lated *  Sandy  river,  *  from  his'slyd^vaiVf  *  sandy,  *  +  oAl^y  *  river,  *  but  the 
Cheyenne  always  explain  this  stream's  name  as  given  above. 

Yellowpaint  river  :  Hlyc^vuni'yohiy  *  Yellowpaint  river  *  {Vhiovdn^ 
'yellow  paint,'  -k-ohe').  Tributary  of  Purgatory  river,  in  Colorado. 
The  same  name  is  given  by  the  Korthern  Cheyenne  to  Muddy  creek  in 
Montana,  a  tributary  of  Rosebud  river  from  the  east. 

Laramie  river  :    Htn^mVyohef    *  Goose   river  *    {hVnd^    '  goose,  *  + 

Heart  river  :  HistaVyohi^  '  Heart  river*  {histsis^  or  hlstd',  *  heart,* 
+  ohe').  Tributary  of  the  Missouri,  near  Mandan,  North  Dakota.  The 
Northern  Cheyenne  call  this  stream  Htstd'hdyo. 

Rapid  creek:  HaiydVyohe^  'Rapid  river*  (jhat'yo,  'rapid,'  ^^  ohe'). 
A  tributary  of  Cheyenne  river  which  rises  in  the  Black  hills.  The 
Northern  Cheyenne  call  this  stream  Haiyofhemdpy  '  swift,  or  rapid,  water.  * 

Deep  fork  :  Hiycf  tdiyohi\  *  Deep  river*  (jhySatdnty  *  deep,*  +  ohe'). 
Rises  about  25  miles  east  of  Fort  Reno,  Okla.,  and  flows  into  the  North 
fork  of  Canadian  river.  By  some  of  the  Northern  Cheyenne  this  is  called 
Hau!eidmlyohey  the  derivation  being  the  same. 

Medicine  Lodge  creek  :  HohklVyohe,  '  Medicine  Lodge  river  * 
{hohki'dyum^  'medicine  lodge,*  +  ^A^').  Enters  Beaver  river  about  25 
miles  west  of  Fort  Supply,  Okla. 

Medicine  Lodge  creek  (in  Kansas)  :  HohktVyohe'ktSy  '  Little  Medi- 
cine Lodge  river*  (as  above  4-  ktSy  diminutive). 

Beaver  RIVER  :  Hdma^lyohe^  ' Beaver  river  *  (Jidmd\  '  beaver,*  +  ohe*). 


20  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Beaver  an.d  Wolf  creeks  unite  a  short  distance  below  Fort  Supply,  form- 
ing the  North  fork  of  Canadian  river.  Another  Beaver  river  runs  into 
the  Republican  river  from  the  south,  flowing  through  northern  Kansas. 

Elm  fork  (of  the  North  fork  of  Red  river)  :  Hdmino^lyohe^  '  Elm 
river'  (^homtn'Of  'elm,' +  <7A^). 

Chug  river:  Ilotu' daina' dhi^ ,  'Bull-falling-down  river'  {hotu'dy 
'bull ; '  Shyanay  '  he  falls,*  +  ohi').  Said  to  have  been  named  from  the 
fact  that  in  1846  a  wounded  bull,  backing  from  an  Indian  about  to  shoot 
at  him,  fell  over  the  bluff. 

Brazos  river  :  Uhk^wusVyohCy  '  Trading  river '  {nauhhUOy  '  I  trade  ' 
or  'buy,*  -{-ohe).  In  ancient  times  the  Cheyenne  met  the  Comanche 
there  for  the  first  time.  They  met  as  friends  and  exchanged  horses  and 
clothing. 

Hackberry  creek  :  Kd^kdimlnfoshiy  '  Where  hackberries  stand  thick ' 
(kd^kdimin'dty  '  hackberry, '  +  shiy  from  htsh'iky  '  earth, '  '  ground, '  a  suffix 
of  quantity  denoting  abundance  of  vegetation,  of  whatever  kind;  it  signi- 
fies '  covered  with,  *  or  '  standing  thick  together.  *  Where  used  of  streams 
where  the  vegetation  indicated  stands  thick,  the  word  ohe'y  'river,*  is 
omitted,  and  the  stream's  name  would  be,  as  in  the  present  case,  '  where 
the  hackberries  stand  thick. ' )  This  stream  flows  into  the  South  Canadian 
about  1 5  miles  east  of  Antelope  hills. 

Barnett's  creek:  KbnSi'yohiy  'Sick  man's  river'  (J^dnhalSy  sick 
man,  +  ohi') .  Konhais  —  here  used  as  a  proper  name  —  was  buried  on  a 
scaffold  near  the  mouth  of  this  stream.     He  was  Red  Moon's  brother. 

Red  Willow  creek  :  MdhkdmUKisuniydhey  '  Red  Willow  river ' 
(jndhkdm'ehtSy  '  red  willow  '  (actually  a  small  dogwood),  +  ohe').  Enters 
the  Republican  just  below  Beecher's  island. 

Kingfisher  creek  :  Mdtsin'tydhiy  '  Kingfisher  river '  {mdtsin!'iy 
kingfisher,'  -k-ohe'),  A  tributary  of  the  Cimarron.  This  stream  seems 
to  be  more  commonly  called  '  Fish  creek,'  Nomd'hiyohe  {noma* he  +  ohe!^. 
There  is  a  Kingfisher  creek,  as  above,  which  enters  the  Platte  not  far  from 
the  present  town  of  Fremont,  Neb. 

Cheyenne  river  :  MSitdmdra'ohey  '  Red  paint  river '  {maitum* y 
'paint,' 4-^^?').  The  South  Cheyenne  river  of  Dakota;  so  called  be- 
cause of  the  abundance  of  red  clay  near  its  banks. 

Willow  creek  :  Mtnfoshiy  '  Where  willows  stand  thick '  {jntn'dky 
'willow,' +x^^).  A  tributary  of  Medicine  Lodge  creek,  in  southern 
Kansas. 

Box  Elder  creek  :  MishkimarohCy  '  Box-elder  river '  {mishkimdy 
'  ox-elder,'  +  ohi').    Tributary  of  Cheyenne  river  east  of  the  Black  hills. 


GRiNNKLL]  CHEYENNE  STREAM  NAMES  21 

MoREAU  river:  MtstaVyohcy  *Owl  river'  {mts'tai^  'owl/ +^^^'). 
Tributary  of  the  Missouri,  having  its  source  northeast  of  the  Black  hills. 

Eagle  Chief  creek  :  MdCiyunHkamahky  '  Medicine  Wood  (river)  ' 
(maiyuft',  '  mysterious, '  +  ka!mdhk^  *  wood ' ) .  A  tributary  of  the  Cimar- 
ron from  the  north. 

North  Fork  of  Red  river  (of  Texas)  :  Mohklmts'siivoy  *  Big 
Sand  *  {mdhk,  '  big,'  +  kissVyovOy  '  sand  '). 

Knife  river:  HovafovonVohCy  'Sword  river'  (^h&vdfovbn^  'sword,' 
-k^ohH^,     A  tributary  of  the  Missouri  near  Ft  Berthold,  North  Dakota. 

TuLE  CREEK  :  Modhtmstd' she^  '  Where  rushes  stand  thick  '  {rtidohmtsf - 
tdsy  'rush,'  +  shi),     A  tributary  of  Red  river. 

Walnut  creek  :  Motoshe',  '  Where  ash  trees  grow  thick '  {moW y 
'  ash,'  +  she^.     A  tributary  of  the  Arkansas. 

Apishapa:  O'ivutsi'ydhij  '  Quarreling  river '  (JvVhydety  'she  scolds,' 
■\-ohi^^,  A  tributary  of  the  Arkansas  between  the  Huerfano  and  the 
Purgatory  in  Colorado.  Many  years  ago  a  village  of  Indians  encamp>ed 
there  began  to  quarrel  among  themselves.  Both  men  and  women  took 
part  in  the  dispute.  They  did  not  fight ;  merely  talked  at  each  other — 
scolded. 

Crow  CREEK  :  OhitdnVohey  'Cro^  (Indian)  river'  {D'hitdn,  'Crow 
man,'  +  ohi').  Near  Cheyenne,  Wyo.  The  Northern  Cheyenne  call  this 
Oh!kbkVohey  '  Crow  (bird)  river. ' 

Arikara  fork  of  Republican  river  :  Onbmc^hey  '  Ree  river ' 
{O'ndniy  '  Arikara,' +^^^').  On  an  island  (Beecher's  island)  in  this 
stream  the  fight  took  place  in  1868  between  Maj.  G.  A.  Forsythe's  com- 
mand of  50  scouts  and  the  Cheyenne,  in  which  chief  Roman  Nose  was 
killed. 

Sand  creek:  Pun*oibhey  'Dry  creek'  {pun'oly  '  dry,' +  c?^^).  A 
tributary  of  the  Arkansas  east  of  Fort  Lyon,  Colo.  Here  occurred  the 
Chivington  massacre. 

Saline  fork  of  Smoky  Hill  river  :  Shistotbiyohey  '  Cedar  river ' 
(^shistotby  'cedar  tree,'  -\-ohe'). 

Purgatory  river  :  Hbtodnd'ohey  '  Difficult  river '  {hdtbdn&y  '  dif- 
ficult,' •\-ohi').  So  named  from  its  perpendicular  banks  and  the  cafions 
through  which  it  runs. 

Mulberry  creek  :  Tsi'bnttdii/Oy  '  Differently  timbered '  (river) 
(JsVontidiwOy  'where  different  sorts  of  trees  grow').  Tributary  of  the 
Arkansas  from  the  south  near  Fort  Dodge,  Kansas.  Named  from  the 
variety  of  trees  which  formerly  grew  on  its  banks. 

Frenchman's  fork  of  Republican  river:    WVhioiyohey   'White- 


22  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

man's  river*  (tuih!io,  'white  man/  -vohi^).  The  upper  Rio  Grande  in 
New  Mexico  bears  the  same  name. 

North  Fork  of  Republican  river:  WVhtuniyohey  'Chief river* 
(wMu,  'chief/ +£?^^'). 

Porcupine  creek  :  Hets*kovitsiyohe^  '  Porcupine  river  *  {hetskbvitSy 
'  porcupine/  +  ohi^^ .     A  northern  tributary  of  the  Yellowstone. 

Sun  river:  IshtVyohe^  'Sun  river*  (jshiy  'sun/  ^ohi').  A  western 
tributary  of  the  Missouri. 

Stinking  water,  or  Wind  river  :  Hdhkdmiomdpy  '  Ill-smelling 
water  *  {hdhkomi^  '  bad  smelling/  +  mapi^  '  water  *). 

Green  river  :  Tassoiyohe^  '  Scalp  river '  {ma  tdss'y  '  scalp/  +  ohe'). 
Many  years  ago  the  Cheyenne  had  a  fight  on  this  river,  in  which  many 
were  killed,  and  when  they  saw  the  dead  lying  there  scalped,  they  called 
it  River  of  Scalps.  It  has  also  been  given  me  as  '  Soul  river '  (tdssoom* y 
'  shadow,*  +  ohi^^y  but  the  first  is  the  true  derivation. 

Bitter  creek  :  Wtuhk'tmdp,  (See  Sweetwater  River  of  the  South, 
above. )     Tributary  of  the  North  Platte  from  the  north. 

346  Broadway, 

New  York  City 


THE   POWHATAN   NAME   FOR   VIRGINIA 
By   WILLIAM   WALLACE   TOOKER 

In  the  Powhatan  name  for  Virginia  occurs  one  of  the  few 
instances  in  which  is  found  an  Indian  name  applied  to  such  an 
extensive  territory.  Virginia,  according  to  the  early  charters,  and 
as  delineated  by  the  cartographers  of  the  seventeenth  century, 
was  a  variable  quantity  as  to  its  bounds  in  the  north  and  south, 
which  were  also  indefinable  in  the  west,  and  were  so  considered  by 
the  colonists  and  the  king.  We  cannot  suppose,  nor  do  we  believe, 
therefore,  that  the  subject  of  this  essay  applied  to  the  whole  of  this 
vast  domain,  but  rather,  being  a  Powhatan  appellative,  it  was  appli- 
cable mainly  to  the  country  dominated  by  Powhatan,  or  at  most 
to  the  lands  drained  by  the  tidewater  streams  flowing  into  Chesa- 
peake bay  on  the  west,  as  laid  down  on  Capt  John  Smith's  map,* 
which  are  now  included  in  the  present  commonwealth  of  Virginia. 
This  view  of  the  case  is  confirmed  by  Strachey  {Histarie,  p.  29),  who 
refers  to  the  various  tribes  in  the  following  words :  **  Which  are  in 
chief  commaunded  by  their  great  Kinge  Powhatan,  and  are  compre- 
hended under  the  denomination  of  Tsenacommacoh^  of  which  we 
maye  more  by  experience  speak,  yt  being  the  place  wherein  our 
abode  and  habitation  hath  now  (well  neare)  1 1  yeares  consisted.'* 
A  note  to  this  says  :  '*  In  the  Mss.,  the  word  'six '  was  originally 
written,  but  has  been  crossed  out  and  two  strokes,  thus,  *  11  '  inserted 
in  darker  coloured  ink." 

As  Strachey  arrived  in  Virginia  in  1 610  and  remained  three  years, 
he  must  have  written  the  above  paragraph  in  161 3,  when  the  colony 
had  been  established  six  years,  and  revised  it  in  161 8,  although  his 
manuscript  was  not  edited  and  published  until  1849.  ^^  ^^^  **  T>\q.- 
tionarie''  he  gives  as  Virginia,  Tsenahco^nmacaJu  Therefore  in 
these  two  notations  we  have  the  earliest  form  of  the  Powhatan  name 


1  These  lands  Smith  marks  on  his  map  **  Powhatan  "  in  large  Roman  letters  which 
extend  from  south  of  James  river  northwardly  to  the  upper  Potomac. 

23 


24  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

for  Virginia,  which  without  question  can  be  assigned  to  a  period 
not  later  than  the  year  161 3. 

On  the  well-known  engraving  of  Pocahontas  (plate  vi),  ^  by 
Simon  De  Passe,  which  was  copied  by  an  unknown  artist  from  a 
painting  made  in  16 16,  when  she  was  21  years  of  age,  and  still  pre- 
served at  Booton  Hall,  near  Aylsham,  Norfolk,  England,  appears 
the  legend :  "  Matoaks  als  Rebecka  daughter  to  the  mighty  Prince 
Powhatan  Emperour  of  Attanoughkoinouck  als  Virginia  converted  and 
baptized  in  the  Christian  faith^  a^idwife  to  the  wo^^  Joh  Rolff^  The 
picture  is  no  doubt  what  it  professes  to  be,  namely,  an  authentic 
portrait,  from  life,  of  Pocahontas,  made  during  the  reign  of  James  I. 
A  description  of  the  original  painting,  by  Mrs  Herbert  Jones,  ap- 
pears in  Arber's  reprint  of  Smith's  works.  A  copy  is  contained  in 
Drake's  Book  of  the  Indians^  8th  edition,  1 841,  which  furnished  the 
accompanying  reproduction. 

As  Pocahontas  posed  for  the  portrait  while  in  England,  the  name 
Attanoughkontouck  must  have  been  thus  pronounced  to  the  painter 
by  Pocahontas  herself,  for  the  inscription  is  undoubtedly  contempo- 

1  As  to  the  significance  and  etymology  of  this  name,  Heckewelder  {Names,  etc., 
1833)  says  :  "It  was  corrupted  from  PockohanteSj  signifying,  a  streamlet  or  river  be- 
tween two  hills,  compounded  of  pochko,  a  rock,  or  rocky  hill,  and  hanne,  a  stream,  the 
latter  word  made  a  diminutive  by  the  sufHx  tes,*^  This  b  incorrect,  for  Strachey  earlier 
wrote :  *<  So  the  great  King  Powhatan  called  a  young  daughter  of  his,  whome  he  loved 
well,  Pochahuntas,  which  may  signify  little  wanton ;  howbeyt  she  was  rightly  called 
Amonate  2X  more  ripe  yeares."  (Historie,  p.  iii.)  Strachey  is  correct  in  this  state- 
ment, for  the  name,  as  revealed  by  its  variations  in  spelling,  is  from  the  cognate  of  the 
"^tXiok  pdachau  *  he  or  she  plays'  or  <  makes  merry'  ;  -on/as,  -untas  (=Natick,  -dfr/am, 
diminutive  -dntas),  is  the  formative  of  verbs  expressing  mental  state  and  activity,  or  dis- 
position of  the  mind,  with  the  diminutive  termination.  Poacha-untas  thus  signifies  *  the 
little  merry-minded,'  *the  little  frolic,'  whence,  also,  'the  little  wanton.' 

**  All  wanton  as  a  child,  skipping  and  vain."  —  Lovers  Labor  Lost.  Of  w^hich  trait 
Strachey  writes:  ** Pochahunias,  a  well  featured,  but  wanton  young  girle,  Powhatan's 
daughter  sometymes  resorting  to  our  fort  [Jamestown],  of  the  age  then  of  eleven  or 
twelve  yeares,  get  the  boyes  forth  with  her  unto  the  markett  place,  and  make  them 
wheele,  falling  on  their  hands,  turning  up  their  heeles  upwards,  whome  she  would  followe 
and  wheele  so  herself,  naked  as  she  was,  all  the  fort  over."     {Historie,  p.  65. ) 

**  Amonate  at  more  ripe  years,"  z=-  amonateu  *she  gives  warning,'  probably  had  re- 
ference to  the  warning  which  she  gave  Smith  in  1609,  for  the  Indians  often  changed  their 
names  at  the  time  of  some  remarkable  happening,  viz. :  '*  That  when  her  father,  intended 
to  haue  surprized  him,  shee  by  stealth  in  the  darke  night  came  through  the  wild  woods 
and  told  him  of  it."  (Smith,  pp.  165,  455,  532.)  Matoaks,  on  the  portrait,  =  Natick 
matohqs  *  a  cloud.' 


s/ 


B\\^^' 


X~&i^n   ^,.^™„  J"^u,„. 


^^  tr  th.  -^r  *"  ,^f:J.h  yx^/Jf- 


TOOKKR]  THE  POWHATAN  NAME  FOR    VIRGINIA  2$ 

rary  with  the  painting.  Strachey's  form,  Tsenaluommacah^  he  prob- 
ably obtained  from  some  Indian  frequenting  Jamestown,  perhaps 
from  Kemps,  the  Indian  who  gave  him  the  names  of  Powhatan's 
dozen  wives,  and  whom  he  mentions  as  having  died  at  Jamestown  in 
i6i  2,  after  living  with  the  colonists  for  nearly  a  year  {Historic ,  p.  53). 

While  these  two  forms  of  the  native  name  of  Virginia  are  seem- 
ingly from  different  sources,  their  identity  is  apparent,  the  difference 
between  them  being  due  more  perhaps  to  individual  utterance  than 
to  any  dialectal  change.  This  appears  plain  when  we  compare  the 
two  —  Attanoughkomouck  dXiA.  TscnaJuommacah  —  for  then  we  find 
that  the  vowel  sound  of  the  initial  a  in  the  former  was  either  dis- 
carded or  was  not  heard  in  the  latter,  and  that  the  second  /  was 
changed  by  assibilation  into  s,  with  resulting  change  in  the  vowels, 
which  would  make  the  name  Attanohcommacah  —  a  difference  that 
would  happen  to  any  name  spoken  by  a  person  who  uses  correct 
language,  contrasted  with  the  same  spoken  by  a  person  with  an  im- 
pediment in  speech,  or  with  a  decided  lisp. 

However  this  may  be,  in  illustrating  the  etymology  of  the  term 
I  shall  proceed  as  if  the  two  forms  were  dialectally  different  and 
analyze  them  separately  with  the  aid  of  the  two  most  prominent 
New  England  dialects,  for  in  its  vocabulary  the  Powhatan  is  closer 
to  these  two  than  to  any  other  of  the  Algonquin  family.  I  have 
made  this  statement  before  in  some  of  my  essays,  but  it  will  do  no 
harm  to  repeat  it  here.  In  fact  it  is  difficult  to  give  its  equivalent 
from  any  other  dialect,  owing  to  lack  of  vocabulistic  material ;  and 
this  is  especially  true  of  the  Lenape,  so  far  as  this  name  is  con- 
cerned. It  seems  singular,  however,  that  Smith  does  not  refer  to 
the  name  in  any  way,  and  the  term  most  nearly  approaching  it  is 
where  he  quotes  Pory  (page  507),  who  in  162 1  visited  a  town  called 
Attougluomaco^  on  Pawtuxunt  river,  the  habitation  of  Namenacus 
and  of  Wamanato  his  brother,  where  Pory  was  shown  many  corn- 
fields, which  might  indicate,  as  will  be  observed,  the  same  deriva- 
tion for  this  name  as  the  other. 

We  have  considered  that  these  two  early  forms  are  sufficient  for 

*  While  this  town  is  not  named  on  Smith's  map  of  Virginia,  it  appears  to  have  been 
situated  on  the  south  side  of  Patuxent  river,  in  what  is  now  Calvert  county,  Maryland. 
Bozman,  Hist.  Maryland,  book  I,  p.  149. 


26  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

our  present  purpose,  and  so  have  not  searched  further  than  the 
authorities  given  for  others  of  the  same  period. 

Attanoughkotnouck  finds  its  equivalent  in  the  Natick  adtanoh- 
komuk  (=  adtan-ohke-komuk),  from  adtan-^  dfan-y  or  tan-,^  as  Eliot 
varies  it,  *  growing,'  '  producing,*  as  land  does  by  cultivation  ;  ohke 
'latid,'  'ground  ';  komouck  or  comaco  (=  Natick  komuk ^  =  Narra- 
gansett  kamucky  or  cammuck),  *  house,'  *  inclosure,'  *  an  inclosed 
place,'  hence  *  land  inclosed  for  producing  or  growing.'  There  is 
another  constructive  form,  frequently  used  by  Eliot,  in  several  vari- 
ations,* which  is  very  similar  to  the  foregoing  in  meaning  but  not  in 
grammar,  viz.  :  adtanohketeamuk  (=  adtan-ohketea-muk),  *  a  garden,' 
or  *  where  the  ground  is  planted  for  growing ';  ohketeau^  *  he  plants 
or  sows,'  with  the  termination  ^muk^  which  Trumbull  variously  calls 
the  suppositive,  passive,  or  present  conditional-passive  form  of  the 
verb. 

Strachey's  Tsenahcomtnacak  finds  its  cognate  form  which  has 
about  the  same  letter  change  as  before  mentioned,  i.  e.,  /  to  s,  in  the 
Narraganset  sandukamuck  (  =  san-duke-kamuck^^  *land,'  1st  pers. 
sing,  nissawndwkamuck  ( =  niS'Sawn'dwke'kamuck)^  *  my  land,' 
literally  *  land  inclosed  for  producing  or  growing,*  and  so  by  free 
translation  the  name  may  be  interpreted  as  '  a  plantation,'  and  its 
meaning  perhaps  was  so  understood  by  the  Virginia  colonists.' 

Trumbull's  suggestion  *  that  the  Narraganset  term  was  perhaps 
the  same  as  sowanohkomuk  (  =  sowan'okke'kofnuk)^  *  south  land,'  *  a 
field  with  a  southern  exposure,'  is  not  acceptable  from  any  point  of 
view ;  and  it  will  not  stand  analysis,  for  the  Powhatan  term  chowan 
=  Natick  sowan  =  Narraganset  soivwan,  *  south,'  hence  the  Pow- 
hatan chowanock  =  Natick  sowanohke,  *  south  land,'  which  indicates 
that  there  is  no  cognation  in  the  prefix  with  the  Narraganset  san  or 
the  Natick  tan. 

1  My  authority  for  the  use  of  this  prefix  is  Eliot's  Bible.  As  it  occurs  in  various  com- 
pounds, it  refers  to  *  growing,'  or  <  producing,'  from  the  beginning  of  cultivation,  while 
adtannekin,  or  tanrukin  (  =  adtan-nekin)  has  reference  to  complete  growth,  as  when  a 
tree  fruits.  This  is  plainly  seen  in  the  Abnaki  cognate  :  tzanigS,  *  il  cesse  de  croitre  *  — 
Rasle. 

*  Tanohketeaonganit^  Deut.  XI,  10  {=itan-ohketea-onganit)f  *  a  garden*;  tanoh- 
keteaonkf  Solomon,  iv,  12,  <  a  garden.' 

*G>mpare Narraganset  (Williams)  wusk&ukamuck  {=  wuske-auke-kamuck),  'new 
ground,'  from  wuske  'new,'  'fresh,'  'young,'  hence  'new  ground  inclosed.' 

♦  Natick  Dictionary ^  p.  145. 


TOOKER]  THE  POWHATAN  NAME  FOR    VIRGINIA  2/ 

For  a  final  word  as  to  Pocahontas^  the  woman,  let  us  remember 
the  unbounded  obligations  we  are  under  for  her  part  in  preserving 
this  **  plantation  alias  Virginia/*  of  which  Smith  (pp.  531^532)  testi- 
fies in  his  letter  to  Queen  Anne :  *'  James  towne  with  her  wild  traine 
she  as  freely  frequented,  as  her  fathers  habitation ;  and  during  the 
time  of  two  or  three  yeeres  [1608-09],  she  next  vnder  God,  was 
still  the  instrument  to  preserue  this  Colonie  from  death,  famine  and 
vtter  confusion ;  which  if  in  those  times,  [it]  had  once  beene  dis- 
solued,  Virginia  might  haue  line  [lain]  as  it  was  at  our  arriuall  to 
this  day.  She  was  the  first  Christian  euer  of  that  Nation,  the  first 
Virginian  euer  spake  English." 

Sag  Harbor, 
New  York. 


A  PUBERTY  CEREMONY  OF  THE  MISSION  INDIANS^ 

By  HORATIO  N.  RUST 

In  1889  the  author  attended  a  puberty  ceremony  of  the  Mission 
Indians  at  Campo  near  the  Mexican  line  in  southern  California. 
Word  had  been  sent  out  that  the  ceremony  would  be  held  near 
this  place.  Friendly  tribes  were  invited.  Among  others  twenty- 
five  Yumas  came  across  the  desert  by  a  trail  which  leads  by  the 
new  settlement  of  Imperial.  The  writer  saw  them  crossing  a 
mountain  ridge  mounted  on  ponies,  in  Indian  file,  gaily  attired,  pre- 
senting a  most  picturesque  sight. 

An  Indian  fiesta  is  usually  much  the  same,  though  it  may  be 
assembled  for  various  purposes.  It  consists  of  a  general  gathering 
of  entire  families,  and  eating,  drinking,  horse-racing,  gambling,  and 
all  kinds  of  merrymaking  are  indulged  in  night  and  day  continuously 
for  about  a  week,  or  until  food  is  exhausted  and  the  sharpest  gam- 
biers  have  secured  all  the  money  and  valuables  at  hand. 

The  present  ceremony  has  been  observed  by  the  different  tribes 
of  Mission  Indians  of  southern  California  from  time  immemorial. 
It  has  been  described  under  various  names,  such  as  the  "  roasting 
of  girls."  It  was  learned  from  careful  inquiry  among  the  old  women 
that  the  object  of  the  ceremony  is  to  prepare  the  girls  for  matrimony. 
As  they  arrive  at  the  age  of  puberty  they  are  informed  of  the  object 
of  the  ceremony  and  told  that  they  have  been  selected  for  it.  They 
look  forward  to  the  event  with  pleasure  rather  than  dread,  for  con- 
trary to  what  has  been  represented  there  is  nothing  in  it  that  is  re- 
pulsive. The  object  of  the  present  account  of  this  ceremony  as  it 
was  witnessed  is  particularly  to  show  its  relation  to  a  certain  sacred 
curved  stone  which  was  then  new  to  the  author,  and  to  point  out 
its  possible  relation  to  the  sacrificial  yoke  or  "Maya  stone'*  of 
Mexico. 


1  Read  at  the  meeting  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association,   San  Fran- 
cisco, August  30. 

28 


RUST]  PUBERTY  CEREMONY  OF  MISSION  INDIANS  29 

In  the  open  space  between  the  booths  prepared  for  the  guests  a 
space  was  cleared  for  the  dancers.  Near  this  a  pit  was  dug  about 
three  feet  deep  and  five  feet  in  diameter.  In  this  pit  a  fire  had  been 
built  which  had  warmed  the  damp  earth  and  caused  steam  to  arise 
through  the  green  herbs  with  which  the  pit  was  nearly  filled.  The 
girls  appeared  wrapped  in  blankets.  They  lay  down  upon  the  green 
herbs  and  were  covered  with  blankets.  Finding  themselves  com- 
fortable, they  appeared  very  happy,  peering  out  through  their 
covers,  laughing,  and  chatting.  They  remained  here  four  days  and 
nights  continuously,  except  that  occasionally  they  were  wrapped  in 
a  blanket  to  go  away  for  food.  Sometimes  acorn  meal  porridge  was 
brought  them  to  drink.  During  these  four  days  the  old  women, 
who  appeared  very  much  in  earnest,  danced  and  sang  around  the 
pit,  waving  branches  of  sagebrush  to  drive  away  the  spirits.  These 
women  intended  to  keep  up  their  dance  constantly,  but  worn  out 
with  old  age  and  continuous  effort  they  sometimes  dropped  on  the 
ground  and  fell  asleep.  Having  rested  they  would  then  return  to 
the  dance.  Occasionally  the  visitors  would  join  in  a  wild  boisterous 
dance,  shouting,  singing,  and  beating  time  with  rattles.  These 
efforts  would  encourage  the  tired  old  women  upon  whom  the  re- 
sponsibility of  continuous  dancing  seemed  to  rest. 

Once  during  the  dancing  an  old  woman  appeared  and  scattered 
a  handful  of  silver  coins  over  the  crowd.  Anyone  was  permitted 
to  secure  the  coins,  and  the  act  caused  much  merriment.  It  was 
explained  that  this  was  done  to  teach  the  girls  to  be  generous. 
After  this  many  yards  of  calico  and  gingham  and  ten  sacks  of 
wheat  were  brought  and  given  away  to  the  old  and  needy,  in  order 
to  teach  the  girls  by  example  to  be  kind  to  the  old  and  the  poor. 
After  this  quantities  of  wild  seeds  used  for  food  were  brought  and 
sowed  broadcast  on  the  girls.  This  was  done  to  cause  them  to  be 
prolific.  During  the  ceremony  grain  was  also  often  showered  over 
the  crowd  by  old  women. 

As  the  end  of  the  ceremony  drew  near,  the  chief  ordered  all 
strangers  away.  The  girls,  with  blankets  wrapped  about  them, 
arose  and  received  garlands  of  leaves  prepared  by  friends  and  placed 
upon  their  heads.  They  were  then  led  away  to  a  hillside  where 
they  were  shown  the  sacred  stone,  which  it  was  said  was  to  pro- 


30  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

tect  them.  This  stone  is  about  13  by  15  inches  in  size,  shaped 
like  a  yoke,  and  thirty-five  pounds  in  weight.*  It  was  said  to  sym- 
bolize or  have  reference  to  the  female  organ  of  generation.  Then 
friends  of  the  girls  hung  their  garlands  on  rocks  and  bushes  about, 
and  the  sacred  stone  was  buried  again.  Grain  was  scattered  over 
all  and  the  ceremony  was  complete. 

It  is  believed,  and  taught  the  girls,  that  the  sweating  in  the  pit 
and  the  remaining  ceremonies  banish  bad  spirits  from  the  girls ;  also 
that  the  sacred  stone  entertains  and  controls  these  spirits  and  that 
they  will  not  return  to  the  girls  as  long  as  these  do  right. 

In  1879,  ^^  21  ^^^^  ^o  ^^^  National  Museum  of  Mexico,  the 
author  was  shown  the  sacrificial  yoke  or  Maya  stone,  and  was  told 
by  curator  Mendoza  that  he  did  not  believe  that  it  had  been  used 
in  sacrifices  nor  knew  its  employment  or  purpose.  He  presented  the 
author  with  a  small  object  of  the  same  shape  chipped  from  obsidian. 
This  piece  he  thought  bore  the  same  relation  to  the  large  sacrificial 
yoke  that  small  crosses  worn  by  our  people  bear  to  the  cross  of 
Christ. 

At  a  later  date  the  author's  son  found  among  other  relics  on 
an  ancient  village  site  near  Redondo  Beach,  California,  a  similarly 
shaped  stone.  This  was  about  two  inches  in  diameter  and  had  been 
shaped  by  rubbing.  In  the  belief  that  this  represented  the  same 
idea  as  the  small  Mexican  specimen  of  obsidian,  it  was  preserved 
with  it. 

In  1893  a  collection,  including  these  pieces,  was  exhibited  at 
the  Chicago  exposition.  Here  they  attracted  the  attention  of  an 
Englishman  who  had  specially  studied  the  Mexican  sacrificial  yokes. 
His  belief  was  that  the  Mexican  objects  represented  the  same  idea 
as  the  two  specimens  from  California  and  that  no  objects  of  the 
kind  had  previously  been  found  in  actual  use. 

Subsequently  another  specimen  found  at  Santa  Barbara  has 
been  obtained  (pi.  vii,  2).  The  two  pieces  from  California  first 
mentioned  and  the  small  Mexican  piece  are  in  the  museum  of  Beloit 
College,  Wisconsin,  while  the  Santa  Barbara  specimen  remains  in  the 


'  According  to  information  subsequently  received  from  the  author,  the  large  stone 
shown  in  plate  vn,  i,  while  similar  to  the  one  used  in  the  ceremony  at  Campo,  was  not 
obtained  there  but  at  another  rancheria  some  distance  to  the  north  in  Shoshonean  territory. 
— Editor, 


RUST]  PUBERTY  CEREMONY  OF  MISSION  INDIANS  3 1 

author's  possession.  Attention  is  also  called  to  the  crescentic  object, 
grooved  about  the  middle,  illustrated  in  the  upper  part  of  plate  vi,  p. 
1 14,  of  Mr  William  H.  Holmes*  paper  published  in  vol.  i,  no.  i,  of 
this  journal.  This  specimen  is  reputed  to  have  come  from  the  auri- 
ferous gravels  of  California.  It  is  hoped  that  interest  may  be 
aroused  which  will  lead  to  further  investigation  of  this  subject,  and 
that  it  may  be  learned  whether  the  sacrifical  stone  yoke  of  the 
ancient  Mexicans  represented  the  same  religious  belief  as  this  sacred 
curved  stone.  It  may  also  be  suggested  that  our  own  superstitions 
regarding  the  horseshoe,  which  is  of  the  same  general  form,  may 
be  connected  with  such  beliefs. 

South  Pasadena, 
California. 

Notes  by  A.  L.  Kroeder 

Two  stones  similar  to  those  described  by  Mr  Rust  are  in  mu- 
seums in  San  Francisco  and  could  therefore  be  exhibited  at  the 
meeting  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association  in  connec- 
tion with  his  paper.  One  of  these  specimens  (pi.  vii,  3)  is  in  the 
California  Academy  of  Sciences  (cat.  no.  40-1 275).  It  will  be  seen 
that  this  piece  resembles  the  one  from  Santa  l^arbara,  but  is  some- 
what smaller  and  less  curved.  It  was  found  on  a  ridge  between 
Poso  creek  and  Kern  river,  that  is  to  say,  at  the  southern  end  of 
the  San  Joaquin  valley,  in  territor>'  occupied  in  recent  times  either 
by  Yokuts  or  Shoshonean  Indians. 

The  second  specimen  (figure  4  of  the  plate)  is  in  the  Anthro- 
pological Museum  of  the  University  of  California  (cat.  no.  1-4562). 
The  curvature  in  this  piece  is  also  not  very  pronounced.  It  differs 
from  the  last  in  having  pointed  ends  and  in  a  rougher  finish,  its  sur- 
face showing  pecking  but  no  marks  of  rubbing.  It  is  slightly 
grooved  around  the  middle  as  if  for  suspension  or  attachment.  Its 
length  is  not  quite  9  inches.  This  specimen  was  found  in  1872 
by  or  through  Mr  C.  D.  Voy  in  the  part  of  Oakland  known  as 
Brooklyn.  It  is  thus  from  the  shore  of  San  Francisco  bay,  and 
there  is  some  probability  that  it  was  found  in  a  shellmound.  Of 
course  there  is  no  direct  information  extant  as  to  the  use  or  purpose 
of  either  of  these  two  specimens. 


32  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  following  information  as  to  the  girls'  puberty  ceremony  was 
obtained  on  inquiry  in  1903  among  the  Luiseiio  Indians  of  Pauma 
and  Rincon  in  northern  San  Diego  county.  These  Indians  are  of 
Shoshonean  stock,  while  those  at  Campo  described  by  Mr  Rust  be- 
long to  the  Yuman  family. 

A  fire  was  made  in  a  hole  in  the  ground.  In  this  tule  was 
placed.  The  girls  were  laid  on  this  on  their  backs.  Two  flat  stones 
were  heated  and  laid  on  their  abdomens.  Several  girls,  generally 
relatives,  were  usually  put  through  the  ceremony  at  once.  They 
were  called  as,  and  the  ceremony  weghenish.  The  ceremony  lasted 
four  or  five  days.  A  head-dress  of  a  plant  called  engwish  was 
worn  by  the  girls  for  several  months  after  the  ceremony.  During 
this  period  they  could  eat  neither  meat  nor  fish.  The  duration  of 
this  restriction  does  not  seem  to  have  been  altogether  fixed.  The 
longer  it  was  observed  the  better  it  was  thought  to  be  for  the  girls. 
In  some  cases  it  is  said  to  have  lasted  a  year.  The  ceremony  was 
performed  in  order  to  make  good  women  of  the  girls.  They  were 
talked  to  by  their  relatives  and  advised  to  be  good  and  to  give  water 
and  food  to  people. 

The  conclusion  of  the  girls'  period  of  restrictions  at  puberty 
was  marked  by  paintings  made  by  them  on  the  smooth  surfaces  of 
large  granite  bowlders.  These  paintings,  some  of  which  can  still  be 
seen,  especially  near  the  old  village  sites,  consist  of  geometrical  ar- 
rangements of  red  lines,  usually  in  patterns  forming  vertical  stripes 
several  feet  high.  After  making  her  painting,  a  girl  was  again  free 
to  eat  meat  and  salt.     The  paintings  were  called  yunish. 

At  one  period,  apparently  at  the  beginning  of  the  ceremony,  the 
girls  ate  tobacco.  Several  small  balls  of  this,  it  is  said  without  ad- 
mixture of  any  other  substance,  were  swallowed  by  them,  after 
which  they  drank  hot  water.  If  they  retained  the  tobacco  they 
were  said  to  be  good ;  but  if  they  vomited  it,  they  were  regarded 
as  bad. 


A  REMARKABLE  PIPE  FROM  NORTHWESTERN 

AMERICA 

By  HARLAN  I.  SMITH 

In  July,  1905,  a  remarkable  pipe  was  procured  by  Mr  George 
H.  Pepper  from  Mr  J.  E.  Standley,  a  dealer  at  Seattle,  Washington, 
for  the  private  collection  of  George  G.  Heye,  Esq.,  of  New  York 
city.  At  the  time  of  its  purchase  the  pipe  was  labeled  "  A  cere- 
monial pipe  found  in  a  mummy  cave  at  Ellamar,  Cook's  inlet, 
Alaska." 

This  pipe,  which  is  tubular  in  form  and  of  the  very  remarkable 
length  of  266  mm.,  is  of  mottled  bluish-green  steatite,  apparently 
identical  in  character  with  that  of  which  similar  specimens  of  this 
type  are  made.  The  bowl  of  the  pipe,  which  measures  53  mm.  in 
length  and  forms  a  slight  angle  at  its  junction  with  the  stem,  is  of 
the  form  characteristic  of  pipes  of  the  Thompson  River  region.* 
Its  upper  edge  is  cut  squarely  across,  while  the  bowl  itself  is 
gouged  out  longitudinally,  in  the  process  of  which  the  wall  in  one 
place  was  broken  through.  The  bowl  is  not  circular,  varying  in 
diameter  from  18  to  20  mm. 

The  stem,  which  is  simply  an  extension  of  the  bowl,  the  two 
having  a  common  axis,  is  204  mm.  long,  circular  in  cross-section, 
and  larger  toward  its  outer  opening  than  where  it  joins  the  bowl. 

The  mouth-piece,  which  is  9  mm.  in  length  by  31  to  32  mm. 
in  diameter,  is  flat  at  the  end,  with  slightly  rounded  edges,  resembling 
in  shape  the  end  of  a  spool.  There  is  a  perforation  through  the 
flange  of  the  mouth-piece,  parallel  with  the  axis  of  the  stem,  and 
one  edge  of  the  upper  or  larger  end  of  the  hole  touches  the  stem 
(fig.  4).  This  end  of  the  perforation  enlarges  for  a  short  distance 
inward,  as  if  drilled  with  a  loose  drill-point.  From  this  enlarged 
part,  as  well  as  from  the  other  end,  the  perforation  of  the  flange 

'  See  Harlan  I.  Smith,  Archaology  of  Lytton,  British  Columbia^  Mem.  Am.  Mus. 
Nat.  Hist.,  1899,  II,  pt.  3,  pp.  154-155,  157-158;  also  Archaology  of  the  Thompson 
River  Region^  British  Columbia^  ibid.,  1900,  II,  pt.  6,  pp.  428-429. 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  8 — 3  'I'l 


34  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

becomes  constricted  to  a  point  almost  opposite  the  upper  edge  of  the 
disk-shaped  part  of  the  mouth-piece. 

The  bore  through  the  stem  of  the  pipe  is  smallest 
where  it  opens  into  the  bowl,  and  becomes  gradually 
larger  until  it  reaches  a  point  about  1 3  mm.  from  the  end, 
when  it  suddenly  enlarges,  showing  the  concentric  stria- 
tions  produced  by  the  drill.  At  the  end  of  the  stem  it  is 
9  mm.  in  diameter.  The  bore  is  not  circular,  but  varies 
from  4^  to  5  mm.  in  diameter  at  the  break  near  the 
middle  of  the  stem,  where  the  latter  is  14  to  15  mm.  in 
diameter. 

This  specimen  resembles  the  pipes  from  the  interior 
of  southern  British  Columbia,  Washington,  and  Oregon. 
A  pipe  from  Lytton,  B.  C,  shown  in  fig.  5  a^  has  a  bowl 
of  the  same  general  form,  but  varies  from  it  in  detail.  In 
the  Lytton  pipe  the  bowl  meets  the  stem  in  a  gradual 
curve,  not  in  an  obtuse  angle  at  the  point  of  junction  as 
in  the  Heye  specimen.  The  mouth-pieces,  however, 
closely  resemble  each  other,  although  that  of  the  Lytton 
pipe  has  a  somewhat  thicker  base.  The  latter,  which  was 
found  in  a  grave,  is  of  greenish  steatite ;  it  is  nicely  made 
and  well  polished. 

The  mouth-piece  of  another  pipe  from  a  grave  at  Lyt- 
ton (fig.  5^)^  also  somewhat  resembles  that  of  the  speci- 
men under  discussion ;  but  its  base  is  divided  by  an  in- 
cision and  the  upper  and  lower  portions  are  serrated. 
The  bowl  of  still  another  Lytton  pipe  (fig.  5  c)^  collected 
in  1877  by  the  late  Dr  G.  M.  Dawson,  is  almost  identical 
in  form  with  that  of  the  pipe  in  Mr  Heye*s  collection, 
having  the  rim  squarely  cut  off  and  the  same  gradual 
jTjG  ^^      curve,  but  with  a  raised  double  band  at  its  junction  with 

SteaUtepipe  the  Stem, 
from  north- 

western         Of  four  pipes  *  collected  near  Lytton  by  Lieut.  G.  T. 

America.    ~~r         i       i~i         ,         .     ,     ^     ,     ,         y  r  •      *• 

Collection  of  Reproduced  from  the  wnitx^ s  Anvueology  of  Lytfottt  op.  cit.,  fig.  103. 

George     G.  «Ibid.,  fig.  104. 

Heye,  Esq.,  »Ibid.,  fig.  in. 

o  f     N  c  w  4  American  Mtisemn  of  Natural  History,  cat.  nos.  16.  i— 120  to  16.  i— 

(Cat    no!  '^^»  ^^^  '^' I — ^^*    These  are  to  be  described  in  detail  and  illustrated  in 

4686.)     ^.  the  writer's  Supplementary  Notes  on  the  Archaology  of  Lytion  (MS. ). 


smith] 


A  REMARKABLE  PIPE 


35 


Emmons,  U.  S.  N.,  the  first  two  and  the  last  have  bowls  of  the  same 
shape,  while  the  third  has  seemingly  been  changed  from  the  usual 
form  bybeing  ground  down  after  having  been  broken.    The  rims  of 


w 


Fic.  5-  —  Pip«  from  British  ColumbiB.  yi.  a,  Of  slealite,  from  Lytlon  (Am.  Mii». 
Nat.  Hist.,  cat.  do.  16-3083).  J,  Of  steatite  or  allied  material,  from  Lyttno  ;  collected 
bjr  C.  Hill-Tout  (from  a  photograph  of  the  specimen  in  the  museum  of  the  Geological 
Survey  of  CaDada).  r.  Of  stCBlite  or  allied  malerial,  from  LyttoD  (from  a  photc^raph  of 
the  specimen  in  the  museum  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  Canada),  t/.  Of  steatite,  from 
Kamloops  (Am.  Mus.  Nal.  Hist.,  cat.  no.  16-2519). 

all  are  more  or  less  squarely  cut  across.  The  first  specimen  has  a 
somewhat  cylindrical  mouth-piece,  the  second  a  cone-shaped  one, 
and  the  fourth  a  mouth-piece  more  or  less  specialized  from  the  cone 
and  decorated  with  incised  lines.  In  the  mouth-piece  of  each  of 
these  specimens  the  bore  becomes  suddenly  constricted  from  the 
outer  opening  to  the  smaller  bore  of  the  stem. 

The  bowls  of  the  pipes  from  Kamloops,  B.  C.  (figs.  5 1/  and  6),' 
also  resemble  that  of  the  Heye  pipe  in  having  the  same  peculiar 
outline  and  slight  angle  where  the  stem  is  met.     The  bowl   of  the 

'Reproduced  from  Smith,  Arthaology  of  ikc  Thompson  Rivfr  Region,  op.  cit. ,  figs. 

374«.  374'>. 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

first  of  these  also  has  the  rim  cut  squarely  across  and 
a  small  cylindrical  mouth-piece.  The  stem  of  the 
second  has  been  broken  through  in  the  making,  as  in 
the  bowl  of  the  Heye  pipe. 

The  mouth-piece  of  a  fragment  of  a  pipe  from 
Umatilla,  Oregon  (fig.  jd),  is  almost  identical  with 
that  of  the  Heye  pipe,  showing  the  same  form  and 
having  a  perforation  in  the  flange ;  but  its  base  is 
shorter  and  less  pronounced.  The  stem  differs  from 
that  of  the  Heye  pipe  in  that  it  is  largest  toward  the 
bowl ;  and  the  bore  of  the  stem  instead  of  contracting 
suddenly  from  near  the  outer  opening  is  smallest  at  the 
base  and  enlarges  gradually  toward  the  bowl. 

A  short  steatite  pipe '  in  the  collection  of  Mr  W. 
H.  Spalding,  of  Ellensburg,  Washington,  which  was 

lite    pipe     found  on  Blalock  island,  near  Umatilla,  Oregon,  has  a 
g    f,'     bowl  with  the  same  gradually  curving  outline,  rim  cut 

a.    M  u  s.     squarely  oflT,  and  gouged-out  interior.     This  bowl  has 

t.  Hisu,     been  broken  through  from  the  outside  in  process  of 

■""■    '        manufacture.     The  bore  of  the  stem  is  oval  in  section 

and  is  largest  at  the  mouth-piece,  which  is  cylindrical. 

The  general  type  of  pipe  above  described  is  regarded  as  bclong- 


Flc.  7.  —  Steatite  pipes  from  northwestern  America.  ^.  a.  Fragment,  from  Um»- 
tilU,  Ore.  (from  a  sketch  of  the  original  in  possesuoo  or  D.  W.  Owen  of  Kenneirick, 
Wash.),  b.  Fragment  fbond  under  >  shell-heap  al  Fort  Hammond,  B,  C.  (Am.  Mus. 
NaL  Hist.,  cat.  no.  16-4115).  ■".  F"""  "  shell-heap  near  Sidney,  B.  C.  (drawn  from 
the  original  now  ia  possession  of  C.  F.  Newcombe,  Victoria,  B.  C. ).  d.  From  a  sbell- 
heap  near  North  Saanich,  B.  C.  [Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  cat.  no.  16-7306). 
"Am.  Mus.  Nat  Hist.,  neg.  cat.  no.  44,  504  (6-5). 


SMITH]  A  REMARKABLE  PIPE  37 

ing  to  the  plateau  region  of  southern  British  Columbia,  Washington, 
and  Oregon ;  and  as  many  of  the  pipes  of  this  region,  although  vary- 
ing greatly  in  length,  have  special  as  well  as  general  points  in  com- 
mon with  those  of  the  specimen  in  Mr  Heye's  collection,  it  seems 
highly  probable  that  the  latter  came  from  the  same  section  rather 
than  from  Cook's  inlet,  Alaska.  However,  this  general  type  of 
tubular  steatite  pipe  reached  the  coast  at  Port  Hammond  and  in  the 
vicinity  of  North  Saanich,  British  Columbia. 

A  fragment  of  a  pipe  bowl  (fig.  7^),*  one  of  several  from  Port 
Hammond,  has  a  flat  rim,  but  the  bowl  meets  the  stem  in  a 
gradual  curve.  The  specimen  shown  in  fig.  7^  has  a  bowl  of 
typical  form,  curving  gradually  into  the  stem,  with  the  rim  cut 
squarely  across. 

The  bowl  of  the  pipe  from  North  Saanich  (fig.  ydy  flares  more 
than  that  of  any  other  specimen  that  has  been  observed ;  otherwise  it 
is  of  the  usual  shape.  An  angle  occurs  at  the  junction  of  the  bowl 
and  the  stem.     The  bore  of  the  stem  is  ovoid  in  section. 

Another  pipe  *  of  this  type  was  found  at  Fulford  Harbour,  British 
Columbia,  the  most  northerly  point  on  the  coast  that  has  produced 
pipes  of  this  sort,  unless  the  Heye  pipe  actually  came  from  Alaska. 
The  bowl  of  the  Fulford  Harbour  specimen  is  separated  from  the 
stem  by  an  incised  line. 

On  the  coast  no  pipes  with  flaring  mouth-pieces  are  known  to 
have  been  found.  All  the  specimens  from  the  coastal  region  are 
short  and  of  nearly  the  same  length. 

The  Heye  pipe  is  the  longest  of  its  kind  that  has  ever  been 
brought  to  the  writer's  notice.  In  this  respect  it  resembles  most 
nearly  the  pipes  of  the  interior,  and  differs  extremely  from  those  of 
the  coast ;  moreover,  the  material  is  apparently  identical  with  that 
of  which  all  other  known  specimens  of  this  general  type  are  made. 
Pipes  of  this  form  are  not  known  to  have  been  found  in  the  vicinity 

'  Reproduced  from  Harlan  I.  Smith,  Shell  Heaps  of  the  Lower  Fraser  River, 
British  Columbia^  Mem.  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  1903,  iv,  pt.  4,  fig.  48^7. 

'  Sec  Archaology  of  the  Thompson  River  Region ,  op.  cit. ,  p.  429  ;  Shell  Heaps, 
op.  cit.,  p.  181 ;  the  writer's  Archaology  of  Pugei  Sound,  MS. 

» Ibid. 

*Scc  Shell-heaps,  op.  cit.,  p.  181  ;  figured  and  described  at  length  in  Archaology 
of  Puget  Sound,  MS. 


38  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

of  Cook's  inlet,  or  indeed  from  elsewhere  in  Alaska.  Ellamar  lies 
on  the  boundary  between  the  Eskimo  and  the  Athapascan  areas,  the 
Eskimo  living  to  the  west  and  the  Athapascan  tribes  to  the  east. 
According  to  Lieutenant  Emmons  the  nearest  native  village  is  about 
two  miles  from  Ellamar. 

If  the  dealer  were  correctly  informed  and  the  pipe  actually  came 
from  Ellamar,  it  may  have  been  a  fugitive  piece,  taken  to  the  coast  in 
early  times  for  trade  or  as  a  gift.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  event- 
ually shown  that  the  pipe  is  one  of  a  type  common  in  that  locality, 
the  fact  will  be  remarkable  indeed,  as  it  is  of  a  form  now  believed 
to  be  peculiar  to  the  interior  plateau  region  of  Oregon,  Washington, 
and  southern  British  Columbia. 

American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
New  York  City. 


NOTES   ON  THE  PIMA   OF  ARIZONA 

By  ales  HRDLICKA 
Introduction 

The  Pima^  are  a  tribe  of  special  interest  to  anthropologists,  since 
physical  examination  shows  them  to  be  practically  identical  in  type 
with  the  ancient  cliff-dwellers  of  southern  Utah  and  with  many  of 
the  eastern  Algonquian  tribes.  They  are  physically  related  to  the 
Papago,  the  Yaqui,  and  especially  to  the  Tarahumare,  but  they 
differ  from  every  other  tribe  of  Arizona  and  northern  Mexico. 

The  Pima  are  divided  in  two  groups  —  those  residing  in  the 
valley  of  the  Rio  Gila  in  southern  Arizona,  and  those  known  as 
Lower  Pima,  or  Pimas  Bajos  (Nevome),  about  Ures  on  the  Rio 
Sonora  and  on  the  upper  waters  of  the  Rio  Yaqui.  These  two 
groups  hold  no  communication,  and  only  a  few  individuals  of 
each  know  of  the  existence  of  the  other.  Antonio  Azul,  the  old 
chief  of  the  Pima  of  Sacaton,  on  the  Gila,  preserves  a  tradition  that 
the  two  branches  once  lived  as  a  single  tribal  group  in  Sonora. 

The  Arizona  Pima  number  nearly  4,000.  In  the  official  census 
the  Pima  of  Mexico  are  not  enumerated  separately,  but  they  no 
doubt  still  number  several  hundred  pure-bloods.  Both  groups  have 
made  considerable  advance  toward  civilization. 

The  settlements  of  the  Arizona  Pima,  who  alone  will  here  be 
treated,  extend  along  the  Gila  from  a  little  west  of  Casa  Grande 
ruin,  principally  on  the  south  side  of  the  river,  to  the  territory  of 
the  Maricopa.  Their  principal  villages,  from  the  east  westward,  are 
Black  water,  Santa  Ana,  Sacaton,  Sweetwater,  and  the  Casa  Blanca 
group.  Smaller  contingents  live  on  the  Salt  River  reservation  and 
about  Lehi,  north  of  the  Gila  valley.  A  branch  of  the  Pima,  by 
some  spoken  of  as  belonging  to  the  Papago,  but  claimed  by  the 
Pima  as  a  part  of  their  tribe,  is  popularly  known  as  "  Quarities." 

'  Visited  in  1902  under  the  auspices  of  the  Hyde  Expedition  for  the  American 
Museum  of  Natural  History,  and  in  1905  for  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology.  The 
accompanying  illustrations  arc  from  negatives  made  by  the  writer  and  now  in  the  Amer- 
ican Museum  of  Natural  History. 

39 


40  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

These  people  live  in  a  village  situated  two  miles  south  of  Casa 
Grande  station  on  the  Southern  Pacific  railroad.  Their  true  name 
is  Kwohatk,  which,  according  to  the  Pima,  was  originally  the  name 
of  their  village.  With  one  or  two  exceptions  the  Kwohatk  children 
examined  by  the  writer  at  the  Sacaton  school  exhibited  the  same 
measurements  and  features  as  the  Pima. 

Present  Condition 

Primarily  the  Pima  are  agriculturists,  but  they  also  eke  out  a 
livelihood  by  selling  wood  and  in  working  for  the  whites.  They  say 
that  formerly  they  hunted,  and  fished  and  gathered  many  clams  in 
the  Gila,  but  owing  to  the  settlement  of  the  adjacent  country,  which 
began  about  twenty-five  years  ago,  and  the  consequent  diversion  of 
the  water  for  irrigation  farther  up  the  river,  most  of  the  land  and 
aquatic  animals  and  birds,  as  well  as  the  clams,  have  disappeared. 
Except  a  few  of  the  men  who  prefer  to  wear  long  hair,  and  the  old 
men  who,  when  warm,  divest  themselves  of  all  except  the  breech- 
cloth,  the  Pima  now  dress  like  their  white  neighbors.  Many,  es- 
pecially at  Sacaton,  are  almost  or  wholly  civilized,  and  a  few  of  the 
youth  are  well  educated;  indeed,  the  efficient  young  teacher  in 
charge  of  the  Casa  Blanca  day-school  is  a  full-blood  Pima.  The 
majority  of  the  dwellings  at  Sacaton  compare  very  favorably,  both 
inside  and  out,  with  those  of  white  people  of  the  same  rela- 
tive level.  In  religion  many  of  the  Pima  are  adherents  of  the 
Protestant  or  the  Catholic  faith.  Nevertheless,  there  are  still,  par- 
ticularly in  the  group  of  villages  about  Casa  Blanca,  a  number  of 
old  Indians  who  care  little  for  the  ways  and  religion  of  the  white 
man  and  who  preserve  many  traditions  as  well  as  a  few  old  native 
observances.  The  old  men  of  the  Casa  Blanca  villages  have  formed 
a  society  of  "oldtimers,"  and  often  meet  to  recount  the  deeds  of 
their  younger  days  and  to  repeat  traditions.  Here,  no  doubt,  still 
exists  a  mine  of  information  for  the  ethnologist. 

The  Pima  still  preserve  traces  of  their  original  form  of  govern- 
ment in  that  each  of  the  larger  villages  acknowledges  a  chief.  The 
chief  at  Sacaton  is  Antonio  Azul ;  the  one  at  Casa  Blanca  is  known 
by  the  whites  as  Henry.  In  the  family  of  Antonio,  chieftainship 
has  been  hereditary,  and  both  he  and  his  sister  Mary,  a  midwife  in 


HRDLICKA]  NOTES  ON  THE  PIMA  OF  ARIZONA  4! 

the  tribe,  know  much  of  the  tribe's  history  and  traditions.  The 
role  of  the  chiefs  is  that  of  advisers,  representatives,  and  to  a  cer- 
tain extent  judges  of  the  people ;  but  in  matters  of  importance,  and 
sometimes  in  ordinary  affairs,  the  chief  calls  an  assembly  of  the  men 
in  his  village,  and  with  them  the  decision  rests.  In  their  dealings 
with  the  tribe  the  chiefs  are  recognized  by  the  United  States 
authorities. 

Of  the  native  religion,  notwithstanding  early  and  persistent  mis- 
sionary efforts,  first  by  the  Jesuits,  later  by  the  Franciscans,  traces 
still  remain  with  some  of  the  old  people.  In  the  small  sierra  north 
of  Santa  Ana  is  a  cave  to  which,  I  was  assured  by  the  Indians,  some 
of  the  elders  yet  go  for  prayer  and  offering.  Pottery,  grain,  and 
other  articles  are  still  sometimes  buried  with  the  dead.  A  few  of 
the  old  men  about  Casa  Blanca  at  least  occasionally  assume  the 
role  of  shamans.  During  the  long  dry  spell  which  ended  in  the 
spring  of  1905  they  resorted  to  the  ceremony  of  "  rain -calling,"  a 
part  of  the  preparation  for  which  consisted  in  obtaining  some  sticks 
of  kauf'ku-tds,  hard- wood  {Sarcobatus  vermiculatus)^  which  were 
cleaned  and  notched  on  one  side ;  they  were  then  rubbed  along  the 
notched  portion  with  a  smaller  plain  stick  during  incantations  to  the 
rain  deities. 

The  people  have  no  knowledge  or  understanding  of  the  numer- 
ous petroglyphs  found  in  their  country,  but  they  sometimes  copy  in 
their  basketry  designs  the  decoration  of  the  ancient  pottery  found 
in  their  neighborhood.  The  swastica,  which  has  been  adopted  by 
one  of  the  Pima  of  Sacaton  as  a  brand,  represents,  according  to 
Antonio  Azul,  the  talons  of  a  hawk.  This  figure  was  formerly  one 
of  the  tribal  totems  and  was  painted  on  war  shields. 

Dwellings 

The  habitations  of  the  Pima  are  of  three  kinds:  (i)  a  hemi- 
spherical dwelling  of  sticks,  brush,  and  mud,  known  as  ki  (pi.  ix,  4); 
(2)  a  quadrilateral,  flat-roofed  structure  of  poles,  sticks,  and  brush, 
with  a  mud  roof  and  sometimes  mud-covered  walls,  used  chiefly  as 
store-houses,  but  occasionally  as  dwellings  (pi.  ix,  3);  (3)  an  adobe 
house,  patterned  after  that  of  the  whites  (shown  in  the  distance  in 

pi.  VIII,  3). 


42  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  well-made  dome -shaped  dwellings,  which  are  the  favorite 
abodes  of  these  people,  are  circular  or  oval  in  ground-plan,  and  gen- 
erally larger  than  similar  structures  built  by  the  Papago  or  the 
Apache  khuva.  The  walls  consist  of  upright  ribs,  strengthened 
with  three,  four,  or  five  circles  of  sticks  fastened  externally.  The 
intervals  between  the  uprights  are  filled  with  arrow-weed  or  brush 
and  the  whole  is  then  covered  externally  with  mud.  The  simple 
fireplace  is  in  the  middle  of  the  floor,  and  a  small  hole  is  left  in  the 
top  of  the  hut  for  the  escape  of  the  smoke.  A  small,  low  opening 
on  one  side  serves  as  the  door.  This  form  of  dwelling,  which  is 
still  much  in  evidence  over  the  western  part  of  the  Pima  reservation, 
is  cool  and  somber  in  the  day  and  warm  at  night ;  but  as  it  is  defi- 
cient in  ventilation,  in  the  morning  the  air  is  always  more  or  less 
foul.  About  Sacaton  the  hemispherical  dwelling  has  been  super- 
seded by  adobe  and  other  modem  houses.  Accompanying  this 
dome-shaped  lodge  are  almost  always  one  or  two  well -constructed 
and  well-ventilated,  quadrilateral,  flat-roofed  store-houses,  and  often 
an  open  shed  for  culinary  and  other  domestic  purposes  (pi.  viii,  4 ; 
pi.  IX,  4).  On  the  roof  of  the  store-house  is  often  fastened  a  cyl- 
indrical, roofed  grain  receptacle,  made  chiefly  of  straw  and  mud, 
adding  much  to  the  picturesqueness  of  the  settlement.  The  store- 
house, which  is  often  spacious,  serves  for  the  safe-keeping  of  com, 
squashes,  and  other  commodities,  and  occasionally  it  is  used  also 
as  a  kitchen.  The  dwelling,  shed,  and  store-house  form  a  charac- 
teristic and  always  more  or  less  isolated  group,  and  a  straggling 
aggregation  of  these  constitutes  a  Pima  village.  An  object  com- 
monly to  be  seen  in  front  of  or  near  a  Pima  dwelling  is  a  post, 
planted  in  the  ground,  with  a  three-branched  upper  end  for  holding 
a  large  water  jar.  The  ceilings  of  the  flat- roofed  houses,  including 
the  adobe  dwellings,  are  usually  made  of  the  flat  ribs  of  the  saguaro, 
or  g^ant  cactus. 

Manufactures 

Basketry,  —  The  two  chief  manufactures  of  the  Pima  women  are 
basketry  and  pottery.  From  stout  coils  of  straw  or  grass  the  women 
make  great  jar-like  basket  receptacles  for  grain ;  and  from  a  va- 
riety of  splints  and  weeds  the  ordinary  coiled  olla-shaped  baskets, 
concave  plaques,  and  a  few  entirely  flat  pieces  are  fashioned.     The 


hrducka]  notes  on  THE  PIMA  OF  ARIZONA  43 

plaques  (pi.  viii,  i,  3)  are  used  for  grain,  corn-meal,  etc ;  the  now 
rare  flat,  circular  pieces  for  tortillas ;  while  the  jar-shaped  and  other 
baskets  are  made  principally  for  sale. 

The  materials  used  are  willow  (ci-uhl)  or  cotton  wood  (a-uh-pd) 
splints,  with  cat-tail  {u-t'/twak)  reeds  for  the  coils.  In  workmanship 
and  decoration  the  baskets  range  from  ordinary  to  really  artistic. 
The  design,  now  always  in  black  and  usually  in  geometric  figures,  is 
effected  by  the  use  of  catsclaw  {yi-huk).  To  the  geometric  figures 
are  occasionally  added  grotesque  representations  of  animals,  such  as 
the  horse,  coyote,  lizard,  cock,  etc.  The  ii-t-hwak  is  generally  split 
with  the  teeth,  which  are  also  employed  in  making  the  splints.  In 
preparing  the  catsclaw  the  women  wet  the  osier,  split  the  end  with 
a  knife,  take  the  point  of  the  splint  between  the  teeth,  and  then  give 
repeated  short  pulls  as  the  catsclaw  is  held  in  the  right  hand  while 
the  splint  is  being  bent  over  the  index  finger  of  the  left. 

Willow  and  cottonwood  fibers  are  preserved  in  coils,  a  large 
number  of  which  are  usually  bound  together.  The  catsclaw  is 
cultivated  by  the  Pima  in  their  melon  patches,  and  is  occasionally 
made  up  into  great  balls  for  preservation  until  needed.  Formerly 
some  of  the  plaques  designed  for  domestic  use  were  made  water- 
tight by  coating  the  inside  with  melted  greasewood  gum,  known  as 
uh-ra-pe-tek,  but  this  is  now  rarely  done.*  The  Pima  women  gen- 
erally deny  that  their  basket  designs  have  now  any  known  symbolic 
meaning. 

Pottery, — The  Pima  women  make  earthenware  jars  (pi.  viii,  i, 
3)  and  bowls  in  a  variety  of  shapes  and  sizes  for  domestic  purposes. 
Some  of  this  ware  is  decorated  chiefly  in  painted  geometrical  figures. 
A  few  of  the  jars  have  a  capacity  of  three  gallons.  The  base  of  the 
jars  is  generally  convex.  In  recent  years,  especially  among  the  more 
civilized  Pima,  the  pottery  industry  has  retrograded,  many  of  the 
vessels  which  they  now  use  being  manufactured  by  the  Kwohatk 
and  the  Papago.  In  one  Pima  dwelling  the  writer  found  a  Chinese 
vessel. 

In  a  Papago  settlement,  near  Sacaton,  a  woman  was  seen  to 
pour  into  a  small  jar  that  she  had  just  fired,  while  the  vessel  was 
still  nearly  red  hot,  a  thin  mixture  of  water  and  flour,  and  also  to 

1  For  a  general  description  of  Pima  basketry,  with  illustrations,  see  Mason,  Aborig- 
inal American  Basketry,  Report  U,  S.  National  Museum  for  jqo2y  Washington,  1409. 


44  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

sprinkle  the  same  paste  over  the  surface.  This,  she  said,  was  to 
seal  the  pores  of  the  vessel,  making  it  impervious.  The  Pima 
practise  the  same  custom.  For  mending  pots  the  Pima  pound 
greasewood  gum  (uh-ra-pe-tek)  between  two  stones,  heating  the 
mass  until  liquefied  and  black,  and  then  applying  it  to  the  joints 
that  are  to  be  united.  This  cement  is  said  to  be  effectual  for  some 
time.  Some  of  the  paints  used  by  the  Pima  women  for  decorating 
pottery  are  of  vegetal  origin  (e.  g.,  mesquite  gum),  which  accounts 
for  the  poor  preservation  of  the  figures  on  many  of  their  vessels. 

Weaving.  —  The  only  weaving  now  done  by  the  Pima  is  the 
netted  part  of  a  carrying  basket,  or  kihu^  which  is  stretched  over 
four  sticks,  tied  near  one  end  and  diverging  at  the  other  (pi.  viii,  2). 
This  carry-all  is  common  to  the  Pima  and  Papago,  as  well  as  to  other 
tribes  of  northwestern  Mexico  as  far  as  the  Cora  in  the  Territory  of 
Tepic.     There  is  no  native  embroidery  or  beadwork. 

Wooden  Utensils,  —  Of  wooden  utensils  of  native  origin  but  three 
are  now  employed  —  a  mortar  and  pestle,  and  a  rude  spatula  with 
a  small  handle  used  for  smoothing  pottery  (pi.  viii,  i).  The  mor- 
tar varies  in  size  and  is  usually  of  cottonwood.  The  pestle  is  of 
mesquite ;  it  ranges  in  length  from  3  to  3  j4  feet,  and  the  pounding 
is  done  with  the  heavier  end.  The  woman  seen  in  plate  viii,  i, 
is  using  a  stone  pestle. 

Cradles,  —  The  Pima  use  two  forms  of  cradles.  One,  the  rarer, 
is  like  that  of  the  Apache  and  Maricopa,  and  is  probably  derived 
from  the  latter.  The  other  consists  of  a  swing  made  by  suspending 
two  long  ropes  from  the  roof,  their  ends  being  about  2  J^  or  3  feet 
from  the  ground.  About  midway  the  ropes  are  separated  by 
two  sticks,  about  18  inches  long,  fastened  between  them.  A  cloth 
is  attached  to  the  ropes  where  thus  separated  and  allowed  to  form 
a  sort  of  hammock  about  15  inches  deep  ;  into  this  is  placed  an  im- 
provised cushion  and  perhaps  a  small  blanket.  The  child  is  placed 
in  this  suspended  cradle,  the  front  and  back  are  fastened  together  to 
prevent  the  baby  from  slipping  out,  and  by  means  of  a  string  tied  to 
one  of  the  ropes  the  little  one  is  lulled  to  sleep.  This  appliance, 
which  is  probably  of  Spanish  origin,  is  used  also  by  some  of  the 
Papago. 

Musical  Instrument, — The  only  native  musical  instrument  heard 
of  was  a  sort  of  a  compound  flute,  or  Pan's  pipes,  now  very  rare, 


..P5 


m 


HRDUCKA]  NOTES  ON  THE  PIMA  OF  ARIZONA  45 

made  of  a  number  of  reed  whistles,  diiTering  in  length,  placed  side 

by  side. 

Customs 

Until  within  recent  years  the  Pima  had  many  ceremonial  obser- 
vances, songs,  games,  etc.,  but  these  have  been  largely  abandoned. 

Unlike  the  Apache,  Navaho,  and  some  other  southwestern 
tribes,  these  people  eat  fish,  ducks,  chickens,  and  indeed  every- 
thing obtainable  that  enters  into  the  dietary  of  the  white  man.  The 
only  native  drink,  now  rarely  made,  is  a  wine  manufactured  from 
the  juice  of  the  saguaro,  or  giant  cactus. 

The  older  women  have  tattooed  lines  on  the  chin,  and  frequently 
a  single  line  from  the  external  angle  of  each  eye  backward.  The 
young  neither  tattoo  nor  paint. 

The  hair  of  the  women,  who  go  bareheaded  more  often  than 
the  men,  from  exposure  to  the  sun  becomes  superficially  of  a  more 
or  less  rusty  color.  To  overcome  this  blemish  they  dye  their  hair 
with  the  juice  of  the  mesquite,  mixing  this  substance,  which  is  ob- 
tained by  boiling  the  inspissated  exudation  found  especially  on  old 
trees,  with  fine  river  mud.  This  paste  is  applied  for  one  or  two 
nights  and  washed  off  in  the  morning,  and  the  treatment  causes  the 
hair  to  remain  beautifully  black  and  glossy  for  a  long  time. 

When  a  man  dies  the  rafters  of  his  house  are  taken  down  and 
neatly  arranged  over  his  grave  (pi.  ix,  2),  which  is  so  dug  as  to  be 
spacious  at  the  base  and  small  at  the  top.  Some  of  the  Pima  still 
deposit  with  the  body,  as  before  mentioned,  various  domestic  articles. 

The  younger  element  in  the  tribe  has  enthusiastically  adopted 
the  outdoor  games  of  the  whites,  particularly  foot-ball.  Baseball 
was  also  in  favor  until  one  of  the  players  was  killed  by  a  batted  ball. 
The  larger  villages  have  each  a  creditable  foot-ball  team  trained 
by  natives  who  have  been  educated  in  the  higher  Indian  schools. 

Of  native  out-door  games  the  Pima  and  Maricopa  until  recently 
played  each  fall  a  great  ball-kicking  game  called  by  the  Pima 
wi'Ce-ta  and  by  the  Maricopa  hu-nd-wak.  The  game  is  still  in 
vogue  among  the  Papago,  but  the  Pima  and  Maricopa  have  aban- 
doned it,  believing  that  it  was  not  viewed  with  favor  by  the  Indian 
department.  The  game  was  described  as  follows:  Several  balls 
{ron-dul)  were  made  from  uh-ra-pe-tek,  the  gum  that  develops  from 
a  parasitic  attack  on  the  grease-wood  (Hj-koh),     Occasionally  the 


46  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

balls  consisted  of  a  core  of  wood  covered  with  gum ;  and  in  ancient 
times  the  core  was  of  stone,  but  smaller.  A  specimen  of  the  latter 
sort  was  obtained  by  the  writer  at  the  Pima  village  of  Casa  Blanca. 
Each  of  two  villages  selected  a  runner,  expert  in  the  game,  who  was 
accompanied  by  twenty  or  thirty  of  his  villagers  on  horseback. 
The  course  usually  extended  from  one  village  to  another,  a  distance 
of  six  to  ten  miles.  Starting  at  one  of  the  villages,  each  runner  laid 
his  ball  on  the  ground,  then  picked  it  up  upon  the  dorsum  of  the 
bare  foot,  and  with  the  same  motion  threw  it  forward  as  far  as  possi- 
ble, at  the  same  instant  starting  to  run.  When  the  ball  was  reached, 
it  was  again  picked  up  with  the  foot  and  thrown,  and  this  operation 
was  repeated  as  rapidly  as  possible  until  the  goal  was  reached,  he 
whose  ball  reached  the  goal  first  winning  the  contest.  The  horse- 
men followed  or  accompanied  the  players,  those  of  the  racer  in  the 
lead  aiming  to  confuse  and  to  retard  the  progress  of  his  opponent 
by  causing  their  horses  to  raise  as  much  dust  as  possible.  Each 
party  also  aided  their  runner  by  telling  him  where  his  ball  had 
fallen  or  rolled.  As  the  course  was  in  no  way  prepared  for  the 
contest,  it  often  happened  that  a  ball  would  roll  into  the  brush,  and 
only  the  watchfulness  of  the  Norsemen  prevented  it  from  becoming 
difficult  to  find  or  even  entirely  lost.  A  player  was  never  permitted 
to  touch  the  ball  with  his  hands.  If  it  fell  into  a  hole  and  could 
not  be  recovered,  or  was  lost  and  could  not  be  found  for  a  given 
length  of  time,  the  racer  was  furnished  with  another.  It  is  safd  that 
the  most  expert  players  could  cast  the  ball  with  the  foot  and  run 
so  fast  to  overtake  it  that  it  was  necessary  for  the  accompanying 
horsemen  to  keep  up  a  constant  gallop.  Contestants  in  this  game 
would  falter  only  if  the  ball  were  lost.  The  winner  was  usually 
rewarded  only  by  the  honor  that  success  brought  to  him  and  his 
villagers,  but  there  was  much  betting  on  the  result  between  the 
people  of  the  two  contesting  settlements.  The  Papago  of  southern 
Arizona  played  this  game,  during  one  of  their  celebrations,  as  late 
as  March,  1905. 

The  medical  practices  and  other  particulars  concerning  the  Pima 
will  be  published  in  a  forthcoming  bulletin  of  the  Bureau  of  Ameri- 
can Ethnology. 

United  States  National  Museum, 
Washington,  D.  C. 


■\ 


TRADITIONS  OF  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES 
AND  VOLCANIC  ERUPTIONS  IN  WESTERN 

SOUTH  AMERICA 

By  ADOLPH  F.  BANDELIER 

The  information  contained  in  this  paper  is  limited  and  fragmen- 
tary. Colombia,  Ecuador,  and  Chile  were  necessarily  included  in 
the  writer's  documentary  investigations,  but  as  he  did  not  visit  these 
countries,  what  is  said  about  them  is  incomplete.  Nor  can  the  sub- 
ject be  treated  from  the  standpoint  of  physiography,  through  lack  of 
specific  knowledge,  hence  the  paper  will  be  devoted  to  a  record  of  the 
Indian  traditions  preserved  from  the  time  of  the  earliest  Spanish 
occupancy  or  by  modem  investigators,  with  an  attempt  to  determine 
in  what  degree  they  may  be  accepted  as  purely  primitive  lore. 

In  Colombia,  the  most  northerly  country  of  South  America  on 
the  Pacific  coast,  traditions  regarding  a  mythical  personage,  or  per- 
sonages, called  Bochica,  Nemquetheba,  and  Zuhe,  in  the  Muysca 
or  Chibcha  idiom  of  Bogota,  may  possibly  refer  to  violent  seismic 
disturbances  in  precolumbian  times.  The  Bishop  of  Panama,  Lucas 
Fernandez  Piedrahita  (i),  in  his  work  published  in  1688,  states  : 

**  Of  the  Bochica,  they  refer  in  particular  to  many  favors  he  conferred 
upon  them,  as  to  say,  that  through  overflows  of  the  river  Funzha,  in  which 
the  artifices  of  Huythaca  played  a  part,  the  plain  or  level  of  Bogota  had 
been  flooded,  and  the  waters  so  increased  that  the  natives  were  compelled 
to  settle  on  the  tops  of  the  highest  mountains  where  they  remained  until 
Bochica  came,  and,  striking  a  mountain  range  with  a  stick,  opened  an 
outlet  for  the  waters,  which  forthwith  left  the  level  land,  so  that  it  became 
habitable  as  before,  and  the  forces  of  the  repressed  waters  in  damaging 
and  breaking  the  rocks  was  so  great  that  they  formed  the  fall  of  Tequen- 
dama,  so  famous  as  one  of  the  wonders  of  the  world." (2) 

In  his  writings  (3)  Fray  Pedro  Simon  antedated  Piedrahita  by 
about  44  years.  He  agrees  with  him  on  certain  points,  but  attrib- 
utes the  overflow  of  the  plateau  of  Bogota  to  a  deity  which  he 

47 


48  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

calls  Chibchachum.  In  treating  of  the  origin  of  the  cult  which  the 
Muysca  or  Chibcha  oiTered  to  the  rainbow,  calling  it  Cuchauiva,  or 
Chuchauiva,  he  states  (4)  : 

**The  foundation  for  these  Indians  to  worship,  with  offerings,  the 
rainbow  Cuchauiva,  was  in  this  manner.  They  found  this,  their  reason, 
on  saying  that,  on  account  of  certain  deeds  which  they  thought  the  God 
Chibchachum  had  done  unto  them,  the  Indian  murmured  against  him, 
offending  him  secretiy  and  openly.  Chibchachum,  angered  by  it,  devised 
to  punish  them  by  overflowing  their  lands,  for  which  purpose  he  created 
or  brought  over  from  other  parts  the  two  said  rivers  of  Sopo  and  Tibito, 
through  which  the  waters  of  the  valley  increased  so  much  that  the  soil,  as 
they  say,  taking  no  pains  to  absorb  them,  a  great  portion  of  it  came  to  be 
flooded,  as  had  not  been  the  case  before  the  two  rivers  entered  the  valley.  *  * 

In  this  stress  the  Indians  appealed  to  Bochica,  sacrificing  to  him, 
whereupon  he  appeared  to  them  on  a  rainbow  with  a  golden  rod  in 
his  hand,  promising  relief.  "And  saying  this,  he  thrust  the  rod 
toward  Tequendama,  cleaving  the  rock  between  which  the  river 
now  flows ;  but  the  rod  being  slender,  it  did  not  make  an  opening 
large  enough  for  all  the  many  waters  that  accumulate  in  winter,  so 
that  it  still  somewhat  overflows.  But  after  all  the  ground  became 
free  for  planting  and  for  the  necessary  sustenance  [crops]."  (5) 
Thenceforth  they  performed  ceremonies  whenever  a  rainbow  ap- 
peared. 

Thus  far  Simon  agrees  in  substance  with  Piedrahita,  but  that 
which  follows  was  either  unknown  to  or  was  overlooked  by  the 
latter. 

**  Although  filled  with  fear  by  what  Chibchachum  afterward  gave  them 
to  understand  —  that  many  were  to  die  when  the  rainbow  would  appear 
to  them,  on  accoimt  of  the  punishment  Bochica  had  inflicted  upon  him, 
[compelling  him]  to  carry  the  whole  earth  and  sustain  it,  whereas  they 
say  it  previously  rested  on  large  timbers  [guayacanes] .  And  this  is  the 
reason  why  now  the  earth  trembles,  which  it  did  not  before:  That  as  it 
is  heavy,  when  he  shifts  it  from  one  shoulder  to  the  other  it  moves,  and 
all  of  it  shakes.'*  (6) 

The  story  about  Bochica's  opening  the  clefl  of  Tequendama 
would  hardly  deserve  attention  were  it  not  for  a  remark  by  Hum- 
boldt, who  visited  and  examined  the  site.     He  says  : 


BANDEUER]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  49 

"  The  river  narrows  much,  close  to  the  cataract  itself,  where  the  cleft, 
which  seems  to  be  the  result  of  some  earthquake,  has  only  ten  or  twelve 
meters  of  width. '  *  (7) 

If  we  place  this  observation  of  the  great  man  of  science  beside 
the  story  of  the  cause  of  earthquakes  as  related  by  Fray  Pedro 
Simon,  in  which  Chibchachum  is  converted  into  a  modem  Atlas,  the 
opening  of  the  rent  at  Tequendama  might  be  fancied  as  a  beginning 
of  seismic  disturbances  in  Colombia.  But  unfortunately  all  these 
reputed  Indian  tales  are  open  to  grave  objection  from  our  present 
point  of  view. 

In  the  first  place,  the  primitiveness  of  these  stories  is  not  yet 
established.  Simon  was  born  38  and  Piedrahita  82  years  after  the 
first  meeting  of  Europeans  with  the  natives  of  Bogota.  The  writings 
of  Gonzalo  Jimenez  de  Quesada  (8)  might  possibly  settle  the  ques- 
tion whether  or  not  the  Tequendama  story  is  untainted  aboriginal  lore. 
The  teachings  of  the  Catholic  church  rapidly  penetrated  native 
lore,  introducing  not  only  biblical  ideas,  which  the  Indian  remod- 
eled to  suit  their  primitive  notions,  but  even  fragments  of  Greek 
mythology.  The  resemblance  between  the  story  of  Atlas  and  that 
of  Chibchachum  supporting  the  earth  and  causing  it  to  quiver  is 
striking  indeed.  I  am  far  from  suggesting  relationship,  merely 
hinting  at  a  possible  infiltration  into  Indian  lore  after  1536,  such  as 
no  doubt  occurred  among  other  and  very  remote  Indian  tribes. 

None  of  the  general  works  on  Spanish  America  in  the  sixteenth 
century,  based  on  original  material,  mentions,  so  far  as  known,  tra- 
ditions of  the  Chibchas,  but  this  does  not  affect  the  possible  authen- 
ticity of  the  tales  in  question.  Oviedo,  for  instance,  wrote  his  chap- 
ters on  New  Granada  only  a  few  years  after  the  conquest,  too  early 
for  obtaining  reliable  information  on  specific  points  not  relating  to 
military  or  administrative  questions  (9).  Afterward,  it  seems,  the 
earliest  writings  on  Colombia  were  not  or  could  not  be  consulted  by 
the  painstaking  compilers  of  the  century  of  the  conquest. 

It  should  also  not  be  forgotten  that  the  above  Indian  stories, 
even  if  precolumbian  originally,  might  have  been  **  myths  of  obser- 
vation.'' Comparison  of  the  remarkable  cleft  of  Tequendama  with 
the  effects  of  earthquakes  experienced  elsewhere  may  have  led  to  an 
explanatory  tale  in  which  the  seismic  forces  became  personified. 

AM.  AMTH.,   N.   S.,  8 — 4 


so  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Transition  from  Colombia  to  Ecuador  is  through  Pasto,  situated 
near  the  confines  of  both  countries.  Of  one  of  its  well-known  vol- 
canoes Pedro  de  Cieza  relates,  in  1 5  50,  after  having  visited  it  in 

1539: 

**  Farther  on  (south  of  Popayan)  is  a  tall  range ;  on  its  summit  is  a  vol- 
cano, from  which  sometimes  much  smoke  arises  and,  in  times  past,  accord- 
ing to  what  the  natives  say,  it  broke  out  once  and  threw  out  a  great  quan- 
tity of  stones.**   (10) 

This  evidently  refers  to  some  eruption  previous  to  the  arrival  of 
the  Spaniards,  for,  had  it  occurred  subsequently,  Cieza  would  have 
recorded  the  fact.     The  term  "  stones  '*  refers  to  lapilli. 

The  tale  of  giants  having  landed,  in  precolombian  time,  at  Punta 
Santa  Elena,  west  of  Guayaquil,  has  been  discussed  in  a  paper  pre- 
viously publishedin  this  journal,'  and  I  return  to  the  subject  because 
of  the  report  of  Agustin  de  2^rate  on  the  manner  in  which  the 
story  became  confirmed  in  the  eyes  of  the  Spaniards,  and  for  the 
reason  that  a  somewhat  different  version  of  the  tale  has  been  ob- 
tained subsequent  to  its  publication. 

Zarate,  who  was  an  administrative  officer  of  high  rank,  went  to 
Peru  in  1543  (n).  My  translation  of  his  statements  not  being 
literal,  I  give  the  original  text  in  a  note  (12).     He  says : 

**  Withal,  what  the  Indians  told  about  these  giants  was  not  fully  be- 
lieved until,  in  the  year  1543,  when  the  captain  Juan  de  Olmos,  a  native  of 
Trujillo,  was  lieutenant  governor  at  Puerto  Viejo,  he  caused  excavations 
to  be  made  in  the  valley,  having  heard  of  these  matters.  They  found 
ribs  and  bones  so  large  that,  if  the  heads  had  not  appeared  at  the  same 
time  it  would  not  have  seemed  credible  [i.  e.,  that  the  remains  were] 
of  human  beings.  And  so,  after  the  investigations  were  finished  and  the 
marks  of  the  thunderbolts  seen  in  the  rocks,  what  the  Indians  said  was 
held  to  be  true ;  and  of  the  teeth  found  there,  some  were  sent  to  various 
parts  of  Peru  and  found  to  measure,  each,  three  fingers  in  width  and  four 
in  length.** 

There  is  hardly  any  doubt  concerning  the  precolumbian  origin 
of  the  tradition,  for  it  cannot  be  a  distorted  account  of  the  first  ap- 
pearance of  Spaniards  on  the  coast  of  Ecuador  in  1525  (13). 

1  American  Anthropologist^  vol.  vn,  1905,  p.  253  ct  seq. 


BANDKUER]  PRECOL  UMBIAN  EAR  THQ  UAKES  5 1 

The  large  human-like  skulls  dug  up  were  those  of  mastodons,  as 
Prof.  H.  F.  Osborne  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History 
has  informed  me,  judging  from  the  close  outward  resemblance  of  the 
skull  of  the  elephant  with  that  of  man.  Hence  the  statement  of 
2^rate  has  also  the  merit  of  being  the  earliest  mention  of  fossil 
remains  in  Ecuador  thus  far  known.  Pedro  Gutierrez  de  Santa 
Clara  was  a  soldier  of  the  same  sort  as  Cieza,  tliat  is,  he  not  only 
observed  and  inquired,  but  recorded  his  observations  and  the  results 
of  his  investigations  very  carefully.  He  wrote  what  is  now  being 
published  in  five  volumes,  embodying  a  detailed  account  of  the  civil 
wars  in  Peru,  from  1 544  to  1 548,  of  which  he  was  an  eye-witness, 
as  well  as  much  valuable  material  on  the  manners,  customs,  and 
traditions  of  the  aborigines.  He  appears  to  have  been  an  honest 
recorder,  but,  like  Cieza,  not  a  critical  one  —  a  consequence  of  the 
times.  His  version  of  the  "giant"  story  is  too  long  to  be  given 
here,  except  those  parts  that  diverge  from  the  texts  of  Cieza  and 
Zarate ;  and  even  then  only  in  a  condensed  or  synoptic  form. 

Gutierrez  places  the  arrival  of  the  giants  in  the  time  of  the  Inca 
war-chief  Tupac  Yupanqui,  that  is,  in  the  second  half  of  the  fifteenth 
century.  They  arrived  on  the  coast  of  Ecuador  in  "  barks  or  rafts 
of  great  size  made  of  dry  timber  and  canes,  propelled  by  lateen  sails, 
of  triangular  shape,  and  from  the  direction  of  the  Moluccas  or  of 
the  Straits  of  Magellan."  They  at  once  began  their  depredations. 
The  natives  threatened  them  with  the  power  of  the  Incas,  and  they 
settled  peaceably,  out  of  fear  of  the  great  might  the  natives  repre- 
sented the  Inca  to  have  (14).  For  the  remainder  of  the  tale  Gut- 
ierrez is  fairly  in  agreement  with  his  predecessors.  The  immoral 
customs,  the  wells  cut  into  the  rock,  the  destruction  of  the  monsters 
by  some  meteoric  (or  volcanic?)  phenomenon,  are  told  in  the  same 
manner  as  by  Zarate  and  Cieza.  But  he  says  also  that  Francisco 
Pizarro  saw  the  gigantic  bones  of  mastodons  which  were  taken  for 
those  of  human  beings,  and  that  similar  ones  were  discovered  in  the 
valley  of  Trujillo  in  Peru  (15). 

The  approximate  date  of  the  arrival  of  the  giants  and  the  state- 
ment that  Francisco  Pizarro  saw  the  large  fossil  remains  throw  sus- 
picion on  the  tales  of  Gutierrez.  He  went  to  Peru  about  1543 
(certainly  not  before),  and  was  probably  misled  by  the  statements  of 


52  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

persons  who  had  already  beg^n  to  "elaborate  "  the  Indian  tradition 
by  additions  and  modifications.  If  the  "  giants  "  had  arrived  on  the 
coast  during  the  time  of  Yupanqui  and  had  some  intercourse  with 
the  Inca  as  Gutierrez  asserts,  it  would  have  been  preserved  in  Inca 
lore,  which  is  or  begins  to  be  somewhat  reliable  only  from  the  time 
of  Tupac  Yupanqui  (l6)  ;  and  as  to  Pizarro  having  seen  the  fossil 
remains,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  latter  were  discovered  in 
1543,  whereas  Pizarro  was  killed  at  Lima  two  years  before.  The 
information  Gutierrez  purports  to  give  is  therefore  of  doubtful 
character. 

The  authenticity  of  the  giant  tale  as  precolumbian  Indian  lore 
is  beyond  doubt  (17),  but  its  connection  with  volcanic  phenomena  is 
by  no  means  certain.  The  "  angel  "  descending  from  the  skies  in 
fiery  garb  and  shooting  fiery  darts  at  the  monsters  would  rather 
recall  some  meteorite  of  unusual  size  and  brilliancy.  It  would  be  very 
unusual  for  fragments  of  a  siderite  to  penetrate  deeply  into  hard  rock. 
The  tradition  might,  therefore,  though  with  less  probability,  be  a  dis- 
torted version  of  some  volcanic  display  in  the  interior,  but  witnessed 
on  the  coast  or  having  taken  place  on  the  coast  itself.  Of  any  such 
disturbance  near  Puerto  Viejo  I  have  as  yet  found  no  trace,  unless 
the  asphalt  pools  of  Colonchen  be  a  survival  (i8).  Of  the  great  vol- 
canoes in  the  interior  of  Ecuador,  Tungurahua,  Sangay,  and  the 
long  extinct  Chimborazo  lie  nearest  to  Cape  Santa  Elena,  but  it 
would  be  a  matter  of  surprise,  to  say  the  least,  if  any  solid  material 
ejected  by  them  had  reached  the  foot  of  the  coast  range.  Sangay, 
which  is  the  most  active  at  present,  is  somewhat  more  than  I7,CXX) 
feet  in  altitude  and  rises  on  the  eastern  declivity  of  the  Andes  (19). 
Tungurahua  is  active  at  intervals,  and  its  elevation  is  a  few  hundred 
feet  less  than  that  of  Sangay  (20).  Chimborazo  is  by  far  the  tallest 
(20,500  feet)  and  also  the  nearest,  lying  in  a  direct  line  nearly  140 
miles  from  Cape  San  Lorenzo  (21) ;  but  while  the  fact  of  its  being 
an  extinct  volcano  has  been  lately  established  (22),  and  ashes  ejected 
by  other  mountains  have  drifted  to  much  greater  distances,  incan- 
descent rock  or  lava  is  not  known  to  have  been  thrown  such  a  dis- 
tance as  that  from  Chimborazo  to  Puerto  Viejo.  As  to  Tungurahua, 
it  lies  at  least  160  miles  inland,  while  Sangay  is  200  miles  from  the 
coast.    Unless  geological  investigation  should  reveal  other  evidences 


BANDiUER]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  53 

of  volcanic  action  than  those  now  known,  the  luminous  phenomenon 
connected  with  the  extermination  of  the  **  giants  "  must  be  attributed 
to  a  large  meteorite  in  precolumbian  times  (23). 

Cotopaxi,  the  loftiest  of  all  active  volcanoes  in  Ecuador  (19,613 
feet,  according  to  Whymper),  had  a  violent  outbreak  in  1534  (24). 
But  Cieza  speaks  of  a  volcano  which,  the  Indians  informed  him,  had 
a  formidable  eruption  in  precolumbian  times.     He  says  : 

"  There  is,  on  the  right  hand  of  this  village  of  Mulahalo,  a  volcano 
or  mouth  of  fire  which  the  Indians  say  broke  out  anciently  and  threw  up 
such  a  great  quantity  of  stones  and  ashes  that  as  far  as  the  cataclysm  ex- 
tended it  destroyed  a  great  portion  of  the  villages."  (25) 

Cotopaxi  lies  near  Mulahalo,  on  Cieza' s  left  as  he  traveled 
from  Quito.  On  the  right  rises  the  peak  of  Illiniza,  and  the  erup- 
tion might  therefore  have  been  from  the  latter.  But  Illiniza,  which 
is  17,405  feet,  according  to  Reiss  and  Stiibel  (26),  is  not  a  volcano. 
The  rock  is  volcanic,  but  no  lava  streams  have  been  observed  (27). 
The  presumption,  therefore,  is  that  Cieza,  confounding,  as  he  did  in 
another  instance  (28),  right  with  left,  really  meant  Cotopaxi. 

In  a  document  of  the  sixteenth  century,  Chimborazo  (until  lately 
regarded  as  a  bell-shaped  upheaval  of  trachyte)  is  twice  mentioned 
as  a  volcano,  and  the  following  interesting  statement  is  added  : 

**  The  Indians  say  the  volcano  of  Chimborazo  is  the  man,  and  the  one 
of  Tunguragua  the  woman,  and  that  they  communicate  [have  intercourse 
with  each  other] ,  Chimborazo  going  to  see  his  wife  and  the  wife  her  hus- 
band, and  that  they  hold  their  meetings.*'  (29) 

Of  the  present  activity  of  Tungurahua  there  is  ample  proof,  and 
the  reported  communication  between  the  two  mountains  (a  belief 
common  to  Indians  inhabiting  volcanic  districts  of  Ecuador  and 
Peru)  alludes  to  eruptions  of  Chimborazo  also,  although  at  a 
period  probably  quite  remote. 

Cayambe,  another  of  the  tallest  Ecuadorian  peaks  now  consid- 
ered extinct,  is  mentioned  in  1582  as  occasionally  active  : 

**  There  is,  in  the  district  of  my  corregimientOy  a  very  high  volcano 
and  great,  that  always  has  snow  on  high,  and  sometimes  light  issues  from 
an  opening  it  has.  It  is  called  the  volcano  of  Cayambe,  from  the  village 
at  its  foot.*'  (30) 


54  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  altitude  of  Cayambe  is  given  by  Whymper  as  1 9, 1 86  feet  (31). 

The  Pichincha  or  Rucu-Pichincha,  the  volcano  nearest  to  the  city 
of  Quito,  is  said  by  Velasco  to  have  made  its  first  eruption  in  1540. 
"  It  was  not  known  to  be  a  volcano ;  the  Indians  themselves  ig- 
nored it ;  that  eruption  must  therefore  be  regarded  as  the  first." 
(32)  Velasco  then  says  it  took  place  "  when  the  troops  of  Gon- 
zalo  Pizarro  were  still  in  the  country."  (33)  Gonzalo  Pizarro,  on  his 
famous  expedition  to  the  cinnamon  country,  arrived  at  Quito  De- 
cember I,  1540,  consequently  the  eruption  must  have  occurred  be- 
tween that  date  and  May,  1541  (34).  In  a  subsequent  passage 
Velasco  says  Gonzalo  Pizarro  was  "at  a  great  distance,"  and  that 
the    effects    "were   felt   more   where   his   troops   were"   than   at 

Quito  (35). 

But  Velasco  is  not  a  very  reliable  authority.  His  main  source 
seems  to  have  been  Gomara,  who,  while  he  never  visited  America, 
had  at  his  command  original  documents  and  held  intercourse  with 
the  most  prominent  explorers  of  the  period  as  they  returned  to 
Spain.     He  treats  of  the  occurrence  in  the  following  terms  : 

'  *  He  [Gonzalo  Pizarro]  journeyed  as  far  as  Quixos,  which  is  north 
of  Quito  [the  direction  toward  the  Atlantic,  that  is,  east^  is  meant] ,  and 
the  last  country  [to  the  east]  Guayanacapa  ruled  over.  .  .  .  Being  in 
that  country  the  earth  shook  terribly  ;  more  than  sixty  houses  fell,  and  the 
earth  opened  in  many  places.  There  were  many  thunderbolts  and  much 
lightning,  so  that  they  wondered  at  it.  There  also  fell  much  water, 
and  it  thundered  heavily."  (36) 

It  therefore  seems  that  Velasco  has  so  misconstrued  the  state- 
ments of  his  predecessor  as  to  place  a  possible  volcanic  eruption 
that  was  felt  chiefly  far  to  the  east  of  Quito,  in  the  immediate 
vicinity  of  that  settlement. 

Agustin  de  Zarate  was  well  acquainted  with  Gonzalo  Pizarro  and 
had  much  intercourse  with  him  immediately  on  his  return  to  Peru 
(37).     He  tells  substantially  the  same  story  as  Gomara  (38). 

While  these  two  authors,  who  were  not  eye-witnesses  of  events 
in  P2cuador,  place  the  seat  of  the  cataclysm  at  a  considerable 
distance  from  the  Pichincha,  and  make  no  mention  of  volcanic 
eruptions,  neither  Gonzalo  Pizarro  himself  in  his  letter  to  the  King 


BANDKUER]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  55 

dated  September  3,  1542  (39),  nor  Fray  Caspar  de  Carbajal  in  his 
narrative  of  the  journey  of  Orellana  ( 40 ),  nor  any  other  of  the 
eye-witnesses  who  were  examined  under  oath  at  various  times 
during  the  sixteenth  century  (41),  allude  to  the  phenomena 
described  by  Zarate  and  Gomara.  Pedro  de  Cieza  writes  of  tor- 
rential rains  and  the  sudden  rise  of  rivers  without  mentioning  earth- 
quakes ( 42  ).  The  account  of  the  first  eruption  of  Pichincha  in 
1 540  seems  therefore  either  to  be  due  to  a  misunderstanding  of  the 
texts  by  Velasco  or  is  an  imaginary  tale  by  that  rather  superficial 
writer. 

A  document  of  about  1571  describes  the  volcanoes  around 
Quito  in  the  following  words : 

"  The  said  city  of  Quito  has  around  it  some  heights  that  are  very  tall 
and  round,  like  wheat-stacks ;  some  of  them  are  covered  with  snow  during 
the  whole  year  and  throw  out  smoke  day  and  night  and  sometimes  great 
flames  of  fire,  especially  the  one  in  the  rear  of  Quito  toward  the  Yumdos, 
three  leagues  from  the  said  city  [of  Quito] .  Ordinarily  in  some  months 
of  the  year  it  throws  up  great  quantities  of  smoke  and  ashes,  making  a 
great  noise  in  the  large  caverns  it  has  opened  in  the  range.  Sometimes 
the  ashes  it  has  emitted  have  covered  the  ground  for  twenty-five  leagues 
around  to  more  than  a  span  in  depth,  and  cloud  the  earth  [cover  the  sky] 
by  the  thickness  of  the  smoke  and  ashes  that  come  out  of  the  said  vol- 
cano. Many  times  there  issues  so  much  water  from  it,  when  it  breaks 
out,  as  to  flood  and  bum  the  timber  through  which  passes  the  water  and 
stones  coming  from  the  volcano,  which  stones  float  on  the  water,  giving 
out  fire.*'  (43) 

The  volcano  three  leagues  from  Quito  and  toward  Yumbos  can 
be  no  other  than  the  Pichincha ;  and  we  gather  from  the  document 
quoted  that  the  mountain  was  in  almost  uninterrupted  activity  be- 
tween 1534  and  1571.  Had  the  eruption  of  1540  been  the  first 
one  known  of  that  volcano,  it  would  surely  have  been  mentioned 
in  one  or  another  of  the  numerous  Spanish  reports  of  that  period. 
It  is  therefore  probable  that  Pichincha  was  already  active  in  pre- 
columbian  time,  or  at  least  before  the  conquest. 

Whymper  alludes  to  "  traditionary  records  *'  of  eruptions  of 
Cotocachi,  but  fails  to  give  details  (44). 

One  of  the  most  authentic  traditions  respecting  volcanic  phe- 


$6  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  8.,  8,  1906 

nomena  in  Ecuador  anterior  to  the  first  appearance  of  Spaniards  is 
apparently  that  mentioned  by  Humboldt  regarding  the  collapse  of 
the  summit  of  the  Capac-urcu,  commonly  called  "El  Altar,"  in  the 
early  part  of  the  sixteenth  century.  After  eight  years  of  decided 
activity,  this  peak,  until  then  the  tallest  in  Ecuador,  collapsed,  cov- 
ering vast  expanses  with  ashes  and  pumice  (45).  This  reduction  in 
height  must  have  amounted  to  more  than  3,000  feet,  since  Reiss 
and  Stubel  (46)  have  determined  the  present  attitude  to  be  17,730. 
This  event  is  vaguely  alluded  to  by  Garcilasso  de  la  Vega. 

That  author,  basing  his  information  on  the  writings  of  Father 
Bias  Valera,  mentions  violent  earthquakes  and  volcanic  disturb- 
ances in  Ecuador  which,  according  to  Indian  tradition,  must  have 
taken  place  between  1520  and  1530.  "Besides  this,**  he  writes, 
"  there  occurred  great  earthquakes  and  quiverings  of  the  soil,  and 
although  Peru  is  visited  by  these  cataclysms,  it  was  noticed  that  the 
earthquakes  were  more  violent  than  the  ordinary  ones,  and  many 
high  peaks  crumbled."  (47) 

We  have,  therefore,  if  not  always  positive  evidence,  at  least  sig- 
nificant indications  of  the  precolumbian  activity  of  the  Ecuadorian 
volcanoes  of  Chimborazo,  Cotocachi,  Pichincha,  Cotopaxi,  Capac- 
urcu,  Tungurahua,  and  Cayambe.  Concerning  Sang^ay  we  have  no 
data,  although  it  is  not  probable  that  its  eruptions  began  at  a  recent 
period.  Of  Antisana  a  violent  eruption  is  mentioned  as  having 
taken  place  about  1620  (48),  while  Gomara  called  it  a  "volcano" 

in  1 5 S3  (49)- 

It  therefore  seems  that  volcanic  activity  in  Ecuador  was  stronger 

and  eruptions  more  frequent  in  precolumbian  times  and  in  the  six- 
teenth century  than  afterward,  or  at  least  since  the  seventeenth  cen- 
tury. The  really  active  volcanoes  in  Ecuador  at  present  are  Coto- 
paxi, Tungurahua,  and  Sangay.  The  decrease  in  activity  appears 
also  to  have  taken  place  chiefly  in  the  north  and  west  (50)  —  all 
provided,  of  course,  that  the  Indian  lore  on  which  the  inferences 
are  based  is  reliable.  I  am  fully  aware  of  the  weak  points  in  In- 
dian traditionary  information  and  of  the  obstacles  to  the  establish- 
ment of  its  authenticity  and  originality  (51). 

In  regard  to  Peru  it  must  be  premised  that,  at  the  present  time, 
there  is  but  one  active  volcano,  the  Ubimas,  in  the  department  of 


BANDiUERl  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  57 

Arequipa,  in  extreme  southern  Peru  (52).  Misti,  near  the  city  of 
Arequipa,  has  fumaroles,  and  once  or  twice  nearly  every  year  a  faint 
column  of  smoke  rises  above  the  crater.  The  frightful  eruption 
of  Omate,  a  neighbor  of  the  Ubinas,  in  1600,  is  the  only  volcanic 
disturbance  of  magnitude  that  has  taken  place  in  Peru  since  the 
conquest  (53), 

But  so  much  cannot  be  said  of  earthquakes,  the  frequency  and 
violence  of  which  on  the  Peruvian  coast  and  in  certain  sections  of 
the  mountains  are  well  known.  Earthquakes  and  earthquake  waves 
occurred  there  long  before  the  sixteenth  century,  a  fact  conceded 
by  Garcilasso  (54),  asserted  by  Oliva  in  regard  to  the  vicinity  of 
Lima  (55),  and  repeated  by  Montesinos  about  Cuzco.  The  latter  dty 
is  noted  for  earthquakes  (56),  and  if  that  which  Montesinos  records 
concerning  such  upheavals  in  prehistoric  times  is  based  on  untainted 
Indian  folklore,  as  he  claims  it  is,  that  section  must  have  experi- 
enced at  least  as  great  devastations  through  seismic  disturbances  in 
earlier  times  as  those  that  have  occurred  since  the  advent  of  the 
Spaniards  (57).  Indeed,  it  would  even  seem  that,  previous  to  the 
nineteenth  century,  earthquake  shocks  and  tidal  waves  produced  by 
earthquakes  were  more  frequent  and  destructive  than  subsequently, 
but  a  comparison  of  data  on  their  effect  is  not  always  reliable  (58). 

The  northern  Peruvian  Andes,  so  far  as  I  know,  show  no  present 
trace  of  volcanic  activity,  but  there  are  traditions  that  point  unmis- 
takably to  eruptions  in  precolumbian  times. 

The  Descrpcion  y  Relacion  de  la  Proidnca  de  los  Yauyos  in 
central  northern  Peru,  dated  1586,  contains  the  following  Indian 
tale,  evidently  primitive : 

**The  said  height  of  Pariacacay  which  is  the  tallest  of  this  range. 
.  .  .  The  Indians  of  this  province  relate  a  pleasing  fable  which  they  hold 
to  be  true.  They  say  that  the  YungaSy  their  neighbors  of  the  valley  of 
Lima,  entered  this  province  making  war,  and  peopled  a  village  called 
to-day  Lima,  which  I  destroyed  for  [the  sake  of]  the  reduction  then  made, 
and  that  at  the  foot  of  this  tall  mountain  of  snow  called  Pariacaca  they  had 
an  idol  named  Guallollo,  to  which  they  at  certain  times  of  the  year  sacri- 
ficed children  and  women.  And  that  there  appeared  to  them  where  this 
tall  snowy  peak  is,  an  idol  called  Pariacaca,  and  it  said  to  the  Indians 
who  made  this  sacrifice  to  the  idol  Guallollo  which  they  worshiped  : 


S8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

'  Do  not  sacrifice  your  wives  and  children ;  worship  me  who  does  not  ask 
for  human  blood,  but  that  you  offer  to  me  blood  of  the  sheep  of  the  land, 
which  they  call  llamas^  with  which  I  will  be  contented.'  And  that  they 
had  replied  to  him  :  '  If  we  do  thus  the  Guallollo  will  kill  us  all.'  And 
the  Pariacaca  answered :  '  I  will  fight  him  and  drive  him  off. '  So  for 
three  days  and  nights  the  Pariacaca  fought  the  Guallollo  and  defeated 
him,  driving  him  off  to  the  Andes,  which  are  forests  of  the  province  of 
Xauxa.  The  Pariacaca  became  the  tall  peak  and  mountain  of  snow  which 
it  is  to-day,  and  the  Guallollo  another  mountain  of  fire.  And  they  fought 
in  this  way:  the  Pariacaca  threw  so  much  water  and  hail  that  the 
Guallollo  could  not  stand  it,  so  he  vanquished  him  and  drove  him  to 
where  he  is,  as  told.  And  the  much  water  he  threw  at  him  became  the 
lake  that  to-day  is  called  Pariacaca,  [along]  which  is  the  royal  road  from 
Cuzco  to  Los  Reyes.  And  to-day  the  Indians  believe  this  and  climb  to 
the  highest  point  of  this  snowy  mountain  to  offer  their  sacrifices  to  the 
Pariacaca,  by  another  name  YarOy  of  which  they  say  it  remained  a  snowy 
mountain  since  the  said  contest."  (59) 

This  tale  was  also  reported  in  1608  by  Father  Francisco  Davila, 
the  former  priest  of  Huarochiri  (60).  Pariacaca  is  the  name  of  a 
well-known  and  very  lofty  peak,  perpetually  snow-capped,  in  the  inte- 
rior northeast  of  Lima.  Its  altitude,  like  that  of  most  summits  in 
northern  and  central  Peru,  is  unknown  (61).  The  Guallollo  I  have 
not  yet  been  able  to  locate. 

The  above  bears  every  mark  of  primitive  Indian  tradition.  It 
describes  a  phenomenon  of  considerable  magnitude  —  the  rise  of  a 
mountain  through  the  subsidence  of  another,  or,  perhaps,  the  forma- 
tion of  an  eruptive  cone.  The  document  alludes  to  the  form  of  the 
summit  of  Pariacaca  also  : 

Pariacaca,  which  is  a  height  of  snow  that  in  its  highest  part  makes 
what  appears  to  be  a  saddle,  and  on  the  slopes  to  the  west,  as  well  as  on 
the  slopes  to  the  east,  on  each  side,  it  forms  a  lake  of  water  from  the 
quantity  of  snow  it  melts."  (62) 

Whether  these  depressions  might  indicate  the  crumbling  of  an 
old  crater,  as  in  the  casq  of  Caruairazu  in  Ecuador  (63),  and  the 
"  Altar,"  is  problematical. 

Information  of  a  more  positive  nature  is  furnished  by  Indian 
tradition,  corroborated  by  topographic  and  geologic  testimony,  on 


\ 


bandeuer]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  $9 

a  volcanic  outbreak  that  took  place,  in  precolumbian  times,  much 
farther  south,  in  the  department  of  Cuzco.  About  1 2  miles  north 
of  the  little  town  of  Sicuani  (the  terminus  of  the  Cuzco  branch  of 
the  railroad  from  Arequipa  to  Bolivia)  are  well-preserved  architec- 
tural remains  of  the  Inca  (64).  At  a  short  distance  from  these  ruins 
toward  the  east  terminates  a  well-defined  lava  flow  that  issued  from 
a  crater  called  Quimsa-pata  (65).  This  volcano,  which  has  shown 
no  trace  of  activity  in  historic  times,  is  indicated  on  Pentland's  map 
(66).  We  visited  Rajti,  as  the  place  is  usually  called  by  Indians, 
in  August,  1 894.  Its  official  name  is  San  Pedro  de  Cacha.  We 
saw  Quimsa-pata,  not  from  the  west  but  from  the  south,  distinctly 
as  a  cup  with  three  prongs  (67),  a  form  common  to  other  craters. 
There  are  two  lava  streams.  One  of  these  flowed  as  far  as  the 
Cuzco  road,  and  is  more  ancient  than  the  ruins,  since  they  stand  on 
it ;  the  other  may  be  more  recent  than  the  buildings,  yet  there  are 
terraces  {andenes  in  Quichua)  in  crags  and  crevices  at  the  base  of 
the  flow.  That  both  streams  issued  from  the  Quimsa-pata  crater 
cannot  be  doubted. 

With  this  site  there  are  connected  traditions  that  were  related  to 
the  Spaniards  so  soon  after  their  arrival  that  it  is  hardly  possible 
more  than  slight  changes  could  have  been  wrought  by  contact.  I 
have  already  discussed  these  traditions  in  connection  with  the  myths 
of  Viracocha  and  Tonapa,  in  Peru  and  Bolivia  (68).  These  names 
may  be  different  appellations  for  one  and  the  same  mythical  being. 
Cieza,  who  visited  Cacha  in  1 549  (69),  was  told  of  a  tall  white  man 
who  performed  wonderful  cures  and  also  changed  the  appearance  of 
the  country.  He  came  to  Cacha,  where  the  natives  attempted  to  stone 
him,  but  **  they  saw  him  kneeling  down,  his  hands  raised  to  heaven  as 
if  invoking  divine  aid  in  the  straits  in  which  he  found  himself.  The 
Indians  further  affirm  that  forthwith  there  appeared  in  the  heavens 
a  fire  so  great  that  they  all  expected  to  be  burnt,  so  that,  filled  with 
great  awe,  they  went  to  him  whom  they  had  desired  to  kill  and 
with  great  clamor  entreated  him  to  free  them  from  the  peril,  since 
they  saw  it  came  to  them  for  the  sin  they  had  committed  of  intend- 
ing to  stone  him.  They  saw  that  forthwith,  commanding  the  fire  to 
stop,  it  went  out,  the  rock,  through  the  conflagration,  remaining  so 
burnt  and  eaten  that  it  became  a  witness  to  the  truth  of  what  has 


6o  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

been  written,  for  it  is  so  charred  and  light  that,  even  if  large,  it  may 
be  lifted  with  the  hand."(70)  Juan  de  Betanzos  heard  the  story 
several  years  before  Cieza  (71),  and  his  version  agrees  almost  text- 
ually  with  that  of  the  former ;  still,  his  description  of  the  site  de- 
serves to  be  quoted : 

'*  I  have  seen  the  burnt  mountain  and  the  rock  of  it,  and  the  burnt 
[section]  is  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  league  [long] .  And  the  Guaca  of 
this  Viracocha  is  in  front  of  this  burnt  space  a  stone's  throw  from  it,  on  a 
level  and  on  the  other  side  of  a  brook  that  runs  between  the  burning  and 
the  Guaca.*'  (72) 

When  we  visited  the  ruins  there  was,  between  them  and  the  flow 
of  lava,  what  we  took  to  be  a  pond  or  pool,  although  it  may  have 
been  the  brook  or  creek  mentioned  by  Betanzos  (73). 

Later  authors  have  only  repeated  the  story  told  by  Betanzos 
and  Cieza  (74).  The  Indian  Salcamayhua,  at  the  beginning  of 
the  seventeenth  century  (75),  related  the  tale  briefly  as  follows : 

"The  one  [they]  say  that  on  a  very  tall  height  called  Cachapucara 
there  was  or  [they]  had  an  idol  in  the  shape  of  a  woman,  to  which  they 
say  that  Tunapa  took  great  aversion  to  the  said  idol,  and  afterward  set 
fire  to  it,  and  the  said  height  burnt  with  the  said  idol,  bursting  and  melt- 
ing the  said  mountain  like  wax,  [so]  that  to  this  day  there  are  marks  of 
that  fearful  and  unheard-of  wonder. ' '   (76) 

In  view  of  the  testimony  offered  by  the  site  and  of  the  early  date 
at  which  the  tradition  was  told  the  Spaniards,  it  appears  authentic 
and  primitive ;  yet  it  might  be  that  the  sight  of  the  flows  of  lava,  so 
prominent  at  Cacha,  resulted  in  a  myth  of  explanation.  We  might 
suspect  the  tale  to  be  not  a  recollection  but  an  "observation 
myth,*'  and  hence  the  eruption  to  have  occurred  long  before  the 
memory  of  man.  At  any  rate  it  remains  established  that  a  volcanic 
outburst  took  place  near  Sicuani,  in  southern  Peru,  during  pre- 
columbian  times  (77). 

An  official  report  on  the  province  of  Collaguas,  now  part  of 
the  department  of  Arequipa,  in  southern  Peru,  written  in  1586, 
states : 

'*  There  are  in  it  two  kinds  of  people,  distinct  in  dress  and  language. 
The  ones  call  themselves  Collaguas^  a  name  which  comes  to  them  from 


BANDEUER]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  6 1 

ancient  times.  According  to  notice  transmitted  from  father  to  son,  they 
hold  that  they  originate  from  a  Guaca  or  place  of  worship  of  ancient  date, 
which  is  in  the  province  of  VeliUi,  that  confines  with  this,  and  it  is  a 
mountain  covered  with  snow  after  the  manner  of  a  volcano,  different  from 
the  other  mountains  thereabout,  and  they  call  it  Collaguata,  They  say 
that  from  this  height,  or  from  the  inside  of  it,  there  issued  many  people 
and  descended  to  this  province  and  valley,  which  is  this  river  along  which 
they  are  settled,  and  they  defeated  those  who  were  natives  and  drove 
them  off  by  force,  while  they  remained  and,  since  this  volcano  from 
which  they  claim  to  proceed  is  named  Collaguata,  they  call  themselves 
CoUaguas.  The  name  itself  does  not  signify  anything,  but  is  derived  and 
originates  from  the  said  volcano  of  Collaguata,  which  anciently  was  wor- 
shipped by  them."  (78) 

The  mountain  alluded  to  is  the  Solimana,  which,  while  no  erup- 
tion of  it  is  known  within  historical  times,  has  been  regarded  as  a 
possibly  extinct  or  at  least  slumbering  volcano  (79) ;  hence  the 
Indian  story  is  supported  by  physiographic  evidences,  so  far  as  in- 
terpretation of  it  in  the  sense  of  precolumbian  eruptions  go. 

In  the  southern  provinces  of  Peru  there  are  other  lofty  and  ap- 
parently isolated  peaks  bearing  the  type  either  of  trachytic  upheavals 
or  of  eruptive  cones.  The  loftiest  of  these,  and,  so  far  as  known, 
the  highest  mountain  in  the  western  hemisphere,  is  the  Koropuna, 
north  of  Arequipa  (80).  According  to  Cieza  there  was  a  shrine  on 
its  upper  slopes,  where  the  Indians  constantly  made  sacrifices  and 
performed  many  ceremonies.  **  There  were  always  people  there  from 
many  parts,  and  the  demon  spoke  there  more  freely  than  at  the 
oracles  [shrines]  aforesaid,  for  he  continuously  gave  replies,  not 
only  occasionally  as  at  the  others.  And  even  now,  through  some 
secret  of  God,  it  is  said  that  fiends  go  about  there  visibly."  (81) 
Antonio  Raimondi,  a  native  of  Italy  and  a  distinguished  naturalist 
and  scientific  explorer  of  Peru,  repeatedly  classed  both  Koropuna 
and  Misti  —  the  magnificent  peak  overlooking  the  city  of  Arequipa 
—  among  the  volcanoes  (82).  Misti,  however,  is  not  extinct,  as 
Raimondi  assumed ;  it  is  only  dormant ;  but  there  appears  to  be 
no  reliable  testimony  in  regard  to  eruptions  after  Arequipa  was 
established  at  its  base  in  1540  (83).  Of  precolumbian  activity  of 
Misti  there  are  some  documentary  and  traditional  indications.  An 
official  report  of  1649  states  : 


62  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

''  Arequipa  is  situated  on  the'slopes  of  one  of  these  volcanoes  of  such 
incomparable  greatness  and  height  that  it  overlooks  the  whole  cordillera, 
and  can  be  seen  from  so  far  out  at  sea  as  to  be  very  useful  to  navigators 
of  these  coasts.  It  has  in  its  summit  a  wide,  awful,  and  exceedingly  deep 
mouth.  Nothing  is  written  about  it  having  broken  out,  but  the  tongues, 
which  were  much  anterior  to  the  pens,  affirm  from  tradition  that  it  burst 
forth  terrifically  at  some  period  very  distant  from  ours.'*  (84) 

It  is  not  inappropriate  to  state  here  that  the  lava  of  Misti  is 
augitic.  While  Cieza  was  in  Peru,  about  the  year  1550,  an  erup- 
tion of  Misti  was  feared  (85). 

The  history  of  the  Jesuit  college  of  Arequipa,  dated  1600, 
which  contains  the  most  circumstantial  narrative  of  the  awful  erup- 
tion of  Omate  in  that  year  (86),  says  of  Misti :  "  Fame  has  it  that 
this  volcano  in  times  past  vomited  fire  and  pumice  stone  and  finally 
water."  (87)  While  Omate  was  in  full  eruption,  it  was  said,  Indian 
sorcerers  consulted  about  the  cataclysm  and  learned  that  Omate 
had  spoken  to  Misti,  proposing  they  should  combine  to  destroy  the 
Spaniards,  but  Misti  declined  on  the  ground  that  it  was  now  a 
Christian,  having  been  named  (the  volcano  of)  Saint  Francis  (88). 
Since  it  does  not  seem  that  there  has  been  any  postcolumbian 
eruption  of  Misti,  its  activity  apparently  ceased  in  precolumbian 
times,  the  faint  traces  already  mentioned  excepted. 

Omate  (the  outburst  of  which  may  be  classed  with  that  of  the 
Conscguina  in  1835,  of  Krakatoa  in  Java,  in  1883,  and  of  the  re- 
cent explosion  of  Mont  Pelee  on  the  island  of  Martinique)  does  not 
seem  to  have  been  in  eruption,  at  least  within  historic  times,  either 
before  or  after  its  great  outburst  in  January,  1600.  That  catastrophe 
came  suddenly  and  unexpectedly.  So  little  did  the  villagers  dream 
of  the  nature  of  the  mountain  that,  since  the  occupancy  of  the 
country  by  Spaniards,  they  cultivated  grapes  and  other  fruits  about 
the  volcano  (89).  Therefore  if  Omate  was  active  before  1600,  it 
must  have  been  prior  to  European  colonization. 

The  Indian  Salcamayhua  has  preserved  the  following  fragments 
of  lore  which  may  relate  to  volcanic  phenomena  in  the  fifteenth 
century,  in  southwestern  as  well  as  in  southeastern  Peru.  At  the 
time  of  the  Inca  war-chief  Yupanqui  (possibly  the  same  as  Tupac 
Yupanqui)  — 


I 


BANDELIER]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  63 

"They  say  that  news  came  how  a  miracle  had  happened  at  Cuzco, 
how  diyauirca  or  amaro  [large  snake]  had  come  forth  from  the  height 
of  Pachatusan  —  a  very  ugly  beast,  half  a  league  long  and  big,  two  and 
one-half  fathoms  in  breadth,  and  with  ears  and  teeth  and  beard.  And 
[it]  comes  by  Yuncaypampa  and  Sinca,  and  thence  enters  the  lagoon  of 
Quibipay  ;  thereupon  there  come  out  of  Asoncata  two  sacacas  of  fire  and 
pass  [over]  to  Potina  of  Arequipa,  and  another  [one]  comes  from  lower 
down  than  Guamanca,  which  is  three  or  four  very  tall  heights  covered 
with  snow,  the  which  [it  is  said,  or  they  say]  were  animals  with  wings 
and  ears  and  tails  and  four  feet,  and  on  the  shoulders  many  spines  like  of 
fish,  and  from  afar  [they]  say  that  it  appeared  to  them  all  fire.**  (90) 

Analyzing  this  rather  incoherent  statement,  it  reduces  itself  to 
the  following :  The  two  sacacas  (an  Aymara,  not  a  Quichua  word, 
91),  aflame,  are  represented  as  going  from  the  nevada  of  Ausan- 
gate,  east  of  Cuzco,  to  southeastward  of  Arequipa.  Another  fiery 
object  is  said  to  have  come  from  Huamanca  (Guamanga),  or 
Ayacucho,  between  Lima  and  Cuzco,  in  the  mountains  ;  hence  the 
presumption  is  that  several  eruptions  occurred  almost  simultane- 
ously in  central  and  southern  Peru  during  the  course  of  the  fifteenth 
century.  The  simultaneous  appearance  of  several  comets  (which 
the  description  of  Salcamayhua  might  also  recall)  is  not  easily  con- 
ceivable, and  it  seems  more  probable  that  the  fiery  serpents,  etc., 
indicate  streams  of  lava.  Later  on  a  famous  fetish  is  mentioned 
(in  the  northern  sections  of  the  present  department  of  Arequipa)  as 
vomiting  fire,  which  might  be  another  allusion  to  some  volcanic 
outbreak  (92). 

Cuzco  and  its  vicinity  are  noted  for  frequent  and  violent  earth- 
quakes. If  the  work  of  Fernando  de  Montesinos  were  reliable,  we 
would  find  in  it  several  references  to  precolumbian  earthquakes  of 
considerable  magnitude.  This  author,  pretending  to  derive  his  in- 
formation from  reliable  Indian  tradition,  writes  of  a  century  of  disas- 
trous seismic  commotions,  beginning  with  the  first  cycle  of  our  era 
and  extending  into  the  second  (93).  Subsequently  he  refers  to 
eruptions  and  earthquakes  in  Ecuador  (94).  But  Montesinos  is  a 
very  suspicious  source,  and  all  that  can  be  safely  admitted  from  his 
assertion  is  that  seismic  phenomena  were  as  active  at  Cuzco  in  early 
times  as  they  are  to-day.     The  Bolivian  Andes,  generally  called 


64  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  '*  Royal  Cordillera,"  has  no  trace  of  eruptive  rocks  (95) ;  and  I 
have  not  been  able  to  obtain  any  Indian  lore  that  even  remotely 
might  be  construed  as  hinting  at  precolumbian  volcanic  disturb- 
ances in  that  great  eastern  chain.  But  the  lore  of  the  Aymara  is 
yet  imperfectly  known.  The  coast  range,  which  in  a  few  of  its 
peaks,  like  the  Sarjama,  or  Sajama,  is  taller  than  the  other,  has 
dormant  if  not  extinct  volcanoes.  Such  is  the  one  mentioned,  which 
is  said  to  rise  more  than  22,000  feet,  the  Huallat-iri,  and  perhaps 
the  Parina-kota  (96).  The  form  of  the  *'  Tetillas  "  near  Sajama  also 
recalls  eruptive  cones.  Farther  south  there  are  active  volcanoes 
close  to  the  Bolivian  frontier,  within  Chilean  territory  (97).  It 
might  be  that  the  tales  recorded  by  Cieza  about  the  coming  of 
"Viracocha"  from  the  south,  with  "such  great  power  that  of 
heights  he  made  plains  and  of  the  plains  great  mountains  '*  (98), 
are  an  allusion  to  volcanic  phenomena  in  precolumbian  times 
among  the  elevated  peaks  of  the  Bolivian  coast  range.  If  Sarjama 
is  the  true  name  of  what  now  is  generally  called  Sajama^  it  would 
mean  **he  (or  one)  who  starts  or  rises**  (99),  in  which  event  it  is 
either  in  allusion  to  the  shape  of  the  mountain,  which  rises  to  a 
great  height  as  a  steep,  isolated  pyramid,  or,  perhaps,  a  dim  recol- 
lection of  ancient  upheavals. 

With  the  exception  of  its  southwestern  portion,  which  borders 
on  Chile,  Bolivia  has  been  visited  but  little  by  earthquakes  within 
historic  times.  Of  these  visitations  that  of  1582  worked  consider- 
able damage  (lOO),  and  that  of  May,  1896,  was  also  of  considerable 
violence  (lOi).  Of  precolumbian  seismic  catastrophes  I  have  not, 
as  yet,  found  any  allusion  aside  from  what  the  Viracocha  tale 
above  mentioned  might  indicate.  The  puna  about  La  Paz  is  tra- 
versed by  trachytic  dykes  and  zones  and  covered  in  spots  with  a 
thin  volcanic  layer  (102).  That  which  has  been  said  about  an  erup- 
tion of  the  mountain  called  Tuanani,  near  Kamata,  in  the  province 
of  Munecas  in  the  eastern  province  of  La  Paz,  has  subsequently  been 
disproved.  That  peak,  although  smaller  in  mass,  resembles  the 
*'  Altar**  in  Ecuador ;  and  it  may  have  been  a  volcano,  shattered  by 
an  explosion  in  times  long  past  (103). 

I  may  be  permitted  to  allude  here  to  a  similarity  in  the  distri- 
bution of  volcanoes  in  the  northern  and  southern  parts  of  the  Amer- 


BANDEunJ  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  65 

ican  continent.  In  each  hemisphere  there  are  found  two  main 
groups  —  a  northern  and  a  southern.  Thus  there  is  in  North 
America  an  accumulation  of  craters  in  Oregon,  Washington,  Alaska, 
and  California,  near  the  Pacific  coast  (104),  and  another,  more  nu- 
merous cluster,  beginning  in  Mexico  and  extending  almost  as  far 
south  as  Panama.  East  of  these  two  groups  North  America  has  no 
volcanoes ;  and  they  appear  in  greatest  number  where  the  mainland 
narrows. 

In  South  America  the  region  east  of  the  Andes  is  free  from 
eruptive  peaks;  they  hug  the  Pacific  coast.  There  is  a  north- 
western group,  embracing  the  volcanoes  of  Colombia  and  Ecuador, 
and  an  extreme  southern  one,  beginning  in  southwestern  Peru  and 
extending  to  the  southern  extremity  of  the  continent  in  Chile.  The 
former  contains  a  relatively  small  number,  the  latter  a  much  greater 
one,  Chile  alone  claiming  at  least  forty.  How  many  of  these  are 
active  at  present  or  were  active  in  the  early  part  of  the  sixteenth 
century  is  not  yet  ascertained,  as  there  is  practically  no  available 
material  on  the  subject  of  precolumbian  eruptions  of  Chilean 
volcanoes. 

The  historian  Alonzo  de  Gongora  Marmolejo,  in  his  work  fin- 
ished in  1575,  states:  "There  are  also  throughout  the  Cordillera 
many  volcanoes  that  commonly  [ordinarily]  emit  fire,  and  more  in 
winter  than  in  summer."  (105) 

Alonso  de  Ovalle,  in  1646,  mentioned  sixteen  volcanoes  **that 
have  broken  out  at  different  times,  and  caused  effects  of  no  less 
wonder  than  stupefaction,  as  well  as  fright  in  all  the  land/'  (lo6) 
Felipe  Gomez  de  Vidaurre,  in  1748,  spoke  of  fourteen  volcanoes 
and  alluded  to  that  of  Peteroa  (about  lat.  35°  50'  S.,  in  the 
department  of  Curico)  as  '*  this  ancient  volcano."  (107) 

Alonzo  de  Ercilla,  the  poet  historian  of  Chile  (whither  he  went 
in  1554,  fourteen  years  after  the  conqueror  Valdivia),  states  that 
earthquakes  were  of  frequent  occurrence  at  this  time  and  describes 
the  volcano  of  Villarica  as  constantly  active.  (108) 

Beyond  a  probability  of  precolumbian  eruptions  in  Chile,  espec- 
ially of  the  peaks  of  Peteroa  and  Villarica,  the  above  indications  do 
not  apply. 

Cosme  Bueno,  in  the  latter  part  of  the  eighteenth  century, 

AM.  AMTH.,  N.  S.,  8 — 5. 


66  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

asserted  that  the  Indians  of  the  district  of  Concepdon  worshiped 
volcanoes,  but  the  statement  is  not  sufficiently  clear  to  establish 
this  as  the  survival  of  an  ancient  custom.  (109) 

Vidaurre  relates  the  following  tradition  current  among  Chilean 
aborigines  during  his  time  : 

"  Among  the  fables  which  these  Indians  tell,  some  knowledge  of  the 
universal  deluge  is  disclosed,  as  clearly  shown  by  the  following  practice 
during  the  great  earthquakes.  When  one  of  these  occurs,  all  run  at  once 
to  the  mountains  called  by  them  tentefiy  that  is,  to  such  as  have  three 
points  [end  in  three  summits] .  To  these  [tops]  they  carry  food  for 
many  days,  and  wooden  platters  on  their  heads.  They  say  that  in  ancient 
times  there  came  a  great  deluge  which  immdated  the  whole  land  except 
the  tenteneSf  for  a  certain  virtue  [faculty]  they  have  of  floating  on  the 
waters.  For  this  reason  they  [the  Indians]  seek  to  escape,  fearing  lest 
the  sea,  after  such  a  violent  movement  of  the  land,  should  turn  again  to 
drown  it;  also  that  they  carry  these  wooden  platters  on  their  heads 
because  it  might  happen  that  the  waters  should  rise  so  high  that  the 
tentenes  would  strike  the  sun  and  their  heads  be  burned  if  they  did  not 
use  that  precaution.  "  (no) 

Subsequent  authors,  including  the  well-known  Jesuit  historian 
Molina,  have  copied  this  statement  of  Vidaurre  with  slight  varia- 
tions (in).  The  tale,  if  primitive,  implies  seismic  disturbances  in 
Chile  during  periods  of  comparatively  remote  antiquity. 

Should  the  folklore  herein  contained  be  authentic  and  pre- 
columbian,  as  some  parts  of  it  undoubtedly  are,  we  might  infer  that 
volcanic  activity  in  western  South  America  was  greater  at  certain 
times  previous  to  the  Spanish  conquest  than  it  is  now.  Thus  the 
active  volcanoes  in  Ecuador  are  reduced  to  three  or  four,  whereas 
there  are  unmistakable  evidences  of  a  number  of  others  having  been 
in  eruption  long  before,  but  have  become  either  extinct  or  are  tem- 
porarily slumbering.  Between  Ecuador  and  southern  Peru  volcanic 
activity  ceased  before  the  advent  of  the  Spaniards.  In  regard  to 
earthquakes  the  testimony  is  more  indefinite,  although  it  would  seem 
that  there  also  has  been  a  gradual  decrease  in  frequency  as  well  as  in 
violence.  This  can  be  inferred,  not  from  data  anterior  to  the  six- 
teenth century,  but  from  a  comparison  of  the  numbers  of  unusually 


BANDiuni]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  6/ 

strong  seismic  phenomena  in  the  sixteenth,  seventeenth,  eighteenth, 
and  nineteenth  centuries.  Since  the  data  concerning  these  dis- 
turbances do  not  pertain  to  the  domain  of  Indian  tradition  and  folk- 
lore, they  are  not  appropriate  to  this  paper. 


NOTES 

1.  Piedrahita  was  a  native  of  what  now  is  Colombia,  but  was  New 
Granada  in  his  time.  According  to  Joaquin  Acosta  (^Compendio  his- 
tbrico  del  Descubrimienio  y  Colonizacion  de  la  Nutva  Granada  en  el 
Siglo  dicimo  sexto^  1 848,  p.  385  et  seq. )  he  was  bom  at  Bogoti  in  the 
beginning  of  the  seventeenth  century —  '*  fu6  hijo  legitimo  de  Domingo 
Hernandez  de  Soto  Piedrahita  y  de  Catalina  CoUantes,  y  bautizado  en  la 
parroquia  de  las  Nieves.**  He  became  Bishop  of  Santa  Marta  in  1669 
(p.  386),  Bishop  of  Panami  in  1676,  and  died  at  Panama  in  1688  (p. 
387).  His  age  at  the  time  of  his  death  being  given  as  seventy,  he  must 
have  been  bom  in  16 18.  The  title  of  his  book  is  Historia  general  de  las 
Conqvistas  del  Nvevo  Reyno  de  Granada  (Antwerp,  1688).  The  names, 
or  titles,  of  Bochica  are  from  that  work  (lib.  i,  cap.  iii,  p.  17).  Nemte- 
requeteva  is  considered  also  by  Fray  Pedro  Simon  as  distinct  from  Bochica. 
Temaux-Compans,  Essai  sur  P ancien  Cundinamarca^  p.  8. 

2.  Piedrahita,  Historia  general  (lib.  i,  cap.  in,  p.  18).  The  esti- 
mate of  the  dimensions  of  the  cataract  given  by  Piedrahita  is  more  than 
liberal.  Humboldt,  Vues  des  Cordillires  et  Monuments  des  peuples  indi- 
genes de  V AmMque  (181 6,  vol.  i,  p.  92),  states:  **La  riviere  se  r^tr^cit 
beaucoup  prds  de  la  cascade  m^me,  0(1  la  crevasse,  qui  parait  form^e  par  un 
tremblement  de  terre,  n*a  que  dix  a  douze  moires  d'ouverture.  A  I'^poque 
des  grandes  s^cheresses,  le  volume  d'eau  qui,  en  deux  bonds,  se  precipite 
a  une  profondeur  de  cent  soixante-quinze  mc^tres,  presente  encore  un  profil 
de  quatre-vingt-dix  metres  carr^s. 

3.  According  to  Joaquin  Acosta  {Compendio,  p.  380),  Simon  was 
bom  at  La  Parrilla  in  1574.  The  date  and  place  of  his  death  are  unknown 
to  me. 

4.  Noticias  historia les  de  las  Conquistas  de  Tierra  finne  (MS.  in  the 
Lenox  branch  of  the  New  York  Public  Library),  pt.  11,  noticia  quarta, 
cap.  IV,  fol.  260,  has  Chuchauiva ;  fol.  265,  Cuchauiva. 

5.  Ibid.  (pt.  II,  noticia  iv,  fol.  265):  **E1  fundam'"  q*  huvo  para 
adorar  estos  Yndios  con  ofrecim"*'  el  arco  del  cielo  Cuchauiva  aunq* 
embuelto  en  fabulas  fue  de  esta  manera.  .  .Fundan  sobre  esto  su  razon 
diciendo  q*  por  ciertas  cosas  qe  havia  usada  con  ellos  al  parecer  en  su 
agravio  el  Dios  Chibchachum,  le  murmuraban  los  Yndios  y  le  ofendian  en 
secreto  y  en  publico  :  con  q*  indignado  Chibchachum  trat6  de  castigarlos 
anegandoles  sus  tierras,  para  lo  cual  cri6  6  trajo  de  otras  partes  los  dos  rios 
dichos  de  Sopo  y  Tibito,  con  que  crecieron  tan  to  las  aguas  del  valle,  q" 
no  dandose  manos  como  dicen  la  tierra  del  valle  a  consumirlas  se  venia  a 


68  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

anegar  gran  parte  de  ella,  lo  q"  no  hacia  antes  que  entraran  en  el  valle  los 
dos  rios,  porq*  el  agua  de  los  demas  se  consumia  en  las  labores  y  semen - 
teras  sin  tener  necesidad  de  desagiie.'*  To  their  entreaties  Bochica, 
standing  on  a  rainbow  and  holding  his  golden  rod,  responded :  '*  Y  dici- 
endo  arroj6  la  vara  de  oro  hacia  Tequendama,  y  abri6  aquellas  pefias  pK)r 
donde  aora  pasa  el  rio  :  pero  come  era  la  vara  delgada  no  hizo  tanta  aver- 
tura  como  era  menester  para  las  muchas  aguas  q"  se  jimtan  los  inviemos  y 
asi  todavia  rebalsa,  pero  al  fin  qued6  la  tierra  libre  para  poder  sembrar  y 
tener  el  sustento. ' ' 

6.  Ibid.    Guayacanes  are    logs   of   the   guayaco  tree    {Guayacum 
officinale) . 

7.  Vues  des  Cordilleres  et  Monuments  indigenes,  i,  p.  92. 

8.  For  quite  a  while  the  writings  of  Quesada  were  believed  to  have 
been  lost.  Joaquin  Acosta  (^Compendia ^  p.  373)  says  about  the  conqueror 
of  New  Granada :  **  Ya  de  edad  de  cerca  de  setenta  afios,  se  resolvi6  a 
escribir  su  compendio  hist6rico  6  ratos  de  Suesca  (que  parece  que  la  obra 
tenia  uno  y  otro  titulo)  pero  desgraciadamente  no  se  consider6  digna  de 
imprimirse  aunque  se  remiti6  a  Espafia,  lo  que  junto  con  los  pasajes  que  el 
Padre  Zamora  y  el  obispo  Piedrahita  nos  han  conservado  de  este  trabajo, 
inclinan  a  hacer  un  juicio  no  muy  favorable  de  la  obra  escrita  por  antiguos 
recuerdos,  algunos  de  los  cuales  son  evidentemente  inexactos.  Este  man- 
uscrito  se  ha  perdidio,  y  tambien  la  coleccion  de  sermones  que  por  aquel 
tiempo  compuso  el  mismo  mariscal  con  destino  a  ser  predicados  en  las  fes- 
tividades  de  Nuestra  Seftora.'*  Piedrahita  (^Historia  general y  pp.  17,  22, 
23)  refers  to  Quesada  in  regard  to  ceremonials,  so  that  it  might  be  that 
details  concerning  Bochica  were  taken  from  the  writings  of  the  conqueror. 
He  refers  to  a  book  written  by  Quesada  which  he  consulted  in  manuscript 
(lib.  I,  cap.  9,  10).  Of  this  work  he  states:  **No  fue  tan  mal  afortu- 
nada  esta  inclinacion,  que  no  se  alentasse  con  otro  acaso  con  que  me  en- 
con  tr6  en  vna  de  las  librerias  de  la  Corte  con  el  Compendio  historial  de 
las  conquistas  del  Nuevo  Reyno,  que  hizo,  escrivi6,  y  remiti6  a  Espafta  el 
Adelantado  Gon^alo  Ximenez  de  Quesada ;  pero  con  tan  mala  estrella, 
que  por  mas  de  ochenta  alios  avia  passado  por  los  vltrages  de  manuscrito 
entre  el  concurso  de  muchos  libros  impressos."  According  to  Acosta 
(^Compendioy  p.  391)  the  Dominican  Fray  Alonso  de  Zamora  also  con- 
sulted, for  his  Historia  de  la  Provincia  de  San  Antonio  del  Nuetfo  Reino 
de  Granada y  del  brden  de  Predicadores  (Barcelona,  1701),  **  El  Compen- 
dio historial  del  Adelantado  Quesada  firmado  de  su  nombre."  Since  the 
days  of  Acosta  much  bibliographic  work  has  been  done  in  Spain,  and  to  the 
late  Don  Marcos  Jimenez  de  la  Espada,  among  others,  we  owe  very  valua- 
ble discoveries.  It  is  now  ascertained  that  Quesada  wrote  at  least  two 
works,  one  of  which  was  printed.  The  earlier  one  is  the  Epitome  del 
Nuevo  Reino  de  Granada^  written  in  1539  and  still  in  manuscript  in  the 
National  Historical  Archives  of  Spain.  The  other  obtained  the  imprim- 
atur in  1568  and  bears  the  title  Tres  Ratos  de  Suesca.  Of  the  former 
Espada  {Relaciones geogrdficas  de  IndiaSy  vol.  i,  p.  xliv),  says:  '*  Donde 
el  insigne  granadino  y  autor  de  los  Tres  Ratos  de  Suesca  resume  discre- 
tamente  los  hechos  princi pales  de  su  conquista  y  lo  mas  notable  del  pais  y 


BANDEuni]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  69 

dc  las  gentes  que  descubri6. ' '  Of  the  Ratos  de  Suesca  he  states  (p.  xliv) : 
''Libroque  muy  pocos  han  lograda  ver. ' '  Since  both  Piedrahita  and 
Zamora  claim  to  have  consulted  the  Compendio  histarial  in  manuscript,  it 
might  seem  that  they  mean  by  it  the  Epitome^  in  which  event  it  is  not 
unlikely  that  the  legends,  etc. ,  recorded  by  them  are  authentic  or  at  least 
but  little  tainted  by  contact.  Should  they,  however,  have  reference  to 
manuscript  copies  of  the  Ratos  de  Suesca^  then  the  strictures  on  their 
source  by  Acosta  may  to  a  certain  extent  be  well  founded  and  the  tradi- 
tions a  subject  for  caution. 

9*  Historia  natural  y  general  de  Indias  (ed.  1852,  vol.  11,  and  i  of 
pt.  II,  lib.  XVII,  pp.  357-413).  He  gives  the  full  text  of  the  report  on 
the  conquest  of  New  Granada,  in  1539,  by  Juan  de  San  Martin  and  An- 
tonio de  Lebrixa.  But  he  also  states  that  at  least  part  of  his  information 
was  obtained  from  Quesada  himself  (p.  410)  :  ''  En  el  qual  se  dara  fin  d 
la  relacion  que  yo  ove  del  licenciado  Goncjalo  Ximenez  de  Quesada.*' 
The  silence  of  Oviedo  about  Chibcha  traditions  is  therefore  somewhat 
strange. 

10.  Primera  parte  de  la  Crbnica  del  Peru  (in  vol.  11  of  Vedia,  His- 
toriadares  primitivos  de  Indias^  p.  386)  :  **  Mas  adelante  esta  una  sierra 
alta,  en  su  cumbre  hay  un  volcan,  del  cual  algimas  veces  sale  cantidad  de 
humo,  y  en  los  tiempos  pasados  (segun  dicen  los  naturales)  revent6  una 
vez  y  ech6  de  si  muy  gran  cantidad  de  piedras.  Queda  este  volcan  para 
llegar  d  la  villa  de  Pasto,  yendo  de  Popayan  como  vamos,  a  la  mano 
derecha.  * ' 

11.  See  American  Anthropologist,  n.  s.,  vii,  1905,  pp.  261,  262,  and 
note  31.     This  eruption  must  have  taken  place  prior  to  1539. 

12.  Historia  del  Descubrimiento  y  Conquista  de  la  Frovincia  del  Perity 
y  de  las  guerras  y  cosas  seHaladas  en  ella  (Vedia,  Hist,  primitivos y  11,  p. 
465)  :  *'  Y  con  todo  esto,  nunca  se  di6  entero  cr^dito  a  lo  que  los  indios 
decian  cerca  destos  gigantes,  hasta  que  siendo  teniente  de  gobernador  en 
Puerto  Viejo  el  capitan  Juan  de  Olmos,  natural  de  Trujillo,  en  el  afio  de 
543,  y  oyendo  estas  cosas,  hizo  cavar  en  aqucl  valle,  donde  hallaron  tan 
grandes  costillas  y  otros  hucsos,  que  si  no  parescieran  juntas  las  cabezas, 
no  era  creible  ser  de  personas  humanas,  y  asi,  hecha  la  averiguacion  y 
vistas  las  seftales  de  los  rayos  en  las  peftas,  se  tuvo  por  cierto  lo  que  los 
indios  decian,  y  se  enviaron  a  diversas  partes  del  Peru  algunos  dientes  de 
los  que  alii  se  hallaron,  que  tenia  cada  uno  tres  dedos  de  ancho  y  cuatro 
de  largo.'*  Among  the  earlier  references  to  these  large  Ecuadorian  fossil 
remains  is  that  of  1605  in  the  Descripcionde  la  Gobernacion  de  Guayaquil 
{^Documentos  ineditos  de  Indias,  vol.  ix,  p.  273):  **  Colonchillo  esta 
poblado  en  el  puerto  de  la  punta  de  Santa  Elena,  veinte  y  cinco  leguas 
de  Guayaquil  y  siete  de  Colonche,  que  es  de  donde  se  proveen  de  las 
cosas  que  les  faltan :  la  tierra  es  est^ril  y  sin  aguas ;  beben  de  po^os, 
especialmente  de  unos  qu6  llaman  de  los  Gigantes,  que  segun  relacion  de 
los  indios  viejos,  los  hubo  en  aquella  tierra,  no  nacidos  en  ella,  sino  veni- 
dos  de  otras  partes.  Descubrense  muchos  huesos  de  estrafia  grandeza, 
especialmente  se  hallan  conservados  en  los  mineros  de  alquitran,  de  que 
hay  pocos.**  It  seems  therefore  that  the  tale  is  authentic  as  a  primitive 
local  Indian  tradition. 


70  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8, 1906 

13.  Zarate,  Historia  del  Descubrimiento  (p.  465):  '*Vieron  los 
espafioles  en  Puerto  Viejo  dos  figuras  de  bulto  destos  gigantes,  una  de 
hombre  y  otra  de  muger.''  It  should  not  be  lost  sight  of  that  the 
"giants"  had  no  women  with  them.  It  might  also  be  asked  whether 
the  stone  "  seats,*'  or  benches,  of  which  there  are  several  in  various  mu- 
seums, representing  usually  a  human  figure  on  all  fours,  bearing  on  the 
back  a  seat  of  some  form,  are  perhaps  related  to  the  "bulto  destos  gi- 
gantes  '*  alluded  to  by  Zarate.  These  seats  come  from  the  same  region. 
The  earliest  notice  the  Indians  had  of  the  appearance  of  the  Spaniards  was 
a  short  time  before  the  death  of  Huayna  Capac,  or  about  1528.  The 
manner  in  which  the  whites  were  then  described  was,  that  they  were  quite 
natural  beings,  except  for  the  beards,  which  appeared  strange.  The  In- 
dians from  the  mountains  had  even  a  very  poor  opinion  of  the  ph)rsical 
qualities  of  the  Spaniards  until  the  affair  at  Caxamarca  convinced  them  of 
the  contrary. 

14.  Historia  de  las  Guerras  civiles  del  Peru  (vol.  in,  cap.  Lxvi,  p. 
566).  I  copy  only  that  part  which  relates  to  the  supposed  negotiations 
with  the  chief,  Tupac  Yupanqui  (p.  567)  :  "  Temieron  con  gran  temor, 
por  lo  qual  luego  a  la  hora  auissaron  dello  por  la  posta  a  Topa  Ynga  Yu- 
panqui, que  a  la  sazon  estaua  en  la  cibdad  del  Cuzco  ...  £1  Ynga 
Topa  Ynga  Yupangue,  por  sustentar  su  reputacion  y  conservar  en  paz  a 
sus  vasallos,  embio  al  curaca  del  valle  de  Chimo  y  al  Gouemador  Ynga 
que  tenia  en  el  pueblo  de  Piura,  que  eran  grandes  seftores,  con  otros  mu- 
chos  yndios  priucipales,  por  embajadores  para  que  considerando  que 
gentes  eran,  hablassen  con  ellos  y  tratassen  de  paz  si  la  querian  tener  con 
el,  y  si  no  que  el  les  daria  tanta  guerra  quanta  ellos  verian,  de  que  les 
pesasse. ' '  A  certain  number  of  these  giants  accepted  the  proposals  and 
settled ;  others  began  to  ravage  the  country,  but  they  also  finally  sub- 
mitted. There  is  no  foundation  for  these  stories  in  Inca  traditions,  and 
the  tales  about  Tupac  Yupanqui  are  from  the  second  half  of  the  fifteenth 
century.  Gutierrez  has  either  elaborated  the  giant  tale  or  has  been  mis- 
informed. 

15.  Historia  de  las  guerras  civiles  del  Perii  (in, p.  573):  "  Despues, 
andando  el  tiempo,  llego  el  marques  Pi^arro*  al  pueblo  de  Chimo,  en 
donde  hallo  otros  huessos  y  calaueras  de  gran  disformidad  y  vnas  muelas 
de  tres  dedos  de  gordor  y  de  cinco  dedos  de  largor  y  tenian  un  verdugo 
negro  por  de  fuera."  Cobo  {Historia  del  Nuevo  Mundo^  vol.  in,  p. 
no)  mentions  the  discovery  of  large  fossil  bones  near  Truxillo  also,  but 
says  it  occurred  subsequent  to  1543  :  **  Otros  muchos  huesos  de  la  misma 
proporcion  se  han  descubierto  despues  acd  en  otras  partes  de  aquella 
misma  provincia  y  de  la  de  Trujillo.  * '  This  indicates  that  the  latter  finds 
were  made  posterior  to  the  year  mentioned  by  Zarate. 

16.  In  this  all  the  older  sources  agree.  That  which  is  anterior  varies 
so  much  between  author  and  author  that  suspicion  naturally  arises  as  to 
its  authenticity.  The  time  of  Tupac  Yupanqui  is  determined  by  his  suc- 
cessors, of  which  there  were  two  —  Huayna  Capac  and  Huascar.  Atau- 
huallpa  was  an  intruder  from  Quito,  and  he  lived  at  the  same  time  as 
Huascar.     Hence  from  1532,  or  1533,  the  year  in  which  both  Atauhuallpa 


BAMDEUUL]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  7 1 

and  Huascar  were  killed,  we  are  obliged  to  go  back  two  generations, 
or  about  sixty  years,  to  the  time  of  Tupac  Yupanqui.  The  arrival  of  the 
''  giants  "  would  have  taken  place  about  the  middle  of  the  fifteenth  cen- 
tury. It  is  hardly  probable  Uiat,  from  a  time  so  near  to  that  of  the  dis- 
covery of  Peru,  no  tales  should  have  survived  of  an  event  as  pK)rtentous  as 
that  of  the  coming  of  giants  from  parts  unknown.  It  should  not  be  over- 
looked, also,  that  Tupac  Yupanqui  is  credited  by  Pedro  de  Sarmiento 
Gamboa,  an  author  whose  work  has  not  yet  been  published,  with  an  imag- 
inary expedition  to  the  islands  of  ''  Ahuachumbi ''  and  ''  Ninachumbi," 
supposed  to  have  existed  in  the  Pacific  ocean,  not  far  from  the  Peruvian 
coast,  at  about  the  time  the  ' '  giants ' '  would  have  appeared  near  Puerto 
Viejo.  I  gather  my  information  on  the  statements  of  Sarmiento  about  the 
islands  mentioned  from  the  preface  to  the  Tres  Relaciones  de  Antigue- 
dades  Peruanas^  Madrid,  1879  (p.  xxiv),  by  Marcos  Jimenez  de  la  Espada. 
He  quotes  Sarmiento:  '*No  quisieron  tomar  la  primera  tierra  que  yo 
desubrl  200  y  tantas  leguas  de  Lima  en  14^,  que  son  las  islas  Uamadas 
Ahuachumbi  y  Ninachumbi,  a  donde  fu^  Topa  Ynga  Yupanqui,  como  en 
la  Historia  de  los  Ingas  del  Perd  vera  V.  M.  .  .  .  * '  See  also  Wilhelm 
Meyer,  Die  in  der  Goettinger  Bibliothek  erhaltene  Geschichte  des  Inka- 
reiches  von  Pedro  Sarmiento  de  Gamboa  (1893,  11,  p.  9,  et  seq.). 

17.  It  is  not  easily  conceivable  that  such  an  elaborate  story  could 
have  been  invented  by  Indians  within  ten  years  of  the  arrival  of  Pizarro. 
The  tale  might  be  a  '*  myth  of  observation  "  based  on  the  sight  of  the 
large  fossil  remains. 

18.  Descripcion  de  la  Gobernacion  de  Guayaquil  (p.  273).  See 
Note  12. 

19.  Whymper  (  Travels  amongst  the  Great  Andes  of  the  Equator ^ 
1892,  p.  73,  note  2)  quotes  Reiss  and  Stiibel  for  the  figures,  which  are 
17,464  feet.  The  Sangay  is  the  most  southerly  of  the  Ecuadorian 
volcanoes. 

20.  Whymper  (op.  cit.,  p.  343)  gives  16,690  feet,  after  Reiss  and 
Stiibel. 

21.  Reiss  and  Stiibel  ^raake  it  115  feet  lower. 

22.  Ancient  lava  streams  on  Chiraborazo  are  mentioned  by  Whymper, 
op.  cit.,  p.  64  et  seq. 

23.  So  far  as  I  know,  there  is  no  allusion  in  Indian  tradition  to 
meteorite  falls  in  western  South  America  in  precolumbian  times,  except 
the  luminous  display  connected  with  the  tale  of  the  giants,  provided  this 
should  eventually  be  established  to  have  been  a  meteor. 

24.  Espada  places  the  eruption  in  1533,  but  it  is  certain  it  took 
place  in  the  year  following,  while  Pedro  de  Alvarado  was  marching  on 
Quito  from  the  coast.  Cieza  (^Primera  Parte  de  la  Cronica,  cap.  XLi, 
p.  393)  states:  *' Y  parece  ser  cierto  lo  que  cuentan  estos  indios  deste 
volcan,  porque  al  tiempo  que  el  adelantado  don  Pedro  de  Alvarado, 
gobemador  que  fu6  de  la  provincia  de  Guatimala,  entr6  en  el  PerQ  con 
su  armada,  viniendo  k  salir  a  estas  provincias  de  Quito,  les  pareci6  que 
llovi6  ceniza  algunos  dias,  y  asl  lo  afirman  los  espafioles  que  venian  con 
^1.     Y  era  que  debi6  de  reventar  alguna  boca  de  fuego  destas,  de  las 


i 


72  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

cuales  hay  muchas  en  aquellas  sierras,  por  los  grandes  mineros  que  debe 
de  haber  de  piedra  zufre.  *  *  Cieza  does  not  identify  the  volcano  with 
Cotopaxi  or  any  other,  although  from  the  line  of  march  of  Alvarado  it  is 
more  than  likely  it  was  the  former  mountain.  Espada  (^Relaciones  Geo- 
grdficas^  i,  p.  26,  note  b)  admits  it.  The  document  commented  on  by  him 
is  the  report  of  the  Licentiate  Salazar  de  Villasante,  Relacion  general  de  las 
Poblaciones  espaHolas  del  Peru,  written  about  1568,  in  which  it  is  stated 
(p.  26):  '*  Como  hizo  otro  volcan  que  revent6  once  leguas  de  alll,  entre 
£1  Atacunga  y  Mulahal6,  pueblos  de  Indios,  el  tiempo  que  entraron 
espafioles  en  aquella  provincia,  y  aneg6  seis  6  siete  pueblos  de  indios  y 
ech6  tanto  piedra  pomez,  que  est^  mas  de  dos  leguas  los  campos  llenos 
della,  tan  grandes  como  ruedas  de  molino. ' '  Since  Benalcazar,  who  was 
the  first  Spanish  leader  to  reach  Quito,  left  Piura  in  October,  1533,  his 
arrival  at  Quito  could  hardly  have  taken  place  before  the  year  1534. 
Velasco  {Histoire  de  Quito,  French  transl.  by  Temaux-Compans,  vol.  11, 
p.  29)  affirms  the  eruption  was  of  Cotopaxi :  **  C*  6tait  le  volcan  de  Coto- 
paxi qui  faisait  sa  seconde  Eruption ;  j'ai  d^ja  dit  plus  haut  que  la  premiere 
avait  eu  lieu  la  veille  du  jour  oil  Atahualpa  fut  fait  prisonnier. ' '  This 
would  allude  to  an  outbreak  in  July,  1532,  but  Velasco  is  a  doubtful  source 
in  many  cases. 

25.  Primera  Parte,  p.  393. 

26.  Whymper,  Travels,  p.  343. 

27.  On  his  ascent  of  Illiniza,  Whymper  (p.  131)  met  volcanic  sand 
at  an  altitude  of  15,000  feet.  Villasante  (^Relacion  general,  p.  18)  calls 
the  Liniza  (Illiniza)  a  '<  volcan,''  but  adds,  from  the  sayings  of  an  In- 
dian :  *'  A  do  se  dice  que  en  la  cumbre  estd  un  ofrecimiento  de  indios  k 
sus  idolos,  de  mucho  oro  y  plata,  de  mas  de  un  mi  Hon,  que  ofrecian  antes 
que  espafioles  entrasen  en  la  tierra. ' '  Hence  if  Illiniza  once  was  an  ac- 
tive volcano,  it  went  to  rest  untold  centuries  before  the  sixteenth. 

28.  In  his  description  of  the  route  from  Lake  Titicaca  to  La  Paz. 

29.  Lava  streams  on  Chimborazo  are  mentioned  by  Whymper, 
Travels,  p.  64  et  seq.  Fray  Juan  Paz  Maldonado,  Relacion  del  pueblo  de 
Sant  Andres  Xunxi  \Rel.  geogr,,  in,  p.  1 50),  says :  *'  Es  tierra  templada, 
esta  a  el  pi6  del  volcan  llamado  Chimborazo,  que  quiere  dezir  en  su  lengua 
del  Inga,  *cerro  nevado  de  Chinbo*,  el  cual  tienen  en  grande  beneracion 
y  lo  adoraban  y  adoran,  aunque  no  a  lo  descubierto,  porque  dicen  que 
nascieron  d6l.  Sacrificaban  en  este  cerro  muchas  doncellas  virgenes.*' 
(p.  151  : )  '*  Dicen  los  indios  que  el  volcan  del  Chimborazo  es  el  varon,  y 
el  de  Tungurahua  es  la  hembra,  y  que  se  comunican  yendo  Chimborazo  d 
ver  d  su  muger  y  la  muger  al  marido  y  que  tienen  sus  ayuntamientos.  *  * 

30.  Sancho  Paz  Ponce  de  Le6n,  Relacion  y  Descripcion  de  los  Pueblos 
del partido  de  Otavalo,  1582  {ReL  geogr,,  in,  p.  113). 

31.  Travels  (p.  337)  mentions  lava  streams. 

32.  Histoire  de  Quito,  transl.  by  Temaux-Compans,  vol.  n,  p.  164. 
The  statement  of  Velasco  appears  doubtful  in  the  light  of  other  informa- 
tion. Thus  Pedro  Rodriguez  de  Aguayo,  Descripcion  de  la  Ciudad  de 
Quito  y  vecindad  de  ella  {Relaciones  geogrd/.,  in,  p.  56)  states  the  fol- 
lowing :   **Tiene  a  la  redonda  de  si  la  dicha  ciudad  de  Quito  algunos  cer- 


BA3IDIUIIL]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  73 

ros  muy  altos  y  redondos  k  manera  de  monton  de  trigo,  de  los  cuales  al- 
gunos  dellos  estin  todo  el  afio  cubiertos  de  nieve  y  echan  humo  noche  y 
dia  y  algunas  veces  llamas  de  fuego  grandes ;  especialmente  el  que  esta  i 
las  espaldas  de  la  dicha  ciudad  de  Quito,  hacia  los  Yumbos,  tres  leguas  de 
la  dicha  ciudad,  del  cual  ordinariamente  echa  de  si  grandisima  cantidad 
de  humo  y  ceniza,  y  hace  grandisimo  ruido  en  las  cavemas  grandes  que 
tiene  hechas  en  la  sierra ;  Y  algunas  vezes  ha  sido  tanta  la  ceniza  que  ha 
caido,que  ha  cubierto  el  suelo  mas  de  un  palmo  mas  de  veinte  y  veinte  y  cinco 
leguas  de  donde  estd  el  dicho  cerro,  y  escurecer  la  tierra  con  la  espesura 
dd  humo  y  ceniza  que  salia  del  dicho  volcan. ' '  This  indicates  consid- 
erable activity  of  the  Pichincha  in  the  sixteenth  century.  Many  are  the 
eruptions  of  that  mountain  that  have  been  mentioned.  The  document 
entitled  La  Cibdad  de  Sant  Francisco  del  Quito ^  1573  {Rel.  geogr.^  in, 
p.  61)  alludes  to  a  violent  outpour  of  ashes  on  October  17-18,  1566. 
The  Descripcion  y  Relacion  del  Estado  ecclesidstico  del  Obispado  de  San 
Francisco  de  Quito ,  1650  {Relaciones^  ap^ndice,  p.  65),  alludes  to  an 
eruption  on  September  8,  1575.  The  two  Spanish  officers  who  accom- 
panied La  Condamine  and  Bouguer  to  South  America  as  geodetic  and 
astronomical  assistants,  Antonio  de  Ulloa  and  Jorge  Juan,  assert  in  their 
final  repK)rt  to  the  King,  in  1748,  that  Pichincha  had  precolumbian 
eruptions.  Relacion  histbrica  del  Viage  hecho  de  orden  de  S.  M,  d  la 
Amirica  meridional  (parte  i',  tomo  10,  lib.  v,  cap.  iv,  p.  351)  :  **E1 
cerro  de  Pichincha  es  volcan,  y  revent6  en  tiempo  de  la  gentilidad  ;  lo 
que  se  ha  repetido  en  otras  ocasiones  despues  de  la  Conquista.  *  *  La 
Condamine  himself  {Journal  du  Voyage  fait  par  ordre  du  Roi  d  V  Equa- 
teury  1751,  p.  147)  mentions  eruptions  of  Pichincha  in  1538,  1577,  and 
1660.  Humboldt  (^Kosmos,  iv,  p.  266)  enumerates  eniptions  of  the 
mountain  in  1539,  1560,  1566,  1577,  1580,  and  1660.  Villasante 
(^Relacion  general,  pp.  26,  45)  alludes  to  a  violent  outbreak  in  1560  and 
to  another  in  1566.  Had  the  eruptions  of  Pichincha  in  the  sixteenth 
century  been  new,  hence  unexpected,  phenomena,  one  or  the  other  of 
the  authors  cited  would  have  stated  the  fact. 

33.  Histoire  de  Quito  (11,  p.  164)  :  **  Les  troupes  de  Pizarro  ^taient 
encore  dans  ce  pays  lorsque  survint  1' Eruption  du  volcan  de  Pichincha,  au 
pied  duquel  est  construite  la  ville  de  Quito.  On  ne  savait  pas  que  ce  fut 
un  volcan,  les  indiens  eux-memes  I'ignoraient ;  cette  Eruption  doit  done 
dtre  regard^e  comme  la  premiere." 

34.  Jos6  Toribio  Medina  (^Descubrimiento  del  Rio  de  las  Amazonas^ 
1894,  p.  Ix),  speaking  of  Francisco  Pizarro,  says:  **Cuando  supo  que 
su  amigo,  deudo  y  paisano  Gonzalo  Pizarro  habia  presentado  su  titulo  de 
gobemador  de  las  provincias  de  Quito,  en  las  que  entraban  Guayaquil  y 
Puerto  Viejo,  al  Cabildo  de  aquella  ciudad  el  i*  de  Diciembre  de  1540.** 
"  Habiendose  hecho  cargo  del  gobiemo  el  1°  de  Diciembre  de  1540'* 
(p.  Ixiii).  The  date  of  Pizarro's  departure  from  Quito  is  not  exactly 
known.  Medina  admits  (p.  Ixx)  that  the  first  of  his  soldiers  left  **al 
finalizar  el  mes  de  Febrero  de  1541."  Pizarro  himself  left  probably  in 
March  of  same  year.  The  cataclysm,  in  the  shape  of  a  violent  earth- 
quake, was  felt,  or  rather  it  is  stated  by  some  authors  that  it  was  felt,  by 


74  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  Spaniards  previous  to  their  reaching  Zumaco,  a  place  afterward  named 
Avila  and  which  Gonzalo  Pizarro  in  his  letter  to  the  King,  Sept.  3, 
1542,  places  60  leagues  from  Quito.  — Carta  de  Gonzalo  Pizarro  al  Rey^ 
fecha  en  Tomebamba  (^DescubrimientOy  etc.,  Documentos,  p.  86).  Zarate 
{Ifistoria  del  Descubrimiento^  lib.  iv,  cap.  11,  p.  493)  states :  "  Y  des- 
pues  de  haber  alii  reposado  algunos  dias  en  las  poblaciones  de  los  indios, 
sobrevino  un  tan  gran  terremoto  con  temblor  y  tempestad  de  agua  y  re- 
lampago  y  rayos  y  grandes  truenos,  que  abriendose  la  tierra  por  muchas 
partes,  se  hundieron  mas  de  quinientas  casas ;  y  tanto  creci6  im  rio  que 
alii  habia,  que  no  podian  pasar  a  buscar  comida,  d  cuya  causa  padescieron 
gran  necesidad  de  hambre. '  * 

35.  Hisioire  de  Quito  (11,  p.  164)  :  **Les  secousses  et  le  ravage 
qu'elle  occasionna  dans  la  ville  ne  furent  pas  considerables.  Dans  le  voi- 
sinage  de  cette  ville  il  lan^a  une  forte  pluie  de  pierres ;  les  effets  furent 
plus  sensibles  a  une  grande  distance,  comme  ^tait  celle  a  laquelle  se  trou- 
vait  Pizarro  avec  son  arm6e. '  *  It  is  curious  to  note  that,  while  Quito  is 
the  point  that  should  have  been  more  affected  by  an  eruption  of  Pichincha 
than  any  other,  owing  to  its  proximity,  it  was  farther  to  the  northeast, 
nearer  the  volcano  of  Antisana,  that  the  commotion  was  most  violent. 

36.  Historia general  (in  Vedia,  11,  p.  243). 

37.  This  is  so  frequently  stated  by  contemporaries  and  acquaintances 
of  Zarate  that  no  reference  to  sources  seems  necessary. 

38.  Hist,  del  DescubrimientOy  p.  493. 

39.  Carta  al  Rey,  p.  86. 

40.  Relacion  que  escribib  del  nuevo  Descubrimiento  del  famoso  rio 
grande  que  descubrib  por  muy  gran  ventura  el  Capitan  Francisco  de  Ore- 
liana  desde  su  nacimiento  hasta  salir  d  la  mar  (in  Medina,  Descubrimi- 
ento y  p.  4,  et  seq. ) . 

41.  Compare,  in  Descubrimiento ^  Toribio  de  Ortiguera,  Jornada  dei, 
Rio  MaraHon,  con  todo  lo  acaecido  en  ella  y  otras  cosas  notables  (p.  177)  ; 
and  a  number  of  testimonies  taken  concerning  the  journey. 

42.  La  Guerra  de  Chupas  (^Documentos  iniditos  para  la  Historia  de 
Espatiay  vol.  76,  cap.  xvii,  etc.  ;  also  cap.  lxxxvi,  pp.  288,  290). 

43.  Pedro  Rodriguez  de  Aguayo,  Descripcion  de  la  Ciudad  de  Quito, 
See  note  52. 

44.  Travels y  p.  264. 

45.  Humboldt,  Kosmos^  iv,  p.  284:  *'Es  hat  sich  unter  den  Einge- 
borenen  des  Hochlandes  von  Quito,  zwischen  Chambo  und  Lican, 
zwischen  den  Gebirgen  von  Condorasto  und  Cuvillan,  allgemein  die 
Sage  erhalten,  dass  der  Gipfel  des  hier  zuletzt  genannten  Vulkans  14 
Jahre  vor  dem  Einfall  von  Huayna  Capac,  dem  Sohne  des  Inca  Tupac 
Yupanqui,  nach  Ausbriichen,  die  ununterbrochen  sieben  bis  acht  Jahre 
dauerten,  eingestOrzt  sei  und  das  ganze  Plateau,  in  welchem  Neu-Rio- 
bamba  liegt,  mit  Bimstein  und  vulkanischer  Asche  bedeckt  habe.  Der 
Vulkan,  urspriinglich  hoher  als  der  Chimborazo,  wurde  in  der  Inca  oder 
Quichua-Sprache  Capac,  der  Konigoder  Fiirst  der  Berge  (Urcu),  genannt, 
weil  die  Eingeborenen  seinen  Gipfel  sich  mehr  (iber  die  untere  Schnee- 
^renze  erheben  sahen  als  bei  irgend  einem  anderen  Berge  der  Umge- 


BANDEUER]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  75 

gend."  This  collapse  of  the  Altar  appears  to  be  certain,  and  would 
have  occurred,  if  the  chronological  indications  are  approximately  reliable, 
about  the  beginning  of  the  sixteenth  or  the  end  of  the  fifteenth  century. 
It  may  be  that  Garcilasso  de  la  Vega  alludes  to  that  event.  He  states  in 
his  Conuntarios  (i,  fol.  240)  :  **  Sin  esto  huuo  grades  terremotos  y  tem- 
blores  de  tierra,  que  aunque  el  Peru  es  apassionado  desta  plaga,  notaron 
que  los  temblores  eran  mayores  que  los  ordinarios,  y  que  cayan  muchos 
cerros  altos.  De  los  Yndios  de  la  costa  supieron  que  la  mar  con  sus  cres- 
cientes  y  menguantes  salia  muchas  vezes  de  sus  terminos  comunes.  ..." 
While  Fernando  de  Montesinos  vis  not  a  very  reliable  authority,  I  still 
quote  here  what  he  states  (Memorias  antiguas  historiaUs  y  politicas  del 
Peru,  1644,  Madrid,  1882,  cap.  xxiii,  p.  136)  concerning  volcanic 
eruptions  in  Ecuador  at  the  time  of  the  Inca  Viracocha,  or,  according  to 
his  chronology  and  list  of  the  Inca  chiefs,  in  the  early  part  of  the  fifteenth 
century  :  **  Hubo  en  este  tiempo  en  aquella  provincia  del  Quito  grandes 
temblores  de  tierra  y  reventar  dos  volcanes,  que  destruyeron  muchos 
pueblos ;  el  uno  es  el  que  esta  frontero  de  Panzaleo,  cinco  leguas  de  la 
ciudad  de  San  Francisco  de  Quito ;  el  otro  es  el  que  estd  d  la  vista  de  los 
montes  de  Oyumbicho."  The  first  one  must  have  been  the  Pichincha, 
the  second  the  Antisana  or  the  Cayambe. 

46.  See  Whymper,  Travels. 

47.  See  Note  45. 

48.  See  Note  45  concerning  a  possible  eruption  of  Antisana  in  the 
early  part  of  the  fifteenth  century.  About  that  of  1620  compare  Diego 
Rodriguez  Docampo,  Descripcion  y  Relacion  del  Estado  eclesidsttco  del 
Obispado  de  San  Francisco  de  Quito,  1650  (^Rel.  geogr,,  iii,  p.  ciii). 
Humboldt,  Kosmos  (iv,  p.  360):  **  Der  Antisana  hat  einen  Feueraus- 
bruch  in  Jahre  1590  und  einen  anderen  im  Anfange  des  vorigen  Jahrhun- 
derts,  wahrscheinlich  1728,  gehabt."  He  quotes  La  Condamine,  Mesure 
des  trois premiers  degris  du  Miridien  ( 1 7 5 1 ,  p.  56 ),  as  his  authority  for  the 
statement.  The  name  applied  to  the  Antisana  in  the  latter  part  of  the 
sixteenth  century  was  **  Volcan  de  Pinta."  On  the  map  accompanying 
the  report  of  the  Conde  de  Lemus  (^Descripcion  de  la  Gobernacion  de  los 
Quixos,  1608,  Rel,  geogrdf.,  i,  between  pp.  cxii  and  cxiii)  the  Antisana 
is  represented  as  active  and  lettered  **Bolcan  de  Pinta.*'  In  the  text 
(p.  ciii)  we  find:  **Hay  vn  bolcan  en  los  confines  de  la  juridicion  de 
Quito,  que  rebent6  el  ailo  de  Mil  y  quinientos  y  nouenta  y  nu^ue  arro- 
jando  mucha  piedra  y  fuego,  tan  to  que  el  humo  dura  todavia,  de  sus  efetos 
6  naturaleza  no  se  a  sabido  cosa  memorable,  boxa  la  boca  media  legiia  y  se 
cree  que  se  puede  llegar  a  las  orillas  tiene  tan  hondo  el  centro  que  no  se 
alcanna  a  ver.  * ' 

49.  Historia  (Vedia,  i,  p.  243)  :  **  Camin6  hasto  Quijos,  que  es  al 
norte  de  Quito,  y  la  postrera  tierra  que  Guaynacapa  seftore6.  .  .  .  Estando 
en  aquel  apresur6  el  paso  hasta  Cumaco,  lugar  puesto  a  las  faldas  de  un 
volcan.'* 

50.  A  glance  at  the  map  of  Ecuador  is  sufficient  to  convince  one  of 
the  truth  of  this  assertion.  This  idea  is  not  a  new  one.  Humboldt 
already  mentioned  it  as  a  probability  {Kosmos,  vol.  iv,  p.  345,  ed.  of 


76  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

1858):  "Wenn  man  die  n6rdlichste  Gnippe  der  Reihen-Vulkane  von 
SUdamerika  in  einem  Blicke  zusammenfasst,  so  gewinnt  allerdings  die,  in 
Quito  oft  aiisgesprochene  und  durch  historische  Nachrichten  einigermassen 
begriindete  Meinung  von  der  Wanderung  der  vulkanischen  Thatigkeit  und 
Intensitats-Zunahme  von  Norden  nach  Siiden  einen  gewissen  Grad  der 
Wahrscheinlichkeit.  *  * 

51.  See  my  papers  in  the  American  Anthropologist y  1904-05. 

52.  Of  late  Ubinas  has  been  quite  active.  Its  altitude  is  generally 
given  at  about  17,000  feet.  At  night  and  from  a  distance  it  presents  the 
appearance  of  a  burning  candle.  Raimondi  (^El  Peru^  i,  p.  170)  speaks 
of  the  crater  of  Ubinas  as  ^*^  destrozado^^  and  (iii,  p.  119)  he  mentions 
the  **  volcan  apagado  de  Ubinas.'*  This  shows  that,  about  forty  years 
ago,  the  mountain  was  at  rest.  Its  lava  is  rubellitic,  whereas  that  of  Misti 
is  augitic.  I  find  no  trace  of  an  eruption  of  Ubinas  in  early  colonial  times, 
but  it  must  not  be  overlooked  that  Misti  and  Ubinas  were  formerly  fre- 
quently confounded,  and  eruptions  of  the  latter  may  therefore  have  been 
ascribed  to  the  volcano  of  Arequipa. 

53.  On  that  eruption,  see  Cobo,  Historia  del  Nuevo  Mundo  (vol.  i, 
cap.  xviii,  and  xix,  pp.  200-213).  Of  the  Ubinas  he  states:  "El  se- 
gundo  y  mas  cierto  indicio  es  ver,  que  despues  que  revent6  6ste  [the 
Omate]  no  ech6  humo  por  algunos  afios  el  volcan  de  los  Ubinas,  estando 
antes  de  continuo  humeando.  *  *  Hence  the  Ubinas  was  active  at  least  as 
late  as  the  latter  part  of  the  sixteenth  century. 

54.  ComentarioSy  i,  fol.  240. 

55.  Historia  del  Peru,  lib.  i,  p.  27  ;  cap.  11,  p.  32. 

56.  Earthquakes  at  Cuzco  have  been  frequent  and  often  violent. 
Compare  Noticias  cronologicos  del  Cuzco y  Lima,  1902,  and  Anales  del 
Cuzco y  1 90 1.  The  former  terminate  in  1600,  whereas  the  latter  include 
the  period  from  1600  to  1750. 

57.  Memorias  antiguaSy  pp.  78,  79,  et  seq. 

58.  Descriptions  of  the  extent  and  effects  of  an  earthquake,  espe- 
cially in  early  times,  are  usually  exaggerated. 

59.  Diego  Avila  Brizefio,  Descripcion y  Relacion  de  la  Provincia  de  los 
Yauyos  toda  {Pel,  geogrdficasy  i,  p.  71). 

60.  A  Narrative  of  the  Errors y  False  Gods  and  other  Superstitions 
and  Diabolical  Rites  in  which  the  Indians  of  the  Province  of  Huarochiri 
[etc.]  Lived  in  Ancient  Times  (Hakluyt  Society  Publ.,  1873,  Markham 
transl.,  p.  123 ).  The  date  is  1608,  and  a  manuscript  copy  is  in  the  Lenox 
branch  of  the  New  York  Public  Library.  The  report  is  a  fragment  only. 
In  addition  to  the  fight  between  Pariacaca  and  Guallollo  there  is  an  allu- 
sion to  earthquakes  (p.  131)  :  **They  relate  that,  a  long  time  ago,  the 
sun  disappeared  and  the  world  was  dark  for  a  space  of  five  days ;  that  the 
stones  knocked  against  each  other ;  and  that  the  mortars,  which  they  call 
Mutca,  and  the  pestles  called  Marop,  rose  against  their  masters,  who  were 
also  attacked  by  their  sheep,  both  those  fastened  in  their  houses  and  those 
in  the  fields."  On  p.  133  a  rising  of  the  sea  on  the  coast  near  Lima  is 
mentioned. 

61.  Raimondi,  El  Peru  (i,  p.  159)  states  that  the  hacienda  of  Paria- 


bahdeuer]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  77 

caca  is  the  place  where  he  experienced  the  most  severe  cold  in  all  his 
travels  in  Peru.  Brizefto,  Descripcion y  Relacion  (p.  78)  :  **  Y  del  lago 
que  nace  h^cia  la  parte  del  Oriente,  sale  un  rio  que  va  al  de  Xauxa  y  al 
Maraflon,  de  la  mar  del  Norte  ;  y  del  lago  que  distila  hicia  la  parte  del 
Poniente,  nace  el  rio  de  Lunaguana,  que  sale  cerca  de  la  villa  de  Cafietey 
a  la  mar  del  Sur,  de  la  dicha  Cordillera. ' '  The  map  accompanying  the 
report  depicts  the  Pariacaca  with  its  summit  shaped  like  a  saddle  and 
with  a  lagoon  on  each  side. 

62.  See  the  preceding  note. 

63.  Humboldt,  Vues  des  CordillereSy  etc.,  i,  p.  287. 

64.  Generally  called  "Temple of  Viracocha.** 

65.  The  word  is  Quichua :  quimsa  *  three,'  pata  '  steps.' 

66.  Squier  (^Peru,  p.  402)  calls  the  volcano  **  Haratche."  We  did 
not  hear  this  name,  as  our  stay  was  necessarily  brief.  Humboldt  (^Xos- 
mosy  IV,  p.  321)  mentions  the  volcano  as  extinct,  as  situated  near  Cacha, 
in  lat.  14°  8',  long.  73°  40',  and  gives  the  elevation  of  11,300  Parisian 
feet  (13,034  English  feet).  His  data  are  taken  from  Pentland  in  Mrs 
Sommerville*s  Physical  Geography  (vol.  i,  p.  185).  The  altitude  given 
by  Pentland  is  certainly  wrong,  even  the  village  of  Sicuani  being  about 
13,000  feet  above  the  Pacific.  Squier  (/Vr»,  p.  402)  gives  the  follow- 
ing description :  **  Beyond  the  town,  on  the  right  bank  of  the  river,  and 
rising  nearly  to  the  center  of  the  valley,  is  the  broad  and  rather  low, 
irregular  volcanic  cone  of  Haratche.  It  has  thrown  its  masses  of  lava  on 
all  sides,  partly  filling  up  the  hollow  between  it  and  the  mountains,  on 
one  hand,  and  sending  off  two  high  dykes  to  the  river,  on  the  other." 
We  were  at  Cacha  on  August  7,  1894,  and  early  the  following  day  were 
obliged  to  leave  Sicuani  precipitately  on  account  of  an  attack  on  the  place 
by  the  revolutionary  party.  On  this  occasion  the  sub-prefect  was  killed 
and  the  animals  we  had  ridden  the  day  before  were  taken  away  by  the 
raiders. 

67.  I  copy  from  my  journal  :   **  The  slopes  of  the  volcano  are  three- 
lobed,  so  that  from  the  front,  or  west,  the  crater-form  is  not  visible. 
From  the  south,  between  San  Pedro  and  San  Pablo,  the  shape  of  the  sum- 
mit is  very  distinct,  and  resembles  that  of  the  Omate,  the  concavity  of 
the  crater  being  well-marked  and  indented. 

68.  See  **  The  Cross  of  Carabuco,**  American  Anthropologist ,  1904, 
vol.  VI,  p.  599. 

69.  Primera  Parte  de  la  Cronica  (cap.  xcv,  p.  440)  :  **  Yendo  yo 
el  afto  de  1549  a  los  Charcas.** 

70.  Segunda  Parte,  cap.  v,  p.  6. 

71.  Betanzos  was  already  engaged  in  searching  for  folk-lore  of  the 
Cuzco  Indians  previous  to  1542.  In  the  latter  year  he  was  considered  an 
expert  in  Quichua.  See  Discurso  sobre  la  Descendenciay  Gobierno  de  los 
IngaSy  1542  (^  Una  Antigua  I  la  Peruana,  published  by  Espada  in  1892,  p. 
5  )  :  **  Dieron  este  cargo  a  personas  de  mucha  curiosidad  por  interpretacion 
de  Pedro  Escalante  indio  ladino  en  lengua  castellana,  el  cual  servia  a 
Vaca  de  Castro  de  interprete,  con  asistencia  de  Juan  de  Betanzos  y 
Francisco  de  Villacastin  vecinos  desta  ciudad  del  Cuzco,  personas  que 


78  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

sabian  muy  bien  la  lengua  general  deste  reino."  It  is  therefore  not 
unlikely  that  Betanzos  heard  of  the  tradition  previous  to  1540,  or  less 
than  ten  years  after  Pizarro  landed  in  Peru.  During  that  time  it  is  not 
likely  that  contact  with  the  whites  could  have  made  more  than  a  very 
slight  impression  on  Indian  folk-lore. 

72.  Suma  y  Narracioriy  cap.  11,  p.  6. 

73.  What  we  took  for  a  pond  is  decribed  by  Betanzos  as  a  brook. 
Squier  (/Vr«,  p.  402)  states :  "At  the  upper  end  of  this  space,  which 
has  been  widened  by  terracing  up  against  the  lava  fields,  and  piling  back 
the  rough  fragments  on  each  other,  is  a  copious  spring,  sending  out  a 
considerable  stream.  It  has  been  carefully  walled  in  with  cut  stones,  and 
surrounded  with  terraces,  over  the  edges  of  which  it  falls,  in  musical 
cataracts,  into  a  large  artificial  pond  or  reservoir  covering  several  acres, 
in  which  grow  aquatic  plants,  and  in  which  water-birds  find  convenient 
refuge. ' '  Our  time  was  too  short  to  permit  us  to  investigate  these  arti- 
ficial beauties,  if  they  still  exist. 

74.  Herrera  (^Historia  generaly  etc.,  1729,  vol.  11,  d6c.  v,  p.  61) 
follows  Cieza.  Gregorio  Garcia  {^Origen  de  los  Indios^  1729,  p.  33) 
copies  Betanzos. 

75.  Relacion  de  Antiguedades  deste  Reyno  del  Piru  (  Tres  R e lactones y 

P-  237). 

76.  Cachapucara  means,   in  Quicha,   *  the  strong  or  well -guarded 

site  (fortified  place)  of  Cacha.*  This  alludes  to  an  ancient  village  higher 
up  than  the  actual  locality,  which  is  in  the  valley  and  has  little,  if  any, 
natural  protection. 

77.  The  eruption  must  have  been  anterior  to  the  fifteenth  century, 
since  Inca  tradition,  as  well  as  the  tales  concerning  Viracocha,  mention 
it  as  having  occurred  in  very  ancient  times.  The  large  buildings,  now  in 
ruins,  having  been  constructed  probably  at  the  end  of  the  fourteenth 
century,  it  is  likely  that  Cachapucara  was  a  settlement  distinct  from  the 
Cacha  of  to-day. 

78.  Juan  de  Ulloa  Mogollon,  etc.,  Relacion  de  la  Provincia  de  los 
Collaguas  para  la  descripcion  de  las  Yndias  que  Su  Magestad  manda  hacer 
{Rel.  geogr,y  vol.  11,  p.  40). 

79.  Raimondi,  El  Peru  (i,  p.  169)  :  *'  Cuya  naturaleza  volcanica 
pude  reconocer  mas  tarde  contemplandolos  de  cerca,  .  .  .*'  (p.  237): 
*  *  Desde  Huayllura  se  di visa  en  la  otra  banda  del  rio  el  grande  nevado  de 
Solimana,  el  cual  formaba  en  otra  6poca  con  el  Coropuna,  el  Sahuanqqueya, 
el  Chachani  y  el  Misti,  una  elevada  cadena  volcanica  que  ha  sido  cortada 
por  los  rios  de  Ocofta,  Mages  y  Chile. '  * 

80.  The  altitude  of  Koropuna  has  been  determined  from  an  excellent 
base  by  Don  Mariano  Bustamante  y  Barreda  and  found  to  be  more  than 
23,000  feet.  Compare  my  Observaciones  sobre  medidas  hipsomitricas  en  las 
Cordilleras  de  Bolivia  (^E studios  de  Orografia  andina^  by  Manuel  Vicente 
Ballivian,  La  Paz,  1900,  p.  75  ).     Raimondi,  Peruy  i,  pp.  169,  237. 

81.  Segunda  Parte  de  la  Cronica  del  Peru,  p.  112. 

82.  Peru,  I,  p.  169,  237. 

83.  Cieza  has  1549,  which  must  be  a  misprint. 


BANDKUER]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  79 

84.  Relacion  del  Obispado  de  Arequipa^  December  15,  1649  C-^^^- 
geogr.y  II,  p.  xviii).  The  occasional  appearance  of  thin  smoke  above  the 
crater  of  Misti  has  been  mentioned  to  me,  among  others,  by  a  most  relia- 
ble authority,  Prof.  S.  J.  Bailey,  in  charge  of  the  observatory  at  Arequipa. 
In  the  book  entitled  Arequipa ^  by  Don  Jorge  Polar,  1891,  mention  is 
made  (p.  47)  of  a  work  by  Father  Travada,  El  suelo  de  Arequipa  conver- 
tido  en  cielo,  in  which  reference  is  made  to  a  manuscript  of  the  Domini- 
can Fray  Alvaro  Melendez,  narrating  an  expedition  to  Misti  on  May  i, 
1677;  also  (p.  50)  an  allusion  to  what  must  have  been  a  slight  eruption 
on  March  28,  1677  :  **  En  la  obra  del  P.  Travada  que  hemos  citado  en 
otro  lugar,  dice,  al  referirse  al  manuscrito  del  P.  Melendez  :  que  el  28  de 
Marzo  de  1677  se  not6  en  Arequipa  una  densa  nube  de  humo  que  coronaba 
toda  la  cumbre  del  volcan,  que  fue  reconocida  por  la  expedicion  que  man- 
daron  los  Cabildos  Eclesiastico  y  Real,  la  cual  confirm6  que  era  humo  de 
azufre,  y  vi6  en  el  crater  muchas  aberturas  de  donde  salia,  divisando  por 
dos  de  ellas,  las  mayores,  unas  como  llamas  de  fuego.  En  otro  lugar 
refiere,  que  *  Otra  expedicion  de  los  licenciados  don  Pedro  Portugal  y 
don  Sebastian  Hemani,  curas  de  Andahuaylas  y  Cabafia,  que  vieron  lo 
mismo,  conjuraron  aquel  seno. ' '  Polar  mentions  a  strong  emission  of  smoke 
in  November,  1874,  and  adds  that  a  photographic  view  of  the  smoking 
mountain  was  then  taken.  Otherwise,  early  data  concerning  Misti  are 
very  contradictory,  and  there  is  manifestly  a  confusion  between  that  peak, 
the  Ubinas,  and  the  Omate. 

85.  Primera  Parte  de  la  Cronica,  (cap.  Lxxvi,  p.  425):  **Cerca 
de  ella  hay  un  volcan,  que  algunos  temen  no  reviente  y  haga  algun  dafio. 
En  algunos  tiempos  hace  en  esta  ciudad  grandes  temblores  de  tierra. ' ' 

86.  Historia  del  Colegio  de  la  CompaHia  de  Jesus  de  Arequipa  y  reven- 
tazon  del  volcan  de  Omate  (MS.  in  the  National  Library  at  Lima,  fol.  8). 

87.  Ibid.  **  Es  fama  que  este  bolcan  en  tiempos  pasados  vomito  fuego 
y  tierra  pomes  y  que  vino  a  dar  en  agua.  Aora  no  se  saue  que  eche  de 
si  cosa.*' 

88.  Ibid.  (fol.  24):  **  Yavn  se  dijo  que  algunos  hechizeros  sacrificaron 
cameros  al  Volcan  porque  no  los  hundiesse  y  que  hablaron  con  el  de- 
monio  que  les  dezia  las  tempestades  que  auia  de  auer  y  como  el  uolcan  de 
Omate  se  auia  querido  concertar  con  el  de  arequipa  para  destruir  a  los 
espaftoles  y  como  el  de  arequipa  respondiese  quel  no  podia  venir  en  ello 
por  ser  Xpano  y  llamarse  S.  franc*  quel  de  Omate  solo  se  esforzaua  por 
salir  con  este  yntento. ' ' 

89,  Historia  del  Colegio  (MS.,  fol.  27)  has  a  good  description  of 
Omate  in  the  year  1600,  after  the  great  eruption  :  **  Rematase  en  lo  alto 
con  vnas  puntas  por  la  parte  de  afuera  de  suerte  que  haze  vna  como  forma 
de  corona  y  en  medio  del  se  leuanta  otra  punta  menos  alta  que  las  de  las 
orillas  que  tendra  de  vulto  como  vna  mediana  yglesia  y  aqui  tiene  la  boca. 
Llamanie  los  indies  chiqui  Omate  denominado  de  vn  puertecillo  pequeiio 
que  tiene  a  la  rraiz,  llamanie  tanvien  Guayna  putina  que  quiere  decir 
volcan  mo^o  o  nueuo.  Porque  a  poco  que  echa  fuego.  Otros  lo  llaman 
Choque  putina  ques  lo  mismo  que  Uolcan  de  mal  aguero." 

90.  Relacion  de  AntigUedades  {j^.  278).     The  **Potina**  is  almost 


8o  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

certainly  the  ''  Huayna  Putina/'  hence  it  may  be  an  allusion  to  a  pre- 
columbian  eruption  of  the  **  Ornate."  The  other  one,  "lower  down 
than  Guamanga,"  may  be  one  of  the  extinct  or  slumbering  volcanoes  of 
the  Solimana  or  Koropuna  group.     See  note  70. 

91.  Torres  Rubio,  Arte  y  Vocabulario  de  la  Lengua  Quichua  (fol. 
155)  has  (acaca,  *huesos  de  muerto.'  The  word  seems  to  be  Aymari. 
Bertonio,  Vocabulario  (11,  p.  304)  has  **  Sacaca  —  Vna  exalacion  ign6a 
propriamente,  que  aun  de  dia  suele  verse  algunas  vezes.  Sacaca  kali — 
Exalacion  de  fuego  tambien,  que  de  noche  parece  que  corre  de  vna  estrella 
a  otra. ' '  The  definition  is  rather  indefinite,  hence  the  allusion  of  Espada 
to  comets  is  not  to  be  altogether  rejected. 

92.  Rdacion  (p.  279):  **A1  fin  el  dicho  Pachacutiyngayupangui 
haze  la  entrada  y  conquista  de  los  Condesuyos  con  cien  mill  hombres,  y 
entonces  la  uaca  de  Cafiacuay  se  arde  fuego  temerario,  y  no  los  consiente 
passar  la  gente. ' ' 

93.  Memorias  antiguas  historiaUs y  politicas  del  Peru  (pp.  78,  79). 

94.  See  Note  45. 

95.  At  least  not  of  volcanic  origin.  The  mass  of  the  Karka  Jake  or 
Huayna  Potosi  is  of  syenite.  Silurian  rocks  form,  so  far  as  known,  the 
crest  or  ridge  of  the  Cordillera. 

96.  The  altitudes  of  these  peaks  are  yet  imperfectly  determined,  and 
all  that  has  been  ascertained  is  limited  to  approximations.  That  one  or 
the  other  of  them,  like  Sajama  for  instance,  is  taller  than  the  highest  peak 
of  the  eastern  Andes  is  likely. 

97.  The  Isluga,  OUagua,  Licancaur,  and  several  more,  are  mentioned 
on  maps  of  Chile  as  volcanoes,  and  some  of  them  are  at  least  intermit- 
tently active. 

98.  Segunda  Parte  de  la  Crdnica^  p.  6. 

99.  I  have  this  definition  from  my  friend  Don  Agustin  Tovar,  of 
Puno. 

100.  This  great  commotion  is  so  frequently  mentioned  that  no  refer- 
ence to  authorities  is  required. 

10 1.  Especially  on  the  east  side  of  Lake  Titicaca. 

102.  I  have  this  on  the  authority  of  Mr  John  Minchin,  a  Scottish 
engineer  of  great  reliability. 

103.  Mr  Frederick  Frank,  for  many  years  a  resident  of  Kamata,  a 
village  at  the  foot  of  Tuanani,  assured  me,  by  letter,  that  to  his  knowledge 
and  that  of  the  oldest  inhabitants  the  mountain  had  never  shown  any  trace 
of  volcanic  activity.  We  saw  it  from  the  heights  about  Charassani  as  a 
considerable  elevation  crowned  by  a  serrated  ridge. 

104.  New  Mexico  and  Arizona  also  have  a  number  of  ancient  craters 
and  lava-streams,  but  there  is  hardly  any  authentic  recollection  of  vol- 
canic disturbances. 

105.  Historia  de  Chile  desde  su  Descubrimiento  hasta  el  aHo  de  IJTS 
(^Historiadores primitivos  de  Chile,  vol.  11,  cap.  i,  p.  i)  :  **  Hai  asimesmo 
por  la  Cordillera  muchos  volcanes  por  toda  ella  que  echan  fuego  de  si  de 
ordinario,  y  mas  en  el  inuiemo  que  en  el  verano.  *  * 

lo6«  Historica  Relacion  del Reyno  de  Chile,  lib.  i,  cap.  vi,  p.  15. 


BANDEUER]  PRECOLUMBIAN  EARTHQUAKES  8 1 

107.  Historia  geogrdfica,  natural  y  civil  del  Reino  de  Chile  (^HisL 
primitivos  de  Chile ^  vol.  xiv,  p.  64).     Peteroa,  "este  antique  volcano" 

(p.  322). 

108.  La  Aravcana  (ed.  of  1735,  parte  primera,  canto  xv,  fol.  79)  : 

«  Y  assi  la  firme  tierra  removida, 

Tiembla,  i  ai  terremotos  tan  vsados, 

Derribando  en  los  Pueblos,  i  Montafias 

Hombres,  Ganados,  Casas,  i  Cabaflas.'* 
(fol.  139. )  <*  La  yniarica,  i  el  Volcan  fogoso/' 

(fol.  173. )  "  Pas6  de  Villarica  el  fertil  Lllano, 

Que  tiene  al  Sur  el  gran  Volcan  vecino, 

Fragua  (segun  afirman)  de  Vulcano, 

Que  regoldando  fuego  est&  contino.'' 

109.  Descripcion  de  las  Provincias  de  Santiago  i  Concepcion  (^Hist, 
primitivos  de  Chile,  vol.  xi,  p.  310). 

no.  Historia  geogrdfica,  natural y  civil  de  Chile,  lib.  vi,  p.  322. 

Ill,  So,  for  instance,  P.  Miguel  de  Olivarez,  S.  J.,  Historia  military 
civil  y  sagrada  de  Chile  (eighteenth  century,  p.  53  ;  in  vol.  iv  of  His- 
toriadores  primitivos).  Juan  Ignazio  Molina,  S.  J.,  Saggio  su  la  Storia 
Civile  dell  Chile  (1782,  fol.  87).  The  latter  has  "Thegtheg''  instead 
of '*Tenten.*' 

American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
New  York  City. 


AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S  , 


8-6 


TANG'-GA,  A  PHILIPPINE  PA-MA'-TO^  GAME 

By  albert  ERNEST  JENKS 

Almost  everywhere  in  the  vacant  roadsides  and  yards  of  Manila, 
and  up  and  down  the  island  of  Luzon,  little  groups  of  native  Fili- 
pinos may  be  seen  playing  games  with  coins.  Bareheaded,  usually 
barefooted,  wearing  only  thin  trousers  and  thinner  shirts,  with  a 
cigarette  between  the  teeth,  in  the  hand,  or  tucked  over  the  ear, 
these  men  and  boys  gamble  by  the  hour,  almost  as  industriously 
as  the  Manila  "  Chino  "  works. 

The  audience,  like  the  players,  is  made  up  of  unemployed  peo- 
ple, and  such  onlookers  usually  sit  on  the  ground  by  the  hour 
squatting,  animal-like,  on  their  feet,  resting  their  haunches  on  their 
heels.  The  groups  of  black -haired,  unbumished-bronze-skinned 
people  are  passive  and  indolent,  save  for  the  stooping  figures  of  the 
players  which  move  slowly  back  and  forth  in  the  game. 

In  the  various  barrios  and  districts  of  the  present  composite  city 
of  Manila  different  games  seem  to  hold  sway.  The  game  of  pal'-ma 
is  played  more  in  the  Walled  City  than  elsewhere,  because,  appar- 
ently, the  narrow  streets  with  the  abutting  buildings  give  the  verti- 
cal walls  necessary  for  playing  the  game.  Ermita  favors  the  game 
of  tang'-ga  —  why,  I  do  not  know. 

Tang'-ga  is  a  game  of  skill  —  a  test  of  a  simple  coordination  of 
the  hand  and  eye  —  yet  there  is  in  it  enough  of  chance,  of  the  frown 
and  smile  of  fortune,  to  make  it  a  gambling  game.  At  times,  when 
money  is  scarce  or  time  hangs  heavily,  friends  play  simply  for 
pleasure. 

Tang'-ga  is  played  on  the  earth.  A  bare  spot  free  of  sticks, 
pebbles,  and  loose  sand  is  chosen  —  preferably  a  surface  of  clay  or 

1  Pa-maf-to  is  the  Tagalog  name  of  the  coin,  stone,  piece  of  pottery,  or  other  thing 
tossed,  flipped,  pitched,  or  thrown  in  playing  various  games.  Among  other  games  it  is 
employed  in  the  Tagalog  games  of  ka-la-ho^ -yo^  ba-tong^ ia-pit^ ,  pi-kt/^  and  tang'-ga ;  it  is 
also  used  in  the  Spanish  game  of  cara  y  cruz^  and  in  the  game  of  paV-ma^  which  is  said 
to  be  of  Chinese  origin. 

82 


JENKS]  A   PHILIPPINE   GAME  83 

compact  loam.  A  surface  fifteen  feet  in  diameter  is  all  that  is  ever 
employed,  and  half  this  size  is  as  large  as  necessary.  The  players 
number  from  two  to  five,  though  two  or  three  play  much  more  fre- 
quently than  do  four,  and  five  complicate  the  game. 

The  essentials  for  a  game  of  tang'-ga  are  a  tan-ge'-ro  (spelled 
"  tanguero  "  in  Tagalog),  two  pa-ma' -tos  for  each  contestant,  and  the 
coins  for  the  winning  of  which  the  game  is  played.  The  tan-ge'-ro 
is  a  small  cylindrical  piece  of  pottery,  stone,  or  wood,  about  half 
an  inch  in  height  and  diameter ;  it  is  placed  on  one  of  its  flat  faces 
on  the  ground,  and  serves  as  a  pedestal  or  base  on  which  the  players 
stack  their  coins.  A  rough,  yet  serviceable,  tang-ge'ro  may  usually 
be  picked  up  readily  when  a  game  is  desired,  as  the  tang-ge'-ro  is 
often  left  where  last  used,  and  the  game  is  played  repeatedly  on  the 
same  spot  of  smooth  earth.  But  most  tang'-ga  players  possess  and 
carry  a  tang-ge'ro  as  they  do  their  two  pa-ma'tos. 

Tang'-ga  is  most  frequently  played  for  copper  coins  —  Straits 
Settlements'  one  cent,  the  Hong  Kong  one  cent,  the  Spanish  dos 
centimos  and  cinco  centimos,  the  Philippine  un  cuarto  and  dos 
cuartos,  the  one  cent  of  the  United  States :  any  and  all  of  the  dozen 
or  more  coppers  current  in  the  islands.  But  nickel  and  silver 
coins  are  also  played  for  up  to  the  value  of  the  Mexican  and  Phil- 
ippine pesos.  ^ 

When  the  players  assemble  for  the  game,  the  tang-ge'-ro  is  placed 
on  the  ground,  and  the  coins  of  the  contestants  are  stacked  up  on 
top  of  it,  the  players  standing  near.  One  of  them  pitches  one  of  his 
pa-ma' -tos  on  the  ground,  six  or  eight  feet  distant.  Each  contestant, 
including  the  owner  of  this  first  pa-ma'-to,  tries  to  pitch  another  as 
close  as  possible  to  this  first  one ;  and  the  order  of  playing  is  deter- 
mined by  the  relative  nearness  of  each  player's  pa-ma'-to  to  the  one 
first  pitched. 

When  the  order  of  precedence  is  thus  fixed  the  players  stand 
at  a  line  six  to  twelve  feet  from  the  tang-ge'-ro,  and  each  in  turn 
pitches  his  two  pa-ma' -tos. 

Considerable  skill  may  be  displayed  in  pitching  the  pa-ma'-to.    It 

1  This  article  was  written  before  the  U.  S.  Philippine  Commission  adopted  the  new 
Philippine  currency.  None  of  the  above-mentioned  coins  is  now  legal  currency  in  the 
Philippines. 


84 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


should  be  held  lying  flat  on  the  side  of  the  middle  finger,  covering  the 
first  joint,  and  in  nearly  a  horizontal  position.  The  rim  of  the  pa- 
ma'-to  is  held  at  opposite  edges,  between  the  bulbs  of  the  thumb  and 
first  finger.  The  arm  is  extended  at  full  length  toward  the  tang- 
ge'-ro,  where  it  is  poised  a  second  to  steady  the  nerves  and  "take 

aim  ";  the  body  is  bent  forward  at  the  waist 
almost  to  a  right  angle  with  the  legs,  and 
it  remains  in  this  position  until  the  pa-ma'- 
to  is  pitched.  From  the  position  of  "  aim  ** 
the  straight  arm,  with  hand  fully  extended, 
passes  backward  at  the  side  of  and  behind 
the  body,  where  it  again  briefly  poises  ;  it 
is  then  thrust  forward  full  length  toward 
the  pile  of  coins,  and  the  pa-ma' -to  is  freed 
by  the  least  opening  of  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger, and  is  sent  on  its  flight. 

A  player  wins  when  one  of  the  coins 
at  stake  has  been  knocked  completely  free 
from  the  tang-ge'-ro  to  the  ground  and  lies 
closer  to  his  pa-ma'-to  than  to  the  tang- 
ge'-ro,  and  is  also  nearer  to  his  pa-ma'-to 
than  to  anyone's  else.  Such  a  coin  is  picked  up  immediately  by  its 
winner,  even  though  the  player  has  pitched  but  one  pa-ma'-to. 

Diagram  i  presents  a  tang'-ga  ground  with  the^'-A^/  (the  Taga- 
log  word  for  line  —  the  "taw**  line),  and  the  coins  stacked  on  top 
of  the  tang-ge'-ro  ;  no  plays  have  yet  been  made. 

Diagram  11  represents,  in  addition,  the  positions  of  the  four  pa- 
ma' -tos  of  two  players.  These  pa-ma'-tos  were  unsuccessfully 
pitched,  since  none  of  the  stacked  coins  was  knocked  to  the 
ground.  When  such  a  play  has  been  made,  each  player  picks  up 
his  pa-ma'-tos,  and  the  order  of  the  playing  is  redetermined,  as 
one  "game"  has  been  played. 

Diagram  in  represents  an  unsuccessful  play  of  a  new  game. 
One  coin,  marked  i,  has  been  struck  from  the  top  of  the  pile,  but 
it  does  not  lie  flat  on  the  ground. 

A  game  terminates  in  one  of  two  ways :  First,  as  in  diagram  11, 
where  each  player  has  pitched  his  pa-ma'-tos  without  knocking  any 


Diagram  I 


JENKS] 


A  PHILIPPINE   GAME 


85 


coin  from  the  pile ;  and,  second,  after  all  the  coins  have  been  won. 
So  diagram  in  represents  only  the  result  of  an  unsuccessful  play  of 
a  game. 


0 
0 

0 

0  0 

(g>0 
0 

0    ^0 
0 

II 


III 


IV 


VI 


VII 


Diagram  iv  represents  a  play  by  which  pa-ma' -to  a  wins  coin  i, 
while  pa-ma'-tos  a',  b,  b'  do  not  win.  If  the  owner  of  pa-ma' -tos 
B  and  b'  were  to  play  next,  the  owner  of  a  and  a'  would  leave  his 
pa-ma'-tos  on  the  ground  during  the  play  of  his  opponent,  since  if  a 


86  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

coin  was  knocked  close  to  either  a  or  a',  as  are  coins  2  and  4, 
respectively,  in  diagram  v,  it  would  belong  to  the  owner  of  A  and  a'. 

In  diagram  v  coin  3  belongs  to  b'  ;  but  coin  i  does  not  fall  to 
either  player,  as  it  is  nearer  the  tang-ge'-ro  than  to  any  pa-ma' -to. 
B  does  not  win.     A  wins  coin  2,  and  a'  wins  coin  4. 

In  diagram  vi  is  shown  a  play  such  as  might  result  had  pa- 
ma'tos  A,  a',  and  b  been  pitched  without  winning,  and  had  b' 
knocked  the  tang-ge'-ro  completely  from  under  the  stack  of  coins, 
scattering  them  all  on  the  ground.  In  this  diagram  a  wins  coins  i 
and  2 ;  a'  wins  coin  5  ;  b'  wins  coins  3  and  4 ;  b  wins  nothing ; 
while  coin  6  is  not  won,  since  it  is  nearer  to  the  tang-ge'-ro  than  it 
is  to  any  pa-ma' -to. 

Diagram  vii  represents  the  result  of  the  skill  of  a  very  success- 
ful player.  Such  plays  are  often  seen  at  a  tang'-ga  game  ;  the  same 
result  may  be  accomplished  in  two  ways.  The  first  pa-ma'-to  is 
pitched  near  the  stack  of  coins,  and  the  second  knocks  the  tang- 
ge'-ro  a  considerable  distance  from  under  the  pile  ;  or  the  first  pa- 
ma'-to  knocks  out  and  carries  away  the  tang-ge'-ro,  while  the  second 
is  pitched  near  the  fallen  coins.  In  such  a  game  the  opposing 
player  does  not  even  have  a  chance  to  play ;  the  first  one  wins  all 
the  coins  and  the  game  is  finished. 

Pa-ma' tos  are  often  especially  prepared  for  playing  tang'ga,  and 
such  are  held  at  more  than  face  value.  One  of  the  set  is  smooth 
and  flat  so  that  it  will  glide  along  the  ground  with  least  resistance. 
It  is  called  pan-da! ta  in  Tagalog,  and  is  used  to  knock  the  tang- 
ge'ro  from  under  the  pile  of  coins.  The  other  pa-ma' to  in  the  set 
is  called  pa-nlng-kat'  ;  by  pounding  and  filing  it  is  made  concavo- 
convex  (pi.  x).  It  is  the  one  used  when  the  player  wishes  his  pa-ma' to 
to  win  out  by  landing  and  remaining  close  to  the  coveted  coin.  When 
the  pa-nlng-kat'  is  properly  released  it  shoots  out  from  between  the 
tips  of  the  thumb  and  finger  and  strikes  the  earth  on  its  rim,  and 
may  be  depended  on  to  remain  within  three  or  four  inches  of  where 
it  first  strikes.  When  pitched  by  a  skillful  player  the  pa-n!ng-kat' 
seldom  bounds  or  rolls  at  all ;  it  strikes  the  earth,  falls  forward  on 
its  concave  face,  and  stops.  However,  no  effort  is  made  to  control 
the  stopping  place  of  the  pan-da'ta.  It  is  pitched  with  more  force 
than  is  the  pa-nlng-kat',  strikes  the  earth  flat  on  its  face  a  few  inches 


JENKS]  A  PHILIPPINE   GAME  87 

in  front  of  the  pile  of  coins,  and  is  supposed  to  clip  the  tang-ge'ro 
from  under  the  pile,  carry  it  some  inches  or  some  feet  distant,  and 
come  to  rest  when  and  where  it  may  happen. 

Such  is  Philippine  tang'-ga  —  a  game  developing  a  low  order  of 
skill  which  seems  valueless  in  any  worthier  pursuit.  As  a  game  for 
healthful  Filipino  amusement  it  answers  its  purpose,  in  that  it  has 
enough  of  chance  to  arouse  the  player's  interest,  and  yet  such  in- 
terest manifests  itself  in  so  unexplosive  a  way  that  it  is  not  trying  or 
exhausting.  The  game  seems  in  every  way  the  legitimate  child  of 
a  people  of  the  tropics ;  its  natural  habitat  is  the  shady  side  of  a 
building  blistering  in  the  southern  sun. 

Elroy, 

Wisconsin. 


THE  SUN'S   INFLUENCE   ON   THE   FORM 

OF   HOPI   PUEBLOS* 

By  J.  WALTER   FEWKES 

In  a  valuable  memoir  on  Pueblo  architecture*  Mr  Victor  Min- 
delefT  first  called  attention  to  the  arrangement  of  houses  in  Hopi 
pueblos  in  parallel  rows  separated  by  courts  or  plazas.  He  might 
have  added  that  these  rows  of  houses,  as  their  parallelism  infers, 
are  oriented  in  a  uniform  direction  without  regard  to  the  configura- 
tion of  the  mesa  on  which  they  are  situated.  The  object  of  this 
article  is  to  suggest  the  cause  of  this  uniform  arrangement  and  ori- 
entation, and  to  discuss  its  influence  on  clan  localization.  I  shall 
also  consider  historic  modifications  of  pueblos  of  this  tribe  produced 
by  the  accession  of  new  clans  as  recounted  in  legends.  My  discus- 
sion will  be  limited  to  the  villages  on  the  East  Mesa,  called  Walpi, 
Sichomovi,  and  Hano,  restricting  the  consideration  to  the  time  they 
have  stood  on  their  present  sites,  or,  roughly  speaking,  to  the  last 
three  centuries.  The  thesis  that  I  seek  to  defend  is  as  follows : 
The  arrangement  and  orientation  of  houses  in  Hopi  pueblos  are 
largely  due  to  an  attempt  to  secure  sunny  exposures  for  entrances 
and  terraces  and  consequent  protection  from  cold  and  wind.  The 
facts  discussed,  like  many  others  before  the  ethnogeographer,  illus- 
trate the  influence  of  climatic  or  environmental  conditions  on  human 
culture  development. 

It  may  lead  to  a  better  understanding  of  the  discussion  if  I  point 
out  in  the  beginning  that  a  modification  has  taken  place  in  certain 
architectural  features  of  Hopi  houses  since  contact  with  Eurdpeans. 
Little  change  has  occurred  in  the  forms  of  the  buildings  or  the  mode 
of  construction  of  their  walls  —  indeed  the  pueblo  has  profoundly 
influenced  the  Mexican  house  builder  in  that  particular — but  the 
relative  position  of  entrances,  especially  those  of  the  lower  story,  is 


*  Read  before  the  Association  of  Geographers,  New  York,  December,  1905. 
^Eighth  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology  ^  Washington,  1 89 1. 

88 


FKWKES]  SUN'S  INFLUENCE  ON  HOPI  PUEBLOS  89 

radically  difTerent  in  old  and  new  Hopi  houses.  An  examination  of 
ruins  that  antedate  the  arrival  of  Europeans  shows  a  total  absence 
of  doorways  in  the  walls  of  basal  rooms,  the  entrances  being  uni- 
versally hatchways  or  openings  in  the  roof  to  which  one  mounted 
by  a  ladder.  The  chamber  of  the  second  story,  however,  was  en- 
tered through  the  side  wall  from  the  roof  of  the  lowest  story.  In 
both  old  and  new  houses  lateral  entrances  are  essential  features  of 
higher  rooms,  an  arrangement  that  imparts  to  a  four-storied  pueblo, 
like  Walpi,  a  terraced  form.  The  roofs  or  terraces  of  a  pueblo  habi- 
tation are  customarily  used  by  the  inhabitants  in  daily  occupations 
almost  as  much  as  the  rooms  themselves,  for  exposure  to  the  sun 
and  protection  from  cold  winds  are  especially  desirable  in  these 
places. 

These  roof  terraces  and  lateral  doorways,  ancient  and  modem, 
as  a  rule  are  situated  on  the  same  side  of  the  houses  :  their  orientation 
is  generally  south  or  east  or  somewhere  between  these  two  directions. 
The  axis  of  a  row  of  such  houses  is  naturally  at  right  angles  to  this 
orientation,  or  approximately  north  by  south.  Let  us  analyze  the 
probable  cause  that  has  led  to  the  union  of  houses  in  rows  and  aim 
to  discover  the  origin  of  their  growth  in  this  direction  rather  than 
in  any  other. 

Starting  with  a  single  habitation  housing  one  clan  or  family  as  a 
nucleus,  suppose  that  this  clan  by  marriage  of  eligible  daughters  is 
rapidly  increasing  and  the  maternal  house  is  not  ample  to  accom- 
modate the  increased  family.  In  other  words,  the  family  has  out- 
grown its  original  house,  and  it  has  become  necessary  to  build  new 
rooms  to  the  old  rather  than  to  construct  new  dwellings.  These 
rooms  may  be  built  on  the  sides,  or,  if  space  allows,  on  the  roof  of 
the  mother's  house.  It  is  evident  that  there  are  limitations  to  the 
capacity  of  the  roof,  and  additions  to  two  of  the  four  sides  are  unde- 
sirable for  the  reason  that  a  room  constructed  on  the  east  or  south 
walls  would  exclude  the  sun  with  its  warmth  from  the  matenial 
house,  while  one  on  the  opposite  (west  or  north)  sides  would  be 
equally  undesirable,  as  the  sun  would  be  shut  out,  thus  exposing 
the  dwelling  to  the  cold.  The  northwest  and  southeast  walls  are 
advantageous  for  additions  to  the  parental  abode,  since  they  permit 
the  new  habitations  to  have  heliotropic  exposures  without  interfering 


90  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [x.  s.,  8,  1906 

with  that  of  buildings  already  standing.  Similar  restrictions  also 
governed  the  addition  of  subsequent  rooms  made  necessar}*^  by  family 
increase,  these  increments  always  tending  to  enlarge  the  row  in  a 
northwest  or  southeast  direction  and  to  restrict  growth  at  right  angles 
to  this  axis.  As  time  went  on  the  topography  of  the  mesa  may  have 
necessitated  a  new  site  and  another  house  nucleus.  Commonly  this 
happened  when  new  clans  joined  the  pueblo.  Each  incoming  family 
was  assigned  a  site  for  its  dwelling,  but  this  site  seldom  adjoined 
houses  already  standing.  After  this  addition  had  erected  its  first 
house  the  law  of  heliotropism  regulating  the  position  of  terraces  and 
growth  of  rows  of  houses  became  operative,  eventually  leading  to 
parallelism  in  the  rows  of  rooms  already  existing.  It  will  thus  be 
seen  that  the  arrangement  of  houses  in  rows  extending  north  and 
south,  or  approximately  in  these  directions,  was  not  fortuitous  but 
was  due  to  the  position  of  the  sun  and  to  human  effort  in  obtain- 
ing a  heliotropic  exposure  for  the  maximum  number  of  terraces.  It 
is  instructive  to  consider  the  bearing  of  legends  and  the  localization 
of  clans  in  the  modem  pueblos  on  this  theory,  and  for  this  purpose 
we  will  begin  our  studies  with  the  Tewa  pueblo  of  Hano. 

Growth  of  Hano 

Hano  was  founded  on  its  present  site  about  the  beginning  of 
the  eighteenth  century  by  Tewa  clans  from  Chewadi,  a  pueblo  in 
the  Rio  Grande  valley  of  New  Mexico.  Legends  gathered  from 
the  present  inhabitants  declare  that  Hano  (pi.  xi)  was  developed 
from  three  originally  independent  building  centers  or  nuclei  of 
growth  that  later  grew  together  by  natural  extension.  These 
centers  of  growth  may  be  designated,  from  the  clans  that  built  and 
first  inhabited  them,  the  Tobacco-Corn,  the  Cloud-Sand,  and  the 
Katcina  houses.  In  the  beginning  the  Tobacco-Corn  habitation 
housed  three  clans  in  as  many  rooms  placed  side  by  side  with  ter- 
races facing  eastward.  These  rooms  were  inhabited  by  the  Tobacco, 
Com,  and  Bear  families.  The  form  of  this  triple-room  house  was 
changed  in  the  first  or  second  generation  by  an  unequal  growth  of 
these  three  clans.  The  Tobacco  and  Com  families  were  vigorous, 
increasing  rapidly  in  numbers,  while  the  Bear  people  remained 
stationary  or  declined.     The  present  localization  of  rooms  in  this 


FKWKES]  SUJr  S  J  NFL  UENCE  ON  HOP  I  PUEBL  OS  9 1 

part  of  Hano  shows  clearly  the  effect  of  this  unequal  growth. 
Commencing  with  their  two  rooms,  the  increase  of  the  Com  and  To- 
bacco families  led  first  to  the  construction  of  additional  upper 
stories,  but  growth  in  this  direction  soon  ceased  by  reason  of  the 
limited  surface,  hence  it  became  necessary  to  enlarge  this  roof  area 
by  lateral  additions.  The  Bear  house  prevented  growth  on  the 
northeast,  and  absence  of  sun  made  the  northwest  side  undesirable ; 
but  two  other  sides  were  available  —  the  east  and  the  south  —  and 
the  cluster  was  forced  to  grow  in  these  directions.  Let  us  consider 
the  details  of  this  growth. 

The  Tobacco-Corn  group  of  rooms  in  Hano  is  the  first  on  the 
right  at  the  head  of  the  trail  entering  that  village.  Two  doorways 
are  seen  as  one  passes  the  kiva  and  turns  toward  this  cluster.  That 
to  the  right  enters  the  room  of  the  most  famous  potter  of  the  Hopi, 
Nampeo,  of  the  Com  clan.  The  adjacent  chamber,  that  which 
opens  to  the  left,  belongs  to  Okun,  of  the  Tobacco  clan.  Both  of 
these  rooms  were  constructed  less  than  twenty  years  ago  and  lie  in 
front  or  to  the  east  of  the  original  rooms  of  their  respective  clans. 
An  examination  of  the  rear  walls  of  the  new  rooms  confirms  the 
statements  of  the  occupants. 

In  the  rear  wall  of  Nampeo's  room,  about  opposite  the  entrance, 
there  is  an  opening  through  which,  using  a  few  steps,  one  may 
crawl  to  the  floor  of  a  dark  chamber.  In  this  opening,  when 
I  first  visited  Hano,  there  stood  a  notched  log  that  served  as  a  ladder 
for  mounting  to  the  chamber  of  the  old  clan  house,  now,  as  then,  a 
dark  store-room.  Nampeo's  present  dwelling  room  is  not  an  en- 
largement of  the  old  room  of  her  ancestors,  but  was  built  in  front 
of  it,  the  front  wall  of  the  latter  being  utilized  as  the  rear  of  the  new 
building.  The  floor  of  the  dark  store-room  in  the  rear  is  the  ter- 
race of  the  old  house. 

Although  the  shape  of  the  neighboring  dwelling  of  Okun  is 
somewhat  different  from  that  of  Nampeo,  it  is  of  late  construction 
and  followed  the  same  law  of  growth.  This  room  was  constructed 
around  the  southeastern  comer  of  the  old  room  of  the  same  clan. 
Its  front  wall  on  the  east  side  is  continuous  with  that  of  Nampeo's 
house,  and  the  rear  on  that  side  is  the  east  wall  of  the  ancestral 
room.     On  the  south  side,  in  the  rear,  there  still  remains  a  portion 


92  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

of  the  original  roof  of  the  old  house,  now  forming  a  raised  part  in 
which  are  hidden  the  effigies  of  the  great  serpent  used  in  the  March 
ceremonies.  This  new  house  owned  by  Okun  does  not  occupy  the 
entire  south  side  of  the  old  habitation  of  the  Tobacco  clan.  Adjoin- 
ing it  on  the  west  there  is  another  room,  owned  by  Hele,  Okun's 
sister,  and  therefore  of  the  same  clan.  Its  length  is  so  great  that 
it  extends  far  enough  beyond  the  south  wall  of  Okun's  house  to  have 
an  east  wall  in  which  is  a  heliotropic  doorway.  The  north  side  wall 
of  Hele's  room  is  the  original  south  wall  of  the  old  Tobacco  house, 
the  former  roof  of  which  is  now  the  floor  of  a  small  back  room. 
Communicating  with  this  are  other  back  rooms,  in  some  of  which 
hang  ancient  masks  and  other  paraphernalia  belonging  to  the  To- 
bacco clan. 

But  Hele's  room  does  not  extend  to  the  southwest  comer  of  the 
original  Tobacco-Corn  house.  Formerly,  as  late  as  1 89 1 ,  this  comer 
was  in  its  original  condition,  but  now  a  modem  room  occupies  what 
was  then  an  empty  space  separating  this  comer  from  the  row  of 
houses  on  the  westem  side  of  the  plaza.  It  is  to  be  noticed  that 
no  additions  have  been  made  to  this  original  building  nucleus  on 
the  north  and  west  sides. 

We  thus  see  that  the  original .  rooms  that  form  the  nucleus  of 
the  northern  end  of  Hano  have  been  modernized  by  additions,  the 
position  of  which  has  been  influenced  by  heliotropic  tendencies. 
This  cluster  does  not  contain  all  the  members  of  these  clans  in 
Hano.  A  member  of  the  Corn  clan  owns  a  house  on  the  south 
side  of  the  plaza,  although  she  lives  at  the  foot  of  the  mesa,  and 
other  members  live  elsewhere.  There  are  special  reasons,  that 
need  not  now  be  considered,  to  account  for  these  exceptions.  As  a 
rule  the  growth  of  the  house  of  the  Tobacco-Com  clan  has  been 
profoundly  influenced  by  the  law  of  heliotropism. 

Another  nucleus  from  which  buildings  in  Hano  have  developed 
was  the  original  habitation  of  the  Cloud-Sand-Sun  group.  This 
was  situated  a  few  feet  from  the  eastern  edge  of  the  mesa,  at  no 
great  distance  south  of  the  southwest  corner  of  the  Tobacco-Com 
building.  The  growth  from  this  center  was  linear,  forming  a  row 
of  rooms  with  heliotropic  exposure,  the  majority  of  the  doorways 
being  situated  in  the  side  walls.     This  is  the  row  of  houses  one 


V 


FEWKKS]  SUN'S  INFLUENCE  ON  HO  PI  PUEBLOS  93 

passes  in  going  through  the  pueblo  and  is  the  most  thickly  popu- 
lated part  of  Hano.  Not  more  than  fifty  years  ago  a  woman  of  the 
Cloud  clan  built  a  house  across  what  is  now  the  Hano  plaza,  about 
fifty  yards  west  of  the  house  row  above  mentioned.  Her  house, 
which  is  still  standing,  became  the  nucleus  of  a  new  row  of  rooms 
that  ultimately  joined  the  southwest  angle  of  the  old  Tobacco-Corn 
habitation.  The  Sun  clan,  formerly  an  important  member  of  the 
group,  gradually  diminished  in  number,  and  in  1892  the  last  sur- 
vivor died,  leaving  the  old  Sun  house,  situated  about  midway  in  the 
row  above  mentioned,  to  a  member  of  the  Bear  clan.  The  ground 
room  in  the  original  house  of  this  row,  which  in  1900  still  preserved 
some  of  its  ancient  features,  contains  the  masks  of  the  Sumaikoli 
that  have  been  described  elsewhere.* 

The  site  of  the  original  building  of  the  Katcina  clan  in  Hano  is 
said  to  have  been  about  due  north  of  the  Bear  house  of  the  To- 
bacco-Corn building,  where  walls  may  still  be  seen  and  where  re- 
mains of  a  kiva  are  even  now  pointed  out.  Early  in  the  history  of 
Hano  this  site  was  abandoned,  the  Katcina  clan  moving  to  the  other 
side  of  the  Tobacco  habitation,  on  a  line  with  the  Cloud-Sand  house, 
a  few  feet  back  from  the  edge  of  the  mesa.  The  row  of  buildings, 
all  comparatively  modem,  that  developed  from  this  center  ulti- 
mately joined  the  Sun  house  of  the  series  above  described. 

From  what  has  been  shown  of  the  traditional  growth  of  Hano  it  is 
evident  that  the  present  village  has  been  evolved  from  three  orig- 
inal building  nuclei  and  that  the  direction  of  growth  from  these 
centers  has  been  largely  influenced  by  the  sun.  Although  the  re- 
sultant rectangular  form  differs  somewhat  from  that  of  some  other 
Hopi  pueblos,  in  which  parallelism  of  house  rows  is  now  clearly 
marked,  the  cause  of  both  is  identical. 

Other  facts  may  be  adduced  to  support  the  above  conclusions 
regarding  the  position  of  the  original  building  nuclei  revealed  by 
traditions.  The  receptacles  of  ancient  masks  ^  and  ceremonial 
paraphernalia  are  now  in  these  ancient  houses  and  not  in  more 


^  A  Journal  of  American  Ethnology  and  Archaology^  II,  33-38,  1892. 

'  It  was  reported  to  me  that  in  old  times  these  masks  were  kept  in  a  shrine  outside  the 
pueblo,  but  that  in  one  of  the  Navaho  raids  they  became  scattered,  later  to  be  carried  to 
their  present  home  on  the  mesa  by  Kalacai,  of  the  Sun  clan. 


94  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

modem  constructions.  In  an  annual  ceremony  called  Powamu 
there  is  a  dramatic  representation  of  the  return  of  a  sun  god  in 
which  its  personator  visits  certain  houses  and  marks  them  with 
sacred  meal.^  The  houses  visited  by  this  personage  are  the  most 
ancient,  the  modem  habitations  being  passed  by  without  special 
notice.  The  explanation  of  this  exclusion  is  evident  When  this 
ceremony  originated  the  only  houses  in  Hano  were  the  original 
ancient  dwellings ;  these  were  then  visited  by  the  sun-god  person- 
ator and  the  practice  has  been  kept  up  without  change  ever  since. 
The  growth  of  new  houses  in  Hano  has  resulted  in  a  rectangular 
pueblo,  but  in  some  instances  villages  of  this  form  have  been  the 
outgrowth  not  from  separate  nuclei,  but  as  an  intentional  means  of 

protection. 

Growth  of  Sichomovi 

The  earliest  or  oldest  houses  of  Sichomovi  were  built  by  the 
Asa,  Badger,  and  Butterfly  clans,  the  first  of  which  once  lived  in 
Zufii,  but  came  originally  from  the  Rio  Grande.  The  Badger  and 
Butterfly  families  are  kindred  of  the  Asa,  and  although  their  de- 
scendants now  speak  Hopi,  they  are  considered  as  related  to  the 
Zufii.  It  would  appear  that  originally  the  Asa  and  Badger  rooms 
were  united  in  one  building  at  the  southwest  corner  of  the  plaza 
(pi.  xi),  and  that  this  habitation  was  the  nucleus  of  the  row  of 
rooms  on  the  west  side  of  this  court.  At  first  the  growth  of  the  Asa- 
Badger  cluster  closely  resembled  that  of  the  Tobacco-Corn  clans,  as 
traced  in  the  traditional  history  of  Hano  pueblo.  The  old  house  is 
now  somewhat  modified  by  modern  buildings,  but  remnants  of  the 
ancient  structure,  still  preserving  the  old  form,  are  still  visible.  By 
a  study  of  the  traditional  growth  of  Sichomovi  it  is  found  that  the 
growth  of  this  pueblo  has  been  northwesterly  from  the  old  Badger 
house,  and  this  house  row  now  forms  the  western  side  of  the  plaza. 
The  other  row  is  parallel  to  it,  forming  the  eastern  side  of  the  plaza. 

It  is  difficult  now  to  determine,  either  traditionally  or  from  clan 
localization,  the  situation  of  the  building  nucleus  in  this  eastem 
row,  but  the  chief  evidence  assigns  the  greatest  age  to  the  home  of 
the  Tobacco  clan.  In  its  development  from  this  center  the  growth 
has  been  due  largely  to  the  influence  of  the  sun. 


*  Sky  god  Personations  in  Hopi  Worship,  y<7«r.  Am,  Folk-lore^   XV,  14-32. 


I 


FEWKKS]  SUN'S  INFLUENCE  ON  HOPI  PUEBLOS  95 

There  are  two  isolated  blocks  of  houses  in  Sichomovi  that  merit 
mention,  espedally  as  one  of  them  is  visited  by  the  personator  of 
the  sun  in  the  yearly  Powamu  ceremony  above  mentioned.  These 
consist  of  the  house  now  inhabited  by  the  chief  Anawita  and  its 
neighboring  rooms  owned  by  the  Tobacco  clan.  The  entrances  to 
these  dwellings  are  heliotropic. 

It  is  evident  from  the  above  facts  that  Sichomovi,  like  Hano, 

has  developed  its  present  form  under  the  influence  of  the  law  of 

heliotropic  exposure  of  the  largest  number  of  terraces  and  lateral 

doorways. 

Growth  of  Walpi 

Walpi,  the  oldest  and  largest  village  on  the  East  mesa,  shows 
better  than  any  other  the  operation  of  the  law  of  heliotropism  in 
determining  the  form  of  a  Hopi  pueblo.  By  reason  of  its  age  and 
complicated  ground-plan,  the  latter  mainly  due  to  changes  in  house 
ownership,  the  arrangement  of  rooms  in  parallel  rows  and  the 
localization  of  clans  in  them  are  somewhat  obscured.  Increase  in 
certain  families  and  decrease  or  extinction  of  others  have  so  modified 
the  form  of  the  component  parallel  rows  of  houses  that  the  present 
clan  localization  does  not  always  represent  what  it  was  ancestorially ; 
but  notwithstanding  these  alterations  it  can  readily  be  recognized 
that  the  same  influences  that  have  given  form  to  Hano  and  Sichom- 
ovi have  been  strong  factors  in  determining  the  direction  of  house- 
growth  in  Walpi. 

Although  complicated  and  more  or  less  obscured  by  later  growth, 
there  are  well-marked  indications  of  three  originally  parallel  rows  of 
houses  in  the  present  ground-plan  of  Walpi  (pi.  xi),  showing  devel- 
opment from  three  building  nuclei.  The  main  and  centrally  placed 
of  these  three  rows  may  be  designated  the  Bear-Snake  ;  that  to  the 
west,  the  Flute  row  ;  and  to  the  east  of  the  latter,  from  the  "  Snake 
rock  **  southward,  the  Asa  row,  formerly  populous  but  now  reduced 
to  ruined  walls.  In  addition  to  these  three  rows  there  are  other 
clusters  of  rooms  in  Walpi,  the  most  important  of  which  is  situated 
on  an  elevated  site  at  the  extreme  southern  end  of  the  pueblo. 

The  Bear-Snake  house  row  is  not  only  the  largest,  but  also  the 
most  complicated  in  its  development.  Little  now  remains  of  the 
Asa  row  save  ruined  walls  that  rise  from  the  very  edge  of  the  mesa 


96  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

above  a  trail  on  the  southeastern  corner  of  a  small  court  in  which 
is  situated  the  main  kiva  of  Walpi. 

The  localization  of  clans  in  modern  Walpi  is  found  to  conform 
with  legends  that  make  it  possible  to  trace  the  growth  of  successive 
additions  to  that  pueblo  from  the  time  the  first  houses  were  erected. 
This  growth,  which  has  been  a  very  gradual  one,  has  been  influ- 
enced from  the  outset  by  the  sun,  or  the  same  cause  that  has  played 
such  a  prominent  part  in  the  growth  of  Hano  and  Sichomovi. 

The  first  houses  built  on  the  site  of  modern  Walpi  were  not  far 
from  the  so-called  "Snake  rock,*'  a  remarkable  stone  pinnacle  that 
rises  from  the  rocky  floor  at  the  southern  end  of  the  open  space 
where  the  Snake  dance  of  that  pueblo  is  biennially  celebrated.  The 
earliest  clans  appear  to  have  erected  two  houses  at  about  the  same 
time  —  one,  the  Bear  house,  on  the  north  side  of  what  is  now  the 
court;  the  other  the  Snake  house,  just  west  of  the  Snake  rock. 
Both  of  these  original  houses  were  still  standing  in  1900,  and  pre- 
served fairly  well  their  ancient  features  —  a  ground-floor  room  with 
hatchway  in  the  roof,  and  a  second  story  consisting  of  a  room  which 
opens  on  the  terrace.  These  two  original  houses  were  built  some 
distance  apart,  separated  by  the  intervening  space  now  covered  by 
dwellings  that  form  the  western  side  of  the  dance  court.  Their 
present  union  has  resulted  chiefly  from  additions  made  necessary  by 
increase  of  the  Snake  clan,  the  Bear  clan  having  gradually  dimin- 
ished in  numbers  until  it  is  now  on  the  verge  of  extinction.  The 
union  of  the  Snake  and  Bear  houses  was  not  necessarily  formed  be- 
fore the  construction  of  other  house  nuclei  in  what  is  now  Walpi, 
although  it  took  place  early  in  the  history  of  this  pueblo.  In  its 
early  days  Walpi  was  probably  a  single  row  of  houses,  possibly 
divided  in  its  length,  individual  rooms  having  heliotropic  terraces 
and  entrances  now  looking  eastward  over  the  dance  court. 

The  enlargement  of  the  Bear-Snake  house  row  had  not  pro- 
ceeded far  beyond  these  boundaries  when  the  Flute  people  arrived 
and  sought  union  with  the  existing  inhabitants  of  Walpi.  They 
were  assigned  a  building  site  west  of  the  houses  of  their  hosts,  who, 
legend  says,  were  related  to  them.  The  Flute  people  had  origi- 
nally come  to  Tusayan  from  the  south  but  before  reaching  Walpi 
settled  Leftanabi  where  they  were  joined  by  the  Horn  clans  that 


V 


FiWKKS]  SUN'S  INFLUENCE  ON  HOP!  PUEBLOS  97 

were  earlier  united  with  the  Snake  families  in  their  home  in  north- 
em  Arizona. 

The  first  building  of  the  Flute  clan  after  their  reception  in  the 
Bear-Snake  pueblo  was  constructed  on  the  western  rim  of  the  mesa 
and  was  separated  by  a  narrow  court  from  the  rear  wall  of  the  Bear- 
Snake  house  group.  The  original  Flute  house  is  still  standing, 
little  changed  in  its  general  appearance  by  adjacent  houses.  In  its 
rooms  are  still  biennially  celebrated  the  secret  rites  of  the  Flute 
priesthood.  This  house  may  be  regarded  as  the  building  nucleus 
of  the  western  row  of  Walpi  houses,  but  it  never  reached  any  consider- 
able length  by  reason  of  its  undesirable  site,  being  on  the  cold  side 
of  the  Bear-Snake  buildings  that  rapidly  rose  to  such  a  height  as  to 
cut  off  the  warm  rays  of  the  sun.  At  this  epoch  Walpi  was  com- 
posed of  two  rows  of  houses,  each  with  several  rooms,  one,  the 
Bear-Snake  row,  possibly  with  two  parts  not  joined  ;  the  other,  the 
Flute  row,  situated  a  short  distance  to  the  west.  Roughly  speak- 
ing, this  was  the  ground-plan  of  the  pueblo  at  the  close  of  the  first 
decade  of  the  eighteenth  century.  Years  earlier,  how  long  no  one 
knows,  Walpi  had  received  increments  to  its  population  from  the 
pueblo  of  Sikyatki,  and  about  the  year  I'joo  still  other  clans  came 
from  Awatobi ;  but  these  arrivals  did  not  essentially  affect  the  out- 
lines of  the  growing  pueblo,  as  the  habitations  appear  to  have  been 
added  to  the  main  row  of  buildings  that  rose  higher  and  broadened 
especially  at  the  northern  extremity. 

But  the  arrival,  soon  after,  of  the  Patki  (Cloud)  people  from  the 
south,  and  their  assimilation  with  the  existing  Hopi  clans,  radically 
changed  the  culture  of  Walpi  and  greatly  affected  the  ground-plan  of 
their  village.  They  introduced  a  higher  form  of  ritual  and  richer 
mythology  and  ceremonials.  The  early  Patki  were  assigned  a  build- 
ing site  south  of  the  rows  of  Bear,  Snake,  and  Flute  houses.  The 
first  habitation  they  constructed  is  still  standing,  in  much  the  same 
form  as  when  built,  consisting  of  a  ground  story  with  hatchway 
forming  the  ceremonial  chamber  of  the  sun  priests,  an  organization 
introduced  into  Walpi  by  this  people. 

The  accompanying  illustration  (plate  xi)  represents  the  relative 
position  of  the  ancient  Patki  or  Cloud  house,  or  nucleus,  from  which 
all  other  habitations  of  this  clan  originated.     In  it  are  still  found  many 

AM.  ANTH.y  N.  S..  8-7. 


98  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

sacred  objects  introduced  into  Walpi  by  this  clan.  The  original 
room  on  the  lower  story,  now  entered  by  a  hatchway,  is  still  used  in 
the  secret  rites  of  the  sun  priests  in  the  sun  prayerstick  making,  as 
elsewhere  described.* 

We  have  now  reached  a  period  in  the  history  of  the  growth  of 
Walpi  when  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  follow  the  sequence  in  the 
addition  of  new  clans  by  the  localization  of  their  descendants. 
Many  families  sought  the  ever-growing  pueblo  for  protection,  and 
as  fast  as  they  came  they  were  assigned  sites  for  their  houses. 
These  habitations,  in  the  enlargement  of  the  village,  were  as  a  rule 
absorbed  into  the  middle  row  of  houses  that  grew  broader  and 
higher  with  each  successive  increment. 

The  clan  house  of  the  Asa  people,  which  formed  the  third  par- 
allel row  of  Walpi  houses,  was  erected  at  the  head  of  the  steep 
trail  that  enters  the  village  from  the  southeast.  The  l^ends  de- 
clare that  this  clan  was  given  this  site  in  order  that  they  might 
defend  the  pueblo  from  enemies  coming  up  the  trail.* 

The  extension  of  the  Asa  row  of  houses  was  greatly  limited  by 
the  configuration  of  the  mesa,  and  as  they  increased  in  number  the 
buildings  covered  all  the  available  space.  In  the  end,  when  their 
ever-increasing  numbers  demanded  more  room,  they  were  obliged 
to  seek  other  building  sites.  Impelled  likewise  by  other  causes, 
they  moved  away  from  Walpi  to  the  Canon  de  Chelly,  where  they 
lived  in  cliff-houses  for  many  years.  Here  they  lost  their  language 
and  learned  that  of  the  Navaho.  Later,  however,  they  returned  to 
the  East  Mesa  and  founded  Sichomovi.  The  houses  they  inhabited 
while  in  Walpi  are  now  ruins  with  the  exception  of  a  single  room 
where  the  last  woman  of  the  Asa  clan  of  Walpi  still  lived  in  1900. 

It  was  at  about  the  same  period  that  houses  were  erected  on  the 
rocky  eminence  situated  south  of  the  little  court  in  which  are  found 
the  two  sacred  rooms  occupied  during  the  Snake  ceremonies.  Kat- 
cina  and  Asa  clans  were  the  first  to  take  up  a  building  site  on  this 
elevation,  and  it  was  later  covered  with  houses:  These  eventually 
were  extended  around  the  western  side  of  the  little  plaza  until  the 

^American  Anthropologist ^  vi,  500,  1 904. 

'There  was  formerly  a  ladder  by  which  one  mounted  to  the  edge  of  the  mesa  at  this 
point,  but  it  is  now  replaced  by  stone  steps. 


FEWKEs]  SUN'S  INFLUENCE  ON  HOPI  PUEBLOS  99 

Patki  and  Katcina  group  were  united.  This  growth  was  of  short 
duration,  for  in  a  few  years  the  Katcina  clan  began  to  decrease  in 
numbers,  their  houses  fell  to  decay,  and  the  beams  were  torn  down 
to  be  utilized  for  buildings  in  more  desirable  situations.  The  reason 
for  this  desertion  is  evident :  exposure  to  cold  and  limitation  in  space 
for  buildings  with  heliotropic  exposure  were  in  themselves  sufficient 
causes  to  bring  it  about. 

The  distribution  of  religious  paraphernalia  in  Walpi  confirms  the 
traditional  account  above  given  and  points  to  the  houses  in  which 
these  objects  are  kept  as  the  original  building  nuclei.  This  identi- 
fication of  the  oldest  houses  is  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  in  the 
annual  personation  of  the  Sun  god  in  the  Powamu  ceremony  this 
being  visits  these  houses  and  no  others,  as  is  the  case  in  Hano 
and  Sichomovi. 

It  has  been  shown  above  that  the  rows  of  rooms  forming  the 
ground-plan  of  a  typical  Hopi  pueblo  are  oriented  in  the  same 
direction,  and  that  this  is  due  to  a  desire  to  obtain  a  maximum  amount 
of  heat  through  heliotropic  exposure.  An  examination  of  their 
plans  and  a  study  of  the  legends  clearly  indicate  that  the  same  law 
is  operative  on  the  other  mesas,  and  can  also  be  extended  to  the 
whole  culture  area  commonly  known  as  the  Pueblo. 

There  remains  to  be  considered  the  cause  that  has  led  to  the 
adoption,  throughout  the  plateau  region  of  the  Southwest,  of  the 
Pueblo  form  of  architecture  —  or  the  grouping  of  clans  into  com- 
posite villages  with  united  rooms.  This  form,  as  I  have  repeatedly 
pointed  out,  is  protective,  and  has  been  evolved  from  a  preexisting 
condition  in  which  the  sedentary  people  of  the  Southwest  were 
more  scattered,  the  habitations  partaking  more  of  the  nature  of 
isolated  rancherias  or  clan  houses.  This  stage  characterized  the  pop- 
ulation of  the  Gila  valley  before  predatory  tribes  raided  it  and  forced 
the  people  from  their  farms. .  It  was  likewise  characteristic  of  the 
other  great  valleys  of  this  region.  The  sedentary  people  were 
settled  in  the  most  advantageous  positions  for  agriculture,  evidently 
irrespective  of  their  foes.  The  advent  of  enemies  and  a  sense  of 
insecurity  led  to  consolidation  of  houses,  pushing  the  people  into 
inaccessible  cafions  and  remote  valleys.     The  clan  houses  joined 


lOO  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

and  became  the  pueblo.  During  this  epoch  was  also  developed  the 
cliff-house,  synchronous  in  origin  with  or  later  than  the  Pueblo  form. 
Instead  of  antedating  the  latter  type  of  village  the  cliff  form  was  con- 
temporary with  it.  It  thus  happens  that  the  many  similarities  in  cliff- 
house  and  Pueblo  culture  are  not  so  much  due  to  descent  one  from 
the  other  as  to  elaboration  of  both  from  a  preexisting  culture  which 
was  formerly  spread  over  the  arid  region  of  the  Southwest  and  in 
the  adjoining  states  of  Mexico.  The  influences  that  led  to  the 
peculiar  architectural  features  in  the  northern  part  of  this  area  were 
the  pressure  of  predatory  tribes  and  the  desire  for  sunny  exposure. 

Bureau  of  American  Ethnology, 
Washington,  D.  C. 


1*  %   ••',••  •    • 
.•  •  •      »     «  • 

•  !        I  •  '     •• 


CERTAIN   NOTCHED   OR  SCALLOPED   STONE  TAB- 
LETS  OF  THE   MOUND-BUILDERS 

By  W.  H.  holmes 

In  a  recent  work  *  Mr  Clarence  B.  Moore  illustrates  a  number 
of  discoidal  and  rectangular  stone  plates  obtained  from  mounds  in 
Alabama  and  elsewhere  in  the  South,  which  he  is  able  to  identify 
as  mortar  plates,  or  palettes,  intended  for  the  grinding  of  pigments. 
It  thus  happens  that  another  of  the  several  groups  of  archeological 
objects  heretofore  placed  in  the  problematical  class  is  safely  assigned 
to  a  definite  use,  although  the  exact  manner  and  significance  of  the 
use  remain  still  in  a  measure  undetermined.  The  rectangular  plates 
bear  a  more  or  less  marked  resemblance  to  the  flattish  rectangular 
tablets  employed  by  Pueblo  shamans  in  grinding  pigments  for 
sacred  purposes ;  and  several  of  the  mound  specimens,  both  rect- 
angular and  circular,  as  demonstrated  by  Mr  Moore,  bear  unmis- 
takable evidence  of  use  in  preparing  colors,  a  sufficient  amount  of 
the  pigments  remaining  on  the  surface  to  permit  chemical  analysis. 
The  colors  are  for  the  greater  part  red  and  white,  the  former  being 
hematite  and  the  latter  carbonite  of  lead. 

Plates  of  the  general  type  described  by  Mr  Moore  are  obtained 
from  ancient  mounds  in  the  Ohio  valley  and  the  Southern  states. 
The  rectangular  specimens  rarely  exceed  lo  inches  in  width  by 
about  1 5  in  length,  and  the  discoidal  variety  ranges  from  6  to  1 5 
inches  in  diameter.  The  thickness  does  not  exceed  i  ^  inches. 
The  central  portion  of  one  face  is  often  slightly  concave,  a  few  are 
quite  flat  on  both  faces,  while  a  smaller  number  are  doubly  convex 
in  a  slight  degree.  The  margins  are  square  or  roundish  in  section, 
and  in  a  few  cases  are  slightly  modified  in  profile,  giving  a  molding- 
like effect.  With  rare  exceptions  the  periphery  of  the  discoidal 
plates  is  notched  or  scalloped.  In  many  cases  one  or  more  en- 
graved lines  or  grooves  encircle  the  face  of  the  plate  near  the  mar- 
gin, and  not  infrequently  the  notches  are  carried  as  shallow  grooves 

^Journal  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia^  XIII,  1905. 

lOI 


I02  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

inward  over  the  surface  of  the  plate,  terminating  against  the  outer 
encircling  band  or  connecting  as  loops  forming  what  may  be  re- 
garded as  reversed  scallops.  The  most  striking  features  of  these 
plates,  occurring  perhaps  in  one  case  in  ten,  are  certain  engraved 
designs  occupying  the  reverse  side  of  the  plate,  the  grinding  sur- 
face being  regarded  as  the  obverse.  These  subjects  are  undoubt- 
edly of  mythologic  origin  and  include  highly  conventional  represen- 
tations of  the  human  hand,  the  open  eye,  the  rattlesnake,  death's- 
head  symbols,  etc.  The  rectangular  plates  have  notches  or  scallops 
at  the  ends  only,  and  the  surface,  excepting  in  the  Ohio  specimens, 
has  no  embellishment  other  than  simple  engraved  lines  extending 
across  the  plate  near  the  ends  or  continuing  around  the  four  sides 
just  inside  the  border. 

The  Cincinnati  tablet  (pi.  xiii,  rf),  the  best  known  of  the  rectan- 
gular plates,  was  found  in  a  large  mound,  associated  with  human 
remains,  in  Cincinnati,  Ohio,  in  1841,  and  was  described  first  in  the 
Cincinnati  Gasette,  December  1 2,  1 842.  The  question  of  its  authen- 
ticity is  fully  discussed  by  Clark.^  This  as  well  as  other  rectangular 
specimens  from  the  Ohio  valley  have  sculptured  figures  on  one  face, 
the  reverse  exhibiting  irregular  depressions  and  grooves  such  as 
might  result  from  prolonged  sharpening  of  stone  implements.  The 
remarkable  figures  engraved  on  the  surface  of  this  tablet,  first 
analyzed  by  Putnam  and  Willoughby,^  are  highly  conventionalized 
animal  forms,  human  or  reptilian.  A  second,  closely  analogous 
tablet  was  found  by  Dr  Hurst  in  a  mound  at  Waverley,  Pike 
county,  Ohio,  in  1878.  Similar  in  general  characteristics,  although 
eccentric  in  outline  and  having  engraved  designs  on  both  sides,  is 
the  Berlin  tablet,  found  in  a  small  mound  near  Berlin,  Ohio.^  Of 
the  discoidal  plates  the  most  northerly  example  is  that  obtained 
from  a  mound  near  Naples,  Illinois.*  It  is  12^  inches  in  diameter 
and  about  i  inch  thick  near  the  margin,  but  having  a  well-marked 
mortar  depression  on  the  obverse  side  is  thinner  toward  the  center. 
On  the  reverse  face,  which  is  slightly  convex,  is  engraved  a  human 


*  Prehistoric  Remains^  1878. 
^Proc.  A.  A.  A.  5.,  XLiv,  1896. 

'  McLean,  TAe  Mound-builders ^  1879. 

*  IlendersoD  in  Smithsonian  Report ^  1882. 


HOU.es]        stone    tablets   OF   THE  MOVND-BUILDERS  lOJ 

hand  having  a  small  mortar  depression  in  the  palm ;  this  specimen  is 
without  notches  or  scallops.  A  superior  example  of  discoidal  plate 
of  somewhat  unique  type,  1 1  )^  inches  in  diameter  and  about  i  inch 
in  thickness,  was  obtained  recently  from  a  mound  near  Arkansas 
Post,  Arkansas.'  It  is  exceptionally  well  finished  and  symmetrical. 
The  slightly  depressed  area  on  one  side  is  bordered  by  36  neatly 
executed  scallops,  between  which  and  the  rounded  periphery  is  a 


—  The  feathered-serpenl  des[^  in  tvo  colors  showing  Ihc  maiiQer  in  which  ihe 
serpenls  are  interlocked.     {,%') 

shallow  indsed  line.  The  opposite  side  shows  a  formal  design 
composed  of  two  concentric  depressed  bands,  probably  intended  to 
represent  an  open  eye  —  a  symbol  common  in  the  ancient  art  of  the 
middle  Mississippi  valley  and  the  Gulf  states.  The  periphery  is 
rounded  in  section  and  without  notches  or  scallops.  Even  more 
remarkable  are  the  disks  with  notched  margins,  on  the  face  of  which 
are  engraved  serpent  symbols  of  unique  design.     One  of  these,  now 

'Sloddard  in  American  Anliqitarian,  vol.  xxvi,  do.  3,  1904. 


I04  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

in  the  Museum  of  the  Ohio  State  Archaeological  and  Historical 
Society  at  Columbus,  known  as  the  Mississippi  tablet  (pi.  xii),  was 
found  in  a  mound  near  Lafayette  bayou  in  Issaquena  county, 
Mississippi,  in  1870.*  It  is  made  of  fine-grained  brownish  sand- 
stone, is  discoidal  in  form,  8  J^  inches  in  diameter,  about  i  inch  thick, 
and  has  smooth,  slightly  convex  surfaces.  On  one  face  is  engraved 
in  shallow  lines  the  representation  of  two  interlocked  rattlesnakes 
with  heads  in  reversed  order,  facing  the  center  from  opposite  sides 
(fig.  8).  These  serpents  are  the  conventional,  mythical,  feathered 
rattlesnakes  of  the  South.  The  heads  are  conventionally  drawn,  the 
mouths  being  furnished  with  teeth  and  tusk-like  fangs.  The  forked 
tongues  are  indicated  by  flowing  lines  issuing  from  the  mouths. 
Plumes  rise  from  the  head,  and  the  upper  surface  of  the  body  is 
embellished  with  groups  of  feathers  alternating  with  scaled  areas. 
The  under  surface  has  elementary  fretwork  composed  of  alternating 
sections  of  scaled  and  plain  surfaces,  as  is  usual  in  drawings  of  the 
mythical  Serpent  god  in  the  South  and  Southwest.  One  of  the 
serpents  has  three  rattles,  the  other  four.  The  reverse  side  has  a 
squarish  depression  near  the  center,  probably  not  an  original  feature 
of  the  plate,  and  a  neatly  engraved  border,  consisting  of  1 5  scal- 
loped lines  bordered  within  by  an  encircling  band  5^  of  an  inch 
from  the  margin.  The  margin,  or  periphery,  is  squarish,  and  is 
divided  into  1 5  sections  by  cross-lines  or  notches  which  connect 
with  the  scallops  of  the  reverse  face.  Near  the  depression  on  this 
face  is  a  small  enclosed  space  filled  in  with  crossed  lines.  This 
specimen  came  into  the  possession  of  Marshall  Anderson,  from 
whom  it  was  acquired  by  the  Ohio  State  Archaeological  and  His- 
torical Society.  Of  the  same  general  type  is  a  thin,  flat-faced,  sand- 
stone disk  (pi.  XIII,  ^)  obtained  from  a  mound  at  Moundville,  Ala- 
bama, and  now  in  the  museum  of  the  University  of  Alabama.  It  is 
12^  inches  in  diameter  and  has  17  marginal  notches ;  one  face  is 
embellished  with  an  incised  design  representing  two  horned  rattle- 
snakes. The  bodies,  which  encircle  the  plate,  are  knotted  at 
opposite  sides  and  the  heads  face  outward.  The  inclosed  space 
contains  the  representation  of  an  open  human  hand  bearing  an  eye 


1  McLean,  The  Mound-builders^  1879,  P*  l^o. 


HOLMES]      STOXE    TABLETS  OF  THE  MOUXD-BUILDERS  I05 

upon  the  open  palm.^  Of  equal  interest  is  a  notched  disk,  83^ 
inches  in  diameter,  found  at  Moundsville,  Alabama,  also  described 
by  Mr  Moore  and  now  in  the  Peabody  Museum  at  Cambridge. 
The  s>*inbols  engraved  on  one  face  include  two  human  hands,  each 
with  an  open  e>'e  in  the  palm,  and  three  other  unique  figures  which 
in  their  general  st>'le  suggest  the  treatment  of  symbolic  subjects  by 
the  ancient  Mexicans. 

It  is  obser\'ed  that  these  plates  are  made  of  sandstone  and  kin- 
dred gritty  materials,  and  this  fact  confirms  Mr  Moore's  conclusion 
that  they  were  used  in  grinding  pigments.  It  is  further  observed 
that  they  are  symmetrically  shaped  and  neatly  finished,  and  besides 
are  embellished  with  various  designs  manifestly  of  symbolic  import. 
That  they  were  held  in  exceptional  esteem  by  their  owners  is  shown 
by  their  burial  \iith  the  dead.  These  facts  indicate  clearly  that  the 
plates  were  not  intended  to  serve  merely  an  ordinary  purpose,  but 
rather  that  they  filled  some  important  sacred  or  ceremonial  office, 
as  in  preparing  colors  for  shamanistic  use  or  religious  ceremony. 
It  may  be  fairly  surmised  that  the  i>estles  used  in  connection  \iith 
these  plates  were  also  symbolic  and  yielded  by  their  outi  attrition 
essential  ingredients  of  the  sacred  pigments.  It  is  a  further  possi- 
bility that  drawings  of  sacred  subjects  were  executed  on  the  plates 
and,  being  ground  off,  entered  also  into  the  composition  of  the  mix- 
tures, imparting  additional  potcnc>-.  These  plates  may  well  be 
compared  with  the  pigment  slabs  of  the  Pueblo  tribes  and  especi- 
ally with  some  of  the  ancient  plates  (pi.  xiii.  e,f)  described  by  Dr 
Fewkes-  which  are  embellished  with  animal  forms  in  relief  and 
with  concentric  lines  and  notched  margins  analogous  to  those 
of  the  mound  specimens. 

The  engraved  designs  on  these  plates  naturally  give  rise  to  specu- 
lation, and  it  is  not  surprising  that  the  ver>'  general  presence  of 
notched  and  scalloped  margins  should  suggest  the  theor>'  that  the 
plates  were  sun  sjTnbols.  But  a  critical  examination  of  the  various 
markings  and  figures  leads  to  the  conWction  that  all  are  representa- 
tive, in  a  more  or  less  conventional  fashion,  of  animal  originals  and 
that  all  were  probably  employed  because  of  their  peculiar  esoteric 


'  Moore  in  Journal  of  the  Academy  Xatural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia^  XIII,  1905. 
«  Twenty-second  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology ^  1 904. 


I06  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

significance  and  relationship  with  the  functions  of  the  tablets.  It  is 
observed  that  the  notches  cut  in  the  edgas  of  the  plates  are  in  many 
instances  carried  inward  over  the  plate  in  such  a  way  as  to  suggest 
feathers  as  these  are  often  formally  treated  in  native  art,  and  this 
leads  to  the  surmise  that  the  animal  original  might  have  been  a 
duck  —  a  symbol  of  wide  distribution  among  the  Indian  tribes  in 
the  South ;  but  recalling  the  occurrence  of  the  feathered-serpent 
design  engraved  on  the  obverse  of  the  Mississippi  tablet  a  strong 
presumption  is  created  that  the  original  concept  in  the  mind  of  the 
makers  of  these  plates  was,  at  least  in  some  cases,  the  feathered 
serpent,  a  northern  form  of  Quetzalcoatl,  a  chief  deity  of  the  mid- 
dle American  peoples. 

With  the  ancient  Mexicans  and  Central  Americans  the  ceremonial 
grinding  plate  or  metate  was  an  object  of  unusual  consideration  and 
was  elaborated  to  represent  the  forms  of  various  animals.  It  is  en- 
tirely in  accord  with  aboriginal  methods  of  thought  that  the  metate 
plate,  taking  the  place  of  the  body  of  an  animal  god,  should  be 
regarded  as  possessing,  through  this  association,  the  supernatural 
powers  of  the  particular  deity,  or  as  being  his  actual  body  ;  and  that 
the  meal,  the  spices,  the  colors,  the  medicines,  etc.,  ground  upon  it 
should  be  surcharged  with  supernatural  potencies  coming  directly 
from  and  being  part  of  the  god  himself.  In  view  of  these  consider- 
ations the  surmise  seems  warranted  that  the  peculiar  excavations 
found  on  the  back  of  the  Cincinnati  tablet,  already  referred  to,  may 
have  resulted  from  the  removal  of  portions  of  the  material  of  the 
plate  itself  to  form  part  of  sacred  mixtures.  A  good  illustration  of  the 
highly  symbolic  character  of  these  grinding  plates  is  furnished  by  a 
large  Central  American  specimen  weighing  several  hundred  pounds, 
now  preserved  in  the  United  States  National  Museum.  The  metate  is 
supported  by  two  sculptured  human  figures,  male  and  female,  joined 
beneath,  whose  heads  appear  at  opposite  ends  of  the  utensil,  the 
breasts  of  the  woman  falling  within  the  rim  of  the  plate.  It  may  be 
fairly  assumed  that  the  symbolism  embodies  the  idea  of  the  per- 
petuity of  life  and  continuity  of  flow  of  god-given  sustenance,  the 
materials  ground  on  the  plate  partaking  of  the  sacred  life  essence. 
It  is  possible  that  the  graphic  elements  in  our  northern  representa- 
tives of  the  sacred  metate  may  have  analogous  symbolism. 


HOLMES]       STONE   TABLETS  OF  THE  MOUND-BUILDERS  lO/ 

A  noteworthy  feature  of  the  engravings  of  the  serpents  and 
other  figures  on  these  mound  tablets  is  the  apparent  maturity  of  the 
art,  the  intricate  forms  being  skilfully  disposed  and  drawn  with  a 
certain  hand.  These  designs  are  not  mere  random  products,  but, 
like  the  copper  ornaments,  the  earthenware  decorations,  and  the 
shell  engravings  of  the  same  region,  are  evidently  the  work  of 
skilled  artists  practising  a  well-matured  art  which  distinctly  sug- 
gests the  work  of  the  semi-civilized  nations  of  Mexico  and  Central 
America.  These  plates  may  be  regarded  as  furnishing  additional 
proof  that  the  influence  of  the  culture  of  middle  America  has  been 
felt  all  along  the  northern  shores  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  has 
passed  with  diminished  force  still  farther  to  the  north. 

Six  examples  of  these  tablets  are  brought  together  in  pi.  xiii. 
They  represent  three  widely  separated  localities  and  differ  consider- 
ably in  appearance,  although  all  are  probably  mortar  plates.  All 
bear  more  or  less  clearly  defined  traces  of  bird-serpent  symbolism. 
Most  of  these  have  been  referred  to  in  the  preceding  paragraphs,  but 
descriptions  may  be  given  in  this  connection,  ez  is  a  discoidal  plate 
of  "  metamorphic  gneiss,"  lO^"  in  diameter  and  3^''  in  thickness, 
obtained  by  Moore  from  a  mound  at  Moundville,  Alabama.  Both 
faces  seem  to  have  served  for  grinding  pigments.  The  obverse  has 
three  concentric  marginal  lines  representing  the  body  of  the  creature 
symbolized,  and  the  periphery  has  thirteen  feather  scallops.  The 
reverse  is  slightly  concave,  and  shows  traces  of  the  light  gray  pig- 
ment ground  upon.  it.  ^  is  a  discoidal  tablet  of  sandstone  from  the 
vicinity  of  Moundville,  Alabama,  and  is  described  in  some  detail  in 
a  preceding  paragraph.  While  the  well  drawn  rattlesnakes  are 
represented  without  recognizable  feather  elements,  the  periphery  of 
the  plate  has  seventeen  notches  marking  off  as  many  undeveloped 
feather  scallops.  ^  is  a  rectangular  plate  of  '*  fine-grained  gneiss,'' 
14''  in  length  by  9^"  in  width  and  )/^"  in  thickness.  Both  faces 
are  flat,  one  showing  traces  of  red  and  the  other  of  cream-colored 
pigment.  The  obverse  has  two  marginal  engraved  lines  and  the 
ends  have  five  exceptionally  deep  feather  scallops,  d  is  the  Cin- 
cinnati tablet,  already  sufficiently  described.  ^  is  a  small,  oblong, 
bird-form  tablet  of  blackish  argillite  from  the  Gila  valley,  Arizona, 
the  length  being  ^'  and  the  thickness  y^".     The  bird  represented 


io8 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


is  minifcstly  the  eagle.  The  head  is  well  suggested  and  the  divided 
tail,  partly  broken  away,  is  ornamented  on  the  back  with  lines  in- 
dicating feathers.  The  palette  surface  is  slightly  concave  and  par- 
tially surrounded  by  a  raised  band  that  may  represent  a  serpent 
The  reverse  of  the  body  is  evenly  convex.  /  is  a  tablet  of  dark 
argillite,  subrectangular  in  shape,  obtained  from  the  Gila  valley, 
Arizona.  It  is  4^"  in  length  and  J^"  in  thickness.  The  upper 
surface,  which  is  slightly  convex  save  at  the  center,  which  is  de- 
pressed, is  surrounded  by  an  incised  line  outside  of  which  is  the 
rounded  margin  ornamented  with  groups  of  notches,  probably  sym- 
bolizmg  the  bird  A  groove  extends  around  the  periphery,  and  the 
reverse,  or  back,  is  irregularly  convex 

To  this  list  may  be  added  the 
small,  roundish  tablet  obtained 
from  Cochise  county,  Arizona, 
shown  in  figure  9.  It  is  made 
of  an  impure  variety  of  nephrite, 
and  IS  45^"  in  diameter  and  J^" 
in  thickness.  The  upper  surface 
IS  slightly  concave,  and  the  mar- 
gin IS  formed  of  the  looped  body 
of  the  rattlesnake  with  charac- 
teristic markings. 

The  small  size  of  most  of  the 
tablets  referred  to  indicates  that 
they  could  hardly  have  been  used 
for  any  purpose  other  than  the 
Fic  9  —  Pigment  lablet  of  nephnie  gnnding  of  pigments  or  medi- 
(Diam  cines,  and  the  peculiar  symbols 
assoaated  with  them  warrant  the 
conclusion  that  they  were  intended  for  use,  in  part  at  least,  in  pre- 
paring substances  sacred  to  the  bird-serpent  deity  of  the  native 
pantheon, 

BcRBAU  OP  American  Ethnology, 
Washington,  D.  C. 


iTilh  rBttleinake  border,  Arizona 
eter  4^  inches,  thiclcness  ^  locb  ) 


PRESERVATION   OF   AMERICAN  ANTIQUITIES  ; 

PROGRESS   DURING  THE  LAST  YEAR ; 

NEEDED  LEGISLATION* 

By  EDGAR  L.  HEWETT 

Prior  to  1904  the  only  act  of  our  Government  looking  toward 
the  preservation  of  our  antiquities  was  the  reservation  and  restora- 
tion, by  act  of  Congress  of  March  2,  1889,  of  the  Casa  Grande 
ruin  in  Arizona.  During  the  last  fifteen  months  a  definite  policy  of 
preservation  has  rapidly  developed,  so  that  at  present  it  may  be  said 
that  approximately  three-fourths  of  all  the  remains  of  antiquity  that 
are  situated  on  lands  owned  or  controlled  by  the  United  States  are 
under  custodianship  more  or  less  efficient,  and  that  the  despoliation 
of  ruins  for  commercial  purposes  is  in  a  fair  way  to  be  stamped  out. 
Following  are  the  various  steps  that  have  been  taken  : 

I.  All  ruins  that  are  situated  on  the  national  forest  reserves 
have  been  placed  under  the  care  of  forest  rangers  and  all  unathor- 
ized  excavation  or  collecting  prohibited.  Forest  rangers  are  clothed 
with  power  to  arrest  offenders,  accordingly  all  ruins  so  situated  are 
adequately  policed.  This  is  a  rapidly  growing  class,  as  forest  re- 
serves are  being  created  constantly  in  the  Southwest,  where  anti- 
quities are  most  numerous.  Already  about  fifty  percent  of  the 
southwestern  ruins  are  within  the  limits  of  forest  reserves  and  in 
time  from  two-thirds  to  three-fourths  of  them  will  be  included. 
The  Forest  Service  now  protects  the  following  reserves  upon  which 
important  archeological  remains  are  situated  : 

In  Colorado:  Montezuma  forest  reserve. 

/;/  Utah  :  Aquarius  and  Sevier  forest  reserves. 

In  New  Mexico :  Pecos,  Gila,  Lincoln,  and  Jemez  forest  reserves. 
The  recently  created  Jemez  forest  reserve  includes  the  vast  arche- 


'  Abstract  of  paper  read  before  the  American  Anthropological  Association  and  the 
Archaeological  Institute  of  America  in  joint  meeting  at  Ithaca,  New  York,  December 
28,  1905. 

109 


I  lO  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

ological  district  of  the  Jemez  plateau,  embracing  the  Pajarito  Park 
and  the  Chama,  Gallinas,  and  Jemez  valleys. 

In  Arizona :  Grand  Canyon,  San  Francisco  Mountain,  Black 
Mesa,  Prescott,  Pinal  Mountains,  Mt  Graham,  Santa  Catalina,  Santa 
Rita,  and  Chiricahua  forest  reserves. 

Many  other  areas,  equally  important  archeologically,  have  been 
withdrawn  from  sale  or  settlement  pending  examination  of  their 
forest  condition.  Noteworthy  among  these  are  the  Rio  Verde  dis- 
trict in  Arizona,  the  Taos  district  in  New  Mexico,  and  the  Mesa 
Verde  district  in  Colorado. 

2.  The  Office  of  Indian  Affairs  prohibits  all  unauthorized  exca- 
vations on  Indian  reservations  and  the  carrying  away  of  remains  of 
antiquity.  Special  custodians  have  been  appointed  for  the  ruins  in 
Canyon  de  Chelly  and  Canyon  del  Muerto  on  the  Navaho  reserva- 
tion in  Arizona,  the  Mesa  Verde  on  the  Southern  Ute  reservation  in 
Colorado,  and  the  Zuiii  reservation  in  New  Mexico.  Indian  traders 
on  reservations  are  prohibited  from  dealing  in  prehistoric  wares, 
thus  removing  from  the  Indians  and  other  persons  the  temptation 
to  despoil  ruins  for  the  sake  of  thfe  small  profits  to  be  derived  there- 
from. This  corrects  one  of  the  most  prevalent  and  disastrous  of 
abuses.  The  most  extensive  archeological  districts  that  come  under 
the  custodianship  of  the  Indian  Office  are  — 

In  Colorado :  The  Southern  Ute  reservation. 

In  New  Mexico :  The  Zuni  and  the  Santa  Clara  reservations, 
and  the  various  Pueblo  grants. 

In  Arizona:  The  Navaho,  Hopi,  San  Carlos,  Walapai,  Gila 
River,  and  Papago  reservations. 

Probably  twenty-five  percent  of  the  southwestern  ruins  are  so 
situated. 

3.  The  General  Land  Office  holds  under  withdrawal,  awaiting 
Congressional  action,  the  following  important  archeological  dis- 
tricts : 

In  Colorado :  The  Mesa  Verde  district. 

In  New  Mexico :  The  Chaco  Canyon  and  Petrified  Forest  dis- 
tricts, and  El  Morro  or  Inscription  Rock. 

The  ruins  situated  on  unappropriated  public  lands  are  held  to 
be  subject  to  the  authority  of  the  Department  of  the  Interior,  and 
orders  have  been  issued  prohibiting  unauthorized  excavations. 


HKWETT]       PRESERVATION  OF  AMERICAN  ANTIQUITIES  1 1 1 

In  addition  to  these  measures  for  the  preservation  of  the  ruins  it 
has  become  necessary  for  the  Departments  to  formulate  some  mode 
of  procedure  with  reference  to  excavation  privileges.  In  passing  on 
the  application  of  the  Southwest  Society  of  the  Archaeological  Insti- 
tute of  America  for  such  privilege,  the  Office  of  Indian  Affairs  held — 

<< .  .  .  It  is  not  satisfied  that  the  Department  could  legally  grant 
permission  to  persons  or  organizations  to  enter  reservations  for  the  pur- 
pose of  excavating  for  and  carrying  away  objects  of  archeological  value 
unless  collecting  for  or  under  the  supervision  of  the  Government.  .  .  . 
"  It  is  recommended  that  permission  be  granted  the  Southwest  So- 
ciety of  the  Archeological  Institute  of  America  to  conduct  archeological 
explorations  and  make  excavations  on  Indian  reservations  in  the  south- 
west upon  the  condition  that  such  work  is  to  be  done  under  the  over- 
sight of,  and  in  cooperation  with,  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology." 

The  essentials  of  a  plan  prepared  in  order  to  meet  the  re- 
quirements of  the  Office  of  Indian  Affairs  in  this  case  and  to  pro- 
vide for  effective  cooperation  and  avoid  duplication  or  conflict  of 
work  are  as  follows : 

1 .  That  this  Society  shall  file  with  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology 
a  brief  but  measurably  definite  plan  of  the  explorations  proposed  on  the 
Indian  reservations,  designating  the  person  who  is  to  have  immediate 
charge  of  the  field  work. 

2.  That  it  shall  furnish  data  for  use  in  compiling  the  card  catalogue 
of  antiquities  now  in  preparation  by  your  Bureau  [the  Bureau  of  American 
Ethnology]  and  for  properly  mapping  the  sites  of  the  explorations  and 
excavations. 

3.  That  it  shall  adopt  a  liberal  policy  of  exchange,  to  the  end  that 
each  participating  institution  may  share  in  the  benefits  of  the  others. 

4.  (tf)  That  thorough  work  shall  be  done  on  each  site  occupied; 
(^)  that  full  notes  shall  be  taken  for  a  catalogue  of  American  antiquities ; 
and  (r)  that  the  results  obtained  by  all  expeditions  shall  be  made  known 
within  a  reasonable  time  through  published  reports. 

This  plan  was  adopted  by  both  the  Office  of  Indian  Affairs  and 
the  Forest  Service  and  was  accepted  as  entirely  satisfactory  by  the 
Southwest  Society.  The  Departments  concerned  have  consistently 
held  that  excavations  may  be  conducted  only  for  the  advancement 
of  the  knowledge  of  archeology  and  not  for  commercial  purposes. 
Collections  may  be  made  only  for  permanent  preservation  in  public 


1 1 2  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

museums,  and  permits  will  be  issued  only  to  qualified  archeologists 
who  are  under  the  direction  of  reputable  institutions  or  societies. 
Recognizing  the  necessity  for  expert  advice  as  to  the  issuance  of 
excavation  permits,  the  Departments  have  adopted  the  plan  of  re- 
ferring all  applications  for  such  permits  to  the  Chief  of  the  Bureau 
of  American  Ethnology  for  an  opinion  as  to  the  standing  of  the 
institution  desiring  the  privilege  and  the  competence  of  the  arche- 
ologist  who  is  to  be  in  charge  of  the  work.  The  spirit  in  which 
the  Bureau  has  responded  to  this  duty  imposed  on  it  by  the  Depart- 
ments is  reflected  in  a  letter  from  its  Chief,  Mr  William  H.  Holmes, 
in  relation  to  the  application  of  the  Southwest  Society  of  the 
Archaeological  Institute  of  America,  from  which  I  quote : 

*'  In  the  way  of  report  on  these  inquiries  I  beg  to  state  that  the 
Archaeological  Institute  of  America  is  to  be  classed  among  the  most  en- 
lightened bodies  of  students  of  human  history  and  antiquity  in  the  country, 
and  its  component  societies,  organized  in  various  cities,  include  in  their 
membership  the  leading  archeologists  of  the  country.  It  may  be  safely 
assumed  that  the  Southwest  Society,  which  is  the  largest  of  the  allied  or- 
ganizations, has  among  its  members  persons  fully  qualified  to  undertake 
the  work  proposed,  and  that  it  will  be  wise  enough  to  entrust  the  work  to 
such,  and  only  such,  as  can  be  implicitly  relied  upon  to  conduct  the  ex- 
cavations in  a  scientific  manner,  to  properly  record  observations,  and  to 
care  for  the  collections  obtained. 

**  This  Bureau  appreciates  fully  the  attitude  of  the  Indian  Office  in  its 
endeavor  to  preserve  the  national  antiquities  for  the  nation,  and  to  pre- 
vent unauthorized  and  unscientific  explorations;  but  it  takes  the  view 
that  whatever  materials  are  intelligently  collected  and  placed  in  reasona- 
bly protected  public  museums,  wherever  situated,  that  provide  systematic 
and  permanent  custodianship,  are  preserved  for  all  the  people.  The  field 
of  American  archeology  is  a  vast  one,  and  the  larger  the  number  of  prop- 
erly qualified  institutions  that  engage  in  the  work,  the  better  for  history 
and  science.  The  system  of  exchanges  of  specimens  and  replicas  of 
important  objects  arranged  between  the  National  Museum  and  other 
museums  of  the  country,  and  the  well-established  practice  of  collaboration 
on  the  part  of  curators  and  students  generally,  place  the  collections  of 
one  institution  practically  at  the  service  of  all." 

On  the  whole  it  would  appear  that  the  system  as  developed 
secures  practically  what  our  students  have  been  asking  for ;  that 


HEWKTT]       PRESERVATION  OF  AMERICAN  ANTIQUITIES  II3 

the  preservation  of  American  antiquities  is  in  a  fair  way  to  be 
accomplished,  and  that  in  the  matter  of  excavation  privileges  sub- 
stantial justice  is  being  done  to  all.  It  is  manifestly  impossible  to 
concentrate  the  entire  authority  in  this  matter  in  any  one  Depart- 
ment. The  purposes  for  which  the  lands  of  the  United  States  are 
administered  are  so  diverse  that  no  Department  could  safely  under- 
take to  grant  privileges  of  any  sort  upon  lands  under  the  jurisdic- 
tion of  another  Department.  Accordingly,  if  archeological  work 
is  proposed  on  forest  reserves  the  application  for  permission  must 
be  to  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture ;  if  on  a  military  reservation,  to 
the  Secretary  of  War ;  and  if  on  an  Indian  reservation  or  on  unap- 
propriated public  lands,  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior.  Any 
other  system  would  lead  to  great  confusion  and  conflict  of  interests. 
It  remains  to  be  considered  what  is  needed  in  the  way  of  national 
legislation  on  this  subject.  I  beg  leave  to  submit  for  your  consid- 
eration the  following  memorandum  of  provisions  which  seem  to  be 
needed.  They  are  drawn  from  measures  previously  brought  for- 
ward, with  such  modifications  as  have  become  necessary  through 
the  rise  of  new  conditions,  and  the  addition  of  some  new  matter, 
designed  to  meet  conditions  with  which  we  were  previously  unac- 
quainted. Every  effort  has  been  made  to  preserve  the  exact  spirit 
of  the  measure  agreed  upon  last  year  by  these  two  organizations 
(the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America  and  the  American  Anthro- 
pological Association)  and  at  the  same  time  meet  the  wishes  of  the 
various  Departments  of  the  Government  that  will  be  charged  with 
the  administration  of  the  law  : 

1 .  That  any  person  who  shall  appropriate,  excavate,  injure,  or  destroy 
any  historic  or  prehistoric  ruin  or  monument,  or  any  object  of  antiquity 
situated  on  lands  owned  or  controlled  by  the  Government  of  the  United 
States,  without  the  permission  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Department  of 
Government  having  jurisdiction  over  the  lands  on  which  said  antiquities 
are  situated  should,  upon  conviction,  be  fined  in  a  sum  not  more  than 
five  hundred  dollars  or  be  imprisoned  for  a  period  of  not  more  than 
ninety  days,  or  should  suffer  both  fine  and  imprisonment  in  the  discretion 
of  the  court. 

2.  That  the  President  of  the  United  States  should  be  authorized,  in 
his  discretion,  to  declare  by  public  proclamation  historic  landmarks,  his- 
toric and  prehistoric  structures,  and  other  objects  of  historic  or  scientific 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S  ,  8-8. 


1 14  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

interest  that  axe  situated  upon  the  lands  owned  or  controlled  by  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  to  be  national  monuments,  and  to  reserve 
as  a  part  thereof  parcels  of  land,  the  limits  of  which  in  all  cases  should 
be  confined  to  the  smallest  area  compatible  with  the  proper  care  and 
management  of  the  objects  to  be  protected :  Provided^  That  when  such 
objects  are  situated  upon  a  tract  covered  by  a  bona  fide  unperfected  claim 
or  held  in  private  ownership,  that  tract,  or  so  much  thereof  as  may  be 
necessary  for  the  proper  care  and  management  of  the  object  may  be  re- 
linquished to  the  Government,  and  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  should 
be  authorized  to  accept  the  relinquishment  of  such  tracts  in  behalf  of  the 
Government  of  the  United  States. 

3.  That  permits  for  the  examination  of  ruins,  the  excavation  of  arch- 
eological  sites,  and  the  gathering  of  objects  of  antiquity  upon  the  lands 
under  their  respective  jurisdictions,  should  be  granted  by  the  Secretaries 
of  the  Interior,  Agriculture,  and  War,  to  institutions  which  they  may 
deem  properly  qualified  to  conduct  such  examination,  excavation,  or 
gathering,  subject  to  such  rules  and  regulations  as  they  may  prescribe : 
Providedy  That  the  examinations,  excavations,  and  gatherings  are  under- 
taken for  the  benefit  of  reputable  museums,  universities,  colleges,  or 
other  recognized  scientific  or  educational  institutions,  with  a  view  to  in- 
creasing the  knowledge  of  such  objects,  and  that  the  gatherings  shall  be 
made  for  permanent  preservation  in  public  museums. 

4.  That  the  Secretaries  of  the  Departments  aforesaid  should  make 
and  publish  from  time  to  time  uniform  rules  and  regulations  for  the  purpose 
of  carrying  out  the  provisions  of  this  law. 

In  a  separate  resolution  I  desire  to  ask  these  two  organizations 
to  consider  the  matter  of  the  proposed  Mesa  Verde  National  Park 
in  Colorado,  provided  for  in  a  bill  introduced  by  Representative 
H.  M.  Hogg,  now  pending  before  the  national  Congress.  This  is 
one  of  the  most  important  pieces  of  legislation  looking  toward  the 
preservation  of  American  antiquities  that  has  ever  been  proposed, 
and  it  seems  most  fitting  that  these  organizations  should  give  it 
their  enthusiastic  support. 

[The  recommendations  made  by  Mr  Hewett  in  the  above  paper  were  subsequently 
considered  at  the  joint  business  meeting  of  the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America  and 
the  American  Anthropological  Association,  were  unanimously  accepted,  and  subsequently 
embodied  in  a  bill  which  has  been  introduced  by  the  Honorable  John  F.  Lacey  of  Iowa 
asH.  R.  11016.  A  resolution  was  also  passed  urging  the  creation  of  the  Mesa  Verde 
National  Park  in  Colorado. — Editor, ^ 

Washington,  D.  C, 

December^  IQO^. 


HOUSES  AND  GARDENS   OF  THE   NEW   ENGLAND 

INDIANS 

By  CHARLES  C.  WILLOUGHBY 

The  habitations  of  the  New  England  Indians  were  of  three 
general  types  —  the  round  house,  the  long  house,  and  the  conical 
house.  The  first  two  forms  occurred  throughout  this  area.  The 
conical  house  seems  to  have  been  more  common  in  Maine  than 
in  other  sections  of  New  England,  where  if  used  at  all  it  was  prob- 
ably employed  as  a  temporary  shelter  only. 

THE   ROUND   HOUSE 

The  outline  of  the  round  house  (fig.  lo,  ^,  d)  closely  approached 
that  of  a  hemisphere.  The  ground-plan  was  circular,^  with  an 
approximate  diameter  of  from  ten  to  sixteen  feet.*  The  probable 
height  of  these  lodges  over  the  central  fireplace  was  from  six  to 
eight  feet.  They  were  occupied  by  one  or  two  families.  Accord- 
ing to  Williams  *'  two  families  will  live  comfortably  and  lovingly  in 
a  little  round  house  of  some  fourteen  or  sixteen  foot  over." 

The  framework  consisted  of  small  poles  set  in  the  ground  two 
or  three  feet  apart,  enclosing  the  circular  floor  space.  Several 
arches  were  made  of  "  halfe  circles  of  timber,"  ^  each  formed  by  bend- 
ing and  lashing  two  opposite  poles  together.  The  remaining  poles 
were  bent  over  and  joined  to  these  arches,  and  horizontal  poles 
were  added,  the  whole  being  firmly  bound  together.  Morton's 
description  is  as  follows  : 

**  They  gather  Poles  in  the  woodes  and  put  the  great  end  of  them  in 
the  ground,  placinge  them  in  forme  of  a  circle  or  circumference  and, 
bendinge  the  topps  of  them  in  form  of  an  Arch  they  bind  them  together 

*  Verrazano  in  Hakluyt,  Divers  Voyages^  Hakluyt  Society's  repr.,  p.  68.  Cham- 
plain,  Voyages  (Prince  Society),  vol.  ii,  pp.  83,  124. 

•  Verrazano,  ibid.  Roger  Williams,  Key  into  the  Language  of  America^  Rhode 
Island  Hist.  Soc.  Coll.,  vol.  I,  p.  48. 

'Verrazano,  ibid. 

"5 


1 1 8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

long  type,  especially  in  the  southern  half  of  New  England,  smaller 
cabins  were  also  used  for  winter  habitations. 

Verrazano,  describing  the  New  England  habitations  in  1524, 

writes : 

<<  We  sawe  their  houses  made  in  circuler  or  rounde  fourm  10  or  12 
foote  in  compasse.  .  .  .  They  moove  the  foresaide  houses  from  one  place 
to  another  according  to  the  commoditie  of  the  place  and  season,  wherein 
they  will  make  their  aboade  and  only  taking  of  the  cover,  they  have 
other  houses  builded  incontinent.  The  father  and  whole  familie  dwell 
together  in  one  house  in  great  number  :  in  some  of  them  we  saw  25  or  30 
persons/*  * 

The  long  house  was  used  as  a  dwelling  or  for  council  or  cere- 
monial purposes  throughout  New  England.  It  seems  to  have  been 
used  for  the  former  purpose  as  far  east  as  the  Saco  river,  Maine,  and 
probably  in  other  sections  of  the  state.  The  great  wigwam  was 
employed  for  council  purposes  on  the  Kennebec  river.  The  one 
on  the  Penobscot  was  twenty  feet  wide  by  forty  feet  long,*  and 
Gyles  saw  one  thirty  or  forty  feet  in  length  on  the  St  John  river  in 
New  Brunswick. 

THE   CONICAL    HOUSE 

The  conical  wigwam  (fig.  11,  b.c)  seems  not  to  have  been  in  very 
general  use ;  it  is  the  traditional  lodge  of  the  modem  Penobscot 
Indians,  who  have  no  knowledge  of  other  aboriginal  forms.  The 
framework  was  made  of  straight  poles  with  their  lower  ends  set 
into  the  ground  enclosing  the  circular  floor  space,  their  upper  ends 
being  brought  together  and  fastened.  This  frame  resembled  that 
of  the  skin  tipi  of  the  Plains  tribes,  and  was  covered  with  bark  mats 
or  pieces  of  bark  which  were  sometimes  held  in  place  by  a  second 
series  of  poles  placed  over  them.  Father  Rasles,  in  a  letter  written 
at  the  Indian  village  of  Nanrantsouak  (Norridgewock)  on  the  Ken- 
nebec in  1723,  describes  the  type  as  follows : 

* '  Their  cabins  are  easily  built.  They  plant  poles  in  the  earth,  which 
they  join  at  the  top,  and  then  cover  them  with  large  pieces  of  bark.  The 
fire  they  make  in  the  middle  of  the  cabin  and  all  around  it  .  .  .  they 
sit  during  the  day  and  sleep  at  night.  *  * ' 

1  Verrazano,  op.  cit. ,  p.  68 

« Maine  Hist.  Soc.  Coll.,  1876,  vol.  vii,  p.  14 

•  Kip,  Early  Jesuit  Missions  in  North  America^  p.  24. 


wiLLOUGHBY]  NEW  ENGLAND  HOUSES  AND   GARDENS  II9 

The  cabins  thus  described  were  not  temporary  shelters,  but 
formed  a  permanent  village  which  was  surrounded  by  palisades. 

Both  the  round  and  the  conical  wigwams  stand  side  by  side  in 
the  modem  camps  of  the  Cree  and  Ojibwa,  and  it  is  not  improbable 
that  they  were  thus  used  over  a  considerable  portion  of  Maine. 

OTHER    HOUSES 

Mourt  in  his  Relation  ^  thus  describes  the  cabin  of  a  chief  in 
eastern  Massachusetts  : 

"A  mile  from  hence,  Nanepashemet  their  King  in  his  lifetime  had 
lived,  His  house  was  not  like  others,  but  a  scaffold  was  largely  built,  with 
pools  and  plancks,  some  six  foote  from  the  ground,  and  the  house  upon 
that,  being  situated  on  the  top  of  a  hill.*' 

Dwellings  upon  raised  platforms  were  unusual.  According  to 
Williams  it  was  the  custom  to  erect  "  little  watch-houses  in  the 
middle  of  their  fields  in  which  they  or  their  biggest  children  lodge, 
and  early  in  the  morning  prevent  the  birds"  from  injuring  the  corn. 
He  gives  no  description  of  these  structures.  They  were,  however, 
probably  like  the  watch-houses  of  the  southern  Algonquians  built 
for  the  same  purpose.  A  picture  of  one  of  these  in  the  village  of 
Secota,  by  John  White,*  shows  a  raised  platform  on  which  is  built 
a  small  cabin  or  shelter  open  at  one  side.  This  is  referred  to  in  the 
text  as  follows : 

*'  In  their  corn  fields  they  built,  as  it  were,  a  scaffold  on  which  they 
set  a  cottage  .  .  .  where  they  place  one  to  watch,  for  there  are  such  a 
number  of  fowls  and  beasts. ' ' 

This  dwelling  of  Nanepashemet's  seems  to  have  been  patterned 
after  a  watch-house.  Such  a  cabin  would  be  more  comfortable  in 
summer  than  the  ordinary  form,  being  cooler  and  more  free  from 
fleas  and  other  vermin. 

Little  hunting  houses  of  bark  and  rushes,  "  not  comparable  to 
their  dwelling  houses,"  ^  were  built  by  hunters  for  temporary  occu- 
pancy while  on  their  fall  hunts. 

In  common  with  most  American  tribes  the  New  England  In- 


'  Mourt' s  Relation,  Journal  of  the  Pilgrims  at  Plymouth^  Cheever's  repr.,  p.  90. 
'  Hariot,  Brief  and  True  Report  of  Virginia^  pi.  XX. 
'Williams,  op.  dt.,  p.  141. 


I20  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

dians  erected  little  wigwams,  called  wetuomemese,  in  which  the 
women  lived  alone  during  catamenia,  "which  custome  in  all  parts  of 
the  country  they  strictly  observe."  ^ 
The  men's  sweat-lodge  was  a 

.  .  .  "little  cell  or  cave,  six  or  eight  foot  over,  round,  made  on  the  side 
of  a  hill  (commonly  by  some  Rivulet  or  Brooke) ,  into  this  frequently 
the  Men  enter,  after  they  have  exceedingly  heated  it  with  a  store  of  wood, 
laid  upon  a  heape  of  stones  in  the  middle.  When  they  have  taken  out 
the  fire,  the  stones  keep  still  a  great  heate  :  Ten,  twelve,  twenty  more  or 
lesse,  enter  at  once  stark  naked  .  .  .  here  doe  they  sit  round  these  hot 
stones  an  hour  or  more  taking  tobacco,  discoursing  and  sweating  together, 
.  .  .  when  they  come  fourth  ...  I  have  seen  them  runne  (Summer 
and  Winter)  into  the  brookes  to  cool  them,  without  the  least  hurt.*'  * 

Another  form  of  sweat-lodge,  sometimes  used  by  the  shamans 
for  their  powwows,  consisted  of  a  small  hut  covered  with  skins  or 
mats.  Within  was  a  pile  of  hot  stones  over  which  water  was 
poured.^ 

LODGE  COVERINGS 

"The  best  sort  of  their  houses  are  covered  very  neatly,  tight,  and 
warm,  with  the  barks  of  trees,  slipped  from  their  bodies  at  such  seasons 
when  the  sap  is  up  ;  and  made  into  great  flakes  with  pressure  of  weighty 
timbers  when  they  are  green ;  and  so  becoming  dry  they  will  retain  a 
form  suitable  for  the  use  they  prepare  them  for.  * '  * 

Birch,  chestnut,*  and  oak  *  bark  are  recorded  as  being  used  for 
lodge  covering,  and  it  is  probable  that  the  bark  of  other  large  trees 
such  as  elm,  pine,  and  hemlock,  were  also  used.  The  bark  was 
fastened  to  the  framework  so  that  the  upper  pieces  overlapped  the 
lower.  Poles  were  sometimes  laid  over  the  bark  to  aid  in  keeping 
it  in  place.  Portable  mats  made  of  flags  were  extensively  used  for 
lodge  coverings.  The  flag  leaves  were  "  finely  sowed  together  with 
needles  made  of  the  splinter  bones  [fibula]  of  a  Cranes  legge, 
with  thread  made  of  their  Indian  hempe.*'  '^     Lodges  thus  covered 

*  Ibid.,  p.  47. 
«Ibid.,  p.  158. 
'Gyles,  op.  cit.,  p.  91. 
^Gookin,  op.  dt.,  p.  149. 
*WiUiams,  op.  cit.,  p.  48. 
^Champlain,  op.  cit.,  p.  67. 
^Morton,  op.  cit.,  p.  135. 


I 


wiLLOUGHBY]     NE  W  ENGLAND  HOUSES  AND  GARDENS  1 2 1 

"  deny  entrance  to  any  drop  of  raine  though  it  come  both  fierce  and 
long.  Neither  can  the  piercing  North  winde  find  a  crannie  through 
which  he  can  conveigh  his  cooling  breath.  They  be  warmer  than 
our  English  houses."  ^  Gookin  says  that  mat-covered  lodges  were 
**  indifferent  tight  and  warm  but  not  so  good  as  those  covered 
with  bark." 

The  Ojibwa,  Winnebago,  and  other  tribes  still  use  this  style  of 
matting.  The  mats  are  three  or  four  feet  wide  and  eight  or  ten 
feet  in  length.  The  leaves  are  strung  together  on  cords  of  bast 
or  Indian  hemp  in  such  a  manner  that  each  alternate  leaf  lies  upon 
the  opposite  side  so  as  to  cover  the  j  unction  of  the  two  opposite  leaves. 
These  cords  are  placed  at  intervals  of  a  few  inches  and  extend  the 
length  of  the  mat,  the  ends  of  which  are  furnished  with  wooden 
strips  and  with  cords  for  tying  the  mats  to  the  lodge  frame.  Fast- 
ening strings  are  also  placed  along  the  sides.  These  mats  are  light, 
portable,  and  fairly  durable. 

Another  style  of  mat  for  lodge  coverings,  probably  not  uncom- 
mon in  certain  sections  of  New  England,  and  still  used  by  the 
Micmac,  Cree,  and  Ojibwa,  is  made  of  pieces  of  the  outer  bark  of 
the  white  birch  sewed  together.  The  pieces  forming  the  mat  are 
usually  three  or  four  feet  in  length  (the  width  of  the  mat)  and  of 
varying  width.  The  pieces  are  joined  by  overlapping  their  longer 
edges  and  sewing  with  split  spruce  roots.  Each  end  of  the  mat  is 
finished  by  placing  two  narrow  and  thin  strips  of  wood,  one  at  each 
side,  so  as  to  enclose  the  edge  of  the  bark  between  them.  These 
are  sewed  and  bound  together  with  split  roots.  An  additional 
piece  of  bark,  a  foot  or  more  long  and  four  or  five  inches  wide,  is 
caught  between  these  binding  strips  by  one  of  its  longest  edges  at 
each  end  of  the  mat  as  a  reenforcement.  The  mat  is  furnished 
with  tying  cords,  and  when  formed  into  a  roll  occupies  a  very  small 
space,  being  light  and  portable.  It  was  probably  this  kind  of  lodge 
covering  that  Father  Rasles  referred  to  as  bark  cloths.  In  the  ex- 
cursions of  the  Norridgewock  Indians  down  the  Kennebec  to  the  sea- 
shore once  or  twice  every  season,  when  camping  for  the  night  they 
would  *'  cover  themselves  with  bark  which  they  carry  with  them 
and  which  they  have  rolled  out  until  it  resembles  cloth."  ^     These 

>  Wood,  op.  cit.,  p.  99. 
*Kip,  op.  cit.,  p.  60. 


122  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [H.  s.,  8,  1906 

bark  mats  are  still  used  as  portable  lodge  coverings  from  New 
Brunswick  to  Lake  Winnipeg,  and  in  early  historic  times  were 
doubtless  common  to  the  canoe  birch  region  throughout  the 
Algonquian  area. 

The  poorer  wigwams  were  sometimes  covered  with  a  thatch  of 
reeds,  grass,  or  corn-husk,^  or  with  boughs  of  trees.* 

HOUSE    FURNISHINGS 

The  walls  of  the  more  permanent  habitations  were  lined  with 
embroidered  mats,^  or  with  mats  of  rushes  painted  in  several  colors.* 
These  mats  were  also  used  as  bedding  and  to  sit  upon.  The  lining 
mats  of  the  Ojibwa  are  probably  very  similar  to  those  of  New 
England,  the  woof  of  these  being  composed  of  rushes,  the  warp  of 
twisted  cords  of  bast.  The  color  of  the  ground-work  is  the  natural 
brownish-yellow  of  the  dried  rushes,  and  pleasing  patterns  are  pro- 
duced in  considerable  variety  by  weaving  in  rushes  dyed  in  various 
colors.  Some  of  these  mats  bear  a  very  close  resemblance  to  the 
simpler  kinds  of  Japanese  straw  matting. 

In  the  smaller  lodges  a  single  fire  was  sufficient  for  the  family. 
In  the  larger  habitations  two,  three,  or  more  fires  were  required  ac- 
cording to  the  number  of  occupants.  Hearths  were  often  made  of 
small  field  stones.  Sometimes  a  post  reaching  to  the  roof  was  set 
up  beside  the  fireplace,  the  upper  end  being  secured  to  a  cross- 
piece.  At  a  convenient  height  a  pin  was  driven  into  the  post,  and 
upon  the  pin  the  kettle  was  hung.  At  the  foot  of  the  post  a 
broad,  flat  stone  was  set  up  to  protect  the  post  from  the  fire.* 

Sometimes  a  scaffold  about  two  feet  high  was  built  over  the  fire- 
place by  driving  four  crotched  sticks  into  the  ground.  Cross-bars 
were  laid  over  the  crotches,  and  over  these  and  at  right  angles  to 
them  were  placed  sticks,^  upon  which  fish  and  other  food  was  dried 
and  smoked.     The  fire  was  usually  made  of  dry  wood  (windfalls), 


*  Champlain,  op.  cit.,  pp.  83,  124. 

"Higgeson,  Nnu  England* s  Plantation^  Mass.  Hist.  Coll.,   1st  s.,  voU  I,  p.  123, 
repr.  1859. 

•Williams,  op.  cit.,  p.  47. 
*Josselyn,  op.  cit.,  p.  98. 
6  Ibid. 
•Mourt,  op.  cit.,  p.  39. 


wiLLOUGHBY]    NEW  ENGLAND  HOUSES  AND   GARDENS  1 23 

but  sometimes  a  tree  was  felled  and  the  log  drawn  into  the  lodge. 
The  fire  was  maintained  at  either  side  near  one  end,  the  log  being 
gradually  pushed  onto  the  hearth  until  all  was  consumed.^  Small 
torches  made  of  pitch  pine  *'  cloven  into  little  slices  "  were  used  as 
occasion  required  for  lighting  the  interior  of  the  hut*  Fire  was 
produced  both  by  friction  and  percussion,  the  latter  process  being 
more  common. 

The  people  sometimes  slept  upon  mats  and  skins  placed  on  the 
ground,  but  in  the  better  class  of  habitations  bedsteads  were  made 
by  setting  forked  sticks  into  the  earth,  which  supported  stout  poles 
a  foot  or  eighteen  inches  from  the  ground.  Over  these,  at  right 
angles  were  laid  other  poles,  or  planks  split  from  logs.'  In  the 
large  houses  the  beds  were  six  or  eight  feet  wide,  being  large 
enough  to  accommodate  three  or  four  persons.*  The  bedding  con- 
sisted of  a  reed  mat  "two  or  three  fingers  thick,'*  *  or  of  mats  and 
skins. 

For  household  utensils  there  were  mortars  and  pestles  of  stone 
and  wood  ;  basket  sieves  for  sifting  commeal ;  •  boxes,  buckets,  and 
dishes  of  birch-bark ;  wooden  dishes ;  baskets  and  bags  of  various 
sorts,  and  earthen  pots.  Trays,  bowls,  and  ladles  were  made  **  very 
smooth  and  artificial  and  of  a  sort  of  wood  not  subject  to  split."^ 
"  They  have  dainty  wooden  bowles  of  maple  of  highe  price  amongst 
them ;  and  these  are  disposed  by  bartering  one  with  the  other  and 
are  but  in  certain  parts  of  the  Country  made,  where  the  several 
trades  are  appropriated  to  the  inhabitants  of  those  parts  onely."® 
These  were  made  from  the  knotty  parts  of  the  maple  and  other 
hard  woods  by  charring  and  scraping,  the  surface  being  after- 
ward ground  smooth  and  polished.  They  were  of  graceful  form, 
with  wall  of  uniform  thickness,  the  curly  grain  of  the  knots  show- 
ing  to   advantage.     Ladles  and   spoons  were  wrought  from  the 


'  Morton,  op.  cit.,  p.  135. 

*Higgeson,  op.  cit,  p.  122. 

*Champlain,  op.  cit.,  p.  125.     Morton,  op.  cit,  p.  135. 

^Gookin,  op.  dt.,  p.  150. 

*Champlain,  op.  cit.,  p.  125 

*Gookin,  op.  dt. 

^Ibid.,  p.  151. 

*  Morton,  op.  dt,  p.  159. 


1 24  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [K.  s.,  8,  1906 

crooked,  knotty  branches  of  the  mountain  laurel  ("spoon  wood"). 
Buckets  with  bails,  boxes  of  various  sizes,  platters,  etc.,  were  made 
of  birch-bark.  The  buckets  were  for  holding  liquids,  the  seams 
being  rendered  tight  with  spruce-gum.  "Delicate  sweet  dishes 
too"  they  have  of  birch-bark  ornamented  upon  the  outside  with 
"  flourisht  works,  and  upon  the  brims  with  glistering  quills  taken 
from  the  Porcupine,  and  dyed,  some  black,  others  red,  the  white 
being  natural."^  The  inner  side  of  the  white  birch-bark  used  in 
making  dishes  and  boxes  is  of  a  reddish  brown  color.  This  side 
was  generally  taken  for  the  outer  side  of  the  dish.  Ornamental  de- 
signs often  covering  the  entire  outer  surface  were  made  by  scraping 
away  portions  of  the  thin  brown  inner  layer  until  the  desired  pat- 
tern appeared  in  the  light  yellow  of  the  bark  beneath.  The  rim 
was  finished  by  enclosing  the  edge  of  the  bark  between  two  wooden 
hoops,  and  carefully  sewing  all  together  with  split  spruce  roots. 
Sometimes  porcupine  quills  were  used  in  ornamenting  the  rim  by 
being  woven  into  the  spruce-root  wrappings.  Baskets  and  bags 
were  of  many  kind  and  sizes.' 

Earthen  pots  such  as  "they  seeth  their  food  in,  which  were 
heretofore,  and  yet  are  [1674]  in  use  among  some  of  them,  are 
made  of  clay  or  earth  almost  in  the  form  of  an  egg,  with  the  top 
taken  off  .  .  .  the  clay  or  earth  they  were  made  of  was  very  scarce 
and  dear."'  These  pots  varied  in  size  from  a  quart  to  two  or  three 
gallons.* 

The  following  is  an  excellent  description  of  the  wigwams  and 
their  furnishings,  seen  by  the  Pilgrims  at  Cape  Cod  in  1620  :  * 

**The  houses  were  made  with  long  yong  Sapling  trees  bended  and 
both  ends  stucke  into  the  ground  ;  they  were  made  round  like  unto  an 
Arbour,  and  covered  downe  to  the  ground  with  thicke  and  well  wrought 
matts,  and  the  doore  was  not  over  a  yard  high,  made  of  a  matt  to  open  ; 
the  chimney  was  a  wide  open  hole  in  the  top,  for  which  they  had  a  matt 
to  cover  it  close  when  they  pleased  ;  one  might  stand  and  goe  upright  in 

'Josselyn,  op.  cit.,  p.  ill. 

2  Willoughby,  Textile  Fabrics  of  the  New  England  Indians,  American  Anthropolo- 
gist, 1905,  vol.  7,  p.  85. 

'Gookin,  op.  cit.,  p.  15 1 • 
*  Morton,  op.  cit. ,  p.  1 59* 
*Mourt,  op.  cit.,  pp.  39,  40. 


wiLLOUGHBY]    NEW  ENGLAND  HOUSES  AND   GARDENS  1 25 

them,  in  the  midst  of  them  were  foure  little  trunches  knockt  into  the 
ground,  and  small  stickes  laid  over,  on  which  they  hung  their  Pots  and 
what  they  had  to  seeth ;  round  about  the  fire  they  lay  on  matts,  which  are 
their  beds.  The  houses  were  double  matted,  for  as  they  were  matted 
without,  so  were  they  within,  with  newer  &  fairer  matts.  In  the  houses 
we  found  wooden  Boules,  Trayes  and  Dishes,  Earthen  Pots,  Hand  baskets 
made  of  Crab  shells,  wrought  together ;  Also  an  English  Paile  or  Bucket, 
it  wanted  a  bayle,  but  it  had  two  Iron  ears :  there  were  also  Baskets  of 
sundry  sorts,  bigger  and  some  lesser,  finer  and  some  coarser :  some 
were  curiously  wrought  with  blacke  and  white  in  pretie  works,  and  sundry 
other  of  their  household  stuflfe :  we  found  also  two  or  three  Deeres  heads, 
one  whereof  had  bin  newly  killed,  for  it  was  still  fresh  ;  there  was  also  a 
company  of  Deeres  feete  stuck  up  in  the  houses,  Harts  horns,  and  Eagles 
clawes  —  and  sundry  such  like  things  there  was ;  also  two  or  three  Baskets 
full  of  parched  Acomes,  peeces  of  fish  and  a  peece  of  broyled  Hering. 
We  found  also  a  little  silke  grasse  and  a  little  Tobacco  seed,  with  some 
other  seeds  which  wee  knew  not ;  without  were  sundry  bundles  of  Flags, 
Sedge,  Bullrushes  and  other  stuffe  to  make  matts. 

PERMANENCY   OF    VILLAGES 

The  members  of  each  tribe  or  community  were  the  recognized 
proprietors  of  certain  hunting,  fishing,  and  agricultural  lands,  held 
generally  in  common.  According  to  Williams  they  were  **very 
exact  and  punctuall  in  the  bounds  of  their  Lands  belonging  to  this 
or  that  Prince  or  People  (even  to  a  River,  Brooke  &c.).  And  I  have 
knowne  them  to  make  bargaine  and  sale  amongst  themselves  for  a 
small  piece  or  quantity  of  Ground."  *  Good  agricultural  lands  and 
good  hunting  and  fishing  grounds  were  necessary  for  the  well-being 
of  every  community.  In  some  regions  these  were  combined  in  a  com- 
paratively small  area  and  the  village  was  in  a  measure  permanent. 
In  other  localities  they  were  widely  separated,  and  the  village  or 
groups  of  people  belonging  to  the  community  rotated  from  place  to 
place  according  to  the  season.  The  winter  villages  were  usually 
situated  in  warm,  thickly  wooded  valleys  near  some  lake  or  river. 
In  the  early  spring  the  people  moved  to  their  fishing  places,  and 
when  planting  season  arrived  they  sought  their  summer  fields. 
During  the  latter  season  they  would  often  remove  from  one  part  of 


*  Williams,  op.  cit.,  p.  89. 


1 26  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

their  fields  to  a  fresh  place  "  because  of  the  abundance  of  fleas  which 
the  dust  of  their  house  breeds."  During  the  intervals  between 
planting,  cultivating,  and  gathering  their  com  and  vegetables,  groups 
and  families  made  excursions  to  their  clam-beds  or  other  localities 
in  search  of  food.  After  the  harvest  was  gathered  they  sometimes 
removed  to  a  hunting  house,  "  and  forsake  it  not  until  Snow  lie 
thick,- and  then  will  travell  home,  Men,  women  and  children  thorow 
the  snow,  thirtie,  yea,  fiftie  or  sixtie  miles ;  but  their  great  remove 
is  from  their  Summer  fields  to  warm  and  thicke  woodie  bottomes 
where  they  winter."  ^  Lodge  frames  were  sometimes  left  standing 
ready  for  the  portable  mats  if  the  owners  returned  to  the  same  spot. 
The  Indians  were  very  expeditious  at  their  removals.  **  They 
are  quicke ;  in  halfe  a  day,  yea,  sometimes  at  a  few  houres  warning 
to  be  gone  and  the  house  up  elsewhere,  especially  if  they  have  stakes 
ready  pitcht  for  their  Mats.'**  Josselyn  writes  :  **  I  have  seen  half 
a  hundred  of  their  Wigwams  together  in  a  piece  of  ground,  and 
they  show  prettily,  within  a  day  or  two  or  a  week  they  have  been 
all  dispersed."^ 

FORTS 

Most  communities  had  as  their  headquarters  one  or  more  forti- 
fied enclosures,  where  the' people  dwelt  at  certain  seasons,  or  into 
which  they  moved  in  time  of  danger.  The  larger  forts  consisted  of 
more  or  less  permanent  villages  of  a  score  or  more  of  cabins  en- 
closed by  a  high  palisade.  The  smaller  ones  were  forty  or  fifty  feet 
in  diameter  and  contained  a  single  cabin.  The  construction  of  the 
fortifications  was  practically  the  same  whether  they  contained  one  or 
fifty  houses.  Some  were  rectangular,  others  circular.  The  smaller 
ones  had  but  one  entrance,  while  the  larger  had  two,  one  on  each 
side. 

In  constructing  a  fort  all  the  people  joined  in  the  work.  A 
circular  or  rectangular  plot  of  ground  was  marked  off  and  sur- 
rounded by  a  narrow  trench  about  three  feet  deep.  Into  this  were 
set  close  together  in  a  single  row  *' young  trees  and  half  trees  as 
thick  as  a  man's  thigh  or  the  calf  of  his  leg.     Ten  or  twelve  feet 


>  Williams,  op.  cit.,  p.  56. 

« Ibid. 

•Jossel)m,  op.  cit.,  p.  98. 


wiLLOUGHBY]    NEW  ENGLAND  HOUSES  AND   GARDENS  \2J 

high  they  are  above  the  ground  and  within  [the  ground]  rammed 
three  foot  deep  with  undermining."  *  A  trench  breast  high  was  usu- 
ally dug  both  within  and  without,*  the  earth  being  thrown  up 
against  the  palisades  for  the  "  better  shelter  against  the  enemies 
dischargcments."     Sometimes  the  outer  trench  was  omitted. 

The  entrance  to  the  fort  was  formed  by  overlapping  the  ends  of 
the  rows  of  palisades,  leaving  a  narrow  passage  between  them. 
When  occasion  required  this  passage  was  stopped  with  boughs  and 
brush.  The  outer  trench  was  spanned  by  a  bridge  or  a  log  which 
led  to  the  entrance.^ 

The  palisades  were  set  close  together,  but  open  spaces  between 
logs  not  perfectly  straight  were  unavoidable.  Such  openings  were 
used  as  loop  holes.  Underbill  *  says  the  palisades  of  the  Pequot 
fort  were  fastened  close  one  to  another.  Other  authorities  do  not 
refer  to  the  joining  of  the  palisades. 

The  fort  of  the  Penobscot  Indians  was  seventy  feet  long  and 
fifty  feet  broad.  Within  were  twenty-three  well  finished  wigwams.* 
There  were  two  forts  on  the  Kennebec,  one  at  Taconock  (Wins- 
low),  the  other  at  Norridgewock.  Both  of  these  contained  several 
cabins.  The  fort  seen  by  Champlain  at  Chouacoit  (Saco)  river  was 
nejirly  square  (fig.  1 1,  d\     He  writes  : 

''  The  savages  dwell  permanently  in  this  place  and  have  a  large  cabin 
surrounded  by  palisades  made  of  rather  large  trees  placed  by  the  side  of 
each  other,  in  which  they  take  refuge  when  their  enemies  make  war  upon 
them. ' '  • 

The  two  circular  forts  visited  by  the  Pilgrims  in  eastern  Massa- 
chusetts were  forty  or  fifty  feet  in  diameter.  They  each  contained 
a  single  cabin.^  The  fort  at  Natick  was  also  circular.®  That  of 
the  Pequots  in  southeastern  Connecticut  enclosed  about  an  acre  of 
ground  •  and  contained  sixty  or  seventy  wigwams.'®    It  was  circular, 

*  Vincent's  Narrative,  Orr*s  rcpr.,  in  History  of  the  Pequot  War^  p.  105. 

'Mourt,  op.  cit.,  p.  90. 

•Drake,  History  of  Philip*  s  fVar,  p.  58.     Mourt,  op.  cit,  p.  90. 

^UnderhiU's  Narrative,  Orr's  repr.,  in  History  of  the  Pequot  War^  p.  78. 

•Drake,  op.  cit.,  p.  325. 

•Champlain,  op.  dt.,  p.  67. 

^  Mourt,  op.  cit.,  p.  90. 

•Gookin,  op.  dt.,  p.  181. 

•Underbill,  op.  dt.,  p.  78. 

'•Hutchinson,  History  of  Massachusetts  Bay^  vol.  I,  p.  78. 


128  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

with  two  entrances.  The  ground-plan  is  well  shown  in  the  en- 
graving in  the  original  edition  of  Underhill.*  This  drawing,  how- 
ever, is  in  many  respects  misleading. 

The  forts  in  the  southern  half  of  New  England  were  probably 
not  all  circular,  for  Wood  writes  that  some  are  forty  or  fifty  feet 
"  square."  Numerous  other  fortifications  are  noted  by  New  Eng- 
land writers.  These  defences  were  frequently  situated  upon  a  hill 
top.  Philip's  fort  was  on  elevated  ground  three  or  four  acres  in  ex- 
tent in  the  middle  of  a  hideous  swamp.  The  writer  recently  ex- 
amined the  remains  of  a  circular  fort  on  the  top  of  a  hill  near  Salem, 
Massachusetts.  The  earthwork  was  about  fifty  feet  in  diameter 
with  a  trench  on  the  inner  side  only. 

GARDENS 

Agriculture  was  universal  among  the  New  England  tribes. 
Much  of  the  coast  region  south  of  the  Saco  river,  Maine,  was 
under  tillage.  The  high,  rocky  shores  of  the  central  and  eastern 
portion  of  Maine  were  not  suitable  for  agriculture,  but  the  fertile 
river  valleys  of  the  interior  of  this  state  and  throughout  New  Eng- 
land generally  had  their  well  cultivated  gardens  wherein  were 
grown  corn,  beans,  pumpkins,  squashes,  artichokes,  and  tobacco.* 
According  to  Williams  — 

*  *  The  women  of  a  family  will  commonly  raise  two  or  three  heaps  [of 
corn]  of  twelve,  fifteene  or  twentie  bushells  a  heap,  which  they  drie  in 
round  broad  heaps ;  and  if  she  have  helpe  of  her  children  or  friends, 
much  more."  '' 

Therefore  a  family  would  commonly  raise  from  twenty-four  to 
sixty  bushels  of  unshelled  corn.  This  apparently  does  not  include 
the  amount  of  green  corn  consumed,  which  was  considerable. 
Judging  by  the  average  yield  of  the  ordinary  field  of  the  New 
England  farmer  of  today,  which  is  but  a  reproduction  of  an  Indian 
garden,  and  taking  into  consideration  the  somewhat  larger  yield  of 
modern  varieties  of  corn,  it  seems  probable  that  the  amount  of 
land  ordinarily  under  cultivation  by  a  single  Indian  family  would 

*  Nnvs  from  America,  London,l^l638. 
*Champlain,  op.  cit.,  pp.  64,  82. 
•Williams,  op.  cit.,  p.  93. 


wiLLOUGHBY]    NEW  ENGLAND  HOUSES  AND    GARDENS  1 29 

be  from  half  an  acre  to  about  one  and  a  half  acres,  or,  in  other 
words,  a  plot  of  ground  from  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  to  two 
hundred  and  fifty  feet  square.  This  estimate  is  corroborated  by 
Gookin,  who  says  the  Indian  fields  at  Wabquissit  yielded  forty 
bushels  of  com  to  the  acre.  The  Indians  taught  the  colonists  their 
native  agriculture  —  to  "  cull  out  the  finest  seede,  to  observe  fittest 
season,  to  keep  distance  for  holes  and  fit  measure  for  hills,  to  worme 
it  and  weed  it ;  to  prune  it,  and  dress  it,  as  occasion  shall  require."  * 

Wood  also  says  that  the  Indians  exceed  the  English  husband- 
men in  the  care  of  their  fields,  keeping  them  clear  with  their  clam- 
shell hoes,  not  suffering  a  weed  to  "advance  his  audacious  head 
above  their  infant  com,  or  an  undermining  worm  to  spoile  his 
spumes.*' 

When  a  field  was  to  be  broken  up  they  had  a  *'  loving  sociable 
speedy  way  to  despatch  it ;  all  the  neighbors  men  and  women, 
fortie,  fiftie,  &c.  joyne  and  came  in  to  helpe  freely.'*  ^  In  preparing 
new  land  the  trees  were  cut  off  about  three  feet  from  the  ground 
and  the  branches  piled  against  the  trunk  and  bumed.  Corn  was 
planted  between  the  stumps  and  in  course  of  time  the  stumps  and 
roots  were  torn  up.*  Each  family  had  its  garden,  which  was 
usually  near  the  summer  cabin,  although  sometimes  a  family  had 
gardens  a  mile  or  two  or  several  miles  apart,  and  when  the  work 
of  one  field  was  over  they  would  remove  their  cabin  to  the  other.* 
In  many  places  along  the  coast  from  the  Saco  to  Cape  Malabar, 
Champlain  saw  well-kept  gardens  with  their  accompanying  cabins. 
He  describes  Nauset  Harbor*  as  three  or  four  leagues  in  circuit, 
"entirely  surrounded  by  little  houses  around  each  one  of  which 
there  was  as  much  land  as  the  occupant  needed  for  his  support.'*  ^ 

Planting  time  arrived  when  the  leaves  of  the  white  oak  were  as 
large  as  a  mouse's  ear.^  On  land  already  cleared  the  weeds  were 
burned  and  the  ground  worked  over  with  instruments  of  very  hard 

>Wood,  op.  cit,  p.  74. 

'Williams,  op.  cit.,  p.  92. 

'Champlain,  op.  cit.,  p.  115. 

*  Williams,  op.  cit.,  p.  56. 

'Near  Eastham. 

'Champlain,  op.  cit,  p.  81. 

^  Belknap,  History  of  New  Hampshirey  ed.  of  1792,  vol.  ill,  p.  93. 

AM    AKTH.,  N.  S..  %-^, 


I30  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [m.  s.,  8,  1906 

wood  shaped  like  a  spade.  The  hills  were  three  feet  apart,  and  in 
each  one  were  placed  three  or  four  kernels  of  com  and  as  many 
beans,  and  the  earth  heaped  up  with  the  shell  of  the  horseshoe 
crab.'  Hoes  of  wood  and  clam-shell  are  also  recorded,  and  Wil- 
liams says  stone  hoes  were  formerly  used.*  The  Stockbridge  In- 
dians employed  for  this  purpose  an  implement  made  of  the  shoul- 
der-blade of  a  bear,  moose,  or  deer,  fastened  to  a  wooden  handle.* 
Sometimes  two  or  three  herring  or  shad  (alewives  ?)  were  placed  in 
the  hill  as  a  fertilizer.*  It  was  the  women's  work  to  plant  and  cul- 
tivate the  gardens  and  gather  the  crops,  *'  yet  sometimes  the  man 
himself  (either  out  of  love  for  his  Wife  or  care  for  his  Children,  or 
being  an  old  man)*'  will  assist. 

Great  care  was  exercised  to  keep  the  ground  free  from  weeds 
and  to  protect  the  young  plants  from  the  depredations  of  birds. 
As  before  noted,  watch-houses  were  erected  for  the  latter  purpose. 
Williams  says  that  hawks  were  kept  tame  about  the  cabins  to  keep 
small  birds  from  the  fields,  and  although  the  crows  did  the  com 
some  injury,  not  one  native  in  a  hundred  would  kill  one  because 
of  the  tradition  that  a  crow  brought  them  their  first  grain  of  com 
in  one  of  its  cars  and  a  bean  in  the  other  from  the  field  of  the  great 
god  Kautintouwit  in  the  southwest. 

The  com  {Zea  mays)  grown  in  the  gardens  of  the  New  England 
Indians  was  of  several  varieties,  the  colors  being  red,  blue,  yellow, 
and  white*  The  modem  improved  varieties  differ  but  little  from 
these  earlier  kinds.  The  bean  {P/iaseolus  vulgaris)  was  also  of  dif- 
fcient  colors •  and  varieties.  Josselyn  writes:  "They  are  varie- 
gated much,  some  being  bigger  a  great  deal  than  others;  some 
white,  blark,  red,  yellow,  blew,  spotted."  ^  This  is  the  common 
lieKI  and  j;arilcn  Iknui  of  the  New  England  farmer. 

The  pumpkin  ( ( //r///7'/A/  tnaxima)  and  the  squash  (asquta- 
nou.ish  01  isquontiTsqiKish  ;   Cucurhita  polymorphid)  were  probably 

it'liiiiiipliiii).  «»p.  III.,  p.  <M- 

•  Willi.imn.  ii|i.  lit.,  p.  51. 

« ,'  \/t.t,f*  f***'**  •*"  /m«''«iw  /iisfor\\  Mass.  Hist.  Coll.,  ist  s..  vol.  IX,  p.  loi. 
*\o»nu.  r4*."*i./.«  i'/  M-  /V/v^/w  RUhfrs,  p.  231. 

•  MoMii,  op.  tit.,  p.  ,M.     HiKRt'JHm,  op,  cit..  p.  iiS.     Williams,  op.  cit.,  p.  91. 

•  rimmplrttn.  op.  til..  P-  <M. 
1  loMflvn,  op.  **»<•.  P"  ^**^- 


wiLLOUGHBY]     NEW  ENGLAND  HOUSES  AND   GARDENS  I3I 

raised  throughout  New  England.  In  nearly  all  of  the  old-fashioned 
fields  in  these  states  these  vegetables  are  grown  in  the  same  hill 
with  the  corn,  and  it  is  probable  that  they  were  thus  planted  in  the 
Indian  gardens.  Josselyn  in  his  quaint  book,  New  Efigland*s 
Rarities,  writes  as  follows  concerning  the  squashes  grown  by  the 
natives : 

"Squashes,  but  more  truly  Squontersquashes,  a  kind  of  melon,  or 
rather  gourd,  for  they  often  degenerate  into  gourds ;  some  of  them  are 
green,  some  yellow,  some  longish  like  a  gourd,  others  round  like  an 
apple ;  all  of  them  pleasant  food  .  .  .  but  the  yellow  squash  because 
like  an  apple,  and  about  the  bigness  of  a  pome-water  is  of  the  best  kind.  * ' 

The  well-known  modem  improved  varieties  of  this  vegetable  are 
the  descendants  of  those  found  growing  in  the  Indian  gardens. 

The  cultivation  of  the  artichoke  (Helianthus  tuberosus)  was 
adopted  from  the  Indians  by  the  colonists  as  far  north  as  Canada.* 
Its  roots  were  used  by  the  natives  as  an  ingredient  in  stews. 
Champlain  found  it  cultivated  at  Nauset  Harbor  in  1605,  and  at 
Gloucester  in  1606.*  Tobacco  {Nicotiana  rusticd)  was  raised  as  far 
north  in  New  England  as  the  central  Kennebec  valley.^  It  was  a 
smaller  and  more  hardy  species  than  that  now  grown  in  warmer 
climates.  This  was  commonly  the  only  plant  cultivated  by  the 
men.* 

The  corn  was  harvested  by  the  women  and  thoroughly  dried  on 
mats,  care  being  taken  to  cover  it  at  night  with  other  mats  and  to 
uncover  it  when  the  sun  was  shining.*  When  thoroughly  dry  it 
was  usually  stored  in  caches,  although  it  was  sometimes  placed  in 
wooden  receptacles  about  three  feet  high,  made  by  cutting  hollow 
logs  into  sections,  or  in  baskets,  and  stored  in  the  wigwam.  Mor- 
ton writes  : 

"  Their  bames  are  holes  made  in  the  earth,  that  will  hold  a  Hogs- 
head of  come  a  peece  in  them.  In  these  (when  their  come  is  out  of  the 
huske  and  well  dried  they  lay  their  store  in  greate  baskets  which  they 


'  Charles  Pickering,  History  of  Plants,  p.  749. 

'Champlain,  op.  cit.,  pp.  82,  112. 

*Strachey,  History  0/  Travel  into  Virginia,  Coll.  Maine  Hist.  Soc.,  vol.  in,  p.  306 

♦Williams,  op.  dt.,  p.  35. 

*lbid.,  p.  92. 


132  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

make  of  Sparke ')  with  mats  under  about  the  sides,  and  on  the  top ;  and 
putting  it  into  the  place  made  for  it,  they  cover  it  with  earth."  ' 

According  to  Wood  the  holes  were  sometimes  lined  with  bark. 

Champlain  saw  *'  trenches  in  the  sand  on  the  slope  of  the  hills, 
some  five  or  six  feet  deep  more  or  less.  Putting  their  com  and 
other  grains  into  large  grass  sacks  they  throw  them  into  these 
trenches  and  cover  them  with  sand  three  or  four  feet  above  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth,  taking  it  out  as  their  needs  require."  * 

The  Pilgrims  opened  a  cache  at  Cape  Cod,  being  attracted  by 
the  heap  of  sand.     In  it  they  found  — 

**  a  little  old  Basket  full  of  faire  Indian  Come,  and  digged  further  & 
found  a  fine  great  new  Basket  full  of  very  faire  come  of  this  yeare,  with 
some  36  goodly  eares  of  come,  some  yellow  and  some  red,  and  others 
mixt  with  blew  which  was  a  very  goodly  sight ;  the  Basket  was  round, 
and  narrow  at  the  top,  it  held  about  three  or  four  Bushels,  which  was  as 
much  as  two  of  us  could  lift  up  from  the  ground,  and  was  very  handsomely 
and  cunningly  made.  * '  * 

These  old  cache  holes  are  still  found  in  many  sections  of  New 
England  where  the  land  has  not  been  cultivated.  The  writer  has 
counted  more  than  thirty-five  in  an  area  of  less  than  half  an  acre  on 
the  side  of  a  sand  hill  in  the  Kennebec  valley. 

1  According  to  Trumbull  probably  the  same  as  spart^  a  northern  English  name  for 
the  dwarf  rush  and  for  osiers. 
'Morton,  op.  cit.,  p.  160. 
'Champlain,  op.  cit.,  p.  121. 
•Mourt,  op.  cit.,  p.  34. 

Peabody  MUSEU.M,  Harvard  University, 
Cambridge,  Massachusetts. 


SOME   UNSOLVED    PROBLEMS   IN    MEXICAN 

ARCHEOLOGY 

By  ZELIA  NUTTALL 

I 

Introduction 

The  admirably  clear  and  comprehensive  address  on  the  History 
of  Anthropology,  read  by  Prof.  Franz  Boas  at  the  International 
Congress  of  Arts  and  Sciences  held  at  St  Louis  in  September,  1904, 
could  not  but  be  of  special  interest  to  Americanists,  for  during  its 
course  he  traced  their  different  methods  and  theories,  their  struggles 
and  points  of  view,  past  and  present,  and  with  rare  impartiality 
touched  as  follows  on  the  long-continued  and  still  active  "  contro- 
versy as  to  the  independent  origin  of  transmission  of  certain  wide- 
spread cultural  traits,  from  one  part  of  the  world  to  another." 

**To  those  investigators  who  advocate  the  theory  of  independent 
origin,  the  sameness  of  cultural  traits  was  assumed  as  a  proof  of  a  regular, 
uniform  evolution  of  culture  ;  as  representing  the  elementary  idea  which 
arises  from  necessity  in  the  mind  of  man  and  which  cannot  be  analyzed 
as  the  earliest  surviving  form  of  human  thought.  They  would  exclude 
the  consideration  of  transmissions  altogether,  believe  it  to  be  unlikely, 
deem  the  alleged  proof  irrelevant  and  ascribe  sameness  of  cultural  traits 
wholly  to  the  psychic  unit  of  mankind  and  to  the  uniform  reaction  of  the 
human  mind  upon  the  same  stimulus. 

**  On  the  other  hand,  Friedrich  Ratzel,  whose  recent  loss  we  lament, 
inclined  decidedly  to  the  opinion  that  all  sameness  of  cultural  traits  must 
be  accounted  for  by  transmission,  no  matter  how  distant  the  regions  in 
which  they  are  found. 

**  Side  by  side  with  these  two  views  exists  a  third,  represented  by 
Gerland  and  a  minority  of  investigators,  namely,  that  such  cultural  traits 
are  vestiges  or  survivals  of  the  earliest  stages  of  a  generalized  human 
culture.*' 

After  recording  the  above  conflicting  views,   Professor  Boas 

justly  observes : 

133 


134  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

"  It  is  evident  that  this  fundamental  question  cannot  be  settled  by 
any  amount  of  discussion  of  general  facts,  since  the  various  explanations 
are  logically  equally  probable.  It  requires  actual  investigation  into 
the  individual  history  of  such  customs  to  discover  the  causes  of  their 
present  distribution." 

It  was  doubtless  intentional  on  the  part  of  the  organizers  of  the 
G)ngress  that  the  two  addresses  by  foreign  speakers  which  followed 
that  of  Professor  Boas  were  by  equally  distinguished  extremists 
holding  radically  opposed  views  concerning  the  origin  of  ancient 
Mexican  and  Central  American  civilizations,  viz.,  Sr  Alfredo 
Chavcro,  of  Mexico,  who  assumes  transmission,  and  Prof.  Eduard 
Scler,  of  Berlin,  who  upholds  autochthony. 

The  presentation,  at  a  single  session,  of  the  problem  as  seen 
from  t\^o  different  standpoints,  naturally  raised,  in  the  minds  of 
unbiased  investigators  (with  which  I  venture  to  class  myself),  the 
question  whether  it  is  not  premature  to  so  positively  deny  or  affirm 
the  autochthony  of  these  ancient  civilizations. 

As  far  as  ancient  Mexico  is  concerned,  it  is  my  experience,  for 
instance,  that  even  after  twenty  years  of  study  I  have  barely  pene- 
trated its  vast  field  of  investigation,  and  that  the  more  I  explore  its 
untrodden  paths  and  discern  its  multifarious  contradictory  and  per- 
plexing features  the  less  I  am  inclined  to  formulate  definite  conclu- 
sions concerning  the  point  at  issue.  Frequently  the  discovery  of 
unknown  or  unworked  material,  or  the  unexpected  results  obtained 
by  the  pursuit  of  a  fresh  line  of  research,  oblige  students  in  our  com- 
paratively unexplored  field  to  alter  or  at  all  events  to  readjust  their 
views  or  working  hypotheses. 

It  has  thus  happened  that  my  recent  reexamination  of  certain 
correlated  facts  by  the  light  of  fresh  knowledge  has  confirmed  me 
in  my  desertion  from  the  comfortable  autochthonistic  point  of  view. 
While  I  can  understand  the  attractions  and  advantages  of  the  latter, 
I  cannot  understand  how  any  one  acquainted  with  the  said  group  of 
facts  can  assert  off-hand,  as  some  extremists  do,  that  no  authentic 
evidence  has  been  met  with  in  Mexico  or  Central  America  which, 
even  remotely,  seriously  suggests  ancient  foreign  influence  or  con- 
tact. While  it  is  inevitable  that  radical  differences  of  opinion  will 
be  evoked  concerning  the  interpretation  to  be  placed  upon  them,  I 


NUTTALL]  PROBLEMS  IN  MEXICAN  ARCHEOLOGY  1 35 

must  believe  that  no  unbiased  reader,  after  examining  the  facts  I 
am  about  to  set  forth,  will  deny  their  authenticity,  interest,  or  claim 
to  serious  consideration. 

Montezuma's  Evidence  as  to  His  Ancestry  and  Origin 

Even  the  most  extreme  autochthonists  will  surely  admit  that  no 
authority  on  the  question  of  their  own  history  and  origin  could  be 
higher  than  that  of  a  member  of  what  Dr  Albert  Reville  describes 
as  "the  firmly-organized  Mexican  priesthood  in  which  was  centered 
the  whole  intellectual  life  and  all  that  can  be  called  the  science  of 
Mexico/' 

The  highest  value  must  therefore  be  assigned  to  the  utterances 
of  Montezuma,  the  high-priest  and  ruler,  concerning  his  ancestry 
and  origin,  as  translated  by  Dofia  Marina  to  Cortes  and  his  com- 
panions. Cortes,  whose  acumen  no  one  denies,  reported  Monte- 
zuma's words  to  the  Emperor  Charles  V  in  his  well-known  second 
letter  written  from  Villa  Segura  de  la  Frontera,  October  30,  1520. 
The  following  is  a  careful  literal  translation  of  the  discourse  ad- 
dressed by  Montezuma  to  the  Spaniards  assembled  in  his  palace,  as 
reported  by  Cortes  : 

**  *  For  a  long  time  and  by  means  of  writings,  we  have  possessed  a 
knowledge,  transmitted  from  our  ancestors,  that  neither  I  nor  any  of  us 
who  inhabit  this  land  are  of  native  origin. 

*  * '  We  are  foreigners  and  came  here  from  very  remote  parts.  We  pos- 
sess information  that  our  lineage  was  led  to  this  land  by  a  lord  to  whom 
all  owed  allegiance  [vassalage] .  He  afterward  left  this  for  his  native 
country  and  returned  again,  but  after  so  long  an  absence  that,  meanwhile, 
those  who  had  remained  behind  had  married  native  women,  had  raised 
large  families  and  built  towns  in  which  they  lived.  When  he  wished  to 
take  them  with  him  they  not  only  declined  to  go,  but  refused  to  acknowl- 
edge him  as  their  lord. 

"  '  Consequently  he  left  without  them,  returning  whence  he  came,  but 
we  have  ever  believed  that  his  descendants  would  surely  come  here  to 
subjugate  this  land  and  us  who  are,  by  rights,  their  vassals. 

"  '  Because  of  what  you  say  concerning  the  region  whence  you  came, 
which  is  where  the  sun  rises,  and  because  of  the  things  you  relate  about 
the  great  lord  or  king  who  sent  you  thence,  we  believe  and  hold  as  certain, 
that  he  must  be  our  rightful  [natural]  lord,  especially  since  you  say  that,. 
for  a  long  time  past,  he  has  known  about  us.     This  much  you  may  be  cer- 


1 36  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

tain  of:  that  we  will  obey  you  and  hold  you  as  lieutenant  of  this  great 
lord  of  whom  you  tell  us,  and  this  we  will  do  without  fail  or  deceit.  And, 
throughout  this  land,  that  is  to  say,  in  all  of  it  that  I  possess  by  virtue  of 
my  lordship,  you  can  command  at  your  will,  for  you  will  be  obeyed.  All 
that  we  possess  is  at  your  disposal,  and  since  you  now  are  in  what  right- 
fully belongs  to  you,  and  in  your  own  house,  take  your  ease  and  rest  from 
the  fatigues  of  your  journey  and  of  the  wars  you  have  gone  through.  .  .  . 
Neither  you  nor  your  people  will  receive  harm,  for  you  are  in  your  own 
house  and  that  which  is  rightfully  yours.  .   .  . '  * ' 

After  the  above  Cortes  writes  : 

*'  I  replied  to  all  he  said,  satisfying  him,  which  seemed  expedient, 
especially  making  him  believe  that  it  was  Your  Majesty  whom  they  had 
been  expecting.  .   .  .   *' 

The  above  statements  by  Montezuma  are  strikingly  corroborated 
by  his  subsequent  harangue  to  the  assembled  native  chieftains,  in 
which  he  appealed,  without  contradiction,  to  their  familiarity  with 
the  fact  of  his  ancestry  and  origin,  in  the  following  terms : 

**My  Brothers  and  Friends  :  You  already  know  that,  for  a  long 
time  past,  your  fathers  and  grandfathers  have  been  subjects  and  vassals  of 
my  predecessors,  just  as  you  now  are  my  subjects  and  vassals.  You  and 
yours  have  always  been  and  are  still  treated  well  and  honorably  by  us, 
and  you,  for  your  part,  have  fulfilled  the  obligations  of  good  and  loyal 
vassals  toward  their  rightful  lords. 

"  I  also  believe  that  your  own  ancestors  must  have  handed  down  to 
you  the  record  that  we  are  not  natives  of  this  land  but  came  to  it  from 
another  very  distant  country,  led  by  a  lord.  .  .  .  When  he  returned  after  a 
long  absence  and  found  that  our  grandfathers  would  not  accompany  him 
nor  accept  him  as  the  lord  of  the  land,  he  departed,  leaving  word  that 
he  would  return  or  send  some  one  with  such  authority  and  power  that  they 
would  be  constrained  and  forced  back  into  his  service.  And  you  well 
know  that  we  have  always  expected  this  lord,  and  now,  from  what  the 
Captain  has  told  us  of  the  king  and  lord  who  sent  him  here  and  because 
of  the  region  from  which  he  says  he  came,  I  hold  it  for  certain  and  you 
should  do  the  same,  that  this  king  is  the  lord  we  expected,  especially  as  he 
tells  us  that  over  there  they  have  long  had  information  concerning  us. 
And  since  our  ancestors  did  not  fulfil  their  obligations  to  their  rightful 
lord,  let  us  now  fulfil  ours  and  render  thanks  to  our  gods  that  that  which 
was  long  expected,  in  vain,  by  our  predecessors,  has  come  to  pass  in  our 
days.     I  entreat  you  much,  since  all  of  this  is  well  known  to  you,  to 


NUTTALL]  PROBLEMS  IN  MEXICAN  ARCHEOLOGY  1 37 

henceforth  acknowledge  and  obey  this  great  king  just  as  you  have  hitherto 
acknowledged  and  obeyed  me.  For  he  is  your  natural  sovereign,  and  as 
his  lieutenant  here  is  his  captain,  render  to  him  all  service  and  tribute, 
such  as  you  have  given  me,  for  I  also  must  henceforth  contribute  and 
serve  in  all  that  is  ordered  me. 

"  In  doing  as  I  beg  you  to,  you  will  give  me  much  pleasure  besides 
fulfilling  what  is  your  obligation  and  duty. ' ' 

Cortes  continues  : 

*' All  of  which  he  [Montezuma]  said  weeping,  with  as  many  sighs 
and  tears  as  a  man  could  possibly  bring  forth  ;  and  all  those  lords  who 
heard  him  also  wept  so  much  that,  for  a  long  while  they  were  unable  to 
give  him  their  answer.  .  .  .  When  their  weeping  had  abated  they  answered 
'  that  they  held  him  as  their  lord  and  had  promised  to  do  all  that  he 
ordered,  and  for  this  reason  and  also  because  of  that  which  he  had  given 
them^  they  would  cheerfully  do  his  bidding. '  Henceforth  and  for  always 
they  gave  themselves  as  vassals  to  Your  Highness,  and  first  together  and 
then  each  one  separately  they  promised  to  do  and  fulfil,  like  good  and 
loyal  vassals,  all  that  would  be  ordered  them  in  Your  Majesty's  royal 
name.  They  also  assumed  the  obligation  to  render  unto  you  the  tribute 
and  service  which  were  formerly  given  to  Montezuma,  and  to  do  every- 
thing that  would  be  commanded  in  your  name.  *  * ' 

Montezuma's  assumption  that  his  native  hearers  were  familiar 
with  the  history  of  his  foreign  ancestry  is  further  proven  to  have 
been  absolutely  true  by  authentic  native  testimony  of  utmost  im- 
portance. We  are  indebted  for  this  to  the  distinguished  Spanish 
friar,  Bernardino  de  Sahagun,  who  came  to  Mexico  in  1529  and 
lived  there  until  his  death,  more  than  sixty  years  later. 

At  one  time  Sahagun  assembled  the  oldest  and  most  learned  in- 
habitants of  Texcoco,  who  dictated  to  him,  in  the  Nahuatl  language, 
all  that  they  knew  concerning  their  ancient  history  and  traditions. 

While  at  Florence,  some  years  ago,  I  copied  the  original  Nahuatl 
notes  preserved  in  the  Laurentian  Library,  from  which  Sahagun 
subsequently  made  the  somewhat  abridged  translation  that  has  been 
published  as  his  Historia  de  Nueva  Espafia.  Within  the  last  year  I 
had  the  interesting  experience  of  showing  the  Nahuatl  text  relating 
to  the  origin  of  the  Mexicans  to  one  of  the  best  living  Nahuatl 


^  Ed.  Lorenzana,  pp.  81,  96. 


138  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

scholars,  Sr  Manuel  Rojas,  a  descendant  and  the  oldest  representa- 
tive of  the  ancient  caciques  of  Tepoztlan,  state  of  Morelos.  At  my 
instance  Senor  Rojas  made  a  literal  translation  of  this  text  into 
Spanish,  which  I  subsequently  carefully  collated  with  the  original 
and  with  Friar  Sahagun's  Spanish  version.  The  following  is  a 
brief  rendering  of  the  main  facts  recorded  in  the  Nahuatl  text  and 
in  the  two  independent  translations  into  Spanish,  the  last  one  made 
after  an  interval  of  about  three  and  a  half  centuries  : 


it 


The  Mexicans  are  foreigners,  for  they  came  from  the  province  of 
the  Chichimecs,  and  the  following  is  what  there  is  to  relate  about 
them  : 

"  Countless  years  before  the  arrival  of  the  Spaniards  the  ancestors  of 
the  Mexicans  arrived  in  boats  and  disembarked,  '  in  the  north* ,  at  the  port 
named  Panoaya,  or  Panuco,  north  of  the  present  port  of  Veracruz. 
Under  the  guidance  of  their  high  priest,  who  carried  with  him  an  image 
of  their  god  named  Tloquenauaque  (lit.  'the  All-embracing  One'), 
which  he  consulted  as  an  oracle,  they  traveled  inland  and  founded  a  town 
named  Tamoanchan,  where  they  lived  peacefully  for  a  long  time.  With 
these  colonists  came  wise  men  or  diviners  who  were  versed  in  the  written 
or  painted  books.  These  wise  men  and  their  leader  or  high  priest  did 
not  remain  permanently  with  the  colonists,  but,  leaving  them  settled  in 
Tamoanchan,  reembarked  in  boats  and  departed  eastward,  carrying  away 
with  them  their  bundles  and  their  painted  books  relating  to  their  ritual 
and  to  their  knowledge  of  mechanical  arts  {tultecaiotl) . 

"  Before  leaving  they  made  the  following  memorable  address  to  those 
whom  they  were  leaving  behind  them  :  *  It  is  the  will  of  our  lord,  the 
All-embracing  One,  the  Night,  the  Air,  that  you  are  to  live  here  in  the 
land  in  which  we  came  to  leave  you.  He  bestows  it  upon  you  .  .  .  here 
you  are  to  live  and  guard  what  has  been  given  to  you.  .  .  .  He  goes  and 
we  go  with  him,  but  truly  he  will  return  to  rescue  and  succor  you  {maguix- 
tiquiuK)  \  to  teach  or  guide  you  {machtiquiuK) y  and  to  determine  the 
limits  or  boundaries  of  the  land.   .   .   .* 

"Then  the  divine  regents  or  governors  (Jeomamaque^  departed  with 
their  wrapped  bundles.  .  .  .  Four  aged  wise  men  remained  behind,  and, 
assembling,  said  :  '  During  the  absence  of  our  lord,  what  method  must  we 
adopt  in  order  to  rule  the  people  well  ?  What  order  is  to  be  instituted, 
now  that  the  wise  men  have  taken  with  them  the  painted  books  according 
to  which  they  governed  ?  *  Then  they  composed  the  count  of  nativity 
signs  or  celestial  luminaries,  the  year  book,  the  year  count,  and  the  book 


NUTTALL]  PROBLEMS  IN  MEXICAN  ARCHEOLOGY  1 39 

of  dreams/  and  these  remained  in  use  as  long  as  governed  the  lords  of  the 
Toltecs,  the  Tepanecs,  the  Mexicans,  and  the  Chichimecs  ...  it  is  not 
known  how  long  these  governed. 

**This  was,  however,  recorded  by  paintings,  but  these  were  burnt  in 
the  time  of  the  lord  Itzcoatl  of  Mexico,  because  the  lord  and  princes  of 
that  time  agreed  that  it  was  not  expedient  that  all  persons  should  know 
such  things  and  that  these  books  should  fall  into  the  hands  of  those  who 
might  treat  them  with  contempt  or  disrespect. ' '  * 

The  text  further  relates  that  from  Tamoanchan  the  colonists  went 
to  Teotihuacan,  where  they  built  the  two  great  pyramids  the  ruins 
of  which  still  exist.  The  above  narrative,  which  was  dictated  at 
their  leisure  by  the  Texcocan  elders,  who  could  scarcely  have  been 
informed  of  the  contents  of  Cortes'  letter  to  Charles  V,  will  be 
found  to  agree  substantially  with  Montezuma's  words. 

Further  corroboration  of  his  evidence  is  furnished  by  another 
text  dictated  by  the  Texcocans  to  Sahagun,  namely,  that  of  the  fine 
address  of  welcome  delivered  by  Montezuma,  in  the  presence  of  a 
multitude  of  hearers,  when  he  first  met  the  Spaniards.  It  completes 
the  native  verbatim  reports  of  Montezuma's  utterances  that  have 
been  preserved,  and  for  dignity  of  expression  and  beauty  of  language 
is  one  of  the  finest  specimens  of  native  discourse  that  has  been 
preserved  : 

"  Oh,  our  lord,  be  welcome  !  You  have  arrived  in  your  country, 
your  town,  and  your  house,  Mexico.  You  have  come  to  seat  yourself  on 
your  throne  and  in  your  chair  which  I  have  been  occupying  for  some 
time  in  your  name.  Other  lords,  who  now  are  dead,  occupied  it  before 
me.  Their  names  were  Itzcoatl,  Moctezuma  the  Elder,  Axayacatl,  Tizoc, 
and  Ahuitzotl.  I,  the  last  of  them  all,  came  to  be  the  one  to  have  the 
care  and  governing  of  your  town,  Mexico.  We  all  in  turn  have  borne 
on  our  shoulders  the  burden  of  your  republic  and  your  vassals.  Would 
that  some  of  those  who  have  departed  and  cannot  see  or  know  what  is 
happening,  were  living  now  and  that  what  is  now  happening  had  taken 
place  in  their  time.     But,  our  lord,  they  are  absent,  and  with  my  own 


1  The  above  is  an  exact  literal  translation  of  Friar  Sahagun' s  Nahuatl  text  of  the 
passage  which,  after  a  lapse  of  thirty  years,  he  freely  rendered  into  Spanish  as  follows : 
**  They  invented  judicial  astrology,  the  art  of  interpreting  dreams,  and  composed  the  count 
of  the  days,  of  the  nights,  of  the  hours,  and  the  differences  of  times  [seasons].  "  —  Book 
X,  chap.  29,  ^  II. 

«Ibid.,  \  12. 


I40  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

eyes,  without  being  either  asleep  or  dreaming,  I  behold  your  face  and 
your  person.  For  many  days  have  I  expected  this,  and  my  heart  has  been 
going  out  toward  the  regions  whence  you  have  come,  from  the  place  which 
is  hidden  to  all  and  is  behind  clouds  and  mists.  I  now  see  that  it  was 
true  what  the  departed  lords  left  word  with  us :  that  you  would  return  to 
reign  in  these  realms  and  would  seat  yourself  on  your  throne  and  in  your 
chair.  Be  welcome  !  Rest  now  after  the  labor  you  have  had  in  coming 
such  long  ways.  This  is  your  house  and  these  are  your  palaces — take 
them  and  rest  therein  with  your  captains  and  the  companions  who  have 
come  with  you. ' '  ^ 

My  quotation  of  the  above  texts  in  full,  notwithstanding  the 
repetitions  they  contain,  is  excusable  for  the  reason  that,  collectively, 
they  constitute  the  most  authentic  and  valuable  testimony  we  pos- 
sess concerning  Montezuma's  origin  and  ancestry. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  name  Quetzalcoatl  does  not  appear  in 
any  of  these,  the  earliest  texts ;  nor  do  they  contain  any  reference 
of  a  religious  or  superstitious  nature  to  the  sun  or  to  any  deity  ex- 
cepting **  the  All-embracing  One  "  and  "  our  gods." 

It  is  my  belief  that  it  would  scarcely  occur  to  any  one,  on  read- 
ing the  above  texts  for  the  first  time,  to  interpret  Montezuma's  account 
of  his  ancestry  as  a  solar  myth,  or  to  identify  the  reputed  leader  of 
the  colonists  as  a  "  solar  god  "  or  **  dawn  hero."  * 

Yet,  notwithstanding  the  incongruity  of  certain  details  recorded 
(as,  for  instance,  the  fact  that,  unlike  the  sun^  the  solar  god  took  his 
departure  toward  the  east)^  the  current  belief  is  that  Montezuma  nar- 
rated **  the  Quetzalcoatl  myth  "  ^  to  the  Spaniards  and  that  he  sacri- 
ficed himself  and  his  people  to  a  foolish  superstitious  belief  in  an 
imaginary  god  or  hero.  It  seems  strange  that,  if  this  was  actually 
the  case,  the  astute  Cortes  did  not  simply  inform  the  emperor  that 
Montezuma  had  recounted  to  him  *' a  ridiculous  fable  about  their 
gods,"  a  phrase  often  used  by  his  contemporaries  in  speaking  of 
native  religious  myths.  And  what  is  stranger  still,  is  that  the  keen- 
minded  Friar  Sahagun,  who  obtained  a  deep  knowledge  of  the  na- 
tive religion  and  superstitions,  writes  naught  about  a  connection 


» Op.  cit.,  book  XII,  Tf  16. 

*See  D.  G.  Brinton,  Myths  of  the  New  Worlds  p.  186. 

'See  H.  H.  Bancroft,  History  of  Mexico^  vol.  I,  p.  289. 


NUTTALL]  PROBLEMS  IN  MEXICAN  ARCHEOLOGY  I4I 

between  this  historical  tradition  and  a  religious  or  solar  myth.  Nor 
does  Bemal  Diaz,  who  was  present  when  Montezuma  delivered  his 
discourse  and  who  described  its  contents  from  memory  after  a  lapse 
of  forty -eight  years,  mention  the  name  of  Quetzalcoatl  or  state  that 
a  fable  or  religious  myth  had  been  related. 

It  being  impossible  for  me  to  attempt  to  trace  here  the  evolution 
of  the  Quetzalcoatl  myth,  I  cannot  do  more  than  to  point  out  the 
facts  that  the  ancient  Mexicans,  like  ourselves,  applied  the  word 
*'  lord  "  to  the  deity  as  well  as  to  a  superior,  and  that  the  name 
Quetzalcoatl,  besides  being  the  name  of  the  Air-god,  was  also  a 
title  assumed  by  a  certain  grade  of  priesthood.  Under  such  cir- 
cumstances it  was  inevitable  that  a  confusion  of  persons  and  titles 
should  have  been  made  and  that  Montezuma's  testimony  should 
have  thus  become  invalidated  and  dismissed  as  irrelevant. 

I  cannot  but  think,  however,  that  a  careful  and  unbiased  study 
of  the  above  original  texts,  the  Nahuatl  version  of  two  of  which 
have  hitherto  been  inaccessible  to  students,  will  convince  others,  as 
it  has  me,  that  Montezuma  absolutely  believed  in  the  foreign  origin 
of  his  ancestors  and  sacrificed  his  power  and  position  to  what  might 
be  termed  a  quixotic  conception  of  his  duty  toward  the  rightful, 
though  remote,  sovereign  of  his  people.  The  argument  that  he  so 
successfully  employed  to  persuade  his  subordinate  chieftains  to 
transfer  their  allegiance  from  him  to  Cortes,  namely,  that  it  was  his 
and  their  duty  to  make  amends  for  the  insubordination  and  disloy- 
alty of  their  forefathers  toward  their  lord,  while  comprehensible  if 
that  leader  was  a  real,  though  unpopular,  personage,  would  seem 
singularly  irrelevant  in  connection  with  mythology.  Nor  do  any 
passages  in  the  texts  contradict,  so  far  as  I  am  able  to  see,  the  im- 
pression they  so  clearly  convey  that  Montezuma's  attitude  toward 
the  Spaniards  was  influenced  by  a  plain  historical  tradition  handed 
down  from  his  forefathers. 

Without  entering  here  into  a  discussion  of  the  problem  whence 
the  foreign  colonists  came  to  the  eastern  coast  of  Mexico,  I  will 
but  emphasize  the  remarkable  but  undeniable  fact  that  the  strange 
language  and  appearance  of  the  Spaniards  and  the  distance  of  their 
journey  across  the  ocean  only  confirmed  Montezuma  in  his  belief 
that  these  strangers  came  from  the  original  home  of  his  ancestors. 


142  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  hypothesis  that  these  ancestors  came  to  the  eastern  coast 
of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  from  some  other  part  of  the  American  con- 
tinent, from  the  peninsula  of  Yucatan,  for  instance,  consequently 
involves  the  less  plausible  theory  that  Montezuma  believed  that  the 
Spaniards  also  hailed  from  these  adjacent  and  familiar  regions. 
Whatever  other  interpretations  may  be  put  upon  them,  the  forego- 
ing data  conclusively  show  that  Montezuma,  who,  of  all  Mexicans, 
best  knew  the  traditions  of  his  race,  believed  that  these  furnished 
an  overwhelming  and  positive  proof  that  his  line  had  originated  in 
a  land  over  the  sea,  as  remote  as  Spain  was  said  to  be. 

In  conclusion,  the  problem  here  submitted  for  impartial  judg- 
ment is,  whether  Montezuma's  genuine  belief  in  his  foreign  ancestry 
and  its  far-reaching  influence  on  his  actions  merits,  as  I  maintain, 
our  serious  consideration  and  acceptance  as  important  historical 
evidence,  or  whether  it  deserves  the  treatment  it  has  received  from 
some  champions  of  autochthony  who  either  overlook  it  entirely  or 
endeavor  to  eliminate  it  from  the  pages  of  Mexican  history  by  de- 
nouncing it  as  irrelevant  and  valueless  and  fit  only  to  be  consigned 
to  the  nebulous  realm  of  mythology. 

II 
The  Origin  of  the  Artificial  Theory  of  the  Four  Elements 

In  Sahagun's  original  Nahuatl  text,  which  is  quoted  in  the  pre- 
ceding essay,  the  invention  and  the  institution  of  the  calendar  and 
form  of  government  which  were  in  use  at  the  time  of  the  Spanish 
conquest  of  Mexico,  as  well  of  as  the  building  of  the  great  pyramids 
the  ruins  of  which  still  exist,  are  attributed  to  the  foreign  colonists 
who  were  said  to  have  arrived  from  the  east  in  ancient  times,  in 
boats,  and  landed  at  Panuco  on  the  coast  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

According  to  said  text,  it  was  after  the  departure  of  their  leader 
that  four  elders  agreed  to  institute  a  tetrarchy  and  devised  the  cal- 
endar as  a  means  of  regulating  and  controlling  communal  life. 

Torquemada,*  the  Spanish  historian,  gives  the  following  addi- 
tional details  concerning  this  episode : 

'  *  These  four  lords  jointly  constituted  the  head  of  the  government. 
Nothing  could  be  done  throughout  the  republic  without  the  consent  of  all 

^  Monarquia  Indiana^  book  XI,  chap.  24. 


NUTTALL]  PROBLEMS  IN  MEXICAN  ARCHEOLOGY  I43 

four  .  .  .  they  divided  the  city  and  province  into  four  parts,  forming 
four  principalities  or  tetrarchies.  ..." 

One  of  the  most  striking  examples  of  a  tetrarchy  which  existed 
in  Mexico  when  the  Spaniards  arrived  was  the  small  republic  of 
Tlaxcala. 

An  examination  of  the  ancient  Mexican  calendar  reveals  its  per- 
fect accord  with  a  tetrarchical  system  of  government.  Its  twenty- 
day  period  is  formed  by  four  principal  day-signs  (which  were  also 
year-signs),  each  of  which  presided  over  four  minor  day-signs.  Its 
solar  cycle  of4x  13=  52  years  was  formed  by  the  rotation  of  the 
four  principal  signs,  representing  a  reed,  a  flint  knife,  a  house,  and 
a  rabbit.  These  signs  were  symbolical  of  the  four  elements  and 
were  associated  with  the  cardinal  points  and  the  sacred  elemental 
colors :  blue,  red,  yellow,  and  green. 

In  the  center  of  the  so-called  Mexican  calendar-stone,  which 
exhibits  a  synopsis  of  the  great  tetrarchical  plan  or  system  of  the 
native  philosophers,  symbols  corresponding  to  the  four  elements  are 
carved  in  an  ollin^  a  quadruplicate  sign  which  is  employed  in  native 
pictography  to  express  movement  or  motion.  Resting  on  the  hiero- 
glyph for  earth,  this  ollin  signifies,  for  instance,  an  earthquake. 

While  the  said  sculptured  monument  thus  demonstrates  that  the 
ancient  Mexicans  associated  the  united  four  elements  with  move- 
ment, i.  e.,  life,  their  mortuary  custom  of  clothing  a  dead  chieftain 
in  succession  with  perishable  garments  of  the  four  elemental  gods 
and  their  colors  indicates  a  belief  that  death  was  a  dissolution  and 
return  to  the  elements  —  earth,  air,  fire,  and  water. 

Ever  since  the  above  indications  came  under  my  notice  I  have 
been  deeply  interested  in  the  fact  which  they  undeniably  establish, 
namely,  that  the  ancient  Mexicans  not  only  believed  in  the  ex- 
istence of  the  said  four  elements  but  also  deified  and  symbolized 
them  and  incorporated  them  in  their  artificial  system  of  government 
by  means  of  an  ingenious  cyclical  calendar. 

To  me  the  presence  of  this  group  of  correlated  ideas  in  pre- 
columbian  America  seemed  very  remarkable,  strange,  and  perplex- 
ing, especially  after  I  had  investigated  the  evolution  of  the  artificial 
theory  of  the  four  elements  in  other  ancient  civilizations. 

On  communicating  some  of  the  results  of  my  investigations  to 


144  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

certain  of  my  colleagues,  I  found  that  none  shared  my  keen  interest 
in  the  question,  their  view  being  the  same  as  that  expressed  by  Dr 
Daniel  G.  Brinton  :  "  The  simple  theory  that  the  world  is  composed 
of  four  elements,  fire,  water,  air  and  earth,  is  one  which  presents 
itself  so  naturally  to  primitive  thought  that  traces  of  it  can  be  seen 
in  most  mythologies  which  have  passed  beyond  the  rudimentary 
forms."  * 

According  to  my  colleagues  the  tetrarchical  form  of  govern- 
ment and  the  cyclical  calendar  were  also  only  the  natural  products 
of  the  primitive  mind. 

I  confess  that,  much  as  I  respected  the  views  expressed,  they 
did  not  satisfy  or  convince  me. 

A  prolonged  investigation  of  the  evolution  of  philosophical 
speculation  had  taught  me  that,  for  instance,  in  Greece  the  artificial 
doctrine  of  the  four  elements  was  not  formulated  until  Greek 
philosophy  had  reached  what  George  Henry  Lewes  designates  as 
**  the  second  epoch  in  its  development,  in  which  the  failure  of  earlier 
cosmological  speculations  directed  the  efforts  of  the  philosophers 
(i.  e.,  Heraclitus,  Anaxagoras,  Empedocles,  and  Democritus)  to  the 
psychological  problems  of  the  origin  and  limits  of  knowledge."  * 

The  following  extracts  from  Lewes*  writings  furnish  an  outline 
sketch  of  the  process  by  which,  after  several  centuries  of  specula- 
tion, Greek  thinkers  evolved  the  identical  **  simple  theory  of  the 
four  elements"  that,  in  ancient  America,  is  said  to  have  naturally 
presented  itself  to  the  primitive  mind. 

More  than  a  century  before  the  birth  of  Heraclitus,  Thales 
(640-550  B.  c.)  had  formulated  the  doctrine  of  a  single  original  and 
eternal  element — Water,  the  beginning  of  all  things.  To  Anax- 
imenes  it  was  Air  that  seemed  the  very  stream  of  life. 

Diogenes  of  ApoUonia  adopted  the  tenet  of  Anaximenes  re- 
specting Air  as  the  origin  of  things,  but  gave  a  wider  and  deeper 
significance  to  the  tenet  by  pointing  out  the  analogy  of  Air  with  the 
soul,  or  vital  force,  and  thus  opened  the  way  to  Anaximander  of 
Miletus,  the  father  of  abstract  and  deductive  philosophy  and  the 
first  of  the  mathematicians  to  formulate  the  doctrine  that  not  water, 
nor  air,  but  the  "Infinite  is  the  origin  of  all  things." 

*  Religions  of  Primitive  Peoples ^  p.  14 1. 

•  History  of  Philosophy^  vol.  I,  p.  66. 


NUTTALL]  PROBLEMS  IN  MEXICAN  ARCHEOLOGY  I45 

Then  followed  the  Eleatics,  one  of  whom,  Zeno,  closes  the 
second  great  line  of  independent  inquiry  opened  by  Anaximenes. 

Heraclitus  (b.  503  b.  c.)  conceived  the  doctrine  of  all  things  as 
a  perpetual  flux  and  reflux,  and  of  Fire  as  the  principle  of  all  things. 
He  affirmed  Fire  to  be  both  the  principle  and  the  element  —  both 
the  moving,  mingling  force  and  the  mingled  matter;  and  formulated 
the  phrase  :  "  Strife  is  the  parent  of  all  things." 

Fire,  which  here  stands  as  the  semi-symbol  of  Life  and  Intel- 
ligence, because  of  its  spontaneous  activity,  is  but  a  modification 
of  the  Water  of  Thales  and  the  Air  of  Anaximenes. 

Anaxagoras  proclaimed  the  All  to  be  the  Many  and  Intelligence 
\Nous\  to  be  the  moving  force  of  the  Universe  which  caused  the 
mass  of  elements  to  become  arranged  in  one  harmonious,  all-em- 
bracing system.  *'The  Nous  has  moving  power  and  knowledge 
...  it  initiates  movement." 

Drawing  special  attention  to  the  fact  that  while  vital  importance 
was  attached  to  "movement"  by  Anaxagoras,  the  central  thought 
of  Pythagorean  philosophy  is  the  idea  of  number.  In  his  mono- 
graph on  the  subject^  the  Rev.  G.  Oliver  quotes  Philolaus,  who  says : 

<'  Number  is  great  and  perfect,  omnipotent  and  the  principle  and 
guide  of  divine  and  human  life.  Number  is  then  the  principle  of  order, 
the  principle  on  which  the  Cosmos  or  ordered  world  exists.  .  .  .  The 
decade,  as  the  basis  of  the  numerical  system,  appeared  to  (Pythagoreans) 
to  comprehend  all  other  numbers  in  itself .  .  .  also  the  number  four 
because  it  is  the  first  square  number  and  is  also  the  potential  decade  :  i 
+  2  -f-  3  -f-  4=  10.  Amongst  the  ten  principia  or  fundamental  opposi- 
tions formulated  by  the  Pythagoreans  are  odd  and  even,  right  and  left, 
male  and  female,  light  and  darkness,  etc.'* 

According  to  Oliver  it  was  Pythagoras  who  was  celebrated  as 
the  ''discoverer  of  the  holy  Tetraktos,  the  fountain  and  root  of 
ever-living  nature,  or  the  Cosmos  consisting  of  Fire,  Air,  Earth  and 
Water,  the  four  roots  of  all  existing  things." 

Lewes,  on  the  other  hand,  attributed  to  Empedocles  **the  con- 
ception of  earth  as  a  fourth  element"  and  the  "principle  that  the 
primary  elements  were  four,  viz. :  Earth,  Air,  Fire  and  Water.  Out 
of  these  all  things  proceed ;  all  things  are  but  the  various  ming- 


*  The  Pythagorean  Triangle, 

AM.  ANTH  ,  N.  S.,  7— XO 


146  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

lings  of  these  four.  Nothing  is  there  but  a  mingling  and  then  a 
separation  of  the  mingled  ..."  Commenting  on  these  theories 
Lewes  here  states  (and  I  emphasize  with  italics  the  importance  of 
his  statement)  :  "  Now,  that  this  is  an  advance  on  the  preceding  con- 
ceptions [of  Heraclitus  and  Anaxagoras  in  particular]  will  scarcely 
be  denied.  It  bears  indubitable  evidence  of  being  a  later  conception 
and  a  modification  of  its  predecessors^  ^ 

To  the  four  so-called  Empedoclean  elements  later  philosophers 
(Xenocrates  and  Philolaus)  added  a  fifth,  the  All-embracing  ether, 
the  Greek  name  for  which  Philolaus  gives  as  oX^a^,  oXa^,  etc. 

To  me  it  seems  impossible  that  any  one  who  has  followed  the 
evolution  of  Greek  philosophical  thought,  as  set  forth  by  Lewes, 
can  doubt  the  above-dted  characterization  of  the  doctrine  of  the  four 
elements  as  the  natural  outgrowth  of  previous  equally  supposititious 
and  artificial  deductions. 

At  the  same  time  I  am  aware  that  Prof.  L.  von  Schroeder,  of 
Dorpat,  has  attempted  to  prove  that  the  five  elements  —  earth,  fire, 
water,  air,  and  ether  (Sanscrit  Qkagd)  —  already  figure  in  the 
Brahmas,  were  taught  in  the  Samkya  philosophy  of  the  Kapila, 
and  were  therefore  known  in  India  at  least  as  far  back  as  the  seventh 
century,  B.C.  It  is  Professor  von  Schroeder's  opinion  that  Pytha- 
gorean philosophy  derived  the  elemental  divisions,  as  well  as  its 
science  of  geometry  and  number,  from  India,  and  in  support  of  the 
latter  assertion  he  mentions  the  fact  that  Samkya,  the  name  of  the 
ancient  Indian  school  of  philosophy,  signifies  "number"  and  that 
its  followers  were  therefore  designated  as  "philosophers  or  teachers 
of  numbers."  It  is  for  Greek  scholars  to  establish  whether  the 
Pythagoreans  derived  their  tenets  from  India  or  whether  the  doc- 
trines of  Pythagoras  and  Empedocles  were  carried  from  India  to 
Greece  at  the  time  of  the  Greek  invasion  under  Alexander  the  Great 
in  327  B.C. 

However  this  may  ultimately  be  decided,  the  remarkable  and 
undeniable  fact  exists  that  in  the  ancient  Mexican  calendar  we  have 
a  numerical  system  of  marvelous  ingenuity  which,  according  to 
tradition,  was  devised  as  a  means  of  introducing  order  in  the  com- 
munity, as  *'  a  guide  for  human  life."     It  is  formed  by  a  combination 

»0p.  cit.,  vol.  I,  p.  9$. 


NUTTALL]  PROBLEMS  IN  MEXICAN  ARCHEOLOGY  1 47 

of  odd  and  even  numbers  and  is  ruled  by  the  number  four,  which  is 
identified  with  the  elements  earth,  air,  fire,  and  water.  What  is 
more,  as  I  have  already  pointed  out,  the  symbols  of  the  four  ele- 
ments (each  in  turn  accompanied  by  the  number  four  and  in  a 
square)  are  enclosed  in  the  quadruplicate  ollin^  or  sign  for  movement, 
which  is  carved  in  the  center  of  the  most  remarkable  monument  of 
ancient  Mexico. 

Unprepared  though  one  may  be  to  face  the  possibility  that  the 
Mexican  sculptor  was  embued  with  abstract  philosophical  ideas,  his 
choice  of  the  ollin  sign,  typifying  movement,  to  encompass  the  sym- 
bols of  the  four  elements,  unquestionably  demonstrates  that  he 
associated  his  ollin  with  a  meaning  analogous  to  that  assigned  by 
Philolaus  to  the  oXojz :  "  that  which  moves  and  carries  the  cosmos, 
which  was  composed  of  the  four  elements."  Strange  as  it  appears, 
it  cannot  be  denied  that  the  Mexican  composite  symbol  calls  to 
mind  Plato's  familiar  dictum  :  "  Thus  there  is  a  perpetual  ebb  and 
flow  of  the  elements :  the  diversity  of  matter  is  the  cause  of  con- 
stant motion."  Much  as  we  would  naturally  hesitate  to  invest  the 
carved  symbol  with  the  whole  significance  of  Plato's  doctrine,  one 
cannot  but  feel  somewhat  authorized  to  do  so  when  one  recalls  the 
name  Tloquenauaque :  the  "All-embracing  One,"  which  is  recorded 
in  Sahagun's  Nahuatl  text  as  that  of  the  Supreme  god  of  the  for- 
eign colonists.  For  this  name  is  unquestionably  identical  in  mean- 
ing with  Plato's  definition  of  God  as  **the  One  being  comprising 
within  Himself  all  other  beings."  ^ 

Besides,  the  calendar  system  of  ancient  Mexico,  which  incor- 
porates what  Lewes  designates  as  "the  Empcdoclean  elements,"  is 
a  masterpiece  of  the  Science  of  Numbers,  the  equal  of  which  does 
not  seem  to  have  been  produced  by  any  known  disciple  of  Pytha- 
goras, who,  however,  idealized  Number  as  the  principle  of  order 
and  the  guide  of  human  life. 

The  more  I  study  this  marvelously  ingenious  cyclical  system 
and  realize  the  advanced  knowledge  of  mathematics  and  astronomy 
that  it  reveals,  the  less  I  can  understand  how  it  could  have  been 
planned  without  the  aid  of  a  cursive  method  of  writing  or  of  regis- 
tering numbers.  From  what  I  have  been  able  to  learn,  in  twenty 
years  of  study  of  the  ancient  Mexicans,  I  also  find  it  incompre- 

1  Lewes,  op.  cit.,  p.  263. 


148  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  \1A,  s.,  8,  1906 

hensible  how  these  unlettered  people  could  have  evolved  inde- 
pendently such  artificial  correlated  products  of  the  human  mind  as 
the  Tetraktos ;  its  association  with  movement ;  a  tetrarchical  sys- 
tem of  government ;  a  science  of  numbers ;  a  cyclical  system  based 
on  a  combination  of  odd  and  even  numbers ;  a  conception  of  the 
deity  as  "All-embracing,"  and  the  pyramid  which,  to  me,  seems  to 
be  a  figuration  of  the  Tetraktos,  *'  the  root  of  all  things." 

Were  we  dealing  with  any  other  part  of  the  world  but  America, 
one  would  scarcely  hesitate  to  claim  that  the  presence,  in  Mexico,  of 
the  Tetraktos,  of  the  cognate  ideas  which  have  been  enumerated  and 
of  native  testimony  asserting  their  foreign  origin,  justifies  the  sup- 
position of  some  form  of  contact  with  persons  not  only  imbued  with 
the  theories  of  certain  Greek  philosophers,  but  bent  on  applying 
them  practically. 

But  we  have  to  do  with  a  portion  of  the  American  continent 
which,  though  connected  with  the  Old  World  by  a  great  and  com- 
paratively smooth  water-way,  is  generally  considered  too  remote  to 
have  been  visited  by  even  those  venturesome  Mediterranean  sea- 
farers who,  in  precolumbian  times,  constantly  braved  the  dangers 
of  the  Bay  of  Biscay  and  the  northern  seas. 

I  therefore  merely  present  the  foregoing  data  with  my  doubts 
and  perplexities  and  the  hope  that  they  may  receive  the  attention  of 
those  interested  in  the  history  of  the  origin  of  ancient  Mexican 
civilization.  It  will  be  for  them  to  meditate,  as  I  have  done,  upon 
the  striking  contradiction  between  Brinton's  dictum  that,  in  America, 
"the  simple  theory  of  the  four  elements  naturally  presented  itself 
to  the  primitive  mind,"  and  Lewes'  conclusion  that  in  Greece  the 
identical  theory,  evolved  after  centuries  of  speculation,  **  bears  in- 
dubitable evidence  of  being  a  later  conception  and  modification  of 
its  predecessors."  The  idea  that  the  Mexicans  might,  by  mere 
chance,  have  formulated  the  theory  without  associating  it  with  philo- 
sophical or  cosmological  speculations,  is  refuted  by  the  positive  facts 
that  on  the  most  important  of  native  monuments  the  symbolized  ele- 
ments are  enclosed  in  the  sign  for  movement ;  that  the  deity  was 
named  "  the  All-embracing  One,"  and  that  the  four  elements  were 
incorporated  in  a  cyclical  system  of  marvelous  ingenuity  and  per- 
fection, which  was  used  to  regulate  and  control  communal  life  under 


NUTTALL]  PROBLEMS  IN  MEXICAN  ARCHEOLOGY  I49 

the  tetrarchical  form  of  government.  Will  future  text-books  main- 
tain that  this  whole  group  of  cognate  artificialities  is  a  "  universal 
trait  of  culture,"  an  Elementargedanke,  such  as  naturally  presents 
itself  to  primitive  man,  and  that  its  presence  in  ancient  America 
merely  proves  that,  in  prehistoric  times,  this  country  produced  its 
own  school  of  philosophy,  its  mathematicians,  its  Pythagoras,  and 
its  Empedocles  ?  To  what  natural  causes  will  future  autochthonists 
attribute  the  remarkable  circumstance  that  the  primitive  aborigine 
of  America  hit  upon  the  "  Empedoclcan  elements  "  instead  of  the  five 
equally  spurious  elements  of  ancient  Chinese  philosophy,  viz.,  earth, 
water,  fire,  wood,  and  metal  ?  Will  the  parallel  development  of  the 
ancient  Mexican  and  Greek  tetraktos  be  cited  as  an  instance  of  the 
psychic  unity  of  mankind ;  or  will  it  be  recorded  that  the  internal 
evidence  furnished  by  the  ancient  Mexican  civilization  corroborates 
native  tradition  and  reveals  that  its  admirable  artificial  organization 
is  attributable  to  a  small  band  of  learned  foreign  enthusiasts  from 
over  the  sea  who,  at  a  remote  and  unknown  period  attempted,  on 
American  soil,  what  might  well  be  described  as  a  realization  of  the 
dream  of  Greek  philosophy,  namely,  the  establishment  of  **  an  ideal 
republic  or  polity''  based  on  abstract  philosophical,  mathematical, 
and  cosmological  ideas  ? 

In  conclusion,  the  question  :  Does  not  Montezuma's  evidence, 
in  conjunction  with  the  internal  evidence  supplied  by  the  Mexican 
civilization  itself,  account  for  the  incongruous  elements  it  exhibits  ? 
Do  they  not  explain  the  existence  of  positive  proofs  of  highly  ad- 
vanced intellectual  culture,  such  as  the  artificial,  ingenious,  calendric 
and  governmental  systems,  along  with  barbarous  and  primitive  su- 
perstitions and  customs,  an  inconsistent  combination  which,  years 
ago,  was  recognized  and  commented  upon  as  follows  by  the  eminent 
German  anthropologist.  Prof.  Theodor  Waitz  ? 

**The  Aztecs  seem  to  have  been  the  last  offspring  or  heir  of  an  ex- 
tremely ancient  and  admirable  civilization,  which  it  had  no  share  in  creat- 
ing^  or  developing  and  only  imperfectly  assimilated.     In  its  hands  the  an- 
cient culture  was  rapidly  deteriorating  and  becoming  mixed  with  barbaric 
elements. ' '  * 


'  Anthropologie  der  A'aturi'dlkir^  Leipzig,  1864,  part  IV,  p.  129. 
Casa  Alvarado, 

CovoacAn,  D.F.,  Mexico. 


HJALMAR  STOLPE 
By  STEWART  CULIN ' 

Dr  Hjalmar  Stolpe,  the  distinguished  Swedish  archeologist  and 
anthropologist,  who  died  January  27,  1905,  was  bom  in  Gafie, 
Sweden,  April  23,  1 84 1.  He  was  graduated  in  i860  from  the 
University  of  Upsala,  from  which  institution  he  received  the  degree 
of  Ph.D.  in  1872. 

Dr  Stolpe's  first  scientific  investigations  were  in  zoology,  and 
were  particularly  devoted  to  ants.  In  1870,  aided  by  the  Academy 
of  Science,  he  studied  the  ants  of  the  island  of  Gotland,  and  in  the 
following  year  began  to  apply  himself  to  archeologic  research,  in 
which  his  interest  was  awakened  through  his  studies  of  amber, 
pursued  on  account  of  the  insects  which  are  enclosed  in  it  Led 
by  the  fact  that  amber  is  found  in  profusion  in  the  so-called 
*'  black  soil "  of  the  island  of  Bjorko,  in  Lake  Malar,  he  went 
there  in  search  of  it.  His  finds  inspired  him  with  a  desire  for 
archeological  investigation,  and  at  his  own  initiative  and  expense 
he  carried  on  excavations  in  the  Bjorko  soil.  These  soon  attracted 
the  attention  of  friends  of  archeological  research,  and  with  the  aid  of 
national  stipends  Stolpe  continued  the  work  from  1871  to  1879  and 
in  1881. 

In  these  studies  Dr  Stolpe  was  assisted  by  his  general  acquain- 
tance with  zoology,  for  as  a  considerable  part  of  the  finds  consisted 
of  bones  of  various  animals,  both  wild  and  domestic,  and  worked  and 
unworked,  much  knowledge  and  perseverance  were  required  in 
identifying  them.  Dr  Stolpe  made  a  thorough  investigation  of  the 
large  grave-fields  on  the  northern  half  of  Bjorko,  which  he  mapped 
in  1888-89. 

These  researches  are  regarded  as  models  of  their  kind,  but  Dr 
Stolpe  published  only  brief  accounts  of  the  results.  His  collections 
and  notes,  however,  are  preserved  in  the  Historical  Museum,  and  it 

1  Condensed  from  the  memoir  by  Dr  Gustaf  Retzius  in  Ymer,  H&ft  I,  Stockholm, 
1905. 

150 


CUUN]  HJALMAR  STOLPE  1 5 1 

is  hoped  that  eventually  a  more  detailed  account  of  his  discoveries 
may  be  made  public. 

Early  in  the  seventies  Dr  Stolpe  had  definitely  decided  on  his 
future  career.  In  1872  he  visited  the  museums  of  Copenhagen, 
and  thenceforward  one  of  the  foremost  objects  of  his  life  was  to 
create  a  museum  of  ethnography  in  his  native  country.  In  this, 
however,  he  was  destined  to  encounter  many  difficulties.  In  1873 
he  was  appointed  as  lecturer  on  Northern  archeology  at  the  Univer- 
sity of  Lund,  and  in  that  and  the  following  year  he  cooperated  with 
Hans  Hildebrand,  Oscar  Montelius,  and  Gustaf  Retzius  in  the  for- 
mation of  the  present  Swedish  Society  for  Anthropology  and  Geo- 
graphy. During  this  decade  Stolpe  took  an  important  part  in 
science  in  Sweden.  It  was  mainly  through  his  initiative  that  the 
Society  arranged  for  the  general  ethnographical  exposition  in  Stock- 
holm, in  1878-79,  for  which  space  was  provided  in  the  palace  of 
the  heir  presumptive.  He  collected  for  this  exhibition  a  large  num- 
ber of  ethnographic  objects  from  Swedish  public  and  private  col- 
lections, devoting  much  time  to  their  determination  and  arrange- 
ment, and  prepared  a  comparative  catalogue  which  was  published 
in  the  Society's  periodical.  In  i88o-'8i  Stolpe  visited  the  principal 
ethnographic  museums  and  private  collections  in  Europe,  and  in 
1883  he  rejoiced  at  receiving  a  commission  as  ethnologist  to  ac- 
company the  frigate  Vanadis  on  a  voyage  round  the  world  to  se- 
cure material  for  his  cherished  hope  —  a  Swedish  ethnographical 
museum.  From  this  expedition,  which  extended  over  a  period  of 
two  years,  he  brought  home  more  than  7,500  specimens,  in  part 
from  South  America  where  he  made  excavations  at  Ancon  in  Peru, 
in  part  from  the  South  Pacific  where  he  investigated  the  grave-fields 
of  Tahiti  and  Oahu,  and  partly  from  Japan  and  the  East  Indies. 
On  his  return  to  Sweden  he  arranged  an  exhibition  of  these  col- 
lections, which  became  knov/n  as  the  "  Vanadis  exhibition,"  first  in 
Stockholm  in  1886,  and  in  the  following  year  in  Gothenburg. 
These  collections  were  incorporated  afterward  with  the  other  ethno- 
graphic collections  that  had  been  arranged  through  him,  the  whole 
being  opened  to  the  public  in  the  Royal  Museum  in  1889. 

Simultaneously  with  his  ethnographical  studies  Stolpe  was  con- 
stantly engaged  in  archeological  research,  especially  in  connection 


152  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

with  his  duties  in  the  Historical  Museum.  On  the  conclusion  of  the 
researches  at  Bjorko  he  was  commissioned  to  investigate  the  grave- 
fields  in  Vendel,  Uppland,  where  some  of  the  most  remarkable  finds 
of  the  Iron  age  in  Sweden  had  been  discovered.  Needless  to  say, 
this  work  was  carried  on  with  the  same  care  and  minuteness  that 
characterized  his  operations  at  Bjorko.  The  examination  of  the 
caves  on  the  island  of  Stora  Karlson  at  Gottland  also  fell  to  him 
and  was  prosecuted  for  a  long  time.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that 
Stolpe  did  not  find  the  opportunity  to  publish  more  exhaustive 
descriptions.  By  nature  he  was  extremely  punctilious  and  critical 
in  the  preparation  of  his  writings,  desiring  them  to  reach  perfection 
both  in  form  and  in  content  before  publication.  A  series  of  works 
of  monumental  character,  both  in  Swedish  archeology  and  in  general 
ethnology,  might  have  been  built  upon  his  researches,  but  partly 
through  force  of  adverse  circumstance  and  partly  on  account  of  his 
deep  conscientiousness,  he  was  not  successful  in  concluding  them 
before  his  untimely  death. 

Stolpe's  inclinations  and  occupations  were  involved  in  a  long 
struggle  between  archeology  and  ethnography.  He  had  a  warm 
interest  in  both,  through  it  was  apparent  that  ethnography  was  the 
dearer  to  him.  When,  therefore,  he  was  commissioned  by  the 
Academy  of  Science  to  superintend  the  ethnographical  department 
of  the  Royal  Museum  from  January  i,  1900,  the  fondest  wish  of  his 
life  was  realized.  To  administer  successfully  the  duties  created  by 
this  assignment  was,  however,  no  easy  task.  Although  he  had  made 
extended  observations  on  the  arrangement  of  foreign  museums,  had 
unlimited  interest  in  his  work,  great  practical  experience  and  effi- 
ciency, and  a  highly-developed  artistic  sense,  the  external  conditions 
were  unfavorable.  The  ethnographic  collections  of  the  Royal  Mu- 
seum were  contained  in  widely  separated,  rented  quarters,  in  some 
respects  most  unsuitable  and  inadequate,  and  the  means  at  his  dis- 
posal for  their  maintenance  and  growth  were  so  limited  that  success 
seemed  impossible.  But,  thanks  to  his  talent  and  perseverance,  he 
succeeded  in  a  few  years  in  rearranging  the  collections  on  a  geo- 
graphic basis  and  in  so  carefully  classifying  and  cataloguing  them 
that  the  Museum  is  now  as  efficient  and  attractive  as  it  is  possible  to 
make  it  in  its  present  quarters.     The  collections  were  rapidly  in- 


CUUN]  HJALMAR  STOLPE  1 53 

creased,  for  Stolpe's  intense  interest  in  his  work  inspired  interest  in 
others.  Notable  among  the  acquisitions  were  the  magnificent  col- 
lections from  Costa  Rica,  gathered  by  Mr  C.  V.  Hartman,  which 
were  presented  by  Mr  Ake  Sjogren,  and  the  collections  brought 
from  South  America  by  Baron  Erland  Nordenskiold  and  Count 
Eric  von  Rosen.  In  January,  1903,  Dr  Stolpe  was  appointed  direc- 
tor of  the  ethnographical  section  of  the  Royal  Museum  in  recogni- 
tion of  his  services. 

Hjalmar  Stolpe's  work  for  ethnography  was  of  an  epoch-mak- 
ing character.  He  was  not  only  the  first  in  Sweden  to  devote  him- 
self after  extensive  preparatory  studies  wholly  to  its  interests  and 
to  bring  together  rich  collections  for  a  general  ethnographical  mu- 
seum, but  he  made  other  contributions  to  the  science  that  won  recog- 
nition abroad. 

During  his  extensive  travels  in  Europe,  in  1880-81,  when  he 
visited  numerous  ethnographical  museums,  "  it  soon  became  appar- 
ent," as  he  said  fifteen  years  later,  "  that  one  real  key  to  a  scientific 
treatment  of  ethnographic  objects  is  found  in  the  comparative 
study  of  ornamental  art."  "  It  may  seem  strange,"  he  added, 
"  that  this  field  was  not  cultivated  long  before,  but  such  is  the  case. 
Many  circumstances  have  contributed  to  delay  the  development  of 
this  branch  of  ethnography.  The  first  is  probably  that  the  majority 
of  ethnological  museums  are  not  yet  scientifically  arranged." 
Stolpe,  a  trained  naturalist,  at  once  applied  to  ethnography  the 
comparative  method  inaugurated  by  Sven  Nilsson  in  archeological 
research,  and  as  a  schooled  archeologist  the  typological  method  that 
had  been  so  successfully  developed  and  employed  by  Hans  Hilde- 
brand  and  Oscar  Montelius  in  archeology ;  and  thus  he  became 
himself  a  pioneer  in  the  new  ethnology.  The  English  archeologist, 
Lane  Fox,  afterward  General  Pitt-Rivers,  is  the  only  one  who  had 
previously  applied  similar  methods  ;  but  Stolpe  was  the  first  in  the 
field  to  clearly  lay  down  scientific  principles  and  endeavor  to  explain 
rationally  the  problems  presented,  especially  as  regards  the  orna- 
mental art  of  primitive  peoples.  In  his  significant  work,  "  Fea- 
tures of  Evolution  in  the  Ornamental  Art  of  Primitive  Peoples," 
published  in  Ymer  for  1890-91,  and  later  reprinted  in  English  and 
German,  he  presented  some  of  the  results  of  his  profound  studies 
along  this  line. 


1 54  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

During  his  visit  to  foreign  museums  in  1880-81,  Dr  Stolpe, 
an  accomplished  artist,  made  numerous  copies  of  ethnographical 
objects  bearing  ornamental  designs,  and  brought  home  more 
than  3,000  rubbings  of  carvings,  as  well  as  a  large  number  of 
detailed  sketches.  This  valuable  material,  which  in  the  course  of 
years  he  greatly  augmented,  made  it  possible  for  him  later  to  con- 
duct extensive  comparative  studies  in  the  art  of  primitive  peoples. 
Thus  he  was  enabled  to  establish  six  different  provinces  within  which 
ornamentation  followed  different  laws  of  style  among  the  natives 
of  Polynesia.  In  1896  he  published  an  edition  de  luxe  of  his 
"  Studies  of  Ornamental  Art :  a  Contribution  to  the  Biology  of 
Ornamental  Designs,"  which  was  awarded  the  Loubat  prize  by  the 
Academy  of  Letters,  History,  and  Antiquity.  In  this  work  Stolpe 
gave  a  clear  presentation  of  the  existing  knowledge  of  the  decorative 
art  of  the  North  American  Indians,  as  well  as  a  large  series  of 
reproductions  of  a  group  of  South  American  clubs  with  carved 
anthropomorphic  and  zoomorphic  ornaments  that  furnish  a  clear 
conception  of  their  typologic  development. 

In  the  fall  of  1903  Dr  Stolpe  visited  the  United  States  as  a 
delegate  to  the  Thirteenth  International  Congress  of  Americanists 
and  made  many  warm  friends  among  his  scientific  colleagues  in 
America. 

At  home  Stolpe  was  esteemed  from  his  youth  as  a  comrade  among 
a  large  circle  of  friends.  His  pleasant  address  and  fine  conversa- 
tional talent,  with  his  superior  education  and  agreeable  wit,  made 
themselves  widely  felt.  He  was  tall  of  stature  with  handsome 
features  of  the  genuine  Northern  type,  and,  gifled  with  a  fine, 
powerful  voice,  he  was  a  particularly  popular  Bellman  singer. 
From  his  appearance  one  would  have  imagined  him  still  a  young 
man,  since  the  vigor  of  youth,  with  a  cheerful,  jocular  tempera- 
ment, seemed  to  retard  the  effect  of  advancing  years.  He  possessed 
the  sensitiveness  of  the  artist  and  the  poet,  a  sensitiveness  that  was 
especially  apparent  when  his  ideals  of  justice  were  shocked  by 
wrongs  perpetrated  by  so-called  civilized  people  upon  primitive 
folk.  As  an  author  he  possessed  a  good  style,  which  is  well  illus- 
trated in  his  excellent  sketches  of  the  Danish  ethnographer  Kristian 
Bahnsson  and  of  Anders  Retzius.     He  was  a  close  student,  oflen 


culin] 


HJALMAR  STOLPE 


155 


working  late  into  the  night  at  the  expense  of  his  health.  He  was 
happy  in  his  home  life,  which  was  made  beautiful  by  a  wife  and 
daughter  whose  lives  were  examples  of  unselfish  devotion.  His 
daughter,  the  apple  of  his  eye,  assisted  him  for  several  years  in  his 
scientific  labors. 

Stolpe  was  not  only  Sweden's  first  real  ethnographer,  but  was 
one  of  the  foremost  champions  of  the  science  in  his  generation. 
The  Ethnographical  Museum  in  Stockholm,  wherever  it  may  find 
its  final  place,  will  remain  his  perpetual  monument. 


BIBUCXJRAPHY 


1.  Naturhistoriska  och  arkeologiska  iin- 

dersdkningar  p&  Bjdrkd  i  M&laren. 
(Ofversik  of  Kun^L  Vetamkaps- 
akademiens  Forhandlingar^  1872 
no.  I ;  1873,  °o-  5- ) 

2.  Bjdrkdfyndet    I.     1874.     Beskrifning 

Ofver  fomsaker  fr&o  Nordens  yngre 
jem&lder  funna  p&  BjOrkd  i  M&lar- 
en.  Published  also  in  French 
nnder  the  title:  Les  troavailles  de 
Bjdrkd.  Description  des  antiquit^s 
de  la  demi^re  p^riode  de  Tftge  da 
fer  dans  les  pays  da  Nord,  troav6es 
dans  rile  de  BjOrkd  (M&lar). 

3.  Sur  les  d^coavertes  faites  dans  IMsIe  de 

Bjdrkd.  {^Compte  rendu  de  la  y^* 
sess,  du  Cong,  intemat,  d*  anthropoL 
et  d^archioi.  prihistoriqueSy  t.  II,  p. 
619,  Stockholm,  1874.) 

4.  Sur  Torigine  et  le  commerce  de  I'ambre 

jaune   dans  1' antiquity.     (Ibid.,  p. 

777.) 

5.  Grafiindersdkningar  pi  Bjdrkd.     (  Tid- 

skrift  fbr  Antropologi  och  Kultur- 
historiOf  1876,  Band  I,  no.  10.) 

6.  Den   Allm&nna  Etnografiska    Utst&ll- 

ningen  i  Stockholm.  I.  Etnografisk 
dfversikt.  II.  Specialforteckning. 
( Omtryckta  i  Tidskr.  f.  Antrop, 
och  Kulturhisty  pt.    ill,  Stockholm, 

1878-79.) 


7.  Meddelanden    fr&n    Bjdrkd.      I.    En 

kristen     begrafningsplats.       ( VitL 

*  Hist,  och  Antikv,  Akad.  M&nadsbL, 

1878,  p.  871.)     II.   (Ibid.,  1880.) 

8.  Exposition  ethnographique  de  Stock- 

holm 1 878-1 879.  Photographies  par 
C.  F.  Lindberg,  teste  par  le  Dr 
Hjalmar  Stolpe.  Stockholm,  1 881, 
pp.  1-36,  pi.  1-278. 

9.  Grafundersdkningar  p&  Bjdrkd  i  M£- 

laren  1881.  (Svenska  Fommin- 
nesforeningens  Tidskrifty  bd.  v,  no. 

I3»P.  S3-) 

10.  Svenska  myror.     (Entomologisk  Tid- 

skrifty  1882,  vol.  3,  pt.  3,  p.  127.) 

1 1 .  Nigra  ord  om  de  etnografiska  museema 

i  Europa.  Stockholms  Dagblads 
Boktryckeri,  Stockholm,  1882. 

12.  P&skdn    i    Stilla    Oceanen.      ( Ymery 

1883,  p.  150.) 

13.  Vendelfyndet.    En  fcirberedande  dfver- 

sikt. (Antikvar,  Tidskr.,  Stock- 
holm, 1884.) 

14.  Vagvisare      genom      Vanadis-Utstill- 

ningen  i  Arffurstens  Palats.  Stock- 
holm, 1886-87. 

15.  VSgledning    genom    Vanadis-Utst&ll- 

ningen  i  Valand.     Gdteborg,  1887. 

16.  Bjdrkd  i  Milaren.     En  vigledning  f(5r 

besdkande.     Stockholm,  1888. 


156 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8, 1906 


17.  Sur    les    collections   ethnographiques 

faites  pendant  le  voyage  autour  de  la 
terre  de  la  frigate  suidoise  la  Vanadis 
dans  les  annies  1883-85.  {^Rapport 
au  VIII*^  Congrh  intemat.  des 
OrientalisteSf  Stockholm,  1889.] 

18.  Om  Kristiania  Universitets  etnografiska 

samling.     (  Ymer,  1 890,  p.  53.) 

19.  Ueber  altmexikanische  und  siidameri- 

kanische  Wurfbrettcr.  (/«/.  Ar- 
chiv  fur  Ethnographies  vol.  Ill,  pt. 
6,  1890.) 

20.  Utvecklingsf^reteelser    i    naturfolkens 

omamentik.  (  Ymer^  1 890,  p.  193. ) 
Translated  into  English  by  Mrs  H. 
C.  Colley  March  :  Evolution  in  the 
Ornamental  Art  of  Savage  Peoples, 
by  Dr  Hjalmar  Stoipe  of  Stockholm. 
(  Transactions  of  the  Rochdale  Lit- 
erary and  Scientific  Society ^  Roch- 
dale. )  Translated  into  German  by 
Frftulein  Prof.  Johanne  Mestorf: 
Entwickelungserscheinungen  in  der 
Omamentik  der  Naturv5lker  {Mit- 
theilungen  der  Anthrop,  GeselU 
schaft  in  PVien,  Bd.  XXII,  p.  19, 
1892.) 

21.  Det  tyska  anthropologiska  s^llskapets 

24 :e  &rsmdte  i  G5ttingen  och  Han- 
nover d.  5-9  Aug.  1893.  (  J  w^r, 
1894,  p.  121. 

Brooklyn  Institute  Museum, 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 


22.  Om  v&rt  Etnografiska  museum.     S&rs- 

kildt  om  dess  afdelning  II.     (  Vmer, 
1895,  I.  pt.  2.) 

23.  Tuna-fyndet    (Alsike  sm^  Uppland). 

(  Ymer,  1895,  p.  219.) 

24.  Ett  etnografiskt  bidrag  till  f&glamas 

flyttningshistoria.  Biviftken  (Pemis 
api  vorus ) .  (  Svenska  Jdgarforbun' 
dets  nya  tidskrift,  vol.  xxx,  pt.  I, 
Stockholm,  1895.) 

25.  Anders  Retzius.     Tal  vid  minnesfeslen 

i  Sv.  S&llskapet  fdr  Antropologi  och 
Geografi  den  23  okt  1896.  (  Ymer, 
1896,  p.  213.) 

26.  Studier  i  amerikansk  omamentik,  ett 

bidrag  till  omamentens  biologi. 
Stockholm,  1896.     Fol. 

27.  Kristian       Bahnson.         (Nekrolog.) 

{Ymer,  1897,  p.  77.) 

28.  Gustaf Nordenskidld.     (Nekrolog.) 

29.  t)ber  die  Tfttowirung  der  Oster-Insu- 

laner.  {Adhand/ungen  und  Be- 
richte  des  Koniglichen  Zoologischen 
und  Anthr apologise h-Ethnographi- 
schen  Museums  %u  Dresden,  Fest- 
schrift, 1899,  no.  6,  Berlin,  1899.) 

30.  Jos^  Rizal.     En  filippinsk  i^rfattares 

och  politikers lefnadshistoria.  (Nor- 
disk  Tidskrifi,  1899.) 


BOOK   REVIEWS 

Lectures  on  the  Early  History  of  the  Kingship,     By  J.    G.    Frazer. 
New  York :  The  Macmillan  Co.    1905.    1 2**,  309  pp.    (Price  J2. 75. ) 

This  work  consists  of  a  series  of  nine  lectures  originally  delivered  at 
Trinity  College,  Cambridge,  under  the  title  of  **The  Sacred  Character 
and  Magical  Functions  of  Kings  in  Early  Society.*'  **  Substantially," 
the  author  adds,  *  *  they  consist  of  a  series  of  extracts  from  the  forthcom- 
ing third  edition  of  my  book  The  Golden  Bought  which  will  contain  fuller 
information  on  many  points. ' ' 

In  spite  of  a  certain  lack  of  completeness  which  this  statement  natur- 
ally leads  one  to  expect,  the  above  work  exhibits  its  author's  character- 
istic, suggestive  style  so  familiar  to  all  students  of  Anthropology,  and  his 
usual  breadth  of  information.  He  begins,  as  in  The  Golden  Bough,  by 
presenting  the  curious  ethnological  problem  of  the  *  *  king  of  the  woods ' ' 
at  Nemi,  to  the  solution  of  which  the  remainder  of  the  material  here  pre- 
sented is  made  to  subserve.  In  the  second  lecture  he  discusses  the  priestly 
and  magical  characteristics  of  the  kingship  in  many  countries,  and  in  con- 
nection therewith  enters  upon  a  treatment  of  magic  generally,  which  he 
divides  into  **  homoeopathic  magic  *'  based  on  **  the  law  of  similarity,*' 
and  **  contagious  magic  "  based  on  **  the  law  of  contact."  These  terms 
are  undoubtedly  suggestive,  though  it  might  be  questioned  whether  one  of 
them  does  not  cast  an  unnecessary  slur  upon  a  certain  school  of  medicine. 
Through  most  of  the  succeeding  lecture  this  discussion  is  continued,  but 
toward  the  end  the  relation  of  magic  to  the  kingship  is  again  brought 
forward,  and  the  thesis  that  kings  have  evolved  out  of  an  early  class  of 
magicians  presented.  In  lecture  five  material  is  assembled  tending  to 
show  that  a  magician  evolves  not  merely  into  a  king  but  into  a  god  as 
well.  In  lectures  six  and  seven  the  author  takes  up  the  subject  of  sacred 
marriages,  including  the  ceremonial  marriages  between  inanimate  objects, 
or  between  inanimate  objects  and  human  beings, — gone  through  in  order  to 
affect  the  course  of  nature, — and  particularly  the  marriages  of  mortals  with 
immortals.  In  lecture  eight  the  popular  theory  of  a  primitive  matriarchal 
state  of  society  is  touched  upon  and  several  ingenious  suggestions  intro- 
duced regarding  early  social  conditions  in  Rome  and  Latium.  The  over- 
throw of  kingly  power  in  Rome  Mr  Frazer  suggests  may  have  been 
partly  owing  to  an  attempt  of  Tarquin  the  Proud  to  alter  the  law  of  suc- 

157 


1 5  8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOL OGIST  [ N.  s.,  8,  1906 

cession  from  the  female  to  the  male  line.  Lecture  nine  contains  a  gen- 
eral summary  and  a  return  to  the  ''  king  of  the  woods ''  in  an  attempt  to 
explain  his  character  in  the  light  of  the  facts  adduced.  More  important, 
however,  than  the  explanation  of  this  one  phenomenon  are  the  general 
theories  which  accompany  it,  the  principal  of  which  are  summed  up  on 
pages  278  to  280,  as  follows: 

*  *  We  have  found  that  at  an  early  stage  of  society  men,  ignorant  of 
the  secret  processes  of  nature  and  of  the  narrow  limits  within  which  it  is 
in  our  power  to  control  and  direct  them,  have  commonly  arrogated  to 
themselves  functions  which  in  the  present  state  of  knowledge  we  should 
deem  superhuman  or  divine.  The  illusion  has  been  fostered  and  main- 
tained by  the  same  causes  which  begot  it,  namely,  the  marvellous  order 
and  uniformity  with  which  nature  conducts  her  operations,  the  wheels  of 
her  great  machine  revolving  with  a  smoothness  and  precision  which  enable 
the  patient  observer  to  anticipate  in  general  the  season,  if  not  the  very 
hour,  when  they  will  bring  round  the  fulfillment  of  his  hopes  or  the  ac- 
complishment of  his  fears.  The  regularly  recurring  events  of  this  great 
cycle,  or  rather  series  of  cycles,  soon  stamp  themselves  even  on  the  dull 
mind  of  the  savage.  He  foresees  them,  and  foreseeing  them  mistakes  the 
desired  recurrence  for  an  effect  of  his  own  will,  ismd  the  dreaded  recur- 
rence for  an  effect  of  the  will  of  his  enemies.  Thus  the  springs  which 
set  the  vast  machine  in  motion,  though  they  lie  beyond  our  ken, 
shrouded  in  a  mystery  which  we  can  never  hope  to  penetrate,  appear  to 
ignorant  man  to  lie  within  his  reach :  he  fancies  he  can  touch  them  and 
so  work  by  magic  art  all  manner  of  good  to  himself  and  evil  to  his  foes. 
In  time  the  fallacy  of  this  belief  becomes  apparent  to  him :  he  discovers 
that  there  are  things  he  cannot  do,  pleasiu-es  which  he  is  unable  of  himself 
to  procure,  pains  which  even  the  most  potent  magician  is  powerless  to 
avoid.  The  unattainable  good,  the  inevitable  ill>  are  now  ascribed  by 
him  to  the  action  of  invisible  powers, whose  favor  is  joy  and  life,  whose 
anger  is  misery  and  death.  Thus  magic  tends  to  be  replaced  by  religion, 
and  the  sorcerer  by  the  priest.  At  this  stage  of  thought  the  ultimate 
causes  of  things  are  conceived  to  be  personal  beings  many  in  number  and 
often  discordant  in  character,  who  partake  of  the  nature  and  even  of  the 
frailty  of  man,  though  their  might  is  greater  than  his,  and  their  life  far 
exceeds  the  span  of  his  ephemeral  existence.  Their  sharply  marked  in- 
dividualities, their  clear-cut  outlines  have  not  yet  begim,  under  the  power- 
ful solvent  of  philosophy,  to  melt  and  coalesce  into  that  single  unknown 
substratum  of  phenomena,  which,  according  to  the  qualities  with  which 
our  imaginati6n  invests  it,  goes  by  one  or  other  of  the  high-sounding 


BOOK  RE  VIE  WS  1 59 

names  which  the  wit  of  man  has  devised  to  hide  his  ignorance.  Accord- 
ingly, so  long  as  men  look  on  their  gods  as  beings  akin  to  themselves  and 
not  raised  to  an  unapproachable  height  above  them,  they  believe  it  to  be 
possible  for  those  of  their  number  who  surpass  their  fellows  to  attain  to 
divine  rank  after  death,  or  even  in  life.  Incarnate  human  deities  of  this 
latter  sort  may  be  said  to  halt  midway  between  the  age  of  magic  and  the 
age  of  religion.  If  they  bear  the  names  and  display  the  pomp  of  deities, 
the  powers  which  they  are  supposed  to  wield  are  commonly  those  of  their 
predecessor,  the  magician.  Like  him,  they  are  expected  to  guard  their 
people  against  hostile  enchantments,  to  heal  them  in  sickness,  to  bless 
them  with  offspring,  and  to  provide  them  with  an  abundant  supply  of  food 
by  regulating  the  weather  and  performing  the  other  ceremonies  which  are 
deemed  necessary  to  insure  the  fertility  of  the  earth  and  the  multiplication 
of  animals.  Men  who  are  credited  with  powers  so  lofty  and  far-reaching 
naturally  hold  the  highest  place  in  the  land,  and  while  the  rift  between 
spiritual  and  temporal  spheres  has  not  yet  deepened  too  far,  they  are  su- 
preme in  civil  as  well  as  religious  matters ;  in  a  word  they  are  kings  as 
well  as  gods.  Thus  the  divinity  which  hedges  a  king  has  its  roots  deep 
down  in  human  history,  and  long  ages  pass  before  these  are  sapped  by  a 
profounder  view  of  nature  and  of  man." 

These  and  similar  theories  of  religious  and  social  evolution  are  not 
altogether  new.  In  fact  they  are  treasured  by  a  certain  school  of  eth- 
nologists as  assured  facts  and  as  the  sine  qua  non  of  anthropological  in- 
vestigation. At  the  same  time  they  are  open  to  many  very  serious  ob- 
jections. Although  magic  certainly  does  play  a  great  part  in  the  religion 
of  those  people  which  we  are  wont  to  call  "primitive,"  the  tribe  has  yet 
to  be  discovered  in  which  religion  consists  of  nothing  else,  and  so  long 
as  that  is  the  case  Mr  Frazer's  statement  of  the  evolution  of  religion 
from  magic  must  remain  the  theory  of  a  man  or  of  a  school,  and  subject 
to  the  vicissitudes  of  any  other  unproved  hypothesis,  by  no  means  entitled 
to  consideration  as  an  organic  part  of  science.  Moreover,  it  is  one  thing 
to  suppose  that  certain  men  or  even  bodies  of  men  imagine  that  they  can 
affect  natural  phenomena,  but  quite  another  to  maintain  that  the  mass  of 
primitive  men  ever  believed  that  they  actually  created  or  produced  them, 
and  it  is  just  this  imagined  production  on  the  part  of  the  masses  which 
the  theory  here  advanced  makes  necessary. 

Nor  does  our  author's  hypothesis  regarding  the  evolution  of  kings  ap- 
pear to  be  founded  on  a  much  firmer  basis.  In  Indian  society,  at  all 
events,  a  sharp  line  must  be  drawn  between  the  shaman  or  conjurer  who 
acts  as  an  individual,  or  perhaps  as  a  member  of  a  secret  order,  and  the 


l6o  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

priest  whose  functions  are  national.  The  former  may  be,  and  sometimes 
is,  a  chief,  but  his  supernatural  abilities  are  not  at  the  basis  of  his  secular 
leadership.  On  the  contrary  they  are  are  a  mere  appanage  or  ' '  accident ' ' 
of  his  position,  while  either  heredity,  or  wealth,  bravery,  sagacity,  and 
all  those  virtues  which  bring  power  to  individuals  in  civilized  society 
are  the  real  bases  of  his  authority.  The  priestly  functions,  being  tribal 
in  character,  lend  themselves  to  union  with  civil  chieftainship  much  more 
readily,  but  in  few  instances  can  the  original  functions  of  the  priest-king 
be  shown  to  have  been  purely  ecclesiastical,  and  in  any  case  it  is  by  no 
means  certain  that  the  priest  has  evolved  out  of  the  shaman. 

The  supposed  *  *  evolution ' '  of  society  from  a  maternal  to  a  paternal 
stage  noticed  incidentally  has  no  better  foundation  than  the  two  theories 
already  considered.  The  fact  is  that  some  tribes  are  organized  on  a 
maternal  basis,  some  on  a  paternal  basis,  while  a  very  large  number,  and 
of  these  many  which  on  other  grounds  would  ordinarily  be  considered  the 
lowest,  are  properly  neither  the  one  nor  the  other  but  partake  of  both. 
Nor  is  there  the  slightest  reason,  beyond  subservience  to  a  widespread 
and  popular  theory,  for  supposing  that  the  last  have  altered  from  any 
other  condition. 

It  is  to  be  feared  that  there  has  been  a  too  great  tendency  among 
some  anthropologists  to  segregate  the  phenomena  presented  by  lower 
races  and  pick  out  certain  elements  as  **  primitive  "  for  no  better  reason 
than  because  they  do  not  occur  or  have  been  largely  suppressed  in  our  pres- 
ent so  called  **  higher  *'  cultiure.  We  thus  assume  our  own  culture  as  an 
infallible  standard  of  comparison  and  everything  outside  as  **  primitive  ** 
in  proportion  as  it  diverges  therefrom.  It  is  much  the  same  as  if  we 
were  to  assume  that  because  the  brain  appears  to  be  the  seat  of  intelli- 
gence the  growth  of  an  individual  had  begun  with  the  bones.  For  such 
phenomena  as  magic  and  belief  in  zoic  or  anthropomorphic  beings  do  not 
show  themselves  successively,  but  are  altogether  contemporaneous,  and  if 
the  above  method  of  reasoning  were  followed,  it  would  be  possible,  by  a 
judicious  selection  of  phenomena,  to  prove  anything.  The  same  may  be 
said  of  the  evolution  of  the  kingship  and  of  society  in  general. 

John  R.  Swanton. 

The  Secret  of  the  Totem.     Bv  Andrew  Lang.     London :    Longmans, 
Green  &  Co.      1905.     12**,  225  pp. 

In  spite  of  the  noted  contributions  of  Mr  Lewis  H.  Morgan  and 
other  Americans  to  the  question  of  the  evolution  of  human  society,  this 
subject  has  always  been  much  more  vigorously  discussed  in  England  than 


BOOK  REVIEWS  l6l 

on  this  side  of  the  Atlantic.  But  while  the  works  of  many  English  stu- 
dents, such  as  Spencer  and  Gillen,  Howitt,  Fison,  and  Haddon,  certainly 
contain  priceless  scientific  contributions  to  the  study,  apparently  additional 
data  have  not  served  to  set  many  of  the  ultimate  questions  at  rest,  and  in 
fact  we  seem  to  have  a  different  theory  for  every  new  investigator.  The 
book  before  us  is  that  of  a  special  pleader  for  one  such  theory,  and  he 
proceeds,  as  might  be  expected,  by  first  discussing  and  refuting  opposing 
theories  and  then  stating  his  own  opinions  and  his  reasons  for  consider- 
ing them  as  involving  the  true  explanation. 

The  opposing  theories  referred  to  are  epitomized  as  follows  on  pages 
31  and  32  : 

"(a)  Members  of  certain  recognized  human  groups  already  married 
habitually  out  of  their  g^oup  into  other  groups,  before  the  animal  names  (now 
totem  names)  were  given  to  the  groups.  The  names  came  later  and  merely 
marked,  at  first,  and  then  sanctioned,  the  limits  within  which  marriage  had 
already  been  forbidden  while  the  groups  were  still  nameless. 

"  Or  {U)  the  animal  names  of  the  phratries  and  totem  kins  existed  (perhaps 
as  denoting  groups  which  worked  magic  for  the  behoof  of  each  animal)  before 
marriage  was  forbidden  within  their  limits.  Later,  for  some  reason,  prohibi- 
tions were  enacted. 

"  Or  {c)  at  one  time  there  were  no  marriage  regulations  at  all,  but  these 
arose  when,  apparently  for  some  religious  reason,  a  hitherto  undivided  com- 
munal horde  split  into  two  sections,  each  of  which  revered  a  different  name- 
giving  animal  as  their  'god*  (totem),  claimed  descent  from  it,  and  out  of 
respect  to  their  ' god,*  did  not  marry  any  of  those  who  professed  its  faith,  and 
were  called  by  its  name,  but  always  married  persons  of  another  name  and 
'god.* 

* '  Or  (//)  men  were  at  first  in  groups,  intermarrying  within  the  group. 
These  groups  received  names  from  animals  and  other  objects,  because  indi- 
vidual men  adopted  animal  'familiars,'  as  Bear,  Elk,  Duck,  Potato,  Pine-tree. 
The  sisters  of  the  men  next  adopted  these  animal  or  vegetable  '  familiars, '  or 
protective  creatures,  from  their  brothers,  and  bequeathed  them,  by  female 
descent,  to  their  children.  These  children  became  groups  bearing  such  names 
as  Bear,  Potato,  Duck,  and  so  on.  These  groups  made  treaties  of  marriage 
with  each  other,  for  political  reasons  of  acquiring  strength  by  union.  The 
treaties  declared  that  Duck  should  never  marry  Duck,  but  always  Elk,  and 
vice  versa.  This  was  exogamy,  instituted  for  political  purposes,  to  use  the 
word  *  political '  proleptically. 

"Or  {e)  men  were  at  first  in  a  promiscuous  incestuous  horde,  but,  per- 
ceiving the  evils  of  this  condition  (whatever  these  evils  might  be  taken  to  be), 
they  divided  it  into  two  halves  \sic'\ ,  of  which  one  must  never  marry  within 
itself,  but  always  in  the  other.     To  these  divisions  animal  names  were  given  ; 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  7 — II 


1 62  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8.  1906 

they  are  the  phratries.     They  threw  ofT  colonies,  or  accepted  other  groups, 
which  took  new  animal  names,  and  are  now  the  totem  kins. 

"  Finally,  in  (/)  conjectures  (a)  and  {c)  may  be  combined  thus :  groups 
of  men,  still  nameless  as  groups,  had  for  certain  reasons  the  habit  of  not 
marrying  within  themselves,  but,  after  receiving  animal  names,  they  developed 
an  idea  that  the  animal  of  each  group  was  its  kinsman,  and  that,  for  a  certain 
superstitious  reason,  it  was  even  more  wrong  than  it  had  been  before,  to  marry 
'  within  the  blood '  of  the  animal,  as,  for  Emu  to  marry  Emu.  Or  {fi)  the 
small  groups  did  marry  within  themselves  till,  after  receiving  animal  names, 
they  evolved  the  superstition  that  such  marriage  was  a  sin  against  the  animals, 
and  so  become  exogamous." 

This  last  theory  (/i  and /a)  is  Mr  Lang's;  (Jf)  was  suggested  by 
Prof.  Baldwin  Spencer  and  Mr  J.  G.  Frazer,  and  is  accepted  by  Mr 
Howitt;  (r)  is  that  of  Dr  Durkheim;  (//)  is  that  of  Mr  Hill-Tout, 
while  {e)  is  that  formerly  held  by  Mr  Howitt. 

It  would,  of  course,  be  entirely  impossible  to  follow  Mr  Lang  in  his 
discussion  of  the  rival  hypotheses  without  reproducing  a  large  part  of  his 
work,  but  since  he  assumes  so  largely  the  character  of  a  critic  he  will 
hardly  deem  it  unfair  if  we  treat  his  own  theory  in  the  same  critical 
manner. 

In  the  first  place  we  may  say  that  we  are  pleased  and  refreshed  to 
find  an  English  sociologist  cutting  free  from  the  erstwhile  popular  notion 
of  an  undifferentiated  primitive  horde  with  promiscuous  intercourse 
between  the  sexes  out  of  which  comes  a  matrimonial  cosmos  via  the  tor- 
tuous path  of  group  marriage,  polyandry,  polygamy,  etc.  In  his  aban- 
donment of  all  this  and  his  advocacy  of  numbers  of  small  local  groups  as 
the  primitive  state  of  society  Mr  Lang  is  much  to  be  commended. 

He  is  not  so  happy,  however,  when  he  attempts  to  account  for 
exogamy  among  those  groups.  In  adopting  Darwin's  suggestion  that 
they  have  arisen  from  the  custom  among  male  anthropoid  apes  of  fighting 
for  supremacy  in  each  band  and  killing  or  driving  off  the  vanquished,  he 
appears  to  be  treading  on  very  thin  ice.  Certainly  we  do  not  know  of 
any  human  form  of  society  in  which  a  custom  at  all  like  this  obtains,  nor 
is  it  easy  to  see  how  a  jealousy  contest  could  pass  over  so  readily  into  a 
voluntary  custom.  If  a  tendency  to  marry  out  of  the  group  is  inherited, 
why  not  a  tendency  to  fight  all  the  other  males  within  it  before  doing  so  ? 
Why  do  not  the  males  in  the  group  regard  each  other  as  mortal  enemies  ? 
Far  from  this  being  the  case,  the  males  in  a  clan  or  band  such  as  is  sup- 
posed to  be  evolved  in  this  manner,  consider  each  other  as  "  friends  "  and 
in  time  of  trouble  stand  or  fall  together. 


BOOK  REVIEWS  1 63 

Furthermore,  this  special  theory,  and  indeed  Mr  Lang's  entire 
hypothesis,  rests  on  the  assumption  that  the  maternal  form  of  social 
organization  is  everywhere  prior  to  the  paternal.  As  he  does  this  largely 
for  the  reason  that  no  English  ethnologists,  when  the  major  part  of  this 
book  was  written,  admitted  a  contrary  opinion,  not  so  much  fault  can  be 
found  with  him  personally.  It  might  be  well  to  inform  him,  however, 
that,  if  we  are  to  understand  by  a  maternal  system  the  clan  systems  of 
southeastern  Australia  and  of  America,  the  position  is  one  from  which 
American  students  of  the  younger  generation  will  certainly  dissent.  The 
reviewer  has  taken  this  subject  up  in  a  brief  contribution  to  the  American 
Anthropologist  and  hopes  to  elaborate  the  evidence  later.  Suffice  it  to 
say  ( I )  that  the  maternally  organized  tribes  in  that  portion  of  North 
America  embraced  in  the  United  States  and  the  British  territories  are 
precisely  those  which  are  in  other  particulars  most  advanced,  and  (2) 
that  areas  occupied  by  maternally  organized  tribes  appear  to  have  been 
gaining  on  the  others  previous  to  white  contact.  Does  either  of  these 
circumstances  argue  anything  *  *  primitive ' '  in  the  maternally  organized 
clan? 

Another  noteworthy  point  and  one  which  will  strike  American  stu- 
dents of  Indian  society  with  astonishment,  is  Mr  Lang's  apparent  in- 
ability to  understand  the  method  of  inheriting  property  under  a  clan 
system  with  female  descent.  He  thinks,  it  appears,  that  there  is  no 
proof  that  a  man  conveys  his  badge  to  his  sister's  children.  This  state- 
ment will  certainly  amuse  anyone  who  has  studied  the  tribes  of  the  north 
Pacific  coast  for  a  single  month  —  I  might  almost  say  for  a  single  week. 
A  badge,  name,  or  any  mark  of  distinction  obtained  by  any  male  among 
the  Haida,  Tlingit,  and  Tsimshian,  for  example,  passes  to  his  sister's  son 
and  is,  or  may  be,  continued  on  in  this  manner  indefinitely.  The  con- 
trary can  hardly  be  maintained  without  accusing  every  anthropologist  who 
has  worked  in  this  area  of  falsifying  the  facts. 

American  views  of  the  origin  of  totemism,  instead  of  being  embodied 
in  the  main  part  of  the  work,  are  treated  in  an  appendix  in  which  Mr 
Hill-Tout  appears  as  the  principal  American  champion. 

We  believe  that  many  of  the  difficulties  which  Mr  Lang  and  Mr  Hill- 
Tout  experience  in  arguing  together  are  due  to  the  fact  that  each  is 
attempting  to  explain  the  origin  of  social  institutions  everywhere  by 
reference  to  a  specific  region.  Of  this  offense  the  English  school  of 
sociologists  must  be  held  especially  culpable,  for  they  have  been  the 
earliest  and  longest  offenders.  Had  they  devoted  their  energies  to  a 
solution  of  the  origin  of  totemism  among  Australian  tribes,  usmg  mater- 


164  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

ial  from  other  parts  of  the  world  simply  as  suggestions,  much  more  good 
might  have  been  accomplished,  and  American  students  could  take  little 
exception  to  their  work.  But  when  the  thesis  is  set  up,  as  it  seems  to 
be  by  the  above  writer,  that  in  determining  the  social  evolution  of  a 
few  tribes  in  southeastern  Australia  the  question  of  social  evolution  all 
over  the  world  has  been  put  at  rest,  Mr  Hill -Tout  or  any  other  sociologist 
has  the  right  to  call  a  halt.  While  not  attempting  to  support  the  latter 
gentleman  in  all  his  contentions,  which  have  resulted,  however,  from  most 
praiseworthy  investigations  among  the  Salish  tribes  of  British  Columbia, 
the  following  points  may  decidedly  be  affirmed :  ( i )  There  is  every  evi- 
dence that  the  crests  of  the  Haida,  Tlingit,  Tsimshian,  and  Heiltsuk 
originated  from  chiefs  who  transmitted  them  to  their  nephews,  and  proof 
nearly  absolute  that  some  of  them  were  so  obtained.  (2)  While  it  is  not 
always  certain  that  these  crests  came  from  personal  manitus,  the  method 
by  which  most  of  them  are  said  to  have  been  acquired  is  identical  with 
the  method  of  acquirement  of  the  personal  manitu.  (3)  Though  these 
crests  may  be  said  to  be  distinct  from  totems,  in  some  tribes,  notably  the 
Tlingit,  their  manner  of  occurrence  resembles  in  a  remarkable  manner  the 
occurrence  of  totems.  The  fact  that  totems  are  found  where  the  per- 
sonal manitu  is  wanting  need  not  trouble  us,  for  the  personal  manitu  in 
its  typical  form  is  also  wanting  among  tribes  on  the  north  Pacific  coast. 
Some  having  become  hereditary  may  have  tended  to  extinguish  the  use 
of  others. 

Phratry  names  in  this  area  originated  in  an  antiquity  too  remote  for  us 
now  to  penetrate,  and  by  the  people  themselves  they  are  carried  back  to 
the  beginning  of  all  things.  It  may  be  interesting  for  Mr  Lang  to  know, 
however,  that  the  Raven  crest  among  the  Haida  is  on  the  Eagle  side  in- 
stead of  the  Raven,  and,  if  it  is  to  be  accepted  as  a  totem,  hardly  fits  into 
his  hypothesis  according  to  which  the  phratry  should  be  found  named  after 
an  animal  which  is  a  totem  on  the  same  side. 

Finally  Mr  Lang  maintains  that  totemic  names  were  originally  nick- 
names, or  names  of  a  similar  character,  originally  applied  by  outsiders 
and  ultimately  adopted  by  the  clan  itself  On  this  point  the  evidence 
from  American  tribes  is  again  rather  unfavorable.  The  bands  of  which 
many  tribes  are  composed  bear  local  names  or  names  recording  some  real 
or  supposed  event  in  their  history,  or  perhaps  some  supposed  characteristic 
of  the  people.  Many  of  these  last  resemble  nicknames,  though  usually 
not  such  as  attach  any  slight  to  the  persons  upon  whom  they  are  bestowed. 
Now,  a  few  of  these  are  names  of  animals  or  refer  to  animals,  and  we  are 
not  to  exclude  the  possibility  that  bands  possessing  such  may  have  evolved 


BOOK  REVIEWS  1 65 

into  clans  and  the  nickname  into  a  totem.  This,  however,  is  not  cer- 
tainly known  to  have  occurred.  In  the  few  cases  where  tribes  appear  to 
be  in  process  of  becoming  totemic  it  is  unfortimate  that  no  nicknames 
involving  animals  app>ear.  In  all  such  cases  a  local  designation  is  used 
side  by  side  with  a  characteristic  totem  or  crest  which  seems  to  be  in  pro- 
cess of  replacing  it,  and  this  latter  is  evidently  already  religious  in  char- 
acter, connected  with  the  animistic  views  of  nature  common  to  all  our 
primitive  tribes. 

It  is  unfortunate  that  Mr  Lang  had  been  unable  to  use  more  informa- 
tion from  American  sources.  Undoubtedly  we  have  employed  terms  on 
this  side  of  the  Atlantic  with  greatly  varying  significance,  and  this  is  often 
deplorable.  Our  failure  to  use  a  hard  and  fast  terminology,  however,  is 
due  largely  to  the  fact  that  we  do  not  find  the  hard  and  fast  divisions 
which  English  theorists  postulate.  But  even  allowing  for  these  trouble- 
some terminologies  we  cannot  believe  that  the  descriptions  accompanying 
them  would  have  left  Mr  Lang  altogether  in  doubt  regarding  some  of  the 
social  phenomena  which  present  themselves  here.  There  is  sufficient 
material  in  print,  for  instance,  to  set  him  right  regarding  inheritance  of 
property  in  a  maternal  stage  of  society,  and  other  bits  of  information  to 
be  gleaned  here  and  there  —  such  as  a  total  absence  of  clans  in  half  the 
continent  of  North  America  and  their  presence  in  the  most  advanced 
tribes  —  which  we  would  cordially  commend  to  him. 

John  R.  Swanton. 

The  Nabaloi  Dialect.  By  Otto  Scheerer.  Department  of  the  Interior, 
Ethnological  Survey  Publications,  Vol.  11,  part  2.  Manila:  Bureau 
of  Public  Printing,  1905.     Pages  83-178;  pi.  61-85;  6  figures. 

This  work,  together  with  an  account  of  the  Bataks  of  the  island  of 
Palawan,  by  Edward  T.  Miller,  completes  Volume  11  of  the  Publications 
of  the  Ethnological  Survey  for  the  Philippine  Islands.  It  is  welcomed  by 
everyone  interested  in  Philippine  anthropology  as  an  important  contri- 
bution to  our  knowledge  of  the  primitive  tribes  of  the  archipelago,  and 
by  students  of  comparative  philology  as  an  interesting  addition  to  our 
knowledge  of  the  Malayan  dialects  of  the  Philippines. 

Mr  Scheerer  was  requested  to  make  a  complete  study  of  the  Ibaloi 
people  of  northern  Luzon  ;  but  circumstances  permitted  him  to  perform 
only  a  part  of.  the  task  assigned  him  —  a  single  chapter  of  general  infor- 
mation relating  to  the  people,  in  addition  to  twenty-nine  schedules,  which 
were  designed  to  include  an  extensive  vocabulary  of  their  dialect.  He 
prepared  a  paper,  while  in  Japan,  on  the  Nabaloi  dialect,  giving  an 
account  of  the  pronunciation,  together  with  lists  of  the  parts  of  speech. 


l66  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

tables  of  verbs,  short  phrases  illustrating  the  syntax  of  the  language, 
examples  of  the  idiom  as  illustrated  by  dialogues,  and  also  a  few  notes  on 
Nabaloi  songs  and  music.  These  notes  were  edited  by  Dr  Merton  L. 
Miller  of  the  Ethnological  Survey,  and  were  revised  by  the  author,  who 
added  to  them  a  translation  of  an  account  of  an  expedition  made  against 
the  Ibaloi  by  Spanish  troops  in  the  year  1829. 

The  illustrations  of  the  work  are  from  excellent  photographs  by  the 
Honorable  Dean  C.  Worcester,  who  requested  Mr  Scheerer  to  write  the 
paper.  They  consist  of  landscapes  illustrating  the  physical  features  and 
agriculture  of  the  country  inhabited  by  the  tribe,  their  dwellings,  baskets, 
musical  instruments,  tools  and  household  utensils,  and  portraits  of  the 
people  performing  their  daily  tasks.  There  is  also  a  sketch-map  showing 
the  location  of  the  territory  in  which  they  live. 

The  tribe  discussed  is  not  known  by  a  special  name.     The  people 
composing  it  have  been  designated  as  Igorotes  of  Benguet,  or  Bengue- 
tafios,  to  distinguish  them  from  the  Igorotes  of  Tinglayan,  Bontok,  and 
other  provinces.     The  name  Igorot,  or  Igolot,  was  used  originally  by  the 
Tagalogs  to  designate  the  mountain  tribes  of  Malayan  origin  of  northern 
Luzon.     It  did  not  include  the  Negritos.     Its  derivation  is  from  the 
Tagalo  golot^    'sierra,'    'mountain   chain';  i-golot  signifying    literally 
'  mountaineer,  *  or  *  one  who  dwells  in  the  sierra.  *     The  people  them- 
selves make  use  of  this  name  only  in  speaking  to  strangers,  in  distin- 
guishing themselves  from  the  civilized  or  Christian  tribes.     To  distinguish 
themselves  from  the  neighboring  mountain  tribes  they  call  themselves 
Ibaloi,  and  their  language   the  Baloi,  or  Nabaloi.     Their  home  is  in 
northern  Luzon,  surrounding  Baguio,  the  present  capital  of  the  province 
of  Benguet.     The  number  of  individuals  composing  their  tribe  is  between 
12,000  and  15,000.     Rumors  as  to  Chinese  intrusions  among  them  and 
of  Chinese  influence  on  their  language  are  silenced  by  the  author,  who 
shows  conclusively  that  the  language  spoken  by  them  is  purely  Malayan. 
Although  having  certain  peculiarities  of  pronunciation  and  idiom,  it  must 
be  classed  with  the  other  dialects  of  the  Malayan  tribes  of  the  archi- 
pelago, the  principal  of  which  are  the  Tagalo,  the  Bisayan,  the  Pampango, 
and  the  Ilocano.     Mr  Scheerer  considers  the  dialect  to  be  composed  of 
three  elements  —  Pangasinan,   Ilocano,  and    **a   third   which   may  be 
genuine  Nabaloi  or  which  will  more  probably  dissolve  itself  again  upon 
further  examination  into  various  components.*'     Pangasinan  and  Ilocano 
words  which  have  been  incorporated  into  the  dialect  have  become  modi- 
fied according  to  the  pronunciation  of  the  tribe,  who  have  a  tendency  to 
change  initial  d  into  r//,  /and  r  into  //,  and  to  precede  the  sound  of  ua 
or  oa  (like  the  English  lud)  by^,  thus  converting //«r<iydJ«  (banana)  into 


BOOK  REVIEWS  1 67 

charayan ;  Manila  into  Manida ;  lupa  (face)  into  dupa ;  and  oala  or 
uala  into  guara.  Another  tendency  is  to  precede  the  sound  of  y  by  d^ 
giving  to  it  very  much  the  sound  of  the  English  7,  as  in  the  word  kabadyo 
(horse)  from  the  Spanish  caballo.  These  peculiarities  are  of  very  great 
interest  to  the  reviewer,  since  they  are  also  characteristic  of  the  Chamorro 
l^u^guage  of  Guam.  Words  transformed  from  their  common  Malayan 
form  to  accord  with  the  genius  of  the  Nabaloi  dialect  in  some  cases  be- 
comes identical  with  corresponding  words  in  the  language  of  the  Gmm- 
orros,  as  in  the  case  of  chalan  (road)  and  uchan  (rain).  To  express 
the  guttural  sound  of  the  German  ch  the  author  uses  the  letter  x^  so  that 
the  Malayan  laki  (male),  which  becomes  in  the  languages  of  Guam  and 
Madagascar  lahi  or  lahy,  and  in  the  Nabaloi  dahhi,  is  written  *'  daxi^ 

As  in  all  languages  of  this  family  there  is  confusion  between  certain 
vowel  sounds.  It  is  often  difficult  to  determine  whether  a  certain  sound 
should  be  represented  by  the  letter  u  or  by  0^  or  whether  by  i  ox  e\  and 
as  different  authors  are  apt  to  select  different  vowels  for  expressing  the 
same  sound,  greater  discrepancies  appear  in  parallel  vocabularies  of  the 
various  dialects  compiled  by  different  writers  than  would  be  the  case  if 
they  were  reduced  to  a  common  phonetic  system ;  just  as  the  use  of  x 
for  the  guttural  sound  causes  an  apparent  difference  between  a  word  in 
which  it  is  used  and  a  word  of  the  same  pronunciation  in  which  the 
sound  is  indicated  by  the  Spanish/  or  the  German  ch. 

An  examination  of  the  lists  of  words  presented  by  Mr  Scheerer  de- 
termines at  once  the  relationship  of  the  Nabaloi  dialect.  Such  primitive 
words  as  dangit  (sky),  bato  (stone),  chalan  (road),  apui  (fire),  asok 
(smoke),  cuin  (salt),  dima  (hand),  tangida  (ear),  mata  (eye),  susu 
(breast),  mimi  (urine),  kuio  (louse),  would  be  recognized  at  once  by 
Polynesians  as  well  as  by  Malayans  and  natives  of  Madagascar  as  similar 
to  corresponding  words  in  their  own  languages.  Other  features  common 
to  all  these  languages  is  the  practical  identity  of  the  personal  pronouns, 
even  to  the  two  forms,  inclusive  and  exclusive,  of  the  plural  of  the  first 
person ;  the  identity  of  the  numeral  system,  which  is  decimal,  and  even 
of  the  names  of  the  numbers ;  the  formation  of  demonstrative  pronouns 
from  adverbs  of  place  ( *  here, '  '  there, '  *  yonder  ' )  ;  the  absence  of  a 
copulative  verb  *  to  be  *  and  the  use,  instead  of  predicative  nouns  and 
adjectives,  of  denominative  verbs,  such  as  *  to-be-good,  *  *  to-be-a-friend  '  ; 
and,  lastly,  similar  peculiarities  of  certain  idioms,  such  as  the  expressions 
*  who  is  your  name  ? '  instead  of  *  what  is  your  name  ?  *  and  *  what  was 
his  saying  ? '  instead  of  '  what  did  he  say  ?  ' 

Other  features  of  the  dialect  as  presented  by  Mr  Scheerer  separate  it 
at  once  from  the  Polynesian  sub-family  of  the  languages  and  group  it 


1 68  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

with  the  other  Malayan  dialects  of  the  Philippines,  the  language  of  Mada- 
gascar, and  the  Chamorro  language  of  Guam.  The  most  striking  of  these 
similarities  is  the  use  of  particles  combined  with  primitive  words  or  roots 
to  form  derivatives  of  various  shades  of  meaning,  not  only  in  the  form  of 
prefixes  and  suffixes,  as  in  the  English  words  '  beloved '  and  '  lovable- 
ness,'  but  as  infixes  into  the  body  of  the  primitive  word  itself.  Thus  by 
inserting  the  particle  in  into  the  word  bulan  (moon)  before  the  tonic 
vowel,  we  form  binudan  (monthly)  ;  and  in  the  same  way  from  kalbig 
(strike)  we  form  kinalbig-mo  (literally,  'your-striking'),  you  struck. 
Another  distinguishing  peculiarity  is  the  use  of  possessive  suffixes  in  place 
of  separate  possessive  pronouns ;  as,  taad-ko,  knife-mine ;  baUi-mo^  house- 
thine ;  kabadyo-to^  horse-his ;  chalan-tayo^  road-ours  (yours  and  mine)  ; 
abong-me,  hut-ours  (theirs  and  mine)  ;  ama-dyo,  father-yours ;  asu-cha^ 
dog-theirs.  These  possessive  suffixes  are  used  not  only  with  nouns,  but 
with  certain  forms  of  the  verb  as  well.  They  are  common  to  all  the 
languages  of  the  sub-family,  including  the  Chamorro,  Malagasy,  and 
Philippine  languages,  and  are  also  found  in  certain  languages  of  the 
Melanesian  and  Micronesian  islands,  and  in  the  endings  of  the  Polynesian 
pronouns ;  as  ta-kuy  or  to-ku  (New  Zealand),  my ;  ta-na^  or  to-na  (New 
Zealand),  his,  in  which  to  and  ta  may  be  considered  as  particles  signi- 
fying ownership  or  belonging,  followed  by  the  possessive  suffix,  just  as  in 
the  Chamorro  the  independent  possessives  iyo-ko^  my  belonging  (used 
with  names  of  inanimate  objects),  and  ga-ko,  my  belonging  (used  with 
animals)  occurs,  and  in  the  same  manner  iyo-mo,  ga-mOy  thy  belonging ; 
and  iyo-Ha,  ga-Ha,  his  belonging. 

Among  the  derivative  words  which  are  characteristic  of  the  Philippine 
sub-family  are  those  formed  by  adding  the  particle  an  to  the  root  and 
signifying  locality,  or  the  place  of  an  action.  Thus,  from  tungau,  sit,  we 
form  tungau-an,  sitting-place,  or  seat ;  from  t'num,  drink,  tnum-an, 
drinking-place,  or  spring ;  and  from  the  Spanish  escue/a,  school, 
eskueda-an,  school-house,  or  school-place.  When  an  action  is  implied, 
the  derived  noun  also  takes  a  verbal  prefix  pan  or  pang  (corresponding 
to  the  Chamorro  particle /tf«,  which  is  used  in  the  same  way)  ;  as,  pang- 
a/a-an,  getting-place,  in  the  sentence  Twai  i  pang-aia-an-mo  ni  kiu  /, 
'  Which  (was)  the  getting-place-yours  of  the  wood  ? '  that  is,  *  Where  did 
you  get  the  wood  ?  ' 

Only  a  few  more  features  of  the  Nabaloi  need  here  be  mentioned  to 
further  illustrate  its  relationship  to  other  members  of  its  sub -family. 
Instead  of  an  indefinite  article  it  uses  the  numeral  saxei  (one).  The 
definite  article,  ^,  or  /,  is  identical  with  that  of  the  Chamorro,  and  like 
the  Chamorro  and  the  Philippine  languages  it  possesses  a  personal  article 


BOOK  RE  VIE  WS  1 69 

XI,  which  is  used  before  the  names  of  persons  and  of  relationship.  Its 
use  in  the  Nabaloi  is  carried  farther  than  in  many  kindred  dialects,  how- 
ever, since  it  takes  the  form  of  a  prefix  to  personal  pronouns,  as  sikak^ 
from  ak  (I)  ;  sikam,  from  ka  (thou)  ;  sikato^  from  to  (he).  It  is  prob- 
ably identical  also  with  the  prefix  to  the  interrogative  pronoun  sipai^  who. 
The  verb  guara,  *  there  is '  or  '  is  there*  (Fr.  ii y  a,  or  ^  a-/-//),  is  iden- 
tical with  the  Chamorro  guaha,  and  is  used  exactly  in  the  same  way ;  as, 
guara  chanumy  'is  there  water?*  (Chamorro,  guaha  hanumf).  And  it 
is  also  used  to  express  ownership  in  the  absence  of  a  verb  '  to  have ' ; 
which  may  be  likened  to  the  expression  '  there-is  belonging- to-me  a  cow,' 
for  *  I  have  a  cow. '  In  the  negative  anchi,  '  there  is  not, '  the  last  syl- 
lable chi  is  without  doubt  to  be  identified  with  the  Chamorro  negative  ti 
(not)  and  the  Madagascar  /x/,  which  occurs  in  the  Bontok  dialect  as  di 
and  the  Tagalo  as  dt.  It  is  interesting  to  find  in  the  Tagalo  that  the 
sense  oi guara  (which  takes  the  form  uala)  is  reversed,  signifpng  '  there 
is  not,'  instead  of  '  there  is  *  — a  change  from  the  original  meaning,  per- 
haps, after  the  manner  of  the  French  jamais,  *  ever,'  which  when  used 
alone  signifies  *  never. '  The  use  of  a  ligation,  or  connecting  particle, 
though  not  so  frequent  as  in  the  Tagalo  and  Chamorro,  is  found  in  the 
examples  furnished  by  Mr  Scheerer ;  thus  we  have  saxei  a  too,  one  per- 
son ;  adnak  a  kurab,  blind  child ;  iman  a  baUi,  that  house ;  achaxel  a 
too,  many  people,  in  which  a  may  be  regarded  as  a  ligation  connecting 
the  adjective  with  the  noun. 

In  the  Nabaloi  preposition  chi  (at,  in,  on)  may  be  recognized  the 
Chamorro^*/  as  in  the  phrases  chi  chanum  (Chamorro  gi  hdnuffi),  *  in 
the  water '  ;  chi  chalan  (Chamorro  gi  chdlan),  *  on  the  road  '  ;  chi  balei 
(Chamorro  gi gima),  •  at  or  in  the  house.'  This  preposition  is  without 
doubt  identical  with  the  ki  of  Tonga  and  New  Zealand,  which  in  Samoan 
and  Hawaiian  becomes  /.  It  is  the  Malayan  di  and  is  used  as  in  the 
Malayan  for  forming  compound  adverbs  and  prepositions ;  as  chi  inaitapou, 
'  on  top,'  *  upon  '  (Chamorro,  gi  hilo ;  New  Zealand,  ki runga  ;  Samoan, 
/  lunga  ;  Hawaiian,  /  luna ;  Malayan,  di  aias)  ;  chi  inaidtiung,  *  below,' 
'  underneath',  *  on  the  lower  side  '  ;  chi pinaidacm,  *  within,'  *  on  the  in- 
side'; chi  inaidingeb,  'behind,'  *  in  the  rear.'  Combined  with  the 
demonstratives  iai  (this),  itan  (that),  iman  (yon),  this  preposition  forms 
the  adverbs  of  place  chiai  (here),  chitan  (there),  chiman  (yonder). 

The  examples  of  verbs  do  not  show  the  use  of  reduplication  of  sylla- 
bles to  express  tense  or  duration  of  time,  which  is  so  characteristic  a 
feature  of  the  Chamorro  and  Tagalo.  Other  features  of  the  verb,  how- 
ever, indicate  that  it  is  used  very  much  as  in  other  dialects  of  the  Philip- 
pines.    Such  are  the  presence  of  a  causative  particle,  the  use  of  distinct 


I70  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

forms  of  the  verb  in  cases  where  the  subject  is  the  principal  idea  to  be  con- 
veyed and  where  the  object  is  to  be  emphazized ;  and  a  difference  also  in  the 
form  of  the  verb  if  it  has  a  definite  object  or  an  indefinite  or  vague  object. 

An  understanding  of  the  use  of  the  verbal  forms  is  aided  much  by 
Mr  Scheerer's  examples  ;  but  it  must  be  admitted  that  these  would  not 
afford  an  adequate  introduction  to  the  intricacies  of  the  subject  unless  one 
were  familiar  with  the  grammar  of  Tagalog  or  other  Philippine  dialects. 
In  studying  a  language  of  this  kind  one  is  always  to  be  grateful  for  as 
many  simple,  concise  sentences  as  possible  as  illustrations  of  its  gram- 
matical features.  Such  sentences  should  be  gleaned  from  natives  them- 
selves and  rendered  literally  with  a  verbatim  translation,  if  possible. 
Tabular  forms  suggest  artificial  constructions.  The  author  labored  imder 
the  great  disadvantage  of  having  to  prepare  his  work  for  publication  in 
Japan,  far  remote  from  the  people  of  whose  language  he  writes,  and  with 
no  subsequent  opportunity  to  verify  doubtful  points  which  must  have  arisen. 

Mr  Scheerer,  in  concluding  the  introduction  to  his  very  interesting  and 
valuable  paper,  calls  attention  to  differences  in  the  dialects  of  neighboring 
communities,  which  must  necessarily  cause  discrepancies  between  vocabu- 
laries compiled  by  different  authors.  To  him  belongs  the  credit  of  being 
the  first  to  introduce  the  Nabaloi  dialect  to  writing,  though  he  modestly 
protests  that  he  has  cut  only  a  narrow  trail  through  the  jungle  of  the 
hitherto  unexplored  territory,  which  he  hopes  will  be  the  means  of  facili- 
tating further  investigation.  William  E.  Safford. 

The  Aboriginal  Pipes  of  Wisconsin,  By  George  A.  West.  (  Wisconsin 
Archceologistf  published  by  the  Wisconsin  Archaeological  Society,  vol. 
IV,  nos.  3,  4,  Milwaukee,  April-August,  1905.) 

This  monograph  will  be  welcomed  by  all  American  archeologists  as  a 
valuable  addition  to  our  present  knowledge  of  the  distribution  of  Indian 
pipes  in  the  United  States.  The  specimens  illustrated,  of  which  there  are 
more  thin  two  hundred,  comprise  both  historic  and  prehistoric  examples. 
Metal  tomahawk  pipes  of  every  known  type  are  represented,  and  those  of 
metal  of  the  trade  type  are  shown  to  be  quite  numerous,  as  are  the  Sioux 
type  of  stone  pipes,  many  of  which  are  inlaid  with  lead.  The  known 
area  of  the  Micmac  or  **  keel-base  pipes  "  is  shown  to  extend  throughout 
Wisconsin,  and  the  same  may  be  said  of  the  disk  pipe.  The  author 
illustrates  a  number  of  specimens  of  what  he  designates  "handle  pipes,** 
apparently  a  type  distinct  from  any  pipe  heretofore  described.  These 
are  provided  with  a  distinct  handle  extending  below  the  bowl,  and  are 
apparently  so  made  as  to  protect  the  hand  from  the  heat  of  the  burning 
tobacco.  J.  D.  McGuiRE. 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


Conducted  by  Dr  Alexander  F.  Chamberlain 

[Note. — Authors,  es]>eciall7  those  whose  articles  appear  in  journals  and  other 
serials  not  entirely  devoted  to  anthropology,  will  greatly  aid  this  department  of  the 
American  Anthropologist  by  sending  direct  to  Dr  A.  F.  Chamberlain,  Clark  University, 
Worcester,  Massachusetts,  U.  S.  A.,  reprints  or  copies  of  such  studies  as  they  may  desire 
to  have  noticed  in  these  pages.  —  Editor.] 


GENERAL 

Balfonr  (H.)  Presidential  address. 
(Rep.  Brit  Ass.  Adv.  Sd.,  Lond.,  1904 
[1905],  Lxxiv,  689-700.)  Treats  of 
the  evolutional  studies  of  Col.  Lane  Fox 
in  the  material  arts  of  man,  the  compara- 
tive study  of  the  musical  instruments  of 
modem  savage  and  barbaric  peoples,  the 
phylogenetic  history  of  the  products  of 
human  industry,  the  ethnologic  study  of 
primitive  races,  — "most  savage  races 
are  in  a  large  measure  strictly  primitive  *  * 
(e.  g.  Tasmanians). 

Barton  ( W.  J. )  The  distribution  of  rural 
occupations.  (Geogr.  Teacher,  Lond., 
1905,  III,  28-31,  map.)  Abstracted  from 
Hahn*s  Die  Haustiere  (Leiprig,  1896). 

Bdrillon  (E. )  Les  femmes &  barbe.  ( R . 
de  THyp.,  Paris,  I9<JS,  xix,  195-203; 
1905,  XX,  2-11,  35-46,  68-78,  99-108; 
134-142,  167-176,  198-209,  many  fgs.) 
Continues  and  ends  an  interesting  psy- 
chological and  sociological  study  of 
bearded  women,  ancient  and  modem,  real 
and  in  art  and  imagination.  Heredity  in 
the  matter  of  ** bearded  women'*  seems 
to  come  from  the  father.  Dr  B.  is  in- 
clined, with  Brandt,  to  consider  the 
bearded  woman  prophetic,  — {France, 
"the  most  advanced  in  many  aspects  of 
evolutions," — leads  ;  here  slightly  hirsute 
women  of  this  type  are  rather  common. 
Psychology  and  education  will,  however, 
prevent  any  character- change  in  woman 
being  induced  by  her  **  beard.'* 

Cams  (P.)  Image  worship.  (Open  Ct., 
Chicago,  1905,  XIX,  21-25.)  C.  states 
that  the  early  Christians  were  iconoclasts 
and  **  the  whole  Christian  symbology  is 
due  to  pagan  influence  and  pagan  tradi- 
tions.'* Curious  is  the  worship  of 
"black  Marys," — their  images  are 
still  found  in  Latin  Europe,  etc. 


—  Pagan  Christs.  (Ibid.,  92-99.) 
Based  on  J.  M.  Robertson's  Pagan 
Christs  (Lond.,  1 903).  Refers  to  the 
Mithraic  eucharist,  the  religious  cannibal- 
ism of  the  ancient  Mexicans,  the  Peni- 
tentes  of  New  Mexico  and  their  passion 
play. 

Professor    Mills,    the    Zendavesta 


scholar.  (Ibid.,  505-509,  portr.) 
Sketch  of  life  and  activities  of  L.  H. 
Mills,  professor  of  Zend  philology  in  the 
University  of  Oxford,  and  Zoroastrian 
scholar. 

The  reality  of  the  devil.     (Ibid., 


717-736,  II  fgs.)  The  illustrations  are 
of  ethnic  interest. 

FroideTMOZ  (H. )  L*histoire  g^ogra- 
phique  et  l*histoire  coloniale  au  Congris 
de  Stuttgart.  (J.  Soc.  d.  Am^r.  de 
Paris,  1905,  N.  s.,  ii,  325-329)  R*- 
sum^s  papers  on  geographical  and  colo- 
nial history  read  at  the  Fourteenth  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Americanists  at 
Stuttgart,  1904. 

▼an  Gennep  (A.)  Notes surl'h^raldisa- 
tion  de  la  marque  de  propri^t^  et  les  ori- 
gines  du  blason.  ( Bull.  Soc.  d' Anthr.  de 
Paris,  1905,  v«  s.,  vi.  103-I12,  23  fgs.) 
Discusses  the  heraldization  of  property- 
marks.  The  Hausem^rke  and  Hof- 
marke  (German),  the  Russian  kieimo, 
Turco- Egyptian  tamga^  Arabic  wasm, 
Japanese  shirushi,  etc. ,  are  considered. 
The  blason  is  of  polygenetic  origin.  Prop- 
erty-marks develop,  with  social  classes, 
into  armorial  bearing  and  heraldic  bla- 
zonry. 

Gayot  (T. )  La  population  et  les  sub- 
sistances.  (Ibid.,  167-182.)  Treatsof 
the  **  ideal  ration,"  vegetable  ration 
in  France,  meat  ration  in  France  and 
England,  the  world's  meat  food,  rela- 
tions of  population  and  food.    The  author 


171 


172 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


concludes  that  the  production  of  grain 
and  meat  in  the  world  is  inferior  to  the 
necessary  ration  as  determined  by  the 
physiologists,  and  that  many  who  need 
a  reparative  nutrition  have  to  put  up  with 
an  insufficient  one. 

Hellwig  ( A. )  Aberglaube  und  Strafrecht 
(Unterbltgsbeil.  z.  Tagl.  Rdschau., 
Berlin,  1905,  Nr.  220,  877-879. )  Dis- 
cusses briefly  "superstitious  crimes," 
such  as  injury  to  property  or  objects  of 
various  sorts  (animals,  trees,  etc. ),  done 
with  a  view  to  transfer  or  get  rid  of  dis- 
ease or  the  like  ;  injuries  to  the  body  or 
its  organs,  "to  drive  out  the  devil,"  to 
cure  diseases,  etc.  ;  killing  a  man  to  ob- 
tain his  blood  or  some  other  part  of 
him  for  "curative"  purposes;  mutila- 
tion of  corpses  through  "  vampire-be- 
liefs ' '  ;  the  main  de  gioire.  Perjury  also 
stands  in  a  peculiar  relation  to  super- 
stition. 

Umfrage  iiber  kriminelle  Aberglau- 

ben.  (Z.  f.  d.  ges.  Strafrechtsw.  Ber- 
lin, 1905-6,  XXVI,  335-338.)  Con- 
tains questionnaire  of  13  items  relating 
to  superstitions  of  and  about  criminals 
and  crime.  The  subject  of  superstition 
and  crime  has  also  been  treated  by  Ldw- 
enstimm,  in  the  Ztitschrift  f,  Socialwis- 
smscha/t  (i(^^f  209-231,  273-286^  and 
in  his  Aberglaube  und  Strafrecht  (Ber- 
lin, 1897). 

Hatchinson  ( W. )  The  weapons  and  tools 
of  the  dog.  (Open  Ct.,  Chicago,  1905, 
XIX,  205-226,  15  fgs.).  Author  argues 
that  ''  the  main  thing  a  dog  is  built  for  is 
to  carry  about  and  *  backup'  his  teeth," 
but  it  is  the  dog's  great-great-grand- 
father, the  wolf,  who  can  do  really  ar- 
tistic things  with  his  teeth.  The  differ- 
ent breeds  of  dogs  "  have  had  their  orig- 
inal wolf  set  of  teeth  modified  by  the 
way  in  which  they  have  been  selected 
and  bred  for  a  particular  '  trade.'  " 

jarger  (J.)  Die  Familie  Zero.  (A.  f. 
Rassen-  u.  Ges. -Biol.,  Berlin,  1905,  ii, 
494-559. )  This  interesting  and  valuable 
monograph,  with  many  tables,  treats  of 
the  family  of  the  Zeros,  —  the  remote  an- 
cestor was  a  mill-owner  in  1639,  — and 
their  product  in  individuals  afflicted  with 
vagabondism,  alcoholism,  crime,  immo- 
rality, mental  diseases,  pauperism.  The 
tendency  to  vagabondism  is  said  to  be 
due  to  marriage  with  "  foreign  "  women. 
The  paternal  character  was  destroyed  by 
unions  of  German  mountaineers  and 
Italian  tinkers  and  "  homeless"  people. 
A  vocabulary  of  the  language  (German 


dialect)  still  used  by  the  Zeros  is  ap- 
pended. 

Kahle  ( B. )  Der  gefesselte  Riese.  ( A.  f. 
Religsw.,  Lpzg,  1905,  viii,  314-316.) 
Treats  of  the  idea  of  the  "chained 
giant"  in  the  mythology  of  certain  peo- 
ples of  the  Caucasus.  R^sumis  An- 
holm's  Den  bundne  Jatte  i  Kaukasus  in 
the  Danska  Studier  for  1904. 

Keller  (C. )  Die  Mutationstheorie  von  de 
Vries  im  Lichte  der  Haustier-Geschichte. 
(A.  f.  Rassen-  u.  Ges.-Biol.,  Berlin, 
1905,  II,  1-19. )  K.  argues  that  there 
is  no  sharp  boundary  between  natural 
and  artificial  selection,  the  latter  being 
only  a  specially  developed  type  of  the 
former.  As  a  rule  the  domestication  of 
animals  has  taken  place  by  the  accumu- 
lation of  small  variations  (Darwin),  and 
only  quite  exceptionally  by  means  of 
striking  mutations  (de  Vries).  Things 
in  free  nature  occur  in  about  the  same 
way  as  in  man's  "artiflcial"  selection. 
K.  cites,  e.  g.,  the  history  of  the  East 
African  Acacia  fistula^  hermit  crab,  the 
sheep,  cattle,  dog,  etc. 

KoUman  ( J. )  Ueber  Rassengehime. 
fZ.  f.  Ethuol.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvil, 
601-602. )  Note  on  the  investigation  of 
four  Fuegian  brains  by  Jacob  (see  Ameri- 
canAnthropohgisty  1905,  N.  S.,  vil,  562). 
Dr  K.  observes  that  the  results  of  Dr 
Jakob  agree  with  those  of  Seitz  and  Man- 
ouvrier,  affording  additional  evidence  that 
"  all  nations,  termed  to-day  civilized,  ex- 
hibit and  have  exhibited  for  2,000  years, 
the  same  quality  of  brain  as  the  Fugians." 

Ueber    Rassengehime.    ii.     (Ibid. 

758-759.)  Note  on  recent  description 
of  the  brain  of  a  Papuan  from  the  south 
coast  of  Dutch  New  Guinea  by  Bolk  in 
Petrus  Kamper, 

Kahlenbeck  ( L.  \  Zur  Kritik  des  Rassen- 
problems.  (A.  f.  Rassen-  u.  Ges.- 
Biol.,  Berlin,  1905,  11,  560-567.)  Crit- 
ique of  recent  article  by  Dr  L.  Stein  in 
Die  Zukunft. 

Lejenne  (C. )  La  place  de  I'homme  dans 
I'univers  et  dans  la  s^rie  zoologique. 
(Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  v« 
s.,  VI,  183-194.)  R^sum^s  and  dis- 
cusses the  arguments  of  A.  R.  Wallace's 
Man's  Place  in  the  Universe  and  M. 
R6n^  Quinton's  V  Eau  de  mer^  Milieu 
organiquCy  the  first  of  which  seeks  to  ele- 
vate the  position  of  man  in  the  universe 
by  making  earth  its  center,  the  latter  to 
lower  it,  by  making  him  not  the  last  and 
highest  member  of  the  zoological  series, 
but  a  species  that  appeared  before  the 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


173 


camivora  and  the  ungulates.  The  birds 
according  to  M.  Quinton  are  posterior 
and  organically  superior  to  the  mammi. 
fers. 

Ussaner  ( A. )  Ueber  den  ersten  Intema- 
tionalen  Archftologen-Kongress  in  Athen 
von  7-13.  April  1905.  (Z.  f.  Ethnol., 
Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  537-546.)  R6- 
sum6s  papers,  etc.,  particularly  that  of 
Ddrpfeld  on  cremation  and  burial  of  the 
dead  in  ancient  Greece  (cremation  and 
then  burial  was  the  custom  from  prehis- 
toric times  to  the  Christian  era  ;  Ho- 
meric literature  belongs  to  the  younger 
Mycenaean  epoch),  and  others  by  Evans, 
Montelius,  etc. 

XAnoaTrier  (  L. )  L'  Anthropologic  k  1'  Ex- 
position de  Saint-Louis  (U.  S.  A.)  en 

1904.  (R.  de  I'fec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 

1905,  XV,  231-256.)  Brief  account  of 
anthropology  at  the  St.  Louis  Exposition 
—  exhibit  of  Bureau  of  American  Eth- 
nology, Section  of  Physical  Anthropology 
and  Laboratory,  Indian  Schools  exhibi- 
tion. Congress  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  etc. 

Meisner  ( H. )  Isocephalie  und  Degenera- 
tion. (A.  f.  Rassen-  u.  Ges.-Biol., 
Berlin,  1905,  II,  76-85.)  Argues  against 
the  views  of  Waldenburg  (in  his  disser- 
tation on  Das  isocephale  Rassens  ele- 
ment unter  Halligfriesen  und  j&dischen 
Taubstummen)  that  the  presence  of  a 
high  degree  of  shortheadedness  (hyper- 
brachycephaly  and  isocephaly)  in  modem 
blonds  is  a  sign  of  degeneration,  and  that 
deaf-mutism  and  mental  diseases  stand  in 
a  certain  relation  thereto.  Statistics  do 
not  bear  out  W.'s  opinion. 

Montelins  (O. )  The  evolution  of  the 
lotus  ornament.  (Rep.  Brit.  Ass.  Adv. 
Sci.,  Lond.,  1904  [1905],  Lxxiv,  700.) 
Brief  notes  on  lotus  ornament  in  Egypt, 
Assyria,  Cyprus,  Greece.  In  Greece 
lotus  becomes  common  only  in  first  mil- 
lenium  B.  c,  although  known  in  My- 
cenaean times.  The  palmette  and  **  Ion- 
ian capital  "  go  back  to  the  lotus. 

Newell  (W.  W. )  In  Memoriam  :  Wash- 
ington Matthews.  (J.  Amer.  Folk-Ix)re, 
Boston,  1905,  XVIII,  245-247.)  Brief 
account  of  life,  1 843-1905,  and  scientific 
activities,  publications,  etc.,  personal 
character.  Dr  M.  **  was  poet  as  well  as 
artist."  A  biography  by  C.  F.  Lummis  is 
in  preparation. 

Northap  (C.  S. )  A  bibliography  of  com- 
parative literature.  ( Mod.  Lang.  Notes, 
Bait.,  1905,  XX,  235-239.)  Critical 
review,  with  corrections  and  numerous 
additions,  of  Baldensperger's  new  edition 


(Strassburg,  1904)  of  Betz's  La  liter- 
ature comparie  ;  essai  bibliographique, 
Peet  ( S.  D. )  The  story  of  the  temptation, 
or  the  contest  between  good  and  evil. 
(Amer.  Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii, 
139-152,  8  fgs.)  Treats  this  theme  as 
represented  in  the  Hebrew  scriptures, 
the  Orient,  America  (Iroquois,  Aztecs, 
Mayas,  etc.). 

The  story  of  the   deluge.     (Ibid., 

201-216,  5  fgs.)  Refers  to  deluge 
legends  of  ancient  Semites,  Greeks, 
Chinese,  Hindus,  American  Indians 
( Algonquians,  Navahos,  Aztecs,  etc.) 
The  views  of  Prof.  Suess  are  reported  at 
some  length. 

Ancient  alphabets  and  sacred  books 


(Ibid.,  265-2S0,  8  fgs.)  Treats  of 
cuneiform  writing,  Egyptian  hieroglyph- 
ics, the  alphabet  and  history,  etc. 
—  Spear-heads,  knives,  stone  axes, 
and  other  edged  tools.  ( Ibid. ,  297-304, 
3  pi.,  I  fg. ).  General  discussion  of  flint 
implements,  grooved  axes,  etc. 

The  boomerang  and  the  bow  and 


arrow.  (Ibid.,  233-250,  2  pi.  6  fgs.) 
Discusses  generally  the  bow  and  arrow, 
the  harpoon,  with  references  to  Tylor, 
Holmes,  Mason. 

Prinzing  ( F. )  Die  kleinere  Sterblichkeit 
des  weiblichen  Geschlechts  in  den  Kul- 
turstaaten  und  ihre  Ursachen.  (A.  f. 
Rassen-  u.  Ges.-Biol.,  Berlin,  1905,  il, 
253-266,  369-382. )  The  proportion  of 
women  to  looo  men  in  the  various  Euro- 
pean states  ranges  from  893  in  Bosnia  to 
1090  in  Portugal,  averaging  1025.  The 
female  mortality  is  in  almost  all  these 
countries  lower  than  the  male.  The 
smaller  mortality  is  conditioned  by  the 
smaller  dangers  to  the  life  of  woman 
during  the  period  15-40  years  and  in  old 
age.  In  the  period  5-15  years  tubercu- 
losis raises  the  death-rate  and  in  the 
period  15-20  years  the  effects  of  civil- 
ization are  p>erceptible. 

Reinach  ( S. )  Le  serpent  et  la  femme. 
(L' Anthropologic,  Paris,  1905,  xvi, 
178-180.)  Author  seeks  to  explain  the 
**  enmity  between  the  serpent  and  the 
woman"  (Gen.  iii)  by  reference  to  the 
belief  current  in  various  regions  of  the 
primitive  world  (and  recently  reported 
from  Portugal)  that  the  menstrual  flow 
is  the  result  of  the  bite  of  a  serpent. 
The  heel  of  the  Biblical  narrative  is 
euphemistic. 

Sutli  (K.  S.  R. )  Shakespeare  and  the 
Indian  drama.  (Educ.  Rev.,  Madras, 
1905,  XI,  388-402. )     Treats  of  develop- 


176 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


Cartailhac  (E.)  Congr^pr^historiquede 
France.  Premiere  session  &  P6rigneux. 
(L'AnthropoIogie,  Paris,  1905,  xvi, 
507-519.)  Brief  account  of  meeting, 
with  r^sum^s  of  principal  papers,  etc. 

Cartailhac  ( E. )  ^/  Breail  ( H. )  Les  pein- 
tares  et  gravnres  murales  des  cavemes 
Pyr^n^ennes.  II.  Marsonlas,  pr&s  Salies- 
du-Salat,  Haute  Garonne.  ( Ibid. ,  43 1 - 
444,  10  fgs. )  Treats  of  the  animal  &g- 
ures  (goat,  horse,  etc.,)  engraved  and 
painted,  tectifonn,  pectiform  signs,  arbor- 
escent figures,  groups  of  points,  cross, 
etc.,  on  the  walls  of  the  cavern  of  Mar- 
sonlas.  There  are  about  a  dozen  rude 
sketches  of  human  heads.  At  Marsonlas 
there  are  three  distinct  *  *  pictorial  layers," 
—  black  animal  figures  ;  polychrome  ani- 
mal figures  with  tectiforms  and  hands, 
enigmatic  red  figures,  crosses  and  branchy 
bands.  One  painting  with  tectifonn, 
arborescent,  and  punctillated  figures  is 
remarkable. 

Canninghaiii  ( D. ) ,  Gray  ( J. ) >  ^^  ^^-  ^^' 
thropometric  investigation  in  Great 
Britain  and  Ireland.  Report  of  Com- 
mittee. (Rep.  Brit.  Ass.  Adv.  Sci., 
Lond.,  1904  [1905].  330-337)  Out- 
lines scheme  for  establishment  of  central 
anthropometrical  bureau  (honorary  con- 
sultative committee,  bureau  in  London, 
measurers).  App>ended  are  brief  notes 
on  the  pigmentation  survey  of  the  school 
children  of  Scotland  carried  out  in  1903 
by  school  teachers  ;  Shrubsall's  study  of 
the  physical  characters  of  London  hos- 
pital patients;  measurements  of  the  in- 
mates of  Scotch  lunatic  asylums  ( Tocher) ; 
measurements  of  Aberdeenshire  and 
Glasgow  school  children  (Tocher)  ; 
measurements  of  Dorsetshire  peasants 
(Gray). 

Dalean  ( F. )  et  Mantras  ( E. )  Le  dolmen 
du  Terrier  de  Cabut,  Commune  d'An- 
glade,  Gironde.  (Soc.  Arch,  de  Bor- 
deaux, 1904,  XXV,  84-91  3  pi. )  De- 
scribes briefly  the  finds  —  metal  objects 
(bronze  dagger-blade,  bronze  frag- 
ments), objects  of  bone  ( **  amulet,"  bone 
bead,  pins,  ornaments),  limestone  beads, 
necklace  of  shell  beads,  and  numerous 
similar  shell  objects,  pottery  (resembling 
ordinary  French  neolithic),  etc.,  at  the 
dolmen  of  Terrier  de  Cabut,  assigned  to 
the  Morgian  epoch. 

Dichelette  (J.)  Les  perles  de  verre. 
(L'Anthropologie,  Paris,  1905,  xvi, 
173-177,  2  fgs.)  R^sum^s  the  second 
part  of  article  by  Reinicke  on  Glasper- 
Un   vorromischfr    Zeiten   aus    Funden 


ndrdlich  der  Alpen^  published  m  AlterHt- 
mer  unserer  heidnischen  Vorteii 
(Mainz,  I9<>4;  v>  60-72).  Glass-making 
is  of  late  origin  in  Europe  and  the  beads 
discussed  by  Reinecke  are  of  Mediterra- 
nean importation. 

Les  petits  bronzes  ibdriques.   ( Ibid. , 


29-40,  6  fgs.)  Discusses  some  of  the 
material  published  by  M.  Pierre,  Paris, 
in  his  Essai  sur  P  Art  et  V  Industrie  de 
V E5paf[ne primitive  (Paris,  1903- 1904, 
2  vols.), — the  small  bronzes,  jewels, 
implements,  and  instruments  of  divers 
sorts,  of  Iberic  origin  ( fibulae  in  particu- 
lar). D.  concludes  that  the  evidence 
shows  that  '*  in  proto-historic  Spain  there 
was  a  sort  of  local  school  of  sculpture, 
which,  while  receiving  inspiration  from 
Grseco-Oriental  models,  succeeded,  in 
spite  of  awkward  execution,  in  giving  its 
works  certain  undeniably  original  char- 
acter." In  industrial  art  the  prototjrpes 
were  Upper  Italian  rather  than  Greek  or 
Carthaginian. 

Deubner  (L. )  O.  Basener,  Ludi  sacu- 
lares,  (A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905, 
VIII,  310-314.)  R^sum^s  O.  Basiner's 
Ludi  saculares.  Drevnyerimskiya  ssye- 
kulyamyya  igry  (Warsaw,  1901,  pp. 
cxv,  326),  treating  of  the  origin  and 
history  of  the  so-called  ludi  siEculares  of 
the  ancient  Romans,  their  relations  to 
the  Gentile  cult  of  the  Valerii. 

Byans  (A.  J.)  Excavations  at  Knossos, 
Crete,  1904.  (Rep.  Brit.  Ass.  Adv.  Sd., 
Lond.,  1904  [1905],  322-324.)  Re- 
ports briefly  explorations  of  floor-levels, 
etc.,  within  palace  area,  tracing  of  Mi- 
nOan  roadway,  discovery  of  cemetery 
north  of  palace,  and  sepulchral  chamber 
farther  north.  Wall-paintings,  great 
pithoit  inscribed  clay  tablets,  painted 
ware,  bronze  objects,  Egyptian  alabas- 
trOf  etc.,  were  found. 

Byans  ( A.  J. ),  Myers  ( J.  L. ),  ^-Z  aL  Ex- 
cavations on  Roman  sites  in  Britain. 
(Ibid.,  337-339. )  Describes  briefly  ex- 
cavations at  Silchester  and  Caerwent, 
1 903- 1 904  ;  detailed  accounts  will  ap- 
pear in  Archaologia,  At  Silchester  the 
remains  of  the  principal  bath  of  the 
Roman  town  were  discovered ;  and  at 
Caerwent  the  south  gate  and  the  base  of 
a  statue  dedicated  to  Mars  (date  152 
A.  D. ). 

Flirtwaiigler  ( A. )  Charon.  Eine  altat- 
liscbe  Malerei.  (A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg., 
1905,  VIII,  191-202,  2  fgs. )  Treats  of 
a  frieze-painting  in  black  on  a  clay  ob- 
ject unique  in  form,  —  not  a  vessel,  since 


km] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


177 


jeilher  bollom  nor  htlly,  foot  nor 
I  propccl}'  an  tichart  of  old  Ath- 
Irovenance.  The  picture  u  t»1u- 
I  being  a  good  half-ceniurj  older 
e  earliest  hithcrlo  knowD  lepre- 
u  of  Chilton.  It  would  appear 
tt  Charon  was  a  genuine  primitive 
1  old  rotk-lhoughl  and  not  Ihe 

Be.)  Le  poulpe  de  I'alKe  coo- 
■4n  Lafang,  Moibihan.  (R.  de 
%1'Aiithr.  de  Paris,  iflOJ,  xv,  139- 
n  fp. )  Describes  the  figure  of  (he 
Vi  carved  on  the  thinl  lupport  of 
fi  of  the  covered  way  of  Lufai^  in 
Biban.  This  prehistaHc  ligure  is 
^ued  trtth  represeDlaltDns  of  the  oc- 
k  OQ   Mycenfean  vessels  and  other 

■  (A.)  Ueberdas  Brandgmben- 
.-.■fcld  von  Wilhelmsan.  (Z.  f. 
BoL,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvu,  59^5991 
ra, )  Describes  some  characteristic 
i  Germanic  objects  (cUy  vessel,  dag- 
■  "ife,  iron  knife,  iroO  key,  etc), 
r  the  double-roll  fi&nia  nor  the 
k-Digra  vessel  with  frirte  it  unique. 
Bunt;  Lisiaurr. 

»  (E.)  Ueber  die  Exknrsion  der 
illschaft  am  28.  Juni  nach  RHdcrs- 
'.  (Ibid.,  783-785,  afgs.)  Describes 
fly  some  urns  from  Itie  graves  near 
I  lake   oT  Steinitz,    and    eiovations 

j  Ueber  Mord-  und  SUhnekrenie. 
bid., 618-619.)  Ciiesevtdencetoshovr 
^  sIone-cros:ies  in  the  highway  related 
piurder  and  then  penance.  Some  lo 
referred  to. 
n  (  W. )  Uebereine  iapplSodische 
Lbertrommel.  (Ibid.,  610. )  Noteon 
" — a  formerly  m  possession  of  Olans 
:iu,  and  noteworthy  as  being  per- 
^  in  all  respects. 

V  (A.)     Ueber  die  Bedeutuag  des 
Eifeldes   von   Wilfaelmsau    fUr  die 
I    des   Haodelsverkehrs  in  der 
vandetungsperiode.   (Ibid.,  59l~ 
^.)     According  lo  L.,  there- 
is  of  Wilhelmsau  indicate  the  eilen- 
ii  of  West  Gallic  trade- relations  over 
E  Elbe  to  the  Spree,  and  of  East  Hun- 
tian   over   Silesia    and   Brandenbui^ 
phward.     The  vessel  with  ornamental 
«  dales  from  (latest)  the  end  of  the 
I  ceotDty.     A  dislribatian-map  for 
le  kettles  and  sigillsla  vessels  with 
lief  is  appended.  Sfck  Busst;  Keisinna. 
1    Die     DoppelHxle    der    Kupferieit 
I   wcstlichen   Europa.     (Ibid.,    5'9~ 


S3Si  *  fe*-)  Describes  briefly  18  cop- 
per "double  axes"  (hole  in  middle, 
blade  at  each  end )  from  various  parts  oif 
Germany  (15),  France  (2),  Switzerland 
(1).  L.  considers  that  these  "double 
axes"  were  not  weapon  or  implements, 
but  imported  aies  from  the  southeast 
(Cyprus)  —  iti  the  early  metal -age  cop- 
per bars  in  Ihe  form  of  "double  axes" 
were  brought  into  western  Europe.  The 
adornment  of  some  of  (hem  indicates  their 
appreciation. 

Die  Doppeliit  aus  Kupfer  von  Pyr- 

mont.  (Ibid.,  770-772,  I  fg. )  De- 
scribes, with  results  of  chemical  analysis, 
a  "  double  aie"  of  copper  (pure  prac- 
tically) found  in  1900  near  Fyrmont.  L. 
considers  that  the  analysis  confirms  Ihe 
view  that  these  West-European  "double 
axes"  belong  to  Ihe  earliest  metal  bars 
coming  from  Cyprus  into  Europe. 

LnctMingei  (C.)  Das  Molkereigerlt  in 
den  Alpeodialekten  der  tomanischen 
Schweii.     (Schw,  A.f.  Volksk.,  Zarich, 

1905,    IK,    177-186,    251-291,    33    fgS.) 

This  excellent  monograph,  with  word- 
indei  and  bibliography  of  some  70  titles, 
treats  in  general  and  in  particular  of  Ihe 
various  instruments,  implements,  and 
nlensils  employed  in  the  milk  industry  ; 
their  names  (etymology,  etc.),  etc.,  in 
the  Alp  dialects  of  Romance  Swilier- 
land.  Some  30  ideas  are  expressed  by 
195  words  (150  of  different  roots, — 66 
percent  Teutonic,  II  percent  Latin). 
MkllOtldBatl  (P.  G.)  Documents  pour 
servir  ^  I'elhnologie  de  la  Corse.  (K. 
de  rfec.  d'Anlhr.  de  Paris,  190S,  xv, 
165-184.)  Gives  results  of  head.meas- 
urements  of  354  individuals  from  various 
parts  of  Corsica   (mountainous  central 


lit  Corf. 


c). 


Both  brachycephals  and  doUchocephals 
are  old  in  Corsica,  but  the  latter  were 
probably  Ihe  original  type,  tending  to- 
ward mesaticephalism.  In  Corsica,  as 
in  France,  the  Pleistocene  man  of  Cro- 
Magnon  has  been  tranafomied  into  a 
modem  race. 
Mttier  (S.)  Volkstiimliches  aus  dem 
Frei-  und  Kelletamt.  (Schw.  A.  f. 
Volksk.,  Zurich,  1905,  ix,  118-150, 
!Ui-a23,  306-313,  I  pi.,  3  fgs. )  Con- 
cluding sections  of  monograph.  Treats 
of  folk-customs  atid  folk-ideas  concern- 
ing Lent,  Ash  Wednesday,  shrovc- 
tide,  palm -Sunday  (boys  with  palms, 
"Balme  "),  Good  Friday  and  the  Satur- 
day following,  Easter,  first  and  last  of 
April,   school-examinations,     "months'' 


178 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


Sundays"  (first  Sanda3rs  in  month),  May 
reverence,  processions  and  <*  beating  the 
bounds/'  etc. 

de  Mensignac  (C. )  Note  sur  le  Jupiter 
gaulois  &  la  roue.  (Soc.  Arch,  de  Bor- 
deaux, 1905,  XXV,  102-110,  I  pi. )  De- 
scribes and  discusses  an  acephalous  stone 
statuette  (Gallo- Roman)  discovered  at 
Bordeaux  in  19CX),  and  believed  to  be  a 
Gaulish  Jupiter  in  rota, 

Mielke  (  — )  Silbemes  Schmuckstiick. 
(Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii, 
536.)  Note  on  an  ancient  south  Sla- 
vonian (?)  silver  buckle  from  a  private 
collection. 

Montelins  (O. )  The  geometric  period  in 
Greece.  (Rep.  Brit.  Ass.  Adv.  Sd., 
London,  1904  [1905],  LXXiv,  723.) 
Geometric  style  is  earlier  in  Greece  than 
in  other  parts  of  Europe  ;  is  a  continua- 
tion of  the  Mycenaean  but  inferior  to  it. 
It  lasted  from  the  12th  to  the  8th  century 
B.  c.  The  Mycenaean  culture  was  due 
to  **  foreigners." 

de  Mortillet  ( A. )  Les  tumulus  du  bronze 
et  du  fer  en  France.  (R.  de  l'6c. 
d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  213-230, 
10  fgs. )  Brief  account  of  the  tumuli  of 
the  bronze  age  and  the  first  iron  age  in 
various  parts  of  France,  their  contents, 
etc.  The  Hallstatt  period  has  been 
styled  the  "tumulus  epoch."  The  large 
dolmenic  tumuli  of  Brittany  seem  to  have 
been  the  sepultures  of  powerful  men,  of 
the  higher  classes,  etc.  Sepulchral  tu- 
muli of  the  middle  bronze  age  are  rare. 
Iron  age  tumuli  abound  in  Doubs,  Jura, 
Ain,  Haute-Sadne,  the  Vosges,  Meurthe- 
et-Moselle,  Ni^vre,  Cher,  Haute-Vienne, 
Landes,  etc. 

Manro  (R.)  et  al.  The  lake  village  at 
Glastonbury.  Sixth  report  of  the  com- 
mittee.    (Rep.   Brit.   Asso.   Adv.    Sci., 

Lond.,  1904  [1905],  324-330*  »  %•) 
Brief  account  of  investigations  in  the 
spring  of  1904  of  mounds  57,  58,  78, 

79.  S5»  54.  5i»  S3.  ^4.  and  some  under- 
taken  in  1902.  A  list  of  objects  (amber, 
glass,  tin,  bronze,  iron,  shale,  animal 
and  human  bones,  tusk,  baked  clay,  flint, 
antler,  stone,  spindle,  whorls,  querns, 
pottery,  etc. )  found  is  appended. 
Obennaier  (H.)  La  station  pal^olithique 
de  Krapina.  ( L' Anthropologie,  Paris, 
1905,  XVI,  13-27,  2  fgs.)  Describes 
situation,  stratification,  etc.,  and  com- 
pares  the   ** station"    of  Krapina  with 

others  (Taubach,  Shipka,  Certovadira, 
Wierzchow)  of  the  lower  paleolithic  age 
in   Central   Europe,    the   paleolithic   in 


France,  etc.  O.,  who  has  visited  Kra- 
pina, considers  that  the  race  there  repre- 
sented was  '*  tall,  with  no  real  pithecoid 
traits,"  and  differed  from  the  man  of 
Spy  in  having  a  high  forehead  and  being 
hyperdolichocephalic. 

Les  restes  humains  quatemaires  dans 


r Europe  centrale.  (Ibid.,  385-410.) 
R^sum^sdata  (genuine  and  doubtful)  con- 
cerning human  remains  of  the  Quaternary 
period  in  Austria- Hungary.  Among  the 
surely  Quaternary  remains  are  those  from 
the  Shipka  cavern,  Krapina  cavern, 
"stations"  of  Willendorf,  Predmost, 
Brunn,  Gudenus  cavern,  etc.  As  more 
or  less  doubtful  are  listed  the  Remains 
from  Zuzlawitz,  Ji)Hn,  Prokopi ;  the 
skulls  from  Bruex,  Podbaba,  Lieben,  and 
Stfebichovic ;  remains  from  Roter  Berg, 
Schlappanitz,  and  Hussowitz  (all  near 
Briinn)  ;  remains  from  the  caverns  of 
Kostelik,  ByciSkala,  Jachymka,  Lautsch, 
Balcarovaskala.  It  appears  that  no  real 
Quaternary  human  remains  have  so  far 
been  proved  to  occur  in  Hungary,  Upper 
and  Lower  Austria  (except  Gudenus), 
or  the  littoral. 

de  Paniagua  (A.)  Silex  reutiliens  et 
mesviniens.  (Soc.  Ardi.  de  Bordeaux, 
1903,  XXIV,  II  i-i  15.)  General  discus- 
sion of  *<  eoliths,"  attributed  to  a  pre- 
Chellean  period  of  the  first  Quaternary 
(glacial). 

Perdrizet  (P. )  Le  miracle  du  vase  bris6. 
(A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  viii,  305- 
309. )  Cites  references  from  lives  of  St 
Gregory,  St  Donatus,  St  Fridolin,  St 
Benedict,  St  Leo,  etc.,  to  all  of  whom 
has  been  attributed  the  **,miracle  of  the 
broken  vase,"  enumerated  among  those 
of  Asclepius  or  ^Esculapius. 

Piette  (E. ).  Les  Ventures  de  Tftge  glyp- 
tique.  (L' Anthropologie,  Paris,  1905, 
XVI,  i-i  I,  II  figs. )  Discusses  the  "  in- 
scriptions ' '  of  Lourdes,  Arudy,  Gourdan, 
Madeleine  Rochebertier,  etc.,  according 
to  P.,  **  the  oldest  known  writing."  In 
the  reindeer  age  there  were  successively 
in  use  two  sorts  of  writing,  pictographic 
(Papalian  epoch)  and  cursive  (Gourdan- 
ian  epoch).  Some  of  the  symbols  and 
characters  belong  evidently  to  the  com- 
mon fonds  of  the  Mediterranean  cultures. 
P.  regards  it  as  proved  that  in  the 
"glyptic  age"  there  existed  in  France, 
near  the  Pyrenees,  **  people  having  a 
symbolic  (rather  than  hieroglyphic)  writ- 
ing formed  of  pictographic  characters. ' ' 

Pittard  ( E. )  Pierres  perches  des  cimeti^res 
tatars  dans  la  Dobroudja.     (R.  de  I'fec. 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


179 


d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  162-264,  i 
fg. )  Describes  pierced  stones  set  up  in 
the  Tatar  cemetery  of  Beiram-dede,  and 
compares  them  with  similar  objects  in 
westemEurope.  Dr  P.  suggests  that  the 
passing  of  infants  through  the  holes  in 
such  stones  many  have  been ''a  second 
birth,'' — the  sick  child  was  reborn  well. 
The  hole  in  the  stone  represented  the 
maternal  opening  through  which  the 
child  came  into  the  world. 

Poirot  (J.)  Recherches  exp^rimentales 
sur  le  dialect  lapon  d'Inari.  (Finn.- 
Ugr.  Forsch.,  Helsingfors,  1904,  iv, 
153-230.)  First  part  (statistics)  of  a 
r^sum^  of  the  kymograph  studies  of  M. 
Aima  in  the  physiological  laboratory  of 
the  University  of  Helsingfors  on  the  phe- 
nomena of  quantity  in  the  Lapp  dialect 
of  Lake  Inari  as  represented  by  the  lan- 
guage of  M.  S.  Saijets,  a  pupil  of  the 
primary  normal  school  of  Lordavala. 

ReitxaiiBteiii  (R. )  Zwei  hellenistische 
Hymnen.  (A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905, 
VIII,  167-190.)  Discusses  the  early 
Christian  "Hymn  of  the  Soul,"  in  the 
Acts  of  St  Thomas,  and  a  song  of  the 
Manichaeans,  recently  discovered  in  MS. 
in  Turkestan,  both  of  which  are  treat- 
ments, more  or  less,  of  the  motif  re- 
vealed in  the  abbreviated  myth  (*'  I  am 
a  king's  son,"  etc.)  found  in  the  wound- 
charm  contained  in  the  London-Leyden 
old  Egyptian  demotic  magical  papyrus, 
published  by  Griffith  in  1904.  The 
Egyptian  myth  seems  the  model  for  the 
early  Christian  hymn. 

Rossat  (A.)  Les  paniers,  po^me  patois 
(Schw.  A.  f.  Volksk.,  Zurich,  1905,  ix, 
112-127,  224-237,  292-305.)  Con- 
tinued from  previous  numbers.  Dialect 
text,  translation,  notes,]  glossary  of  unu- 
sual and  difficult  words. 

Schmidt  ( W. )  The  latest  discoveries  in 
prehistoric  science  in  Denmark.  ( Rep. 
Brit.  Ass.  Adv.  Sci.,  Lond.,  1904 
[1905],  Lxxiv,  723-724.)  The  oldest 
stone  age  is  older  than  the  kitchen-mid- 
dens and  much  anterior  to  the  dolmens. 
The  MuUerey  lake-dwellers  of  the  stone 
age  must  have  lived  on  rafts.  The  im- 
pressions of  grains  of  cereals  on  pottery 
have  revealed  the  species  of  these  foods. 
Tumuli  avoided  swamps,  followed  an- 
cient roads,  and  led  toward  river-fords. 
The  lur  or  trumpet  of  the  bronze  age  can 
still  be  used  for  musical  purposes. 

Schrader  ( P. )  Le  monde  russe.  ( R.  de 
rfec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  73- 
85. )     Sketches     the     development    of 


Russia.  Civilized  Poland  (politically 
extinct  now,  and  socially  more  and  more 
absorbed  in  Pan-Slavonia)  and  **  bar- 
baric" Russia  have  long  shared  the 
great  Oriental  plain  of  Europe,  whose 
cold  climate  retarded  the  growth  of  a 
sedentary  civilization,  but  acted  as  a  cer- 
tain unitary  force.  Contact  between  thb 
great  plain  and  Europe  was  gradually 
established  by  the  Slavs.  Muscovy,  a 
sort  of  Asiatic  march,  semi- Asiatic  itself, 
was  the  Brst  political  force  of  Russia,  — 
cemented  by  the  pressure  of  the  Asiatic 
Tatars.  In  Siberia  a  new  Russian  cul- 
ture is  arising,  with  more  energy  and 
less  bonhomie  than  in  Europe. 

Shrubsall  (F.  C.)  A  comparison  of  the 
physical  characters  of  hospital  pa- 
tients with  those  of  healthy  individuals 
from  the  same  areas,  with  suggestions  as 
to  the  influence  of  selection  by  disease  on 
the  constitution  of  city  populations. 
(Rep.  Brit.  Ass.  Adv.  Sci.,  Lond.,  1904 
h90S]»  LXXIV,  702-704.)  R6sum6s 
briefly  results  of  investigations  as  to  stat- 
ure, cephalic  index,  and  pigmentation 
in  London  hospital  patients.  Adult  pa- 
tients are  fairer  than  the  surrounding 
healthy  population  ;  children  are  much 
fairer  than  adults,  and  than  healthy  chil- 
dren. With  passage  of  successive  gener- 
ations from  rural  to  urban,  blonds  feel 
more  acutely  change  of  environment. 
Stature  also  shows  a  progressive  dimi- 
nution. 

Stengel  (P.)  'A^tJ^f  KX{»ra7rwXof.  (A.  f. 
Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  viii,  203-213.) 
Discusses  the  significance  of  klytopolos^ 
**  famous  for  horses,"  an  epithet  of 
Aides  (Hades).  Horse  sacrifice  among 
the  Greeks  seems  always  to  have  had  a 
chthonic  character. 

Stader  ( M. )  l^tude  sur  un  nouveau  chien 
pr^historique  de  la  Russie.  (L' Anthro- 
pologic, Paris,  1905,  XVI,  269-285,  2 
fgs. )  Detailed  account,  with  measure- 
ments of  a  new  s|>ecies  (  C.  poutiatini) 
of  prehistoric  dog  discovered  near  Viso- 
koi6  on  the  south  shore  of  Lake  Bologoi6 
in  deposits  containing  paleolithic  imple- 
ments. This  dog  resembled  in  striking 
fashion  the  dingo  of  Australia.  S.  thinks 
that  the  dog  of  the  European  Quaternary 
exteriorly  like  the  dingo,  attached  itself 
to  savage  man,  was  finally  domesticated, 
and  by  crosses  with  the  wolf  became  the 
ancestor  of  the  large  and  ferocious  breeds 
of  European  dogs.  There  was  also  a 
dwarfish  species. 


i8o 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


Thieullen  (A.)  Sur  les  pierres  taill^es 
anti-classiques.  (Bull.  Soc  d'Anthr. 
dc  Paris,  1905,  v«s.,  vi,  199-203,  i  fg. ) 
Brief  account  of  a  flint  "retouched''  to 
make  the  figure  of  a  bird,  an  irrefutable 
proof,  according  to  T.,  of  the  authenticity 
of  these  objects.  A  letter  from  Bou- 
cher de  Perthes  to  M.  Chalet  is  also  cited. 

£k)lithes    et    autres    silex    taill6s. 

(Ibid.,  1 13-125.)  Criticism  of  the 
views  in  M.  Rutot's  Coup  d^ctil  sur 
V  ktat  des  connaissances  relatives  aux 
industries  de  la  pier  re,  dP  exclusion  du 
niolithique,  en  igoj, 

VaaTilli  (O.]  Sepultures  n^olithiquesde 
Montigny  - 1'  Engrain,  Aisne.  ( Ibid. , 
151-154,  3  fgs. )  Presents  additional 
data  concerning  the  neolithic  graves 
(covered  way)  of  Montigny-1' Engrain 
previously  described  in  1887. 

Poteries    n^olithiques  d'Erondelle, 

Somme.  (Ibid.,  154.)  Adds  to  item 
of  1 89 1  concerning  the  pottery  ( 14  dif- 
ferent varieties  of  ornamentation )  from  a 
neolithic  *'  station  "  at  Erondelle. 

Vire  ( A. )  Grotte  pr6historique  de  Lacave 
(Lot),  ipoque  de  Solutr^.  (L' Anthro- 
pologic, Paris,  1905,  XVI,  411-429,  18 
fgs. )  Describes  briefly  the  topography, 
geological  strata  and  condition,  imple- 
ments, etc.,  of  stone  (flints,  pebbles), 
bone  and  horn  objects  (arrows,  spear- 
heads, etc.,  harpoons,  needles,  engrav- 
ings on  horn,  etc.,  ornaments  (shell, 
stone,  teeth,  bone),  fauna  (not  exten- 
sive), osseous  human  remains  (rare). 
The  Solutrean  "station*'  of  Lacave  is 
the  highest  and  most  eastern  yet  discov- 
ered in  the  valley  of  the  Dordogne,  and 
marked  by  the  purity  and  homogeneity 
of  implements,  fauna,  etc. 

Zaborowski  (S. )  Contribution  b.  I'anthro- 
pologie  physique  de  la  Sicile  ^n^olith- 
ique.  (Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
I905»  v«s.,  VI,  196-199.)  Resumes  the 
article  of  Giuffrida-Ruggeri  (see  Ameri- 
can Anthropologist,  1905,  N.  s.,  vii, 
336 )  on  the  human  remains  of  the  caves 
of  Isnello  and  Chiusilla,  near  Cefalu,  on 
the  north  coast  of  Sicily,  belonging  to 
the  so-called  **  eneolithic  "  age.  These 
Sicilian  skulls  resemble  the  ancient  Egyp- 
tian in  several  respects. 

Le  commerce    et    les  noms    de 

I'ambre,  anciennement.  (R.  del'^c. 
d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  204- 
208. )  In  the  neolithic  age  the  use  of 
amber  was  spread  from  the  Vistula 
almost  to  the  Black  sea,  and  straying  to 
Switzerland,  but  not  in  Italy  at  this  epoch. 


The  principal  commercial  roate  for  am- 
ber was  the  Elbe;  another  was  the  Vistula. 
Italy  received  its  prehistoric  amber  from 
the  Baltic  in  exchange  for  metal  ( gold, 
bronze).  The  ancient  Assyrian  term  for 
"amber"  signifies  "saffron  that  at- 
tracts" ;  Grttt\s,  electron,  was  transferred 
from  the  name  given  to  a  composite  metal 
of  similar  color  ;  Latin  sucdnum  signified 
"  resin  "  ;  the  olATcvLionic glcesum  (our 
glass  is  cognate)  refers  to  its  "shining" 
qualities,  —  the  German  Bernstein  **  in- 
munmable  stone,"  is  a  recent  manufac- 
ture ;  the  Russian  jantare  is  borrowed 
from  Lithuanian  (  cf.  Tchermiss  jan- 
dar,  "  glass  " ).  In  Finnish,  as  in  Teu- 
tonic amber  and  glass  are  related  by 
name.  Z.  considers  that  the  Borussi 
imposed  themselves  upon  a  Finnish  sub- 
strate. 
ZaUer  ( H. )  Ratsel  aus  MQnchenbuchsee, 
Karton  Bern.  (Schw.  A.  f.  Volksk., 
Zurich,  1905,  IX,  81-111,  187-210.) 
Lists,  with  explanatory  and  comparative 
notes,  445  riddles  obtained  from  the  pu- 
pils of  the  secondary  schools  of  Miinchen- 
buchsee  in  the  canton  of  Bern,  Switzer- 
land, in  the  winter  of  1898-99. 

AFRICA 

Anthony  (R.)  et  Hazard  (R.)  Notes 
sur  la  myologie  d'un  n^gre  de  I'Ouban- 
gui.  (L' Anthropologic,  Paris,  1905, 
XVI,  445-456,  4  fgs. )  Treats  of  the 
musculature  of  a  negro  of  the  Ubangi, 
who  died  in  France  in  1903,  from  sleep- 
ing sickness.  There  was  present  a 
greater  (than  in  white)  development  of 
the  muscles  in  the  transverse  direction 
and  at  the  same  time  a  shortening  in  the 
longitudinal  (perhaps  an  individual 
character), —  the  subject  was  powerful 
rather  than  agile.  The  muscles  were  a 
deeper  red  than  seen  usually  in  the  white 
man,  and  the  subcutaneous  fat  a  more 
pronounced  golden  yellow. 

Avelot  (R. )  La  musique  chez  les  Pa- 
houins,    les    Ba-kalai,    les    Eshira,    les 

I  vela  et  les  Ba-Vili.     (Ibid.,  287-293, 

II  fgs.)  Describes  the  tom-toms,  sev- 
eral sorts  of  stringed  instruments  (pos- 
sibly borrowed  from  the  Mpongw6), 
horn,  proto- marimba,  musical  bow,  etc., 
of  the  Pahouins ;  the  kongo  (mouth- 
bow)  and  fetish -trumpet  of  the  Baka- 
lai ;  the  bomo,  etc. 

Bertholon  ( L. )  Note  sur  le  nom  de 
"Maures."  (Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de 
Paris,    v«  s.,    vi,     141-145.)      Argues 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


l8l 


that  Maure  (our  Moor)^  from  Greek 
fiavpof  **  black,'*  referred  originally  to 
the  dark  population  of  northern  Africa 
at  the  time  of  the  Berber  immigration, — 
from  such  application  it  has  come  to  be 
applied  geographically  to  all  the  inhab- 
itants of  a  certain  region.  In  the  dis- 
cussion Atgier  points  out  that  while,  out- 
side the  cities,  in  Algeria,  the  tent  Arab 
or  Bedouin  is  never  called  '*  Maure,"  his 
wife  is  styled  **  Mauresque,"  so  that  the 
proverb  or  jest  runs  **  Arabe  au  f^minin 
fait  mauresqueJ*'' 

Note  sur  le  nom  de  Ib^res,   Ber- 


b^es,  et  Africains.  (Ibid.,  145- 149.) 
Argues  that  the  names  Africain  and  Ber- 
ber e  are  synonymous  and  date  from  the 
time  of  the  Phrygian  invasion  — barbar- 
icus  and  phrygicus  signified  the  same. 
In  the  discussion  M.  Atgier  maintains 
that  both  Ibtr  and  Berber  go  back  to  the 
Libyan  root  ber^  "black.'* 

Capitan  ( L. )  £:tude  d*  une  s^rie  de  pieces 
receuillies  par  M.  Am^lineau  dans  les 
tombeaux  trds  arch&iques  d'Abydos. 
(R.  de  rfec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905, 
XV,  209-212,  II  fgs. )  Describes  flint 
knives,  scrapers,  arrow-heads,  etc.,  found 
by  M.  Am^lineau  in  the  prehistoric  tombs 
of  Abydos,  some  of  which  are  of  curious 
forms,  and  others  (hyalin  quartz)  of  fine 
workmanship.  The  nature  of  certain 
arrow-heads  suggests  that  the  ancient 
Egyptians  may  have  employed  poisoned 
barbs. 

Capitan  (L.)  et  Cayeaz  (M.)  £:tude 
pfetrographique  des  mati^res  employees 
pour  la  fabrication  des  vases  en  pierre 
pr^bistoriques  6gyptiens. ^  (Ibid.,  96- 
100.)  Describes  briefly  15  difierent 
sorts  of  hard  rock  used  by  the  ancient 
Egyptians  for  the  manufacture  of  stone 
vessels  —  syenite,  diorite,  gabbro,  epi- 
diorite,  granite,  porphyrite,  leptynite, 
serpentine,  etc. 

Cams  ( P. )  The  Queen  of  Sheba  according 
to  the  tradition  of  Axum.  (Open  Ct., 
Chicago,  1905,  XIX,  31-34.)  Cites  from 
Littmann's  Bihliotheca  Abessinica^  Vol. 
I,  the  Tigr6  legend  ( a  local  tradition  of 
Axum)  of  the  Queen  of  Sheba,  who  goes 
to  Solomon  to  be  cured  of  an  ass's  heel, 
caused  by  the  blood  of  a  dragon.  The 
story  refers  to  the  ark  of  Mary  preserved 
at  Axum. 

The  history  and  significance  of  the 

Rosetta  stone.     (Ibid.,  89-91.)     Based 
on  Budge's  recent  work  on  this  subject. 

Decorse  (J. )  Le  tatouage,  les  mutilations 
ethniques  et  la  parure  chez  les  popula- 


tions du  Sudan.  (L' Anthropologic, 
Paris,  1905,  XVI,  129-147,  14  fgs.) 
Discusses  tattooing  of  several  sorts,  eth- 
nic deformations  and  mutilations  (cran- 
ial, dental,  aural,  nasal,  labial,  circum- 
cision, and  ornaments  (necklaces,  brace- 
lets, wristlets,  anklets,  etc. )  among  the 
Sudanese  negroes.  There  are  two  dis- 
tinct types  of  tattooing,  one  reminiscent  of 
combat,  the  other  ornamental  (the  faces  of 
the  women  do  not  rival  those  of  the  men, 
but  their  body  and  limbs  often  do  so). 
Real  cranial  deformation  is  rare.  Filing 
the  teeth  is  common.  The  pierced  ear- 
lobe  bears  all  kinds  of  "ornaments." 
Lip-plugs  abound.  Finger- rings  (a  mark 
of  the  idle)  are  rare. 

La  chasse  et  1*  agriculture  chez  les 


populations  du  Sudan.  (Ibid.,  456- 
475 »  6  fgs.)  According  to  Dr  D.  the 
negro  of  the  Soudan  hunts  for  food,  not 
for  sport.  Except  in  the  case  of  the  ele- 
phant and  the  hippopotamus,  hunting  is 
rather  a  quest  after  the  young  in  nests 
and  lairs  —  trapping  and  snaring  are  also 
in  vogue,  even  the  children  trap  birds, 
etc.,  those  of  the  Chari  especially.  The 
efliect  of  a  hunting  condition  of  existence 
is  noted, — there  is  a  continual  tension  of 
the  senses.  All  negro  agronomy  is 
dominated  by  the  habitat.  The  negro  is 
practically  at  one  with  the  face  of  nature  ; 
he  is  not  its  master,  as  is  man  in  agricul- 
tural £urop>e.  The  imperfection  is  not  all 
due  to  natural  laziness.  Clearing  land 
has  been  a  difficult  task.  He  has  often 
reached  the  maximum  to  be  obtained 
with  the  means  at  hand.  To  improve 
negro  agriculture,  one  needs,  not  to  at- 
tack the  methods  of  cultivation,  but  to 
modify  the  cultivated  products.  Better 
seeds  or  better  useful  plants  would  mean 
more  than  better  machinery  of  cultiva- 
tion. 
Fishberg  (M.)  BeitrSge  zur  physischen 
Anthropologie  der  nordafrikanischen  Ju- 
den.  (Z.  f.  Demogr.  u.  Stat.  d.  Juden, 
Berlin,  1905,  I,  Sdabr.,  pp.  4.)  Gives, 
with  tables  of  measurements,  the  results 
of  the  investigation  (in  the  summer  ot 
1905)  of  606  Jewish  boys  (5  to  16  years) 
from  Tunis,  Algiers,  and  Constantine 
(head-measurements,  color),  and  of  46 
native  adult  Jews  from  Morocco,  Al- 
giers, and  Tunis,  together  with  31  emi- 
grants from  these  regions  measured  at 
New  York.  The  children  of  N.  African 
Jews  furnish  in  proportion  about  one-sixth 
as  many  blonds  as  those  of  European 
Jews.     In  the  N.  African  Jews  the  dark 


l82 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8, 1906 


type  is  purer.  The  former  are  also  much 
more  dolichocephalic;  likewise  longer 
and  narrower  nosed. 

Frobenius  (L.)  Bericht  aus  Dima.  fZ. 
f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  767- 
770.)  Calls  attention  to  the  "culture 
islands*'  (fine  wooden  ware,  weaving, 
etc.),  increase  in  length  of  bows  indi- 
cating north  to  south  influence.  F.  finds 
two  t3rpes,  the  old  central- African  of  the 
primitive  forest  (men  clothed,  women  al- 
most naked  ;  use  bow  only  ;  no  circum- 
cision ;  maternal  uncle  succession  and 
children  ;  village-heads  only  ;  old  palm- 
leaf  tobacco-pipe),  and  the  later  South 
African  of  the  southern  steppe  (men 
little  clothed,  women  more  ;  lance  more 
common  than  bow  ;  circumcision  ;  son 
inherits  ;  germs  of  '*  king  "  ;  water-pipe 
for  hemp).  The  Kassai  pile-dwelling  is 
specially  interesting. 

Hotchldss  ( W.  R. )  A  glance  into  Cen- 
tral Africa.  (So.  Wkmn.,  Hampton,  Va., 
1905,  XXXIV,  48S-493,  5  fgs. )  Contains 
notes  on  the  Mkamba. 

Hagaet  ( J. )  Le  pays  de  Laghouat  (R. 
de  rfec.  d'Antbr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv, 
185-203,  6  fgs.)  Historical  sketch  and 
description  of  Laghouat,  the  **  capital  " 
of  southern  Algeria.  At  the  epoch  of 
Arab  invasion  the  Laghouat  region  was 
occupied  by  tribes  belonging  to  the  great 
Berber  confederation  of  the  Magr*  Aoua. 
It  had  several  Roman  appellations.  The 
tomb  of  a  celebrated  marabout,  ATssa,  is 
here.  Laghouat  was  concerned  in  the 
movement  of  Abd  el  Kader.  The  in- 
digenous population  is  composed  of 
Arabs  and  Mzabite  Berbers.  The  sed- 
entary Arabs  are  represented  by  the 
Ksunans,  the  nomad  by  the  Larbfta. 

Leprince  ( M. )  Notes  sur  les  Mancagnes 
ou  Brames.  ( L*  Anthropologic,  Paris, 
1905,  XVI,  57-65.)  Treats  briefly  of 
physical  characters  (stature  av.  1.65  m.), 
dress  and  ornament,  tatooing  (done 
in  adult  age ;  not  as  caste-sign),  dwell- 
ings (Portuguese  influence),  religion 
( fetishistic ;  oppose  Islam,  Catholicism, 
etc.),  marriage,  funerals  (differ  from 
neighboring  peoples ),  social  organization 
(chief;  no  slavery),  justice  (chiefs  aided 
by  fetish-men),  dances  (mimic  war; 
lascivious  women's  dance).  The  nu- 
merals 1-20  are  given. 
Loyson  (6.  H.)  Glimpses  of  Islam  in 
Egypt.  Open  Ct.,  Chicago,  1905,  xix, 
418-437,  8  fgs.)  Reprint  of  selected 
portions  from  Mme.  Loyson's  book 
Through  the  Lands  of  Islam.     Notes 


on  the  fel/aks,  a  shiek  of  Assoan,  the 
people  of  the  desert,  etc. 
lUcallster  (A.),  Mym  (C.  S.),  et  al 
Anthropometric  investigations  among  the 
native   troops    of  the  Egyptian   army. 
( Rep.  Brit  Ass.  Adv.  Sci.,  Lond.,  1904 
[1905],  LXXiv,  339-340. )    Brief  report 
on  anthropometric  data  (measurements 
of  1,005  felliihin)  of  1901-1902.    Cop- 
tic population  is  shown  to  be  more  vari- 
able than  Mohammedan.    Modem  popu- 
lation of  Qena  province,  as  compared 
with  ancient  Naqada,  suggests  that  '*the 
homogeneity   of   the  Upper   Egyptians 
has  not  been  seriously  disturbed  during 
the  last  7,000  years."     No  evidence  of 
correlation  between  stature  and  cephalic 
index,  or  the  infiltration  of  a  taller  race 
into  Egypt 
Monteil   (C.)     Considerations  g^nirales 
sur  le  nombre  et  la  numeration  chex  les 
Mand^s.  (L' Anthropologic,  Paris,  1905 
XVI,  485-502.)     Discusses  the  numeri- 
cal system  of   the   Mand^s  of   French 
West  Africa,  particularly  the  numbers 
i-io,  whose  etymology,  etc,  is  indicated. 
All  the  Mande  dialects  have  a  quinary 
system,  —  6  is  new  point  of  departure  : 
in  Malinke  the  number-names  still  recall 
those  of  the  five  fingers. 
Myers  ( C.  S. )    The  variability  of  modem 
and  ancient  peoples.     (Rep.  Brit.  Ass. 
Adv.  Sd.,  Lond.,  1904  [1905]  Lxxiv, 
718.    Author  states  Uiat  his  Egyptian  an- 
thropometric investigations  lend  no  sup- 
port to  the  theory  that  **  modem  peoples 
deviate  more  widely  than  ancient  peoples 
from  their  respective  means."     Modem 
and  ancient  peoples   living  under  like 
conditions  of  country  and  climate  differ 
little  in  variability. 
Passarge  (S.)     Das  Okawangosumpfland 
und  seine  Bewohner.     (Z.   f.  Ethnol., 
Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  649-716,  46  fgs.) 
Treats  of  the    inhabitants  of  the  marsh 
lands  of  the  Okawango,  —  Batauana  or 
Baroa,    Bamangwato,  Bakalahari,  Bak- 
nitsi,    MassAbia,    Makiilaka,    Mambuk- 
tishu,    MakAba,     Matete  -  Mahura,    Ba- 
tanka,  numbering  altogether  some  25,000, 
—  their  history   (chiefs,  etc.),   anthro- 
pological     characters     (Bushmen    and 
negroes  are  easily   distinguished,  mitts 
are  lighter  than  the  negro  ;  the  purest 
negro-type  occurs  in  the  Kwando-Zam- 
besi  tribes  ;  the  Bechuanas  are  a  mixture 
of  negroes  with   Hottentots   and  Bush- 
men), language  (the  speech  of  Bushmen 
and  Bantu  is  absolutely  different ;   Be- 
chuana  serves  as  a  means  of  communica- 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


183 


tion  between  several  peoples),  settle- 
ment and  cultural  relations  (in  the 
marshland  itself  permanent  settlements 
are  lacking,  in  the  transitional  territory 
the  division  into  one  town  and  numerous 
villages  is  important  politically  and 
socially),  culture -possessions  (clothing 
and  ornament,  weapons,  houses  and  im- 
plements, —  with  some  detail,  —  com- 
mons and  water- vessels,  musical  instru- 
ments, —  with  the  Bushmen  the  musical 
bow  b  the  hunting  bow  itself,  —  drawings 
and  paintings  of  the  Bushmen,  agriculture 
and  cattle-breeding,  the  dog,  hunting  and 
fishing  devices,  food),  trade,  social  rela- 
tions, manners  and  customs,  political  con- 
ditions. Vocabularies  of  SusAbia  and 
Ssekuba  (pp.  715-716). 

Scfaweinfnrth  (G.)  Ueber  die  stein- 
zeitKchen  Forschungen  in  Ober&gypten. 
(Ibid.,  622-624,  4  fgs. )  Describes  cer- 
tain unexplained  stone  artifacts  of  the 
paleolithic  age  from  ''stations"  near 
Thebes. 

Sigpr  (C.)  Blancs  et  noirs.  (Mercure 
de  France,  Paris,  1905,  LVii,  543-550- ) 
General  discussion  of  the  African  ques- 
tion. The  soul  of  the  black  is  evolving, 
but  "  fidse  humanity"  on  the  part  of 
Europeans  leads  him  to  infer  feebleness. 
According  to  S.  the  beginning  of  philo- 
sophic wisdom,  for  white  and  black  alike, 
lies  in  the  respect  for  and  consciousness 
of  power. 

VernMn  (R.)  Note  sur  quelques  crftnes 
du  2*  temtoire  militaire  de  I'Afrique 
occidentale  frangaise.  (L'Anthropolo- 
gie,  Paris,  1905,  xvi,  41-56,  6  fgs.) 
Describes  with  tables  of  measurements  4 
Lobi,  2  Bobo,  and  i  Tiefo  skulls  (all  but 
one  male)  from  French  West  Africa. 
The  Lobis  are  not  a  homogeneous  group. 
Mandingo  influence  has,  apparently, 
made  itself  felt  earlier  among  the  Bobos 
than  among  the  Lobis.  The  cephalic 
index  of  the  latter  ranges  in  the  4  skulls 
65.95-78.02. 

Vicente  do  Sacramento  (J.)  Aponta- 
mentos  para  a  lingua  mac6a.  ( Bol.  Soc. 
de  Geogr.  de  Lisboa,  1904,  xxii,  .^29- 
338,  361-366  ;  XXIII,  1905,  40-52,  125- 
131,  187-196,  263-272,  300-306.) 
Grammatical  sketch  of  the  Macua  lan- 
guage of  Mozambique,  with  extensive 
vocabulary  ca.  2500  words.  The  terms 
for  the  genital  organs  are  used  for  abuse 
and  insult.  Counting  is  treated  with 
some  detail  (pp.  125-129).  The  con- 
jugation of  the  verb  dthuca^  *to  anchor,' 
occupies  pages  40-49. 


ASIA 

Albers  (A.  C. )  Modem  India.  (Open 
Ct.,  Chicago,  1905,  XIX,  588-603,  657- 
681,  20  fgs.)  Treats  of  Hindu  diarac- 
ter,  women  (no  girlhood),  ceremonies 
(investiture  of  boy  with  sacred  thread, 
bride-choosing,  marriage  ceremony, 
mourning),  begging,  religion  and  wor- 
ship ( Kali,  Durga,  Jaganat,  Benares  and 
its  temples),  caste,  the  siupa  at  Samath 
(where  the  enlightened  Gautama  de- 
livered his  first  sermon),  Buddha-Gaya 
(the  Buddhist  Mecca,  where  is  the  sacred 
Bo-tree),  the  Bhutanese,  etc.  Miss  A. 
is  head  of  a  girls'  school  in  India. 

Aaamy  ( — )  Eine  Reise  von  Peking 
durch  China  und  das  tibetanische  Grenz- 
gebiet  nach  Birma.  (Z.  f.  Ethnol. 
Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  481-500,  9  fgs.) 
Describes  journey  in  1906  from  Pekin 
across  China  into  Tibet  Contains  some 
notes,  on  the  peoples,  etc.,  of  the  re- 
gions visited. 

Bexold  (C. )  Syrisch  und  Aethiopisch. 
(A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  viii, 
286-304. )  Notes  on  literature  of  1903- 
1904  relating  to  Syrian  and  Ethiopian 
philology,  mythology,  religion,  etc.  Par- 
ticularly valuable  are  works  of  Dussaud 
in  Syrian  mjrthology.  Budge's  translation 
of  Palladsui's  Historia  Lausiaca  (320 
A.  D.). 

Buckley  (E.)  The  Japanese  as  peers  of 
Western  peoples.  (Amer.  J.  Sodol., 
Chicago,  1905,  XI,  326-335.)  Treats 
of  physical  characteristics,  skill  and  in- 
dustry, invention  and  science,  philos- 
ophy, art,  moral  faculty,  religion.  B. 
concludes  that  there  can  be  no  "  yellow 
peril ' '  in  the  case  of  Japan,  *  *  only  an 
honorable  rivalry,  profitable  alike  to 
yellow  and  white."  Japanese  art  (both 
fine  and  decorative),  which  has  won 
world-recognition,  **is  an  exclusively 
Mongol  ianproduct. " 

Buddhist  and  Christian  gospels.  (Open 
Ct.,  Chicago,  1905,  xix,  538-546.) 
R^sum^s  the  work  done  by  A.  J.  Ed- 
munds in  comparative  religion.  His 
pamphlet  on  Buddhist  and  Christian 
Gospels  was  published  in  a  second  edi- 
tion in  1904.  Many  interesting  parallels 
are  adduced. 

Buffet   (E.    P.)     A   Buddhist   in   Jewry. 
(Ibid.,  622-630.)     Cites  parallels  to  the 
philosophy  of  Gotama  from  the  book  of 
Ecclesiastes. 

Cams  (P.)  Assyrian  poems  on  the  im- 
mortality of  the  soul.      (Ibid.,  107-IIO, 


1 84 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  8.,  8,  1906 


2  fgs.)  Cites  poem  concerning  the  visit 
of  Sie  gods  to  a  dying  man,  a  prayer  for 
an  Assyrian  king,  etc. 

—  TheAinus.  (Ibid.,  163-177, 13 fgs.) 
Brief  account  of  author's  visit  to  the 
Ainu  at  the  St  Louis  Exposition.  Also 
extracts  from  Prof.  Starr's  recent  book, 
The  Ainu  Group  at  the  St  Louis  Expo- 
sition, on  the  beeur- festival,  etc 

—  Zoroaster's  contribution  to  Christi- 


treatise  on  re- 

(Ibid.,    547- 

Gives  transla- 


anity.  (Ibid.,  409-417,  I  fg.)  Refers 
to  the  coming  of  the  magi  (Matth.  II.  I 
and  the  Arabic  Gospel 0/  the  Infancy), 
King  Cyrus  (Is.  xiv.  2),  the  Persian  in- 
fluence in  the  Apocrypha,  the  Persian 
doctrine  of  Ahuramazda  and  Angra- 
mainyu,  Mithraism,  etc.,  and  find  in 
Persia  the  anticipation  of  the  *<  new  faith 
that  was  to  develop  its  full  bloom  in 
Christianity." 

Moral   tales  of  the 

sponse    and   retribution. 

562,  604-621,  14  fgs.) 

tions  of  short  stories   with  pictures  by 

Chinese  artists.     See  Suzuki, 

Dodge  (A.  P.)  The  Bahai  revelation. 
(Ibid.,  56-63.)  Criticises  a  previous 
article  by  Dr  Carus  on  the  new  religious 
movement  of  the  followers  of  Beha 
Ullah,  **  the  blessed  perfection,"  as  he  is 
usually  called  by  believers  in  the  Orient, 

—  the  devotees  are  known  as  Babists. 

Srolution  de  I'id^e  religieuse  dans 
rinde.  (R.  de  I'fec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
1905,  XV,  101-104.)  Critical  review 
and  r^sum^  of  Andr^  de  Paniagua's  re- 
cent book,  Les  temps  hiroiques,  in  which 
the  view  is  mistakenly  set  forth  that 
India  was  the  cradle  of  all  human  my- 
thology, and  the  mater  gentium, 

Ohosen  el  Howie  (  Mrs)  Excavations  at 
Sidon.  (Amer.  Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905, 
XXVII,  223-225. )  Notes  on  the  remains 
of  the  temple  of  the  Phenician  god  Esh- 
mun.  Inscriptions  (possibly  charms) 
were  found  on  the  hidden  sides  of  the 
stones. 

de  Goannont  (J.)  L'id^e  du  retour 
^ternel  dans  les  religions  de  I'Inde. 
( Mercure  de  France,  Paris,  1905,  Lvii, 
338-356.)  Author  shows  that  the 
hypothesis  of  **  the  eternal  recurrence  of 
things,"  figuring  so  much  in  Nietzsche, 

—  existing  also  in  the  so-called  **platonic 
year  "  of  German  folk-lore,  —  goes  back 
originaDy  to  the  religions  and  philo- 
sophers of  India;  belongs  with  their 
cosmogonic  ideas. 

Hawkins  (C.  J.)  Excavations  and  the 
Bible.     (Open  Ct.,  Chicago,  1905,  xix. 


1-7. )  Cites  evidence  to  show  that  Israel 
was  not  an  isolated  nation,  but  absorbed 
much  from  the  vast  old-world  dviliiation 
preceding  her. 

Herbertton  (F.  D. )  Agricultural  villages 
in  the  higher  Himalayas.  (Geogr. 
Teacher,  Lond.,  1905,  in,  23-27,  2  fgs. ) 
Treats  briefly  of  villages  in  the  Panj  or 
upper  Oxus  valley  described  by  Oluisen 
in  his  recently  published  Through  the 
Unknown  Pamir,  the  method  of  irri- 
gation, etc.  In  crossing  streams  the 
gupsar  corresponding  to  the  Mesopo- 
tamian  inflated  skin  is  in  use. 

ten  Kate  (H.)  Neue  Mitteilungen  tiber 
die  blauen  Geburtsflecken.  (2L  C 
Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  756- 
758. )  Notes  occurrence  in  Tamil  and 
Singhalese  children  in  Ceylon,  and  cites 
item  of  Javanese  folk-lore  concerning  toh^ 
or  skin-spot.  The  Singhalese  name  is 
upan  happe,  "birth  spot"  Ten  K. 
reports  that  Ceylonese  children,  bo3rs 
especially,  have  little  of  those  child-like 
charms  of  face,  etc.,  found  in  so  many 
children  of  other  colored  races.  Both  in 
the  Singhalese  and  Tamil  adults  the 
author  noticed  frequently  a  sort  of 
pseudostupor.  Ten  Kate  also  finds  the 
Dravidian  to  resemble  strongly  the  Aus- 
tralian type. 

Kohler  (W.)  Die  Schliissel  des  Petrus. 
Versuch  einer  religionsgeschichtlichen 
Erklftrung  von  Matth.  16,  18,  19.  (A. 
f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  viii,  214-243.) 
K.  concludes  that  this  famous  pmssage  of 
the  New  Testament  is  not  a  Xdyiov 
KvpiaKov,  nor  something  taken  over  par- 
ticularly from  Judaism  to  Christianity, 
but  a  transference  from  the  antique 
world,  —  Mithraism  is  perhaps  respon- 
sible for  a  good  deal. 

Latham  ( II.  L. )  The  views  of  Shinto  re- 
vival scholars  regarding  ethics.  (Open 
Ct.,  Chicago,  1905,  XIX,  100,  106.) 
Cites  extracts  from  Japanese  scholars  of 
the  seventeenth  and  eighteenth  centuries 
concerning  Chinese  ethics,  the  Mikado, 
example  and  precept,  ofienses,  punish- 
ment and  rewards,  fear  of  the  gods,  etc. 

▼on  Luschan  ( F. )  Ueber  alte  Portrat  dar- 
stellungen  aus  Sendschirli.  (Z.  f.  Eth- 
nol., Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  ^24-625.) 
Discusses  briefly  the  four  heads  from  one 
of  the  large  reliefs  dug  up  at  Sendschirli 
in  1888  —  they  belong  ca.  1300-1400 
B.  c.  Von  L.  holds  that  the  large  nose 
is  pre- Semitic,  not  Semitic,  and  that  the 
old  Asia  Minor  skull  closely  resembles 
the  so-called  *'  Alpine  type  "  —  the  Al- 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


I8S 


pine  race  came  from  Asia  Minor,  accord- 
ing to  Ton  L. 

Karqnand  (A.)  The  palace  at  Nippur 
not  Mycenaean  but  Hellenistic.  ( Amer. 
Antic|.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii,  163-165.) 
Repnnted  from  the  Amer,  Jour, 
ArcheoL^  Jan.-Mar.,  1905. 

Ilasteniian  ( E.  W.  G. )  Explorations  in 
the  Dead  Sea  valley.  (Ibid.,  249-258, 
3  fgs. )  Reprinted  from  the  Biblical 
World,    Gives  brief  account  of  Costigan 

!i855^,  Mo]3rneux  (1847),  and  Lynch 
1848)  expeditions. 

NUdeka  (T.)  Mutter  Erde  und  Ver- 
wandtes  bei  den  Semiten.  (A.  f. 
Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  viii,  161-166.) 
Cites  examples  of  the  Semitic  concept  ol 
earth  as  "mother  of  all,"  "mother  of 
all  living,"  etc.  Also  the  Semitic  corre- 
lation of  terms  for  **  seed,"  spermay  off- 
spring, e.  g.,  the  roots  t-r  and  drw, 

Offord  (J. )  The  biblical  Nisroch  and  the 
Assyrian  and  Babylonian  Nusku.  (Amer. 
Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii,  127-128.) 
Nusku  was  an  important  deity  reported 
as  worshiped  by  Sennacherib  (II  Kgs. 
XIX.  37),  as  "Nisroch,  his  god."  The 
identiBcation  is  doubted  by  some. 

Oppert  (G.)  Die  Gottheiten  der  Indiert 
(Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii, 
501-513,  717-754.)  Treats  of  the  cul. 
of  the  aborigines  of  India  (the  highest 
spirit,  in  Tamil  AijranSrs  ;  in  Canarese, 
Ayyappa ;  the  Dravidian  Ellamma  ;  the 
black  goddess  KAlamma  or  j^all ;  M&ri- 
yammai  or  Mari  ;  Visaharl  and  Manasa, 
etc.).  According  to  O.  "on  the  whole 
the  basal  character  of  the  Gramadevata 
has  remained  unchanged,  although  Brah- 
mans,  Buddhists,  Mohammedans  and 
Christians  have  come  in  contact  with  it." 
Grflmadevata  ( "  village  deity  " ),  a  Sans- 
krit long-word,  is  the  usual  name  for  the 
local  god. 

Phelps  (M.  H.)  A  representative  Hindu. 
(Open  Ct.,  Chicago,  1905,  xix,  438- 
439.)  An  account  of  Hon.  P.  Raman- 
athan,  solicitor-general  of  Ceylon,  now 
visiting  America. 

Proctor  (H.)  Alphabetic  origins.  (Amer. 
Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii,  128- 
130. )  R6sum^s  recent  articles  of  Petrie 
and  Pitcher — the  first  considers  that  the 
Phenician  alphabet  is  of  non- hieroglyphic 
origin,  the  second  believes  that  "alpha- 
betic characters  owe  their  form  to  arbi- 
trary invention."  P.  thinks  that  the 
names  were  adopted  from  the  sacred  He- 
brew square  alphabet,  which  may  be 
"the  very  character  in  which  the  Deca- 


logue was  written  on  the  Two  Tables  of 
Stone  by  the  *  Finger  of  God.*  " 

The  Bible  and  the  Syrian  archeol- 
ogy. (Ibid.,  197-199.)  R6sum6s  part 
of  V.  Ermoni's  pamphlet  La  Bible  et 
P  Archiologie  Assyrienne,  treating  of 
Adon,  Baal,  Shemesh,  etc.  J.  Offord  adds 
( 199-200)  some  notes  on  Syrian  places 
mentioned  in  the  Tel-el- Araama  tablets, 
etc. 

Ronz  ( P. )  La  prostitut^e  japonaise  au 
Tonkin.  (Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
1905,  v«  s.,  VI,  203-210.)  Treats  of 
methods  of  recruiting,  distribution,  so- 
matology, psychology,  pathology,  of  the 
Japanese  prostitute  in  Tonkin.  Pauper- 
ism here,  as  elsewhere,  lies  at  the  basis 
of  prostitution.  The  prostitutes  are  of 
ages  from  14  to  30  (majority  ca,  18), 
are  small  and  not  well  built  or  well  pro- 
portioned (the  parts  adjoining  the  gen- 
ital system  are  prominent).  They  can 
all  read  and  write  and  are  not  at  all 
devoid  of  sentiment,  are  very  lojral  to 
their  native  country.  Venereal  diseases 
are  very  common.  Even  in  the  midst  of 
their  vicious  profession  these  women 
preserve  something  of  virtue — "  the  lo- 
tus, with  roots  in  the  mud,  can  produce 
beautiful  flowers"  (Japanese). 

Note  ethnographique  sur  les  peu- 

plades  du  Haut-Tonkin,  iv«  territoire 
militaire.  (Ibid.,  155-156.)  Treats  of 
the  Ounis,  Pulas,  Thai  orThft  (physical 
characters,  intellect,  religion  and  funeral 
rites,  family,  marriage,  etc.,  foods  and 
drinks,  houses,  industries,  art,  orna- 
ment), Nilns,  Nhiings,  Mans  or  Yios, 
Mcos  of  Upper  Tonkin  ( fourth  military 
district)  numbering  in  all  some 36,000, — 
the  Thai,  Niins,  Mins,  and  Meos  each 
count  between  7000  and  8000.  The  writ- 
ten languages  of  the  C)unis  and  Ni&ns 
employ  Chinese  characters.  Several  of 
the  tribes  write  and  speak  Chinese.  The 
Thafs  average  1.60  m.  in  height  and  53  k. 
in  weight.  They  are  intelligent,  cour- 
ageous, honest,  frank  and  good-natured. 
Although  the  Thai  language  is  Siamese 
spoken  and  written,  the  Thais  use  Chi- 
nese characters  in  this  region.  The 
Thais  are  agriculturists  and  the  arts  are 
in  a  rudimentary  state  (pottery,  e.  g., 
comes  from  China  or  Annam).  The 
Nians  and  Nhungs  are  shorter  than  the 
Thais.  The  dress  of  the  Meos  and  Mans 
is  very  curious.  Both  of  these  peoples 
burn  the  forest  for  planting. 

Schwally  (F.)  Alte  semitische  Religion 
im  allgemeinen,  israelitische  und  jtidische 


1 86 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  S,  1906 


Religion.  (A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905, 
VIII,  275-285.)  Notes  on  literature  of 
1905  relating  to  ancient  Semitic  religion 
in  general,  religion  of  Israel,  Judaism,  — 
works  of  Curtiss,  Lagrange,  Torge, 
Matthes,  Moulton,  Dussaud,  Sarre, 
Samter,  Zimmem,  Winckler,  Nickel, 
Mttller,  Jeremias,  Delitzsch,  Budde, 
Hoffmann,  Marti,  Westphal,  Bohn,  Erbt, 
Meinhold,  Kurtz,  Lincke,  Bdhme,  Bous- 
set,  GUdemann,  Volz,  Boklen,  et  al.  are 
cited,  besides  periodical  literature. 

Sternberg  (L. )  Die  Religion  der  Gil- 
jaken.  (Ibid.,  244-274,  456-473-) 
This  excellent  article  treats  of  cos- 
mogonic  conceptions,  ideas  about  ani- 
mals (especially  bear  and  killer  whale), 
deities  (particularly  gentile  gods),  the 
bear-feast  and  the  ritual  procedures  ac- 
companying the  killing  of  a  bear,  evil- 
spirits  and  shamanism,  the  fate  of  the 
soul.  The  Giliak  is  an  animist,  and  for 
him  man,  the  best  known  and  most 
understood  of  all  beings,  is  naturally  the 
prototype,  —  every  visible  thing  is  merely 
a  form  in  which  hides  a  god,  —  a  man. 
The  religion  of  the  Giliaks  is  a  composite 
of  pantheism,  animal-cult,  fetishism,  de- 
monism,  polytheism,  etc.,  on  a  common 
substrate  of  anthropomorphism. 

Snznki  (T.)  and  Carus  ( P. )  A  religious 
book  of  China.  (Open  Ct.,  Chicago, 
1905,  XIX,  477-493. )  Translation,  with 
introduction  and  notes,  of  the  T^ai 
Shang  Kan  Ying  P*ienj  or  **The 
Treatise  of  the  Exalted  One  on  Response 
and  Retribution,"  a  work  of  Taoist  piety 
and  ethics  (consisting  of  an  introduction, 
moral  injunctions,  description  of  evil- 
doers and  their  penalty,  sayings  from 
various  sources,  conclusion). 

Velde  (  —  )  Eine  Sammlung  altchines- 
ischer  Hieb-  und  Stichwafien.  (Z.  f. 
Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  78-5 
786. )  Brief  account  of  the  collection  of 
old  Chinese  weapons  (lances,  halberds, 
swords,  daggers,  battle-axes,  blunt  weap- 
ons of  various  sorts,  "birds'  claws," 
crescents,  two-handed  swords,  etc.)  in 
the  Museum  fiir  VQlkerkunde,  —  ob- 
tained in  Pekin  in  1898- 1900.  There 
are  many  fanciful  forms  of  swords.  The 
handles  indicate  the  small  size  of  the 
hands  of  the  Chinese. 

Vlrchow  (H. )  Weitere  Milteilungen 
iiber  FUsse  von  Chinesinnen.  (Ibid., 
546-568,  4  pi.,  2  fgs. )  Treats  of  the 
plaster-cast  of  foot  of  a  thirty-year  old 
woman  (foot  bound  from  sixth  year), 
and  X-ray  pictures  of  the   feet  of  two 


adult  women  and  a  girl  of  10  years,  the 
Chinese  shoe,  etc  V.  styles  the  Chi- 
nese foot  pes  equine '  vara -calcaneus. 
The  Manchu  and  Hakka  women  and  the 
women  of  fisher-peoples  do  not  bind  the 
feet. 

Voirol  (S.)  Chez  les  B&bis.  (Mercore 
de  France,  Paris,  1905,  LViii,  523.) 
Describes  a  visit  some  three  years  ago  to 
Abbas  Effendi  and  to  Abu-Chirazi,  a 
celebrated  theologian,  who  explained 
the  teachings  of  Beha  'oullah,  who  gave 
new  life  to  Babism. 

Warren  (W.  W.)  Newest  light  on  our 
oldest  mother  country.  ( Open  Ct. ,  Chi- 
cago, 1905,  XIX,  568-572. )  Discusses 
Aryan  origins  and  particularly  B&l  Gan- 
gftdhar  Tilak's  recent  work.  The  Arctic 
Home  in  the  Vedas^  in  which  the  theory 
is  put  forth  that  "  the  ancestors  of  the 
Vedic  Rishis  lived  in  an  Arctic  home,  in 
interglacial  times."  W.  had  advanced 
in  his  Paradise  Found  the  view  that  the 
cradle  of  the  human  race  was  at  the  north 
pole. 

Zaborowski  (S.)  Les  Lolos  et  les  popu- 
lations du  sud  de  la  Chine  d'aprts  les 
ouvrages  chinois.  (R.  dePfic.  d'Anthr. 
de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  86-95,  4  ^g^- )  Based 
on  photographs  of  the  Lolos  of  Kien- 
Chang  by  M.  Francois  and  translations 
by  M.  Beauvais  of  Chinese  works  on  the 
indigenes  of  Yunnan.  Z.  considers  the 
Lolo  physical  type  "  sub-Caucasic,"  re- 
lated rather  to  the  peoples  of  Assam, 
Burma,  etc.,  than  the  Tibetan.  The 
Lolos  bum  their  dead  and  are  monog- 
amous. The  old  Chinese  records  de- 
scribe them  as  they  are  to-day,  the  mass 
of  the  population  of  this  region  having 
long  been  Lolo.  The  Lolos  form  a  solid 
block  even  now.  Valuable  data  are 
contained  in  the  Chinese  documents. 

INDONESIA,  AUSTRALASIA, 
POLYNESIA 

Igorotes,  The.  (Open  Ct.,  Chicago,  1905, 
xix,  113-122,  13  fgs.)  Brief  general 
description.  Based  on  government  in- 
formation. 

Klaatsch  (  H. )  Reisebericht  aus  Sydney. 
(Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii, 
772-781. )  Describes  travels  in  Australia 
Sept.  27,  1904,  to  Feb.  17,  1905,  and 
gives  account  of  the  mummy  of  old 
*'  King  Narcha"  from  the  Boenje  coun- 
try, which  K.  obtained  at  much  trouble 
and  expense.  Another  mummy  and  45 
crania   ( 30  had  also  most  of  the  other 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


187 


bones)  are  among  the  remains  secnred 
by  the  author.  From  kitchen-middens 
many  primitive  flints  ('*  eoliths"  )  were 
obtained,  —  some  trib^  have  such  rude 
artefacts  still  beside  polished  axes,  the 
origin  of  which  is  doubtful.  Dr  K.'s 
visit  to  Australia  has  been  rich  in  ma- 
terial and  ethnic  data. 

Negritos,  The,  viewed  as  pygmies. 
(Amer.  Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii, 
130-13 1,  I  fg.)  Extract  from  Jenks' 
Report. 

POch(R.)  Ueber  den  Hausbau  der  Ja- 
bimleute  an  der  Ostkiiste  von  Deutsch- 
Neuguinea.  (2L  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin, 
1905,  XXXVII,  514-518,  4  fgs.)  De- 
scribes the  construction  of  the  ordinary 
house  and  the  two-story  lum  (bachelor 
house ;  or  assembly  house)  of  tne  Jabim 
of  Simbang  in  eastern  German  New 
Guinea.  Houses  are  on  piles,  even  on 
dry  ground.  The  walls  are  adorned 
with  figures  of  fishes  and  snakes  ;  human 
and  animal  figures  in  relief  and  painted. 
Jabim  house-building  has  some  analogies 
with  Malayan,  —  the  view  of  von  Lu- 
schan  as  to  the  relation  between  Malay 
and  Melanesian  house-building  is  con- 
firmed. 

ScfaeUong  (O.)  Weitere  Mitteilungen 
fiber  die  rapuas  Habim)  der  Gegend 
des  Finschhafens  in  Nordost  Neu-Guinea, 
Kaiserwilhelmsland.  (Ibid.,  602-618.) 
Gives  data  additional  to  those  recorded 
in  ID  previous  publications,  concerning 
hair  and  hair-dressing  (cutting,  or  shav- 
ing), boring  of  nasal  septum  (with  pinna 
of  sago-palm),  sense  of  smell  (predilec- 
tion for  pleasing  odors),  language 
(multiplicity  of  dialects  often  seemingly 
unrelated),  trade  (private;  auction- 
markets),  industries  (special  places  for 
manufacture  of  nets,  spears,  etc.),  chil- 
dren (**good*'  and  well-behaved), 
politeness  (sometimes  covers  deceit), 
tobacco,  betel -chewing,  property,  theft, 
fishing  and  fish-weirs,  bird-catching, 
meal -time  (one  big  meal  toward  even- 
ing), food,  use  of  coco-palm  and  prod- 
ucts, diseases,  burial,  mourning,  treat- 
ment of  widow,  etc. 
Senrat  (  L.  G. )  Les  engins  de  p^che  des 
anciens  Pauraotu.  (L'Anthropologie, 
Paris,  1905,  XVI,  297-307,  17  fgs.) 
Describes  hooks  for  bonito,  sharks, 
mureme,  attachment  of  line  to  hooks, 
manufacture  of  shell  hooks,  canoes  and 
their  outfit,  implements,  etc.,  in  use  for- 
merly among  the  inhabitants  of  Paumotu 
(Low   Archip. ).      European    manufac- 


tures have  now  driven  out  almost  entirely 

the  ancient  native  devices. 

—     Les  mane  des   lies  orientales    de 


I'archipel  des  Tuamotu.  (Ibid.,  475- 
484,  5  fgs.)  Describes  the  mora,  or 
altars,  of  the  ancient  natives  of  the 
islands  of  Niuhi  or  Fakalina  (at  Tahiti- 
nui,  Katipa)  and  Fagatau  (at  Rama- 
pohia).  There  are  also  mora  on  the 
island  of  Napuka,  but  none  on  Puka- 
puka.  These  mora  are  numerous  and 
each  family  has  its  own.  They  diffier  in 
type  firom  those  of  Temoe  and  Marutea, 
in  the  southeast  of  the  archipelago.  The 
principal  part  of  the  mora  is  an  oblong 
construction  of  piled  stones. 
Thomas  (N.  W. )  Ueber  Kulturkreise  in 
Australien.  (Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905, 
XXXVII,  759-767,  2  fgs. )  Criticises  the 
conclusions  of  Dr  Grftbner  (See  Amer- 
ican Anthropologist y  1905,  N.  S.,  vii, 
720)  with  respect  to  culture  areas  in 
Australia,  argmng  for  a  bringing  together 
of  all  data  concerning  the  chief  charac- 
ters of  aboriginal  culture  rather  than  the 
imperfect  consideration  of  a  large  num- 
ber of  characters.  T.  points  out  that 
Roth,  Spencer  and  Gillen  deal  with  ter- 
ritory outside  Gribner*s  so-called  **  West 
Papuan  culture  area."  The  change 
from  maternal  to  paternal  succession  is 
not  due  to  Papuan  influence.  Distribu- 
tion of  canoes,  knocking  out  of  teeth, 
etc,  are  discussed.  Descent  is  overesti- 
mated. 

AMERICA 

Adam  ( L. )  Grammaire  occawai.  ( J. 
Soc.  d.  Am^r.  de  Paris,  1905,  N.  s.,  11, 
209-240.)  Second  section  treating  of 
the  verb  and  its  modifications.  The  ex- 
pressions **i->&/V-ma-puia,"  **he  kissed 
him,'*  and  ^^danki-  ma-puia-i  pona," 
**he  thanked  him,"  indicate  the  intro- 
duction of  English  words  via  the  mis- 
sionary. 

Avery  (F.  F. )  Suggested  changes  in  In- 
dian schools.  (So.  Wkmn.,  Hampton, 
Va.,  1905,  XXXIV,  378-384.)  Advo- 
cates substitution  of  district  for  reserva- 
tion schools,  extension  of  day  schools, 
etc. 

Barnard  (W.  C. )  A  few  rare  specimens. 
(Amer.  Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii, 
225-226. )  Brief  descriptions  of  a  cliff- 
dweller's  stone  pipe  from  Phcenix,  Ariz. ; 
a  green  granite  **  medicine  cup,"  from 
Bee  creek  on  the  Cherokee  reservation, 
Ind.  Ty  ;    a  stone   mortar   from   Osage 


i88 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


river,  Mo. ;  and  a  white  flint  spearhead 
from  near  Seneca,  Mo. 

Benedict  (J.  D.)  Normal  schools  for 
teachers  of  Indians.  (So.  Wkmn., 
Hampton,  Va.,  1905,  xxxiv,  518-522.) 
According  to  author  **  the  greatest  need 
of  Indian  education  to-day  is  a  corps  of 
teachers  trained  to  understand  Indian 
life,"  and  all  that  this  means. 

Boas  (F.)  The  mythologies  of  the  In- 
dians. (Intern.  Quart.,  N.  Y.,  1905, 
XII,  157-173.)  Illustrates  historical 
development  of  mythology  by  citation 
and  discussion  of  the  Tlingit  tale  of  the 
adventures  of  Nanak  (i.  e.,  the  Russian 
explorer  and  trader  Baranoff,  1801),  and 
of  a  sun-myth  of  the  Comox  Indians. 
The  elements  of  a  complex  myth  **  ap- 
pear in  endless  combinations,  partly  in 
the  tales  of  the  tribe  that  owns  the  myth, 
partly  in  those  of  its  neighbors."  As  to 
geographical  distribution,  **  there  has 
been  liberal  exchange  all  over  the  north- 
em  half  of  the  continent,"  and  **  a  cer- 
tain amount  of  interchange  between  the 
Old  World  and  the  New."  First  efforts 
at  explanation  must  be  directed  toward 
an  interpretation  of  the  reasons  leading 
to  borrowing,  and  to  the  modification  of 
mythological  material  by  assimilation. 

Anthropometry  of  central  Califor- 
nia. (Bull.  Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist., 
N.  Y.,  1905,  XVII,  347-380,  9  pi.) 
Treats  material  collected  by  Dr  R.  B. 
Dixon  in  1899-1900  and  by  Mr  V.  K. 
Chesnut  in  1 892-1893.  Measurements 
are  given  of  216  individuals  (Maidu  60, 
Hat  Creek  and  Pit  River  8,  Paiute  I, 
Porno  28,  Yuki -Porno,  2,  Yuki  48, 
Wintun  2,  Yokuts  I,  Wintun-Yuki  i, 
Wylackie  2,  half-breeds  12,  Maidu  half- 
breeds,  18,  Pit  River  half-breeds  4, 
Porno  half-breeds  12,  Yuki  half-breeds 
9,  Wintun  half-breeds  5,  miscellaneous 
3).  The  Yuki  differ  in  type  from  all 
the  neighboring  tribes,  being  short  f  av. 
of  males  1590  mm.),  longer  headed  (av. 
ceph.  ind.,  77*5 )»  with  narrow  and  low 
faces.  This  type  is  also  found  among 
the  Maidu  of  the  foot  hills  (but  disap- 
pears farther  to  N.  and  E.)  and  to  a  less 
extent  among  the  Porno.  Among  the 
Pomo  and  toward  the  interior  a  type 
(av.  Stat,  of  males  1680  ;  ceph.  ind.,  83  ; 
av.  width  of  face,  149)  prevails  a  tribe 
resembling  that  of  the  Indians  of  the 
Nevada-Utah  plains.  The  Pit  River  In- 
dians are  excessively  short-headed  (pos- 
sibly due  to  head  flattening).  Dr  B.  sug- 
gests that  the  Yuki  type  may  be  related 


to  the  short-statured  long-headed  type 
of  the  ancient  inhabitants  of  Sta  Barbara 
island.  A  rapid  reduction  of  the  Indian 
population  is  in  process. 

Borba  (T.  M. )  Oiingang  deluge  legend. 
(J.  Amer.  Folk-Lore,  Boston,  1905, 
XVIII,  223-225.)  Accounts  for  west- 
ward course  of  rivers,  origin  of  monkeys, 
tigers,  tapirs,  ant-eaters,  song  and  dance, 
size  of  feet  of  Indians,  etc.  English 
text  of  a  legend  published  originally  in 
Portuguese  in  the  Revista  do  Museo 
Paulista^  X902. 

Conard  (lietitia  M.^  A  visit  to  QuinauU 
Indian  graves.  (Open  Ct.,  Chicago, 
1905,  XIX,  737-744f  5  ^gs- )  Describes 
graves  of  Quinault  and  Queets  Indians  of 
Washington  state,  visited  in  1902.  They 
are  houses  of  the  dead  rather  than  graves, 
and  <<  the  profuseness  with  which  the 
graves  are  furnished  with  articles  of 
luxury  and  use  is  quite  in  contrast  with  the 
meager  furnishings  of  the  houses  of  these 
Indians,  which  must  be  seriously  dimin- 
ished when  a  member  of  a  household 
dies."  Traces  of  old  Indian  customs 
still  survive. 

Curtis  (W.  E.)  Education  and  morals 
among  the  Navajos  and  Pueblos. 
(Amer.  Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  XXVII, 
259-264. )  Reprinted  from  the  Chicago 
Record- Heraldiox Km%.  X2,  1905.  Dis- 
cusses the  effect  of  education,  —  **  the 
morals  of  the  Pueblo  Indians  have  always 
been  high,  but  they  were  higher  before 
the  whites  came."  According  to  C.  J. 
Crandall,  superintendent  of  the  Indian 
school  at  Santa  F6,  **  the  Navajos  are 
much  brighter  and  more  ambitious  than 
any  other  Indians  and  the  Apaches  are 
next  to  them." 

Diguet  ( L. )  Anciennes  sepultures  indi- 
genes de  la  Basse-Califomie  m^ridionale. 
(J.  Soc.  d.  Am^r.  de  Paris,  1905,  N.  s. 
II,  329-333,  2  fgs. )  Gives  an  account 
of  author's  examination  of  two  funerary 
grottos  or  shelters  at  El  Pescadero,  near 
Cape  Pulmo,  southern  California,  their 
contents  ( 7  skeletons,  bone  implements, 
etc.).  In  a  cave  near  Santiago  were 
found  a  woman's  **  apron,"  some 
wooden  implements  and  objects  ;  besides 
the  human  remains.  These  burials  be- 
longed probably  to  the  Indians  known  as 
Pericus. 

Dorsey  (G.  A.)  Caddo  customs  of  child- 
hood. (J.  Amer.  Folk-Lore,  Boston, 
1905,  xviii,  226-228.)  Treats  of  cus- 
toms to  protect  new-bom  child  (sun- 
blessing,  fire-blessing,  etc. )  and  the  in- 


CUAMBKRLAIN] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


189 


£uit  up  to  two  years.  Also  the  <'  teach- 
ing"  of  the  child  by  grandmother  or 
some  old  person  when  eight  or  ten,  — 
child's  preparation  for  dangers  of  travel 
to  the  other  world. 

Dozaon  (C. )  An  Indian  as  a  mechanic. 
(So.  Wkmn.,  Hampton,  Va.,  1905, 
XXXIV,  503-505.)  Relates  experi- 
ences of  author,  an  Onondaga,  now  a 
member  of  the  labor  union  and  one  of 
the  highest  paid  machinists  in  the  shop. 

FehlingV  (  H. )  Das  Einwanderungsprob- 
lem  in  den  Vereinigten  Staaten.  ( A.  f. 
Rassen-  u.  Ges.-Biol.,  Berlin,  1905,  ii, 
413-423. )  Discusses  statistics  of  Report 
of  the  Commissioner  of  Immigration  for 
1904  and  of  the  Twelfth  Census.  The 
effects  of  ''good  times''  and  "bad 
times"  in  the  U.  S.  is  marked  less  so 
than  that  of  corresponding  conditions  in 
Europe.  The  most  important  change  in 
the  last  decade  is  the  drift  of  immigrants 
from  southern  and  eastern  Europe,  in- 
stead of  from  the  north  and  northwest. 
The  most  frequent  intermarriages  are 
those  between  bom  Americans  and  immi- 
grants from  English  Canada. 

Fletcher  (A.  C. )  Preparation  of  Indians 
for  citizenship.  (So.  Wkmn.,  Hampton, 
Va.,  1905,  XXXIV,  425-428. )  There  is 
**  ample  proof  of  the  capacity  of  the 
Indian  to  become  an  enlightened  citizen 
of  the  United  States."  The  **  agency 
system"  and  the  reservation  have  not 
taught  the  Indian  the  real  duties  of  citi- 
zenship or  made  the  most  of  him  for  it. 
Schools  and  the  establishment  of  the 
Indian  court  of  offenses  have  brought 
about  good  results. 

France  ( J*  J* )  S  udy  and  prevention  of 
tuberculosis  among  colored  people  of 
Virginia.  (Ibid.,  494-498. )  Discusses 
statistics  ;  argues  that  the  negro's  greater 
susceptibility  to  tuberculosis,  like  that  of 
white  women  as  compared  with  the  white 
men,  is  largely  due  to  urban  indoor  labor, 
insufficient  food,  scant  clothing,  etc. 
Manchester,  Va.,  is  alone  in  reporting  a 
higher  death  rate  from  tuberculosis  for 
whites  (3.30  per  thousand)  than  blacks 
r2.2o). 

Colder  (F.  A.)  Aleutian  stories.  (J. 
Amer.  Folk-Lore,  Boston,  1905,  xviii, 
215-222. )  English  texts  of  5  tales  :  The 
sad  woman,  the  woman  who  was  fond  of 
intestines,  the  man  and  woman  who  be- 
came sea-otters,  a  sea-otter  story,  the 
brother  and  sister  who  became  hair-seals. 

Hamy  (E.-T. )  Deux  pierres  d'^clair 
(pedras  de  corisco),  de  I'£^tat  de  Minas- 


GeraSs,  Br^sil.  (J.  Soc.  d.  Amir,  de 
Paris,  1905,  N.  s.,  II,  323-325,  I  %•) 
Describes  two  **  thunder  stones,"  — 
flint  hatchets  of  the  old  Indians  of  Minas 
Gera^s,  found  in  digging  a  ditch  at  Los 
Tranqueros.  Native  superstition  attri- 
butes to  them  an  origin  from  lightning 
and  thunder. 

Hrdlil^^  (A.)  Diseases  of  the  Indians, 
more  especially  of  the  southwest  United 
States  and  northern  Mexico.  (Wash- 
ington Med.,  Ann.,  1905,  iv,  372-394-) 
R^sumisdata  to  be  published  in  a  forth- 
coming Bulletin  of  the  Bureau  of  Amer- 
ican Ethnology.  Based  on  the  author's 
personal  observations  during  6  expedi- 
tions, 1 898- 1 905,  among  38  groups  or 
tribes  of  Indians,  with  the  addition  of 
facts  from  the  reports,  1 904-1 905,  of 
agency  school  physicians,  etc.,  relating 
to  X02  localities,  and  ca.  125,000  Indians 
fincluding  some  mixed  bloods).  Dr  H. 
nnds  that,  *'  on  the  whole,  the  health  of 
the  Southwestern  and  North  Mexican  un- 
civilized Indians  is  superior  to  that  of  the 
whites  living  in  larger  communities." 
The  most  unfavorable  regions  for  the 
Indian  are,  at  present,  in  the  north, 
parts  of  Wisconsin,  the  Dakotas  and 
Montana.  Many  interesting  facts  are 
given  in  this  valuable  paper  concerning 
numerous  diseases.  Dr  H.  does  not 
think  pre-Columbian  syphilis  proved. 
Also,  '*  in  all  probability,  the  proportion 
of  the  several  main  varieties  of  tubercu- 
losis is  not  much  if  any  larger  among  the 
Indians  as  a  whole  than  it  is  among  the 
poorer  classes  of  whites  as  a  whole."  In 
the  discussion  Drs  Lamb,  Kober,  John- 
son, Morgan,  and  Gen.  Forwood  took 
part,  and  added  facts  from  their  own  ob- 
servations. 

La  Flesche  (F.)  The  past  life  of  ttie 
plains  Indians.  (So.  Wkmn.,  Hampton, 
Va.,  1905,  XXXIV,  587-594. )  Treats  of 
agriculture,  buffalo-hunt  and  prepara- 
tions for  it,  the  **  surround,"  prepara- 
tion of  meat  and  hides,  harvesting, 
making  bows,  arrows,  lances  (teaching 
boys)  and  other  weapons,  etc.  Describes 
one  phase  of  Omaha  life  in  the  past. 

de  La  Grasserie  (R. )  Renseignements 
sur  les  noms  de  parent^  dans  plusieurs 
langues  am6ricaines.  (J.  Soc.  d.  Am6r. 
de  Paris,  1905,  N.  s.,  11,  333-338.) 
Cites  names  of  relationship  in  several 
Salishan  languages  (Skq6mic,  Hilqula, 
Stlil'tl  Emch,  Shush wap,  Kalispelm), 
with  comments.  These  names  refer  to 
sex  of  relation  spoken  of,  respective  age 


igo 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


of  two  relations,  degree  of  relationship, 
sex  of  intermediary  relations,  indication 
of  whether  intermediary  relations  are 
dead  or  living,  relationship  or  alliance, 
sex  of  relation  speaking. 

Lapham  (Julia  A.)  A  glimpse  at  maps 
of  the  northwest  territory.  (Amer. 
Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii,  121-126. ) 
Notes  on  maps  of  1670-71,  1 68 1  (Mar- 
quette), 1684-8  (Franqueline),  1696, 
1679,  1752,  1770,  1791,  1832,  1835, 
1836.  These  maps  are  valuable  for  the 
sites  and  names  of  Indian  settlements, 
rivers,  lakes,  etc.,  and  the  variants  in 
spelling. 

Lehnuum  (W. )  Les  peintures  Mixteco- 
Zapot4^ques  et  quelques  documents  ap- 
parent^s.  (J.  Soc.  d.  Am6r.  de  Paris, 
1905,  N.  s.,  II,  241-280.)  Lists  with 
description,  historical  sketch,  biblio- 
graphic references,  the  group  of  picture- 
writings  dominated  by  the  Codex  Borgia 
and  influenced  by  Zapotec  culture  (Co- 
dex Borgia,  Codex  Vaticanus  B.,  Codex 
Cospi ;  Codex  F6jerv&ry-Mayer,  Codex 
Landa  ;  No.  20  of  the  Aubin  collection) 
and  picture-writing  of  Oaxaca,  including 
Mix  tec  (Codex  Becker  No.  I,  Codex 
Columbinus,  Codex  Becker  No.  2, 
Lienzo  de  Zacatepec,  Lienzo  de  Amolte- 
pec,  Lienzo  Vischer  No.  i.  Codex  Yan- 
cuitan),  Zapotec  (Codex  Vindebonen- 
sis.  Codex  Nuttall,  Codex  Bodleianus, 
Codex  Selden  No.  i,  Codex  Waecker- 
Gotter,  Codex  Selden  No.  2,  Dorenberg 
Fragment,  Codex  Dehesa,  Codex  Bar- 
anda.  Map  of  Tehuantepec,  Lienzo  de 
Huilotepec,  Lienzo  de  Guevea,  Lienzo  de 
Santa  Maria  Chimalapa,  Codex  Alva- 
rado,  Lienzo  de  Petapa),  Cuicatec  (Co- 
dex Porfirio  Diaz,  Codex  Fernandez 
Leal  ,  Mazatec  (Lienzo  Seler  i),  Cho- 
cho-Popoloca  (Lienzo  Seler  ii.  Codex 
of  Santa  Catarina  Texupan,  Annals  ot 
Quecholac),  Chinantec  (Survey  of  Xochi- 
tepec,  Survey  of  Muagnia), — 35  Mss. 
in  all. 

YOn  Lusdiaxi  (  F.  )  Ueber  ein  Os  supra- 
tympanicum  beim  Menschen.  (Z.  f. 
Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  625- 
626.)  Note  on  a  well-marked  occur- 
rence of  the  spina  supra  ftieatum 
(Bezold)  as  a  small  independent  bone 
in  the  skull  of  a  Peruvian  mummy  from 
Puno. 

Miller  ( K. )  Surplus  negro  women.  (So. 
Wkmn.,  Hampton,  Va.,  1905,  xxxiv, 
522-528. )  In  the  U.  S.  negro  women 
exceed  men  by  54,347  (or  13  per  1 000). 
In    15    cities    (of   more    than    20,000 


negroes)  the  female  excess  is  59,091 
( making  the  ratio  of  women  to  men  1 18 
to  xoo).  In  Chicago  negro  men  exceed 
women  in  numbers.  In  Atlanta  the  ratio 
of  women  to  men  is  145  to  100.  Train- 
ing for  domestic  service  is  one  solution  of 
the  problem. 

Newton  (E.  E.)  Impressions  of  the 
Navahos.  (Ibid.,  60(^-615.)  Notes  on 
experiences,  etc.,  of  wife  of  a  school 
physician.  The  Navaho  makes  a  good 
physical  impression,  is  deeply  supersti- 
tious, tenacious  in  adherence  to  the  estab- 
lished  order  of  things,  an  inveterate 
gambler,  is  hippophile  and  philocanine, 
is  an  excellent  artisan,  and  possesses 
intelligence  of  a  good  order.  His  future 
lies  in  the  education  of  his  character. 

Peet  (S.  D. )  Stone  relics  in  California. 
(Amer.  Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii, 
169-176,  3  fgs. )  Based  chiefly  on 
Holmes,  Anthropological  Studies  in 
California  (Rep.  U.  S.  Nat  Mus., 
1900).  Refers  also  to  Mercer's  Ex- 
ploration of  Durhatn  Cave  in  i8gj 
(Publ.  Univ.  of  Penn.,  1897).  ^^  ^^ 
California  province  art  in  stone  is  practi- 
cally uniform  at  all  points.  Variations  in 
local  resources  account  largely  for  differ- 
ences existing. 

Riyet  (  — )  I^es  indiens  Colorados.  Ridt 
de  voyage  et  itude  ethnologique.  (J. 
Soc.  d.  Am^r.  de  Paris,  1905,  N.  s.,  ii, 
177-208,  5  pi.,  I  fg.)  Treats  of  visit  to 
the  Colorado  Indians  of  western  Ecuador 
in  1903.  Dress  and  ornament,  body- 
painting  (red  and  black,  applied  with 
finger),  mutilations  (facial  depilation, 
nose-piercing,  cranial  deformation), 
dwellings  and  furniture,  sugar-cane  press, 
marimba^  agriculture,  food  and  drink, 
hunting  and  fishing,  position  of  woman 
(neither  servant  nor  slave),  family  life, 
marriage,  alcoholism  (abuse  of  n^i), 
death  and  burial,  religion,  "governor" 
(religious  and  civil  authority  lacking), 
visit  of  Quito  priest,  Indian  character 
(he  has  not  yet  been  made  a  slave 
with  low  and  miserable  soul).  The 
Colorado  is  not  idle  per  se^  and  he  is  in- 
telligent, and  about  his  only  vice  is  drunk- 
enness. Twenty  years  ago  the  Colo- 
rados numbered  more  than  700 ;  to-day 
350,  and  alcoholism  and  small-pox  are 
killing  them  off. 

Schenk  ( A. )  Note  sur  un  cr&ne  humain 
ancien  trouv6  au  Tennessee,  pr^s  James- 
Town,  fetats-Unis.  (R.  de  I'fec. 
d'Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  156-162, 
3  fgs. )     Describes,  with  measurements. 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


191 


an  ancient  Indian  skull,  found  (with 
some  flints  and  fragments  of  rude  pottery) 
at  a  depth  of  5  feet  below  a  bed  of  ashes 
and  animal  bones  in  a  cave  near  James- 
town, Tennessee,  and  presented  to  the 
Anthropological  Museum  of  Lausanne  in 
1880.  The  cephalic  index  is  78.73.  S. 
thinks  the  skull  belongs  with  the  <<  mound 
builders." 

Soltf  (E.)  Photographic  eines  hervor- 
ragenden  Stiickes  aus  dem  mexikanischen 
Altertume.  (Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1905, 
XXXVII,  527-536,  12  fgs. )  Describes  a 
female  head  of  jadeite,  with  hair  inter- 
woven with  snakes.  S.  considers  it  to 
represent  Xochiquetzal. 

Solberg  (O. )  Ueber  Gebr&uche  der  Mit- 
telmesa-Hopi  (Moqui)  bei  Namenge- 
bung,  Heirat  und  Tod.  (Ibid.,  626- 
636. )  Treats  of  the  ceremonial  clean- 
sing of  the  child  and  the  name-giving 
(the  ceremony  lasts  from  an  hour  to  an 
hour  and  a  balQ  ;  marriage  and  cere- 
monies connectea  therewith  (usually  40 
days)  ;  death  and  burial,  etc.,  I^om  ob- 
servations in  the  pueblos  of  Mishongnovi 
and  Shipaulovi  of  the  Tusayan  (Moqui, 
or  Hopi)  stock. 

Stoddard  (H.  L.)  Phallic  symbols  in 
America.  (Amer.  Antiq.,  Chicago, 
1905,  XXVII,  281-294,  8  fgs. )  General 
discussion  of  the  correlation  of  the  solsti- 
tial and  phallic  symbols  of  America,  to 
those  found  in  Asia,  Europe,  and  Africa. 
Reference  is  made  to  the  '<  Yoni  sym- 
bol "  from  Menard's  mound,  the  altar  at 
Copan,  an  idol  from  Nicaragua,  etc. 
Author  finds  in  America  '*  Babylonian 
sun-dial  and  Teraphims.'' 

Stone  ago  collection.  (Narrag.  Libr. 
Ass.  Bull.,  Peace  Dale,  R.  I.,  1905, 
No.  2,  37-40,  7  pi. )  Brief  account  of 
two  flint  scrapers  from  Mildenhall  ( Suf- 
folk), England;  a  flint  spearpoint  from 
Wisconsin  ;  a  rubbing-stone  from  An- 
trim, Ireland;  six  obsidian  << razors*' 
from  Honduras  ;  flint  knife,  gouge,  and 
scraper  from  Denmark  ;  a  small  collec- 
tion of  fine  chalcedony  and  varying  flint 
arrowpoints  from  the  beach  at  Santa 
Barbara,  Cal.  ;  an  Australian  spalting 
tool  of  hard  flint  mounted  in  asphalt  and  a 
glass  arrowhead  made  with  it ;  two  flint 
objects  of  uncertain  use  from  California. 

Snperstitions  of  the  Indians.  (Amer. 
Antiq.,  Chicago,  1905,  xxvii,  132-136.) 
Reprinted  from  the  Chicago  Inter-  Ocean 
for  July  22,  1900.  Gives  items  of  super- 
stition from  the  Catarina  Indians  con- 
cerning Monequanish,  <<  the  enchanted 


land,"  an  upland  region  in  the  San 
Pedro  Martin  range  of  Lower  California. 
Also  items  of  superstition  relating  to 
Tauquitz  peak  in  S.  California  from  the 
San«Jacintos  and  Sabobas. 

Thorndiko  (T.  W. )  A  plea  for  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  commercial  game  and  fur 
preserve  in  the  Northwest.  (Rep.  In- 
tern. Geogr.  Congr.,  Wash.,  1904,  viii, 
870-891.)  Contains  at  pages  884-885 
notes  on  the  Indians  (ca,  15,000)  of 
**the  north  country,"  or  ''muskeg  re- 
gion," south  of  Hudson  Bay.  The  ad- 
mixture of  white  blood  is  very  large,  and 
the  "breeds"  outnumber  the  full- 
bloods,  —  the  whites  are  mainly  Scotch, 
with  some  French  Canadians.  The  fu- 
ture welfare  of  the  Indians  depends  on 
the  preservation  of  the  fur.  The  Cana- 
dian preservation  system  is  superior  to 
the  American,  but  what  is  wanted  every- 
where, for  Indians,  animals,  land,  is  not 
reservation  but  preservation. 

Thonar  (A.)  En  el  pais  del  caucho. 
(An.  de  Instr.  Prim.,  Montevideo,  1905, 
II,  883-889,  3  fgs. )  Treats  of  the  Acre 
region  of  Brazil,  —  an  india-rubber  coun- 
try. Refers  briefly  to  the  Araonas  and 
Tacanas.     Translated  from  the  French. 

Upham  ( W. )  Mounds  built  by  the  Sioux 
in  Minnesota.  (Amer.  Antiq.,  Chicago, 
1905,  XXVII,  217-223.)  Cites  evidence 
(from  Capt  J.  Carver,  etc.)  that  the 
mounds  on  Dayton's  bluff,  in  the  eastern 
portion  (Mounds  Park)  of  the  city  of  St 
Paul,  were  built  for  sepulture  by  the 
Sioux,  partly  in  Carver's  time  (less  than 
150  years  ago)  and  partly  much  earlier. 
Other  mounds  in  Minnesota  may  also 
have  been  made  by  the  Sioux  (e.  g.,  at 
Red  Wing). 

Wake  (C.  S. )  Asiatic  ideas  among  the 
American  Indians.  (Ibid.,  153-162, 189- 
196. )  By  reference  to  ideas  in  Mazdaism, 
Mithraism,  etc.  (the  "Great  Medicine" 
of  the  Indians  ''answers  somewhat  to 
Mithra"  ;  Persian  frat'ashiism  agrees 
with  American  Indian  totemism  ;  Arap- 
aho  myths  have  content  resembling  Ori- 
ental, especially  Mithraic  legends ; 
American  Indian  "mystery"  has  analo- 
gies with  Oriental),  author  seeks  to  es- 
tablish "  contact  between  American  and 
Asiatic  ideas,"  but  not  successfully. 

Williamson  (G.)  Superstitions  from 
Ix)uisiana.  (J.  Amer.  Folk- Lore,  Bos- 
ton, 1905,  xviii,  229-230.)  Enumer- 
ates 35  items,  chiefly  from  negro  in- 
formants, concerning  good  and  bad 
luck,  etc. 


ANTHROPOLOGIC   MISCELLANEA 

Indian  Ceremonies  in  Oklahoma  and  Indian  Territory.  —  The  fol- 
lowing list  of  Indian  tribes  and  localities  where  ceremonies  and  dances 
take  place  and  may  be  witnessed  is  arranged  for  the  benefit  of  students 
or  investigators  within  reach  of  points  in  Oklahoma  and  Indian  Territory. 
In  most  cases  the  dances  are  repeated  year  after  year  in  the  same  places, 
which  are  accessible  to  visitors  on  horseback.  Each  year  celebrations 
occur  approximately  within  the  week  preceding  or  the  week  following  the 
dates  given  below.  For  example,  the  Sand  Creek  Yuchi,  Creek  Nation, 
Indian  Territory,  held  their  annual  ceremony  from  July  17  to  19  in  1904, 
and  July  21  to  23  in  1905.  It  ought  to  be  added,  however,  that  the 
Yuchi  chiefs  have  decided  to  discontinue  their  rites  owing  to  intoxication 
and  disorder  among  the  young  men  at  the  ceremonies.  The  list  was  pre- 
pared while  the  writer  was  engaged  in  field  work  for  the  Bureau  of  Ameri- 
can Ethnology  and  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History. 
Creeks  (Muskogi).     Annual  Green-corn  and  New-fire  ceremony. 

Hickory  Ground  town,  July  2-6,   near  Henrj'ctta,   Indian  Ter.  (Crazy 
Snakes). 

Arbekatown,  July  21 ,  Tulledegee  Hills,  near  Henryetta. 

Tuskegee  town,  August  4 ,  near  Tuskegee  (irregular). 

Yuchi,     Annual  Com  and  New-fire  ceremony. 

Sand  Creek,  July  21-23,  near  Bristow,  Indian  Ter.  (probably  discontinued). 

Polecat  settlement,  July  29-31,  near  Kelly ville,  Indian  Ter. 
Choctaw.     Cry  or  Lamentation. 

July  27,  Siloam,  near  McCurtain,  Indian  Ter. 
Shawnee,     War- dance. 

August  26         ,  near  Shawnee,  Oklahoma. 

August  10-14,  near  Tulsa,  Indian  Ter.  (Upper  Shawnees,  also  with  Tulsa 
town  Creeks). 
Wyandot,  Seneca,  Peoria,  and  Miami.     War-dance,  barbecue,  and  games. 

August  15-20,  near  Wyandot,  Indian  Ter. 
Ponca. 

August  12-17,  1 01  Ranch,  near  Bliss,  Oklahoma. 
Pawnee,  Cheyenne.     Medicine-arrow  ceremony. 

August  14-20,  near  Pawnee,  Oklahoma. 

Sundays  during  summer,  mescal-eaters  dance  about  twelve  miles  south  of 

Pawnee,  Oklahoma. 

Cheyenne.     Sun -dance. 

July  6,  near  Clinton,  Oklahoma. 

Frank  G.  Speck. 
192 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  1 93 

Origin  of  the  Name  Navaho.  —  In  the  second  valley  south  of  the 
great  pueblo  and  cliff  village  of  Puye  in  the  Pajarito  Park,  New  Mexico, 
is  a  small  pueblo  ruin  known  to  the  Tewa  Indians  as  Navahti,  this  being, 
as  they  claim,  the  original  name  of  the  village.  The  ruined  villages  of 
this  plateau  are  all  Tewa  of  the  pre-Spanish  period.  This  particular 
pueblo  was  well  situated  for  agriculture,  there  being  a  considerable  acre- 
age of  tillable  land  near  by  —  far  more  than  this  small  population  would 
have  utilized.  The  old  trail  across  the  neck  of  the  mesa  to  the  north  is 
worn  hip-deep  in  the  rock,  showing  constant,  long-continued  use.  I  infer 
that  these  were  the  fields  of  not  only  the  people  of  NavahCi  but  also  of  the 
more  populous  settlements  beyond  the  great  mesa  to  the  north  where  til- 
lable land  is  wanting.  The  Tewa  Indians  assert  that  the  name  * '  NavahCi ' ' 
refers  to  the  large  area  of  cultivated  lands.  This  suggests  an  identity 
with  Navajo  which  Fray  Alonso  de  Benavides,  in  his  Memorial  on  New 
Mexico  published  in  1630,  applied  to  that  branch  of  the  Apache  nation 
("Apaches  de  Navaj6*')  then  living  to  the  west  of  the  Rio  Grande, 
beyond  the  very  section  above  mentioned.  Speaking  of  these  people 
Benavides  says  :  "  But  these  [Apaches]  of  Navaj6  are  very  great  farmers 
\lahradores\ ,  for  that  [is  what]  '  Navajd  *  signifies  —  '  great  planted 
fields  '  [sementeras  grandes] .  * '  * 

These  facts  may  admit  of  two  interpretations.  So  far  as  we  know, 
this  author  was  the  first  to  use  the  name  Navaho  in  literature,  and  he 
would  have  been  almost  certain  to  have  derived  it  from  the  Pueblos  of 
New  Mexico  among  whom  he  lived  as  Father  Custodian  of  the  province 
from  1622  to  1629,  since  the  Navaho  never  so  designated  themselves. 
The  expression  "  the  Apaches  of  Navaj6  **  may  have  been  used  to  desig- 
nate an  intrusive  band  that  had  invaded  Tewa  territory  and  become  in- 
trenched in  this  particular  valley.  On  the  other  hand,  the  Navaho,  since 
the  pastoral  life  of  post-Spanish  times  was  not  then  possible  to  them,  may 
have  been  so  definitely  agriculturists,  as  Benavides  states  (although  he 
did  not  extend  his  missionary  labors  to  them),  and  have  occupied  such 
areas  of  cultivated  lands,  that  their  habitat,  wherever  it  was,  would  have 
been  known  to  the  Tewa  as  NavahCi,  *'  the  place  of  great  planted  fields.*' 

If  the  first  interpretation  is  correct,  it  would  doubtless  be  verified  by 
archeological  evidences  at  the  ruin  of  Navahu.  It  would  seem  at  any 
rate  that  the  Tewa  origin  of  the  tribal  designation  Navaho  is  assured. 

Edgar  L.   Heweit. 


*  Benavides*  Memorial  in  Land  of  Suns  hi ne^  Los  Angeles,  Cal.,  1901,  vol.  xiil,  no. 
6,  p.  441. 


AM.  AMTM.,  M.  S.,  7— X3 


194  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Philippine  Ethnological  Survey.  —  In  the  recent  reorganization  of 
the  Philippine  Government  certain  bureaus  were  combined  in  the  hope 
of  reducing  the  cost  of  administration.  One  of  the  bureaus  to  be  com- 
bined is  the  Ethnological  Survey  which  is  working  among  the  native  tribes 
of  the  islands.  The  Survey  is  to  be  called  the  Division  of  Ethnology  of 
the  Bureau  of  Education.  Dr  Merton  L.  Miller  has  been  made  chief  of 
the  division. 

Measurements  of  Igorotes.  —  Through  the  courtesy  of  Mr  R.  Schneid- 
ewind,  manager  of  the  Filipino  Exhibition  Company's  Igorot  village 
recently  displayed  in  San  Francisco,  opportunity  has  been  afforded  the 
Department  of  Anthropology  of  the  University  of  California  to  take 
measurements  of  eighteen  men  and  seven  women  from  Bontoc,  Tacucan, 
and  several  other  Igorot  pueblos.  These  measurements  are  given  here- 
with. The  name  of  each  individual  is  followed  by  that  of  his  pueblo  and 
his  age  as  estimated  by  Mr  Schneidewind.  Terms  and  numbers  in  paren- 
theses give  respectively  a  phonetic  rendering  of  names  and  the  author's 
estimate  of  the  individual's  age.  The  measurements  are  in  millimeters. 
Those  of  height  of  shoulder,  height  of  middle  finger  from  the  groimd, 
and  length  of  forearm,  are  averages  of  measurements  on  the  two  sides. 
Three  of  the  younger  men,  Antero,  Felingao,  and  Ugoay,  were  measured 
at  St  Louis  in  1904  and  thus  afford  a  standard  of  comparison  for  the 
author's  metrical  accuracy.  The  averages  of  the  men,  especially  in  the 
body  measurements,  are  probably  lowered  somewhat  by  the  preponderance 
of  very  young  men.  This  conclusion  is  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  the 
average  stature,  i486  mm.,  of  the  seven  women  measured,  all  of  whom 
were  fully  adult,  is  nearly  96  percent  of  the  average  of  the  men,  1550 
mm.  The  average  cephalic  and  nasal  indices,  respectively  78.5  and  100, 
are  almost  identical  for  the  men  and  the  women.  The  color  references 
are  to  the  reproduction  of  Broca's  color  tables  given  in  Dr  Hrdlicka's 
recent  Directions  for  Collecting  Information  and  Specimens  for  Physical 
Anthropology y  published  in  Bulletin  39  of  the  United  States  National  Mu- 
seum. Where  two  numbers  are  given,  the  skin  partook  of  the  color  of 
both,  but  more  nearly  resembled  the  first.  The  average  tint  seemed  to 
be  intermediate  between  25  and  31,  somewhat  darker  than  the  former, 
somewhat  less  red  than  the  latter.  There  was  almost  always  some  red 
tinge.  The  color  was  observed  on  the  upper  inner  portion  of  the  fore- 
arm.    The  women  gave  the  impression  of  being  darker  than  the  men. 

A.  L.  Kroeber. 


k 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA 


■qiMa  "P—'P'^'ja  1     ".  * 


■wan  )°  ■p'"^  I  ;:;  g;  s^^ ;:;,  Cl  s;  S."^  ^ 
■■PWM  aiiinuoi^ig  I   S  H  S;  3,  S^  -,12, "  S  " 


5,s.s;_^i ' 


MJoi"*"!  I 


■1I3B1I 

af.HsHlsHlil'li^l'i 

9 

•rPPlKj'o'^l'H 

r8SI«=I=IH£S;JS;K-I 

S'SKKRSsI 

S 

-«pinDqSJO.qSBH 

S^-S  sHsllf  Is's'ssssl 

S  j-SJMSS, 

» 

■«nms 

Siii^SI,!,!  Ikk4SI  sII-S 

s'ilsllls 

* 

ll!iil^l!tllWi^i! 

•j£"|j-i||s.f|||s||||l 


196  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Some  Suggestions  Concerning  Anthropological  Bibliography.^  — 

The  appearance  of  the  Proof  Sheets  of  a  Bibliography  of  the  North 
American  Indians ^  by  James  Constantine  Pilling  (Washington,  1885), 
and  the  subsequent  bibliographies  of  separate  linguistic  stocks  by  the 
same  compiler,  marked  an  era  in  anthropological  bibliography  in  America. 
The  Handbook  of  the  Indians^  now  in  process  of  publication  by  the 
Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  is  another  work  of  great  bibliographic 
value,  which  is  unique  in  character.  The  bibliography  of  language  and 
of  general  ethnology  is  thus  happily  begun,  but  the  other  departments  of 
anthropology  have  hard  fared  so  well,  though  the  necessity  for  good 
bibliographies  is  evident  enough.  Some  of  the  bibliographical  desiderata 
may  be  listed  as  follows  : 

1 .  The  continuation  and  completion  of  the  series  of  bibliographies  of 
Linguistic  Stocks  begim  by  the  late  J.  C.  Pilling,  and  its  extension  to 
Mexico,  Central  America,  and  South  America. 

2.  The  compilation  of  a  bibliography  of  the  Physical  Anthropology 
of  the  American  Indians. 

3.  The  compilation  of  bibliographies  of  American  Indian  Art,  Polit- 
ical and  Social  Institutions,  and  other  individual  subjects  worthy  of  ex- 
tended treatment. 

4.  The  compilation  of  an  authoritative  and  adequate  bibliography  of 
Religion,  Mythology,  and  Folk-lore. 

5.  The  compilation  of  a  bibliography  of  "  American  Indian  Contact 
with  the  Whites. ' ' 

6.  The  compilation  of  a  bibliography  of  Bibliographies  relating  to 
investigators  of  and  writers  about  the  American  Indians. 

7.  The  establishment  of  a  department  of  Bibliography  of  books  in, 
for  example,  the  American  Anthropologist^  with  notes  of  the  briefest  sort, 
stating  whether  the  book  is  good,  bad,  or  indifferent;  whether  it  con- 
tains anything  new  and  what  that  new  thing  is,  etc. 

The  bibliographies  of  linguistic  stocks  may  be  continued  by  the 
Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  under  whose  auspices  the  Pilling  series 
was  initiated.  If  not,  some  other  means  of  publishing  them  might  be 
devised  —  possibly  in  some  of  the  anthropological  journals. 


^  This  brief  report  on  the  needs  of  Anthropology  in  the  bibliographic  field  was  pre- 
pared by  Dr  Chamberlain  for  presentation  at  the  Ithaca  meeting  of  the  American  An- 
thropological Association,  and  is  here  published  in  order  that  further  suggestions  may  be 
made  by  those  interested  in  the  subject.  A  list  of  the  writings  of  living  American  an- 
thropologists will  be  published  in  the  American  Anthropologist^  the  first  instalment  of 
which  will  probably  appear  in  the  next  number.  —  Editor. 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  1 97 

Some  of  these  bibliographies,  e.  g.,  that  concerned  with  Physical 
Anthropology,  might  be  published  as  supplements  to  the  American  An- 
thropologisty  or  other  periodicals  now  existing. 

Certain  individuals  are  perhaps  at  the  present  moment  in  the  posses- 
sion of  such  lists,  made  for  their  own  use,  as  would  enable  them,  with 
little  difficulty,  to  complete  the  bibliography  of  one  or  more  particular 
topics. 

The  various  anthropological  Museums  might  issue  as  part  of  their 
publications  the  bibliographies  of  Art,  Archeological  topics,  etc.  The 
bibliography  of  Bibliographies  might  appear  as  an  article  in  some  anthro- 
pological journal  or  other  publication,  or  be  issued  separately  by  some 
scientific  society,  e.  g.,  the  American  Anthropological  Association  or  the 
American  Philosophical  Society. 

The  difficulty  with  Reviews  has  always  been  to  procure  adequate  criti- 
cism by  competent  experts.  Naturally  one's  colleagues  are  rather  loth 
to  diagnose  acutely  his  productions.  But  good  reviews  are  absolutely 
necessary  for  the  welfare  of  anthropological  science.  A  book-bibliog- 
raphy of  the  kind  indicated,  to  be  supplemented  by  authoritative  dis- 
cussions of  the  more  important  works,  would  be  very  useful  and  valuable. 

The  writer  has  for  some  years  past  been  responsible  for  the  reviews 
of  Periodical  Literature  in  the  American  Anthropologist^  and  the  kind  ap- 
preciation of  this  work  by  his  colleagues  and  other  students  of  anthro- 
pology all  over  the  country  has  proved  its  usefulness  and,  at  the  same 
time,  encouraged  the  compiler,  who  has  now  so  familiarized  himself  with 
the  subject  that  the  labor  has  ceased  to  be  burdensome  to  a  degree.  He 
would  repeat  here  the  request  that  authors  of  papers  and  monographs  send 
copies  of  these  to  him  at  the  earliest  possible  moment.  Those  so  doing 
have  aided  much  in  the  making  of  the  bibliography.  The  same  may  be 
said  of  the  more  special  (and  more  extended  in  detail)  **  Record  of  Amer- 
ican Folk-lore,**  etc.,  published  in  the  Journal  of  American  Folk-Lore. 

A  final  suggestion  might  be  made,  namely,  that  of  a  series  of  bibliog- 
raphies of  special  topics  in  anthropology,  something  like  the  **  Temple 
Series**  of  the  works  of  Shakespeare  —  at  once  handy  and  authoritative. 
This  would  provide  for  bibliographies  of  more  subjects  and  tend  to  pro- 
mote reasonable  uniformity.  Alexander  F.  Chamberlain. 

Saint  Louis  Public  Museum.  —  The  new  Saint  Louis  Public  Mu- 
seum, which,  like  the  Field  Columbian  Museum  of  Chicago,  is  an  out- 
growth of  a  great  exposition,  has  entered  on  its  work  and  in  a  neat  pam- 
phlet (Bulletin  i,  December,  1905)  sets  forth  its  plan  and  purpose  as 


jpS  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

''  an  educational  institution  designed  to  diffuse  practical  knowledge  by 
approved  scientific  methods  among  the  people  of  the  city  and  state. ' ' 
It  is  the  aim  of  the  Museum,  which  is  temporarily  housed  in  the  Fine 
Arts  building  of  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition ,  to  have  four  depart- 
ments :  Geography,  Geology,  Biology,  and  Anthropology,  the  first  being 
a  departure  from  customary  museum  arrangement.  The  Department  of 
Anthropology  "is  outlined  to  illustrate  by  means  of  casts,  sculptures, 
paintings,  photographs,  and  other  preparations  (and  eventually  living 
specimens)  the  types  of  mankind  native  to  the  continents  of  the  globe  ; 
together  with  aboriginal  clothing,  houses,  utensils,  implements,  weapons, 
decorative  devices,  ceremonial  objects,  etc.,  all  so  arranged  as  to  indicate 
the  trend  of  progress,  both  among  particular  tribes  and  peoples  and  in 
general  throughout  the  world.  As  the  museum  grows,  it  is  designed  to 
devote  a  division  of  this  department  to  Ethnology,  i.  e.,  to  the  special 
representation  of  race  types ;  another  to  Archeology,  or  human  relics  of 
prehistoric  times ;  and  a  third  to  Technology,  or  Industries,  illustrated 
not  only  by  devices  and  products,  but  by  processes.  It  is  planned  to 
give  special  attention  to  the  exhibition  of  primitive  Arts  and  Crafts,  some- 
times with  the  help  of  primitive  artisans  —  this  to  enhance  the  interest  of 
the  exhibits,  and  at  the  same  time  to  reveal  the  long  course  of  that  man- 
ual development  which  forms  the  basis  of  modem  industries  and  finds 
its  highest  expression  in  modem  invention.  Among  the  industrial  prod- 
ucts suitable  for  museum  display  are  implements,  ranging  from  rude  stone 
to  finest  steel ;  clothing  fabrics,  from  leaves  of  plantain  and  fig  and  skins 
of  beasts  to  finest  textiles ;  houses  and  house  materials,  from  shrubbery 
bowers  to  steel,  concrete,  terra  cotta,  and  artificial  stone ;  utensils,  from 
primitive  baskets  and  earthenware  pots  to  aluminum  and  porcelain  ware ; 
spinning  and  weaving  devices,  from  simple  structures  of  sticks  to  modem 
spinning-jennys  and  mechanical  looms ;  and  decorative  devices,  from  the 
simplest  symbols  to  the  most  artistic  forms  and  figures.  It  will  not  be 
needful  for  the  Public  Museum  to  trace  the  development  of  esthetic  mo- 
tives, since  this  is  the  function  of  a  neighboring  institution ;  yet  it  is 
needful  to  illustrate  the  development  of  industrial  motives  with  so  much 
of  the  artistic  concepts  as  they  necessarily  involve.  It  is  through  indus- 
trial devices  that  mankind  makes  conquest  of  the  natural  world ;  and  the 
motto  of  the  sub-department  of  Technology  may  well  be.  What  Alan 
hath  wrought,^' 

Already  commendable  interest  is  shown  in  the  new  institution  by  the 
citizens  of  Saint  Louis,  as  manifested  by  the  attendance  during  October 
and  November,  which  is  estimated  at  2,000  visitors  daily.     The  material 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  1 99 

in  the  Museum  on  September  20  consisted  of  residua  from  the  Exposition 
of  1904,  valued  at  about  $500,000.  In  October  the  Mrs  Dyer  collec- 
tion of  Indian  basketry,  beadwork,  featherwork,  etc.,  was  installed  as  a 
loan  exhibit,  and  later  the  Sosnovec  collection  of  prehistoric  objects  from 
local  sites  was  similarly  installed.  The  first  Bulletin  contains  an  account 
of  the  organization  of  the  Museum,  the  articles  of  agreement,  the  officers 
and  committees,  a  summary  of  its  early  work  and  its  present  needs,  a 
statement  of  *'some  commercial  benefits  of  museums,"  etc.  Its  principal 
officers  are :  A.  C.  Stewart,  president ;  Amedee  B.  Cole,  L.  D.  Kings- 
land,  George  M.  Wright,  H.  H.  Wemse,  and  Pierre  Chouteau,  vice- 
presidents  ;  George  T.  Parker,  secretary ;  William  H.  Thomson,  treas- 
urer ;  W  J  McGee,  director  of  the  Museum.  The  Bulletin  is  sent  free 
to  members  of  the  corporation  and  to  heads  of  cooperating  institutions. 

William  Clement  Putnam.  It  is  with  regret  that  we  record  the 
death  of  William  Clement  Putnam  at  his  home  in  Davenport,  Iowa,  on 
January  13th.  Mr  Putnam,  son  of  the  late  Charles  E.  and  Mary  Duncan 
Putnam,'  was  born  in  Davenport,  June  27,  1862,  and  was  graduated  from 
the  local  High  School  in  1880,  and  with  high  honors  from  the  law 
department  of  the  University  of  Iowa  in  1883.  Returning  to  his  native 
city  he  began  the  practice  of  law  with  his  father  under  the  firm  name  of 
Putnam  &  Putnam,  which  continued  until  the  father's  death  in  1887, 
after  which  time  he  conducted  the  practice  alone.  Early  in  life  Mr 
Putnam  manifested  a  literary  taste,  becoming  an  authority  on  such  widely 
distinct  historical  characters  as  Shakespeare  and  Blackhawk ;  and  his 
ability  as  a  writer  is  exemplified  by  an  admirable  sketch  of  his  father's  life 
and  work,  published  as  a  memorial  by  the  Davenport  Academy  of 
Sciences.  To  this  institution,  as  mentioned  in  these  pages  at  the  time  of 
the  death  of  Mary  Duncan  Putnam,  the  mother,  the  Putnam  family  have 
ever  shown  rare  devotion.  Indeed,  during  Mr  W.  C.  Putnam's  last  brief 
illness  he  presented  to  the  Academy  a  collection  of  basketry  and  dictated 
from  his  death-bed  a  report  as  chairman  of  its  finance  committee  which 
communicated  the  gratifying  news  that  the  Academy  was  entirely  out  of 
debt.  But  the  greatest  indication  of  Mr  Putnam's  devotion  to  the 
Davenport  Academy  and  to  the  city  of  his  birth  is  expressed  in  his  last 
will  and  testament,  by  which  he  bequeathes  his  estate,  estimated,  it  is 
said,  at  ^700,000,  to  his  sister  and  four  brothers  in  trust.  After  the  pay- 
ment of  certain  modest  annuities  to  these  members  of  his  family  and  the 
cost  of  administering  the  estate  with  the  object  of  ultimately  increasing  its 
value,  Mr  Putnam's  will  provides  that  the  residue  of  the  net  income  shall 


200  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

be  added  to  the  Putnam  Memorial  Fund  of  the  Davenport  Academy  of 
Sciences,  and  that  on  the  death  of  his  sister  and  brothers  the  entire 
estate,  including  the  choicest  private  library  in  Iowa  and  a  noteworthy 
art  collection,  shall  pass  to  the  Academy  in  its  entirety. 

William  Clement  Putnam  was  beloved  wherever  he  was  known.  He 
was  a  man  of  extreme  refinement,  charity,  and  public  spirit,  a  lawyer  of 
rare  ability,  and  a  leader  in  the  business  world.  Notwithstanding  his 
varied  interests  he  was  never  too  busy  to  find  opportunity  to  labor  for  the 
institution  in  which  he  had  his  heart  and  which  through  his  munificence 
and  that  of  the  Putnam  family  will  some  day  be  a  great  power  in  the  dif- 
fusion of  knowledge. 

A  Remarkable  Stone  Az. — What  is  believed  to  be  the  largest  Indian 
stone  ax  in  existence  has  recently  been  placed  on  exhibition  among  the 
collections  of  the  Missouri  Historical  Society,  at  St  Louis,  by  its  presi- 
dent, Dr  C.  A.  Peterson,  by  whom  the  specimen  was  procured  as  a  loan. 
This  noteworthy  object  is  of  granite;  it  measures  28  inches  in  length,  14 
inches  in  width,  and  11^  inches  in  thickness,  and  weighs  more  than  300 
pounds.  The  ax  was  obtained  by  George  M.  Huss,  of  Birchwood,  Wis- 
consin, from  an  eminence  in  one  of  the  wildest  sections  of  the  territory 
still  occupied  by  the  Chippewa  Indians  of  Lac  Court  Oreilles  and  Lake 
Chetac,  in  Sawyer  county,  Wisconsin.  When  found  the  pointed  end  was 
embedded  in  a  small  mound  of  bowlders  and  pebbles,  with  the  body  and 
head  of  the  ax  exposed,  the  whole  apparently  forming  a  shrine  or  altar. 
In  shape  the  ax  resembles  a  tomahawk  pipe ;  its  upper  end  or  head  is 
slightly  hollowed  out  and  in  this  depression  was  ceremoniously  placed  a 
small  quantity  of  tobacco.  A  well -beaten  moccasin  trail  led  up  the  incline 
of  the  eminence  on  which  the  shrine  stood,  indicating  that  the  place  had 
long  been  used  for  religious  purposes.  The  ax  for  a  time  formed  the 
keystone  of  a  chimney,  but  was  removed  temporarily  for  a  loan  exhibit. 
According  to  Chippewa  tradition  the  ax  has  been  held  in  veneration  by 
these  Indians  from  time  immemorial.  The  object  will  remain  in  the  care 
of  the  Missouri  Historical  Society  until  spring,  when  it  will  be  returned 
to  Mr  Huss,  who,  it  is  hoped,  will  deposit  it  in  some  public  museum  rather 
than  permit  a  repetition  of  the  vandalism  to  which  it  was  once  subjected. 

Dr  Swan  Moses  Burnett  died  suddenly  of  heart  failure  at  Washing- 
ington  city,  January  18,  1906.  Dr  Burnett  was  bom  at  New  Market, 
Tennessee,  March  16,  1847,  was  graduated  from  Bellevue  College  Medi- 
cal Department  in  1870,  and  in  1873  began  the  practice  of  his  profession  at 
Knoxville,  Tenn.,  where  he  married  Frances  Hodgson,  who  already  had 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  20I 

achieved  a  reputation  as  a  novelist.  Two  years  later  they  removed  to 
Washington,  where  Dr  Burnett  soon  became  a  leading  practitioner  in 
diseases  of  the  eye  and  ear.  He  was  professor  of  ophthalmology  and 
otology  in  the  medical  department  of  Georgetown  University  from  1876 
and  in  the  Washington  Post-graduate  Medical  School  from  1879,  ^^^  ^'^ 
a  member  of  the  staff  of  three  hospitals.  He  was  also  a  member  of 
the  Washington  Academy  of  Sciences  and  the  Philosophical  Society  of 
Washington,  and  for  many  years  was  actively  interested  in  the  Anthropo- 
logical Society  of  Washington,  before  which  he  presented  several  papers 
noted  for  their  scholarly  treatment.  Three  of  his  articles  appear  in  the 
American  Anthropologist:  A  Note  on  the  Melungeons  (11,  347-349, 
1889),  The  Modem  Apotheosis  of  Nature  (v,  247-262,  1902),  Giuseppe 
Mazzini  —  Idealist:  A  Chapter  in  the  Evolution  of  Social  Science  (n.  s., 
II,  502-526,  1900).  Dr  Burnett  was  also  the  author  of  a  Treatise  on 
Astigmatism^  and  a  contributor  to  medical  text -books  in  the  line  of  his 
specialty.  In  1898,  after  several  years  of  separation,  Dr  and  Mrs  Bur- 
nett were  divorced,  and  in  1901  he  married  Miss  Margaret  Brady,  of 
Washington,  who  survives  him. 

Publications  of  Dr  V.  Giuffrida-Ruggeri.  —  With  the  title  Esposi- 
zione  delta  vita  scientifica  e  riassunto  delle  pubhlicazioni  del  dottor  Vincenzo 
Giuffrida-Ruggeri  (Scanso,  1905,  pp.  6)  has  been  published  a  bibliog- 
raphy of  the  writings  (exclusive  of  notes  and  reviews  of  anthropological 
literature)  of  Dr  Giuffrida-Ruggeri,  who  took  his  degree  in  medicine  and 
surgery  at  Rome  in  July,  1 896,  with  a  thesis  Sulla  dignitd  morfologica  dei 
segni  dettidegenerati,  Dr  Giuffrida-Ruggeri  spent  three  years  (1897-99) 
in  anthropological  investigations  of  the  craniological  material  in  the  Reg- 
gio  (Emilia)  Asylum.  In  1900  he  became  assistant  to  the  professor  of 
anthropology  in  the  University  of  Rome,  and,  in  June,  1902,  docent  in 
anthropology  at  the  same  institution.  Dr  Giuffrida-Ruggeri  is  at  present 
also  secretary  of  the  Anthropological  Society  at  Rome.  His  publications, 
as  here  listed,  number  sixty-seven.  To  the  Atti  delta  Societd  Romana  di 
Antropologia  he  has  contributed  besides  some  two  hundred  reviews  and 
abstracts  of  anthropological  works.  The  subjects  dealt  with  in  his  publi- 
cations are  chiefly  anatomical  (preponderatingly  craniological),  but  em- 
brace also  such  topics  as  :  the  passage  from  the  paleolithic  to  the  neo- 
lithic ;  Italian  origins ;  variation  in  man  and  woman  ;  human  plasticity ; 
the  jargon  of  criminals,  etc.  Dr  Giuffrida-Ruggeri  is  one  of  the  best 
equipped  of  the  younger  generation  of  European  anthropologists. 

A.  F.  C. 


202  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Dr  Richard  Hodgsoiii  secretary  and  treasurer  of  the  American  Branch 
of  the  Society  for  Psychical  Research  and  a  founder  of  the  American 
Anthropological  Association,  died  suddenly  at  Boston,  December  21.  Dr 
Hodgson  was  born  in  Melbourne,  Australia,  in  1855,  and  was  graduated 
from  Melbourne  University  (M.  A.,  LL.D. )  ;  he  also  took  a  law  course  in 
his  native  city,  and  was  graduated  in  mental  and  moral  science  at  the 
University  of  Cambridge,  England,  later  spending  six  months  at  the  Uni- 
versity of  Jena.  In  1882-83  ^^  Hodgson  lectured  in  a  University  exten- 
sion course  in  the  north  of  England  ;  was  university  lectiu^r  at  Cambridge 
in  1884-85  on  Herbert  Spencer's  philosophy;  and  from  1882  to  1887 
was  active  in  the  investigations  of  the  Society  for  Psychical  Research  in 
England.  He  has  been  a  frequent  contributor  to  the  Proceedings  of  the 
Society,  his  most  imp>ortant  articles  being  on  Blavatsky's  Theosophical 
Phenomena,  Mai -observation  and  Lapse  of  Memory  in  Connection  with 
Pseudo-spiritistic  Phenomena  ;  A  Case  of  Double  Consciousness ;  Indian 
Magic  and  the  Testimony  of  Conjurors ;  and  The  Trance  Phenomena  of 
Mrs  Piper. 

Dr  Max  UhlCi  who  for  more  than  six  years  has  been  connected  with 
the  University  of  California  as  Hearst  Lecturer  in  Peruvian  Archeology 
and  Field  Director  of  Explorations  in  South  America  for  the  Department 
of  Anthropology,  has  resigned  his  position  to  accept  the  directorship  of 
the  National  Archeological  Museum  of  Peru.  Dr  Uhle  has  just  completed 
a  second  residence  of  two  years  in  Peru  for  the  University  of  California, 
in  which  period  he  was  engaged  in  archeological  excavations  on  the  coast 
for  some  distance  north  and  south  of  Lima,  and  in  the  interior.  His 
work  has  been  conducted  with  the  aim  of  determining  the  sequence  and 
relations  of  the  various  periods  and  types  of  civilizations  in  ancient  Peru, 
and  the  results  of  his  six  years*  labors  will  be  published  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  of  the  University.  His  explorations  have  resulted 
in  the  formation  of  large  collections,  the  value  of  which  will  be  enhanced 
by  the  fact  that  a  law  forbidding  the  exportation  of  antiquities,  or  arche- 
ological explorations  by  foreigners  except  for  the  benefit  of  the  National 
Museum,  became  operative  in  Peru  on  the  ist  of  January,  1906. 

Dr  Friederich  S.  Erauss,  the  versatile  and  tireless  ethnologist  and 
folklorist  of  Vienna,  writes  encouragingly  of  his  recent  work.  His  latest 
undertaking  is  a  Folk-lore  Library,  to  appear  in  a  series  of  booklets  of 
convenient  size,  of  which  the  first  two  are  already  in  press.  Several  of 
the  volumes  will  treat  of  racial  humor,  of  which  Dr  Krauss  himself  will 
handle  German,  Servian,  and  Gypsy.     The  second  part  of  his  great  work. 


% 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  203 

Anthropophyieiay  is  now  in  print,  with  an  exceptionally  varied  table  of  con- 
tents, together  with  four  more  volumes  of  his  series  of  Romanische  Meis- 
terencMer.  His  Serbische  Meisterwerke  has  now  reached  the  fifth  number. 
He  has  also  brought  out  within  the  last  year  (1905),  in  collaboration  with 
Eduard  Kulke,  Um  holder  Frauen  Gunsty  an  artist  romance  of  the  Ital- 
ian renaissance,  in  which  a  peasant  boy,  of  rare  but  terrible  genius,  after 
attaining  the  pinnacle  of  success,  dies  by  the  hand  of  a  jealous  nobleman 
in  the  very  moment  of  unveiling  his  masterpiece.  All  of  his  works  are 
from  the  press  of  the  Deutsche  Verlagsactien-gesellschaft  of  Leipzig. 

James  Mooney. 

Californla'Branch  of  the  American  Folk-Lore  Society.  —  The  fifth 
meeting  of  the  California  Branch  of  the  American  Folk-Lore  Society 
was  held  in  the  Unitarian  church,  Berkeley,  Thursday,  December  7, 
1905,  at  8  p.  M.  Prof.  John  Fryer  presided.  Mrs  M.  S.  Biven  and 
Miss  G.  E.  Barnard,  both  of  Oakland,  were  elected  to  membership. 
Prof.  Wm.  F.  Bade  delivered  a  lecture  on  "Hebrew  Folk-lore,'*  based 
primarily  on  folk-lore  elements  in  the  Book  of  Genesis.  At  the  conclu- 
sion of  the  lecture  a  vote  of  thanks  was  tendered  Professor  Bade,  as  also 
the  trustees  of  the  Unitarian  church.  One  hundred  and  fifty  persons  at- 
tended the  meeting. 

The  sixth  meeting  of  the  California  Branch  was  held  in  the  Unitarian 
Church,  Berkeley,  February  13,  1906,  at  8  p.  m.  Dr  William  Popper, 
who  has  recently  become  connected  with  the  University  of  California, 
spoke  on  '*  Superstitions  of  the  Arabs,''  based  on  personal  experiences 
during  a  residence  in  the  Orient.  A.  L.  Kroeber,  Secretary, 

Berkeley  Folk-Lore  Club.  —  The  second  regular  meeting  of  the 
Berkeley  Folk-Lore  Club  during  1905-06  was  held  in  the  Faculty  Club 
of  the  University  of  California,  Tuesday  evening,  November  28th. 
President  Lange  called  the  meeting  to  order.  Prof.  H.  A.  Overstreet, 
Mr  A.  H.  Allen,  and  Prof.  W.  F.  Bade,  were  elected  to  membership. 
Prof.  F.  B.  Dresslar  read  a  paper  on  **Some  Studies  in  Superstition," 
based  on  superstitions  known  to  and  in  part  credited  by  advanced  school 
students  on  the  Pacific  coast.  Special  attention  was  paid  to  the  degree 
of  credence  given  to  superstitions  and  to  the  subject  of  mental  preference 
for  odd  numbers.  At  its  conclusion  Professor  Dresslar' s  paper  was  dis- 
cussed by  the  members.  A.  L.  Kroeber,  Secretary. 

First  Chair  of  Anthropology  in  South  America.  —  The  first  chair 
of  anthropology  was  established  in  1905  in  the  Faculty  of  Philosophy  and 
Letters  at  the  University  of  Buenos  Aires,  the  first  appointee  (September 


204  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

2)  being  Dr  Robert  Lehmann-Nitsche,  Director  of  the  Anthropological 
section  of  La  Plata  Museum,  who  will  continue  to  serve  also  in  the  latter 
capacity.  At  the  close  of  1903  Dr  Lehmann-Nitsche  delivered,  with  the 
consent  of  the  feculty,  a  course  of  lectures  on  General  Anthropology,  and 
in  the  beginning  of  1904,  by  request,  another  course  on  Paleoanthro- 
pology. Both  of  these  courses  were  well  attended,  that  of  1904  averaging 
61  hearers.  In  1905  the  University  decided  to  establish  a  regular  chair 
of  anthropology  and  to  give  the  subject  an  official  standing  as  a  depart- 
ment in  the  curriculum  of  the  Faculty  of  Philosophy  and  Letters.  Of 
related  departments  American  Archeology  has  been  represented  by  Dr 
Samuel  A.  Lafone  Quevedo  and  Dr  Juan  B.  Ambrosetti. 

A.  F.  C. 
Missouri  Historical  Society.  —  The  following  officers  have  been 
reelected  by  the  Missouri  Historical  Society  to  serve  during  the  ensuing 
year :  Dr  Cyrus  A.  Peterson,  president ;  W.  K.  Bixby,  first  vice-presi- 
dent ;  D.  I.  Bushnell,  second  vice-president ;  Charles  P.  Pettus,  secre- 
tary ;  Alfred  T.  Terry,  treasurer ;  Miss  Louise  Dalton,  librarian.  Judge 
Walter  B.  Douglas,  James  A.  Reardon,  J.  M.  Wulfing,  V.  Mott  Porter, 
Malcomb  Macbeth,  and  the  five  officers  first  named  constitute  the  advisory 
board.  The  interest  of  the  Missouri  Historical  Society  in  anthropolog- 
ical topics  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  four  of  the  ten  members  of  its  advi- 
sory board  are  members  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association. 

Lieut.  Georg  Friederidi  already  known  for  his  historico-ethnologic 
studies,  has  been  publishing  in  recent  issues  of  the  Neue  Militdrische 
B latter y  of  Berlin,  the  German  army  and  navy  journal,  some  valuable 
papers  on  the  use  of  mounted  infantry,  or,  more  properly,  dismounted 
cavalry,  in  Europe  and  Asia  from  the  earliest  historic  period  down  to  the 
modem  wars  of  Germany  and  France,  including  a  general  survey  of  the 
equestrian  orders  of  ancient  Greece  and  Rome  and  the  Medieval  period. 
The  references  quoted  indicate  a  wide  range  of  research  and  the  subject 
is  one  which  must  appeal  to  every  military  man.        James  Moonev. 

Dr  Roland  B.  Steineri  of  Grovetown,  Georgia,  a  founder  of  the  Ameri- 
can Anthropological  Association  and  well  known  for  his  work  in  local 
archeology  and  folk-lore,  died  at  the  City  Hospital  of  Augusta,  Georgia, 
January  13,  aged  sixty-six  years.  Dr  Steiner*s  collection  of  archeologic 
objects  was  well  known  throughout  the  country,  and  many  specimens 
collected  by  him  have  gone  to  enrich  our  larger  museums.  He  wrote 
little  or  nothing  on  archeologic  topics,  but  was  an  occasional  writer  on 
the  folk-lore  of  the  Southern  negro,  of  whom,  being  a  planter,  he  became 
a  close  observer. 


^ 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  20$ 

The  Sixth  International  Congress  of  Criminal  Anthropology 
will  open  at  Turin  on  April  28,  1906.  The  following  questions  are  pro- 
posed for  discussion,  and  the  communications  presented  will,  as  far  as 
possible,  be  grouped  round  these  as  central  themes  :  ( i )  the  treatment 
of  juvenile  criminality  according  to  the  principles  of  criminal  anthropology, 
to  be  introduced  by  M.  von  Hamel ;  (2)  the  treatment  of  female  crimi- 
nality, to  be  introduced  by  Dr  Pauline  Tamowsky ;  (3)  the  relations  of 
economic  conditions  to  criminality,  to  be  introduced  by  Professor  Kurella ; 
(4)  the  equivalence  of  the  various  forms  of  sexual  psychopathies  and 
criminality,  to  be  introduced  by  Prof.  C.  Lombroso ;  (5)  criminal  anthro- 
pology in  police  organization,  to  be  introduced  by  Professor  Ottolenghi ; 

(6)  the  psychological  value  of  evidence,  to  be  introduced  by  Dr  Brusa ; 

(7)  prophylaxis  and  treatment  of  crime,  to  be  introduced  by  Dr  Ferri ; 

(8)  establishments  for  the  perpetual  detention  of  criminals  declared  to  be 
irresponsible  on  account  of  mental  defect,  to  be  introduced  by  Professor 
Garofalo. 

"  Anthropos." — A  new  octavo  quarterly  journal  of  16  pages,  pub- 
lished under  the  title  Anthropos  and  under  the  editorship  of  Rev.  W. 
Schmidt,  S.V.D.,  of  St  Gabriel,  Modling,  near  Vienna,  has  made  its  ap- 
pearance. Zaunrith  &  Co.,  1 2  Bergstrasse,  Salzburg,  Austria,  are  the  pub- 
lishers. A  prospectus  announces  that  the  new  journal  will  supplement 
existing  ethnographical  and  philological  periodicals  ''by  calling  in  the 
aid  of  an  important  factor  of  ethnographic  and  linguistic  investigations, 
viz,  missionaries,"  consequently  its  pages  will  contain  contributions  per- 
taining to  *'  peoples  of  the  whole  world  among  whom  missionaries  work 
and  will  work.**     The  subscription  price  is  12  marks. 

Dr  Charles  Peabodv  of  Cambridge  and  Dr  G.  B.  Gordon  of  Phila- 
delphia have  been  appointed  delegates  from  the  American  Anthropolog- 
ical Association  to  the  International  Congress  of  Anthropology  and  Pre- 
historic Archeology  to  be  held  at  Monaco  in  April,  1906.  Mr  David  I. 
Bushnell  Jr,  assistant  in  archeology  in  the  Peabody  Museum  of  Harvard 
University,  now  in  Europe  making  a  special  study  of  the  American  col- 
lections in  European  museums,  has  been  appointed  a  delegate  to  represent 
the  Peabody  Museum  at  the  same  Congress. 

An  archeological  museum,  which,  according  to  Nature^  will  devote 
special  attention  to  Indo-Chinese  matters,  has  been  established  by  the 
French  government  at  Pnom  Penh,  French  Indo-China.  The  museum 
will  be  under  the  scientific  control  of  the  ficole  fran^aise  d'Extrdme- 
Orient,  the  chief  of  the  archeological  department  of  which  will  act  as 
director  of  the  new  museum. 


206  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  American  Museum  of  Natoral  History  has  received  as  a 
gift  from  George  S.  Bowdoin,  Esq.,  a  member  of  the  board  of  trustees,  a 
valuable  collection  illustrating  the  culture  of  some  of  the  tribes  of  Central 
Africa.  The  collection  includes  implements  of  warfare,  idols,  fetishes 
and  masks,  clothing,  baskets,  musical  instruments,  household  utensils  of 
bamboo,  pottery  and  brass,  bracelets,  necklaces  and  household  adornments 
of  beads,  shells,  and  brass.  A  gold  bead  weighing  three  ounces  and  seven 
carved  ivory  tusks  from  Ashantee  are  worthy  of  particular  mention. 

The  Wisconsin  Archeological  Society  is  securing  the  custodian- 
ship, for  school  purposes,  of  the  last  group  of  Indian  mounds  remaining 
in  Milwaukee.  In  the  spring  there  will  be  held  a  joint  meeting  of  the 
Wisconsin  Landmarks  Committees  and  of  the  Wisconsin  Archeological 
Society,  under  the  auspices  of  the  latter.  This  meeting  will  be  held 
among  the  mounds  preserved  on  the  campus  of  Carroll  College,  Waukosha. 
The  Society  will  soon  have  completed  the  details  of  the  preservation  of 
the  celebrated  '*  man  "  mound  at  Baraboo. 

Mr  Charles  S.  Spang,  formerly  of  Pittsburg,  who  recently  died  in 
Paris,  where  he  spent  the  latter  half  of  his  long  life,  before  his  death  re- 
quested his  heirs  to  turn  over  to  the  Carnegie  Museum,  of  Pittsburg,  his 
collection  of  remarkably  fine  Etruscan  pottery  and  Egyptian  antiquities. 
In  accordance  with  his  wish  these  collections,  which  were  made  nearly 
fifty  years  ago  by  a  gentleman  whom  Mr  Spang  employed  to  make  exca- 
vations, have  recently  come  into  the  custody  of  the  museum. 

It  is  reported  by  Science  that  the  committee  appointed  to  carry  the 
proposal  of  a  memorial  to  Rudolf  Virchow  into  effect  has  now  a  sum  of 
$20,000  at  its  disposal.  Of  this  amount  $9,000  has  been  contributed  by 
subscribers  and  $11,000  by  the  city  of  Berlin.  Three  prizes,  of  the 
value  respectively  of  $750,  $500,  and  $250,  are  offered  for  the  best  design 
of  a  memorial.     Drawings  must  be  submitted  before  April,  1906. 

The  University  of  Oxford  has  established  a  Diploma  in  Anthro- 
pology, awarding  a  certificate  of  merit  after  written  and  practical  exami- 
nation at  the  end  of  a  course  of  study  of  not  less  than  a  year  in  residence 
and  under  supervision. 

Peabodv  Museum,  Harvard  University,  has  recently  acquired,  by 
gift  of  Mr  L.  H.  Farlow,  a  fine  collection  of  Indian  relics  from  the  north- 
em  coast  of  America,  southern  Alaska,  British  Columbia,  and  northern 
California. 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  20/ 

During  his  recent  visit  to  New  Orleans  to  attend  the  meeting  of  the 
American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  Mr  George  H. 
Pepper,  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  obtained  for  George 
G.  Heye,  Esq.,  of  New  York,  the  archeological  collection  of  the  late  Dr 
Joseph  Jones. 

Mrs  Phcebe  Hearst  has  presented  to  the  California  State  University 
her  archeological  and  anthropological  collection  from  all  parts  of  the 
world.  It  has  cost  more  than  $400,000,  and  with  it  she  presents  to  the 
university  $60,000  for  the  maintenance  of  a  department  of  anthropology. 
—  Science. 

Yale  University  has  received  from  two  anonymous  donors  a  gift  of 
$75,000,  which,  subject  to  certain  annuities,  will  be  used  to  found  a  lec- 
tureship on  the  interrelation  of  religion,  science,  and  philosophy. 

Mr  Edgar  L.  Hewett,  who  holds  the  fellowship  of  American  arche- 
ology in  the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America  during  1906,  has  departed 
for  Mexico  where  he  will  spend  several  months  in  field  study. 

Dr  L\  Frobenius,  the  well-known  German  ethnologist,  has  under- 
taken an  expedition  to  the  region  of  the  Kasai  for  the  study  of  the  native 
tribes  of  that  part  of  Africa. 

At  the  Ithaca  meeting,  held  in  December,  Dr  A.  L.  Kroeber  of  the 
University  of  California  was  elected  president  of  the  American  Folk-Lore 
Society. 

Professor  Karl  von  den  Steinen,  of  Berlin,  has  been  elected  an 
honorary  member  of  the  Anthropological  Institute  of  Great  Britain  and 
Ireland. 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  ASSOCIATION 

Proceedings  of  the  Ithaca  Meeting 
December  27-29,  1905 

The  sessions  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association  and  of  the 
Council  were  held  in  the  Botanical  Lecture  Room,  Sage  College,  Cornell 
University,  December  27-29,  1905.  Prof.  Franz  Boas,  Senior-Vice- 
president,  presided  in  the  absence  of  the  President,  Prof.  F.  W.  Putnam. 

Meetings  of  the  Council 

Members  of  the  Council  present  were  Messrs  Boas,  Bowditch,  Dixon, 
Gordon,  E.  L.  Hewett,  Hyde,  and  MacCurdy. 

The  minutes  of  the  special  meeting  held  in  San  Francisco  were  read 
and  approved.  The  report  of  the  Treasurer  was  read  and  referred  to  the 
Auditing  Committee.  The  Special  Committee  on  program  for  the  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Americanists  to  be  held  in  Quebec,  September 
10-16,  1906,  reported  progress  through  its  chairman,  Dr  George  Grant 
MacCurdy. 

The  Committee  on  Nominations  appointed  by  Professor  Boas  consisted 
of  Dr  MacCurdy  (chairman),  Mr  Hewett,  and  Mr  Hyde. 

New  members  were  elected  as  follows  :  Mr  Charles  M.  Bean,  Dr  D.  D. 
Berolzheimer,  Mr  H.  L.  Broomall,  Mr  E.  S.  Curtis,  Dr  G.  V.  N.  Dear- 
bom,  Mrs  M.  C.  B.  Hoover,  Dr  Berthold  Laufer,  Mr  J.  A.  Reardon, 
Mr  Edward  Sapir,  Mr  H.  E.  Sargent,  Dr  H.  W.  Shimer,  Dr  A.  W. 
Stirling,  Mr  Erastus  Tefft,  Dr  H.  M.  Whelpley,  Prof.  B.  G.  Wilder,  Mr 
J.  H.  Wilson,  Mr  J.  M.  Wulfing. 

Moved  that  a  Committee  on  Policy  be  appointed  by  the  President  to 
represent  the  Association  at  the  Council  of  the  American  Association  for 
the  Advancement  of  Science.  Carried.  The  President  subsequently 
appointed  Messrs  Boas  (chairman),  Bowditch,  Dorsey,  Hodge,  Kroeber, 
McGee,  and  Peabody  to  constitute  this  committee. 

Moved  that  the  President  be  empowered  to  appoint  delegates  to  the 
International  Congress  of  Anthropology  and  Prehistoric  Archeology 
which  will  be  held  at  Monaco,  April  16-21,  1906.  Carried.  (Dr 
Charles  Peabody  and  Dr  George  Byron  Gordon  were  subsequently  ap- 
pointed delegates  to  the  Congress. ) 

208 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  ASSOCIATION  209 

The  report  of  the  Committee  on  Nominations  was  read  and  approved, 
the  officers  recommended  for  the  ensuing  year  being  as  follows : 

President :  Prof.  Frederic  W.  Putnam,  Cambridge. 

Vice-President  to  serve  four  years  :  Prof.  Franz  Boas,  New  York. 

Secretary :  Dr  George  Grant  MacCurdy,  New  Haven. 

Treasurer :  Mr  B.  Talbot  B.  Hyde,  New  York. 

Editor:  Mr  F.  W.  Hodge,  Washington. 

Members  of  the  Council  to  serve  four  years :  Charles  Peabody,  James 
Mooney,  J.  D.  McGuire,  Berthold  Laufer,  Livingston  Farrand,  Frank 
Baker. 

Committee  on  Program:  G.  G.  MacCurdy,  F.  Boas,  F.  W.  Hodge, 
A.  L.  Kroeber. 

Committee  on  Finance :  B.  T.  B.  Hyde,  Stanley  McCormick,  G.  G. 
MacCurdy,  W.  H.  Fumess,  3d. 

Auditing  Committee :  R.  B.  Dixon,  E.  L.  Hewett,  G.  B.  Gordon. 

Committee  on  Publication :  F.  W.  Putnam,  Chairman,  ex-officio ;  F. 
W.  Hodge,  Secretary,  ex-officio;  Juan  B.  Ambrosetti,  Museo-Nacional, 
Buenos  Aires,  Argentina ;  Frank  Baker,  Washington ;  Franz  Boas,  New 
York ;  David  Boyle,  Department  of  Education,  Toronto  ;  Alexander  F. 
Chamberlain,  Worcester,  Mass.  ;  Alfredo  Chavero,  City  of  Mexico; 
Stewart  Culin,  Brooklyn ;  George  A.  Dorsey,  Chicago ;  J.  Walter  Fewkes, 
Washington ;  Alice  C.  Fletcher,  Cambridge ;  W.  H.  Holmes,  Washing- 
ton ;  H.  von  Ihering,  S^  Paulo,  Brazil ;  A.  L.  Kroeber,  San  Francisco ; 
Rodolfo  Lenz,  Santiago  de  Chile ;  W  J  McGee,  St  Louis ;  Charles  Pea- 
body,  Cambridge.  (Dr  G.  B.  Gordon,  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania, 
has  subsequently  been  appointed. ) 

The  following  invitation  to  hold  the  next  annual  meeting  of  the  Asso- 
ciation in  Washington,  D,  C,  was  read  and  referred  to  the  Committee  on 
Policy : 

Ithaca,  N.  Y.,  December  27,  1905. 
To  THE  President  and  Executive  Committee  of  the  American  An- 
thropological Association. 

Gentlemen  :  The  Executive  Committee  of  the  Archaeological  Institute  of 
America  voted  last  evening  to  accept  the  invitation  of  the  Washington  Soci- 
ety of  the  Institute  to  hold  its  next  general  session  in  Washington  during  the 
Christmas  holidays  in  1906.  They  also  authorized  the  Secretary  pro  tempore 
to  extend  an  invitation  to  the  American  Anthropological  Association  and  the 
American  Philological  Association  to  hold  their  meetings  in  Washington 
jointly  with  the  Institute. 

The  George  Washington  University  has  extended  to  the  three  societies  the 
courtesies  of  the  institution  and  the  use  of  its  buildings  for  their  sessions. 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  7— 14 


210  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

In  behalf  of  the  Executive  Committee  of  the  Institute  I  beg  to  express  the 

hope  that  the  American  Anthropological  Association  will  vote  to  hold  their 

next  meeting  in  Washington. 

Respectfully  yours, 

Mitchell  Carroll, 

Secretary  pro  tern,  for  Exec,  Com*  tee. 

A  closer  affiliation  with  the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America  rel- 
ative to  membership  dues  was  proposed  by  the  Secretary  and,  by  a  vote 
of  the  Council,  was  referred  to  the  Committee  on  Policy. 

A  communication  from  the  Colorado  Sodety  of  the  Archaeological 
Institute  of  America,  requesting  that  the  Association  pass  resolutions  en- 
dorsing the  Bill  of  Representative  Hogg  of  Colorado,  creating  the  Mesa 
Verde  National  Park,  was  read  by  Mr  E.  L.  Hewett,  who  moved  that  it 
be  referred  to  the  Committee  on  the  Preservation  of  American  Antiquities 
with  power  to  act  for  the  Association.  This  Committee,  at  its  meeting 
on  the  evening  of  December  28,  voted  to  recommend  legislation  that 
would  preserve  the  ruins  of  the  Mesa  Verde  district,  but  did  not  pro- 
nounce in  favor  of  any  particular  bill. 

Business  Meeting  of  the  Assooation 

Election  of  Officers 

Moved  that  the  Secretary  be  instructed  to  cast  a  unanimous  ballot  for 
the  officers  recommended  in  the  foregoing  report  of  the  Nominating 
Committee  and  approved  by  the  Council.     Carried. 

Reports  of  Committees 

Committee  on  American  Archeological  Nomenclature,  Dr  Charles 
Peabody,  chairman,  reported  progress  and  asked  that  the  Committee  be 
continued. 

Committee  on  Nomenclature  of  Indian  Linguistic  Families  North  of 
Mexico,  Mr  F.  W.  Hodge,  chairman,  submitted  the  following  pre- 
liminary report,  which  was  read  by  the  Secretary : 

Your  committee,  appointed  at  the  meeting  of  the  Association  held  at 
Berkeley,  California,  on  August  21st  last,  "to  report  at  the  next  regular 
meeting  on  the  most  desirable  nomenclature  for  the  Indian  linguistic  families 
north  of  Mexico,*'  beg  leave  to  say  that  owing  to  the  importance  of  the  subject 
and  the  difficulty  of  discussing  the  questions  involved  by  reason  of  the  wide 
separation  of  its  members,  have  not  yet  found  it  practicable  to  reach  such  con- 
clusions on  all  the  points  at  issue  as  will  warrant  the  presentation  of  a  final 
report  at  the  present  time.  It  may  be  said,  however,  that  a  majority  of  the 
Committee  are  in  favor  of  a  radical  change  in  the  present  system  as  well  as  in 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  ASSOCIATION  211 

the  nomenclature  itself.  There  has  not  been  sufficient  time,  however,  to  col- 
late all  the  suggestions  made  and  to  submit  them  to  the  individual  members  of 
the  Committee  for  discussion. 

I  therefore  beg  to  recommend  that  the  Committee  be  continued  and  that 
it  be  instructed  to  present  at  the  next  regular  meeting  a  final  report  on  the  sub- 
ject. Should  this  recommendation  be  approved,  it  may  be  deemed  advisable 
by  the  Conmiittee,  in  conjunction  with  the  Committee  on  Publication,  to  pub- 
lish in  the  American  Anthropologist  the  report  of  the  majority  as  finally  agreed 
upon,  in  order  that  full  opportunity  may  be  given  members  generally  to 
openly  discuss  the   recommendations   proposed  before  final  action  by  the 

Association  is  taken. 

Respectfulty  submitted, 

F.  W.   Hodge,   Chairman, 
The  Committee  was  continued. 

Committee  on  the  Preservation  of  American  Antiquities,  Mr  E.  L. 
Hewett  reported  progress.  On  his  recommendation  the  Committee  was 
continued.  As  Mr  Hewett' s  paper,  to  be  read  later  before  the  joint 
meeting  of  the  Association  with  the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America 
and  the  American  Philological  Association,'WOuld  deal  at  length  with  the 
work  of  this  Committee,  discussion  of  the  report  was  postponed  until  the 
joint  meeting  of  the  three  societies  and  the  meeting  of  the  Joint  Com- 
mittee. 

Auditing  Committee,  Dr  Dixon,  chairman,  announced  that  the  Com- 
mittee had  found  the  accounts  of  the  Treasurer  to  be  correct  and  moved 
the  adoption  of  the  latter' s  report,  which  follows : 

Report  of  the  Treasurer 

RECEIPTS 

Balance  from  1904 %    858.77 

Anthropological  Society  of  Washington,  for  subscrip- 
tion to  the  American  Anthropologist. 391.66 

American    Ethnological    Society,    for  subscription   to 

American  Anthropologist 150.63 

Annual  dues 915.00 

Annual  subscriptions  to  American  Anthropologist ^  Vol. 

VII 668.59 

Sale  of  back  numbers  and  extra  copies i30-45 

PubUcation  Fund  :  For  vol.  vii,  no.  3,  plate  17....  $200 

From  special  subscriptions 45 

Annual  subscriptions 210        455.00 

Authors*  reprints  (at  cost) 196.73 

$3,766.83. 


212  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

EXPENDITURES 

The  New  Era  Printing  Company,  for  printing,  binding, 
and  mailing  American  Anthropologist  (vol.  vi, 

no.  $,  and  vol.  vii,  nos.  i,  2,  3) 11,845.24 

Printing  Memoirs  American  Anthropological  and  Eth- 
nological Societies 143.83* 

Illustrations  for  American  Anthropologist, 289. 66 

Colored  plate  for  vol.  vii,  no.  3 150.00 

Editor's  expenses 22.^,00 

Insurance  on  back  numbers 25.00 

Secretary's  expenses 80.59 

Treasurer's  expenses 136.14 

American  Ethnological  Society  to  cancel  debt 62.40 

To  correct  bank  error  on  foreign  exchange 32.09 

Expenses  of  San  Francisco  meeting 77.00      3,066.95 

Balance  to  meet  outstanding  liabilities I699.88 

Following  the  reading  of  Mr  Hodge's  paper  on  '^  The  needs  of  the 
American  Anthropologist  in  the  direction  of  Bibliography  and  Reviews 
of  American  Anthropological  Literature,"  it  was  moved  that  a  committee 
be  appointed  to  consider  the  question  of  Book  Reviews.  Carried. 
(Messrs  Hodge  (chairman),  Chamberlain,  Dixon,  Gordon,  and  Wissler 
were  subsequently  appointed  by  the  President  to  constitute  this  com- 
mittee. ) 

Committee  on  Resolutions,  —  Dr  MacCurdy  submitted  the  following 
resolutions,  which  were  adopted : 

Resolved,  that  the  American  Anthropological  Association  express  its  ap- 
preciation of  the  courtesy  of  Cornell  University  in  extending  to  the  Associa- 
tion the  hospitality  of  its  buildings,  the  very  cordial  invitation  to  luncheon 
December  27th,  28th,  and  29th,  and  the  welcome  personally  given  through  its 
President,  Dr  Jacob  Gould  Schurman  ;  that  the  Association  express  its  appre- 
ciation of  the  ability  and  fidelity  of  Prof.  H.  C.  Elmer  in  his  capacity  as 
Chairman  of  the  Local  Committee  ;  that  the  thanks  of  the  Association  be  ex- 
tended to  the  Town  and  Gown  Club  of  Ithaca  for  its  hospitality  so  generously 
offered. 

Papers  Read 

Mr  Warren  K.  Moorehead :  Natural  History  vs,  the  Historical 
Method  in  the  Study  of  Certain  Stone  Objects,     (Read  by  Dr  Peabody.) 

Dr  Charles  Peabody  and  Mr  W.  K.  Moorehead :  The  So-called  Gor- 
gets,    (Illustrated  by  stereopticon. ) 

1  This  sum  was  paid  in  behalf  of  the  American  Ethnological  Society  and  the  Associa- 
tkm's  uidebtedness  credited  therewith. 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGICAL    ASSOCIATION  21 3 

Pro£  Franz  Boas :  The  Theory  of  EvobOion  Applied  to  Ethnological 
Problems. 

Mr  Edward  Sapir :  Preliminary  Report  on  an  Expedition  to  the  Upper 
Chinook, 

Dr  Berthold  Laufer :  History  of  the  Game  of  Polo. 

Mr  F.  W.  Hodge :  The  Needs  of  the  *'  American  Anthropologist^^  in 
the  Direction  of  Bibliography  and  Reviews  of  American  Anthropological 
Literature.     (Read  by  Dr  MacCurdy.) 

Mr  C.  V.  Hartman  :  Use  and  Ornamentation  of  the  Tree-calabash  in 
Tropical  America.     (Illustrated  by  stcreopticon  and  specimens. ) 

Mr  G.  W.  James ;  Poetry  and  Symbolism  of  Indian  Basketry  (with 
demonstrations) . 

Prof.  Burt  G.  Wilder:   (i)   The  Statements  and  Opinions  of  Jeffries 

Wyman  as  to  the  Anthropoid  Apes  and  their  Approximation  to  Man.    (2) 

Holes  on  Certain  Human  and  Ape  Brains  in  the  Cornell  Collection. 

(Papers  read  before  the  Joint  Session  of  the  Association  with  the  American  Folk- 
Lore  Society,  Prof.  Thomas  Frederick  Crane,  Dean  of  the  University  Faculty,  Cornell 
UniTersity,  presiding : ) 

Presidential  Address  of  Miss  Alice  C.  Fletcher :  Psychic  Relation 
between  Men  and  Animals  (by  title). 

Dr  John  R.  Swanton  :  A  Concordance  of  American  Myths.  (Read 
by  Mr  Newell.)' 

Mr  W.  W.  Newell :  Early  Printed  German- American  Popular  Med- 
icine. 

(Papers  read  at  the  Joint  Session  of  the  Association  with  the  Archaeological  Insti- 
tute of  America  and  the  American  Philological  Association  :) 

Prof.  Franz  Boaz :  Philological  Aspects  of  Problems  of  American 
Anthropology  and  Archeology, 

Mr  Edgar  L.  Hewett:  The  Preservation  of  American  Antiquities; 
Progress  during  the  Last  Year ;  Proposed  Legislation^ 

PAPERS    READ    BY   TITLE 

Dr  Clark  Wissler :  Some  Psychological  Elements  in  Primitive  Art. 

Prof.  Marshall  H.  Saville  :    The  Goldsmith' s  Art  in  Ancient  Mexico. 

Mr  Phillips  Barry  :     Folk-Poetry  of  New  England. 

Mr  John  B.  Stoudt :    German- American  Riddles. 

Mr  V.  Stefansson  :    77ie  Scandinavian  Occupancy  of  Greenland. 


^  A  Committee  on  the  Concordance  of  Mythology  was  subsequently  appointed,  as  fol- 
fows :  Boas  (chairman),  Dixon,  and  Swanton. 
'  See  page  109  of  this  issue. 


214  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Mrs  Marie .  L.  Lamoreaux :  Suggestions  on  the  Origin  of  Prehistoric 
Ruins  of  the  South  American  Continent^  and  Origin  of  the  People  and 
Civilization, 

Dr  A.  L.  Kroeber :   7\uo  Ceremonies  of  the  Mohave  Indians. 

George  Grant  MacCurdy, 

Secretary. 
Yale  Univbrsity  Muskum, 
New  Haven,  Connecticut. 


American  Anthropological  Association 

OFFICERS  AND  MEMBERS^ 

JANUARY,  1906 


OFFICERS 

Pruidbnt,  FREDERIC  W.  PUTNAM,  Cambridge. 

ViCB-PRXsiDBNT   1906,  GEORGE  A.  DORSE Y,   Chicago. 

VzcB-piBSiDKMT    1907,   MISS   ALICE   C   FLETCHER,   Waahington. 

ViCB-PEBazDBNT  1908,  WILLIAM  H.  HOLMES,  Waahington. 

ViCE-PEBSiDSNT  X909,  FRANZ  BOAS,  New  York. 

SicaiTARY,  GEORGE  GRANT  MACCURDY,  New  Haven. 

TRBASuau,  B.  TALBOT  B.   HYDE,   New  York. 

EoiTOB,  F.  W.  HODGE,  Waahington. 

LIFE  MEMBERS 


MR  EDWARD  E.  AYER,* 

Railway    Exchange    Buildings    Chicago, 

Illinoia. 
MR  CHARLES  P.  BOWDITCH,* 

38  State  at,  Boaton,  Maaa. 


MR  ARCHER  M.  HUNTINGTON,* 

Baycheater,   New  York. 
M,  LE  DUC  DE  LOUBAT,* 

53    Rue   Dumont   d'Urville,    Paria. 
MR  CLARENCE  B.  MOORE,* 

X331   Locuat  St.,   Philadelphia,   Pa. 


MEMBERS 


MR  EDWARD  D.  ADAMS,* 

35  Wall  St.,  New  York  City. 
DR  CYRUS  ADLER, 

Smithsonian      Institution,      Washington, 

D.   C. 
DR  JUAN  B.  AMBROSETTI,* 

Muaeo    Nadonal,    Buenos   Aires,    Argen- 
tina. 
DR  EDWARD  H.  ANGLE, 

1023  N.  Grand  ave.,  St.  Louis,  Missouri. 
DR  PAUL  R.  BAER, 

2003   Fair  ave.,   St.   Louis,   Mo. 
DR   FRANK   BAKER, 

National    Zoological    Park,    Washington, 

D.  C. 
MRS  HUBERT  HOWE  BANCROFT, 

St.    Dun  Stan's,    San    Francisco,    Cal. 
MR   S.   A.    BARRETT. 

3101    Hillegas   ave.,   Berkeley,    Cal. 


DR   GEORGE    BARRIE,* 

2x31    Mass.    ave.,    N.    W.,    Waahington, 

D.  C. 
PROF.  CHARLES  MELVILLE  BEAN, 

High   School,   Pulaski,   New  Yoric 
MRS   JAMES    H.    BEATTY, 

Boise  City,   Idaho. 
COL.    PAUL   BECKWITH.* 

U.    S.    National    Museum,    Washington, 

D.  C. 
MR  J.  W.  BENHAM.* 

X38   West  42d  St.,   New  York   City. 
MR    DANIEL   D.    BEROLZHEIMER, 

XX   East   59th  St.,   New  York  City. 
MRS  THOMAS  B.  BISHOP, 

2309  Washington  St.,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 
DR  FRANZ  BOAS,* 

American   Museum   of   Natural   Hiatory, 

New  York  City. 


^  Members  whose  names  are  marked  with  an  asterisk   (*)   are  Founders  of  the  Asso- 
ciation. 


215 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


DK  DAVID  BOYLE,* 

Dept.  of  EducMlon,  Toronto,  Cuudt. 
DR    J.    C    BRANNER,* 

Stufard   UiuTeriitr,   CaliforniL 
MISS  ADELA  BRETON, 

Cire  ^Iti  ud  Doivct  Buk,  Bath,  Eor 

Und. 
UR  L,  H.  BRITTIN,' 

Englewood,   New   Jeney. 
UR  HENRY  L.  BROOMALL, 

14  South  aTC,  Medi*.  Pa. 
MR   HERBERT  BROWN, 

MR  H.  G.  BRYANT,* 

aoij  WalDDt  It.,  PbiUdelphia,  Pa. 
MRS  EMMA  F.  JAY  BULLENE,* 

1431   Court  Place,   Denver,   Catorado. 
DR  E.   S.   BURGESS,* 

11  Wert  ggih  It.,  New  Yoik  Glr. 
MR   DAVID  I.  BUSH  NELL,  JR., 

Care    French,    Lemon   &    Co.,    Florence, 

Italy. 
MS  DAVID  I.  BUSHNELL,  SR., 

41M  Olive  at.  St.  Louia,  Mo. 
DR  AMOS  W.  BUTLER,* 

State   HouK,   Indianapolis    Indiana. 
MR  H.   H.   CAMMANN,* 

43  West  jSlh  n„  New  York  City, 
DR  MARY  GRAFTON  CAMPBELL, 

Care   J.    S.    Spllman,    Milli   Bids.,    San 

Franciaco,  Cal. 
DR  ALEXANDER  F.  CHAMBERLAIN," 

Oarl;   UniveraitT,   Worceater,    Uaia. 
DR   ALFREDO    CHAVERO. 

Avenida    de    MadHd,    No.    17.    City    of 

Mexico,  Mexico. 
MRS  J.   FESSENDEN   CLARK, 

III;  Leavenworth  it..  San  Frandaeo,  CaL 
MRS  KATE  FOOTE  COE. 

Diawer  i,  New  Hivoi,  Conn. 
DR  A.  C  CONNON, 

MR    STEWART   CULIN,* 

Brooklyn    Inaiitute    MuKora,     Boole]  yn, 

N.    Y. 
DR   R.    G.    CURTIN,* 

ai  South  tgth  «t,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
UR  E.  S.  CURTIS, 

Seattle,  Waahington. 
PROF.  M.   M.   CURTIS,* 

WeMem   Reaerve   UniverBty,   Oeseland, 

Ohio. 
DR  WILLIAM  HARPER  DAVIS,* 

Leliish  Univeralty,  South  Bethlehem,  Pa. 
DR   GEORGE    V.    N.    DEARBORN, 

Tufti    College    Uedical    Sefaoot,    BoMon, 


UR  F.  S.  DELLENBAUGB,* 

16  Weat  6i(t  it..  New  York  City. 
UR   E.   W.   DEMING, 

II  Weat  14th  at   New  York  City. 
MR  G.  E.   DIUOCK,* 

EUiabeth,  New  Jeracy. 
DR  ROLAND  B.  DIXON,' 

Harvard  Univenity,  Cambridge,  Maaa. 
PROF.  R.  E.   DODGE,* 

Teachera   Colleie,    Columbia    Univerdty, 

New  YoA  City. 
DR  DAVID  J.  DOHERTY, 

jSi  La  Salle  ave.,    Chicago,  III. 
DR    GEORGE    A.    DORSEY,' 

Field   Columbian   Muacum.  Chicago,  IlL 
MISS  CONSTANCE  GODDARD  DU  BOIS,' 

Waterbury,   Cooneeticut. 
MR  CHRISTOPHER  EASTON, 

>90  Ttaamea  it,  Newport,  R.  I. 
DR    N.    B.    EMERSON, 

Box  fi4S,   Honolulu,  Hawaii. 
DR   WM.   C    FAKABEE, 

Peabody  Museum,  Cambridge,  Maaa. 
PROF.   AMOS   W.    FARNHAU. 

State  Normal  School.  Oawcgo,  New  Yoric. 
DR  LIVINGSTON  FARRAND,* 

Columbia  University,   New  Yoik  Gty. 
DR    J.    WALTER    FEWKES,' 

Bureau    of   American   Ethnologr,   Waah- 

ington,  D.  C. 
DR  CARL  FISCB, 

3)ta  I^ne  at,  St  Louii,  Mo. 
DR    MAURICE    FISHBERG, 

79  West  1 1 5th  St..  New  York  City. 
PROP.    IRVING    FISHER, 

460   Prospect  at..   New  Haven,   Conn. 
MISS  ALICE  C.  FLETCHER,* 

ai4  First  St.,  S.  E..  Wathington,  D.  C. 
DR  J.   M.   FLINT,* 

U.    S.    National    Muaeum,    WaahingtOD, 

D.  C. 
DR   WESTON   FLINT,* 

The  Cecil,  Washington,  D.  C. 
DR    DANIEL   FOLKMAR,* 

Bonioc  Lepanlo-Bontoe  Proviiwe,  Philip- 

PROF.    J.    FRYER. 

Univerdiy  of   California.  Berkeley.  Cat 
DR  WILLIAM  H.   FURNESS,  3d. 

Muaeum  of  Science  and  Art,  Univerti? 

of  Pennsylvania,  Philadelphia,  Fa. 
DR  DANIEL  GARCIA. 

Hospital    Mililar,    Guadalajara,    Jalisco, 

DR  E.  GATES,* 

Chevy  Cbase,    Maryland. 
MR   WILLIAM    R.    GERARD. 

134    Broadhurst    ave..    New    Yoik    City. 
PROP.    FRANKLIN    H.    GIDDINGS, 

Columbia  Univerdty,  New  York  Qty. 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  ASSOCIATION 


217 


DR  PUNY  £.  GODDARD, 

Unhreraity  of  California,  Betkeley,  CaL 
PROF.  W.  H.  GOODYEAR/ 

Brooklyn    Institute    Museum,    Brooklyn, 

New  York. 
DR  GEORGE  BYRON  GORDON, 

Museum  of  Science  and  Art,  University 

of  Pennsylvania,   Philadelphia,   Pa. 
MRS  FREDERICK  H.  GREEN, 

Oojme    Court,    Ridge    Road,    Berkeley, 

Cal. 
DR  GEORGE  BIRD  GRINNELL,* 

346  Broadway,  New  York  City. 
MR   STANSBURY  HAGAR.^ 

48  Wall  St,  New  York  City. 
MRS  JOHN  HAYS  HAMMOND, 

3a  Riverside  Drive,  New  Yoric  City. 
DR  R.   H.  HARPER, 

Afton,  Indian  Territory. 
MR  H.  H.  HARRISON, 

52   Broadway,   New  York  City. 
MRS  RALPH  C.   HARRISON, 

919  Pine  St.,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 
MR  C.  V.  HARTMAN, 

Carnegie  Museum,   Pittsburg,   Pa. 
MR  JOHN  WALTER  HASTINGS, 

Hastings      Hall,      Harvard      University, 

Cambridge,  Mass. 
DR  HENRY  W.  HAYNES,* 

339    Beacon   St.,   Boston,   Massachusetts. 
MRS  PHCEBE  A.  HEARST,* 

Pleasanton,    California. 
MRS  R.  F.  HERRICK, 

Eurdca,  Cal. 
MRS    ESTHER    HERRMAN.* 

59  West  56th  St.,  New  York  City. 
MR   RICHARD   HERRMANN,* 

Dubuque,    Iowa. 
MR   EDWARD  W.   HEUSINGER, 

1x3  City  St.,  San  Antonio,  Texas. 
PROF.  EDGAR  L.  HEWETT,* 

Care  U.  S.  National  Museum,  Washing- 
ton,  D.  C. 
MR  J.  N.  B.  HEWITT,* 

Bureau   of  American    Ethnology,   Wash- 
ington, D.  C. 
MR  GEORGE  G.  HEYE, 

52  Broadway,  New  York  City. 
MR   CHARLES  HILL-TOUT, 

Bvckland,   Abbotsford,   B.   C. 
MISS  CATHERINE  H.   HITTELL, 

808    Turk    St.,    San    Francisco,    Cal. 
MR  F.  W.  HODGE,* 

Bureau   of   American    Ethnology,   Wash- 
ington, D.  C. 
DR  WILLIAM  J.   HOLLAND.* 

Carnegie  Musetim,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 
MR  WILLIAM  H.  HOLMES,* 

Bureau   of   American    Ethnology,   Wash- 
ington, D.  C. 


MR  HOMER   E.   HOOPES, 

Media,  Pennsylvania. 
MRS  MILDRED  C.  B.  HOOVER, 

536  Middlefield   Road,   Palo  Alto,  CaU- 

fomia. 
DR  WALTER  HOUGH,* 

U.    S.    National    Museum,    Washington, 

D.  C. 
MRS  EMMA  SHAFTER  HOWARD, 

1206  Alice  St.,  Oakland,  Cal. 
DR  ALES  HRDLICKA, 

U.    S.    National    Museum,    Washington, 

D.   C. 
MR  J.  F.  HUCKEL,* 

Union  Station  Annex,  Kansas  City,  Mo. 
DR   J.   W.    HUDSON, 

Ukiah,    California. 
DR  H.  M.  HURD,* 

Johns  Hopkins  Hospital,  Baltimore,  Md. 
DR  JULIUS   H.   HURST, 

Box  X92,  Madison,  Connecticut. 
DR  WALTER  HURST, 

502  Stanyan  st.,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 
MR    DAVID   HUTCHESON,* 

Library  of  Congress,  Washington,  D.  C 
MR  B.  TALBOT  B.  HYDE, 

80  West  St,  New  York  Qty. 
MISS  ELIZABETH  M.  HYDE,* 

2x0  East   x8th  St.,  New  York  City. 
DR  H.  VON  IHERING, 

Museo  Paulista,  S&o  Paulo,  Brazil. 
MR  G.  WHARTON  JAMES,* 

X098  N.   Raymond  st.,  Pasadena,  Cal. 
DR  H.  JAYNE,* 

Wistar    Institute,    University    of    Penn- 
sylvania, Philadelphia,   Pa. 
DR  L.  W.  JENKINS, 

Peabody    Academy    of    Science,    Salem, 

Mass. 
DR  ALBERT  ERNEST  JENKS,* 

Elroy,    Wisconsin. 
DR   PHILIP   MILLS  JONES,* 

Room  I,  Y.  M.  C.  A.  Bldg.,  San  Fran- 
cisco, Cal. 
DR  DAVID  STARR  JORDAN,* 

Stanford  University,  California. 
DR  C.  H.  JUDD, 

Yale  University,  New  Haven,  Conn. 
DR  HERMAN  F.  ten  KATE. 

Care    Consul    for    Holland,    Yokohama, 

Japan. 
DR  H.  KINNER,* 

1103  Rutger  St.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 
DR   A.   KIRSCHMANN, 

Toronto   University,  Toronto,   Canada. 
DR  GEORGE  L.  KNAPP, 

226    Swift    Block,    Pueblo,    Colorado. 
DR   GEORGE   M.   KOBER,* 

x6oo  T  St.,  Washington,  D.  C. 


2l8 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


DR  A.   L.   KROEBER,* 

Affiliated  Colleges,  San  Frandaco,  Cal. 
MR  FRANaS  LA  FLESCHE, 

ax4  First  St.,  S.  £.,  Washington,  D.  C 
DR  BERTHOLD  LAUFER, 

American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 

New  Yotk  aty. 
MRS  MARIE  LUaLE  LA  MOREAUX, 

X50  Lear  st,  Dallas,  Texas. 
DR  R.  LEHMANN-NITSCHE,* 

Museo  de  la  Plata,  La  Plata,  Argentina. 
DR  J.  S.  LEMON,* 

Gardner,    Mass. 
DR  RODOLFO  LENZ, 

Casilla  844*  Santiago  de  Cliile,  Chile. 
DR  NICOLAS  LEON, 

xa  del  Fresno,  No.  15x0,  City  of  Mexico. 
MISS  ELIZABETH  J.  LETSON, 

Buffalo    Society    of    Natural    Sciences, 

Buffalo,  N.  Y. 
MR  EDWARD  UNDSEY,* 

Warren,  Pa. 
MR  REAMER  LING, 

St.    Johns,    Arizona. 
MR    WALTER    S.    LOGAN,* 

ar  WiUiam  st.  New  York  Qty. 
MR   M.    C    LONG,* 

Missouri  ave.  and  Main  st,  Kansas  City, 

Missouri. 
REV.  DR  JAMES  WILUAM  LOWBER, 

XX3    East    x8th    st,    Austin,    Texaa. 
DR  CARL  LUMHOLTZ.* 

x6  West  9th  st.  New  Yoric  Gty. 
MR  D.  WILLARD  LYON, 

Y.  M.  C.  A.,  15  B,  Peking  Road,  Shang- 
hai,   China. 
MR  STANLEY  McCORMICK.* 

7  Monroe  st,  Chicago,  Ills. 
DR  GEORGE  GRANT  MACCURDY,* 

Yale   University   Museum,    New   Hsven, 

Connecticut. 
DR  J.  B.  McGEE,* 

1405  Woodland  ave.,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 
DR  W  J  McGEE/ 

Saint  Louis  Public  Museum,   St   Louis, 

Missouri. 
MR  J.  D.  McGUIRE,* 

1834  1 6th  St.,  Washington,  D.  C. 
MR  CHARLES  PAUL  MACKIE, 

Englewood,   N.  J. 
MR    E.    L.    McLEOD, 

Bakersfield,    Cal. 
PROF.  JOHN  J.  McNULTY, 

X7  Lexington  ave..  New  York  City. 
MISS    EVA   MANNING. 

1330  Columbia  Road,  Washington,  D.  C. 
DR   F.  W.   MARLOW,* 

200  Highland  St.,   Syracuse,   New  Yoric. 
REV.    J.    D.    MARMOR, 

1638  Madison  ave.,   New  York  City. 


MISS  MYRA  B.  MARTIN,* 

27  William  st.  New  Yoric  City. 
DR  OTIS  T.  MASON,* 

U.    S.    National    Museum,    Waahington, 

D.  C. 
MR   ALBERT   MATTHEWS,* 

X45  Beacon  st,  Boston,  Mass. 
DR  C.  HART  MERRIAM, 

Department  of  Agriculture,  Washington, 

D.  C 
DR   JOHN   C    MERRIAM, 

University  of  California,   Bericeley,  CaL 
DR  MERTON  L.  MILLER,* 

Ethnological  Survey,  Manila,  P.  I. 
MISS   ELIZABETH  MILLS, 

Pacific  ave.  near  Devisadero,  San  Fran- 
cisco,   Cal. 
MR   OWEN  W.   MILLS, 

Millbury,  Mass. 
MR  W.  C  MILLS,* 

State  University,   Columbus,   Ohio. 
MR  E.  J.  MOLERA,* 

606  Qay  St.,  Ssn  Frandaco,  CaL 
PROF.   WILL  S.  MONROE, 

State  Normal  School,  Westfield,  Maas. 
MR    FREDERICK   MONSEN, 

Press  Club,  San  Frandaco,  Cal. 
MR  JAMES  MOONEY,* 

Bureau  of   American   Ethnology,    Wash- 

ington,  D.  C 
MR  GEORGE  F.  MOORE, 

1825  Park  Row  Bldg.,  New  York  City. 
MR  WARREN  K.  MOOREHEAD,* 

Phillips  Academy,  Andover,  Maas. 
REV.  A.  G.  MORICE,  O.  M.  I., 

Mission  City,   B.   C. 
DR    T.    F.    MOSES.* 

Worcester  Lane,  Waltham,  Mass. 
MR  L.  F.  MOTT.* 

17  Lexington  ave..  New  York  City. 
MR  JOHN  MURDOCH,* 

Public  Library,  Boston,  Mass. 
MR  WILLIAM  NELSON.* 

152    Market    st,    Paterson,    N.    J. 
DR  C.  F.  NEWCOMBE, 

105   Niagara  st.,  Victoria,   B.   C. 
DR  W.   W.   NEWELL, 

Cambridge,   Mass. 
MISS  GRACE  NICHOLSON. 

46  North  Los  Robles  ave..  Pasadena,  Cal. 
REV.  J.  B.  NIES,* 

Christ  Church.   Sharon,  Conn. 
DR   R.   J.   NUNN,* 

119   York   St.,    Savannah,   Georgia. 
MRS   ZELIA   NUTTALL.* 

Casa  Alvarado.  Coyoac&n,  D.  F.,  Mexico. 
MR  C.   L.  OWEN,* 

Field   Columbian   Museum,   Chicago,   III. 
MR  VICTOR  H.   PALSITS, 

Lenox  Library.  New  Yoric  City. 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  ASSOCIATION 


219 


DR  WILLIAM  F.  PARKS, 

X0J7  Goodfellow  avc,   St.  Lotiii,  Mo. 
MR  H.  H.  PARSONS,* 

84  Griswold  ft,    Detroit,   Michigan. 
DR  CHARLES  PEABODY/ 

X97  Brattle  st,  Cambridge,  Masa. 
MRS  LUCY  E.  PEABODY,* 

X430  Corona  at.,  Denver,  Colorado. 
PROF.  J.  E.  PEARCE,* 

Higli   School,   Aufltin,   Texaa. 
MRS  JAMES  SIDNEY  PECK, 

5   Waverly   Place,   Milwaukee,    Wia. 
MR  HAROLD  PEIRCE,^ 

22a  Drexel  Building,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
MR  GEORGE  H.  PEPPER,* 

American   Museum   of   Natural   Hiatory, 

New   York    City. 
PROF.  G.  H.  PERKINS,* 

Burlington,  Vermont. 
DR  C.  A.  PETERSON,* 

P.  O.  Box  980,  St.  Louis,  Missouri 
DR  W.  A.  PHILLIPS, 

xyxx  Hinman  ave.,  Evanston,  IlL 
DR  H.  PITTIER  DE  FABREGA,* 

Bureau  of  Plant  Induftry,  Waahington, 

D.  C. 
MRS  E.  B.  POWER. 

2437  Post  St.,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 
MR  A.  PRATT,  JR.,* 

a6  Bunnell  at.,  Bridgeport,  Connecticut. 
PROF.  J.  DYNELEY  PRINCE,* 

Columbia  University,  New  York  City. 
DR  T.  MITCHELL  PRUDDEN,* 

x6o  West  59th  St.,  New  York  City. 
MISS  ELIZABETH  DUNCAN  PUTNAM, 

Davenport,  Iowa. 
PROF.  F.  W.  PUTNAM,* 

Peabody  Museum,  Cambridge,  Mass. 
MR  JAMES  A.  REARDON, 

4371  West  Belle  pi.,  St  Louis,  Mo. 
DR  ADOLPH  C.  REICHARD, 

Oberlindau    78,    Frankfort,    a/M.,    Ger- 
many. 
MR   E.   W.    KICKER,* 

P.  O.  Box  5083.  Boston,  Massachusetts. 
DR  S.  A.  ROBINSON,* 

Covesville,  Va. 
DR  FRANCISCO  M.  RODRIGUEZ, 

Museo  Nacional,  City  of  Mexico,  Mexico. 
MISS  HELEN  rOcKER, 

2240  Pacific  ave.,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 
MR  CORNELIUS  E.  RUMSEY, 

Riverside,  Cal. 
MR  HORATIO  N.  RUST, 

South    Pasadena,    Cal. 
MRS  H.   L.  RYAN, 

2682  Sacramento  St.,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 
MR  EDWARD  SAPIR, 

9  St.   Nicholas  ave..  New  York  City. 


MR  HOMER  £.  SARGENT, 

Lakota  Hotel,    Chicago,   Ilia. 
PROF.  MARSHALL  H.  SAVILLE,* 

American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 

New  York  City. 
MR  SIDNEY  B.  SCHUYLER, 

705  Matket  sL,  St  Louis,  Mo. 
COL.  H.  L.  SCOTT,  U.  S.  A.,* 

Manila,    Philippine  lalanda. 
MISS  S.  A.  SCULL,* 

40  X  Water  st,  Smethport  Penn^ylrania. 
MRS  MARIANNA  P.  SEAMAN,* 

1424   Eleventh  at.,   N.   W.,  Waahington, 

D.  C. 
MR  A.  E.  SHELDON, 

Nebraska     Historical    Society,     Lincoln, 

Neb. 
DR  HERVEY  W.  SHIMER, 

5  Albemarle  Chambera,  Botton,  Matt. 
DR  C.  E.   SLOCUM,* 

Defiance,  Ohio. 
MR    HARLAN   I.   SMITH, 

American   Museum   of  Nattiral   Hiatory, 

New  York  City. 
MR  P.  S.  SPARKMAN, 

Valley  Center,- Cat 
MR  FRANK  G.  SPECK, 

Hackensack,  N.  J. 
MRS  DORCAS  L.  SPENCER, 

X324  Weber  St.,  Alameda,  Cat 
DR  EDWARD  ANTHONY  SPITZKA, 

66  Eaat  73d  St.,  New  York  City. 
DR   FREDERICK   STARR,* 

Chicago  Univeraity,  Chicago,  Illinois. 

MR  vilhjXlmur  STEFANSSON, 

Peabody   Museum,    Cambridge,   Mass. 
DR    KARL   voM   deh    STEINEN, 

I  Friedrichstr.,  Steglitz,  Berlin,  Germany. 
DR   JAMES   F.    STEVENS,* 

1 136    O    St.,    Lincoln,    Nebraska. 
DR  ALEXANDER  W.  STIRLING, 

Capital  City  Oub,  Atlanta,  Ga. 
PROF.   WILLIAM   G.   SUMNER, 

240  Edwards  St.,  New  Haven,  Conn. 
DR   JOHN    R.    SWANTON.* 

Bureau   of   American    Ethnology,    Wash- 
ington, D.  C. 
MR  ERASTUS  TEFFT, 

Hanover  Bank  Bldg,  New  York  City. 
MR  BENJAMIN  THAW,* 

Hotel  Saint  Regis,  New  York  Cty. 
DR  ALTON  H.  THOMPSON,* 

720   Kansas   ave.,   Topeka,   Kansas. 
PROF.    E.    L.    THORNDIKE,* 

Columbia  University,  New  York  City. 
MR  TOWNSEND  W.  THORNDIKE, 

22  Newbury  St.,  Boston,  Mass. 
MR  WILLIAM  WALLACE  TOOKER,* 

Sag  Harbor,  New  York. 


220 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


DR  A.  M.  TOZZ£R»* 

Peabody  Muaeum,  Cambridge,  Man. 
DR  MAX  UHLE, 

National   Archeological   Mtiaeum,    Lima, 

Peru. 
MR  H.  H,  VAIL,* 

American  Book  Co.,  Washington  Square, 

New  York  Qty. 
EUZABETH  J.  VAN  BEUREN, 

21  West  14th  sL,  New  York  City. 
DR  T.  WAYLAND  VAUGHAN,* 

U.    S.    National    Museum,    Washington, 

D.  C 
REV.    S.   P.   VERNER,* 

Tryon,    North    Carolina. 
MR  A.   C.  VROMAN,* 

Pasadena,   California. 
HON.  R.  E.  M.  GREGORIE  DE  WALLANT, 

Legacion  de  Russia,   4a  Bucareli,   1833, 

City  of  Mexico. 
MR  ATREUS  WANNER, 

York,   Pennsylvania. 
MISS  H.  NEWELL  WARDLE,* 

Academy  of  Natural  Sciences,  Philadel- 
phia, Pennsylvania. 
PROF.  H.  C.  WARREN,* 

Princeton,  New  Jersey. 
REV.   ANSELM   WEBER.   O.F.M., 

St.    Michaels,    Arizona. 
MR  F.  S.   WEBSTER.* 

Carnegie   Museum.    Pittsburg,    Pa. 
MR    GEORGE   A.    WEST, 

Highland    Boulevard,    Milwaukee,    Wis. 


DR  M.  F.  WHEATLAND,* 

84  John  St,   Newport,   Rhode  Island. 
DR  HENRY  M.  WHELPLEY, 

S34S  Albion  pi.,   St.   Louis,   Mo. 
JUDGE  JAMES  WICKERSHAM,* 

Fairbanks.   Alaska. 
PROF.  BURT  G.  WILDER, 

Cornell  University,  Ithaca,  N.  Y. 
DR   HARRIS   H.   WILDER, 

Smith    College.    Northampton,    Mass. 
MR  C.  C.  WILLOUGHBY.* 

Peabody  Museum.   Cambridge,   Mass. 
MR  J.  HOWARD  WILSON, 

561   N.  Broadway,  Yonkers,  New  York. 
PROF.   N.   H.   WINCHELL, 

University    of    Minnesota,    Minneapolis, 

Minnesota. 
DR  CLARK  WISSLER. 

American   Museum  of  Natural  History, 

New  York  Oty. 
DR  JAMES  H.  WOODS, 

2  Chestnut  St..  Boston,  Mass. 
DR  DEAN  C.  WORCESTER,* 

Manila.    Philippine   Islands. 
MR  CHRISTOPHER  WREN. 

Centre  St..  Pljrmouth.  Pennsylvania. 
PROF.  G.  FREDERICK  WRIGHT, 

Oberlin.  Ohio. 
DR  J.  H.  WRIGHT. 

38  Quincy  st.  Cambridge.  Mass. 
MR  JOHN  M.   WULFING. 

3448    Longfellow   boulevard,    St    Louis, 

Missouri. 


DECEASED  MEMBERS 


GUSTAV  BRUHL.* 
M.  A.  CLANCY.* 
WILLIAM  E.  DODGE.* 
GEORGE  J.  ENGLEMANN.* 
JOHN  H.  HINTON.* 


RICHARD  HODGSON.* 
WASHINGTON  MATTHEWS.* 
J.  W.  POWELL.* 
FRANK  RUSSELL.* 
ROLAND  B.  STEINER.* 


American  Anthropologist 


NEW   SERIES 


Vol.  8  April-June,  1906  No.  2 

RECENT  CAVE  EXPLORATION  IN  CALIFORNIA^ 

By  JOHN  C.  MERRIAM 

Introduction 

During  the  last  three  years  a  series  of  investigations  has  been 
carried  on  by  the  Department  of  Anthropology  of  the  University 
of  California,  with  a  view  to  determining,  if  possible,  the  time  when 
man  first  appeared  in  this  region.  As  cavern  deposits  have  fur- 
nished some  of  the  most  important  materials  in  the  study  of  early 
man  in  other  regions,  it  was  considered  desirable,  as  one  of  the 
phases  of  this  work,  to  make  a  careful  paleontological  and  archeolog- 
ical  investigation  of  the  numerous  limestone  caves  of  the  state.  In 
this  study  the  effort  has  been  made  to  obtain  as  complete  a  knowledge 
as  possible  of  the  mammalian  faunas  which  have  existed  in  this  region 
between  early  Quaternary  time  and  the  present.  Man  is  considered 
as  a  possible  element  of  the  fauna,  and  so  far  as  his  geographic  or 
his  geologic  occurrence  is  concerned  he  must  be  subjected  to  investi- 
gations of  much  the  same  character  as  are  used  in  the  study  of  other 
organisms.  Until  the  facts  of  this  class  are  determined,  it  is  diffi- 
cult to  make  a  beginning  on  matters  which  are  perhaps  more  defi- 
nitely anthropological. 

The  discovery  of  human  relics,  apparently  in  association  with 
remains  belonging  to  a  Quaternary  fauna,  in  the  extreme  southern 
portion  of  South  America  leads  one  to  suspect  that  an  early  migra- 
tion of  the  human  type  may  have  passed  over  North  America  into 

^  Read  at  the  meeting  of  the  AmericaD  ADthropological  AssodatioD,  San  Francisco, 
August  30,  1905.  Including  a  partial  report  to  the  American  Committee  of  the  Archaeo- 
logical Institute  of  America  on  the  explorations  made  under  an  appropriation  by  the  com- 
mittee for  the  work  in  1905. 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  8-X5  221 


222  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

South  America.  That  other  mammalian  types  came  into  America 
in  fairiy  recent  geological  time  we  know,  and  there  is  no  inherent 
improbability  in  the  theory  that  man  came  with  the  other  mam- 
mals. If  his  remains  are  found  with  a  Quaternary  fauna  in  the 
southern  continent  there  is  good  reason  why  we  should  search 
for  them  here. 

Up  to  the  present  time  only  a  few  caves  situated  in  Calaveras 
county  and  in  Shasta  county  have  been  examined.  Many  other 
occurrences  are  known,  but  limitations  of  time  have  made  it  impos- 
sible to  visit  these  localities.  One  would  hardly  be  justified  in  stat- 
ing that  as  yet  more  than  a  beginning  has  been  made  on  the  pos- 
sible cave  investigations  of  California.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  in 
time  these  studies,  in  connection  with  the  other  phases  of  this  work, 
may  give  us  some  definite  information  regarding  the  date  of  man's 
appearance  in  the  Pacific  Coast  region. 

Mercer's  Cave 

In  the  summer  of  190 1  Professor  F.  W.  Putnam  and  the  writer 
examined  several  caves  in  the  vicinity  of  Murphys,  Calaveras  county, 
and  in  1902  Dr  W.  J.  Sinclair  visited  a  number  of  caverns  in  the 
same  region.  The  most  interesting  remains  encountered  were  those 
in  the  well-known  Mercer's  cave  near  Murphys.  In  this  cavern  there 
were  found  a  number  of  bones  of  an  extinct  ground-sloth,  which 
has  recently  been  described  by  Dr  Sinclair  as  the  type  of  a  new 
species,  Megalonyx  sierrensis}  The  bones  of  this  animal  were  cov- 
ered with  a  deposit  of  stalagmite,  ranging  from  a  few  millimeters  to 
about  half  an  inch  in  thickness.  From  their  situation  it  appeared 
that  the  body  of  the  animal  had  fallen  into  the  main  chute  of  the  cave, 
and  in  the  process  of  decay  the  remains  had  been  scattered  for  a 
considerable  distance  along  the  passageway.  In  the  same  cavern, 
although  not  in  close  proximity  to  the  Megalonyx  remains,  there 
were  found  a  number  of  human  bones  bearing  a  very  thin  calcareous 
incrustation.  It  appears  that  in  this  region  it  has  been  at  some 
time  the  custom  of  the  aborigines  to  throw  the  bodies  of  their  dead 
into  such  caverns  as  this,  and  in  places  great  numbers  of  skeletons 

»  Wm.  J.  Sinclair,  New  Mammalia  from  the  Quaternary  Caves  of  California,  Publ. 
Univ,  Calif. y  Geology,  vol.  4,  no.  7,  p.  155. 


MERRIAM]   RECENT  CAVE  EXPLORATION  IN  CALIFORNIA  223 

have  accumulated.  The  human  bones  found  in  this  cave  were  in 
such  position  as  to  indicate  that  they  had  been  thrown  into  the  first 
chamber  through  the  small  opening  above,  while  the  Megalonyx 
remains  had  fallen  some  distance  below  this  chamber.  While  it  is 
exceedingly  difficult  to  form  any  estimate  of  the  relative  ages  of  the 
human  bones  and  the  Megalonyx  remains,  such  evidence  as  we  have 
seems  to  indicate  that  the  remains  of  man  are  the  younger,  as  they 
are  nearer  the  opening  and  are  covered  A\4th  a  much  thinner  layer 
of  stalagmidc  material.  The  human  bones  are,  however,  probably 
many  years  old.  While  the  relative  thickness  of  the  covering  of 
stalagmite  is  in  itself  no  absolute  criterion  as  to  the  age  of  the  en- 
closed material,  as  it  may  accumulate  very  rapidly  in  one  place  and 
very  slowly  in  another  place,  it  is  probable  that  the  thinner  layer  on 
the  human  bones  means  a  shorter  period  of  entombment. 

Potter  Creek  Cave 

The  most  extensive  investigations  of  the  caverns  have  been  car- 
ried on  in  Shasta  county.  In  this  region  two  large  caves  have  been 
very  carefully  explored  and  the  principal  deposits  almost  completely 
worked  over.  These  are  Potter  Creek  cave,  on  the  McCloud  river, 
near  Baird,  and  the  Samwel  cave,  on  the  same  river,  fifteen  miles 
above  Baird. 

Potter  Creek  cave  was  the  first  to  be  the  subject  of  careful  in- 
vestigation. It  was  discovered  in  1878  by  Mr  J.  A.  Richardson, 
and  by  him  several  specimens  of  fossil  bones  were  sent  to  Professor 
E.  D.  Cope.  In  the  summer  of  1902  Mr  E.  L.  Furlong  explored 
the  cave  again,  without  knowing  that  it  was  the  one  discovered  by 
Mr  Richardson.  Large  deposits  of  fossil  remains  were  found,  and 
excavation  work  was  carried  on  by  him  and  by  Dr  Sinclair  through 
that  season.  Throughout  the  whole  of  the  summer  of  1903  the 
work  was  in  charge  of  Dr  Sinclair,  whose  excellent  report  *  on  this 
work  has  already  been  published.  The  floor  of  the  cave  was  care- 
fully surveyed  and  all  specimens  taken  out  were  labeled  with  refer- 
ence to  their  position  in  the  strata.  The  deposits  were  excavated  to 
a  depth  of  25   feet,  below  which  there  seemed  to  be  little  but  an 


*  PubL  Univ.  Calif, ^  North  Amer.  Archseol.  and  Ethnol.,  vol.  2,  no.  I. 


224  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

accumulation  of  stalagmite-covered  bowlders.  The  exploration 
work  furnished  several  thousand  bones  and  fragments,  of  which 
between  4,000  and  5,000  were  determinable  specimens.  The  re- 
mains include  those  of  many  extinct  animals,  and  furnish  the  most 
satisfactory  representation  of  the  Quaternary  fauna  of  California  that 
has  yet  been  obtained  in  any  one  locality.  Fifty-two  species  were 
listed  by  Dr  Sinclair,  of  which  at  least  twenty-one  were  found  to  be 
extinct. 

Associated  with  the  remains  of  the  Quaternary  fauna  in  Potter 
Creek  cave  there  were  many  broken,  splintered,  and  polished  bones, 
which  were  carefully  investigated  by  Dr  Sinclair,  having  been  con- 
sidered as  possibly  representing  the  work  of  man.  The  presence  of 
the  splintered  bones  is  yet  to  be  thoroughly  satisfactorily  explained, 
though  there  are  many  ways  in  which  they  might  have  been  formed 
or  introduced.  In  the  caves  of  Europe  such  splintered  bones  are 
in  part  due  to  the  splintering  of  long-bones  of  large  mammals  by 
man,  and  in  part  to  the  crushing  of  such  bones  by  the  larger  car- 
nivores. 

The  character  of  the  pointed  and  polished  bones  figured  by  Dr 
Sinclair  in  his  paper  is  also  difficult  to  determine  with  certainty. 
These  polished  fragments  strongly  resemble  many  of  the  roughest 
implements  found  in  the  deposits  of  the  shell-mounds  of  the  Pacific 
coast.  Possibly  they  have  been  rough  bone  splinters,  used  by  man 
until  they  attained  the  degree  of  polish  which  we  find  upon  them. 
On  the  other  hand  it  is  noted  that  in  nearly  all  shell-mound  frag- 
ments the  polish  is  mainly  upon  the  pointed  portion  of  the  imple- 
ment, while  the  portions  not  used  for  active  work  may  be  almost 
without  smoothing  or  polish.  In  the  specimens  from  the  caves  the 
polish  is  almost  perfectly  even  over  the  whole  surface  in  every  case. 
The  evenness  of  this  polish  seems  to  indicate  that,  if  these  objects 
were  used  as  implements,  special  pains  must  have  been  taken  to 
polish  those  portions  which  would  in  the  course  of  ordinary  use  be 
left  rough.  Such  smoothing  as  we  see  here  may  perhaps  be  as 
readily  explained  by  the  action  of  water  as  by  any  other  means, 
the  fragments  being  rubbed  on  all  sides  and  evenly  polished. 

In  other  bone  fragments,  peculiar  perforations  and  notches  have 
been  noted  which  are  not  easily  explained  by  the  operation  of 


MERRIAM]   RECENT  CAVE  EXPLORATION  IN  CALIFORNIA  22$ 

natural  processes,  but  which  could  be  accounted  for  by  perforation 
through  human  agency.  Of  all  the  evidence  which  has  been 
advanced  in  favor  of  the  influence  of  man  in  the  production  of 
implement-like  objects  found  in  the  Shasta  caves,  the  evidence  of 
perforation  seems  probably  the  strongest.  A  serious  doubt  must 
exist,  however,  as  to  whether  the  presence  of  only  a  few  somewhat 
indefinite  perforations  in  a  very  small  number  out  of  several  thousand 
of  these  fragments  should  be  considered  proof  of  the  presence  of 
man.  Had  a  large  percentage  of  the  fragments  been  formed  and 
used  by  man,  evidence  of  a  more  definite  character  ought  to  be 
present  in  abundance. 

While  it  is  probably  true  that  as  yet  no  unequivocal  evidence  of 
the  agency  of  man  in  the  fashioning  of  the  bone  fragments  from 
this  cave  has  been  presented,  in  all  fairness  to  those  who  may 
undertake  from  the  study  of  such  materials  to  give  us  something 
of  the  earliest  history  of  the  human  race,  we  should  not  forget  that, 
at  the  very  period  where  the  discrimination  between  artifacts  and 
natural  objects  is  most  important  it  becomes  most  difficult.  In  the 
early  stages  of  the  development  of  man,  such  implements  as  were 
used  by  him  were  probably  in  many  cases  simply  special  forms  of 
natural  objects  which  were,  in  their  original  form,  well  adapted  to 
meet  his  primitive  needs.  The  earliest  true  artifacts  were  objects  of 
this  class  showing  only  a  little  modification. 

A  more  detailed  discussion  of  the  peculiarly  marked  bone 
fragments  from  the  California  caves  is  presented  by  Professor  F.  W. 
Putnam  in  a  paper  on  this  subject  appearing  also  in  this  number  of 
the  American  Anthropologist, 

Samwel  Cave 

The  exploration  of  the  Samwel  cave,  in  the  Shasta  region,  has 
been  carried  on  by  Mr  E.  L.  Furlong  through  parts  of  the  seasons 
1903,  1904,  and  1905.'  This  cave  is  somewhat  larger  than  the  one 
at  Potter  creek  and  contains  several  chambers  of  considerable  size. 
The  largest  chamber  had  not  been  entered  previous  to  1903,  when 
it  was  explored  by  Mr  Furlong  and  the  writer. 

1  The  explorations  during  the  season  of  1905  were  carried  on  under  an  appropriation 
from  the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America  for  the  **  Exploration  of  Caves  in  Northern 
California  under  the  supervision  of  F.  W.  Putnam/' 


226  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8, 1906 

Opening  into  one  of  the  passageways  about  100  feet  from  the 
entrance  is  a  fissure  containing  a  small  alluvial  fan,  which  opens 
out  on  the  floor  of  the  chamber.  This  deposit  appears  to  have 
accumulated  through  the  entrance  of  material  from  the  upper  part 
of  the  fissure.  The  entrance  is  now  closed  with  a  stalagmite  growth, 
and  no  clue  to  its  position  has  yet  been  obtained  from  the  study  of 
the  surface  of  the  rock  outside.  In  small  pockets  on  the  sides  of 
the  fissure,  and  in  the  deposit  below,  there  have  been  found  large 
numbers  of  bone  fragments  representing  a  Quaternary  fauna.  These 
include  remains  of  extinct  species  ^  of  Equus^  Elephas,  and  Ursus  ; 
also  remains  of  Euceratherium,^  a  recently  described  sheep- like  un- 
gulate found  in  these  caves,  and  bones  of  a  ground-sloth  somewhat 
similar  to  forms  found  in  the  caves  of  Brazil.* 

The  largest  chamber  of  the  Samwel  cave  is  at  a  lower  level  than 
the  entrance  and  the  fissure  deposit.  It  was  entered  from  above 
through  a  long  chimney.  In  this  chamber  there  was  found  a 
large  deposit  of  fossil  remains,  including  numerous  extinct  species. 
Among  these  were  Euceratherium^  Preptoceras^  (another  new  sheep- 
like form),  and  a  ground-sloth.  It  seemed  improbable  that  the 
remains  in  this  lower  chamber  had  come  in  through  the  passage  by 
which  we  first  obtained  entrance,  and  a  careful  search  revealed  the 
presence  of  an  alluvial  fan  coming  in  from  one  side  of  the  cavern. 
Excavations  into  this  indicated  that  it  reached  out  toward  the  sur- 
face, and  during  the  last  season  a  passageway  was  cut  through  it  to 
an  outer  grotto  on  the  side  of  a  small  canon  near  by.  The  lower 
chamber  was  originally  reached  by  a  passageway  leading  from  a  large 
shelter  cave  now  represented  by  the  grotto.  A  part  of  the  roof  of 
the  original  shelter  has  broken  down,  and  is  represented  by  several 
large  blocks  which  have  fallen  from  the  cliff  above. 

In  the  Samwel  cave  numerous  splintered  and  polished  bone  frag- 
ments have  been  obtained,  and  the  problems  with  relation  to  man 
are  practically  the  same  as  those  of  Potter  Creek  cave.  In  addition 
to  these  objects,  there  was  found  in  the  chamber  near  the  fissure  de- 


^  See  E.  L.  Furlong  in  Science^  n.  s.,  vol.  20,  p.  53. 

<  Sinclair  and  Furlong,  Univ.  Calif.  PubL^  Geology,  vol.  3,  no.  20. 

'Sinclair,  New  Mammalia,  op.  cit.,  p.  153. 

*E.  L.  Furlong,  Univ,  Calif,  PubL^  Geology,  vol.  4,  no.  8. 


MERRiAM]    RECENT  CAVE  EXPLORATION  IN  CALIFORNIA  22/ 

• 

posit,  a  chipped  fragment  of  basaltic  lava,  which  appeared  to  have 
come  from  a  point  six  inches  below  the  surface  of  the  stalagmite. 
Also  in  the  excavation  of  the  outer  grotto  of  the  lai^est  chamber, 
a  chipped  obsidian  fragment  was  brought  up  in  the  bucket  from  a 
depth  of  eleven  feet,  at  which  level  bones  resembling  those  of  an 
extinct  species  have  been  obtained.  In  neither  case,  however,  was 
the  chipped  fragment  actually  seen  in  place,  and  both  must  be  set 
aside,  for  the  present,  as  merely  suggesting  the  presence  of  man. 

Stone  Man  Cave 

A  third  cavern  in  the  Shasta  region,  which  has  been  partly 
explored,  is  the  Stone  Man  cave  about  one  mile  northeast  of  Baird. 
It  was  visited  by  Mr  Furlong  and  the  writer  in  1903.  In  one 
of  the  uppermost  chambers  a  number  of  bone  fragments  were 
found  in  the  stalagmite.  These  were,  however,  too  imperfect  for 
specific  determination,  and  the  age  of  the  deposit  has  not  been 
determined.  In  one  of  the  lower  galleries,  a  portion  of  a  human 
skeleton  was  found  imbedded  in  the  stalagmite.  The  greater  num- 
ber of  the  bones  had  been  removed  before  our  visit,  but  enough  was. 
left  to  show  that  a  considerable  fraction  of  an  inch  of  stalagmite  has 
accumulated  on  the  skeleton.  Mr  J.  A.  Richardson  kindly  gave  us 
a  vertebra  which  he  obtained  here  when  the  cave  was  first  explored. 
It  seems  to  have  lost  practically  all  of  the  organic  matter,  and  the 
cavities  in  the  bone  are  largely  filled  with  calcite  crystals.  In  this 
cave  there  is  unfortunately  nothing  to  fix  the  age  of  the  skeleton 
definitely.  It  might  easily  be  many  centuries  old,  or  might  have 
come  to  its  present  location  at  a  comparatively  recent  date,  though 
evidence  rather  favors  a  considerable  antiquity. 

Age  of  the  Cave  Deposits 

The  faunas  of  both  the  Potter  Creek  and  the  Samwel  cave  indicate 
Quaternary  age.  As  far  as  is  now  known,  the  fauna  of  Samwel 
cave  contains  the  larger  percentage  of  recent  species  and  is  proba- 
bly the  younger.  In  addition  to  this  evidence,  the  situation  of  the 
two  caverns  gives  considerable  information  regarding  their  relative 
ages.  Potter  Creek  cave  is  situated  at  a  height  of  800  feet  above 
the  level  of  McCloud  river,  and  just  below  an  ancient  terrace  level 


228  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

of  the  river.  The  Satnwel  cave  is  situated  just  below  a  terrace  350 
feet  above  the  McCloud.  The  lowest  chamber  of  this  cave  opens  at 
a  point  not  more  than  200  feet  above  the  river.  Both  caverns  were 
evidently  formed  at  a  time  when  McCIoud  river  was  near  the  level  of 
the  terraces  above  them.  Both  received  their  principal  deposits  when 
the  river  was  a  short  distance  below  them,  and  it  is  evident  that  the 
time  which  has  elapsed  since  the  formation  of  the  deposits  in  Potter 
Creek  cave  is  much  greater  than  that  since  the  formation  of  similar 
beds  in  the  Samwel  cave.  The  evidence  of  physiography  appar- 
ently corroborates  that  obtained  from  the  study  of  the  fauna. 

The  fauna  of  Potter  Creek  cave  is  considered  by  Dr  Sinclair  to 
represent  the  middle  or  later  Quaternary.  The  fauna  of  Samwel 
cave  is  certainly  Quaternary,  but  is  evidently  later  than  that  of 
Potter  Creek.  The  age  of  Potter  Creek  cave  is,  according  to  com- 
monly accepted  correlations,  not  far  from  that  of  the  earliest  deposits 
containing  human  remains  in  Europe.  Though  a  reasonable  doubt 
might  arise  as  to  whether  man  could  have  reached  America  as  early 
as  the  date  of  the  Potter  Creek  deposits,  the  age  of  Samwel  cave 
appears  to  be  within  the  period  of  man's  existence  in  the  old  world. 

From  the  evidence  at  hand  it  seems  that  both  Mercer's  cave 
and  Stone  Man  cave  were  in  existence  in  Quaternary  time,  and 
in  all  probability  some  of  the  deposits  in  both  caverns  were  formed 
in  that  period. 

University  of  California, 
Bfrkeley. 


EVIDENCE  OF    THE  WORK    OF    MAN    ON    OBJECTS 
FROM   QUATERNARY  CAVES   IN   CALIFORNIA^ 

By  F.  W.  PUTNAM 

In  the  investigations  of  the  Quaternary  caves  of  California  which 
have  been  carried  on  by  the  Department  of  Anthropology  of  the 
University  of  California  during  the  last  few  years,  there  have  been 
discovered  a  considerable  number  of  bone  and  several  stone  frag- 
ments apparently  indicating  the  work  of  man.  If  these  specimens 
are  actually  the  evidence  of  man's  work,  it  is  of  the  utmost  impor- 
tance to  have  the  facts  brought  out,  as  the  objects  in  question  have 
been  found  associated  with  a  fauna  which  represents  an  epoch  con- 
siderably antedating  the  end  of  the  Quaternary  period,  and  would 
indicate  human  occupancy  of  this  portion  of  the  continent  at  a  very 
remote  period.* 

The  specimens  that  seem  to  exhibit  evidence  of  human  handi- 
work of  the  Quaternary  period  include  a  number  of  polished  and 
pointed  bone  fragments  in  most  respects  similar  to  the  rougher 
instruments  from  the  shell-mounds,  and  several  other  fragments 
with  perforations  of  such  a  character  that  it  seems  impossible  to 
explain  their  presence  excepting  by  the  agency  of  man.  With 
these  more  definite  evidences  of  man's  presence  there  are  found  in 
the  same  strata  large  numbers  of  splintered  bones,  such  as  else- 
where form  a  considerable  part  of  the  deposits  in  caves  or  in  shell- 
mounds  that  have  served  as  places  of  human  habitation  in  prehis- 
toric time. 

Another  class  of  objects  from  the  caves,  which  must  be  consid- 
ered in  connection  with  the  bone  specimens,  consists  of  stone  frag- 
ments exhibiting  the  undoubted  work  of  man  and  showing  some 
evidence  of  having  been  buried  in  strata  containing  the  remains  of 
extinct  animals. 


*  Read  at  the  meeting  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association,  San  Francisco, 
August  29,  1905. 

'  For  a  description  of  these  caves  and  a  discussion  of  their  geological  age,  see  the 
preceding  paper  by  Dr  J.  C.  Merriam. 

229 


^ 


230  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8, 1906 

Of  the  first  class  of  objects  three  are  figured  by  Dr  Sinclair  in 
his  paper  on  the  exploration  of  Potter  Creek  cave.*  Two  figures 
of  one  of  these  bones  are  reproduced  here  (pi.  xvii,  figs,  i,  2). 
This  specimen  (no.  3894)  exhibits  quite  remarkable  oblique  beveled 
edges.  The  inner  side  of  the  specimen  shows  this  very  clearly, 
while  the  sharp  edge  produced  is  shown  in  the  outer  view.  It  is 
difficult  to  understand  how,  by  any  natural  process,  beveling  and 
smoothing  of  this  character  could  have  been  produced,  working 
from  two  edges  to  a  terminal  point.  Moreover,  the  beveling  ex- 
tends from  the  softer  inner  portion  of  the  bone  to  the  denser  outer 
layers,  producing  the  sharp  edge  where  it  is  most  useful.  At  the 
end  opposite  to  the  beveled  portion  of  this  specimen  is  a  distinct 
notch,  quite  different  from  the  ordinary  reentrant  angles  in  flaked 
or  broken  bone.  Its  appearance  on  the  same  fragment  with  the 
extraordinary  bevel-edge  point,  giving  evidence  of  the  action  of 
two  quite  different  influences  on  the  bone,  makes  both  the  beveled 
end  and  the  notch  appear  all  the  more  remarkable.^ 

Of  the  fragments  showing  perforations  there  are  two  that  have 
been  made  the  subject  of  special  study.  The  first  of  these,  no. 
3959  (pi.  XV,  figs.  1-4;  pi.  XVI,  figs.  3,  4),  is  a  thick  fragment  of 
bone  showing  several  notches  or  perforations  that  do  not  appear  to 
have  been  formed  in  any  natural  way.  It  was  found  by  Mr  Sin- 
clair between  70  and  80  inches  below  the  surface  in  section  7  of  the 
deposits  in  Potter  Creek  cave.  Possible  explanations  of  the  occur- 
rence of  the  foramina  in  this  specimen  are  that  they  are  natural ; 
that  they  have  been  formed  by  the  gnawing  of  rodents  or  the  bor- 
ing of  insects  ;  or  that  they  have  been  produced  by  heavy,  angular 
bodies  falling  upon  them,  the  rough  edges  afterward  being  smoothed 
by  water  action.  In  order  to  test  these  suggestions  as  carefully  as 
possible,  every  effort  has  been  made  to  determine  the  particular  bone 


^  Univef  sity  of  California  Publications^  American  Archaeology  and  Ethnology,  vol. 
2,  no.  I. 

'The  plate  in  Mr  Sinclair's  paper  contains  for  comparison  the  figures  of  two  un- 
questionable bone  implements  from  the  ancient  shell-heap  at  Emeryville,  and  any  one 
familiar  with  the  pointed  and  cutting  implements  made  of  splinters  of  bone,  which  are 
so  abundant  in  shell-heaps  and  other  accumulations  of  human  debris,  will  readily  accept 
these  pointed  and  perforated  bone  splinters  from  the  caves  as  implements  of  the  same 
character. 


PUTNAM]  QUATERNARY  MAN  IN  CALIFORNIA  23 1 

or  part  of  bone  which  this  fragment  represents.  After  having 
passed  through  the  hands  of  Mr  Sinclair,  who  did  not  reach  a  defin- 
ite conclusion  as  to  its  character,  the  specimen  was  examined  by  a 
number  of  eminent  comparative  anatomists,  including  Dr  G.  H. 
Parker,  Dr  W.  D.  Mathews,  Mr  J.  W.  Gidley,  Mr  F.  A.  Lucas,  Dr 
A.  HrdliCka,  and  Dr  F.  W.  True,  all  of  whom  agree  that  the  per- 
forations are  not  natural.  Messrs  Mathews  and  Gidley  have  kindly 
expressed  their  opinion  in  the  following  statement : 

*'  Specimen  (no.  3959)  from  Pleistocene  cave  deposit  of  Potter  creek, 
California,  submitted  for  examination  by  Professor  Putnam. 

' '  The  specimen  is  a  fragment  of  a  shaft  of  a  limb-bone  of  some  mam- 
mal. It  is  too  much  worn  and  uncharacteristic  for  positive  identification, 
but  appears  to  be  part  of  the  humerus  of  a  ruminant,  probably  from  the 
external  side  near  the  distal  end  of  the  shaft,  and  compares  most  nearly 
with  Ovibos.  It  is  pierced  by  a  complete  circular  hole  and  deeply  notched 
by  a  much  larger  oval  hole  of  which  the  outer  side  is  broken  away.  These 
are  not  like  the  natural  foramina  of  bones  in  the  appearance  of  their 
edges,  nor  is  there  any  possible  identification  of  the  fragment  in  question 
which  would  give  them  the  position  and  size  of  naturally  occurring  for- 
amina. 

**  They  are  not  the  work  of  water  acting  by  solution,  as  shown  by  the 
uniform  diameter  and  regularly  circular  form  of  the  smaller  one,  and  the 
beveled,  not  rounded,  edges  of  the  larger  one. 

*  *  They  are  not  the  work  of  insects  or  of  boring  molluscs,  as  is  proved 
by  the  slight  beveling  of  the  external  and  rounding  of  the  internal  mar- 
gin of  the  smaller  hole,  and  by  the  strong  and  irregular  beveling  of  the 
larger  one,  as  well  as  by  other  features  of  position,  direction,  etc. 

*  *  They  are  not  the  work  of  rodents  :  this  explanation  is  out  of  the 
question  for  the  smaller  hole,  and  must  be  rejected  for  the  larger  one  from 
the  absence  of  any  marks  of  gnawing  teeth  around  the  margin  of  the  hole, 
its  form,  the  thickness  of  the  bone  at  the  part  pierced,  and  other  consid- 
erations. Parts  of  the  edges  of  the  fragment  bear  the  marks  of  gnawing 
teeth  very  clearly  defined ;  this  gnawing  must  have  occurred  after  the 
fragment  was  broken  to  its  present  form,  while  the  larger  hole  was  made 
when  it  was  more  complete  than  it  now  is. 

*  *  These  holes  could  not  have  been  punctured  by  the  teeth  of  carniv- 
ora,  the  beveling  of  the  edges  of  the  larger  hole,  and  the  small  size  and 
uniform  diameter  of  the  smaller  one  forbidding  it. 

**  The  only  alternative  of  which  we  can  conceive,  and  in  our  view  the 


232  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

only  possible  explanation  of  these  holes  is  that  they  are  the^work  of  man. 
The  end  of  the  fragment  has  also  two  or  more  slight  notches,  the  margin 
of  which  is  like  that  of  the  incomplete  hole  mentioned.  These  also  are 
probably  of  artificial  origin  and  can  hardly  be  explained  by  natural  splin- 
tering of  the  bone,  or  as  the  work  of  carnivora  or  rodents. 

"  We  therefore  endorse  without  question  Professor  Putnam's  view 
that  this  bone  certainly  shows  the  handiwork  of  man,  and  we  take  pleas- 
ure in  expressing  our  acknowledgments  for  the  privilege  of  examining  it. 

[Signed]  *'W.  D.  Matthew,  J.  W.  Gidley. 

"American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
February  second^  ^^^j.** 

As  the  musk-ox  is  unknown  in  the  Shasta  cave  fauna  it  is  not 
probable  that  this  specimen  represents  a  bone  of  one  of  these 
animals.  There  were,  however,  in  these  caves  abundant  remains 
of  the  new  genus  Euceratherium,  a  large  sheep-like  animal  related 
to  the  musk-ox  and  possessing  bones  quite  similar  in  form  and 
size.  Euceratherium  was  one  of  the  more  common  ungulates  at  the 
period  when  the  cave  deposit  was  forming  and  would  have  served 
as  one  of  the  principal  food  supplies  for  early  man  if  he  were  living  in 
this  region  at  the  time.  The  form  of  this  fragment  agrees  as  closely 
with  that  of  the  distal  end  of  the  humerus  of  Euceratherium  as  it 
does  with  that  of  Ovtbos,  and  there  is  good  reason  for  believing  that 
it  represents  that  bone.  In  the  humerus  of  Euceratherium  the  fora- 
mina are  similar  to  those  in  Ovibos,  and  there  are  no  natural  openings 
that  correspond  to  the  perforations  seen  here. 

The  smaller  completely  enclosed  perforation  in  the  specimen 
(pi.  XV,  figs.  2,  3,  4 ;  pi.  XVI,  fig.  4)  is  almost  circular  in  outline, 
is  nearly  normal  to  the  surface  of  the  bone,  and  is  slightly  beveled 
on  the  margins.  The  cutting  of  the  hole  and  the  beveling  are  not 
accompanied  by  much  cutting  of  the  natural  canals  of  the  bone, 
but  the  form  and  direction  of  the  holes  are  not  comparable  with 
those  of  ordinary  natural  foramina. 

Close  to  the  smaller  perforation  is  an  exceedingly  small  open- 
ing, about  half  a  millimeter  in  diameter,  indicated  in  the  illustra- 
tions (pi.  XV,  fig.  4 ;  pi.  XVI,  fig.  4)  by  a  bristle.  It  may  represent 
a  natural  foramen  or  it  may  be  artificial  ;  it  is  difficult  to  determine 
its  true  nature. 


I«  of  iplinltred  fnigmc 


PUTNAM]  QUATERNARY  MAN  IN  CALIFORNIA  233 

The  second  specimen,  no.  3756  (pi.  xvi,  figs,  i,  2),  represents 
a  large  fragment  splintered  fi'om  a  heavy  limb  bone.  It  was  ob- 
tained 40-50  inches  below  the  surface  in  section  6  of  the  Potter 
Creek  cave.  One  end  is  pointed  and  somewhat  beveled  by  splint- 
ering, the  other  is  slightly  worn  and  has  been  much  gnawed  by 
rodents.  In  the  rough  end  of  the  fragment  is  a  nearly  circular 
hole,  about  3  mm.  in  diameter,  cutting  the  bone  along  a  line  nearly 
normal  to  its  outer  surface.  The  hole  is  quite  sharply  cut,  and  the 
edges,  both  at  the  outer  and  the  inner  ends  of  the  aperture  are  very 
little  worn.  Viewed  from  the  inner  side  by  means  of  a  hand  lens 
one  can  see  that  the  coarser  canals  of  the  bone  are  distinctly  cut 
across  by  this  perforation.  Although  I  am  not  able  to  determine 
with  certainty  the  bone  from  which  this  fragment  came,  it  is  prob- 
ably a  splinter  of  a  leg  bone  of  one  of  the  large  ungulates.  The 
opening  appears  quite  different  from  a  natural  foramen,  as  the  edges 
are  sharp  and  the  canals  of  the  bone  are  crossed  in  an  unnatural 
manner.  The  course  of  the  opening,  moreover,  is  transverse  to 
the  axis  of  the  bone,  whereas  most  foramina  in  bones  of  this  char- 
acter enter  at  an  angle  of  less  than  90  degrees. 

It  should  be  noted  in  connection  with  the  study  of  this  speci- 
men that  the  end  in  which  the  perforation  occurs  is  somewhat  worn 
and  that  the  opposite  end  is  splintered  in  such  a  way  as  to  form  a 
natural  bevel  on  both  sides,  coming  to  a  point  somewhat  as  in 
specimen  no.  3894  described  above.  While  I  do  not  wish  to  assert 
positively  that  this  opening  was  made  by  the  hand  of  man,  I  cannot 
conceive  of  any  natural  way  in  which  such  a  perforation  could  be 
produced,  and  certainly  the  present  evidence  points  to  man  as  the 
active  agent  in  its  production. 

The  polished  and  perforated  specimens  mentioned  above  are 
found  in  association  with  a  large  number  of  splintered  bone  frag- 
ments derived  largely  from  the  breaking  up  of  long-bones  of  large 
ungulates.  Of  these  there  are  many  hundreds  of  specimens  occur- 
ring in  nearly  all  layers  of  the  deposits.  On  only  a  few  of  the 
splinters  are  there  marks  such  as  would  be  made  by  the  teeth  of 
camivora  in  crushing  the  bones.  In  the  absence  of  definite  evidence 
of  the  fracture  of  these  bones  by  large  camivora,  one  is  forced  to 
suspect  that  man  has  been  the  active  agent  here  as  in  the  shell- 


234  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

mounds,  where  the  numerous  fractured  and  splintered  bones  are 
unanimously  attributed  to  the  work  of  man. 

Of  the  stone  fragments  mentioned  above  as  occurring  in  these 
cave  deposits,  two  were  found  in  Samwel  cave.  In  these  two  speci- 
mens there  is  no  doubt  of  the  handiwork  of  man.  The  first  speci- 
men, no.  10012  (pi.  XVII,  figs.  5,  6),  was  obtained  by  Mr  E.  L. 
Furlong,  in  1904,  in  the  fissure  deposit  of  the  upper  chamber  of 
Samwel  cave.  It  was  found  six  inches  beneath  the  loosened  sta- 
lagmite layer  after  a  blast  to  break  up  the  dense  rock.  The  speci- 
men is  a  distinctly  chipped  basalt  fragment.  It  seemed  to  belong 
to  the  loosened  earth  in  which  it  was  found.  Its  surface  is  par- 
tially covered  with  a  thin  calcareous  coating.  In  and  on  the  stalag- 
mite above  it  numerous  remains  of  extinct  animals  were  obtained. 

The  second  specimen,*  no.  icon  (pi.  xvii,  figs.  3,  4),  is  a  dis- 
tinctly chipped  obsidian  flake  obtained  from  a  shaft  sunk  into  the 
deposits  filling  the  old  entrance  of  the  large  lower  chamber  of  Sam- 
wel cave.  This  specimen  was  not  seen  in  place,  but  was  brought 
up  in  a  bucket  filled  with  moist  earth  from  the  bottom  of  the  shaft, 
then  eleven  feet  deep.  The  earth  around  the  mouth  of  the  shaft 
was  quite  dry,  and  if  the  fragment  did  not  come  from  the  layers 
below,  it  must  have  fallen  into  the  shaft  in  the  course  of  the  work- 
ings and  have  been  buried  in  the  moist  earth  below.  The  surface 
of  the  specimen  was  partly  covered  with  a  thin  calcareous  incrusta- 
tion. The  layer  exposed  at  the  bottom  of  the  pit  at  this  time 
underlies  strata  containing  remains  of  an  extinct  ground-sloth. 

While  we  cannot  state  definitely  that  either  of  the  stone  frag- 
ments actually  occurred  in  the  Quaternary  deposits,  there  is  at 
least  strong  presumptive  evidence  in  favor  of  their  having  been 
derived  from  these  beds,  and  that  they  were  the  work  of  men  ex- 
isting in  this  region  before  the  Quaternary  fauna  became  extinct. 

In  concluding  this  brief  statement  relating  to  the  supposed  evi- 
dence of  man's  handiwork  in  the  Shasta  caves,  it  seems  to  me  that 
the  two  perforated  bones  here  illustrated  are  sufficiently  important 
to  warrant  the  belief  that  man  inhabited  the  vicinity  of  the  caves  at 
least  as  early  as  the  latter  half  of  the  Quaternary  period.     At  all 

1  This  specimen  was  obtained  in  the  summer  of  1905,  during  the  progress  of  the 
work  carried  on  under  an  appropriation  by  the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America. 


I       I 


'FtOM  POTTEH  CREEK  AND  SAMWEL  C 
:y,  Univfreily  of  l.i.li(uiiiia.  Xaiur.l  ij«j 
Fol1«  CiMk  ctyr  (No,  3894)-     Thr  upp. 


NOTE  ON  THE  DETERMINATION  OF  SEX  IN  MAN 

By  E.  T.  BREWSTER 

Dr  John  Benjamin  Nichols,  in  a  paper  recently  printed  in  this 
journal/  sets  forth  conclusions  practically  identical  with  those  to  which 
I  had  come,  quite  independently,  by  the  same  method.  He  finds, 
in  effect,  that  in  three  thousand  New  England  families  having  six 
children  or  more,  the  actual  distribution  of  sons  and  daughters  is 
very  nearly  identical  with  the  theoretical  chance  distribution.  There 
is  nevertheless  a  slight  tendency  toward  an  excess  of  families  in 
which  the  children  are  all  of  the  same  sex,  and  also  a  somewhat 
disproportionate  number  of  boys  in  the  largest  families.  Dr  Nichols 
therefore  concludes  that  sex  is  entirely  independent  of  environment, 
but  is  determined  by  the  dominance  of  one  or  the  other  of  the 
hereditary  impulses  derived  from  the  two  parents.  The  sex-making 
forces  fight  it  out  in  the  germ,  and  in  the  long  run  one  is  about  as 
likely  to  be  prepotent  as  the  other.  The  slight  departures  from 
theory  he  would  explain  by  the  occasional  ascendancy  of  one  parent 
over  the  other. 

Dismissing  for  the  present  all  questions  of  interpretation,  I  shall 
set  forth  certain  facts  in  regard  to  these  departures  from  the  theoreti- 
cal chance  distribution. 

First  of  all  I  turn  to  the  magnitude  of  the  disagreement  with 
chance.  Of  1,200  children  of  known  sex,  601  were  followed  at  the 
next  birth  by  a  child  of  the  same  sex  as  themselves,  599  by  one  of 
the  other  sex.  This  is  clearly  chance  and  far  within  the  error  of 
random  sampling.  Suppose,  however,  in  place  of  random  we  take 
selected  cases,  a  method  which  in  studies  of  this  sort  has  not  been 
generally  employed.  In  1,442  cases  in  which  two  consecutive  chil- 
dren were  of  the  same  sex,  I  find  that  in  727  a  run  of  two  boys  or 
two  girls  is  followed  by  another  of  the  same  sex,  and  by  one  of  a 
different  sex  in  715.  Table  A  shows  the  results  of  applying  the 
same  method  to  runs  of  three,  four,  five,  six,  seven,  and  eight  chil- 

*  Vol.  VII,  No.  I,  1905,  pp.  24-36. 

236 


DETERMINATION  OF  SEX  IN  MAN 


237 


dren  of  like  sex  in  two  groups  of  related  families.  Throwing  out 
the  last  case,  in  which  the  numbers  are  too  small  to  have  much 
value,  in  all  cases  except  one,  if  two  or  more  consecutive  children 
are  of  like  sex  the  next  stands  an  appreciably  better  than  average 
chance  of  being  of  that  sex  also.  On  the  whole  this  tendency 
tends  to  increase  with  the  length  of  the  run.  At  any  rate  the  final 
sum,  1,210  of  one  sort  lo  1,154  of  the  other,  is  significant  of  the 
operation  of  some  real  cause.  Sex,  then,  is  nearly  a  matter  of 
chance,  yet  there  are  special  cases  in  which  some  sex-determining 
tendency  is  also  at  work,  so  that  a  sporting  neighbor  of  the  Patriarch 
Jacob,  after  the  birth  of  the  eleventh  consecutive  son,  might  reas- 
onably risk  a  wager  of  three  to  two  that  number  twelve  would  be  a 
boy  also. 

TABLE   A 
Sex  of  Child  afteb  a  Succission  of  Chiluken  of  the  Same  Sex 


^^i-!^'|-s_;|-;|'|j 


s" {£■  ■ 

Observed     ratio 

lilte/dif. 

CilculitHl  ralio' 

CalcuUled  ratio 
II  J  equal  109, 


II  i^  11 1:1 


1.0295     '034      '-038 


IlIO 

8364 


I  shall  now  set  forth  evidence  to  show  that  a  tendency  to  depart 
from  the  chance  distribution  of  sex  in  the  direction  of  an  excess  of 
boys  or  girls  is  correlated  with  the  age  of  the  mother. 

My  data  consist  of  the  published  genealogies  of  eight  New 
England  families  whose  records  go  back  to  the  early  days  of  the 
country  and  come  down  to  the  middle  of  the  last  century  when  the 
number  of  children  to  each  marriage  becomes  too  small  for  my  pur- 
pose. Table  B  shows  the  cKstribulion  of  sex  among  the  first  three 
births  and  the  last  three  in  some  fourteen  hundred  families  in  which 


238 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.   S 


1906 


there  were  six  children  or  more.  From  this  table  it  appears  that 
there  is  a  pretty  well-marked  tendency  for  mothers  to  bear  boys 
early  in  life  and  girU  later.  Twenty-three  hundred  women  had 
among  their  first  three  children  3,756  boys  and  3,285  girls.  The 
same  women  had  among  their  last  three  births  3,594  boys  and  3,432 
girls.  In  other  words,  a  group  of  young  women  bear  1 14  boys  to 
each  100  girls :  the  very  same  women  when  along  in  years  bear  only 
105  boys  to  each  loo  girls.  Moreover,  taking  each  of  the  eight 
family  stocks  separately,  there  is  no  case  in  which  the  number  of 
boys  among  the  last  three  births  exceeds  that  among  the  first  three. 
On  the  other  hand,  there  is  but  one  of  the  eight  in  which  the  num- 
ber of  girls  in  the  first  three  exceeds  that  in  the  last  three.  Clearly, 
therefore,  there  is  a  correlation  between  the  age  of  mothers  and  the 
sex  of  the  offspring. 


Sex  o 


First  Threk  a 


TABLE   B 
3  Last  Three  Childrrn  11 


Fauilibs  or  Six  o 


jBny,. 

'.^ 

:Sz. 

3G.... 

Tot.] 

Boj™. 

ToulCHri.. 

4" 

U 

lot 

33           4«o 

439 

lit 

48 

416 

4S 

|»1 

s^ 

86'          390 

111 

t\ 

.  30! 

161 

■ii 

1  W 

8^ 

3«i 

4,16 

IftS 

35 

ip 

(S 

IW 

1* 

-it 

1«? 

30! 

V 

s( 

>■>» 

11 

7a 

Mt 

»M 

30 

1.1 : 

^t 

2C 

a4» 

ic 

"M 

1- 

V 

411 

^90 

4»! 

9°, 

los 

ai 

411 

M 

It 

1    330 

179 

4! 

46 

'3! 

ZM 

\%M 

261 

« 

|i»8s 

1110 

3oaj 

IJ71 

"SI 

,6, 

'm 

'.6, 

37S6 

1»8S 

«. 

849j       Ss6j      ,a89|         13594 

3433 

3 

7 

9 

9 

S 

6 

2 

3 

H.;fi"i3. 

\l"t3. 

,  f  61*13. 

\iMt3. 


6.  D""... 


10.  Sum    c«lca]>ted 
if  It  J  to  10  9 


The  correlation  need  not,  however,  be  direct.  In  fact  the  more 
obvious  supposition  is  that  the  correlation  is  primarily  with  bodily 
vigor  and  only  incidentally  with  age.  I  shall  now  submit  evidence 
on  this  point 

Presumably  women  who  bear  more  than  five  children  are  a  se- 
lected class  appreciably  more  vigorous  than  the  general  body  of 


BREWSTER]  DETERMINATION  OF  SEX  IN  MAN  239 

wives.  They  should  therefore  bear  a  somewhat  larger  proportion 
of  boys.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  averaging  the  first  three  and  the  last 
three  births,  they  produce  boys  and  girls  in  the  ratio  of  1 10  to  100; 
while  a  random  sample  of  mothers,  including  this  selected  class, 
shows  a  ratio  of  only  i  .07.  This  agrees  perfectly  with  the  long 
known  fact  that  there  is  a  preponderance  of  boys  among  the  first 
births ;  and  that,  according  to  Dr  Nichols,  large  families  contain  a 
disproportionate  number  of  boys  and  the  families  of  consumptive 
mothers  an  excess  of  girls. 

At  first  sight  it  would  seem  easy  to  test  the  matter  still  further 
by  studying  the  proportion  of  boys  and  girls  in  families  of  fewer  than 
six  children.  Unfortunately  the  apparently  small  family  of  a  gene- 
alogy may  be  merely  one  whose  members  have  in  part  escaped  the 
notice  of  the  compiler ;  and  since  the  latter  is  somewhat  more  likely 
to  overlook  girls  than  boys,  the  desired  ratio  is  likely  to  come  out 
higher  than  it  should.  Moreover,  especially  as  one  comes  down 
toward  recent  times,  families  of  fewer  than  six  children  become 
practically  identical  with  the  general  unselected  population. 

It  is,  however,  possible  to  select  one  group  of  women  who  are 
clearly  less  vigorous  of  body  than  their  sisters  —  those,  namely, 
whose  husbands  marry  again.  In  general  the  woman  whose  hus- 
band has  had  children  by  a  second  or  third  wife  has  died  young  and 
is  therefore  likely  to  be  the  sort  of  woman  who  should,  according  to 
our  present  theory,  bear  proportionately  fewer  boys  than  average 
mothers.  My  numbers  are  unfortunately  small.  I  find,  however, 
in  this  class  64  boys  and  63  girls ;  and  this,  so  far  as  it  goes,  bears 
out  the  theory. 

TABLE  C 
Sex  of  Children  of  First,  Second,  and  Third  Wives 

First  Wife.  Second  Wife.  Third  Wife.  Second  and  Third. 
^                       64                      113                   6  119 

9  63  86  2  88 

Ratio  ^/9  1.02  1. 31  1.35 

There  is,  moreover,  another  curious  fact  (Table  C)  concerning 
the  children  of  men  who  marry  more  than  once.  The  second  wife 
not  only  has  more  children  than  the  first  (199  to  127) ;  she  also 
bears  a  far  larger  proportion  of  boys.    Second  wives,  in  the  families 


246  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

private  collection  in  England  ;  two  in  the  Ethnographical  Museum 
in  Copenhagen ;  three  in  the  Ethnographical  Museum  in  Berlin  ; 
and  one  said  to  be  in  Gotha.  With  the  five  pieces  in  Rome  there 
are  thus  nineteen  known  specimens  in  various  parts  of  Europe ;  but 
many,  if  not  all,  were  at  one  time  in  Florence. 

The  best-preserved  and  most  interesting  of  the  specimens  in 
Rome  is  a  mask  representing  a  human  face.  The  entire  length  is 
280  mm.  and  the  width  is  about  135  mm.,  approximately  life  size. 
The  inner  surface  is  plain,  while  the  outside  is  covered  with  mosaic, 
which  for  the  greater  part  is  of  turquoise  outlined  with  pearl. 
Professor  Pigorini  ^  has  been  able  to  trace  the  history  of  this  most 
interesting  piece  for  more  than  three  and  a  half  centuries,  finding 
this  entry  in  the  Inventario  delta  Guardaroba  Medicea,  1553  :  Una 
maschera  Venuta  a'  India  composta  di  turchine  sopra  il  Icgno,  This 
is  the  first  of  a  series  of  references  to  the  same  mask  made  in  differ- 
ent lists. 

The  art  here  illustrated  as  practised  by  the  ancient  Mexicans  is 
another  link  connecting  the  culture  of  that  people  and  of  the 
earlier  pueblo-dwellers  of  New  Mexico  and  Arizona.  In  no  other 
part  of  North  America  is  the  art  known  to  have  been  followed  ;  in 
both  the  regions  indicated  turquoise  was  the  principal  material  of 
which  the  mosaic  was  formed,  and  although  the  incrusted  objects 
from  the  two  localities  are  very  different  in  form,  there  is  a  similar- 
ity in  the  workmanship  that  suggests  a  connection  between  the 
ancient  peoples. 

Of  special  interest  is  a  small  collection  from  the  northwest 
coast  of  America,  now  in  the  Anthropological  Museum  in  Florence. 
It  includes  thirty-four  pieces,  all  of  which  were  collected  by  Captain 
Cook  during  his  third  voyage,  in  the  year  1778.  This  collection 
has  already  been  described  and  many  of  its  objects  figured  by  Pro- 
fessor Giglioli.* 

Of  the  thirty -four  specimens,  twenty-three  were  obtained  in  the 
vicinity  of  Nootka  and  include  garments,  ornaments,  weapons,  and 


»0p.  cit.,  p.  338. 

'  E.  H.  Giglioli,  **  Appunti  intorno  ad  una  collezione  EtnograBca  fatta  durante  il 
terzo  viaggio  di  Cook,"  Archivio  per  I* Ant,  e  la  Etnol,,  vol.  xxv,  pp.  120-161,  Firenze, 

1895. 


«  UlTuii  G.ll.ry,  Flor.n«.    (M)! 


BUSHNELL]  MATERIAL   IN  ITALIAN  COLLECTIONS  247 

ceremonial  objects,  for  the  greater  part  in  a  good  state  of  preserva- 
tion. Four  hats  in  this  portion  of  the  collection  are  of  interest,  as 
they  are  probably  the  specimens  which  were  figured  in  the  account 
of  the  voyage.  Two  are  conical  in  form,  terminating  in  a  point ; 
on  each  are  represented  four  large  whales  and  many  canoes.  The 
others  are  smaller  and  lower,  having  flat  crowns  and  being  decorated 
with  a  symbolic  design  painted  in  red,  blue,  and  black. 

Two  capes  made  of  narrow  strips  of  cedar  bark,  braided,  and 
continuing  as  a  fringe  at  the  bottom  ;  a  bracelet  made  of  horn,  and 
two  wooden  combs,  highly  decorated  and  well  preserved,  were  col- 
lected at  Nootka.  Other  specimens  from  the  same  locality  are 
several  harpoon  points  ;  a  bow  1,135  mm.  in  length  ;  and  a  wooden 
mask  representing  a  human  face,  skilfully  made.  Two  very  fine 
examples  of  the  bone  club,  both  well  decorated  with  characteristic 
carving  and  in  an  excellent  state  of  preservation,  belong  to  the  same 
collection.  The  remaining  eleven  objects  forming  the  Cook  col- 
lection consist  of  harpoons  and  smaller  weapons  from  Prince 
William  sound,  Norton  sound,  and  Unalaska.  Considered  histor- 
ically this  collection  possesses  great  value  in  addition  to  the  rarity 
and  interest  of  the  specimens. 

There  are  a  few  very  interesting  objects  from  the  same  part  of 
North  America,  preserved  in  the  Kircheriano  Museum  in  Rome. 

Professor  Giglioli's  collection  of  material  from  the  northwestern 
part  of  North  America  is  very  rich  and  complete,  and  includes  a 
large  series  of  hafled  implements  and  weapons  from  Vancouver 
island  and  northward.  The  most  interesting  of  these  are  to  be  fig- 
ured in  a  work  descriptive  of  the  entire  collection  which  he  has  now 
in  preparation. 

The  greater  portion  of  the  collections  from  North  America  be- 
longing to  the  Italian  museums  consists  of  specimens  from  the  cen- 
tral and  eastern  sections  of  the  continent,  representing  the  work  of 
the  Sioux,  the  Algonquians,  and  the  Iroquois.  Certainly  there  are 
a  number  of  very  interesting  objects  in  the  various  collections. 
Some  bear  a  date,  or  a  few  words  of  an  old  inscription  which  offer 
a  clue  to  their  history ;  but  in  the  great  majority  of  cases  there  is 
absolutely  nothing  known  of  the  pieces  —  no  records  of  when  or 


.liglloli'.  CollKlion.     (54) 
ITALIAN  COLLECT  IONS 


BUSHNELL]  MATERIAL   IN  ITALIAN  COLLECTIONS  249 

These  moccasins  were  never  worn  and  are  now  as  fresh  as  when 
they  were  made,  although  they  have  been  in  Florence  since  1828. 

The  knife-sheath  mentioned  above  is  shown  in  plate  xxi,  a.  It  is 
an  interesting  example  of  eighteenth  century  work,  being  made 
of  heavy  buckskin,  colored  black,  similar  to  the  moccasins  just 
described.  The  extreme  length  is  280  mm. ;  the  pocket  alone  is 
190  mm.  long.  The  decoration  is  folded  quill  work,  forming  a 
lozenge-shaped  pattern,  each  line  being  made  up  of  three  rows  of 
quills  —  one  red,  one  white,  and  the  third  blue.  Across  the  top  of 
the  pocket  are  two  bands  of  folded  quills  ;  a  fringe,  formed  probably 
of  tufts  of  deer  or  moose  hair,  formerly  extended  along  the  bottom 
edge  of  the  lower  of  these  decorated  bands,  but  it  has  disappeared, 
only  the  fourteen  narrow  strips  of  skin  to  which  it  was  attached 
now  remaining.  A  narrow  band  of  quillwork  runs  along  the  edge 
of  the  top.  The  whole  sheath  is' outlined  with  small  white  opaque 
beads  of  European  manufacture. 

The  second  and  smallest  specimen  on  plate  xxi  {b)  is  one  of  two 
similar  pieces  in  the  same  collection.  This  is  not  a  very  old  piece, 
but  is  interesting  on  account  of  the  material  of  which  it  is  made, 
namely,  the  scaly  skin  of  the  tail  of  a  beaver. 

The  third  sheath  (pi.  xxi,  c)  is  an  unusually  good  example  of  a 
western  type,  made  of  heavy  skin.  The  length  is  280  mm.  and 
the  width  at  the  top  90  mm.  The  quillwork  decoration  of  the  band 
is  well  made  and  the  quills  are  dyed  various  bright  colors.  The 
long  fringe  is  bound  at  intervals  with  white  quills  and  terminates  in 
tufts  of  hair,  colored  red.  The  edge  of  this  sheath  is  outlined  with 
a  narrow  line  of  quills,  alternating  red,  white,  and  blue. 

In  the  Kircheriano  Museum  in  Rome  there  are  four  specimens 
which  were  collected  by  Maximilian,  Prince  of  Wied-Neuwied, 
among  the  Omaha.  One  is  a  knife-sheath  somewhat  similar  to 
the  one  just  described,  a  horse  bridle,  and  a  saddle  blanket,  the  last 
two  having  a  similar  decoration  in  quillwork.  The  fourth  object 
and  the  most  interesting  is  a  club  formed  of  a  natural  root,  gnarled 
and  knotted  at  one  end  and  tapering  to  the  other.  The  smaller  end 
is  bound  with  tanned  skin,  which  served  as  the  handle  ;  around  the 
upper  end  of  the  skin  wrapping  is  a  band  of  quillwork  similar  in 
design  and  workmanship  to  that  on  the  other  objects.     The  entire 


2 so  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

length  of  the  club  is  about  one  meter.  The  sheath  in  the  Florence 
Museum  probably  belonged  originally  to  the  same  collection  as 
this  club. 

The  small  museum  in  the  Collegio  di  Propaganda  Fide,  in  Rome, 
has  a  very  rich  ethnological  collection  from  Africa  and  a  small 
miscellaneous  collection  from  other  parts  of  the  world,  including  a 
few  notable  and  rare  objects  from  North  America. 

The  gem  of  the  North  American  collection  is  a  piece  of  wam- 
pum, which  is  probably  the  finest  existing  example  of  that  form  of 
art.  This  superb  specimen  is  formed  of  fifteen  rows  of  beads  ag- 
gregating 1,940  mm.  in  length  and  108  mm.  in  width.  Each  row 
consists  of  646  beads,  making  a  total  of  9,690.  Although  made  in 
a  single  straight  piece  in  the  regular  form  of  a  *  belt,*  this  was 
evidently  intended  for  an  entirely  different  purpose.  As  will 
be  seen  in  plate  xxii,  it  has  been  arranged  and  fastened  in  such 
a  manner  as  to  form  a  loop,  allowing  the  ends  to  hang  to  an 
equal  length.  This  peculiar  form,  as  well  as  the  figures  and  sym- 
bols which  are  represented  in  white  beads,  makes  it  appear  to  have 
been  intended  for  use  as  a  stole,  and  it  is  so  designated  in  the 
museum.  It  was  probably  made  for  some  missionary  in  the  St 
Lawrence  valley  or  in  the  Iroquois  country.  As  has  already  been 
stated,  there  are  fifteen  rows  of  beads.  Between  these  there  is  a 
narrow  strip  of  tanned  buckskin  extending  the  entire  length  and 
continuing  as  a  fringe  at  each  end.  The  beads  are  strung  on  two 
threads  of  sinew,  one  of  which  passes  on  each  side  of  the  interven- 
ing strips  of  buckskin. 

The  interesting  designs  represented  in  white  beads  suggest  on 
one  side  Christianity,  on  the  other  paganism.  Considering  this  ob- 
ject as  a  stole  with  the  ends  hanging  down  in  front,  the  first  figure 
on  the  right  is  probably  intended  to  represent  the  chapel  of  the 
mission.  One  window  is  represented,  as  well  as  a  cross  over  the 
doorway  ;  next  are  several  characters  which  may  identify  the  mis- 
sion ;  beyond  these  are  two  keys,  crossed,  the  meaning  of  which  is 
obvious.  The  two  figures  in  the  middle  evidently  represent  the 
missionary  and  an  Indian,  the  former  being  on  the  right,  and  the 
latter  on  the  left,  holding  a  cross,  the  Christian  symbol,  between 


^ 


E  ANTHnOPOLOQICAL  MUSEUM.  FLORENCE 


BUSK  NELL] 


MATERIAL   IN  ITALIAN  COLLECTIONS 


251 


them.  The  figure  which  is  assumed  to  represent  the  Indian  is  hold- 
ing another  object  also,  but  what  it  is,  is  difficult  to  say.  Beyond 
this  figure  is  a  zigzag  pattern  ending  in  what  seems  to  represent  two 
i,  crossed.  Next 


is  a  human  figure,  an 
Indian  grasping  a  bow 
in  one  hand.  The  last 
two  designs  suggest 
a  pipe  and  a  pine  tree. 
It  will  be  noticed  that 
the  designs  on  the 
two  extreme  ends  are 
difierent. 

That  the  history  of 
this  unique  piece  is 
not  known  is  to  be  re- 
gretted ;  but  its  pres- 
ence in  the  museum 
in  the  CoUegio  di 
Propaganda  Fide  may 
be  accepted  as  proof 
of  its  having  been 
brought  from  Amer- 
ica  by  a  missionary. 

There  is  a  similarity  between  the  figure  of  the  Indian  holding  a 
bow,  on  the  piece  just  described,  and  four  figures  on  a  Huron  belt 
presented  by  Professor  Hamy  in  his  work  illustrating  the  Galerie 
Americainedu  Musec  d'Ethnographie  du  Trocadero  in  Paris.  The 
accompanying  sketch  (fig.  1 2)  of  one  of  the  figures  on  that  belt  was 
made  from  this  illustration.  While  the  figures  on  the  speci- 
men now  in  Rome  are  placed  across  the  band,  those  on  the  other 
extend  lengthwise,  as  may  be  seen  by  comparing  the  two  illustra- 
tions. 

The  large  Onondaga  belt  figured  by  Professor  Holmes  '  is  a  trifle 
longer  than  the  specimen  in  Rome,  each  now  being  formed  of  650 
beads,  and  there  is  close  similarity  in  the  human  figures  repre- 
sented on  both  pieces. 


252 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  190 


There  are  other  examples  of  wampum  in  the  same  collection,  al 
of  minor  importance  in  comparison  with  the  one  described,  but 

interesting  nevertheless.  One  is  a  small  band, 
about  250  mm.  in  length,  formed  of  four  rows 
of  beads.  The  beads  appear  to  be  old  and 
much  worn  ;  but  they  have  been  newly  strung 
on  yellow  wool,  which  detracts  greatly  from 
the  value  of  the  piece.  Two  small  pipes,  made 
of  grayish  steatite,  with  an  opening  for  the 
stem  forming  an  acute  angle  with  the  bowl, 
have  each  a  perforation  through  the  under  part. 
To  each  of  these  is  attached  a  single  string  of 
wampum,  alternating  purple  and  white.  Both 
pipes  are  new,  never  having  been  used ;  but 
the  beads,  like  those  forming  the  small  band, 
appear  to  be  old— certainly  much  older  than 
the  pipes  to  which  they  are  attached.  These 
three  pieces  seem  to  belong  together,  and  the 
beads  may  be  the  remnants  of  an  old  belt.  It 
is  not  known  when  or  where  the  specimens 
were  collected. 

Another  object  worthy  of  attention  in  the 
same  collection  is  a  small  club  (figure  13). 
The  dimensions  are:  length  320  mm.;  the 
handle,  which  is  rectangular  in  section,  is  23 
mm.  wide  and  1 1  mm.  thick  ;  the  ball  at  the  end  is  47  mm.  in  diam- 
eter. The  whole  is  made  of  a  single  piece  of  wood,  rather  heavy 
and  dark  in  color.  It  shows  the  effect  of  long  use,  being  much  worn 
and  highly  polished.  Long,  narrow  strips  of  tanned  buckskin  are 
wound  round  the  lower  part  of  the  handle  ;  probably  these  were  orig- 
inally wound  smooth  and  even,  but  they  have  become  loosened.  At 
short  intervals  the  strip  of  skin  is  bound  with  porcupine  quills 
colored  red  and  white.  The  question  naturally  arises,  for  what 
purpose  was  this  small  club  used  ?  It  is  too  small  and  light  to 
have  been  serviceable  as  a  weapon,  although  in  form  it  resembles 


Fig.  13. — Small  club 
in  the  Museum  of  the 
Collegio  di  Propaganda 
Fide,  Rome. 


» Art  in  Shell  of  the  Ancient  Americans,  in  Second  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Eth 
nology^  1883,  pi.  xlii. 


BUSHNELL]  MATERIAL  IN  ITALIAN  COLLECTIONS  253 

the  primitive  club  of  many  American  tribes.  It  may  have  been  used 
as  a  drumstick,  for  which  purpose  it  would  have  served  admirably. 

Both  museums  in  Rome,  the  Kircheriano  and  that  in  the  Propa- 
ganda Fide,  have  interesting  old  examples  of  small  boxes  made  of 
birch  bark,  with  covers,  the  whole  being  decorated  with  porcupine 
quillwork  in  various  designs.  An  unusually  large  and  fine  specimen 
is  in  the  latter  museum.  In  the  same  collections  are  several  strips 
of  birch  bark  and  thin  strips  of  cedar,  covered  with  symbols  and 
totems  of  Algonquian  origin.  The  pieces  of  bark  were  at  one  time 
folded  and  attached  in  the  form  of  a  book,  but  it  is  evident  several 
pieces  are  missing. 

Among  the  specimens  from  the  eastern  part  of  America  in  Pro- 
fessor Giglioli's  collection  is  one  of  special  historic  interest.  It  is 
an  adz  or  gouge  made  of  granite,  215  mm.  in  length,  62  mm.  in 
width,  with  a  maximum  thickness  of  37  mm.  Attached  to  it  is  a 
label,  so  old  and  discolored  that  only  the  first  part  of  the  writing 
can  be  deciphered  ;  it  reads  : 

HaCHE  DES  INDIENS  qui  sous  LA  CONDUITE  DK  LEUR  CHEF  BrANT,  EN 
1790,  MASSACRERENT  ET  PRECIPITERENT  DANS  l'HuDSON  25  PERSONNES 
sous  LE  COMMANDEMENT.    .    . 

On  a  small  label  is  written  : 

TuscARORA  —  Splitting  Foot. 

There  is  no  reason  to  doubt  the  authenticity  of  the  labels,  so  faded 
and  discolored  they  are ;  and  it  is  interesting  to  know  that  the  so- 
called  adz  was  probably  used  as  a  weapon,  and  that  at  a  compara- 
tively late  day. 

Many  excellent  catlinite  pipes  are  to  be  seen  in  the  older  collec- 
tions in  Europe,  a  number  of  them  having  the  characteristic  stem 
often  a  meter  in  length  and  decorations  of  quillwork,  tufts  of  hair, 
or  feathers. 

One  very  good  specimen  in  the  Propaganda  Fide  bears  a  label 
on  which  is  written  : 

Pipe  offerte  a  Sa  Saintet^  par  le  chef  Ma-za-kah  au  nom  des 
Sioux  et  de  Sauteux, 

but  unfortunately  neither  date  nor  locality  is  mentioned.     The  pipe 

AM.  AMTH.,  N.  S.,  8 — If. 


254  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

is  rather  large  and  well  leaded  ;  the  stem  is  long  and  flat,  and  is 
partly  covered  with  quillwork. 

In  the  Kircheriano  Museum  in  Rome,  as  well  as  in  the  Anthro- 
pological Museum  in  Florence,  are  preserved  several  excellent  ex- 
amples of  pipes.  One  in  the  former  collection,  made  of  a  piece  of 
beautiful  catlinite,  and  having  a  long  base  and  a  conical  bowl,  is 
decorated  with  narrow  bands  of  lead.  The  stem  belonging  to  it  is 
nearly  a  meter  in  length  and  for  about  one-third  of  the  distance 
from  the  mouth-piece  is  covered  with  excellent  quillwork.  This  is 
divided  into  five  panels  or  sections  of  equal  size.  The  first,  third, 
and  fifth  sections  are  white  and  have  in  the  center  a  thunder-bird 
in  black  ;  the  second  and  fourth  have  a  red  ground,  the  former 
being  plain  while  in  the  latter  there  is  a  thunder-bird  worked 
in  white  quills.  The  sections  are  divided  by  two  narrow  lines  of 
black  quills,  between  which  are  dots  of  black  and  white.  The 
decoration  on  the  other  side  is  rather  different. 

A  long  inscription  written  on  the  stem  is  so  badly  rubbed  and 
worn  as  to  be  scarcely  legible  ;  however,  it  is  possible  to  make  out 
the  word  "Commissioner"  and  the  date,  "Aug.  20th  1825." 
Now,  during  the  month  of  August,  1825,  a  United  States  *  com- 
missioner,* Governor  Lewis  Cass,  met  representatives  of  different 
tribes,  including  the  Ojibway,  the  Sauk  and  Foxes,  and  the  Sioux, 
at  Prairie  du  Chien,  Wisconsin,  and  there  formulated  a  treaty  which 
was  signed  on  the  19th  day  of  the  month  named.  It  is  safe  to 
consider  this  pipe  as  being  one  used  by  the  Sioux  at  that  time,  as 
the  date  it  bears  was  the  day  after  the  signing  of  the  treaty.  It  is 
unfortunate  that  we  cannot  read  the  entire  inscription,  for  it  would 
probably  be  of  historical  value. 

There  is  another  pipe,  also  in  the  Kircheriano  Museum,  which 
may  have  been  obtained  at  the  same  time.  It  also  is  of  catlinite, 
not  leaded,  but  having  above  the  base,  back  of  the  bowl  and  facing 
the  smoker,  the  figure  of  a  small  animal,  probably  intended  to  repre- 
sent a  mink  or  a  marten.  The  stem  belonging  to  this  pipe  is  nearly 
a  meter  in  length,  broad  and  flat,  and  covered  for  about  one-third 
of  its  length  with  quillwork  alternating  in  plain  broad  bands  in  red 
and  yellow. 

Two  bags,  one  made  of  an  entire  beaver  skin,  the  other  of  the 
skin  of  a  smaller  animal,  probably  date  from  the  same  period. 


BUSHNELL]  MATERIAL  IN  ITALIAN  COLLECTIONS  255 

Originally  both  were  excellent  specimens,  the  tails  being  covered 
with  elaborate  quillwork ;  but  now  they  are  in  a  poor  state  of  pres- 
ervation. 

Returning  to  the  subject  of  pipes,  the  Florence  Museum  has 
some  very  good  examples  of  both  Sioux  and  Algonquian  work. 

One  Sioux  specimen  has  an  excellent  stem,  exactly  one  meter 
in  length,  covered  with  quills  for  a  distance  of  310  mm.  from  the 
smaller  end.  This  is  divided  into  sections  similar  to  the  pipe  in 
Rome,  and  the  pattern  is  also  the  same ;  but  nothing  is  known  of 
its  history. 

A  curious  specimen  in  this  collection  is  an  elaborately  carved 
pipe  of  greenish  steatite,  measuring  135  mm.  in  length.  Originally 
three  human  figures  were  represented  astride  the  base,  but  the 
greater  portion  of  two  of  them  has  been  broken  and  lost.  This 
belongs  to  the  same  class  of  work  as  the  "  Chippewa  pipe  "  figured 
by  Doctor  Wilson.^ 

An  unusually  beautiful  old  catlinite  pipe  in  Professor  Giglioli's 
collection  is  figured  in  plate  xx,  b.  The  ornaments  attached  to  the 
ears  and  nose  are  of  silver.  This  piece  was  obtained  in  Paris  some 
years  ago  and  probably  dates  from  early  in  the  nineteenth  century. 

There  are  other  objects  in  these  institutions  that  have  been 
brought  from  America.  These  include  garments  of  buckskin, 
beaded  moccasins  and  belts,  knife-sheaths,  and  bags,  all  compara- 
tively modem  and  of  no  special  interest,  but  necessary  to  represent 
the  arts  of  the  native  tribes.  On  the  foregoing  pages  are  briefly 
described  the  oldest  and  the  most  valuable  and  interesting  objects 
from  North  America  preserved  in  Italian  collections.  These,  by 
the  kindness  of  Professors  Mantegazza  and  Pigorini,  I  have  been 
able  to  study  and  photograph  ;  and  to  Professor  Giglioli  I  am  under 
special  obligation  for  advice  and  friendly  interest,  and  for  the  bene- 
fit and  pleasure  derived  from  studying  his  magnificent  private 
collection. 

As  the  specimens  illustrated  in  this  article  were  never  before 
photographed,  I  trust  this  short  account  of  them  may  be  of  interest 
to  students  of  American  ethnology. 

Florence,  Italy. 


'  Prehistoric  Man,  vol.  I,  p.  392. 


RUINS  OF  THE  CERRO  DE  MONTEZUMA 

By  a.  H.  BLACKISTON 

The  ruins  of  the  fortifications  and  so-called  watch-tower  that 
crown  the  summit  of  the  Cerro  de  Montezuma,  southwest  of  and 
overlooking  the  remains  of  the  famous  Casas  Grandes  of  Chihuahua, 
Mexico,  have  received  as  a  rule  but  imperfect  notice  from  the 
travelers  and  explorers  who  from  time  to  time  have  visited  this  sec- 
tion. With  the  exception  of  the  description  in  Bandelier's  Final 
Report  on  Investigations  in  the  Southwest  *  —  an  excellent  account 
in  many  particulars  —  and  that  in  the  Archives  de  la  Commission 
Scientifique  du  Mexique,  the  descriptions  of  these  ruins  are  either  of 
a  very  meager  nature  or  are  decidedly  misleading.  Escudero  briefly 
mentions  them  as  partaking  of  the  nature  of  a  fortified  watch-tower, 
and  notes  a  number  of  lines  of  stone  on  the  southern  slope  of  the 
mountain  ;  Clavigero,  who  never  saw  the  ruins,  gives  a  far  from 
satisfactory  though  better  description  than  Bancroft  seems  to 
suspect,  but  speaks  of  them  as  being  defended  on  one  side  by  a 
high  mountain  ;  Bartlett  viewed  them  from  a  distance,  while  Lum- 
holtz  climbed  the  steep  ascent  but  apparently  lacked  either  time  or 
inclination  for  a  detailed  account.  The  AUnin  Mexicano  also  speaks 
of  this  monument  as  a  fortress  built  of  great  stones,  though  it  soars 
into  the  imaginary  when  alluding  to  walls  20  feet  thick,  and  to  the 
destruction  of  the  buildings  for  the  sake  of  the  stone  they  con- 
tained —  a  manifest  absurdity  when  it  is  learned  that  the  stones  are 
uncut  and  that  the  entire  space  between  this  point  and  the  nearest 
habitations  is  covered  with  a  superabundance  of  similar  rock.  And, 
indeed,  even  were  this  not  the  case,  the  task  of  removing  stone 
from  these  ruins  would  prove  of  Herculean  proportions  for  the  some- 
what shiftlessly  inclined  native  of  to-day. 

Accompanied  by  a  Mexican  guide  who  did  not  display  an  un- 
necessary amount  of  enthusiasm,  the  writer  crossed  the  plain  and 

*  Papers  of  the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America,  Am.  Series,  iv,  pt.  2,  Cam- 
bridge, 1892. 

256 


BLACKiSTON]       RUINS  OF  THE  CERRO  DE  MONTEZUMA  2$? 

successfully  climbed  the  Cerro  de  Montezuma,  then  veiled  in  clouds, 
though  at  times  it  was  necessary  to  lead  the  horses  and  at  others  to 
encourage  their  exhausted  spirits  with  an  energy  which  we  little  felt 
like  expending.  A  piercing  wind  swept  across  the  crest  and  car- 
ried the  snow  in  swirling  eddies  into  the  depths  beyond,  while  the 
clouds,  perceptibly  thinning  as  we  neared  the  top  (the  upper  stratum 
having  been  reached),  left  a  comparatively  clear  but  by  no  means 
comfortable  field  for  exploration. 

About  two  miles  southwest  of  the  Casas  Grandes  lies  the  base 
of  the  mountain  that  forms  the  culminating  peak  of  the  range  which 
borders  the  western  side  of  the  Casas  Grandes  valley,  and  upon 
which  are  situated  the  ruins  that  form  the  subject  of  this  paper.  An 
ancient  road  approximately  six  miles  long  leads  from  the  former 
ruins  to  the  summit  of  the  mountain,  winding  around  the  precipi- 
tous sides  and  forming  by  far  the  most  feasible  route  of  ascent.  In 
the  lowlands  its  traces  are  faint  and  frequently  lost,  but  higher  it  is 
not  only  most  distinct,  but  for  the  greater  part  of  its  length  has 
been  either  walled  in  along  the  exposed  portions  or  cut  into  the 
mountain  side.  In  sections  the  trail  is  from  seven  to  eight  feet 
wide,  in  others  much  narrower,  preserving  as  a  whole  a  uniform 
grade,  though  local  conformations  sometimes  make  an  abrupt 
ascent  imperative,  but  even  then  all  obstacles  were  met  with  con- 
summate skill.  The  most  pronounced  place  of  this  character  is  at 
the  point  where  the  road  enters  the  northern  end  of  the  platform 
from  whose  southern  extremity  rises  the  peak  crowned  by  the  main 
ruins. 

This  step  or  bench  runs  out  into  a  bold  promontory,  and  it  is 
here  that  the  "  road  of  the  Montezumas,"  as  the  natives  term  it,  after 
many  short,  sharp  turns  and  steep  ascents  among  the  great  bowlders, 
enters  through  a  natural  gateway  in  the  rock,  the  village  that  grimly 
lies  across  its  path.  Every  foot  of  this  approach  is  commanded  by 
fortifications  placed  in  a  manner  that  excites  admiration,  and 
in  fact  the  entire  village  seems  to  have  partaken  of  a  military 
character,  as  it  is  most  ably  defended  by  walls  and  parapets  of 
stone. 

The  houses,  solidly  built  of  the  same  material,  are  roofless,  and 
in  but  a  fair  state  of  preservation,  with  the  walls  still  standing  to 


258  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  height  of  from  2  to  4  feet.  Their  number  is  about  twenty-two, 
and  among  them  are  several  of  circular  construction,  one  of  which 
measures  19  feet  2  inches  in  diameter  with  walls  2  feet  10  inches 
thick.  Near  the  center  of  the  vills^e  is  a  large  circular  basin  or 
depression  67  feet  in  diameter,  on  which  opens  a  number  of  struc- 
tures, the  measurement  of  the  best  preserved  one  being  1 1  feet  3 
inches  in  length,  5  feet  5  inches  in  width,  with  walls  2  feet  thick. 
This  ruin,  once  probably  a  store-house  of  some  kind,  had  founda- 
tions of  adobe  rising  about  2  feet  from  the  floor  —  the  only  in- 
stance in  which  this  material  was  observed.  A  depression  similar 
to  the  large  one  just  described,  located  in  a  vills^e  ruin  many 
miles  toward  the  headwaters  of  the  Piedras  Verdes  river,  was  like- 
wise examined  by  the  writer.  Regarding  the  orig^inal  character  of 
these  basins  but  little  can  be  said  beyond  the  advancement  of  the 
theory  that  they  were  courts,  the  sides  of  which  had  been  elevated 
by  the  falling  walls  of  the  surrounding  houses.  That  they  were 
reservoirs  is  hardly  probable,  as  in  the  case  first  cited  the  necessary 
water  supply  for  a  receptacle  of  the  size  was  lacking,  while  in  the 
latter  an  abundance  of  water  was  near  at  hand. 

But  by  far  the  most  striking  object  in  these  ruins  is  the  great 
stone  wall  running  in  a  northwesterly-southeasterly  direction  along 
the  eastern  escarpment  of  the  plateau,  and  measuring  between 
300  and  400  feet  long,  5  feet  thick,  and  more  than  6  feet  high  on 
the  outer  side.  Toward  the  central  section  project  the  ruins  of 
what  seems  to  have  been  a  very  formidable  tower  or  redoubt,  1 8  feet 
in  diameter,  encircled  at  a  lower  level  by  an  outer  wall  of  great 
strength. 

The  inhabitants  of  this  place  exhibited  a  keen  appreciation  of  its 
defensive  possibilities  and  literally  left  no  stone  unturned  to  render 
it  as  nearly  impregnable  as  possible.  In  the  valley  adobe  was  ex- 
clusively used  as  a  building  material,  but  here,  with  the  exception 
noted,  undressed  stone  solidly  and  neatly  laid,  as  far  as  observed, 
without  mortar,  was  exclusively  employed,  the  individual  stones 
averaging  i  foot  long  by  7  or  8  inches  in  thickness,  and  3  or  4 
inches  in  width,  though  in  some  cases,  notably  in  the  parapets,  they 
reached  much  greater  proportions.  Indeed  in  one  place  the  writer 
noticed  two  bowlders  each  about  5  feet  high. 


BLACKISTON]       RUINS  OF  THE  CERRO  DE  MONTEZUMA  259 

Approximately  200  feet  to  the  south  of  the  village,  near  the 
point  where  the  road  begins  to  make  the  final  ascent  to  the  summit, 
lies  a  circular  mass  of  stone  14  feet  5  inches  in  diameter,  probably 
the  remains  of  a  tower,  the  location  of  which  is  significant  as  from 
a  military  point  of  view  it  could  have  been  of  but  little  service.  The 
use  to  which  it  was  devoted  was  evidently  of  a  formal  or  religious 
nature,  and  probably  bore  an  important  relation  to  the  ruins  on 
the  nearby  peak  between  which  and  the  village  it  formed  the  con- 
necting link. 

After  passing  along  the  crest  of  the  plateau,  past  the  solitary 
tower,  the  road  clings  to  the  precipitous  western  face  of  the  moun- 
tain and  finally,  becoming  smaller  and  less  clearly  defined,  at  a  dis- 
tance of  half  a  mile  reaches  the  summit. 

Here  on  the  very  crest  of  the  peak  and  around  its  sides,  2,000 
feet  above  the  valley,  in  an  unsurpassed  situation,  lies  a  ruin  of  great 
interest.  A  circular  wall,  56  feet  2  inches  in  diameter,  incloses  the 
remains  of  a  tower  or  building  18^  feet  square,  whose  sides,  2  ^ 
feet  in  thickness  and  from  4  to  6  feet  high,  face  the  cardinal  points 
of  the  compass  as  in  the  case  of  the  valley  ruins,  of  the  Casa 
Grande  on  the  Gila  river,  and  of  the  palaces  and  temples  of 
Palenque  and  Mitla.  To  the  east  a  projection  about  10  feet  wide 
with  walls  I J^  feet  thick  runs  to  the  encircling  wall  which  at  this 
point  is  5  feet  4  inches  wide,  while  to  the  west  its  width  is  but  a 
little  more  than  4  feet ;  the  height  of  this  wall  is  6  feet. 

Outside  of  this  is  another  encircling  wall,  inclosing  the  inner  one 
at  a  distance  of  36  feet  on  the  western  and  64  feet  4  inches  on  the 
southern  side.  It  varies  in  thickness  from  i  foot  3  inches  to  2  feet  7 
inches,  being  thickest  to  the  north  and  east.  Strong  outlying 
walls  are  numerous  on  the  northern  slope  where  several  ex- 
tensive works  of  this  nature  lie  between  the  summit  and  the 
village,  while  a  number  of  roads  or  trails  lead  in  various  direc- 
tions to  the  lowlands,  the  most  important  being  the  one  already 
described. 

Though  there  seem  to  have  been  far  too  few  houses  to  shelter 
the  garrison  that  must  have  been  required  to  man  effectively  such 
extensive  works,  however  large  or  small  the  number,  the  problem 
of  an  adequate  water  supply  must  of  necessity  have  been  of  vital 


I 

t 


260  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 


importance.     This  need  was  probably  satisfactorily  met  by  means 
J  of  a  spring  which,  my  guide  informed  me,  was  situated  below  the 

\  parapet  where  the  road  entered  the  village,  but  which  the  writer 

was  unable  to  find  on  account  of  the  depth  of  snow  at  this  point. 
Two  reservoirs  were  cut  in  the  rock  near  the  lower  ruins  to  pro- 
vide an  additional  supply  of  water. 

We  now  come  to  the  point  of  greatest  interest  in  connection  with 
these  ruins,  and  one  which  in  time  may  cast  much  light  on  the 
nature  of  the  early  culture  of  this  region.  About  90  feet  down 
the  western  slope  an  opening  that  had  been  walled  in  was  discovered 
a  few  years  ago.  With  the  dazzling  beacon  of  buried  treasure  ever 
before  their  eyes,  luring  them  farther  into  the  heart  of  the  mountain, 
several  of  the  whites  of  this  section  began  the  task  of  opening  the 
tunnel,  which  they  found  most  solidly  blocked.  Up  to  the  present 
time  they  have  blasted  their  way  along  1 3  5  feet  of  its  length  and 
have  found  that  this  subterranean  passage  descends  by  irregular 
gradations  to  a  point  directly  under  the  ruins  on  the  sununit ;  what 
Hes  at  the  end  of  the  tunnel  is  yet  unknown.  No  signs  of  ore  de- 
posits or  other  indications  of  the  presence  of  a  mine  have  been 
encountered. 

These  features,  taken  in  connection  with  other  distinctive  fea- 
1  tures  later  to  be  enumerated,  seem  to  leave  but  little  doubt  that 

this  ruin  fulfilled  a  role  other  than  that  of  a  mere  watch-tower, 
though  from  the  great  expanse  of  territory  stretching  before  the 
eye  from  its  elevation  (a  view  which  unfortunately  the  writer  was 
obliged  to  miss)  it  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  this  feature  was  by 
any  means  ignored. 

Popular  tradition  among  the  natives  unhesitatingly  proclaims  the 
remains  to  be  the  palace  of  the  great  king  who  reigned  from  these 
heights  over  the  inhabitants  of  the  Casas  Grandes  —  a  regal  throne 
indeed,  with  its  head  among  the  clouds  and  its  foot  upon  the  golden 
maize  fields  of  the  valley.  But  popular  tradition  often  lacks  in  accu- 
racy what  it  supplies  in  imagination,  and  this  case  is  not  an  excep- 
tion. For  it  is  probable  that  religion  was  the  only  great  monarch 
that  ruled  from  these  ancient  ruins,  even  as  in  many  forms  it  has 
ruled  before  and  since  from  the  temples  of  the  Old  World  and  the 
New,  from  Thebes  and  Babylon,  from  Teotihuacan  and  Pachacamac. 


BLACKISTON]       RUINS  OF  THE  CERRO  DE  MONTEZUMA  26l 

For  wherever  his  habitat  or  whatever  his  color,  man  is  much  the 
same  throughout  the  world. 

The  elaborately  constructed  road  would  in  itself  seem  to  counte- 
nance the  theory  of  religious  origin  —  a  mere  watch-tower  would 
need  no  such  pathway  ;  while  the  extensive  system  of  fortifications, 
the  orientation  of  the  crowning  tower,  its  eastward  projection,  the 
tunnel  under  it,  and  the  nature  of  the  village  guarding  the  entrance 
to  the  plateau,  all  point  to  the  same  conclusion. 

That  there  was  direct  communication,  religious  as  well  as  mili- 
tary, between  these  ruins  and  those  of  the  valley,  there  is  little 
doubt,  but  whether  this  partook  of  the  sanguinary  nature  of  the 
worship  of  Huitzilopochtli  or  of  the  complacent  character  of  the 
Peruvian  pantheon,  it  is  impossible  to  conjecture.  The  past  still 
veils  in  deep  uncertainty  the  true  signification  of  these  remains,  but 
it  may  yet  be  found  that  the  key  to  the  culture  of  the  inhabitants 
of  the  Casas  Grandes  lies  deep  in  the  heart  of  the  Cerro  de 
Montezuma. 


THE   ICELANDIC   COLONY   IN   GREENLAND 

By   VILHJALMUR   STEFANSSON 

Note.  —  There  are  three  chief  sources  used  in  the  following  article  : 
(i)  the  various  Icelandic  sagas,  some  of  which  deal  largely  with  Green- 
land and  Greenlandersy  while  others  refer  to  Greenland  events  only  inci- 
dentally ;  (2)  the  Icelandic  Annals,  for  and  including  the  years  1288  to 
141 1  ;  and  (3)  Diplomatic  Papers y  mostly  papal  documents  relating  to 
church  affairs,  although  some  of  them  are  records  of  ecclesiastical  courts, 
and  similar  chronicles.  These  three  sources  have  been  included  in  a 
three- volume  compilation,  Grctnlands  Historiske  Mindesmarkery  pub- 
lished in  Copenhagen,  1838-45.  The  author  of  the  present  paper  has 
relied  chiefly  on  this  authority  so  far  as  the  Latin  papers  and  the  Annals 
are  concerned ;  in  the  case  of  the  sagas  he  has  used  the  Icelandic  editions 
of  them  in  the  library  of  Harvard  College. 

The  Northmen  who  inhabited  the  coasts  of  Norway,  Sweden, 
and  Denmark  were,  when  history  brings  them  into  view,  a  seafaring 
people.  At  first  they  hugged  their  own  coasts  ;  later  they  crossed 
the  Baltic  and  the  North  sea  and  beat  up  and  down  the  shores  for 
purposes  of  trade  or  pillage  —  often  discharging  a  merchant  cai^o 
and  then  turning  to  piracy.  Becoming  bolder  with  experience  they 
'*  sailed  directly  west  ",  as  the  sagas  have  it,  and  discovered  the 
Shetlands ;  a  little  later  they  came  upon  the  Orkneys  and  the  north 
coast  of  Scotland.  About  the  middle  of  the  ninth  century  the 
Faroes  became  known  to  the  Northmen,  and  in  874  the  first  settle- 
ment was  made  in  Iceland.  By  930  all  of  Iceland  had  been  colo- 
nized, chiefly  by  those  of  the  Norwegian  nobility,  with  their  retainers, 
who  found  the  overlordship  of  Harald  the  Fairhaired  too  irksome. 
Harald  became  the  first  king  of  all  Norway  after  the  battle  of  Hafrs- 
fjord  in  872,  when  the  opposition  of  the  independent  petty  kings,  of 
whom  Harald  had  been  one,  was  finally  crushed. 

The  discovery  of  Greenland  was  the  logical  result  of  the  settle- 
ment of  Iceland  combined  with  the  lack  on  the  part  of  the  mariner 
of  that  time  of  compass  or  of  means  of  accurately  reckoning  his 
position  at  sea,  for  a  ship  from  Norway,  failing  to  strike  Iceland  and 
not  knowing  its  location,  was  almost  certain  to  reach  Greenland. 

262 


stefAnsson]  ICELANDIC  COLONY  IN  GREENLAND  263 

Thus  it  happened  about  the  year  900  that  a  certain  Gunnbjorn, 
of  Norway,  missed  Iceland  and  found  himself  close  to  some  skerries, 
with  land  in  sight  to  the  west.  Though  he  had  never  been  to  Ice- 
land he  knew  from  descriptions  that  the  shores  before  him  were  an- 
other land,  and  so  he  turned  back.  The  skerries  were  thereafter 
known  by  the  name  of  this  navigator,  and  the  tradition  of  them 
was  preserved. 

About  the  year  950  a  man  named  Eirikr  the  Red  was  outlawed 
in  Norway  for  the  killing  of  several  people  for  whom  he  had  a 
personal  dislike.  He  went  to  Iceland,  but  there  also  certain  per- 
sons did  not  please  him  ;  he  killed  some  of  them  and  was  again 
outlawed,  this  time  for  three  years. 

Not  wishing  apparently  to  trust  himself  where  he  might  find  a 
disagreeable  neighbor  on  each  hand,  Eirikr  set  sail  for  Gunnbjom's 
skerries  and  the  land  that  lay  beyond.  It  was  in  982  he  sailed, 
and  the  next  three  years  he  spent  in  exploring  the  coast,  especially 
that  part  of  it  lying  between  Cape  Farewell  and  Ikersuak,  which  he 
called  Broad  Firth.  He  selected  a  site  for  a  homestead,  named 
many  mountains,  islands,  and  bays,  and  called  the  country  Green- 
Land.  He  ''  said  that  people  would  desire  going  to  it  all  the  more 
if  the  land  had  a  fair  name."  In  984  Eirikr  went  to  Iceland  for  his 
worldly  possessions,  and  the  next  year  he  returned  to  Greenland  as 
his  new  home. 

This  was  the  beginning  of  the  colony  in  Greenland,  which  may 
fairly  be  called  Icelandic,  for  the  records  show  that  most  of  the 
settlers  came  from  Iceland.  In  one  summer  25  ships  left  the 
west  coast  of  Iceland  bound  for  the  new  settlements  ;  only  14  of 
these  reached  their  destination,  the  rest  being  either  lost  at  sea  or 
driven  back  by  ice  and  unfavorable  weather.  Allowing  50  emi- 
grants to  a  ship,  and  this  is  considered  a  reasonable  estimate  by 
authorities  on  the  navigation  of  the  period,  probably  some  700  Ice- 
landers went  to  Greenland  the  first  summer.  After  this  time  the 
records  mention  only  a  few  families  who  went  there  from  either  Ice- 
land or  Norway.  What  the  population  numbered  when  the  colony 
was  at  its  best,  say  in  the  twelfth  century,  must  remain  a  matter  for 
conjecture. 


264  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

GrcetdanduB  Vetus  Owrographia^  an  ancient  manuscript  now  lost, 
is  quoted  by  the  medieval  historian  Bjom  Jonsson.  It  gives  some 
interesting  facts  about  the  colony  and  furnishes  a  basis  for  an  esti- 
mate of  its  population. 

There  were  two  Icelandic  colonies  in  Greenland  :  the  Eastern 
and  the  Western.  Both  were  on  the  southwest  coast,  for  the  east 
coast  was  then,  as  now,  barricaded  with  ice.  The  Eastern  settle- 
ment is  considered  to  have  reached  from  60°  to  61°  north  latitude, 
while  the  Western  settlement  was  between  64°  and  65°.  After 
naming  and  describing  various  bays,  islands,  and  other  features  in 
the  Eastern  settlement,  Jonsson's  account  goes  on  to  say  : 

"  Thence  (from  the  E.  Settlement)  it  is  vi  days,  rowing  for  vi  men  to 
the  Western  Settlement,  then  it  is  vi  days,  rowing  to  Lysu-firth,  thence 
VI  days  to  the  Karl-Booths,  thence  ni  days  to  Bear  Island  and  twelve  days 
around  it.  .  .  .  It  is  said  there  are  clxxxx  dwellings  in  the  Eastern  Set- 
tlement and  xc  in  the  Western." 

It  seems  reasonable  to  suppose  that  there  were  at  least  10  per- 
sons on  a  farm,  for  in  Iceland,  the  country  most  nearly  analogous, 
the  average  is  more  than  20  to  a  farm.  On  the  basis  of  280  farms 
in  the  two  colonies,  the  total  population  of  Greenland  at  the  time 
under  consideration  should  have  fallen  not  far  short  of  3.000. 

The  literary  sources,  as  well  as  modem  excavations  and  re- 
searches, give  evidence  that  the  manner  of  life  in  the  colonies  was 
essentially  the  same  as  in  Iceland.  Horses,  cattle,  sheep,  and  goats 
were  brought  from  Iceland,  and  the  barns  provided  for  them  are 
shown  to  have  been  of  a  type  of  construction  essentially  similar  to 
that  common  in  the  mother  country.* 

The  two  things  that  tended  most  to  differentiate  the  conditions 
of  life  in  Greenland  from  those  prevailing  in  Iceland  were  {a)  the 
greater  difficulty  in  communicating  from  Greenland  with  the  outside 
world  on  account  of  greater  distance  and  more  dangerous  seas,  and 
{b)  the  abundance  in  Greenland  of  game  of  various  kinds  either 
scarce  or  unknown  in  Iceland  —  bears,  deer,  foxes,  seals,  walrus, 
and  other  animals. 

At  first,  communication  between  Greenland  and  Iceland  and 
Norway  was  fairly  frequent.     After  the  new  country  was  Christian- 

*  Gmnlendinga  Saga,  by  Professor  F.  j6Dsson  :  Copenhagen,  1899. 


stepAnsson]  ICELANDIC  COLONY  IN  GREENLAND  265 

ized  in  the  year  1000,  church  documents  throw  considerable  light  on 
the  life  of  the  people  ;  after  1 1 24,  when  the  first  bishop  of  Green- 
land as  a  separate  and  independent  bishopric  was  consecrated,  papal 
letters  and  documents  come  to  be  of  considerable  interest.  They 
show,  among  other  things,  that  Greenland  contributed,  in  walrus 
ivory,  oil,  and  ropes  of  hide,  its  share  toward  the  maintenance  of 
the  Crusades. 

During  the  first  two  centuries  of  their  history  the  Greenlanders 
proved  themselves  intrepid  voyagers,  sailing  to  Markland  (probably 
Newfoundland) for  "merchandise";  such  is  the  term  used  in  the 
Iceland  annals,  though  house  timber  is  probably  meant.  A  ship 
which  had  "previously  been  in  the  Markland  trade"  from  Green- 
land was  driven  upon  the  west  coast  of  Iceland  in  1347.  This  is 
probably  the  last  authentic  mention  in  Icelandic  records  of  voyages 
to  America. 

It  was  early  found  useful  to  establish  summer  hunting  stations 
far  up  the  west  coast  of  Greenland,  for  game  was  much  more  abun- 
dant there  than  near  the  settlements  ;  besides,  in  many  cases,  those 
who  killed  game  within  the  limits  of  the  colony  were  forced  to  give 
a  certain  proportion  of  it  to  the  church.  Voyages  to  the  north  there- 
fore became  frequent,  and  it  is  from  the  account  of  one  of  these  that 
we  get  the  earliest  intimation  that  the  colonists  were  beginning  to 
dread  the  approach  of  the  Eskimo.  Our  authority  is  the  Icelandic 
Hauk* s-Book  ;  the  voyage  spoken  of  took  place  in  the  year  1 266. 

*  *  The  summer  that  the  priest  Amaldr  left  Greenland  .  .  .  there  were 
found  in  the  sea  pieces  of  wood  that  had  been  hewn  with  small  axes  or 
knives,  and  one  piece  that  had  stuck  in  it  rows  of  teeth  and  pieces  of 
bone.  That  summer  also  there  came  from  Northr-Seta  (one  of  the  sum- 
mer hunting  stations  to  the  north)  men  who  had  gone  farther  north  than 
anyone  else,  so  far  as  was  known.  They  found  no  dwellings  of  savages 
except  in  the  heath  above  Krok-Firth,  and  it  is  therefore  men  think  that 
that  is  the  nearest  way  for  the  savages  to  come  (upon  the  settlements) 
from  the  lands  which  they  inhabit. 

"  Then  the  clergy  fitted  out  ships  to  discover  what  there  was  farther 
north  than  they  had  ever  been  before,  and  they  sailed  beyond  Krok-Firth 
Heath  until  the  land  became  lower}     Then  there  came  a  south  wind,  with 

1  This  may  possibly  mean  that  they  sailed  out  to  sea,  i.  e.,  toward  America,  until 
the  receding  land  looked  low  on  the  horizon. 


270  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n,  s.,  8.  1906 

Considering  the  historical  and  archeological  evidences  together, 
it  seems  probable  that  the  Icelandic  colony  in  Greenland  was  de- 
stroyed by  the  Eskimo  rather  than  assimilated  with  them.  Appar- 
ently there  are  few,  if  any,  traces  of  early  Scandinavian  influence 
upon  the  culture  of  the  natives,  and  the  word  for  sJuep  is  said  to  be 
the  only  Icelandic  term  that  has  survived  in  the  language  of  the 
Eskimo.*  There  are  Icelandic  traditions,  probably  not  well  founded, 
to  the  effect  that  the  main  body  of  the  Eastern  colony  moved  over 
to  Markland  (America)  ;  this  is  especially  discredited  by  the  almost 
certain  knowledge  we  have  that  the  Greenlanders  of  the  time  were 
in  possession  of  no  seaworthy  ships. 

When  the  colony  came  to  an  end  will  probably  always  remain 
doubtful.  When  connection  with  the  outer  world  ceased  their  power 
of  resistance  may  have  declined  faster  than  it  did  before,  though  it 
is  certain  that  the  period  of  highest  prosperity  had  already  been 
passed,  owing  to  the  oppressive  trade  monopoly  long  maintained  by 
Norway  through  the  merchants  of  Bergen.  The  colonists  possibly 
survived  into  the  sixteenth  century  ;  the  Pope  appointed  bishops  of 
Garthr  as  late  as  1520,  but  this  fact  may  evidence  a  desire  to  be- 
stow an  office  rather  than  a  genuine  belief  in  the  existence  of  the 
colony.  The  Eskimo  traditions  represent  a  period  of  struggle  where 
their  enemies  held  out  for  a  long  time  even  after  there  was  but  one 
farm  left  to  them.  This,  the  same  traditions  say,  the  Eskimo  at 
last  succeeded  in  burning.  As  already  stated,  several  of  the  ruins 
show  evidences  of  destruction  by  fire,  and  this  final  conflagration 
may  have  taken  place  while  the  country's  last  bishop,  Vincentius, 
held  the  title  *'  }*3piscopos  Gardensis"  in  Europe,  toward  the  middle 
of  the  sixteenth  century. 

Peabody  Museum,  Harvard  University, 
Cambridge,  Massachusetts. 


'  It  has  been  pointed  out  by  the  editor  of  Gra-nlands  Ilistoriskf  Mindism<Erker 
that  the  geographic  term  utiblik^  used  by  the  Greenland  sagas,  cannot  be  Icelandic  and  is 
probably  a  corruption  of  the  Eskimo  word  itiblik.  If  that  be  so,  it  would  go  to  show 
earlier  contact  with  the  Eskimo  than  other  sources  would  lead  us  to  accept. 


UNWRITTEN   LITERATURE   OF    HAWAIP 
By    NATHANIEL   B.    EMERSON 

The  hula  —  the  dance,  with  its  songs  and  ceremonies  —  stood 
for  very  much  to  the  ancient  Hawaiian  ;  it  was  to  him  in  place  of 
our  concert-hall  and  lecture-room,  our  opera  and  theater,  and  thus 
became  one  of  his  chief  means  of  social  enjoyment.  Besides  this  it 
kept  the  communal  imagination  in  living  touch  with  the  nation's 
legendary  past.  The  hula  had  songs  proper  to  itself,  but  it  found 
a  mine  of  inexhaustible  wealth  in  the  epics  and  wonder-myths  that 
celebrated  the  doings  of  the  volcanic  goddess  Pele  and  her  com- 
peers. Thus  in  the  cantillations  of  the  old-time  hula  we  find  a 
ready-made  anthology  that  includes  every  species  of  composition  in 
the  whole  range  of  Hawaiian  poetry. 

This  epic  of  Pele  was  chiefly  a  more  or  less  detached  series  of 
poems  forming  a  story  addressed  not  to  the  closet  reader,  but  to 
the  eye  and  ear  and  heart  of  the  assembled  chiefs  and  people ;  and 
it  was  sung.  The  Hawaiian  song,  its  note  of  joy  par  excellence,  was 
the  oli ;  but  it  must  be  noted  that  in  every  species  of  Hawaiian 
poetry  —  mele  —  whether  epic,  or  eulogy,  or  prayer,  sounding 
through  them  all  we  shall  find  the  lyric  note. 

The  most  telling  record  of  a  people's  intimate  life  is  the  record 
which  it  unconsciously  makes  in  its  songs.  This  record  which  the 
Hawaiian  people  have  left  of  themselves  is  full  and  specific.  When, 
therefore,  we  ask  what  emotions  stirred  the  heart  of  the  old-time 
Hawaiian  as  he  approached  the  great  themes  of  life  and  death,  of 
ambition  and  jealousy,  of  sexual  love,  conjugal  love,  and  parental 
love  ;  what  his  attitude  toward  nature  and  the  dread  forces  of  earth- 
quake and  storm,  and  the  mysteries  of  spirit  and  the  hereafter — we 
shall  find  our  answer  in  the  songs  and  prayers  and  recitations  of 
the  hula. 


1  Introduction  to  an  unpublished  manuscript,  The  UnwHtUn  Literature  of  Hawaii, 
Presented  at  the  meeting  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association,  San  Francisco, 
August,  1905. 


271 


u 


273  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [m.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  hula,  it  is  true,  has  been  unfortunate  in  the  mode  and  man- 
mer  of  its  introduction  to  us  modems.  An  institution  of  divine, 
that  is,  religious,  origin,  the  hula  has  in  modem  times  wandered  so 
far  and  fallen  so  low  that  foreign  and  critical  esteem  has  come  to 
associate  it  with  the  riotous  and  passionate  ebullitions  of  Polynedan 
kings  and  the  voluptuous  posturings  of  their  flesh-pots.  We  must, 
however,  make  a  just  distinction  between  the  gestures  and  bodily 
contortions  presented  by  the  men  and  women,  the  actors  in  the 
hula,  and  their  uttered  words.  "  The  voice  is  Jacob's  voice,  but 
the  hands  arc  the  hands  of  Esau."  In  truth  the  actors  in  the  hula 
no  longer  suit  the  action  to  the  word.  The  utterance  harks  back 
to  the  golden  age ;  the  gestures  are  trumped  up  by  the  passion  c& 
the  hour,  or  dictated  by  the  master  of  the  hula,  to  whom  the  real 
meaning  of  the  old  bards  is  ofltimes  a  sealed  casket. 

Whatever  indelicacy  attaches  in  modern  times  to  the  gestures 
and  contortions  of  the  hula  dancers,  the  old-time  hula  songs  were 
in  lai^e  measure  untainted  with  grossness.  If  there  ever  was  a 
Polynesian  Arcadia,  and  if  it  were  possible  for  true  reports  of  the 
doings  and  sayings  of  the  Polynesians  to  reach  us  from  that  happy 
land  —  reports  of  their  joys  and  sorrows,  their  love-makings  and 
their  jealousies,  their  family  spats  and  reconciliations,  their  wor- 
ship of  beauty  and  of  the  gods  and  goddesses  who  walked  in 
the  garden  of  beauty  —  we  may,  I  think,  say  that  such  a  re- 
port would  be  in  substantial  agreement  with  the  report  that  is 
here  offered. 

If  any  one  finds  himself  unable  to  tolerate  the  nude,  he  must 
not  enler  the  galleries  of  art.  If  one's  virtue  will  not  endure  the 
love-making  of  Arcadia,  let  him  banish  that  myth  from  his  imagina- 
tion and  hie  to  a  convent  or  a  nunnery. 

For  an  account  of  the  first  hula  we  may  look  to  the  story  of 
Pele.  On  one  occasion  that  goddess  begged  her  sisters  to  dance 
and  sing  before  her;  but  they  all  excused  themselves,  saying  they 
did  not  know  the  art.  At  that  moment  in  came  little  Hiiaka,  the 
youngest  and  the  favorite.  Unknown  to  her  sisters,  the  little 
maiden  had  practised  the  dance  under  the  tuition  of  her  friend,  the 
beautiful,  but  ill-fated,  Hopoe.  When  the  invitation  was  banteringly 
passed  on  to  her,  to  the  surprise  of  all  Hiiaka  modestly  consented. 


KMERSON]  UNWRITTEN  LITERATURE   OF  HAWAII  273 

The  wave-beaten  sand-beach  was  her  floor,  the  open  air  her  hall. 
Feet  and  hands  and  swaying  form  kept  time  to  her  improvisation  : 

Look  Puna's  a-dance  in  the  wind ; 
The  palm-groves  of  Kea-au  shaken. 
Haena  and  the  woman  Hopoe  dance  and  sway, 
On  the  beach  Nana-huki  — 
A  dance  of  purest  delight  — 
Down  by  the  sea  Nana-huki. 


The  hula  was  a  religious  service,  in  which  poetry,  music,  pan- 
tomime, and  the  dance  lent  themselves  under  the  forms  of  dramatic 
art  to  the  refreshment  of  men's  minds.  Its  view  of  life  was  idyllic 
and  it  gave  itself  to  the  celebration  of  those  mythical  times  when 
gods  and  goddesses  moved  upon  the  earth  as  men  and  women  and 
when  men  and  women  were  as  gods.  As  to  subject-matter,  its 
warp  was  spun  largely  from  the  bowels  of  the  old-time  mythology, 
that  became  cords  through  which  the  race  maintained  vital  con- 
nection with  its  mysterious  past.  Interwoven  with  those,  forming 
the  woof,  were  threads  of  a  thousand  hues  and  of  many  fabrics, 
representing  the  imaginations  of  the  poet,  the  speculations  of  the 
philosopher,  the  aspirations  of  many  a  thirsty  soul,  as  well  as  the 
ravings  and  flame-colored  pictures  of  the  sensualist,  the  mutterings 
and  incantations  of  the  kahuna,  the  mysteries  and  paraphernalia  of 
Polynesian  mythology,  the  annals  of  the  nation's  history  —  the 
material,  in  fact,  which  in  another  nation  and  under  different  cir- 
cumstances would  have  gone  to  the  making  of  its  poetry,  its 
drama,  its  literature. 

The  people  were  superstitiously  religious ;  one  finds  their  drama 
saturated  with  religious  feeling,  hedged  about  with  tabu,  loaded 
down  with  prayer  and  sacrifice.  They  were  poetical ;  nature  was 
full  of  voices  for  their  ears  ;  their  thoughts  came  to  them  as  images ; 
nature  was  to  them  an  allegory ;  all  this  found  expression  in  their 
dramatic  art.  They  were  musical ;  their  drama  must  needs  be  cast 
in  forms  to  suit  their  ideas  of  rhythm,  of  melody  and  harmony  — 
poetic  harmony.  They  were,  moreover,  the  children  of  passion, 
sensuous,  worshipful  of  whatever  lends  itself  to  pleasure.      How 


274  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

then  could  the  dramatic  efforts  of  this  primitive  people,  still  in  the 
bonds  of  animalism,  escape  the  smirch  of  passion  ?  It  is  interesting 
to  note  that  the  songs  and  poetical  pieces  which  have  come  down 
to  us  from  the  remotest  antiquity  are  generally  inspired  with  a  purer 
sentiment  and  a  loflier  purpose  than  the  modem  ;  but  it  can  be  said 
of  them  all  that  when  they  do  step  into  the  mud  of  animalism  it  is 
not  to  tarry  and  wallow  in  it;  it  is  rather  with  an  unconscious 
naivete,  as  of  a  child  thinking  no  evil. 

The  most  advanced  modern  is  no  doubt  better  able  to  hark 
back  to  the  sweetness  and  light  and  music  of  the  primeval  world 
than  the  veriest  wigwam-dweller  that  ever  chipped  an  arrowhead  or 
twanged  a  bow.  It  is  not  so  much  what  the  primitive  man  can 
give  us  as  what  we  can  find  in  him  that  is  worth  our  while.  The 
light  that  a  Goethe,  a  Thoreau,  or  a  Kipling  can  project  into 
Arcadia  is  only  that  mirrored  in  their  own  nature. 

If  one  mistakes  not  the  temper  and  mind  of  this  generation,  we 
are  living  in  an  age  that  is  not  content  to  let  perish  one  seed  of 
thought,  or  one  single  phase  of  life  that  can  be  rescued  from  the 
drift  of  time.  We  mourn  the  extinction  of  the  buffalo  of  the  plains 
and  the  birds  of  the  islands,  thinking  —  rightly  —  that  life  is  some- 
what less  rich  and  full  without  them.  What  of  the  people  of  the 
plains  and  of  the  islands  of  the  sea  —  is  their  contribution  so 
nothingless  that  one  can  affirm  that  the  orbit  of  man's  mind  is 
complete  without  it  ? 

Comparison  is  unavoidable  between  the  place  held  by  the  dance 
in  ancient  Hawaii  and  that  occupied  by  the  dance  in  our  modem 
society.  The  ancient  Hawaiians  did  not  as  a  rule  personally  and 
informally  indulge  in  the  dance  for  their  own  amusement  as  does 
pleasure-loving  society  at  the  present  time.  Like  the  Shah  of  Per- 
sia, but  for  very  different  reasons,  Hawaiians  of  the  old  time  left  it 
to  be  done  for  them  by  a  paid  body  of  trained  performers.  This 
was  not  because  the  art  and  practice  of  the  hula  was  held  in  disre- 
pute —  quite  the  reverse  —  but  because  it  was  an  accomplishment 
requiring  special  education  and  arduous  training  both  in  song  and 
dance,  and  more  especially  because  it  was  a  religious  matter  and 
must  be  guarded  against  profanation  by  the  observance  of  tabus  and 
the  performance  of  priestly  rites. 


EMERSON]  UNWRITTEN  LITERATURE   OF  HAWAII  27$ 

This  fact,  which  we  find  paralleled  in  every  form  of  common 
amusement,  sport,  and  entertainment  in  ancient  Hawaii,  sheds  a 
strong  light  on  the  genius  of  the  Hawaiian.  We  are  wont  to  think 
of  the  old-time  Hawaiians  as  light-hearted  children  of  nature 
given  to  spontaneous  outbursts  of  song  and  dance  as  the  mood 
seized,  quite  as  the  rustics  of  "  merrie  England  "  joined  hands  and 
tripped  *'  the  light  fantastic  toe  "  in  the  joyous  month  of  May,  or 
shouted  the  harvest  home  at  a  later  season.  The  genius  of  the 
Hawaiian  was  different.  With  him  the  dance  was  an  affair  of  pre- 
meditation, an  organized  effort,  guarded  by  the  traditions  of  a  som- 
ber religion.  And  this  characteristic,  with  qualifications,  will  be 
found  to  belong  to  every  variety  of  popular  Hawaiian  sport  and 
amusement.  Exception,  of  course,  must  be  made  of  the  unorgan- 
ized sports  of  childhood.  One  is  almost  inclined  to  generalize  and 
to  say  that  those  children  of  nature,  as  we  are  wont  to  call  them, 
were  in  this  regard  less  free  and  spontaneous  than  the  more  ad- 
vanced race  to  which  we  are  proud  to  belong.  But  if  the  approaches 
to  the  temple  of  Terpsichore  with  them  were  more  guarded,  we  may 
confidentiy  assert  that  their  enjoyment  therein  was  more  deep  and 
abandoned. 

Honolulu, 
Hawah. 


EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR  VALLEY 

By  GERARD  FOWKE 

The  researches  herein  reported  were  carried  on  during  the 
working  season  of  1898,  for  the  American  Museum  of  Natural 
History  of  New  York.  Investigation  was  confined  strictly  to  the 
last  350  miles  of  the  Amur  river  and  to  the  coast  from  its  mouth  to 
Okhotsk  sea.^  Facts  stated  and  opinions  advanced  are  not  intended 
to  include  a  wider  range  than  the  immediate  vidnity  of  the  shores. 

Before  the  advent  of  the  Russians,  from  1855  to  i860,  the 
natives'  diet  was  confined  almost  exclusively  to  meat  and  fish.  The 
Amur  is  one  of  the  great  salmon  streams  of  the  world,  though  at 
present  Japanese  and  Russian  fishermen  succeed  in  catching  the 
greater  portion  of  the  run  near  the  mouth  of  the  river.  The  main 
dependence  for  animal  food  was  the  flesh  of  the  elk ;  these  came 
down  in  summer  from  the  mountains  to  feed  on  the  abundant  vege- 
tation along  the  river,  and  hunters  lay  in  wait  for  them  around  the 
margins  of  swamps.  No  shell-fish  exist  in  the  region  examined,  or 
at  least  none  accessible  at  the  time  of  need,  except  a  sort  of  peri- 
winkle or  water-snail ;  these  are  not  used  as  food  at  the  present  time, 
nor  is  there  any  evidence  that  they  ever  served  this  purpose.  The 
absence  of  shell-fish  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  the  v/ater 
of  the  Amur  contains  only  a  very  small  amount  of  lime  in  solution 
(evidenced  by  it  lathering  freely  with  any  kind  of  soap),  and  the  swift 
current  carries  to  the  sea  all  clayey  sediment,  such  as  is  ordinarily 
deposited  by  large  streams,  leaving  only  sand  and  gravel  in  its  bed 
and  along  the  shores.  One  may  walk  for  miles  on  the  beach  after 
a  heavy  rain  without  soiling  his  shoes. 

Possibly  some  items  may  have  been  added  to  the  meager  dietary 
through  barter  with  Manchus,  but  not  enough  to  be  of  material 
value.  In  summer,  while  vegetation  is  abundant,  the  natives  con- 
sume quantities  of  various  herbs  which  grow  spontaneously,  with 

*  A  brief  abstract  was  printed  in  ^SV/Vwa-,  April  14,  1899. 

276 


FOWKE]     EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY  2JJ 

an  especial  predilection  toward  garlic  or  wild  onions  ;  but  they  have 
never  made  the  slightest  attempt  at  cultivating  the  soil  until  quite 
recently,  and  at  the  best  they  take  no  interest  in  raising  crops  of 
any  sort  except  on  a  very  small  scale,  when  they  have  been  urged 
to  do  so  by  the  advice  and  example  of  the  white  settlers. 

Bone,  wood,  and  fiber  seem  to  have  been  the  primitive  materials 
for  nearly  all  tools,  implements,  and  utensils.  Flint  or  any  allied 
substance  adapted  to  the  manufacture  of  arrow  or  spear  heads  is 
not  to  be  found.  Stone  suitable  for  other  objects  is  rare ;  it  occurs 
only  in  the  form  of  water-worn  pebbles  or  small  bowlders  which 
are  not  at  all  plentiful,  being  confined  to  limited  and  widely  sepa- 
rated areas  along  the  shores.  For  many  kinds  of  work  they  may 
have  been  used  in  their  natural  forms. 

Careful  investigation  failed  to  reveal  any  distinct  evidence  of  a 
prehistoric  people  differing  in  their  manner  of  living  from  those  now 
occupying  the  region.  Every  place  at  all  suitable  for  a  village-site, 
every  stretch  of  shore  or  exposed  bank  bordering  on  a  spot  that 
would  seem  to  hold  out  to  persons  in  any  condition  of  life  the 
slightest  inducement  for  even  temporary  occupancy,  was  thoroughly 
examined,  but  usually  with  negative  results.  No  flint  implements 
were  discovered,  though  a  few  arrow-heads  labeled  "  from  the  Amur 
River,"  and  supposed  to  have  come  from  this  region,  are  to  be  seen 
in  the  museums  at  Khabarovsk  and  Vladivostok.  These  specimens, 
or  at  least  the  stone  of  which  they  are  made,  may  well  have  been 
brought  from  another  locality.  Some  chipped  as  well  as  some 
polished  celts  were  found  ;  these  are  quite  small,  and  most  of  them 
have  the  beveled  edge  which  indicates  use  as  scrapers  or  skin- 
dressers.  Fragments  of  pottery  are  abundant  in  numerous  places, 
on  almost  every  beach  in  fact  that  offers  a  good  fishing  station. 
Most  of  them  are  pronounced,  by  both  natives  and  Manchus,  to  be 
of  **  Chinese"  (Manchu  ?)  manufacture.  The  pieces  attributed  to 
local  handiwork  are  mostly  rough  and  of  coarse  material,  with  slight 
endeavor  at  any  sort  of  ornamentation  ;  usually  they  are  quite  poorly 
made. 

No  investigations  away  from  the  river  were  attempted  ;  the  primi- 
tive wilderness,  with  its  dense  growth,  is  almost  impenetrable,  and 
no  one  has,  or  has  ever  had,  a  permanent  home  beyond  its  borders. 


278  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Native  hunters  of  fur-bearing  animals  are  accustomed  to  make  their 
winter  camps  not  more  than  five  or  six  miles  away  from  home,  and 
go  prepared  to  remain  in  them  for  weeks  or  months  at  a  time.  Not 
even  trails  are  to  be  found  through  the  forests  or  along  the  river 
banks  ;  aside  from  the  usual  difficulties  of  making  a  road  under 
such  conditions,  the  innumerable  marshes,  lakes,  sloughs,  and 
bayous  are  absolutely  impassable.  The  many  tributaries  and  inlets 
equally  prevent  extended  journeying  along  the  river  shores.  So 
all  travel  must  be  by  water  ;  in  boats  during  four  months  of  summer, 
on  sledges  or  sleighs  drawn  by  dogs  or  horses  during  four  months 
when  the  river  is  frozen,  while  for  two  months  in  spring  and  a  like 
period  in  fall  all  traffic  is  suspended. 

The  Amur  below  Khabarovsk  embodies  the  drainage  channels 
of  a  series  of  former  lakes.  Wide  bottom  lands  alternate  with 
gorges  and  receding  rocky  shores.  The  former  are  the  silt  deposits 
in  the  basins  of  the  extinct  sheets  of  water  ;  the  latter  mark  the  bar- 
riers by  which  the  ancient  lakes  were  restricted.  The  rocky  portions 
of  the  channel  have  not  yet  been  eroded  to  a  depth  which  permits 
the  formation  of  terraces  in  the  flat  border-lands  ;  when  the  river 
overflows  its  immediate  banks  the  water  nearly  everywhere  stretches 
to  the  high  lands  on  both  sides.  There  are  some  exceptions  to  this 
rule  in  places  where  local  conditions  have  modified  the  general  plan 
and  brought  about  a  different  arrangement  of  topographical  features. 
Such  exceptional  benches  are  usually  limited  in  extent,  especially 
so  as  to  their  width.  Even  if  those  instances  in  which  the  bed- 
rock reaches  to  the  river's  shores  be  included,  there  are  not  many 
level  tracts  on  the  Amur  above  the  reach  of  the  highest  floods ; 
consequently,  as  the  native  villages  must  be  located  close  to  the 
water,  most  of  them  are  subject  to  overflow.  Occasionally,  though 
not  often,  there  is  a  bluff*  or  low  hill  favorably  situated  for  occu- 
pancy ;  but  approach  to  such  elevations  from  the  river  is  generally 
somewhat  difficult  and  preference  is  given  to  more  easily  accessible 
stations,  despite  the  certainty  of  future  inconvenience.  Apparently, 
like  many  higher  in  the  social  scale,  the  Amur  people  submit 
philosophically  to  preventable  hardships  merely  because  they  regard 
such  matters  as  part  of  the  natural  course  of  events ;  their  fathers 
lived  so  and  it  is  not  for  them  to  violate  precedent. 


4 


FOWKK]      EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY         279 

The  Russians  protect  themselves  with  substantial  log  houses 
put  together  in  a  manner  that  bids  defiance  to  the  violence  and  cold 
of  wintry  gales,  but  the  natives  seem  averse  to  the  form  of  energy 
required  in  erecting  such  buildings.  They  prefer  to  cling  to  their 
own  style  of  building,  despite  the  fact  that  it  involves  the  expendi- 
ture of  a  considerably  greater,  amount  of  labor  in  producing  less 
satisfactory  results.  Perhaps,  however,  the  native  looks  at  the 
latter  part  of  the  proposition  from  a  different  point  of  view.  In 
summer,  when  camping,  a  hut  or  tent  affords  all  the  protection  that 
is  deemed  necessary.  The  simplest  form  is  constructed  somewhat 
like  an  Indian  wigwam,  with  a  number  of  poles  tied  together  at  the 
top  and  spread  apart  at  the  bottom,  this  framework  being  covered 
with  bark  or  skins,  or  sometimes  nowadays  with  canvas.  To  ac- 
commodate a  larger  number,  posts  are  set  in  the  ground  and  pro- 
vided with  cross-poles  and  rafters,  to  which  bark  is  fastened  with 
tough  twisted  vines,  the  roof  being  held  in  place  by  stones  and 
poles.  This  structure  may  be  used  for  several  successive  summers. 
The  winter,  or  permanent,  dwelling  is  constructed  practically  as 
follows :  A  suitable  site  having  been  selected,  there  is  marked  off  a 
space  whose  size  is  determined  by  the  number  of  persons  for  whom 
accommodations  are  to  be  provided.  The  earth  within  this  area  is 
cleared  out  to  a  depth  varying  according  to  circumstances,  but  usu- 
ally about  two  feet.  Should  the  ground  be  low-lying  or  difficult 
to  penetrate,  the  pit  may  be  shallower ;  but  if  easily  removed,  or 
well  underdrained,  the  depth  may  be  considerably  increased.  Posts 
are  set  around  the  margin  of  the  excavated  area,  with  poles  and 
twigs  lashed  to  them  horizontally  and  vertically  to  form  a  wattle  ; 
mud  is  thickly  plastered  over  this  on  both  sides.  The  roof  is  simi- 
larly wattled  and  plastered  on  top.  Earth  is  then  banked  up 
against  the  wall  on  the  outside,  and  spread  over  the  roof,  in  such 
amount  as  may  be  requisite  for  protection  against  the  elements. 
Should  the  earth  removed  from  the  house-site  be  insufficient  or 
unsuitable  for  this  purpose,  more  is  obtained  by  digging  in  any  con- 
venient spot.  Little  pits  due  to  this  borrowing  are  to  be  seen  at 
every  village-site,  occupied  or  abandoned. 

In  one  corner,  a  fire-place  is  made  of  stones  built  up  somewhat 
like  a  dome  or  in  the  shape  of  an  old-fashioned  straw  bee-hive.     An 


28o  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  190! 

opening  is  left  at  the  bottom  for  supplying  fuel ;  and  another  at  th< 
top,  into  which  a  lai^e  iron  kettle  is  set.     From  this  stove,  or  fur- 
nace, flues  lead  around  the  room  next  to  the  wall.     Each  flue  con- 
I  sists  of  two  parallel  rows  of  flat  stones,  set  on  edge  and  coverec 

with  similar  slabs.  If  stones  of  proper  form  are  not  easily  obtain- 
able, bowlders  are  substituted ;  all  interstices  in  the  fire-place  and 
flues  are  closely  chinked  with  mud.     There  may  be  three  or  foui 

I  of  these  flues  in  lai^e  houses ;  and  perhaps  another  furnace  in  a 

comer  opposite  the  first.  All  the  flues  finally  unite  in  one,  which, 
after  passing  through  the  wall,  is  carried  from  1 5  to  30  feet  out- 
side, where  it  terminates  at  a  chimney.  This  may  be  formed  of  a 
log  hollowed  out  like  a  trough,  with  a  board  fastened  over  the  oper 
side ;  or  it  may  be  made  entirely  of  boards.  It  is  from  10  to  i; 
feet  high,  and  has  a  draft  ample  for  the  demands  made  on  it 
Over  the  flues  sand  and  fine  gravel  are  piled,  held  in  place  at  th< 
front  by  boards  and  carefully  leveled  on  top,  thus  forming  a  raisec 
,1  platform  on  which  the  whole  family  practically  lives  when  indoors 

So  long  as  a  fire  is  kept  up,  the  platform  is  warm  and  dry. 

More  or  less  repair  to  the  walls  and  roof  is  necessary  after  everj 
storm  ;  with  every  freeze  and  thaw  also  their  integrity  is  impaired 
The  wattle  itself  in  time  yields  to  age  and  moisture,  and  the  house 
becomes  untenantable.  But  the  inmates  do  not  always  await  suet 
notice  of  eviction.  A  flood  beyond  the  ordinary,  causing  inconve- 
nience  or  discomfort ;  a  period  of  unusual  cold ;  the  failure  of  i 
hunting  or  fishing  expedition ;  a  bad  dream  of  the  '*  head  man  " 
an  omen  of  impending  trouble  or  misfortune,  or  even  a  slightei 
appeal  to  their  superstitious  fancy,  will  cause  the  entire  populatior 
of  a  village  to  pack  up  incontinently  and  seek  another  location 
The  house  thus  abandoned  soon  sinks  to  decay.  The  earth  pilec 
around  its  base,  reinforced  by  that  falling  from  the  walls,  stands  a^ 
an  embankment  around  the  depression  within.  If  the  roof  timben 
give  way  while  the  earth  still  remains  on  them,  the  cavity  will  be 
shallower  to  that  extent ;  should  the  roof  remain  intact  until  the 
earth  washes  off,  which,  if  neglected,  it  will  soon  do  in  the  vcrj 
heavy  rains  prevalent  at  certain  seasons,  the  embankment  is  thereb) 
proportionally  elevated.  When  the  house  remains  in  use  for  a  long 
period,  the  roof  will   require  several  renewals  on  account  of  this 


FOWKE]      EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY         28 1 

denudation  ;  thus  the  height  of  the  surrounding  wall,  as  compared 
with  the  depth  of  the  central  portion,  may  be  considerably  aug- 
mented. Consequently  the  sites  of  two  houses  identical  in  fabrica- 
tion may  differ  greatly  in  appearance  after  all  the  perishable  parts 
have  yielded  to  decay ;  one  may  seem  to  have  had  its  floor  much 
deeper  than  the  floor  of  the  other.  Such  dissimilarity  can  have  no 
bearing  upon  either  the  actual  or  the  relative  age  of  two  abandoned 
houses,  but,  at  the  most,  can  only  suggest  that  one  was  probably 
occupied  a  greater  length  of  time  than  the  other. 

In  referring  to  measurements  hereafter,  the  figures  indicating 
breadth  or  diameter  will  represent  the  horizontal  distance  between 
opposite  points  on  the  embankment;  while  depth  will  mean  the 
vertical  distance  from  the  top  of  the  surrounding  wall  to  the  bottom 
of  the  enclosed  pit  as  both  now  exist. 

The  word  •*  house-pits  "  is  the  closest  interpretation  of  the  native 
name  by  which  these  depressions  are  known.  They  are  regarded, 
wherever  found,  as  abodes  of  **  the  old  people."  This  term  signifies 
simply  people  who  lived  at  the  locality  before  the  present  inhabi- 
tants came,  and  has  no  reference  either  to  the  time  of  the  earlier 
occupancy  or  to  the  identity  of  the  dwellers. 

With  these  preliminary  remarks,  applicable  to  the  territory  occu- 
pied at  this  time  by  the  two  native  tribes  of  Golds  or  Goldi,  and 
Gilyaks,  a  more  detailed  account  of  the  expedition  may  be  taken  up. 
The  names'  of  villages  or  other  places  are  phonetically  spelled 
according  to  the  pronunciation  given  by  either  Russians  or  natives. 

On  the  right  bank  of  the  Amur,  somewhat  more  than  200  miles 
below  Khabarovsk,  is  a  station  of  the  Russian  Imperial  Post  Service. 
It  has  no  specific  name,  being  merely  a  place  for  changing  horses 
in  the  winter.  The  native  village  of  Halba  is  situated  two  versts 
(verst  =  3,500  English  feet)  below  it.  From  the  station  a  smooth, 
gently-sloping  gravel  beach  extends  about  six  versts  down  the 
river,  terminating  at  a  narrow  stream  which  is  the  outlet  of  a  lake 
or  lagoon  covering  probably  fifty  acres.  The  beach  borders  a 
strip  of  level  bottom  land ;  between  this  and  the  mountains  at  the 
back  is  a  wide  swampy  tract.  Elk  and  game  of  other  varieties  re- 
sort to  the  lake,  while  wild  fowl  in  season  throng  the  marsh.     The 


282  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

beach,  which  afTords  a  most  excellent  place  for  landing  canoes  and 
hauling  seines,  was  deemed  a  good  spot  for  beginning  operations. 

A  verst  above  Halba  are  a  dozen  or  more  house-[Mts,  from  20 
to  40  feet  in  diameter,  and  from  3  to  6  feet  deep.  The  sides  have 
attained  their  final  slope.  Owing  to  the  profuse  groiKth  of  brush, 
weeds,  and  vines,  especially  blackberry  and  wild  rose  bushes,  the 
exact  number  of  pits  could  not  be  ascertained,  and  no  digging  was 
attempted. 

Two  versts  below  Halba  is  the  native  village  of  Belgo ;  here  arc 
fifteen  or  twenty  pits  similar  to  those  just  mentioned.  Here  also 
obstacles  such  as  before  encountered  prevented  accurate  count 
Across  one  pit,  measuring  2  5  feet  from  side  to  side  and  4  feet  deep, 
a  trench  was  carried.  In  the  center,  2  feet  below  the  present  bot- 
tom, a  space  3  by  4  feet  with  a  maximum  depth  of  six  inches,  was 
burned  to  a  bright  red.  No  ashes  or  charcoal  lay  on  or  around 
this  fire-bed,  but  its  origin  was  plain.  Below  this  level  was  fine, 
clean,  yellow  sand ;  above  it,  the  earth  from  the  sides.  On  the 
same  level  were  several  pieces  of  pottery,  fragments  from  large 
vessels.  The  unchanged  sand  was  loose  and  easily  dug ;  that 
which  was  burned  was  compact,  and  gave  forth  a  gritty  sound  and 
sensation  as  it  was  penetrated  by  the  tools.  A  skull,  quite  solid, 
was  picked  up  on  the  surface  among  the  weeds  a  few  feet  from  this 
pit ;  but  no  place  could  be  found  from  which  it  was  likely  to  have 
come. 

About  a  hundred  yards  above  the  outlet  of  the  lake,  lying  under 
three  feet  of  earth  and  at  the  level  of  the  topmost  gravel  layer  of 
the  beach,  was  a  fire-place  of  flat  stones,  exactly  similar  to  the  kind 
now  in  use  among  the  Goldi.  Apparently  it  was  constructed  when 
the  bed  of  gravel  and  sand  on  which  it  rested  was  the  highest  por- 
tion of  the  beach,  and  was  since  covered  by  the  alluvium ;  at  least 
there  was  no  indication  that  the  overlying  earth  had  ever  been  dis- 
turbed since  it  was  deposited  by  the  water.  The  slabs  were  almost 
in  their  proper  order ;  there  were  some  traces  of  other  fires  in  the 
earth  above  them,  though  no  stones  were  found  about  the  latter. 

At  several  other  places  along  the  foot  of  the  bank,  within  a  mile 
of  this  fire-place  others  much  like  it  were  unearthed  at  about  the 
same  depth.    Two  of  them  were  cleared  out,  but  no  remains  of  any 


FOWKE]     EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY         283 

kind  were  found  in  or  about  them.  Neither  could  anything  be  found 
on  the  beach  except  two  fragments  of  pottery  and  a  rude,  unfinished, 
chipped  celt. 

At  Belgo  and  Halba  the  river  is  fully  two  miles  wide ;  on  an 
island  near  the  farther  side  are  about  20  house-pits,  smaller  and 
shallower  than  those  at  the  villages.  In  one,  which  was  cleared 
out.  a  flue  was  found,  made  of  flat  stones,  just  as  flues  in  that  region 
are  constructed  now.  It  was  covered  with  five  or  six  inches  of 
earth,  probably  sedimentary,  as  the  river  has  flooded  the  site  twice 
in  the  last  forty  years.  Portions  of  two  skeletons  were  found  in  the 
river  bank  where  it  had  caved  away.  They  were  just  under  the 
sod ;  the  bones  looked  quite  fresh,  and  the  birch  box  in  which  they 
lay  was  only  slightly  touched  with  decay.  A  skull,  possibly  from 
one  of  these  skeletons,  was  picked  up  on  the  beach  ;  and  *  great 
many  potsherds  also  were  found.  A  Chinese  merchant  who  in- 
spected the  latter  material  said  that  most  of  it  was  of  Chinese  (Man- 
churian  ?)  though  some  of  it  was  of  Goldi  manufacture.  The  oldest 
man  in  Belgo  does  not  remember  when  any  one  lived  on  the  island. 
He  did  not  know  his  age,  but  his  daughter  claimed  to  be  more  than 
eighty,  and  looked  it. 

At  Verchne-Tombovsk,  nine  versts  below  Belgo,  human  remains 
were  exhumed  by  some  workmen  in  excavating  for  an  ice-house  on 
the  point  of  a  terrace  where  a  small  stream  flows  into  the  Amur. 
No  information  could  be  secured  from  the  men  beyond  the  fact  of 
the  bones  having  been  discovered  about  four  feet  beneath  the  sur- 
face. At  the  same  time,  while  a  drainage  trench  was  being  dug 
around  the  ice-house,  a  fire-place  and  flue  were  unearthed  near  the 
river  bank.  They  were  practically  destroyed  by  the  trenching,  but 
enough  remained  to  show  that  they  were  of  the  type  now  in  use. 
The  natives  say  a  village  formerly  stood  here,  but  that  many  inhabi- 
tants died  of  smallpox  "  before  the  Russians  came,''  and  the  sur- 
vivors moved  up  the  river  and  established  the  village  of  Belgo. 

Several  houses  having  been  erected  on  this  old  village-site,  per- 
mission for  further  excavations  could  be  obtained  only  for  a  small 
area  on  the  river  bank.  Here  an  ash-bed  was  found  at  the  depth  of 
sixteen  inches ;  it  was  three  and  a  half  feet  across,  five  inches  thick 
at  the  middle,  and  thinned  to  an  edge  on  every  side.     It  lay  in  a 


284  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s,,  8,  1906 

saucer-shaped  hole  or  fire-pit,  the  earth  under  the  central  portion 
ha\nng  burned  red  to  a  further  depth  of  three  or  four  inches.  Some 
fragments  of  pottery  and  a  piece  of  slate  rubbing-stone  were  found 
among  the  ashes.  A  foot  from  the  edge  of  the  fire-pit  and  lower 
than  its  bottom,  or  at  a  total  depth  of  about  two  feet,  was  a  large 
polishing  or  sharpening  stone  with  a  wide  hollow  in  each  face,  and 
a  narrow,  deep  groove  alongside  one  of  them. 

Twenty  versts  below  Verchne-Tombovsk,  on  the  opposite  side 
of  the  river,  near  Chanka,  house-pits  occur ;  high  grass  and  weeds 
prevented  their  number  being  ascertained.  There  are  also  two 
earth  mounds  about  three  feet  high,  through  one  of  which  a  trench 
was  dug.  The  first  foot  excavated  was  of  earth ;  this  rested  on  a 
mass  of  birch-bark  scraps  among  which  were  some  jMeces  of  wood, 
including  parts  of  a  spoon  and  of  a  small  human  efiigy.  It  is  custom- 
ary among  the  Goldi,  when  making  domestic  articles  of  such  material, 
to  throw  all  the  refuse  in  a  heap  near  the  house.  The  Russians 
sometimes  take  advantage  of  this  custom  to  secure  foundations  for 
haystacks,  increasing  the  elevation,  if  necessary,  by  piling  on  earth ; 
such  were  the  origin  and  use  of  these  mounds. 

At  Onda,  on  the  right  bank  of  the  Amur,  is  the  first  beach  for 
several  miles.  Fragments  of  old  pottery  were  scattered  among  the 
gravel  on  the  shore.  At  the  water's  edge  near  the  village  were  two 
small  severed  bushes  or  branches  struck  into  the  gravel,  with  the 
leaves  still  clinging  to  the  twigs,  though  quite  dry.  Half-way  up 
the  beach  were  two  more  such  bushes ;  at  the  top  of  the  bank,  in 
the  edge  of  the  brush,  two  more.  They  seemed  to  be  intended  to 
mark  a  pathway.  Beyond  the  last  two,  in  an  open  or  cleared  space 
of  not  more  than  a  square  yard,  the  end  of  a  stout  stick  pushed  or 
driven  deep  into  the  ground  stood  about  thirty  inches  high.  Stick 
and  bushes  all  had  little  bunches  of  shavings  tied  to  them.  Some 
yards  away,  the  end  of  a  coffin  was  projecting  from  the  low  bank, 
the  boards  being  but  very  slightly  decayed.  In  it  was  a  skeleton 
with  shreds  of  decayed  flesh  still  clinging  to  the  bones.  A 
modern  Chinese  or  Japanese  pipe  and  a  copper  vessel  of  a  kind  in 
common  use  for  heating  vodka  were  with  the  remains. 

Nothing  worthy  of  mention  was  found  between  here  and  the 
mouth  of  the  Garoon,  which  comes  in  on  the  left  some  miles  below. 


powke]     exploration  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY  285 

A  large  island  at  the  mouth  of  this  stream  causes  it  to  discharge 
through  two  channels.  On  the  left  bank  of  the  lower  mouth  are 
three  house-pits.  They  are  evidently  quite  recent,  as  the  walls  have 
suffered  very  little  from  erosion  and  the  comer  posts  are  still  stand- 
ing, solid  and  strong. 

Just  below  middle  Tombovsk  notched  sinkers  were  found  on 
the  beach  near  the  bank  ;  these  may  have  belonged  to  any  age. 
The  Goldi  use  many  such  sinkers. 

On  the  left  bank,  about  three  versts  below  Holbuka,  at  the  lower 
end  of  a  ridge  a  mile  long,  with  low  swampy  land  back  of  it,  are 
twelve  or  fourteen  house-pits.  These  are  from  i  S  to  3  5  feet  across, 
2  to  4  feet  deep,  and  30  to  60  feet  higher  than  the  level  of  the 
beach  —  the  first  house -pits  yet  seen  which  are  entirely  above  over- 
flow. Pottery  fragments  also  were  found.  This  ridge  may  be  the 
remains  of  an  island  ;  but  it  has  every  appearance  of  being  due  to 
the  combined  action  of  waves  and  winds. 

On  the  right  bank,  just  above  the  mouth  of  the  Nyung-Nyu,  is 
a  house-pit ;  there  may  be  others.  Oftentimes,  in  the  coarse,  rank 
grass,  which  is  from  four  to  seven  feet  high  on  the  flat  lands,  and 
stands  as  thick  as  timothy  in  a  meadow,  one  discovers  depressions 
only  by  falling  or  sliding  into  them  ;  and  there  is  no  certain  way  o\ 
determining  when  the  last  one  has  been  found.  Immediately  below 
Nyung-Nyu,  at  a  single  hut  marked  on  charts  as  the  village  of  that 
name,  are  several  house-pits.  They  stand  on  a  former  bank  of  the 
Amur,  with  a  gentle  slope  down  to  a  slight  bayou  in  front ;  but  the 
site  is  now  shut  off  from  the  water  by  a  great  sand  ridge  formed 
by  the  waves  or  wind,  or  both,  since  the  village  was  settled.  These 
are  apparently  the  most  ancient  house-pits  found,  so  far,  on  the  trip  ; 
but  surface  changes  are  very  rapid  in  the  shifting  soils  and  sands  of 
the  Amur  valley. 

On  the  right  bank  of  the  great  river,  five  miles  above  lower 
Tombovsk,  is  a  terrace  rising  thirty  feet  above  overflow.  It  is  level 
on  top,  half  a  mile  long,  and  5CX)  feet  wide  at  the  broadest  part. 
The  river  now  flows  80  yards  from  its  foot ;  the  intervening  space  is 
a  low  meadow,  built  up  by  flood  action  on  the  former  gravel  beach. 
An  extensive  swamp  stretches  between  the  terrace  and  the  moun- 
tains in  the  rear.  Scattered  about  here  are  48  house-pits,  many  of 
them  40  to  50  feet  across  and  3  to  5  feet  deep. 


286  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Nearly  half  a  mile  below  this  terrace,  separated  from  it  by  a 
little  stream  issuing  from  a  swamp,  is  a  small  sand  ridge,  with  the 
front  nearly  vertical  from  wave  action  during  high  water.  It  is 
probably  the  last  remnant  of  an  island,  and  will  soon  disappear. 
Between  its  base  and  the  water  extends  a  mass  of  gravel  and  bowlders, 
among  which  are  thousands  of  pebbles  of  very  hard  blue  slate  and 
other  stone  suitable  for  implements  ;  most  of  these  are  of  such  shape 
and  size  that  but  little  labor  would  have  been  required  to  convert 
them  into  tools  or  weapons  adapted  to  primitive  needs.  Many  pieces 
showed  marks  of  work,  among  them  small  scrapers  or  celts  of 
slate,  now  for  the  first  time  observed,  and  notched  sinkers.  Frag- 
ments of  pottery  also  were  found. 

On  the  left  bank  of  the  Amur,  nearly  opposite  this  place,  begins 
another  terrace  or  ridge,  thirty  feet  high,  with  a  swamp  back  of  it. 
All  such  ridges  are  similar  in  appearance  to  those  found  along  lake 
margins,  and  are  formed  in  the  same  manner.  The  Amur  in  many 
places  has  a  width  of  two  miles  or  more  while  within  its  banks, 
and  during  floods  attains  a  velocity  of  eight  or  ten  miles  an  hour. 
It  is  stated  by  persons  familiar  with  the  river  at  all  seasons,  that  in 
places  where  there  is  a  rocky  bottom  and  consequently  a  greater 
incline,  a  rate  of  fifteen  miles  an  hour  is  reached  in  the  channel  in 
time  of  highest  spring  floods.  Such  a  torrent,  when  opposed  by  a 
strong  wind,  has  a  swell  like  the  ocean.  The  water  is  then  thick 
with  sediment  which  is  whirled  into  the  eddies  and  piled  in  calmer 
places  along  the  shores,  forming  great  bars  and  tow-heads  ;  when 
the  waters  recede  and  these  dry  out,  the  winds  carry  the  sand 
farther  inland  and  in  time  large  tracts  may  be  covered  by  it  to  a 
considerable  depth. 

The  ridge  or  dune  last  mentioned,  whose  lower  point  is  about 
four  miles  above  lower  Tombovsk,  is  nearly  three-fourths  of  a  mile 
long,  and  contains  house-pits  along  its  entire  length.  There  are 
more  than  a  hundred  from  30  to  50  feet  across  and  up  to  6  feet 
deep ;  and  many  others  which  may  be  the  sites  of  small  huts  or 
only  large  '*  borrow-pits."  This  village-site  has  not  been  inhabited 
within  the  memory  of  any  one  now  living  ;  the  natives  have  a  tradi- 
tion, however,  that  a  large  number  of  their  people  formerly  lived  on 
the  spot. 


^ 


FOWKE]      EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY  287 

At  the  lower  end  of  this  dune  is  a  swale,  separating  it  from  a 
ridge  50  feet  high,  and  sloping  steeply  on  both  sides.  It  is  not 
composed  of  sand,  like  the  other,  but  is  a  spur  projecting  from  a  high 
hill.  In  a  line  on  its  crest,  which  is  only  wide  enough  to  afford 
them  room,  are  five  or  six  pits,  scarcely  of  sufficient  size  to  mark  a 
hut-site,  and  at  some  distance  from  the  river.  They  may  be  ancient 
traps  or  pit-falls. 

On  the  same  side,  a  mile  below,  is  a  lagoon  of  thirty  or  forty 
acres.  A  dune  running  out  from  a  low  hill  of  native  soil 
nearly  shuts  oflT  this  lagoon  from  the  river,  leaving  only  a  narrow 
outlet  along  the  upper  side.  On  the  higher  part  of  the  dune  and 
extending  to  the  adjacent  slope  of  the  hill,  is  a  collection  of  a  dozen 
or  more  house-pits  ;  they  are  from  30  to  60  feet  above  the  water. 
This  is  known  to  be  the  site  of  a  recent  Goldi  village.  A  native 
said  he  had  been  among  the  people  at  the  time  it  was  occupied, 
and  that  it  was  abandoned  about  twenty  years  before.  In  all  essen- 
tial respects  it  is  the  same  as  others  examined. 

Two  miles  above  lower  Tombovsk  the  Coolgoo  river  flows 
into  the  Amur;  on  the  lower  side  of  the  junction  are  five  or  six 
house-pits. 

Three  versts  below  lower  Tombovsk,  on  the  same  side,  is  a 
dune  or  ridge  made  by  the  river ;  it  is  on  a  foundation  of  sand  and 
fine  gravel  containing  slate  pebbles.  The  latter  were  utilized  to 
some  extent  for  making  implements,  as  unfinished  or  broken  ones 
were  found,  along  with  fragments  of  pottery.  A  single  house-pit 
was  located  behind  the  dune. 

Seven  versts  below  this,  on  the  left,  are  several  house-pits  at 
the  mouth  of  a  small  stream  coming  in  from  the  Stone  Man  moun- 
tain. On  top  of  this  mountain  are  three  great  masses  of  rock,  por- 
tions of  dykes.  They  are  visible  for  more  than  forty  miles  up  or 
down  the  river.  Tradition  has  it  that  in  ages  past  a  great  Goldi 
chief  went  up  here  with  his  dog  in  pursuit  of  a  bear.  For  some 
reason  all  were  changed  into  stone.  Viewed  from  a  certain  point 
the  **man"  has  a  striking  resemblance  to  a  statue  in  classic  cos- 
tume, while  the  **bear"  looks  very  much  like  a  sculpture  of  that 
animal  gazing  back  over  a  pile  of  stones  at  his  pursuer.  The  *'  dog  " 
has   no  likeness  to  anything  in   particular.     Many  persons  have 


288  AMERICAX  AXTHROPOLOGIST  [x.  s.,  8,  1906 

attempted  to  reach  the  top  of  the  mountain  where  the  figures  are» 
but  no  one  has  ever  succeeded. 

Nothing  i^-as  found  between  here  and  the  mouth  of  the  Sheleko 
river;  on  the  upper  side  of  this  stream,  at  the  site  of  an  aban- 
doned Russian  \illage,  are  five  house-pits.  A  small  celt-scraper 
was  found  near  by,  on  the  beach. 

Five  versts  farther  down  the  Amur  is  the  recently  abandoned 
native  \illage  of  Hotzko.  Here,  on  both  sides  of  a  little  stream,  are 
house-pits,  overgroHTi  as  in  other  places. 

Four  versts  lower  is  another  abandoned  \illage-site.  The  land 
about  it  i^as  cultivated  for  some  years  by  Russian  colonists  who 
kept  for  their  toi^n  its  native  name  of  Ca.  Like  most  government 
colonies,  this  one  soon  perished,  through  sondes  that  seem  in- 
separable from  pauper,  penal,  or  subsidized  communities,  and  the 
only  inhabitant  now  is  a  man  who  sells  wood  to  the  steamboats  and 
cuts  hay  from  the  old  clearing.  There  are  about  80  house-pits  here, 
besides  numerous  borrow-pits,  so  that  at  one  time  Ca  must  have 
boasted  a  considerable  population.  One  of  these  pits,  measuring 
38  feet  square  between  outside  comers  of  the  embankment,  was 
trenched  across.  The  ridge  was  of  a  clayey  nature,  proving  it  to 
be  the  mud  plastering  of  the  walls.  Remains  of  a  post  were  found 
going  down  into  the  earth  below  the  wall.  Farther  within  were  four 
rows  of  smoke-blackened  stones,  forming  three  flues.  Nothing  was 
found  in  the  central  area  except  a  few  scattered  potsherds ;  these, 
being  near  the  surface,  may  have  been  gathered  up  in  the  earth 
forming  the  roof,  and  fallen  in  with  it.  On  reaching  the  opposite 
side,  three  rows  of  stones  were  found,  forming  two  flues.  The  dis- 
tance from  outside  to  outside  of  these  stones  was  34  feet,  which 
thus  represents  the  inner  measurement  of  the  house.  Natives  say 
that  "a  long  time  ago"  (this  means  with  them  any  time  prior  to 
the  Russian  occupancy)  very  many  people  lived  here.  A  **  great 
sickness"  fell  upon  the  community,  from  which  most  of  them  died. 
The  survivors,  as  soon  as  they  were  able,  moved  away.  The  disease 
was  probably  smallpox;  it  raged  in  1874  and  again  in  1S79,  *^^d 
it  is  said  that  a  similar  but  more  deadly  pestilence  occurred  many 
years  ago  throughout  the  valley.  Search  was  made  for  a  burial- 
place,  but  no  signs  of  one  could  be  discovered.     Until  recent  years 


FOWKE]      EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY  289 

the  natives  —  or  the  Gilyaks,  at  least  —  did  not  inter  the  dead,  but 
either  burned  them  or  laid  them  on  the  ground,  scantily  covered 
with  old  clothing,  grass,  and  brush. 

Near  the  upper  end  of  an  island  whose  head  is  twelve  versts 
below  Loocheeteska,  is  a  single  house-pit ;  a  verst  farther  are  seven 
or  eight.  On  the  lower  end  of  the  island  is  the  native  village  of 
Gassan,  recently  settled. 

There  is  nothing  else  until  the  abandoned  village  of  Ere,  three 
versts  below  Seleonepar,  is  reached  ;  here  are  18  or  20  house-pits, 
some  of  them  40  feet  across  and  4  feet  deep.  In  two  of  them  the 
stone-flue  arrangement  is  quite  easily  traced,  so  they  must  be  com- 
paratively recent.  At  this  place  a  grave  was  opened  ;  the  body  had 
been  placed  in  a  strong  pine  box  and  buried  two  feet  deep.  As  the 
interment  was  of  a  late  date,  we  did  not  disturb  the  remains. 

From  Seleonepar  to  the  mouth  of  the  Amur,  only  Gilyak  villages 
are  found.  Above  the  Garoon  river,  all  are  Goldi ;  while  both  tribes 
intermingle  between  these  points. 

From  Ere,  for  a  hundred  miles  or  more,  on  the  left  side  of  the 
Amur  is  a  succession  of  lagoons,  swamps,  creeks,  bayous,  and 
islands,  stretching  in  some  places  fully  twenty  miles  inland  to  the 
mountains,  and  all  subject  to  frequent  overflow.  No  one  lives 
among  them,  and  no  one  ventures  into  them  except  a  few  hunters, 
fishers,  or  hay  cutters,  and  these  for  only  a  short  time.  On  the 
right  side  there  are  many  more  bluffs  than  above  Ere.  and  where 
good  beaches  or  bottom  lands  occur  there  is  usually  some  feature 
that  makes  residence  unpleasant  or  inconvenient.  Consequently, 
but  few  villages  are  to  be  found.  Sometimes  there  is  not  a  habit- 
able spot  for  ten  miles  at  a  stretch. 

Five  miles  above  Nyata  is  a  sand  dune  a  few  feet  above  over- 
flow. House-pits  extend  fully  a  fourth  of  a  mile  along  its  top  ; 
some  of  them  are  four  feet  deep.  In  two  or  three  are  remains  of 
posts  and  poles,  indicating  possibly  more  modem  huts  on  the  older 
sites.  A  few  cross-sections  show,  on  account  of  the  caving  of  the 
bank  ;  the  construction  is  the  same  as  in  the  house-pits  which  were 
excavated.  Some  potsherds,  and  a  small  pot  nearly  whole,  were 
found  on  the  shore. 

About  two  and  a  half  miles  below  Nyata,  on  a  low  bluff*  on  the 


290  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

lower  side  of  a  river  bearing  the  same  name,  are  ten  house-pits,  one 
of  them  fully  60  feet  across. 

Four  miles  below  the  mouth  of  Poolsa  river  are  two  pits  on  a 
bluff;  and  two  versts  below  these,  above  overflow,  are  eight  others. 

From  here  to  Sophisk  there  are  only  low  islands  and  marshy 
shores  or  low  bluffs.  No  spot  exists  where  there  is  a  safe  mooring- 
place  for  river  craft  of  any  sort,  or  any  site  where  a  house  could  stand. 
The  river  divides  into  scores  of  channels  so  intricate  and  so  con- 
tinuously shifting  in  direction  and  depth  that  even  steamboat  pilots 
are  often  at  a  loss  to  know  the  proper  course.  The  dense  growth 
of  willow  and  birch  shuts  off  every  view  beyond  the  nearest  shore. 
In  a  small  boat  one  soon  finds  himself  as  bewildered  and  completely 
lost  as  if  in  a  trackless  mountain  region,  and  can  do  nothing  but 
drift  with  the  current  until  he  finds  his  bearings  again. 

Ten  versts  above  Sophisk  a  headland  juts  out  into  the  river, 
causing  a  violent  whirlpool  where  waves  toss  a  canoe  about  as  in  a 
storm  at  sea.  On  a  narrow  beach  of  sand  behind  this  point  lies  a 
large  bowlder,  probably  carried  thither  by  floating  ice,  as  it  is 
composed  of  material  different  from  any  natural  formation  in  the 
vicinity.  One  side  of  this  bowlder  has  been  dressed  into  a  flat  tri- 
angular surface,  measuring  nearly  five  feet  on  each  edge.  Near  the 
apex  a  human  face  is  formed  by  deeply  incised  lines  ;  this  is  pro- 
vided with  a  crown  or  head-dress.  Below  this,  near  the  center  of 
the  smoothed  surface,  are  two  other  heads,  without  covering.  One 
has  two  parallel  lines  across  the  middle  of  the  face.  The  other  has 
V-shaped  incisions  extending  from  each  nostril  over  the  cheeks ; 
from  the  glabella  upward  ;  and  from  the  middle  of  each  eye-brow 
outward.  Farther  down,  across  the  lower  part  of  the  stone,  are 
two  rows  of  what  seem  to  be  only,  vertical  lines ;  but  they  are 
probably  remains  of  an  inscription  partially  obliterated  by  sand 
scouring,  as  the  stone  is  frequently  under  water.  A  priest  long 
resident  in  Siberia  and  Manchuria  says  the  whole  drawing  is  the 
symbol  of  the  Chinese  Water  God,  or  God  of  the  Waters.  There  is 
certainly  no  place  on  the  lower  Amur  where  voyagers  in  small  boats 
have  more  need  of  his  good  offices. 

The  maps  show  a  native  village  where  Sophisk  stands ;  but 
there  is  now  no  indication  that  it  ever  existed. 


FOWKE]      EXPLORATION  OF  THE   LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY  291 

From  Sophisk  to  Marinsk  only  two  places  are  fit  for  habitation. 
One  is  a  long,  high  dune,  separating  Lake  Lada  from  the  river. 
Natives  reported  house-pits  on  this  dune,  but  none  could  be  found. 
The  other  locality  is  at  the  outlet  of  Lake  Lada,  two  versts  above 
Marinsk ;  there  is  a  native  village  here,  but  no  evidence  of  earlier 
occupancy. 

Three  versts  below  Marinsk,  on  an  island  of  several  thousand 
acres  mostly  subject  to  overflow,  is  a  ridge  or  wind  dune  nearly  a 
hundred  feet  high  in  places  and  covering  an  area  of  at  least  half  a 
square  mile.  On  the  river  side  this  is  cut  away  to  a  bluff  as  steep 
as  the  character  of  the  material  (sand  and  silt)  will  permit.  On  the 
beach  at  the  upper  end  of  this  bluff  were  some  pottery  fragments. 

Passing  from  this  point  between  low  banks,  no  signs  of  life  are 
to  be  observed  until  at  the  two  native  villages  of  Bulou,  standing 
on  little  terraces  below  the  outlet  of  a  lake.  There  are  no  house- 
pits. 

A  mile  below  Mongol  a  small  stream  enters  the  Amur.  On 
the  lower  side  is  a  dry  terrace,  scattered  about  on  which  are  many 
house-pits,  some  of  them  the  largest  yet  observed.  Two  are  in 
natural  depressions  resembling  sinkholes  but  closed  at  the  bottom. 
The  slope  of  the  terrace  reaches  down  to  a  swale  fifty  yards  wide, 
beyond  which  is  a  gravel  ridge  of  the  same  breadth  piled  up  by 
wave  action. 

Fivfe  miles  below  Kiama  is  a  formation  similar  to  that  near 
Mongol.  The  natives  report  house-pits  on  the  terrace  and  say  the 
"old  people"  lived  there.  The  stage  of  the  water  was  such  that 
the  place  could  not  be  reached  either  on  foot  or  by  boat.  There 
can  be  no  doubt  that  both  these  places  were  abandoned  because  the 
formation  of  the  gravel  ridges  shut  the  inhabitants  off  from  the  river. 

At  the  Goldi  village  of  Pooh',  five  versts  above  Bogorobski,  on 
the  right  bank,  are  house-pits  on  a  high  terrace  between  two  little 
streams.  The  present  natives,  who  have  lately  moved  down  from 
the  Garoon  river,  say  a  Gilyak  village  formerly  stood  here. 

Scattered  along  from  Bogorobski  to  a  little  stream  less  than 
half  a  mile  above  it,  are  between  twenty  and  thirty  house-pits. 
Much  of  the  ground  is  cultivated.  Careful  search  failed  to  reveal 
a  single  object  in  the  vertical  bank ;  but  on  the  beach  were  pot- 


292  AMEK/CAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  \yk.  s.,  8,  1906 

sherds  and  many  broken  or  unfinished  small  stone  implements. 
Nearly  all  the  latter  are  of  slate,  and  are  mostly  celts  or  scrapers, 
though  there  were  found  in  addition  some  side-notched  sinkers  ;  a 
sharpening  stone ;  a  fragmentary  chipped  flint,  the  only  piece  of 
this  character  discovered  on  the  entire  trip ;  and  a  stone  triangular 
in  section  with  the  faces  rubbed  smooth  and  flat. 

About  half  a  mile  below  Bogorobski  are  seven  house-pits  25 
to  30  feet  across,  on  a  level  terrace  50  or  60  feet  above  the 
water.  The  bank  in  front  is  very  steep,  this  being  the  first  group 
found  which  is  at  all  difficult  of  access. 

A  mile  farther  down  the  river,  on  a  terrace  above  high  water,  are 
five  or  six  house-pits  on  the  left,  the  first  observed  on  this  side  below 
the  Stone  Man  mountain.  Natives  all  agree  in  the  statement  that 
there  are  not,  and  never  have  been,  any  permanent  settlements  on 
the  east  bank  of  the  Amur  from  Bogorobski  to  **  a  long  distance 
above  Sophisk."  In  fact,  until  the  point  just  described  is  reached 
there  is  no  place  on  the  mainland  below  Loocheeteska  where  one 
could  be  established. 

On  the  lower  side  of  Poolka  river,  entering  the  Amur  at  Greater 
Mehilovski,  at  the  native  village  of  the  same  name,  are  small  house- 
pits  on  a  terrace  above  overflow.  In  one,  the  posts  and  ground  tim- 
bers are  only  partially  decayed,  so  that  it  must  have  been  abandoned 
within  a  few  years. 

Five  versts  below  here  is  an  abandoned  village  called  Padt,  as 
nearly  as  the  name  can  be  understood.  In  1895,  while  the  river 
was  at  flood  stage,  a  terrible  storm  swept  over  this  region.  Many 
of  the  houses  here  were  destroyed  and  others  injured  beyond  repair. 
Such  as  remain  are  used  as  storage  rooms  for  fishing  appliances ; 
but  the  place  will  never  be  occupied  again  so  long  as  this  catas- 
trophe is  remembered.  Probably  very  many  of  the  unoccupied 
•villages  owe  their  desertion  to  a  similar  cause. 

Several  house-pits  are  on  a  low  bluff"  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
village ;  bushes  and  small  trees  grow  all  around  them,  but  none  of 
any  size  are  found  in  the  depressions,  a  fact  which  indicates  a  rather 
late  occupancy.  In  the  woods  near  by  are  three  houses  or  pens, 
each  about  the  size  of  a  dog  kennel ;  each  contained  a  small,  erect, 
draped  figure,  like  a  standing  doll,  with  various  small  articles  lying 


FOWKE]      EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY  293 

around  it  on  the  floor.  In  one  was  a  copper  pipe ;  in  all  were 
broken  china  cups,  fragments  of  cloth,  and  little  utensils  of  bark 
and  wood. 

At  the  village  of  Akra,  a  short  distance  below  Boskrecenskoe,  is 
a  river  of  the  same  name,  about  three  versts  in  length,  flowing  out 
of  a  lagoon.  There  are  a  few  house-pits  at  the  mouth  of  the  lagoon. 
It  is  reported  that  worked  stones  of  some  kind  exist  near  the  head 
of  Akra  river  ;  the  natives  say  Russian  explorers  spent  several  days 
hunting  for  them  some  years  ago,  but  found  nothing. 

Just  above  Douri  are  pits  on  overflow  ground,  and  a  littnrway 
below  that  village  are  others  on  a  high  terrace. 

At  Tiir  three  large  dressed  square  stone  columns,  the  sides 
covered  with  inscriptions,  stood  on  the  bluff"  where  the  church  is 
built.  One  is  now  in  Khabarovsk,  another  in  Vladivostok.  The 
third,  by  accident,  fell  into  the  river,  which  is  120  feet  deep  at  the 
foot  of  the  bluff",  and  was  never  recovered.  The  inscriptions  have 
been  deciphered,  and,  it  is  claimed,  are  to  the  effect  that  Genghis 
Khan  extended  his  conquests  to  this  point.  It  is  reported  that  in- 
scribed stones  are  standing  about  70  versts  up  the  Amgoon  river, 
which  joins  the  Amur  opposite  Tiir  ;  some  Russians,  presumably 
the  same  party  that  went  to  the  head  of  Akra  river,  made  a  search 
but  were  unable  to  find  them. 

Many  house-pits  are  on  the  gently-sloping  hillside  back  of  the 
village.  A  Gilyak,  in  leveling  off'a  place  to  build  on,  found  a  Chi- 
nese brick  a  foot  beneath  the  surface,  and  three  feet  below  this  a 
layer,  scarcely  decayed,  of  birch  bark.  This  position  is  near  the 
foot  of  a  hill,  however,  so  the  **find*'  may  not  be  of  great  age. 

The  remains  of  an  extensive  town  are  on  the  slope  of  the  hill 
next  below  Tiir.  There  are  several  long  streets,  ditches  for  drain- 
ing them,  and  square  house-sites  somewhat  elevated.  Tiles  from 
roofs  strew  the  ground  in  places.  There  is  also  an  irregular  mound 
of  earth  and  stones,  some  of  the  latter  dressed,  which  is  supposed 
to  be  the  remains  of  a  **  church.*'  Much  of  it  has  been  dug  away 
by  relic  seekers,  but  nothing  worthy  of  mention  ever  rewarded 
their  search.  There  can  be  no  question  that  a  populous  Chinese 
or  Manchu  settlement  flourished  here  at  some  time  in  the  distant 
past ;  but  nothing  has  been  discovered  on  which  to  base  a  conjecture 
as  to  the  period  of  its  existence. 


294  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

At  Coo,  24  versts  below  Tiir,  are  about  20  house-pits  above 
high  water.  One  is  nearly  70  feet  across.  A  very  old  man  said 
these  **  yama  '  *  looked  **  just  so  "  when  he  was  a  boy,  and  that  they 
marked  the  site  of  old-time  Gilyak  houses. 

At  Cheboc  the  Amur  makes  its  final  turn  eastward  to  the  sea. 
It  sweeps  at  an  acute  angle  around  a  granite  bluff  fifty  feet  high, 
whose  top  can  be  reached  only  by  two  or  three  paths  eroded  in 
crevices  of  the  rock.  On  its  undulating  surface  is  a  considerable 
Gilyak  town,  the  only  one  found  under  such  conditions.  The  excel- 
lent roach  at  the  foot  of  the  bluff  is  probably  considered  sufficient 
compensation  for  the  difficulty  of  reaching  the  village.  Among  the 
present  domiciles  are  several  house-pits  ;  but  they  may  mark  only 
older  residences  of  the  same  people.  At  one  of  them  the  pine- 
trunk  chimney  is  still  standing.  Some  of  the  modern  houses  are 
in  various  stages  of  decay  ;  in  a  short  time,  when  all  the  woodwork 
shall  have  disappeared  and  the  site  become  overgrown  with  bushes, 
they  will  have  the  same  appearance  as  these  seemingly  ancient 
dwellings. 

At  this  town  thirteen  bears  were  confined  in  pens,  awaiting 
their  turn  to  be  sacrificed.  There  is  a  vast  amount  of  ceremony 
connected  with  this  religious  rite,  but  the  bears  are  eaten  at  the  end. 

From  here  to  Nikolaevsk  the  entire  country  is  unsuited  for  a 
life  like  that  to  which  the  natives  incline.  There  are  few  spots 
where  good  landing  places  are  to  be  had,  and  the  ground  is  either 
rocky  or  swampy,  so  that  excavation  for  house  sites  is  not  feasible. 
The  few  houses  existing  are  in  such  situations  that,  if  abandoned, 
not  a  trace  of  them  could  be  found  in  another  generation  ;  they  are 
intended  mostly  for  temporary  use.  If  there  was  a  settlement  in  the 
vicinity  of  Nikolaevsk,  all  vestiges  of  it  are  now  effaced. 

At  the  village  of  Chabac,  on  the  left  bank,  35  versts  below 
Nikolaevsk,  on  a  gentle  incline  back  of  a  bluff  40  feet  high,  are 
several  house-pits.  The  area  on  which  they  are  found  contains 
only  small  scattering  bushes,  while  all  around  are  trees  of  moderate 
size.     These  house-pits  are  therefore  probably  recent. 

About  two  miles  below  Chabac  there  is  a  gradual  ascent  from  a 
small  brook  ;  it  is  broken  in  three  or  four  places  by  small  terraces, 
only  a  square  rod  or  two  at  any  point  being  level.     On  this  slope 


^ 


FOWM]     EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY  295 

are  10  or  12  house-pits  in  a  pine  forest.  A  native  said  a  Russian 
dug  here  in  1895  and  found  **  some  pots  *'  — potsherds,  probably. 
The  same  report  is  made  in  regard  to  the  pits  beyond  Cape  Puah, 
mentioned  later. 

On  the  right  bank  of  the  Amur  there  are  no  remains  between 
Nikolaevsk  and  the  native  village  of  Goolyaka.  On  a  little  bluff  at 
the  lower  end  of  this  village  several  large  houses  are  falling  into 
ruins.  Fifty  years  from  now,  only  brush-covered  depressions  will 
be  left  to  suggest  their  former  existence. 

Immediately  below  Goolyaka  is  a  large  bight  into  the  head  of 
which  flows  a  small  brook.  On  the  upper  side  of  this  are  two 
groups  of  house-pits.  One,  consisting  of  1 1  depressions,  extends 
about  250  yards  along  a  bank  subject  to  frequent  overflow.  Some 
flues  are  still  to  be  seen  among  them,  though  no  timbers  now 
remain.  The  other  group  is  back  of  this,  on  a  terrace  about  20 
feet  higher;  there  are  at  least  25  of  the  pits,  which  seem  of  greater 
age  than  those  just  mentioned.  It  is  probable  the  ground  on  which 
the  first  group  occurs  was  a  beach  at  the  time  the  upper  group  was 
occupied ;  being  covered  with  silt  at  high  water,  it  no  longer  afforded 
a  convenient  landing-place,  and  was  utilized  for  residence  purposes, 
with  the  abandonment  of  the  older  site. 

On  the  lower  side  of  the  brook  are  six  house-pits  ;  these  are  in 
the  forest,  with  pine  trees  fully  two  feet  in  diameter  growing  over 
them. 

Along  the  lower  side  of  Cape  Vahs,  which  forms  the  eastern 
boundary  of  this  bight,  are  10  house-pits,  apparently  of  recent  ori- 
gin. The  earth  on  the  inner  side  of  the  embankment  has  not  yet 
attained  its  final  slope. 

Several  miles  farther  down  the  Amur,  nearly  opposite  the  village 
of  Nahleo,  is  a  similar  bight  receiving  a  creek.  On  the  upper  side 
of  this  creek,  in  dense  forest,  are  at  least  a  dozen  house-pits.  Pines 
more  than  two  feet  in  diameter  are  growing  among  them,  the  largest 
one  observed  standing  on  an  embankment.  Moss  covers  the  ground 
to  a  depth  of  several  inches.  The  pits  extend  fully  a  hundred  yards 
back  from  the  river  bank.  A  short  distance  west  of  these,  beyond 
a  Httle  ravine,  are  three  house-pits.  In  one,  the  timbers  are  only 
partially  decayed  and  the  pine-trunk  chimney  is  still  standing. 


296  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

There  is  nothing  more  to  be  found  above  the  mouth  of  the 
river. 

Outside  of  this,  the  coast  along  the  Channel  of  Tartary  is  a 
succession  of  cliffs,  with  long  capes  or  points  of  rock  projecting  at 
intervals.  Occasionally,  between  these,  are  areas  of  beach  or  level 
lands.  Nearly  all  of  the  latter,  however,  are  inundated  at  the 
highest  tides,  and  waves  beat  over  them  with  great  force.  The 
bays  are  shallow  and  many  of  them  are  strewn  with  huge  rocks 
carried  in  by  the  floating  ice,  so  that  only  at  high  tide  is  it  possible 
for  even  a  canoe  to  venture  on  them  with  safety. 

South  of  the  river  habitable  spots  cease  within  ten  or  twelve 
miles ;  there  are  some  small  fishing  villages  on  this  side,  but  they 
have  scant  room.     No  house-pits  exist. 

North  of  the  river  there  are  several  good  camping-places  where 
the  native  or  the  Japanese  fishermen  spend  the  fishing  season  ;  but 
they  leave  before  cold  weather  sets  in.  The  largest  is  on  the  north 
side  of  Cape  Puah,  the  last  headland  south  of  the  promontory  between 
Okhotsk  sea  and  the  Channel.  Here  is  the  finest  beach  on  the  coast, 
and  as  it  is  somewhat  sheltered  from  the  waves,  permanent  houses 
have  been  erected  by  some  Gilyak  families  who  spend  the  summer 
in  them.  In  autumn  they  move  across  the  peninsula  to  another 
cluster  of  houses,  at  some  distance  from  the  open  water  but  on  a 
narrow  passage  which  cuts  off  a  large  marshy  island,  where  they 
remain  until  the  tides  and  storms  of  spring  have  spent  their  force. 

Seven  versts  north  of  Cape  Puah  are  eight  or  ten  house-pits  on  a 
gravel  ridge.  The  sea  is  cutting  away  the  bank  and  has  partially 
destroyed  two  of  them.  In  two  the  timbers  in  part  remain  ;  in  two 
others  the  flues  are  still  to  be  seen.  In  all  respects  these  houses 
were  evidently  like  those  now  in  use. 

A  verst  farther  are  three  house-pits,  close  to  the  beach,  in  a  pine 
forest.  The  trees  are  small,  apparently  of  less  than  a  centur>''s 
growth.  A  hundred  yards  back  of  them,  on  somewhat  higher 
ground  and  in  larger  timber,  are  three  other  pits.  One  of  the 
latter,  not  more  than  30  feet  across,  is  fully  6  feet  deep.  Evidently 
the  ground  in  front,  on  which  the  young  pines  are  growing,  has 
been  built  up  since  the  pits  behind  were  in  use,  a  condition  similar 
to  that  below  Goolyaka. 


> 


rowKE]     EXPLORATION  OF  THE  LOWER  AMUR    VALLEY  297 

A  mile  north  of  the  last  mentioned  remains  are  four  house-pits 
from  20  to  25  feet  in  diameter  and  3  to  4  feet  deep,  which  hold 
their  square  shape  better  than  any  observed  elsewhere.  They  are 
covered  with  a  heavy  growth  of  moss  and  peat,  which  has  accumu- 
lated to  a  thickness  of  from  two  to  three  feet  on  the  gravel  bank  in 
front  of  them. 

Still  north  of  here,  in  the  Channel  and  in  the  Okhotsk  sea,  are 
islands  on  which  are  Gilyak  villages,  permanently  occupied.  Several 
attempts  were  made  to  reach  them,  but  all  failed  on  account  of  the 
rough  weather ;  and  as  the  season  for  the  autumn  typhoon  was  now 
at  hand,  work  had  to  be  closed. 

Conclusions 

On  the  whole,  there  seems  no  reason  for  believing  that  a  manner 
of  living  and  a  degree  of  culture  materially  different  from  those  now 
prevailing  in  the  region,  have  existed  in  the  lower  Amur  valley  since 
prehistoric  times.  Other,  earlier,  people  there  may  have  been,  but 
they  have  left  no  traces.  So  far  as  ancient  remains  are  concerned, 
an  investigator  finds  nothing  on  which  to  establish  a  working  theory 
as  to  migrations  in  any  direction.  All  existing  conditions,  as  they 
are  disclosed  by  minute  examination,  are  explicable  by  reference  to 
known  habits  of  the  present  inhabitants  or  to  the  Manchu  whose 
possession  of  the  region  has  lately  terminated.  With  no  mounds, 
no  cairns,  no  shell-heaps,  no  burial-grounds,  no  evidence  of  agricul- 
ture, scarcely  any  stone  implements  or  pottery,  and  with  such 
specimens  as  exist  in  no  wise  distinctive  —  the  archeologist  stands 
helpless.  The  problems  of  migrations  and  of  ethnic  relations  must 
be  reached  in  some  other  way,  if  they  are  to  be  reached  at  all. 

Saint  Louis,  Mo. 


NOTKWORTHY   ARCHEOLOGICAL   SPECIMENS  FROM 

LOWER  COLUMBIA  VALLEY 

By  HARLAN  I.  SMITH 

In  the  summer  of  1903  I  examined  the  archeological  collection 
of  the  Oregon  Historical  Society,  in  its  museum  in  the  City  Hall 
at  Portland.  The  collection  contained  unique  sculptures  as  well  as 
excellent  types  of  rare  objects  supplementary  to  the  material  already 
forming  a  part  of  the  collections  in  the  American  Museum  of  Nat- 
ural History,  as  well  as  to  the  specimens  included  in  the  author's 
gatherings  of  that  season  in  the  field,  and  to  those  he  had  seen  in 
the  small  collections  of  the  region,  and  in  the  large  museums  of  the 
East,  such  as  those  at  Harvard,  Yale,  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, and  the  National  Museum  at  Washington.  A  loan  of  the 
original  specimens  for  study  in  the  Museum  being  greatly  preferable 
to  notes  and  sketches  made  on  the  spot,  the  Society,  through  its 
assistant  secretary,  Mr  George  H.  Himes,  courteously  granted  per- 
mission for  their  shipment  to  New  York  for  study,  photographing 
and  casting.  The  Society  also  liberally  granted  the  writer  permis- 
sion to  take  duplicate  photographs  and  casts  to  supply  the  needs 
of  other  students  and  institutions,  and  otherwise  to  use  them  as 
might  be  deemed  desirable  in  furthering  the  cause  of  ethnology. 
Prints  from  the  negatives  and  casts  from  the  molds  of  the  speci- 
mens may  now  be  obtained  by  students  or  institutions  conducting 
researches  on  the  North  Pacific  coast. 

The  sculptures,  some  of  which  are  unique,  are  characteristic  of  the 
region  of  the  lower  Willamette.  While  not  attempting  to  explain 
fully  what  these  sculptures  represent,  they  may  be  regarded  as  of 
great  value  in  showing  the  character  of  the  ancient  art  of  that  section. 

Four  specimens  (pi.  xxiii,  a-d),  which  may  be  designated  hand- 
hammer-adzes,  have  celtlike  edges,  but  otherwise  resemble  cylin- 
drical pestles  with  rather  small  knob-shaped  tops.  On  each  side 
may  be  noticed  a  facet  or  shallow  pit. 

298 


SMITH]        SPECIMENS  FROM  LOWER   COLUMBIA    VALLEY  299 

The  first  hand-hammer-adze  (a)  resembles  a  plummet  or  cylin- 
drical pestle,  but  it  is  not  as  thick  as  it  is  wide.  On  each  side  is  a 
facet,  apparently  formed  by  using  the  object  as  a  hammer  for  some 
soft-headed  tool,  such  as  a  canoe-maker*s  wedge  of  wood  or  antler. 
The  specimen  has  a  knob-shaped  top,  a  celtlike  end  with  a  rather 
straightedge,  and  is  8^^  inches  (21 1  mm.)  long.  The  bit  is  squarish 
and  seems  to  have  been  reworked  back  from  the  edge  for  about  one- 
fifth  of  the  entire  length.  Where  this  reworked  surface  terminates 
abruptly  there  is  a  rise  to  the  older  surface  which  in  certain  lights  ap- 
pears to  form  a  ridge,  in  others  a  groove.  There  are  similar  but  less 
distinct  signs  that  the  surface  of  the  bit  had  been  once  or  twice  pre- 
viously reworked  still  farther  back,  nearly  to  the  edges  of  the  facets. 
The  present  specimen  is  made  of  a  heavy  bluish-gray  stone  resem- 
bling diorite.  The  surface  is  smooth,  especially  on  the  ground 
bevels  that  form  the  celtlike  edge  and  on  the  facets.  This  speci- 
men was  found  by  Mrs  A.  Dwier  of  Mt  Tabor,  and  in  November, 
1900,  was  presented  to  the  museum  of  the  Oregon  Historical  Soci- 
ety by  the  Oregon  Alpine  Club,  of  which  she  was  a  member.  (Cat. 
no.  99,  List  no.  29;  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist,  Cast  cat.  no.  16/9855, 
Neg.  no.  12.) 

The  second  hand-hammer-adze  (p)  closely  resembles  the  first, 
except  that  the  facet  and  surrounding  surface  on  one  side  have 
been  broken  out,  apparently  by  the  use  of  the  specimen  as  a  pound- 
ing instrument.  The  knob-shaped  top  likewise  is  broken,  as  if 
pounded  in  an  effort  to  use  the  whole  object  as  a  chisel  or  wedge  as 
well  as  for  an  adze  and  a  hammer;  it  shows  only  one  reworked  sur- 
face, which  extends  back  nearly  to  the  edge  of  the  remaining  (hardly 
noticeable)  facet.  The  second  specimen  is  Si  inches  (216  mm.) 
long,  and  is  composed  of  rather  lighter  and  warmer-colored  stone 
than  the  first.  The  marks  left  in  pecking  it  into  shape  have  not 
been  entirely  effaced  by  polishing  except  on  the  rubbed  bevels  which 
form  the  celtlike  edge.  The  implement  just  described  was  found  by 
Mrs  A.  Dwier  of  Mt  Tabor,  representing  the  Oregon  Alpine  Club, 
and  in  November,  1900,  it  was  loaned  to  the  museum  of  the  Ore- 
gon Historical  Society.  (Cat.  no.  139,  List  no.  27;  Am.  Mus. 
Nat.  Hist.,  Cast  cat.  no.  16/9853,  Neg.  no.  12.) 

The  third  hand-hammer-adze  (c)  also  very  closely  resembles  the 


300  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

first,  except  that  the  upper  third  is  broken  off  and  missing.  The 
cutting  edge  is  somewhat  curved  and  is  fractured  twice  on  each  side  ; 
the  bit  is  oval  in  section  and  its  sides,  which  bevel  suddenly  from 
the  shaft,  bulge  so  slightly  that  they  seem  concave  and  apparently 
are  somewhat  reworked  ;  and  the  pits  on  both  sides  are  pronounced 
and  very  smooth.  The  specimen,  which  is  covered  with  yellow 
clay,  was  found  by  the  Oregon  Alpine  Club,  and  in  November, 
1900,  was  deposited  in  the  museum  of  the  Oregon  Historical  So- 
ciety. (Cat.  no.  140,  List  no.  26;  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  Neg.  no. 
12.     No  cast.) 

The  fourth  hand-hammer-adze  (d)  differs  from  the  first  three  in 
that  it  has  no  top  knob,  facets,  or  reworked  surface.  The  cutting 
edge  is  curved,  convex  on  one  side  and  less  so  on  the  other,  giving 
the  implement  a  form  similar  to  that  of  some  of  the  celts  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi valley.  The  surface  is  polished  very  smooth  but  still  shows 
some  of  the  marks  of  pecking  by  means  of  which  the  object  was 
fashioned.  The  specimen  is  8^  inches  (226  mm.)  long  and  of  a 
yellowish  brown  color.  It  was  found  in  Washington  county,  Ore- 
gon, and  was  presented  in  November,  1900,  to  the  museum  of  the 
Oregon  Historical  Society,  by  Mr  A.  H.  Garrison  of  Hillsboro. 
(Cat.  no.  29  (10029),  List  no.  28 ;  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist,  Cast  cat. 
no.  16/9854,  Neg.  no.  12.) 

There  is  a  similar  hand-hammer-adze  in  the  collection  of  Mr 
D.  W.  Owen,  of  Kennewick,  Washington,  which  he  says  is  from 
Umatilla,  Oregon.  This  specimen,  so  far  as  is  known  at  present, 
indicates  the  eastern  limit  of  distribution  of  this  form. 

The  first  specimen  of  this  kind  that  came  to  my  notice  is  in  the 
James  Terry  collection  in  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  His- 
tory. It  is  catalogued  under  no.  T-22774  as  a  **  chisel  stone, 
plummet  shaped,  Columbia  City,  Columbia  river,  Oregon  .  .  . 
collected  by  Dr  C.  G.  Capler  on  October  4,  1882."  In  general  it 
(^g)  resembles  the  first  hand-hammer-adze  described  in  this  paper, 
but  the  object  as  a  whole  is  of  a  slightly  different  shape,  the  neck 
being  short,  the  lateral  bulge  of  the  body  high  up  near  the  neck, 
and  the  bit  long  and  slender ;  one  facet  merges  into  the  flat  surface 
of  the  side,  while  the  other  is  rough,  apparently  having  been  made 
by  pecking.     The  entire  surface  from  the  top  to  the  side  is  curved 


SMITH]       SPECIMENS  FROM  LOWER  COLUMBIA    VALLEY  3OI 

continuously,  the  neck  being  formed  by  grooving  the  side  edges  and 
carrying  the  groove  around  nearly  to  the  middle  of  the  sides,  but 
leaving  a  small  surface  standing  out  like  a  ridge  connecting  the  top 
with  the  side.  The  bit  is  oval  in  cross-section  and  the  celtlike  edge 
is  convex.  On  each  face  of  the  bit  are  four  grooves,  two  on  each  side. 
They  extend  from  points  between  the  side  and  the  edge,  near  the 
middle  of  the  object,  to  the  bevel  for  the  blade.  The  grooves  on 
the  left  part  of  each  side  extend  farther  to  the  right  at  the  blade, 
causing  the  object  to  suggest  a  spiral  or  screw.  The  specimen  is 
8|  inches  (213  mm.)  long,  made  of  heavy  stone  of  a  light  bluish- 
gray  color ;  the  surface  is  smooth  in  some  places  but  shows  marks 
of  pecking  in  others. 

Mr  E.  D.  Zimmerman,  of  Philadelphia,  informs  me  that  in  his 
private  collection  at  Monterey,  Pa.,  are  six  or  seven  hand -hammer- 
adzes.  Judging  from  a  photograph  of  a  portion  of  the  collection, 
these  are  of  the  type  here  described ;  one  of  them  has  a  hat-shaped 
top ;  two  at  least  are  of  the  long-bitted  variety. 

In  a  photograph  of  the  H.  C.  Stevens  collection,  recently  offered 
for  sale,  may  be  seen  at  least  three  hand-hammer-adzes.  One  of 
these  has  a  simple  knob  at  the  top ;  another,  a  hat-shaped  top, 
bulging  body,  and  long  bit ;  while  a  third  specimen,  which  appears 
to  be  of  the  type  above  described,  has  a  long  bit.  The  top  is  grooved 
around  twice  (cf.  fig.  23  e,  Mem.  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  iv)  and  on 
the  side  of  the  body  shown  in  the  photograph  are  two  grooves 
which  meet  near  the  neck  and  then  diverge,  passing  on  each  side 
of  the  spot  where  the  facet  is  usually  found,  toward  the  edges  of  the 
side.  No  facet  shows  in  the  picture.  The  grooves  just  described 
give  the  object  an  appearance  suggesting  the  lower  side  of  a  fish,  the 
grooves  indicating  the  gill  slits. 

Rev.  Myron  Eells  probably  refers  to  this  type  of  object  in  his 
statement  that  **  still  another  seems  to  have  been  a  pestle  at  the 
handle  end,  and  a  blunt  edge  at  the  other."  *  He  also  doubtless 
alludes  to  this  type  when,  referring  to  chisels  and  wedges,  he  states  : 

"  Dr  RafTerty  has  nine  whole  ones,  or  parts,  about  which  there  is  no 
doubt.     They  mostly  come  from  Sauvies  Island,  and  are  generally  of  hard 


>  Smithsonian  Report  for  1886,  p.  286. 

AM    ANTH.,  K.  S.,  8~90 


302  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

volcanic  rock.  They  vary  in  weight  from  2  pounds  14  ounces  to  5 
pounds  II  ounces;  in  length  from  6^  to  13^  inches,  and  width  from 
2^  to  3^2  inches,  and  in  thickness  from  2^  to  2^  inches.  The  edges 
are  sharp,  but  the  stone  is  thick  a  short  distance  from  the  edge.  I  know 
of  none  from  other  parts  of  Oregon.'** 

The  fact  that  some  of  the  grooves  on  the  Terry  specimen  looked 
as  if  recently  made,  taken  in  connection  with  its  peculiar  shape,  led 
the  writer  at  first  to  regard  it  as  a  questionable  specimen,  or  at  least 
as  a  "  sport"  not  at  all  characteristic  of  the  region.  The  number  of 
similar  specimens  from  a  restricted  area  which  have  since  come  to 
the  author's  notice,  however,  prove  that  they  constitute  a  type 
characteristic  of  the  archeology  of  Willamette  valley  and  vicinity. 

The  facets  suggest  that  these  specimens  have  been  used  as 
hammers.  The  writer  found  similar  objects  only  a  short  distance 
to  the  northwest  of  Portland,  from  Copalis  head  southward  to 
Shoalwater  bay,  Washington,  which  are  of  the  same  type  as  those 
known  to  have  been  used  by  canoe-makers  as  hammers,  that  were 
secured  in  1898  by  Dr  Livingston  Farrand  among  the  Indians  at 
Quinault.  However,  all  the  specimens  found  from  Quinault  to 
Shoalwater  bay,  so  far  as  the  author  is  aware,  have  plain  ends  in- 
stead of  celtlike  ends  and  may  be  called  hand-hammers.  Probably 
these  hand-hammer-adzes  were  used  by  canoe-makers  as  combina- 
tion hammers  and  adzes,  the  blows  being  delivered  in  such  a  way 
as  to  form  the  facets. 

Two  specimens  (pi.  xxiii,  €-e\  f-f')^  which  may  be  designated 
hand-adzes,  have  celtlike  ends  and  tops  resembling  pestles. 

The  first  hand-adze  [e,  e^)  resembles  in  its  upper  portion  a 
pestle,  with  a  circular  body,  somewhat  larger  at  the  base  than  at 
the  top,  a  disk-shaped  striking-head,  and  a  convex  top.  The  sur- 
face of  this  portion  of  the  object  shows  very  slight  scars  or  flutings, 
reminding  one  of  the  surface  of  a  whittled  stick  or  of  a  pared  veg- 
etable. The  shaft  expands  suddenly  into  the  disk-shaped  striking- 
head,  which  in  turn  coalesces  into  a  celtlike  form  projecting  from 
the  base  of  the  upper  portion.  The  line  of  demarkation  between 
the  upper  (cylindrical)  and  the  lower  (celtlike)  portions  of  the  spec- 
imen is  obscure  except  along  part  of  one  edge  (e^).     The  celtlike 

Ubid.,  p.  288. 


\ 


SMITH]       SPECIMENS  FROM  LOWER   COLUMBIA    VALLEY  303 

part  is  somewhat  convex  on  one  side  (shown  in  e\  concave  on  the 
other,  especially  at  its  base,  but  elliptical  in  cross-section  ;  it  tapers 
gradually  from  its  large  base  toward  what  was  once  the  cutting  edge, 
but  which  is  broken  off  There  are  many  signs  of  fluting  on  the 
convex  face.  The  whole  object  is  6J  inches  (174  mm.)  long.  It 
is  hard  and  heavy  and  appears  to  be  basalt,  although  the  surface, 
except  where  broken,  is  much  weathered  and  resembles  yellowish- 
gray  chalk. 

This  hand-adze  was  found  in  the  garden  of  Mr  E.  D.  Nelson, 
Portland,  Oregon,  and  was  presented  by  him  on  February  5,  1903, 
to  the  Museum  of  the  Oregon  Historical  Society.  (Cat.  no.  382 
(380),  List  no.  35;  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  Cast  cat.  no.  16/9860, 
Neg.  no.  I  (edge)  and  3  (side).) 

The  second  hand-adze  (/,  /')  resembles  the  first,  but  the  top 
and  the  convex  exterior  of  the  bit  present  the  natural  surface  of  a 
water- worn  pebble,  while  the  remainder  of  the  surface  shows  marks 
of  pecking,  by  which  process  the  object  was  fashioned  from  the 
pebble.  In  some  places  these  marks  are  partially  obliterated  by 
grinding  and  polishing.  There  are  no  flutings  on  the  surface. 
The  disk  shape  of  the  striking-head  shows  plainly  for  fully  half  the 
circumference  of  the  specimen,  but  the  convex  side  of  the  celtlike 
part  extends  nearly  half-way  up  the  shaft  of  the  pestle-like  part. 
It  is  set,  as  it  were,  about  half-way  its  length  on  the  side  of  the 
lower  half  of  the  pestle-like  part.  The  bit  is  lenticular  in  cross- 
section  and  oval  in  outline.  The  cutting  edge  is  semicircular, 
sharp  and  beveled  to  an  edge,  chiefly  from  the  concave  side.  The 
whole  object  is  7  J^  inches  (184  mm.)  long  and  is  made  of  heavy 
grayish  or  milky  blue  mottled  stone,  possibly  slate. 

This  specimen  was  found  on  Columbia  slough  about  ten  miles 
below  Portland  and  was  deposited  in  the  Museum  of  the  Oregon 
Historical  Society  on  Nov.  30,  1902.  (Cat.  no.  383,  List  no.  36; 
Am.  Mus.  of  Nat.  Hist.,  Cast  cat.  no.  16/9861,  Neg.  no.  i  (edge) 
and  3  (side).) 

There  is  a  specimen  of  this  type  (cat.  no.  25)  in  the  collection 
of  Mr  Louis  O.  Janeck,  North  Yakima,  Washington.  The  natural 
surface  of  the  pebble  from  which  the  implement  was  made  shows 
on  the  ridge,  or  the  part  which  corresponds  to  the  sides  of  the 


304  AMERJCAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

striking-head  of  the  pestle-like  section.  The  specimen  is  6  J^  inches 
(165  mm.)  long  and  made  of  rock  resembling  diorite  or  diabase. 
(Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist,  Neg.  cat.  no.  44452  (2-1).  44503  (6-4).) 
It  is  perhaps  the  most  nearly  perfect  form  of  this  type  ever  seen  by 
the  writer.  The  upper  end  corresponds  closely  in  form  to  a  pestle, 
with  a  slight  indication  of  a  knob  at  the  top,  a  flaring  body,  and  a 
short  striking-head  the  periphery  of  which  extends  as  a  ridge  nearly, 
if  not  quite,  around  the  specimen.  The  celtlike  part  is  toward  one 
edge,  so  that  one  side  expands  to  meet  the  ridge  above  mentioned, 
forming  a  concavity ;  the  other  contracts  to  meet  it,  forming  a  con- 
vex sweep  from  the  cutting  edge  to  the  beginning  of  the  body  of  the 
pestle-like  part.  The  specimen  was  found  near  the  surface  in  an  old 
burial  ground  of  the  Indians  near  the  mouth  of  Yakima  river  on  what 
is  known  as  McNeals  island.  This  specimen  marks  the  present  known 
eastern  limit  of  the  occurrence  of  the  form.  Mr  Zimmerman  has 
informed  me  that  there  are  five  or  six  specimens  of  this  type  in  his 
collection. 

The  region  north  of  Portland  has  yielded  a  pestle,'  shaped  like 
the  upper  part  of  the  present  specimens,  which  was  used  as  a 
hammer,  the  blow  being  delivered  with  the  end  instead  of  with  the 
side  as  in  the  previous  case.  From  the  same  area  come  stone  celts 
hafted  in  handles  made  of  antler  (see  fig.  29  d,  p.  164,  Mem.  Am. 
Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  iv).  From  the  region  south  of  Portland  are  such 
celts,  hatted  by  being  lashed  to  stone  handles  (for  specimens  of 
such  handles  see  Oreg.  Hist.  Soc.  cat.  no.  381,  list  34,  and  the 
collections  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  the  United 
States  National  Museum,  and  the  Pcabody  Museum  of  Harvard). 
It  seems  to  the  writer,  therefore,  that  this  type  (the  hand-adze)  is  a 
combination  of  the  pestle-shaped  hammer  of  the  north  and  the  stone 
celt-handle  of  the  south  with  the  celt  of  both  regions,  and  that  it 
resulted  from  a  modification  and  combination  of  the  same  ideas  that 
produced  these  neighboring  forms  with  which  it  may  be  compared. 

It  is  also  interesting  to  compare  this  form  with  one  from  the 
gravel  at  Oregon  bar,  California,  shown  in  plates  11  and  viii  of 
the  paper  by  Professor  William  H.  Holmes  on  Auriferous  Gravel 

'  See  Ameritatt  Aiukrefffliigitl,  N.  s,,  i,  fig.  10  (,  p.  364,  1899. 


MThln«aVan.    3,  AI  Tw<nly-l»o  Vun.    4,  Mi»  Keller  ■nd  Dr  A 


c,  Gnhjini  KfII.    ;.  Mill  Sullivan  Rtidini  and  Sprllin; 


HITZ]  HELEN  KELLER  309 

would  seem,  sought  expression  in  manifold,  and  especially  in  mis- 
chievous and  combative,  ways,  such  as  unruly  manifestations  against 
the  reprimands  of  her  grandmother.  In  one  well  authenticated  in- 
stance (after  having  discovered  the  function  of  a  key)  she  quietly 
locked  her  mother  in  a  pantry,  where  the  latter  was  compelled  to 
remain  for  an  hour  or  more.  Mrs  Keller  pounded  on  the  door  to  no 
purpose ;  Helen  seated  on  the  floor  outside,  felt  the  jar  of  pounding, 
and  laughed  the  while  with  great  glee.  This  performance  and  its 
revelation  of  what  seemed  a  singularly  bad  spirit  convinced  the  par- 
ents that  the  child  must  be  taught  and  made  to  behave,  naturally  so 
by  some  instructor  specially  qualified  to  undertake  so  difficult  a  task. 
On  the  occasion  of  Helen's  father  consulting  Doctor  Chisholm  of 
Baltimore  in  regard  to  her  case,  the  latter  advised  seeing  Dr  Alex- 
ander Graham  Bell  of  Washington,  who  no  doubt  would  be  able  to 
suggest  how  a  suitable  instructor  might  best  be  obtained.  Doctor 
Bell's  advice  resulted  eventually  in  securing  the  services  of  a  graduate 
of  the  Perkins  Institute  for  the  Blind  at  South  Boston,  Miss  Anne 
Mansfield  Sullivan,  whose  eyesight  had  recently  been  restored  by  an 
operation.  After  a  brief  period  of  special  preparation,  the  follow- 
ing March  (1887)  she  entered  upon  what  promised  to  be  her  life 
work,  and  developed  into  one  of  the  most  remarkable  achievements 
in  the  history  of  pedagogy. 

As  can  well  be  imagined,  the  case,  owing  to  the  extremely 
refractory  spirit  of  the  child  at  the  time,  presented  to  the  teacher 
almost  insurmountable  obstacles,  for  little  Helen  resorted  to  the 
same  tactics  with  Miss  Sullivan  that  she  had  applied  in  her  inter- 
course with  her  parents.  But  her  teacher  proved  equal  to  the  task. 
Inflexible  determination,  at  times  even  physical  force,  yet  always 
tempered  with  maternal  affection  and  unwearying  patience,  coupled 
with  an  unshakable  faith  in  the  eventual  success  of  her  well-nigh  in- 
spired efforts,  ultimately  triumphed.  After  a  voluntary  isolation  of 
herself  and  pupil  in  a  cottage  apart  from  the  parental  residence, 
devoted  to  "  seven  weeks  of  the  hardest  work  she  had  ever  done," 
this  pedagogical  Columbus  was  finally  rewarded  with  the  discovery 
of  the  realm  within  whose  bounds  lay  untold  happiness  for  her  pupil 
and  inexpressible  satisfaction  for  herself  How  this  was  brought 
about  in  part  is  told  in  Helen's  own  words,  when,  five  years  later,  at 


3  lO  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  age  of  thirteen,  she  tells  in  a  brief  autobiography  of  her  being 
taught  the  manual  or  finger  alphabet. 

''  I  had  not  the  least  idea  that  my  finger-play  was  the  magical  key 
which  was  to  unlock  my  mind's  prison  door,  and  open  wide  the  windows 
of  my  soul.  I  had  learned  eighteen  or  twenty  words  before  that  thought 
flashed  into  my  mind  as  the  sun  breaks  upon  the  sleeping  world,  and  in 
that  moment  of  illumination  the  secret  of  language  was  revealed  to  me, 
and  I  caught  a  glimpse  of  the  beautiful  country  I  was  about  to  explore. 

"  Teacher  had  been  trying  all  the  morning  to  make  me  understand 
that  the  mug  and  the  milk  in  the  mug  had  different  names ;  but  I  was 
very  dull,  and  kept  spelling  '  milk  '  for  mug,  and  '  mug  '  for  milk,  until 
teacher  must  have  lost  all  hope  of  making  me  see  my  mistake.  At  last 
she  got  up,  gave  me  the  mug,  and  led  me  out  of  the  door  to  the  pump 
close  by.  Some  one  was  pumping  water,  and  as  the  cool  fresh  stream 
burst  forth,  teacher  made  me  put  my  mug  under  the  spout,  and  spelled 
w-a-t-e-r,  water.  That  word  startled  my  soul,  and  it  awoke,  full  of  the 
spirit  of  the  morning,  full  of  joyous,  exultant  song.  Until  that  day  my 
mind  had  been  like  a  darkened  chamber,  waiting  for  words  to  enter  and 
light  the  lamp,  which  is  thought. 

"  I  learned  a  great  many  words  that  day.  I  do  not  remember  what 
they  all  were ;  but  I  do  know  that '  mother,*  '  father,*  and  *  teacher  *  were 
among  them.  It  would  have  been  difficult  to  find  a  happier  little  child 
than  I  was  that  night  as  I  lay  in  my  crib  and  thought  over  the  joy  the  day 
had  brought  me,  and  for  the  first  time  I  longed  for  a  new  day  to  come. 
The  next  morning  I  awoke  with  joy  in  my  heart.  Everything  I  touched 
seemed  to  quiver  with  life.  It  was  because  I  saw  everything  with  the  new, 
strange,  beautiful  sight  which  had  come  to  me.  I  was  never  angry  after 
that,  t>ecause  I  understood  what  my  friends  said  to  me,  and  I  was  very 
busy  learning  many  wonderful  things.  I  was  never  still  during  the  first 
glad  days  of  my  freedom.  I  was  constantly  spelling  and  acting  out  the 
words  as  I  spelled  them.  I  would  run,  jump,  skip,  and  swing,  no  matter 
where  I  happened  to  be.  Everything  was  budding  and  blossoming.  The 
honeysuckle  hung  in  long  garlands  deliciously  fragrant,  and  the  roses  had 
never  been  so  beautiful  before.  Teacher  and  I  lived  out  of  doors  from 
morning  until  night,  and  I  rejoiced  greatly  in  the  forgotten  light  and  sun- 
shine found  again.  *  * 

Within  three  months  Helen  had  learned  to  use  the  stylus  em- 
ployed by  the  blind  in  writing,  and  had  written  her  first  letter 
(June,    1887).     Acquisition   of  the  power  of  reading   readily  the 


HITZ]  HELEN  KELLER  3 1 1 

embossed  print  familiar  to  the  blind  followed  immediately.  This 
was  succeeded  within  three  years  by  her  acquiring  (1890),  through 
the  special  instruction  of  Miss  Sarah  Fuller,  the  ability  to  speak 
orally,  or  "  talk  with  her  mouth,"  as  she  designated  speech,  an 
achievement  she  had  insisted  on  learning,  and  which  afforded  her 
unbounded  delight.     The  art  of  using  an  ordinary  typewriter  had 

qto"n.q.€      •urLLv        aire 
S  i  tn  k&o  -n.  -u^  /  Ll      tKool 

neiET^    slick     a     V^oL-rti^Xf 

^ocloA    -^LTill    iiXVt    -m'uL- 

dHEfl      -m.^itCt'TL   ^     Ttio  t  k  ^  H. 

Fig.  14.  —  Helen  Keller's  first  composition. 

meanwhile  also  been  accomplished.  Helen  thus  briefly  relates  how 
Miss  Fuller  taught  her  to  speak  : 

*'  She  passed  my  hand  lightly  over  her  face,  and  let  me  feel  the  posi- 
tion of  her  tongue  and  lips  when  she  made  a  sound.  I  was  eager  to 
imitate  every  motion,  and  in  an  hour  had  learned  six  elements  of  speech  : 
M.  P.  A.  S.  T.  I.  Miss  Fuller  gave  me  eleven  lessons  in  all.  I  shall 
never  forget  the  surprise  and  delight  I  felt  when  I  uttered  my  first  con- 
nected sentence,  *  it  is  warm.  *  It  is  true,  they  were  broken  and  stam- 
mering syllables ;  but  they  were  human  speech.  My  soul  came  out  of 
bondage  and  was  reaching  through  those  broken  symbols  of  speech  to  all 
knowledge  and  all  faith." 

In   this   connection    I  would  refer  to  some  interesting  recent 
observations  made  by  an  eminent  scholar  ^  of  Vienna  on  the  subject 

^  Prof.  Dr  W.  Jerusalem  in  the  Oestreichische  Rundschau^  432-433»  Wien,  July  6, 
1905. 


3 1 2  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

of  what  another  great  man  of  science  calls  the  "  Universal  Sense," 
the  Sense  of  Touch  : 

'<  In  concluding  my  treatise  on  Laura  Bridgman  fifteen  years  ago,  I 
stated  that  the  education  and  development  of  Laura  Bridgman,  and  others 
who  shared  her  lot,  primarily  teaches  us  that  the  scope  of  touch  and 
motor  sensations  can  solely  serve  the  world  as  a  gateway  to  mental  con- 
ceptions. This  assertion  in  the  education  of  Marie  Heurtin  attains  its 
final  verification.  In  the  case  of  Laura  Bridgman,  Helen  Keller,  and  most 
others,  we  were  unable  definitely  to  ascertain  the  exact  extent  to  which 
their  infantile  receptiveness  may  have  contributed  in  arousing  mental 
activity.  In  the  case  of  Marie  Heurtin,  however,  who  was  bom  sightless 
and  deaf,  there  is  no  questioning  the  fact  that  the  senses  of  sight  and  hear- 
ing have  given  rise  to  subconscious  sensations.  All  that  she  has  mentally 
achieved  heretofore,  and  may  hereafter  achieve,  must  exclusively  be 
ascribed  to  the  sense  of  touch  and  to  muscular  motor  sensation  [Muskei- 
Empfindungen\ .  Marie  Heurtin  not  only  enables  us  conclusively  to  judge 
of  the  extent  touch  and  motor  sensations  are  capable  of  exercising  —  but 
more.  We  can  no  longer  deny  the  fact  that  sense  perceptions  serve  only 
as  Auslosende  Reize  [stimulating  solvents] ,  by  means  of  which  the  central 
power  of  our  soul  life  is  awakened.  The  sensual  conceptions  of  thought 
as  presented  by  Locke,  and  further  elaborated  by  Lamettrie  and  Coniel- 
lac,  and  as  latterly  again  asserted  by  prominent  students  of  natural  phi- 
losophy, are  no  longer  tenable,  confronted  by  the  facts  presented  in  Marie 
Heurtin *s  education.  Whatever  comes  by  external  contact  is  only  the 
formulating  power  of  our  Internal.  From  within  we  learn  to  know  the 
world  outwardly  by  adapting  the  latter  to  our  organization.  Hence  we 
learn  that  it  is  not  so  essential  whether  these  perceptions  are  solved  by 
either  sight,  aural  or  touch  sensation.  Surely  a  something  mysterious 
must  exist  within,  qualified  to  give  us  a  conception  and  understanding  of 
the  world. 

**  The  teacher  of  Marie  Heurtin  had  faith  that  such  a  mental  or  spir- 
itual power  existed  within  her  animal-like  pupil,  and  her  faith  has  been 
confirmed. ' ' 

All  of  the  absolutely  requisite  appliances  of  intercourse  with 
others,  and  the  channels  for  readily  acquiring  the  knowledge  she  so 
eagerly  yearned  to  possess,  were  now  made  available  to  her,  and 
having  thus  arrived  at  the  portals  of  Helen  Keller's  virtual  entrance 
into  conscious  life,  I  will  leave  the  faithful  and  gifted  teacher  to  say 


HIT2]  HELEN  KELLER  313 

how  she  proceeded  to  unfold  a  mind  deprived  of  what  are  generally 
considered  the  two  most  essential  media  of  brain  perception. 

"  Language  grows  out  of  life,  out  of  its  needs  and  experiences,  its 
joys  and  sorrows,  its  dreams  and  realities.  At  first  my  little  pupil's  mind 
was  all  but  vacant.  Up  to  the  time  when  I  began  to  teach  her,  she  had 
no  means  of  registering  on  its  blank  pages  her  childish  impressions  and 
observations.  She  had  been  living  in  a  world  she  could  not  realize. 
Language  and  knowledge  are  like  Siamese  twins ;  they  are  indissolubly 
connected,  they  are  interdependent.  Good  work  in  language  presup- 
poses and  necessitates  a  real  knowledge  of  things.  As  soon  as  my  little 
pupil  grasped  the  idea  that  everything  had  a  name,  and  that  by  means  of 
the  manual  alphabet  these  names  could  be  transmitted  from  one  to 
another,  I  proceeded  to  awaken  her  further  interest  in  the  objects  whose 
names  she  learned  to  spell  with  such  evident  joy.  I  never  taught 
language  for  the  purpose  of  teaching  it ;  but  invariably  used  language 
as  a  medium  for  the  conveyance  of  thought :  thus  the  learning  of  lan- 
guage was  coincident  with  the  acquisition  of  knowledge.  In  order  to  use 
language  intelligently,  one  must  have  something  to  talk  about,  and  having 
something  to  talk  about  is  the  result  of  general  culture ;  no  amount  of 
language  training  will  enable  our  little  children  to  use  language  with  ease 
and  fluency,  unless  they  have  something  clearly  in  their  minds  which 
they  wish  to  communicate  or  unless  we  succeed  in  awakening  in  them  a 
desire  to  know  what  is  in  the  minds  of  others.  From  the  very  first  Helen 
was  eager  and  enthusiastic  in  pursuit  of  knowledge. 

**  She  had  one  advantage  over  ordinary  children — nothing  from  with- 
out distracted  her  attention ;  so  that  each  new  thought  made  upon  her 
mind  a  distinct  impression^  which  was  rarely  forgotten.  At  first  I  did  not 
attempt  to  confine  my  pupil  to  any  systematic  course  of  study.  I  felt 
that  she  would  accomplish  more  if  allowed  to  follow  her  own  natural  im- 
pulses. I  always  tried  to  find  out  what  interested  her  most,  and  made 
that  the  starting  point  for  the  new  lesson,  whether  or  not  it  had  any 
bearing  on  the  lesson  I  had  planned  to  teach,  and  her  eager  inquiries 
often  led  us  far  away  from  the  subject  with  which  we  t>egan. 

**  Helen  acquired  language  in  an  objective  way,  hy  practice  and  habit ^ 
rather  than  by  study  of  rules  and  definitions.  Grammar  with  its  puzzling 
array  of  classifications,  nomenclatures  and  paradigms,  was  wholly  discarded 
in  her  education.  She  learned  language  by  being  brought  in  contact 
with  the  living  language  itself ;  she  was  made  to  deal  with  it  in  everyday 
conversations,  and  in  her  books,  and  to  turn  it  over  in  a  variety  of  ways 


3 14  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

until  she  had  mastered  its  anatomy.  I  talked  to  her  almost  incessantly 
in  her  waking  hours,  and  encouraged  her  to  talk  to  me.  I  spelled  into 
her  hand  a  description  of  what  was  taking  place  around  us ;  what  I  saw, 
what  I  was  doing,  what  others  were  doing,  an)rthing,  everything.  I 
talked  to  her  with  my  fingers  as  I  should  have  talked  to  her  with  my 
mouth  had  she  been  a  hearing  child,  and  no  doubt  I  talked  much  more 
with  my  fingers,  and  more  constantly  than  I  should  have  done  with  my 
mouth ;  for  had  she  possessed  the  use  of  sight  and  hearing,  she  would 
have  been  less  dependent  on  me  for  entertainment  and  instruction. 

"Very  early  in  her  education  I  led  her  to  observe  and  describe 
flowers  and  animals.  A  flower  or  an  insect  often  furnished  material  for  a 
long  and  interesting  language  lesson.  I  did  not  attempt  to  make  these 
lessons  in  zoology  and  botany  formally  scientific.  I  introduced  them 
early  in  her  education  for  the  purpose  of  cultivating  her  observation, 
furnishing  themes  for  thought,  and  to  fill  her  mind  with  beautiful  picttures 
and  inspiring  ideals.  Material  for  language  lessons,  knowledge  of  facts, 
and  greater  power  of  expression  were  ends  obtained  through  these  lessons ; 
but  were  not  the  most  important  aims.  .  .   . 

"  Books  have  played  a  very  important  part  in  Helen's  education.  As 
soon  as  she  had  learned  the  raised  letters,  I  gave  her  books  to  read  and 
I  doubt  very  much  if  I  shall  be  able  to  make  you  understand  the  impor- 
tance and  advantage  that  books  have  been  to  her  in  acquiring  a  command 
of  idiomatic  English  ;  the  advantage  has  certainly  been  incalculable.  I 
am  confident  that  the  ease  and  fluency  with  which  she  uses  language  are 
in  large  part  due  to  the  fact  that  embossed  books  were  placed  in  her  hands 
as  soon  as  she  had  learned  the  letters.  She  has,  like  many  hearing  persons, 
a  natural  aptitude  for  comprehending  and  using  language  as  soon  as  it  has 
been  acquired.  I  think  also  much  of  the  fluency  with  which  she  uses 
language  is  due  to  the  fact  that  nearly  every  impression  she  receives 
comes  through  the  medium  of  language.  But  after  due  allowance  has  been 
given  to  Helen's  natural  aptitude  for  acquiring  language,  and  to  the 
advantage  resulting  from  her  peculiar  environment,  I  think  we  will  still 
find  that  the  constant  companionship  of  good  books  has  been  of  supreme 
importance  in  her  education. 

*  *  In  speaking  of  what  books  have  been  to  her,  Helen  herself  says  : 
*  I  read  my  first  story  on  May-day,  and  ever  since  books  and  I  have  been 
loving  friends  and  inseparable  companions.  They  have  been  my  faithful 
teacher  in  all  that  is  good  and  beautiful ;  their  pages  have  carried  me 
back  to  ancient  times  and  shown  me  Egypt,  Greece,  Rome ;  they  have 
introduced  me  to  Kings,  Heroes,  and  Gods ;  and  they  have  revealed  to 
me  great  thoughts,  great  deeds.  *  '  * 


HlTZ]  HELEN  KELLER  3  I  S 

Her  teacher  continues : 

''It  is  not  necessary  that  a  child  should  understand  every  word  in  a 
book  before  he  can  read  it  with  pleasure  and  profit.  Indeed  only  such 
explanations  should  be  given  as  are  really  essential.  Helen  drank  in 
language  which  she  at  first  could  not  understand^  and  it  remained  in  her 
mind  until  needed^  when  it  fitted  itself  naturally  and  easily  into  her  con- 
versation and  compositions.  Thus  she  drew  her  vocabulary  from  the  best 
source,  standard  literature,  and  when  the  occasion  came,  she  was  able  to 
use  it  without  effort.  *  * 

This  fully  coincides  with  Dr  A.  Graham  Bell's  ofl-cxpressed 
educational  theorem  :  **  /  would  have  a  deaf  child  read  books  in 
order  to  learn  language^  instead  of  learning  the  language  in  order 
to  recul  books''  — applicable  equally  well,  it  is  claimed,  to  hearing 
children. 

Miss  Sullivan  proceeds  further  : 

"  Helen  has  had  the  best  and  purest  models  in  language  constantly 
presented  to  her,  and  her  conversation  and  her  writings  are  unconscious 
reproductions  of  what  she  has  read.  Reading,  I  think,  should  be  kept 
independent  of  the  regular  school  exercises.  Children  should  be  encour- 
aged to  read  for  the  pure  delight  of  it.  The  attitude  of  the  child  towards 
his  books  should  be  that  of  unconscious  receptivity.  This  means  true 
reading  :  reading  not  only  for  entertainment,  but  for  intellectual  enrich- 
ment and  enlargement.  The  great  works  of  the  imagination  ought  to  be- 
come part  of  their  lives,  as  they  were  once  of  the  very  substance  of  the 
men  who  wrote  them.  It  is  true  that  the  more  sensitive  and  imaginative 
the  mind  is  that  receives  the  thought-picture  and  images  of  literature, 
the  nicer  the  vitality  of  feeling,  the  freshness  and  eagerness  of  interest, 
and  the  spiritual  insight  which  proclaims  the  artistic  temperament,  and 
naturally  she  has  a  more  active  and  intense  joy  in  life  simply  as  life,  and 
in  nature,  books  and  people,  than  less  gifted  mortals.  Her  mind  is  so 
filled  with  the  beautiful  thoughts  and  ideals  of  the  great  poets,  that  nothing 
seems  commonplace  to  her  :  for  her  imagination  colors  all  life  with  its  own 
rich  hues." 

Here  I  would  interject  some  observations  relative  to  imagination 
in  the  education  of  the  blind-deaf,  ascribed  to  Doctor  Dewey,  the 
eminent  psychologist  of  Chicago  University,  in  which  it  is  claimed 
that  in   certain  phases  of  the   imaginative  faculty  they  excel  all 


3 1 6  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Others.  So  pronounced  is  this  characteristic  that  the  eminent 
authority  mentioned  places  first  in  this  respect  the  blind-deaf,  the 
simply  blind  next,  then  normal  men  and  women,  and  the  deaf  last 
of  all.*  Doctor  Dewey  cites  the  case  of  Helen  Keller  simply  as 
typical  rather  than  abnormal,  and  alludes  to  the  "  great  danger  of 
laying  too  much  stress  upon  sense  perception  "  in  the  education  of 
children,  adding : 

"  The  wonderful  and  varied  imagery  which  these  minds  in  silence  and 
darkness  have  created  for  themselves  stands  as  a  perpetual  challenge  to 
those  teachers  who  are  encouraging  their  pupils  to  revel  in  the  endless  pano- 
rama of  sense  perception.  It  is  not  necessary  to  make  our  pupils  blind- 
deaf,  but  it  may  be  well  sometimes  to  require  them  to  shut  their  eyes  and 
ears,  if  need  be,  and  think.  I  can  conceive  of  no  more  important  school 
exercise  than  that  which  will  induce  the  child  to  bring  into  consciousness 
images  of  objects  that  are  not  present  to  the  senses.  This  done  again 
and  again,  and  the  dissociative  process  begins.  Gradually  each  image 
becomes  disengaged  from  the  thing  of  sense  that  brought  it  into  con- 


sciousness. ' ' 


This  verifies  what  the  sculptor,  Horatio  Stone,  said  to  me  per- 
sonally years  ago,  '*  A  well  defined  ideal,  after  all,  is  solely  the 
true,"  and  we  appreciate  more  fully  the  depths  of  thought  which 
prompted  the  poet  Clarence  Stedman  to  close  the  beautiful  poem  he 
dedicated  to  Helen  Keller,  with  the  far-sighted  words : 

*  *  Not  as  we  see 
Earth,  sky,  insensate  forms  ourselves. 

Thou  seest,  but  vision  free 

Thy  fancy  soars  and  delves. 
Albeit  no  sounds  to  us  relate 

The  wondrous  things 

Thy  brave  imaginings 
Within  their  starry  night  create. 

Pity  thy  unconfined 
Clear  spirit,  whose  enfranchised  eyes 

Use  not  their  grosser  sense  ? 
Ah,  no  !  thy  bright  intelligence 

Hath  its  own  Paradise, 


>  Arkansas  Optic ^  March  3d,  1900. 


HITZ]  HELEN  KELLER  3  I J 

A  realm  wherein  to  hear  and  see 

Things  hidden  from  our  kind. 

Not  thou,  not  thou,  *tis  we 

Are  deaf,  are  dumb,  are  blind  !  *  * 

At  this  period,  when  thirteen  years  of  age,  it  was  that  Helen 
Keiller,  under  the  wise  guidance  of  Miss  Sullivan  aided  by  special 
teachers,  really  entered  upon  a  regular  system  of  academic  training. 
How  she  regarded  this  step  in  her  life,  the  entry  she  made  in  her 
diary  at  the  time,  speaks  for  itself : 

Dear  Diary  :  **  To-day  is  the  thirteenth  of  October  1893,  and  I  have 
some  pleasant  news  for  you.  My  studies  began  to-day,  and  I  am  very, 
very  glad.  I  study  arithmetic,  Latin,  history,  geography  and  literature. 
I  am  glad,  because  I  want  to  learn  more  and  more  about  everything  in 
this  beautiful  wonderful  world.  Every  day  I  find  how  little  I  know  :  for 
I  catch  glimpses  on  all  sides  of  treasures  of  history,  language  and  science, 
a  beautiful  world  of  knowledge,  and  I  long  to  see  everything,  know  every- 
thing, and  learn  everything.  I  do  not  feel  discouraged  when  I  think  how 
much  I  have  to  learn,  because  I  know  the  dear  Lord  has  given  me  an 
eternity  in  which  to  learn  it. 

*'  I  used  to  say  I  did  not  like  arithmetic  very  well,  but  now  I  have 
changed  my  mind  !  for  I  see  what  a  good,  useful  study  it  is.  It  helps  me  to 
think  clearly  and  logically  and  strengthens  my  mind  in  many  ways.  I  try 
to  be  very,  very  calm  and  patient  now  when  the  examples  seem  very  hard, 
but  sometimes  in  spite  of  my  great  effort  to  keep  my  mind  in  the  right 
place,  it  will  flutter  like  a  little  bird  in  a  cage  and  try  to  escape  into  the 
pleasant  sunshine  ;  for  nice  and  useful  as  arithmetic  is,  it  is  not  as  inter- 
esting to  me  as  a  beautiful  poem,  or  a  lovely  story. 

**  Latin  is  a  very  beautiful  language,  and  I  hope  I  shall  be  able  to 
speak  and  read  much  of  it  when  I  go  home  next  spring.  Already  I  begin 
to  feel  better  acquainted  with  the  grand  old  heroes  of  Rome  since  I  know 
a  little  of  the  language  in  which  they  thought  and  talked  so  long  ago. ' ' 

But,  in  the  words  of  her  faithful  teacher.  Miss  Sullivan, 

*'It  is  Helen's  loving  and  sympathetic  heart  rather  than  her  bright 
intellect  which  endears  her  to  everybody  with  whom  she  comes  in  con- 
tact. She  impresses  me  every  day  as  being  the  happiest  child  in  the  world, 
and  so  it  is  a  special  privilege  to  be  with  her.  The  spirit  of  love  and 
joyousness  seems  never  to  leave  her.     May  it  ever  be  so.     It  is  beautiful 

AM.  ANTH  ,  N.  S.,  8 — 91. 


3 18  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

to  think  of  a  nature  so  gentle,  pure  and  loving  as  hers  ;  it  is  pleasant  also 
to  think  she  will  ever  see  only  the  best  side  of  every  human  being.  While 
near  her  the  roughest  man  is  all  gentleness,  all  pity ;  not  for  the  world 
would  he  have  her  know  that  he  is  aught  but  good  and  kind  to  every  one. 
So  we  see,  pathetic  as  Helen's  life  must  always  seem  to  those  who  enjoy 
the  blessings  of  sight  and  hearing,  that  it  is  nevertheless  full  of  bright- 
ness, cheer,  courage  and  hope.'* 

In  October,  1894,  Helen  Keller  attended  a  term  at  a  select 
school  for  the  deaf  in  New  York  City,  mainly  for  the  purpose  of 
perfecting  her  articulation,  and  to  continue  her  study  of  Latin, 
French,  and  German.  In  1 896  in  Cambridge  she  entered  upon  her 
preparatory  studies  for  admission  to  Radcliffe  College  (the  Harvard 
Annex  for  women),  which  she  resolutely  determined  to  achieve  if 
possible.  Of  her  studies  and  examination  there,  Mr  Arthur  Gil- 
man,  whose  school  she  attended,  speaks  as  follows : 

**  She  was  successful  in  every  subject,  and  took  *  honors  *  in  English  and 
German.  I  think  that  I  may  say  that  no  candidate  in  Harvard  or  Rad- 
cliffe was  graded  higher  than  Helen  in  English.  The  result  is  remarkable, 
especially  when  we  consider  that  Helen  has  been  studying  on  strictly  Col- 
lege preparatory  lines  for  one  year  only.  She  had  had  long  and  careful 
instruction,  it  is  true,  and  she  had  always  the  loving  ministrations  of  Miss 
Sullivan  in  addition  to  the  inestimable  advantage  of  a  concentration  that 
the  rest  of  us  never  know.  No  man  or  woman  has  ever  in  my  experi- 
ence got  ready  for  these  examinations  in  so  brief  a  time.  How  has  it 
been  accomplished  ?  By  a  union  of  patience,  determination  and  affec- 
tion, with  the  foundation  of  an  uncommon  brain.*' 

The  major  portion  of  the  time  between  this  and  the  final  exami- 
nation which  resulted  (July  4th,  1899)  in  her  being  formally  admitted 
to  the  Freshman  class,  was  devoted  to  study  under  a  special  instruc- 
tor, Mr  Merton  S.  Keith,  of  Cambridge,  Mass.,  assisted  by  Miss  Sul- 
livan.    Of  her  labors  during  this  period,  Mr  Keith  says  : 

'*  It  is  idle  to  inquire  whether  Miss  Keller*s  achievements  are  due  to 
innate  abilities  or  qualities,  or  to  expert  teaching.  In  cases  like  Miss 
Keller's  it  seems  to  me  that  good  teaching  and  proper  environment  are 
even  more  necessary  than  in  the  case  of  the  common  student.  More 
pitfalls  have  been  in  her  way,  and  careful  guidance  has  often  been  abso- 
lutely necessary. 


HITZ]  HELEN  KELLER  319 

*'  With  all  her  innate  and  acquired  powers  of  mind,  she  could  not 
have  attained  her  present  eminence,  had  it  not  been  for  the  moral,  or 
quasi -moral  equalities  of  her  soul.  Ambition,  undaunted  courage,  defi- 
ance of,  or  glorying  over  obstacles,  obstinate  refusal  to  admit  defeat,  hope 
rising  from  incipient  despair,  self-respect  and  self-trust,  patience  and 
faith  in  planning  or  working,  or  waiting  for  the  consummation  of  effort, — 
these  constitute  her  armor  of  victory. 

**  Great  as  have  been  her  achievements,  equal  results  are,  I  believe, 
within  the  reach  of  many  others.  The  merely  intellectual  qualities  needed 
are  not  rare  ;  it  is  their  combination  with  moral  power  that  produces  the 
seemingly  magic  results.  Ambition  stimulated  by  obstacles,  persistent 
will  and  patience,  explain  many  of  the  wonders  of  Helen  Keller's  success. ' ' 

Of  Mr  Keith's  instruction,  Helen  says  : 

*  *  I  have  enjoyed  my  work  with  Mr  Keith  more  than  I  can  express  in 
words.  He  has  done  more  than  any  of  my  teachers  except  Miss  Sullivan 
(although  she  seems  more  like  a  part  of  myself  than  a  teacher),  to  store 
my  mind  with  rich  treasures  of  knowledge,  which  shall  be  a  joy  to  me  as 
long  as  I  live.  He  made  all  my  studies  interesting,  even  mathematics. 
He  kept  my  mind  alert  and  eager,  and  trained  to  reason  clearly,  and  to 
seek  conclusions  calmly  and  logically  instead  of  jumping  wildly  into  space, 
as  it  were,  and  arriving  nowhere.  He  was  always  gentle  and  forbearing 
no  matter  how  dull  I  might  be,  and  believe  me,  my  stupidity  would  often 
have  exhausted  the  patience  of  that  phenomenally  patient  man.  Job." 

In  a  letter  to  me,  speaking  of  the  examination  admitting  her  to 
RadclifiTe,  she  says  : 

'  <  It  is  an  unspeakable  relief  to  know  that  I  have  passed  the  examina- 
tion with  credit.  But  what  I  consider  my  crown  of  success  is  the  hap- 
piness and  pleasure  that  my  victory  has  brought  to  my  dear  teacher.  In- 
deed, I  feel  that  the  success  is  her's  more  than  mine  ;  for  she  is  my  con- 
stant inspiration." 

In  the  college  classrooms  Miss  Keller  required  the  constant 
presence  of  Miss  Sullivan,  who  could  spell  into  her  hand  with  ample 
rapidity  all  that  the  instructors  read  or  spoke.  Should  a  professor 
ask  questions,  Miss  Sullivan  repeated  audibly  whatever  Miss  Keller 
would  answer,  or,  when  allowed,  she  handed  in  after  recitations  the 
latter's  typewritten  answers. 

The  spirit  which  animated  Miss  Keller  in  her  studies  is  briefly 
and  best  told  by  her  in  a  letter  to  Professor  Copeland  of  the  Har- 
vard faculty : 


320  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

**  I  am  resolved  to  be  myself,  and  to  write  my  own  thoughts  when  I 
have  any.  When  I  have  written  something  that  seems  to  be  fresh  and 
spontaneous  and  worthy  of  your  criticisms,  I  will  bring  it  to  you,  if  I 
may,  and  if  you  think  it  good,  I  shall  be  happy ;  but  if  your  verdict  is 
imfavorable,  I  shall  try  again,  and  yet  again  until  I  have  succeeded  in 
pleasing  you.   ...  *  * 

It  would  be  deeply  interesting,  did  time  allow,  could  we  follow 
Miss  Keller  during  her  career  at  college,  to  observe  the  unvan- 
quishable  attitude  she  persistently  assumed  in  overcoming  the  mani- 
fold difficulties  that  confronted  her,  but  I  must  desist  and  simply 
state  that  I  personally  attended  her  graduation  from  Radcliife,  at 
Cambridge,  on  the  28th  of  June,  1904  (one  day  after  the  twenty- 
fourth  anniversary  of  her  birth),  and  witnessed,  amidst  continuous 
applause,  the  award  to  her  and  thirty-seven  classmates  of  the 
degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts,  coupled  in  her  case  with  the  distinction 
*' cum  laude,'  and  the  additional  words  in  Latin  inscribed  on  her 
diploma  :  **  Not  only  approved  in  the  whole  academic  course,  but 
excellent  in  English  letters."  The  ovation  given  her  at  the  time  re- 
flected credit  alike  on  herself  and  the  vast  audience  in  attendance. 

At  a  recent  alumnae  meeting,  among  other  things  she  modestly 
stated : 

'*  You  will  not  misunderstand  me  if  I  say  that  much  of  my  life  in 
college  has  been  tedious ;  slowness  was  unavoidable  in  the  manual  labor 
of  Miss  Sullivan's  task  and  mine,  ...  In  study  I  have  fallen  heir  to  no 
end  of  interest  and  delight.  How  eagerly  I  look  forward  to  a  new  book  ! 
As  I  read,  there  is  a  light  before  me  ;  it  is  the  radiance  of  poetry.  .  .  . 
College  has  breathed  new  life  into  my  mind,  given  me  new  ideas  of  things, 
a  perception  of  new  truths,  and  new  aspects  of  the  old  ones.  I  grow 
stronger  in  my  conviction  that  there  is  nothing  good  or  right  which  we 
cannot  accomplish  if  we  have  the  will  to  strive.  The  assured  reality  and 
nearness  of  the  end  of  my  schooldays  fills  me  with  bright  anticipations. 
The  doors  of  the  great  world  are  flung  open  before  me,  and  a  light  shines 
upon  me,  the  light  kindled  by  thought  that  there  is  something  for  me  to 
do  beyond  the  threshold. 

**  And  indeed,  for  all  earnest  college  graduates  there  is  a  great  work 
in  the  world  —  work  that  can  be  done  in  sweet,  unaggressive  ways. 
There  are  harsh  customs  to  be  made  sweet  with  love  ;  hearts  in  which  a 
kind,  tolerant  brotherly  love  must  be  awakened  ;  time-hallowed  prejudices 


HIT2]  HELEN  KELLER  32 1 

that  must  be  overthrown.  One  evil  that  must  be  checked  is  the  igno- 
rance of  the  learned  who  have  never  learned  the  simple,  honest  language 
of  the  heart,  which  is  the  most  vital  of  all  languages,  and  is  more  satis- 
fying than  all  the  Greek  and  Latin  ever  written.  Thus  I  have  groped 
my  way  through  college,  reaching  out  on  the  dark  pathway  for  wisdom, 
for  friendship,  and  for  work.  I  have  found  much  work,  and  abundant 
friendship,  and  a  little  wisdom,  and  I  ask  for  no  other  blessedness. ' ' 

Her  exceptional  achievement  is  well  summarized  by  Mr  John 
A.  Macy,  the  able  editor  of  her  invaluable  volume,  The  Story  of  My 
Life,  dedicated  **to  Alexander  Graham  Bell,  who  has  taught  the 
Deaf  to  speak,  and  enabled  the  listening  ear  to  hear  speech  from 
the  Atlantic  to  the  Rockies.*' 

Mr  Macy  says : 

'<  The  result  of  her  work  is  to  set  a  new  standard  for  the  deaf,  and  to 
raise  a  standard  high,  if  not  new,  for  the  whole  world  of  men  who  work 
and  pray.  She  has  moved  the  hearts  of  all  nations  to  an  enduring  sym- 
pathy for  the  afflicted,  and  to  a  new  belief  in  the  capacity  for  the  blind 
and  the  deaf  to  be  uplifted.  Thereby  is  Helen  Keller's  service  great 
imto  those  who  see,  and  those  who  are  blind,  to  those  who  hear,  and 
those  whose  ears  hear  not. 

'<  It  is  safe  to  predict  that  her  work  will  go  further  than  the  goal 
which  is  marked  by  her  graduation.  This,  all  who  know  her  well  will 
readily  affirm." 

As  to  her  future  occupation,  the  public  may  rest  assured  it  will, 
in  substance,  consist  of  service  to  her  fellow  man,  **  Opportunities 
to  serve  others,"  she  says  herself,  **  offer  themselves  constantly  ;  it 
bewilders  me  to  think  of  the  countless  tasks  that  may  be  mine."  To 
prove  helpful  she  realizes  the  imperative  necessity  of  continuing  to 
improve  her  mind  by  engaging  in  research  and  keeping  well  abreast 
of  the  best  wisdom  of  the  age.  Writing  will,  no  doubt,  occupy  a 
large  portion  of  her  time,  and  to  judge  from  what  has  so  far  ema- 
nated from  her  pen,  future  productions  from  the  same  source  will 
prove  interesting,  uplifting,  and  of  enduring  service. 

Let  me  now  quote  a  few  of  the  many  striking  pen  pictures  Miss 
Keller  has  already  given  us,  relate  several  of  many  incidents,  and 
state  her  creed. 

Speaking  of  one  of  her  favorite  resorts  near  her  home  in  Ala- 


322  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

bama,  she  says  in  one  of  her  earliest  letters :  "  The  mountains  are 
crowding  round  the  springs  to  look  at  their  own  beautiful  re- 
flections.'* 

Being  asked  for  a  sentiment,  she  said : 

"  Knowledge  is  happiness.  .  .  .  Knowledge  of  the  thoughts  and 
deeds  that  have  marked  man's  progress  is  to  feel  the  great  heart-throbs 
of  humanity  through  centuries,  and  if  one  does  not  feel  in  these  pulsa- 
tions a  heavenward  striving,  one  must  indeed  be  deaf  to  the  wonderful 
harmonics  of  life.  *  * 

Literature  is  Miss  Keller's  "  Utopia."    She  says : 

"  Here  I  am  not  disfranchised.  No  barrier  of  the  senses  shuts  me 
out  from  the  sweet,  gracious  discourse  of  my  book-friends :  they  talk  to 
me  without  embarrassment  or  awkwardness.  The  things  I  have  learned, 
and  the  things  I  have  been  taught,  seem  of  ridiculously  little  import, 
compared  with  their  large  loves  and  heavenly  charities. ' ' 

Again  : 

"Be  of  good  cheer.  Do  not  think  of  today's  failures,  but  of  the 
success  that  may  come  tomorrow. 

''  Remember  no  effort  that  we  make  to  attain  something  beautiful 
is  ever  lost.  Sometime,  somewhere,  somehow  we  shall  find  that  which 
we  seek.  *  * 

At  another  time  she  says : 

"It  is  not  always  needful  for  Truth  to  take  a  definite  shape  ;  enough, 
if  it  hovers  about  us  like  a  spirit  wafted  through  the  air  like  the  sound 
of  a  bell,  grave  and  kindly.  * ' 

Speaking  of  a  visit  made  to  Lexington,  she  wrote : 

**  As  we  rode  along  we  could  see  the  forest  monuments  bend  their 
proud  forms  to  listen  to  the  little  children  of  the  woodlands  whispering 
their  secrets.  The  anemone,  the  wild  violets,  the  hepatica  and  the  funny 
little  curled-up  ferns  all  peeped  out  at  us  from  beneath  their  brown 
leaves. '  * 

In  another  letter  after  leaving  the  country  to  reside  in  Boston, 
she  thus  expresses  herself  about  the  public  park,  or  Common  : 

'*  Somehow  after  the  great  fields  and  pastures,  and  lofty  pinegroves 
of  the  country,  the  scene  here  seems  shut  in  and  conventional.     Even  the 


HITZ]  HELEN  KELLER  323 

trees  seem  citified  and  self-conscious.  Indeed  I  doubt  if  they  are  on 
speaking  terms  with  their  country  cousins  !  I  cannot  help  feeling  sorry 
for  these  trees  with  all  their  fashionable  airs.  They  are  like  the  people 
whom  they  see  every  day,  who  prefer  the  crowded  city  to  the  quiet  and 
freedom  of  the  country.  They  do  not  even  suspect  how  circumscribed 
their  lives  are.  They  look  down  pityingly  on  the  country  folk  who  have 
never  had  an  opportunity  to  see  the  great  world.  O  my,  if  they  only 
realized  their  limitations,  they  would  flee  for  their  lives  to  the  woods  and 
fields ! ' ' 

At  another  time,  in  speaking  of  Autumn,  she  says  : 

*  *  The  forest  trees  have  donned 
Their  gorgeous  Autumn  tapestries 
...  A  mysterious  hand  is  silently  stripping  the  trees. 
And  with  rustle  and  whirr  the  leaves  descend. 
And  like  little  frightened  birds. 
Lie  trembling  on  the  ground.  *  * 

One  of  her  letters  closes  with  :  **  I  must  go  to  bed,  for  Morpheus 
has  touched  my  eyelids  with  his  golden  wand." 

In  giving  Doctor  Bell  an  account  of  one  of  her  dreams,  after 
describing  a  curious  house,  and  saying  that  the  people  in  it  wore 
breastpins  on  their  shoes,  bangles  on  their  heads,  and  rings  on  their 
wrists.  Doctor  Bell  queried :  "  Do  you  mean  you  saw  them  with 
your  eyes  ?  **     She  replied,  **  Yes." 

How  Miss  Keller  looks  upon  her  limitations,  she  thus  expresses- 
herself  to  me  in  a  recent  letter  : 

**When  I  think  of  the  truths  which  have  been  brought  within  my 
reach,  I  am  strong  and  full  of  joy.  I  am  no  longer  deaf  and  blind ;  for 
with  my  spirit  I  see  the  glory  of  the  all-perfect  that  lies  beyond  the  phys- 
ical sight,  and  hear  the  triumphant  song  of  love  which  transcends  the 
tumult  of  this  world.  What  appears  to  be  my  affliction  is  due  to  the 
obscurity,  yea,  the  darkness  occasioned  by  terrestrial  things.  I  cannot 
help  smiling  sometimes  at  the  arrogance  of  those  who  think  they  alone 
possess  the  earth  ;  they  see  only  shadows  and  know  only  in  part.  They 
little  dream  that  the  soul  is  the  only  reality,  the  life,  the  power  that  makes 
harmony  out  of  discord,  completeness  out  of  incompleteness.  * ' 

Hellen  Keller's  rules  of  life  and  creed  may  best  be  summed  up 
as  noted  in  a  diary  entry  made  October  18,  1894,  at  the  age  of 
fourteen  years,  when  she  says: 


324  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

''  I  find  that  I  have  four  things  to  learn  in  my  school  life,  and  indeed 
in  life :  To  think  clearly  without  hurry  or  confusion ,  to  love  everybody 
sincerely,  to  act  in  everything  with  the  highest  motives,  and  to  trust  in 
dear  God  unhesitatingly." 

And  in  her  latest  work.  Optimism,  she  sums  up  her  creed  as 
follows : 

'*  I  believe  in  God,  I  believe  in  man,  I  believe  in  the  power  of  the 
spirit.  I  believe  it  is  a  sacred  duty  to  encourage  ourselves  and  others  :  to 
hold  the  tongue  from  any  unhappy  word  against  God's  world,  because  no 
man  has  any  right  to  complain  of  a  universe  which  God  made  good,  and 
which  thousands  of  men  have  striven  to  keep  good.  I  believe  that  we 
should  so  act  that  we  may  draw  nearer  and  more  near  the  age  when  no 
man  shall  live  at  his  ease  while  another  suffers." 

VoLTA  Bureau, 
Washington,  D.  C. 


SOME  NOTES  ON  ANTHROPOLOGY  AND 

ARCHEOLOGY 

By  CHARLES  PEABODY 

The  inverse  of  a  genealogical  tree  is  or  would  be  interesting ;  a 
single  ancestral  pair  increases  and  multiplies,  as  is  said,  like  a  green 
bay  tree,  but  one  may  also  gather  together  from  the  various 
branches ;  our  green  bay  tree  may  concentrate  its  laurel  crowns 
from  branch  and  tip  upon  the  trunk.  If  from  the  Greek  unique 
science  of  ipdoao<pia  have  sprung  all  sciences  and  all  arts,  until  their 
name  is  legion  and  their  titles  sometimes  limited  to  the  understand- 
ing of  one  man,  there  is  yet  a  centripetal  force  urging  the  massing 
and  arranging  of  many  under  one  umbrageous  whole  —  Anthro- 
pology. It  is  of  this  rapprochement,  partly  artificial,  partly  natural, 
of  certain  sciences  and  arts  that  a  word  of  explanation  may  be  fitting 
and  seasonable. 

Anthropology  and  archeology  are  sciences ;  they  are  not  arts  : 
to  correlate  the  facts  set  forth  by  them,  to  draw  inferences  and  estab- 
lish other  facts,  is  an  art,  yet  one  may  be  a  capital  anthropologist  or 
archeologist  and  no  artist  at  all ;  one  may  write  a  Teutonic  Ph.D. 
thesis  brim  full  of  facts  and  be  quite  unable  to  make  these  facts  tell 
their  story.  It  is  well  not  to  confuse  the  subject-matter  with  the 
study  of  it.     Archeology  studies  art ;  not,  therefore,  is  it  an  art. 

Considering  for  a  moment  anthropology  and  archeology  as  kin- 
dred or  step-kindred  sciences,  it  will  be  interesting  to  make  a  sort 
of  parallel  column  record.  It  may  be  understood  that  a  certain  gulf 
has  existed  between  the  anthropologists  and  the  archeologists, 
especially  the  classical  archeologists,  of  America.  Some  reasons 
for  this  unhappy  chasm  will  appear  during  the  discussion. 

It  is  well  for  gods  and  men  to  define  terms.  Hence  Anthropology 
wishes,  cries  for  definition  ;  our  inverted  figure  of  the  green  bay 
tree's  trunk  sheltering  the  branches  thereof  now  becomes  pertinent. 
One  may  define  anthropology  axiomatically  as  a  whole  in  terms  of 
its  parts.     In  order  to  do  this  properly  it  is  well  to  hie  one  to  au- 

325 


326  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

thority  and  to  quote  him.*  "Anthropology  is  in  fact  a  group  of 
sciences.  There  is  .  .  .  physical  anthropology  .  .  .  including  an- 
thropometry and  craniology,  and  mainly  based  upon  anatomy  and 
physiology  [somatology  in  other  words].  There  is  comparative 
anthropology,  which  deals  with  the  zoological  position  of  mankind. 
There  is  prehistoric  archaeology,  which  .  .  .  has  to  seek  the  aid  of 
the  geologist  and  the  metallurgist.  There  is  psychology,  which  com- 
prehends the  whole  operations  of  [the]  mental  faculties.  There  is 
linguistics,  which  traces  the  history  of  human  language.  [I  need 
not  refer  here  to  special  philology,  epigraphy,  paleography,  and 
phonetics.]  There  is  folk-lore,  which  investigates  man's  traditions, 
customs,  and  beliefs  [of  course  demonology  and  mythology]. 
There  are  ethnography,  which  describes  the  races  of  mankind  and 
ethnology  which  differentiates  between  them,  both  closely  connected 
with  geographical  science.  There  is  sociology,  which  applies  the 
learning  accumulated  in  all  the  other  branches  of  anthropology  to 
man's  relation  to  his  fellows,  and  requires  the  cooperation  of  the 
statistician  and  the  economist." 

To  define  archeology,  one  may  turn  to  the  title-page  of  the  first 
number*  of  the  American  Journal  of  Arclujeology  ;  we  find  this  su- 
perscription directly  followed  by  the  words,  **  For  the  study  of  the 
Monuments  of  Antiquity  and  of  the  Middle  Ages."  The  contrast 
is  striking  and  instructive.  Men  who  were  accustomed  to  minute 
and  painstaking  effort  directed  with  convergent  force  toward  the 
elucidation  of  some  one  circumscribed  field  of  study,  toward  the 
driving  of  the  drill-point  of  research  one  millimeter  deeper  into  the 
rock  of  the  ancient  unknown,  men  who  had  been  thus  for  years 
delving  and  probing  under  the  definite  aegis  of  archeology,  bounded 
by  but  not  identified  with  philology  and  history  —  such  men  were 
hardly  ready  to  sink  the  individuality  of  themselves  and  their  sci- 
ence in  this  new,  swelling,  indiscriminate  tide  of  anthropology. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  young,  constructive,  synthetic  scholar 
says  (again  with  Brabrook),  **  the  grandeur  and  comprehensiveness 


1  See  address  of  E.  W.  Brabrook,  Prcs.  Sec.  Anthropology,  Rep.  Sixty-eighth  Meeting 
Brit.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.,  1898,  p.  999-1010,  London,  1899  ;  also  in  Smithsonian  Report^ 
1898,  p.  621  ff,  1899. 

«Vol.  I.,  no.  I,  Jan.,  1885. 


PEABODY]      NOTES   ON  ANTHROPOLOGY  AND  ARCHEOLOGY      327 

of  the  subject  are  among  its  attractions.  The  old  saying,  *  I  am  a 
man,  and  therefore  I  think  nothing  human  to  be  foreign  to  me/ 
expresses  the  ground  upon  which  the  anthropological  sciences 
claim  from  us  a  special  attention."  He  feels  hampered,  harnessed, 
and  harassed  in  the  fetters  of  one  single  digging,  in  the  clutches  of 
one  single  science.  To  hook  out  a  fact  and  hang  it  on  the  line  to 
dry,  and  then  allow  others  to  coordinate  it  with  its  fellows,  seems  old 
fogy  and  stupid  when  wide  realms  of  research  and  comparison  lie 
open ;  in  these  we  may  work  not  only  with  the  spade,  but  with  the 
plough,  the  harrow,  the  reaper,  and  the  winnowing  machine. 

The  cumbersomeness  of  a  definition  of  anthropology  such  as  that 
in  the  nut-shell  given  above  has  been  felt,  and  Professor  Putnam,  in 
consonance  with  his  own  simplicity,  prefers  **  Man  and  his  Works." 
While  easier  to  handle  and  less  subject  to  scoffing  from  those  who 
are  not  *'  -ologiolators,"  it  is  yet  too  comprehensive,  and  the  ad- 
herents of  the  older  smaller  but  respectable  sciences  may  retort  that 
we  can  do  away  with  all  other  names  by  inventing  one  new  one  — 
and  using  three  only  —  making  all  knowledge  and  activities,  natural 
and  supernatural,  come  under  Theology,  Anthropology,  and  Prag- 
matology.  The  name  is  or  is  not  an  asset  to  anthropologists  ac- 
cording to  their  constructive  or  dispersive  point  of  view,  but  it  was 
not  calculated  to  win  the  affections  of  those  whom  it  proposed  to 
swallow  up.  For  at  the  time  when  this  capacious  science  arose* 
Archeology  laid  hold  of  the  skirts  of  Literature  ;  while  distinct  from 
the  printed  word,  it  yet  was  its  handmaiden.  The  illustrating  of 
Greek  and  Latin  texts,  the  unearthing  of  the  steps  up  which  the 
Panathenaic  Procession  took  its  way,  the  study  of  that  romantic  pro- 
cession itself  in  the  marbles  of  the  Parthenon ;  still  more,  the  cor- 
roboration and  strengthening  of  biblical  positions  through  biblical 
and  oriental  substrata  —  all  this  tended  toward  the  recognition  of 
archeology  as  an  art  to  be  wielded  by  artists,  literary,  dialectic,  or 
homiletic. 

Anthropology  might  well  be  a  bugaboo  to  frighten  such.  At 
the  very  beginning  arises  the  sublime  Boucher  de  Perthes ;  ^  hear 
him  bring  constructive  reasoning  and  sound  science  into  his  arche- 


*  Cf.  A.  Thicullen,  Hommage  A  Boucher  de  Perthes^  Paris,  1904,  pp.  21  ff. 


328  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

ology  :  "  La  premiere  chose  a  faire,  avant  la  discussion  theorique, 
ecrivait-il,  c'est  d'en  venir  a  une  verification  materielle.  Malheu- 
reusement,  c'est  ce  qu'on  ne  fait  presque  jamais,  et  Ton  prefere 
ecrire  pendant  huit  jours  pour  demontrer  qu'une  chose  ne  peut  pas 
etre,  que  d'employer  une  heure  a  se  convaincre  qu'elle  est.  .  .  . 
Les  hommes  pratiques  ...  en  avaient  peur,  ils  craignaient  de  se 
rendre  complices  de  se  qu'ils  appelaient  une  heresie.** 

Then  we  have  that  most  upsetting  of  beasts,  the  Pithecanthropus 
erecttis  —  evolution  and  its  train.  Again  hark  the  sound  of  crim- 
inal anthropology ;  listen  to  Topinard's  invitation  to  the  columns 
of  the  Revue  d' Anthropologie :^  "Nous  accudllerons  avec  plaisir 
dans  les  colonnes  de  cette  Revue  les  communications  .  .  .  ayant 
trait,  non  a  la  science  toute  entiere  de  la  criminalite  .  .  .  mais  a  la 
partie  .  .  .  qui  traite  des  types  de  criminels,  si  types  il  y  a  .  .  .  ; 
surtout  lorsque  seront  mises  en  usages  les  methodes  descriptives  et 
anthropometriques  precises  ...  les  methodes  rigoureuses  d'ana- 
lyse  et  de  synthese  que  cette  Revue  preconise."  This  suggests 
association  with  the  Bertillon  system  of  measurements,  whereby  one 
may  be  literally  hung  up  by  the  thumb ;  handwriting  experts  and 
all  their  successes  and  failures.  Under  the  same  broad  double  or 
rather  hierarchical  wings  may  be  grouped  the  following  unified 
subjects :  A  fiercely  scientific  article  on  the  inoffensive  pretzel ;  ^ 
such  a  title  as  **  Das  Fehlergesetz  und  seine  Verallgemeinerungen 
durch  Fechner  und  Pearson  in  ihrer  Tragweite  fur  Anthropologic  "  ;' 
"Craniologie  pathologique  de  monstre  exencephalien  **  ;  *  "  Climat 
de  I'epoque  quaternaire "  ;  "^  ''A  Mazahua  catechism  in  Testera- 
Amerind  hieroglyphics."* 

To  offset  all  this,  the  anthropologists,  accustomed  to  gamboling 
lamb-like  among  pastures  with  no  wire  fences,  shy  at  the  narrow 
critical  work  of  the  old  school  of  archeologists.  The  ditty  the 
American  students  used  to  sing  about  Dorpfeld,  the  greatest  of 

'  Cf.  Rn>ue  d^  Anthropologies  1887,  p.  690. 

*Cf.    M.  HSfler,  Bretzelgeb&ck,  Archiv  f.  Anthropologies  n.  f.,  Ill  (xxxi),  2,  pp. 

94  ff. 

'Cf.  Ranke  and  Greiner,  Archiv  f.  Anthropologies  n.  f.,  II  (xxx),  1904,  pp.  295  ff. 
*  M.  Girald^s,  Bull,  SocUti  d'  Anthropologie  de  Paris,  2«  ser.,  7,  1872,  p.  648. 
5Cf.  G.  de  Mortillet,  ibid.,  1874,  p.  391. 
••Cf.  N.  Le6n,  American  Anthropologist^  n.  s.,  II,  p.  722  ff.,  1900. 


^ 


PEABODY]      NOTES   ON  ANTHROPOLOGY  AND  ARCHEOLOGY      329 

classical  archeologists,  illustrates  this.  The  tune  of  Jonah  and  the 
whale  fitted  well  the  line,  "Dorpfeld  and  the  Riegellocher.**  This 
sobriquet  came  from  the  anxious  care  with  which  Dorpfeld  bases 
his  reconstructions  of  both  archeology  and  monuments  on  bolt- 
holes,  foot-marks,  and  other  minutest  details.  So  too  the  exhaustion 
of  all  the  methods,  the  invocation  of  the  whole  *'  barbara  celarent " 
quatrain  to  determine  the  exact  polygonal  requirements  of  the  Greek 
chlamys,  seem  to  some  to  resemble  the  travail  preceding  the  birth 
of  a  mouse.  They  may  say  with  some  reason,  **  Why  such  Sturm 
und Drang  \.o  secure  metriculous  accuracy  when  you  can't  even  spell 
your  own  name  ?  '*  We  find  **  archaiology  "  (Grieb's  English-Ger- 
man Dictionary),  "  archaeology,*'  and  '*  archeology  "  ;  we  find  the 
diphthong  ce  and  the  two  letters  separate,  and  vigorous  defenders  of 
idiosyncratic  spellings. 

The  anthropologists  perhaps  may  look  upon  the  cut-and-dried 
methods  and  dry-as-dust  results  with  some  contempt  and  deplore 
the  extent  to  which  German  pedagogism  may  go.  They  point  with 
some  humor  to  the  little  torso  in  the  Acropolis  museum  to  which 
a  head  was  added  after  careful  study  of  the  appropriate  measure- 
ments of  each,  but  which  later  was  rudely  decapitated  and  provided 
with  a  second  head  ;  this  proved  its  appropriateness  by  quite  upset- 
ting the  previous  measurements. 

The  scope  then,  the  methods,  and  the  results,  were  such  that 
at  the  beginning,  in  this  country  at  any  rate.  Archeology  could  say 
of  Anthropology  that  it  was  a  sort  of  composite  photograph,  an 
impressionistic  congeries  of  everything  and  everybody,  loose  and 
scattered  application.  Anthropology  could  say  of  Archeology  that 
it  was  shackled  to  tradition,  literature,  and  Teutonism  ;  that  it  piled 
up  solid  grains  of  sand  with  little  care  as  to  the  form  or  constancy 
which  the  heap  assumed.  The  gulf  thus  created  had  yet  features 
that  caused  it  to  yawn  further.  There  is  a  certain  jealousy  between 
Art  and  Science.  Here  we  shift  our  ground  and  the  distrust  of 
Anthropology  and  Archeology,  one  for  the  other,  is  quite  the  in- 
verse of  what  we  have  just  heard. 

Classical  archeology  is  a  science  dealing  largely  with  the  fine 
arts ;  no  one  should  attempt  Greek  criticism  save  him  who  under- 
stands the  Greeks,  and  the  Greeks  were  artists.     Outside  of  epig- 


330  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [w.  s.,  8,  1906 

raphy  and  topography,  classical  archeologists  concern  themselves 
mostly  with  architecture  and  sculpture.  The  man  who  scans  the 
Riegellocher,  no  matter  what  else  he  foi^ets,  ought  never  to  forget 
that  every  discovery  is  a  stone  in  a  structure  of  which  beauty  is  the 
inspiration  —  beauty,  expressed  as  well  as  the  artist  inspired  by 
beauty  could  express  it.  Every  thesis  written  on  a  pair  of  broken 
stones  should  point  by  synecdoche  to  a  whole  of  beautiful  comple> 
tion,  a  sum  total  of  line,  form,  and  proportion  Hellenic  in  magnifi- 
cence, or  should  point  by  metonymy  to  a  certain  stage  in  the 
progress  of  the  expression  of  the  beautiful  among  the  Greeks.  The 
pride  of  the  broader  minded  archeologist,  especially  now-a-days,  is 
that  in  sculpture,  painting,  numismatics,  gems,  basilicas,  cathedrals, 
what  you  please,  the  terminus  <id  quern  and  a  quo  is  beauty  and  the 
expression  of  the  ideas  of  beauty. 

Enters  Anthropology,  claiming  authority  over  all  human  activ- 
ities, threatening  to  absorb  the  beautiful  in  comparative  statements 
of  ethnological  religions  and  conceptions,  to  drag  the  Hermes  of 
Praxiteles  into  the  net  of  dolichocephaly  and  the  Aphrodite  of  Melos 
into  an  anti-corset  hygienic  diatribe  —  what  wonder  archeology 
balks !  Even  the  pure  archeology  of  the  new  world  is  slurred  as 
ugly  and  grotesque ;  the  canon  of  Polycleitus  would  flee  to  his 
Argive  mountains  at  sight  of  a  stela  from  Quirigua,  and  the  grapes 
that  Zeuxis  painted  turn  to  sour  wine  at  sight  of  a  Southwestern 
sand  picture. 

Between  the  upper  and  nether  millstones  of  classical  archeology 
and  ethnology,  pure  archeology  in  this  country  has  but  a  limited 
region  of  activity.  So  much  is  unknown,  enigmatic  —  "problemat- 
ical ",  as  Professor  Holmes  puts  it  —  that  ethnology  rather  lets  it 
slip,  and  the  majority  of  scholars  flock  to  the  living  tribes,  avoiding 
a  science  whose  end  seems  to  be  a  description  of  itself  and  its  defi- 
nitions to  be  in  terms  of  the  defined.  Not  content  with  the  chasm 
thus  separating  the  sciences,  the  personal  equation  takes  a  hand. 
There  is  the  eternal  revolt  of  the  young  against  the  old,  the  Ibsens, 
the  D'Indys,  the  Rodins,  versus  Shakespeare,  Beethoven,  and  — 
shall  we  say  —  Jean  Goujon?  Nothing  so  fascinatingly  com- 
pelling  to  conservatism  as  Hellenic  study ;  nothing  more  re- 
pelling to  the  explorer  than  the  everlasting  harking  back  to  the 


PEABODY]      NOTES   OAT  ANTHROPOLOGY  AND  ARCHEOLOGY      33 1 

Greeks ;  the  very  name  Classics  invokes  a  gesture  of  disdain. 
'*  Out  upon  them ! "  *'  Away  with  them ! "  is  hurled  from  high 
pedagogic  seats,  and  Greek  and  Latin  are  invited  to  talk  modem  or 
give  place  to  the  twentieth  century  —  a  century  smacking  more  of 
the  twenty-first  than  of  the  nineteenth. 

The  power  of  advance  creates  a  language  —  Volapuk  —  Espe- 
ranto —  this  latter  a  utilitarian  exemplification  of  the  survival  of  the 
fittest  —  loves  experiment  and  cares  not  for  failure;  all  failures  are 
but  experiments  and  successes  by  exclusion.  The  universal  lan- 
guage does  not,  like  Islam,  slay  all  the  unconverted,  so  the  inter- 
vening years  must  needs  be  given  a  linguistic  stepping  stone,  hence 
the  anthropological  terms  which  follow :  Mentation,  pentalogic, 
seriated  (p.  p.)  nephelonomy,  geonomy,  chemology,  andrology, 
demology,  and  the  sciences  (not  altogether  new)  that  deal  with  the 
pleasures,  welfare,  morality,  expression,  and  opinion  concomitant  in 
every  human  act,  namely :  esthetology,  technology,  sociology, 
philology,  and  sophiology.  Besides  this  nomenclature,  for  which 
we  may  hold  as  responsible  or  congratulate  as  having  put  into 
being  the  late  J.  W.  Powell,  we  have  less  well-established  names. 

"Amerind"  and  "Amerindian"  made  a  brave  fight  and  are 
not  quite  dead  yet ;  "  nomenology,"  suggested  by  Hill-Tout,  and 
"bicaves,"  suggested  by  Moorehead,  have  their  accolade  to  win, 
while  "  artifacts  "  (or  "  artefacts  *')  bids  fair  to  live  because  of  a  cry- 
ing need  for  it.  But  all  these  are  horrors  to  the  conservative.  The 
modern  Schmidt  on  Hesychius  feels  stunned  by  such  words  and 
spellings,  and  shouts  '' procul  profani'' \  wrapping  himself  in  a 
bomb-proof  of  ancient  philology  warranted  to  blunt  the  fiercest 
propaganda. 

The  older  archeology  and  the  newer  anthropology,  then,  from 
scope,  methods,  material,  purposes,  ideals,  age,  and  experience,  show 
little  likelihood  of  developing  a  cohesion  that  will  cause  them  to 
dwell  together  as  sisters,  if  not  in  unity,  at  least  in  amity.  Yet  both 
are  here  to  stay,  both  are  domiciled  at  Harvard,  both  point  to  a 
museum  —  Fogg  or  Peabody,  with  pride  in  the  interior  and  tirade 
against  the  exterior. 

Classical  and  American  archeology  after  all  deal,  both,  with 
works  of  art ;  discuss,  both  of  them,  the  progress  of  artistic  en- 


332  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

deavor  among  more  or  less  primitive  peoples ;  and  both  sciences 
try  to  run  the  probe  as  far  back  as  may  be.  While  Palestine, 
Assyria,  Egypt,  Greece,  and  Rome  on  the  one  hand  were  working 
ever  backward,  while  the  United  States  on  the  other  was  beginning 
to  present  its  problems  of  Calaveras  county,  of  Little  Falls  and  of 
Trenton,  other  countries  too  were  digging.  England  and  France  in 
caves  and  river-drift,  Germany  and  Austria  in  Hallstatt  and  else- 
where, Denmark  in  peat-bogs  and  kitchen-middens,  Switzerland  and 
Italy  in  lake  and  bog  dwellings,  were  stirring  up  problems  and  spec- 
imens, presenting  these  to  museums  and  those  to  curators,  and 
waiting  for  Archeology  as  a  whole  to  take  all  together,  classify, 
arrange,  and  deduce.  Whether  or  no,  willy  or  nilly.  Archeology 
then  had  to  answer,  and  letting  go  the  leading-strings  of  History, 
stood  on  her  own  feet  and  boldly  embraced  the  prehistoric.  It  is 
the  **  prehistoric  "  that  names  the  keystone  which  will  hold  the  arch 
that  is  going  to  bridge  over  the  gap  between  old  and  new.  East  and 
West.  When  Schliemann  found  his  nine  superimposed  cities  and 
Dorpfeld  relegated  the  majority  of  these  to  a  time  anterior  to  Aga- 
memnon and  Achilles,  the  touchstone  of  archeological  community  of 
interest  was  found.  There  were  two  stones  or  stone  implements  in 
juxtaposition  in  Egypt.  Both  man  has  wrought.  One  can  be  his- 
torically given  an  age  of  5,000  years,  and  shows  practically  no 
weathering ;  the  other  shows  complete  weathering.  The  com- 
parison attests  in  a  word  the  dignity  of  prehistoric  archeology. 
Leaving  History,  then,  Archeology  joins  schools  and  countries  by 
speaking  in  other  terms ;  dates  have  less  meaning  than  sequences, 
and  Archeology  dares  put  on  the  same  plane  of  comparison  the 
stone  age  of  Greece,  which  may  have  ended  at  the  second  mil- 
lenium,  B.  C,  and  the  stone  age  of  Massachusetts,  which  lasted 
till  the  Pilgrim  Fathers  came.  The  bronzes  of  the  Mycenaean 
epoch  may  fearlessly  be  placed  alongside  those  of  Hallstatt,  and 
series  of  vases  may  be  made  and  compared  whether  from  northern 
Mississippi,  Etruria,  or  Crete. 

The  dependence  of  history  on  archeology  instead  of  archeology 
on  history  may  well  be  illustrated.  All  history  must  have  a  sub- 
stratum of  some  sort  to  build  on  ;  traditional  it  may  be,  but  better 
it  is  that  it  be  composed  of  facts.     To  Archeology  —  yes,  and  to 


^ 


PEABODY]      NOTES  ON  ANTHROPOLOGY  AND  ARCHEOLOGY      333 

Anthropology  —  History  turns  for  her  starting  points.  It  will  not 
be  amiss  to  give  some  examples  showing  where  a  series  from  the 
prehistoric  to  the  historic  has  been  established.  In  Egypt  again 
whole  sequences  of  objects  ranging  from  prehistoric  into  the  historic 
have  been  made.     Flinders-Pctrie  says  :  * 

''Thus  this  chaos  of  over  900  types  of  pottery,  hundreds  of  stone 
vases,  weapons  and  tools  of  flint  and  of  copper,  ivory  work  and  beads^ 
extending  over  many  centuries,  perhaps  one  or  two  thousand  years^  has 
now  been  reduced  ...  to  an  orderly  series,  in  which  we  can  not  only 
state  exactly  the  relative  order  of  the  objects,  but  also  the  degree  of  uncer- 
tainty and  the  extent  of  range  which  belong  to  each  object.  We  have 
here  a  new  and  exact  method  for  dealing  with  all  those  vague  ages,  as  yet 
unfathomed,  and  for  extracting  all  that  is  possible  about  their  history. 
Prehistoric  archaeology  has  made  another  step  toward  becoming  an  exact 
science.  And  now  the  responsibility  of  those  who  excavate  is  tenfold  in- 
creased, as  the  extent  of  their  care  and  exactitude  will  more  than  ever 
restore  or  ruin  the  history  of  the  past.  *  * 

Again,^  the  same  author  illustrates  prehistoric  specimens  of  stone 
from  Egypt  whose  uses  are  unknown,  and  for  which  he  wishes 
an  analogy  or  explanation ;  the  former  at  any  rate  may  be  given 
him  in  some  of  the  shield-shaped  **  gorgets  "  that  compose  one  class 
of  the  so-called  **  ceremonials  "  of  the  American  Indians  or  mound- 
builders,  provided  they  were  different.  While  the  explanation  is 
still  far  to  seek,  it  is  not  quite  so  far,  for,  granted  one  party  to  an 
analogy  made  clear,  the  other  at  once  receives  additional  light. 

To  continue  with  Egypt.  The  important  excavations  of  Dr 
Reisner  and  Dr  Lythgoe  formed  more  than  one  archeological  series 
reaching  backward  into  prehistoric  times,  and  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  that  means  somewhere  in  the  fourth  millenium,  B.  C. 
Flint-working  camps  of  the  prehistoric  period  and  subsequent 
quarries  of  the  Ptolemaic  and  Roman  times  were  explored.  This 
makes  the  sequence  of  the  marble  quarries  on  Pentelicon  from  Par- 
thenon to  Hotel  Grande  Bretagne,  seem  short,  even  curt. 

There  has  been  much  discussion  of  the  Pelasgian  question  and 
the  Etruscan  question.     On  the  former  one  may  quote  rising  eleven 


^Journal  of  the  Anthropological  Institute  ^  XXIX,  n.  s.,  2,  300. 
^  Man^  1902,  pi.  B. 

AM.  ANTH  .  N.   S..  ft-Sa 


334  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

diverging  theories;  and  on  the  latter  still  more.  History  and  tradi- 
tion are  nearly  forced  to  give  up  the  problem.  Archeology  and 
Anthropology,  however,  are  not  ready  to  give  it  up,  and  Sergi  has 
at  any  rate  posed  a  good  working  theory  for  the  Etruscans.  He 
assumes,  ist,  for  paleolithic  and  neolithic  Italy  a  homogeneous 
Mediterranean  occupancy,  dolichocephalic  with  the  custom  of  bur- 
ial ;  2d,  for  neolithic  and  aeneohthic  Italy  an  intrusion  of  a  brachy- 
cephalic  race  with  the  custom  of  incineration ;  and  3d,  that  late  in 
the  eighth  century  the  Etruscans  appear  to  be  an  intermingling.  His 
theory  of  the  homogeneous  Mediterranean  race  is  very  good  as  a 
working  hypothesis,  and  if  we  can  find  a  solution  and  make  it 
answer  the  questions,  it  should  be  considered  a  good  Q.  E.  D. 

Perhaps  the  most  dramatic  case  of  bridging  over  the  gap  between 
the  old  archeology,  which  dealt  with  late  remains,  and  the  new 
archeology,  which  deals  with  old  remains,  is  that  undertaken  by 
Miss  Harriet  A.  Boyd.  After  studying  during  the  winter  of  1896- 
97  at  the  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  at  Athens,  Miss  Boyd 
served  with  distinction  as  a  nurse  in  the  Greek  army  during  the  un- 
fortunate war  with  Turkey.  After  the  conclusion  of  the  war,  anx- 
ious to  enter  the  Cretan  archeological  field  on  her  own  account,  she 
received  financial  assistance  from  various  colleges  and  universities  in 
America,  and  instituted  excavations  at  Kavousi  and  Goumia  near  the 
eastern  end  of  the  island.  During  the  progress  of  her  explorations 
she  discovered  remains  representing  periods  of  occupancy  ranging 
from  modern  times  well  back  into  the  prehistoric  ages.  Among 
these  are  the  periods  of  Turkish,  Venetian,  Greco-Roman,  and 
Mycenaean  occupancy.  Her  discoveries  were  pushed  so  far  with 
the  comparatively  unknown  prehistoric  times  that  she  deemed  it 
necessary  to  return  and  study  in  the  Department  of  Anthropology 
of  Harvard  University.  She  felt  that  anthropology  was  perhaps  the 
science  most  competent  to  deal  with  epochs  which  have  not  the 
assistance  of  history,  traditions,  and  inscriptions  for  their  elucidation. 
Miss  Boyd,  by  her  own  homogeneous  work,  as  it  were,  thus  took 
part  in  bridging  the  gap  between  classical  archeology  and  anthro- 
pology. 

The  proof  of  interest  lies  in  publication.     The  Archaeological 
Institute  of  America  publishes  the  American  Journal  of  Archceology^ 


PEABODY]      NOTES  ON  ANTHROPOLOGY  AND    ARCHEOLOGY      33$ 

and  various  and  sundry  long-named  anthropological  associations 
the  American  Anthropologist,  The  Journal  has  been  overwhelm- 
ingly classical  in  its  table  of  contents,  the  Aiithropologist  most  pre- 
ponderantly non -classical. 

The  classical  side  were  rather  beforehand  in  courteous  overtures, 
and  their  board  of  editors  has  held  and  again  holds  now  a  repre- 
resentative  of  American  archeology  ;  the  officers  of  the  Institute 
are  urgent  for  American  material,  the  Society  supports  a  fellowship 
in  American  archeology,  and  one  of  the  last  societies  to  be  affiliated 
with  the  Institute  is  the  Southwest  Society  of  Los  Angeles,  with  the 
highly  original  Charles  F.  Lummis  as  its  particular  inspiration. 
More  than  this,  the  American  Anthropological  Association  last  year 
received  an  invitation  to  join  the  Institute  and  the  Philological 
Association — note  the  latter  —  in  their  annual  meeting  at  Ithaca. 
The  bidding  was  accepted,  and  the  interesting  sight  was  presented 
of  men  whose  supreme  interests  had  been  bound  up  with  the  cranial 
index,  or  whose  comparative  powers  had  been  taxed  to  determine 
whether  the  raven  or  the  coyote  was  more  potent  for  evil,  listening 
to  an  esoteric  discourse  on  conservatism  in  Greek  literature  and  life, 
and  on  the  polygonal  qualities  of  the  erstwhile  church  of  SS.  Ser- 
gius  and  Bacchus  in  Constantinople.  While,  therefore,  classical 
learning  now  respects  and  appeals  to  anthropology  and  prehistoric 
archeology,  the  latter  have  much  to  learn  from  their  elder  sister. 
Vice-president  Boas,  of  the  Anthropological  Association,  returned 
the  classical  compliment  at  Ithaca  in  emphasizing  the  need  of  philo- 
logical study  and  erudition  in  ethnology.  **  Who/*  he  said,  *'  would 
study  the  Greeks,  not  knowing  Greek?*'  **Who,*'  said  he, 
"should  study  the  Indian,  not  knowing  Indian  ?  *' 

Of  dry-as-dust  Teutonic  method  archeologists  in  America  must 
drink  their  fill.  The  day  is,  we  hope,  happily  passed  when  speci- 
mens are  dug  up  and  sold,  with  no  care  in  description,  no  concern 
for  their  environment.  Mounds  are  made  for  something  more  than 
scratching  or  even  trenching  ;  there  are  men  who  can  turn  over  and 
replace  a  whole  mound  and  find  nothing,  yet  be  content  with  results 
of  negative  significance,  or  of  purely  structural  importance.  Men 
are  happy  to  work  in  laboratories,  examining  specimens,  measuring 
and  comparing  them  ;  are  willing  to  publish  their  results,  leaving  it 


336  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

to  the  next  generation  to  say  that  two  and  two  make  four.  It  is 
the  true  scholar's  greatest  care  that  he  say  not  2  +  2  =  5. 

Accuracy,  patience,  and  contentment  we  may  learn  from  our 
older  fellows  in  the  field  of  archeology.  Breadth  of  vision,  bold- 
ness, and  comprehensive  synthesis  the  classical  student  may  well 
take  to  himself  when  he  knocks  at  the  door  of  Anthropology  to  ask 
whence  all  these  things  be. 

Cambridge,  Massachusetts. 


PAWNEE   WAR   TALES 

By  GEORGE  A.   DORSEY 

Note.  —  The  two  tales  of  war  here  presented  were  obtained  from  a 
very  old  Pawnee  warrior  commonly  called  George  Shooter,  a  Chaui. 
Their  chief  interest  is  in  the  information  they  ftimish  regarding  the 
methods  formerly  pursued  by  the  Pawnee  in  preparing  for  and  while  on 
raiding  expeditions. 

THE  DEFEAT  OF  THE  PAWNEE  BY  THE  CHEYENNE,  ARAPAHO,  AND 

COMANCHE 

One  night  a  warrior  sat  in  his  lodge  with  many  friends  about  him 
listening  to  his  experiences  while  on  the  war-path.  As  the  night 
wore  on  and  he  continued  to  tell  of  his  exploits,  a  great  longing 
seized  him  and  he  asked  his  friends  if  they  would  accompany  him 
the  next  morning,  for  he  had  decided  to  start  on  the  war-path  again. 
On  that  same  night  three  other  warriors  sat  in  their  lodges  and  told 
their  friends  of  their  own  experiences  in  war,  and  a  great  longing  to 
fight  filled  the  breast  of  each  of  these  warriors  ;  then  they  asked 
their  friends  to  go  with  them  on  the  morrow,  for  they  too  had  de- 
cided to  start  on  the  war-path  again.  Before  the  break  of  day  the 
four  warriors  and  their  men  were  on  the  way  to  the  country  of  the 
enemy.  During  the  day  the  scouts  from  each  party  met  and  at 
night  the  four  parties  came  together.  The  scouts  resented  the 
presence  of  one  another,  for  every  scout  preferred  to  have  the 
country  to  himself,  but  the  four  leaders  joined  forces  and  traveled 
together  to  the  enemy's  country. 

One  day  the  leaders  sat  down  in  a  valley  and  sent  out  men  to 
kill  bufifalo.  The  men  went  out,  killed  a  bufifalo,  and  started  to  skin 
it.  When  they  had  it  about  half  skinned,  the  bufifalo  rolled  over, 
jumped  up,  and  ran  away  with  its  skin  flapping  up  and  down.  The 
men  were  dumb  with  astonishment  for  a  time  ;  then  they  went  on 
and  killed  another  buffalo,  skinned  it,  cut  up  the  meat  and  took  it 
to  camp  where  the  leaders  were.  While  they  were  roasting  the 
meat,  the  men  who  had  been  out  to  kill  buffalo  told  the  leaders 

337 


338  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

about  the  buffalo  that  was  nearly  skinned  when  it  jumped  up  and 
ran  away  from  them.  One  of  the  leading  warriors  said  to  the  other 
leading  warriors:  **  This  is  a  ver>'' bad  omen;  tomorrow  I  shall 
leave  you  three  warriors  to  go  your  way  with  your  parties,  and  I 
will  go  with  my  party  to  another  country."  The  other  warriors 
spoke  up  and  said  that  there  was  no  danger  and  that  they  should  all 
go  together.  All  the  warriors  stayed  at  the  place  over  night,  but 
the  next  morning  the  warrior  who  said  that  he  was  going  to  leave 
started  out  toward  the  north  with  his  men.  They  had  gone  but  a 
short  distance  when  the  other  companies  sent  four  scouts  to  look 
over  the  country  and  see  whether  there  were  any  .signs  of  enemies. 
The  scout  who  started  first  told  the  other  three  scouts  that  he  would 
go  ahead ;  that  if  he  should  fail  then  another  should  follow,  and 
then  the  other  one. 

When  the  first  scout  had  climbed  a  high  hill  on  the  south  side, 
the  main  body  were  looking  at  him.  Just  as  he  was  about  to  stand 
up,  for  he  had  been  crawling  up  the  hill,  a  man  on  horseback  came 
up  on  the  other  side  so  that  they  saw  each  other  at  the  same  time. 
The  man  afoot  crawled  back.  The  man  on  horseback  turned  around 
and  went  back  whence  he  came.  Then  the  first  scout  gave  a  sign 
to  the  second  that  he  (the  first)  had  been  seen  ;  then  the  second 
scout  gave  the  sign  that  the  enemy  had  seen  their  scout,  to  the  third 
scout,  who  passed  it  on  to  the  fourth.  The  fourth  man  ran  to  the 
place  where  the  main  company  of  warriors  was  and  told  them  that 
the  first  warrior  had  given  a  sign  to  the  second,  and  the  second  to 
the  third,  and  the  third  to  himself,  that  an  enemy  had  seen  the  first 
scout.  The  war-party  slipped  quietly  away  into  a  thickly  timbered 
country  and  there  they  stayed.  The  other  three  scouts  then  stopped 
crawling  and  stood  up  and  walked  toward  the  place  where  the  leaders 
and  their  warriors  were  in  hiding.  While  they  were  walking  over 
the  prairie,  several  men  on  horseback  came  over  the  hill,  saw  them, 
turned  their  horses  about,  and  disappeared  over  the  hill.  In  a  few 
seconds  the  enemy  all  came  over  the  hill  on  horseback.  They 
whipped  up  their  ponies  and  rode  toward  the  timber. 

In  the  meantime  the  other  leader  who  had  gone  had  turned  back 
with  his  company  and  joined  the  main  body  of  warriors,  and  all  the 
warriors  were  putting  on  their  war  clothing.    There  was  one  young 


DORSEYj  PAWNEE    WAR   TALES  339 

man  who  put  on  a  wolf  robe,  seized  his  bow  and  arrows,  jumped 
up  in  front  of  the  leader  and  the  men,  and  said  :  **  Leader,  to-day  the 
Wolf-man  shall  defend  you  and  your  men  ! "  Then  he  went  back 
and  sat  down.  Then  another  young  man  jumped  up  and  stood  be- 
fore the  leader.  This  man  had  a  bear  robe  about  his  shoulders.  He 
said  :  "  Leader  and  men,  to-day  the  Bear-man  shall  defend  you  !  " 
When  he  sat  down,  another  man,  who  had  a  buffalo  robe  about  him, 
stood  up  before  the  leader  and  said  :  **  To-day  Young-Bull  shall  de- 
fend you  and  these  men  !  '*  He  sat  down  and  another  man,  with  a 
coyote  robe  on,  stood  up  and  said :  **  Leader,  to-day  the  Coyote- 
man  shall  protect  and  fight  for  you  ! " 

During  this  time  the  enemy  were  rapidly  approaching  on  horse- 
back. The  four  leaders  then  arrayed  their  men  in  a  line  and  said 
that  all  the  men  should  fight  for  their  leaders.  The  enemy  came 
and  they  were  many.  As  they  rode  up,  the  four  men  jumped  up  on 
a  bank  and  fought  them,  killing  several  and  driving  them  back. 
Again  the  enemy  made  a  charge  and  the  warriors  beat  them  off 
again.  Again  the  enemy  made  an  attack  upon  the  warriors  and 
again  they  were  driven  back. 

About  this  time  a  man  called  out  from  the  distance.  The  war- 
riors looked  and  saw  many  men  on  horseback  coming  from  another 
direction.  The  man  who  had  hallooed  to  them,  called  out,  saying : 
**  My  brothers,  Pawnee,  we  are  Comanche  ;  the  Cheyenne  and 
Arapaho  are  fighting  you  ;  you  have  driven  them  back  four  times ; 
now  we  will  stand  here  and  watch  you  fight,  but  we  will  not  take 
part,  since  you  are  our  brothers.**  When  the  Comanche  finished 
speaking,  some  one  from  the  warrior  crowd  of  Pawnee  shot  at  him 
and  hit  him  upon  the  forehead,  killing  him  instantly.  The  Com- 
anche were  aroused  at  once,  for  the  Pawnee  had  killed  their  chief  in 
return  for  their  offer  of  peace.  They  rode  away  and  joined  the 
Cheyenne  and  Arapaho. 

Then  the  Cheyenne,  Arapaho,  and  Comanche  all  rode  up  to  the 
Pawnee  and  surrounded  them.  The  four  warriors  fought  well. 
The  Coyote-man,  one  of  the  four  men  who  spoke,  was  killed.  The 
enemy  surrounded  them,  retreated,  then  rushed  up  again  many 
times,  but  the  Buffalo- man  and  the  Bear-man  held  out  against  them 
for  a  long  time.     After  a  time,  the  Bear- man  saw  that  there  was 


340  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

little  hope  for  them  and  ordered  the  men  to  run  into  a  ravine  that 
extended  up  the  hill  side.  They  were  surrounded  in  the  ravine,  for 
they  did  not  know  where  to  go.  The  Buflfalo-man  led  the  way, 
killing  the  enemies  in  front  of  him  as  he  progressed.  When  the 
Buffalo-man  had  killed  one  man,  another  Pawnee  caught  the  pony 
of  the  dead  man,  mounted  it,  and  rode  away.  The  Bear-man 
plunged  ahead  by  fighting  his  way  through  the  enemy,  who  closed 
in  on  all  sides,  killing  them  on  the  right  and  on  the  left.  The  Bear- 
man  brought  up  the  rear  and  fought  the  enemy  from  behind. 

The  enemy  had  killed  many  Pawnee  warriors,  but  the  man  they 
wanted  very  much  to  kill  was  the  Buffalo-man.  In  those  days  it 
was  customary  for  the  Pawnee  to  have  their  hair  roached,  but  the 
Buffalo-man  had  long  hair ;  so  the  enemy  wanted  to  kill  him  and 
take  his  scalp.  The  Buffalo-man  and  the  Bear-man  succeeded  in 
getting  the  Pawnee  through  the  line  of  the  enemy,  but  out  of  the 
one  hundred  and  twenty  men  only  twenty  were  left. 

PEACE    BETWEEN   THE   PAWNEE    AND    THE    COMANCHE 

There  was  one  man  who  made  up  his  mind  to  go  on  the  war- 
path. He  sent  for  several  other  young  men  to  join  him.  They 
sat  in  his  lodge  with  him  and  smoked  the  warrior's  pipe.  The 
warrior  then  told  the  young  men  that  he  had  it  in  his  mind  to  go 
on  the  war-path  and  that  he  had  selected  them  to  join  him.  The 
other  young  men,  when  they  heard  it,  were  glad.  Each  in  his 
turn  spoke  and  said  :  *'  I  will  go  with  you  ;  this  night  I  go  to  my 
lodge  and  tell  my  mother  and  sisters  to  make  me  several  pairs  of 
moccasins  and  to  fill  the  moccasins  with  pounded  buffalo  meat  and 
corn."  The  warrior  was  glad  to  know  that  the  young  men  were 
willing  to  go  with  him.  The  young  men  left  the  lodge  and  went 
to  their  homes,  and  each  told  his  mothers  and  sisters  to  make  sev- 
eral pairs  of  moccasins  and  fill  them  with  food.  The  mothers  and 
sisters  of  these  young  men  made  several  pairs  of  moccasins  that 
night,  and  the  next  day  they  made  more,  so  that  by  night  they  had 
made  all  the  moccasins  that  the  warriors  needed.  In  the  night  the 
warrior  sat  in  his  lodge  and  the  young  men  came  in  with  their 
packed  moccasins.  The  young  men  sat  around  the  fire  in  the 
lodge.     Some  of  the  young  men  went  out  in  pairs  and  sang  war 


DORSEY]  PAWNEE    WAR    TALES  34 1 

songs  around  the  village,  to  let  the  other  young  men  know  that 
they  were  about  to  leave  the  village  to  go  on  the  war-path.  Toward 
morning  all  had  come  into  the  lodge  and  the  warrior  led  them  out 
of  the  village. 

The  war-part)''  went  away  into  the  southern  country  for  many 
days  and  months.  When  they  reached  the  enemy's  country  they 
were  very  careful  to  hide  during  the  day  and  to  travel  only  during  the 
night.  One  day  they  were  traveling  along  a  ravine,  when  one  of 
the  scouts  climbed  up  the  side  of  a  hill  and  saw  a  lone  tipi  on  the 
prairie.  He  came  down  and  reported  to  the  leader  that  there  was 
a  lone  tipi  on  the  prairie.  The  leader  went  up  the  hill  and  saw 
the  tipi  there  by  itself.  He  went  back  and  selected  one  of  the 
scouts  to  go  and  visit  the  tipi  and  see  who  was  in  it.  The  scout 
went  up,  came  to  the  tipi,  peeped  in,  and  saw  that  there  were  only 
one  woman  and  a  little  boy  about  four  years  old.  The  woman 
was  close  to  the  entrance,  pounding  dried  meat  with  a  pestle.  The 
scout  went  back  and  reported  to  the  leader  that  there  were  a  woman 
and  a  little  boy  in  the  tipi.  The  leader  then  told  all  the  warriors 
to  lie  down  in  the  ravine,  saying  he  was  going  up  to  see  whether 
he  could  persuade  the  woman  to  feed  them.  When  the  leader 
reached  the  top  of  the  hill,  he  looked  over  the  country  and  saw  a 
man  coming  on  horseback.  He  lay  down  and  hid.  When  the 
man  on  horseback  came  to  the  tipi,  he  lariated  the  pony  and  went 
inside.  Then  the  leader  arose  and  called  his  warriors  and  they  fol- 
lowed him  to  the  tipi.  The  warriors  sat  down  outside  of  the  tipi, 
while  the  leader  went  close  up  to  the  tipi  and  sat  down.  The  little 
boy  in  the  tipi  was  playing  and  laughing.  The  leader  peeped  into 
the  tipi,  and  he  saw  that  the  man  was  lying  down  with  a  robe  over 
his  head,  and  the  woman  was  still  pounding  the  buffalo  meat.  The 
leader  sat  there  for  a  long  time,  making  up  his  mind  whether  to  kill 
the  people  or  whether  to  save  them.  He  heard  the  boy  ask  his 
mother  to  give  him  some  meat.  The  mother  took  some  pemmi- 
can,  pressed  it  together  and  made  a  ball  of  it,  and  gave  it  to  the 
boy.  He  ran  out  of  the  tipi,  up  to  the  leader,  put  his  arms  about 
the  leader^s  neck,  and  sat  in  his  lap.  The  leader  took  the  pemmi- 
can,  then  the  boy  went  into  the  tipi  to  get  something  more.  Again 
he  went  up  to  the  leader  and  gave  him  the  ball  of  pemmican,  then 


I  342  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  \s.  $.,  8,  1906 

i  went  into  the  tipi  and  asked  for  another  ball  of  pemmican,  took  it 

out,  and  gave  it  again  to  the  leader.     Several  times  the  boy  took 

,  out  meat  and  came  back  without  any.     The  woman,  knowing  that 

there  were  no  dogs  about  the  tipi,  thought  there  must  be  somebody 
outside  to  whom  the  child  was  giving  meat.  She  called  her  hus- 
band and  told  him  that  she  had  given  several  balls  of  pemmican  to 

j  the  child,  that  he  had  gone  out  and  returned  without  any,  that  she 

■  was  sure  she  heard  voices  out>ide. 

As  the  man  rose  up  in  the  bed  and  rested  on  one  of  his  elbows, 
the  leading  warrior  made  a  motion  to  his  warriors  to  follow  him  into 
the  tipi.  The  leading  warrior  threw  open  the  entrance  and  went 
in,  and  as  soon  as  he  went  in  the  others  followed  him.  The 
enemy  lying  in  bed  was  paralyzed  with  fear.  As  soon  as  the 
warriors  sat  around  the  circle  of  the  fireplace,  the  leader  made  a 
motion  for  the  man  to  get  up,  but  the  man  was  so  paralyzed  that 
he  did  not  get  up  for  some  time.  The  little  boy  in  the  meantime 
ran  up  to  the  leader  and  sat  in  his  lap.  The  leader  then  made  a 
motion  to  the  man  lying  down  to  get  up  from  his  bed  and  to  sit 
with  thcni,  assuring  him  that  they  did  not  intend  to  do  them  any 
harm,  for  said  the  leader,  **  I  have  a  child  like  this  little  boy  at  my 
home."  The  little  boy  came  and  touched  him  with  his  arms  and 
gave  him  something  to  eat,  then  gave  him  water  to  drink.  **  I 
have  entered  your  lodge,  and  as  I  sit  in  your  lodge  the  little  boy 
again  comes  to  me,  as  if  he  were  my  son ;  he  sits  in  my  lap ;  I 
love  the  little  boy  as  I  do  my  own,  so  you  need  not  be  afraid  that 
wc  will  kill  you."  The  man  lying  upon  the  bed  arose  and  sat  with 
them.  lie  breathed  a  sigh  of  relief,  then  he  turned  around  to  his 
wife  and  told  her  to  put  a  kettle  over  the  fire  and  to  cut  a  little 
dried  buffalo  meat  and  boil  the  meat  for  the  people.  Then  the  man 
told  the  leader  that  his  brother-in-law  was  the  head  chief  of  the 
Comanche ;  that  the  Comanche  had  been  camping  there  and  had 
broken  camp  that  morning ;  that  the  men  had  gone  over  the  hills 
but  a  short  distance  ;  that  the  people  were  waiting  for  them  at 
another  place  ;  that  they  knew  that  the  man  of  the  tipi  was  hunting 
his  ponies,  and  that  this  was  how  he  and  his  family  came  to  be 
alone  in  this  spot ;  that  he  had  been  looking  for  his  ponies  that  had 
strayed  away  from  him  and  had  not  found  them.     The  man  of  the 


DORSEY]  PAWNEE    IVAR    TALES  343 

tipi  further  told  the  leader  that  he  was  glad  that  the  warriors  had 
not  killed  him,  his  wife  and  his  child ;  and  that  they  should  start 
after  they  had  eaten,  and  that  he  would  take  them  to  the  village  of 
his  own  people  and  give  them  assistance  in  capturing  many  ponies. 
The  woman  took  the  kettle  from  the  fire  and  the  warriors  took 
charge  of  the  kettle.  The  leader  selected  two  men  to  take  the 
meat  out  of  the  kettle  and  to  divide  it  equally  among  the  men. 
After  the  meat  was  divided  equally,  they  all  ate.  Then  the  leader 
told  the  man  that  they  were  going  down  to  the  ravine  to  hide  until 
night,  when  they  would  go  with  him  to  the  village  of  his  people. 
The  leader  and  his  warriors  went  out  from  the  tipi  to  the  hollow. 
Just  as  they  climbed  over  the  hill,  one  of  the  warriors  looked 
back  and  there  came  upon  the  hill  behind  the  tipi  a  man  on 
horseback  driving  several  ponies.  The  man  who  saw  them  called 
to  the  leader,  who  stopped  and  looked.  He  said  that  it  was 
another  man  who  was  bringing  the  ponies  that  belonged  to  the 
man  of  the  tipi.  The  warriors  hid  in  the  ravine,  while  the 
leader  stood  upon  the  hill.  The  man  who  brought  the  ponies 
went  into  the  tipi.  Shortly  after  he  went  in,  the  man  of  the  tipi 
came  out  and  went  to  the  place  where  the  warriors  were  in  hiding. 
Then  the  man  told  the  leader  and  the  warriors  that  his  brother-in- 
law  had  brought  the  ponies  to  his  tipi  and  that,  as  his  brother-in-law 
was  chief  of  the  Comanches,  he  had  asked  the  leader  and  his 
warriors  to  come  to  the  tipi  again.  The  warriors  all  arose  and  fol- 
lowed the  man  to  his  tipi.  They  entered  the  tipi  and  there  the 
chief  was  sitting  by  the  woman  at  the  southeast  of  the  entrance  of 
the  tipi.  The  chief  arose  and  shook  hands  with  the  leader,  then 
shook  hands  with  all  the  others.  He  made  signs  to  the  leader  to 
let  him  know  that  he  was  thankful  that  he  had  not  killed  the  man, 
the  woman,  and  the  child.  He  made  the  leader  understand  that  the 
woman  was  his  sister,  that  the  child  was  his  nephew.  The  chief 
also  told  the  leader  that  the  family  were  to  take  down  the  tipi, 
bring  the  ponies  and  pack  all  their  things  on  them  and  go  where 
their  village  was ;  that  this  man  must  make  his  tipi  on  the  south 
side  of  the  village,  some  distance  away,  and  that  they  must  come 
out  there  after  dark,  for  the  woman  would  have  something  for  them 
to  eat.     The  chief  further  said  that  he  was  going  to  give  the  leader 


344  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

a  fine  pony  with  a  saddle,  and  that  when  they  got  ready  to  go 
away,  he  would  help  the  warriors  capture  many  ponies.  The 
leader  said  it  was  good.  When  this  was  all  arranged  the  war- 
riors went  back  and  hid  in  the  ravine. 

The  man  and  woman  took  down  the  tipi,  brought  their  ponies 
and  packed  them,  and  went  on  to  their  village,  and  the  warriors 
followed.     The  family  arrived  at  the  village  and  put  up  their  tipi  on 
the  south  side,  and  after  dark  the  warriors  went  to  the  tipi  and  the 
chief  and  the  man  of  the  tipi  were  there.     The  chief  told  the  Pawnee 
warriors  that  he  was  going  to  have  the  crier  go  through  the  village 
and  tell  the  people  to  go  to  his  tipi  to  tell  war  stories.    The  warriors, 
being  afraid  of  treachery,  told  the  chief  that  if  he  did  not  come  back 
they  would  have  to  kill  the  man,  woman,  and  child,  but  the  chief 
said  that  he  was  in  earnest.     So  the  chief  went  to  the  village  and 
called  the  crier  to  go  through  the  village  and  invite  all  the  men  to 
come  to  his  tipi.     The  chief  stayed  there.     When  all   the   men 
entered  his  tipi  he  told  them  that  he  wanted  them  to  tell  war 
stories.     When  the  men  came  they  began  to  tell  their  war  stories 
and  the  chief  slipped  out  and  went  to  the  tipi  where  his  brother- 
in-law  was  with  the  enemy.     He  entered,  and   taking  the  warrior 
by  the  hand,  led  him  out  and  gave  him  the  pony  and  saddle  he 
promised  him.     Then  they  went  back  into  the  tipi,  the  chief  and 
the  leader,  and  the  chief  begged  the  leader  to  give  him  the  pipe  that 
he  carried.     The  leader  said  that  he  could  not  do  that,  but  that 
when  the  chief  should  help  the  warriors  capture  many  ponies  and 
after  they  had  been  three  days  on  their  way  home,  he  would  kill 
one  of  the  ponies,  and  then  if  the  chief  would  go  so  many  steps  west 
of  the  dead  pony  he  would  find  the  pipe  in  the  grass.     The  Pawnee 
did  not  want  to  ^ive  his  pipe  to  the  enemy  for  fear  he  would  give 
him  all  the  power  that  the  pipe  possessed.     The  pipe  was  one  with 
which  smoke  had  been  offered  to  the  different  gods  in  the  heavens, 
so  that  the  gods  watched  over  the  men  who  carried  the  pipe  and 
gave  them  success  in  capturing  ponies  or  attacking  people.     By 
dropping  the  pipe  it  would  lose  its  power.     All  these  things  were 
agreed    on  by  the  warriors  and  the  Comanche    chief.     After  the 
warriors  had  eaten  and  were  given  plenty  of  meat  to  carry  home, 
they  began  to  get   ready  to  go  with  the  chief  where  the  ponies 


dorsey]  pawnee    IVAR    TALES  345 

were.  The  chief  led  them  to  a  bottom  land  where  all  the  ponies 
were.  He  told  the  Pawnee  warriors  to  take  as  many  as  they 
wanted.  The  Pawnee  took  all  the  ponies  they  could  manage  and 
went  on,  the  chief  going  home.  The  Comanche  men  who  were  in 
the  chief's  tipi  were  still  telling  war  stories,  but  by  morning  there 
was  a  noise  through  the  camp  that  the  enemy  had  come  to  the 
camp  and  stolen  many  ponies.  The  chief  then  had  the  crier  go 
through  the  village  to  tell  the  men  to  come  to  his  tipi  and  he  would 
lead  them  and  try  and  catch  the  enemy  who  had  stolen  their  ponies. 
So  the  warriors  gathered  around  the  chiefs  tipi  and  they  struck  out 
after  the  Pawnee  warriors. 

For  several  days  they  went  on  their  trail,  and  on  the  third  day 
they  could  see  them  going,  but  a  long  distance  away.  About  that 
time  the  Comanche  found  a  dead  pony  lying  upon  the  path.  The 
Comanche  stopped  and  the  chief  kept  going  around  until  at  last  he 
went  as  many  steps  as  he  was  told,  and  there  in  the  grass  he  found 
the  pipe.  The  chief  picked  it  up  and  told  them  that  he  had  found 
the  pipe.  The  Comanche  were  glad  that  the  Pawnee  had  dropped 
their  pipe,  and  thought  that  all  the  powers  that  went  with  the  pipe 
might  now  be  given  to  them  ;  so  they  were  glad  to  turn  back. 
Many  years  after,  the  Comanche  and  Pawnee  met.  This  story  was 
told  to  the  Comanche,  and  then  the  Comanche  understood  why  so 
many  ponies  were  stolen  from  them,  and  why  the  chief  had  invited 
^  all  the  men  to  his  tipi.  When  the  Comanche  knew  the  story  they 
were  not  afraid  to  visit  the  Pawnee,  for  now  they  were  friends. 

Field  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
Chicago. 


HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR  THE  EAST  MESA,  ARIZONA 

By  J.    WALTER   FEWKES 

Introduction 

The  more  we  know  of  the  sociological  evolution  of  the  Pueblos, 
the  more  evident  it  is  that  the  increase  of  population  and  attendant 
modifications  in  culture  are  due  only  partially  to  internal  growth  or 
the  enlargement  of  existing  families.  Additions  of  new  clans  are 
most  vital  factors  in  producing  these  changes,  always  tending  to 
modify  more  or  less  the  culture  of  the  population  with  which  they 
have  become  incorporated.  Survivals  of  these  additions  may  be  de- 
tected in  cults,  language,  and  arts  of  the  component  people.  In  order 
rightly  to  estimate  the  modifications  resulting  from  successive  incor- 
porations of  other  clans  with  a  people,  it  is  important  to  recognize 
distinctive  culture  features  belonging  to  the  several  component  clans. 
This  can  be  done  by  determining  the  sites  of  their  former  habitations 
and  investigating  the  archeological  evidences  of  culture  contained  in 
them.^ 

The  main  but  not  the  only  source  of  our  knowledge  of  the  mi- 
grations and  successive  halts  of  Hopi  clans  is  tradition,  which  indi- 
cates the  pueblos  (now  ruins)  that  have  been  occupied  by  them. 
Culture  objects  from  these  ruins  may  verify  or  disprove  tradition. 
Each  clan  added  to  a  Hopi  pueblo,  being  in  itself  a  unit,  has  its  own 
historj",  that  may  be  regarded  as  independent  of  other  chronicles  of 
the  kind  up  to  the  time  of  its  fusion  into  general  Hopi  history. 

Some  of  the  characteristics  of  clan  culture  history  survive  among 
the  Hopi  to  the  present  day.  The  first  step  in  an  investigation  of 
Pueblo  culture  evolution  is,  then,  definitely  to  associate  ruins  with 
clans.  This  may  be  done  by  several  methods,  one  of  the  most  re- 
liable of  which  is  by  traditions. 

I  have  already  shown  how  certain  Hopi  clans  claim  ownership 
in  eagles'  nests  near  distant  ruins  and  how  this  claim  may  be  used 

^  Most  of  the  data  here  recorded  were  gathered  between  1890  and  1894,  while  the 
author  was  connected  with  the  Hemenway  Expedition. 

346 


FEWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR   THE  EAST  MESA  347 

in  support  of  traditions.  There  is  a  similar  proprietorship  in  shrines 
and  springs'  near  ruins,  and  the  identification  of  their  present  owners 
may  aid  us  in  determining  what  clans  were  once  inhabitants  of  the 
pueblos  of  which  these  ruins  are  the  remains. 

In  order  to  indicate  the  importance  of  shrines  and  springs  in  a 
study  of  Pueblo  sociology,  let  us  take  for  an  example  the  clans  that 
survived  the  fall  of  Awatobi.  When  this  pueblo  was  destroyed  at 
the  close  of  the  seventeenth  century,  it  was  inhabited  by  at  least  four 
peoples  —  the  Awata  (Bow),  Honani  (Badger),  Buli  (Butterfly),  and 
Piba  (Tobacco).  It  would  appear  that  the  population  was  com- 
posite and  that  the  three  peoples  first  named  formed  the  nucleus  of 
a  population  which  was  joined  later  by  the  last  mentioned  (Tobacco), 
that  formerly  lived  south  of  Walpi  on  the  banks  of  the  Little  Col- 
orado. The  Bow,  Badger,  and  Butterfly  came  from  the  Rio  Grande 
valley  and  were  probably  of  either  Keresan  or  Tanoan  origin.^ 

In  the  dispersion  of  the  survivors  of  Awatobi  the  Bow  people 
went  to  the  Middle  mesa  and  the  Tobacco  to  Walpi,  while  the 
women  of  the  Badger  and  the  Butterfly  were  appropriated  by  the 
Oraibi.  Incidentally  it  is  instructive  to  note  that  some  of  the 
Badger  and  the  Butterfly  peoples,  returning  to  the  East  mesa, 
aided  the  Asa  in  founding  Sichomovi,  while  the  Bow  people  moved 
from  their  Middle  mesa  settlement  to  Walpi,  where  their  descend- 
ants still  live. 

A  few  years  ago  the  idols  of  the  Alosaka  at  Awatobi  were 
removed  from  their  shrines  and  carried  to  the  store  of  an  Indian 
trader,  the  late  Thomas  V.  Keam,  to  whom  they  were  offered  for 
sale.  It  was  then  learned  that  these  idols  were  especially  rever- 
enced by  the  descendants  of  the  Awatobi  clans  living  at  Mishong- 
novi,  for  almost  the  entire  population  of  this  pueblo  visited  Mr 


.  ^American  Anthropologist ^  n.  s.,  II,  p.  690-707,  1 900.  Every  clan  in  Walpi  has  a 
right  to  water  from  the  largest  springs,  but  individual  clans  claim  certain  springs,  espe- 
cially those  at  distant  ruins,  as  their  property. 

2  As  most  of  the  ruined  pueblos  on  the  Antelope  mesa  were  of  Keresan  origin,  it  is 
probable  that  Awatobi,  which  belongs  to  the  same  series,  was  founded  by  the  same  clans. 
At  least  we  may  logically  conclude  that  the  nucleus  of  that  historic  pueblo  came  from  the 
eastern  pueblos,  especially  as  this  conclusion  harmonizes  with  the  evidences  that  the 
Hopi  culture  was  in  the  first  instance  of  eastern  origin  and  therefore  more  modem  than 
that  of  the  Rio  Grande  pueblos 


348  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  S.,  8,  1906 

Keam  and  begged  for  their  idols.  He  delivered  them  to  the  priests 
and  they  were  carried  back  to  the  Middle  mesa.*  It  was  discovered 
also  at  that  time  that  several  of  the  Awatobi  shrines  and  springs 
were  still  used  ceremonially  by  certain  of  the  Hopi  clans  who 
•claimed  them  as  their  property. 

These  facts  might  be  paralleled  in  the  history  of  many  other 
mounds  near  the  East  mesa.  Even  remote  ruins  like  Homolobi, 
Kicuba,  and  Lenyanobi  are  still  regarded  as  the  property  of  the 
clans  that  once  inhabited  them,  and  their  old  shrines  and  springs 
still  figure  in  the  ceremonials  of  those  clans. 

Another  instance  of  the  verification  of  a  clan  migration  by 
-ownership  and  position  of  a  sacred  spring  is  suggested  by  Sisibi, 
near  the  Moki  buttes.  This  spring  lies  on  the  trail  taken  by  the 
Southern  people  of  Walpi  in  their  migration  to  that  pueblo  from 
Homolobi.  It  is  visited  annually  by  the  chief  of  the  Kwakwantu, 
a  warrior  priesthood  of  Southern  clans,  for  sacred  water  used  in  the 
New  Fire  ceremony. 

Several  clans  are  said  to  have  migrated  separately  or  together 
from  Homolobi  northward  to  Walpi.  Among  these  were  the 
Cloud,  Lizard,  Tobacco,  Rabbit,  and  possibly  the  Young  Com. 
The  Flute,  Sun,  Squash,  and  others  had  preceded  them  in  this  mi- 
gration. When  some  of  the  clans  came  to  a  place  called  Koko- 
pelti  a  short  time  before  they  reached  the  Moki  buttes,  the  Young 
Corn  separated  from  the  others  and  then  or  a  little  later  the 
Tobacco  and  possibly  the  Lizard  went  to  Awatobi.  The  remainder 
continued  their  journey  to  a  pueblo  called  Pakatcomo,  later  to 
Tawapa,  and  ultimately  joined  the  Walpians.  After  the  destruction 
of  Awatobi  the  Tobacco  peoples  were  united  with  their  former 
kindred  in  Walpi. 

Judging  from  the  time  spent  relatively  in  the  manufacture  and 
consecration  of  prayer  emblems,  it  might  well  be  concluded  that 
these  objects  are  essential  features  of  every  considerable  Hopi 
ceremony.  As  it  rarely  happens  that  any  rite  is  complete  without 
the  introduction  of  these  objects,  their  correct  interpretation  is  a  key 


1  These  images  are  now  kept  in  a  cave  near  Mishongnovi,  and  are  probably  the  same 
as  those  figured  by  Dr  O.  Solberg  in  his  article  Ueber  die  Bah(/s  der  Hopi,  Archiv  /, 
AnthropoLy  bd.  IV,  no.  I,  fig.  5. 


FKWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR   THE  EAST  MESA  349 

to  the  meaning  of  the  ceremony.  Their  form  and  character  vary  in 
different  rites,  as  may  be  seen  by  consulting  descriptions  of  dif- 
ferent festivals.  Appendages  to  these  objects  are  significant,* and 
each  type  has  a  prescribed  form  and  pigmentation.  Although 
varied  in  shape,  color,  and  the  materials  of  which  they  are  made, 
prayer  emblems  fall  into  several  types,  among  which  may  be 
mentioned  prayer  sticks,^  clay  images,  miniature  bowls,  artifidal 
eggs,  meal,  tobacco,  and  food  of  various  kinds.  It  would  be  an 
important  contribution  to  science  to  describe  all  the  forms  they 
assume,  but  the  present  article  considers  more  especially  the  places 
where  these  offerings  are  deposited  and  incidentally  certain  other 
inclosures  where  sacred  objects  are  kept.  I  have  attempted  to 
enumerate  some  of  the  better  known  shrines  near  the  East  mesa 
and  have  pointed  out  their  distribution  in  that  neighborhood,  that 
this  knowledge  may  serve  as  a  guide  in  the  determination  of  shrines 
near  ruins  and  lead  to  a  more  complete  identification  of  the  clans 
that  once  inhabited  the  dwellings  now  represented  by  these  ruins. 

The  number  of  shrines  ^  near  the  East  mesa  is  too  large  to  con- 
sider exhaustively  at  this  time,  so  it  will  be  necessary  to  choose  a 
few  of  the  more  significant  for  description.  There  are  others,  of 
course,  including  many  at  the  other  mesas  that  are  here  omitted. 

In  one  sense  any  inclosure  in  which  ceremonial  objects  are  pre- 
served is  regarded  by  the  Hopi  as  a  place  for  prayer  offerings. 
Thus  a  cave  or  a  recess  in  a  cliff  where,  for  instance,  the  jars  used 
in  washing  the  reptiles  in  the  mysterious  rites  of  the  Snake  dance 
are  kept,  or  the  cavern  where  certain  dilapidated  effigies  of  plumed 
serpents  are  stored,  is  considered  with  a  certain  amount  of  rever- 
ence. The  same  is  true  of  the  cleft  in  the  rock  containing  the 
Apache  scalps  and  of  the  burial  places  of  the  eagles.  It  is  not  pos- 
sible to  draw  a  strict  line  of  demarcation  between  cemeteries  and  true 
shrines. 

Among  the  Hopi  a  shrine  varies  in  form  and  construction  from 
an  inclosure  in  which  an  idol  is  permanently  preserved  to  a  simple 

^  At  my  suggestion  Dr  Solberg  has  lately  made  a  collection  of  Hopi  prayer  sticks, 
which  he  has  described  in  a  special  article  (op.  cit.)  in  which  several  shrines  are  like- 
wise figured. 

<  The  word  shrine  is  used  broadly  to  designate  a  devotional  place  other  than  the  cere- 
monial chambers,  or  Idvas. 

AM    ANTH.,  N.  S..  8-23. 


3 so  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  \v.  s.,  8,  1906 

cleft  in  the  side  of  a  bowlder  or  clifT.  One  of  the  simplest  Pueblo 
shrines  is  a  pile  or  a  ring  of  stones  so  placed  as  to  form  an  inclosure 
for  the  reception  of  offerings.  Abandoned  shrines  near  inhabited 
pueblos  are  not  uncommon,  new  shrines  being  constantly  made  as 
new  conditions  may  seem  to  demand  them.  The  situation  of 
shrines  is  determined  by  convenience  and  by  safety  of  access  as  well 
as  by  other  considerations.  Predatory  tribes  have  sometimes  raided 
so  close  to  the  Hopi  mesas  that  shrines  could  not  be  visited  with- 
out danger.  When  a  new  shrine  is  made  to  replace  an  old  one  the 
latter  is  still  regarded  with  reverence,  and  in  it  offerings  are  still 
placed  at  stated  times  —  a  custom  that  persists  even  after  the  idols 
or  other  sacred  objects  have  been  removed.  Thus  the  figurines  of 
the  Alosakas  ^  no  longer  occupy  their  ancient  crypt  at  the  ruin  of 
Awatobi,  yet  their  former  home,  the  old  shrine,  is  still  treated  with 
reverence.  Talatumsi,  the  Walpi  equivalent  of  the  Earth  goddess, 
called  the  Alosaka  woman,  formerly  had  a  shrine  to  the  north  of 
Hano,  but  the  site  was  too  exposed  to  hostile  Utes  and  Apaches  ; 
the  idol  was  removed  to  its  present  home,  but  at  the  New  Fire  cere- 
mony each  year  offerings  are  still  placed  in  the  old  shrine. 
—  Of  the  several  types  of  Hopi  shrines  the  most  complicated  and 
characteristic  is  that  which  contains  an  idol  or  image  to  which  the 
shrine  is  especially  dedicated.  The  shrine  of  Talatumsi  is  the  best 
known  of  this  type.  A  majority  of  the  larger  shrines  are  of  the 
simplest  construction,  consisting  of  stones  arranged  in  rings  with  a 
large  rock  on  one  side  forming  a  back.  Both  simple  and  complex 
shrines  often  contain  stones,  concretions,  and  various  other  oddly- 
shaped  substances. 

In  the  theogony  of  the  Hopi,  as  among  other  agricultural  peo- 
ples whose  ideas  are  not  modified  by  acculturation,  living  beings  are 
supposed  to  have  sprung  from  a  preexisting  earth,  the  origin  of 
which  is  beyond  their  philosophy  and  therefore  not  considered  by 
them.  The  earth  in  their  conception  always  existed,  and,  following 
the  analogy  of  growing  vegetation,  organisms  grew  out  of  the  earth 

^  The  Alosakas,  of  which  there  were  two  images  at  Awatobi,  one  representing  the 
male,  the  other  the  female,  are  equivalents  of  the  Hopi  Muyiftwft-taka  and  Muyiflwft- 
wilqti.  The  former  would  appear  to  be  a  sky  god,  the  latter  an  earth  goddess.  In  a 
way  both  are  rightly  designated  germ  gods,  clan  designations  of  conceptions  which  find 
expression  under  many  different  names. 


FEWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR    THE  EAST  MESA  35  I 

or  were  born  like  animals.  The  earth  to  them  is  not  a  creator  but  a 
mother,  the  genetrix  of  lesser  gods  and  animals,  and  the  ancestor 
or  first  of  the  human  race.  In  order  to  carry  out  the  analogy  of 
conception  or  gestation,  a  mythic  father,  or  Sky-god,  the  male 
principle  of  nature,  was  assumed  and  personified  as  an  ancient 
Pueblo  god  of  highest  rank.  This  god,  like  the  personation  of  the 
earth,  has  various  synonyms  or  equivalent  designations,  the  multi- 
plicity of  which  would  appear  to  indicate  a  most  complicated  and 
advanced  mythology,  although  in  reality  it  is  quite  simple.  The 
Earth  mother  has  also  many  names  derived  from  different  clans  or 
attributes.  We  find  the  Sky-god  called  Heart  of  the  Sky,  Sun- 
god,  Plumed  Serpent,  and  by  numerous  other  designations.  No 
satisfactory  interpretation  of  Pueblo  mythology  is  possible  before 
the  synonymy  of  the  gods  shall  have  been  worked  out  better  than 
at  present. 

The  Hopi  have  several  shrines  erected  to  such  earth  beings  as 
Spider-woman,  Tuwapoiitumsi,  Muyinwu,  and  Masauu.  Sky  and 
Sun  gods  likewise  have  their  places  for  prayer  offerings.  Many 
shrines  are  dedicated  to  the  Rain  gods,  or  Katcinas,^  ancestors  of 
the  clans.  So  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  discover,  there  is  no  spe- 
cial shrine  of  the  warriors  similar  to  that  of  the  members  of  the 
Zuni  Priesthood  of  the  Bow  on  the  great  mesa  near  their  pueblo. 
The  places  of  offerings  to  the  Plumed  Serpent,  a  Sky-god  introduced 
from  the  south,  are  springs,  not  true  shrines. 

Shrines  to  Special  Supernaturals 

Talatumsi.  — This  personage,  a  synonym  of  the  Alosaka-wiiqti, 
or  the  Alosaka  woman  ^  of  Awatobi,  has  two  shrines  at  the  East 


'  The  word  katcina  is  apparently  derived  from  pueblos  of  Keresan  or  Tanoan  stocks. 
A  katcina  is  sometimes  called  a  <<  sitter,"  referring  possibly  to  the  custom  of  burying  the 
dead  in  a  sitting  posture.  Among  the  Zufti,  as  with  the  Hopi,  the  katcinas  are  ancestral 
gods  that  are  supposed  to  live  in  an  underworld  or  mythic  dwelling  under  or  associated 
with  a  lake  or  spring.  These  ancestral  spirits  are  personated  from  time  to  time  in  sacred 
dances,  when  prayers  are  said  to  the  personators  vicariously  for  rain  and  other  blessings. 
According  to  Mr  H.  R.  Voth,  the  word  katci  means  ** living**  ;  possibly  katcina  is 
(rom  ka/df  **  living,"  and /la,  "parent.'* 

*  The  Tewa  equivalent  of  Talatumsi  is  called  by  them  Cenikwia,  the  Horn-woman 
(fa/a,  **  dawn  "  ;  (umsiox  tumasi,  **  elder  sister  "  or  **  woman  *' ).  Tumas  Katcina,  known 
at  Oraibi  as  the  man  who  bears  the  helmet  with  crow  feathers,  is  apparently  the  elder 


352  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

mesa,  one  of  which  (pi.  xxvi,  fig.  ci)  is  situated  on  the  terrace  among 
a  pile  of  rocks  to  the  left  of  the  so-called  ladder  trail  ^  from  Tawapa 
to  Walpi.  The  image  of  this  being  is  ordinarily  seated  in  a  stone 
inclosure  or  cleft  of  the  rocks  between  two  bowlders,  whose  entrance 
is  closed  by  a  wall  of  small  stones  and  is  opened  only  when  the 
shrine  is  visited  for  ceremonial  purposes.  Talatumsi  plays  an  im- 
portant role  in  the  New  Fire  ceremony  and  her  image  is  carried  to 
\  the  mesa  top  quadrennially  when  the  rites  elsewhere  described'  are 

performed  before  the  shrine. 

Tuwapofliumsi,  —  The  best  known  shrine  of  this  Earth-woman 
\  is  situated  to  the  left  of  the  trail  leading  from  Walpi  to  Mishongnovi, 

h  just  below  the  ruin  Kisakobi,  or  Old  Walpi.     It  is  a  simple  box- 

{ (  shaped  inclosure  (pi.  xxvi,  fig.  b),  or  rude  crypt,  made  of  slabs  of 

rock  standing  on  edge,  open  at  the  top  and  on  one  side.  Within 
the  inclosure  are  a  log  of  petrified  wood,  and  other  objects  of  stone. 
Offerings  are  presented  at  this  shrine  in  the  New  Fire  ceremony  in 
November,  as  elsewhere  ^  described.  At  this  time  the  whole  ruin 
of  Old  Walpi  is  regarded  as  one  great  place  for  offerings,  and  after 
a  procession  around  the  mounds  has  been  made  by  the  two  Fire 
societies,  offerings  are  placed  in  the  shrines.  The  Earth-woman 
above  mentioned  is  sometimes  called  Tawakiitcmana,  or  Sun-white 
Maid,  and  the  concept  is  known  by  various  other  names  also. 

Shrine  of  Salt  Woman.  —  Light  is  thrown  on  the  situation 
of  Hopi  shrines  by  a  study  of  trips  made  by  this  people  to  the 
Grand  canyon  to  obtain  salt.  At  that  time  they  carried  offer- =' 
ings  to  the  Woman  of  the  Hard  Substance,  sometimes  called  the 
Salt  woman,  who  had  a  shrine  in  or  near  the  canyon.  So  far  as  I 
can  trace  traditions,  it  would  seem  that  the  Spaniard  Cardenas  in 
1 540  followed  the  same  trail  that  the  Hopi  still  use  when  they  visit 


f 


■    I 


sister  of  the  Katcinas.  She  is  associated  with  the  child- floggers,  called  at  Walpi  the 
Tuilwup  Katcinas,  at  Oraibi  the  Ho  Katcinas.  These  and  many  other  duplications  of 
names  of  the  same  god  among  the  Hopi  are  very  often  perplexing  in  a  study  of  their 
mythology. 

'The  ladder  trail  is  the  steepest  of  all  the  routes  leading  from  the  terrace  into  Walpi 
and  is  almost  precipitous  at  one  point  where  a  stone  stairway  replaces  a  former  ladder. 
This  trail  passes  between  two  conspicuous  stone  pinnacles  before  entering  the  small  court 
in  which  the  Mofikiva  is  situated.  Its  name  is  derived  from  the  old  ladder  once  used  at 
the  steej)  part  of  the  ascent,  but  now  abandoned. 

2  The  New  Fire  Ceremony  at  Walpi,  Ameriian  Attthropologist^  n.  s.,  ll,  1900. 


FEWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR    THE  EAST  MESA  353 

the  Havasupai  Indians  in  Cataract  canyon,  or  practically  part  of  the 
old  route  used  in  these  excursions  after  salt.  This  trail  apparently 
crosses  the  Little  Colorado  not  far  from  the  Moenkopi  trail  at  Tan- 
ner crossing,  a  few  miles  below  Black  falls.  The  route  with  Hopi 
names  attached,  as  given  to  me  by  one  of  the  Indians,  will  be  con- 
sidered in  another  article. 

It  is  said  that  before  gathering  the  salt  which  hung  from  the 
cliffs  in  the  form  of  "  icicles,"  the  Hopi  deposited  prayer  sticks, 
one  before  the  image  of  the  Salt  goddess  and  the  other  before  that 
of  the  God  of  War.  It  was  their  custom  to  allow  themselves  to 
be  suspended  over  the  edge  of  the  cliffs  by  ropes,  in  order  that  they 
might  break  off  the  salt  **  icicles  "  and  transfer  them  to  their  sacks. 

Great  Masauu  Shrine,  —  One  of  the  best  known  of  all  the 
shrines  at  the  East  mesa  is  the  Great  Masauu  shrine,  situated 
among  the  foot-hills  west  of  the  mesa,  near  the  main  trail  to  Walpi. 
This  shrine,  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  plate  (xxvii,  fig.  g)^ 
has  a  rock  on  one  side  but  is  made  up  largely  of  twigs  and  branches 
that  have  been  thrown  upon  it  by  those  passing  with  firewood.  In 
the  same  shrine  may  likewise  be  found  small  clay  vessels,  prayer 
sticks,  and  various  other  offerings.  These  are  not  confined  to  the 
shrine  but  are  found  also  in  front  of  the  opening,  as  in  the  case  of 
the  small  bowl  shown  in  the  figure. 

Small  Masatiu  Shrine,  —  Along  the  top  of  a  ridge  forming  the 
eastern  border  of  the  sand  dunes  near  Isba,  north  of  the  peach- 
trees,  are  four  piles  of  stones  (pi.  xxvi,  fig.  d)  mixed  with  small 
fragments  of  wood.  These  occur  at  intervals  alongside  the  old 
trail,  now  abandoned,  from  the  valley  to  Hano  ;  in  former  days 
those  setting  out  to  gather  wood  on  returning  with  their  loads  threw 
on  the  piles  offerings  to  the  god  Masauu  in  the  belief  that  by  so 
doing  they  avoided  fatigue. 

In  ancient  times  the  annual  wood  gathering  in  November,  just 
about  the  time  of  the  New  Fire  ceremony,  was  the  occasion  of  the 
exhibition  of  an  interesting  custom  that  still  survives  at  the  East 
mesa.  The  last  time  I  observed  it  was  at  the  close  of  November, 
1900,  when  the  events  here  narrated  occurred.  On  the  28th  many 
men  of  Walpi  started  for  the  wooded  mesas  about  six  miles  north 
of  the  ruin  Sikyatki.     Early  on  the  morning  of  the  29th  the  town 


Il 


i 


354  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

crier,  or  the  chief,  from  the  top  of  the  highest  house  in  Walpi  gave 
notice  to  the  girls  of  the  pueblo  to  don  their  finery  and  proceed 
down  the  trails  to  meet  the  returning  wood  gatherers.  About  the 
middle  of  the  forenoon  several  venerable  chiefs  gathered  at  the  spring 
Moiiwiba,  and  later  went  to  a  knoll  called  Mandtcomo,  where  girls 
from  the  pueblos  had  collected  in  considerable  numbers,  all  dressed 
in  their  best  clothing.  Among  the  patriarchs  who  gathered  there 
were  Kwatcakwa,  the  sun-chief,  Honyi,  the  speaker-chief,  Hayi,  and 
Pautiwa,  the  warrior-chief.  At  Wala  the  speaker-chief  laid  on 
the  trail  a  cotton  string  with  feather  attached  and  drew  a  line  of 
meal  on  the  ground  as  symbolic  of  opening  the  trail  to  the  pueblo 
for  the  returning  wood  gatherers.  The  old  men  kindled  a  small 
fire  and  smoked,  quietly  awaiting  the  wood  gatherers,  who  soon 
appeared  and  were  greeted  with  a  '*  thank  you."  As  each  group 
appeared,  one  or  another  of  the  maidens  would  run  out  and  present 
her  chosen  youth  with  a  small  package  of  corn  mush  {sawibi).  If 
he  took  it  the  maiden  followed  him  along  the  trail  to  the  mesa  top. 
In  this  way  the  maidens  showed  their  preferences  for  certain  youths, 
generally  for  those  to  whom  they  were  betrothed,  or  in  some  in- 
stances openly  expressed  their  preferences  for  the  first  time.  Mar- 
ried women  take  no  part  in  this  custom  for  obvious  reasons. 

After  all  the  wood  gatherers  had  passed,  each  of  the  old  men 
gathered  a  bundle  of  greasewood,  threw  it  on  his  back,  and  pro- 
ceeded up  the  trail.  As  the  crowd  approached  the  town,  a  con- 
siderable number  of  people  had  gathered  on  the  house  tops  of  Hano 
to  watch  the  proceedings,  and  amid  much  laughter  the  loaded 
burros,  with  their  happy  drivers  followed  by  the  bashful  maids, 
passed  through  the  pueblo.  Formerly  this  custom  was  observed 
by  many  people,  but  at  present  the  number  of  participants  is  but 
small.  It  is  said  that  in  old  times  a  procession  of  this  kind  yearly 
passed  the  four  piles  of  stones  and  twigs  above  described  when  it 
returned  to  the  pueblo. 

There  are  numerous  other  small  shrines  of  this  kind  near  the 
East  mesa,  some  of  which  are  collections  of  small  stones  thrown 
there  bypassing  Indians,  others  stones  deposited  in  natural  crevices 
of  bowlders  or  cliffs.  In  the  same  categor}'  may  be  placed  also  the 
rock  called   Masovva,  or  Skeleton  Stone,  situated  about  halfway 


FEWKES]  HO  PI  SHRINES  NEAR    THE  EAST  MESA  35$ 

between  Tawapa  and  the  elevation  to  the  left  of  the  eastern  trail 
leading  to  Hano,  upon  which  stands  the  house  purchased  from 
Polakka,  a  Tewa  Indian,  and  for  a  long  time  occupied  by  officials 
of  the  Government 

Plumed  Serpent  Cult} — This  cult  appears  among  the  inhabitants 
of  the  East  mesa  pueblos  in  two  distinct  forms,  that  of  Hano  and 
that  of  Walpi.  The  former  is  the  Tanoan,  the  latter,  the  Hopi 
variant.  One  came  from  the  east,  the  other  from  the  south.  The 
Plumed  Serpent  cult  is  a  form  of  sky  or  sun  worship  introduced 
into  Walpi  by  the  religious  fraternities  of  the  Cloud,  the  Flute,  and 
other  southern  clans.  Effigies  of  this  serpent  are  employed  in  the 
Winter  Solstice  rites  of  these  people  and  in  the  March  dramatiza- 
tions. It  crops  out  likewise  in  the  New  Fire  ceremony  when  mem- 
bers of  the  Kwakwantu,  a  warrior  society,  carry  wooden  slats  rep- 
resenting plumed  serpents,  and  their  chief  bears  an  effigy  of  the  same 
monster,  made  of  the  stalk  of  the  agave  plant.  The  spring  Tawapa, 
supposed  to  be  the  home  of  the  Plumed  Serpent,  no  doubt  received  its 
name.  Sun  spring,  from  the  connection  of  sun  and  serpent  worship. 

In  the  dramatization  that  occurs  at  the  East  mesa  every  March, 
the  Tewa  and  the  Hopi  employ  effigies  ^  of  these  reptiles  made  of 
cloth,  skins,  and  gourds.  Formerly  these  effigies  when  not  in  use 
were  kept  in  caves  outside  the  pueblos,  but  of  late  intramural  recep- 
tacles have  been  made  for  them.  The  effigies  of  the  Plumed 
Serpents  of  Hano  were  formerly  kept  in  a  small  cave  on  the  west 
side  of  the  mesa  near  the  ruin  at  the  mound  Tukinobi,  but  they  are 
now  concealed  in  four  jars  in  the  home  of  the  Tobacco  clan.  The 
extramural  crypt  or  "home"  contains  fragments  of  old  abandoned 
effigies,  hoops,  cloth,  and  broken  gourds,  with  fragments  of  wood 
and  pieces  of  cord,  and  is  occasionally  visited  by  priests  who  some- 
times make  offerings  at  that  place. 


iThe  Horned,  or  Plumed,  Serpent  cult,  was  widely  distributed  in  Mexico,  the 
Pueblo  area,  and  among  the  ancient  inhabitants  of  the  Mississippi  valley.  It  is  a  form  of 
sun  and  sky  worship,  and  is  almost  universally  said  to  have  been  brought  to  Walpi  from 
the  mythic  land  in  the  south  called  Palatkwabi.  The  horn  is  constantly  represented  on 
the  head  of  figures  of  this  serpent,  feathers  being  less  constant. 

2  I  was  repeatedly  warned  not  to  touch  these  effigies,  even  when  they  were  not  in 
use.  Women  never  allowed  even  their  garments  to  come  into  contact  with  the  effigy  of 
the  Great  Snake. 


3S6  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Sumcdkoli  Shrine.  —  Several  men  at  the  East  mesa  belong  to  a 
sacerdotal  society  called  the  Yayas.  They  claim  to  be  able  to  cure 
diseases  of  certain  kinds  and  the  stories  they  tell  of  their  necromancy 
are  past  all  belief.  In  treating  the  sick  they  make  use  of  heat, 
ashes,  or  other  products  of  fire  and  most  of  their  jugglery  is  with 
firebrands,  so  that  one  would  not  be  far  astray  in  calling  the  Yaya 
a  Fire  society ;  hence  I  have  spoken  of  their  biennial  festival  as  the 
Little  Fire  ceremony.  They  kindle  fire  with  two  sticks,  and  at  the 
time  a  row  of  masks  called  the  Sumaikoli  and  Kawikoli,  a  fetish  of 
the  Earth  goddess,  Kokyanwiiqti,  the  Spider-woman,  and  other 
objects  are  arranged  in  the  form  of  an  altar.  Perhaps  the  most 
significant  and  characteristic  ceremonial  object  employed  by  the 
Yaya  is  a  wooden  framework,  called  by  Mrs  Stevenson  a  "  charm." 
This  is  carried  in  the  hand  in  the  manner  shown  in  my  representa- 
tions of  the  Sumaikoli  and  Kawikoli.^  Two  of  these  **  charms  " 
were  obtained  by  Mr  Stewart  Culin  in  a  collection  from  the  Canyon 
de  Chelly.  These  specimens,  now  in  the  Brooklyn  Institute  Mu- 
seum, possibly  belonged  formerly  to  the  Asa  clan,  who  claim  once 
to  have  inhabited  the  ruin  near  which  these  objects  were  found.  If 
so,  there  is  no  doubt  of  the  late  occupancy  of  some  of  the  cliff- 
dwellings  of  the  Canyon  de  Chelly,  as  the  Asa  moved  to  this  canyon 
in  quite  recent  times. 

It  would  appear  that  the  Sumaikoli  ceremony  was  brought  to 
the  Hopi  by  eastern  Pueblo  clans,  and  I  am  inclined  to  attribute  its 
introduction  to  the  Asa  or  to  some  Hano  peoples  supposed  to  be 
Tanoan.  Mrs  Stevenson  has  described  the  Sumaikoli  and  Kawikoli 
(Saiapa)  as  they  are  personated  in  Zuni,  where  the  cult  is  much 
more  elaborate  than  at  Hano  or  Walpi.  The  Sumaikoli  cult  seems 
likewise  to  have  been  added  to  the  original  culture  of  the  Zufii  since 
they  settled  in  the  Zufii  valley  or  while  their  home  was  farther  down 
the  Little  Colorado.^ 


*The  Lesser  New  Fire  Ctrtmonyy  American  Anthropohgisty  III,  1901  ;  Twenty- 
second  Rep.  Bur.  Am.  Ethnol.^  pi.  XXXV,  p.  96.  Like  so  many  other  Hopi  ceremonies, 
the  Sumaikoli  is  of  Keresan  origin. 

^The  Sumaikoli  apparently  originated  at  Cipia,  an  ancient  Keres  habitation  near 
Isleta  or  Laguna,  New  Mexico,  from  which  it  spread  to  Zufli  and  to  the  Hopi  mesas  with 
the  possible  exception  of  Oraibi.  This  appears  to  be  one  of  many  ceremonial  personages 
common  to  the  Hopi  and  the  Zufti  that  were  not  derived  one  from  the  other  but  arose 


FEWKES]  HO  PI  SHRINES  NEAR    THE  EAST  MESA  357 

Just  Opposite  an  old  house  in  Hano,  where  once  lived  the  sun- 
priest  who  was  also  chief  of  the  Sumaikoli,  situated  on  the  eastern 
rim  of  the  mesa,  there  are  a  few  small  stones  forming  an  inclosure 
in  which  are  biennially  deposited  the  prayer  sticks  of  the  priests  at 
the  Sumaikoli  ceremony.  The  shrine,  called  a  sun  shrine,  receives 
other  offerings  also,  but  that  made  to  the  sun  by  the  Yaya  priests  is 
conspicuous.  This  priesthood  makes  offerings  also  to  the  moon, 
to  Masauu,  and  to  the  six  world  "quarters" — north,  west,  south, 
east,  above,  and  below.  Such  offerings  consist  of  feathered  strings, 
some  of  which  are  tied  to  an  emblem  representing  the  sun. 

The  Sumaikoli  and  Kawikoli  masks  of  Hano  are  kept  in  a  dark 
room  on  the  ground  floor  of  the  old  sun  house  of  that  pueblo. 
They  differ  somewhat  in  symbolism  from  those  of  Walpi.^ 

Sun  Shrine  on  Trail  to  Katcinaki,  —  Katcinaki,  or  the  Katcina 
house,  is  a  shallow  cavern  situated  nearly  under  Sichomovi,  half- 
way between  the  edge  of  the  mesa  and  the  surface  of  the  terrace. 
This  is  the  place  where  men  personating  the  katcinas  unmask  and 
where  they  have  their  mid-day  dinner.  Here  is  a  small  shrine  in 
which  ceremonial  deposits  are  placed  at  times.  The  trail  leading  to 
it  from  the  mesa  top  passes  over  the  east  rim  of  the  mesa  about 
halfway  between  Walpi  and  Sichomovi  and,  after  descending  a  few 
feet,  bifurcates,  one  branch  forming  the  main  trail  to  Sun  spring. 
Overlooking  this  trail  as  it  leaves  the  mesa  is  a  projecting  spur  of 
the  mesa  t^%<t  upon  which  is  situated  the  Eastern  Sun  shrine  of 
Walpi.  This  shrine,  shown  in  the  accompanying  figure  (pi.  xxvii, 
fig.  €\  is  filled  with  offerings  at  the  Winter  Solstice  ceremony  and 
is  a  receptacle  for  prayer  sticks  and  feather  offerings  at  other  festi- 
vals also. 

Talaviiva.  —  This  shrine  is  situated  on  the  extreme  point  of  the 
cliff  above  Wala,  on  the  trail  from  the  Isba  to  Hano.  Near  it  are 
the  markings  in  the  edge  of  the  cliff  through  which  the  Tewa  formerly 
shot  their  arrows  at  invaders,  in  defence  of  their  town.     On  the  oc- 


from  a  common  source.  Like  the  Zufii  Kolowissi  and  the  Hopi  PalUlUkon,  both  were 
derived  from  clans  that  once  lived  on  the  Little  Colorado.  In  a  somewhat  similar  way 
the  concept  of  the  Flute  cultus  hero  in  these  two  modem  pueblos  may  have  been  inde- 
pendently derived  from  the  people  of  some  Flute  pueblo  now  in  ruins. 

1  See  Jour,  Am.  EihnoL  and  Archaoi.,  1 1  ;  also,  American  Anthropologist,  n.  s., 
Ill,  1901. 


'; 


■I 


I 

h 

I  ■ 

I  I 


358  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

casion  of  my  visit  the  shrine  contained  several  fragments  of  petri- 
fied logs  but  no  prayer  sticks  or  other  offerings. 

Mofiiva, —  This  shrine  is  situated  on  the  mesa  top,  north  of  the 
main  cluster  of  Hano  houses,  and  not  far  from  the  remains  of  an  old 
kiva  adjoining  broken-down  walls  of  an  ancient  habitation  that  the 
Hano  ascribed  to  the  Katdna  clan.  Offerings  are  made  in  this 
shrine,  especially  by  the  Hano  priests  and  those  personating  the 
Hano  katcinas. 

Hano  Sun  Shrine, —  It  is  in  this  shrine  that  the  sun  priest  of 
Hano  places  his  sun  offerings  at  the  summer  solstice,  as  recorded  in 
my  account  of  this  ceremony.^ 
I  Ancient  Hano  Sun  Shrine,  — There  is  an  old  sun  shrine  of  the 

!  Hano  clans  on  the  mound  south  of  the  trail  that  leads  from  the  foot- 

hills to  their  ancient  pueblo  on  Sikyaotcomo,  or  Yellow-rock  mound. 
It  is  said  that  one  of  the  earliest  Hano  settlements  crowned  this  ele- 
vation and  the  adjacent  remains  of  walls  support  the  tradition  that 
it  was  a  pueblo  of  considerable  size.  The  shrine  on  this  hill  is 
used  almost  exclusively  by  the  modern  Hano  priests  and  always 
contains  several  offerings.  It  consists  of  a  ring  of  stones  a  few  feet 
in  diameter,  open  on  the  east  side.  The  character  of  the  offerings 
varies  from  time  to  time.  The  following  objects  were  observed  just 
after  the  Winter  Solstice  ceremony  in  1900.  The  most  unusual 
form  of  these  offerings,  peculiar  to  Hano  so  far  as  I  know,  is  a  prayer 
stick  in  the  form  of  an  ancient  ladder,  which  is  elsewhere  figured, 
and  described  as  carried  by  the  Buffalo  maid  in  the  Buffalo  dance. 
This  is  a  flat  wooden  slat  serrated  on  each  edge  with  each  surface 
divided  by  a  meridian  band,  one  side  yellow,  the  other  green.  One 
end  is  continued  into  a  handle.  The  ladder  prayer  stick  is  used  in 
the  Winter  Solstice  ceremony  in  a  symbolic  way,  being  in  fact  an 
offering  to  the  sun,  which  is  supposed  to  be  wear>'  at  that  time  and 
in  need  of  assistance  in  climbing  from  his  home  in  the  under-world 
to  the  sky. 

Two  sun  prayer  sticks  of  Hano  priesthoods  were  likewise  seen 
in  this  shrine.  These  differ  from  the  Walpi  variety  in  having  a 
ferrule  incised  in  the  stick  representing  the  male,  a  face  being  painted 
on  the  stick  representing  the  female.    Both  Hano  and  Walpi  varie- 

^  Jour.  Am,  EthnoL  and  Archi€oL^  II,  1893. 


FEWKES]  HO  PI  SHRINES  NEAR    THE  EAST  MESA  359 

ties  are  double,  consisting  of  two  sticks  tied  together  about  mid- 
way in  their  length.  One  of  the  most  remarkable  offerings  in  this 
shrine  was  an  imitation  of  an  eagle's  egg,  made  of  wood.  It  was 
painted  white  with  black  spots  and  had  a  wish  feather  attached  to 
it.  These  imitation  eagle  eggs  are  "  signature  "  prayers  for  the  in- 
crease of  eagles  and  occur  also  in  other  sun  shrines.  They  are  made 
at  the  Winter  Solstice  ceremony. 

Shrine  of  Ahula,  —  Ahiila  appears  in  the  great  Katcina  ceremony 
called  the  Powamu,  or  yearly  celebration  of  the  return  of  the  kat- 
cinas,  or  divinized  ancestors.  This  personage,  representing  the  Sky 
god  or  male  parent  of  all,  visits  the  main  clan  homes  of  the  three 
villages  on  the  mesa,  symbolically  receiving  the  prayers  of  their  res- 
idents which  he  answers  in  a  similar  manner. 

There  is  a  conspicuous  shrine  situated  at  the  gap,  Wala,  near 
the  head  of  the  trail  from  Coyote  spring  to  Hano,  which  contains  a 
coiled  stone,  possibly  a  cast  of  a  cephalopod  shell.  Prayer  offerings 
are  placed  in  this  shrine  in  many  ceremonies ;  here  Ahiil,  the  Sky 
god,  dresses  and  dons  his  mask  before  he  enters  the  Hopi  pueblo. 
The  coiled  stone  is  not  interpreted  as  representing  a  snake  idol,  as 
some  authors  have  suggested,  but  as  comparable  with  what  the 
Hopi  call,  as  translated,  a  "  heart-twister."^ 

Tohkuki'i,  —  The  shrine  of  the  animal  footprints  is  situated  near 
the  trail  from  Walla  to  the  two  mounds  called  Kiikutcomo,  "  foot- 
prints mound.*'  This  shrine,  a  small  cairn  containing  stone  fragments 
and  other  objects,  takes  its  name  from  certain  depressions  in  the 
surface  of  the  rock  which  the  Hopi  liken  to  wildcat  tracks.  Several 
similar  markings  on  the  rock  nearby  seem  to  indicate  that  the  im- 
pressions especially  associated  with  the  shrine  were  but  one  speci- 
men of  many  of  these  impressions  to  be  found  in  the  neighborhood. 
In  this  shrine  was  observed  a  wooden  ball,  which  I  was  told  had 
been  placed  there  in  order  that  the  Rain  gods  might  pour  out  water 
from  the  clouds  in  torrents  which  should  fill  all  the  dry  water 
courses,  causing  the  adobe  balls  in  their  beds  to  be  rolled  along 


^  The  nearest  approach  to  it  in  form  is  the  coiled  stone  from  Awatobi  now  in  the 
Berlin  Museum,  to  which  institution  it  was  sold  by  the  late  Mr  Thomas  V.  Keam.  A 
coiled  wooden  object  known  as  **the  mother"  and  called  also  a  ** heart-twister**  is 
prominent  on  the  Walpi  Mamzrauti  altar.     (See  American  Anthropologist^  ill,  1892.) 


360  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

like  the  stone  balls  which  were  kicked  by.  the  young  men  in  the 
foot  races  held  in  early  spring.  These  races  are  thus  a  form  of 
prayer,  or  a  mental  suggestion  to  the  Rain  gods  to  aid  their  de- 
scendants with  copious  rains. 

KwapUdkpu,  —  This  shrine,  situated  on  the  north  side  of  a  hill 
called  Tukinobi  that  lies  about  midway  between  the  twin  mounds 
Kiikiitcomo  and  Wala,  is,  as  its  name  signifies,  an  eagle  shrine  ;  it 
contains  artificial  eagle  eggs,  especially  just 'after  the  Winter  Sol- 
stice ceremony.  Near  the  shrine  are  the  remains  of  a  former  set- 
tlement of  the  Kokyan,  or  Spider  clan  of  the  Bear  people,  the  ear- 
liest arrival  in  Tusayan  and  a  very  old  settlement  on  the  East  mesa.* 

Shrines  in  the  Plazas 

Almost  every  Hopi  pueblo  has  in  the  middle  of  its  plaza  a 
shrine  that  is  generally  one  of  the  best  made  of  these  structures  in 
the  neighborhood.  These  plaza  shrines  are  of  two  kinds  :  (i)  those 
!1  whose  cavities  are  sunk  below  the  level  of  the  ground  and  always 

provided  with  a  stone  covering ;  and  (2)  those  with  lateral  walls 
above  the  surface  of  the  ground,  having  lateral  entrances.  Both 
types  are  sometimes  said  to  represent  symbolically  a  mythological 
opening  from  the  under-world  through  which  the  races  of  men 
emerged.  The  plaza  shrine  of  Walpi  belongs  to  the  former  of  these 
types,  the  corresponding  shrines  at  Sichomovi  and  Hano  to  the 
latter. 

A  plaza  shrine  of  the  second  type  is  a  simple  uncovered  stone 
box  made  of  slabs  of  rock  set  on  one  edge,  generally  with  the  east 
side  open.  Shrines  of  this  kind  are  usually  well  supplied  with 
prayer  emblems  of  different  sorts. 

Sipapu  is,  of  course,  a  general  name  for  the  entrance  to  the 
under-world,  and  is  applied  likewise  to  a  symbolic  representation  of 
the  same,  as  a  hole  in  the  floor  of  a  ceremonial  room  or  a  depression 
in  the  plaza.  The  plaza  shrine  at  Walpi  is  a  sipapu,  or  crypt  in  the 
floor  of  the  plaza,  and  is   covered  with  a  circular  stone  ordinarily 

'  Like  many  of  the  oldest  clans  of  the  Hopi  pueblos,  the  Spider  clan  is  said  to  have 
come  from  the  east  According  to  some  of  the  most  reliable  traditionists,  the  Bear 
people  are  the  oldest  in  Walpi.  The  evidence  drawn  from  picture  writing  found  on  pot- 
tery taken  from  their  old  ruins  relates  them  to  former  inhabitants  of  Sikyatki,  whose 
ancestors  we  know  came  from  Jemez. 


FEWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR   THE  EAST  MESA  36 1 

cemented  over  the  orifice.  This  stone  covering  is  removed  at  cer- 
tain ceremonies  when  offerings  are  deposited  in  the  cavity.  At  the 
New  Fire  ceremony  broad  lines  of  meal  are  drawn  on  the  ground 
from  it  across  the  plaza  in  the  direction  of  the  shrines  of  Talatumsi 
and  other  supernatural  beings.  These  are  either  pathways  of  influ- 
ence from  shrines  to  the  under-world,  the  abode  of  the  gods,  or 

vice  versa. 

World  Quarter  Shrines 

In  certain  of  the  great  Hopi  festivals,  as  the  Snake  dance  and 
the  Flute  ceremony,  but  more  especially  in  the  former,  it  is  custom- 
ary for  the  priests  to  deposit  prayer  sticks  for  rain  in  temporary 
shrines  situated  in  the  four  cardinal  directions  ^  from  the  pueblo. 
These  sticks  are  made  for  seven  consecutive  days,  their  length  each 
day  being  less  than  on  the  preceding  day.  The  shrines  in  which 
the  offerings  are  placed  are  situated  at  distances  also  diminishing 
day  by  day  from  the  maximum  —  about  five  miles.  On  the  last 
day  prayer  sticks  no  longer  than  the  first  joint  of  the  finger  are 
placed  on  the  four  sides  of  the  entrance  to  the  room  in  which  the 
offerings  are  manufactured.  These  temporary  world  quarter  shrines 
and  the  offerings  placed  in  them  are  located  at  constantly  dimin- 
ishing intervals  in  order  to  toll  the  Rain  gods  from  their  distant 
homes  to  the  pueblo.^ 

Snake  Shrines,  —  In  the  now  voluminous  literature  of  the  Hopi 
Snake  dance,  little  or  nothing  has  been  recorded  regarding  the  fate 
of  the  long  black  prayer  sticks  made  by  the  Snake  priests  and  car- 
ried by  them  in  the  dance.  At  the  close  of  the  dance  these  objects 
are  deposited  in  four  shrines  situated  at  the  base  of  the  mesa,  one 
in  each  of  the  four  world  quarters,  and  hence  called  the  North, 
West,  South,  and  East  snake  shrines.  It  may  be  mentioned  also 
that  in  the  disposition  made  of  the  snakes  after  the  dance  a  serpent 
is  always  left  in  each  of  these  shrines. 

The  Snake  shrine  of  the  North  is  situated  near  a  large  bowlder, 
not  far  from  a  house  owned  by  Kannu.  At  the  time  of  my  visit 
there  were  in  this  shrine  several  of  the  black  prayer  sticks  of  the 
priests.     The  Snake  shrine  of  the  West  is  a  cleft  in  the  pinnacle  of 

'  Determined  by  solstitial  sunrise  and  sunset,  not  by  polar  observations. 

>  Shrines  may  sometimes,  as  possibly  in  this  instance,  symbolically  represent  springs. 


362  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

rock  at  the  extreme  south  end  of  the  East  mesa,  near  the  bowlder 
on  which  is  cut  the  pictograph  of  the  winged  being  Kwataka,  else- 
where described.  The  Snake  shrine  of  the  East  is  situated  not  far 
from  the  Buffalo  shrine,  to  the  right  of  the  road  as  one  approaches 
the  spring  called  Ispa,  Coyote  Water.  It  is  a  simple  cleft  in  the 
rock  which  bears  one  or  two  pictographs  of  serpents.  The  Snake 
shrine  of  the  South  is  situated  a  little  to  the  right  of  the  steep  trail 
to  Walpi,  just  below  the  sheep  corral  on  the  terrace.  Nearby  are 
pictographs  of  snakes  and  when  visited  the  shrine  was  found  to 
contain  several  snake  prayer  sticks. 

Shrines  with  Pictographs 

It  commonly  happens  that  pictographs  of  striking  character  are 
found  near  shrines.  None  of  these  is  more  instructive  than  the 
pictograph  of  Kwataka,  a  mythic  being  of  birdlike  form.  This 
being  is  regarded  by  the  Hopi  with  great  awe,  for  it  is  one  of  the 
most  dreaded  supernatural  personages  of  the  tribal  Olympus  and 
around  it  cluster  many  legends,  some  of  which  recount  how  it 
destroyed  and  devastated  old  pueblos.  Some  of  the  ruins  of  Ari- 
zona are  directly  associated  with  the  effects  of  its  rage.  In  certain 
respects  Kwataka  resembles  the  Zuni  Achiyalatopa,  "the  knife 
feathered  being,**  figures  of  which  are  so  constant  on  certain  Zuni 
filtars  but  which  I  have  never  found  on  a  Hopi  altar.  Kwataka 
was  worshipped  when  success  in  war  was  desired,  and  offerings  of 
medicine  were  placed  in  the  depression  indicating  the  location  of 
the  heart  of  this  supernatural  being.  He  was  regarded  as  the 
most  powerful  god  of  war.  There  is  a  very  good  pictograph  of 
Kwataka  in  the  foothills  at  the  south  end  of  the  East  mesa,  on  the 
face  of  a  large  bowlder.  The  accompanying  drawing  (figure  15) 
shows  that  the  Hopi  conception  of  him  was  a  giant  birdlike  being 
with  a  long  straight  beak  and  a  crest  of  feathers.  Remarkable 
features  not  partaking  of  the  birdlike  character  are  the  two  appen- 
dages rising  from  the  back  and  extending  forward.  These  are  said 
to  represent  baskets  in  which  prey  is  placed,  but  were  more  probably 
designed  for  basketwarc  shields  to  protect  the  god  from  his  foes. 
The  depressions  in  the  surface  of  the  rock  near  the  position  of  the 
heart,  where  the  war  medicine  was  placed,  are  indicated  in  the  illus- 


■0 


HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR   THE  EAST  MESA 


363 


tration.  On  aj^roaching  this  pictograph,  one  may  see  on  the  rock 
footprints  said  to  have  been  made  by  Tcavaiyo,  another  little-known 
monster  of  Hopi  mythology.     From  several  considerations  I  am 


Fic.  15.  - 


-  Rctograph  of  Kwataka. 

ancient  Sky  god,  the  rites  of  which 


led  to  regard  Kwataka  as  ar 
have  not  yet  been  identified. 

The  Nakopan  Shrine  and  Pictograph.  —  This  shrine  is  situated 
about  two  miles  north  of  the  mounds  of  old  Sikyatki  and  the  ac- 
companying pictograph  commemorates  one  of  the  few  folk  tales 
that  have  come  down  to  our  time  from  that  prehistoric  village.  In 
my  paper  on  Hopi  Katcinas  will  be  found  the  story  of  the  personages 


o 


ti 


364  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

concerned,  with  graphical  representations  of  them,  but  no  one  has 
yet  described  the  shrine.  This  consists  of  a  shallow  cave  hollowed 
out  of  the  cliff  a  few  feet  below  the  edge  of  the  mesa,  on  the  side 

looking  toward  Sikyatki ;  it  con- 
^000000000^  tains  two  stones  of  unusual  shape, 

^  o  called  by  the  Hopi  the  two  War 

gods.  In  front  of  these  stones 
o  ^  ^  there  were  when  I  visited  the 
o  place  several  rude  clay  vessels  and 

o  prayer  sticks.     The  pictograph  of 

'000000000  ^he  Nakopan,  cut  on  the  surface 

B  of  the  cliff  just  above  the  shrine, 

Fig.  16. —Pictograph  of  Nakopan.       consists  of  an    incised    figure    of 

rectangular  shape  indicating  where 
the  Nakopan  personages  were  seated,  the  maid  being  a  figure  of 
the  female  organ  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustration. 

The  pictograph  here  dealt  with  (figure  16)  is  said  to  show 
where  the  children  of  the  Sikyatki  woman  sat  when  she  left  them 
their  food.  It  is  about  2  J^  feet  square,  the  seat  of  the  girl  being 
represented  by  the  female  sign  {ci),  and  that  of  the  boy  by  parallel 
lines  (b).  According  to  the  myth,  a  Sikyatki  mother  was  angry  be- 
cause her  children  begged  for  com.  They  fled  to  the  cave  de- 
scribed above  and  the  mother,  who  had  entered  into  illicit  relations 
with  a  man  not  their  father,  left  food  for  them  daily  at  this  place.* 
Toho  Pictograph.  —  This  pictograph  (pi.  xxvii,  fig.  /),  which  oc- 
curs on  the  face  of  a  large  bowlder  situated  on  the  terrace  below 
Sichomovi,  represents  in  incised  outlines  a  mountain  lion  several 
feet  long.  The  heart  is  indicated  by  a  depression  in  which  meal  or 
other  offerings  may  be  placed,  but  they  are  placed  also  near  the 
base  of  the  rock.  This  bowlder  is  situated  not  far  from  the  site  of 
the  first  trader's  store^  at  the  East  mesa. 

*  Near  this  pictograph  two  Hopi  men  were  killed  by  the  Navaho  in  comparatively 
recent  times. 

2  The  earhest  trader  was  a  young  Mexican,  Roman  Vaca,  called  by  the  Hopi 
Lomana,  who  brought  his  stock  in  old  wooden-wheeled  wagons  over  a  road  the  sig^ 
of  which  are  still  to  be  seen.  Vaca  was  succeeded  by  Mr  William  Keam,  whom  the 
Hopi  call  *•  Billee  "  and  from  whom  Reams  canyon  takes  its  name.  Mr  William  Keam 
was  succeeded  as  trader  by  his  brother,  the  late  Thomas  V.  Keam. 


FEWKES]  HO  PI  SHRINES  NEAR    THE  EAST  MESA  365 

Various  Other  Shrines 

Mucaiaski,  —  In  this  shrine  —  a  cleft  in  the  rocks  to  the  right  of 
the  road  leading  from  the  plain  to  the  mesa,  about  opposite  the  old 
Polakka  house  —  an  offering  is  deposited  after  a  Buffalo  dance. 
The  place  is  only  a  few  feet  from  the  road  and  is  somewhat  hidden 
from  the  sight  of  passers-by.  The  offering  is  a  notched  stick  with 
attached  feathers ;  it  is  called  the  *'  sun  ladder,"  a  figure  of  which 
is  published  in  an  article  on  Hopi  Minor  Ceremonies,  in  a  former 
volume  of  this  journal. 

The  Buffalo  dance  was  introduced  into  Walpi  by  Tanoan  clans 
from  the  Rio  Grande  and  was  formerly  celebrated  with  much  fervor. 
The  Hopi  say  that  it  was  carried  from  Walpi  to  Zuiii  *  about  1886 
and  that  they  brought  back  in  exchange  for  it  the  Howina,  a  Warrior 
or  Harvest  festival,which  is  occasionally  celebrated  on  the  East  mesa. 

Clowns^  Shrines.  —  The  Hopi,  like  the  Zuiii,  have  an  order  of 
knob-headed  personations  called  Koyimsi  who  appear  in  certain 
of  their  ceremonial  dances.  These  are  commonly  called  clowns  and 
represent  ancestral  beings  that  once  lived  at  a  pueblo  (now  a  ruin), 
Winema,  not  far  from  the  junction  of  the  Little  Colorado  and  Zuiii 
rivers.  Although  these  beings  have  the  same  name  at  Zuiii  and 
Walpi,  it  is  not  necessarily  true  that  one  order  was  derived  from 
the  other.  It  is  more  probable  that  both  came  from  a  single  source 
—  one  of  the  ruined  pueblos  of  the  Little  Colorado.^ 

The  shrine  of  the  Koyimsi  is  situated  near  a  great  rock  on  a 
sandy  hillock  to  the  right  of  the  road  from  Tawapa  to  Supela's 
house.     It  is  a  ring  of  small  stones  with  an  opening  looking  eastward. 

There  survives  on  the  East  mesa  a  persistent  tradition  that 
when  the  mission  at  Walpi  was  destroyed  in  1680,  the  altar  images, 
or  **  Santos,"  were  hidden  in  the  sand  near  this  shrine,  but  exactly 
where  no  one  now  knows,  although  all  the  old  men  agree  that  the 
burial  site  was  not  far  from  Sun  spring. 

Hutciobi.  —  As  the  visitor  approaches  Walpi  from  the  north  the 
mesa  narrows  and  descends  a  few  steps,  to  rise  again  as  one  enters 


*The  Pleasure  dance  figured  by  Mrs  Stevenson  (pi.  Lxxxi,  Twenty-third  Rep.  Bur. 
Am.  Ethnol. )  is  a  Buffalo  dance  introduced  by  the  Hopi. 

'  The  Koyimsi  cult  at  ZuAi  dates  back  to  the  earliest  times  of  which  the  tribal  tradi- 
tions speak.     It  is  old  at  Walpi  also,  where  it  was  introduced  by  clans  from  the  south. 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  8 — 34. 


t 


366  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  pueblo.  This  constriction  of  the  mesa  has  caused  the  trail  to 
narrow  and  the  worn  surface  of  the  rock  shows  clearly  the  marks 
of  the  many  footsteps  that  daily  pass  over  it.  On  one  side  of  the 
narrowed  trail  (pi.  xxvii,  fig.  /)  is  a  small  overhanging  ledge  of 
rocks  under  which  one  can  generally  find  prayer  sticks  and  other 
offerings.  This  is  a  favorite  place  for  the  prayer  offerings  of  the 
Warrior  society,  who  perform  similar  devotions  at  Momtcita,  their 
ceremony  occurring  in  December.  On  the  trail  at  this  point  is 
commonly  placed  a  string  to  which  is  tied  a  feather ;  the  two  are 
called  a  ''road"  and  are  used  as  symbols  indicating  that  a  cere- 
mony is  about  to  begin  ^  or  is  in  progress  in  the  pueblo.  The  trail 
is  then  said  symbolically  to  be  open,  whereas  when  the  string  is  laid 
across  it,  the  trail  is  ceremonially  closed. 

Atutuskia.  —  This  shrine  is  situated  near  Syskiamu's  house,  to 
the  right  of  the  road  in  foothills  east  of  the  mesa. 

Nivian  Katcina  Shrine.  —  This  important  shrine  is  situated  near 
the  southern  end  of  the  mesa  on  the  east  side  just  below  the  level 
of  the  terrace.  It  is  inclosed  by  a  number  of  flat  stones  set  on 
edge,  forming  the  sides,  and  covered  by  a  thin  slab  of  rock.  This 
covering  is  removed  in  July  at  the  celebration  of  the  Niman  Ka- 
tdna,  when  offerings  are  placed  in  the  shrine  as  has  been  described 
elsewhere.^  The  Niman  celebrates  the  departure  of  ancestral  gods 
called  katcinas,  who  are  supposed  to  live  in  the  under-world,  the 
entrance  to  which  is  the  sun  house  in  the  west.  The  shrine  here 
described  is  symbolic  of  that  abode. 

Kalalini,  —  This  shrine,  which  is  situated  on  the  mesa  top,  half- 
way between  Hano  and  Sichomovi,  is  a  simple  uncovered  circle  of 
stones,  without  contents.  Novices  are  said  to  make  their  offerings 
here  at  the  time  of  the  New  Fire  ceremony. 

Tubpaka,  —  A  small  simple  shrine  to  be  found  on  the  east  edge 
of  the  mesa  near  Sichomovi. 

Hombiki,  — This  shrine  is  situated  in  front  of  Tebewysi's  house 
in   Sichomovi.     Novices   of  the   priesthoods  called  Tataukyamu, 


1  The  speaker-chief  generally  places  a  stringed  feather  at  this  place  after  be  has  pub  < 
licly  announced  a  ceremony. 

^Jour.  Am.  ArchaoL  and  Ethnol.y  II,  1892. 


FEWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR    THE  EAST  MESA  367 

Wiiwutcimtu,  and  Kwakwantu  are  said  to  make  oiTerings  in  this 
shrine  at  the  New  Fire  ceremony. 

Talatinka,  —  This  is  the  sun  shrine  of  Walpi  in  which  offerings 
are  placed  at  the  Winter  Solstice  and  at  other  ceremonies  of  the  Sun 
priests.  The  novices  of  the  Kwakwantu  likewise  are  said  to  make 
offerings  here  at  the  New  Fire  ceremonies.  The  site  of  these  de- 
votions is  about  halfway  between  Walpi  and  Sichomovi,  on  the  east 
rim  of  the  mesa,  above  the  trail.  A  Navaho  home  formerly  stood 
not  far  distant.  At  the  Winter  Solstice  ceremony  this  shrine  is 
generally  filled  with  prayer  sticks,  some  double,  others  curved  at 
one  end,  the  latter  being  offerings  of  certain  societies  introduced  by 
Patki  and  other  southern  clans. 

Tuwanacabi,  — This  shrine,  bearing  the  same  name  as  the  tradi- 
tional pueblo  ^  west  of  Oraibi,  where  the  Badger  people  lived  when 
the  katcinas  emerged  from  the  under-world,  is  very  sacred  to  the 
Walpians.  It  is  situated  in  the  foothills  due  south  of  the  end  of 
the  mesa.  In  form  this  shrine  is  simple  —  a  circle  of  stones  with 
the  opening  facing  the  east,  having  on  the  west  side  the  large  rock 
so  common  in  Hopi  simple  shrines.  There  is  no  idol  or  other 
sacred  image  here,  but  prayer  offerings  are  rarely  wanting.  Offer- 
ings of  the  following  kind  were  observed  there  just  after  the  cele- 
bration of  the  Flute  ceremony  in  the  winter  of  1900. 

The  most  important  of  these  were  two  prayer  sticks  dedicated 
to  Cotokinuiiwii,  a  sky  supernatural,  introduced  into  Walpi  by  the 
Flute  and  Patki  families,  who  formerly  lived  near  the  Little  Colo- 
rado, south  of  Walpi.  It  appears  from  tradition  and  from  a  study 
of  ceremonials  that  the  Hopi  conception  of  Cotokinunwu  was  the 
highest  ideal  of  a  Sky  god  attained  by  the  development  of  their  own 
religion  ;  when  they  learned  of  monotheism  from  Christian  mission- 
aries, they  immediately  identified  the  latter's  deity  with  their 
own  greatest  god.  The  offerings  made  as  prayers  to  this  being  are 
occasionally  called  by  the  Hopi,  when  speaking  to  white  people, 
"Jesus  pahos." 


1  The  custom  of  naming  kivas  or  shrines  after  ruins  is  not  uncommon  among  the 
Hopi.  Thus  Mofikiva  was  formerly  called  Pakatcomo,  from  the  ruin  of  that  name 
marking  the  place  where  the  Patki  once  lived.  There  was  also  at  one  time  a  kiva  on  the 
East  mesa  called  Homolobi  for  a  similar  reason. 


$68  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  {».  «.,  8,  1906 

The  best  idol  of  Cotokinuiiwu  known  to  me  is  that  on  the  altar 
of  the  Flute  priesthood  at  Oraibi.  It  apparently  represents  a  bird- 
snake  concept,  the  head  having  a  curved  apical  extension,  remind- 
ing  one  of  some  of  the  Mexican  pictures  of  Quetzalcoatl.  Its  wings 
arc  conventionally  made  and  the  two  long  legs  are  decorated  with 
the  zigzag  lightning  symbols  of  the  Plumed  Serpent,  Certain  of  the 
characteristics  of  the  same  Serpent  god,  as  rain-bringing  and  thun- 
der-making, suggest  the  attributal  name  Thunder  Bird  or  God  of 
Thunder  applied  to  this  being,  but  the  image  is  rather  that  of  the 
homed  tlian  of  a  feathered  serpent  god  ;  the  cult  of  the  latter,  it  will 
be  remembered,  reached  a  complicated  development  in  southern 
and  eastern  Mexico. 

The  idol  of  Cotokinunwii  on  one  of  the  altars  of  the  Flute  fra- 
ternity of  Oraibi  gives  an  excellent  idea  of  the  Hopi  concept  of  this 
bird-snake  supernatural,  and  we  have  also  good  material  in  the 
paraphernalia  and  idols  of  the  Patki  clans  from  which  to  study  his 
variant.  In  this  case,  as  shown  by  the  effigies  of  the  Plumed  Ser- 
pent employed  in  the  Winter  Solstice,  the  snake  element  predomi- 
nates, but  there  is  still  found  the  survival  of  the  bird  element  and 
the  Sky  god  conception.  The  Kwakwantii,  a  warrior  brotherhood 
of  these  clans,  wear  helmets  with  the  curved  horns  characteristic  of 
Cotokinunwii'  and  carry  in  their  hands  wooden  slats  curved  in  the 
form  of  small  plumed  serpents. 

The  offerings  of  the  Flute  chief  to  Cotokinunwu  are  made  in  the 
Tuwanacabi  shrine  and  are  flat  double  prayer  sticks  tied  side  by  side, 
each  with  a  face  painted  on  one  end,  and  pointed  at  the  other.  Each 
stick  has  a  packet  of  meal  and  a  feather  tied  about  midway  of  its 
length.  In  addition  to  the  offerings  to  the  God  of  the  Sky  there 
were  noticed  in  this  shrine  many  green  prayer  sticks.  These  were 
about  the  length  of  the  finger  and  were  deposited  by  the  Flute 
priests  to  bring  rain.  The  numerous  other  prayer  sticks  of  this 
kind  that  occur  in  this  shrine  are  offerings  of  former  years. 

There  was  also  in  the  same  shrine  a  small  prayer  stick  made  of 
two  parts  tied  together.  Both  of  the  components  were  without 
facet  but  one  was  painted  yellow  and  the  other  green.     This  was 

n  this  idol  are  inijicaled  elsewhere.    The  curved  horn 
le  images  of  Quetzalcoatl. 


FEWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR   THE  EAST  MESA  369 

an  offering  of  Naka,  the  chief  of  the  Katcina  clan,  to  his  ancestral 
gods.  The  shrine  contained  also  numerous  single  sticks  painted 
black,  placed  there  by  the  Snake  priesthood. 

Lalakon  Shrine, — When  in  their  wanderings  from  the  south  the 
Patki  people  arrived  in  the  valley  now  called  the  Walpi  wash,  they 
were  invited  to  exhibit  to  the  Walpians  their  magic  power  in  caus- 
ing rain  and  lightning.  This  exhibition  took  place  near  the  spring 
Tawapa  which,  on  that  account,  became  sacred  to  them.  Two 
societies  of  priests,  called  the  Lakone  sorority  and  the  Kwakwantu 
fraternity,  were  introduced  into  Walpi  at  that  time.  Both  of  these 
priesthoods  have  shrines  at  or  near  Tawapa. 

Sowifiakabu. — The  Rabbit-ear  shrine  is  situated  just  below  the 
terrace  at  the  side  of  the  trail  from  Walpi  to  Tawapa. 

Uhatanopi,  —  This  is  the  shrine  that  contains  or  covers  the  heart 
of  the  mythic  Hawk  (Kica),  and  in  this  connection  the  following 
story  is  repeated :  In  prehistoric  times  Kica  (Hawk)  and  Tciibio 
(Deer)  tested  their  powers  by  running  a  race.^  Hawk  was  very 
fleet,  but  Deer  prayed  for  rain,  which  fell  in  torrents  and  drenched 
Hawk's  wings  so  that  he  flew  with  difficulty  and  but  slowly.  Hawk 
lost  the  race  and  Tciibio  slew  him,  cutting  out  his  heart  and  bury- 
ing it  in  this  place.  As  Hawk  expired,  he  murmured  that  all  youths 
who  should  pray  at  the  shrine  where  his  heart  is  buried  should  be 
fleet  of  foot.  Hence  foot  racers  often  deposit  their  offerings  at 
Unatanopi. 

Talaviwa,  —  This  shrine  is  situated  on  the  north  end  of  the 
mesa,  back  of  Hano  and  just  above  the  gap.  Near  it  are  the  grooves 
where  the  warriors  rested  their  arrows  when  they  shot  at  the  Utes 
or  other  hostiles  coming  up  the  trail.  The  shrine  contains  a  few 
fossil  logs  or  fragments  of  silicified  wood. 

Mofiiva, —  This  devotional  spot  is  situated  just  north  of  the  main 
building  at  Hano  and,  like  the  shrine  at  the  gap,  contains  a  coiled 
stone.  When  visited,  many  Hano  prayer  sticks  {p'dopc)  and  feath- 
ered strings  {pclatciye)  were  found. 

Sheep  Shrines, —  In  almost  every  Hopi  sheep  corral  there  is  a 
place  where  clay  images  of  the  animal  are  placed  as  prayers  for  the 


>  The  idea  of  testing  the  relative  power  of  magic  forces  by  racing  is  truly  aboriginal. 


370  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

increase  of  domestic  animals.  These  images  are  commonly  made  in 
the  Winter  Solstice  ceremony  and  in  the  Warrior  festival  that  fol- 
lows it.  During  the  former  celebration  prayers  are  made  to  Mu- 
yinvvu  for  the  increase  of  everything  the  Hopi  desire,  and  at  that  time 
wish  or  prayer  feathers  are  tied  to  peach  trees,  wagons,  legs  of 
chickens,  tails  of  horses  and  burros,  and  to  ever}'  other  possession  of 
the  Hopi.  Like  prayer  offerings  are  placed  in  all  the  shrines  and 
at  every  spring. 

The  sheep  shrines  lie  on  the  east  or  sunny  side  of  the  mesa, 
about  halfway  from  the  terrace  to  the  rim,  and  were  placed  at  that 
point  as  a  protection  against  coyotes  and  marauding  Indians.  Of 
late  other  corrals  have  been  constructed  on  the  terrace,  which  offers 
a  larger  space  than  the  talus  of  the  mesa. 

Springs  as  Shrines 

In  a  general  way  every  spring  is  supposed  to  be  sacred  and 
therefore  a  place  for  the  deposit  of  prayer  sticks  and  other  offerings. 
Some  of  these  springs,  as  Tawapa  and  Mofiwiba,  are  supposed  to  be 
specially  consecrated  to  the  Great  Serpent  or  Sun,  others  to  some 
lower  divinity,  but  every  spring  is  a  place  of  worship  and  hence  a 
shrine.  There  are  many  springs  near  the  East  mesa,  some  of  which 
still  flow ;  others  have  been  filled  with  drifting  sand  and,  although 
no  longer  yielding  water,  are  still  places  where  offerings  are  made. 
It  requires  constant  diligence  to  keep  the  springs  from  filling  with 
sand,  and  from  time  to  time,  under  direction  of  the  village  chief,  the 
male  population  dig  out  the  sand  that  has  drifted  into  them. 

Near  distant  ruins  are  likewise  traditional  springs  from  which 
water  is  obtained  for  use  in  certain  rites  or  ceremonial  proceedings. 
When  water  is  thus  obtained,  prayer  offerings  are  customarily  de- 
posited. While  the  majority  of  springs  are  dedicated  simply  to  the 
Rain  gods,  a  few  are  special  homes  of  a  Germ  god,  the  Sun,  or  the 
Plumed  Serpent,  or  all  combined. 

Some  of  the  largest  springs  are  believed  to  be  inhabited  by 
supernatural  beings.  The  Great  Plumed  Snake  is  supposed  to  live 
under  the  Sun  spring  and  offerings  to  him  are  made  at  that  place.* 

>  Springs  are  often  regarded  as  homes  of  the  gods  and  sometimes  as  entrances  to  the 
under-world,  where  divinized  personages  dwell,  or  as  windows  out  of  which  they  look. 


FEWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR    THE  EAST  MESA  37 1 

In  the  Flute  ceremony  a  prayer  stick  is  biennially  deposited  with 
ceremony  in  the  bed  of  the  same  spring  by  a  man  who  sinks  under 
the  water  for  that  purpose.  Water  from  sacred  springs,  especially 
those  associated  with  early  migrations,  is  deemed  most  efficacious  in 
medicine  making.  Several  springs  are  supposed  to  have  been  miracu- 
lously formed  by  early  chiefs,  who  on  that  account  have  come  to  be 
regarded  as  supernatural  personages. 

Ispa, —  This  spring  is  situated  near  the  main  trail  from  the  plain 
to  the  gap,  Wala,  and  lies  just  above  the  neighboring  peach  trees. 
It  has  a  heavy  flow  and  is  capable  of  supplying  the  water  for  all  the 
three  villages  as  well  as  for  the  houses  clustered  about  it.  A  large 
number  of  prayer  sticks  are  always  to  be  found  below  an  overhang- 
ing roof  in  the  rear  of  this  spring  at  the  edge  of  the  water. 

Uflpa, —  This  spring,  now  filled  with  drifted  sand,  is  on  the  south 
side  of  the  hill  called  Sikyaowatcomo,  the  site  of  an  early  settle- 
ment of  the  Hano.  Although  now  no  longer  used,  offerings  are 
sometimes  placed  in  the  sand  above  the  spring,  thus  keeping  up  an 
old  practice.  Except  from  this  custom  and  from  traditions,  no  one 
would  know  that  there  ever  was  a  spring  at  this  place. 

Wipo,  which  lies  on  the  west  side  of  the  East  mesa,  a  short  dis- 
tance north  of  Kanelba,  is  one  of  the  finest  springs  in  the  Hopi 
country.  It  is  a  place  of  offering  for  several  societies,  among  the 
most  important  of  which  is  the  Flute.  There  are  terraced  gardens 
and  evidences  of  house  walls  near  this  spring,  indicating  a  consid- 
erable ancient  population  in  the  neighborhood. 

Wifipa,  —  Site  of  a  spring  a  few  miles  north  of  Sikyatki,  near  a 
ruin  once  occupied  by  the  Katcina  people.  This  spring,  once  strong, 
is  now  dry  and  filled  with  sand.  Its  walls  are  made  of  well-dressed 
stone  laid  in  circular  form.  Near  this  spring  are  walls  of  an  old 
pueblo  of  small  size. 

Kwastapa,  — This  is  one  of  the  springs  on  the  west  side  of  the 
East  mesa  at  which  the  Flute  and  other  fraternities  deposit  their 
offerings.  Like  Wipo  and  Kanelba,  it  was  a  halting-place  in  the 
migrations  of  the  Flute  clans  and  is  supposed  to  be  of  mythic  origin. 

Kahabipa, — This  water,  labeled  on  our  maps  Comar  spring, 
takes  its  name  from  Koma,  a  Hopi  who  is  said  to  have  once  had  a 
house  near  it. 


372  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Kaliabiobi,  —  Little  is  known  of  this  spring  except  that  it  is  near 
the  one  just  described  or  between  it  and  the  Hopi  butte. 

Sipi,  —  This  spring  is  not  far  from  the  Hopi  butte  (Custapoii- 
tukwi)  and  is  visited  by  the  chiefs  of  the  Kwakwantu  for  water 
used  in  the  New  Fire  ceremony  and  the  Winter  Solstice  ceremony. 
To  it  novices  of  this  fraternity  are  sent  in  their  initiation  ceremonies. 
The  Patki  and  other  southern  peoples  stopped  at  this  spring  in  their 
migration  northward  from  Homolobi  or  the  settlements  along  the 
Little  Colorado. 

Cakwaskpa,  —  A  small  spring  near  the  Giant's  Chair. 

Hutchimopa.  —  A  feeble  spring  in  the  plain  below  Walpi. 
There  is  another  spring  of  the  same  name  not  far  from  Sikyatki. 

Mohwiba.  —  This  large  spring,  situated  near  the  trail  leading 
from  the  plain  to  Hano,  on  the  right  hand  side,  is  dedicated  to  the 
Hano  Plumed  Serpent,  Avaiyo.  It  is  one  of  the  few  large  walled 
springs  with  a  pathway  leading  down  to  the  water.  Monwiba  was 
dug  out  within  a  few  years ;  at  the  time  a  festival  was  held,  the 
workmen  personating  the  Snow  Katcina  wearing  masks  on  which 
were  depicted  the  heads  of  plumed  serpents.  In  the  March  drama- 
tization, exercises  are  performed  at  this  spring  with  the  effigies  of 
the  Great  Serpent  of  Hano.  Tawapa  is  the  home  of  the  Walpi 
Plumed  Snake  ;  Monwiba,  of  that  of  the  Hano. 

Amipa.  —  A  small  spring  used  by  farmers  and  others,  but  situ- 
ated far  from  the  pueblos  and  consequently  available  only  occasion- 
ally for  drinking  purposes. 

Sikyatkipa,  —  This  is  the  old  spring  of  the  ancient  Sikyatki,  the 
Kokop  pueblo,  from  which  the  former  inhabitants  of  that  town  ob- 
tained their  drinking  water.  At  present  the  water  is  not  potable 
but  offerings  are  still  placed  on  the  edges  of  the  spring  by  the  chief 
of  the  Kokop  clan. 

Tawapa,  —  The  great  Walpi  Sun  spring,  situated  at  the  foot  of 
the  mesa,  east  of  Sichomovi.  When  I  first  visited  it,  in  1 890,  there 
was  not  a  single  house  in  the  neighborhood  and  the  surroundings 
were  in  a  perfectly  natural  condition.  Lately,  the  day  school  was 
built  near  Tawapa  and  the  name  of  the  latter  was  changed.  Tawapa 
is  supposed  to  be  the  home  of  the  Plumed  Serpent,  and  the  Lala- 
kontu,  Kwakwantu,  and   Flute   priesthoods  use  water  from  it  in 


FEWKES]  HOPI  SHRINES  NEAR   THE  EAST  MESA  373 

certain  ceremonies.  The  Patki  family  are  said  to  have  camped 
near  it  after  they  left  Pakatcomo,  their  last  pueblo  before  reaching 
Walpi,  and  here  they  performed  the  rites  that  caused  the  mist  to 
come  and  produced  the  lightning  that  so  frightened  the  women  of 
Walpi.  Tawapa  is  much  reverenced  by  the  Flute  people  also,  who, 
like  the  Patki,  came  from  the  south,  and  here  they  perform  biennially 
one  of  their  most  impressive  ceremonies,  in  the  course  of  which 
their  chief  sinks  under  the  water  and  there  deposits  prayer  sticks.* 

Tatacpa,  —  This  spring  lies  near  the  coffin-shaped  butte  in  full 
sight  southeast  of  Walpi. 

Numupa,  —  This  spring  is  situated  at  the  entrance  to  Keams 
canyon,  on  the  right  hand  side.  It  yields  an  abundant  supply  of 
water,  the  flow  having  been  much  augmented  by  the  care  bestowed 
on  the  spring. 

Toifovepa,  —  This  good  spring  also  is  situated  at  the  entrance  to 
Keams  canyon. 

Otiur  Springs,  —  In  addition  to  the  places  of  prayer  above  men- 
tioned, the  Hopi  deposit  prayer  objects  at  the  following  springs : 
Kanelba,  Hokonaba,  Muzriba,  Pehuba,  Wukokoba.  Honaupa, 
Pisaba,  Anwucba,  Yoyainiba,  Yapa,  Kokyanba,  Tubuskia,  Anapu- 
laba,  Yohopa,  Takaplapi,  Pepsiba,  and  the  four  springs  near  old 
Awatobi  called  Lefioba,  Tetuiba,  Pisaba,  and  Tciibpa.  The  fore- 
going list  shows  that  the  East  mesa  Hopi  have  many  springs,  and 
that  the  duty  of  supplying  the  water  with  prayer  offerings  accounts 
for  the  activity  of  the  people  in  making  offerings. 

If  we  accept  the  broad  definition  of  a  shrine  as  a  place  of 
worship,  naturally  such  rooms  as  kivas  should  not  be  omitted.  For 
obvious  reasons  these  are  not  included  in  this  account. 

I  cannot  pass  by  certain  sacred  places  especially  reverenced  by 
particular  clans,  a  typical  example  of  which  was  called  to  my  atten- 
tion by  the  governor  of  Walpi  about  six  months  after  the  great 
smallpox  epidemic  in  1899.  During  my  work  at  Walpi  in  1900, 
Hani  told  me  one  evening  that  the  inhabitants  of  the  East  mesa 
were  much  troubled  because  the  mythic  Badger  had  emerged  from 
the  under-world  and  was  digging  up  the  graves  of  those  who  had 

^  Jour.  Am.  Ethnol.  and  ArcJurol.^  II.  It  is  claimed  by  some  of  the  Hopi  that 
these  southern  clans  introduced  into  Walpi  the  custom  of  making  prayer  sticks. 


378  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  discoverer  proposes  to  master  the  language  of  the  Indians  in  order  to 
•'learn  the  riches  of  the  country  and  make  endeavors  to  convert  these 
people  to  our  religion."  The  characterization  of  the  successful  outcome 
of  the  voyage  as  a  ' '  triumph  over  the  sneers  of  monks  and  scoffs  of 
sages ' '  seems  rather  gratuitous  in  view  of  the  fact  that  during  the  long 
period  of  waiting  and  discouragement  Columbus  and  his  sons  found  shelter, 
food,  and  sympathy  in  the  Franciscan  monastery  of  La  Rabida,  and  that 
the  successful  interview  with  the  Spanish  Queen  was  brought  about  by  the 
devoted  and  untiring  effort  of  the  prior  of  the  same  monastery  (pp.  124, 
128).  The  chapter  on  "Columbus'  Fourth  Voyage"  was  evidently 
drawn  from  other  sources,  judging  from  the  eloquent  eulogy  at  its 
close. 

Several  chapters  are  devoted  to  the  later  Spanish  explorations  and 
conquests,  and  we  are  reminded,  from  Gomara  (p.  230),  that  many  voy- 
ages were  made  by  various  navigators  in  the  first  years  after  the  discovery, 
which  were  afterward  forgotten,  as  their  only  result  was  the  impoverish- 
ment of  their  projectors.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  some  of  the  early 
charts  about  which  there  is  controversy,  as  the  Cantino  map,  may  em- 
body information  obtained  by  now  unknown  discoverers.  A  royal  com- 
mission may  give  the  stamp  of  authority,  but  it  is  no  proof  of  priority. 
The  traces  of  Spanish  occupancy  in  Florida,  noted  on  page  266,  do  not 
date  from  Le6n's  time,  but  from  the  actual  settlement  period  subsequent 
to  1565.  The  great  work  of  Las  Casas  in  securing  protection  for  the  In- 
dians against  the  barbarous  treatment  of  the  first  adventurers  receives  full 
credit.  It  is  well  to  remember  that  the  cruelties  of  Balboa,  Cort6s,  Nufio  de 
Guzman,  and  De  Soto  were  perpetrated  within  the  first  half  century  of  the 
discovery,  before  administrative  methods  could  be  either  formulated  or 
enforced.  Even  before  the  close  of  this  period  schools  had  been  estab- 
lished for  the  education  of  Indian  youth,  and  missionaries  were  introduc- 
ing the  arts  of  civilization  among  the  natives.  In  1542  concurrent  procla- 
mation by  the  Pope  and  the  Emperor  provided  for  gradual  emancipation 
of  Indian  slaves  throughout  Spanish  America,  and  prohibited  the  further 
enslavement  of  Indians  on  any  pretext  whatsoever.  For  the  eastern  part 
of  De  Soto's  route  the  Nineteenth  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  American 
Ethnology  is  taken  as  authority.  The  correct  date  for  the  founding  of 
Santa  F6  (p.  301)  is  1605  (Bandelier,  Hodge). 

The  work  of  Spanish  colonization  in  the  United  States,  both  east  and 
west,  needs  more  ample  treatment  than  it  receives  in  the  first  two  volumes. 
The  conquest  and  settlement  of  New  Mexico,  after  Coronado,  the  great 
Pueblo  revolt,  the  final  reconquest,  are  noted  in  only  a  few  brief  lines  in 


BOOK  RE  VIE  WS  379 

the  first  volume  and  not  at  all  in  the  second,  which  deals  entirely  with 
the  eastern  sections  and  comes  down  to  1660.  The  colonization  of 
Florida,  the  establishment  of  the  Apalachee  and  Timucua  missions,  the 
building  of  roads  and  planting  of  orange  groves,  the  opening  of  mines 
in  the  foot-hills  of  the  Alleghenies,  and  the  important  Indian  fishing 
trade  between  Florida  and  Havana,  are  not  noted  beyond  the  single 
reference  to  the  founding  of  St  Augustine.  It  may  be  that  these  things 
are  reserved  for  a  later  volume.  If  not,  the  omission  should  be  sup- 
plied from  the  Spanish  historians  or  from  Bandelier,  Shea,  Lowery,  and 
Hubert  Bancroft.  The  work  of  Spain  as  the  pioneer  of  civilization  in 
the  United  States  is  not  yet  appreciated. 

The  chapter  on  Indians  is  brought  up  nearly  to  the  date  of  publica- 
tion. Further  linguistic  investigation  within  the  last  three  years  has  some- 
what reduced  the  number  of  distinct  stocks  and  proven  the  former  existence 
on  the  southern  Florida  coast  of  an  Arawakan  colony  from  the  neighbor- 
ing Antilles.  The  appendix  chapter  on  Indian  relations,  with  table  of 
tribes  and  reservations,  contains  much  valuable  information  in  small 
compass.  The  conclusion  of  Thwaites  that  the  Indian  population  of  the 
United  States  to-day  is  approximately  what  it  was  in  1600  cannot  stand. 
There  has  been  a  great  diminution,  as  is  shown  in  the  *'  Indian  '*  chapter, 
pp.  341-2.  According  to  the  best  expert  testimony,  California  alone  a 
century  ago  contained  almost  if  not  quite  as  many  Indians  as  exist  now  in 
the  whole  United  States. 

Volume  II  deals  with  the  colonial  period  from  1600  to  1660,  includ- 
ing the  founding  of  Canada  or  New  France,  Virginia,  New  York,  New 
England,  New  Sweden  or  Delaware,  New  Jersey,  and  Maryland.  As  ex- 
planatory of  a  part  of  this  colonization  the  author  goes  into  detail  con- 
cerning the  religious  struggle  in  England  from  the  time  of  Henry  VIII  to 
the  Restoration,  including  the  secession  of  the  Puritans  from  the  Estab- 
lished Church  and  the  persecution  of  the  Catholics  under  both,  leading 
on  the  one  hand  to  drastic  penal  laws  in  Massachusetts  and  on  the  other 
to  generous  toleration  in  Maryland. 

The  chapter  on  **  The  Evolution  of  a  Colonial  System  *'  is  of  special 
value  as  defining  the  methods  by  which  new  nations  were  developed 
beyond  sea,  while  the  chapter  on  "Annexation  and  Confederation*' 
shows  how  the  principle  of  individualism,  which  was  the  ruling  passion  of 
the  immigrants,  led  ultimately  and  logically  to  a  united  republic.  **  The 
migrations  from  the  old  world  to  the  new  differed  largely  from  those  that 
had  changed  the  character  of  European  society  in  that  they  were  indi- 
vidual rather  than  tribal.     Having  been  led  across  the  ocean  by  the 


380  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

common  love  of  liberty,  Catholic  and  Protestant,  Churchman  and  Puritan 
alike,  they  left  old  political  forms  in  the  old  places,  and  applied  their 
cherished  principles  in  a  way  and  to  an  extent  peculiar  to  themselves. 
Students  have  devoted  much  time  and  learning  to  tracing  the  germs  of 
some  of  our  institutions  back  into  the  depths  of  ancient  German  forests, 
but  the  truth  still  stands  that  the  ideas  and  institutions  that  characterize 
the  nation  are  essentially  peculiar  to  the  nation."  In  other  words, 
America  is  of  the  Americans. 

The  New  Netherlands  colony  receives  due  attention,  and  we  are  re- 
minded that  until  very  recently  our  historians  generally  have  based  their 
statements,  either  directly  or  indirectly,  on  writers  antagonistic  to  the 
Dutch  settlement  and  ignorant  of  the  language  in  which  its  records  were 
written.  The  beneficent  spirit  of  the  Maryland  colony  as  established  by 
Lord  Baltimore  is  clearly  brought  out.  Notwithstanding  his  patent  from 
royalty,  which  precluded  all  other  claimants,  the  governor  bought  the 
lands  from  the  Indians  themselves,  "  thus  anticipating  by  fifty  years  the 
policy  of  William  Penn."  Also,  *'from  the  beginning  religious  tolera- 
tion of  all  Christian  creeds  was  proclaimed  and  practised. ' '  Later  on  this 
principle  of  toleration  was  confirmed  by  definite  statute  drawn  up  by 
Lord  Baltimore  himself  and  passed  by  the  Colonial  assembly  without 
amendment.  **  Thus  for  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  the  world  did  a 
legally  constituted  legislature  enact  religious  liberty  —  for  Christians." 
In  spite  of  its  discrimination  against  non-Christians,  '*  the  act  was  so 
liberal  for  that  day  that,  in  our  day,  it  is  difficult  to  appreciate  it  fully. 
...  If  any  Protestant  would  carp  because  there  were  mists  and  exhala- 
tions that  obscured  what  Bancroft  has  called  the  morning  star  of  religious 
freedom,  let  him  remember  that  within  the  preceding  year  a  Puritan 
parliament  in  England  had  passed  an  ordinance  imposing  death  as  the 
penalty  for  *  maintaining  with  obstinacy '  any  one  of  eight  enumerated 
heresies.  In  Maryland  the  promised  toleration  was  everywhere  continued 
and  the  prescribed  penalties  were  never  inflicted. ' '  All  this  in  Maryland 
while  the  Puritan  exiles  in  Massachusetts  were  banishing  Roger  Williams 
into  the  wilderness  for  preaching  toleration,  cutting  off  the  ears  and  bor- 
ing the  tongues  of  Quakers,  hanging  men  and  women  for  religious  opinions, 
and  selling  their  children  into  West  Indian  slavery,  as  we  find  in  the 
chapter  on  **The  Puritan  and  the  Heretic." 

Of  course  these  things  are  well  known  to  students  of  American  his- 
tory, but  the  facts  are  not  always  accessible  to  the  general  reader  and 
have  seldom  been  presented  with  such  clearness  of  statement  and  wealth 
-of  reference. 


BOOK  REVIEWS  38 1 

Some  of  the  old  traditional  idols  are  shattered,  though  still  with  re- 
luctant hand.  The  ten  thousand  —  or  is  it  fifty  thousand  ?  —  descend- 
ants of  the  Mayflower  will  be  somewhat  surprised  to  learn  from  the  roster 
that  the  number  of  adult  passengers  in  that  celebrated  vessel  who  sur- 
vived the  winter  was  only  twenty -six,  all  told,  including  [sailors  and  a 
servant  boy.  The  still  more  numerous  descendants  of  Pocahontas  will 
rejoice  to  know  that  the  romantic  story  of  Smith's  rescue  **  has  not  been 
absolutely  disproved. '  * 

The  author's  style  is  clear  and  concise,  without  long  argument  or  dis- 
sertation, for  all  of  which  the  reader  is  referred  to  the  ample  classified 
bibliography  at  the  end  of  the  volume.  At  the  same  time,  any  substan- 
tial difference  of  opinion  is  always  plainly  stated.  The  tables  of  con- 
temporary rulers  and  of  colonial  governors  add  much  to  the  understand- 
ing of  the  narrative.  The  numerous  illustrations  —  portraits,  autographs, 
facsimile  titles,  views,  and  maps  —  all  are  carefully  chosen  and  finely  exe- 
cuted, and  the  prefatory  list  is  really  a  critical  and  historical  catalog. 
In  matter  and  arrangement  the  work  is  the  best  history  of  the  United 
States  that  has  yet  appeared,  while  from  the  book-maker's  standpoint  the 
beautiful  volumes  are  an  equal  credit  to  the  Matthews -Northrup  press  and 
the  Burrows  Publishing  House.  The  complete  history  as  outlined  will 
make  fifteen  octavo  volumes  of  about  500  pages  each,  with  such  an  index 
as  the  same  publishers  have  given  to  the  Jesuit  Relations ^  and  will  be 
brought  down  to  1902.  James  Mooney. 

Anthropophyteia  :  Jahrbiicher  fiir  Folkloristiche  Erlubungen  und  For- 
schungen  zur  Entwicklunggeschichte  der  geschiechtlichen  Moral,  etc. 
Herausgegeben  von  Dr  Friedrich  S.  Krauss.  II  Band.  Leipzig : 
Deutsche  Verlagsactiengesellschaft,  1905.     Sm.  4°,  xvi,  480  pp. 

The  second  volume  of  the  great  work  on  sexual  folklore,  by  Dr 
Krauss  of  Vienna,  is  at  hand.  It  is  issued  with  the  collaboration  of  a 
number  of  distinguished  scholars  and  includes  the  whole  range  of  custom, 
story,  proverb,  riddle,  charm,  and  song  bearing  on  the  subject  as  found 
in  Vienna,  Berlin,  and  the  South  German  provinces,  Servia,  Hungary, 
Elsass,  Sicily,  and  among  the  Gipsies.  Original  texts  are  given  in  Ger- 
man, including  dialectic  forms,  Servian,  Magyar,  and  Italian,  with  gloss- 
aries of  special  terms  not  known  to  dictionaries.  While  it  is  obviously 
impossible  to  particularize,  it  may  be  said  that  the  work  gives  proof  of  a 
degree  of  beastliness  still  existing  in  the  daily  life  of  whole  European 
communities  hardly  to  be  matched  even  among  the  Australian  savages. 
Most  of  this,  of  course,  is  under  the  surface,  but  in  many  sections  it  is 

AM.   ANTH.,   N.  S.,  8—25. 


382  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

an  ordinary  feature  of  national  custom,  as  in  Hungary,  where  young  men 
and  women  dance  together  to  the  words  of  improvised  obscene  songs, 
while  their  elders  look  on  approvingly.  As  usual  the  most  sacred  things 
are  held  up  to  filthiest  ridicule.  As  the  reviewer  has  already  had  occa- 
sion to  remark  in  connection  with  the  first  volume  {American  Anthropolo- 
gist^ 1905*  VII,  127),  it  might  be  well  for  our  statesmen  to  know  enough 
of  this  work  to  ask  themselves  seriously  how  much  of  such  material  they 
care  to  incorporate  into  our  American  civilization  and  citizenship.  As  a 
contribution  to  dialect  study  the  volume  has  a  special  value. 

James  Mooney. 

Bibliothek  auserwdhlten  serbischer  MeisterwerkCy  mit  Uterarhistorischen 
Einleitungen,  Herausgegeben  von  Dr  Friedrich  S.  Krauss.  Leip- 
zig:  Deutsche  Verlagsactiengesellschaft.     1906. 

Band  V  —  Die  Blume  von  Cannosa  —  Mater  Dolorosa  :  Zwei  Noi^ellen 
von  ViD  VuLETic  VuKASOVic.     Band  VI  —  Liebe  und  Leben  im  Her- 

V 

zogland —  Zwolf  Erzdhlungen  von  Svetozar  Corovic. 

Two  more  booklets  of  the  series  of  Servian  masterworks,  translated 
into  German  and  edited  by  Dr  Krauss,  have  appeared  from  the  Leipzig 
press.  Volume  V  contains  two  short  stories  by  Vuletic,  one  of  the 
younger  generation  of  Servian  writers,  born  near  Ragusa  in  1853  of 
parents  who  had  emigrated  from  Herzegovina.  The  greater  part  of  his 
active  life  has  been  spent  as  a  teacher  in  the  higher  schools  of  Ragusa,  his 
leisure  hours  being  devoted  to  authorship,  usually  under  a  nom  de  plume ^ 
and  to  the  study  of  Servian  and  Dalmatian  antiquities  and  folklore,  in 
which  he  is  a  recognized  authority.  As  a  story-teller  his  style  is  simple 
and  of  the  people,  and  his  analysis  of  womanly  character  is  especially 
delicate. 

In  the  eleven  short  sketches  of  Volume  VI  the  Doctor  introduces  for 
the  first  time  to  Western  readers  a  young  writer  who  he  predicts  will  yet 
be  known  as  one  of  the  greatest  literary  geniuses  not  alone  of  Servia  but  of 
the  Slavic  race.  In  speaking  of  Servian  things  it  should  be  noted  that  only 
about  one-sixth  of  the  7,000,000  people  who  use  the  Servian  language 
are  in  Servia  proper,  the  remainder  constituting  a  more  or  less  important 
element  in  the  adjoining  provinces  of  the  Balkan  region,  the  chronic 
unrest  in  that  quarter  being  largely  due  to  the  effort  of  the  dismembered 
national  fragments  to  come  together.  Corovic  himself  was  bom  in 
Herzegovina  barely  thirty  years  ago  and  began  his  literary  career  when 
only  fourteen  years  of  age.  At  twenty  he  founded  in  Mostar  a  journal 
for  the  express  purpose  of  building  up  a  national  Servian  literature,  with 


■> 


BOOK  REVIEWS  383 

such  success  that  from  the  Adriatic  to  the  lower  Danube  The  Daybreak  is 
now  regarded  as  the  exponent  of  a  common  heritage.  The  frontispiece 
portraits  are  indicative  of  intellectual  breadth  and  vigor. 

James  Mooney. 

Berittene  Infanterie  in  China  und  andere  Feldzugs-Erinerungen,  Von 
Georg  Friederici,  Haupttnann  a,  D,  Mit  70  Abbildungen  im 
Text  und  einer  Karte,  Berlin  :  Dietrich  Reimer  (Ernst  Vohsen), 
1904.     8°,  355  pp. 

This  work  deals  with  the  writer's  experiences  as  captain  of  a  company 
of  German  mounted  infantry  in  China  during  the  Boxer  uprising  in 
1900-01,  and  is  altogether  one  of  the  most  interesting  and  instructive 
books  on  China  that  have  appeared  in  a  long  time.  The  writer  is  a 
master  of  English  and  is  well  acquainted  with  America,  having  traveled 
extensively  in  the  United  States  and  Mexico  and  having  resided  for  a  time 
in  Washington,  and,  as  former  Lieutenant  Friederici,  is  already  known 
for  his  study  of  our  Indian  policy  under  the  title  of  *  *  Indians  and  Anglo- 
Americans.  ' '  He  is  also  an  authority  on  Indian  things  generally,  and  an 
acknowledged  expert  on  the  subject  of  mounted  infantry  from  the  earliest 
period.  Spurred  on  by  the  double  love  of  soldier's  adventure  and  scien- 
tific observation,  he  was  one  of  those  to  respond  to  the  Kaiser's  call  of 
"volunteers  to  the  front"  for  the  rescue  of  the  imperiled  legations. 

The  opening  chapter  deals  with  the  mobilization,  the  embarkment, 
and  the  long  voyage  around  the  coast  of  France  and  Portugal,  through  the 
straits,  and  along  the  Mediterranean  to  Port  Said  and  the  Suez  canal, 
down  the  Red  sea  and  by  the  Indian  ocean  to  Singapore,  the  world's 
"museum  of  races,"  and  on  to  Ta-ku,  the  landing  port  for  Tientsin  and 
Peking.  The  author  shows  himself  familiar  with  the  history  of  every 
point  of  interest  along  the  route.  The  combination  of  home  spirit  and 
practical  method  so  characteristic  of  the  German  even  when  he  goes 
soldiering  is  manifested  by  the  organization  of  singing  clubs  and  language 
classes  almost  before  the  ship  is  well  under  way,  the  celebration  of  every 
birthday,  and  later  the  detail  of  men  from  winter  quarters  at  Yangtsun  to 
procure  a  suitable  Christmas  tree.  The  barracks  canteen — whisper  it 
softly  !  —  had  three  large  orchestral  instruments.  The  company  mascots 
ranged  from  "Prince  Tuan,"  a  donkey,  and  Li  Hung  Chang,  a  billy- 
goat,  down  to  geese  and  ducks.  A  pleasant  feature  was  the  friendly  feel- 
ing shown  toward  one  another  by  the  troops  of  the  different  allied  nations, 
particularly  the  warm  comradeship  established  between  the  Germans  and 
the  French. 


384  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

But  there  is  another  side  to  the  shield.  We  get  glimpses  of  the 
meaning  of  war  when  we  read  of  the  desolated  cities,  the  people  shot 
down  when  they  chanced  to  come  too  near  the  pickets,  the  village  fired 
when  the  villagers  were  not  prompt  with  the  war  indemnity  demanded, 
and  the  troops  of  homeless  dogs  which  *  *  were  very  useful  to  clear  the 
country  of  corpses.'*  We  learn  that  the  loud  explosions  from  the  burn- 
ing houses  came  not  from  ammunition  hidden  by  the  Boxers,  but  were 
caused  by  the  bursting  of  the  bamboo  supports.  I^ter  on  we  are  told 
that  the  work  of  identifying  the  slain  German  soldiers  for  burial  by  their 
comrades  was  very  difficult,  as  nearly  every  body  had  been  so  mutilated 
as  to  be  unrecognizable. 

In  regard  to  **  lot "  and  the  general  disregard  for  the  rules  of  civi- 
lized warfare  by  white  troops  when  dealing  with  people  of  another  race 
and  culture,  the  author  claims  that  these  things  are  universal  and  inevitable 
under  such  circumstances,  and  that  no  one  of  the  allies  can  claim  superior 
merit  in  this  respect.  He  has  something  to  say  about  our  own  Chivington 
massacre  and  negro  lynchings,  and  makes  sly  reference  to  a  certain 
notable  ball  once  given  by  the  Chinese  minister  in  Washington,  where 
guests  who  had  intruded  without  invitation,  after  having  eaten  and  drunk 
to  satiety,  proceeded  to  carry  off  everything  portable  as  souvenirs  of  the 
happy  occasion,  even  to  the  fur  coats  of  the  dijilomats.  The  brutalizing 
effect  of  warfare  with  a  savage  or  half-civilized  foe  is  dwelt  on,  particu- 
larly in  China,  where,  from  immemorial  custom,  **  every  corpse  is  muti- 
lated and  every  prisoner  tortured." 

We  are  given  descriptions  of  Tientsin  and  Peking,  the  great  wall, 
the  street  scenes  and  noises,  the  cultivated  fields  with  their  various  prod- 
ucts, the  poisonous  river  water  which  must  be  clarified  with  alum  to  be 
drinkable,  the  house-building  and  furnishing,  and  some  little  note  of  the 
home  life  so  far  as  it  could  be  observed  in  war  time.  Every  country  has 
its  own  smell,  (juoting  from  another  author,  and  the  captain  describes  the 
all-pervading  smell  around  Tientsin  in  the  summer  season  as  *' simply 
infernal."  There  are  some  interesting  paragraphs  on  the  jargon  words 
which  the  troops  i)icked  uj)  in  their  daily  contact  with  the  coolies,  but 
the  American  reader  may  look  twice  before  recognizing  in  dschunke 
and  tSihaii-tschau^  the  familiar  junk  and  chowchow.  The  pages  on  the 
several  breeds  of  native  horses  are  especially  valuable  from  the  military 
point  of  view.  The  author's  general  conclusion  seems  to  be  that  China 
of  to-day  is  about  in  the  status  of  Europe  in  the  sixteenth  century. 

And  now,  after  nineteen  months  of  campaign  and  garrison,  during 
which  the  captain  did  not  escape  an  experience  with  fever,  the  order 


BOOK  REVIEWS  385 

comes  to  break  camp  for  the  coast  and  the  homeward  voyage,  the  goodly 
feast  is  spread,  and  the  comrades  for  the  last  time  turn  down  their  glasses 
to  the  chorus  of  the  Song  of  the  Mounted  Infantry  : 

Und  sind  die  Wirren  wieder  hier  beendet, 
Und  herrscht  in  China  Ruhe,  Frieden,  Glilck, 
Dann  kehr'n  wir  heim  zum  lieben  Vaterlande 
Und  denken  an  die  schdne  Zeit  zuriick. 

The  author  combines  the  many-sided  instructiveness  of  Humboldt 
with  the  irrepressible  humor  of  Bourke  in  his  happiest  vein.  The  volume 
is  handsomely  bound,  and  printed  in  Roman  type,  and  is  enriched  with 
seventy  excellent  illustrations  from  photographs,  an  appendix  of  notes 
which  show  wide  reading  in  a  number  of  languages,  and  a  map  of  the 
province  of  Chi-li.  James  Mooney. 

Mat  and  Basket  Weaving  of  the  Ancient  Hawaiians^  Described  and 
Compared  with  the  Basketry  of  the  other  Pacific  Islanders,  By 
William  T.  Brigham,  A.M.,  Director^  etc.  With  an  Account  of 
Hawaiian  Nettings,  By  John  G.  Stokes,  Curator  of  Polynesian 
Ethnology,  Memoirs  of  the  Bemice  Pauahi  Bishop  Museum.  Vol. 
II,  No.  I,  Honolulu:  Museum  Press,  1904.  4^,  144  pp.,  153  figs., 
16  pi. 

As  the  title  states,  Messrs  Brigham  and  Stokes  treat  exhaustively  of 
Hawaiian  matting,  basketry,  and  netting,  making  extensive  studies  in 
other  parts  of  the  Pacific  also  for  purposes  of  comparison.  Dr  Brigham 
has  arranged  his  topics  chiefly  by  materials,  but  the  peculiar  nature  of 
each  one  of  the  substances  used  makes  that  order  practically  structural 
as  well.     Here  is  his  table  of  contents  : 

Palm  stems.     Shields. 

Pandanus,     Hats,  mats,  pillows,  baskets,   sails,  garments,   covered 

cord,  Fijian  baskets. 
Freycinetia  roots.     Baskets. 
Fern  stems.     Baskets,  fish  traps. 
Grass.     Makaloa  mats,  rush  mats,  cord,  bambu  fans,  combs,  spears, 

clubs,  sandals. 
Australian  baskets. 
Hibiscus  fiber.     Mats  of  the  Samoans. 
Baskets  of  the  Maori, 

Banana  fiber.     Loom  work  of  the  Caroline  islanders  ;  dress  mats. 
Olona  fiber.     Nets,  koko  pun  pun. 

The  foregoing  are  the  principal  substances  and  types  of  workmanship, 


386  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,   1906 

but  the  very  first  pictures  prove  how  Nature  is  ever  present  in  that  insular 
area  with  materials  and  suggestions.     Figure  2  shows  a  good  sized  fish 
carried  along  by  means  of  a  ki  leaf  {Cordyline  terminalis),  the  outer  end 
wrapped  in  a  half-knot  about  the  body. 
A  list  of  the  textile  plants  follows : 

Flax  (^Phormium  tenax). 

Mulberry  {Broussonetia  papyri/era) . 

Pandanus  (^Pandanus  odoratissimus  et  al.  sp.  and  P,  Caricosus), 

Coconut  (^Cocos  nucifera). 

Hibiscus  (^Pariteum  tiliaceuin). 

Banana  {Musa  var.  sp.). 

Grass,  riki  riki. 

Sedge  (^Cyperus  lai'igatus) . 

Olona  i^Touchardia  latifolia), 

Mamaki  (^Pipturus  albidus), 

leie  (^Freycinetia  arnottiy  and  in  Tahiti  F,  demissa), 

Iwaiwa,  ferns. 

Ki  leaf  (  Cordyline  temntiaUs) . 

The  dyes  used  are  — 

Crimson.     By  mixing  inner  bark  of  roots  of  nonufi'afr'a  (^Eugenia 

vialaccensis)  with  sea  water  and  lime. 
Yellow.     Turmeric  and  oil ;  and  from  bark  of  the  nonu  (^Morinda 

cetrifolid). 
Purple.     Young  shoots  of  mountain  plantain  soa'a  {Afusafehi). 
Brown.     By  mixing  inner  bark  of  pani  (?)  with  sea  water. 
Black.     By  burying  in  soft  mud  of  a  tan  patch. 

It  is  noted  at  a  glance  that  the  Hawaiians  and  other  islanders  dealt 
with  in  these  excellent  monographs  were  better  provided  with  raw  materials 
for  their  varied  textile  work  than  were  the  American  Indians  on  the  Pacific 
coast.  The  fact  that  the  insular  environment  embraces  also  our  Philippine 
islands,  makes  the  study  of  the  subject  more  interesting  and  pertment. 

How  easy  it  was  to  convert  a  coco  palm  leaf  10  or  12  feet  long  into 
either  a  receptacle  or  a  vehicle,  as  Mr  Brigham  shows  in  figures  1-4  ;  but 
in  the  very  next  illustrations  the  same  leaves  shredded  are  wrought  into 
the  finest  twills.  Figures  8-16  are  examples  of  checker^'ork,  twilling, 
twining,  and  openwork  on  fans  with  artistic  handles  and  borders.  On 
pages  8-15  will  be  observed  the  playing  with  oblique  warps  and  wefts 
occurring  in  many  parts  of  the  Pacific,  by  which  geometric  and  even 
animal   forms   are  created  on  borders.     These  cunning  islanders  have 


BOOK  REVIEWS  387 

caught  the  knack  of  covering  up  strong  coco  fiber  with  finer  materials 
(see  fig.  28,  p.  22).  Indeed,  from  cover  to  cover  in  these  monographs 
one  is  in  the  midst  of  surprises  as  he  makes  a  mental  comparison  with  the 
natives  of  the  Pacific  coast  of  America.  Among  the  islanders  are  found 
coiled  work  on  several  foundations,  with  continuous  and  interrupted  join- 
ing ;  false  bottoms  to  baskets  in  different  weaving,  which  recalls  the 
Eskimo  fashion  of  a  piece  of  hide  for  a  start ;  twined  weaving,  in  every 
variety  but  one,  which  would  make  California  Indian  women  stare ; 
wicker  work  in  rattan  ;  pandanus  mats  and  hats  of  leaves  sewed  together 
as  in  tule  mats  ;  tapa  cloth  in  perfection.  And  yet  the  differences  in  the 
finished  products  are  also  striking.  Forms,  materials,  functions,  and 
designs  vary  greatly.  The  absence  of  the  coco  fiber  and  the  long  rat- 
tans eliminates  from  the  American  textiles  the  wonderful  braids,  knots, 
and  borders,  which  by  their  ingenious  varieties  puzzle  the  student  who 
tries  to  work  them  out. 

Mr  Brigham  devotes  a  great  deal  of  attention  to  mats  and  mat  mak- 
ing ;  this  is  well  deserved,  for  many  of  the  mats  require  twelve  months' 
work,  and  all  of  a  woman's  skill  to  complete.  The  finishing  of  a  mat  of 
this  kind  was  made  the  occasion  of  no  little  rejoicing.  All  the  women 
of  the  neighborhood  familiar  with  the  manufacturer  were  summoned  on 
a  given  day  to  bathe  the  mat.  On  assembling,  they  proceeded  to  wash 
the  mat  in  fresh  water  and  after  stretching  it  out  to  dry  they  adjourned 
to  the  house  to  partake  of  the  feast  provided  by  the  hostess  to  celebrate 
its  completion.  The  author  is  careful  to  collect  the  folklore  of  mats  in 
Fiji  and  elsewhere. 

The  processes  of  weaving  elaborate  specimens  is  continued  in  soft 
basketry  or  wallets  and  in  those  used  for  clothing.  Specimens  from  some 
of  the  islands  are  most  gorgeous.  The  method  of  ornamenting  the 
wallets  is  quite  un-American,  for  in  the  last  named  all  kinds  of  surface 
decorations  are  a  part  of  the  technic.  Not  so  in  the  Malay-Polynesian 
area,  where  a  stout  wallet  forms  the  inside,  working  part,  while  the  most 
highly  decorated  outside  is  quite  another  affair. 

The  author  devotes  a  section  to  the  sandals  of  pandanus,  dracaena, 
hau  bark,  banana,  etc.,  whose  use  is  made  necessary  by  the  glassy  lava 
from  the  volcanoes. 

In  this  connection  attention  must  be  drawn  to  the  fact  that  the  gourd 
takes  the  place  of  pottery  in  Hawaii  and  that  the  watertight  cooking 
basket  was  not  known.  The  double  wallet  is  imitated  in  immense  variety, 
however,  in  the  basketry  of  all  kinds,  and  netting  of  curious  workman- 
ship is  closely  wrought  about  the  gourd.  The  last-named  article  furnishes 
the  vessel,  and  the  weaving  or  knotting  the  vehicle. 


390  AMERICA/^  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  190b 

The  papers  treat  of  the  subjects  of  Eugenics  (Galton);  Civics:  as  Applied  Soci- 
ology (Geddes);  The  School  in  some  of  its  Relations  to  Social  Organization  and  to 
National  Life  (Sadler);  Influence  of  Magic  on  Social  Relationships  (Westermarck); 
Relation  between  Sociology  and  Ethics  (Hdffding);  Guiding  Principles  in  the  Philosophy 
of  History  (Bridges);  Sociological  Studies  (Stuart-GIennie). 

Material  zur  Sprache  von  Comalapa  in  Guatemala.  Von  Dr  Jakob 
Schoembs.  Dortmund :  Druck  und  Verlag  von  Fr.  Wilh.  Ruhfus,  1905. 
i2*»,  xi,  237  pp. 

The  So-called  "Gorgets."  By  Charles  Peabody  and  Warren  K. 
Moorehead.  Phillips  Academy,  Department  of  Archaeology,  Bulletin  II. 
Andover,  Mass.  :  The  Andover  Press,  1906.     8**,  100  pp.,  19  pi. 

Kwakiutl  Texts.  By  Franz  Boas  and  George  Hunt.  Memoir  of  the 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History.  The  Jesup  North  Pacific  Expe- 
dition. Vol.  Ill,  part  III.  Leiden  :  E.  J.  Brill,  Ltd. ;  New  York :  G.  E. 
Stechert,  1905.     4°,  pp.  403-532. 

Contributions  to  the  Ethnology  of  the  Haida.  By  John  R.  Swanton. 
Memoir  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History.  The  Jesup  North 
Pacific  Expedition.  Vol.  v,  part  i.  Leiden:  E.  J.  Brill,  Ltd.;  New 
York:  G.  E.  Stechert,  1905.     4°,  300  pp.,  maps,  pis.,  figs. 

The  Koryak.  Religion  and  Myths.  By  Waldemar  Jochelson. 
Memoir  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History.  The  Jesup  North 
Pacific  Expedition.  Vol.  vi,  part  i.  Leiden:  E.  J.  Brill,  Ltd.;  New 
York:  G.  E.  Stechert,  1905.     4°,  382  pp.,  map. 

Haida  Texts  and  Myths.  Skidegate  Dialect.  Recorded  by  John  R. 
Swanton.  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  Bulletin  29.  Washington : 
Government  Printing  Office,  1905.     8°,  448  pp. 


I 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


Conducted  bv  Dr  Alexander  F.  Chamberlain 

[Note.  —  Authors,  especially  those  whose  articles  appear  in  journals  and  other 
serials  not  entirely  devoted  to  anthropology,  will  greatly  aid  this  department  of  the 
American  Anthropologist  by  sending  directly  to  Dr  A.  F.  Chamberlain,  Clark  University, 
Worcester,  Massachusetts,  U.  S.  A.,  reprints  or  copies  of  such  studies  as  they  may  desire 
to  have  noticed  in  these  pages.  —  Editor.] 


general 

Bair  ( J.  H. )  Human  infancy  —  its  causes, 
significance,  and  the  limits  of  its  pro- 
longation. (Univ.  of  Colorado  Studies, 
Boulder,  1905,  iii,  25-29.)  Infancy 
'*  came  as  the  direct  result  of  increased 
cerebral  capacity,  and  it  affords  a  basis 
for  learning  by  experience."  Lack  of 
pliability  prevents  acquisition  or  adapta- 
tion to  the  higher  spiritual  environment 
among  lower  beings,  individuals,  races. 

Barclay  (J.  W. )  Malthusianism  and  the 
declining  birth-rate.  (Ninet.  Cent., 
Land.,  1906,  80-89.)  From  study  of 
recent  statistics  B.  concludes  that  man 
can  and  does  increase  subsistence  faster 
than  population  can  multiply ;  that  a 
declining  birth-rate  marks  the  growing 
well-being  of  a  people  and  does  not  in- 
dicate with  even  approximate  accuracy 
the  growth  of  the  population  ;  that  the 
birth-rate  declines  with  the  death-rate, 
and  their  close  correspondence  suggests 
the  existence  of  a  natural  law  that  ulti- 
mately controls  conception.  The  su- 
perior fertility  of  the  lower  and  the  in- 
ferior fertility  of  the  higher  classes  insures 
proper  social  mixture. 

Baudouin  ( M. )  La  technique  modeme 
des  fouilles  des  sepultures  m^galithes. 
(R.  Scientif.,  Paris,  v«s.,  v,  136-141.) 
Discusses  excavation  and  investigation, 
finds,  and  descriptions  of  work,  restora- 
tion. Such  investigations  should  be  car- 
ried out  according  to  a  technique  justified 
by  experience  and  by  competent  savants. 

von  Bechterew  (W. )  Ueber  Messung  des 
Gehirnvolums.  (Neurol.  Cbl.,  Leipzig, 
1906,  XXV,  98.)  Note  on  the  water- 
method  of  measuring  brain-volume,  ap- 
proved by  Prof.  B. ,  —  a  device  for  this 
process  was  described  by  him  in  1892. 


Blant  (VV.  S.)  The  genealogy  of  the 
thoroughbred  horse.  (Ninet.  Cent, 
Lond.,  1906,  5^71.)  Review  and 
critique  of  Ridge  way's  recent  work.  B. 
thinks  with  Pi^trement  that  the  horse 
was  **  first  tamed  in  the  northern  plains, 
that  is  to  say,  in  some  of  the  cold  regions 
of  Upper  Asia  or  Eastern  Europe,  where 
snow  lay  long  in  winter,  and  so  may  have 
suggested  the  using  of  animals  for  draught 
in  sledges  rather  than  for  any  purposes 
of  riding."  The  modem  Kehailan  is 
indigenous  to  Nejd. 

Bongrand  (Dr)  La  valeur  de  P experi- 
mentation sur  Phomme  en  pathologie 
experimentale.  (R.  Scientif.,  Paris, 
v«  s.,  v.,  362-365.)  Dr  B.  maintains 
that  subject  and  experimenter  should  not 
be  one  and  the  same  person,  that  a  com- 
mittee is  preferable  to  a  single  individual, 
that  frequent  repetitions  are  desirable. 

Boule  (M.)  "La  Fable  eolithique." 
(L'Anthropologie,  Paris,  1905,  xvi, 
726-731. )  R^sum^s  a  recent  article  by 
M.  de  Lapparent  in  the  Correspondant 
on  *«the  eolithic  fable.'*  M.  de  L. 
facetiously  suggests  as  a  good  title  for  a 
book  that  would  add  to  the  gayety  of 
nations :  Les  siUx  taillh  par  cux- 
m?mes, 

Barbank  ( L. )  The  training  of  the  human 
plant.  (Century  Mag.,  N.  Y.,  1905, 
LXXXli,  127-138.)  Argues  in  favor  of 
differentiation  in  training  (children 
should  be  reared  for  the  first  ten  years  of 
life  in  the  open),  being  honest  with 
children,  keeping  fear  away,  using  sun- 
shine, fresh  air,  nourishing  food  (avoid- 
ing overfeeding  as  well  as  underfeed- 
ing), metamorphosis  of  the  abnormal, 
strengthening  of  the  weak,  etc.  B.  is 
against  the  marriage  of  "first   cousins 


391 


392 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


reared  under  similar  environments/*  and 
would  prohibit  altogether  the  marriage 
of  the  physically  unBt.  He  believes 
also  that  *'ten  generations  should  be 
ample  to  fix  any  desired  attribute.'* 

Capitan  (L. )  Les  iolithes,  d'apr^s  Ru- 
tot.  (R.  de  l'6c.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
1905,  XV,  274-279,  13  fgs.)  Notes 
concerning  the  <*  eoliths*'  described  and 
figured  in  Rutot*s  Coup  (P (til  sur  Pitat 
des  connaissances  relatives  aux  Industries 
de  la  Pierre  d  P  exclusion  du  niolithique, 
and  the  stratigraphy  of  the  place  where 
they  were  found. 

^/Papillault  IQ.)     L' identification 

du  cadavre  de  Paul  Jones  et  son  autopsie 
113  ans  apr^s  sa  mort.  (Ibid.,  269- 
273. )  Brief  account  of  the  identification 
of  the  remains  of  Paul  Jones  on  the  basis 
of  historical  records,  the  busts  by  Hou- 
don  and  the  data  yielded  by  the  corpse 
itself,  113  years  after  death.  See  also 
Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr,  de  Paris,  1905,  v« 
s.,  VI,  363-369. 

Charrilhat  (M.)     Anatole  Roujon  1841- 

1904.  (Bull.  Soc.   d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 

1905,  v«  s.,  VI,  256-259.)  Apprecia- 
tion, sketch  of  scientific  activities  and 
list  of  publications  (257-259)  of  Dr  A. 
Roujon.  His  writings  were  chiefly  con- 
cerned with  prehistoric  archeology  and 
ethnology.  In  1873  he  published  in  the 
Bulletins  de  la  Sociitf  d^Anthropologie 
de  Paris  an  article  on  Photographies 
mixicaines  Hablissant  F existence  dans 
ce  pays  de  Mongolohies et  d'*  Australohies, 

Costantin  (J.)  L'anc^tre  de  Thomme 
d'aprds  les  anciens.  ( R.  Scientif.,  Paris, 
1905,  v«  s.,  V,  1-6,  33-37.)  Discusses 
the  argonaut  and  its  actions,  the  legends 
about  it,  etc.,  Mycenwan  cephalopods, 
etc.  The  ancients  thought  the  male  of 
the*  argonaut  was  a  young  cuttle-fish. 
The  cuttlefish  was  regarded  as  the 
** sketch"  of  a  man.  The  ancestor  of 
man  was  a  *•  fetus-fish  ;  "  the  cuttle- 
fish, according  to  the  old  Assyrians, 
Greeks  and  Romans,  was  the  precursor, 
if  not  the  ancestor,  of  the  human  race. 

Cntore  (O. )  Di  una  rara  monstruositi 
neir  uomo,  perobrachius  achirus.  ( Anat. 
Anz.,  Jena,  1906,  xxviii,  222-229,  2 
fgs. )  Describes,  with  bibliography,  the 
case  of  an  otherwise  normal  individual 
(with  normal  ancestry  and  connections) 
from  Catania,  whose  left  fore-arm  is  re- 
duced in  length,  with  the  fingers  repre- 
sented by  five  little  fleshy  appendices. 

Dwight  (T. )  Numerical  variation  in  the 
humr.n  spine,  with  a  statement  concern- 


ing priority.  (Ibid.,  33-40,  96-102.) 
Risumis  recent  important  papers  by 
Bardeen,  Adolphi,  and  Ancel  and  Sen- 
cert,  with  criticisms,  —  in  the  main  con- 
firmatory of  D*s  conclusions  of  1901, 
except  as  to  theory  of  irregular  segmen- 
tation. Additional  data  from  the  War- 
ren Museum  collection  are  given  (7 
specimens).  Dwight  and  Tench ini  hit 
upon  the  idea  of  compensation  independ- 
ently at  about  the  same  time. 
Foardrignier  ( E. )  Les  Stapes  de  la  c6ra- 
mique  dans  T  antiquity.  Chronologie 
c^ramique.  Vases  Susiens.  Poterie 
dolmenique.  Anciens  procid^s  de  fabri- 
cation. (Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
1905,  v-*  s.,  VI,  222-246. )  Discusses 
early  Athenian,  MycensMin,  Cretan, 
Susian,  neolithic  pottery.  According  to 
F.,  **  the  origin  of  pottery  goes  back  at 
least  to  the  very  commencement  of  the 
neolithic  period. ' '  The  dolmenic  ceramic 
remains  indicate  a  crude  and  infant 
industry. 

Giuffrida-Raggeri  (G.)  Discussioni  di 
antropologia  generale.  (Mon.  Zool. 
Ital.,  Forenze,  1905,  xvi,  148-158.) 
Discusses  and  criticizes  chiefly  Stratz's 
recent  work,  Naturgeschichte  des  Men- 
schen  (Stuttgart,  1904),  in  which  he 
sets  forth  a  monogenetic  conception  of 
the  precocious  autonomous  evolution  of 
the  human  stock,  exclusive  of  the  anthro- 
poids. Dr  G.-R's  scheme  differs  from 
S's  in  regarding  the  white  race  not  as  a 
direct  descendant  of  the  primitive  type, 
but  as  the  last  chronological  succession 
of  the  three  principal  human  directions 
(black,  yellow,  white). 

Grahl  (F. )  Angeborener  ausgedehnter 
Naevus  pigmentosus  in  Verbindung  mit 
Pigmentflecken  im  Gehim.  (Beitr.  z. 
path.  Anat.,  Jena,  1906,  xxxix,  66-81, 
I  pi.,  I  fg. )  Describes  a  case  of  exten- 
sive Xaci'us  pigmentosus  associated  with 
pigment-spots  in  the  brain,  —  newborn 
well-nourished  female  infant  of  50^  cm. 
from  Cologne.  On  the  optic  thalami  are 
two  small  dark  spots  ;  part  of  the  cere- 
bellum also  shows  coloration.  The  body 
has  a  broad  band  of  color  around  the 
middle  and  spots  occur  also  elsewhere. 

Hadley  (A.  T. )  Mental  types  and  their 
recognition  in  our  schools.  (Harper's 
Mo.,  N.  Y.,  1905,  CXI,  123-129.) 
Proposes  grouping  of  students  **  accord- 
ing to  their  mental  habits"  as  an  im- 
provement for  the  mass  on  the  elective 
system  so  successful  with  the  few. 


\ 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


393 


Helm  (K.)  Die  Heimat  der  Indoger- 
manen  und  der  Germanen.  (Hess.  Bl. 
f.  Voiksk.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  IV,  39-71. )  Dis- 
cusses the  question  of  the  primitive  home 
of  the  I ndo- Europeans  and  the  Teutons 
from  the  points  of  view  of  anthropology, 
culture-history,  archeology,  etc.  H.  cites 
proof  of  the  continuity  of  west  European 
culture,—  **the  men  of  the  shell-heaps 
were  the  ancestors  of  those  peoples  ( 1 .  «r. , 
the  Teutons)  who,  proceeding  thence  in 
historic  times,  occupied  a  large  portion 
of  Europe  and  other  continents."  They 
formed  a  small  section  of  the  Indo-FIuro- 
peans,  who  had  a  much  more  extended 
primitive  home.  The  advances  in  cul- 
ture noted  in  the  later  stone  age  are  due, 
not  to  the  immigration  of  a  culturally 
superior  people,  but  to  the  fact  of  inde- 
pendent development  in  loco  of  native 
stock,  or  their  rise,  slowly  and  labori- 
ously under  foreign  influence  to  a  higher 
stage  of  civilization. 

Laurent  ( O. )  La  trepanation  rolandique 
etla  ponction  ventriculaire  dans  Tarri^ra- 
tion.  (C.  R.  Acad.  d.  Sci.  Paris,  1906, 
CLXII,  356-359.)  Describes  three  ex- 
periments (girl  of  4  months,  boy  of  10 
years,  child  of  5  years),  with  more  or  less 
ameliorative  results. 

Laussedat  ( M.)  Sur  le  relev6  des  monu- 
ments d' architecture  d'aprds  leurs  photo- 
graphies, pratique  surtout  en  Alleraagne. 
(Ibid. ,  435-438. )  Discusses  the  restitu- 
tion (common  in  Germany)  of  architec- 
tural monuments  with  the  aid  of  photo- 
graphs. From  1885  to  1 905  some  835 
monuments  have  been  thus  reconstituted 
in  185  different  localities. 

Le  Roy  ( A. )  Le  rOle  scientifique  des  Mis- 
sionaires.  (Anthropos,  Salzburg,  1906, 
I,  3-10.)  Beside  his  first  duty(**to 
propagate  the  gospel  "  )  the  missionary', 
by  his  vocation,  comes  to  have  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  country  (geography ),  its  social 
conditions,  religious  beliefs  and  practices, 
languages,  etc.  He  must  serve  God,  but 
he  may  be  a  discoverer  and  investigator 
as  well. 

Libby  (  M.  F. )  Hall  on  growth.  Precis 
and  comments.  (Investig.  Dept.  Psy.  and 
Ed.  Univ.  Colorado,  Boulder,  1905,  in, 
1-23.  R6sum6s  G.  Stanley  \\'d\V%  Ado- 
lescence (2  volSk  1904). 

Loisel  (G. )  L'oeuf  femelle.  (  R.  de  I'fec. 
d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  361-366.) 
Contains  interesting  data  as  to  the  nature 
of  the  female  egg,  female  births,  etc.  In 
the  rare  cases  where  it  was  possible  to 
differentiate  it  the  female  egg  was  dis- 


tinguished from  the  male  by  being  larger 
and  better  protected.  Instances  are  re- 
corded of  a  man  having  26  girls  in  suc- 
cession (no  boy)  by  the  same  woman; 
another  had  24  boys  without  a  girl. 

▼on  Laschan  ( F. )  Ziele  und  Wege  eines 
modernen  Museums  fUr  Vdlkerkunde. 
(Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1905,  Lxxxviii, 
238-240. )  Discusses  the  objects,  nature, 
uses,  etc.,  of  a  modem  ethnological  mu- 
seum. For  academic  uses  small  collections 
are  quite  sufficient.  Good  phot(^aphs  of 
objects,  types,  ceremonies,  etc.,  can  be 
well  employed  for  instruction.  Museums 
should  be  neither  collections  of  rarities 
nor  art-hoards.  The  **show  side**  must 
be  divorced  from  the  scientific.  Neither 
school -boys  nor  Cook  tourists  need  to 
rush  past  everything  in  the  building. 

Marie  {Dr)  et  Pelleticr  (Madeleine) 
Craniectomie  et  r6g6n6 ration  osseuse. 
(Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  \^ 
s.,  vr,  369-373,  I  fg.)  Discusses  inef- 
fective •  ''this  case  proves  the  uselessness 
of  craniectomy  as  a  therapeutic  means  in 
idiocy*' I  trepanning  in  a  male  micro- 
cephal  of  18  years.  An  osseous  regen- 
eration, almost  complete,  had  taken  place, 
contrary  to  the  opinion  generally  enter- 
tained by  surgeons  and  anatomists. 

Monseur  (E. )  L'^me  pupilline.  (R.  de 
I'Hist.  d.  Relig.,  Paris,  1905,  u,  1-23.) 
Treats  of  the  folk-lore  of  the  pupil  of  the 
eye.  Endeavors  to  prove  that  **  the  pupil 
soul  "  was  a  very  ancient  conception, 
primitive  man  easily  seeing  in  the  image  in 
the  eye  of  him  at  whom  he  was  looking, 
the  guardian  spirit,  soul,  etc.,  of  the 
other.  The  "evil  eye "  is  also  discussed. 
The  *'  little  man  of  the  eye  "  has  a  long 
ethnic  history. 

L'ame   poucet.      (Ibid.,   361-376.) 

Discusses  *'the  Tom-thumb  soul"  in 
folk-lore,  etc., —  the  idea  of  the  soul  as 
a  little  man  an  inch  or  so  high  resident 
in  the  head,  etc. 

Montana  (  L. )  La  infancia  de  la  humani- 
dad.  f  R.  de  la  Fac.  de  Letr.  y  Ci., 
Univ.  de  la  Habana,  1905.  I,  168-183, 
2  fgs. )  Based  chiefly  on  Verneau's 
Venfauce  de  r humaniii.  Treats  of 
prehistoric  man  in  western  Europe,  the 
various  epochs  and  their  characteristics, 
etc. 

Moutier  (A.^  De  I'influence  de  la  vieil- 
lesse  sur  la  pression  art6rielle.  (C.  R. 
Acad.  d.  Sci.,  Paris,  1906,  CLXii,  599- 
600. )  Experiments  of  M.  show  that 
hypertension  of  the  arteries  is  not  as 
common    in    the   old    as    is    generally 


394 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


believed,  and  when  it  does  occur  is  the 
result  of  arterio-sclerosis  and  not  due  to 
the  normal  evolution  of  the  organism. 

▼on  Negelain  (J. )  Die  PHanze  im  Volks- 
glauben.  (Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1905, 
Lxxxviii,  318-320,  347-349- »  Treats 
of  the  folk-lore  of  flowers  ( Teutonic  and 
Indo-European),  water-origin  of  flowers 
and  flower-nymphs,  flower-names  for  girls 
and  their  signiflcance,  flower-symbols, 
parallelism  of  human  beings  and  plants, 
spring- lore,  plant-medicine,  etc.,  ances- 
tral tree-worship,  soul-lore,  etc. 

Reinach  (S. )  L'origine  des  sciences  et  la 
religion.  {  L' Anthropologie,  Paris,  1905, 
XVI,  657-663. )  R.  argues  that  the  cul- 
tivation of  cereals  and  the  domestication 
of  animals  is  due  originally  to  religion 
and  superstition  ;  indeed  religion  is  at 
the  beginnings  of  everything.  The  his- 
tory of  mankind  is  merely  a  sort  of 
progressive  laicization.  Magic  is  the 
strategy  of  animism.  This  subject  is 
further  developed  in  the  second  volume 
of  the  author's  Cultes^  mythes  et  religions 
(Paris,  1906). 

Salomon  (P.)  Description  d'un  fcetus 
achondroplase.  (Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr. 
de  Paris,  1905,  ^'«  s.,  vi,  303-308.) 
Describes,  with  some  detail,  a  male 
achondroplasic  still-born  infant  (almost 
at  term),  figuring  since  1864  in  the 
Dareste  collection  in  the  Lille  Museum 
as  phocomelian.  In  a  future  memoir  Dr 
S.  intends  to  study  the  r6le  of  achondro- 
plasia in  the  production  of  phocomelian 
monsters. 

Schmidt  ( W. )  Die  moderne  Ethnologie. 
(Anthropos,  Salzburg,  1905,  r,  134- 
163. )  First  part,  German  text  with 
French  version  on  opposite  page,  —  of  a 
general  discussion  of  the  nature  and  ex- 
tent of  ethnology,  its  divisions,  etc. 

Schrader  ( F. )  Sur  les  consequences  phys- 
iques et  historiques  du  retrait  des  anciens 
glaciers.  (R.  de  I'fec.  d'Anthr.  de 
Paris,  1905,  XV,  408-414.)  Discusses 
the  effects  upon  man  and  his  migrations 
of  the  retreat  of  the  glaciers.  Accord- 
ing to  S.,  the  human  swarming  of  the 
neolithic  epoch  was  due  to  the  disap- 
pearance of  the  glacial  regime  and  the 
gradual  return  of  the  temperate  flora  and 
fauna,  and  the  attraction  exercised  upon 
a  certain  human  group  by  these  new 
conditions.  The  rapports  of  Asia  and  Eu- 
rope are  also  discussed.  To  glacial  Eu- 
rope corresponded  a  more  European  Asia. 
As  Europe  became  more  habitable  Asia 
became  less.     The  desiccation  influenced 


the  evolution  of  the  peoples,  —  beyond 
the  hives  of  India  and  China  lay  barbaric 
tribes  and  nomadic  hordes,  where  civili- 
zation was  largely  inhibited. 

Schwalbe  ( G. )  Zur  Frage  der  Abstam- 
mung  des  Menschen.  (Globus,  Bm- 
schwg.,  1905,  LXXXVIII,  159-161.) 
Critique  —  ^^ply  to  a  previous  article  by 
Kollmann.  S.  maintains  that  the  Nean- 
derthal man,  homo  primigenius,  is  the 
predecessor  of  the  present  human  race, 
homo  recens.  Also  argues  against  K.'s 
theory  of  the  priority  of  small  races, 
such  pygmoid  remains  as  have  been 
noted  being  rather  individual  variations 
within  the  limits  of  one  and  the  same 
race. 

Taylor  (J.  W.)  The  Bishop  of  London 
on  the  declining  birth-rate.  (Ninet. 
Cent.,  Lond.,  1906,  219-229.)  Author 
concludes  that  the  steady  decline  in  the 
birth-rate  is  due  to  **  artificial  preven- 
tion "  (both  the  legitimate  and  the 
illegitimate  birth-rates  are  so  affected, 
the  latter  being  no  longer  a  criterion  of 
morality).  The  result  is  grievous  phys- 
ical, moral  and  social  evils  for  the  whole 
community.  The  paper  of  Barclay 
is     severely    criticized.      See    Barclay 

(J.  ly.). 

Thulier  (  H. )  Discours  prononc^  k  T inau- 
guration du  monument  de  Gabriel  de 
Mortillet.  (R.  de  Pfec.  d'Anthr.  de 
Paris,  1905,  XV,  385-388.)  Brief  ap- 
preciation of  scientific  activities,  and  list 
of  chief  publications. 

Tschepourkowsky  (E. )  A  quantitative 
study  of  the  resemblance  between  man 
and  woman.  ( Biometrika,  Cambridge, 
I905t  IV,  161-168. )  Discusses  stature, 
cephalic  index,  nasal  index,  head  length, 
facial  index,  relative  arm  length,  with 
respect  to  the  various  peoples  of  the 
Russian  empire  (as  reported  by  various 
authorities,  particularly  Ivanovski).  In 
three  of  the  characters  compared  woman  is 
more  variable  than  man,  though  in  Ave 
the  difference  is  not  sensible. 

Veirworn  ( M. )  Ueber  die  altesten  Spuren 
des  Menschen.  (Corr.-Bl.  d.  D.  Ges.  f. 
Anthrop.,  Miinchen,  1905,  xxxvi,  63- 
64. )  Discusses  the  question  of  the 
**  eoliths,"  etc.  M.  concludes  that  **at 
the  close  of  the  miocene  period  there 
already  existed  a  somewhat  differentiated 
culture," — when  man  is  silent,  stones 
speak. 

Welldon  (J.  E.  C.)  The  children  of  the 
clergy.  (Ninet.  Cent.,  Lond.,  1906, 
230-238. )     From   the  statistics  of  the 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


39S 


Dictionary  of  National  Biography  it 
appears  that  '*the  eminent  or  prominent 
children  of  the  clergy  since  the  Reforma- 
tion have  been  1,270,"  while  in  all 
English  history  the  corresponding  num- 
bers for  the  children  of  lawyers  and  doc- 
tors are  respectively,  510  and  350.  The 
distribution  of  eminent  children  of  clergy- 
men among  the  various  walks  of  life  is 
discussed.  In  Scotland  **  the  sons  of  the 
manse ' '  have  long  had  repute. 
Woodruff  (C.  E. )  Complexions  of  the 
insane.  (N.  Y.  &  Phila.,  Med.  J.,  1905, 
Repr.,  pp.  7.)  Gives  results  of  the 
records,  by  Dr  Russell,  of  the  N.  Y. 
Commission  in  Lunacy,  of  the  color  of 
eyes,  hair,  and  skin,  of  1 ,439  insane  indi- 
viduals. The  native-bom  insane  seem  to 
he  of  lighter  type  than  the  population  from 
which  they  are  drawn.  According  to 
Major  \V.,  blond  invalids  (tuberculous 
especially)  should  be  kept  north,  — "only 
brunet  invalids  will  do  well  in  the 
south.'* 

The  neurasthenic  states  caused  by  ex- 
cessive light.  (Med.  Rec.,  N.  Y.,  1905, 
Repr.,  pp.  21.)  Major  \V.  holds  that 
•*the  main  result  of  excessive  light,  which 
is  not  of  sufficient  degree  to  cause  ne- 
crosis of  protoplasm,  is  some  kind  of  a 
chemical  breaking  up  which  renders  it 
paretic."  The  effects  of  the  tropics  on 
blonds,  the  good  results  of  sanitoria  in 
the  north  for  southern  neurasthenics,  the 
therapeutic  uses  of  light,  complexions, 
seasonal  mortality,  etc.,  are  briefly  dis- 
cussed. Old  estimates  of  the  excellence 
of  sunny  climes  must  be  revised.  The 
most  healthful  spot  in  the  country,  accord- 
ing to  the  last  report  of  the  Surgeon-Gen- 
eral, is  the  northwestern  comer,  a  very 
cloud V  and  rainv  area. 

The  identity  of  variations  and  modifi- 


cations. (Amer.  Med.,  Chicago,  1905,  x, 
661-665,  706-710.)  After  discussing 
various  theories  of  variation.  Major  \V. 
argues  that  "modification  is  a  variation 
in  the  soma  due  to  a  temporary  change 
in  the  environment  '* — both  are  identical 
and  neither  is  hereditary  unless  the 
causes  are  repeated,  and  (paradoxically) 
each  is  hereditary  as  long  as  the  cause 
exists.  Retum  to  the  normal  is  almost 
a  universal  rule  in  all  organisms,  if  the 
environment  is  restored.  Similarity  of 
environment  may  evolve  similarity  of 
types  of  man  in  widely  separated  areas, 
e.  g.,  the  Amazonian  Leggs  and  the 
aquatic  Malays. 


EUROPE 

Andenon  (Nina)  A  tour  in  Corsica. 
(Cheltenham  Ladies*  Coll.  Mag.,  Chelt., 
1906,  27-35.)  Notes  on  Bastia,  San 
Fiorenzo,  Ajaccio,  Corte,  Bonifacio,  etc. 
At  a  church  near  Bastia  is  a  collection 
of  relics  which  includes  a  clod  of  earth 
from  the  garden  of  Eden,  a  sample  of 
manna,  Moses'  rod,  etc.  The  bergerie 
is  typical  of  the  more  peaceful  life 
of  the  people  about  Ajaccio  of  to-day, 
but  it  "has  little  in  common  with  an 
English  sheep-farm.**  Murder  is  still 
the  national  vice  of  the  Corsican. 

Batky  (Zs. ')  Blaue  Sgraffito-Geschirre. 
(Anz.  d.  Ethnogr.  Abt.  d.  Ung.  Nat.- 
Mus.,  Budapest,  1905,  iii,  48-50,  i  pi., 
I  fg.  ^  Describes  briefly  the  blue 
"sgraffito- ware"  of  which  a  collection 
(20  jugs  and  34  plates)  dating  from 
17S6  to  1846,  is  in  the  Hungarian  Na- 
tional Museum.  The  flourishing  period 
of  this  ware  was  1 799-1813  ;  the  earliest 
known  specimen  goes  back  to  1 78 1. 

Baudooin  ( M. )  D^couverte  d'un  menhir 
tomb^  sous  les  dunes  et  d'une  station 
gallo-romaine  aux  Chaumes  de  Saint- 
Hilaire-de-Riez,  Yend^e.  (Bull.  Soc. 
d'Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1905,  v«  s.,  vi, 
271-278,  2  fgs. )  Describes,  in  continu- 
ation of  previous  article,  the  Pierre  du 
Trou  d^ argent  (a  fallen  megalith),  a 
polished  axe,  some  pseudo-flints,  human 
bones  and  some  dozen  skeletons,  Gallo- 
Roman  vases,  some  copper  or  bronze 
rings,  etc.,  found  in  1902- 1905  at  what 
appears  to  l>e  a  Gallo- Roman  "station,** 
of  the  second  or  third  century  A.  D. 

Les    gravures  sur  os  de   l*6poque 

gallo-romaine  d  la  nicropole  de  Trous- 
sepoil,  au  Bernard,  Yendee.  (Ibid., 
310-320,  6  fgs.)  Gives  account  of 
graffiti,  marks  resembling  the  Roman 
figures,  V,  VI,  xi,  vii,  viii,  ix,  iv,  x, 
and  heads  of  animals,  etc.,  on  bones  of 
the  Gallo- Roman  epoch  found  in  1902- 
1903  in  the  sepulchral  pits  of  the  necrop- 
olis of  Troussepoil.  They  are  probably 
ancient,  isolated  signs,  only  resembling 
Roman  figures.  E.  Riviere  reports 
similar  "figures**  from  the  necropolis 
of  Ilameau,  Paris. 

Btnnett  (J.  I.)  /Esculapius  the  miracle- 
worker.  ( Union  Univ.  Q. ,  Schenectady, 
N.  Y.,  1905,  I,  252-265.)  A  somewhat 
wit-moved  discussion  of  the  labors  of 
"the  John  Alexander  Dowie  of  the 
Greeks.** 


396 


AMERICAN-  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


Breuil  (H.)  Pr^tendus  manches  de  poig- 
nard  sculpt^s  de  T&ge  du  renne.  (L'- 
Anthropologie,  Paris,  1905,  xvi,  629- 
632,  3  fgs. )  The  AbW  B.  argues  that 
the  so-called  poniard  handle  of  Lau- 
gerie-Basset  which  figures  in  G.  de  Mor- 
tillet's  Le  Pr^historique  is  not  such  but 
simply  an  incompleted  piece  of  sculpture, 
as  the  figures  of  reindeer  carved  one  be- 
hind another,  e.  g.,  from  Bruniquel,  in- 
dicate. Their  exact  use  is  undetermined, 
—  they  may  have  been  clothes- buttoners. 

Brunner  (  K. )  Ueber  Funde  bei  I wno,  Kr. 
Schubin,  Posen.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin, 
1905,  XXXVII,  899-912,  19  f^s. )  De- 
scribes briefly  nine  finds  ( chiefly  pottery 
urns,  and  other  clay  objects  ;  stone  ham- 
mer, flints,  amber  bead,  etc.  ),from  grave- 
places  of  the  early  bronze  age  at  Ivirno 
in  Posen.  The  human  remains  had 
quite  disappeared. 

Basse  ( H. )  Urnenfeld  bei  Wilmersdorf 
in  Kreise  Storkow-Beeskow.  (Ibid., 
920. )  Notes  finds  of  urns  and  seven 
subsidiary  vessels,  stone  hammer,  bone 
beads,  and  other  objects. 

Capital!  ( L. )  Presentation  de  silex  de 
Guerville  pr^s  Mantes,  pseudo-6olithes. 
(Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905, 
VS.,  VI,  373-378.)  Describes  some 
"pseudo-eoliths,"  of  the  sort  discovered 
by  M.  Laville  at  the  cement  factory  of 
Guerville,  near  Mantes.  These  **  pseudo- 
eoliths  "  are  made  by  the  machinery 
that  breaks  up  the  masses  of  slate  and 
chalk  (the  latter  often  containing  pieces 
of  flint,  etc. )  ;  they  resemble  closely  the 
so-called  "eoliths"  of  Rutot,  etc. 

Recherches  dans  les  graviers  quater- 

naires  de  la  Rue  de  Rennes  ^  Paris. 
(Ibid.,  269-270.)  Brief  account  of  the 
discovery  of  a  tooth  of  the  rhinoceros 
tichorhinus  and  a  tooth  of  a  mammoth  in 
the  quaternary  gravels  exposed  during 
the  construction  of  the  metropolitan  sub- 
way in  the  Rue  de  Rennes,  city  of  Paris. 
No  flints  of  undisputed  human  make 
were  found,  except  a  few  "eoliths." 
Congr^s   pr6historique   de    France, 


x"  session  tenue  ^  P6rigueux.  (R.  de 
rfec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  373- 
385. )  Resumes  papers  read  at  the  French 
Prehistoric  Congress  held  at  Perigueux 
Sept.  26-Oct.  I,  1905.  A  large  portion 
of  the  communications  dealt  with  "  cave 
man  ' '  and  related  topics.  A.  de  Mortillet 
read  a  paper  on  Bolivian  primitive 
implements  ( stone  spades,  mallets,  etc. ), 
based  on  a  collection  made  by  him  in  the 
region  of  L.  Titicaca. 


Charbonneaa-Lassay  (L.)  L'abri  sous 
roche  et  les  quartz  tallies  de  Saint - 
Laurent-sur-S^vre,  Vendue.  (Ibid., 
344-346,  4  fgs.)  Describes  two 
**coup-de-poing"  of  quartzite  of  paleo- 
lithic type  from  the  immediate  neighbor- 
hood of  the  rock-shelter  of  St  Laurent- 
sur-S^vre.  These  are  the  only  Chellean 
objects  so  far  known  representing  a  paleo- 
lithic industry  in  the  Vendean   granite. 

Cook  (A.  B.)  The  European  sky-god. 
Ill  :  The  Italians.  (Folk-Lore,  Lond., 
1905,  XVI,  260-332.)  Treats  in  detail 
of  Jupiter,  his  names  and  appella- 
tions, characteristics,  functions  (sky-god, 
weather-god,  water-god,  earth-god), 
sacred-tree  (oak,  beech,  poplar,  mis- 
tletoe), symbols,  the  "golden  bough," 
the  maneSy  the  king  as  an  embodiment  of 
Jupiter,  recognition  of  Jupiter  in  popular 
heroes,  latent  belief  in  a  human  Jupiter, 
emperors  and  Jupiter,  the  king  as  repre- 
sentative of  the  sky-god,  killing  the  effete 
king,  the  Poplifugia  and  Regifngiunty 
the  NoneSy  etc. 

Da  Costa-Ferreira  (A.)  La  capacity 
cr&nienne,  chez  les  criminels  portugais. 
(Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  \*  s.,  vi, 
357-361.)  Based  on  study  of  data  of 
Dr  Ferraz  de  Macedo.  The  author  con- 
cludes that  Portuguese  criminals,  in 
general,  have  a  cranial  capacity  larger 
than  that  of  normal  individuals  and  are 
also  more  corpulent,  —  this  corpulence 
is  the  chief  factor  in  increasing  such 
capacity.  Determination  of  criminal  type 
from  cranial  capacity  is  impossible. 

El  worthy  (F.  T.)  A  solution  of  the 
Gorgon  myth.  (Folk- Lore,  Lond., 
1905,  XVI,  350-352,  2  fgs.)  Adduces 
further  evidence  of  the  Perseo- lobster 
explanation. 

Farreau  (/?/*)  Ueber  Kiesgrubenfunde 
bei  Neuhaldensleben.  (Corr.-Bl.  d.  D. 
Ges.  f.  Anthrop.,  Munchen,  1905, 
xxxvi,  63-66. )  Discusses  the  probable 
age  of  the  flints  found  in  the  Neu- 
haldensleben gravel-pits.  These  belong, 
according  to  the  animal  remains  accom- 
panying them,  to  the  interglacial  period. 

Fritsch  (G. )  Eine  verzierte  Hirschge- 
weihstange.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905, 
XXXVII,  969-970.)  Brief  account  of  a 
piece  of  red-stag  horn  (ornamented  with 
numerous  marks  all  over  one  side  and 
on  part  of  the  other)  from  Stargard  in 
Lausitz. 

GiOYanetti  ( — )  Quelques  observations 
et  corrections  se  r6f(&rant  au  travail  de 
M.    Merejkowsky   sur   le   cr&nes  de  la 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


397 


Sardaigne.  (Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de 
Paris,  1905,  v«  S.,  vi,  287-288.) 
Corrects  errors  in  a  table  of  cephalic, 
nasal-facial  and  orbital  indices  of  Sar- 
dinian skulls  given  by  Merejkowsky  in 
Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr,  de  Paris,  1882, 
p.  164. 

Girard  ( P. )  Les  origines  de  T^pop^e  en 
Gr^e.  (R.  Int.  de  I'Enseignm.,  Paris, 
1906,  LI,  97-114.)  Discusses  Homer 
and  the  pre- Homeric  Greece  revealed  in 
the  last  few  years.  The  Jliad  is  rela- 
tively modem  and  composite.  Neither 
it  nor  the  Odyssey  lies  near  the  birth  of 
culture.  The  **  Greeks  were  the  Greeks 
because  they  made  Homer  ;  and  because 
in  Homer  they  have  set  their  ideal 
humanity." 

GdDCZi  (F. )  Brunnen  und  Steige  im 
GScsej.  (Anz.  d.  Ethnogr.  Abt.  d.  Ung. 
Nat.-Mus.,  Budapest,  1905,  ill,  7-12, 
4  fgs. )  Treats  of  the  wells  ( usually  in 
front  of  the  houses)  and  stiles  among 
the  Magyars  of  Gocsej  in  the  western 
part  of  the  district  of  Zala.  Sweep- 
wells  {csigdskutaky  ** roll-wells ** ),  tub- 
wells  {bodonkut)f  their  preparation, 
apparatus,  etc.,  are  described.  The 
stiles  formerly  served  for  entrance  into 
the  yard  or  even  the  house. 

Groos  ( W. )  Die  Murichowo,  ein  Gebiet 
fiir  deutsche  Forschung  und  Untemeh- 
mung.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1905, 
Lxxxviii,  293-295,  I  fg.)  Describes  a 
European  terra  incognita,  Murichowo  on 
the  river  Vardar  in  Macedonia,  which 
probably  contains  some  of  the  descend- 
ants (non  Slav  in  speech)  of  the  first 
hordes  of  Asiatic  Bulgars.  It  contains 
also  a  settlement  of  Germans,  a  '*  culture 
island." 

Giintlier  (C. )  Coblenz  und  Umgebungin 
vorgeschichtlicher,  romischer  und  frank- 
ischer  Zeit.  (Corr.-Bl.  d.  D.  Ges.  f. 
Anthrop.,  1905,  xxxvi,  57-59.)  Brief 
account  of  prehistoric,  Roman  and  Frank- 
ish  remains  in  and  about  Coblenz.  Paleo- 
lithic objects  occur  at  Mettemich  and 
Rhens  (flint  implements,  bones  of  mam- 
moth, teeth,  etc. )  ;  neolithic  at  Urmitz  ; 
Hallstatt  at  NeuhSusel.  The  early 
Roman  period  is  represented  at  Urmitz, 
etc  ,  while  the  city  of  Coblenz  itself  was 
the  site  of  a  castellum,  and  Roman  re- 
mains occur  all  around.  Frankish  re- 
mains occur  in  Liitzel  Coblenz. 

Hahne  (H.)  Ueber  die  Beziehungen  der 
Kreidemiihlen  zur  Eolithenfrage.  ( Z.  f. 
Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  1024- 
imc  'i     Discusses  the  so-called  '*  chalk- 

^M.    ANTH   .   N.    S..   &-26 


mill  fragments,"  —  pseudo-eoliths, — and 
the  recent  articles  in  particular  of  Boule 
and  Obermaier.  These  flints,  which  so 
closely  repeat  the  forms  of  the  famous 
eoliths,  were  first  discovered  by  Laville 
at  Mantes  in  France.  Material  analo- 
gous to  that  of  Mantes  is  cited  by  H.  from 
Sassnitz.     See  Gi/>7/a»  (L. ). 

Henrd  ( G. )  Les  alsaciens  sous  le  rapport 
moral  et  intellectuel.  (R.  de  I'Ec. 
d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  281-301, 
3*7-336,  8  fgs).  Treats  of  literature 
(three  times,  in  the  thirteenth  century, 
in  the  Hohenstaufen  era  of  Old  Germanic 
epics,  at  the  end  of  the  M  iddle  Ages  in 
the  beginnings  of  German  prose  and  with 
the  mystics,  and  in  the  time  of  the  pre- 
cursors of  the  Reformation, —  Brandt, 
Mamer,  Fischart,  etc., —  Alsatian  influ- 
ence was  dominant),  public  men  and 
men  of  science,  teachers,  scholars,  etc. 
(Him,  Wurtz,  Reuss,  Friburger,  Koch, 
and  many  historians,  philologists,  etc. ), 
political  ideas  (in  the  Alsatian  the  ** sense 
of  monarchy"  is  lacking),  psychic  tem- 
perament, art  and  music  (Goethe  erred 
in  ascribing  to  Teutonic  genius  all  the 
monumental  architecture  of  Alsace). 
The  first  great  period  of  Alsatian  litera- 
ture lasted  from  the  ninth  century  to 
beyond  the  Reformation. 

Heyne  ( — )  Ueber  Kdrper  und  Gesichts- 
bildung  der  alten  Germanen.  (Corr.- 
Bl.  d.  D.  Ges.  f.  Anthrop.,  Milnchen, 
1905,  XXXVI,  61-62. )  R6sum6s  data 
from  Tacitus,  Ausonius,  etc.,  as  to  the 
bodily  and  facial  characters  of  the  ancient 
Teutons  (men  and  women).  Their 
white  skin  and  rosy  appearance  were 
praised,  but  not  their  voices.  Ausonius 
of  Bordeaux  fell  in  love  with  and  mar- 
ried the  Swabian  slave  Bissula.  The 
names  Bruno  and  Bruna  seem  to  refer 
to  complexion.  Later,  stature  appears 
to  have  decreased  somewhat,  hair  and 
skin  color  alone  remaining  of  the  old 
Teutonic  ideals. 

Hoffmann  (W. )  Heidentum,  Katholizis- 
musund  Protestantismusinunserer  rhein- 
hessischen  Landbev5lkerung.  ( Hess.  Bl. 
f.  Volksk.,  Leipzig,  1905,  iv,  1-24.) 
Treats  of  Rhenish- Hessian  folk -thought, 
heathen  (of  old  beliefs  and  customs  not 
a  few  fragments  still  remain  :  the  so-called 
**  Mai-Kuren,"  the  straw-rof)e  of  St 
Sylvester's  night,  some  folk-beliefs  about 
the  vine  and  its  products,  the  fabled 
fountain-origin  of  infants,  etc.,  beliefs 
about  fire.  New  Year's,  Easter  and  other 
practices,  customs  connected  with  birth. 


398 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


baptism,  courting  and  married  life,  death 
and  funerals,  spirits,  the  devil,  charms, 
taboos,  etc. ),  Catholic  ( remains  of  Cath- 
olic influence  in  Protestant  Hesse  are 
seen  in  current  belief  as  to  the  relation  of 
man  to  God  and  of  man  to  man  ;  as  to 
the  sacrament,  sin,  etc. ;  the  position  of 
the  clergyman  ;  the  nomenclature  of  the 
calendar,  etc.),  and  Protestant  (anti- 
Catholic  feeling  regarding  images,  vest- 
ments, individualism,  rationalism,  etc., 
but  not  to  the  exclusion  of  pietism). 

Jaeger  (J.)  Die  Tegemsee.  (Globus, 
Bmschwg.,  1905,  Lxxxviii,  357-362. ) 
Treats  of  geology  of  this  Bavarian  lake, 
human  occupation  (no  traces  of  man  of 
stone  or  metal  ages  yet  discovered  ;  nor 
did  the  Romans  settle  here  ;  not  till  the 
sixth  century,  when  the  old  Bajuwari 
came,  was  this  region  really  inhabited), 
place-names,  the  cloister  (founded  in 
756),  which  had  a  noted  and  useful 
career,  etc. 

Kahle  ( B. )  Die  verschluckte  Schlange. 
(Ibid.,  233-234.)  Discusses  the  old 
Norse  tale  of  the  <* snake'*  in  the 
stomach  of  the  beautiful  princess  Inge- 
borg  and  her  cure. 

KArpAty  (K. )  Votiv-Gaben  aus  Trans- 
Danubien.  (Anz.  d.  Ethnogr.  Abt.  d. 
Ung.  Nat.-Mus.,  Budapest,  1905,  ill, 
45-47,  2  fgs. )  Notes  on  votive-gifts 
(animal  forms,  limbs,  etc. )  in  wax  from 
trans- Danubian  Hungary.  These  objects 
are  difficult  to  obtain,  as  they  are  melted 
into  tapers  by  the  religious  authorities 
after  they  have  been  offered  in  procession 
or  at  the  altar. 

Kiessling  ( M. )  Das  ethnische  Problem 
des  antiken  Griechenland.  (Z.  f.  Ethn., 
Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  1009-1024. ) 
First  part  of  a  general  discussion  of 
ancient  Greek  ethnology  —  geographical 
and  linguistic  (folk-names  and  place- 
names)  data.  K.  considers  that  when 
the  Hellenic  tribes  entered  Greece  from 
Central  Europe  they  found  there  an 
**  autochthonous  "  people  whose  original 
home  was  in  Asia  Minor.  From  the 
mingling  of  these  arose  the  ethnos  of 
Hellenic  culture. 

Kii00p(O. )  Pfllnische  Damonen.  (Hess. 
Bl.  f.  Volksk.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  IV,  24-32.) 
Discusses  various  Polish  "demons,"  — 
djabelek  my  jacy  ("wash  devil"),  a 
recent  creation;  "bis,"  plonnik  (a 
neighbor  in  league  with  the  devil), 
kusy  ( "  the  one  with  too-short  clothes," 
a  euphonism  for  "devil"),  boruta  and 
rokita  (the  former  is  "the  Polish  national 


devil^^*  who  lives  in  a  subterranean  part 
of  an  old  castle  near  Gnesen  ;  the  latter 
has  more  of  a  peasant  character),  with 
brief  legends,  etc. 

Lehmann-Nitsche  ( R. )  Ueber  die  Adal- 
bertsteine  zu  Strelno,  Kujawien.  (  Z.  f. 
Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  946-951, 
2  fgs.)  liescribes  the  "Adalbert 
stones ' '  ( erratic  red  granite  blocks )  in 
fVont  of  a  church  at  Strelno,  believed  by 
the  author  to  indicate  a  cult-place  of  the 
old  heathen  period.  Certain  reverence 
attaches  to  them  on  the  part  of  the  Polish 
Catholic  population. 

LUeauer  ( A. )  Eine  Doppelaxt  aus 
Kupfer  von  Ellierode,  Kr.  Northeim, 
Hannover.  (Ibid.,  1007-1009,  2  fgs.) 
Describes  a  double-axe  of  pure  copper 
(the  nineteenth  hitherto  known)  from 
Ellierode  in  Hanover,  between  B5rssum 
and  Pyrmont.  The  axe,  which  evi- 
dently could  not  be  used  as  a  tool,  was 
probably  a  form  of  "copper  bar,"  in- 
tended for  insignia  of  honor,  ex-votos, 
"  money,"  or  the  like. 

Zweiter  Bericht  fiber  die  TStigkeit 

der  von  der  Deutschen  anthropologischen 
Gesellschaft  gew&hlten  Kommission  fUr 
prahistorische  Typenkarten.  (Ibid., 
793-847,  37  fgs.,  map.)  This  second 
report  of  the  committee  on  maps  of  pre- 
historic types  treats  of  the  different  varie- 
ties of  special  axes  (stop-ridged  and 
flanged.  West  European ;  northern ; 
north  German ;  Bohemian),  listing 
places  where  they  have  been  found. 
The  West  European  and  northern  types 
belong  to  the  older  bronze  age»  the  north 
German  to  the  epoch  from  the  middle  of 
the  second  period  of  Montelius  far  into 
the  third  period  of  Montelius,  the  Bohe- 
mian to  the  epoch  from  the  second  to  the 
third  period  of  Montelius. 

LOTett  ( E. )  The  Whitby  snake-ammonite 
myth.  (F'olk-Lore,  Lond.,  1905,  xvi, 
333-334,  I  pi. )  Notes  on  the  snake- 
headed  ammonites  once  figuring  on  town 
arms  of  Whitby — the  legend  was  that 
there  were  snakes  turned  into  stone  by  St 
Hilda  (Scott's  Marmion^  ii.  13). 

Maclagan(R.  C. )  Additions  to  "The 
Games  of  Argyleshire."  (Folk- Lore, 
Lond.,  1905,  XVI,  340-349..  4  %s. ) 
Treats  of  hopping  games,  imitative  games, 
incorrect  speaking,  knife  games,  leap- 
frog, marbles  (one  game  is  "  American 
tag"),  mental  agility. 

Madarassy  (L.)  Das  Putri-  (HUtten-) 
Viertel.  ( Anz.  d.  Ethnogr.  Abt.  d.  Ung. 
Nat.-  Mus.,  Budapest,  1905,  in,  53-57, 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


399 


3  fgs. )  Describes  briefly  the  putri  or 
**hut"  quarter,  or  gypsy  section  (pariah 
class )  of  Hungarian  towns,  etc. 

Kahoudean  (P.  G. )  D^couverte  d*une 
sepulture  n^olithique  k  Martigny  pr^s 
Vendfime,  Loir-et-Cher.  (R.  de  I'Ec. 
d*Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  XV,  420-421.) 
Brief  account  of  the  discovery,  reported 
by  M.  G.  Renault,  of  a  neolithic  burial- 
place  at  Martigny  near  Venddme. 
Through  carelessness  of  the  fanner's  em- 
ployes in  their  search  for  treasure,  at  least 
20  human  skeletons  were  destroyed.  The 
**  furniture  "  of  the  grave  consisted  of  a 
single  fine  lance-point  of  flint. 

ManouTiier  (L. )  Cr&nes  de  T^poque 
M^rovingienne.  (Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr. 
de  Paris,  1905,  v«  s.,  vi,  361-362.) 
Notes  on  5  skulls  (two  of  the  sixth  cen- 
tury from  the  Merovingian  cemetery  of 
C16ry  ;  three  from  the  cemetery  of  Maure- 
pas,  one  of  the  eighth,  the  others  of  the 
eleventh  or  twelfth  century)  presented 
to  the  Society  by  M.  C.  Burlanger  of 
P6ronne.  No  measurements.  Ethnic 
types  are  not  very  marked  in  these  skulls. 
One,  however,  has  strong  individual 
characters,  prognathism,  etc. 

Mehlis  ( C. )  Neolithische  N&pfchensteine. 
(Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1905,  Lxxxviii, 
184,  2  fgs.)  Describes  pitted  stones 
from  Wallbdhl  and  notes  various  theories 
as  to  their  use  :  amulets  and  pectoralia  ; 
for  making  holes  in  skins,  etc.  ;  nut- 
breakers  (sambaquis  of  Brazil)  ;  primi- 
tive palettes  for  colors  ;  for  shaping  clay 
pearls. 

Hielke  ( R. )  Ein  tonerner  prahistorischer 
Fusz.  (Ibid.,  354,  I  fg. )  Brief  note 
on  a  prehistoric  clay  foot  from  Ucker- 
marck.  The  markings  indicate  that  in 
the  middle  of  the  bronze  age,  at  least, 
sandals  were  in  use. 

Ton  Hiske  (K.  Frh.)  Mitteilungen  iiber 
Velem-St.  Veit.  (Mitt.  d.  Anthr.  Ges. 
in  Wien,  1905,  xxxv,  270-277,  13  fgs.) 
Describes  briefly  prehistoric  finds  (bronze 
ornaments,  implements,  etc.  ;  pottery) 
from  the  foot  of  Mt  Velem  St  Veit  and 
forged  iron  from  fibulae  of  the  Glasinac 
type.  The  use  of  the  clay  pyramids  is 
not  clear  although  thev  seem  to  be  con- 
nected in  some  way  with  the  hearth. 

de  Mortillet  (A.)  La  trouvaille  mor- 
gienne  de  Glomel,  C6tes-du-Nord.  ( R. 
de  rfec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  XV, 
337-343,  12  fgs.)  Describes  13  bronze 
objects  (an  axe  and  12  dagger-blades), 
now  in  the  Museum  of  St  Omer,  found 
in  1 840-1 845   (in  connection  with  the 


making  of  the  Nantes- Breste  canal,  etc.) 
at  Glomel,  in  the  department  of  the 
C6tes-du-Nord,  Brittany.  No  arrow- 
points  were  found  with  them.  De  M. 
considers  it  a  votive  deposit  and  not  the 
"  cache  "  of  a  manufacturer  or  a  trader. 

Mnrko  (M.)  Zur  Geschichte  des  volks- 
tiimlichen  Hauses  bei  den  SQdslawen. 
(Mitt.  d.  Anthr.  Ges.  in  Wien,  1905, 
xxxv,  308-330,  8  fgs.)  This  first  part 
r^sum^s  briefly  the  Slavonic  literature  of 
the  subject,  discusses  Meringer's  works 
on  the  Bosno-Herzegovinian  house,  the 
**  High  German  "  house  in  the  adjacent 
countries,  etc. 

N&cke  ( P. )  Syphilis  und  Dementia  para- 
lytica in  Bosnien.  (Neurol.  Cbl.,  Leip- 
zig, 1906,  XXV,  157-164. )  Dr  N.  finds 
that  while  syphilis  in  Bosnia  (also  Herze- 
govina and  probably  Dalmatia)  is  extra- 
ordinarily common,  brain-softening  and 
tabes  dorsal  is  are  very  rare. 

Oesten  ( E. )  Bericht  Uber  den  Fortgang 
der  Arbeiten  zur  Rethra-Forschung. 
(Z.  f.  Ethn.,  -Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii, 
981-990,  7  fgs.)  Resumes  the  results 
of  the  excavations,  etc.,  in  November, 
1904,  and  January,  1905,  at  10  different 
spots  in  Prill  witz.  Remains  of  a  bridge, 
and  at  the  end  of  it,  of  a  large  building, 
not  the  Rethra  temple,  but  the  approach 
to  it,  were  discovered.  Other  relics  of 
the  ancient  Redarii  were  also  found. 

Osterheide  (A. )  Zwei  Kleinigkeiten  zum 
"Martinsfest."  (Hess  Bl.  f.  Yolksk., 
Lpzg.,  1905,  JV,  33-38.)  According  to 
O.,  the  St  Martin's  day  customs  still  bear 
evidence  of  ''a  contest  of  summer  and 
winter. ' '  Text  ( two  versions )  and  music 
of  the  **  Martin  song,"  as  it  is  still  given 
by  children  in  Moers  a.  Rh. 

Pasquale  (M.)  Lo  sviluppo  fisico  nei 
ragazzi  delle  scuole  della  Citti  e  Pro- 
vincia  di  Roma.  (Int.  A.  f.  Schulhyg., 
Lpzg.,  1906.  II,  270-297,  28  tables,  6 
curves.)  Gives  results  of  investigation 
(stature,  weight,  chest-girth,  strength  of 
hand)  of  2005  boys  and  1530  girls,  from 
the  elementary  schools  of  the  city  and 
province  of  Rome,  between  the  ages  of 
6  and  15  years.  Up  to  10  years  the 
boys  surpass  the  girls  in  height,  but  from 
10  to  15  the  latter  exceed  the  former,  the 
maximum  difference  occurring  between 
12  and  13.  The  chest  girth  follows 
stature  but  with  less  marked  differences. 
In  strength  of  hand  the  girls  are  at  all 
ages  inferior  to  the  boys  —  the  left  hand 
is  inferior  in  both  sexes.  In  height  the 
boys  of  the  city  of  Rome  surpass  those  of 


400 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


the  other  communes ;  weight  shows  the 
same  run.  Food,  housing,  work,  clothing, 
education,  and  social  condition  thereby 
represented,  influence  physical  condition 
and  development.  As  remedies  for  un- 
favorable conditions  Dr  P.  enumerates 
physical  education,  manual  labor,  vaca- 
tion-colonies, preventive  medicine,  school- 
refection,  clothing,  etc.  The  public  school 
ought  to  be  a  corrective  and  healthful 
institution. 

Pittard  (£. )  Influence  de  la  taille  sur 
I'indice  c^phalique  dans  un  groupe 
ethnique  relativement  pur.  (Bull.  Soc. 
d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1 905,  v«  s.,  vi,  279- 
286. )  Discusses  the  influence  of  stature 
upon  cephalic  index  in  the  case  of  a 
relatively  pure  group  of  1 205  (m.  775, 
w.  430)  adult  gypsies  from  the  Balkan 
peninsula.  Dr  P.  concludes  that  stature 
has  a  manifest  influence  on  the  cephalic 

.  index,  dolichocephaly  increasing  with 
rise  of  stature.  In  a  dolichocephalic 
group  the  tallest  are  the  most  dolicho- 
cephalic ;  in  a  brachycephalic  group  the 
tallest  are  on  the  average  the  least  brachy- 
cephalic. According  to  P.,  the  much 
discussed  attraction  of  the  city  for  those 
of  high  stature  and  more  marked  dolicho- 
cephaly (**a  so-called  social  selection") 
*'  is  explainable  simply  by  the  simultane- 
ous occurrence  of  these  two  characters  : 
greater  development  of  stature  due  to 
conditions  of  urban  life  and  the  lowering 
of  the  cephalic  index  connected  with  such 
augmentation  of  stature." 

La  couleur  des  yeux  et  des  cheveux 

et  la  forme  du  nez  chez  1270  Tsiganes 
des  deux  sexes  de  la  p^ninsule  des  Bal- 
kans. (R.  de  rfec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
1905,  XV,  367-372.)  Gives  results  of 
observations  of  color  of  hair  and  eyes  and 
form  of  nose  of  840  male  and  430  female 
gypsies  of  the  Balkan  peninsula,  —  the 
earlier  data  of  Gliick  are  also  considered. 
Black  hair  is  most  common  in  both  sexes 
(blonds  are  only  0.6  per  cent  for  men 
and  I  per  cent  for  women)  ;  curly  hair 
occurs  in  only  7  per  cent  of  the  men. 
Dark  eyes  occur  in  87  per  cent  of  both 
sexes.  Straight  noses  occur  in  57.5  per 
cent  of  the  men  and  70. 7, per  cent  of  the 
women.  The  aquiline  nose  proper  is 
very  rare. 

Regalia  (E. )  Grotta  Romanelli  (Castro, 
Terra  d'Otranto).  Seconda  Nota.  Due 
Risposte  ad  una  Critica.  (A.  p. 
I'Antrop.,  Firenze,  1905,  xxxv,  113- 
172,  2  fgs. )  Discusses  the  various 
deposits  of  the  Romanelli  cave  and  the 


remains  found  therein.  Dr  R.  concludes 
that  **  nothing  of  genuine  neolithic 
character  has  been  produced  from  this 
cave."  The  absence  of  pottery  and  of 
the  remains  of  domestic  animals  is  proof 
positive.  An  *<osteological  note"  ( 147- 
'55)  ^y  ^1*  ^*  treats  of  the  equidian 
remains  from  this  cave,  and  a  *' reply" 
(157-169)  by  P.  E.  Stasi  to  a  critique 
by  Professor  Pigorini  of  his  article  on  the 
Romanelli  flnds.  The  figure  incised 
upon  the  right  wall  of  the  cave  repre- 
sents, according  to  Dr  R.,  some  species 
of  AsinuSf  used  for  food  by  these  pre- 
historic people.  Another  set  of  incised 
grooves  on  the  same  wall  is  thought  to 
be  a  "fence"  for  large  game. 

Riets  ( — )  Kdrperent  wick  lung  und  geis- 
tige  Begabung.  (Z.  f.  Schlgshdtspfl., 
Hamburg,  i^>6,  xix,  65-98,  8  fgs. ) 
Gives,  with  tables  and  curves,  the  results 
of  data  concerning  some  20,400  boys 
(aged  9-20)  from  19  Gymnasia,  8  Real- 
gymnasia,  3  Oberrealschulen  and  12 
Realschulen)  in  the  city  of  Berlin, — 
height,  weight,  &nd  yearly  growth  are 
considered.  Physically  the  children  of 
the  p>oor  lag  behind  those  of  the  well 
to-do.  The  author  considers  classes  and 
age  better  criteria  than  the  estimates  of 
teachers.  The  physically  fitter  are 
generally  the  intellectually  fitter. 

Roeder  (A.)  Parsifal.  (Open  Ct.,  Chi- 
cago, 1905,  XIX,  26-27.)  Author 
argues  that  the  people,  deprived  of  the 
real  Christ  by  the  theologians,  built 
themselves  in  Parsifal  **  a  compensatory 
Christ." 

Rothmann  (  —  )  Vorlaufiger  Bericht 
uber  die  Ausgrabungen  auf  Flintholm, 
aus  den  Mitteln  der  Rudolf  Virchow- 
Stiftung  1904.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin, 
1905,  XXXVII,  996-998.)  Brief  account 
of  investigation  of  the  **  culture  layer  " 
of  the  later  neolithic  settlement  at 
**  Flintholm,"  and  notes  of  finds  (5000 
pottery  fragments,  300  of  which  are 
ornamented  ;  6500  flint  chips,  300 
scrapers,  50  knives,  15  axes  ;  fragments 
of  grinding  and  rubbing  stones,  etc.  ;  5 
horn  axes  and  many  worked  pieces  of 
bone,  etc.  ;  2700  animal  bones). 

Schenck  (A.)  Les  palafittes  de  Cudre- 
fin.  Vaud.  Lac  de  Neuchatel.  Age  de 
bronze.  ( R.  de  I'fec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
1905,  XV,  262-268,  15  fgs.)  Gives  ac- 
count of  discovery  of  a  new  lacustrine 
"station"  between  Cudrefin  and  Port- 
Alban  on  the  Vaudois  shore  of  Lake 
Neuchatel  and  the  remains  there  found 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


401 


(wooden  piles,  bronze  axes,  and  knives, 
ornaments,  particularly  pins ;  hooks, 
buckles,  bracelet,  spiral,  etc.).  The 
**  station'*  belongs  to  the  flourishing 
period  of  the  bronze  age  (Desor)  or  the 
Lamaudian    epoch  (Mortillet),  contem- 

.porary  with  the  lake-dwellings  of  Morges 
and  Corcelettes. 

£tude  d'ossements  et  cr&nes  humains 


provenant  de  palafittes  de  T&ge  de  la 
pierre  polie  etde  I'&gedu  bronze.  Lac 
de  Neuch&tel.  Lac  L6man.  (Ibid., 
389-407. )  Treats  of  human  bones  and 
skulls  from  neolithic  and  bronze  age  lake- 
dwellings  at  Grandson  (skeleton),  con- 
cise (two  skulls,  etc.),  Corcelettes  (two 
skulls,  etc. ),  and  Anthy  (skeleton),  with 
detailed  descriptions,  measurements,  etc. 
The  increasing  number  of  skulls  now 
known  from  these  lake>dwellings  indicate, 
according  to  Dr  S.,  the  brachycephaly 
of  the  early  neolithic  lacustrine  popula- 
tion ;  at  the  middle  of  the  period  ( Roben- 
haus  epoch)  mesocephalic  and  dolicho- 
cephalic skulls  appear,  then  in  the  period 
of  transition  from  stone  to  bronze  ( Mor- 
gian  epoch)  the  dolichocephals  predom- 
inate ;  towards  the  end  of  the  bronze  age 
the  characteristic  Celtic  brachycephals 
are  in  the  majority,  and  they  still  form  a 
very  strong  proportion  of  the  population 
in  Switzerland. 

Schicker  (J.)  Bericht  fiber  romische 
Skelettfunde  in  der  Umgebung  von  Laur- 
eacum.  ( Stzgb.  d.  Anthr.  Ges.  in  W  ien, 
1905,  XXXV,  54-55.)  Brief  account  of 
several  skeletons  and  five  skulls  (three 
dolichocephalic,  two  mesocephalic)  found 
in  Roman  graves  in  the  neighborhood  of 
ancient  Laureacum. 

Schnippel  (E. )  Ueber  Reste  einer  stein- 
zeitlichen  Ansiedlung  im  ostpreussischen 
Obcrlande.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905, 
XXXVII,  952-969,  20  fgs. )  Describes 
finds  (flints  and  pottery- fragments, — 
numbering  over  1600)  at  a  **  station  "  of 
the  later  stone  age  near  Osterode,  East 
Prussia.  The  ornamentation  of  the  pot- 
tery is  interesting,  some  shards  contain- 
ing finger-marks  of  children. 

Schiitte  (H.)  Sind  die  Kreisgruben  un- 
serer  Watten  GrSlber  oder  Brunnen? 
(Corr.-Bl.  d.  D.  Ges.  f.  Anthrop.,  Mun- 
chen,  1905,  XXXVI,  50-55,  59-61.) 
Adduces  arguments  to  show  that  the  cir- 
cular pits  of  the  Oldenburg  sand- banks 
are  wells  and  cisterns,  not  graves,  — 
those  of  the  North  Sea  sand-banks  were 
discovered  by  Fr.  von  Alten  in  1873. 
The  pottery  found  in  them  is  such  as 


might  easily   find   its   way  into  wells. 
This  article  appeared  also  in  the  Jahrb, 
f.  Ges.  d,  Hozgt,  Oldenburg^  1905,  XIII, 
149-169. 

Schweinfurth  (G. )  Pseudoeolithen  im 
nordischen  Geschiebemergel.  (Z.  f. 
Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  912-914.) 
Briefly  describes  some  **  pseudoeoliths'* 
from  the  **  Kreisberg  "  near  Neu- Brand- 
enburg and  from  Neu-Strelitz,  and  sug- 
gests the  investigation  of  the  marl  of  the 
northern  gravel-pits  for  interglacial  flints 
comparable  to  the  prehistoric  Egyptian. 
The  results  hitherto  have  been  negative. 

Sebestyin  (K.)  Das  Sz^kler  Haus  des 
Hiromsz^kler  "SzenifSld."  (Anz.  d. 
Ethn.  Abt.  d.  Ung.  Nat.-Mus.,  Buda- 
pest, 1905,111,  1-7,  10  fgs.)  Describes 
the  house ;  its  construction,  divisions, 
etc.,  among  the  Sz^kler  of  the  so-called 
«*Szentf51d,"or  «*  Holy  Land"  of  the 
H&romzek  district  of  Hungary,  a  part 
of  the  country  still  without  railroads  and 
least  aflected  by  modem  civilization. 
The  Sz^kler  house  is  bi-partite,  has 
smoke- hole  (no  chimney),  gable-orna- 
ments, a  fence  (often  of  stone)  ;  stone 
posts  have  driven  out  oaken  gates. 

SebOk  (S. )  Die  wandemde  Stina  im 
Hortobagver  Gebirge.  (Ibid.,  51-53, 
3  fgs. )  Describes  the  transportable  hut 
{stina)  of  the  Wallachs  of  the  Horto- 
bagy  mountains.  The  stina  is  not  used 
for  sleeping  in,  but  for  cooking,  milking, 
making  cheese,  etc. 

Szab6  ( I. )  Weihnachten  der  Dev&er 
Csang6-Sz6kler.  (Ibid.,  13-25,  2  fgs.) 
Describes,  with  part  of  text  and  music, 
the  **  Soldier-play"  and  the  "Bethle- 
hem Play"  recited  and  sung  at  Christ- 
mas time  by  the  Czang6-Sz6kler  of  Devd. 
The  **  Bethlehem  players"  are  12  in 
number. 

Thomas  (T.  H. )  A  fisher-story  and  other 
notes  from  South  Wales.  (Folk-Lore, 
Lond.,  1905,  XVI,  337-340.)  English 
text  of  a  transformation-story  (fish-girl 
lover)  from  Carmarthen.  See  also  the 
same  author's  Some  Folk-Lore  of  South 
Wales  (Cardiff,  1904). 

Variot  {—)  et  Cliaumet(— )  Tables  de 
croissance  dresses  en  1905  d*apres  les 
mensurations  de  4400  enfants  Parisiens 
de  I  k  15  ans.  (C.  R.  Acad.  d.  Sci., 
Paris,  1906,  CXLII,  299-301.  ^  Gives 
curve  and  tables  of  stature  and  weight 
(also  compares  with  results  of  Bowditch, 
Qu6telet,  etc. ).  Foreigners,  sick  and  ab- 
normal individuals  are  not  included.  The 
annual  increment  of  height  is  greatest  for 


402 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


boys  at  14-15  years,  girls  at  2-3  years  ; 
least  at  1 1 -1 2  and  1 5- 1 6  respectively. 
Increment  of  weight  greatest  for  boys  at 
14-15,  girls,  14-15  ;  least  at  3-4  for  both 
sexes.  The  average  stature  of  Parisian 
boys  at  15-16  years  is  greater  than  that  of 
Boston  boys ;  of  girls,  less. 

Vilibald  (S. )  Wogulisch-ostjakische  or- 
namentierte  Rindengef^e.  (Anz.  d. 
Ethnogr.  Abt.  d.  Ung.  Nat.  Mus.  1905, 
III,  25-44,  4  pi.,  9  fgs. )  Treats  of  the 
interesting  ornamented  bark  vessels  of  the 
Wogul-Ostyaks,  of  which  a  collection  of 
50  pieces  (12  dishes  of  birch-bark,  4 
covers  for  fish-dishes,  3  **  tubs,"  a  scoop, 
3  cradles,  9  cylindrical  boxes  of  pine  or 
birch-bark,  1 1  round  plates,  etc.),  partly 
obtained  by  Dr  K.  Papai  and  Dr  J. 
Jank6  from  various  parts  of  the  Wogul 
and  Ostyak  country.  The  native  names 
of  the  ornamental  motifs  are  given  at  pp. 
41-43.  Among  these  are  :  sun,  fish  ly- 
ing, worm,  duck-wing,  pike-tooth,  horse- 
tooth,  dog's  paw,  snake,  pine  cone,  etc. 
The  ornamentation  of  the  Woguls  and 
Ostyaks  is  ''an  original  *  national '  char- 
acteristic of  these  peoples,  highly  devel- 
oped among  them  ;  "  comparison  with 
the  decorative  styles  of  the  Magyars 
gives  only  negative  results. 

Virchow  (  H. )  Bericht  Uber  die  Oertlich- 
keit  (les  **  Flintholm  "  auf  Grund  eines 
am  II  August,  1905,  unter  FUhrung 
des  Dr  Rothmann  ausgefUhrten  Besuches. 
(Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  993- 
996. )  Describes  various  layers  ( particu- 
larly the  **  Kulturschicht")  and  con- 
tents, —  wood,  remains  of  dwellings, 
stone,  bone  and  horn  implements,  re- 
mains of  food-substances,  fragments  of 
pottery,  etc., —  at  a  neolithic  "station" 
on  the  north  end  of  the  island  of  Alsen. 
The  passage-graves  in  the  neighborhood 
have  been  destroyed  by  the  present 
owners. 

Volkov  (T. )  Rapport  sur  les  voyages  en 
Galicie  orientale  et  en  Bukovine  en  1903 
et  1904.  (Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
1905,  v<^  s. ,  VI,  289-294.  ^  Brief  account 
of  author's  investigations  in  eastern  Ga- 
licia  and  Bukovinain  I903-^904.  Gives 
anthropometric  data  (stature,  cephalic 
index,  color  of  hair  and  eyes )  concerning 
112  Huzuls  and  126  Bdrkis,  notes  on 
houses,  costume,  etc.  As  compared  with 
the  Huzuls  the  Borkis  are  less  purely 
mountaineers,  less  conservative  in  dress, 
have  fewer  and  poorer  ornaments.  They 
belong  together,  however,  in  one  group, 
no  fundamental  differences  really  exist- 


ing. The  Huzuls  of  Bukovina  and  Galicia 
are  anthropologically  one.  The  Galician 
and  Bukovinan  Huzuls  are  tallest  (av. 
169 1  mm.)  and  somewhat  more  brachy- 
cephalic.  The  B5rkis  of  Tukla  seem  an 
intermediate  group  between  the  Huzuls 
and  the  Bdrkis. 

Waldstein  ( C. )  What  Herculaneum  offers 
to  archeology.  (Harper's  Mo.,  N.  Y., 
1905,  ex,  733-738,  9  %s. )  Brief  notes 
on  art  objects  (bronzes,  marble  busts, 
mural  paintings  on  marble,  portrait 
statues,  manuscripts,  etc. ),  recovered 
from  Herculaneum.  The  Greek  finds  in 
the  villas  exemplify  the  glorious  age  of 
art.  Piso's  villa  has  been  particularly 
fruitful. 

Weigers  ( — )  Ueber  die  palJlolithischen 
Funde  aus  dem  Interglazial  von  Hundis- 
burg.  ( Z.  f.  Ethn.  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii, 
915-920,  2  fgs. )  Discusses  the  finds  at 
Hundisburg  and  the  opinions  of  Dr 
Favreau  concerning  them.  W.  finds  no 
proof  that  diluvial  man  lived  in  Hundis- 
burg before  the  last  interglacial  time. 

Wherry  (Albinia)  The  dancing-tower 
processions  of  I  taly.  ( Folk-  Lore,  Lond. , 
1905,  XVI,  243-259,  5  pi. )  Treats  of 
the  **Rua"  of  Vicenza  ;  the  Macchina 
Triomphale  or  Cero,  of  Sta  Rosa  at 
Viterbo;  the  **Gigli,"  or  Lilies,  of 
Nola ;  the  festival  of  **  La  Vara"  at 
Messina;  the  festival  of  Sta  Rosalia  at 
Palermo  ;  the  elevation  of  the  Ceri  at 
Gubbio.  The  Ceri^  or  *  *  dancing  towers,  * ' 
figuring  in  George  Eliot's  Romola^  though 
now  extinct  in  Florence,  still  survive  in 
many  other  parts  of  Italy.  To  Mrs  W. 's 
paper  Prof.  N.  W.  Thomas  adds  a 
''Note." 

Wilke  «  Dr )  Beziehungen  der  west-  und 
mitteldeutschen  zur  donaul&ndischen 
Spiral-MSanderkeramik.  (Mitt.  d. 
Anthr.  Ges.  im  Wien,  1905,  xxxv, 
250-269,  56  fgs.)  Discusses  the  rela- 
tions of  the  west  and  central  German  to 
the  Danubian  spiral-meander  pottery. 
The  four  groups  of  ornamental  motives 
(unilinear  continuing  volutes,  double 
volutes,  serpent-lines,  doubling  or  multi- 
plication of  the  simple  two  or  more 
circled  volute-line)  are  briefly  treated. 
According  to  W.  the  spiral  meander  pot- 
tery is  distinct  in  origin  and  development 
from  the  so-called  "  Winkelbandkera- 
mik."  The  ornamentation  of  the  latter 
is  synthetic  in  its  evolution  and  has,  as 
H.  Schmidt  pointed  out,  been  imitated 
from  bodily  ornament ;  the  former  was 
analytically  discovered  by  way  of  com- 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


403 


plicated  groups  of  figures.  The  primi- 
tive home  of  the  spiral-meander  pottery 
was  in  the  lower  Danubian  region. 
Their  distribution  in  the  west  was  prob- 
ably due  to  trade-relations. 

Wilser  ( L. )  Neues  Ober  den  Urmenschen 
von  Krapina.  (Globus,  Bmschwg., 
1905,  LXXXVIIT,  283-284.)  R^sumi 
and  critique  of  Gorjanovic-Kramberger's 
recent  monograph  on  the  primitive  man 
of  Krapina.  G.-K.  assumes  the  exist- 
ence of  but  one  old-diluvial  race.  W. 
denominates  the  oldest  known  human 
race  of  Europe  Homo  primigenius. 

Zaborowski  ( S. )  Demiers  travaux  sur 
I'anthropologie  des  Finlandais.  (R.  de 
rfec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  xv,  415- 
419.)  R^sum*  and  critique  of  Wester- 
lund's  Studier  i  Finlands  anthropologie 
( Helsingfors,  1 900 -1 904).  The  original 
dolichocephaly  of  the  Finns  has  been  in- 
fluenced by  a  brachycephaly  now  domi- 
nant due  to  Lapp  and  Slav  admixture  (in 
the  parts  contiguous  to  present  Slav  areas 
the  brachycephaly  reaches  80  per  cent). 
Finland  proper  has  been  occupied  by 
the  Finns  comparatively  recently. 

Penetration  des  Slaves  et  transfor- 
mation c^phalique  en  Boh^me  et  sur  la 
Vistule.  (Ibid.,  1-17. )  Discusses  the 
migration  of  the  Slavs  (during  our  era 
brachycephaly  has  been  the  sign  of  the 
appearance  and  expansion  of  Slavonic 
speech  ;  in  the  **  centers  of  refuge," 
forests  and  marshes,  there  are  still  to  be 
found  indigenous  dolichocephals,  — 
Lithuanians  and  others)  and  the  changes 
in  cephalic  indices  in  Bohemia  and  the 
region  of  the  Vistula.  Upon  the  Slav 
brachycephalic  peoples  have  imposed 
themselves  other  brachycephals  (Mon- 
golian). Z.  discusses  also  inhumation 
and  incineration  and  their  ethnic  rela- 
tions. The  ancient  Aryans  inhumed 
their  dead ;  the  incinerating  peoples 
were  brachycephalic  brunets  of  Asiatic 
origin,  the  custom  of  burning  the  dead 
being  propagated  simultaneously  with 
brachycephaly. 

AFRICA 

Adamt  (C.  F. )  Reflex  light  from  Africa. 
(Century  Mag.,  N.  Y.,  Lxxxii,  1905, 
loi-i  1 1. )  Gives  author's  impressions  of 
Khartoum  and  "Black  Africa,"  with 
views  on  the  African  in  America,  San 
Domingo  and  1*  gypt  ( a  suggestive  paral- 
lel), the  Philippines,  the  **veiled  protect- 
orate,"   etc.     Mr    Adams,    who    takes 


Omdurman  to  mark  **in  commerce,  in 
letters  and  in  art,  in  science  and  in 
architecture,  the  highest  point  of  develop- 
ment yet  reached  by  any  African  race," 
says  of  the  Soudanese  in  general,  **  in 
them  not  the  slightest  inherent  power  of 
development  has  as  yet  come  to  the 
surface," —  they  have  **  neither  domesti- 
cated the  elephant  nor  invented  pottery." 
The  author  is  very  naive  in  some  of  his 
ai^uments. 

African  topics  reyiewad.  (J.  Afric.  Soc., 
Lond,  1905-6,  V,  87-95,  197-21 1.) 
Contams  notes  on  direct  taxation,  the 
Aswa  region  of  the  Latuka  country,  the 
women  of  the  Bahima  (cows  are  the 
center  of  life  with  these  people),  a  list 
of  Kabi  kings,  the  custom  of  hlonipa 
among  the  Lokele  of  Stanley  Falls ; 
procedure  in  native  courts  on  the  Gold 
Coast,  swearing  of  a  chiefs  oath,  palm- 
leaf  notice  of  trespass-case ;  Boers  and 
game-destruction,  poisonous  snakes,  big 
game  of  Uganda,  hlonipa  in  Bantu  ( list 
of  30  Kele  words  and  their  hlonipa 
equivalents). 

Atlantiachen  (Die)  Kfistenstildte  Ma- 
rokkoa.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1905, 
Lxxxviii,  201-305,  261-266,  12  fgs.) 
The  illustrations,  taken  from  Montel's 
Voyage  au  Maroc^  are  of  ethnographic 
interest. 

Bailey  (  W.  F. )  The  native  and  the  white 
in  South  Africa.  (Ninet.  Cent.,  Lond., 
1906,  314-330. )  Discusses  the  problem 
and  the  various  solutions  proposed,  — 
'*  the  problem  is  the  nearest  approach  to 
an  insoluble  one  that  can  be  conceived." 
The  question  in  the  future  is  <*  Is  South 
Africa  fitted  by  nature  and  circumstances 
to  be  a  white  man's  land  ?  "  Meantime 
the  native  is  increasing  more  rapidly 
than  the  white  ;  he  is  beginning  to  think, 
read  and  write  for  himself.  Taught  that 
he  is  equal  with  the  white  man  in  the 
sight  of  God,  he  will  not  long  be  content 
to  remain  so  much  his  inferior  in  the 
sight  of  man. 

Bailland  (E.)  The  problem  of  agri- 
cultural development  in  West  Africa. 
(J.  Afric.  Soc.,  Lond.,  1905-6,  v,  117- 
129.)  Author  holds  that  **  for  the 
present  the  problem  of  the  exploitation 
of  West  Africa  must  be  effected  in  a  dif- 
ferent way  from  that  to  be  pursued  in 
semi -equatorial  regions,  such  as  those  of 
the  Sudan."  In  West  Africa  the  em- 
ployment of  manure  is  difiicult  (by 
reason  of  the  heavy  rains)  and  the  use  of 
the  plough  often  impossible  (the  roots 


404 


AMERJCAX  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[3L  5L,  S.  1906 


?1m* 


toe]  txifU;, 

3Mtk  J.;  Dk  XadblKiamea  der  Sols- 
kftfKem  '  Waa^^i ;  m  I>egtid>-Oit«frika 
fO>>Uu,  hrmAwg,  1905,  Lxxxviii, 
197-201,  222-226  y  Treau  <>f  the  bis- 
v^ry — t vo  miij^ratioof,  f 825-I S60 —  nee 
fofzfttre,  tn)>eft,  pofmlaskiii,  UagBage, 
diC,  <iif  the  Wanfooi  of  Genua  Eut 
Afrka.  The  geoealofpca]  trees  of  the 
fjmauL  ajyi  Tavaete  ttodu  are  given, 
alto  a  crAiparatWe  vocabolarf  of  55 
vord*  ifi  KiMoiii,  KiogODJ,  Kidendaiili, 
Kimo4i  and  KinyaMa,  alw  of  the  Kis- 
Mto  tlave-jargon.  The  Kaffir  desceod- 
aotA  and  the  klave  element  nomber  alto- 
gether fome  500-700.  B.  spent  35^ 
yeart  in  the  owntry. 

CspitAll  n.. )  //  D'AgDtl  ^  A.  )  RapporU 
de  VtL%yyit  et  de  la  f^ole  k  Tipoque 
n^olithkjue.  TK.  de  Ytc,  d'Anthr.  de 
Pari»,  1905,  XV,  302-316,  12  fgj.>  De- 
ftCiilMrs  a  Mrrie^  of  24  flints  from  the  rocky 
i%let  of  kion  on  the  coast  of  Provence 
near  Marseilles,  which  resemble  to  iden- 
tity a  airrespr>nding  series  from  Fajrom 
in  Kgypt  (such  specimens  being  of  a 
kind  extremely  rare  ootside  of  £g3rpt). 
The  authors  txrliere  in  the  contempo- 
raneity of  the  neolithic  Egyptian  popu- 
lation and  that  of  the  kitchen-middens 
and  sands  of  the  islet  of  Rion  ;  also  that 
the  Egyptians  came  to  kion  about 
5000  H.  fJ.,  leaving  their  flints  as  evi- 
dence of  their  temporary  sr>joum,  —  some 
of  the  refuK  heaps  antedate  this  period. 
After  the  Egyptians  came  the  Ligurians 
(whilr  Kion  was  still  a  peninsula)  as 
shown  by  the  presence  of  their  jxculiar 
mttery,  then  the  Orceks,  the  Romans, 
leaving  also  ceramic  evidence. 

Cobhrnm  (H. )  The  Idem  secret  society. 
(J.  Afric.  Soc,  I>ond.,  1905-6,  v,  40- 
42. )  The  Nigerian  Uem  society  is  **  a 
Ixxly  of  men  formed  for  the  purpose  of 
governing  the  clan,  household,  or  family 
to  which  they  belong."  Each  idrm  has 
n  siM*cial  significant  name,  a  distinguish- 
ing badge.  The  head  of  the  house  is 
always  the  president,  and  must  give  an 
annual  feast  to  the  members.  The  evil 
character  of  the  itir/n  is  largely  exag- 
gerated. 

Cotton  (J.  C)  Calabar  stories.  (Ibid., 
I9i-I9'>. )  Clives  English  texts  of  10 
brief  stories  (cosmogonic,  observation- 
myths,  animal-tales),  telling  why 
monkeys  inha))it  trees,  where  the  stars 
came  from,  why  some  monkeys  have 
white  faces,   why  the  pig's  nose  is  de- 


enames. 
(J.)     L'hafaitaxiaa  ct  'iC 

et  an  Chan.  .  L'Anthio- 
pologie.  Park,  1905,  xvi,  639^6, 
13  %s.  I  Treats  of  the  hoose  'Coo^ 
type,  Bnada  type  ;  NieUim  type,  Kabn 
type,  Dendji  type;  Banna  type,  Sno 
type,  Tchad  type,  — the  first  group 
belongs  to  the  rainy  region,  the  third  to 
the  arid,  vfaile  the  second  is  inter- 
mediate) and  the  village  ^the  natnra] 
grouping  vas  by  fiunilies, — a  village 
begins  as  " lome  one's  place*'  ;  race 
little  inflncnoes  the  disposition  of  vil- 
lages, rather  the  nature  of  the  countiy  ; 
each  has  his  own  house  ;  the  more  popu- 
lous the  village,  the  rarer  the  huts 
without  enclosures ;  in  fetishism  isolation 
and  indecision  are  characteristic  ;  Islam 
has  introduced  some  modifications  of  a 
social  nature  ;  the  Horo  have  "  trans- 
portable villages*' )  among  the  natives  of 
the  Congo  and  the  Chari. 

DeMoq^  (J. )  The  temple  of  Susinak. 
( Harper's  Mo.,  N.  Y.,  1905,  ex,  875- 
8S4,  16  fgs. )  Describes  the  ruins  of  the 
temple  of  Susinak  ( in  the  center  of  the 
tell  of  Susa)  and  the  objects  therein  dis- 
covered (diorite  stele  of  Hammurabi, 
2000  B.  c.  ;  stele  of  Nuram  Sin,  ca» 
3750  B.  c. ;  obelisk  of  Munichtusu  ; 
title-deeds  or  kudurms ;  ex-votos,  of- 
ferings, etc.) 

Dennett  ( R.  E. )  The  Bavili  alphabet  re- 
stored. (J.  Afric.  Soc.,  Lond.,  1905-6, 
V,  48-58. )  Author  seeks  to  show  that 
**  in  the  death  shroud  used  in  the  burial 
of  the  king  of  Ix>ango  ( French  Congo ) 
there  is  the  living  evidence  of  a  formula 
of  the  philosophy  that  lies  at  the  back  of 
the  Bavili* s  mind."  This  formula  is 
filled  in  with  the  numbers  1-26.  This 
article  is  a  linguistic-metaphysic  tour  de 
force. 

Duchemin  ( — )  Les  m^galithes  de  la 
Gambia.  (L'Anthropologie,  Paris,  1905, 
XVI,  633-638,  8  fgs.)  Describes  two 
types  of  megalithic  tombs  (one  with  cir- 
cle of  monoliths,  without  a  central  tumu- 
lus ;  the  other  with  central  tumulus 
without  monolithic  inclosure ;  both 
usually  fronted  by  a  line  of  monolithis 
facing  eastward);  investigated  by  Capt. 
D.  in  1904.  They  are  situated  at 
N'Gayen,     Diama    Passy,    Keur    Sam, 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL    LITERATURE 


405 


Kountouata,  Khodiam,  and  Dialato.  Hu- 
man remains  and  pottery  ( the  latter  not 
very  different  from  that  of  West  African 
peoples  to-day)  were  discovered.  The 
skulls  are  Nigritic. 

Flinders-Petrie  ( W.  F. )  The  Egyptians 
in  Sinai.  An  account  of  recent  dis- 
coveries. (Harper's  Mo.,  N.  Y.,  1906, 
cxii,  440-447,  9  fgs. )  Gives  account 
of  the  excavations  at  the  site  of  the 
temple  of  Saralit  el  Khadem,  Sinai  and 
the  remains  there  discovered.  The 
Egyptian  records  in  this  region  date  back 
to  4500  B.  c.  (rock  sculpture  of  King 
Semerkhet  of  First  Dynasty),  and  the 
Egyptians  mined  turquoise  here  4000- 
1100  B.  c.  The  mining-record  tablet 
dates  from  2500  B.  c.  Here  too  is  to  be 
found  **  the  oldest  example  of  the  system 
of  Semitic  worship." 

France  ( H. )  Customs  of  the  Awuna 
tribes.  (J.  Afric.  Soc.  Lond.,  1905-6, 
V,  38-40. )  Describes  briefly  a  fetish - 
dance  of  worshipers  of  Hebieso  (god  of 
thunder)  at  W6,  a  village  on  the  Gold 
Coast.     The  dancers  were  women. 

Gentz  ( — )  Die  englische  Eingeborenen- 
politik  in  Siidafrika.  ( Globus,  Bmschwg. , 
1905,  Lxxxviii,  266-267. )  The  English 
policy  is  **to  gain  time,"  and  to  keep  for 
the  present  the  good-will  of  the  natives. 
The  race-struggle  is  by  no  means  ended 
and  South  Africa  may  yet  hear  the  cry 
'^  the  dark  continent  for  the  blacks." 

Greene  ( H.  C. )  A  great  discovery  in 
Egypt.  (Century  Mag.,  N.  Y.,  1905, 
Lxxxi,  60-76,  19  fgs. )  Gives  account 
of  the  discovery  in  February,  1905,  in 
the  Valley  of  the  Kings,  of  the  tomb  of 
loua  and  Tioua,  father  and  mother  of 
Queen  Tii  of  the  eighteenth  dynasty 
(famous  for  having  changed  the  national 
religion ),  the  mummies,  rich  furniture 
( the  offerings  to  the  dead  were  the  real 
things  themselves,  not  mere  models).  A 
ventilated  provision  trunk  of  reeds  has 
quite  a  modern  aspect. 

Grenfell  ( Alice)  Egyptian  mythology  and 
the  Bible.  (Monist,  Chicago,  1906,  xvi, 
169-200,  22  fgs.)  Cites  Old  Testament 
(voice-creation  of  light,  etc.,  precedence 
of  night  over  day,  maker-formula  of  ad- 
dress to  the  Almighty,  processional  boat 
and  ark,  oneness  of  God,  washing  with 
milk,  "the  beginning  of  wisdom,"  the 
just  man)  and  New  Testament  parallels 
(Alpha  and  Omega,  the  golden  girdle, 
the  wool-white  hair,  the  second  death, 
the  sea  of  glass,  the  four  beasts  full  of 
eyes,  the  four  angels  at  the  four  corners 


of  the  earth,  tears  wip>ed  away,  scorpion 
tails,  lion-headed  horses  with  serpent- 
headed  tails,  many  crowns,  chaining  the 
dragon,  the  lake  of  Are,  the  wall  of  jas- 
per). These  are  **a  few  traces  of 
Egyptian  influence  "  in  the  Bible. 

Hamy  (E.  T.)  Note  sur  ungisement  de 
labradorites  taill^es  d^couvert  par  le  Dr 
Maclaud  au  confluent  de  la  F^fin^  et  du 
Rio  Grande,  Guin^e  Portuguaise. 
(L'Anthropologie,  Paris,  1905,  xvi, 
625-628,  2  fgs.)  Brief  account  of  the 
discovery  in  February,  1903,  at  the  junc- 
tion of  the  F^fln^  and  the  Rio  Grande  in 
Portuguese  Guinea  of  some  100  flints 
(worked  labradorites),  indicating  a  pre- 
historic ** station"  (the  negroes  of  the 
Rio  Grande  region  have  no  legend  about 
these  stones,  do  not  know  their  former 
use,  and  assign  no  peculiar  property  to 
them). 

Huguet  (J. )  Recherches  sur  les  habitants 
du  Mzab.  (R.  de  l'6c..  d'Anthrop.  de 
Paris,  1905,  XV,  18-31.)  Treats  of 
population  (census  of  1 896-7  showed 
25,300),  physical  characters  and  ethnic 
elements  ( negro  slaves  from  all  parts  of 
Africa  ;  Arabs  ;  Jews  ;  Mzabites  proper; 
mitiSf  Negro-Mzabites),  anthropometric 
data  of  10  Mzabite,  10  Jewish,  10  Arab, 
10  negro  children,  4  mitis  ( Mzabite- 
Negro)  and  one  Mzabite- Jew  mitts.  The 
Mzabite  is  physically  superior  to  the 
Kabyle  but  inferior  to  the  Tuareg  ;  he  is 
more  intelligent  than  the  Arab. 

Superstition,  magie  et  sorcellerie  en 

Afrique.  (Ibid.,  349-360.)  Treats  of 
fetishism,  sorcerers  (in  Africa  **the  first 
king  was  a  successful  sorcerer"),  etc. 
Based  on  Chanel,  Kingsley,  Fargeas, 
Schweinfurth,  Burton,  Guiral,  Nebout, 
etc.  H.  believes  in  religious  evolution 
from  fetishism  (animism,  naturism), 
through  polytheism  to  monotheism.  The 
most  powerful  elements  of  African  society 
are  the  sorcerers,  *  *  magicians, "  or  *  *  medi- 
cine-men." European  civilization  has  not 
weakened  their  power  as  much  as  is  gen- 
erally believed. 

Johnston  (A.)  The  colonization  of  British 
East  Africa.  (J.  Afric.  Soc.  Lond., 
1905-6,  V,  28-37.)  Discusses  ethnic 
and  political  conditions.  Advocates  a 
** British  first"  policy  for  "this  healthy 
territory."  Also  **  administration  for  a 
time  in  water-tight  compartments." 

Junod  (H.  A.)  The  native  language 
and  native  education.  (Ibid.,  1-14. ) 
Argues  in  favor  of  the  method  of  **  ver- 
nacular at  the  base  and  English  at  the 


406 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


top.**  The  native  child  **is  a  little 
Bantu,  having  learned  in  his  home  a 
nice,  expressive,  though  not  cultured, 
language,  in  which  the  mind  of  his  fore- 
fathers has  been  incorporated.**  This 
he  ought  to  study  first,  then  English. 

EOnigin  (Die)  NJawingi  Ton  Mpororo. 
(Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1905,  Lxxxviii, 
337.)  Gives,  after  v.  Stuemer  in  the 
Kolonialblatt  for  Oct  I,  1905,  an  ac- 
count of  a  visit  to  Njawingi,  the  female 
ruler  of  Mpororo,  or  rather  the  priestess 
Kiakutuma,  now  the  tool  of  the  stronger 
party  in  the  state.  A  real  Njawingi 
probably  once  existed,  and  a  popular 
belief  in  her  divinity  and  immortality 
has  arisen. 

La  Chard  ( L.  W. )  The  arrow-poisons  of 
Northern  Nigeria.  (J.  Afric.  Soc, 
Lond.,  1905-6,  V,  22-27. )  Gives  results 
of  examination  of  7  vegetable  and  3  ani- 
mal (obtained  from  decaying  tissue) 
poisons.  The  Hausa  names  of  18  kinds 
of  plants  used  in  making  poison  are 
given.  For  man,  the  natives  believe 
that  vegetable  poison  alone  is  insufficient, 
so  the  arrows  are  coated  with  the  animal 
fluid  after  the  vegetable  has  dried. 

Laloy  (L. )  Le  Quaternaire  d*£^gypte 
d*apr^s  M.  Blanckenhom.  (L'Anthro- 
pologie,  Paris,  1905,  xvi,  664-672.) 
R^sumi  and  critique  of  article  by 
Blanckenhorn  in  the  Zeitschr,  d, 
deutschen geolog,  Ges.  (Berlin)  for  1 90 1. 

MacAlpine  (A.  G. )  Tonga  religious 
beliefs  and  customs.  (J.  Afric.  Soc, 
Lond.,  1905-6,  V,  187-190.)  De- 
scribes death  and  beliefs  concerning  it 
(breath  =  soul  ;  depwirted  spirit  ;  inter- 
ment) among  the  Tonga  of  the  south- 
west corner  of  Bandawe.  Reprinted 
from  The  Aurora  of  February,  1 905. 

Maguire  ( P. )  West  African  dyeing. 
(Ibid.,  151-153.)  Describes  briefly 
indigo-dyeing.  Reprinted  from  The 
Manchester  Guardian, 

Melange  (Le)  des  races  au  Congo  fran- 
cs. (R.  de  rfec.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris, 
1905,  XV,  421-422.)  Observations  of 
M.  F.  Challaye,  reproduced  from  Le 
Temps  for  May  27,  1 905.  Calls  atten- 
tion to  the  mixture  of  races  in  process  at 
the  new  Brazzaville,  in  the  French 
Congo. 

Melusine  (A)  Story  from  the  Gold 
Coast.  (J.  Afric.  Soc.,  Lond.,  1905-6, 
V,  104-107. )  Gives  origin  myth  of  the 
Safur  Nannara  family  of  Chama  on  the 
Gold  Coast,  said  to  be  descended  from 


the  Bointo.  The  wife  disappeared  when 
called,  in  abuse,  a  flsh. 

Merrick  (G. )  Languages  in  Northern 
Nigeria.  (Ibid.,  43-47. )  Author  esti- 
mates that  in  the  ranks  of  the  Northern 
Nigerian  Regiment  some  60  or  70  lan- 
guages are  spoken.  A  list  of  tribes  is 
given.  This  region  of  Africa  is  prolitic 
in  varieties  of  speech. 

Nerinton  (H.  W. )  The  slave-trade  of 
to-day.  ( Harper* s  Mo.,  N.  Y.,  1905, 
CXI,  668-676,  849-858;  cxii,  1 14-122, 
237-246,  327-337,  30  fgs. )  Sections 
3-7,  treating  of  Portuguese  slavery  and 
contract-labor,   "the   hungry  country" 

iCuanza  to  Mashiko),  down  to  the  coast 
to  Benguela  and  the  sea),  the  slaves  at 
sea,  the  islands  of  doom  (San  Thom6 
and  Principe  in  the  Gulf  of  Guinea). 
The  complete  account  of  Mr  N.*s  investi- 
gations has  been  published  with  the  title 
A  Modern  Slavery  (N.  Y.,  1906). 

PapillanlttG.)  Crinesd*Abydos.  (Bull. 
Soc.  d*Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  v«  s.,  vi, 
260-269. )  Describes  with  details  of 
measurement  the  material  (7  male,  4 
female  skulls)  brought  by  M.  Am^lineau 
from  Abydos,  and  compares  it  with 
Broca's  Sakkarah  and  Chantre's  El 
Khozan  crania.  The  cephalic  indices 
for  the  three  series  average,  respectively, 
for  men  and  women  75,  78.8 ;  76.2, 
78.1  ;  73,  74.7.  The  so-called  «*  Osiris 
skull '  *  is  probably  female.  Three  types 
of  skull  occur,  representing  ethnic 
varieties. 

Pirie  (G. )  Northeastern  Rhodesia,  its 
people  and  products.  Part  I.  (J.  Afric. 
Soc.,  Lond.,  1905-6,  V,  130-147. )  His- 
torical notes,  etc.,  on  the  Awemba,  their 
chiefs,  wars,  etc.,  1730- 1896. 

Ramsay  \Capt.)  Bamum.  (Globus, 
Brnschwg.,  1905,  272-273,  2  fgs.) 
Brief  account  of  Chief  Joia  of  Bamum  in 
southwestern  Adamaua,  and  his  people. 
A  wooden  seat,  testifying  to  the  art  of 
the  Bamum  tribes,  is  now  in  the  Berlin 
Ethnological  Museum. 

Roux  ( — )  Note  sur  un  cas  d' inversion 
sexuelle  chez  une  Comorienne.  ( Bull. 
Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  v«  s.,  vi, 
218-219.)  Gives  account  of  a  woman  of 
the  island  of  Maintirano,  on  the  west  coast 
of  Madagascar,  who  was  a  sarindahy 
(** having  the  appearance  of  a  man"), 
whose  sexually  inverse  practices  lasted 
beyond  her  sixtieth  year, —  the  wooden 
phallus  used  by  her  was  obtained  by  the 
author.  In  Madagascar  there  exists  a  sect 
of  male  sexual  perverts  called  Sekatra, 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


407 


—  the  individual  members  are  termed 
jtfrj'w^az/V  (**  having  the  appearance  of 
women" ). 

Schmidt  ( W. )  Lieder  und  Ges&nge  der 
Ewhe-Neger,  Ge-Dialekt.  (Anthropos, 
Salzburg,  1905,  I,  65-81.)  First  part 
of  collection  (native  text,  translation, 
music)  of  texts  of  songs  in  the  Ge  dialect 
of  the  Ewhe  negroes  of  West  Africa, — 
three  songs  of  Anecho  young  women  are 
given.  The  composers  of  songs,  hakpato^ 
often  have  their  singers  or  declaimers, 
hasino.  The  professional  singers  sing 
loud  and  distinctly  in  contrast  to  the 
ordinary  singer.  Both  hakpato  and 
hasino  are  usually  members  of  fetish 
societies  and  satirize  women  and  their 
affairs  in  particular. 

Smith  (M.  L. )  Arab  music.  (J.  Afric. 
Soc,  Lond.,  1905-6,  V,  148-150. )  Calls 
attention  to  the  efforts  made  by  the 
governor-general  of  Algeria  to  preserve 
Arab  music.  The  Touc hiat  Zidattf  (iht 
instrumental  prelude  at  the  beginning  of 
the  A^uba  or  opera  of  the  Zidane  mode) 
has  lately  been  performed  by  military 
bands  in  Algiers.  Miss  S.'s  article  is 
translated  from  the  French  of  M.  Jules 
Rouanel. 

Spire  (F. )  Rain-making  in  equatorial 
Africa.  (Ibid.,  15-21,  3  fgs. )  Brief 
account  of  **  rain-making,"  as  exem- 
plified for  the  author  by  Ledju,  the 
hereditary  chief  rain-maker  of  the  Bari 
tribe,  and  his  assistants  in  May,  1904. 
Previous  to  British  occupation  unsuccess- 
ful "rain-makers"  were  killed  or 
severely  punished.  The  wet  season  is  the 
rain-making  time.  At  other  seasons  the 
natives  are  incredulous. 

Tan  Thiel.  Le  Sorcier  dans  I'Afrique 
^quatoriale.  (Anthropos,  Salzburg, 
1905,  I,  49-59.)  Treats  of  the  *' sor- 
cerer" as  fortune-teller  and  diviner 
(augury  by  hen,  poison,  calabash  and 
seeds,  water,  etc. ) ,  priest  ( sacrifices, 
r6le  of  serpent  ;  the  great  initiation  or 
kubandwa^  —  described  in  some  detail  ; 
it  lasts  four  days  ;  vocabulary  of  the 
luchwezi ox  ritual  language),  and  doctor. 

Weissenborn  (J.  )  Animal- worship  in  Af- 
rica. (J.  Afric.  Soc.  I^nd.,  1905-6,  v, 
167-181. )  First  part  of  a  translation  of 
Dr  W.'s  article  in  the  Deutsche  Geogr. 
Blatter,  vol.  xxvill.  In  extended  form 
the  same  monograph  appeared  in  the 
Int.  Arch,  f,  Ethnogr.  for  1 904.  About 
60  arimals  are  considered  in  the  last,  — 
in  the  present  article  the  goat,  sheep,  ox 
and  cattle  (buffalo  not  revered  except 


among  Zulus),  serpent  (in  some  detail), 
etc. 

Werner  ( A. )  Recent  work  in  Bantu 
philology.  (Ibid.,  59-70.)  Reviews 
W.  H.  Stapleton's  Comparative  Hand- 
book of  Congo  Languages  (Yakusu, 
1903)  and  Suggestions  for  a  Grammar 
of  Bangala  (1903)  and  R.  Wolffs 
Grammatik  der  Kinga-Sprache.  The 
Bangala  is  a  lingua  franca  which  is 
spreading  rapidly  all  over  that  part  of 
the  Congo  not  influenced  by  the  Arabs. 
This  Bangala  has  lost  the  alliterative 
concord,  its  adjectives  are "  indeclinable, 
its  numerals  invariable,  it  has  given  up 
the  possessive  adjective  {my  now  =zwith 
me)y  has  an  *  *  ungrammatical "  present 
tense,  etc. 

Native  affairs  in  Natal.    (Ibid.,  72- 

86. )  R6sum6s  data  of  the  Blue  Book 
for  Native  Affairs  for  1 904,  dealing 
with  Natal  and  Zululand.  The  evil  in- 
fluence of  depraved  Europeans,  especially 
upon  native  women,  the  undermining  of 
native  custom  and  tradition  by  European 
influence  (the  contrast  between  the 
**  Kraal  girl"  and  the  **  Mission  girl" 
is  marked),  the  ravages  of  liquor,  etc., 
are  referred  to.  The  remedy  for  **  native 
lawlessness,"  is  *•  to  know  the  nati%'e." 
Notes  on  the  Shambala   and  some 


allied  languages  of  Fast  Africa.  (Ibid., 
1 54- 1 66,  map. )  Treats  briefly  of  the  pho- 
netics ('*  /irt-disease,"  tone),  and  gram- 
mar (/«  and  bu  classes,  diminutive,  ono- 
matopoetic  elements)  of  Shambala,  Bon- 
dei,  Zigula,  and  Nguru. 

ASIA 

Von  Brandt  ( M. )  Nach  dem  Kriege. 
Japan  in  politischer  und  wirtschaftlicher 
Beziehung.  (Globus,  Brnschwg,  1905, 
Lxxxviii,  213-216. )  Author  points  out 
effects  of  the  war  upon  Japanese  charac- 
ter and  institutions.  In  the  recent  dis- 
turbances in  Tokio  students  were  often 
the  leader  of  mobs.  There  is  danger  for 
the  "old  men." 

Buchner(M.)  Zum  Buddhatypus.  (Ibid., 
253-254.)  Discusses  two  peculiarities 
of  the  canonical  Buddha  type,  the  piercing 
of  the  ear-lobes  and  the  snail-like  curly 
locks — the  former  derived  from  the  thick 
ear-plugs  once  in  use.  The  latter  may  be 
due  to  the  difficulty  primitive  art  finds  in 
imitating  the  human  hair, — one  way  in 
Oceania  and  Asia  was  to  place  a  number 
of  small  snail-shells  on  the  head.  To 
substitute  dough  for  this  and  then  color 


4o8 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


it  black  was  another  step  observed  by  the 
author  in  China. 

d'Snjoy  (P.)  P^nalitis  chinoises.  Peines 
et  supplices.  Sursis  et  revision.  (  Bull. 
Soc.  d*Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905,  v«  s.,  vi, 
247-254. )  General  account  of  Chinese 
punishments,  —  they  are  both  numerous 
and  diverse,  and  are  of  two  sorts,  those 
inflicted  as  direct  punishments  for  offenses 
committed  and  those  accessory  to  the 
former  in  special  cases.  The  former 
number  eight :  whip  or  rod  ;  bastinado  ; 
detention  with  hard  labor ;  transporta- 
tion ;  exile ;  deportation  with  military 
servitude  ;  pillory  ;  death.  The  acces- 
sory punishments  are  bastinado  and 
branding.  In  capital  cases  respite  and 
revision  are  possible. 

Oil  (S. )  Fdbulas  et  refranes  anamitas. 
(Anthropos,  Salzburg,  1906,  I,  82-90.) 
First  part  of  a  collection  (native  text  with 
Spanish  translation)  of  Annamese  fables 
(the  toad  and  the  tiger;  19  proverbs) 
from  the  province  of  Nam-Dinh. 

OOU  (W.)  Wilh.  Filchners  Reise  in 
Ost-Tibet.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1905, 
Lxxxviii,  149-154,  6  fgs.)  ConUins  a 
few  notes  on  the  Tanguts. 

Onetdon  (H.)  La  litt^rature  khmdre  et 
le  Buddhisme.  (Anthropos,  Salzburg, 
1906,  I,  91-109,  6  fgs.)  Lists,  r^sum^s, 
and  comments  upon  the  literature  of  the 
Khmers,  or  Cambodians  ( texts,  authors, 
translators,  copyists,  general  themes, 
etc. )  and  discusses  the  effects  of  Bud- 
dhism, — **  if  Brahmanisro  has  created  in 
Cambodia  che/s-d"  oeuvrs  of  architecture, 
Buddhism  has  killed  its  literature." 

Haberer  (  —  )  Ueber  die  Menschenrassen 
des  japanischen  Reiches.  (Z.  f.  Ethn., 
Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  241-244. )  Treats 
chiefly  of  the  peoples  of  the  island  of 
Formosa,  the  llakka  ( Kwantung  Chi- 
nese) of  the  west  coast;  the  Hoklo 
(Fukien  Chinese)  of  the  west  coast 
towns ;  the  Malay  population  ( seven 
groups,  Atayal,  Vonum,  Tsou,  Tsalises, 
Pauvan,  Puyuma,  Ami), — the  Japa- 
nese term  the  Malays  Sfhanshin 
( **  savages  " ).  The  independent  For- 
mosan  tribes  number  some  115,000. 
The  adjacent  island  of  Kotosho  or  Botel 
Tobago  is  inhabited  by  a  harmless, 
primitive  people,  ca.  3,000  souls.  The 
Japanese  themselves  are  a  **  Mongol- 
Malay  mixture." 

Iyer  (L.  K.  A.  K.)  The  Izhuvas  of 
Cochin.  ( Ethnogr.  Surv.  of  the  Cochin 
State,  Monogr.  No.  10,  Emakulam, 
1905,    1-79,  5    pis.)     Treats   of  tribal 


names,  caste,  titles,  houses ;  marriage 
and  sex-relations,  puberty-rites,  child- 
birth, and  ceremonies  connected  with 
pregnancy  and  lying-in,  inheritance, 
magic,  sorcery,  witchcraft,  religion  ( Kali, 
Sakti,  Sastha,  hook-swinging,  minor 
deities  and  demons,  ancestor-worship, 
temples,  serpent-worship,  death  and  fun- 
eral ceremonies,  pollution-bathing)  caste- 
occupations,  cultivation  (paddy,  cocoa- 
nut,  sesamum ),  food,  status  among  the 
Hindus,  dress,  etc.  Contains  many 
valuable  data. 

Laufer  ( B. )  Zum  Bilde  des  Pilgers  Hsiian 
Tsang.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1905, 
LXXXVIII,  257-258.)  Discusses  the 
various  paintings,  images,  etc.,  purport- 
ing to  represent  HsUan  Tsang.  Accord- 
ing to  Chinese  reports  a  fresco  painting 
of  him  exists  in  the  Jo-K*ang  temple  at 
Lhasa. 

Ein  angebliches  Christusbild  aus  der 

T'ang-Zeit.  (Ibid.,  281-283,  3  fgs.) 
Discusses  a  picture  reproduced  by  Giles 
in  his  Introd.  to  the  Hist,  of  Chinese  Art, 
and  by  him  thought  to  represent  Jesus 
and  two  Nestorian  priests,  and  to  belong 
to  the  seventh  century.  L.  attributes  it 
to  the  sixteenth  century,  and  shows  that 
the  flgures  are  Buddha,  Lao-Tse,  and 
Confucius. 

Masniac  ( C.  V. )  A  visit  to  the  Court  of 
theTashi  Lama.  (Ninet.  Cent.,  Lond., 
1906,  255-270.)  Contains  notes  on 
monasteries,  Tibetan  head-gear,  horse- 
trappings,  ofHcial  dress,  medical  services, 
the  Tashi  I^ma  and  his  surroundings, 
the  monastic  city  of  Tashilhiimpo  (  with 
the  tombs  of  the  Lamas),  etc. 

Moore  ( D.  M. )  Three  days  sojourn  in 
Portuguese  Goa.  (Cheltenham  Indies' 
Coll.  Mag.,  Chelt.,  1 906,  43-49.) 
Portuguese  who  come  to  Goa  **do  noth- 
ing," have  no  idea  of  sport,  never  bring 
their  wives,  and  smoke  continuallv  in 
miserable  cafi6s.  The  old  city  is  in  ruins, 
and  the  Goanese  furnish  the  English  in 
India  with  many  cooks,  clerks,  etc. 

Rous  ( — )  Contribution  ^  I'^tude  an- 
thropologique  de  I'annamite  tonkinois. 
(Bull.  Soc.  d'Anthr.  de  Paris,  1905, 
v«  s.,  VI,  321-350,  4  fgs. )  Gives  icono- 
graphic  (10  types  figured),  anthropo- 
metric and  anatomic  (av.  stat.  1622  mm.; 
av.  weight  52.2  kilogr. ;  av.  chest-girth 
795.9),  physiological  and  psychological 
(acclimation  good  in  Delta,  poor  in 
Upper  Tonkin  ;  acquisition  of  language 
by  child  not  more  precocious  than  Euro- 
pean ;  memory  well -developed,  initiative 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


409 


less ;  intelligence  lively ;  affective  feel- 
ings less  developed  than  among  whites  ; 
resistance  to  pain  greater  among  the  poor 
classes  than  among  the  rich,  but  general 
sensibility  to  pain  hardly  less  among 
Annamitesthan  among  Europeans ;  well- 
developed  religiosity  "hereditary";  pa- 
triotism marked ;  honesty  equal  to  that 
in  general  of  French  peasants  ;  among 
chief  vices  are  gambling,  opium-using,  — 
pederasty  not  so  common  as  generally 
believed ),  and  pathologic  data  (dominant 
disease  is  malaria  ;  typhoid  fever  is  rare ; 
ulcers  known  as  *'  Annamite  sores"  are 
common)  concerning  the  Annamites  of 
Tonkin.  The  anthropometric  data  relate 
to  70,  the  medical  to  146  individuals. 

TanaLka(T. )  Shinranism  —  A  Study  in 
Japanese  Buddhism.  (Hartf.  Sem.  Rec., 
Hartford,  Conn.,  1905-6,  xvi,  35-58.) 
Treats  of  the  life,  teaching  and  doctrines 
of  Shinran  (1173-1262  A.  d.  ),  the 
originator  of  a  system  of  Buddhism, 
which  T.  styles  **  a  form  of  protestantism 
( Buddhism  is  '  but  Roman  Catholicism, 
without  Christ,  and  in  Asiatic  form') 
believing  in  Amitabha  Buddha  ( no  real 
historical  figure)  instead  of  Jesus  Christ." 

VOlling  (A  )  Die  Haartracht  der  Chin- 
esen.  (Anthropos,  Salzburg,  1905,  I, 
60-64,  3  fgs. )  Describes  the  hair-dress 
of  the  Chinese  (the  same  with  boys  and 
girls  till  4-5  years  ;  or  at  the  latest  6 ;  a 
sort  of  Franciscan  tonsure  for  boys  up 
to  12,  then  adult  style  ;  girls  of  6  years 
unite  the  earlier  three  **  tails  "  into  one, 
and  have  front  of  head  shaved,  —  other 
varieties  are  noled )  young  and  adult. 
Mourning  interferes  with  head-dress  and 
Christianity  has  also  initiated  some 
changes  in  certain  communities. 

W.  (R. )  Ethnische  EigentUmlichkeiten 
des  Japanerfusses.  (Globus,  Bmschwg., 
1906,  Lxxxviii,  317-318.)  R^sum6s 
Buntaroand  Yaso  Adachi's  recent  studies 
of  the  Japanese  foot. 

White  (G.  E. )  Present  day  sacrifice 
in  Asia  Minor.  (Hartf.  Sem.  Rec, 
Hartford,  Conn.,  1905-6,  xvi,  113- 
121.)  In  general,  **the  common 
people  of  our  peninsula  offer  sacrifice 
voluntarily  at  the  critical  periods  of  life, 
perform  the  service  with  or  without  a 
priest  or  imam,  and  use  the  meat  much 
as  their  own  need  or  sense  of  propriety 
dictates;  the  flesh  is  never  burned." 
Obligatory  sacrifices  are  few.  Each  vil- 
lage has  its  sacred  place,  but  no  altar. 
Nominal  Christians  vow  and  kill  on 
Saturday  with  sacrificial  ceremony   the 


cock  for  the  Sunday  dinner.  Sacrificial 
meals  for  the  poor,  prayers  for  rain,  etc., 
are  noted.  Various  Mahometan  rites 
are  referred  to. 

INDONESIA,  AUSTRALASIA, 
POLYNESIA 

Baesaler  (A.)  Abbildungen  von  alten 
beschnitzten  Maori- Sflrgen.  (Z.  f. 
Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  971-973, 
3  pi.,  I  fg. )  Describes  six  old  carved 
Maori  coffins  of  pine  now  in  the  Auck- 
land Museum.  They  represent  human 
beings  in  grotesque  form.  Such  coffins 
are  rare  in  museums,  and  their  age  is  esti- 
mated at  over  200  years. 

Tahitische  Legenden.    (Ibid.,  920- 

924. )  R^sum^s  Tahitian  legends  of  the 
origin  o>  the  isthmus  of  Taravao  (ac- 
counts also  for  the  heat  in  the  island), 
origin  of  cocoa-palm  (the  eyes  of  the 
dead  eel  can  still  be  seen),  the  last  can- 
nibal on  Tahiti,  origin  of  the  name 
Huahine  (from  Huavahine^  a  word  re- 
ferring to  coitus). 

Ueber  Fischen  auf  Tahiti.     (Ibid., 


924-940,  6  fgs. )  Treats  of  seasons, 
months,  days,  etc.,  for  fishing,  modes  of 
capturing  fish  (with  hands,  with  hip- 
cloth,  with  baskets ;  by  clubbing,  etc.  ; 
by  poisoning  the  water ;  with  spears, 
hooks,  snares ;  with  nets,  etc.),  festivals 
connected  with  fishing,  etc.  With  the 
taking  of  the  varoy  a  sort  of  sea-crab, 
goes  a  certain  song  (p.  934). 

Biro  (L. )  Daten  zur  Schiffahrt  und 
Fischerei  der  Bismarck- 1  nsulaner. 
(Anz.  d.  Ethnogr.  Abt.  d.  Ung.  Nat. 
Mus.,  Budapest,  1905,  in,  57-73,  26 
fgs.)  Treats  of  navigation  (the  mon- 
canoe  of  the  Siara  region  and  the  equip- 
ment ;  canoe  ornamentation ;  the  bul 
canoes  of  Mateisom  in  New  Hanover) 
and  fishing  (nets,  — often  owned  by 
many  individuals  in  common,  or  by  the 
community ;  traps,  spears ;  poisoning, 
etc. )  among  the  natives  of  the  Bismarck 
islands. 

Bohatta  (H.)  Das  javanische  Drama, 
7vajang.  ( Mitt.  d.  Anthr.  Ges.  in  Wien, 
1905,  XXXV,  278-307.)  After  an  intro- 
duction on  the  history,  nature,  character, 
technique,  varieties,  etc.,  of  the  Jav- 
anese drama,  Dr  B.  gives  for  the  first 
time  in  German  the  complete  text  of  a 
wajangf  and  for  the  first  time  in  any 
European  language  the  text  of  a  Javanese 
sketch  or  pakim^  **  Irawan's  Wedding." 
The  wajang  in  question  is  Lakon  Abi- 


410 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


jasoj  based  on  a  tale  in  the  Mah&bh&rata. 
The  wajang-play  was  popular  in  Java  in 
the  twelfth  century,  so  its  origins  lie 
beyond  that  period. 

Brb  ( J. )  Ein  Fund  von  Steinwaffen  in 
Siid-Sumatra.  (Int.  A.  f.  Ethnogr., 
Leiden,  1904,  xvi,  173-175.  4  %s.) 
Describes  two  stone  weapons  (a  lance- 
head  and  a  second  piece  of  undetermined 
use)  found  in  190 1  at  Tjahia  Negri  at 
the  edge  of  the  mountains  in  the  Sunge 
Septutih  division  of  Lampong. 

Glufifrida-Raggeri  (V.)  Crani  dell*  Aus- 
tralia, della  Nuova  Caledonia  e  delle 
Isole  Salomone.  (A.  d.  Soc.  Rom  di 
Antwp.,  1905,  XIT,  Estr.,  pp.  31,  2  fgs.) 
Treats,  with  tables  of  measurements  of 
three  Australian,  three  New  Caledonian 
and  six  Solomon  Islands  crania.  The  two 
New  Caledonian  skulls  are  **  absolutely 
tjrpical  of  the  South  Pacific  region. ' '  The 
Solomon  Islands  skulls  are  morpholog- 
ically superior  to  the  Australian,  New 
Caledonian  and  Papuan  and  are  not 
marked  by  Melanesian  characters, — this 
indicates  the  presence  of  an  **  Oceanic'* 
race  in  the  sense  of  Stratz  (from  Indo- 
nesia to  Samoa,  and  from  Hawaii  to  New 
Zealand). 

Graebner  ( F. )  Einige  Speerformen  des  Bis- 
marck-Archipels.  (Globus,  Brnschwg., 
1905,  i.xxxviii,  333-336,  II  fgs.)  De- 
scribes and  compares  spears  from  Mut- 
schau  and  New- Hanover  in  particular  ; 
also  specimens  from  other  islands.  The 
Mutschau  and  New- Hanover  types  are 
related,  the  former  being  perhaps  primi- 
tive. The  Mutschau  and  Pols<lamhafen 
spears  probably  belong  with  the  three, 
part  North -Australian. 

Kr&mer  ( A. )  Die  Gewinnung  und  die 
Zubereitung  der  Nahrung  auf  den  Ralik- 
Ratakinseln,  Marshallinseln.  (Ibid., 
140-146,  7  fgs.)  Treats,  with  some  de- 
tail, of  the  obtaining  of  food  and  its  prep- 
aration in  the  Ralik-Ratak  archipelago. 
The  ground-oven,  cooking  processes  and 
utensils,  use  of  bread-fruit,  arrow-root, 
cocoa-nut,  pandus  products,  etc.,  are  de- 
scribed. Many  fish-names  (also  15 
native  terms  for  ways  of  taking  fish)  are 
given,  besides  text  and  translation  of  a 
dolphin -catching  song,  notes  on  the  cap- 
ture and  use  of  this  creature,  etc. 

Mathews  (R.  H.)  S^ome  initiation  cere- 
monies of  the  aborigines  of  Australia. 
( Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvil,  872- 
879. )  Describes  the  Wonggumuk  and 
Kannety  ceremonies  of  initiation,  the 
former  with  considerable  detail,  and  for 


the  first  time.  The  ceremonies  include 
painting  the  novice,  **  fire- throwing," 
water-squirting,  the  game  of  <* thunder,*' 
caricatures  and  representations  sometimes 
obscene,  ** smoking**  the  boys,  etc 

N]niAk  ( L. )  Rites  and  customs  of  the 
Iban  or  Dyaks  of  Sarawak.  ( Anthropos, 
Salzburg,  1906,  I,  11-23,  3  fgs.)  First 
part  of  account  drawn  up  by  <*a  Dyak, 
who,  when  a  child,  had  acquired  the 
knowledge  of  reading  and  writing  at  the 
Mission  school  at  Kanovit,  which  he 
attended  for  several  years,"  and  trans- 
lated (closely)  by  Very  Rev.  Edm. 
Dunn,  Prefect  Apostolic  of  Labuan  and 
N.  Borneo,  who  contributes  a  general 
introduction.  Pages  18-22  contain  in 
parallel  columns  Dyak  texts  and  English 
translation  descriptive  of  the  spirits  in- 
voked by  the  Iban,  gods  and  goddesses, 
their  names,  etc.  The  highest  of  all  is 
B a  tar  a  —  then  come  the  creator  of 
matter,  the  mixer,  the  molder,  the 
makers  of  heaven  and  earth,  the  maker 
of  water  and  divider  of  streams,  the 
maker  of  fruits,  the  helpers  of  man,  etc. 

Papillault  (G. )  Cours  de  sociologie. 
M^thodes  gin^rales.  Application  aux 
Australiens.  ( R.  de  I'fec.  d'Anthr.  de 
Paris,  1905,  XV,  243-261. )  Treats  the 
** first  attempts  at  social  organization** 
as  revealed  among  the  Australian  abor- 
igines. Based  on  Fison  and  Howitt, 
Baldwin  Spencer  and  Gillen,  etc.  P.  sees 
in  tribal  divisions  and  subdivisions  only 
"successive  limitations  of  promiscuity.** 
The  savage  is  neither  a  philosopher  nor 
a  machine,  —  he  thinks  under  an  ex- 
tremely confused  religious  form.  Group- 
marriage  and  class  division  were  in  their 
beginnings  confused. 

POch  ( R. )  Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Einge- 
borenen  von  Deutsch-Xeu-Guinea.  (Z. 
d.  Ges.  f.  Erdk.  zu  Berlin,  1905,  555- 
558.  \  Brief  notes  ( from  letter  of  6  Aug., 
1905)  on  the  "four  elemental  popula- 
tions" of  this  region  :  Coast  peoples  from 
Augusta  river  to  HUon  gulf  ( Papua  type), 
mountain-tribes  of  the  Kai  country,  moun- 
tain-tribes of  New  Pomerania  { Baining), 
people  of  New  Mecklenburg  (represent- 
ing probably  the  purest  Melanesian  type). 

Richter  ( O. )  Unseregegenwarlige  Kennt- 
nis  der  Ethnographic  von  Celebes. 
(Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1905,  Lxxxviii, 
154-158,  171-176,  191-195.)  R^sum^s 
our  knowledge  of  the  native  tribes  of 
Celebes,  past  and  present,  and  discusses 
the  chief  problems  of  East  Indian  ethnol- 
ogy,    the    distribution    of    implements. 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


411 


customs,  etc.  Hindu  influence,  accord- 
ing to  R.,  has  been  underestimated. 
The  Minahassa—  Bola&ng  Mongondon 
group  stands  in  contrast  to  the  Bugi- 
Macassar-Central  Celebean  tribes.  The 
Toalas  of  Sarasin  represent  probably  a 
pre-Malayan  type.  The  Minahassa  are 
mixed.  The  ethnography  of  Celebes 
offers  still  great  difficulties. 

S.  Paul  und  Fritz  Sarasins  Forschungen  in 
Celebes.  (Ibid.,  362-367,  9  fgs.)  R6- 
sum^s  the  Sarasins'  recent  book  Reisen 
in  Celebes  (2  vols.  Wiesbaden,  I905), 
treating  of  the  Minahassa,  who  inhabit 
the  east  of  the  long  northern  peninsula 
and  are  completely  under  Dutch  influence, 
the  mountainous  tribes  of  the  Alfuros  and 
Toradja,  the  Luwu  country  and  its 
peoples,  the  Tokeja,  and  Tomuna  and 
(particularly)  the  Toala  of  the  Lamont- 
jong  mountains  in  the  south,  who  repre- 
sent the  most  primitive  people  of  the 
island,  the  pile-dwellers  of  Limbotto  and 
Matanna  (the  pile-dwellings  erected 
probably  for  peaceful  reasons  and  not 
merely  for  protection),  etc. 

Seidel  (H. )  Sprachen  und  Sprachgebiete 
in  Deutsch-Mikronesien.  (Ibid.,  181- 
184. )  Discusses  chiefly  Senflit's  Spra- 
chenkarte  von  Deutsch-Mikronesien 
(Berlin,  1905).  Fritz  and  Saflbrd's 
Chamorro  monographs  are  noted.  S. 
takes  exception  to  Senflit's  attempt  to  flx 
close  relations  between  Nakuoroand 
Mariana  islands.  Kusaie  has  a  language 
with  some  peculiar  characteristics.  The 
other  linguistic  areas  are  Ponape,  etc.,  the 
central  Carolines  with  the  exclave  on  the 
Marianas,  the  west  Carolines,  Nukuoro, 
Jap  with  Ngulu,  Palau,  seven  in  all. 

Senfft  ( A. )  Sage  ilber  die  Entstehung 
der  Inseln  Map  und  Rumung  und  der 
Landschaft  Nimigil,  Japinseln.  (Ibid., 
139-140.)  These  islands  are  said  to 
have  been  created  in  consequence  of  the 
amours  of  a  native  and  a  beautiful 
maiden,  —  partly  by  her  mother  in 
anger,  and  partly  as  the  result  of  the 
killing  of  the  latter  while  in  the  form  of 
a  rat. 

StephAn(E. )  BeitrSlge  zur  Psychologic 
der  Bewohner  von  Neupommern.  Nebst 
ethnographischen  Mitteilungen  Uber  die 
Barriai  und  iiber  die  Insel  Hunt,  Duvor. 
(Ibid.,  205-210,  216-221,  25  fgs.,  map.) 
Treats  of  physical  characters,  life  activi- 
ties, pigeon* English,  power  of  attention 
(weak),  song  and  dance,  attitude 
towards  photographs  and  pictures  (a 
lion   was   called    **dog,"    or  **pig")i 


medicine  and  magic,  weather  charms, 
love  charms,  language,  weapons,  imple- 
ments,  instruments,  etc.,  —  these  are 
figured  and  described.  Worth  noting  is 
Dr  S.'s  statement  that  he  detected  in 
Selin,  his  guide  and  collector,  **a  fine- 
ness of  feeling  essentially  that  of  a  civil- 
ized man  of  fine  feeling." 

Ein   modemes    Kolonialabenteuer. 


(Ibid.,325-331,  349-353,  map.)  Gives 
an  account  of  the  ** founding"  of  Port 
Breton  in  New  Britain  by  the  Marquis 
de  Rays  in  1 87 7- 188 1,  one  of  the  most 
remarkable  swindles  of  the  nineteenth 
century. 

AMERICA 

Bany  (P.)  Traditional  ballads  in  New 
England,  II-III.  (J.  Amer.  Folk-Lorc, 
Boston,  1905,  XVIII,  191-214,  291-304.) 
Gives  texts  and  variants,  music,  etc.,  of 
The  Gypsy  Laddie,  Lord  Randall,  The 
Demon  Lover,  Young  Beicban,  The 
Elfin  Knight,  Lord  Lovell,  Bonnie  James 
Campbell,  Our  Good  Man,  Young 
Hunting,  Springfield  Mountain,  Henry 
Martin,  from  various  parts  of  New 
England  and  Canada. 

Berdan  ( E. )  Der  Mond  in  Volksmedizin, 
Sitte  und  Gebr&uchen  der  mexikanischen 
Grenzbewohnerschaft  des  sildlichen 
Texas.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1905, 
Lxxxviii,  381-384. )  Treats  of  Texan- 
Mexican  folk-lore  concerning  the  moon 
in  medicine,  customs,  beliefs,  etc.,  in  the 
frontier  regions  of  Starr  and  Hidalgo 
counties.  The  parteras  (or  ** sages 
femmes"),  with  their  lunar  treatment  of 
female  diseases,  moonshine-cures,  due 
observance  of  moon-phases,  lore  of  wax- 
ing and  waning,  sympathetic  cures,  etc., 
are  described. 

B0A8  ( F. )  Publications  of  the  Jesup 
North  Pacific  Expedition.  (Science,  N. 
Y.,  1906,  N.  S.,  XXIII,  102-107.) 
Critical  r^sum^  and  review  of  works  of 
S wanton  (  Haida  ethnology),  Jochelson 
(Koryak),  Bogoras  (Chukchee). 

Bridge  (C.  A.  G.)  A  great  moral  up- 
heaval in  America.  Ninet.  Cent.,  Lond., 
1906,  205-218.)  Emphasizes  "the  re- 
semblance of  the  institutions  of  the 
Americans  to  those  of  their  English  kins- 
men." Advance  in  the  U.  S.  towards 
aristocratic  conditions  is  noted.  The 
English  element  has  not  been  swamped 
by  the  non- English  (list  of  Presidents, 
judges,  heads  of  educational  institutions, 
etc.,  show  this). 


412 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


Cannttatt  (O. )  Ueber  die  indianische  Be- 
vOIkening  der  alten  Jesuitenreduktionen 
in  SUdamerika.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin, 
1905,  XXXVII,  882-898.)  Based  on 
DobritzhofTer,  Sepp,  Burgos  (pages  888- 
897).  Describes  the  life  and  routine  of 
the  Indian  population  in  the  old  Jesuit 
**  reductions  "  of  South  America. 

Carter  (Oscar  C.  S.)  The  plateau  country 
of  the  Southwest  and  La  Mesa  Encantada 
( the  Enchanted  mesa).  (Jour.  Franklin 
Inst.,  Phila.,  June,  1906,  451-467,  ill.) 
Reviews  the  results  of  the  expeditions  to 
this  celebrated  mesa  in  New  Mexico  by 
Libbey  and  Hodge  in  1 897,  and  agrees 
with  the  latter  that  the  evidence  is  in 
favor  of  the  former  occupancy  of  the 
height  by  the  Acoma  Indians. 

■Collins  ( Mary  C. )  The  training  of  the 
Indian  child.)  So.  Wkmn.,  Hampton, 
Va.,  1905,  XXXIV,  390,  10  fgs. )  Gen- 
eral description  of  training  of  Siouan 
child,  —  infancy,  rules  of  conduct, 
chivalry,  play,  home  life,  religion,  etc. 

Del  Campana  ( D. )     L'arte  plumaria  dei 
Mundurucu    (Brasile)  e  di  altri  popoli 
del    Sud- America.      (A.    p.    I'Antrop., 
Firenze,    1905,  xxxv,    177-197,  i   pi., 
^9  %s. )     IJescribes  briefly  26  feather- 
work   objects    (articles   of  dress,  orna- 
ments, etc. )  from  the  Mundurucu  Indians 
of  Brazil,  now  in  the  Florentine  Museum, 
with  notes  on  this  art  among  other  tribes, 
—  Caribs,  Arawaks,  Roucouyennes,  In- 
dians of  the  Rio  Napo,  Temb6  (Tupi), 
Ticuna  f  Arawak),  Boror6,  Carayil,  Api- 
aki,    certain    peoples    of    ancient    and 
modern    Peru,   the    ancient    Calchaqui, 
many  peoples  of  the  Gran   Chaco,  the 
Charruas  of  Uruguay,  some  Patagonian, 
even  Fuegian  tribes,  etc.     The  highest    ' 
and  most  special  development  of  art  in    \ 
feather-work  in  all  South  America  occurs   , 
in  Brazil,  and  the  Mundurucu  ( number-    ' 
ing  now  1429  souls,  in  the  region  of  the   , 
Tapajoz  and  its  affluents)  are  the  most 
expert  of  all  the   Indians  to  whom  the 
art  is  known. 

Dorsey  ( G.  A. )     The  Ponka   sun-dance.    \ 
(Field  Col.   Mus.,  Anthrop.   Ser.,  Chi- 
cago,   1905,   VII,   62-88,   35   pi.)      De- 
scril)es   preparations,    ceremonies,    etc., 
of  four  days,  paints  and  costumes,  etc. 
This  *•  sun-seeing  dance,"  or  '*  mystery 
dance,"  held  when  the  moon  is  at  least    \ 
half  full,  is  carried  out  by  the  *'  thunder- 
men,"  or  priests,  who  are  **a  close  cor-    , 
poration  with  self- perpetuating  power."    1 
The  Ponca  sun -dance   is   simpler   than    I 
the  .'\rapaho  and   Cheyenne  and  is  an    ! 


annual  ceremony  not  dependent  on  the 
vow  of  an  individual.  The  torture  and 
painted  dancers  are  also  peculiar.  Hyp- 
notism is  possibly  employed. 

Fritsch  ( G. )  Versteinerter  Ausguss  ron 
dem  Mokassin  eines  Indianers.  (Z.  f. 
Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905,  xxxvii,  970-971.) 
Describes  a  ''petrified  mocassin"  from 
the  south  shore  of  the  Little  Slave  lake 
in  N.  \V.  Canada.  It  may  be  a  relic  ot 
tertiary  man. 

Giachetti  (V. )     Studi  antropologici  sugli 
antichi   reniviani.      (A.    p.    PAntrop., 
Firenzi,    1905,  xxxv,   201-301,   i   pi.) 
Gives  details  of  description  and  measure- 
ment of  62  ancient  Peruvian  skulls  (39 
from  Cajamarca,  6  from  Lima,  6  from 
Tacora,  6  from  "Chepcn'*;  of  the  non- 
deformed,    14   were    brachycephalic,    4 
roesocephalic  and  one  dolichocephalic) 
and  18  mandibles,  belonging  to  the  Reg- 
noli  collection  (obtained  in  1869)  of  the 
Pisa  Anatomical  Institute.     Of  the  de- 
formed skulls  lengthened  by  the  process 
6  had  the  Aymara  deformation,  16  fronto- 
suprainiac,  4  bregma  parieto  subiniac  or 
submentonian ;  of  those  broadened  arti- 
ficially 5  had  fronto-subiniac  deformation 
and  15  were  plagiocephalic.     Deforma- 
tion slightly  diminishes  the  known  small 
capacity  of  Peruvian  skulls,   which   are 
normally  brachycephalic,  but  made  arti- 
ficially hyperbrachycephalic,  or  mesoce- 
phalic   (and  even  dolichocephalic),  ac- 
cording  to   the   degree  of  deformation. 
In  the  broadened  skulls  the  face  becomes 
platopic,  in  the  lengthened  a  little  more 
prominent.    Other  corresponding  changes 
in    nasal    and    palatal    structure   occur. 
Bibliography  of  54  titles. 
Hermant  (P.)     Evolution  ^conomique  et 
sociale  de  certaines  peuplades  de  P  Am6r- 
ique  du  Nord.     { Bull.  Soc.  R.  Beige  de 
G6ogr.,  Bruxelles,  1904,  Extr.,  pp.  no.  ) 
This  well-documented  monograph  on  the 
economic  and  social  evolution  of  certain 
American  Indian    peoples  treats  of  the 
Eskimo    (6-24);    **Tinnehs,"     i.     e., 
Athapascans    (24-4O  ;      *' Nootka-Co- 
lombians,"    i.     e.,    Chinooks,     Oregon 
tribes,  Shastikas,  Tsimshians,  Kootenays, 
Salish,  Kwakiutl,  Tlinkits,  Haida,  Noot- 
kas    (41-64);    Califomian    tribes    (64- 
70)  ;  Algonquins  (70-83)  ;  Sioux  X^^-- 
94)  ;    Iroquois    (94-100).     The    topics 
considered   are  :    Habitat  and  distribu- 
tion,   dwellings,    economic    conditions, 
fishing,    hunting,   agriculture,   technique 
and  industries,  social  conditions  (chiefs, 
authority,  etc. ),  family  ( number  of  wives. 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


413 


acquisition  of  viives,  incest,  stability  of 
marriage,  family  property,  inheritance, 
levirate,  adultery,  chastity,  age  of  mar- 
riage, consent  of  woman,  conjugal  affec- 
tion, etc. ). 

Janyier  (T.  A.)  Legends  of  the  city  of 
Mexico.  (Harper's  Mo.,  N.  Y.,  1906, 
cxii,  258-265,  2  fgs.)  English  texts  of 
4  legends  collected  by  the  author  in  the 
city  of  Mexico, —  legend  of  Don  Juan 
Manuel,  legend  of  the  Puentedel  Clerigo, 
legend  of  the  obedient  dead  nun,  legend 
of  the  Callejon  del  Armado. 

ten  Kate  (  H.)  Bemerkungen  zur  Mittei- 
lung  des  Hm.  J.  Kollmann  iiber  Ras- 
sengehime.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905, 
XXXVII,  991. )  Points  out  that  two  of  the 
brains  in  question  are  Araucanian,  not 
Fuegian.  Dr  ten  Kate  agrees  with  Dr  K. , 
though  less  positively,  in  believing  that  as 
far  as  present  data  show,  ''there  is  no  mor- 
phological or  micro-anatomical  determi- 
nation of  race-  differences. '  *  According  to 
ten  Kate  the**  historic  education"  of 
which  K.  speaks  is  conditioned  by  **  phys- 
ical factors," — psycho- physical  and  an- 
thropogeographical  belong  together. 

Kemp  (J.  F.)  An  interesting  discovery 
of  human  implements  in  an  abandoned 
river  channel  in  southern  Oregon.  ( Sci- 
ence, N.  Y.,  1906.  N.  s.,  xxin,  434- 
436. )  Describes  finds  of  mortars  and 
pestles  in  the  auriferous  gravels  of  the 
Deep  Gravel  Mining  Co.,  near  Waldo, 
Ore. 

Laut  ( Agnes  C. )  Sea  voyagers  of  the 
northern  ocean.  ( Harper's  Mo.,  N.  Y., 
1906,  CXII,  291-298,  2  fgs.)  Treats  of 
the  Russian  adventurers  in  Alaska  ( Sheli- 
koff,  Baranoff,  etc.)  and  their  relations 
with  the  Indian  tribes. 

Lehmann  (W. )  Altmexikanische  Mus- 
chelzierate  in  durchbrochener  Arbeit. 
(Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1905,  Lxxxviii, 
285-288,  4  fgs. )  Describes  a  shell  orna- 
ment (with  37  perforations)  fromTampico 
now  in  the  Berlin  Ethnological  Museum. 
Similar  ornaments  are  reported  from 
Guerrero,  Morelia  and  Tuxpan  (Vera 
Cruz).  They  all  resemble  the  ** shell 
gorgets ' '  of  the  mound  region  of  the 
U.  S. 

Die  fiinf  ira  Kindbett  gestorbenen 

Frauen  des  Westens  und  die  fiinf  GStter 
des  Stidens  in  der  mexikanischen  My- 
thologie.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin,  1905, 
XXXVII,  848-871,  19  fgs.)  Treats  of 
the  five  women  of  the  west  who  died  in 
child- bed  and  the  five  deities  of  the 
south    in    Mexican  mythology,  —  dates, 

AM.    ANTH.,    N.   S  ,  8-27 


symbols,  etc.  The  five  groups  on  the 
MS.  are :  East  (tlapco,  tonatiuh  in 
ieuayan),  north  (mictlan),  middle  or 
above-below  (aco-tlani),  west  (cihuatl- 
ampa),  south  (uitztlampa,  xochitlalpan). 
The  basis  of  the  article  is  a  fine  example 
of  Zapotec  picture-writing.  No.  20  of  the 
Aubin  collection  in  the  Parisian  Bibli- 
othdque  Nationale,  the  history  of  which 
is  briefly  given.  Boban's  previous  inter- 
pretation is  erroneous.  The  five  Ciua- 
Uteo  correspond  to  the  five  Uitznahua  in 
so  far  as  these  relate  to  Tezcatlipoca. 
The  five  pairs  of  deities  belong  to  the 
cardinal-points  tonalamatl. 

MattheWB  ( B. )  American  character. 
(Columbia  Univ.  Q.,  N.  Y.,  1905,  viii, 
97-114.)  Discusses  the  characteristics 
of  the  American  people  as  recently  de- 
scribed by  a  French  correspondent  of 
Tolstoi.  Prof.  M.  holds  that  the  Amer- 
icans are  entirely  devoted  to  money- 
making,  hostile  to  art  and  all  forms  of 
beauty,  devoid  of  ideals.  America  has 
contributed  to  civilization  five  things  : 
Warred  little  and  sought  to  substitute 
arbitration,  set  an  example  of  the  broad- 
est religious  toleration,  made  evident  the 
wisdom  of  universal  suffrage,  welcomed 
all  races  into  political  freedom,  diffused 
material  well-being  to  a  hitherto  un- 
heard-of extent. 

Max  Schmidt'B  Indianeratndien  in  Zen- 
tralbrasilien.  (Globus,  Brnschwg., 
1905,  LXXXVIII,  314-317,  7  %s.) 
Based  on  S.'s  recent  volume  Indianer- 
studien  in  Zeniralbrasilien  (Berlin, 
1905).  Treats-briefly  of  the  Guato 
(bow,  fire-fan),  Bakairi  (fire-fan,  etc.) 
Trumai  (basket),  Auetd  (wooden 
masks  ^. 

Motta  ( J. )  O  Portuguez  falado  no  Brazil. 
(R.  da  Soc.  Scient.  de  S.  Paulo,  1905, 
65-82. )  General  discussion  of  the  pro- 
nunciation, vocabulary,  etc. ,  of  Brazilian 
Portuguese,  with  numerous  illustrative 
examples.  M.  says  that  the  vocabulary 
of  Brazilian  Portuguese  is  much  richer 
than  that  of  European  Portuguese  and 
even  purer,  since  the  former  is  less  favor- 
able to  the  imputation  of  foreign  expres- 
sions ;  its  syntax  is  more  natural, 
euphonic  and  often  logical.  In  Brazil  a 
national  language  is  creating  a  national 
literature. 

Nelson  ( H.  L. )  The  pleasant  life  of  Pdre 
Marquette.  (Harper's  Mo.,  N.  Y., 
CXI,  1905,  74-82,  5  fgs.)  Account  of 
some  incidents  in  the  life  of  the  famous 
missionary,  —  the  Joliet  expedition.   The 


414 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


*'  Indians,  who  were  descended  from  the 
Aztecs,  and  whose  language  was  a  Mexi- 
can dialect"  were  mythical,  as  N. 
should  have  noted. 

Newell  (W.  W.)  In  Memoriam  :  Wash- 
ington Matthews.  (J.  Amer.  Folk- 
Lore,  Boston,  1905,  xviii,  245-247.) 
Sketch  of  life  and  appreciation  of  scien- 
tific labors. 

Poet  (C.  J.)  Indian  music  of  South 
America.  (Harper's Mo.,  N.  Y.,  1906, 
cxii,  255-257).  Brief  account,  with 
musical  notations,  of  the  flute-music  of 
the  Aymara  Indians  of  Achicuchi,  Sorata, 
etc.  Some  are  sung  at  the  great  fiesta 
of  Todos  Santos.  One  song  (at  the 
expense  of  the  whites)  is  very  popular 
with  the  choloSy  or  half-breeds. 

An  ethnological  paradox.  (Har- 
per's Mo.,  N.  Y.,  1905,  ex,  910-916, 
6  fgs. )  Treats  of  the  Lecco  Indians 
of  the  eastern  slopes  of  the  Bolivian 
Andes,  who,  according  to  the  author,  show 
"distinct  Malaysian  resemblances", — 
in  physical  characters,  muscular  develop- 
ment, costume,  etc.  Their  balsas,  huts, 
etc. ,  are  described.  They  have  no  death 
or  burial  ceremonies  ;  no  hierioglyphs  or 
even  crude  pictures  ;  no  musical  instru- 
ments. Their  language  is  called  Riki- 
riki  and  they  count  on  a  basis  of  five 
five.     Families  are  small. 

Across  the  highlands  of  the  world. 


(Ibid.,  1905,  CXI,  20-26,  6  fgs.)  Con- 
tains some  notes  on  the  Aymara  Indians 
of  Cocuta,  Wailata,  etc.  In  the  latter 
village  ''are  the  real  highlanders  of  the 
Andes,  the  makers  of  the  chalona  and 
chufto  that  can  only  be  prepared  in  the 
extreme  cold  of  the  high  altitudes." 

Santin  de  Prade  ( O. )  Unaspedizione  ai 
**  Coroados  "  nello  Stato  di  S.  Paola  nel 
Brasile.  fAnthropos,  Salzburg,  1905,  i, 
35-48,  5  fgs. )  Gives  account  of  expedi- 
tion of  December,  1904,  in  search  of  the 
Coroados,  the  discovery  of  a  clearing  and 
cabin  with  implements,  weapons  etc.,  of 
various  sorts.  In  the  cabin  were  found 
the  sick  wife  of  a  chief  and  a  little  girl, — 
all  others  had  fled  from  **the  hated 
Brazilians." 

Sapper  (K.)  Aztekische  Ortsnamen  in 
Mittelamerica.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin, 
1905,  XXXVII,  1002-1007.)  Discusses 
the  origin  and  distribution  of  Aztec  place- 
names  of  Central  America.  S.  believes 
that ' '  outside  the  Pipil  regions,  the  Aztec 
place-names  of  Central  America  are 
partly  older  formations  of  Aztec  trades- 
men  and   partly   later   creations   under 


Spanish  influence."  Since  Aztec  has 
been  no  longer  an  official  language  in  the 
Indian  countries,  no  new  Aztec  place- 
names  have  been  formed. 

Das  mexikanische  Territorium  Quin- 


tana  Roo.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1 905, 
Lxxxviii,  165-167,  map.)  Contains 
notes  on  the  Mexican  campaign  of 
1 900- 1 904  against  the  Majras  and  Sie  or- 
ganization of  the  new  territory  of  Quin- 
tana  Roo  in  eastern  Yucatan,  marking  the 
final  subjection  of  the  Mayas. 
Teediaiier  (C.)  Mythen  und  alte  Volks- 
sagen  aus  Brasilien.  (Anthropos,  Salz- 
burg, 1905,  I,  24-34.)  First  part  of 
collection  of  myths  and  legends  of  the 
Brazilian  Indians  (with  critical  com- 
ments) relating  to  the  Korupira^  Caap- 
ora,  Caipdra,  etc,  a  forest  demon  (the 
K.  and  the  hunter ;  the  K.  and  the  poor 
man),  and  the  Anhangd  or  Yurupari^ 
a  spirit  of  bad  dreams  ( the  A.  and  the 
child ;  the  A.  and  the  hunter).  The 
attitude  of  the  Indians  towards  these 
spirits  is  discussed.  Influence  of  Christi- 
anity is  suggested. 

Thompson  (E.  H. )  A  page  of  American 
history.  (Proc.  Amer.  Antiq.  Soc., 
Worcester,  Mass.,  1905-6,  N.  s.,  xvii, 
239-252).  Describes  the  participation 
of  American  adventurers  in  the  rebellion 
of  the  Mayas  of  Yucatan  in  1S47. 

Veatch  (A.  C. )  On  the  human  origin  of 
the  small  mounds  of  the  lower  Mississ- 
ippi valley  and  Texas.  ( Science,  N.  Y., 
1906,  N.  s.,  XXIII,  34-36.)  Cites  pas- 
sages from  Foster,  De  Nadaillac,  etc. 
Author  holds  that  "the  theory  of  human 
origin  is  in  no  way  applicable  to  the 
great  class  of  natural  mounds  which  he 
has  observed  in  I^uisiana,  Texas  and 
Arkansas  and  along  the  Iron  Mountain 
Railroad  in  southeastern  Missouri." 
The  situation  does  not  serve  human  uses. 

Verwom  (M. )  Indianische  Reiseerinner- 
ungen.  (Corr.-Bl.  d.  D.  Ges.  f.  An- 
throp.,  Miinchen,  1905,  xxxvi,  55-56.) 
Brief  account  of  visit  to  various  Ameri- 
can Museums,  with  observations  on  the 
antiquity  of  the  American  Indian,  —  V. 
thinks  he  came  (in  possession  of  neo- 
lithic culture)  from  Eastern  Asia  at  a 
comparatively  late  period. 

PseudopalHolithische    Steingerftten 

aus  Nordamerika.  (Ibid.,  62-63.) 
Notes  on  a  collection  of  **pseudo- paleo- 
lithic" flints  obtained  by  the  author  in 
the  neighborhood  of  Washington,  D.  C, 
in  October,  1904. 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


415 


Wardle  (H.  N. )  The  treasures  of  pre- 
historic Mound ville.  (Harper's  Mo., 
N.  Y.,  1906,  cxii,  200-210,  14  fgs. ) 
Gives  account  of  the  investigation  of  "  an 
ancient  American  city  of  the  copper 
age,"  near  Moundville  (named  after  it), 
Alabama,  and  describes  the  chief  remains 
as  discovered  by  C.  B.  Moore.  In  the 
various  mounds  were  found  human  bones 
and  votive  gifts,  copper  gorgets,  pen- 
dants, hair-ornaments,  etc.,  water-bot- 
tles of  black  ware,  ceremonial  axes,  etc. ) 
The  most  remarkable  specimens  are  ''a 
wonderful  diorite  vase  of  the  crested 
wood  duck,"  a  remnant  of  a  carved 
shell  drinking  cup,  etc.  The  scarcity 
of  actual  weapons  and  the  abundance  of 
ceremonial  and  decorative  art-objects  sug- 
gest that  <<  the  ancient  settlement  on  the 
Black  Warrior  River  was  not  military, 
but  a  center  of  barbaric  art  and  religion." 
The  settlement  is  plainly  pre-Columbian, 
no  European  remains  at  all  occurring. 

WisBler  (C. )  The  whirlwind  and  the 
elk  in  the  mythology  of  the  Dakota. 
(J.  Amer.  Folk-Lore,  Boston,  1905, 
xviii,  257-268. )  Discusses  the  **  whirl- 
wind moth ' '  and  analogues  ;  the  power 


of  the  elk  (and  buffalo),  particularly  in 
sexual  matters  ( a  legend  illustrating  the 
use  of  elk  "  medicine  "  by  young  men  to 
acquire  power  over  and  possession  of 
women  is  given).  The  buffalo  and  the 
bear  are  said  to  partake  of  the  power  of 
the  whirlwind  with  some  tribes.  The 
cocoon  and  moth  are  believed  to  imitate 
the  whirlwind.  I^blems  of  imitation 
are  presented  by  the  Dakota  and  their 
interpretations  **  are  the  results  of  keen 
psychological  introspection.  *  *  The  whirl- 
wind in  question  is  *'the  harmless  little 
whirl,'*  seen  every  clear  day  on  the 
plains. 

—  Ethnic  types  and  isolation.  ( Sci- 
ence, N.  Y.,  1906,  N.  s.,  xxiii,  147- 
149. )  Points  out  how  well-known  eth- 
nographical facts  (e.  g.,  the  distribu- 
tion of  North  American  aboriginal  lin- 
guistic stocks)  correspond  in  a  way  to 
the  observations  recorded  from  both 
animal  and  plant  life.  California  may 
have  been  a  nursery  or  incubator  of  liv  • 
ing  stocks.  Isolation  has  been  an  impor- 
tant factor  in  the  development  of  ethnic 
types.  Psychological  barriers  to  diffu- 
sion may  be  thus  created. 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA 

Interaational  Bureau  of  Ethnography.  —  The  Field  Museum  of  Nat- 
ural History,  Chicago,  has  published  the  following  free  translation  of 
a  Memorial  adopted  by  the  Congress  at  Mons,  Belgium,  in  September, 
1905,  providing  for  the  organization  of  an  International  Bureau  of  Eth- 
nography. The  Field  Museum  and  the  United  States  National  Museum 
have  been  invited  to  become  members  of  the  provisional  organizing  body. 

Article  i.  There  is  founded  by  the  countries  enumerated,  and  by 
all  those  countries  which  hereafter  subscribe  to  the  present  agreement,  a 
permanent  Bureau  entitled  the  International  Bureau  of  Ethnography. 

Article  2.  The  object  of  the  Bureau  is  the  organization,  at  common 
expense,  of  ser\'ices  pertaining  to  the  scientific  documentation  relative  to 
the  social  state,  the  manners  and  customs  of  different  peoples,  especially 
peoples  of  inferior  civilization. 

The  Bureau  especially  concerns  itself  with  the  following  objects : 

1.  The  organization  of  a  permanent  bureau  of  inquiry,  especially  by  : 
(«)  The  publication  of  ethnographic  and  sociologic  questions,  keep- 
ing account  of  the  initiatives  of  different  countries  and  of  the  results  ob- 
tained ; 

(d)  The  sending  out  of  these  questions  through  the  medium  of  com- 
petent authorities  to  all  those  who  are  apt  to  furnish  results,  especially  to 
Colonial  officials,  to  explorers,  to  missionaries,  etc. 

2.  The  publication  of  the  results  of  this  inquiry  on  a  uniform  plan, 
or  on  a  plan  as  uniform  as  possible. 

3.  The  distribution  of  the  results  to  the  different  contracting  States, 
to  participating  learned  associations,  and  to  the  public  in  general,  under 
established  conditions. 

4.  The  elaboration  of  an  ethnographic  bibliography  embodying  the 
published  writings  (books  and  articles  from  periodicals)  in  all  languages 
and  in  all  countries. 

(t/)  Published  at  all  times  (progressive  service). 
(fi)  Published  during  the  current  year  (service  to  increase  as  much 
as  possible). 

5.  The  publication  of  the  current  part  of  this  catalogue,  and  the 
communication  of  the  results  for  the  anterior  part. 

416 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  4I7 

Article  3.  To  this  end  there  is  established  in  Brussels  an  Interna- 
tional Bureau  of  Ethnography  charged  with  the  organization  of  such 
divers  services. 

Article  4.  This  Bureau  enjoys  all  the  rights  attached  to  a  civil 
person  after  the  manner  of  permitting  him  to  receive  gifts  and  bequests, 
and  of  contracting  for  work  and  publication,  of  civil  engagements  in  the 
sphere  of  their  privileges. 

Article  5.  The  Bureau  functions  under  the  direction  of  an  interna- 
tional committee  formed  by  the  delegates  of  all  the  contracting  States. 
This  international  committee  will  be  composed  of  three  delegates  for  each 
nation,  of  whom  one  delegate  shall  have  the  title  of  National  Commis- 
sioner, who  shall  be  especially  designated. 

They  are  nominated  for  a  term  of  six  years. 

This  committee  will  unite  at  least  once  every  two  years,  and  consider 
all  the  decisions  and  conclusions  relating  to  the  International  Bureau  of 
Ethnography.  It  shall  be  empowered  to  convene  more  frequently,  but 
at  the  initiative  of  the  executive  of  the  bureau  or  at  the  demand  of  four 
of  the  adhering  States. 

Article  6.  The  national  commissioners  shall  unite  at  least  once 
each  year  and  exercise  the  control  of  administration,  and  especially  verify 
the  accounts. 

Each  commissioner  will  be,  in  place  of  his  government,  the  ordinary 
intermediary  to  the  International  Bureau  of  Ethnography.  He  will  com- 
municate to  it  the  results  received  by  way  of  missions,  of  inquiries  or 
otherw'ise.  He  will  transmit  the  requirements  of  the  International  Bu- 
reau to  his  Government  or  Principal. 

Article  7.  In  the  interval  between  sessions,  the  execution  of  the 
scientific  decisions  of  the  international  committee,  and  the  management 
of  the  administrative  affairs,  shall  be  confined  to  an  Executive  Bureau 
composed  of  the  President,  Permanent  Secretary,  and  Assistant  Sec- 
retary. 

For  scientific  affairs  not  foreseen,  the  Bureau  shall  take,  through 
correspondence,  the  advice  of  the  delegates  of  the  different  govern- 
ments. 

Likewise  for  administrative  affairs  not  foreseen,  the  Bureau  will  take, 
through  correspondence,  the  advice  of  the  national  commissioners  of  the 
different  governments. 

It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Bureau  to  fix  the  dates  of  the  meetings  of 
the  international  committee,  as  well  as  to  convoke  the  delegates  of  the 
contracting  States,  indicating  the  order  of  the  day  of  meeting. 


41 8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  communications  to  the  International  Bureau  of  Ethnography 
with  the  adhering  governments  will  be  through  the  intermediary  of  the 
national  commissioners. 

Article  8.  Each  country  may  encourage  the  co-operation  of  its  own 
learned  men  and  own  learned  societies ;  but  the  communication  of  this 
organization  shall  be  made  to  the  International  Bureau  of  Ethnog- 
raphy. 

The  Bureau  may  enter  into  direct  relations  with  all  societies  of  eth- 
nography, of  sociology,  of  geography,  and  other  scientific  organizations 
which  wish  to  co-operate  in  the  realization  of  the  aim  of  the  institution  ; 
likewise  with  men  of  science  and,  in  general,  individuals. 

Article  9.  If  the  amount  of  donations,  legacies,  and  subsidies  aris- 
ing from  individuals  or  free  institutions,  capitalized  at  3  percent,  reaches 
at  least  the  sixth  of  the  allowance  of  the  participating  States,  there  shall 
be  formed  a  committee  of  donors  which  shall  be  represented  by  two  mem- 
bers of  the  international  committee. 

Article  10.  A  report  on  the  work  and  the  financial  administration 
of  the  Bureau  shall  be  addressed  each  year  to  the  adhering  governments. 
To  the  report  will  be  annexed  a  statement  of  the  preliminary  budget  for 
the  following  year  and  the  program  of  undertakings. 

Article  ii.  The  budget  of  the  International  Bureau  of  Ethnog- 
raphy will  be  supported  by  annual  assessments  of  the  contracting  mem- 
bers and  States,  by  the  proceeds  of  the  sale  of  publications  and  by  taxes 
to  be  calculated  upon  information  furnished,  and  by  gifts  and  legacies. 

The  amount  of  the  assessments  assigned  annually  to  the  Bureau  by  the 

adhering  States  is  fixed  at  the  minimum  figure  of .      (This  amount 

shall  be  fixed  at  the  first  meeting  of  the  international  committee ;  it  will 
depend  in  effect  upon  divers  circumstances  not  yet  determined,  especially 
upon  the  number  of  languages  into  which  the  documents  shall  be  trans- 
lated and  published.) 

The  assessments,  not  consumed  in  the  operations,  shall  be  reported  at" 
the  end  of  the  year.  They  may  ser^'e,  should  there  be  a  surplus,  to  con- 
stitute a  reser\e  fund. 

Above  the  annual  assessments  a  capital  of (likewise  reserved 

as  above)  shall  be  put  the  first  year  at  the  disposition  of  the  Bureau  for 
installation  expenses.  The  States  and  Colonies  which  shall  hereafter 
make  use  of  the  privileges  of  joining,  according  to  Article  17,  shall  have 
to  pay  their  share  of  this  sum  upon  the  basis  of  assessments  as  fixed  in 
Article  13. 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  419 

Article  12.  The  States  and  Colonies  which  withdraw  from  the  Bu- 
reau at  the  expiration  of  their  first  term  of  twenty  years,  shall  lose  their 
participating  rights  in  a  common  fund. 

In  case  of  liquidation  the  common  fund  shall  be  partitioned  among 
the  States  and  Colonies  of  the  International  Bureau  after  a  basis  of  dis- 
tribution as  provided  for  in  Article  13. 

Article  13.  The  contributing  part  of  the  contracting  States  in  the 
annual  assessment  to  the  International  Bureau  of  Ethnography,  as  well  as 
the  first  installments,  is  established  in  units  upon  the  double  base  of  their 
population  and  of  economic  activity. 

As  for  population,  a  unit  shall  be  considered  as  500,000  inhabitants. 
As  for  economic  activity,  a  unit  shall  be  considered  as  50,000,000  francs 
of  foreign  commerce,  imports  and  exports  together. 

Article  14.  The  amount  of  the  personal  contributions  of  each  State 
is  rendered  in  an  agreed  proportion  in  subscriptions  to  publications  cal- 
culated at  a  price  of  public  sale  reduced  one-fifth. 

The  use  of  collections  by  the  delegates  of  the  central  administration 
of  the  adhering  States  is  free.  It  shall  answer,  without  expense,  to  all 
their  demands  for  information. 

Article  15.  The  total  assessment  of  the  contracting  States  divided 
by  the  sum  of  the  units  attributed  to  each  of  them  in  execution  of  the 
preceding  arrangements,  will  give  the  unit  of  the  part  leviable.  It  will 
suffice  to  multiply  this  by  the  number  of  units  assigned  to  each  of  the 
States  to  find  the  amount  of  its  contribution  to  the  budget  of  the  Inter- 
national Bureau  of  Ethnography. 

Article  16.  In  order  to  place  the  institution  in  position  to  realize 
its  object  as  exactly  and  completely  as  possible,  the  contracting  parties 
engage  themselves  each  so  far  as  concerns  its  own  country  : 

1 .  To  execute,  as  rapidly  as  possible,  the  obligations  springing  from 
Article  2. 

2.  To  address  to  the  International  Bureau  : 

(<?)  A  copy  of  all  official  publications  (books  or  periodicals)  appear- 
ing which  pertain  to  the  aim  of  the  institution. 

(^)  The  list,  manuscript  or  printed,  of  all  works  (books  or  pamph- 
lets) which  shall  appear  in  the  future.  This  list,  which  shall  be  addressed 
to  the  Bureau  of  Ethnography  with  as  much  regularity  as  possible,  shall 
be  held  as  official.  It  shall  indicate  for  each  work  the  name  and  surname 
of  the  author,  or  the  name  of  the  publisher,  and  the  title  of  the  work  with 
eventually  such  necessary  supplementary  directions  as  to  assure  a  methodic 


420  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

classification  by  contents  of  the  work,  on  examining  the  title,  the  place 
and  date  of  publication,  the  size,  number  of  pages,  and  price. 

Article  i  7.  The  rule  of  procedure  having  the  same  obligatory  force 
as  the  present  convention,  but  within  the  limits  of  this  same,  shall  be 
made  by  the  international  committee. 

Article  18.  Those  States  and  Colonies  which  have  not  taken  part 
in  the  present  convention  may  be  admitted  later.  Their  accession  will 
be  made  in  writing  to  the  Belgian  Government  which  shall  make  the  fact 
known  to  all  other  contracting  governments.  The  accession  shall  carry 
in  full  right  adhesion  of  all  the  clauses  and  admission  to  all  the  advantages 
stipulated  in  the  present  convention. 

Article  19.     The  present  convention  shall  go  into  effect  the 

and  shall  remain  in  effect  during  twenty  years. 

If  twelve  months  before  the  expiration  of  the  first  twenty  years,  the 
present  convention  shall  not  disband,  the  Bureau  shall  exist  during  a  new 
period  of  twenty  years,  and  so  on.  Withdrawal  shall  be  addressed  to  the 
Belgian  Government.  It  shall  not  be  in  effect  as  regards  the  country 
which  shall  make  it,  the  convention  remaining  executor  for  the  other  ad- 
hering countries. 

Catalog  of  the  Bishop  Jade  Collection.  —  Since  the  death  of  Mr 
Heber  R.  Bishop,  three  years  ago,  the  magnificent  collection  of  jade  ob- 
jects which  he  presented  during  his  lifetime  to  the  Metropolitan  Museum 
of  Art,  in  New  York,  has  been  finally  installed,  in  fifteen  elegant  cases  of 
gilt  bronze  and  plate  glass,  in  the  northeast  room  of  the  second  floor  of 
the  new  wing  of  the  Museum  building,  now  known  as  Bishop  hall. 
This  room  was  arranged  and  decorated,  under  Mr  Bishop's  personal  di- 
rection, by  the  noted  firm  of  Allard  Freres,  of  Paris,  with  the  object  of 
making  it  the  finest  example  on  this  continent  of  the  style  of  Ix)uis  XV. 
So  successfully  has  this  been  done  that  the  Bishop  hall  is  regarded  as 
never  having  been  excelled  even  in  the  time  of  Louis  XV  himself. 

In  a  previous  notice  of  this  subject^  reference  was  made  to  the  re- 
markable Catalog  of  the  collection  that  Mr  Bishop  planned  as  early  as 
1886,  and  the  researches  in  connection  therewith  that  he  provided  for. 
While  it  is  a  source  of  j)rofound  regret  that  Mr  Bishop  did  not  live  to  see 
the  fruition  of  his  labors,  it  is  with  gratification  that  I  am  able  to  an- 
nounce the  final  com[)letion  of  this  beautiful  and  unique  work  and  its  dis- 
tribution  in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  Mr  Bishop's  will.     With  the 


*  See  American  Anthropoloi^ist^  J903»  voL  iv,  pp.  111-117. 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  42 1 

exception  of  six  royal  personages  the  Catalog  has  in  no  case  been  sent  to 
an  individual,  and  no  copy  has  been  or  will  be  sold. 

The  work  bears  the  title  Catalog  and  Investigations  in  Jade,  Pub- 
lished by  Heber  R,  Bishop,  New  York,  1905.  It  consists  of  two  folio 
volumes,  printed  on  the  finest  quality  of  linen  paper,  containing  570  pages 
(vol.  I,  277  pp.;  vol.  II,  293  pp.)  measuring  2o|^  x  16J  inches.  There 
are  150  full-page  plates  (water-colors,  etchings,  and  lithographs),  and 
nearly  300  pen-drawings  in  the  text.  The  volumes  weigh,  respectively, 
69  and  55  pounds.  This  great  work,  the  edition  of  which  is  one  hun- 
dred copies,  aggregated  in  cost  about  $1,850  per  copy,  thus  doubling 
that  of  Audubon's  monumental  folio.  The  Birds  of  America.  From  an 
artistic  point  of  view  it  stands  alone  as  perhaps  the  greatest  work  ever 
issued  —  it  is  certainly  the  greatest  catalog  of  a  collection  in  any  branch 
of  science  or  art. 

The  preparation  and  publication  of  the  Catalog  was  made  possible  by 
the  liberality  of  Mr  Bishop,  who  spared  no  expense  or  care  in  its  execu- 
tion. About  thirty  scientific  and  art  specialists  in  Europe  and  America 
contributed  to  the  subject  to  which  the  work  is  devoted,  and  the  illustra- 
tions were  prepared  with  the  utmost  regard  for  accuracy  and  artistic 
merit.  Chinese  and  Japanese  artists  were  employed  to  execute  many  of 
the  drawings,  and  experts  in  color  were  freely  consulted. 

The  Catalog  possesses  a  special  interest  from  the  fact  that  all  the 
scientific  investigations  conducted  in  connection  with  it  are  based  on 
specimens  in  the  Bishop  collection.  The  entire  mineralogical  and  arche- 
ological  researches  were  in  charge  of  the  writer,  who  spent  more  than 
twelve  years  in  carrying  on  the  investigation.  The  other  collaborators 
are  :  Dr  Stephen  W.  Bushell,  G.M.C.,  Chinese  article  ;  Dr  Robert  Lilley, 
editor ;  Tadamasa  Hayashi,  Chinese  and  Japanese  ;  Dr  William  Hallock, 
adjunct  professor  of  physics  in  Columbia  University  ;  Dr  D.  L.  Penfield, 
professor  of  mineralogy  in  Yale  University ;  Dr  Henry  W.  Foote,  Shef- 
field Scientific  School,  Yale  University  ;  Dr  Joseph  P.  Iddings,  professor 
of  petrology  in  the  University  of  Chicago ;  Prof.  F.  W.  Clarke,  chief 
chemist  of  the  United  States  Geological  Survey ;  Mr  Ira  Harvey  Wool- 
son,  adjunct  professor  of  engineering  in  Columbia  University ;  Mr  Logan 
Waller  Page,  in  charge  of  physical  tests,  United  States  Department  of 
Agriculture ;  Dr  Charles  Palache,  professor  of  petrography  in  Harvard 
University ;  Mr  Louis  V.  Pirsson,  professor  of  petrography  in  Yale  Uni- 
versity ;  Dr  Henry  S.  Washington,  petrographer ;  Prof.  L.  von  Jaczewski, 
professor  of  mineralogy  and  geology  in  the  University  of  Ekaterinoslav, 
St   Petersburg;    Herrn   Geheimrath    Dr  A.   B.  Meyer,  director  of  the 


422  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Konigliches  Zoologisches  und  Anthropologisch-Ethnographisches  Museum 
at  Dresden ;  Herrn  Dr  Max  Bauer,  director  of  the  Mineralogisches 
Institut  der  Konigliches  Universitat  at  Marburg ;  Mr  Robinson, 

artist;  the  late  Dr  Thomas  Wilson,  curator  of  prehistoric  archeology, 
United  States  National  Museum  ;  Dr  Joseph  Edkins  of  Shanghai  ;  Prof.  A. 
Damaur  of  Paris ;  Dr  Ludwig  Leiner,  curator  of  the  Rosegarten  Museum 
at  Constance ;  Mrs  Zelia  Nuttall  of  the  Peabody  Museum,  Cambridge, 
Mass.  ;  Miss  Eliza  R.  Scidmore  of  Washington ;  Dr  F.  Berwerth  of  the 
Hof  Museum  at  Vienna ;  Prof.  Ernst  Weinschenk,  professor  of  mineralogy 
in  the  Mineralogisches  Institut  at  Mlinich ;  the  Field  Columbian  Museum 
at  Chicago ;  the  Smithsonian  Institution  at  Washington ;  the  American 
Museum  of  Natural  History  at  New  York. 

Among  the  illustrators  may  be  mentioned  the  noted  French  etchers 
Sulpis,  Guerard,  Richard,  Piquet,  LeRat,  and  Coutry.  Twelve  of  the 
plates  consist  of  a  series  of  water-color  sketches  illustrating  all  the  proc- 
esses of  jade-working,  and  are  the  product  of  native  Chinese  artists.  A 
number  of  tlie  photographic  plates  are  by  Mr  C.  W.  Smillie  of  the  United 
States  National  Museum.  The  lithographs  are  the  work  of  Messrs  Prang 
&  Co.  and  Forbes  &  Co.  of  Boston.  The  letter-press  was  executed  by- 
Messrs  Theodore  L.  De  Vinne  &  Co.  of  New  York,  who  regard  it  as  the 
most  important  work  among  the  many  celebrated  productions  of  the 
De  Vinne  press.  The  paper  used  is  the  product  of  the  mills  of  the  L.  L. 
Brown  Paper  Co.  of  Adams,  Mass.  The  binding  of  the  volumes,  which 
was  intrusted  to  Strikeman  &  Co.  of  New  York,  is  in  full  green  levant, 
and  the  beautiful  tooling  and  perfect  workmanship  are  fully  in  keeping 
with  the  other  features  of  the  Catalog. 

For  the  benefit  of  students  who  may  desire  to  consult  the  Catalog, 
the  following  list  of  recipients  is  given  : 

Royal  personages :  I'he  Prince  of  Wales,  the  Emperor  of  Germany, 
the  Czar  of  Russia,  the  Queen  of  Holland,  the  Mikado  of  Japan,  the 
Emperor  of  China. 

United  States  :  Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art,  New  York  ;  American 
Museum  of  Natural  History,  New  York ;  Grolier  Club,  New  York  ;  New 
York  Public  Library;  Columbia  University,  New  York  ;  Harvard  Uni- 
versity, Cambridge ;  Library  of  Congress,  Washington  (two  copies  for 
copyright);  United  States  National  Museum,  Washington;  Yale  Uni- 
versity, New  Haven;  Girard  College,  Philadelphia;  Johns  Hopkins 
University,  Baltimore ;  Cornell  University,  Ithaca ;  Princeton  Univer- 
sity ;  Boston  Public  Library  ;  Museum  of  Fine  Arts,  Boston  ;  University 
of  California,  Berkeley  ;  Golden  Gate  Museum,  San  Francisco  ;  Medford 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  423 

Library,  Medford,  Mass.  ;  Field  Museum  of  Natural  History,  Chicago; 
John  Crerar  Library,  Chicago ;  Art  Institute,  Chicago ;  New  York  State 
Library,  Albany ;  Public  Library  of  Saint  Louis ;  State  Library,  Rich- 
mond, Va.  ;  Enoch  Pratt  Free  Library,  Baltimore ;  Free  Library,  Phila- 
delphia ;  Public  Library,  St.  Paul ;  Carnegie  Museum,  Pittsburg ;  Brook- 
lyn Institute  of  Science  and  Art. 

Canada :  Toronto  University ;  Public  Library  of  Toronto  ;  McGill 
University,  Montreal. 

Mexico :  Biblioteca  Nacional,  City  of  Mexico. 

England  and  Scotland :  British  Museum  Library,  London  ;  South 
Kensington  Museum,  London  ;  University  of  London ;  Bodleian  Library, 
Oxford ;  University  Library,  Cambridge ;  Fitzwilliam  Museum,  Cam- 
bridge ;  Birmingham  Free  Library ;  Manchester  Free  Library ;  Edinburgh 
University ;  University  of  St  Andrew's,  Scotland ;  University  of  Glas- 
gow ;  University  of  Aberdeen. 

Germany :  University  of  Berlin  ;  Konigliche  Kunst-Gewerbe  Museum, 
Berlin ;  Konigliche  Bibliothek,  Berlin ;  Konigliches  Zoologisches  und 
Anthropologisch-Ethnographisches  Museum,  Dresden ;  University  of 
Munich ;  University  of  Marburg ;  University  of  Breslau ;  University  of 
Heidelberg ;  Mineralogical  Institute  of  Hesse. 

France :  Bibliothdque  Nationale,  Paris;  Museed'Histoire  Naturelle, 
Paris ;  Museum  of  the  Louvre,  Paris. 

Austria  :  Die  Bibliothek  das  Kaiserhaus,  Vienna ;  Hof-Kunstmuseum, 
Vienna ;  K.  K.  Universitats-Bibliothek,  Vienna ;  National  Museum  of 
Hungary,  Budapest. 

Italy  :  Library  of  the  Vatican,  Rome ;  Bibliotheca  Nazionale  Vittorio 
Emanuele,  Rome ;  Bibliotheca  Nazionale  Centrale,  Florence. 

Spain :  Biblioteca  Nacional,  Madrid. 

Sweden :  Library  of  the  Royal  Ethnographical  Museum,  Stockholm. 

Norway :  Library  of  the  University  of  Christiania. 

Denmark :  Royal  Library,  Copenhagen. 

Russia  :  Imperial  Library  of  Russia,  St  Petersburg ;  Library  of  the 
Summer  Palace,  St  Petersburg;  Berg  Akademie,  St  Petersburg;  Uni- 
versity of  Warsaw. 

Japan :  Imperial  Museum  of  Tokio. 

Belgium  :  Biblioth^que  Royale,  Brussels. 

An  extended  description  of  the  Catalog,  with  illustrations,  has  been 
published  as  Occasional  Notes  No.  1 1 ,  Supplement  to  the  Bulletin  of  the 
Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art,  New  York,  May,  1906. 

George  F.  Kunz. 


424  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

American  Assodation  of  Museums.  —  During  the  first  week  of  this 
year  the  directors  and  the  executive  officers  of  several  leading  museums 
of  this  country  met  in  Washington  to  discuss  the  advisability  of  forming 
an  association  of  museums  on  lines  similar  to  those  of  the  Museums 
Association  of  Great  Britain.  As  a  result  of  this  meeting  it  was  decided 
that  those  interested  directly  in  all  museums  should  be  invited  to  attend  a 
formal  organization  meeting  in  New  York  city  on  May  15,  and  an  invita- 
tion was  extended  by  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History  that 
the  first  meeting  be  held  in  that  institution.  This  invitation  was  extended 
on  behalf  of  the  Washington  confreres,  through  the  pages  of  Science^  by 
Dr  W.  J.  Holland,  director  of  the  Carnegie  Museum  of  Pittsburg. 

On  the  day  appointed  there  met  in  the  American  Museum  of  Natural 
History  about  one  hundred  museum  workers,  representing  nearly  all  the 
prominent  museums  of  the  United  States,  including  the  Bemice  Pauahi 
Bishop  Museum  of  Honolulu.  The  meeting,  which  extended  over  two 
days,  held  two  sessions  on  the  first  day  in  the  American  Museum  of 
Natural  History,  and  two  on  the  following  day  at  the  Botanical  Museum 
in  Bronx  Park.  The  first  day  the  delegates  were  the  guests  at  luncheon 
of  the  trustees  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  and  on  the 
second  day  of  the  trustees  of  the  Botanical  Museum.  The  luncheon  of 
the  second  day  was  especially  notable  as  it  was  held  at  the  Hermitage, 
where  several  short  speeches  were  made,  which  did  much  toward 
strengthening  the  bond  of  relationship  among  the  representatives  of  the 
various  museums.  The  serious  work  before  the  delegates,  which  occupied 
the  greater  part  of  the  four  sessions,  was  the  consideration  of  a  report 
presented  by  a  committee  composed  of  Dr  W.  J.  Holland  of  the  Carnegie 
Museum,  Dr  William  M.  R.  French  of  the  Art  Institute  of  Chicago, 
Professor  P.  M.  Rea  of  the  College  of  Charleston,  Dr  James  E.  Tal- 
mage  of  the  Deseret  Museum  of  Salt  Lake  City,  and  Dr  W.  P.  Wilson  of 
the  Philadelphia  Commercial  Museum.  This  report  was  finally  adopted 
as  a  preliminary  constitution,  to  remain  in  force  for  one  year  and  subject 
to  revision  at  the  next  annual  meeting.  After  the  formal  adoi)tion  of  the 
constitution,  the  following  officers  were  elected  : 

President,  Dr  H.  C.  Bumpus,  Director  of  the  American  Museum  of 
Natural  History,  New  York.  First  Vice-President,  Dr  William  M.  R. 
French,  Director  of  the  Art  Institute  of  Chicago.  Second  Vice-President^ 
Dr  W.  J.  Holland,  Director  of  the  Carnegie  Museum,  Pittsburg.  Sec- 
retary, Dr  George  A.  Dorsey,  Curator  of  Anthropology,  Field  Museum 
of  Natural  History,  Chicago.  Treasurer,  Dr  W.  P.  Wilson,  Director  of 
the   Philadelphia   Commercial    Museum,    Philadelphia.      Councilors  for 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  425 

three  years y  Dr  Richard  Rathbun,  Assistant  Secretary  of  the  Smithsonian 
Institution  in  charge  of  the  National  Museum,  Washington,  and  Profes- 
sor E.  S.  Morse,  Director  of  the  Peabody  Museum,  Salem,  Mass.  Coun- 
cilors for  two  years ^  Dr  N.  L.  Britton,  Director-in -chief,  New  York 
Botanical  Garden,  Bronx  Park,  New  York,  and  Dr  James  E.  Talmage, 
University  of  Utah,  Salt  Lake  City.  Councilors  for  one  year y  Mr  F.  A, 
Lucas,  Curator-in -chief  of  the  Brooklyn  Institute  of  Arts  and  Sciences, 
and  Mr  William  H.  Goodyear,  Curator  of  Fine  Arts  of  the  Brooklyn 
Institute  Museum. 

During  the  interval  occupied  by  the  organization  committee  in  pre- 
paring the  constitution  and  during  the  balloting  for  officers,  papers  were 
read  as  time  permitted.  The  titles  of  the  more  important  papers  pre- 
sented are  as  follows  : 

Is  It  Desirable  to  Introduce  Departments  of  Geography  in  Educa- 
tional Museums  ?     Dr  W  J  McGee. 

The  Two  Kinds  of  Museums.     Dr  Benjamin  Ives  Gilman. 

The  Aims  and  Principles  of  the  Construction  and  Management  of 
Museums  of  Fine  Arts.     Dr  Benjamin  Ives  Gilman. 

Museums  and  Museum  Work  for  Public  Schools.  Professor  Henry 
Montgomery. 

A  Method  of  Recording  Bird  Records.     Dr  P.  M.  Rea. 

The  Educational  Arrangement  of  Natural  History  Museums.  Mr  G. 
C.  Baker. 

Metallic  Cases  in  Museums.     Dr  Milton  J.  Greenman. 

On  May  17th  a  meeting  of  the  Council  was  held,  lasting  nearly  the 
entire  day,  in  the  office  of  President  Bumpus.  At  this  time  certain  work- 
ing rules  were  considered  and  adopted  for  the  guidance  of  the  Council 
during  the  ensuing  year  ;  plans  were  discussed  looking  toward  the  suc- 
cess of  the  next  annual  meeting,  which  the  Association  had  already  deter- 
mined should  be  held  in  Pittsburg  in  accordance  with  an  invitation  ex- 
tended to  the  Association  by  the  director  and  trustees  of  the  Carnegie 
Institute,  the  meeting  to  be  held  in  May  or  June,  as  shall  later  be  deter- 
mined by  the  Council.  At  this  meeting  also  committees,  made  neces- 
sary by  the  presentation  of  certain  resolutions  on  the  previous  day,  were 
appointed.     Of  these  resolutions,  the  following  are  of  general  interest : 

( I )  The  presentation  of  the  claims  of  the  members  of  the  staffs  of 
museums  to  the  committee  in  charge  of  the  Carnegie  Foundation  for  the 
Promotion  of  Teaching.  (2)  The  securing  of  such  legislation  as  will 
extend  to  the  more  important  museums  of  this  country  such  special  oppor- 
tunities as  are  now  offered  to  the  United  States  National  Museum  by 


426  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  different  departments  of  the  national  government.  (3)  The  secur- 
ing of  more  favorable  postal  rates  for  the  publications  of  the  Association. 
(4)  The  alliance  of  the  Association  with  the  National  Educational 
Association. 

The  object  of  those  originally  responsible  for  the  calling  together  of 
the  Association  seems  to  have  met  with  unexpected  and  gratifying  suc- 
cess. Not  only  was  the  attendance  much  larger  than  had  been  antici- 
pated, but  the  feeling  which  prevailed  throughout  and  characterized 
every  stage  of  the  proceedings  was  entirely  in  accord  with  the  aims 
of  the  Association  —  the  promotion  of  a  better  understanding  and  the 
affording  of  a  closer  bond  of  union  among  those  engaged  in  museum 
work  in  America.  George  A.  Dorsey, 

Secretary, 

Mesa  Verde  National  Park.  —  By  act  of  Congress  approved  June 
29,  1906,  the  Mesa  Verde  National  Park  was  created.  The  law  reads  as 
follows : 

Be  it  enacted  [etc.],  That  there  is  hereby  reserved  from  settlement, 
entry,  sale,  or  other  disposal,  and  set  apart  as  a  public  reservation,  all  those 
certain  tracts,  pieces,  and  parcels  of  land  lying  and  being  situate  in  the 
State  of  Colorado,  and  within  the  boundaries  particularly  described  as 
follows :  Beginning  at  the  northwest  corner  of  section  twenty-seven, 
township  thirty-five  north,  range  sixteen  west.  New  Mexico  principal 
meridian  ;  thence  easterly  along  the  section  lines  to  the  southwest  corner 
of  the  southeast  quarter  of  section  t\^'enty,  township  thirty-five  north, 
range  fifteen  west ;  thence  northerly  to  the  northwest  corner  of  the  south- 
east quarter  of  said  section  ;  thence  easterly  to  the  northeast  corner  of  the 
southeast  quarter  of  said  section  ;  thence  northerly  to  the  northwest  cor- 
ner of  section  twenty-one,  said  township  ;  thence  easterly  to  the  north- 
east corner  of  the  northwest  quarter  of  said  section  ;  thence  northerly  to 
the  northwest  corner  of  the  southeast  quarter  of  section  sixteen,  said  town- 
ship ;  thence  easterly  to  the  northeast  comer  of  the  southeast  quarter  of 
section  fifteen,  said  township ;  thence  southerly  to  the  southeast  corner 
of  said  section  ;  thence  easterly  to  the  southwest  corner  of  section  thir- 
teen, said  township ;  thence  northerly  to  the  northwest  corner  of  the 
southwest  quarter  of  said  section  ;  thence  easterly  to  the  northeast  cor- 
ner of  the  southwest  quarter  of  said  section  ;  thence  northerly  to  the 
northwest  corner  of  the  northeast  quarter  of  said  section  ;  thence  easterly 
to  the  northeast  comer  of  said  section  ;  thence  northerly  to  the  northwest 
comer  of  the  southwest  quarter  of  section  seven,   township  thirty  five 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  427 

north,  range  fourteen  west ;  thence  easterly  to  the  northeast  comer  of  the 
southwest  quarter  of  said  section  ;  thence  northerly  to  the  northwest  cor- 
ner of  the  southeast  quarter  of  section  six,  said  township  ;  thence  easterly 
to  the  northeast  comer  of  the  southwest  quarter  of  section  four,  said 
township ;  thence  southerly  to  the  northwest  comer  of  the  southeast 
quarter  of  section  nine,  said  township ;  thence  easterly  to  the  northeast 
comer  of  the  southeast  quarter  of  said  section ;  thence  southerly  to  the 
northwest  comer  of  section  twenty-two,  said  township  ;  thence  easterly  to 
the  northeast  comer  of  the  northwest  quarter  of  said  section ;  thence 
southerly  to  the  northwest  comer  of  the  southeast  quarter  of  said  section  ; 
thence  easterly  to  the  northeast  comer  of  the  southeast  quarter  of  said 
section ;  then  southerly  to  the  northwest  quarter  of  section  twenty-six, 
said  township  ;  thence  easterly  to  the  northeast  comer  of  the  northwest 
quarter  of  said  section  ;  thence  southerly  to  the  southeast  comer  of  the 
southwest  quarter  of  section  thirty-five,  said  township ;  thence  easterly  to 
the  northeast  comer  of  section  two,  township  thirty-four  north,  range 
fourteen  west ;  thence  southerly  along  the  section  line  between  sections 
one  and  two  and  between  sections  eleven  and  twelve  to  the  northern 
boundary  of  the  southern  Ute  Indian  Reservation  ;  thence  westerly  along 
the  northem  boundary  of  said  reservation  to  the  center  of  section  nine, 
township  thirty -four  north,  range  sixteen  west ;  thence  northerly  along  the 
quarter-section  lines  to  the  northwest  corner  of  the  southeast  quarter  of 
section  twenty-eight,  township  thirty-five  north,  range  sixteen  west ; 
thence  easterly  to  the  northeast  comer  of  the  southeast  quarter  of  said 
section ;  thence  northerly  to  the  northwest  comer  of  section  twenty- 
seven,  said  township,  the  place  of  beginning. 

Sec.  2.  That  said  public  park  shall  be  known  as  the  Mesa  Verde  Na- 
tional Park,  and  shall  be  under  the  exclusive  control  of  the  Secretary  of 
the  Interior,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  prescribe  such  rules  and  regulations 
and  establish  such  service  as  he  may  deem  necessary  for  the  care  and 
management  of  the  same.  Such  regulations  shall  provide  specifically  for 
the  preservation  from  injury  or  spoliation  of  the  ruins  and  other  works 
and  relics  of  prehistoric  or  primitive  man  within  said  park  :  Proinded^ 
That  all  prehistoric  ruins  that  are  situated  within  five  miles  of  the  boun- 
daries of  said  park,  as  herein  described,  on  Indian  lands  and  not  on  lands 
alienated  by  patent  from  the  ownership  of  the  United  States  are  hereby 
placed  under  the  custodianship  of  the  Secretary  of  Interior,  and  shall  be 
administered  by  the  same  service  that  is  established  for  the  custodianship 
of  the  park. 


428  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8, 1906 

Sec.  3.  That  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  be,  and  he  is  hereby  au- 
thorized to  permit  examinations,  excavations,  and  other  gathering  of 
objects  of  interest  within  said  park  by  any  person  or  ]>ersons  whom  he 
may  deem  properly  qualified  to  conduct  such  examinations,  excavations, 
or  gatherings,  subject  to  such  rules  and  regulations  as  he  may  prescribe  : 
Provided  always.  That  the  examinations,  excavations,  and  gatherings  are 
undertaken  only  for  the  benefit  of  some  reputable  museum,  university, 
college,  or  other  recognized  scientific  or  educational  institution,  with  a 
view  to  increasing  the  knowledge  of  such  objects  and  aiding  the  general 
advancement  of  archaeological  science. 

Sec.  4.  That  any  person  or  persons  who  may  otherwise  in  any  man- 
ner willfuly  remove,  disturb,  destroy,  or  molest  any  of  the  ruins,  mounds, 
buildings,  graves,  relics,  or  other  evidences  of  an  ancient  civilization  or 
other  proi)erty  from  said  park  shall  be  deemed  guilty  of  a  misdemeanor, 
and  upon  conviction  before  any  court  having  jurisdiction  of  such  offenses 
shall  be  fined  not  more  than  one  thousand  dollars  or  imprisoned  not  more 
than  twelve  months,  or  such  person  or  persons  may  be  fined  and  im- 
prisoned, at  the  discretion  of  the  judge,  and  shall  be  required  to  restore 
the  property  disturbed,  if  possible. 

Field  Museum  of  Natural  History.  —  The  Annual  Report  of  the 
Field  Columbian  Museum  (Field  Museum  of  Natural  History),  of  Chi- 
cago, for  1904-05,  sets  forth  the  progress  of  the  Museum  during  the 
year.  It  is  learned  that  of  the  eighteen  lectures  delivered  under  the 
Museum's  auspices  during  the  period  covered  by  the  report,  four 
were  devoted  to  anthropological  topics  ;  while  of  the  seven  publica- 
tions issued,  all  but  three  belong  to  the  anthropological  series,  in- 
dicating strongly  that  in  the  publication  of  results,  at  least,  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  is  far  in  advance  of  the  other  departments  of  the 
Museum.  'I'he  same  department  has  600  books  and  85  pamphlets  in  its 
special  library,  out  of  36,572  volumes  in  the  Museum,  which  would  seem 
to  indicate  that  the  dei)artment  is  perhaps  not  receiving  full  exchange 
returns  for  its  excellent  series  of  publications.  The  entries  in  the  acces- 
sions catalogues  of  the  department  total  72,551,  of  which  9,710  were 
made  during  the  year.  The  former  figure  again  shows  the  activity  of  the 
department,  which  exceeds  in  its  entries  those  of  any  other  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  department  of  Botany.  Most  of  the  collections  procured 
were  by  purchase,  a  fact  due  in  i)art  to  the  St  Louis  Exposition.  Field 
work,  however,  was  not  neglected.  Dr  C.  F.  Newcombe  made  collec- 
tions on  the  Northwest  coast;   Dr  J.  W.  Hudson  in  northern  California; 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  429 

and  an  important  acquisition  was  gained  through  the  generosity  of  Mr  S. 
L.  James,  who  gave  a  collection  of  Egyptian  antiquities  and  a  marble 
sarcophagus,  the  latter  the  work  of  Grecian  or  Roman  artisans.  A  pre- 
pared head  from  the  Jivaro  Indians  of  Ecquador  and  a  small  collection  of 
stone  implements  from  Ireland  were  presented  by  Mr  H.  D.  Higinbotham 
and  Mr  W.  E.  Prager  respectively.  Among  the  objects  received  through 
exchange  are  100  skulls  of  NavaHo  and  other  Southwestern  Indians,  a 
Haida  house-post,  models  of  Mitla  and  Monte  Alban,  and  a  series  of 
busts  from  Siberia.  From  the  St  Louis  Exposition  many  valuable  objects 
were  obtained,  including:  the  Zavaleta  archeological  collection  from 
Calchaqui,  Argentina  ;  a  collection  of  Tibetan  bronzes  and  objects  illus- 
trating East  Indian  ethnology ;  Maori  feather  cloaks  and  carvings  from 
New  Zealand ;  an  archeological  collection  from  Egypt ;  ethnological  col- 
lections from  German  East  Africa,  chiefly  from  the  Massai,  including  30 
life  masks,  a  costumed  Massai  warrior,  and  a  carved  doorway  of  native 
design ;  Siamese  objects,  including  musical  instruments,  armor,  and 
weapons ;  a  choice  series  of  Filipino  objects,  largely  head-gear  \  a 
collection  from  the  Pygmy  region  of  Africa;  Haida  carvings;  Hupa 
featherwork ;  Cinghalese  ceremonial  masks ;  about  200  objects  from  cliff- 
dwellings  ;  and  specimens  from  the  Ainu,  the  Cheyenne,  and  the  North 
Pacific  coast  Indians.  Noteworthy  among  other  collections  obtained  by 
purchase  during  the  year  were  the  Frederick  Starr  collection  of  Mexican 
objects,  numbering  about  6,000,  and  a  rare  throwing-stick  from  Utah 
cliff- ruins. 

In  the  spring  lecture  course  of  the  Museum,  for  1906,  the  following 
are  of  anthropological  interest  : 

March  10  :  Some  Aspects  of  Archeological  Work  in  Central  America, 
by  Dr  Alfred  M.  Tozzer  of  Harvard  University. 

March   24 :  How  People  Live  in  Congo  Land,  by  Dr  D.  W.  C. 
Snyder  of  New  York  City. 

April  14 :  The  Seri  Indians  of  Sonora,  by  Dr  W  J  McGee  of  the 
St  Louis  Public  Museum. 

April  28  :  The  Monuments  of  a  Prehistoric  Race,  by  Mr  Frederick 
M onsen  of  San  Francisco. 

American  Museum  of  Natural  History. — The  Report  of  the  American 
Museum  of  Natural  History  for  1905,  which  has  recently  appeared,  an- 
nounces that  general  progress  has  been  made  during  the  year  in  the  depart- 
ment of  anthropology.  The  work  of  the  Jesup  North  Pacific  Expedition 
was  continued  under  the  general  direction  of  Dr  Boas,  who  paid  particular 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  8 — 38. 


430  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

attention  to  the  publication  of  results,  consisting  of  three  volumes  of 
Memoirs  of  great  scientific  interest  and  importance.  These  volumes  are 
Kwakiutl  Texts,  by  Franz  Boas  and  George  Hunt ;  Contributions  to  the 
Ethnology  of  the  Haida  of  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  y  by  John  R.  Swan  ton ; 
and  Religion  and  Myths  of  the  Koryaky  by  Waldemar  Jochelson.  In  ad- 
dition, Roland  B.  Dixon's  paper  on  The  Northern  Maidu  has  been 
published  in  the  series  of  Bulletins,  and  a  manuscript  on  the  Shasta  Indians 
is  awaiting  publication.  The  field  work  in  eastern  Asia  having  been 
concluded,  Dr  Laufer  devoted  his  time  to  the  classification  and  arrange- 
ment of  the  Chinese  collection,  and  to  research  on  the  collection  of 
ancient  Chinese  pottery,  his  manuscript  on  the  pottery  of  the  Han  period 
being  practically  completed. 

Dr  Clark  Wissler,  acting  curator  of  the  department,  has  devoted 
special  attention  to  the  material  culture  of  the  Plains  Indians  and  to  a 
general  ethnographic  survey  of  North  America  with  a  view  of  determining 
the  limits  of  the  various  cultural  areas.  Researches  have  been  conducted 
by  Dr  William  Jones  among  the  Chippewa  Indians,  by  Dr  P.  E.  God- 
dard  among  the  Sarsi,  Mr  Frank  G.  Speck  among  the  Yuchi,  Miss 
Constance  Goddard  Du  Bois  among  the  Mission  Indians,  and  by  Dr  J.  B. 
Walker  among  the  Dakota.  Collections  have  been  made  on  the  Yakima 
reservation  by  Mr  Edward  Sapir  and  among  the  Blackfeet  by  Mr  D.  C. 
Duvall.  The  most  noteworthy  collection  received  during  the  year  was 
that  obtained  from  the  Philippine  village  at  the  Louisiana  Purchase 
Exposition,  presented  to  the  Museum  by  President  Jesup.  Other  im- 
portant accessions  by  the  department  of  anthropology  are  an  African 
collection,  the  gift  of  Mr  George  S.  Bowdoin  ;  a  unique  mummy  from 
South  America  presented  by  Mr  J.  Pierpont  Morgan ;  a  large  collection 
of  baskets  and  ceremonial  objects,  by  Mr  Adolph  Lewisohn  ;  a  num- 
ber of  valuable  Indian  specimens,  by  Mrs  Albert  Bierstadt,  and  a  fine 
collection  of  Socorro  pottery  by  Mr  George  G.  Heye.  A  valuable 
painting,  **The  Song  of  Innookshuee,**  made  in  Greenland  in  1894 
by  Mr  F.  W.  Stokes,  was  presented  to  the  Museum  by  Messrs 
George  Foster  Peabody,  Robert  C.  Ogden,  and  Arthur  Curtiss 
James. 

The  Loubat  collection  of  Mexican  antiquities  has  been  strengthened 
by  exchanges  with  other  institutions ;  but  the  most  important  work  accom- 
plished in  the  division  of  Mexican  and  Central  American  archeology  was 
the  painting  of  a  cast  of  the  sculptured  side  of  a  room  in  the  ruins  of 
Chichen  Itza,  Yucatan,  through  the  assistance  of  Miss  Adela  Breton,  of 
England,   whose  exhibition  of  reproductions  of  ancient  Mexican  mural 


> 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  43 1 

paintings  at  the  meeting  of  the  International  Congress  of  Americanists  at 
New  York  in  1902  was  so  greatly  admired. 

The  department  of  anthropology  of  the  American  Museum  has  recently 
lost  the  services  of  Dr  Franz  Boas^  Mr  Adolph  F.  Bandelier,  and  Dr 
Berthold  Laufer.  These  losses,  with  the  resignation  of  Professor  F.  W. 
Putnam  and  Dr  Livingston  Farrand  last  year,  cannot  fail  to  cripple  seri- 
ously the  activities  of  an  institution  that  has  done  so  much  during  the  last 
few  years  to  advance  anthropology  in  America. 

The  San  Francisco  Disaster.  — Anthropologists  will  learn  with  de- 
light, after  fearing  the  worst,  that  the  chief  center  of  anthropological  work 
in  the  West  —  the  University  of  California  —  passed  practically  unin- 
jured through  the  terrible  ordeal  that  beset  San  Francisco  and  its  vicinity 
in  April.  As  is  well  known,  the  museum  of  the  University  is  installed  in 
one  of  the  buildings  of  the  Affiliated  Colleges  in  San  Francisco,  which  is 
fortunately  so  isolated  that  it  was  not  affected  by  the  conflagration,  while 
the  earthquake  did  almost  no  damage  either  to  the  building,  which  is 
constructed  with  a  view  of  resisting  just  such  disturbances,  or  to  the  col- 
lections. But  for  the  fact  that  much  of  the  time  and  energy  of  the  Uni- 
versity corps  has  been  devoted  to  the  relief  of  the  sufferers,  the  work  of 
the  Department  of  Anthropology  would  have  been  continued  uninter- 
ruptedly. The  members  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association, 
whose  interest  was  so  closely  drawn  to  the  University  during  the  Cali- 
fornia meeting  in  August  and  September  last,  will  receive  this  word, 
which  comes  from  Professor  Putnam  and  Doctor  Kroeber,  with  no  small 
degree  of  pleasure.  The  chief  injury  to  the  University  lies  in  the  tem- 
porary impairment  of  its  income,  but  an  institution  that  has  accomplished 
so  much  in  so  short  a  time  will  no  doubt  overcome  this  obstacle  in  the 
very  near  future.* 

It  is  with  regret  that  so  much  cannot  be  said  of  Leland  Stanford  Uni- 
versity at  Palo  Alto,  for  while  the  first  reports  were  more  or  less  exag- 
gerated, later  and  authentic  information  of  damage  to  the  buildings  is 
bad  enough  indeed.  The  libraries  of  San  Francisco  are  also  severe  suf- 
ferers. Fortunately  the  Bancroft  Library,  which  was  acquired  by  the 
University  of  California  a  few  months  ago,  as  announced  in  these  pages 
at  the  time,  was  saved  intact,  although  in  the  path  of  the  fire.  At  least 
half  of  the  Sutro  Library,  which  numbered  about  200,000  volumes  and 
which  for  years  had  been  in  storage  awaiting  final  disposition  as  a  public 

*  Since  these  lines  were  put  in  type  word  has  been  received  that  the  Legislature  has 
come  to  the  relief  of  the  University,  so  that  no  curtailment  of  its  corps  will  be  necessary. 


432  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8, 1906 

library,  was  saved  almost  miraculously  in  the  heart  of  the  burned  district. 
The  California  Academy  of  Sciences,  the  Public  Library,  the  Mercantile 
Library,  and  the  Mechanics  Institute  (the  last  two  had  recendy  been  con- 
solidated), were  destroyed,  as  were  also  the  archives  of  the  Surveyor 
General  of  California  which  contained  Spanish  documents  of  historical 
and  ethnological  value. 

The  suggestion  is  here  offered  that  the  American  Anthropological 
Association  and  the  institutions  in  touch  with  it  send  such  reprints,  dupli- 
cates, and  other  scientific  publications  (except  those  of  the  Smithsonian) 
as  may  be  available,  to  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences,  addressed  in 
care  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  Washington,  D.  C.  The  Smith- 
sonian Institution  announces  that  it  will  gladly  forward  all  such  publica- 
tions from  Washington  to  San  Francisco  without  cost  to  the  sender. 
Publications  sent  by  mail  may  be  directed  for  the  present  to  the  California 
Academy  of  Sciences  in  care  of  the  University  of  California  at  Berkeley, 
which  will  hold  them  until  the  Academy  can  take  steps  toward  rebuild- 
ing. Such  action  will  do  much  toward  replenishing  the  splendid  library  of 
the  Academy  that  has  been  so  great  a  boon  to  students  on  the  Pacific  coast. 

Professor  Putnam  and  the  History  of  Religions  Club.  —  At  the 

March  meeting  of  the  History  of  Religions  Club  of  Harvard  University, 
a  Club  founded  by  Professor  C.  H.  Toy  some  twelve  or  thirteen  years 
ago,  Professor  F.  W.  Putnam,  one  of  the  charter  members,  was  presented 
with  an  autograph  letter  of  congratulation  by  the  members  of  the  Club, 
in  recognition  of  the  fiftieth  anniversary  of  his  connection  with  the  Uni- 
versity. Professor  C.  R.  I^nman  also  read  the  following  lines,  written 
by  him  in  honor  of  the  occasion,  and  Professor  Putnam,  after  replying, 
gave  later  in  the  evening  some  entertaining  reminiscences  of  the  Univer- 
sity as  it  was  fifty  years  ago,  and  of  his  association  as  a  student  with 
Louis  Agassiz.  R.  B.  D. 

Thou  scion  of  a  sturdy  English  stock, 

Putnam  of  Puttenham  in  Surrey  fair,  — 
Which,  once  transplanted  to  New  England  rock. 

Thereout  life-sap  did  wrest,  and  flourished  there,  — 

Which,  from  John  Putnam's  day,  in  Salem  quaint, 

Its  branches  green  with  others  interlaced. 
With  Fiske,  Ward,  Appleton,  and  many  a  saint 

Whose  deeds  the  Bay  State  history  have  graced,  — 

A  stock,  whose  men,  e'en  from  the  days  of  yore, 
Grcat-grandsire,  grandsire,  sire,  and  thou,  O  friend. 

In  line  direct  through  generations  four, 

To  Harvard's  bead-roll  dignity  do  lend,  — 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  433 

Yoke-fellow  true,  — to  thee  thy  friends  do  say, 

Full  fifty  years  thy  furrow  hast  thou  plowed, 
Hast  borne  the  heat  and  burden  of  the  day. 

Accept  from  us  our  plaudit,  hearty,  loud. 

Thy  fathers,  for  three  generations  back. 

The  Bible-name  of  Ebenezer  bore. 
Thy  name  is  Frederic  ;  nor  doth  it  lack 

Its  fitness,  if  we  trust  grammarian's  lore. 

For  ''  rich  in  peace,"  thy  spirit  swayed  thy  mind 

So,  that  thou  keptst  the  tenor  of  thy  way 
Unswerved  by  praise  or  blame,  and  so  didst  find 

The  light  that  lightens  to  the  perfect  day. 

And  not  alone  a  Frederic  art  thou. 

The  name  of  Ebenezer  mayst  thou  claim. 
Thou  '<  stone  of  help  *'  in  the  great  work  that  now 

Hath  brought  our  Harvard  to  her  splendid  fame. 

For  as  we  follow  from  those  early  years 

The  small  beginnings,  now  so  grandly  grown. 
We  see  thy  hand  and  heart,  thy  hopes  and  fears. 

In  constant  working,  now  by  triumphs  known. 

The  past  of  a  mysterious  folk  to  ken 

From  grave  or  shell -heap,  pueblo,  serpent-mound. 

To  read  a  book  writ  with  nor  ink  nor  pen,  — 

Such  was  thy  task.     We  see  what  thou  hast  found. 

Old  as  the  Old  World  is  the  New  Worid»s  face. 

Its  past  no  more  can  wholly  hid  remain. 
For,  lo,  the  romance  of  a  vanished  race. 

Thou  callest  back  and  bidst  to  live  again. 

Preservation  of  Antiquities.  —  The  bill  "for  the  preservation  of 
American  antiquities,"  attention  to  which  has  already  been  directed  in 
these  pages,  has  been  finally  enacted  into  law  by  approval  of  the  Presi- 
dent on  June  8.  As  it  now  stands  on  the  statute  books  the  act  is  as 
follows : 

Be  it  enacted  [etc.] ,  That  any  person  who  shall  appropriate,  excavate, 
injure,  or  destroy  any  historic  or  prehistoric  ruin  or  monument,  or  any 
object  of  antiquity,  situated  on  lands  owned  or  controlled  by  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States,  without  the  permission  of  the  Secretary  of  the 
Department  of  the  Government  having  jurisdiction  over  the  lands  on  which 
said  antiquities  are  situated,  shall,  upon  conviction,  be  fined  in  a  sum  of 
not  more  than  five  hundred  dollars  or  be  imprisoned  for  a  period  of  not 


434  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

more  than  ninety  days,  or  shall  suffer  both  fine  and  imprisonment,  in  the 
discretion  of  the  court. 

Sec.  2.  That  the  President  of  the  United  States  is  hereby  authorized, 
in  his  discretion,  to  declare  by  public  proclamation  historic  landmarks, 
historic  and  prehistoric  structures,  and  other  objects  of  historic  or  scien- 
tific interest  that  are  situated  upon  the  lands  owned  or  controlled  by  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  to  be  national  monuments,  and  may 
reserve  as  a  part  thereof  parcels  of  land,  the  limits  of  which  in  all  cases 
shall  be  confined  to  the  smallest  area  compatible  with  the  proper  care  and 
management  of  the  objects  to  be  protected :  Provided^  That  when  such 
objects  are  situated  upon  a  tract  covered  by  a  bona  fide  unperfected  claim 
or  held  in  private  ownership,  the  tract,  or  so  much  thereof  as  may  be 
necessary  for  the  proper  care  and  management  of  the  object,  may  be 
relinquished  to  the  Government,  and  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  is 
hereby  authorized  to  accept  the  relinquishment  of  such  tracts  in  behalf  of 
the  Government  of  the  United  States. 

Sec.  3.  That  permits  for  the  examination  of  ruins,  the  excavation  of 
archaeological  sites,  and  the  gathering  of  objects  of  antiquity  upon  the 
lands  under  their  respective  jurisdictions  may  be  granted  by  the  Secre- 
taries of  the  Interior,  Agriculture,  and  War  to  institutions  which  they 
may  deem  properly  qualified  to  conduct  such  examination,  excavation, 
or  gathering,  subject  to  such  rules  and  regulations  as  they  may  prescribe  : 
Provided,  That  the  examinations,  excavations,  and  gatherings  are  under- 
taken for  the  benefit  of  reputable  museums,  universities,  colleges,  or  other 
recognized  scientific  or  educational  institutions,  with  a  view  to  increasing 
the  knowledge  of  such  objects,  and  that  the  gatherings  shall  be  made  for 
permanent  preservation  in  public  museums. 

Sec.  4.  That  the  Secretaries  of  the  Departments  aforesaid  shall  make 
and  publish  from  time  to  time  uniform  rules  and  regulations  for  the 
purpose  of  carrying  out  the  provisions  of  this  Act. 

Missouri  Historical  Society. — The  proposal  of  the  Missouri  His- 
torical Society  to  vest  the  beneficial  ownership  of  all  the  property  owned 
by  it  in  the  people  of  the  State  of  Missouri,  as  previously  mentioned  in 
these  pages  (vol.  vii,  no.  3,  p.  577),  was  unanimously  adopted  by  the 
Society  at  a  meeting  held  May  25  th  last.  The  clauses  that  are  of  special 
interest  to  archeologists  read  as  follows  : 

'*  To  hold  all  its  lands,  premises,  improvements,  collections  of  books, 
manuscripts,  portraits,  prehistoric  remains,  relics,  moneys,  choses  in  ac- 
tion and  all  its  property  and  effects  of  every  kind  and  description,  now 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  435 

owned  or  hereafter  acquired,  in  trust  for  the  use  and  benefit  of  the  people 
of  the  State  of  Missouri,  forever,  the  Society  reserving  to  itself  the  right 
and  power  at  all  times : 

"I.  To  retain,  at  the  City  of  St.  Louis,  the  custody  of  all  of  said 
property  and  collections,  forever ; 

*'  2.  To  borrow  money  for  the  pur|>ose  of  acquiring  necessary  real 
estate,  or  for  erecting,  or  altering  or  adding  to  a  building  upon  real  estate 
owned  by  it,  for  the  housing  of  said  collections,  and  as  security  for  the  re- 
payment of  any  sum  or  sums  so  borrowed  may  encumber  only  its  real  estate ; 

"3.  To  sell,  exchange  or  dispose  of,  as  may  reasonably  appear  to  it 
to  be  for  the  interest  of  its  cestui  que  trusty  and  in  furtherance  of  the  pur- 
poses of  the  Society,  any  or  all  of  its  real  property,  and  any  article  or 
articles  from  its  collections,  applying  the  proceeds  thereof  to  the  purposes 
of  this  trust,  having  in  view  always  the  acquisition,  preservation  and  ex- 
hibition of  the  best  possible  collection  of  such  articles  of  historical  value 
and  interest  as  it  is  the  object  of  the  Society  to  collect  and  preserve  ; 

*'  4.  To  have  exclusive  right  to  determine  the  policy  to  be  observed 
in  carrying  out  the  purposes  of  this  trust,  controlled  only  by  the  rules  of 
law  in  such  cases  provided." 

Folk-lore  Meetings  in  California.  —  The  seventh  meeting  of  the 
California  Branch  of  the  American  Folk-Lore  Society  was  held  in  South 
Hall,  University  of  California,  Berkeley,  on  Tuesday,  March  20,  1906, 
at  8  p.  M.  Mr  Charles  Keeler  presided.  The  following  were  elected  to 
membership  in  the  Society :  Dr  E.  K.  Putnam,  Stanford  University,  and 
the  Department  of  Education  of  Ontario,  represented  by  Dr  David 
Boyle,  Toronto.  Professor  Vernon  L.  Kellogg  of  Stanford  University 
gave  an  address,  illustrated  with  lantern  slides,  on  **In  Samoa.*' 

The  eighth  meeting  of  the  California  Branch  was  held  at  Cloyne 
Court,  Berkeley,  Tuesday,  April  17,  1906,  at  8  p.  m.,  Mr  Charles  Keeler 
presiding.  Dr  J.  VV.  Hudson  was  elected  to  membership  in  the  Society. 
On  motion,  Charles  Keeler,  A.  H.  Allen,  and  P.  E.  Goddard,  previ- 
ously appointed  by  the  Berkeley  Folk-Lore  Club  as  a  committee  to  report 
on  the  feasibility  of  making  a  special  study  of  the  folk-lore  of  Berkeley 
and  vicinity,  were  elected  to  represent  the  California  Branch  and  to 
secure  the  cooperation  of  the  two  societies  in  the  undertaking.  A  report 
reviewing  the  work  of  the  Society  during  the  first  year  of  its  activity, 
which  closed  with  this  meeting,  was  read  by  the  secretary.  Dr  H.  du  R. 
Phelan,  Captain  U.  S.  Volunteers,  gave  the  address  of  the  evening  on 
**  The  Peoples  of  the  Philippine  Islands,'*  based  on  a  sojourn  of  several 


438  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  Justint  Winsor  Prize  of  J 100,  offered  by  the  American  His- 
torical Association  for  the  encouragement  of  historical  research,  will  be 
awarded  for  the  year  1906  to  the  best  unpublished  monograph  in  the 
field  of  American  History  that  shall  be  submitted  to  the  Committee  of 
Award  on  or  before  October  i,  1906.  The  monograph  must  be  based  on 
independent  and  original  investigation  in  American  History,  by  which 
is  meant  the  history  of  any  of  the  British  colonies  in  America  to  1776, 
of  other  portions  of  the  continent  which  have  since  been  included  in 
the  territory  of  the  United  States,  and  of  the  United  States.  It  may 
deal  with  any  aspect  of  that  history  —  social,  political,  constitutional, 
religious,  economic,  ethnological,  military,  or  biographical,  though  in 
the  last  three  instances  a  treatment  exclusively  ethnological,  military,  or 
biographical  would  be  unfavorably  received.  Information  respecting  the 
conditions  under  which  the  prize  is  awarded  will  be  furnished  by  Pro- 
fessor Charles  H.  Hull,  Cornell  University,  Ithaca,  N.  Y. 

The  Herbert  Baxter  Adams  Prize  of  J 2 00,  offered  biennially 
by  the  American  Historical  Association,  for  the  encouragement  of  his- 
torical research,  will  be  awarded  for  the  year  1907  to  the  best  unpub- 
lished monograph  in  the  field  of  European  History  that  shall  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  Committee  of  Award  on  or  before  October  i,  1907.  The 
general  conditions  are  similar  to  those  regarding  the  Justin  Winsor  prize. 
Information  will  be  furnished  by  Professor  Charles  Gross,  11  Putnam 
ave.,  Cambridge,  Mass. 

Dr  Albert  Ernest  Jenks  has  recently  finished  classifying  and  cata- 
loguing, for  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  a  collection  of  more 
than  four  thousand  objects  from  the  Philippine  islands,  a  task  occupy- 
ing ten  weeks.  Doctor  Jenks  has  been  elected  to  a  professorship  in  the 
department  of  sociology  of  the  University  of  Minnesota,  although  his 
work  will  be  largely  in  anthropology  and  ethnology.  The  University  is 
to  be  congratulated  for  its  progressiveness  in  joining  the  ranks  of  the 
educational  institutions  of  the  country  that  now  regard  the  Science  of 
Man  as  an  essential  part  of  their  curriculum,  and  for  procuring  the  ser- 
vices of  an  instructor  of  such  ability  and  experience  as  Doctor  Jenks. 
While  in  the  East  Dr  Jenks  gave  illustrated  addresses  on  the  People  of  the 
Philippines  before  the  American  Ethnological  Society  of  New  York,  the 
Boston  Branch  of  the  American  Folk-Lore  Society,  and  the  Anthropolog- 
ical Club  of  Harvard  University. 

Dr  T.  Mitchell  Prudden,  of  the  College  of  Physicians  and  Sur- 
geons, Columbia  University,  who  has  spent  several  seasons  in  the  study 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  439 

of  Southwestern  archeology,  has  presented  his  collection,  numbering 
several  hundred  specimens,  to  the  Yale  University  Museum.  The  collec- 
tion consists  largely  of  pottery,  textile  fabrics,  ornaments,  and  objects 
used  in  ancient  religious  rites.  With  the  collection  Dr  Prudden  gives  the 
necessary  cases,  his  field  notes,  and  a  map  of  the  region  drawn  by  himself. 

A  REUNION  of  the  Congr^s  de  T  "  Alliance  Fran^aise  "  et  des  Soci6t6s 
de  G^ographie  will  be  held  at  Marseilles,  September  10-15,  on  the  occa- 
sion of  the  Exposition  Coloniale.  The  meetings  of  the  Congress,  which 
will  be  international  in  character,  are  to  be  held  in  the  Grand-Palais. 
The  work  of  the  Congress  will  be  divided  into  two  sections  under  the 
respective  auspices  of  the  Geographical  Societies  and  the  Association 
Nationale  pour  la  Propagation  de  la  Langue  Fran^aise  dans  les  Colonies 
ct  a  r  Stranger.     M.  Jacques  Leotard  is  general  secretary. 

Rev.  Charles  James  Wood,  author  of  Survivals  in  Christianity 
(1892),  a  collection  of  lectures  delivered  by  him  before  the  Episcopal 
Theological  Seminary  of  Cambridge,  died  suddenly  in  his  rectory  at 
York,  Pennsylvania,  May  5.  Mr  Wood  was  a  graduate  of  Harvard 
(1875),  ^^^  contributed  papers  to  the  Victoria  Institute,  the  Folk-Lore 
Society,  and  other  organizations,  and  for  years  was  on  the  staff  of  the 
Critic  and  the  Outlook, 

The  titles  presented  in  a  communication,  published  in  May,  by  the 
committee  of  organization  of  the  International  Congress  of  Americanists, 
to  be  held  at  Quebec,  September  10-15,  give  promise  of  the  success  of 
the  Fourteenth  Session  of  the  Congress.  The  titles  of  thirty-nine  papers 
had  been  submitted,  and  others  have  since  been  registered. 

Captain  Georg  Friederici,  of  the  German  army,  well  known  for 
his  studies  on  military  and  American  Indian  subjects,  is  now  a  privat- 
docent  at  the  University  of  Leipzig.  Captain  Friederici' s  doctor's  thesis 
deals  with  scalping,  head-hunting,  and  related  war  customs  of  the  Indians 
of  both  Americas.  J.  M. 

Dr  W.  C.  Farabee,  of  the  anthropological  department  of  Harvard 
University,  with  three  students,  next  year  will  conduct  a  research  expe- 
dition about  the  headwaters  of  the  Amazon.  For  a  time  a  base  will  be 
established  at  Arequipa,  Peru.     The  party  will  be  gone  three  years. 

The  Second  Session  of  the  Congr^  Pr^historique  de  France  will  be 
held  at  Vannes,  Morbihan,  August  21-26.  Professor  Adrien  de  Mortillct 
is  president  and  Dr  Marcel  Baudouin  (21,  Rue  Linn6,  Paris)  general 
secretary  of  the  committee  of  organization. 


440  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

For  the  benefit  of  members  of  the  American  Anthropological  Asso- 
ciation who  desire  to  consult  the  Constitution,  it  may  be  said  that  the  lat- 
ter will  be  found  in  Volume  7,  No.  4,  October-December,  1905,  of  the 
American  Anthropologist. 

Dr  Edward  Anthony  Spitzka,  fellow  and  demonstrator  of  anatomy 

•  _ 

in  the  College  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons,  Columbia  University,  New 
York,  has  been  elected  professor  of  general  anatomy  in  Jefferson  Medical 
College,  Philadelphia. 

Dr  Franklin  H.  Giddings,  professor  of  sociology  in  Columbia 
University,  has  been  appointed  professor  of  the  history  of  civilization, 
filling  the  chair  founded  recently  by  Mrs  Maria  H.  Williamson  with  a 
fund  of  $150,000. 

Field  Museum  of  Natural  History.  — By  resolution  of  the  board 
of  trustees  of  the  Field  Columbian  Museum,  Chicago,  dated  November  8th 
last,  the  name  of  the  museum  was  changed  to  Field  Museum  of  Natural 
History. 

Dr  J.  W.  LowBER,  F.R.G.S.,  member  of  the  Royal  Societies  Club 
of  Austin,  Texas,  and  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association,  has 
been  elected  to  membership  in  the  Royal  Asiatic  Society  of  London. 

Yale  University  has  conferred  the  degree  of  doctor  of  science  on 
Professor  Henry  H.  Donaldson,  head  of  the  department  of  neurology  of 
the  Wistar  Institute  of  Anatomy,  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania. 

We  regret  to  record  the  death,  on  May  i6th,  of  Dr  Hermann  Obst, 
Director  of  the  Museum  fiir  Volkerkunde  in  Leipzig.  Professor  A.  Bergt 
has  received  an  appointment  as  acting  director  of  the  Museum. 

Mr  Robert  Y.  Cummings  has  given  $20,000  to  the  Field  Museum 
of  Natural  History,  Chicago,  to  defray  the  expenses  of  an  ethnological 
study  of  the  native  tribes  of  the  Philippine  islands. 

Dr  Charles  Peabody  has  been  appointed  instructor  in  European 
archeology  in  the  Department  of  Anthropology  of  Harvard  University 
for  one  year  from  September  ist  next. 

Mr  Clarence  B.  Moore,  of  Philadelphia,  has  been  elected  a  corre- 
sponding member  of  the  Berliner  Gesellschaft  fiir  Anthropologic,  Eth- 
nologic und  Urgeschichte. 

Dr  J.  Walter  Fewkes,  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  has 
been  elected  a  corresponding  member  of  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural 
History. 


'«. 


American  Anthropologist 


NEW   SERIES 


Vol.  8  July-September,   1906  No.  3 

RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGY 

A  REVIEW  OF  THE  ACTIVITIES  OF  INSTITUTIONS  AND 

INDIVIDUALS  FROM  1902  TO  1906 

PRESENTED  TO  THE  FIFTEENTH  INTERNATIONAL  CONGRESS 

OF  AMERICANISTS,  QUEBEC,  1906 

Although  the  International  Congress  of  Americanists  has  for 
its  object  the  consideration  of  American  topics,  only  two  meetings  of 
the  body  have  been  held  in  the  New  World.  It  was  not  until  the 
fall  of  1902  that  the  United  States  was  honored  with  the  presence 
of  the  Congress,  which  then  convened  in  New  York  City  in  its 
Thirteenth  session.  On  this  occasion  delegates  and  other  members 
of  the  Congress  had  the  opportunity  of  rounding  out  their  knowl- 
edge of  the  recent  progress  in  anthropologic  research  in  its  various 
branches  on  the  part  of  students  in  the  western  world,  and  by  means 
of  excursions  after  the  close  of  the  session  they  were  enabled  to  have 
a  glimpse  of  some  of  the  collections  outside  of  New  York  that  had 
been  gathered  through  state  and  private  enterprise,  as  well  as  to  gain 
further  knowledge  of  the  methods  employed  in  this  country  in  an- 
thropologic investigation. 

It  is  not  unsafe  to  say  that  in  no  similar  period  of  our  history 
has  so  great  an  advance  been  made  in  anthropologic  work  on  the 
North  American  continent  as  during  that  which  has  elapsed  since 
the  Thirteenth  session  of  the  International  Congress  of  Americanists 
in  1902.  The  national,  state,  and  municipal  governments  and  mu- 
seums,  the  universities  and  colleges,  and  other  scientific  and  educa- 
tional institutions,  as  well  as  individuals,  have  been  industriously 
engaged  in  various  fields  of  activity  —  in  research,  collecting,  in- 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  8 — 29.  44  ^ 


442  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

structing,  and  publishing  ;  new  institutions  have  been  organized  and 
educational  establishments  that  hitherto  have  had  only  a  passing 
interest  in  anthropology  have  come  to  regard  it  as  a  necessary 
feature  of  their  curricula  ;  and  individuals  have  generously  devoted 
their  time  and  means  to  the  advancement  of  those  interests  that  the 
International  Congress  of  Americanists  represents. 

The  American  Anthropological  Association 

It  has  been  said  that  perhaps  the  most  important  single  event 
of  the  present  century  in  the  history  of  the  development  of  Ameri- 
can anthropology  was  the  formation  of  the  American  Anthropolog- 
ical Association.  While  this  took  place  (at  Pittsburg)  June  30, 
1902,  three  months  before  the  International  Congress  of  Americanists 
convened  in  New  York,  the  first  regular  meeting  of  the  Association 
was  not  held  until  December  of  the  same  year.  The  entire  history 
of  the  new  Association,  therefore,  except  that  of  its  birth,  falls 
within  the  period  that  has  elapsed  since  the  New  York  session  of 
the  Congress.^ 

While  the  membership  is  miscellaneous  in  character  it  includes 
practically  all  the  anthropologists  of  the  country.  At  the  beginning 
of  the  year  1903  the  membership  numbered  175  ;  it  has  almost 
doubled  in  the  last  three  years,  being  now  2J  i .  Two  presidents  have 
served  the  Association  since  its  foundation,  Dr  W  J  McGee  and  Pro- 
fessor F.  W.  Putnam ;  two  secretaries,  Dr  George  A.  Dorsey  and 
Dr  George  Grant  MacCurdy ;  two  treasurers,  Dr  Roland  B.  Dixon 
and  Mr  B.  Talbot  B.  Hyde ;  and  one  editor,  Mr  F.  W.  Hodge. 

One  of  the  chief  purposes  of  the  new  Association  is  the  publica- 
tion of  a  high  class  journal.  This  purpose  is  being  realized  in  the 
American  Anthropologist^  for  which  a  grand  prize  was  conferred  on 
the  Association  in  1904  by  the  International  Jury  of  Awards  of  the 
Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition,  St  Louis.  In  addition  to  the  An- 
thropologist, a  series  of  Memoirs  is  to  be  published,  part  i  of  volume 
I  having  already  appeared,  while  part  11  is  in  press. 


*  See  The  American  Anthropological  Association,  by  George  A.  Dorsey,  American 
Anthropolo^'sty  v,  Jan. -Mar.,  1903  ;  also  The  Foundation  of  a  National  Anthropologi- 
cal Society,  by  Franz  Boas,  Science,  xv,  p.  804. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  443 

Another  object  of  the  Association  is  '*  to  serve  as  a  bond  of 
union  among  American  anthropologists  and  American  anthropolog- 
ical organizations."  In  pursuance  of  this  object  the  membership 
has  been  increased  and  both  annual  and  special  meetings  have  been 
held.  Three  of  the  annual  meetings  were  in  conjunction  with  those 
of  Section  H  of  the  American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of 
Science,  at  Washington,  St  Louis,  and  Philadelphia,  respectively ; 
while  the  fourth  was  held  at  Ithaca,  N.  Y.,*  in  affiliation  with  the 
Archaeological  Institute  of  America  and  the  American  Philological 
Association.  The  special  meeting  held  in  San  Francisco,^  August 
29  to  September  2,  1905,  was  the  most  notable  of  all,  proving  as  it 
did  the  truly  national  character  of  the  organization  in  that  a  success- 
ful meeting  of  anthropologists  could  be  held  independently  of  other 
societies  and  on  the  Pacific,  as  well  as  on  the  Atlantic,  coast.  The 
next  annual  meeting  of  the  Association  will  be  held  in  New  York 
City  during  Convocation  Week,  in  affiliation  with  Section  H  of  the 
American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science. 

Ever  since  its  foundation  the  American  Anthropological  Associa- 
tion has  kept  in  touch  with  the  International  Congress  of  Ameri- 
canists, one  of  its  first  acts  being  the  appointment  of  a  delegate  (Mr 
J.  D.  McGuire)  to  the  New  York  Congress  of  1902.  It  sent  dele- 
gates also  to  the  Stuttgart  Congress  of  1904,  and  will  be  largely 
represented  at  the  Quebec  Congress.  A  sub-committee  on  program 
for  the  Quebec  Congress  was  recently  named  by  President  F.  W. 
Putnam  ;  it  consists  of  the  following  members  :  George  Grant  Mac- 
Curdy  (chairman),  F.  W.  Hodge,  Marshall  H.  Saville,  George  B. 
Gordon,  George  A.  Dorsey,  W  J  McGee,  A.  L.  Kroeber,  and  Ro- 
land B.  Dixon. 

Much  is  being  accomplished  through  standing  committees,  nota- 
bly those  on  American  Archeological  Nomenclature,  Nomenclature 
of  Indian  Linguistic  Families  North  of  Mexico,  Book  Reviews,  and 
The  Preservation  of  American  Antiquities.  The  last  named  com- 
mittee, acting  jointly  with  a  like  committee  from  the  Archaeological 


"^American  Anthropologist^  Vlll,  p.  208,  Jan. -Mar.,  1 906. 

^American  Anthropologist^  VI I,  p.  732,  Oct. -Dec,  1905  (for  amended  Constitution, 
seep.  745). 


444  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Institute  of  America,  has  been  most  instrumental  in  framing  and 
securing  the  passage  of  the  bill  for  the  preservation  of  American 
antiquities. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States 

It  is  encouraging  to  note  on  the  part  of  the  National  Government 
a  better  appreciation  than  ever  before  of  the  needs  of  anthropology. 
Among  other  evidences  of  this  spirit  is  the  recent  enactment  by 
Congress  of  the  law,  above  alluded  to,  for  the  preservation  of  antiqui- 
ties on  the  public  domain  by  prohibiting  the  excavation  thereof  or  the 
gathering  of  collections  therefrom  except  for  the  benefit  of  educa- 
tional and  scientific  institutions.*  A  step  in  a  similar  direction  is  the 
provision  made  by  Congress  at  its  last  session  for  the  establishment  of 
the  Mesa  Verde  National  Park  in  Colorado,  which  contains  some  of 
the  most  important  cliff-dwellings  in  the  United  States.  For  several 
years  the  General  Government  has  taken  measures  for  the  care  of 
the  celebrated  ruin  of  Casa  Grande  in  Arizona,  and  recently  Con- 
gress has  provided  for  its  further  protection  as  well  as  for  its  exca- 
vation. 

For  many  years  the  Office  of  Indian  Affairs  maintained  the 
policy  of  trying  to  eliminate  everything  aboriginal  from  the  Ameri- 
can Indian  by  substituting  therefor  something  that  originated  with 
the  white  man,  whether  or  not  it  was  adapted  to  the  Indian's  needs. 
But  the  present  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs,  Honorable  Francis 
E.  Leupp,  who  has  long  been  an  earnest  student  of  the  Indian 
problem,  finds  good  in  the  aborigines  that  his  predecessors  seem  to 
have  overlooked,  and  is  securing  the  means  for  encouraging  some 
of  their  native  industries.  Another  step  —  one  which  every  lover  of 
the  esthetic  will  encourage  —  is  the  beginning  that  the  Commissioner 
has  made  toward  recording  the  music  of  the  Indians,  much  of  which 
otherwise  in  a  few  years  would  have  been  lost  forever. 

Smithsonian  Institution 

But  the  center  of  anthropological  research  under  the  auspices  of 
the  General  Government  is  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  which  directs 
the  investigations  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology  and  the  col- 
lection and  study  of  material  by  the  National  Museum.     In  view  of 

'  For  the  text  of  the  law,  see  American  Anthropologist^  vill,  p.  433,  Apr. -June,  1906. 


^ 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  445 

the  fact  that  these  tw'o  important  agencies  of  anthropological  work 
are  associated  with  the  Institution,  the  need  for  work  in  the  anthro- 
pological field  on  the  part  of  the  Institution  proper  is  not  so  urgent 
as  in  some  other  departments  of  knowledge  in  which  it  does  not 
have  similarly  well-equipped  agencies.  The  Smithsonian  Institu- 
tion, however,  has  at  all  times  taken  the  entire  field  of  knowledge 
as  being  within  its  purview,  and  from  the  date  of  the  issuance  of  its 
first  volume  of  Contributions  to  Knowledge  —  comprising  the  now 
famous  work  of  Squier  and  Davis  on  the  "  Ancient  Monuments  of 
the  Mississippi  Valley"  —  down  to  the  present  time,  it  has  through 
its  own  publications  and  from  its  funds,  independently  of  such  as 
were  placed  at  its  disposal  by  the  Government,  contributed  to  the 
advancement  of  anthropological  science.  It  has  moreover  often 
had  the  opportunity,  without  any  direct  expenditure  of  funds,  either 
by  cooperation  or  by  its  publications,  to  greatly  stimulate  anthropo- 
logical work.  By  means  of  the  appendix  to  the  Annual  Report  of 
the  Board  of  Regents  it  has  disseminated  knowledge  on  this  subject 
by  republication  in  large  editions  of  papers  relating  to  anthropology. 
Thus  in  the  last  three  Reports  issued,  the  following  papers  have 
been  published : 

—  The  Craniology  of  Man  and  Anthropoid  Apes,  by  N.  C.  Macnamara. 
The  Baousse-Rouss6  Explorations  :  Study  of  a  new  Human  Type  by  M. 

Vemeau,  by  Albert  Gaudry. 
Fossil  Human  Remains  found  near  Lansing,  Kansas,  by  W.  H.  Holmes. 
The  Wild  Tribes  of  the  Malay  Peninsula,  by  W.  W.  Skeat. 
The  Pygmies  of  the  Great  Congo  Forest,  by  Sir  Harry  H.  Johnston. 
Guam  and  its  People,  by  W.  E.  Safford. 
Oriental  Elements  of  Culture  in  the  Occident,  by  Dr  Georg  Jacob. 

—  The  Problems  of  Heredity  and  their  Solution,  by  W.  Bateson. 
John  Wesley  Powell  [biography],  by  G.  K.  Gilbert. 

—  A  New  Theory  of  the  Origin  of  Species,  by  A.  Dastre. 
The  Evolution  of  the  Human  Foot,  by  M.  Anthony. 
Problems  Arising  from  Variations  in  the  Development  of  Skull  and  Brains, 

by  Professor  Johnson  Symington. 
The  Antiquity  of  the  Lion  in  Greece,  by  Dr  A.  B.  Meyer. 
The  Excavations  at  Abusir,  Egypt,  by  Professor  Dr  A.  Wiedemann. 
The  Ancient  Hittites,  by  Dr  Leopold  Messerschmidt. 
Central  American  Hieroglyphic  Writing,  by  Dr  Cyrus  Thomas. 
Traces  of  Aboriginal  Operations  in  an  Iron  Mine  near  LesHe,  Mo.,  by 

W.  H.  Holmes. 


446  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Primeval  Japanese,  by  Capt.  F.  Brinkley. 

The  Korean  Language,  by  Homer  B.  Hulbert. 

On  Mountains  and  Mankind,  by  Douglas  W.  Freshfield. 

Morocco,  by  Theobald  Fischer. 

Old  Age,  by  Elie  Metchnikoff. 

The  Contributions  of  American  Archaeology  to  History,  by  W.  H. 
Holmes. 

Goumia,  by  Harriet  A.  Boyd. 

Archaeological  Researches  on  the  Frontiers  of  Argentina  and  Bolivia,  by 
Eric  von  Rosen. 

A  General  View  of  the  Archaeology  of  the  Pueblo  Region,  by  Edgar 
L.  Hewett. 

The  Painting  of  Human  Bones  among  the  American  Aborigines,  by  Dr 
Ales  Hrdlicka. 

Sling  Contrivances  for  Projectile  Weapons,  by  F.  Krause. 

Materials  Used  to  Write  upon  before  the  Invention  of  Printing,  by  Pro- 
fessor Albert  Maire. 

An  Inquiry  into  the  Population  of  China,  by  W.  W.  Rockhill. 

Chinese  Architecture,  by  S.  W.  Bushell. 

In  the  Quarterly  Issue  of  the  Smitlisonian  Contributiotts  to  Knowl- 

edge  the  following  anthropological  papers  have  been  published  since 

1902. 

Shell  Ornaments  from  Kentucky  and  Mexico,  by  W.  H.  Holmes. 
Preliminary  Report  on  an  Archeological  Trip  to  the  West  Indies,  by  J. 

Walter  Fewkes. 
Korean  Headdresses  m  the  National  Museum,  by  Foster  H.  Jenings. 
Chinese  Medicine,  by  James  M.  Flint. 
Kava  Drinking  as  Practised  by  the  Papuans  and  Polynesians,  by  Walter 

Hough. 
Porto  Rican  Stone  Collars  and  Tripointed  Idols,  by  J.  Walter  Fewkes. 
The  Tugda,  or  Rice  Planter,  of  the  Coyunos,  Philippine  Islands,  by  E. 

Y.  Miller. 
Report  on  the  Construction  of  a  Vowel  Organ,  by  E.  W.  Scripture. 
The  Contributions  of  American  Archaeology  to  Human  Histor>%  by  W. 

H.  Holmes. 

Under  the  Hodgkins  Fund  there  have  been  made  certain  physi- 
cal investigations  with  regard  to  sound,  which  have  to  do  with  the 
subject  of  phonetics,  and  these  again  with  linguistic  studies.  Among 
these  may  be  mentioned  a  grant  in  February,  1903,  to  Professor  E. 
W.  Scripture,  of  Yale  University,  for  the  construction  of  a  vowel 
machine.  Professor  Scripture's  work  was  continued  in  1904,  and  he 
made  numerous  interesting  investigations. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  447 

In  1902  the  Institution  was  represented  at  the  Thirteenth  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Americanists,  held  in  New  York,  by  Mr  F.  W. 
Hodge,  and  at  the  Congress  of  Orientalists,  held  in  Hamburg, 
by  Professor  Paul  Haupt.  Mr  W.  H.  Holmes  represented  the  In- 
stitution at  the  Fourteenth  International  Congress  of  Americanists, 
held  at  Stuttgart  in  1904;  Professor  Haupt  at  the  Fourteenth  In- 
ternational Congress  of  Orientalists,  at  Algiers  ;  Dr  Franz  Boas  at  the 
Archeological  and  Historical  Federation  of  Belgium,  held  at  Mons. 

In  1905  Dr  J.  Walter  Fewkes,  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Eth- 
nology, carried  on,  partly  at  the  expense  of  and  under  the  auspices 
of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  an  extended  archeological  reconnois- 
sance  in  the  Gulf  states  of  Mexico.  His  trip  was  successful,  giving 
rise  to  the  acquisition  of  important  data  and  several  interesting 

publications. 

Bureau  of  American  Ethnology 

The  progress  of  the  work  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology 
during  the  last  four  years  may  be  regarded  as  highly  gratifying. 
Advancing  along  the  general  lines  of  research  inaugurated  by  its 
organizer  and  first  director.  Major  J.  W.  Powell,  and  with  practically 
the  same  scientific  staff  that  supported  him  at  the  close  of  his  career, 
the  investigations  have  reached  a  stage  of  maturity  that  makes 
apparent  the  wisdom  of  their  aim  and  their  usefulness  distinctly  felt 
from  both  the  practical  and  the  scientific  point  of  view.  Although  the 
Bureau's  regular  staff  is  quite  limited  in  number,  its  resources  have 
been  so  managed  that  the  best  talent  of  the  country  has  been  enlisted 
in  carrying  to  completion  nearly  every  branch  of  research  with  which 
the  student  of  the  American  aborigines  is  concerned. 

Field-work  —  the  substantial  basis  of  progress  in  the  Bureau's 
investigations  —  has  been  prosecuted  in  the  United  States,  including 
Alaska,  and  in  British  Columbia,  the  West  Indies,  and  Mexico ;  yet 
a  large  portion  of  the  energies  of  the  Bureau  have  been  concentrated 
in  summarizing  the  vast  body  of  information  relating  to  the  tribes, 
previously  collected  by  the  Bureau  and  available  through  numerous 
other  sources,  and  embodying  this  in  a  **  Handbook  of  the  Indians," 
now  under  the  editorship  of  Mr  F.  W.  Hodge,  the  first  of  the  two 
volumes  of  which  will  soon  be  issued.  This  "  taking  stock  ''  of  the 
accumulated  store  of  knowledge  has  made  it  possible  to  plan  a  series 


448  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

of  works  the  compilation  of  which  is  now  in  progress.  These  include 
handbooks  of  stocks  and  tribes ;  languages ;  physical  and  mental 
characters ;  physiology,  pathology,  and  medicine ;  arts  and  indus- 
tries ;  religion  and  folklore ;  social  organization,  government,  laws, 
etc. ;  esthetics  ;  games  ;  sign  language  ;  pictography  ;  archeology  ; 
governmental  relations  and  welfare ;  geographical  names ;  bibliog- 
raphies, etc. 

The  Handbook  of  the  Indians  (sometimes  heretofore  referred  to 
as  a  dictionary  or  cyclopedia  of  the  tribes)  may  be  regarded  as  pre- 
liminary to  the  more  comprehensive  series  of  works  referred  to,  and 
is  probably  the  most  noteworthy  general  result  accomplished  by 
students  of  the  American  aborigines.  This  work  had  been  in 
process  of  compilation  for  a  number  of  years,  and  a  mass  of  data 
relating  to  the  linguistic  stocks,  tribes,  and  tribal  groups  had  accu- 
mulated prior  to  the  New  York  meeting  of  the  Americanists  ;  but 
when  the  time  came  for  final  revision  and  publication,  it  was  found 
that  in  many  respects  the  accumulated  data  were  meager,  defective, 
and  generally  inadequate,  and  the  various  agencies  at  the  command 
of  the  Bureau  were  brought  to  bear  in  revising,  elaborating,  and 
completing  the  work.  At  the  same  time  the  scope  of  the  Handbook 
of  the  Indians  was  widened  to  include  the  entire  field  of  aboriginal 
history  and  activity  north  of  Mexico,  and  all  the  available  eth- 
nologists and  archeologists  in  America  were  invited  to  assist  in  the 
branches  in  which  their  respective  studies  made  them  best  qualified. 
The  response  was  most  generous  and  even  enthusiastic,  so  that  within 
a  comparatively  brief  time  a  vast  amount  of  work  was  accomplished. 
In  addition  to  the  hundreds  of  brief  articles  by  members  of  the  regular 
scientific  staff  of  the  Bureau,  the  Handbook  will  contain  a  large 
number  of  articles  on  special  topics  by  anthropologists  and  other 
students  whose  researches  have  made  them  the  leading  authorities 
on  the  subjects  respectively  treated.  These  contributors  include 
Mr  S.  A.  Barrett,  Dr  Franz  Boas,  Professor  Herbert  E.  Bolton,  Dr 
A.  F.  Chamberlain,  Mr  Stewart  Culin,  Dr  Wm.  H.  Dall,  Miss  Anna 
L.  Dawes,  Dr  Roland  B.  Dixon,  Dr  George  A.  Dorsey,  Mr  Josiah 
H.  Dortch,  Mr  Wilberforce  Fames,  Dr  Livingston  Farrand,  Miss 
Alice  C.  Fletcher,  Mr  Gerard  Fowke,  Dr  Pliny  E.  Goddard,  Dr 
George  Bird  Grinnell,  Mr  Henry  W.  Henshaw,  Mr  Edgar  L.  Hewett, 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  449 

Dr  Walter  Hough,  Dr  Ales  Hrdlicka,  Dr  William  Jones,  Dr  A.  L. 
Kroeber,  Mr  Joseph  D.  McGuire,  Dr  Otis  T.  Mason,  and  Dr  Wash- 
ington Matthews. 

As  the  date  for  submitting  the  manuscript  of  the  Handbook  to 
the  printer  approached,  it  was  realized  that  within  the  limited  time 
assigned  for  the  completion  of  the  work  it  would  be  difficult  or 
impossible  to  reach  the  degree  of  completeness,  consistency,  and 
unity  requisite  in  a  work  of  reference  of  this  class,  and  a  committee 
of  revision  was  therefore  organized  which  met  three  times  each 
week  during  the  winter  and  spring  of  1904-05.  This  committee 
consisted  of  the  ethnological  staffs  of  the  Bureau  and  the  National 
Museum,  and  other  resident  ethnologists ;  while  ethnologists  from 
elsewhere  when  visiting  Washington  often  gave  the  committee  the 
benefit  of  their  criticism.  The  substantial  and  valuable  results  of 
these  conferences  can  hardly  be  overestimated.  To  make  the  work 
still  more  complete  and  authoritative  it  was  deemed  advisable  to 
submit  proofs  of  every  article  to  each  contributor,  a  plan  which, 
while  necessarily  involving  some  delay,  has  been  the  means  of  pro- 
moting accuracy  in  a  degree  that  otherwise  would  not  have  been 
possible. 

A  second  work  of  prime  importance  initiated  a  number  of  years 
ago  has  taken  final  form  within  the  last  four  years.  This  is  the 
preparation  of  a  Handbook  of  Languages  under  the  supervision  of 
Dr  Franz  Boas,  honorary  philologist  of  the  Bureau.  The  following 
manuscripts  for  this  work  have  been  submitted  :  ( i )  Grammatical 
Notes  on  the  Hupa  (Athapascan  stock),  by  Dr  P.  E.  Goddard ;  (2) 
Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Yuki  (Yukian  stock),  by  Dr  A.  L. 
Kroeber ;  (3)  Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Maidu  (Pujunan  stock), 
by  Dr  Roland  B.  Dixon  ;  (4)  Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Sauk  and 
Fox  (Algonquian  stock),  by  Dr  William  Jones ;  (5)  Grammatical 
Notes  on  the  Dakota  (Siouan  stock),  by  Dr  John  R.  Swanton  ;  (6) 
Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Haida  (Skittagetan  stock),  by  Dr  John 
R.  Swanton  ;  (7)  Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Tlingit  (Koluschan 
stock),  by  Dr  John  R.  Swanton  ;  (8)  Grammatical  Notes  on  the 
Kwakiutl  (Wakashan  stock),  by  Dr  Franz  Boas ;  (9)  Grammatical 
Notes  on  the  Chinook  (Chinookan  stock),  by  Dr  Franz  Boas;  (10) 
Grammatical   Notes  on  the  Shoshoni  (Shoshonean  stock),  by  Mr 


450  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

H.  H.  St  Clair,  2d.  The  following  manuscripts  have  not  yet  been 
completed :  ( i )  Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Eskimo,  by  Dr  Franz 
Boas  ;  (2)  Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Onondaga  (Iroquoian  stock), 
by  Mr  J.  N.  B.  Hewitt;  (3)  Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Coosa 
(Kusan  stock) ;  and  (4)  Grammatical  Notes  on  the  Takelma  (Takil- 
man  stock),  by  Mr  H.  H.  St  Clair,  2d;  (5)  Grammatical  Notes  on 
the  Wasco  (Chinookan  stock),  by  Mr  E.  Sapir ;  (6)  Grammatical 
Notes  on  the  Yuchi  (Uchean  stock),  by  Mr  F.  G.  Speck.  The  in- 
troductory chapters  of  the  above-named  handbook,  treating  especi- 
ally of  the  morphology  of  the  languages,  will  be  prepared  by  Dr  Boas. 
A  third  branch  of  the  Bureau's  work  actively  prosecuted  during 
recent  years  is  the  preparation  of  an  archeological  map  and  accom- 
panying  card  catalogue  of  archeological  sites  of  the  country.  This 
work  had  already  been  well  advanced  in  eastern  United  States,  as 
may  be  seen  by  reference  to  the  several  works  of  Dr  Thomas  on  the 
mound-builders,  and  as  indicated  by  the  various  explorations  of  the 
Bureau  on  the  Atlantic  slope,  as  yet  unpublished,  particularly  in  the 
tidewater  districts  of  Maryland,  Virginia,  and  the  Carolinas,  con- 
ducted by  Mr  William  H.  Holmes.  Activity  in  this  branch  has  re- 
cently been  especially  stimulated  in  the  Pueblo  region,  which  contains 
our  most  noteworthy  antiquities,  by  the  agitation  in  favor  of  a  measure 
for  the  preservation  of  our  national  antiquities,  which  took  final  form  in 
the  law  enacted  at  the  last  session  of  Congress ;  and,  more  especially 
on  account  of  the  action  of  the  executive  departments  of  the  Govern- 
ment having  control  of  the  public  lands  and  reservations,  in  taking 
practical  steps  to  utilize  their  agents  and  field  forces  in  policing  the 
ruins.  With  the  view  of  facilitating  this  guardianship,  card  cata- 
logues and  maps  showing  all  known  ruins  of  the  Southwest  have 
been  compiled  by  the  Bureau  and  placed  at  the  disposal  of  the  de- 
partments ;  and  a  series  of  bulletins  treating  of  the  antiquities  of  the 
various  physiographic  and  ethnic  areas  of  the  Southwest,  intended 
primarily  for  the  use  of  the  field  men,  is  in  preparation.  No.  i  of 
this  series.  The  Antiquities  of  the  Jemez  Plateau,  by  Edgar  L. 
Hewett,  is  already  published.  Others,  soon  to  be  issued,  will  treat 
of  the  Antiquities  of  the  Mesa  Verde,  also  by  Mr  Hewett ;  of  the 
Antiquities  of  the  Little  Colorado  River,  by  Dr  J.  Walter  Fewkes  • 
and  of  the  Antiquities  of  the  Upper  Gila,  by  Dr  Walter  Hough. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  45 1 

The  preparation  and  installation  of  an  exhibit  at  the  Louisiana 
Purchase  Exposition,  held  in  St  Louis  in  1904,  constituted  a  work  of 
considerable  moment  for  the  period  under  survey.  After  careful 
consideration  it  was  decided  to  illustrate  as  the  chief  topic  the 
mythic  symbolism  of  various  tribes  as  embodied  in  their  decorative 
arts.  Prominent  among  the  concepts  thus  embodied  are  the  various 
forms  of  animal  and  plant  life,  clouds,  lightning,  rain,  sun,  moon,  and 
stars,  as  well  as  various  monsters  existing  only  in  the  imagination. 
These  motives  are  interwoven  with  the  thought  and  life  of  the  people, 
and  are  introduced  freely  into  their  various  arts,  In  selecting  the 
exhibits  only  the  most  important  symbolic  concepts  of  the  tribes 
represented  were  chosen,  and  for  each  of  these  concepts  a  group  of 
exhibits  was  assembled,  consisting  of  a  limited  number  of  specimens 
of  native  workmanship  in  carving,  modeling,  painting,  and  engrav- 
ing, and  a  series  of  the  native  designs  drawn  out  in  colors  on  a  flat 
surface  and  associated  with  the  specimens  in  the  exhibit  as  a  means 
of  further  elucidating  the  strange  modifications  everywhere  dis- 
played. The  exhibits  were  supplemented  by  a  series  of  designs 
and  objects  selected  by  Dr  Franz  Boas  to  illustrate  the  varied 
symbolism  associated  with  a  given  motive  or  design  by  different 
tribes  and  peoples.  In  addition  to  these  systematic  exhibits,  two 
other  important  collections  were  presented.  The  archeological  re- 
searches of  Dr  Fewkes  in  the  West  Indies  were  represented  by  a 
large  series  of  typical  relics  of  art  in  stone,  bone,  shell,  wood,  and 
clay,  without  question  the  most  complete  series  yet  brought  together 
to  represent  the  pre-Columbian  culture  of  the  Carib  and  Arawak 
peoples,  who  were  practically  exterminated  by  the  Spanish  invaders. 
Mr  Mooney,  who  is  engaged  in  the  study  of  the  heraldry  system 
of  the  Great  Plains  tribes,  prepared  a  series  of  exhibits  illustrating 
this  hitherto  undeveloped  branch  of  research. 

The  publications  of  the  Bureau  have  been  carried  forward  as 
rapidly  as  the  exigencies  of  the  Government  press  would  permit. 
The  publication  of  annual  reports  has  been  brought  practically  down 
to  date.  The  Twenty -seventh  report,  for  the  fiscal  year  1905-06, 
awaits  only  the  completion  of  Mr  Mooney's  report  on  his  several 
years'  investigations  among  the  Kiowa,  Kiowa-Apache,  and  other 
Plains  tribes.      The  Twenty-sixth  report,  which  includes  memoirs 


452  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

on  the  ethnology  of  the  Pima  and  the  Tlingit  tribes,  by  Dr  Frank 
Russell  and  Dr  John  R.  Swanton  respectively,  is  in  the  printer's 
hands ;  the  Twenty-fifth  report,  which  embodies  the  researches 
of  Dr  Fewkes  covering  three  years  in  the  West  Indies  and  one  year 
in  Mexico,  is  about  ready  for  the  bindery ;  and  the  same  is  true 
of  the  Twenty-fourth  report  which  contains  Mr  Culin's  extensive 
work  on  Indian  Games.  The  Twenty-third  report,  embracing  Mrs 
Stevenson's  monograph  on  the  Zuni  Indians ;  the  Twenty-second, 
accompanied  by  Two  Summers*  Work  in  Pueblo  Ruins,  by  Dr 
Fewkes,  Maya  Calendar  Systems,  by  Dr  Thomas,  and  The  Hako, 
a  Pawnee  Ceremony,  by  Miss  Fletcher ;  and  the  Twenty-first,  con- 
taining Hopi  Katcinas,  by  Dr  Fewkes,  and  Iroquoian  Cosmogony, 
by  Mr  J.  N.  B.  Hewitt ;  as  well  as  Bulletins  no.  25,  the  Natick 
Dictionary,  by  James  Hammond  Trumbull;  no.  28,  Mexican  An- 
tiquities, by  various  authors  ;  no.  29,  Haida  Texts,  by  Dr  Swan- 
ton  ;  no.  31,  List  of  Publications  of  the  Bureau  ;  and  no.  32,  Anti- 
quities of  the  Jemez  Plateau,  by  Mr  E.  L.  Hewett,  have  appeared 
during  the  period  under  review.  The  first  volume  of  Bulletin  30, 
The  Handbook  of  the  Indians,  which  will  comprise  about  a  thou- 
sand pages,  will  soon  be  ready  for  the  bindery. 

The  study  of  the  numerous  delegations  of  Indians  visiting  Wash- 
ington during  the  winter  season  with  the  view  of  promoting  personal 
or  tribal  interests  before  the  departments  of  the  Government,  has 
been  systematically  pursued.  The  members  of  these  delegations 
are  conducted  to  the  laboratories  of  the  Bureau  and  the  National 
Museum,  where  arrangements  are  made  to  have  measurements  and 
photographs  taken,  and  plaster  masks  also  are  made  of  such  as  are 
willing  to  submit  to  the  process.  During  the  last  three  years  ap- 
proximately one  thousand  negatives  have  been  added  in  this  manner 
to  the  Bureau's  great  collection  ;  masks  have  been  made  of  some  40 
individuals  ;  and  measurements  of  some  3CX)  members  of  the  dele- 
gations have  been  taken  by  Dr  Hrdlicka. 

The  scientific  staff  of  the  Bureau  is  as  follows  :  W.  H.  Holmes, 
chief;  Franz  Boas,  honorary  philologist;  J.  Walter  Fewkes,  J.  N. 
B.  Hewitt,  F.  W.  Hodge,  James  Mooney,  M.  C.  Stevenson,  J.  R. 
Swanton,  and  Cyrus  Thomas,  ethnologists. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  453 

National  Museum 

The  most  important  event  of  the  last  few  years  in  the  history  of 
the  National  Museum  is  the  erection  of  the  new  granite  building 
for  which  Congress  recently  appropriated  $3,500,000  and  which  is 
now  in  process  of  construction.  For  some  time  the  facilities  of  the 
present  building  have  not  been  adequate  to  meet  the  demands  cre- 
ated by  the  steady  growth  of  the  Museum's  collections,  and  it  is 
confidently  believed  that  the  completion  of  the  new  structure  will 
mark  an  epoch  in  the  history  of  the  institution  in  all  its  compre- 
hensive and  varied  activities.  Fortunately  the  material  equipment 
of  the  Museum  —  the  cases,  mountings,  labels,  cabinets,  etc.,  —  are 
designed  to  fill  the  requirements  of  the  future  home  of  our  national 
scientific  collections.  For  the  immediate  present  the  plan  is  to  work 
up  thoroughly  for  publication  the  materials  in  hand. 

During  the  fiscal  years  1903-06,  the  Department  of  Anthro- 
pology made  no  changes  in  the  program  mapped  out  by  Mr  William 
H.  Holmes  in  1897.  The  ideal  is  the  science  of  man,  embracing 
biology  and  culture-history. 

In  May,  1903,  under  the  head-curatorship  of  Mr  Holmes,  the 
division  of  physical  anthropology  was  organized  and  Dr  Ales 
Hrdlicka  placed  in  charge.  Through  the  efforts  of  the  latter  the 
division  has  become  an  efficient  agency  in  the  promotion  of  soma- 
tology, which,  although  early  contemplated  in  the  plan  of  the 
founders  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution  and  the  National  Museum, 
had  not  before  this  time  been  placed  on  a  working  basis.  Despite 
the  recognized  difficulty  of  securing  somatological  material,  the 
growth  has  been  rapid  and  the  results  attained  important.  Especi- 
ally worthy  of  mention  are  the  facial  casts  and  physical  measure- 
ments of  Indians  visiting  Washington,  and  the  large  comparative 
series  of  brains  of  man  and  other  animals  gathered  since  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  division.  During  the  last  three  years  the  collection 
in  large  part  has  been  rescued  from  the  confusion  due  to  the  neces- 
sity of  providing  for  the  large  and  constantly  growing  body  of  ma- 
terial in  the  cramped  quarters  of  the  Museum  building,  and  has 
been  assembled,  classified,  and  made  accessible  to  students.  The 
task  of  identifying  specimens  promiscuously  collected  in  earlier 
years  has  been  prosecuted,  and  at  the  same  time  the  working  up, 


454  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

publication,  and  installation  of  important  series  furnish  evidence  of 
continued  progress. 

The  following  summary  explains  the  methods  by  which  the 
National  Museum  receives  accessions  to  its  collections : 

By  Gifts,  either  with  or  without  restrictions. 

By  LoanSy  either  with  or  without  reservations. 

By  Deposits  from  the  Smithsonian  Institution  and  from  societies. 
The  former  makes  no  reservations ;  the  collections  of  the  latter, 
chiefly  for  exhibit,  are  not  distributed  among  the  general  series. 

By  Tramfers  from  the  several  departments  of  the  Government 
without  restrictions.  By  far  the  most  numerous  and  valuable  of 
these  for  number  and  definite  information  are  from  the  Bureau  of 
American  Ethnology. 

By  Purchases,  No  definite  sums  have  lately  been  appropriated 
for  purchases  except  for  expositions  of  a  national  character,  to 
supply  missing  links  in  series. 

By  Specimens  made  in  laboratories.  These  include  lay  figures, 
models,  casts,  and  photographs.  They  are  extremely  valuable,  both 
for  exhibition  and  for  exchange. 

By  Explorations  made  by  members  of  the  staff,  by  the  Bureau  of 
American  Ethnology,  and,  when  opportunity  offers,  by  other  Gov- 
ernment surveys  and  expeditions.  The  most  valuable  accessions 
are  derived  from  this  source. 

The  following  table  shows  the  increase  of  specimens  in  the  vari- 
ous divisions  of  the  Department  of  Anthropology  since  1 903  : 


June  30,  1903. 

June  30,  1906 

Physical  anthropology 

2.770 

7,139 

Ethnology 

478,064 

489,072 

Prehistoric  archeology 

372,979 

391.838 

Historic  archeology 

2,223 

2,405 

Technology 

31.093 

33.041 

Ceramics  (art) 

4,610 

4.849 

Graphic  arts 

8.896 

9.324 

Photography 

1,800 

1,860 

Musical  instruments 

1,625 

1,681 

Medicine 

6,889 

5. 031 

Histor)^ 

43.048 

45.956 

Historic  religions 

2,769 

3,000 

RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  455 

The  Museum  has  received  numerous  and  valuable  accessions  by 
donation.  It  is  difficult  to  single  out  those  especially  noteworthy, 
but  among  the  most  important  may  be  mentioned  the  following : 

igoi-02.  Wm.  L.  Abbott  collection  from  Malaysia,  236  speci- 
mens ;  Charles  Hummel,  stone  implements  from  Pennsylvania,  581 
specimens ;  Prof  J.  Heierlei,  flint  implements  and  bones  from  Switzer- 
land, 383  specimens  ;  W.  F.  Young,  archeological  collection  from 
Kentucky,  627  specimens. 

i^o2-oj,  Wm.  L.  Abbott  collection  from  Sumatra,  the  Anda- 
mans,  and  Nicobars,  500  specimens ;  Hilder  collection  for  Pan- 
American  Exposition,  from  the  Philippines,  1,500  specimens;  Mrs 
E.  M.  Chapman's  collection  of  coins,  837  examples. 

I <) 03-0 4.,  Wm.  L.  Abbott  collections  from  southwestern  Ma- 
laysia, 1,377  specimens;  H.  W.  Seton-Karr  collection  of  chipped 
stone  objects  from  Egypt,  278  specimens ;  the  I.  H.  Harris  collec- 
tion of  Ohio  archeology,  8,533  specimens;  West  Indian  arche- 
ological specimens,  numbering  550,  collected  by  Dr  J.  Walter 
Fewkes  for  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology  ;  and  the  Ozark  cave 
material  collected  by  Mr  W.  H.  Holmes,  numbering  2,710  speci- 
mens. 

1^04.-05,  Wm.  L.  Abbott  collections  from  the  islands  off  the 
coast  of  Sumatra  and  the  Mergui  archipelago  of  Lower  Burma, 
numbering  755  specimens  ;  Mrs  Matilda  Coxe  Stevenson's  collec- 
tions from  Zuni ;  Dr  Walter  Hough's  collection  of  Pueblo  arche- 
ology  from  western  Socorro  county.  New  Mexico,  863  specimens ; 
and  many  accessions  in  history,  archeology,  physical  anthropology, 
technology,  and  ceramics. 

ipoj-06.  The  collections  from  Engano,  Nias,  western  Borneo, 
and  western  Sumatra,  numbering  1,800  specimens  of  ethnology, 
and  some  somatology,  sent  by  Dr  W.  L.  Abbott ;  collections  of  the 
Museum-Gates  expedition  of  1905,  secured  by  Dr  Walter  Hough 
in  Arizona  and  New  Mexico,  numbering  3,000  specimens  ;  from 
the  Pajarito  park,  New  Mexico,  by  Mr  Edgar  L.  Hewett,  for  the 
Bureau  of  American  Ethnology;  458  specimens  from  the  Philippines, 
presented  by  the  Insular  Commission  at  St  Louis ;  cave  material 
from  France  and  Algeria,  sent  by  Jean  Miguel ;  ancient  pottery 
from  Sinaloa,  Mexico,  by  E.  W.  Nelson ;  gold  objects  from  Colom- 


4S6  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

bia,  by  Dr  H.  Pittier  de  Fabrega ;  Japanese  archeology  by  Y. 
Hirase  and  P.  L.  Jong ;  pottery  from  Casas  Grandes,  Mexico,  by 
A.  H.  Blackiston ;  collection  of  569  ancient  and  modem  arms,  by 
the  U.  S.  Cartridge  Company;  133  historical  relics,  by  Mrs  Julian 
James ;  Jewish  religious  objects,  by  Ephraim  Benguiat. 

The  following  explorations  productive  of  collections  have  been 
conducted : 

igoi-02.  By  Mr  William  H.  Holmes,  in  a  sulphur  spring  at 
Afton,  Indian  Territory ;  result,  860  ancient  specimens.  By  Dr 
Walter  Hough,  in  Arizona;  result,  2,200  specimens,  ancient  and 
modem;  Mr  Peter  G.  Gates,  same  locality;  result,  701  specimens. 

igo2-oj.  By  Mr  William  H.  Holmes,  aided  by  Mr  Gerard 
Fowke,  at  Kimmswick,  Missouri  ;  result,  mound  relics  and  fossil 
bones ;  also,  in  flint  quarries  and  workshops  in  Carter  county,  Ken- 
tucky, and  Harrison  county,  Indiana,  and  in  a  hematite  mine  at  Leslie, 
Missouri.  By  Dr  J.  Walter  Fewkes,  of  the  Bureau  of  American 
Ethnology,  in  the  islands  of  Santo  Domingo  and  Cuba.  By  Dr 
W.  L.  Abbott,  in  northern  Sumatra  and  adjacent  islands ;  result, 
the  gift  of  many  hundreds  of  specimens  to  the  Museum. 

igoj-04.  By  Dr  Fewkes,  further  studies  in  the  West  Indies. 
By  Dr  Hough,  field  work  in  New  Mexico  and  Arizona.  By  Mr 
George  C.  Maynard,  for  parts  of  the  old  locomotive  **  Stourbridge 
Lion." 

/po^-oj.  Dr  Ales  Hrdlicka  examined  the  Apache  and  Pima 
in  Arizona  and  New  Mexico,  continuing  a  physical  and  physiological 
research  on  Indian  children  ;  Dr  W.  L.  Abbott  visited  islands  off 
the  coast  of  Sumatra  and  collected  in  the  Mergui  archipelago,  for- 
warding from  these  localities  755  specimens ;  Dr  J.  Walter  Fewkes 
continued  his  researches  to  determine  the  range  of  Antillean  culture, 
visiting  the  state  of  Vera  Cruz,  Mexico  ;  Dr  Walter  Hough  gath- 
ered collections  from  the  foreign  exhibits  at  the  Louisiana  Purchase 
Exposition  at  St  Louis  ;  Mrs  Matilda  Coxe  Stevenson  completed 
her  studies  at  the  pueblo  of  Zuni,  New  Mexico,  and  transmitted  a 
large  ethnographic  collection  ;  Dr  Edgar  A.  Mearns,  U.  S.  A., 
added  numerous  Moro  artifacts  from  Mindanao. 

igoj-06,  Dr  Ales  Hrdlicka  visited  Florida  to  examine  fossil 
human  remains  ;   Dr  Walter  Hough  continued  the  field  work  of 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  457 

the  Peter  Goddard  Gates  expedition  for  the  National  Museum, 
visiting  the  headwaters  of  the  Gila  river  system  in  New  Mexico  and 
Arizona,  procuring  data  on  the  distribution  of  ancient  Pueblo  culture 
and  obtaining  a  large  collection. 

The  anthropological  publications  of  the  Museum  during  the  last 
four  years,  excluding  numerous  papers  bearing  on  Museum  subjects 
that  do  not  appear  in  its  official  series  of  publications,  are  as  follows  : 

CoviLLE,  Frederick  Vernon.     [Plants  used  in  basketry.]     Rep.  U.  S.  N. 

M.,  1902  (1904),  pp.  199-214. 
Wokas :  A  Primitive  Food  of  the  Klamath  Indians.     Ibid,,  pp.   725- 

739- 
Holmes,  William  H.     Flint  Implements  and  Fossil  Remains  from  a  Sulphur 

Spring  at  Afton,  Ind.  T.     Ibid,,  1901  (1903).  pp.  233-252. 
Report  on  the   Department  of  Anthropology  for  the  year  1899- 1900. 

Ibid,,  1900  (1902),  pp.  21-29. 

Anthropological  Studies  in  California.     Ibid,,  pp.  155-187. 

Report   on  the    Department   of   Anthropology  for  the  year  1900-01. 

Rep.  U.  S.  N.  M.,  1901  (1903),  pp.  51-61. 
Classification  and  Arrangement  of  the  Exhibits  of  an  Anthropological 

Museum.     Ibid,,  pp.  253-278. 
Report  on  the  Department  of  Anthropology  for   the    year    1901-02. 

Ibid,,  1902  (1903),  pp.  53-58. 
Report  on  the  Exhibit  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum  at  the  Pan-American 

Exposition,  Buffalo,    N.  Y.,   1901.     [With  others.]     Ibid.,  pp.   177-231. 
and  O.  T.  Mason.     Instructions  to  Collectors  of  Historical  and  Anthro- 


pological Specimens.     Bull.  U.  S.  N.  M.,  no.  39,  pt.  Q,  1902,  16  pp. 
Hough,  Walter.     A  Collection  of  Hopi  Ceremonial  Pigments.     Ibid.,  1900 

(1902),  pp.  463-471- 
Archeplogical  Field  Work  in  Northeastern  Arizona.     The  Museum-Gates 

Expedition  of  190 1.     Ibid.,  1901  (1903),  pp.  279-358. 
Hrdlicka,  a.     Directions  for  Collecting  Information  and  Specimens  for  Phys- 
ical Anthropology.     Bull.  U.  S.  N.  M.,  no.  39,  pt.  R,  1904,  pp.  1-25. 
Brains  and  Brain  Preservatives.     Proc.  U.  S.  N.  M.,    1905,  xxx,  pp. 

245-320. 
Mason,  Otis  T.     Directions  for  Collectors  of  American  Basketry.     Bull.  U. 

S.  N.  M.,  no.  39,  pt.  P,  1902. 
Aboriginal  American  Harpoons  :  A  Study  in  Ethnic  Distribution.     Rep. 

U.  S.  N.  M.,  1900(1902),  pp.   189-304. 
Aboriginal  American  Basketry  :    Studies  in  a  Textile  Art  without  Machin- 


ery.    Ibid.,  1902  (1904),  pp.  171-548. 

—  Report  on  the  Department  of  Anthropology  for  the  year  1902-03.     Ibid,, 
1903  (1904),  pp.  51-60. 

AM.    ANTH.,   N.  S.,  8— 30. 


4S8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 


Report  on  the  Department  of  Anthropology  for  the  year  1903-04.     Ibid, , 


1904  (1906),  pp.  61-76. 

wM  Wm.  H.  Holmes.     Instructions  to  Collectors  (q.  v.). 


Seton-Karr,  H.  W.     Flint  Implements  of  the  Fayum,  Egypt.     Rep.  U.  S. 
N.  M.,  1904  (1906),  pp.  745-751. 

The  scientific  staff  of  the  Department  of  Anthropology  of  the 
National  Museum  is  as  follows :  Otis  T.  Mason,  head  curator. 
Division  of  ethnology :  Otis  T.  Mason,  curator ;  Walter  Hough, 
assistant  curator ;  J.  Walter  Fewkes,  collaborator.  Division  of 
physical  anthropology  :  Ales  Hrdlicka,  assistant  curator.  Division 
of  historic  archeology :  Cyrus  Adler,  curator ;  I.  M.  Casanowicz, 
assistant  curator ;  Paul  Haupt,  honorary  associate.  Division  of 
prehistoric  archeology :  W.  H.  Holmes,  honorary  curator ;  J.  D. 
McGuire,  collaborator;  E.  P.  Upham,  aid.  Division  of  tech- 
nology :  George  C.  Maynard,  assistant  curator.  Division  of 
graphic  arts  :  Paul  Brockett,  custodian.  Section  of  photography  : 
T.  W.  Smillie,  custodian.  Division  of  medicine :  J.  M.  Flint, 
U.  S.  N.  (retired),  honorary  curator.  Division  of  historic  relig- 
ions :  Cyrus  Adler,  honorary  curator.  Division  of  history  :  A.  H. 
Clark,  honorary  curator ;  Paul  Beckwith,  assistant  curator. 

Harvard  University 

peabody  museum   (anthropological  section  of  the  university 

museum) 

When,  in  1866,  George  Peabody  founded  the  Peabody  Museum 
of  American  Archaeology  and  Ethnology,  he  founded  also  the  Pea- 
body professorship  with  the  same  title,  and  his  deed  of  gift  requires 
that  the  Peabody  professor  shall  have  charge  of  the  Museum.  In 
fact  the  Division  and  the  Museum  are  so  closely  allied  that  it  is  im- 
possible to  refer  to  one  without  including  the  other.  When  the  Pea- 
body professorship  was  established  in  the  University,  the  curator  of 
the  Museum  was  appointed  Peabody  professor,  and  when  the  Di- 
vision of  Instruction  was  organized  in  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sci- 
ences, he  was  made  chairman  of  the  Division.  Later  the  name  of 
the  Division  was  changed  to  Anthropolog)',  and  the  Museum  is  now 
known  as  the  Anthropological  section  of  the  University  Museum. 
The  Thaw  fellowship,  founded  in  1890  by  Mrs  William  Thaw,  is 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  459 

held  by  an  assistant  in  ethnology.  The  Hemenway  fellowship, 
founded  in  1891  by  Mrs  Mary  Hemenway,  is  to  be  held  by  a  grad- 
uate student  in  the  University  but  is  to  be  awarded  by  the  faculty  of 
the  Peabody  Museum.  The  Winthrop  scholarship,  founded  in  1895 
by  the  bequest  of  Robert  C.  Winthrop,  until  his  death  the  chair- 
man of  the  original  board  of  trustees  of  the  Museum,  is  "assigned 
to  the  Peabody  Museum"  but  is  to  be  awarded  by  the  Corporation 
of  the  University.  The  archeological,  ethnological,  and  somato- 
logical  collections  of  the  Museum  are  used  in  connection  with  the 
lectures  and  research  work  in  the  Division,  and  the  anthropological 
laboratories  and  library  of  the  Museum  are  used  extensively  by  the 
students.  The  officers  of  the  Division  are  also  officers  in  the 
Museum.  Capable  students  preparing  to  become  anthropologists 
are  given  practical  experience  in  field  work  in  connection  with  the 
expeditions  of  the  Museum. 

At  the  New  York  meeting  of  the  Americanists,  in  1902,  a  brief 
account  was  given  of  the  researches,  publications,  and  other  activi- 
ties of  the  Museum.  Since  that  time  the  work  in  all  these  lines 
has  been  steadily  continued. 

Museum  Collections,  —  Since  1902  the  collections  in  all  divisions 
of  the  Museum  have  been  increased  by  the  results  of  explorations, 
by  gifts,  and  by  purchase.  Several  important  changes  have  been 
made  in  the  various  halls,  and  many  specimens,  plans,  and  models 
have  been  added.  The  collection  of  facsimiles  of  the  sculptures 
and  monuments  illustrating  the  art  and  culture  of  the  ancient  peo- 
ples of  Central  America  has  been  increased  to  so  great  an  extent 
that  the  present  building  is  not  large  enough  to  place  all  on  exhi- 
bition. Unique  and  instructive  pictorial  exhibits  have  been  made 
in  several  of  the  halls  by  means  of  photographs  showing  the  native 
peoples,  their  costumes,  habitations,  and  occupations,  and  by  maps 
showing  the  distribution  of  each  tribe  or  family  group.  The  gifts 
received  during  the  last  few  years  include  very  extensive  additions 
to  the  exhibits  of  basketry,  so  that  the  Museum  now  has  a  remark- 
ably good  collection,  including  many  examples  of  the  oldest,  rarest, 
and  finest  baskets  of  the  various  tribes  of  North  American  Indians. 

Explorations.  — The  explorations  carried  on  by  the  Museum  in 
Central  America,  since  1891,  under  the  patronage  of  the  subscribers 


460  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

to  the  Central  American  Research  Fund,  have  been  continued  by 
two  expeditions  in  the  field.  The  Memoirs  of  the  Museum,  pub- 
lished by  means  of  the  same  Fund,  furnish  information  in  relation  to 
these  explorations  so  far  as  the  results  have  been  prepared  for  pub- 
lication. In  the  summer  of  1903  a  Museum  party  explored  an  old 
village  site  of  the  Erie  Indians  in  New  York  state.  Each  season 
since  that  time  an  expedition  has  been  sent  to  explore  some  ancient 
Iroquoian  site  in  that  state.  Good  results  have  been  obtained  and 
a  representative  collection  has  been  placed  on  exhibition.  In  the 
summer  of  1905  an  old  Mandan  village  site  in  North  Dakota  was 
explored  under  the  auspices  of  the  Museum  by  a  party  of  Harvard 
students.  The  report  on  this  work  forms  the  archeological  section 
of  a  paper  published  by  the  Museum  under  the  title  **  The  Man- 
dans."  In  the  same  year  several  places  within  the  enclosure  about 
the  famous  Turner  group  of  mounds  in  Ohio  were  examined  and 
additional  information  was  thus  procured  in  relation  to  this  interest- 
ing site  where  the  Museum  carried  on  extended  explorations  more 
than  a  decade  ago.  During  the  summer  of  1906  Mr  Volk  was 
employed  to  continue  the  researches  relating  to  the  further  elucida- 
tion of  the  existence  of  glacial  man  in  the  Delaware  valley.  Other 
special  researches  of  minor  importance  have  been  carried  on  from 
time  to  time.  The  Peabody  Museum  South  American  Expedition 
has  been  organized  and  will  start  for  South  America  in  October  of 
this  year.  The  expedition  will  be  continued  for  three  years,  with 
headquarters  at  Arequipa,  Peru.  The  purpose  of  the  expedition  is 
to  carry  on  researches,  ethnological,  somatological,  and  linguistic, 
among  the  little-known  tribes  of  the  eastern  Andean  region  of  Peru, 
Bolivia,  and  Argentina.  The  expedition  is  under  the  patronage  01 
a  Har\^ard  graduate  who  makes  this  valuable  gift  to  the  University. 
Dr  W.  C.  Farabee  has  been  granted  leave  of  absence  to  take  charge 
of  the  expedition  as  field  director. 

Publications.  —  In  1903  the  Museum  issued  vol.  11,  no.  2,  of  its 
quarto  illustrated  Memoirs,  forming  the  second  part  of  Teobert 
Maler's  report  on  his  archeological  researches  in  the  Usumasinta 
valley,  with  brief  references  to  the  Lacandone  Indians  of  that  region. 
Seventy-eight  heliotype  plates  illustrate  the  ruins  and  sculptures 
described  in  the  volume.     In  1904  vol.  in,  no.  i,  of  the  Memoirs 


N 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  46 1 

was  issued  under  the  titie  of  Archaeological  Researches  in  Yucatan, 
by  Edward  H.  Thompson.  This  number  includes  reports  on  the 
exploration  of  the  prehistoric  ruins  of  Xul,  Tzula,  and  Chacmultun. 
Three  of  the  nine  plates  are  in  color  and  illustrate  the  mural  paint- 
ings on  the  interior  walls  of  the  ruined  edifice  of  Chacmultun.  In 
the  same  year  four  numbers  of  the  Museum  octavo  illustrated  papers 
were  issued :  No.  7  of  vol.  i,  Penitential  Rite  of  the  Ancient  Mexi- 
cans, by  Zelia  Nuttall ;  nos.  i  and  2  of  vol.  in.  The  Cahokia  and 
surrounding  Mound  Groups,  by  D.  I.  Bushnell,  Jr ;  and  Explora- 
tions of  Mounds,  Coahoma  County,  Mississippi,  by  Charles  Pea- 
body  ;  and  no.  i  of  vol.  iv.  Representation  of  Deities  of  the  Maya 
Manuscripts,  byPaul  Schellhas  (a  translation  from  the  German).  In 
1905  the  third  number  of  vol.  in  was  issued,  Inheritance  of  Digital 
Malformation  in  Man,  by  W.  C.  Farabee.  In  August,  1906,  the 
fourth  number  of  this  volume  was  printed.  The  Mandans :  A  Study 
of  their  Culture,  Archaeology  and  Language,  by  G.  F.  Will  and 
H.  J.  Spinden.  The  annual  reports  of  the  curator  have  been  pub- 
lished in  the  annual  reports  of  the  president  and  treasurer  of  Har- 
vard University. 

Library,  — By  gift  and  exchange  of  publications  with  other  insti- 
tutions the  anthropological  library  has  rapidly  increased  in  extent 
and  in  importance.  It  is  now  especially  rich  in  full  sets  of  the  serial 
anthropological  publications  of  the  world. 

The  faculty  of  the  Museum  is  as  follows :  Charles  W.  Eliot, 
A.M.,  LL.D.,  president ;  Frederic  W.  Putnam,  A.M.,  S.D.,  secre- 
tary ;  Charles  P.  Bowditch,  A.M.,  Francis  C.  Lowell,  A.B., 
Augustus  Hemenway,  A.B. 

The  officers  and  assistants  in  the  Museum  are :  Frederic  W. 
Putnam,  A.M.,  S.D.,  curator  of  the  Museum ;  Charles  C.  Willoughby, 
assistant  curator ;  Roland  B.  Dixon,  Ph.D.,  librarian  and  assistant 
in  ethnology ;  Jane  Smith,  assistant  librarian  ;  Frances  H.  Mead, 
assistant  and  secretary ;  Alice  C.  Fletcher,  assistant  in  ethnology 
and  Thaw  fellow ;  Zelia  Nuttall,  honorary  assistant  in  Mexican 
archeology;  William  C.  Farabee,  Ph.D.,  assistant  in  somatology; 
Alfred  M.  Tozzer,  Ph.D.,  assistant  in  Central  American  archeology. 


462  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

THE   DIVISION    OF   ANTHROPOLOGY 

In  1 890  the  Division  of  American  Archaeology  and  Ethnology 
was  established  at  Harvard.  For  four  years  it  was  open  only  to  gradu- 
ates taking  the  research  course  in  American  archeology  and  ethnology 
given  by  the  Peabody  professor.  In  1 894  a  course  in  general  anthro- 
pology was  added  for  graduates  and  undergraduates,  and  an  instructor 
in  anthropology  was  appointed  to  aid  the  Peabody  professor.  The 
scope  of  the  Division  was  extended  from  year  to  year  until  in  1902 
the  name  was  changed  to  Anthropology.  In  the  college  year 
1895-96  one  professor  and  one  instructor  gave  one  research  course, 
taken  by  three  students,  and  one  general  course,  taken  by  nine  stu- 
dents. Ten  years  later  one  professor,  three  instructors,  and  one 
assistant  gave  four  research  courses  to  1 2  students,  and  six  other 
courses  to  179  students.  The  teaching  force  for  1906-07  will  be 
one  professor,  one  assistant  professor,  two  instructors,  and  one  assis- 
tant. The  courses  offered  will  be:  (i)  general  anthropology;  (2) 
somatology  ;  (4)  prehistoric  archeology  and  European  ethnography  ; 
(5)  American  archeology  and  ethnology  ;  (7)  ethnology  of  Oceania  ; 
(8)  American  Indian  languages ;  (9)  archeology  and  hieroglyphic 
systems  of  Central  America.  Research  courses  :  {20a)  American 
archeology  and  ethnology ;  (20<J)  advanced  somatology ;  (20r)  studies 
in  American  languages  ;  (20^/)  general  ethnology  ;  (20^)  Central 
American  and  Mexican  hieroglyphic  and  picture  writing. 

The  officers  of  the  Division  are:  Frederic  W.  Putnam,  A.M., 
S.D.,  Peabody  professor  of  American  archeology  and  ethnology, 
chairman;  Roland  B.  Dixon,  Ph.D.,  assistant  professor  in  anthro- 
pology; William  C.  Farabee,  Ph.D.,  instructor  in  anthropology; 
Alfred  M.  Tozzer,  Ph.D.,  instructor  in  Central  American  arche- 
ology ;  Charles  Peabody,  Ph.D.,  instructor  in  European  archeology 
and  ethnology;  Herbert  J.  Spinden,  A.M.,  Hemenway  fellow,  as- 
sistant in  anthropology. 

HARVARD   ANTHROPOLOGICAL   SOCIETY 

Connected  with  the  Division  of  Anthropology  is  the  Harvard 
Anthropological  Society,  composed  of  the  officers  in  the  Division 
and  an  average  of  forty  students  taking  courses  therein.  This 
Society  was  founded  in  1898.     During  the  college  term  meetings 


% 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  463 

are  held  for  the  presentation  and  discussion  of  papers  and  the  review 
of  current  anthropological  literature.  Two  or  more  public  lectures 
by  eminent  anthropologists  are  given  each  year  in  one  of  the 
Harvard  lecture  halls  under  the  auspices  of  the  Society. 

RADCLIFFE  ANTHROPOLOGICAL   CLUB 

Several  courses  in  the  Division  of  Anthropology  are  open  to  the 
students  in  Radcliffe  College,  and  course  i  has  been  taken  by  Rad- 
cliffe  students  since  1899,  course  4  since  1904.  In  1903  the  Rad- 
cliffe Anthropological  Club  was  founded.  This  club  is  conducted 
on  the  same  general  principles  as  the  Harvard  Anthropological 
Society,  except  that  no  public  meetings  are  held.  It  is  composed 
of  an  average  of  twenty-five  Radcliffe  students  taking  the  courses 
in  anthropology. 

Yale  University 

To  the  courses  in  anthropology  offered  previous  to  the  year 
1902-03  a  number  of  new  ones  have  been  added.  In  the  fall  of 
1903  a  junior  course  in  general  anthropology  was  started,  and  in 
1906  the  Department  of  Anthropology  was  definitely  separated  from 
Economics  and  Law,  with  which  two  departments  it  had  been  joined 
under  the  general  Department  of  the  Social  Sciences. 

The  '*A*'  course  in  anthropology  is  now  called  physical  and 
commercial  geography,  and  is  given  together  by  the  departments  of 
Geology  and  Anthropology.  The  regular  *'B"  course  is  anthro- 
pology (general)  and  the  **  C  "  course  is  science  of  society.  The 
numbers  in  these  main  courses  for  1905-06  were  respectively  about 
130,  210,  and  no;  for  1906-07,  160,  150,  and  130. 

In  1905-06  a  one-hour  course  in  somatic  anthropology  (now 
called  natural  history  of  man)  was  given  by  Professor  Ferris  of  the 
Medical  School ;  in  1906-07  this  will  be  a  two-hour  course.  For 
1905-06  a  course  was  given  by  Dr  Keller  in  culture-history,  and 
for  1906-07  one  in  historical  anthropology.  Since  1902  Dr 
Keller  has  given  a  two-hour  course  in  anthropology  (elementary)  in 
the  Sheffield  Scientific  School,  in  the  select  course;  for  1906-07 
there  will  be  about  70  men  in  this  course. 

The  *'A"  course  in  physical  and  commercial  geography  is 
mainly  a  study  of  environmental  influences  on  man,  with  especial 


464  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

reference  to  trade.  Connected  with  this  course  is  a  commercial 
museum,  the  exhibit  at  the  Portland  Exposition  of  the  U.  S.  Bureau 
of  Plant  Industry.  Less  connected  with  pure  anthropology  are 
courses  which  develop  out  of  it,  as  flora  and  fauna  of  commerce, 
markets,  transportation,  etc.  Since,  however,  all  these  courses  are 
envisaged  from  the  standpoint  of  sociology  and  anthropology,  and 
pay  attention  to  primitive  types,  they  are  truly  part  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  in  its  wider  sense. 

The  Boocock  Library  of  the  Social  Sciences  still  adds  to  itself  a 
yearly  increment  of  special  works  on  anthropology,  sociology,  and 
especially  ethnography. 

Professor  Sumner  has  in  press  a  large  volume  on  Folk-ways, 
His  Sociology  will  soon  appear  also.  To  Queries  in  Ethnography, 
which  was  published  in  1903,  Dr  Keller  will  shortly  add  an  edition 
of  Keltic's  Partition  of  Africa  and  a  work  on  Colonisation. 

YALE   UNIVERSITY  MUSEUM 

When  the  Yale  University  Museum  was  founded,  no  provision 
was  made  for  anthropology.  The  plans  included  storage,  exhibi- 
tion, and  lecture  rooms  for  three  departments  only,  viz.,  geology, 
tnineralogy,  and  zoology,  and  the  income  from  invested  funds  was 
for  the  use  of  these  alone.  The  anthropological  section  exists, 
therefore,  by  courtesy ;  homeless,  but  for  the  attic,  and  without 
income.  Luckily  it  is  not  without  friends,  and  these  are  increasing  in 
number  every  year.  Through  them  there  have  been  added  fifty-nine 
collections  since  the  New  York  Congress  four  years  ago.  Of  these, 
fifty-two  were  gifts,  and  seven  loans.  The  gifts  of  money  number 
ts\'o  ;  and  of  cases,  four.  Nine  exchange  collections  have  been 
received,  while  three  important  accessions  are  the  result  of  field 
work.     Only  two  purchases  have  been  made. 

The  more  important  accessions  arc  the  following  : 

An  annual  consignment  of  Egyptian  antiquities  from  several 
localities,  representing  various  dynasties  and  periods,  the  gift  of  the 
Egypt  Exploration  Fund. 

Several  hundred  Indian  antiquities  from  a  rock-shelter  near 
Pleasant  Valley,  Connecticut,  the  gift  of  Mr  Walter  E.  Manchester. 

Two  Chilcat  blankets,  a  number  of  Indian  baskets,  and  various 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  465 

ethnological  specimens  from  Japan,  Africa,  and  Alaska,  the  gift  of 
Mrs  Elizabeth  F.  Jenkins  and  Mrs  Kate  Foote  Coe. 

(i)  Plaster  casts  of  aboriginal  objects  in  stone,  of  rare  types, 
from  Alabama  and  Florida  ;  (2)  A  collection  of  gorgets,  pendants, 
and  implements  of  shell ;  stone  pendants  and  bone  implements,  from 
the  mounds  and  shell-keys  along  the  southwest  coast  of  Florida  — 
all  the  gift  of  Mr  Clarence  B.  Moore  of  Philadelphia. 

Aboriginal  American  basketry  and  other  ethnological  speci- 
mens to  the  number  of  293,  loaned  by  Mr  and  Mrs  William  H. 
Moseley  of  New  Haven.  Forty-eight  Eg3^tian  and  Soudanese 
baskets  and  variou3  Egyptian  antiquities,  also  loaned  by  Mr  and 
Mrs  Moseley. 

Two  hundred  and  fifty-six  eolithic  and  paleolithic  implements 
from  England,  France,  and  Belgium,  the  result  of  field  work  by  the 
curator,  Dr  George  Grant  MacCurdy,  and  given  by  him  to  the 
Museum. 

A  double  Indian  burial,  removed  intact  from  Derby,  Connecti- 
cut, and  installed  to  illustrate  an  early  mode  of  burial  by  the 
Indians  of  southern  New  England — the  result  of  field  work  by  the 
Museum. 

An  Eskimo  collection  from  Point  Barrow,  Alaska,  consisting  of 
wearing  apparel,  weapons,  tools,  utensils,  etc.,  the  gift  of  Miss  Grace 
Nicholson,  Pasadena,  California. 

An  ethnographic  collection  from  the  Philippine  islands,  including 
articles  of  clothing,  spears,  arrows,  bolas,  daggers,  etc.,  the  gift  of 
Lieut.  Theodore  Gruener,  New  Haven. 

Ancient  Egyptian  pottery,  collected  at  Beni-Hassan  in  1904, 
the  gift  of  the  Beni-Hassan  Excavations  Committee. 

More  than  five  hundred  antiquities  from  the  ancient  pueblos  and 
cliff-dwellings  of  Utah,  Colorado,  Arizona,  and  New  Mexico,  the 
gift  of  Professor  T.  Mitchell  Prudden,  College  of  Physicians  and 
Surgeons,  Columbia  University.  Dr  Prudden's  gift  includes  also  a 
choice  selection  of  modern  Pueblo  pottery,  a  catalogue,  maps,  field 
notes,  and  new  cases  for  the  installation  of  the  collection. 

Mr  Benjamin  Hoppin,  of  Baddeck,  Nova  Scotia,  has  added  to 
his  Eskimo  collection  and  has  given  a  new  case  for  its  installation. 

The  only  annual  contributor  of  money  to  the  anthropological 


466  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s,,  8,  1906 

section  of  the  Museum  is  Mr  Stansbury  Hagar  of  New  York  City. 
The  curator's  time  has  been  given  largely  to  research  work  on 
the  archeological  material,  with  a  view  to  publication.  A  monograph 
entitled  :  "The  Eolithic  Problem  —  Evidences  of  a  Rude  Industry 
antedating  the  Paleolithic,"  ^  has  already  appeared,  and  a  much 
more  extensive  work  on  the  several  thousand  Chiriquian  antiquities 
in  the  Museum  is  now  well  under  way. 

Columbia  University  in  the  City  of  New  York 

Anthropological  instruction  at  Columbia  University  was  inau- 
gurated in  1 894  by  Dr  Livingston  Farrand  and  Dr  W.  Z.  Ripley, 
who  for  a  number  of  years  gave  a  joint  course  on  general  ethnology. 
In  1 896  Dr  Franz  Boas  was  appointed  lecturer  in  physical  anthro- 
pology, and  gave  introductory  courses  on  physical  anthropology 
and  also  introduced  the  study  of  Indian  languages.  In  1 899  Dr 
Boas  was  appointed  professor  of  anthropology. 

In  1903  the  Duke  of  Loubat  established  a  professorship  of 
American  archeology,  to  which  Marshall  H.  Saville  was  appointed. 
In  the  same  year  Professor  Farrand,  who  up  to  that  time  had  divided 
his  work  between  the  departments  of  Psychology  and  Anthropology, 
was  transferred  to  the  Department  of  Anthropology  and  concentrated 
his  work  on  the  development  of  this  department.  In  1902  and 
1903  Dr  William  Jones  was  appointed  assistant  in  American  lin- 
guistics, which  position  he  held  for  two  years.  In  1903-04  Dr 
Clark  Wissler  was  appointed  assistant  in  physical  anthropology. 
The  following  courses  have  been  given  during  the  last  four  years : 

1.  General  anthropology,  introductory 

course.     Professor  Farrand 1902-03    1903-04    1904-0$    1905-06 

2.  Statistics    applied   to   anthropom- 

etry.    Professor  Boas 1902-03    1903-04    1904-0$    1905-06 

3.  Ethnology.     Professor  Farrand 1902-03    1903-04    1904-05    1905-06 

4.  Physical  anthropology.     Professor 

Boas -  -  1904-05 

5.  American    languages.       Professor 

Boas 1902-03    1903-04    1904-05    1905-06 

6.  Ethnography  of  America  and  Asia. 

Professor  Boas -  1903-04    1904-05    1905-06 

'  American  Anthropologist^  vii,  p.  425-479,  July- September,  1905. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  467 

7.  Ethnography  of  Asia.    Dr  Berthold 

Laufer -  -  1904-05    1905-06 

8.  Archeology  of  Mexico.     Professor 

Saville -  1903-04    1904-05    1905-06 

9.  Spanish  sources  for  American  eth- 

nology.   Mr  A.  F.  Bandelier -  -  1904-05    1905-06 

10.  General     archeology.      Professor 

Saville -  .  .  1905-06 

11.  Archeology  of   Peru.     Mr  A.   F. 

Bandelier _  .  .  1905-06 

12.  Anthropological     research.     Pro- 

fessors Boas  and  Farrand 1902-03    1903-04    1904-05    1905-06 

13.  Primitive    industries.     Dr    Clark 

Wissler -         1903-04    1904-05    1905-06 

With  the  present  year  a  general  reorganization  of  the  department 
has  been  made.  The  course  on  statistics  applied  to  anthropometry, 
which  has  been  given  for  a  number  of  years  as  a  general  introduc- 
tion to  the  study  of  variation,  will  be  continued  by  the  Department  of 
Mathematics  as  a  general  course  introductory  to  statistical  work,  and 
its  place  will  be  taken  by  a  systematic  course  in  anthropometry, 
while  morphological-anthropological  work  will  be  carried  on  in  the 
Anatomical  Institution  by  Professor  Huntington.  A  course  on 
general  ethnography  has  been  added  to  the  introductory  courses, 
and  the  course  on  American  languages  is  divided  into  an  introduc- 
tory and  an  advanced  course. 

The  members  of  the  staff  of  the  department,  and  advanced  stu- 
dents, during  the  past  years  have  carried  on  research  work  of  various 
kinds  in  cooperation  with  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  the 
Carnegie  Institution,  and  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History. 

With  the  present  year  Columbia  University  has  organized,  in 
cooperation  with  Yale  University,  courses  in  preparation  for  foreign 
service,  in  which  anthropological  instruction  occupies  a  somewhat 
important  position.  The  arrangement  of  these  courses  has  been  the 
occasion  for  further  developing  the  ethnographical  courses  on  east- 
ern Asia. 

American  Museum  of  Natural  History 

In  1903  Professor  F.  W.  Putnam  resigfned  the  curatorship  of  the 
Department  of  Anthropology  in  the  American  Museum  of  Natural 


468  AMERICA X  AXTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

History,  which  he  had  held  for  nearly  ten  years,  and  accepted  a  call 
to  take  charge  of  the  Department  of  Anthropology  of  the  University 
of  California.  From  this  time  until  1906  the  Department  of 
Anthropology  of  the  American  Museum  was  occupied,  chiefly  under 
the  direction  of  Professor  Franz  Boas,  with  the  completion  of  work 
already  under  way  at  the  time  of  the  meeting  of  the  Congress  of 
Americanists  in  New  York  Cit}'  in  1902,  at  which  meeting  a  report 
of  progress  was  made.  In  conformity  with  previous  plans  ethno- 
logical and  archeological  research  in  North  America  has  been  sys- 
tematically conducted  in  five  culture  areas  :  the  Arctic,  the  Pacific 
coast  of  the  United  States,  the  Great  Plains,  the  Great  Lake  and 
Forest  area,  and  the  Pueblo  area. 

For  a  number  of  years  Professor  Boas  has  directed  the  collec- 
tion of  anthropological  specimens  and  information  among  the  Eskimo 
about  Hudson  bay  and  northu-ard.  During  the  winter  01  1905 
Captain  George  Comer  and  Captain  James  Mutch  returned  from 
whaling  voyages  to  the  straits  and  inlets  north  of  Hudson  bay  where 
they  obtained  many  interesting  specimens.  Professor  Boas  has  made 
a  special  study  of  the  data  gathered  by  these  gentlemen,  the  results 
of  which  will  soon  appear  in  the  Museum  Bulletin. 

Rev.  J.  W.  Chapman,  for  many  years  a  missionary  on  Yukon 
river,  stationed  in  the  vicinity'  of  Anvik,  made  important  ethnolog- 
ical collections  among  the  Athapascan  tribes  inhabiting  that  region, 
in  whose  culture  an  interesting  mixture  of  Alaskan  Eskimo  and 
Athapascan  is  apparent. 

In  1899  the  Museum  organized  the  Huntington  Californian  Ex- 
pedition for  investigations  among  the  Maidu,  Pit  River,  and  Shasta 
Indians.  This  work  was  under  the  charge  of  Dr  Roland  B.  Dixon 
and  was  practically  completed  in  1904.  The  results  of  this  expe- 
dition have  been  entirely  satisfactory' ;  these  include  the  systematic 
presentation  of  the  language  of  the  Maidu  and  the  Shasta,  a  study 
of  their  art  and  their  general  ethnology.  The  results  of  the  work 
among  the  Maidu  have  been  published  in  the  Bulletin  of  the  Mu- 
seum. Since  1902  Miss  Constance  Goddard  DuBois  has  made  an- 
nual visits  to  the  Mission  Indians  of  southern  California  for  the  pur- 
pose of  investigating  their  general  ethnology  and  language.  She 
has  made  considerable  progress  in  her  work,  but  it  is  yet  incom- 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  469 

plete  and  will  be  carried  on  in  the  future  under  the  direction  of  the 
University  of  California.  Preliminary  reports  of  her  work  have 
been  published.* 

From  1 897  to  1 899,  in  connection  with  the  Jesup  North  Pacific 
Expedition,  Mr  Harlan  I.  Smith  made  extensive  archeological  ex- 
plorations in  British  Columbia,  the  results  of  which  suggested  the 
investigation  of  the  archeology  of  the  Columbia  River  valley.  Ac- 
cordingly in  the  summer  of  1903  he  explored  the  Yakima  valley,  that 
the  boundary  between  the  culture  of  The  Dalles  and  of  the  Thomp- 
son River  region  might  be  determined.  The  results  of  this  work 
seem  to  indicate  that  the  general  plateau  culture  of  the  interior  of 
British  Columbia,  Washington,  and  Oregon,  differing  greaUy  from 
the  culture  of  the  coast,  resembled  that  of  the  present  natives.  In 
the  Yakima  valley  the  culture  seems  to  be  slightly  different  from 
that  of  the  Thompson  River  region,  and  perhaps  even  less  like  that 
of  the  region  around  The  Dalles.  The  most  interesting  object 
secured  on  this  expedition  was  a  carving  in  antler,  representing  a 
costumed  human  figure,  which  is  in  many  respects  unique.  A  pre- 
liminary report  of  the  results  of  the  expedition*  and  a  general  com- 
parative summary  of  all  archeological  explorations  on  the  North 
Pacific  coast*  have  been  published. 

Since  1902  the  Museum  has  continued  a  systematic  study  of  the 
decorative  art  and  ceremonies  of  the  Indians  of  the  plains.  During 
this  time  expeditions  have  been  made  to  the  Assiniboin,  Black- 
feet,  Dakota,  Gros  Ventres,  and  Sarsi,  all  of  which  yielded  impor- 
tant scientific  results,  with  illustrative  specimens.  Professor  Franz 
Boas,  who  directed  this  investigation,  has  summarized  the  results  on 
decorative  art.*  The  interesting  point  was  that  the  interpretations 
given  by  a  people  to  their  conventional  decorative  designs  are  of 
secondary  importance  because  of  a  tendency  to  read  into  such  de- 
signs ideas  habitually  entertained  by  their  makers.  On  this  account 
it  has  seemed  desirable  to  continue  the  investigation  of  the  decora- 
tive art  of  the  Plains  Indians  from  two  points  of  view :  (i)  To  de- 
termine from  the  objective  designs  the  types  for  the  several  tribes 

'^  Journal  of  American  Folk- Lore^  I905>  1 9^6. 

2  See  Science^  April  6,  1906. 

^Bulletin  of  the  American  Geographical  Society  y  XXXVIII,  May,  1906. 

^  Popular  Science  Monthly^  Oct.,  1 903. 


470  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

and,  if  possible,  their  relation  to  one  another  ;  (2)  to  determine  the 
types  of  ideas  associated  with  decorative  desig^ns  among  the  various 
tribes.  It  will  not  be  possible  to  complete  this  research  for  several 
years.  Previous  to  1902  Dr  A.  L.  Kroeber  carried  on  the  field 
work  among  the  Plains  Indians  and  since  that  time  he  has  prepared 
a  detailed  comparative  statement  of  the  types  of  designs  character- 
istic of  the  tribes  so  far  investigated.  This  will  appear  in  a  future 
edition  of  the  Museum  Bulletin.  During  the  sunmier  of  1905  Dr 
P.  E.  Goddard  visited  this  Sarsi  in  Canada  and  secured  an  impor- 
tant collection  of  decorated  objects,  but  the  exact  relation  of  the  art 
of  this  tribe  to  the  general  Plains  type  can  not  be  definitely  stated 
at  this  time. 

In  connection  with  the  foregoing  studies  in  art,  the  ceremonial 
organization  of  the  various  tribes  visited  was  investigated.  Dr  A. 
L,  Kroeber  has  completed  the  manuscript  for  the  Arapaho  and  the 
Gros  Ventres,  a  portion  of  which  has  been  published.  The  Museum 
has  secured  an  extensive  collection  of  ceremonial  objects  from  the 
Blackfoot  tribes  and  the  necessary  data  for  a  publication  treating  of 
their  ceremonial  life  and  organization.  Dr  J.  R.  Walker  has  spent 
the  last  two  years  in  a  similar  investigation  among  the  Dakota. 

Dr  William  Jones  has  been  engaged  in  continuous  study  of  the 
Ojibwa  in  the  Great  Lake  region  of  North  America  and  has  made 
a  general  collection  of  ethnological  specimens  from  the  same  people. 
So  far  he  has  recorded  in  the  original  language  all  of  the  most 
important  myths  of  these  people,  most  of  which  material  has  been 
prepared  for  publication.  He  has  made  a  special  study  also  of 
their  philosophy  and  religion  as  revealed  in  the  myths  and  the 
ceremonies  pertaining  to  the  Midewiwin  and  other  rites.  For  the 
last  tw'o  years  the  greater  portion  of  this  work  has  been  under  the 
direction  of  the  Carnegie  Institution. 

The  work  of  the  Hyde  Expedition  was  continued  by  Mr  George 
H.  Pepper  who  in  1904  made  a  special  investigation  of  Pueblo 
pottery.  Twenty-six  pueblos  in  New  Mexico  and  Arizona  were 
visited  and  a  representative  collection  was  obtained  from  each.  Dur- 
ing the  summer  of  1904  several  months  were  devoted  to  the  study  of 
textile  work  among  the  Navaho,  the  greater  portion  of  the  work 
being  done  at  Ganado,  Arizona,  which  is  in  the  southern  part  of  the 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  47 1 

Navaho  reservation.  At  this  time  a  series  of  looms  was  obtained 
showing  the  technique  of  the  various  primitive  forms  of  Navaho 
textiles.  In  addition  a  trip  was  made  to  the  state  of  Michoacan  in 
the  southwestern  part  of  Mexico  where  archeological  work  was 
carried  on  during  the  months  of  November  and  December. 

North  America  was  not  the  only  field  of  operations  during  this 
period  of  1903-05.  Mr  Adolph  F.  Bandelier  returned  to  New 
York  in  1903  after  several  years  of  continuous  exploration  in  Peru 
and  adjacent  parts  of  South  America.  Since  his  return  the  large 
archeological  collections  from  this  region  have  been  arranged  for 
exhibition,  and  Mr  Bandelier  is  engaged  on  an  extensive  work  on  the 
culture  of  the  ancient  Peruvians.^  This  work  is  intended  to  be  a 
critical  examination  of  all  available  historical  and  archeological  data. 

Dr  Berthold  Laufer  completed  his  Chinese  collections  in  the 
early  part  of  1904  and  through  his  efforts  the  Museum  has  brought 
together  a  large  number  of  well-selected  specimens  pertaining  par- 
ticularly to  the  industrial  life  of  China,  with  supplementary  informa- 
tion for  treating  the  material  culture  of  Chinese  peoples  from  the 
historical  point  of  view.  Since  his  return  Dr  Laufer  has  completed 
for  publication  a  study  of  ancient  pottery  and  other  material  relating 
to  Chinese  archeology.'  The  work  in  China  was  under  the  direction 
of  the  East  Asiatic  Committee,  of  which  Professor  Boas  was  the  ex- 
ecutive secretary. 

Some  important  illustrative  collections  were  procured  by  the  Mu- 
seum. In  1903  a  valuable  collection  from  the  natives  of  central 
Australia  was  obtained  by  exchange  with  the  National  Museum  of 
Melbourne,  Victoria.  This  collection  contains  specimens  of  prac- 
tically all  the  types  described  by  Spencer  and  Gillen  in  their  famous 
work  on  the  Native  Tribes  of  Central  Australia.  In  the  same  year 
an  arrangement  was  made  with  the  Bureau  of  Missions  by  which  a 
very  important  ethnological  collection  from  Africa  was  deposited  in 
the  Museum.  In  addition  the  Museum  has  acquired  from  time  to  time 
a  number  of  small  African  collections,  including  one  of  carvings  in 
ivory  and  wood.     In  1905  the  ethnological  collection  of  the  Philip- 

*  For  various  papers  on  the  subjects  of  Mr  Bandelier' s  researches  in  Peru  and  Bo- 
livia, see  American  Anthropologist^  1904,  1905. 

'  Dr  Laufer's  **  Historical  Jottings  on  Amber  in  Asia  *'  will  appear  in  a  forthcom- 
ing issue  of  the  American  Anthropologist, 


472  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

pine  islands  at  the  St  Louis  Exposition  was  presented  to  the  Mu- 
seum by  President  Jesup.  This  is  a  large  and  important  collection, 
presenting  many  aspects  of  the  general  ethnology  of  the  islands. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  official  publications  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  for  the  years  named  : 

For  igoj 

G.  T.  Emmons  :  The  Basketry  of  the  Tlingit.  {Memoirs,  iii,  pt.  2,  pp.  229- 
278.) 

Ales  Hrdlicka  :  Divisions  of  the  Parietal  Bone  in  Man  and  Mammals.  {Bulle- 
tin, XIX,  pp.  231-386.) 

Franz  Boas  :  The  Jesup  North  Pacific  Expedition.    {Museum  Journal,  in,  pp. 

71-119.) 
Harlan  I.  Smith :  Shell  Heaps  of  the  Lower  Eraser  River,  British  Columbia. 

{Memoirs,  iv,  pt.  4,  pp.  133-192.) 

For  ig04 
Waldemar  Borgoras  :  The  Chukchee  —  Material  Culture.     {Memoirs,  vii,  pt. 

3,  pp.  1-276.) 
Carl  Lumholtz  :  Decorative  Art  of  the  Huichol  Indians.     {Metnoirs,  11,  pt.  3, 

PP-  279-327.) 
A.  L.  Kroeber :  The  Arapaho.     III.     Ceremonial  Organization.     {Bulletin, 

XVIII,  pt.  2,  pp.  151-230.) 
Clark  Wissler  :  Decorative  Art  of  the  Sioux  Indians.     {Bulletin,  xviii,  pt.  3, 

pp.  231-278.) 
Harlan  I.  Smith :  A  Costumed  Human  Eigure  from  Tampico,  Washington. 

{Bulletin,  xx,  pp.  195-203.) 
Adolph  F.  Bandelier  :  On  the  Relative  Antiquity  of  Ancient  Peruvian  Burials. 

{Bulletin,  xx,  pp.  217-226.) 

For  igos 

Eranz  Boas  and  George  Hunt :  Kwakiutl  Texts.     {Memoirs,  ill,  pt.  3,  pp.  403- 

S32.) 
W.  Jochelson  :  Religion  and  Myths  of  the  Koryak.     {Memoirs,  vi,  pt.  i,  pp. 

1-382.) 
J.  R.  Swanton :  The  Haida  of  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.     {Memoirs,  v,  pt.  i, 

pp.  1-300.) 
Eranz  Boas  :  Anthropometry  of  Central  California.     {Bulletin,  xvii,  pt.  4,  pp. 

347-380.) 
R.  B.  Dixon  :  The  Northern  Maidu.     {Bulletin,  xvil,  pt.  3,  pp.  11-346.) 
G.  E.  Kunz  :  On  the  Ancient  Inscribed  Summerian  (Babylonian)  Axe-head 

from  the  Morgan  Collection  in  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History. 

{Bulletin,  xxi,  pp.  37-47.) 
J.   D.   Prince  and  R.   Lau  :    An  Ancient  Babylonian  Axe-head.     {Bulletin, 

XXI,  pp.  49-52-) 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  473 

Brooklyn  Institute  Museum 
A  Department  of  Ethnology  was  established  by  the  Brooklyn 
Institute  of  Arts  and  Sciences  in  February,  1903,  and  Mr  Stewart 
Culin  appointed  curator.  The  primary  object  of  the  department  was 
the  acquisition  of  ethnological  material  for  the  Institute  Museum,  for 
which  a  large  building  was  in  course  of  erection  on  the  Eastern 
Parkway,  Brooklyn.  The  Museum  had  been  divided  between  art 
and  natural  history,  and  no  considerable  amount  of  ethnological 
material  had  been  accumulated.  The  curator  was  free,  therefore,  to 
develop  the  collections  from  the  beginning.  It  was  determined  to 
devote  the  attention  of  the  department  first  to  the  American  Indian, 
and  the  southwestern  section  of  the  United  States  was  selected  for 
the  preliminary  work.  The  curator  proceeded  to  the  field  in  the 
spring  of  1903  and  made  other  tripsin  the  two  years  following.  As 
a  result  one  large  hall  of  the  Museum  has  been  arranged  and  opened 
to  the  public.  Precisely  half  of  this  hall  is  devoted  to  the  pueblo  of 
Zuni,  special  attention  being  given  to  the  exhibition  of  Zuni  masks 
and  ceremonial  objects.  The  opposite  side  is  devoted  to  the  Apache, 
Navaho,  Hopi,  and  Cliff-dwellers.  A  large  collection  of  material 
from  the  cliff-dwellings  in  the  Caiion  de  Chelly,  obtained  by  Mr 
Culin  in  1903,  is  an  important  feature  of  this  exhibit.  It  includes 
many  recent  Navaho  and  Hopi  objects,  intermingled  with  the  re- 
mains of  the  cliff-dwellers  proper.  Among  other  interesting  Navaho 
collections  is  a  set  of  old  masks  for  the  Yebichai  dance.  Altogether 
133  different  masks  of  the  southwestern  Indians  are  exhibited  in 
this  hall. 

A  feature  of  the  hall  is  the  employment  of  pictures  in  connec- 
tion with  the  exhibits,  and  much  attention  has  been  paid  to  the 
artistic  arrangement  of  the  collections.  In  1904  and  1905  Mr 
Culin  was  accompanied  in  the  field  by  the  Museum  staff  artist,  Mr 
H.  B.  Judy,  who  made  a  large  number  of  sketches  of  the  landscape, 
houses,  and  people  of  the  Pueblo  country.  Enlargements  of  a 
number  of  these  sketches  are  displayed  in  the  upper  parts  of  the 
exhibition  cases,  and  a  panorama  of  the  landscape  opposite  the  East 
mesa  of  Hopiland  is  shown  along  the  upper  part  of  the  wall  immedi- 
ately below  the  ceiling. 

Materials  for  a  second  American  hall,  to  be  devoted  to  coUec- 

AM.  AMTH.,  N.  S..  8-3I. 


474  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

tions  from  California  and  the  Northwest  coast,  have  also  been  col- 
lected by  Mr  Culin  during  his  field  trips.  No  publications  have  yet 
been  made,  the  principal  effort  having  been  expended  on  the  work 
of  collection  and  display.  At  the  same  time  much  important  infor- 
mation has  been  obtained  and  turned  to  account  in  the  preparation 
of  systematic  labels. 

Field  Museum  of  Natural  History 

Since  the  account  of  the  Department  of  Anthropology  of  the 
Field  Museum  of  Natural  History  (then  Field  Columbian  Museum) 
was  presented  to  the  members  of  the  Thirteenth  Congress  of  Ameri- 
canists in  1902,  there  has  been  no  change  in  the  policy  as  stated  at 
that  time,  namely,  the  consideration  of  the  claims  of  anthropology 
in  America,  especially  in  North  America,  as  subjects  for  investiga- 
tion and  museum  presentation.  Within  the  North  American  field 
very  little  new  investigation  has  been  undertaken,  but  much  addi- 
tional research  has  been  carried  on  among  the  tribes  referred  to  in 
the  report  of  1902.  Thus  .more  or  less  continuous  investigation 
has  been  made  by  the  curator  of  the  department  among  the  Pawnee, 
Wichita,  Caddo,  Arikara,  Ponca,  Cheyenne,  and  Arapaho,  that 
among  the  tribes  of  the  Caddoan  stock  being  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington.  Dr  C.  F.  Newcombe  has 
continued  his  explorations  among  the  various  tribes  of  the  North 
Pacific  coast  of  America.  Dr  J.  W.  Hudson  has  continued  his  in- 
vestigation among  the  tribes  of  California.  Assistant  curator  Owen 
has  made  additional  investigations  among  the  Navaho  and  the 
Apache,  and  for  two  winters  has  studied  the  so-called  Mission 
Indians  of  southern  California.  Assistant  curator  Simms  has  made 
additional  visits  to  the  Crow  Indians  of  Montana,  and  to  the  Cree, 
Assiniboin,  and  Ojibwa  of  Canada.  Mr  H.  R.  Voth  has  devoted 
two  more  years  to  investigation  among  the  Hopi  of  Arizona. 
Through  cooperation  with  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  Mr 
James  Mooney  has  spent  many  months  continuing  his  researches 
in  the  heraldic  system  of  the  Plains  Indians,  especially  among  the 
Cheyenne. 

As  a  result  of  these  investigations  many  important  acquisitions 
have  been  made.     This  is  especially  true  oi   the  Northwest  coast 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  475 

and  of  California,  the  Apache,  Pawnee,  Arikara,  Wichita,  Cree,  and 
Cheyenne.  Several  collections  from  North  America  have  also  been 
acquired  through  purchase,  notably  a  large  collection  of  buffalo-hide 
shields  from  the  Pueblo  tribes,  a  number  of  painted  buffalo  robes,  a 
very  important  collection  from  the  village  of  Wushuum  of  the 
Chinook  of  Washington,  and  about  250  fine  old  baskets  from  tribes 
hitherto  not  well  represented  in  the  Museum's  collections. 

The  acquisition  of  new  specimens  from  the  many  tribes  above 
enumerated  has  made  necessary  the  reinstallation  of  the  material. 
The  most  important  rearrangements  are  to  be  found  in  the  collec- 
tions from  the  Northwest  coast  and  California,  which  are  now  com- 
pletely installed,  with  the  exception  of  the  Mission  Indian  collection. 
The  Northwest  Coast  collection  occupies  in  this  present  arrangement 
88  cases  and  is  one  of  the  most  imposing  collections  in  the  Museum. 
The  reinstallation  of  the  California  collection  was  made  possible  by 
the  transfer  of  the  Museum  lectures  to  the  city,  the  collection  being 
now  installed  in  about  50  cases  in  the  old  lecture  hall.  Space  is  not 
available  in  the  hall,  however,  for  the  Mission  collection,  which  will 
be  exhibited  in  an  adjoining  room.  The  Arapaho  collection,  which  is 
now  very  complete  and  extensive,  is  as  yet  only  partially  installed ; 
while  the  Cheyenne  collection,  equally  important  in  certain  respects 
and  even  more  extensive,  is  not  yet  installed.  Certain  rearrange- 
ments have  been  made  in  the  Hopi  hall,  rendered  necessary  by  the 
acquisition  of  new  material  consisting  almost  exclusively  of  dance 
paraphernalia. 

Since  1903  the  department  has  been  acquiring,  at  a  gradually 
increasing  rate,  material  from  countries  other  than  North  America. 
One  of  the  most  important  collections  thus  obtained  was  made  by 
Allayne  Ireland,  who  visited  Borneo  and  the  neighboring  territory 
under  the  joint  auspices  of  the  Field  Museum  and  the  University  of 
Chicago.  As  a  result  of  this  expedition  the  department  acquired  a 
very  large  collection  from  British  Borneo,  the  Malay  peninsula,  and 
Burma.  On  his  visit  to  Europe  last  year  the  curator  acquired  by 
purchase  a  number  of  valuable  collections,  among  the  most  im- 
portant of  which  is  one  made  by  Professor  Rudolf  Martin  of  Zurich, 
which  formed  the  illustrations  for  his  great  work  on  the  Malay 
peninsula.     Other  collections  of  importance  have  been  acquired 


476  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

from  Australia,  German  and  English  New  Guinea,  and  Admiralty, 
New  Ireland,  New  Britain,  Matty,  Durour,  Hervey,  Fiji,  Samoa, 
and  Marshall  and  Gilbert  islands.  At  the  same  time  collections 
were  obtained  from  Benin,  West  Africa,  and  Togo  Hinterland.  From 
several  islands  of  the  Pacific  a  limited  number  of  specimens  was  se- 
cured, especially  from  the  Marquesas,  Hawaii,  Easter  island,  Tonga, 
the  Carolines,  and  New  Zealand.  In  addition  to  the  few  specimens 
procured  from  New  Zealand  was  a  large  Maori  house  consisting  of 
88  pieces.  In  the  autumn  of  last  year  there  was  acquired  by 
purchase  a  collection,  numbering  about  8,000  objects,  from  Pro- 
fessor Frederick  Starr  of  the  University  of  Chicago.  This  acquisi- 
tion, the  result  of  many  years  of  collecting  on  the  part  of  Professor 
Starr,  comprises  such  material  as  the  Penafiel  collection  of  Mexican 
objects,  and  that  obtained  during  three  years'  investigation  in  the  ruins 
of  Tlacotepec.  There  is  also  included  in  this  collection  a  large  num- 
ber of  valuable  specimens  illustrating  the  ethnology  of  the  Tonkawa, 
Sauk  and  Foxes,  and  Iroquois,  and  a  small  archeological  collection 
from  the  Southwest  including  a  very  rare  cliff-dwelling  spear-thrower 
in  an  excellent  state  of  preservation.  Also  forming  a  part  of  Professor 
Starr's  collection  is  an  extensive  series  of  objects  illustrating  the 
ethnology  of  the  more  primitive  tribes  of  Mexico,  and  about  140 
busts  of  Indians  of  New  Mexico  and  Mexico,  made  under  Professor 
Starr's  personal  supervision. 

The  opportunity  afforded  by  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition 
at  St  Louis  in  1904  was  taken  advantage  of,  and  at  the  end  of  the 
exposition  there  were  acquired,  through  either  gift  or  purchase, 
collections  which  will  be  named  in  order  of  their  probable  impor- 
tance :  An  archeological  collection  from  Calchaqui,  Argentina,  and 
one  from  Egypt ;  ethnological  collections  from  German  East  Africa, 
Ceylon,  Siam,  Yesso,  India,  New  Zealand,  Tibet,  the  Soudan,  and 
the  Pigmy  tribes  of  equatorial  Africa.  The  great  opportunity  pre- 
sented by  the  presence  of  a  large  number  of  primitive  people  at  St 
Louis  was  seized  by  the  official  photographer  of  the  Museum,  who 
spent  five  months  on  the  Exposition  grounds,  during  which  time  more 
than  3,000  negatives  were  made,  including  two  or  three  positions  of  all 
the  American  tribes,  as  well  as  those  from  the  Philippines,  Asia,  and 
Africa,  together  with  photographs  of  their  habitations  and  industries. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  477 

At  the  same  time  material  was  secured  for  the  construction  of  eight 
groups  in  miniature  exhibiting  primitive  life.  The  department  coop- 
erated with  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History  and  secured 
more  than  50  busts,  made  from  life  molds,  of  some  of  the  most  in- 
teresting representatives  at  the  exf>osition.  During  the  early  months 
of  the  exposition,  Dr  Newcombe  of  the  Department  of  Anthro- 
pology was  in  charge  of  representatives  of  two  tribes  of  the  North- 
west coast,  and  brought  them  to  Chicago  for  several  weeks*  stay, 
rendering  valuable  assistance  in  the  identification  of  material  which, 
up  to  that  time,  it  had  not  been  possible  to  classify  properly. 

During  the  last  four  years  the  department  has  been  enriched  by 
certain  gifts,  the  most  important  of  which  are  worthy  of  mention. 
Chief  among  these  is  that  of  Mr  Cummings,  of  which  notice  will  be 
made  presently.  Mr  Stanley  McCormick  has  very  generously  con- 
tinued to  support  the  Hopi  investigations.  From  Mr  Martin  A. 
Ryerson,  vice-president  of  the  board  of  trustees,  has  been  received 
a  large  and  interesting  collection  of  objects  illustrating  the  life  of 
the  lake-dwellers  of  Switzerland.  Mr  Ryerson  has  also  generously 
made  possible  the  acquisition,  by  exchange  with  the  Berlin  Museum, 
of  part  of  Dr  Koch's  Brazilian  collection.  From  the  J.  L.  James 
estate  were  secured  a  handsome  and  valuable  Egyptian  sarcophagus 
of  a  late  period  and  seven  mummy  cases  containing  mummies,  and 
a  large  number  of  smaller  objects  of  the  time  of  the  Romans. 

Since  1902  the  Anthropological  Department  of  the  Museum  has 
issued  the  following  publications  :  **  The  Oraibi  Snake  Dance," 
**  The  Oraibi  Oaqol  Ceremony,"  **  Oraibi  Natal  Customs,"  **  Hopi 
Proper  Names,"  **  Hopi  Mythology,"  all  by  H.  R.  Voth;  "Tradi- 
tions of  the  Crows,"  by  S.  C.  Simms  ;  *'  Traditions  of  the  Arapaho," 
by  G.  A.  Dorsey  and  A.  L.  Kroeber;  ''The  Sun  Dance  of  the 
Arapaho,  Ponca  and  Cheyenne,"  **The  Ceremonial  Organization  of 
the  Cheyenne,"  and  *•  Traditions  of  the  Osage,"  by  G.  A.  Dorsey. 
It  seems  proper  in  this  connection  to  note  that  investigations  carried 
on  by  the  curator  have  been  printed  by  the  Carnegie  Institution  as 
follows  :  **  The  Mythology  of  the  Wichita,"  "  The  Traditions  of  the 
Caddo,"  and  "  The  Traditions  of  the  Arikara."  An  additional  vol- 
ume, also  a  portion  of  the  Carnegie  investigation,  has  been  pub- 
lished as  the  eighth  volume  of  Memoirs  of  the  American  Folk-Lore 


478  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Society  under  the  title  "  The  Traditions  of  the  Skidi  Pawnee."  An 
additional  volume  has  been  prepared  and  was  recently  transmitted 
to  the  Carnegie  Institution  for  publication  under  the  title  '*  The 
Mythology  of  the  Pawnee."  This  volume  will  be  printed  in  two  parts, 
part  II  to  contain  the  text  and  music  of  60  songs,  and  an  examination 
of  the  elements  of  the  mythology  of  the  Caddoan  tribes  as  compared 
with  those  of  other  tribes  of  North  America.  The  material  for 
another  volume  resulting  from  the  Carnegie  investigation  is  at  hand 
and  its  preparation  well  under  way ;  this  treats  of  the  social  and 
ceremonial  organization  of  the  Pawnee.  The  curator  has  also  been 
engaged  for  four  years  in  an  investigation  of  the  Arapaho,  the  results 
of  which  will  be  ready  for  publication  during  the  forthcoming  winter. 
It  is  expected  that  at  least  two  additional  volumes  will  be  necessary 
to  complete  the  results  of  the  Stanley  McCormick  expedition  among 
the  Hopi.  Dr  Newcombe  is  now  engaged  in  the  preparation  of 
certain  monographs  which  will  present  the  result  of  his  special 
investigations  on  the  North  Pacific  coast. 

For  the  immediate  future  many  of  the  investigations  above  noted 
will  be  continued  in  North  America.  The  most  important  new 
field  of  research  to  be  undertaken  is  the  Philippine  islands.  This 
investigation  has  been  made  possible  through  the  generosity  of  Mr 
Robert  Fowler  Cummings,  who  has  presented  the  sum  of  $20,000 
to  the  Museum  to  defray  the  expenses  of  a  systematic  survey  of  the 
many  tribes  of  the  islands.  This  work  will  be  carried  on  by  Dr 
William  Jones  and  Mr  F.  C.  Cole,  and  will  require  from  four  to  six 
years  for  its  completion. 

The  untimely  death  of  Mr  Marshall  Field  in  January  made  a 
profound  impression  on  the  oflficers  of  the  Museum.  Those  of  the 
scientific  staff  of  the  Museum  who  knew  Mr  Field  were  greatly 
encouraged  by  the  constantly  increasing  interest  which  he  mani- 
fested in  the  institution  as  it  grew  from  year  to  year.  It  seems 
apparent  that  originally  Mr  Field's  interest  in  the  Museum  was  in- 
definite, and  that  he  gave  a  million  dollars  in  the  beginning  largely 
because  he  was  asked  and  urged  by  his  friends  to  perform  a  public 
act ;  but  as  he  saw  the  institution  grow,  especially  as  he  recognized 
the  constantly  increasing  interest  manifested  by  the  teachers  and 
children  of  the  public  schools,  and  as  he  saw  the  institution  gain  its 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  479 

share  of  the  respect  and  confidence  of  the  scientific  world,  his  enthusi- 
asm grew  in  proportion.  During  the  last  few  years  of  his  life  there  was 
practically  nothing  done  in  the  Museum  of  which  he  was  not  cog- 
nizant. He  took  great  interest  in  the  plans  for  the  new  building,  and 
it  is  a  source  of  keen  regret  to  the  officers  of  the  Museum  that  he  did 
not  live  to  see  them  carried  into  execution.  The  essence  of  the  char- 
acter of  Mr  Field,  honesty  and  intensity  of  purpose,  seems  more  and 
more  to  have  dominated  the  Museum,  and  it  is  perhaps  due  to  the 
inspiration  furnished  by  Mr  Field's  life  that  it  has  been  able  to  ac- 
complish what  it  has  done  in  the  brief  space  of  twelve  years.  After 
the  death  of  Mr  Field  it  was  found  that  he  had  left  the  sum  of 
$8,000,000  for  the  Museum,  of  which  it  is  proposed  to  spend  three 
or  four  millions  for  a  building,  reserving  the  remainder  as  a  main- 
tenance fund.  To  be  added  to  this  source  of  income  is  a  fund, 
which  will  be  available  as  soon  as  the  Museum  enters  its  permanent 
quarters,  obtained  by  taxation  in  that  part  of  Chicago  under  the 
control  of  the  South  Park  commissioners.  Thus  the  future  income 
of  the  Museum  will  be  in  all  probability  between  $200,000  and 
$250,000  per  annum.  Its  position  therefore  seems  assured.  In 
recognition  of  Mr  Field's  interest  in  the  Museum,  and  in  considera- 
tion of  the  fact  that  the  institution  had  outgrown  its  former  World's 
Fair  character,  the  trustees  recently  decided,  and  it  seems  wisely,  to 
change  the  name  from  Field  Columbian  Museum  to  Field  Museum 
of  Natural  History.  Thus  due  honor  is  still  paid  the  illustrious 
founder,  and  the  public  is  at  once  informed  as  to  the  Museum's  char- 
acter and  function. 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

The  Free  Museum  of  Science  and  Art  of  the  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania has  continued  to  subscribe  to  the  Egypt  Exploration  Fund 
and  to  the  Egyptian  Research  Account,  and  has  shared  in  the  results 
of  these  explorations,  receiving  a  series  of  valuable  objects  ranging 
in  chronological  order  from  the  earliest  prehistoric  period  to  the 
latest  dynasties  and  of  great  significance  not  only  to  students  of 
Egyptian  history,  but  to  anthropologists  as  well. 

In  1903  the  Second  Archeological  Expedition  to  Crete,  organ- 
ized through  the  American  E;cploration  Society,  went  out  for  the 


48o  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Museum.  In  1904  the  excavations  in  Crete  were  continued,  chiefly 
at  Goumia,  the  site  of  a  Mycenaean  town  discovered  by  Miss  Harriet 
A.  Boyd,  who  conducted  the  excavations.  Other  sites  also  in  the 
same  vicinity  were  discovered  and  explored,  notably  a  number  of 
rock -shelters,  containing  pottery  of  a  very  primitive  type,  but  no 
trace  of  metals.  Practically  the  entire  site  of  Goumia  has  been 
cleared,  and  through  the  liberality  of  the  Cretan  government  a  large 
collection  of  pottery,  bronze,  and  stone  objects,  representing  several 
culture  periods,  has  been  placed  in  the  Museum.  The  great  inter- 
est of  these  collections  consists  in  the  fact  that  they  represent  an 
unbroken  succession  from  a  very  primitive  period  through  the  bronze 
age  to  the  introduction  of  iron,  and  illustrate  the  relation  of  early 
prehistoric  conditions  in  the  Mediterranean  region  to  the  later  cul- 
ture. The  report  on  these  explorations,  a  large  folio  volume  now 
in  press,  will  contain,  in  addition  to  much  other  matter  of  great 
interest,  a  series  of  colored  plates  illustrating  the  painted  pottery 
and  other  artistic  objects  found  in  the  excavations. 

Much  has  been  done  in  the  Babylonian  section  of  the  Museum 
in  the  classification,  cataloguing,  and  interpretation  of  the  large  col- 
lection of  cuneiform  tablets  and  other  objects  discovered  at  Nippur 
by  the  University  expeditions  of  1900- 1902,  as  well  as  by  those  of 
earlier  dates,  and  the  preparation  of  this  material  for  publication  has 
been  carried  forward  steadily  under  the  direction  of  Professor  Hil- 
precht,  who,  in  addition  to  the  volumes  already  published  by  himself 
and  his  assistants,  has  in  press  two  new  volumes  embodying  the 
results  of  his  most  recent  researches.  The  excavations  of  the  Baby- 
lonian expeditions  were  not  confined  to  the  strata  of  the  Babylonian 
period  alone,  but  extended  backward  through  an  unbroken  sequence 
to  a  remote  prehistoric  era  which  corresponds  to  the  very  begin- 
nings of  culture  in  that  region.  The  collections  therefore  contain 
much  material  that  is  of  peculiar  value  to  the  anthropologist  as  well 
as  to  the  Assyriologist. 

In  1905  Dr  G.  B.  Gordon,  curator  of  ethnolog>'',  made  an 
extended  excursion  in  northern  Alaska  in  the  interest  of  the  Mu- 
seum, collecting  specimens  illustrating  the  cultures  of  the  Atha- 
pascans and  the  Eskimo,  making  an  inquiry  into  the  present  condi- 
tion of  these  peoples,  and  procuring  data  relative  to  their  tribal  rela- 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  48 1 

tions  and  surviving  customs.  As  a  result  of  this  trip  the  Museum 
has  acquired  an  extensive  Eskimo  collection  and  a  considerable 
number  of  valuable  specimens  from  the  Tinne  and  the  Tlingit 

Dr  Gordon,  who  is  also  curator  of  American  archeology,  has 
made  a  series  of  excursions  about  eastern  Pennsylvania,  locating  the 
aboriginal  village  sites,  quarries,  workshops,  and  trails,  with  a  view 
of  preparing  an  ethnological  map  of  the  state.  From  these  various 
sites  several  interesting  series,  illustrating  the  characteristic  artificial 
types  of  the  region  an5  the  aboriginal  methods  of  working  in  stone, 
have  been  placed  in  the  Museum. 

The  most  notable  collections  received  by  the  Museum  through 
gift  and  by  purchase  are  the  following  :  (i)  Reproductions  of  bronzes 
from  Pompeii  and  Herculanaeum  in  the  National  Museum  at  Naples. 
(2)  Part  of  the  Egyptian  exhibit  at  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Expo- 
sition, including  the  tomb  of  Ra-ka-pou  described  by  Mariette  in  his 
"  Mastabes  of  the  Old  Empire.*'  (3)  Ethnological  collection  from 
the  Caroline  islands,  procured  by  Dr  W.  H.  Fumess,  3d.  (4)  Col- 
lection illustrating  the  ethnology  of  the  Bagobos  of  Luzon.  Besides 
these  prominent  acquisitions  the  collections  in  the  Museum  have 
increased  very  materially  by  smaller  accretions,  and  the  installation 
has  proceeded  as  rapidly  as  circumstances  would  permit.  Already 
the  need  is  felt  for  an  addition  to  the  Museum,  and  steps  are  being 
considered  for  proceeding  with  the  construction  of  the  building  on 
the  extensive  plan  outlined  at  its  origin. 

In  the  library  of  the  Museum  the  Brinton  collection  of  Ameri- 
cana and  works  relating  to  anthropology  generally,  presented  to 
the  University  by  the  late  Dr  Daniel  Garrison  Brinton,  has  been  com- 
pletely catalogued  since  1903,  and  the  many  valuable  manuscripts, 
including  the  Berendt  collection  which  it  contains,  are  at  the  dis- 
posal of  scholars.  An  effort  is  being  made  to  keep  this  library 
up  to  date,  continuing  the  great  work  done  by  Dr  Brinton  by  adding 
to  his  collections  all  the  more  recent  works  bearing  on  the  several 
branches  of  anthropology.  Since  1902  about  4,000  books  and 
pamphlets  have  been  added,  and  the  collection,  augmented  by 
yearly  accumulations  of  standard  antliropological  literature,  will 
render  effective  the  plan  which  Dr  Brinton  had  in  view  and  should 
do  much  toward  making  this  institution  an  important  center  for 
anthropological  investigation  in  America. 


482  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

When  in  1886  Dr  Brinton  was  appointed  to  the  chair  of 
American  archeology  and  linguistics  at  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, that  institution  took  the  initial  step  in  a  movement  which, 
taken  up  soon  afterward  by  Harvard,  has  led  to  the  introduction 
of  anthropology  as  a  distinct  branch  of  learning  into  all  the  principal 
universities  in  the  United  States.  In  founding  a  chair  of  American 
archeology  and  ethnology,  Pennsylvania  was  not  only  the  first  of 
American  universities  to  recognize  the  claims  of  these  special 
branches  of  investigation,  but  was  the  first  to  introduce  the  study  of 
anthropology  as  a  distinct  science.  It  is  well  known  that  Dr 
Brinton's  comprehensive  exposition  of  his  subject  embraced  the  whole 
science  of  anthropology,  and  his  lectures  foreshadowed  the  later 
development  of  instruction  in  anthropology  in  America.  Although 
first  in  this  movement,  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  did  not  sub- 
sequently make  so  rapid  progress  in  this  particular  direction  as 
some  of  the  other  American  universities.  In  recent  years,  however, 
there  has  been  renewed  activity  in  this  respect.  In  the  academic  year 
1903-04  a  general  introductory  course  was  announced,  and  at 
the  same  time  a  course  in  American  archeology  and  ethnology 
was  continued.  In  the  year  1905-06,  a  course  in  European  eth- 
nology was  added,  and  during  the  last  academic  year  a  total  of  56 
students  registered  in  these  three  courses.  It  is  planned  to  in- 
crease further  in  the  near  future  the  opportunities  for  instruction 
in  anthropology  at  the  University  of  Pennsylvania. 

A  course  of  public  lectures  has  been  given  during  each  winter 
at  the  Museum  by  the  curators  and  by  scholars  from  other  institu- 
tions at  home  and  abroad. 

In  1897  Mrs  Lucy  Wharton  Drexel,  to  promote  archeological 
research  founded  a  medal  to  be  awarded  annually  by  the  Department 
of  Archeology  to  an  English-speaking  scholar  for  archeological 
excavation,  or  publication  based  on  archeological  excavation.      In 

1903  this  medal  was  struck  for  the  first  time,  four  being  awarded 
simultaneously  to  Professor  F.  VV^  Putnam,  Professor  Herman  V. 
Hilprecht,  Dr  William  M.  Flinders-Petrie,  and  Mr  Arthur  J.  Evans. 
These  four  medallists,  selected  by  the  board  of  managers  of  the 
Department  of  Archeology,  constitute  a  committee  on  award.      In 

1904  the  medal  was  awarded  to  Bernard  Pyne  Grenfell,  and  in  1906 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  483 

to   William    Mitchell    Ramsay   of  King's   College,  University   of 
Aberdeen. 

The  following  publications  have  been  issued  by  the  University 
since  1902  : 

(i)  Publications  of  the  Babylonian  Expedition  of  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, Edited  by  Professor  Hilprecht. 

Series  A,  vol.  x,  Business  Documents  of  Murashu  Sons  of  Nippur,  by 
Dr  A.  T.  Clay,  1904. 

Series  A,  vols,  xiv  and  xv.  Documents  from  the  Temple  Archives  of 
Nippur,  by  Dr  A.  T.  Clay,  1906. 

Series  D,  vol.  iii,  Early  Babylonian  Personal  Names,  by  Dr  Herman 
Ranke,  1905. 

(2)  Pachacamac :   Report  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  Expedition  to 
Peru,  by  Dr  Max  Uhle. 

(3)  Transactions  of  the  Free  Museum  of  Science  and  Art :  vol.  i,  pts.  1-2-3. 
vol.  2,  pt.  I. 

Contents^  vol,  /,  //.  /  .•  Goumia.  Report  of  the  American  Exploration 
Society's  Excavations  at  Goumia,  Crete,  1901-1903,  by  Harret  A  Boyd. 
Scenes  from  the  ^Ethiopis  on  a  Black-figured  Amphora,  by  William 
Nickerson  Bates.  The  Stone  Money  of  Uap,  by  William  Henry  Fur- 
ness,  3d.  Chronological  Sequence  in  the  Maya  Ruins  of  Central  America, 
by  G.  B.  Gordon. 

Contents t  vol.  /,  //.  2 :  In  the  Temple  of  Bel  at  Nippur,  by  H.  V.  Hil- 
precht. 

Contents,  vol,  /,  pt,  j :  The  Serpent  Motive  in  the  Ancient  Art  of  Cen- 
tral America  and  Mexico,  by  G.  B.  Gordon.  The  Etruscan  Inscriptions 
in  the  Museum,  by  William  Nickerson  Bates.  Torso  of  a  Hermes,  by 
Alfred  Emerson.  Goumia  :  Report  of  the  American  Exploration  So- 
ciety's Excavations  at  Gournia,  Crete,  1904,  by  Harriet  A.  Boyd.  Early 
Painted  Pottery  from  Gournia,  Crete,  by  Edith  H.  Hall.  Excavations  at 
Vasiliki,  1904,  by  Richard  B.  Saeger.  Topographical  Map  from  Nippur, 
by  A.  T.  Clay.     The  Archaic  Arch  at  Nippur,  by  Clarence  S.  Fisher. 

Contents,  vol,  II,  pt.  i :  Decorated  Pottery  of  the  Bronze  Age  in  Crete, 
by  Edith  H.  Hall.  Some  Notes  on  Xochicalco,  by  Adela  Breton.  Notes 
on  the  Western  Eskimo,  by  G.  B.  Gordon.  An  Inscribed  Bone  from 
Ohio,  by  G.  B.  Gordon. 

University  of  California 

As  the  Department  of  Anthropology  of  the  University  of  Cali- 
fornia, which  had  its  origin  in  several  archeological  expeditions  sent 
out  for  the  University  in  1899  by  Mrs  Phoebe  A.  Hearst,  was  not 


484  AMERICA ^r  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

organized  as  a  department  and  museum  until  1901,  since  which 
time  Mrs  Hearst  has  generously  maintained  her  support,  the  greater 
part  of  its  existence  falls  within  the  period  since  the  last  meeting  of 
the  International  Congress  of  Americanists  on  American  soil  in  the 
autumn  of  1902. 

During  these  four  years  the  history  of  the  department  has  con- 
sisted of  a  steady  furtherance  of  its  researches,  a  rapid  expansion 
of  its  collections,  and  the  institution  of  a  system  of  publication  and 
instruction.  In  1903  Professor  F.  W.  Putnam  was  appointed  head 
of  the  department  as  professor  of  anthropology  and  director  of  the 
Museum.  Immediately  thereafter  an  Ethnological  and  Archaeo- 
logical Survey  of  California  was  organized  for  the  correlation  and 
development  of  the  various  lines  of  anthropological  research  then  in 
progress  concerning  that  state.  In  the  same  year  the  greater  part 
of  the  collections  accumulated  up  to  that  time  were  temporarily 
transferred  from  the  provisional  storehouse  originally  erected  for 
them  on  the  University  grounds  in  Berkeley,  to  a  large  suitable 
building  belonging  to  the  University  at  the  Affiliated  Colleges  in 
San  Francisco.  In  the  former  building  it  had  been  impossible  to 
use  and  work  over  the  collections  properly,  and  it  was  becoming 
difficult  to  find  space  for  their  storage.  The  building  at  present 
occupied,  which  is  spacious  and  well  lit,  has  made  possible  the 
satisfactory  handling  and  disposition  of  specimens.  In  consequence 
the  work  of  unpacking,  identifying,  arranging,  and  recording  the 
collections  has  been  continuously  prosecuted  until  at  present  the  bulk 
of  the  material  is  suitably  prepared  for  permanent  preservation  in 
the  Museum.  The  larger  part  of  the  collections  has  been  arranged 
in  eleven  halls  and  smaller  rooms  so  as  to  be  visible  and  available 
for  use  by  students  and  scholars.  Since  1905  it  has  been  found 
practicable  to  provide  a  limited  exhibition  of  these  collections  to  the 
public.  The  storage  building  vacated  in  Berkeley  has  been  partly 
remodeled  into  offices  and  class  rooms  for  the  department.  In 
the  main  hall  of  this  Berkeley  building  a  collection  of  plaster 
casts  belonging  to  the  department,  illustrating  ancient  Oriental, 
Greek,  and  Roman  art  and  architecture,  has  been  installed  for 
exhibition.  A  gallery''  surrounding  this  hall  is  devoted  to  an 
arrangement  of  a  general  s}'noptic  anthropological  collection  used 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  485 

in  connection  with  instruction  given  to  students.  In  1905  Mrs 
Hearst  formally  transferred  to  the  University  all  collections  made 
through  her  for  the  Museum. 

The  primary  object  of  the  department  is  research  and  the 
increase  of  knowledge.  As  this  purpose  since  the  beginning  has 
been  intimately  associated  with  and  largely  carried  out  through  the 
formation  of  a  museum,  the  progress  of  the  department  can  best  be 
understood  by  a  consideration  of  these  two  lines  of  activity  in 
conjunction. 

The  Ethnological  and  Archaeological  Survey  of  California .  is 
organized  to  prosecute  to  the  fullest  extent  investigations  dealing 
with  the  native  and  aboriginal  inhabitants  of  all  parts  of  the  state 
and  their  ethnology,  linguistics,  archeology,  and  antiquity.  This 
work  is  maintained  by  the  department  with  the  cooperation  of  other 
institutions  and  of  the  people  of  the  state.  Under  the  direction  of 
Professor  F.  W.  Putnam  investigations  have  been  made  during  the 
last  four  years  by  the  regular  staff  of  the  department,  consisting  of 
Professors  A.  L.  Kroeber,  P.  E.  Goddard,  and  J.  C.  Merriam,  Mr 
S.  A.  Barrett,  and  several  assistants,  as  well  as  by  a  number  of 
collaborators,  including  Professor  R.  B.  Dixon,  Miss  C.  G.  DuBois, 
and  Mr  J.  Peterson. 

Investigations  concerning  the  antiquity  of  man  have  been  carried 
on  under  the  immediate  supervision  of  Professors  Putnam  and  Merriam 
in  several  parts  of  the  state,  notably  the  auriferous  gravel  regions 
and  certain  caves  in  Shasta  county.  A  summary  of  the  latest  results 
of  the  latter  explorations  has  been  published.^  Archeological  inves- 
tigations have  been  under  the  direction  of  Professor  Merriam  and 
have  been  conducted  largely  among  the  shell-mounds  of  San  Fran- 
cisco bay,  supplementary  to  a  general  archeological  reconnoissance 
of  the  southern  part  of  the  state  made  during  the  earlier  years  of  the 
department's  existence.  A  general  survey  of  the  mounds  of  the 
bay  region  has  been  made.  Two  mounds  in  Alameda  and  Contra 
Costa  counties  have  been  thoroughly  examined,  one  in  continuation 
of  earlier  exploration,  with  a  view  to  determining  fully  both  their 
geological  relations  and  their  structure  and  contents.  Other  mounds 
and  deposits  have  been  partially  explored. 

>  American  Anthropologist^  viii,  no.  2,  April-June,  1906. 


486  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

In  ethnology  and  the  examination  of  the  native  languages,  exten- 
sive studies  have  been  made  in  several  parts  of  the  state,  which  can 
be  best  summarized  by  a  review  of  the  work  done  in  connection  with 
each  of  the  various  distinct  stocks  of  Indians. 

The  investigations  among  the  Hupa,  Tolowa,  Wailaki,  Kato, 
and  other  groups  belonging  to  the  great  Athapascan  stock  in  north- 
em  California  have  been  in  the  hands  of  Professor  Goddard.  Con- 
siderable field  work  has  been  accomplished  with  each  of  these  divi- 
sions and  much  valuable  information,  especially  as  to  the  beliefs  and 
speech  of  these  people,  has  been  gone  over  and  is  being  prepared 
for  publication  by  Professor  Goddard.  His  researches  have  been 
most  extended  among  the  Hupa,  regarding  whom  he  has  in  progress 
an  elaborate  series  of  publications.  Three  of  these,  comprising  two 
volumes,  have  been  issued,  '*  Life  and  Culture  of  the  Hupa," 
**  Hupa  Texts,"  and  '*  The  Morphology  of  the  Hupa  Language," 
while  the  remaining  contributions,  to  consist  of  a  Phonology  and 
Dictionary  of  the  language,  are  partly  in  press.  In  connection  with 
his  investigations  of  the  Athapascans  of  California,  which  form  part 
of  a  larger  plan  for  the  investigation  of  the  entire  Athapascan  family. 
Professor  Goddard  has  also  commenced  studies  in  continuation  of 
the  work  of  the  late  Dr  Washington  Matthews  among  the  Navaho 
and  Apache  of  Arizona  and  New  Mexico. 

The  Yurok  stock  of  northwestern  California  has  been  made  the 
subject  of  a  special  ethnological  study  by  Professor  Kroeber.  These 
people  seem  to  be  the  most  typical  representatives  of  the  peculiarly 
specialized  culture  of  this  part  of  the  state,  for  which  reason  an 
extensive  investigation  of  them  has  been  made,  illustrated  by  a  large 
museum  collection. 

Among  the  neighboring  Karok  the  ethnological  investigations 
made  have  been  in  the  main  supplementary  to  those  among  the 
Yurok.  The  Karok  language,  however,  has  been  given  particular 
attention  and  a  considerable  body  of  information  regarding  it  has 
been  acquired. 

The  small  Chimariko  stock,  which'  is'  the  nearest  to  extinction 
of  those  that  remain  in  California,  has  been  the  subject  of  a  mono- 
graphic investigation  by  Professor  R.  B.  Dixon  in  1906.  The 
present  condition  of  this  broken,  scattered,  and  reduced  band  of 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  487 

people,  whose  survivors  can  be  counted  on  the  fingers  of  one  hand, 
leaves  opportunity  for  only  a  limited  acquisition  of  ethnological  in- 
formation. Professor  Dixon's  study  of  their  language  has  in  com- 
pensation been  the  more  thorough. 

The  Yuki  stock  has  been  investigated  by  Professor  Kroeber,  and 
the  language,  which  seems  typical  of  the  languages  of  a-  large  part 
of  California,  has  been  especially  studied  and  a  large  body  of  mate- 
rial bearing  upon  it  has  been  secured.  A  portion  of  this  informa- 
tion has  been  prepared  for  preliminary  publication. 

The  adjacent  Pomo  have  been  investigated  by  Mr  S.  A.  Barrett. 
He  has  made  special  studies  of  their  geography  and  dialectic  and 
political  divisions ;  of  their  basketry,  basket  designs,  and  ornamen- 
tal art;  and  of  their  myths,  and  has  reports  on  these  subjects  well 
advanced  toward  completion.  In  addition  he  is  engaged  on  a 
general  study  of  the  culture  of  the  Pomo. 

Among  the  Wintun  stock  no  systematic  investigations  have  as 
yet  been  made,  but  both  Professor  Dixon  and  Mr  Barrett  have  been 
able  to  acquire  valuable  information  in  extension  of  their  work 
among  neighboring  tribes. 

The  Moquelumnan  stock  occupies  two  separate  territories.  The 
people  in  the  northern  of  these  areas  have  been  studied  by  Mr  Bar- 
rett in  connection  with  the  Pomo,  of  whom  they  are  neighbors  and 
whom  they  resemble.  The  bulk  of  the  Moquelumnan  people,  gen- 
erally known  as  Miwok,  occupy  an  inland  territory  farther  south. 
At  the  present  moment  arrangements  are  being  made  for  an  ethno- 
logical reconnoissance  of  this  region,  to  serve  as  a  basis  for  more 
extensive  future  investigations. 

Among  the  Yokuts,  who  adjoin  the  Miwok  on  the  south,  more 
work  has  been  done,  both  in  ethnology  and  linguistics.  A  paper 
on  the  Yokuts  language  and  its  dialects,  by  Professor  Kroeber,  is 
at  present  passing  through  the  press. 

The  language  of  the  Washoe  of  eastern  central  California  and 
western  Nevada  has  been  the  subject  of  a  preliminary  study  which 
is  in  preparation  for  publication. 

The  languages  of  the  nearly  extinct  stocks  of  the  coast  south  of 
San  Francisco — Costanoan,  Esselen,  Salinan,  and  Chumash — are 
the  subject  of  a  preliminary  report  issued  in  1904. 


488  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  California  tribes  belonging  to  the  extensive  Shoshonean  and 
Yuman  families  have  been  considerably  studied.  A  paper  by  Pro- 
fessor Kroeber  on  the  Shoshonean  dialects  of  the  state  is  in  press. 
Investigations  among  the  Luiseno  and  Diegueno  of  southern  Cali- 
fornia have  also  been  made,  principally  by  Miss  DuBois,  who  has 
devoted  her  attention  particularly  to  the  religious  side  of  the  life  of 
these  people.  Professor  Kroeber  has  collected  information  as  to 
the  material,  social,  and  religious  culture  of  the  Mohave. 

Somatology  has  not  been  neglected  in  the  survey.  A  paper 
issued  in  the  department's  series  of  publications  by  Dr  A.  Hrdlicka 
on  **The  Physical  Anthropology  of  California"  has  stimulated  in- 
terest in  the  subject.  The  somatological  collections  have  been  in- 
creased since  the  preparation  of  Dr  Hrdlicka's  paper,  and  a  sys- 
tematic collection  of  photographs  and  measurements  of  living  Indians 
has  been  undertaken,  which  it  is  hoped  to  extend  in  time  to  cover 
the  entire  state. 

While  the  work  and  results  of  the  Survey  must  continue  to 
consist  in  the  main  of  the  more  detailed  investigations  that  have 
been  enumerated  and  others  of  a  similar  scope,  the  correlation  of 
the  discoveries  made  and  their  presentation  in  convenient  and  readily 
accessible  summary  have  not  been  neglected.  Preliminary  publi- 
cations of  this  nature  on  **  The  Native  Languages  of  California,"  * 
by  Professor  Dixon  and  Professor  Kroeber,  and  on  "  Types  of  In- 
dian Culture  in  California,"  by  Professor  Kroeber,  have  been  issued, 
the  latter  in  the  department's  series  of  publications.  A  larger, 
more  general  work,  dealing  with  all  phases  of  the  anthropology  of 
California,  is  in  preparation. 

The  collections  illustrative  of  California  anthropology  date  back 
in  part  to  donations  received  in  the  early  years  of  the  University's 
existence,  long  before  the  establishment  of  the  Department  of  An- 
thropology. Since  the  latter  event  they  have  many  times  multi- 
plied, and  the  last  four  years  have  brought  a  rapid  increase.  Nearly 
all  sections  or  culture  regions  of  the  state  are  now  represented  by 
ethnological  and  archcological  and  in  part  by  somatological  speci- 
mens illustrating  the  aboriginal  life  and  types.  From  several  re- 
gions the  material  is  extensive  and  very  valuable.     The  California 

'  American  Anthropologist^  v,  1-26,  Jan. -Mar.,  1903. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  489 

collections  fill  the  largest  hall  in  the  building  at  present  occupied 
by  the  department. 

In  the  greater  part  of  North  America  outside  of  California,  re- 
searches and  the  formation  of  collections  have  of  necessity  been  less 
extensive  and  systematic  than  in  California.  Considerable  collec- 
tions had  been  acquired  by  1902.  Since  that  year  efforts  in  this 
field  have  been  directed  to  investigations  of  special  subjects  prom- 
ising results  of  value,  and  to  the  increase  and  rounding  out  of  the 
collections  with  a  view  to  making  them  representative  of  as  many 
of  the  principal  types  of  North  American  culture  as  possible. 
Through  an  arrangement  made  f>ossible  by  Mrs  Hearst  on  behalf 
of  the  department,  Dr  Washington  Matthews  spent  the  last  years 
of  his  life  in  the  study  and  arrangement  of  the  voluminous  ethno- 
logical and  linguistic  information  accumulated  by  him,  chiefly  from 
the  Navaho,  during  the  long  period  of  his  field  service.  Subse- 
quent to  Dr  Matthews*  death  Professor  Goddard  has  continued  the 
preparation  of  this  material  and  has  undertaken  the  continuance  of 
Dr  Matthews'  work.  A  paper  containing  several  Navaho  myths, 
prayers,  and  songs  collected  by  Dr  Matthews  and  edited  by  Dr 
Goddard  is  now  in  press.  In  the  Mississippi  valley  an  archeolog- 
icai  collection  from  a  well-known  interesting  site  near  Kimmswick 
was  obtained  by  a  joint  expedition.  Explorations  in  the  Delaware 
valley  were  made  by  Mr  E.  Volk  for  one  season.  Through  Mr 
George  H.  Pepper  a  collection  illustrative  of  recent  Pueblo  pottery 
and  its  manufacture  was  obtained.  In  1903  the  Tlingit,  Eskimo, 
and  Athapascan  collections  previously  presented  by  the  Alaska 
Commercial  Company  to  the  University  were  transferred  to  the 
department.  From  these  sources,  supplemented  by  the  acquisition 
of  portraits,  photographs,  and  exchanges,  the  general  North  Ameri- 
can collections  of  the  department  have  become  fairly  illustrative 
and  well-balanced  and  of  value  for  comparisons.  They  contain 
many  rare  and  some  unique  pieces. 

Mexican  researches  have  been  made  possible  by  the  Crocker  Fund 
for  archeological  research  in  Mexico,  established  in  1902,  and  have 
been  intrusted  to  Mrs  Zelia  Nuttall,  who  since  that  time  has  resided 
in  that  country.  Mrs  Nuttall  has  made  several  explorations,  besides 
giving  much  study  to  old  books  and  manuscripts.     She  has  pub- 

AM.    ANTII.,   N.   S.,  8-33 


490  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

lished  the  first  part  of  the  important  Codex  entitled  "  The  Book  of 
the  Life  of  the  Ancient  Mexicans,"  and  a  paper  dealing  with  "  The 
Earliest  Historical  Relations  between  Mexico  and  Japan,"  both 
issued  by  the  department.  She  is  at  present  engaged  on  several 
other  papers  of  a  similar  nature.  Mrs  Nuttall  has  also  been  instru- 
mental in  securing  for  the  Museum  ethnological  and  archeological 
collections  from  Mexico,  supplementing  these  by  a  number  of  casts 
of  small  objects.  From  Mr  C.  E.  Rumsey  the  museum  has  received 
the  valuable  Anton  Roman  Memorial  collection  of  prehistoric  pot- 
tery and  stone  objects  from  Chiriqui.  These  collections,  with  others 
previously  obtained  for  the  department  from  the  Indians  of  Guate- 
mala, have  established  a  Mexican  and  Central  American  section  of 
the  museum. 

The  South  American  researches  of  the  department  have  been 
carried  on  by  Dr  Max  Uhle  in  Peru  in  continuance  of  those  pre- 
viously made  by  him  for  the  department  and  for  other  institutions. 
During  1903  Dr  Uhle  was  engaged  mainly  in  the  preparation  of 
reports  on  his  explorations  and  collections  made  at  Trujillo,  Hua- 
machuco,  Chincha,  Huaitara,  and  lea.  These  reports  are  now  being 
completed  for  publication.  During  1904  and  1905  Dr  Uhle  con- 
ducted explorations  in  Peru  in  the  vicinities  of  Ancon,  Chancay, 
Supe,  Cuzco,  Chala,  Nazca,  and  Lima.  In  all  these  regions  impor- 
tant collections  were  obtained,  whose  value  is  enhanced  by  the  new 
regulations  concerning  the  export  of  Peruvian  antiquities  which  were 
enacted  coincidently  with  Dr  Uhle's  acceptance  of  the  directorship 
of  the  archeological  section  of  the  National  Museum  of  that  coun- 
try.  Dr  Uhle's  field  investigations  were  made  primarily  with  a 
view  to  discriminating  more  accurately  between  the  various  culture 
types  of  ancient  Peru  and  of  establishing  their  geographical  and  tem- 
poral relations.  In  the  course  of  his  most  recent  explorations  for 
the  department  he  has  discovered  several  such  new  t}'pes  of  civili- 
zation, some  of  them  apparently  of  great  age,  besides  seemingly  cor- 
relating several  others  regarding  whose  chronological  sequence  or 
contcmporancit>'  and  historical  relation  little  or  nothing  was  pre- 
viously known.  As  a  result  of  Dr  Uhle's  earlier  and  later  explora- 
tions for  the  department,  the  Museum  possesses  ten  thousand 
carefully  collected  and  identified  archeological  specimens  from  all 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  49I 

the  known  periods  and  from  practically  all  parts  of  Peru.  Many  of 
these  serve  as  the  basis  for  the  most  completely  developed  views 
regarding  the  history  of  Peruvian  civilization,  and  all  will  be  invalua- 
ble in  connection  with  such  theories  and  beliefs  on  this  subject  as 
the  future  may  bring  forth. 

The  large  collections  illustrative  of  Greek,  Roman,  and  other 
Mediterranean  archeology,  for  which  the  University  is  indebted  to 
Mrs  Hearst,  were  completed  in  1902.  A  great  part  of  these  collec- 
tions did  not  actually  arrive  in  California  however  until  after  this 
date.  Their  unpacking,  arrangement,  and  recording  were  under- 
taken in  1903  under  the  direction  of  Dr  Alfred  Emerson,  the  col- 
lector. In  somewhat  more  than  a  year  Dr  Emerson  completed  this 
work,  leaving  the  Museum  in  possession  of  one  of  the  largest  and 
most  valuable  collections  of  Graeco-Roman  archeology  in  America. 
The  bulk  of  the  material,  comprising  all  the  originals  and  certain 
reproductions,  is  systematically  arranged  for  exhibit  in  the  Museum 
in  San  Francisco.  The  plaster  casts  and  other  reproductions  illus- 
trative more  particularly  of  ancient  art,  have  been  arranged  and  are 
open  for  exhibition  in  the  main  hall  of  the  former  storage  building  of 
the  department  in  Berkeley. 

Messrs  B.  P.  Grenfell,  A.  S.  Hunt,  and  J.  G.  Smyly  have  been 
engaged  in  the  further  editing  and  publication  of  the  results  obtained 
by  the  two  first  named,  during  excavations  made  in  1 889-1900  in  the 
Fayum,  Egypt.  The  numerous  unique  and  invaluable  manuscripts 
obtained  during  this  exploration  are  being  prepared  for  publication, 
translation,  and  comment  in  "  The  Tebtunis  Papyri,"  which  will  con- 
stitute the  first  three  volumes  of  the  department's  publications  in 
Graeco-Roman  archeology.  Volume  I  was  issued  in  1 902  and  volume 
n  is  at  the  present  moment  leaving  the  press. 

The  Egyptian  Expedition,  also  supported  by  Mrs  Hearst  and  under 
the  direction  of  Dr  G.  A.  Reisner,  assisted  by  Messrs  F.  N.  Green, 
A.  M.  Lythgoe,  A.  C.  Mace,  and  N.  de  G.  Davis,  which  had  ex- 
plored from  1899  to  1902  at  Coptos,  Der-el-Ballas,  El-Ahaiwah, 
Ballas,  and  Naga-ed-Der,  continued  excavations  at  Naga-ed-Der 
and  Gizeh  from  1902  to  1905.  Many  important  scientific  results 
were  obtained  by  the  expedition.  The  development  of  the  mastaba 
during  the  earlier  dynasties  was  established  and  much  new  light 


492  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

thrown  on  both  the  culture  and  the  physical  type  and  presumable 
origin  of  the  predynastic  Egyptians.  The  collections  obtained  are 
very  extensive  and  a  large  part  of  them  arrived  at  the  Museum 
between  1902  and  1906.  They  have  been  partially  unpacked,  but 
it  has  not  yet  been  possible  to  catalogue  or  install  them.  An  im- 
posing series  of  publications  describing  the  results  of  the  expedition 
is  projected.  Seven  volumes  have  so  far  been  announced.  Of  these 
the  first,  **  The  Hearst  Medical  Papyrus,"  by  Dr  G.  A.  Reisner, 
was  issued  in  1905.  Two  succeeding  volumes  are  in  an  advanced 
stage  of  publication. 

Various  accessions  from  Asia,  the  Philippines,  Oceanica,  Africa, 
and  prehistoric  Europe  have  been  received  in  the  last  four  years, 
which  have  developed  and  strengthened  these  sections  of  the 
Museum.  Among  these  the  collections  from  Oceanica  are  now  the 
most  extensive. 

A  system  of  publications  of  the  department,  of  which  a  number 
of  papers  have  already  been  mentioned  individually,  was  planned  in 

1 90 1,  but  with  one  exception  has  been  entirely  developed  since 

1902.  It  consists  of  three  series:  one  of  Egyptian  Archaeology, 
one  of  Grreco-Roman  Archaeology,  and  one  of  American  Archae- 
ology and  Ethnology,  besides  a  projected  series  of  Memoirs  and  a 
series  of  Special  Publications.  In  each  of  the  first-mentioned  two 
series,  one  volume  has  been  issued  and  several  others  are  on  the 
point  of  appearing.  In  the  American  series  ten  papers,  comprising 
three  volumes  and  part  of  a  fourth,  have  appeared,  while  an  equal 
number  of  contributions  are  cither  in  press  or  in  an  advanced  stage 
of  preparation. 

University  instruction  given  by  the  department  has  also  prac- 
tically originated  since  the  Congress  at  New  York.  The  one  course 
given  in  1901-02  has  developed  into  a  system  of  eight  and  ten 
courses  now  offered  annually.  This  instruction  not  only  introduces 
undergraduate  students  to  anthropology  and  provides  them  with 
several  courses  on  topics  of  broad  interest,  but  furnishes  systematic 
work  in  ethnology,  archeology,  and  linguistics  to  advanced  students 
and  prospective  anthropologists. 


RECENT  PROGhESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  493 

Anthropological  Societies  in  California 

The  anthropological  societies  of  California,  other  than  the  active 
Southwest  Society  of  the  Archaeological  Institute  of  America  *  cen- 
tered in  Los  Angeles,  date  from  the  mid-summer  meeting  of  the 
American  Anthropological  Association  in  San  Francisco  in  1905. 
The  several  societies  had  been  formally  founded,  or  steps  had  been 
taken  to  organize  them,  previous  to  this  occasion,  but  the  beginning 
of  their  activity  was  in  each  instance  coincident  with  or  immediately 
following  the  coming  of  the  anthropologists,  and  much  of  the  stimu- 
lus that  has  given  them  life  was  bom  of  this  meeting,  which  was 
the  first  of  the  kind  held  on  the  Pacific  coast. 

The  San  Francisco  Society  of  the  Archaeological  Institute  of 
America  dates  back  to  the  latter  part  of  1903,  when  a  meeting  was 
held  and  an  organization  adopted.  The  Society's  active  existence, 
however,  began  in  1905,  when  about  two  weeks  after  the  session 
of  the  American  Anthropological  Association  a  meeting  was  held 
at  which  the  Honorable  James  D.  Phelan  was  chosen  president  and 
other  officers  were  elected.  Professor  F.  W.  Putnam  delivered  a 
lecture  on  ''American  Archeology.*'  Later  in  the  winter,  on  the 
occasion  of  a  visit  from  Professor  Mitchell  Carroll  of  Washington, 
a  third  successful  meeting  was  held,  at  which  Professor  Carroll 
spoke  on  "The  Acropolis."  The  Society  was  greatly  strengthened 
about  this  period  by  Professor  Carroll's  exertions  on  its  behalf,  and 
at  the  time  of  the  fire  which  overwhelmed  San  Francisco  it  had 
enrolled  more  than  fifty  members.  A  month  later  the  Society  was 
formally  accepted  as  an  affiliated  society  of  the  Institute.  After  a 
probable  temporary  suspension  of  its  activity,  the  Society  expects 
to  re-enter  upon  its  career  with  increased  energy  as  soon  as  the 
general  conditions  of  industry  in  San  Francisco  shall  have  returned 
to  a  normal  basis. 

A  lively  interest  has  been  aroused  of  late  in  folk-lore  matters  in 
California  and  two  cooperating  societies  are  carrying  on  work.  On 
May  3,  1905,  a  Berkeley  Folk-Lore  Club,  consisting  principally  of 
members  of  the  faculty  of  the  University  of  California,  was  founded 
with  fifteen  charter  members.  During  1905-06  this  society  held 
four  meetings  at  which  papers  were  presented.     In  the  course  of  the 

>  See  page  505. 


494  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

year  the  membership  enlarged  to  more  than  twenty  and  increased 
interest  was  manifested.  Professor  A.  F.  Lange  has  served  as 
president. 

At  the  first  regular  meeting  of  the  Berkeley  Folk- Lore  Club  on 
August  18,  1905,  a  committee  appointed  to  report  on  the  feasibility 
of  the  establishment  of  a  California  Branch  of  the  American  Folk- 
Lore  Society  made  favorable  recommendations.  This  report  was 
adopted  and  the  California  Branch  of  the  American  Folk- Lore  Society 
was  thereby  founded  by  those  present  and  signifying  their  assent. 
The  first  meeting  was  held  ten  days  later,  when  the  Branch  was 
fully  organized  by  the  adoption  of  by-laws  and  the  election  of  officers. 
Professor  F.  W.  Putnam  was  chosen  president  and  Mr  Charles 
Keeler  first  vice-president.  Dr  C.  Hart  Merriam  gave  an  address 
on  ''Aboriginal  Folk-Lore  from  California"  and  was  followed  by 
Professor  Putnam,  Dr  R.  B.  Dixon,  Dr  Charles  Peabody,  Professor 
W.  E.  Ritter,  and  Professor  J.  C.  Merriam  as  speakers.  Subse- 
quently during  1905-06  seven  other  meetings  were  held  in  San 
Francisco  and  Berkeley.  At  these  meetings  lectures  and  papers 
were  presented  on  the  folk-lore  and  mythology  of  the  Japanese,  the 
Chinese,  the  Hebrews  of  Old  Testament  times,  the  modem  Arabic- 
speaking  peoples,  the  Polynesians,  and  the  races  of  the  Philippine 
islands,  the  audiences  ranging  from  fifty  to  two  hundred  and  fifty 
persons.  During  the  same  season  five  papers  of  some  length, 
besides  a  number  of  shorter  articles  and  notes,  dealing  with  Cali- 
fornia and  other  folk-lore,  were  contributed  by  members  of  the 
Branch  to  the  Jounial  of  American  Folk-Lorc.  Other  papers  have 
been  prepared  and  promised,  and  a  separate  department  of  the  Journal 
has  been  instituted  for  the  proceedings  of  the  Branch.  Member- 
ship is  held  largely  by  residents  of  San  Francisco,  Berkeley,  and 
other  bay  cities,  but  people  in  all  parts  of  the  state,  including 
southern  California,  as  well  as  a  number  of  eastern  anthropologists 
interested  in  the  folk-lore  of  California,  are  among  the  members. 

The  societ)"  is  now  preparing  to  reassemble  for  the  first  meeting 
of  1906-07.  Meetings  will  be  held  as  heretofore  in  Berkeley  and 
San  Francisco  and  it  is  hoped  will  be  extended  to  other  cities 
of  the  state.  A  program  for  the  year  is  being  prepared  in  which  a 
series  of  meetings  and  papers  dealing  systematically  with  at  least 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  49$ 

one  aspect  of  general  folk-lore,  and  a  line  of  study  devoted  specially 
to  local  folk-lore,  will  be  features. 

Clark  University 

The  activities  of  the  Department  of  Anthropology  at  Clark  Uni- 
versity have  consisted  of  academic  lectures,  investigations,  etc.,  by 
Dr  Alexander  F.  Chamberlain,  the  head  of  the  department,  who, 
since  1 904,  has  borne  the  title  of  assistant  professor  of  anthropology. 
During  the  period  1902-06  the  topics  treated  in  the  lecture  courses 
have  included  the  following  :  Heredity  and  environment  in  the  indi- 
vidual and  the  race,  phenomena  of  race  mixture,  education  among 
primitive  peoples,  anthropological  history  of  America,  psychology 
of  primitive  peoples,  role  of  the  individual  in  primitive  culture,  con- 
tact of  ''higher"  and  "lower**  races,  interpretation  of  folk-lore, 
psychology  of  primitive  languages,  religions  of  primitive  peoples, 
progress  and  its  criteria.  Orient  and  Occident,  the  negro  in  Africa 
and  in  America,  childhood  of  the  race  and  of  the  individual,  evo- 
lution of  human  culture,  etc.  The  basis  for  and  illustrations  of  these 
lectures  have  been  as  far  as  possible  the  anthropological  phenomena 
revealed  by  the  study  of  America  past  and  present,  Indian  and 
Aryan. 

Among  the  investigations  carried  on,  or  now  in  progress,  may 
be  mentioned  : 

( I )  Studies  in  linguistic  psychology  (primitive  knowledge-words, 
taste- words,  hearing- words,  etc.) ;  (2)  Language  of  the  Kutenai 
Indians  (preparation  of  a  dictionary,  etc.) ;  (3)  Contact  of  the  Indian 
and  the  White  in  America  (culture-borrowings,  loan-words  in 
American  English,  contributions  of  the  American  Indian  to  civiliza- 
tion) ;  (4)  The  contributions  of  the  Negro  race  to  human  civilization  ; 
(5)  A  linguistic  map  of  South  America  ;  (6)  Ethno-botany  of  the 
Kutenai  Indians  ;  (7)  The  Canadian  French  of  northwestern  Canada, 
etc.  ;  (8)  The  influence  of  the  Algonquian  and  Iroquoian  stocks  on 
other  Indian  peoples ;  (9)  Association  of  ideas  in  American  Indian 
languages  ;  (10)  Acquisition  of  reading  and  writing  by  primitive 
peoples  ;  (11)  Studies  of  a  child. 

The  publications  of  Dr  Chamberlain  for  1902-06  include,  apart 
from  those  not  concerned  with  American  anthropology  : 


496  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

1.  Algonkian  words  in  American  English.    Jour.  Amer.  Folk- Lore,  xv, 
pp.  240-267,  1902. 

2.  An  Algonquian  loan-word  in  Siouan.     American  Anthropologist,  x.  s. , 
V,  pp.  172-173,  1903. 

3.  Primitive  theories  of  knowledge.     Monist,  xiii,  pp.  295-302,  1903. 

4.  Primitive  taste-words.     Amer,  Jour,  PsycAo/,,  xiv,  pp^  146-153,1903. 

5.  The  contributions  of  the  American  Indian  to  civilization.  I^oc.  Amer, 
Antiq,  Soc,  n.  s.,  xvi,  pp.  91-126,  1902-03. 

6.  Race-character  and  local  color  in  proverbs.  Jour,  Amer.  Folk-Lore, 
XVII,  pp.  28-31,  1904. 

7.  Iroquois  in  northwestern  Canada.     American  Anthropologist,  N.  s. ,  vi, 

pp.  459-463*  1904. 

8.  American  Indians.     Encyclop,  Americana,  viii,  1904. 

9.  Mythology  of  Indian  stocks  north  of  Mexico  —  I.  Jour,  Amer,  Folk- 
Lore,  XVIII,  pp.  111-122,  1905. 

10.  Primitive  hearing  and  • '  hearing-words. ' '  Amer,  Jour,  Psychol, ,  xvi. , 
pp.  1 19-130,  1905. 

11.  "  Pitons  "  and  Canadian  substitutes  for  money.  Jour,  Amer,  Folk- 
Lore,  XIX,  pp.  1 70-1 71,  1906. 

In  collaboration  ^\^th  Mr  W.  W.  Tooker,  Dr  Chamberlain  is  pre- 
paring an  addition  (with  notes,  vocabulary,  etc.)  of  **  The  Proverbs 
of  Solomon,  King  of  Israel,"  from  the  text  of  the  **  Eliot  Bible." 
During  the  period  1902-06  considerable  attention  has  been  paid  to 
bibliographical  work,  and  Dr  Chamberlain  has  conducted  the  **  Peri- 
odical Literature"  department  of  the  American  Anthropologist,  the 
■"Record  of  American  Folk-lore"  oi  th^  Journal  of  Afncrican  Folk- 
Lore,  and  the  section  on  **  Archeology,  Ethnology,  and  Folk-lore" 
of  the  Rroiew  of  Historical  Publications  Relating  to  Canada, 

The  endowment  of  the  library  of  Clark  University,  under  the 
terms  of  the  will  of  its  founder,  and  the  erection  and  occupancy  of 
the  new  library  building,  have  rendered  possible  the  better  arrange- 
ment of  the  books  in  the  anthropological  department,  to  which  large 
additions  have  recently  been  made.  The  liberal  administration  of 
the  hbrarian,  Dr  Louis  N.  Wilson,  permits  an  increasing  use  of  the 
library  to  be  made  by  scholars  and  others  concerned.  Evidence  of 
interest  in  the  anthropology  of  the  American  Indians  is  shown  in 
Worcester  by  the  recent  publication  of  two  valuable  studies  by 
gentlemen  not  immediately  connected  with  professional  academic 
life,  namely  :  *'  Indian  Names  of  Places  in  Worcester  County,  Massa- 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  497 

chusetts,"  by  L.  N.  Kinnicutt  (pp.  59,  Worcester,  1905),  and  "A 
Study  of  the  Etymology  of  the  Indian  Place  Name  Missisquoi/*  by 
George  McAleer,  M.D.  (pp.  104,  Worcester,  1906). 

In  recent  years  the  theses  for  the  degree  of  Ph.  D.  in  the  Psy- 
chological and  Pedagogical  departments  of  the  University  have  drawn 
largely  on  anthropological  material.  In  1904  there  was  established, 
under  the  editorial  direction  of  President  G.  Stanley  Hall,  The 
American  Journal  of  Religions  Psychology  and  Education^  which, 
like  his  recent  comprehensive  study  of  "  Adolescence  "  (New  York, 
2  vols.,  1904),  contains  much  of  interest  to  anthropologists. 

Phillips  Academy 

In  1 90 1,  by  the  gift  of  Mr  and  Mrs  Robert  Singleton  Peabody, 
of  Philadelphia,  a  Department  of  American  Archeology  was  estab- 
lished at  Phillips  Academy,  Andover,  Massachusetts.  The  purpose 
of  this  foundation  is  threefold  —  instruction,  research,  and  publica- 
tion. An  artistic  building,  a  collection  of  thirty  thousand  specimens, 
and  a  faculty  consisting  of  the  honorary  director,  Dr  Charles  Pea- 
body,  and  the  curator,  Warren  King  Moorehead,  A.M.,  completed 
the  equipment  requisite  for  the  unique  experiment  of  teaching 
archeology  in  a  secondary  school. 

Voluntary  classes  of  from  fifteen  to  twenty  senior  students  receive 
two  lectures  a  week  and  **  eye-knowledge  **  by  means  of  the  stere- 
opticon  and  of  the  collections  in  the  museum.  While  the  depart- 
ment is  yet  too  young  to  judge  of  ultimate  results,  one  thing  is  made 
certain,  namely,  that  no  one  of  the  four  hundred  students  at  Andover 
leaves  school  without  knowing  that  there  is  such  a  science  as 
American  archeology,  a  fact  not  even  yet  of  universal  or  even  gen- 
eral knowledge. 

Explorations  have  been  undertaken  at  Hopkinsville,  Kentucky, 
in  an  ancient  cemetery;  in  Jacobs  Cavern,  southwestern  Missouri; 
and  at  Bushey  Cave,  Cavetown,  Maryland.  The  results  in  addition 
to  the  collections  from  these  sites  have  been  gratifying.  Striking 
instances  of  the  antiquity  of  man  as  proved  by  evidences  of  man 
embedded  in  stalagmite  were  found  in  both  caverns,  and  the  red 
cave-earth  was  identified  in  which,  if  ever,  the  remains  of  very  early 
man  in  America  are  likely  to  be  found  in  any  abundance. 


498  AAfERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Two  Bulletins,  "The  Exploration  of  Jacob's  Cavern"  (1904) 
and  "The  So-called  'Gorgets'"  (1906)  have  been  issued.  No.  2 
is  in  accordance  with  the  wishes  of  the  founders  that  individual 
specimens  should  receive  the  detailed  systematic  study  vouchsafed 
to  specimens  in  the  other  natural  sciences. 

An  exhibition  assisted  by  Mr  Gerard  Fowke's  care  and  advice 
was  installed  at  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition  and  honored  by 
the  award  of  a  silver  medal. 

The  department  is  self-supporting,  and  hopes  to  continue  to  be 
of  service  to  the  archeological  interests  of  anthropology. 

The  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington 

pjjj  This  Society  was  founded  in  1 879,  early  in  the  period  when  the 
science  of  anthropology  was  beginning  to  awaken  to  a  knowledge 
of  the  extent  of  its  domain.  The  constant  endeavor  of  the  Society 
has  been  to  increase  the  resources  of  anthropology,  and  it  has  suc- 
ceeded in  maintaining  a  high  standard  of  excellence  in  the  character 
of  its  scientific  work.  The  membership  has  been  drawn  mainly 
from  Washington,  where  various  activities  of  the  Government  for 
many  years  have  attracted  men  of  science  from  all  parts  of  the 
United  States,  but  there  are  many  members  distributed  throughout 
this  and  other  countries.  The  list  of  the  corresponding  and  hon- 
orary members  contains  the  names  of  many  of  the  world's  best 
known  anthropologists. 

The  American  Anthropologist  for  a  number  of  years  was  main- 
tained as  the  journal  of  the  Society,  until,  through  the  demands  of 
broader  organization,  it  became  spokesman  for  the  anthropological 
workers  of  America ;  but  it  is  still  the  organ  of  the  Society,  which 
publishes  therein  its  proceedings  and  many  of  the  papers  read  be- 
fore it.  There  have  appeared  eleven  volumes  of  the  old  series  of 
T}u  American  Anthropologist  (1888- 1899),  three  volumes  of  Trans- 
actions, one  volume  of  Abstract  of  Transactions,  and  two  Special 
Papers. 

Since  the  Society  of  Americanists  honored  the  United  States 
with  its  presence  in  1902  there  have  been  read  before  the  Anthro- 
pological Society  114  papers,  falling  under  the  following  classes: 
Archeology,  27  ;  sociology,  24 ;  technology,  i  5  ;  somatolog>%  1 3  ; 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  499 

sophiology,  9  ;  history  and  biography,  8  ;  ethnology,  $  ;  philology, 
4  ;  psychology,  4 ;  exploration,  3  ;  esthetology,  2  ;  classification,  i  ; 
and  general,  i.  Seventy -six  of  these  papers  were  read  by  21 
members. 

In  1902  Mr  W.  H.  Holmes,  whose  active  interest  has  con- 
tributed so  much  to  the  achievements  of  the  Society,  was  re-elected 
president ;  in  the  following  year  Miss  Alice  C.  Fletcher  honored  the 
Society  and  materially  advanced  its  interests  as  its  presiding  officer ; 
in  1904  Dr  D.  S.  Lamb  became  president 

A  noteworthy  event  during  1905  was  the  presentation  of  "The 
History  of  the  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington,**  by  Dr 
Lamb.  This  paper,  which  formed  Dr  Lamb's  presidential  address, 
was  the  result  of  his  efforts  to  collate  the  history  of  the  Society  from 
the  chaotic  records  of  its  earlier  years. 

In  1905  Dr  George  M.  Kober  occupied  the  chair  of  president, 
and  the  year  of  his  incumbency  was  marked  by  steady  and  encourag- 
ing progress.  In  May,  1906,  Mr  J.  D.  McGuire  was  chosen  to 
serve  the  Society  as  its  chief  officer. 

During  the  period  1902-06  many  interesting  specimens  were 
exhibited  before  the  Society  and  numerous  verbal  communications 
and  reports  were  presented.  The  discussion  of  the  papers  was  full 
and  satisfactory.  Three  symposiums  of  special  interest  have  engaged 
the  attention  of  the  members,  namely,  on  artifacts  in  the  caves  of  the 
United  States  ;  on  the  origin  of  Floridian  culture  ;  and  on  clans  and 
gentes.  These  subjects,  which  were  treated  by  means  of  formal 
papers  and  discussions,  were  productive  of  good  results. 

Within  the  period  covered  by  this  review  there  is  recorded  the 
loss  by  death  of  Major  J.  W.  Powell,  a  leader  of  thought  in  anthro- 
pological science  ;  Dr  Washington  Matthews,  the  dean  of  the  body 
of  investigators  ;  Dr  Thomas  Wilson,  the  archeologist ;  Dr  W.  W. 
Johnston,  prominent  in  advanced  medical  science ;  Dr  Swan  M. 
Burnett,  and  Col.  Weston  Flint. 

The  officers  of  the  Society  for  1906  are  :  President,  J.  D.  Mc- 
Guire ;  vice-presidents :  {a)  Somatology,  Ales  Hrdlicka ;  (^)  psy- 
chology, J.  Walter  Fewkes ;  {c)  esthetology,  W.  H.  Holmes ;  (rf) 
technology,  Walter  Hough ;  (r)  sociology,  James  Mooney  ;  (/) 
philology,  J.  N.  B.  Hewitt ;  {g)  sophiology.  Miss  Alice  C.  Fletcher ; 


500  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

general  secretary,  Dr  Walter  Hough  ;  secretary  to  the  board  of 
managers,  Dr  John  R.  Swanton ;  treasurer.  Mr  George  C.  Maynard ; 
curator,  Mrs  Marianna  P.  Seaman ;  councilors,  Paul  Beckuath,  I. 
M.  Casanowicz,  J.  \V.  Fewkes,  J.  N.  B.  Hewitt,  F.  W.  Hodge, 
Mrs  Sarah  L.  James,  James  Mooney,  J.  B.  Nichols,  W.  E.  Saffbrd, 
and  J.  R.  Swanton. 

American  Ethnological  Society 

This  Society,  which  was  founded  in  1849,  w^as  reorganized  in 
1900  and  has  held  regular  meetings  since  that  time.  Most  of  the 
meetings  of  the  Society  have  been  held  in  cooperation  with  the  Sec- 
tion of  Psychology  and  Anthropology  of  the  New  York  Academy 
of  Sciences.  During  the  last  four  years  the  Ethnological  Society 
has  had  for  its  official  pubHcation — jointly  with  the  Anthropo- 
logical Society  of  Washington  —  the  American  AntJtropologist^  in 
which  the  proceedings  of  the  Society  have  been  reported,  and  in 
which  the  more  important  papers  read  have  appeared  in  the  form  of 
essays. 

During  the  year  1904  the  American  Ethnological  Society  coop- 
erated with  the  New  York  Academy  of  Sciences  in  the  publication 
of  memoirs,  and  in  this  manner  a  supplement  to  the  American 
Anthropologist,  entitled.  **  Some  Principles  of  Algonquian  Word- 
formation,"  by  Dr  William  Jones,  was  published. 

With  the  present  year  the  American  T^thnological  Society,  while 
continuing  its  former  relation  to  the  American  Anthropologist^  is 
beginning  the  publication  of  a  separate  series  which  is  to  appear  at 
irregular  intervals,  and  which  will  contain  principally  authentic  rec- 
ords of  information  collected  among  the  Indians,  in  the  original 
languages,  with  translations.  In  undertaking  this  collection,  which 
it  is  hoped  will  prove  of  value  from  an  ethnological  as  well  as  from 
a  philological  point  of  view,  the  Societ>'  follows  the  Hne  of  work 
originally  laid  out  by  its  founder,  Albert  Gallatin,  to  whom  we  owe 
the  first  serious  attempt  to  classify  the  North  American  Indian  lan- 
guages. While  the  first  volumes  of  the  new  series  will  be  devoted 
to  material  of  this  class,  it  is  hoped  that  other  important  ethnolog- 
ical information  also  will  be  included  in  later  volumes. 


ns 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  $01 

New  York  Academy  of  Sciences 

The  anthropological  meetings  of  the  New  York  Academy  of  Sci- 
ences have  been  held  in  cooperation  with  the  meetings  of  the  Amer- 
ican Ethnological  Society.  While  up  to  the  year  1905  the  New 
York  Academy  of  Sciences  did  not  publish  any  anthropological 
material,  but  brought  out  important  papers  in  cooperation  with  the 
American  Ethnological  Society  and  the  American  Anthropologist ^ 
two  extended  papers  were  published  during  the  year  1905  :  "  Essay 
on  the  Grammar  of  the  Yukaghir  Language/*  by  Waldemar  Jochel- 
son  ;  and  "  Materials  for  the  Physical  Anthropology  of  the  Eastern 
European  Jews,"  by  Maurice  Fishberg.  The  former  was  printed  as 
a  supplement  to  the  American  Anthropologist ^  the  latter  as  the  first 
issue  of  the  Memoirs  of  the  American  Anthropological  and  Ethnolog- 
ical Societies. 

The  American  Folk -Lore  Society 

The  work  of  the  American  Folk -Lore  Society  has  proceeded 
without  essential  change  in  policy.  The  publications  of  the  Society 
consist  of  a  series  of  Memoirs,  issued  at  convenient  intervals,  and  a 
quarterly  periodical,  the  Journal  of  American  Folk-Lore. 

In  1904  appeared  volume  viii  of  the  Memoirs,  being  a  collec- 
tion of  Pawnee  tales,  entitled  **  Traditions  of  the  Skidi  Pawnee,'*  by 
George  A.  Dorsey  (8°,  xvi,  366  pp.).  Volume  ix,  to  appear  about 
October  of  the  current  year,  will  contain  the  Mexican  Christmas 
miracle  play  entitled  **  Los  Pastores,'*  given  in  Spanish  text  with  Eng- 
lish translation.  The  basis  of  the  work  will  be  a  version  of  the  play 
as  now  performed  on  the  Rio  Grande ;  the  text  will  be  provided  with 
introduction,  illustrations,  and  music. 

Th^  Journal  of  American  Folk-Lore,  the  principal  publication  of 
the  Society,  is  now  in  its  nineteenth  volume.  The  Journal  is 
designed  (i)  to  present  a  record  of  American  folk-lore ;  (2)  to  print 
inedited  traditional  matter,  whether  aboriginal  or  immigrant ;  (3) 
to  afford  facilities  for  comparative  studies  in  the  general  subject. 
The  *'  Record  "  forms  a  regular  department,  giving  bibliographical 
information  concerning  American,  Philippine,  Negro,  and  American- 
European  folk-lore,  and  undertakes  to  index  publications  on  these 
subjects.     This  feature  is  prepared  by  Professor  A.  F.  Chamber- 


S02  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8.  1906 

lain,  the  editor  of  the  Journal.  The  scope  of  the  Journal  will  best 
be  understood  by  presenting  the  titles  of  certain  of  the  papers  which 
have  appeared  since  the  summer  of  1902,  as  follows  : 

Aboriginal  Material 

Alaska  :   Tales  from  Kodiak  Island.     F.  A.  Colder,     xvi,  16,  85. 
Aleutian:  Stories.     F.  A.  Colder,     xviii,  215. 

Algonquian  :  Manabozho  and  Hiawatha.     J.  C.  Hamilton,     xvi,  229. 
California  :  A  Ghost-dance.     A.  L.  Kroeber.     xvii,  32. 

Sonu  Shamans  of.     R.  B.  Dixon,     xvii,  22. 
Cheyenne  :  An  Obstacle  Myth.     C.  B.  Crinnell.     xvi,  108. 
Chipewyan  :  Fireside  Stories.     J.  M.  Bell,     xvi,  73. 
Costa  Rica  :  Folk-lore  of  the  Bribri  and  Brunka.     H.  Pittier  de  Fdbrega. 

XVI,   I. 

Dakota:    Whirlwind  and  Elk  in  Mythology.     C.  Wissler.     xvii,  257. 

DiegueSJo:  Story  of  the  Chaup.     C.  G.  DuBois.     xviii,  217. 

Lassik  :   Tales.     P.  E.  Goddard.     xix,  133. 

Maidu  :  System  and  Sequence  in  Mythology.     R.  B.  Dixon,     xvi,  32. 

Mission  :  Mythology.     C.  G.  DuBois.     xvii,  185  ;  xix,  52,  145. 

Pawnee:  Star  Lore.     A.  C.  Fletcher,     xvi,  10. 

Pima  :  A  Constitution.     F.  Russell,     xvi,  222. 

POMO :  A  Composite  Myth,     S.  A.  Barrett,     xix,  37. 

Sioux :  Games.     J.  R.  Walker,     xviii,  27,  xix,  29. 

Wichita;  Tales.     G.  A.  Dorsey.     xv,  215,  xvi,  160,  xvii,  153. 

WiSHOSK  :  Myths.     A.  L.  Kroeber.     xviii,  85. 

Immigrant  Material 

English  :    Traditional  Ballads  of  New  England.     P.  Barr>'.     xviii,    123, 

191,  291. 
Sailors'  Chanties.     P.  A.  Hutchison,     xix,  16. 
The  Passover  Song  of  the  Kid  and  an  Equivalent  from  New  Eng- 
land.    W.  W.  Newell,     xvii,  33. 
Incantations  and  Popular  Healing  in  Maryland.      L.  H.  Wren- 
shall,     xv,  268. 
French:  Four  Louisiana  Folk-tales.     A.  Fortier.     xix,  123. 

French  Canadian  Folk-tales.     W.  J.  Wintemberg.     xvii,  265. 
German  :  '*  The  Long  Hidden  Friend.''     (Folk-book  of  Charms.)     By  J.  G. 

Hohman,  Reading,  Pa.,  18 19.     Introduction  by  C.  F.  Brown. 
XVII,  89-152. 
Pennsylvania  German  Riddles  and  Nursery  Rhymes.     J.  B.  Stoudt. 
XIX,  113. 
Filipino:    Visayan  Folk-tales  —  /.     B.  S.   Maxfield  and  W.   H.  Millington. 

XIX,  97. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  SO3 

Negro:  African  Institutions  in  America,     H.  H.  S.  Aimes.     xviii,  15. 
Items  from  Bahama,     M.  Clavel.     xvii,  36. 

Ignis  Fatuus.    (Tale,  with  comparisons.)    W.  W.  Newell,    xvii,  39. 
Notes  on  Music.     C.  Peabody.     xvi,  148. 

Comparative  Studies 

The  Folk-lore  of  the  Eskimo,     F.  Boas,     xvii,  i. 

Some  Traits  of  Primitive  Culture.     F.  Boas,     xvii,  243. 

Mythology  of  Indian   Stocks   North   of  Mexico.    (Bibliographical.)     A.   F. 

Chamberlain,     xviii,  iii. 
Race  Character  in  Proverbs,     A.  F.  Chamberlain,     xvii,  28. 
Significance  of  Mythology  and  Tradition.     L.  Farrand.     xvii,  14. 
Disenchantment  by  Decapitation,     G.  L.  Kittredgc.     xviii,  i. 
Individual  and   Collective    Characteristics  in   Folk-lore.      W.    W.    Ncwell» 

XIX,    I. 

Mexican  Human  Sacrifice.     C.  H.  Toy.     xviii,  173. 

During  the  present  year  arrangements  have  been  made  to  pro- 
mote local  organization,  and  branches  of  the  American  Folk- 
Lore  Society  have  already  been  established  in  California,*  Arizona, 
and  Missouri.  It  is  hoped  to  extend  a  similar  organization  to  other 
states  and  territories,  especially  those  which  still  possess  unrecorded 
traditional  matter.  The  effect  of  such  extension  must  be  to  pro- 
mote a  more  complete  record,  and  to  lend  an  impulse  to  every  form 
of  anthropological  research.  The  Society  has  every  reason,  there- 
fore, to  anticipate  a  future  of  usefulness  and  prosperity. 

ARCHiEOLOGICAL   INSTITUTE   OF    AMERICA 

The  Archaeological  Institute  of  America  confines  its  activities 
strictly  to  the  field  indicated  by  its  title ;  hence  much  American 
philology,  ethnology,  and  somatology  inseparably  bound  up  with 
American  archeology  have  remained  foreign  to  it ;  hence  too  the 
Institute  has  welcomed  research  and  report  in  epigraphy  and  archi- 
tecture of  times  entirely  historic  and  of  peoples  continuous  and  con- 
temporaneous. As  archeologists  the  members  have  added  to  their 
classical  field  (a  field  offering  archeological  material,  it  must  be  said, 
in  the  greatest  purity)  a  large  sphere,  or  hemisphere,  of  action  in 
the  Americas.     It  will  be  remembered  that  the  president  of  the  In- 

1  See  page  494. 


S04  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

stitute,  Professor  John  Williams  White  of  Harvard  University,  was 
appointed  in  June,  1901,  to  serve  on  the  commission  of  organiza- 
tion of  the  Thirteenth  International  Congress  of  Americanists  to  be 
held  at  New  York  the  following  year,  and  that  he  was  a  member  of 
the  council  of  that  Congress.^ 

What  the  Institute  has  done  in  the  American  field  may  well  be 
classified  under  three  headings  —  legislation,  research,  and  publica- 
tion. 

The  subject  of  the  preservation  of  the  monuments  of  antiquities 
in  America  has  been  before  various  legislative  bodies  and  incor- 
porated in  numerous  drafts  and  bills,  but  it  is  only  recently  that  a 
way  has  been  found  out  of  the  many  difficulties.  As  early  as  May, 
1904,  the  council  of  the  Institute  created  a  committee  on  preserva- 
tion of  the  remains  of  American  antiquity,^  with  the  president  and 
secretary  as  chairman  and  secretary  respectively ;  each  society  of 
the  Institute  was  represented  on  this  committee. 

At  a  meeting  in  St  Louis,  September  22,  1904,  a  sub-committee, 
composed  as  follows,  was  appointed,  to  urge  legislation  :  The  presi- 
dent of  the  Institute ;  Mr  Charles  P.  Bowditch  ;  Honorable  J.  W. 
Foster ;  Mr  W.  H.  Holmes,  and  Professor  F.  W.  Putnam.  At  a 
meeting  held  in  Washington,  January  10,  1905,  in  conjunction  with 
a  similar  committee  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association,* 
a  memorandum  was  agreed  on  and  on  the  following  day  the  two 
committees  appeared  before  the  Committee  on  Public  Lands  of  the 
House  of  Representatives.  The  congressional  committee  prepared 
a  bill  of  substantially  the  same  purport  as  the  memorandum,  but 
owing  to  failure  of  recognition  by  the  Speaker  the  matter  had  to  lie 
over. 

The  "  hopes  and  purposes  of  those  who  are  interested  in  the 
preservation  of  American  antiquities,  the  steps  taken,  and  the  results 
achieved,"  were  made  the  subject  of  a  paper  by  Mr  Edgar  L. 
Hewett,  read  before  the  joint  meeting  of  the  Institute  and  the 
American  Anthropological  Association  at  Ithaca  in  December,  1905, 


^  Am.  Jour.  Archtrohi^^  Suppl.,  vol.  vi,  p.  4,  1902. 
2  Ibid.,  Suppl.,  vol.  VIII,  p.  4,  1904. 
3 Ibid.,  Suppl.,  vol.  IX,  p.  6,  1905. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  505 

and  with  an  additional  note  on  legislation  may  be  consulted  in  the 
American  Anthropologist,  * 

Under  the  heading  of  research  may  be  treated  the  formation  of 
new  societies  in  regions  where  research  is  possible.  The  Colorado 
and  California  societies  are  cases  in  point ;  the  former  has  centers 
in  Denver,  Boulder,  Colorado  Springs,  and  Pueblo,  and  in  the  latter 
state  are  independent  societies  at  San  Francisco  and  Los  Angeles. 
The  western  organization  was  largely  the  result  of  the  energetic 
work  of  Professor  D'Ooge  and  Professor  Kelsey ;  their  efforts  in 
Los  Angeles,  ably  seconded  by  the  enthusiastic  cooperation  of  the 
secretary,  Mr  Charles  F.  Lummis,  have  already  borne  much  fruit. 
The  Southwest  Society  of  the  Institute  was  founded  in  Los 
Angeles  in  the  last  days  of  November,  1903,  on  lines  intended 
to  fulfil  an  original  function  of  the  Institute  by  means  of  local 
exploration  —  the  locus  of  the  Society  being  the  million  square 
miles  broadly  known  as  the  Southwest.  Under  the  stimulus  of 
practical  activity  the  Society  has  had  a  phenomenal  growth.  In  its 
first  year  it  rose  to  third  rank  in  membership  among  the  fifteen 
affiliations  of  the  Institute ;  at  two  years  old  it  was  by  far  the  largest 
society,  with  a  roster  of  406. 

At  the  very  outset  the  Southwest  Society  began  active  work,  its 
first  endeavor  being  to  record,  by  phonograph,  the  fast-vanishing 
folk-songs  of  the  Southwest.  It  has  now  thus  recorded  more  than 
600  numbers' —  about  400  in  Spanish  and  the  rest  in  29  different 
Indian  tongues  —  and  has  completed  the  transcription  of  the  Span- 
ish songs,  which  will  be  published  as  soon  as  proper  translation 
and  annotation  can  be  given  them.  Sixty  of  the  most  interesting  of 
these  songs  have  been  harmonized  for  a  popular  edition.  In  its  first 
year  the  Society  also  raised  a  special  fund  and  purchased  a  collec- 
tion of  thirt>'-four  paintings  which  hung  in  the  Franciscan  missions 
of  California  until  the  disestablishment  of  1834.  Among  these  can- 
vases —  all  of  historical  interest  —  are  three  of  extraordinary  artistic 
beauty  and  value.  One  of  the  most  nearly  perfect  archeological 
collections  of  local  interest  in  existence  was  made,  years  ago,  by 
Dr  F.  M.  Palmer,  curator  of  the  Southwest  Society,  and  is  now  in 
the  possession  of  the  Los  Angeles  Chamber  of  Commerce.     This 

*  Vol.  VIII,  no.  I,  p.  109,  1906, 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  8.,  8 — 33. 


506  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

is  pledged  to  the  Society  as  soon  as  the  latter  shall  have  proper 
quarters.  Complementary  to  this  collection  the  Society  has  raised 
special  funds  and  purchased  two  other  collections,  also  of  southern 
California  archeology,  which  cover  the  field  definitively.  One  of 
these  collections  was  made  by  Dr  Palmer ;  the  other  includes  what- 
ever he  did  not  secure  of  the  marvelous  material  found  at  Redondo 
Beach.  The  joint  collection  now  includes  a  large  number  of  unica, 
as  well  as  all  known  specimens  of  several  of  the  most  extraordinary 
artifacts. 

The  Southwest  Society  is  now  engaged  in  founding  a  great 
free  public  museum,  and  is  negotiating  for  the  purchase  of  a  site 
of  40  acres  for  ;$6o,ooo  —  what  is  believed  to  be  the  most  beautiful 
site  occupied  by  any  public  building  in  America.  Upon  this  command- 
ing hill  the  museum  will  be  built,  somewhat  after  the  fashion  of  the 
Alhambra.  A  large  number  of  collections  are  already  pledged  to 
the  museum,  including  the  personal  relics  of  John  C.  Fremont,  and 
all  that  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  retains  of  the  relics  of  the 
heroic  period  of  California  —  the  Mission  era  of  the  Franciscans. 
Dr  Palmer  has  conducted  three  expeditions  on  behalf  of  the  South- 
west Society — one  on  the  sea-coast  of  southern  California,  in  the 
summer  of  1905  ;  one  on  the  northern  verge  of  the  White  Mountain 
reservation  in  Arizona,  in  the  same  season ;  and  one  among  the 
prehistoric  cliff-dwellings  of  the  Canon  de  Chelly,  Cafion  del 
Muerto,  Monument  canon,  and  the  adjacent  parts  of  northeastern 
Arizona,  in  May  and  June,  1906.  All  these  explorations  were 
rewarded  by  rich  discoveries.  It  is  the  intention  of  the  Society  to 
prosecute  researches  in  its  chosen  field  as  rapidly  as  funds  can  be 
procured ;  and  it  is  now  endeavoring  to  arrange  for  the  Archae- 
ological Institute  of  America  a  new  classification  which  shall  differ- 
entiate properly  between  contributory  and  active  societies.  The 
Southwest  Society  has  published  two  editions  each  of  two  illustrated 
bulletins,  setting  forth  something  of  these  activities,  and  a  tliird 
bulletin  is  now  in  preparation. 

The  San  Francisco  Society  was  finally  vivified  and  strengthened 
by  Professor  F.  W.  Putnam  in  1905,  interest  having  been  aroused 
during  the  meetings  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association 
in  that  city  in  the  early  fall.    Among  its  present  officers  are  :  Presi- 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  507 

dent,  Hon.  James  D.  Phelan ;  vice-presidents,  Dr  David  Starr  Jordan 
and  Dr  Benjamin  Ide  Wheeler,  presidents  respectively  of  Leiand  Stan- 
ford Junior  University  and  the  University  of  California.  The  roll  con- 
tains fifty-one  names.  The  continued  activity  of  the  Society  in  spite 
of  the  appalling  disaster  of  April  last  deserves  the  highest  com- 
mendation, a  fact  recognized  by  the  Institute  in  the  remission  of  all 
dues  for  the  current  year.^ 

The  work  of  the  western  members  is  frequently  mentioned  in 
Out  Wcst^  of  which  magazine  Mr  C.  F.  Lummis  is  editor ;  refer- 
ence may  be  made  specially  to  the  numbers  of  March,  1904  (p.  288) 
and  March-April,  1905  (p.  241). 

The  committee  of  the  Institute  on  American  archeology  in  1 899 
established  a  traveling  fellowship,  and  in  190 1  Mr  (now  Dr)  Alfred 
M.  Tozzer  was  appointed  Fellow  for  four  years,  during  which  he 
has  made  personal  explorations  among  the  Maya  of  southern 
Mexico  and  Central  America.  In  1905  he  was  succeeded  as  Fel- 
low by  Mr  Edgar  L.  Hewett.  The  report  of  Dr  Tozzer's  work, 
soon  to  be  issued,  it  is  hoped,  will  deal  at  length  with  the  arche- 
ology, ethnology,  and  linguistics  of  those  tribes. 

From  February  27  to  March  24,  1906,  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Institute,  Dr  Tozzer  delivered  a  lecture  at  various  centers  on 
"Some  Aspects  of  American  Archeology."  He  visited  Boston, 
New  York,  the  University  of  Pennsylvania,  the  George  Washington 
University,  Pittsburg,  Washington  and  Jefferson  College,  Detroit, 
the  University  of  Chicago,  the  University  of  Wisconsin,  the  State 
University  of  Iowa,  the  University  of  Kansas,  the  Prosso  School, 
Kansas  City,  the  University  of  Missouri,  the  Washington  Univer- 
sity, the  University  of  Cincinnati,  and  the  University  of  Rochester. 

The  practical  interest  shown  by  the  Institute  is  proved  by  the 
appropriation  in  1905  for  the  Committee  on  American  Archaeology 
of  $2,500,  later  apportioned  as  follows: 

To  the  Southwest  Society,  per  Dr  Palmer ;?3oo 

Fellowship  500 

For  cave  work,  northern  California* 500 

Field  work,  Central  America 1,000 

Balance 200 

$27500 

»  See  pages  493,  494. 

*See  American  Anthropologisty  vol.  VIII,  no.  2,  p.  221-235,  1906. 


508  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  American  Journal  of  ArchcBology  is  the  official  organ  of 
the  Institute.  For  many  years  an  editorship  in  American  arche- 
ology was  provided  for  and  committed  to  Professor  Henry  W. 
Haynes,  of  Boston.  Later  this  was  discontinued  but  in  1905  was 
reestablished  and  given  to  Dr  Charles  Peabody. 

The  president  of  the  Institute,  Professor  Thomas  Day  Seymour, 
is  insistent  in  his  demand  for  a  comprehensive  and  adequate  repre- 
sentation in  print  of  the  American  field,  and  the  pages  of  the  Jour- 
nal welcome  gladly  contributions  of  merit  commensurate  in  dignity 
with  the  standard  maintained  for  many  years  in  communications 
from  Greece  and  Rome,  Egypt,  Palestine,  and  Babylonia.  The 
Institute  thus  recognizes  the  growth  in  breadth  and  depth  of  arche- 
ology and  finds  expansive  power  in  itself  sufficient  to  meet  the  ever- 
increasing  demands  of  the  science. 

American  Antiquarian  SoaExv 

After  the  death,  on  August  5,  1897,  of  Dr  J.  Hammond  Trum- 
bull, the  well-known  Algonquian  scholar  and  authority  on  the 
language  of  the  Massachusetts  Indians,  in  which  was  printed  the 
famous  "  Eliot  Bible/'  the  manuscript  of  his  Dictionary  (neatly 
written  in  his  own  hand,  in  four  volumes)  came  into  the  possession 
of  the  American  Antiquarian  Society,  Worcester,  Mass.,  of  which 
he  was  a  distinguished  member.  This  **  unique  manuscript,"  as  it 
has  well  been  termed,  in  accordance  with  a  happy  thought  of  Rev. 
Edward  Everett  Hale  was  intrusted  to  the  Bureau  of  American 
Ethnology  at  Washington,  in  whose  hands  it  was  prepared  for 
publication  by  experts,  appearing  as  Bulletin  26  of  that  institution, 
under  the  title  **  Natick  Dictionary  "  (pp.  xxviii,  1-349,  Washington, 
1903).  Thus  the  joint  action  of  the  Bureau  and  the  Society  made 
accessible  to  students  of  American  Indian  tongues  a  work  of  great 
value.  The  anthropological  activities  of  the  American  Antiquarian 
Society  during  the  last  few  years  have  been  limited  to  the  publica- 
tion of  the  results  of  investigations  and  researches  by  its  members. 
Since  1902  the  following  papers  have  appeared  in  its  Proceedings : 

(i)  The  Painted  Rocks  of  Lake  Chelan,  by  William  D.  Lyman,  xv, 
n.  s.,  pp.  259-261,  1902-03. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  509 

(2)  The  Contributions  of  the  American  Indian  to  Civilization,  by  Alex- 
ander F.  Chamberlain,     xvi,  n.  s.,  pp.  91-126,  1903-04. 

(3)  Aboriginal  Languages  of  North  America,  by  Edward  E.  Hale.     Ibid,^ 

pp.  307-313- 

(4)  Myths  and  Superstitions  of  the  Oregon  Indians,  by  William  D.  Lyman. 
7^/V/.,  pp.  221-251. 

(5)  A  Page  of  American  History,  by  Edward  H.  Thompson.  Ibid,^  xvii, 
n.  s.,  pp.  239-252,  1905-06. 

On  November  16,  1905,  the  Society  lost  by  death  its  president, 
Mr  Stephen  Salisbury,  who  had  occupied  that  position  for  many 
years.  He  was  particularly  interested  in  Central  American  arche- 
ology, having  himself  visited  Yucatan  more  than  once,  and  read 
papers  before  the  Society  on  the  subject.  Of  his  fortune,  a  con- 
siderable amount,  estimated  at  some  |>  300,000  (partly  real  estate) 
passes  to  the  Society.  A  portion  of  this  will  be  used  probably  for 
the  construction  of  a  new  building,  of  which  the  Society  is  sorely  in 
need,  its  present  home  being  altogether  too  small  even  for  library 
purposes. 

The  value  of  the  library  of  the  Society,  for  students  of  early 
America  and  of  the  American  aborigines,  continues  to  increase,  the 
files  of  periodicals  and  rare  books  and  manuscripts  being  added  to 
every  year.  Interesting  to  American  anthropologists  is  the  copy 
of  Gallatin's  "  Synopsis  of  Indian  Tribes "  (the  rare  vol.  11  of 
ArcJuBologia  Ameruand),  presented  by  him  to  Schoolcraft,  differing 
in  some  respects  from  other  editions,  and  containing  text-changes 
and  erasures  made  by  the  author  himself. 

Ohio  State  ARCHiEOLooiCAL  and  Historical  Society 

Work  in  Ohio  archeology  has  been  carried  forward  with  com- 
mendable activity  and  with  remarkable  success  by  the  Ohio  Archae- 
ological and  Historical  Society,  the  field  investigations  being  con- 
ducted under  the  personal  direction  of  Mr  William  C.  Mills,  curator 
and  librarian.  In  1902  was  published  the  report  on  the  investiga- 
tions of  the  Adena  mound,  examined  during  the  previous  year,  and 
in  the  same  year  was  completed  the  investigation  of  the  Baum  village 
site,  begun  in  1899.  The  results  of  this  work  were  published  early 
in  the  present  year. 


5IO  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

In  1903  Mr  Mills  examined  the  Gartner  mound  and  village  site, 
the  results  of  this  study  being  published  during  the  following  year. 
No  field  investigations  were  conducted  in  1904,  as  the  time  of  the 
curator  was  occupied  with  a  noteworthy  exhibit  at  the  Louisiana 
Purchase  Exposition  which  attracted  much  attention  and  gained  for 
the  Society  the  award  of  a  grand  prize  and  for  the  curator  a  gold 
medal. 

During  the  present  summer  Mr  Mills  has  completed  his  excava- 
tions, for  the  Society,  of  the  celebrated  Harness  mound,  a  task  that 
may  be  regarded  as  the  best  of  the  many  notable  investigations  that 
the  Society  has  undertaken  in  Ohio.  This  great  mound  is  160  ft. 
longi  90  ft.  broad  at  the  base,  and  18  ft.  high,  and  had  been  exca- 
vated by  explorers  from  time  to  time  during  half  a  century. 
Although  these  excavations  had  been  conducted  in- almost  every 
portion  of  the  central  part  of  the  mound  and  many  burials  removed, 
Mr  Mills  has  exhumed  133  burials  ;  more  than  100  pieces  of  copper, 
consisting  of  large  plates,  axes,  ear-ornaments,  pendants  and  large 
pearls  set  in  copper,  and  pipes  (all  of  the  platform  variety)  ;  engraved 
bone ;  cut  mica  in  many  designs ;  obsidian ;  cut  human  jaw-bones, 
and  many  other  interesting  objects,  making  a  total  of  12,177  speci- 
mens. The  value  of  the  studies  is  enhanced  by  a  series  of  125 
photographs  made  during  the  progress  of  the  work.  Of  no  small 
interest  is  the  discovery  by  Mr  Mills  that  the  so-called  altar  of  this 
mound,  described  sixty  years  ago  by  Squier  and  Davis,  is  not  an 
altar  at  all,  but  a  grave.  The  report  on  this  investigation  is  now  in 
preparation  and  will  be  published  early  next  year. 

Attention  is  now  directed  to  one  of  the  large  mounds  of  the  Seip 
group,  which  is  about  the  size  of  the  Harness  mound,  but  which, 
unlike  the  latter,  has  never  been  examined  beneath  the  surface. 
Already  this  earthwork  gives  promise  of  affording  many  interesting 
objects  to  the  Ohio  Archaeological  and  Historical  Society  and  much 
information  on  the  customs  of  the  builders. 

The  Society  has  not  confined  its  attention  to  field  researches  and 
the  publication  of  their  results,  interesting  and  valuable  though  they 
are.  The  tract  on  which  the  celebrated  Fort  Ancient  stands  has 
been  converted  into  a  free  public  park  of  nearly  300  acres.  The 
Serpent  Mound  Park,  it  will  be  remembered,  was  transferred  to  the 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOG  Y  5  1 1 

Society  some  years  ago  by  Harvard  University.  '^  During  the  present 
year  there  was  deeded  to  the  Society  a  plot  of  land  on  the  Muskin- 
gum, the  site  of  the  Big  Bottom  massacre,  which  also  has  been  con- 
verted into  a  public  park. 

The  Society  is  now  engaged  in  the  preparation  of  an  archeological 
atlas  of  Ohio,  arranged  by  counties;  and  in  1907  it  will  make  an 
archeological  exhibit  at  Jamestown,  Virginia,  on  the  occasion  of  the 
celebration  of  the  founding  of  the  Virginia  colony. 

A  bill  was  introduced  at  the  last  session  of  the  legislature  appro- 
priating $400,000  for  a  new  building  for  a  home  for  the  Society  and 
the  Ohio  State  Library.  This  bill  was  favorably  reported,  but, 
coming  as  it  did  at  the  close  of  the  session,  was  recommended  to  lie 
over  to  the  next  session,  when  it  will  come  up  for  action.  The 
Sodety  contemplates  building  an  archeological  museum  of  Ohio 
remains ;  no  effort  will  be  made  to  collect  material  pertaining  to 
any  other  state. 

Wisconsin  Archeological  Society 

The  Wisconsin  Archeological  Society  was  organized  in  1899 
and  in  1903  was  incorporated  under  the  laws  of  the  state.  The 
purpose  of  this  organization  is  to  encourage  the  preservation  and 
the  intelligent  study  of  Wisconsin  antiquities.  For  many  years 
previous  to  its  organization  the  interest  in  these  was  confined  to 
only  a  scattered  few  of  the  citizens.  Though  frequently  appealed 
to,  the  state  government  had  manifested  but  little  interest  in  the 
conser\'ation  of  its  aboriginal  monuments  or  in  the  collection  of  in- 
formation concerning  them,  hence  these  were  left  almost  completely 
at  the  mercy  of  curiosity  seekers  and  of  persons  ignorant  of  their 
scientific  or  educational  value.  Moreover,  but  few  of  the  educa- 
tional institutions  of  the  state  had  manifested  more  than  the  slightest 
interest,  some  of  these  even  neglecting  to  care  for  ancient  works 
located  upon  their  own  premises.  It  was  left  to  a  few  enthusiastic 
and  self-sacrificing  students  here  and  there,  and  working  generally 
quite  independently  of  one  another,  to  continue  in  limited  areas 
the  earlier  surveys  and  researches  of  Lapham  and  his  co-workers. 
In  recent  years  some  valuable  researches  were  conducted  by  the 
United   States    government,   these   being   confined    chiefly  to    the 


512  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

southwestern  part  of  the  state.  The  results  of  these  were  published 
and  have  since  served  to  create  additional  interest. 

Thousands  of  Wisconsin's  valuable  archeological  treasures  in 
clay,  stone,  and  metal,  which  should  have  been  preserved  in  the 
educational  institutions  of  the  state,  through  this  lack  of  local  inter- 
est found  their  way  instead  into  the  hands  of  dealers  in  Indian 
**  relics  "  and  other  commercially  inclined  persons,  and  of  tourists  and 
summer  residents,  and  were  thus  scattered  far  and  wide  throughout 
the  country.  This  ever-increasing  traffic  became  in  time  a  positive 
menace  to  the  study  of  Wisconsin  archeology.  The  State  Histor- 
ical Society  and  one  or  two  other  local  institutions  alone  attempted 
to  assemble  representative  collections. 

With  the  organization  of  the  Wisconsin  Archeological  Society 
there  has  come  as  the  result  of  organized  effort  a  gradual  awaken- 
ing of  popular  interest  in  these  matters.  Beginning  \^'ith  a  mere 
handful  of  intelligent  and  enthusiastic  workers,  the  Society  now  has 
a  membership  of  more  than  500,  including  many  of  the  state's  most 
prominent  educators  and  other  influential  and  honored  citizens. 
These  are  scattered  through  nearly  every  Wisconsin  county  and  all 
are  in  some  way  or  other  assisting  in  its  labors  and  working  under 
its  direction. 

The  following  is  a  brief  resume  of  some  of  the  more  important 
work  accomplished  by  the  Wisconsin  Archeological  Society  in  the 
cause  of  the  advancement  of  archeology  in  the  last  years  of  its 
existence : 

The  rapid  destruction  and  obliteration  of  Wisconsin's  antiquities, 
owing  to  the  cultivation  of  lands,  the  construction  of  highways  and 
railroads,  the  growth  of  cities  and  towns,  and  other  causes,  have 
made  most  necessary  the  conducting  of  surface  surveys  and  re- 
searches in  fields  still  available.  Under  the  direction  of  the  Arche- 
ological Society  such  work  has  been  in  progress  for  several  years  in 
various  parts  of  the  state.  In  several  counties  the  investigations 
have  already  been  completed  and  the  results  published.  Others 
await  publication  or  are  still  in  progress.  In  other  districts  a  large 
amount  of  valuable  data  has  been  collected.  Each  year  the  number 
of  competent  and  willing  volunteer  field  workers  is  increasing.  Not 
a  few  of  these  have  received  special   training  at  various  educational 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  513 

institutions  giving  archeological  instruction  and  many  more  at  the 
hands  of  the  Society  itself.  Their  reports  are  carefully  criticized  and 
helpful  literature  is  furnished  as  required.  From  other  workers, 
less  advanced,  many  clues  and  other  data  of  value  to  future  workers 
or  expeditions  are  received. 

Fine  groups  of  Indian  mounds  have  already  been  preserved  on 
the  grounds  of  the  University  of  Wisconsin,  of  Beloit  and  Carroll 
colleges,  in  Smith  Park  at  Menasha,  in  Myrick  Park  at  La  Crosse, 
in  Mound  Cemetery  at  Racine,  and  in  several  other  localities  in  the 
state.  Through  the  activity  and  encouragement  of  the  Wisconsin 
Society  and  of  the  cooperating  Landmarks  Committee  other  mounds 
are  being  preserved  and  appropriately  marked.  Recently  there 
have  been  thus  secured  from  destruction  fine  groups  in  Cutler  Park 
at  Waukesha  and  in  the  State  Fair  Park  at  West  AUis.  The  ladies 
of  Fort  Atkinson  have  leased  a  plot  of  ground  upon  which  is 
situated  perhaps  the  only  intaglio  effigy  mound  still  existing  in  the 
state.  At  the  Society's  request,  the  Wisconsin  Central  Railway,  one 
of  the  important  lines  of  the  state,  has  agreed  to  preserve  and  to 
protect  a  series  of  beautiful  large  conical  mounds  situated  along  its 
right-of-way  on  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Buffalo.  It  appreciates  the 
scenic  and  historical  value  of  these  earthen  monuments.  The 
Society  has  secured  also  the  right  to  protect  from  mutilation  and  to 
use  for  school  instruction  purposes  an  interesting  group  of  effigy 
mounds  conveniently  situated  on  the  upper  Milwaukee  river.  It  is 
desired  to  secure  these  permanently.  At  the  coming  session  of  the 
state  legislature  the  appointment  of  a  commission  to  consider  the 
preservation  and  parking  of  the  yet  remaining  earthworks  at  old 
Aztalan  will  be  asked  for.  The  preservation  of  other  works,  includ- 
ing the  celebrated  Man  mound  near  Baraboo,  will  probably  be 
secured  through  local  interest,  in  the  near  future. 

Nearly  all  of  the  prominent  educational  institutions  of  the  state 
are  now  cooperating  with  the  Society,  and  by  its  advice  and  with  its 
assistance  important  archeological  collections  are  now  being  assem- 
bled in  some  of  them.  In  this  laudable  movement  Beloit  College  is 
in  advance  of  all  others.  Recent  purchases  of  two  of  the  most 
valuable  Wisconsin  cabinets  have  made  its  collections  probably  the 
most  extensive  and  valuable  in  the  state.     At  St  Francis  Seminary 


$14  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

and  Milwaukee-Downer  College  good  collections  are  being  as- 
sembled. Ripon  College  and  Lawrence  University  are  making  prep- 
arations to  increase  the  educational  value  of  their  present  inextensive 
collections  by  the  acquirement  of  others.  With  the  completion  of 
the  new  Rankin  Science  Hall  at  Carroll  College  important  collec- 
tions will  be  installed.  Several  members  of  the  Society  will  also 
there  deposit  cabinets  owned  by  them.  At  Marquette  College  the 
establishment  of  a  collection  is  being  considered. 

As  a  result  of  the  continued  agitation,  it  having  been  pointed 
out  that  these  institutions  are  convenient  places  for  the  preservation 
of  valuable  local  archeological  materials,  collections  have  been  in- 
stalled in  public  libraries  at  Green  Bay,  Menasha,  Oshkosh,  Fond  du 
Lac,  Racine,  and  elsewhere  in  the  state.  At  Oshkosh,  the  museum 
established  in  connection  with  the  library  has  received  an  added  im- 
petus by  the  securing  of  a  noted  collection.  At  Sheboygan,  plans 
for  the  establishment  of  a  museum  auxiliary  in  connection  with  the 
local  library  are  being  pushed  by  members  of  the  Society,  who  will 
there  place  collections  now  belonging  to  them.  The  Sauk  County 
Historical  Society  is  installing  an  already  valuable  collection  in  the 
city  hall  at  Baraboo.  To  this  various  residents  of  the  county  are 
donating  specimens. 

The  Wisconsin  Society  has  no  present  intention  of  founding  an 
archeological  museum  of  its  own,  such  collections  and  specimens  as 
it  secures  being  placed  in  the  care  and  keeping  of  various  deserving 
institutions.  Many  public-spirited  Wisconsin  collectors  are  coop- 
erating with  the  Society  by  placing  their  collections  or  duplicate 
materials  at  its  disposal.  Others  have  indicated  that  they  will  do 
so  in  the  near  future. 

Beloit  College  is  the  only  Wisconsin  institution  of  learning  now 
offering  a  course  in  American  archeology.  This  year  40  students 
attended  the  lectures.  Several  years  ago  Wisconsin  Universit}'  un- 
dertook to  establish  such  a  course,  but  the  instructor  in  charge  be- 
came ill  and  has  not  yet  been  replaced.  Courses  in  classical 
archeology  are  given  in  several  other  institutions  in  the  state.  Dur- 
ing the  present  year  an  attempt  will  be  made  to  secure  the  introduc- 
tion of  full  courses  in  American  archeology  into  at  least  several  of 
the  normal  schools  of  the  state.     At  Green  Bay,  a  school  collection 


RECEXT  PROGRESS  AV  ANTHROPOLOGY  515 

is  being  circulated  by  a  member  of  the  Society.  At  Milwaukee  the 
Museum  also  circulates  such  collections,  and  lectures  on  local  arche- 
ology are  given  by  the  public  school  instructor. 

During  eight  months  in  the  year  the  Wisconsin  Society  holds 
public  meetings  at  which  lectures  and  talks  on  local  and  American 
archeology  are  given  by  prominent  members  and  educators.  These 
are  usually  very  well  attended  and  have  already  done  much  to 
awaken  an  additional  interest  in  the  Wisconsin  movement.  During 
the  summer  months  field  meetings  are  frequently  held  and  practical 
instruction  in  field  work  is  given. 

On  May  26  of  the  present  year  the  first  state  assembly  of  the 
Wisconsin  Society  was  held  at  Carroll  College,  Waukesha.  The 
program  was  devoted  to  addresses  by  leading  archeologists  and  edu- 
cators, pilgrimages  to  local  mounds  and  sites,  to  special  exhibits,  and 
to  the  unveiling  by  the  Waukesha  Women's  Club  of  an  explanatory 
bronze  tablet  on  the  site  of  one  of  the  most  prominent  local  mounds. 
This  gathering  of  members  and  affiliated  societies  was  so  well 
attended  and  successful  that  these  assemblies  will  be  made  a  per- 
manent feature.  On  September  3-4  a  similar  gathering  with  ap- 
propriate exercises  was  held  at  Menasha  in  the  historic  Fox  River 
valley,  in  another  part  of  the  state.  At  their  request  speakers  are 
often  furnished  by  the  Society  to  various  societies  and  educational 
institutions  throughout  Wisconsin. 

At  the  1905  Wisconsin  State  Fair,  the  Society  caused  to  be  made 
an  archeological  exhibit  along  educational  lines  in  connection  with 
which  were  displayed  hundreds  of  specimens,  photographs,  casts, 
surveys,  charts,  and  maps.  It  was  visited  by  a  very  large  number 
of  people  during  the  course  of  the  Fair  and  was  productive  of  great 
interest.  At  this  year's  Fair,  a  typical  village  of  Wisconsin  Ojibwa 
Indians  was  erected  on  the  grounds  as  an  educational  feature.  For 
this  purpose  the  sum  of  S2000  was  contributed  by  the  State  Fair 
Board  and  Milwaukee  business  men.  An  open-air  meeting  was 
also  held  among  the  mounds  on  the  Fair  grounds. 

The  official  organ  of  the  Society  is  the  Wisconsin  Archcologist^  a 
quarterly  bulletin,  now  printed  under  state  auspices,  which  reaches 
every  educational  institution  and  public  library  in  the  state  as  well 
as  the  reading  tables  of  the  leading  institutions  of  learning,  public 


5l6  AAfERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

libraries,  and  scientific  and  historical  societies  of  the  United  States. 
Five  volumes  of  this  well  illustrated  and  interesting  publication  have 
now  been  issued. 

Among  the  more  notable  of  the  Society's  recent  contributions 
to  archeological  knowledge  may  be  mentioned :  "  The  Native 
Copper  Implements  and  Ornaments  of  Wisconsin,"  **  Potsherds 
from  Lake  Michigan  Shore  Sites,"  "  Summary  of  the  Archeology 
of  Winnebago  County,"  "The  Aboriginal  Pipes  of  Wisconsin,"  and 
the  **  Summary  of  the  Antiquities  of  Eastern  Sauk  County."  There 
is  now  in  press  a  "  Record  of  Wisconsin  Antiquities,"  in  which  will 
be  given  in  abstract  form  a  complete  list,  with  references  to  the  liter- 
ature, of  the  antiquities  of  seventy  Wisconsin  counties.  This  will 
prove  invaluable  to  the  Wisconsin  student  and  as  a  basis  for  future 
research. 

With  the  aid  of  the  Wisconsin  Free  Library  Commission, 
traveling  libraries  of  historical  and  archeological  literature  are  being 
circulated  in  the  state.  Thousands  of  pamphlets,  circulars,  and 
books  have  also  been  distributed  by  the  Society  to  students  and 
public  institutions.  The  State  Historical  Society  has  also  recently 
published  a  Landmarks  leaflet.  Articles  on  Wisconsin  archeology 
and  the  local  movement  have  appeared  in  various  magazines  and  in 
the  reports  and  transactions  of  scientific  societies.  Through  these 
various  channels  archeological  literature  is  now  being  placed  at  the 
command  of  all  residents  of  the  state.  The  traffic  in  archeological 
materials  is  being  discouraged  and  the  manufacture  and  sale  of 
fraudulent  antiquities  are  diminishing  under  the  Society's  surveil- 
lance. 

The  Society  owes  its  present  success  to  the  activity  and  interest 
of  its  ever-increasing  number  of  members  and  patrons  and  to  the 
intelligent  cooperation  of  the  Landmarks  Committee.  Its  needs  are 
the  same  as  those  of  every  active  educational  organization  of  its  kind 
in  the  country.  Up  to  the  present  time  support  has  come  almost 
entirely  from  its  own  membership.  With  but  small  means  at  its 
command  it  has  already  accomplished  much.  Additional  funds  for 
the  prosecution  of  field  work  and  researches  along  special  lines, 
for  the  purchase  of  collections,  and  for  other  necessary  work  are 
required. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  ^\^ 

Public  Museum  of  the  City  of  Milwaukee 

For  the  last  twenty-four  years  this  Museum  has  exhibited  a 
steadily  augmenting  series  illustrative  of  man  and  his  works.  Inas- 
much as  a  curator  has  never  been  employed  especially  for  the 
Anthropological  department,  the  growth  has  been  uneven  and  not 
altogether  systematic. 

The  collections  at  present  consist  of  casts  of  the  more  important 
remains  of  primitive  man ;  several  unmounted  American  racial  skele- 
tons ;  mounted  skeletons  of  Europeans ;  casts  of  a  series  of  skulls  of 
races  with  casts  of  brain  cavities  of  some  of  these ;  a  number  of 
North  American  Indian  skulls ;  a  series  of  about  fifty  portrait  busts 
of  various  races  of  the  globe ;  two  life-size  pictorial  groups ;  a  series 
of  46  "  eoliths  *'  from  Kent,  England ;  a  series  of  about  one  thousand 
implements,  cores,  etc.,  from  several  of  the  more  important  caves 
of  France ;  several  hundred  implements  and  other  artifacts,  etc., 
from  the  Swiss  lake-dwellings ;  a  considerable  series  of  objects  in 
stone  and  clay  from  various  ruins  of  Mexico ;  a  small  series  of 
Egyptian  objects,  containing  two  mummies  with  their  coffins  and  one 
mummy  portrait  in  wax  and  distemper,  from  the  Greco-Roman 
period ;  scattering  collections  illustrating  the  archeology  of  other 
peoples,  and  a  fairly  strong  collection  of  stone  and  copper  imple- 
ments, pottery,  etc.,  of  the  mound-building,  cliff-dwelling,  and  other 
North  American  Indians.  Of  recent  artifacts  there  are  fair  series 
from  various  North  American  tribes,  including  the  western  Eskimo, 
together  with  some  five  hundred  objects  from  the  Filipinos,  a  con- 
siderable series  from  the  Congo  negroes,  and  lesser  ones  from  many 
other  places. 

A  special  gift,  kept  separate  from  the  main  exhibit,  is  the  Nun- 
nemacher  collection  which,  with  a  considerable  sum  of  money  for  its 
increase,  was  bequeathed  to  the  Museum.  It  consists  of  an  impor- 
tant series  of  arms  and  armor,  containing  a  fine  series  of  hand  guns 
and  pistols  (exhibiting  their  development  from  the  earliest  to  the 
latest  types),  porcelain,  pewter,  ivories,  bronzes,  and  numerous  other 
articles  representing  the  arts  of  various  races  at  various  periods. 
Taken  together  more  than  thirty  thousand  anthropological  speci- 
mens are  shown  in  the  Museum.  In  some  instances  these  are 
exhibited  in  carefully  labeled  series  with  a  view  to  conveying  as 


Sl8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

much  information  as  possible,  but  the  labeling  is  as  yet  very  in- 
complete. 

In  addition  to  the  inspection  and  occasional  study  of  this  ma- 
terial by  the  casual  visitor,  some  of  it  is  used  before  classes  from  the 
grammar  schools  of  the  city  by  the  Museum  lecturer,  in  the  school 
room  maintained  in  the  building.  From  time  to  time  special  lectures 
are  given  to  normal  school  classes  by  the  director  of  the  Museum. 
Several  series  of  specimens  illustrative  of  the  arts  of  the  prehistoric 
Indians  of  Wisconsin  have  been  prepared  and  are  circulated  among 
the  grammar  schools  of  the  city.  Specimens  of  Indian  copper  work 
and  of  pipes  have  been  used  for  the  illustration  of  articles  pub- 
lished in  the  Wisconsin  Archeologist  and  the  Bulletin  of  the  Wis- 
consin Natural  History  Society.  As  the  Museum  has  no  publica- 
tion other  than  its  annual  report,  it  has  taken  no  official  part  in 
publishing. 

Recently  the  trustees  of  the  Museum  have  come  into  a  consid- 
erable annual  appropriation,  a  definite  percentage  on  the  assessed 
valuation  of  the  city,  for  the  making  and  maintenance  of  an  historical 
museum.  It  is  the  intention  to  make  this  an  anthropological  mu- 
seum  in  its  broad  sense.  However,  the  income  of  several  years  will 
be  required  for  the  purchase  of  more  ground  and  the  erection  of 
a  large  addition  to  the  present  building.  It  is  intended  that, 
when  this  income  shall  be  available  for  the  collection  proper,  the 
department  shall  be  properly  organized  and  important  researches 

carried  on. 

Minnesota  Historical  Society 

An  extensive  archeological  collection  was  donated  to  this  So- 
ciety in  November,  1905,  by  Rev.  Edward  C.  Mitchell,  D.D.,  a 
member  of  the  Society's  council  and  chairman  of  its  museum  com- 
mittee. The  collection  is  displayed  for  the  benefit  of  the  public,  in 
fourteen  large  glass  cases  of  the  museum,  adjoining  the  Historical 
Library,  in  the  new  capitol.  It  consists  of  aboriginal  implements, 
weapons,  and  ornaments,  which  had  been  gathered  by  Dr  Mitchell, 
during  his  residence  of  thirty-three  years  in  St  Paul,  from  nearly 
every  state  and  territory  of  the  Union,  and  to  a  smaller  extent  from 
many  foreign  countries.  This  donation  comprises  21,500  objects  of 
stone,  bone,  shell,  horn,  copper,  pottery,  and  a  few  of  brass,  lead,  iron. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOL OGY  5  1 9 

glass,  and  wood.  Dr  Mitcheirs  collections  from  Minnesota  are  in 
two  cases,  presenting  a  very  great  variety  of  stone  axes,  hatchets, 
chisels,  knives,  spearheads,  arrowheads,  etc. ;  a  fine  series  of  pot- 
tery vessels,  bone  and  copper  implements,  and  fifteen  skulls,  ex- 
humed from  aboriginal  mounds.  From  Wisconsin  there  are  two 
cases,  containing,  besides  many  stone  implements,  a  large  number 
of  copper  implements  and  ornaments.  Masses  of  copper  are  ex- 
hibited as  mined  by  the  Indians  in  the  region  of  Lake  Superior  or 
as  found  by  them  in  the  glacial  drift  or  on  its  surface.  Various 
specimens  illustrate  the  process  of  working  the  copper  from  its  or- 
iginal masses  to  the  finished  knife,  spearhead,  or  other  article  of 
use  or  ornament.  In  the  Ohio  case  one  of  the  shelves  displays  a 
remarkable  cache,  or  hidden  hoard,  of  192  thin,  finely  chipped, 
flint  spearheads  or  knives,  nearly  alike  in  form  but  differing  in  size, 
which  were  found  together  in  Fulton  county.  From  Arkansas  and 
from  Arizona  are  many  fine  specimens  of  Indian  pottery,  as  bowls, 
vases,  and  bottles ;  and  from  Alaska,  very  interesting  articles  ol 
horn,  ivory,  and  bone. 

Other  important  archeological  collections  also  had  been  brought 
together  for  this  Society  by  the  late  Hon.  J.  V.  Brower,  a  member 
of  the  council  and  former  chairman  of  its  museum  committee,  who 
died  June  i,  1905.  This  material  comprises  a  vast  number  of  speci- 
mens, in  all  exceeding  100,000,  of  stone  implements  and  weapons, 
flakes,  bone  and  copper  ornaments,  pottery,  etc.,  partly  from  the 
modem  Indians  and  partly  from  the  ancient  mounds  throughout 
Minnesota  and  the  region  reaching  west  to  the  Rocky  mountains 
and  south  to  Kansas.  The  collections  made  by  Mr  Brower,  and 
his  field  notes,  with  the  large  series  of  field  notes  and  maps  made 
by  the  late  Alfred  J.  Hill  aided  by  Professor  T.  H.  Lewis,  relating 
chiefly  to  the  aboriginal  mounds  of  Minnesota  and  adjoining  states, 
are  now  being  worked  over  by  Professor  N.  H.  Winchell  for  the 
Society. 

The  most  valuable  portions  of  these  collections  are  designed  to  be 
displayed  in  five  cases  in  the  archeological  museum  in  the  new  cap- 
itol.  F*rom  the  notes  and  maps  Professor  Winchell  has  in  prepara- 
tion a  volume  on  **  The  Archeology  of  Minnesota,*'  which  had  been 
planned  by  Mr  Brower,  to  be  published  by  the  Minnesota  Historical 


520  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Society  in  its  series  of  Historical  Collections,  It  should  be  added  that 
considerable  portions  of  Mr  Brower's  archeological  explorations 
and  studies  were  published  by  him  in  a  series  of  quarto  volumes^ 
entitled  **  Memoirs  of  Explorations  in  the  Basin  of  the  Mississippi.'* 
The  secretary  and  librarian  of  the  Society  is  Mr  Warren  Upham. 

Iowa  Anthropological  Association 
In  October,  1903,  The  Iowa  Anthropological  Association  was 
formed  at  Iowa  City  with  twenty-eight  charter  members.  In  Feb- 
ruary following  it  held  its  first  yearly  meeting,  at  which  the  field  of 
anthropology  was  discussed  by  various  speakers  and  the  relations 
thereof  to  geology,  mineralogy,  archeology,  biology,  sociology,  edu- 
cation, and  history  were  shown.  Since  then  two  annual  sessions 
have  been  held.  From  the  first  the  meetings  of  the  Association  have 
been  well  attended,  while  those  that  took  place  in  1906  were  crowded. 
The  principal  topics  considered  at  the  yearly  meeting  of  1905  — 
those  bearing  most  directly  on  the  particular  field  covered  by  the 
Association  —  were  the  Okoboji  Mound  people  in  connection  with 
the  investigation  of  the  mound  and  the  finds  made  therein  by  Dr 
Duren  J.  H.  Ward,  and  anthropological  work  for  Iowa.  Attention 
was  given  also  to  phases  of  archeology  in  Europe  and  in  Japan, 
and  the  Association  was  informed  as  to  the  state  of  this  science  at 
Harvard  University. 

The  yearly  meeting  of  1906  was  held  under  the  joint  auspices 
of  the  State  Historical  Society  and  the  Anthropological  Association. 
"The  Meskwaki  Indians"  (popularly  known  as  the  Foxes)  was  the 
chief  topic  presented,  and  this  was  discussed  at  some  length  in  con- 
nection with  the  able  papers  read  before  the  meeting  which  dealt 
with  various  phases  of  the  history  and  life  of  these  Indians. 

The  officers  of  the  Anthropological  Association  for  the  current 
year  are  :    President,  Benj.   F.  Shambaugh ;    vice-president,  J.   H. 
Paarmann ;  secretary,  Duren  J.  H.  Ward ;  treasurer,  Frederick  E. 
Bolton  ;  executive  board  —  additional,  Frederick  J.  Becker,  Willian* 
J.  Brady,  Isaac  A.  Loos,  Frank  A.  Wilder,  and  B.  Shimek. 

State  Historical  Society  of  Iowa 

The  work  of  the  State  Historical  Society  of  Iowa  along  anthro- 
pological lines,  since   1902,  consists  of  (i)  an  anthropological  sur- 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  $21 

vey  of  a  portion  of  the  state,  and  (2)  an  investigation  of  the  Mes- 
kwaki  Indians  at  Tama,  Iowa.  An  account  of  the  anthropological 
survey  is  given  in  the  January,  1904,  number  of  The  Iowa  Journal 
of  History  and  Politics  under  the  title  of  '*  Some  Iowa  Mounds  — 
an  Anthropological  Survey."  Some  of  the  results  of  the  Mes- 
kwaki  investigation  are  given  in  the  April,  1906,  number  of  the  same 
journal  under  the  titles  of  **  Meskwakia"  and  "The  Meskwaki 
People  of  To-day."  Other  contributions  to  The  Iowa  Journal  of 
History  and  Politics  of  an  anthropological  character  are  :  "  Histor- 
ico-Anthropological  Possibilities  in  Iowa,"  January,  1903  ;  **  Anthro- 
pological Instruction  in  Iowa,"  July,  1903;  "  First  Yearly  Meeting 
of  the  Iowa  Anthropological  Association,"  July,  1904;  '*The 
Problem  of  the  Mounds,"  January,  1905;  **  Second  Yearly  Meet- 
ing of  the  Iowa  Anthropological  Association,"  July,  1905.  These 
contributions,  as  well  as  the  anthropological  investigations,  were 
made  by  Dr  Duren  J.  H.  Ward. 

From  the  work  on  the  Okoboji  mound  and  among  the  Mes- 
kwaki  extensive   additions  were   made  to  the  collections  of  the 

Society. 

Other  Iowa  Institutions 

As  a  study  anthropology  has  not  been  regularly  introduced  into 
any  educational  institution  in  Iowa.  Professor  Shambaugh  gives 
each  year  a  series  of  lectures  on  the  elements  of  anthropology  as 
an  introduction  to  work  in  the  Department  of  Political  Science  in  the 
State  University.  Professors  Loos  and  Bolton  also  devote  some 
attention  to  it  as  a  background  for  certain  features  of  their  depart- 
ments of  Sociology  and  Education  respectively.  During  the  uni- 
versity year  1905-06  Dr  Ward  gave  two  free  courses,  one  in 
anthropology  and  one  in  ethnology — seventy-tvvo  lectures  in  all — 
to  students  of  the  University,  which  were  allowed  to  count  as  regu- 
lar academic  work.  These  lectures  outlining  the  two  sciences  were 
well  attended  by  students. 

The  Davenport  Academy  of  Sciences  is  slowly  adding  to  its 
very  valuable  collection  of  anthropological  material.  This  consists 
of  mound  and  other  Indian  relics,  and  foreign  and  American  jour- 
nals and  books.  Each  year  the  Academy  has  one  or  more  lectures 
of  an  anthropological  character  in  its  public  courses.     In  the  course 

AM.   ANTH..   N.   S..  8 — 34. 


522  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

of  1905  Rev.  S.  p.  Vemer  appeared  before  the  Academy  with  one 
of  the  African  pigmies  whom  he  had  exhibited  at  the  Lousiana  Pur- 
chase Exposition  in  St  Louis.  His  lecture  attracted  wide  atten- 
tion. In  the  course  for  1906  Dr  Ward  gave  an  illustrated  lecture 
on  the  Meskwaki,  the  interest  in  which  was  increased  by  the  pres- 
ence of  four  fully-costumed  members  of  the  tribe. 

The  Sioux  City  Academy  of  Science  and  Letters  is  making  a 
collection  of  anthropological  objects  and  is  discussing  the  possibility 
of  lectures  on  the  science. 

American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science 

The  winter  meeting  of  Section  H  (Anthropology)  of  the 
American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science  for  1902— 
03  was  held  in  Washington,  D.  C,  beginning  late  in  December 
and  extending  into  the  new  year.  The  vice-presidential  address 
was  given  by  Mr  Stewart  Culin,  the  title  being  *'  America  the  Cra- 
dle of  Asia.'*  The  American  Anthropological  Association  and  the 
American  Folk-Lore  Society  affiliated  with  Section  H,  and  the  gen- 
eral report  of  the  meeting  was  published  in  Science^  February  20, 
1903.  The  address  of  the  vice-president  is  published  in  the  annual 
report  of  the  Association. 

The  1903-04  meeting  was  held  in  St  Louis  during  Convocation 
Week  of  that  year,  the  American  Anthropological  Association 
affiliating.  The  address  of  the  retiring  vice-president,  Dr  George 
A.  Dorsey,  was  entitled  "The  Future  of  the  Indian.*'  The 
record  of  this  meeting  was  published  in  Scicjice,  March  18,  1905. 

The  meeting  of  1904-05  was  held  in  Philadelphia,  with  the 
American  Anthropological  Association  and  the  American  Folk- 
Lore  Society  affiliating.  The  address  of  the  retiring  vice-presi- 
dent. Professor  Marshall  H.  Saville,  was  entitled  **  Mexican  and 
Central  American  Archeology."  The  record  of  the  meeting  ap- 
pears in  Science,  March  24,  1905. 

The  meeting  of  1905—06  was  held  in  New  Orleans.  Owing 
to  the  fact  that  the  American  Anthropological  Association  was  in 
session  in  Ithaca,  N.  Y.,  at  the  same  time,  section  H  was  meagerly 
represented.  A  business  meeting  was  held  and  the  council  con- 
cluded to  print  the  address  of  the  retiring  vice-president,  Dr  Wal- 


RECENl  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  $23 

ter  Hough,  on  "  Pueblo  Environment'*     This  address  was  pub- 
lished in  Science,  June  8,  1906. 

Section  H  did  not  participate  in  the  meeting  held  at  Ithaca, 
N.  Y.,'June  28  to  July  3,  1906,  it  being  deemed  inadvisable  to 
hold  a  meeting  at  that  time  in  view  of  the  fact  that  many  of  the 
members  would  wish  to  present  papers  before  the  Fifteenth  session 
of  the  International  Congress  of  Americanists  and  also  at  the  regu- 
lar meeting  in  New  York  during  the  coming  winter. 

The  Wyoming  Historical  and  Geological  Society 

The  Wyoming  Historical  and  Geological  Society  has  its  home 
at  Wilkes-Barre,  in  Wyoming  valley,  Pennsylvania,  where  it  is 
housed  in  its  own  handsome  brick  building,  provided  under  the  will 
of  the  late  Isaac  S.  Osterhout. 

The  Society  was  organized  in  1858  and  at  present  has  a  mem- 
bership of  about  325,  of  whom  134  are  life  members,  having  paid 
the  required  fee  of  $\qo. 

Besides  the  departments  of  History  and  Geology  the  Society  has 
an  Archeological  department.  The  archeological  collections  con- 
tain about  30,000  specimens,  principally  of  the  stone  age,  which 
are  displayed  in  glass-covered  cases.  These  collections  are  rather 
unique  in  being  composed  almost  entirely  of  specimens  from  the 
Susquehanna  River  region  and  northeastern  Pennsylvania,  to  which 
localities  the  Society  directs  special  attention.  There  is  also  a  spe- 
cial archeological  library  for  working  purposes  and  an  ethnological 
fund  for  making  further  additions  to  collections. 

The  Society  has  published  nine  volumes  of  annual  Proceedings, 
containing  only  original  matter,  besides  numerous  pamphlets ;  it 
now  publishes  a  volume  each  year.  Among  the  articles  published 
on  archeology  are :  *'  Description  of  Indian  Earthenware  in  the 
Collection  of  the  Society,"  and  "  Report  on  Pottery  of  the  Athens, 
Pa.,  Locality,"  by  Harrison  Wright,  Ph.D. ;  *'  Report  on  Susque- 
hanna River  Shell  Heaps,"  by  M.  A.  Sheldon  Reynolds  ;  **  Silver 
and  Copper  Medals  Presented  to  the  American  Indians  by  Sover- 
eigns of  England,  France  and  Spain,"  by  Rev.  Horace  E.  Hay  den  ; 
**  Early  Smoking  Pipes  of  the  North  American  Indians,"  by  A.  F. 
Berlin  ;  "  Remains  of  the  Stone  Age  in  Wyoming  Valley  and  along 


524  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  Susquehanna  River  '*  and  *'  Aboriginal  Pottery  of  the  Wyoming 
Valley-Susquehanna  River  Region,*'  by  Christopher  Wren.  The 
Society  has  issued  also  "Reports  on  the  Frontier  Forts  of  the  Re- 
gion, Prior  to  1783,"  by  M.  A.  Sheldon  Reynolds,  and  Capt.  John 
M.  Buckalew,  of  the  Pennsylvania  State  Commission,  and  members 
of  the  Society. 

The  rooms  of  the  Society  are  open  free  to  the  public  on  every 
week  day;  during  the  year  1905  there  were  6,500  visitors,  the 
number  increasing  each  year.  It  is  the  effort  of  the  officers  and 
members  of  the  Society  to  have  it  fill  the  place  of  an  educational 
institution  in  the  special  fields  which  it  covers,  and  the  general 
public  is  coming  to  appreciate  it  more  and  more  in  that  sense. 
Rev.  Horace  E.  Hayden  is  the  corresponding  secretary  and 
librarian,  and  Mr  Christopher  Wren  fills  the  office  of  curator  of 
archeology. 

The  Delaware  County  Institute  of  Science 

The  scientific  work  of  this  Institute,  whose  headquarters  are  at 
Media,  Pa.,  consists  of  lectures  and  of  articles  published  in  its  Proceed- 
ings. Among  the  original  anthropological  work  to  which  the  Insti- 
tute lays  claim  is  the  taking  of  a  number  of  excellent  photographs 
of  El  Morro,  or  Inscription  Rock,  in  New  Mexico,  by  Homer  E. 
Hoopes,  with  new  and  corrected  translations  by  Henry  L.  Broomall. 
A  valuable  find  of  Indian  relics  along  the  river  bank  in  the  city 
of  Chester,  Pennsylvania,  has  been  made  by  T.  Chalkley  Palmer, 
the  results  of  which  have  been  published  by  the  Institute  in  its  Pro- 
ceedings and  the  collections  deposited  in  its  museum.  The  Institute 
has  also  a  quite  complete  collection  of  local  Indian  relics.  Beyond 
this  its  work  has  been  confined  to  the  re -arrangement  and  re -pres- 
entation of  matter  already  known.  The  recent  articles  and  lectures 
on  anthropological  subjects  with  which  the  Institute  has  been  con- 
cerned are :  **  The  Great  Wall  of  China,"  by  Jacob  B.  Brown  ; 
**  Significance  of  Errors  in  Speech,"  by  Henry  L.  Broomall ;  '*  The 
Pueblo  Indians  and  the  Enchanted  Mesa,"  **  The  Hopi  Indians  and 
the  Snake  Dance,"  **  Hopi  and  Navaho  Indians"  —  three  lectures 
by  Homer  E.  Hoopes;  "  Russia,"  by  Jacob  B.  Brown;  "  Errors  of 
Speech,"  by  Henry  L.  Broomall  ;  "  Japan,"  by  Professor  Hondo,  of 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  52$ 

Tokio ;  **  The  Conflict  of  Languages/*  by  Henry  L.  Broomall ; 
"The  Caroline  Islands,"  by  Dr  Furness  ;  "Italy,"  by  Dr  A.  R. 
Easby;  **The  Origin  of  Language'*  and  "The  Material  of  Lan- 
guage"—  two  lectures,  by  Henry  L.  Broomall ;  "The  Campanile," 
by  Jacob  B.  Brown,  and  many  others. 

Ethnological  Survey  for  the  Philippine  Islands 

A  bureau  for  ethnological  work  in  the  Philippines  was  organized 
in  Manila  by  the  United  States  Philippine  Commission  in  October, 
1 90 1,  under  the  name  "Bureau  of  Non-Christian  Tribes.'*  In 
August,  1903,  the  name  of  the  Bureau  was  changed  to  "The  Eth- 
nological Survey  for  the  Philippine  Islands,**  and  the  scope  of  the 
work  was  enlarged  to  include  the  so-called  Christian  peoples  as  well 
as  the  Pagans  and  Mohammedans. 

When  the  work  was  organized  it  was  placed  under  the  direction 
of  Dr  D.  P.  Barrows,  who  retained  his  position  as  chief  until  October 
13,  1903,  when  he  resigned.  Dr  Albert  Ernest  Jenks  became  a 
member  of  the  Bureau  in  May,  1902  ;  in  July  he  was  made  ^assistant 
chief,  and  became  chief  October  13,  1903,  on  the  resignation  of  Dr 
Barrows.  Dr  Jenks  resigned  his  position  August  3,  1905.  Dr 
Merton  L.  Miller  entered  the  Bureau  as  assistant  chief  in  January, 
1904,  and  became  acting  chief  in  entire  charge  of  the  work  in  August, 
1905*  on  the  resignation  of  Dr  Jenks.  In  November,  1905,  the 
Survey  became  a  division  of  the  Department  of  Education,  with  Dr 
Miller  as  chief  of  the  division,  which  position  he  still  retains. 

The  work  of  the  Survey  falls  under  four  heads  :  (i)  exploration 
among  the  wild  peoples ;  (2)  investigation  and  report  on  practical 
operations  of  all  legislation  affecting  the  non-Christian  peoples,  and 
recommendation  of  new  legislation  for  such  peoples ;  (3)  publication 
of  scientific  ethnological  data ;  and  (4)  collection  of  ethnological 
museum  specimens. 

The  work  of  exploration  was  decided  on  and  determined  by 
the  enabling  act  which,  in  the  following  language,  clearly  hinted  at 
the  paucity  of  accurate  knowledge  at  hand :  The  Bureau  was  "  to 
conduct  systematic  investigations  with  reference  to  the  non-Christian 
tribes  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  in  order  to  ascertain  the  name  of 
each  tribe,  the  limits  of  the  territory  which  it  occupies,  the  approx- 


526  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

imate  number  of  the  individuals  which  compose  it,  their  social 
organizations,  and  their  languages,  beliefs,  manners,  and  customs," 
etc.  The  scope  of  the  investigations  of  the  Bureau  was  greatly 
enlarged  by  the  act  of  1903,  since  thereafter  the  Bureau  was  to 
"  conduct  systematic  scientific  researches  in  anthropology  and  eth- 
nology among  all  inhabitants  of  the  Philippine  Islands.  The  head 
of  any  department  of  the  Insular  Government  may,  through  the 
Secretary  of  the  Interior,  call  upon  the  Ethnological  Survey  to  make 
investigation  and  report  on  any  matters  referring  to  the  inhabitants 
of  the  Philippines  upon  which  information  is  required." 

Exploring  parties  have  visited  the  aboriginal  Neg^to  peoples 
everywhere  they  are  known  to  exist  in  any  considerable  numbers 
in  the  islands,  except  in  northeastern  Luzon  ;  this  means  explorations 
in  western  and  northern  Luzon,  northern  Mindanao,  and  the  islands 
of  Negros  and  Panay.  The  extensive  mountain  area  of  northern 
Luzon  has  been  penetrated  in  many  places,  although  two  entirely 
new  exploring  trips  must  yet  be  made :  one  along  the  eastern  moun- 
tain range,  the  Sierra  Madre ;  the  other  across  the  Cordillera  Cen- 
tral near  the  northern  part  of  the  island.  The  peoples  visited  in 
this  extensive  mountain  area  are  the  head-hunting  Igorot  —  the 
Bontoc,  Lepanto,  Benguet,  and  Quiangan  —  and  the  Kalinga, 
Tinguian,  and  Ibilao.  The  island  of  Mindoro  has  been  crossed  in 
its  wildest  central  part,  but  only  scant  traces  of  the  timid  Mangiyan 
people  were  found  there.  However  they  hold  the  entire  island, 
except  for  a  few  Christian  Tagalog  people  in  small  villages  on  the 
northern  shores,  and  small  Christian  Visayan  villages  on  the  southern 
shores. 

The  island  of  Paragua  has  been  penetrated  at  several  points,  and 
the  Tagbanua  and  Batak  peoples  visited.  In  Mindanao  exploring 
trips  have  been  made  among  the  wild  Manobo,  Bagobo,  Bilan,  and 
Subano  peoples,  and  the  Montesque  of  the  northern  part.  The 
Maguindanao  Moros  of  the  southern  coast  of  Mindanao  have  been 
visited  and  studied  in  half  a  dozen  places,  as  have  the  Samal  Moros 
of  the  Zamboanga  peninsula.  To  visit  the  peoples  in  Mindanao  two 
trips  have  been  made  southward  up  the  Agusan  river  from  the 
north  coast,  one  journey  turning  eastward  over  the  mountains  to 
the  Pacific  ocean,  the  other  continuing  across  the  island  to  the  Gulf 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  527 

of  Lanao.  The  Lake  Lanao  Moros  were  visited,  for  which  pur- 
pose a  trip  was  made  across  Mindanao  from  south  to  north. 
Misamis  province  has  been  penetrated  deeply  from  the  north  coast 
among  the  wild  mountain  people  and  the  Moros.  The  Yakan 
Moros  of  Basilan  island  have  been  visited  on  both  the  northern  and 
southern  shores ;  and  the  Sulu  Moros  in  the  Jolo  archipelago  have 
been  studied.  Other  smaller  islands  containing  non-Christian 
peoples  have  been  visited,  and  most  of  the  larger  islands,  where 
the  so-called  Christian  culture  is  found,  have  been  touched  in  the 
numerous  journeys  by  members  of  the  Survey. 

The  advisory  administrative  work  of  the  Survey  has  been  varied. 
Numerous  investigations  have  been  made  to  see  that  the  wild  people 
understood  quarantine  restrictions  during  epidemics  ;  to  see  that  they 
were  not  imposed  on  by  officious  native  Christian  or  Mohammedan 
officials ;  and  to  study  the  effect  of  existing  legislation.  Legisla- 
tion has  been  recommended  to  the  Commission  by  the  Survey  and 
several  such  recommendations  have  been  passed  as  acts  by  the 
Commission. 

Until  the  organization  of  the  Moro  province,  June  i,  1903,  under 
General  Leonard  A.  Wood,  all  the  Mohammedan  peoples  were 
under  the  paternal  arm  of  a  resident  member  of  the  Survey  called 
"Agent  for  Moro  Affairs."  When  the  government  for  the  Moro 
province  was  organized,  the  then  agent,  Dr  N.  M.  Saleeby,  was 
rewarded  for  his  good  service  with  appointment  as  superintendent  of 
schools  and  a  member  of  the  provincial  council.  Another  at  one 
time  efficient  member  of  the  Survey,  Mr  William  A.  Reed,  has 
been  governor,  during  the  last  three  years,  of  the  pagan  province  of 
Lepanto-Bontoc. 

The  scientific  publications  of  the  Survey  are  the  following  : 

Vol.  I.    The  Bontoc  Igorot,  by  Dr  Albert  Ernest  Jenks,  p.  1-266,  154  pL,  9 

fig- 

Vol.  II,  part  I.    The  Negritos  of  Zambales,  by  William  Allan  Reed,  p.  1-83, 

62  pi.,  2  fig. 
Vol.  II,  part  II.    The  Nabiloi  Dialect,  by  Prof.  Otto  Scheerer,  p.  85-178,  28 

pi.,  6  fig. 
Vol.  II,  part  III.    The  Batak  of  Palawan,  by  Lieut.  E.  Y.  Miller,  p.  179-199, 

6  pi. 
Vol.  111.    Augustinian  Relations  (Archaic  Spanish  edition),  compiled  by  Father 

Angel  Perez,  p.  1-411,  7  pi. 


528  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Vol.  III.  (In  preparation)  Augustinian  Relations  (English  edition),  compiled 
by  Father  Angel  P^rez. 

Vol.  IV,  part  I.  Studies  in  Moro  History,  I^w  and  Religion  (Maguindanao 
Moros),  by  Dr  N.  M.  Saleeby,  p.  1-107,  16  pi.,  5  diagrams. 

Vol.  IV,  part  II  (in  press).  Studies  similar  to  vol.  iv,  part  i,  on  the  Sulu 
Moros. 

Vol.  V,  part  I  (in  press.)   The  Tinglayan  Igorot,  by  Dr  Daniel  Folkmar. 

Vol.  V,  part  II  (in  preparation).  The  Subano  People,  by  Emerson  B. 
Christie. 

Vol.  VII  (in  preparation),  by  Dr  Merton  L.  Miller,  will  be  a  general  r6sum6 
of  all  ethnological  data  collected  by  the  Survey.  It  will  be  more  compre- 
hensive than  detailed,  and  will  suggest  a  hundred  interesting  and  impor- 
tant ethnological  problems. 

In  October,  1901,  the  Philippine  Museum  of  Ethnology,  Natural 
History,  and  Commerce  was  organized  by  the  Commission  and 
placed  under  the  chief  of  the  Ethnological  Survey  for  administration 
The  museum  collections  of  the  Survey  were  sent  to  the  Philippine 
Exposition  at  St  Louis  in  1904  and  numbered  there  about  18,000 
specimens.  Of  that  number  some  5,000  were  returned  to  Manila 
and  became  the  nucleus  of  an  extensive  collection  which  it  is  hoped 
soon  to  house  in  a  suitable  new  building.  Much  of  the  energy  of 
the  Survey  during  the  years  1903-04  was  expended,  in  connection 
with  the  Philippine  Exposition  Board,  in  gathering  museum  speci- 
mens and  groups  of  native  people  for  the  Exposition.  Represen- 
tative community  groups  of  peoples,  usually  numbering  forty  or 
more  individuals  and  composed  of  families,  were  gathered,  sent  to 
St  Louis,  and  exhibited  at  Government  expense.  The  chief  of  the 
Survey  spent  ten  months  at  St  Louis  in  charge  of  the  museum 
collections.  Among  the  groups  of  peoples  exhibited  were  Christian 
Visayans,  Mohammedan  Lanaos  and  Samals,  and  pagan  Tinguian, 
Mangiyan,  Bontoc  and  Lepanto  Igorot,  Bagobo,  and  Negrito  com- 
munities. 

Regarding  the  future  work  of  the  Ethnological  Survey  the 
Honorable  Dean  C.  Worcester,  Secretary  of  the  Interior,  in  whose 
department  the  Bureau  was  organized  and  where  it  remained  until 
the  retrenchment  act  of  November  3,  1905,  has  the  following  to 
say  in  his  annual  report  for  1905  : 

Supervision  and  control  of  non-Christian  tribes  outside  the  Moro  Province 
has  by  Acts  Nos.  1396  and  1397  been  given  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior, 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  $29 

while  at  the  same  time  the  work  of  the  Ethnological  Survey  has  been  trans- 
ferred to  the  Bureau  of  Education.  This  change  has  been  made  in  order  that 
the  Survey  may  utilize  during  the  vacation  period  of  each  year  the  services  of 
school-teachers  who  are  generally  distributed  throughout  the  archipelago. 
The  new  arrangement  is  open  to  the  objection  that  it  removes  from  the  depart- 
ment charged  with  the  supervision  and  control  of  non-Christian  tribes  the 
only  agency  which  now  exists  for  gathering  information  regarding  them  and 
for  investigating  the  practical  operations  of  the  special  laws  enacted  for  them, 
except  in  so  far  as  investigations  can  be  made  by  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior 
in  person.  It  remains  to  be  seen  whether  the  increased  amount  of  information 
gathered  through  the  bringing  of  school-teachers  under  the  immediate  control 
of  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  Ethnological  Survey  work  will  compensate  for 
the  difficulties  necessarily  involved  in  this  arrangement.  In  view  of  the 
experience  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution  in  attempting  to  use  school-teachers 
for  ethnological  work  in  the  United  States,  I  doubt  the  wisdom  of  the  change, 
which  will,  however,  be  conclusively  determined  by  actual  experience. 

Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop  MuseIjm 

The  Department  of  Ethnology  of  the  Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop 
Museum  of  Polynesian  Ethnology  and  Natural  History,  at  Hono- 
lulu, H.  I.,  has  been  studying  the  Hawaiian  portion  of  the  Poly- 
nesians and  has  published,  since  the  last  session  of  the  Congress, 
the  following  Memoirs  in  quarto :  "  Stone  Implements  of  the  Ancient 
Hawaiians"  (p.  100,  1903);  "Hawaiian  Mat  and  Basket  Weaving" 
(p.  105,  1906);  **01d  Hawaiian  Carvings  "(p.  20,  1906),  all  byW. 
T.  Brigham  ;  **  Hawaiian  Nets  and  Netting,"  by  John  F.  G.  Stokes 
(p.  57,  1906). 

In  the  Occasional  Papers,  8vo.  :  **  Remarks  on  Phallic  Stones 
from  Rapanui,"  by  J.  L.  Young  (vol.  11,  p.  171) ;  "Aboriginal  Wooden 
Weapons  of  Australia,"  by  Leopold  G.  Blackman  (p.  173). 

During  the  same  period  the  Museum  has  been  steadily  accumu- 
lating facts  and  specimens  illustrative  of  former  human  life  on  other 
Pacific  islands.  Its  collection  of  Hawaiian  antiquities  is  now  by  far 
the  most  complete  in  existence,  and  its  authentic  collections  from 
other  groups  in  the  Pacific  region  are  very  large.  All  these  it  is 
the  policy  pf  the  Museum  to  study,  illustrate,  and  publish  in  its 
Memoirs  and  Occasional  Papers. 

The  Work  of  Individuals 

Aside  from  the  studies  in  American  anthropology  conducted 
officially  or  personally  by  those  regularly  associated  with  universi- 


S30  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

ties,  museums,  and  other  institutions,  to  which  brief  reference  has 
been  made,  a  great  amount  of  investigation  has  been  prosecuted  by 
others  in  no  way  connected  with  such  institutions,  but  who  pursue 
their  studies  through  love  for  the  subject  and  who  in  the  end  usually 
make  public  museums  the  beneficiaries  of  their  collections  and  the 
public  generally  the  wiser  for  the  knowledge  they  have  gained. 

CLARENCE    B.    MOORE 

Noteworthy  among  the  students  of  this  class  is  Mr  Clarence 
B.  Moore,  of  Philadelphia,  whose  excellent  memoirs  in  the  Journal 
of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  all  the  result 
of  his  personal  excavation  and  studies  of  Southern  mounds,  have 
been  justly  characterized  as  forming  the  most  important  contribution 
to  American  archeology  that  has  ever  been  made  under  private 
auspices. 

It  is  Mr  Moore's  plan,  during  the  summer  preceding  the  work, 
which  is  usually  carried  on  in  the  winter  season,  to  send  agents 
expert  in  mound  investigation  over  the  region  to  be  investigated 
and  personally  to  visit  each  mound  which  may  be  heard  of  through 
most  diligent  inquiry.  A  list  of  these  mounds  and  of  the  names 
and  addresses  of  their  owners  is  sent  to  Mr  Moore,  who  obtains 
in  advance  permission  to  dig.  The  work  is  done  from  a  flat-bot- 
tomed steamer  sufficiently  large  to  accommodate  more  than  thirty 
men.  All  work  is  conducted  under  Mr  Moore's  personal  super- 
vision, with  the  aid  of  Dr  M.  G.  Miller,  who,  since  the  beginning 
of  the  field  investigations  in  1891,  has  had  charge  of  the  anatomical 
work  of  the  expeditions. 

The  first  part  of  the  season  of  1903  was  given  to  the  investiga- 
tion of  Apalachicola  river,  Florida.  In  the  mounds  of  this  river 
was  noted  the  influence  of  the  northwestern  coast  of  Florida  (which 
had  been  investigated  in  1901  and  1902),  including  the  mortuary 
deposit  of  earthenware  in  the  eastern  margin  of  mounds,  made  for 
the  dead  in  common,  and  the  presence  of  excised  decoration  on  the 
bodies  of  vessels.  A  heavy  flood  ended  the  work  at  the  point  where 
the  Chattahoochee  and  Flint  rivers  form  the  Apalachicola.  The 
rest  of  the  season  of  1903  was  devoted  to  the  lower  Suwannee  river 
(Florida)  and  to  the  western  coast  of  central  Florida  from  Suwannee 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  $3 1 

river  to  Tampa  bay,  which,  respectively,  were  approximately  the 
southern  limit  of  Mr  Moore's  work  in  1902  and  the  northern  limit 
of  his  investigation  in  1900.  The  most  noteworthy  work  on  this 
coast  was  the  investigation  of  the  great  place  of  burial  near  the 
mouth  of  Crystal  river,  where  numbers  of  pendants  of  shell,  of  lime- 
stone native  to  the  region,  and  of  hard  stones  not  found  in  Florida, 
including  rock-crystal  and  amethystine  quartz,  were  found.  Many 
pendants  of  native  copper  also  were  encountered,  of  the  same  shapes 
as  the  pendants  of  shell  and  of  stone  ;  interesting  ear-ornaments  of 
sheet-copper  were  met  with,  some  coated  with  silver. 

In  the  early  part  of  the  season  of  1904  the  mounds  of  Lake 
Tohopekaliga,  in  the  Kissimmee  region,  Florida,  were  visited  with 
almost  negative  results.  The  remainder  of  the  season  was  given  to 
the  southwestern  coast  of  Florida,  beginning  at  Charlotte  Harbor 
and  continuing  down  through  the  Ten  Thousand  islands,  around 
Cape  Sable  and  up  through  the  Keys  to  Miami,  on  the  east  coast, 
ending  at  Lake  Worth,  the  southernmost  limit  of  Mr  Moore's 
investigation  of  1896. 

The  season  of  1905  was  begun  with  the  circuit  of  Mobile  bay, 
Alabama,  and  the  investigation  of  points  somewhat  to  the  north- 
ward. Next,  the  mounds  of  Mississippi  sound  as  far  as  Biloxi, 
Mississippi,  were  examined  without  satisfactory  result.  Next,  the 
lower  Tombigbee  river,  Alabama,  was  investigated,  going  north- 
ward from  its  union  with  Mobile  river  to  Bickley  landing,  where 
the  work  on  the  river  for  the  season  of  1901  had  ended.  The  entire 
Tombigbee  river  yielded  most  uninteresting  results.  The  remainder 
of  the  winter  of  1905  was  devoted  to  an  examination  of  the  antiqui- 
ties of  the  Black  Warrior  river,  Alabama,  from  its  junction  with  the 
Tombigbee  to  the  city  of  Tuscaloosa,  including  the  famous  group  of 
mounds  and  cemeteries  at  Moundville.  Most  interesting  discoveries 
awaited  Mr  Moore  at  this  place,  including  the  swastika  (earthenware 
and  copper) ;  the  plumed  serpent,  also  skulls  and  arm-bones  resem- 
bling those  shown  in  Mexican  codices,  engraved  on  earthenware  ; 
many  ceremonial  stone  palettes  for  paint ;  and  a  superb  vessel, 
probably  of  diorite,  with  arching  neck  and  head  of  a  wood-duck, 
rising  above  the  bowl,  the  limit  of  aboriginal  endeavor  in  stone 
thus  far  met  with  in  the  United  States. 


532  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Part  of  the  autumn  of  1905  (really  the  beginning  of  the  season 
of  1906)  was  spent  among  the  mounds  of  lower  Flint  and  lower 
Chattahoochee  rivers  (Florida,  Georgia,  and  Alabama),  beginning 
where  work  on  Apalachicola  river  had  ended  in  the  season  of  1903. 
But  little  work  was  done  on  Flint  river,  but  the  Chattahoochee 
showed  the  influence  of  the  coast,  as  the  Apalachicola  had  done, 
for  a  distance  of  about  fifty  miles  northward,  above  which  limit 
burial  mounds  were  not  encountered.  Presumably  the  domiciliary 
mounds,  which  are  numerous,  have  cemeteries  in  connection,  but 
except  in  a  single  instance  Mr  Moore  was  not  successful  in  finding 
them. 

In  the  beginning  of  the  winter  of  1906,  Crystal  river,  Florida, 
was  revisited,  and  what  remained  of  the  cemetery  there  was  com- 
pletely dug  through.  Among  other  objects  of  interest,  an  ear-plug 
of  sheet  copper,  overlaid  with  meteoric  iron,  was  found.  The 
remainder  of  the  season  of  1 906  was  devoted  mainly  to  work  among 
the  Ten  Thousand  islands,  off  the  southwestern  coast  of  Florida, 
where  parts  of  the  seasons  of  1900  and  1904  had  been  spent.  It 
was  at  Marco,  it  will  be  remembered,  a  settlement  on  one  of  these 
islands,  that  Mr  Gushing  made  his  great  discovery  of  prehistoric 
objects  of  wood  —  a  discovery  which  will  not  be  duplicated,  there 
is  reason  to  believe,  as,  in  all  probability,  the  deposit  of  these  objects 
in  the  mud  arose  from  some  special  cause.  At  all  events,  much 
digging  in  the  mud  at  Marco  and  elsewhere  among  the  Keys  has 
not  been  productive. 

Full  accounts  of  Mr  Moore's  archeological  work  may  be  found 
in  the  Journal  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia 
(the  principal  objects  obtained  during  the  field  work  have  been  placed 
in  the  Academy),  under  the  following  titles  :  ^ 

Certain  Aboriginal  Mounds  of  the  Apalachicola  River,  Vol.  XII. 
Certain  Aboriginal  Mounds  of  the  Central  Florida  West-coast.     Vol.  XII. 
Miscellaneous  Investigation  in  Florida.     V^ol.  XIII. 

Certain  Aboriginal  Remains  of  Mobile  Bay  and  Mississippi  Sound.  Vol. 
XIII. 

Certain  Aboriginal  Remains  of  the  Lower  Tombigbee  River.     Vol.  XIII. 

'  Mr  Moore  generously  announces  that  he  will  gladly  furnish  gratuitously  to  members 
of  the  Fifteenth  International  Congress  of  Americanists  some  of  the  above-mentioned 
publications,  on  written  application  to  him  at  1 32 1  Locust  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  $33 

Certain  Aboriginal  Remains  of  the  Black  Warrior  River.  (Moundville.) 
Vol.  XIII. 

Mounds  of  the  Lower  Chattahoochee  and  of  the  Lower  Flint  Rivers.  (Not 
yet  published.) 

Crystal  River  Revisited.     (Not  yet  published.) 

Notes  on  the  Ten  Thousand  Islands.     (Not  yet  published.) 

GERARD    FOWKE 

One  of  the  most  active  of  American  archeologists  is  Mr  Gerard 
Fowke,  whose  services  have  been  commanded  by  various  institu- 
tions, especially  for  researches  in  the  Mississippi  valley.  In  1902 
he  examined,  for  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  the  exten- 
sive flint  deposits  along  Tygart  river,  Kentucky,  discovered  by 
him  some  years  before,  from  which  nearly  all  the  flint  implements 
found  along  the  middle  Ohio  river  are  derived.  An  immense 
amount  of  quarry  work  was  done  here  by  the  aborigines,  mostly 
by  drifting  in  from  the  outcrop  on  the  slopes,  although  in  many 
places  pits  were  sunk  from  the  surface.  The  workings  extend,  irreg- 
ularly and  with  many  intervals,  over  an  area  of  several  square 
miles. 

In  October  of  the  same  year  Mr  Fowke  participated  in  the 
nvestigations,  conducted  under  the  auspices  of  the  Bureau  of  Amer- 
ican Ethnology,  at  Lansing,  Kansas,  where  the  remains  of  the  so- 
called  **  Lansing  man  "  had  been  unearthed.  The  work  of  enlarging 
the  tunnel  in  which  the  bones  were  found  was  conducted  under 
Mr  Fowke's  personal  supervision. 

In  April,  1903,  in  a  hematite  quarry  near  Leslie,  Missouri, 
several  hundred  grooved  hematite  hammers  were  discovered,  evi- 
dently used  by  aborigines  in  breaking  up  the  material.  The  ancient 
miners  had  reached  the  ore  by  digging  through  the  overlying  soil 
and  clay,  and  after  removing  so  much  of  it  as  they  uncovered  in 
this  way,  had  made  tunnels  in  various  directions  through  the  iron. 
The  principal  object  seemed  to  be  to  secure  material  for  paint ; 
there  is  much  variation  in  hardness,  some  of  it  being  so  dense 
that  modern  drills  make  no  impression  on  it,  while  in  other  spots 
it  is  so  soft  as  to  be  easily  ground  fine  with  stones.  Marks  of 
tools  were  plainly  visible  wherever  the  primitive  workers  carried 
their  tunnels,  some  of  them  due  to  the  hematite  or  stone  hammers, 


534  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Others  to  pointed  flint  chisels.  At  one  place,  on  the  surface  of  the 
ground,  now  removed  by  the  ore-diggers,  was  a  deposit  of  hematite 
chips,  evidently  due  to  flaking  in  the  manufacture  of  axes,  celts,  etc. 
This  deposit  contained  several  large  wagon  loads ;  while  the  entire 
amount  of  prehistoric  labor  probably  involved  the  removal  of  several 
hundred  tons. 

The  vast  quantity  of  homstone  disks  found  in  one  of  the  Ho|>e- 
well  mounds  near  Chillicothe,  Ohio,  aroused  some  curiosity  as  to 
the  source  of  the  material.  None  like  it  is  found  in  Ohio.  There 
is  a  deposit  near  Trenton,  Kentucky ;  another  in  Union  county, 
Illinois  ;  a  third,  more  extensive,  in  the  vicinity  of  Wyandot  Cave, 
Indiana.  There  are  probably  others,  but  their  situation  has  not  yet 
been  made  known  to  archeology.  Similar  disks  are  reported,  in 
limited  numbers,  from  Mt  Sterling,  Kentucky.  The  Indiana  flint 
has  been  known  for  many  years,  through  an  erroneous  report 
regarding  its  occurrence  in  the  cave  ;  erroneous,  that  is,  as  concerns 
the  method  of  working.  The  homstone  extends  from  Indian  creek 
to  Buck  creek,  and  from  the  Ohio  river  an  irregular  line  two  or 
three  miles  north  of  that  stream.  Beyond  that  line  the  material  is 
unfit  for  chipping.  It  is  also  reported  in  Meade  county,  Kentucky, 
but  it  is  not  known  that  any  ancient  quarrying  was  carried  on  in  that 
direction.  A  great  amount  of  excavating  and  chipping  was  done 
along  the  hillsides  in  the  area  mentioned,  and  it  was  thought  possi- 
ble to  discover  the  workshop  where  these  disks  were  made.  But 
no  spot  is  to  be  found  where  broken  or  imperfect  disks  occur. 
The  homstone  occurs  only  in  the  form  of  nodules,  spheroidal,  ellip- 
soidal, or  irregular  in  form,  and  so  far  as  known  is  more  easily 
wrought  than  any  other.  Only  the  larger  nodules,  of  fine  grain 
and  susceptible  of  easy  chipping,  were  used  for  the  disks  ;  and  when 
one  of  these  was  broken  or  otherwise  spoiled  for  such  use,  the  frag- 
ments were  manifestly  used  for  making  smaller  implements.  Hence 
no  imperfect  disks  are  found. 

Except  for  the  examinations  described,  Mr  Fowke's  time  from 
April  to  November,  1903,  was  spent  in  examining  caverns,  under 
the  auspices  of  the  Carnegie  Institution,  for  remains  of  cave  or 
paleolithic  man.  Some  two  hundred  caves  were  visited,  in  Indiana, 
Illinois,   Kentucky,  Tennessee,  and  Alabama.     Nearly  all  of  these 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  S3S 

proved  to  be  in  such  situation,  or  of  such  nature,  that  they  are  not 
and  probably  never  were  at  all  fitted  for  human  occupancy,  except 
as  mere  temporary  shelters.  Of  those  examined,  some  had  no  evi- 
dence of  habitation ;  others  seemed  to  have  been  used  for  long 
periods.  But  in  every  case  where  any  such  traces  were  found,  they 
were  exactly  correspondent  to  those  about  modem,  or  known, 
Indian  villages ;  and  they  invariably  ceased  abruptly  at  a  given 
plane  below  which  not  a  trace  of  anything  was  found  that  seemed 
due  to  human  agency. 

The  region  within  a  hundred  miles  north  and  south  from  the 
mouth  of  the  Missouri  has  yielded  many  thousands  of  implements 
of  numerous  forms,  made  of  the  same  material — a  white  or  cream 
colored,  fine-grained  chert,  with  tints  of  pink,  red,  or  brown,  from 
oxidation.  Stone  much  like  it  is  found  in  small  quantities  in  several 
places ;  but  the  only  extensive  deposit  showing  ancient  quarrying 
is  in  Jefferson  county,  Missouri,  beginning  at  the  Meramec  river 
and  extending  several  miles  toward  the  south  and  southeast.  This 
deposit  (an  impure,  fragmentary,  stratified  chert,  only  a  small  part 
of  which  is  fit  for  flaking),  which  was  investigated  by  Mr  Fowke  in 
July,  1904,  is  a  narrow  outlier,  fortning  the  cap-rock  of  a  winding 
ridge  ;  in  some  places  it  is  fifty  feet  thick.  The  lowest  layer 
seems  to  have  been  most  sought.  Where  erosion  had  removed  most 
of  the  overlying  material,  pits  were  dug,  but  for  the  greater  part 
the  excavations  were  at  the  outcrop  along  the  hillsides.  In  at 
least  two  places  tunnels  were  carried  in  for  quite  a  distance. 

Shortly  afterward  a  large  cave  near  Arlington,  Missouri,  over- 
looking the  Gasconade  river,  was  partially  excavated.  Artificial 
remains  were  found  to  a  depth  of  6  ^  feet,  being  uniform  in  character 
from  top  to  bottom.  They  terminated  abruptly  on  mingled  rock 
and  clay,  the  original  floor  of  the  cave.  At  one  point,  beneath  the 
modern  debris  of  the  floor,  were  (i)  several  layers  of  kitchen  refuse 
distinctly  stratified ;  and  (2)  an  unbroken  layer  of  roof-dust  2  to  4 
inches  thick ;  in  all,  fully  2  feet  of  material  accumulated  during 
Indian  occupancy.  Under  all  this  was  a  piece  of  glass  bottle.  The 
roof-dust  in  a  dry  cave  is  the  equivalent  of  stalagmite  formations  in 
a  wet  one. 

The  great  number  of  "hoes"  and   "spades"   found  within  a 


53^  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  J.  E.  Mattem  collection  of  Ohio  gorgets  and  other  stone 
material. 

A  collection  of  stone  gorgets  and  other  stone  specimens  from 
southern  Ohio,  numbering  in  all  several  hundred  pieces. 

The  Dr  Joseph  Jones  collection  of  Southern  material,  a  descrip- 
tion of  which  has  been  given  in  the  Smithsonian  Contributions  to 
K^iowledge, 

The  Dr  A.  W.  Getman  collection  of  stone,  bone,  and  p>ottery 
objects  from  Jefferson  county,  New  York. 

The  Henry  Booth  collection  of  stone  and  other  material  from 
the  United  States  and  Europe. 

The  M.  F.  Savage  collection  of  stone  and  pottery  from  the  Mid- 
dle states. 

The  L.  H.  Brittin  ethnological  collection  from  the  Plains  Indians 

The  greater  part  of  the  Joseph  Keppler  collection  of  Iroquois, 
material  and  ethnological  specimens  from  the  Plains  tribes,  combined 
with  the  Heye  collection  through  the  interest  of  Mr  Keppler. 

The  Henry  Hales  collection  of  pottery,  stone,  and  shell,  from 
Socorro  county.  New  Mexico. 

A  representative  collection  of  prehistoric  pottery  from  northern 
Arizona,  made  by  J.  L.  Hubbell. 

The  Northwest  Coast  pipe  collection,  made  by  Lieut.  G.  T. 
Emmons,  U.  S.  N. 

A  collection  of  Tahltan  material  from  British  Columbia,  made 
by  Lieutenant  Emmons. 

Two  collections  of  pottery  from  the  Valley  of  Mexico,  made  by 
Dr  Guillermo  Bauer. 

Two  Zapotecan  collections,  made  by  Americans  having  business 
interests  in  Mexico. 

A  collection  of  material  mostly  from  the  Valley  of  Mexico. 

A  collection  of  Tarascan  pottery  from  Michoacan,  Mexico. 

The  C.  P.  Mackie  Mexican  collection. 

A  collection  of  pottery  and  nearly  five  hundred  objects  of  pre- 
historic gold  jewelry  from  Ecuador,  made  by  D.  C.  Stapleton. 

A  collection  of  eighty-five  large  gold  objects  from  Cliiriqui, 
Central  America,  made  by  a  mining  engineer. 

A  collection  of  Chiriqui,  Costa  Rica,  and  Porto  Rico  stone  and 
gold  material,  made  by  Mr  Frank  Utley. 


> 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  539 

The  Rev.  Thomas  T.  Huckerby  collection  of  stone  objects  from 
St  Vincent. 

EDWARD    ANTHONY   SPITZKA 

The  researches  of  Dr  Spitzka  have  been  concerned  chiefly  with 
problems  of  cerebral  morphology,  development,  and  heredity, 
particularly  in  the  Primate  series.  He  has  been  interested  also  in 
the  relations  of  mental  abilities  with  variations  in  brain-form.  The 
material  for  these  studies  has  consisted  chiefly  of  race  brains,  brains 
of  notably  intellectual  men,  and  those  of  criminals.  Dr  Spitzka's 
studies  may  be  grouped  as  follows : 

(i)  Brains  of  races:  Eskimo,  Papuans,  Japanese,  Negroes, 
Andamanese,  Nicobarese,  etc. 

(2)  Brain-weight :  Japanese. 

(3)  Brains  of  intellectual  men :  Edward  Seguin  and  his  son, 
Edward  C.  Seguin,  Major  J.  W.  Powell,*  George  Francis  Train, 
Major  J.  B.  Pond,  Professor  E.  D.  Cope  (and  skull).  Prof  Joseph 
Leidy,  Dr  Philip  Leidy,  Dr  William  Pepper,  Professor  Harrison 
Allen,  Dr  A.  J.  Parker.*  Dr  Spitzka's  studies  on  Cope,  P.  Leidy, 
J.  Leidy,  Pepper,  Allen,  and  Parker  will  be  published  in  the  Transac- 
tions of  the  American  Philosophical  Society  of  Philadelphia. 

(4)  Brain-weight  of  intellectual  men  as  compared  with  ordi- 
nary population. 

(5)  Brains  of  criminals :  Leon  F.  Czolgosz  (the  assassin  of 
McKinley)  and  seventeen  others.  Dr  Spitzka's  studies  on  these 
tend  to  disprove  most  of  the  contentions  of  the  Lombroso  school 
regarding  an  alleged  criminal  type  of  structural  anatomy. 

(6)  Brains  of  blood  relatives :  The  three  Van  Wormer  brothers ; 
the  Drs  Seguin,  father  and  son  ;  Eskimo,  father  and  daughter ;  the 
two  Leidy  half-brothers ;  and  demonstration  of  hereditary  resem- 
blances in  cerebral  surface  configuration. 

(7)  Description  and  naming  of  the  postorbital  limbus,  a  forma- 
tion occasionally  met  with  at  the  base  of  the  brain  {e,  g..  Cope; 
Parker  ;  Japanese  ;   Papuans,  etc.). 

(8)  The  form  of  the  empty  and  contracted  heart  and  the  form 
of  the  empty  and  contracted  stomach,  as  observed  in  criminals  exe- 
cuted by  electricity  and  immediately  examined  post-mortem. 


^  American  Anthropologist y  vol.  v,  no.  4,  1 903. 


S40  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

(9)  Mental  phenomena  presented  by  the  Duchobors  of  Canada 
in  recent  epidemics  of  religious  fanaticism. 

(10)  Mental  state  of  assassins.  These  are  found  to  be  not  neces- 
sarily insane,  as  they  are  often  believed  to  be.  The  percentage  of 
lunatics  among  regicides  is  found  to  be  not  noticeably  greater  than 
among  ordinary  murderers. 

(i  i)  A  study  of  lynching  in  North  America. 

STANSBURY  HAGAR 

Since  the  Thirteenth  session  of  the  Congress  of  Americanists 
at  New  York,  at  which  he  presented  a  paper  on  **  Cuzco,  the  Celes- 
tial City,*'  designed  to  show  that  the  plan  of  the  city  seeks  to  repro- 
duce the  supposed  design  of  the  sky,  including  the  pole,  milky- way, 
and  zodiac,  Mr  Hagar  has  continued  his  studies  on  the  astronomical 
symbolism  of  ancient  Peru,  which  he  hopes  soon  to  publish.  In 
1904  Mr  Hagar  issued  a  third  preliminary  paper  on  the  subject, 
**The  Peruvian  Ritual,"  showing  that  each  of  the  Peruvian  monthly 
festivals  reproduces  the  aspects  and  attributes  of  the  zodiacal  sign 
through  which  the  sun  was  passing  at  the  date  of  the  festival.  This 
paper  was  presented  to  the  Congress  of  Americanists  and  reprinted 
in  The  American  Antiquarian}  A  paper  on  the  **  Star-lore  of  the 
Cherokees  '*  will  be  published  shortly.  It  embodies  the  results  of  field 
work  among  the  Cherokee  of  North  Carolina  and  shows  many  an- 
alogies between  their  stellar  legends  and  those  of  neighboring  and 
even  of  distant  tribes.  Mr  Hagar  has  also  completed  a  study  of  the 
**  Astronomy  and  Astrology  of  the  American  Indians,"  covering  the 
sources  of  information,  cosmogony,  ritual,  calendar  (briefly),  astrol- 
ogy, and  stellar  myths  and  legends.  Under  all  these  heads  there 
is  found  a  marked  unity  of  thought  throughout  North  and  South 
America,  with  much  that  seems  distinctive  in  America,  and  much, 
especially  in  Peru,  that  offers  marked  analogies  with  astronomical 
concepts  of  the  Old  World.  Mr  Hagar  is  also  completing  a  study 
of  intercommunication  with  the  dead,  worship  of  the  dead,  and  de- 
mons, among  the  American  Indians,  showing  the  wide  prevalence 
among  them  of  beliefs  akin  to  modern  spiritualism,  but  indepen- 
dent of  it,  and  a  widespread  and  elaborate  worship  of  ancestors  and 
spirits. 


» Vol.  XXVI,  pp.  329  et  seq. 


> 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  S4I 

G.  FREDERICK  WRIGHT 

Dr  Wright  has  continued  investigations  bearing  on  the  relations 
of  man  to  the  Glacial  epoch — a  subject  of  interest  and  importance 
in  determining  the  period  of  the  earliest  remains  in  America  and  in 
furnishing  a  clue  to  the  conditions  surrounding  man  in  his  earliest 
known  stages.     In  the  words  of  Dr  Wright : 

Evidence  of  the  presence  of  man  in  America  toward  the  close  of 
the  Glacial  epoch  continues  to  increase.  The  most  important  is  that 
discovered  at  I^nsing,  Kansas,  and  brought  to  the  notice  of  the  public 
by  Mr  M.  C.  Long,  of  Kansas  City,  Missouri.  This  evidence  has  been 
studied  with  special  care  by  Prof.  N.  H.  Winchell,  Dr  Warren  Upham, 
Prof.  T.  C.  Chamberlin,  and  others  ;  while  I  have  spent  much  time  at  the 
immediate  locality  and  in  studying  the  general  conditions.*  The  evidence 
consists  of  two  nearly  complete  human  skeletons  found  at  the  base  of  the 
loess  which  borders  the  Missouri  river.  According  to  Dr  Hrdlicka  and 
others,  the  type  does  not  differ  materially  from  that  of  the  tribes  of  Indians 
which  have  continued  to  inhabit  America,  but  in  the  opinion  of  Pro- 
fessor Winchell,  Dr  Upham,  and  myself,  these  skeletons  were  buried 
beneath  the  original  loess  which  fills  the  valley.  All  agree  that  this  loess 
was  deposited  at  the  close  of  what  is  known  as  the  lowan  stage  of  the 
Glacial  epoch,  when  the  glacial  ice  extended  to  the  center  of  Iowa. 
Professor  Chamberlin  attempts  to  prove  that  the  loess  at  Lansing  may 
have  been  worked  over  somewhat  subsequently  to  the  original  time  of 
deposit,  but  this  has  been  warmly,  and  I  think  successfully,  controverted 
by  Professor  Winchell  and  Dr  Upham.  Even  then,  however,  the  date 
would  not  be  very  much  reduced. 

A  most  interesting  and  important  discovery  bearing  on  the  condi- 
tions in  the  midst  of  which  the  Lansing  Man  lived,  was  made  by  Dr  Ball, 
of  the  Missouri  Geological  Sur\ey,  in  1902,  the  significance  of  which  I 
have  made  a  special  subject  of  study.'  The  discovery  consisted  of  several 
clusters  of  granitic  bowlders  of  large  size  from  Canada  which  had  been 
deposited  at  Tuscumbia,  Missouri,  in  the  valley  of  Osage  river,  60  miles 
above  its  junction  with  the  Missouri,  and  40  miles  south  of  the  extreme 

'  For  the  literature  of  this  interesting  subject  see  Upham  in  American  Antiquarian^ 
XXIV,  413,  1902,  and  American  Geologist^  135,  Sept.  1902  ;  Winchell,  ibid.,  Sept.  1902 ; 
Williston  in  Science^  Aug.  I,  1902  ;  Chamberlin  in  Journal  of  Geology^  X,  745,  1903  ; 
Holmes  in  Smithsonian  Report^  455,  1902,  and  American  Anthropologist^  IV,  743,  1902  ; 
Hrdlicka  in  American  Anthropologist^  v,  303,  1902  ;  Upham  in  Records  of  the  Past,  I, 
Sept.  1902;  Wright,  ibid.,  ii,  Apr.  1903. — Editor. 

^Records  of  the  Pasty  Jan.,  1905,  p.  15-26. 


542  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

limit  reached  by  the  ice  during  the  Glacial  epKxJi.  The  only  explanation 
of  these  bowlders  is  that  during  the  final  melting  of  the  ice  over  the  drain- 
age basin  of  the  Missouri  annual  floods  two  hundred  feet  in  height  were 
produced  in  that  river  for  some  time  during  the  summers,  while  there 
were  none  in  the  Osage  river,  since  it  was  outside  the  glacial  region.  This 
would  permit  icebergs  bearing  bowlders  to  float  do^^Ti  the  Missouri  river, 
and  be  carried  by  a  back  current  up  the  Osage  to  Tuscumbia,  where  they 
were  stranded  upon  the  recession  of  the  flood.  It  was  during  this  condi- 
tion of  things  that  the  loess  of  the  Missouri  valley  was  mostly  deposited. 
The  I^nsing  Man  must  have  witnessed  these  recurring  floods,  with  all 
their  disturbing  effects. 

But  evidence  continues  to  accumulate  that  the  date  of  the  close  of 
the  Glacial  epoch  is  much  more  recent  than  was  formerly  supposed.  Studies 
which  I  have  made  on  the  lateral  enlargement  of  the  Niagara  gorge  *  and 
on  the  enlargement  of  the  valley  of  the  post-glacial  streams  of  Ohio  con- 
firm and  nearly  demonstrate  that  the  glacial  ice  did  not  melt  off  from  cen- 
tral New  York  earlier  than  ten  thousand  years  ago,  and  probably  not  until 
eight  thousand  years  ago.  These  dates  are  now  accepted  by  many  of  our 
most  competent  geologists.  So  that  we  may  conclude  that  glacial  man  in 
North  America  and  in  western  Europe  was  perhaps  contemporary  with 
civilized  man  in  the  valley  of  the  Euphrates.  This  recent  date  of  the 
close  of  the  Glacial  epoch  will  account  also  for  the  modem  character  of 
the  Lansing  skeleton. 

Dr  Wright  is  about  to  publish  a  volume,  giving  the  results  of 
his  investigations  during  the  last  twenty-five  years,  in  which  he 
endeavors  to  show  that  everywhere  in  the  northern  hemisphere 
early  man  witnessed  an  instability  in  the  geological  conditions  which 
is  out  of  all  analogy  with  the  changes  that  are  now  taking  place. 
In  connection  with  Dr  Nils  Olof  Hoist,  of  Sweden,  he  has  studied 
the  elevated  post-glacial  beaches  of  Sweden,  showing  that  remains 
of  man  were  buried  there  previous  to  an  elevation  of  land  which 
amounts  in  the  north  to  one  thousand  feet.  Dr  Hoist  has  this  year 
published  the  results  of  his  work  along  these  lines. 

Much  effort  has  also  been  devoted  by  Dr  Wright  to  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  worthy  popular  archeological  journal.  The  Records 
of  the  Past  is  now  nearing  the'  completion  of  its  fifth  year.  This 
periodical,  published  in  Washington,  has  largely  been  looked  after 

'  American  Geologisfy  March,  1902,  p.  140-143. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  543 

by  the  associate  editor,  Mr  Frederick  Bennett  Wright.  Special  atten- 
tion is  given  to  the  abundant  illustrations,  while  the  articles  are  not 
only  of  a  popular  character  but  are  sufficiently  thorough  to  give 
specialists  a  general  view  of  archeological  work  in  every  field.  The 
contributions  are  from  a  wide  circle  of  investigators  of  the  most 
eminent  character. 

WILLIAM    E.  SAFFORD 

Mr  Safford,  who  has  long  been  interested  in  the  study  of  the 
ethnology  of  South  American  and  Polynesian  aborigines,  availed 
himself  of  the  opportunity  afforded  him  as  a  lieutenant  in  the  United 
States  Navy  to  study  the  habits,  customs,  arts,  and  languages  of 
the  natives  of  those  countries  visited  by  him.  His  first  work  on 
Polynesian  philology  was  in  connection  with  the  language  of  the 
Easter  islanders,  while  attached  to  the  U.  S.  S.  Mohican^  and  was 
embodied  in  the  paper  on  **Te  Pito  te  Henua,"  by  Surgeon  George 
H.  Cooke,  U.  S.  N.^  In  this  paper  a  number  of  Easter  Island  words 
were  compared  with  corresponding  words  in  various  Polynesian  and 
Malayan  languages,  establishing  the  interrelationship  between  them. 
This  led  to  the  study  of  Polynesian  migrations,  in  which  Mr  Safford 
has  ever  since  been  interested.  While  acting  as  assistant  governor 
of  the  island  of  Guam  he  took  up  the  study  of  the  language  and 
ethnology  of  the  aboriginal  inhabitants,  together  with  their  methods 
of  agriculture,  and  the  botany  of  that  island,  and  the  result  has  been 
a  paper  on  **  Guam  and  its  People."  ^  Mr  Safford  then  prepared  a 
work  on  the  *' Useful  Plants  of  the  Island  of  Guam,"  ^  with  an  intro- 
ductory account  of  the  physical  features  and  natural  history  of  the 
island,  of  the  character  and  history  of  its  people,  and  their  agricul- 
ture. This  proved  to  be  a  veritable  handbook  of  the  island  and  of 
the  economic  botany  of  Polynesia.  The  vernacular  names  of  nearly 
all  the  useful  plants  of  Polynesia  appear  and  are  interesting  in  trac- 
ing the  migrations  of  the  people  from  group  to  group.  Mr  Safford 
had  already  written  an  account  of  the  "  Abbott  Collection  from  the 


^  Report  of  the  U.  S.  N^a ti on al  Museum  for  tSgjy  pp.  689-723. 
'^American  Anthropologist^    1902  ;    revised  and  republished   in  the  Smithsonian 
Report  for  igo2,  1903. 

*  Contributions  from  the  U,  S.  National  Herbarium^  voL  IX,  1905. 


544  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Andaman  Islands/' '  in  which  he  gives  an  account  of  the  islands 
and  their  history,  and  points  out  the  interesting  relationship  of  the 
Negrito-like  inhabitants  to  Aetas  of  the  Philippines  and  the  resem- 
blance of  their  peculiar  sigmoid  bows  to  those  of  the  natives  of  New 
Ireland,  and  of  Mallicolo  of  the  New  Hebrides  group. 

Mr  Safford  has  also  assisted  in  preparing  a  list  of  the  vernacular 
names  of  the  Hawaiian  fishes  published  in  the  report  on  the  "Aquatic 
Resources  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands/*  by  Jordan  and  Evermann  ;  * 
and  a  list  of  the  Samoan  names  of  fishes,  about  to  appear  in  a 
later  bulletin.  These  lists  are  interesting  on  account  of  the  affinities 
they  establish  between  widely  remote  peoples  who  have  had  no 
intercommunication  during  historic  times. 

In  a  series  of  articles  on  *'  The  Chamorro  Language  of  Guam,'*  ^ 
Mr  Safford  goes  quite  extensively  into  the  comparative  philology 
of  the  languages  of  the  Pacific  islands,  the  Philippines  and  the  Malay 
archipelago  ;  and  in  a  recent  paper  read  before  the  Anthropological 
Society  of  Washington  he  calls  attention  to  the  Igorrot  tribes  of  the 
Philippines  as  typical  in  language  and  customs  of  certain  tribes  of 
the  ancient  Polynesians,  and  showing  many  affinities  with  the  ancient 
Chamorro  of  Guam.  The  interrelationship  of  all  these  islanders  is 
clearly  shown  by  their  arts,  language,  social  organization,  and 
superstitions,  as  well  as  by  the  useful  plants  they  have  carried  with 
them  in  their  migrations.  There  is  nothing  in  their  entire  ethnology 
to  suggest  American  origin,  but  all  points  clearly  to  the  Malay 
archipelago  as  the  cradle  from  which  they  sprang. 

Mr  Safford  is  now  engaged  in  a  work  on  the  useful  plants  of 
Mexico,  in  which  he  hopes  to  throw  light  on  many  questions  involv- 
ing the  origin  of  cultivated  plants. 

HENRY     PITTIER     DE     FABREGA 

During  the  last  five  years  (i  900-1 904)  of  his  residence  in  Costa 
Rica,  Dr  Pittier  de  Fabrega  continued  his  studies  on  the  Indian 
languages  of  that  country,  perfecting  his  vocabulary  and  grammar 
of  the  Terraba  language  and  collecting  extensive  material  on  the 

^  Smithsonian  Report  for  igo2y  1903. 

^  BttlUtin  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  for  igojy  vol.  xxill,  1905. 

'  Published  in  various  numbers  of  the  American  Anthropologist. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  545 

Cabecara  and  the  Brunka.  This  linguistic  material  is  now  sufficient 
to  enable  him  to  prepare  for  each  of  these  dialects  a  monograph 
similar  in  its  plan  and  scope  to  his  **  Sprache  der  Bribri  Indianer/' 
published  in  1898  under  the  patronage  of  the  late  Dr  Friedrich 
Miiller.  The  only  remaining  language  not  yet  thoroughly  re- 
corded in  Costa  Rica  is  the  Guatuso,  now  spoken  by  only  a 
few  Indians  living  in  the  Rio  Frio  valley,  toward  Lake  Nica- 
ragua. In  the  course  of  his  investigations  on  the  Costa  Rican 
and  Panamenian  languages,  and  without  any  knowledge  of  Uhle's 
communication  to  the  Seventh  International  Congress  of  American- 
ists at  Berlin,  in  1888,  Dr  Pittier  determined  certain  well-estab- 
lished affinities  between  the  idioms  of  the  immense  group  recog- 
nized today  as  the  Chibchan  stock.  A  careful  comparison  of  the 
available  material  enabled  him  to  show  that  the  languages  of  south- 
ern origin  extended  along  the  Atlantic  slope  of  Central  America  as 
far  as  Honduras,  and  included  several  dialects  the  affinities  of  which 
hitherto  had  not  been  understood.^  During  the  two  last  years  he 
has  profited  by  the  opportunities  of  extensive  explorations  made  in 
Central  and  South  America  in  behalf  of  the  U.  S.  Department  ot 
Agriculture,  to  whose  staff  he  now  belongs,  to  strengthen  the 
Uhle-Pittier  hypothesis,  to  gather  missing  links  in  the  aboriginal 
languages  of  the  region  between  the  Isthmian  tribes  and  those  of 
the  high  plateau  of  Bogota,  and  to  determine  the  southern  limit 
of  this  linguistic  group.  In  January  and  February  of  the  present 
year  Dr  Pittier  made  a  new  survey  of  the  Paez  language,  spoken  at 
the  foot  of  the  Huila,  in  the  central  cordillera  of  Colombia.  In  June 
and  July  he  spent  six  weeks  with  the  Koggaba  Indians,  during  which 
time  he  collected  vocabularies.  The  first  of  these  languages  may 
be  related  to  the  Kichua ;  the  last  is  decidedly  Chibchan.  Both 
had  been  studied  before,  but  a  large  part  of  Dr  Pittier* s  compre- 
hensive lists  of  words  is  quite  new  and  forms  an  important  addition 
to  our  knowledge  of  South  American  aboriginal  languages. 

ALICE   C.    FLETCHER 

Miss  Fletcher  has  continued  her  ethnologic  researches,  particu- 
larly among  the  Omaha  and  the  Pawnee  Indians,  and  her  study  of 

*  See  **  Numeral  Systems  of  the  Costa  Rican  Indians,*'  American  Anthropologist,  VI, 
no.  3,  1904. 


546  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGISl  [N.  s.,  8,   1906 

the  Pawnee  version  of  an  intertribal  ceremony  which  once  prevailed 
over  a  large  part  of  the  Mississippi  valley  has  been  completed  and 
published  under  the  title  "The  Hako/*'  Miss  Fletcher's  investiga- 
tions of  the  music  of  the  Indians  of  the  United  States  have  also  been 
continued ;  a  number  of  graphophone  records  have  been  obtained 
and  certain  conclusions  relative  to  the  emotional  characteristics  of 
Indian  songs  and  the  forms  used  in  their  expression  have  been 
formulated  in  lectures.  With  the  assistance  of  her  collaborator,  Mr 
Francis  La  Flesche,  Miss  Fletcher  has  been  enabled  to  obtain  the 
songs,  rituals,  ceremonies,  etc.,  forming  a  cosmic  drama  and  pre- 
served, in  a  secret  society  known  among  the  Omaha  tribe  as  the 
Shell  Society ;  and  arrangements  have  been  perfected  with  the  few 
surviving  old  men  for  a  revision  of  her  list  of  Omaha  tribal  names 
according  to  gentes  and  intermarriages,  together  with  a  review  of 
her  notes  on  former  tribal  ceremonies  preliminary  to  their  publica- 
tion. Unfortunately  severe  illness  has  interrupted  Miss  Fletcher's 
work,  but  with  rapidly  returning  health  it  will  now  be  resumed  and 
its  valuable  results  published  in  the  near  future. 

ZELIA    NUTTALL 

In  addition  to  her  investigations  under  the  auspices  of  the  Pea- 
body  Museum  of  Harvard  University  and  of  the  University  of  Cali- 
fornia, noted  above,  Mrs  Nuttall  has  devoted  her  attention  during 
the  last  four  years  (meanwhile  residing  at  Coyoacan  in  the  valley  of 
Mexico)  to  investigations  and-  researches  in  local  Mexican  arche- 
ology, ethnology,  folklore,  and  history.  Mrs  Nuttall  has  made  a 
special  study  of  the  archeology  of  her  neighborhood,  which  was  the 
ancient  home  of  the  powerful  Tepanec  tribe  that  was  subjugated 
with  difficulty  by  the  Aztecs.  Her  publications  since  1902,  in 
addition  to  those  previously  mentioned,  are : 

A  Suggestion  to  Maya  Scholars.     {^American  Anthropologist,  v,   no.   4, 

1903.) 

The  Periodical  Adjustments  of  the  Ancient  Mexican  Calendar.     (American 

Anthropologist,  vi,  no.  4,  1904.) 

Some  Unsolved  Problems  in  Mexican  Archeology.  (American  Anthro- 
pologist, VIII,  no.  I,  1906.) 

The  Astronomical  Methods  of  the  Ancient  Mexicans.     (In  preparation.) 

'  Twenty-second  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology ^  part  II. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  547 

The  preparation  of  part  II  of  the  "  Life  of  the  Ancient  Mexicans'* 
and  of  the  map  of  the  valley  of  Mexico  by  Alonso  de  Santa  Cruz 
has  progressed  considerably,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  during 
the  last  year  Mrs  Nuttall's  work  has  been  handicapped  by  serious 
ill-health,  from  which,  however,  she  is  fortunately  rapidly  recovering. 

HENRY    MONTGOMERY 

The  archeology  of  North  Dakota  and  South  Dakota  has  had 
special  study  by  Dr  Henry  Montgomery,  of  the  University  of 
Toronto,  who  for  some  time  past  has  been  engaged  on  the  prod- 
ucts of  his  personal  explorations  in  these  states  and  their  immediate 
vicinity.  In  March  last  Dr  Montgomery  read  a  paper  on  this  work, 
illustrated  by  specimens  and  views,  before  the  Anthropological 
Society  of  Washington  ;  and  his  illustrated  article  on  the  **  Remains 
of  Prehistoric  Man  in  the  Dakotas  **  will  appear  in  the  next  issue  of 
the  American  Anthropologist,  The  structure  of  the  aboriginal  burial 
mounds ;  the  occurrence  of  elongate  mounds  and  of  tumuli  connected 
by  long,  thick,  earthen  walls  or  ridges ;  the  occurrence  of  the  straight, 
tubular  pipes,  and  the  character  of  the  earthen  vases  or  urns,  con- 
stitute the  most  important  of  the  results  of  Dr  Montgomery's  ex- 
plorations in  that  northwestern  region.  These  somewhat  extensive 
excavations  and  explorations  were  undertaken  several  years  ago, 
but  the  field  notes  and  collections  were  studied  only  recently,  and 
very  little  had  been  published  before  the  present  year.  Dr  Mont- 
gomery has  also  continued  his  studies  in  the  archeology  of  the 
Southwestern  states,  which  were  begun  during  his  residence  in 
Salt  Lake  City  (1890-94),  and  in  1903  he  completed  a  brief  out- 
line work  entitled  '*  Prehistoric  Man  in  the  United  States  and 
Canada." 

WILLIAM    WALLACE   TOOKER    AND    WILLIAM    R.    GERARD 

Along  linguistic  lines  have  been  the  personal  studies  of  Mr  Wil- 
liam Wallace  Tooker  and  Mr  William  R.  Gerard,  several  of  whose 
papers,  which  have  appeared  in  the  American  A7ithropologist,  have 
elicited  attention  not  only  by  reason  of  the  general  interest  in  the 
origin  and  meaning  of  aboriginal  Virginian  names  that  has  arisen  on 
the  eve  of  the  three  hundredth  anniversary  of  the  founding  of  the  Vir- 


548  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

ginia  Colony,  but  because  of  the  apparently  unalterable  differences 
between  some  of  the  conclusions  reached  by  these  two  students. 
For  several  years  Mr  Gerard  has  been  engaged  in  compiling  a  dic- 
tionary of  all  the  words  that  have  entered  English  from  the  Indian 
languages  of  the  three  Americas  and  the  West  Indies.  This  work, 
which  has  grown  to  be  very  voluminous,  gives  (i)  the  various  spell- 
ings of  the  Indian  word  ;  (2)  a  definition  of  the  object  named  ;  (3) 
historical  quotations  from  various  authors,  giving  a  history  of  the 
word  ;  (4)  the  etymology  of  the  word  ;  (5)  the  combinations  into 
which  the  word  has  entered. 

MAURICE    FISHBERG 

During  the  last  four  years  Dr  Fishberg,  of  New  York  City,  has 
obtained  the  measurements  of  1,528  native  and  immigrant  Jews  in 
the  United  States,  the  results  of  the  study  of  which  he  has  incor- 
porated in  the  following  papers  : 

Physical  Anthropology  of  the  Jews.  I  —  The  Cephalic  Index.  Ameri- 
can Anthropologist,  iv,  p.  684-706,  1902.  II  —  Pigmentation.  Ibid.,  v,  p. 
89-106,  1903. 

Materials  for  the  Physical  Anthropology  of  the  Eastern  European  Jews. 
Annals  of  the  New  York  Academy  of  Sciences,  xvi,  pp.  155-298  ;  published 
also  as  Memoirs  of  the  American  Anthropological  and  Ethnological  Societies, 
vol.  I,  pt.  I,  1905. 

During  the  summer  of  1905  Dr  Fishberg  visited  North  Africa 
and  obtained  measurements  of  77  native  Jew  adults  and  606  chil- 
dren. These  results  have  been  published  in  part  in  Zeitschrift  fur 
Deinographie  und  Statistik  dcr  Juden  for  November,  1905,  under 
the  title  **  Beitrage  zur  physischen  Anthropologic  der  nordafrikani- 
schen  Juden." 

JOHN    DYNELEY    PRINCE 

Professor  Prince,  of  Columbia  University,  has  continued  his  stud- 
ies in  Algonquian  philology  and  folk-lore.  In  1902,  in  collabora- 
tion with  the  late  Charles  Godfrey  Leland,  he  published  "  Koloskap 
the  Master,  and  other  Algonquin  Poems,"  and  subsequently  has 
published  "  The  Differentiation  between  the  Penobscot  and  the  Can- 
adian Abenaki  Dialects,"^  **The  Modem  Pequots  and  Their  Lan- 


^  American  Anthropologist^  IV,  p.  17-32,  1902. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  549 

guage"  (in  collaboration  with  Frank  G.  Speck  ),^  **  Glossary  of  the 
Mohegan-Pequot  Language  **  (also  in  collaboration  with  Mr  Speck),^ 
"A  Tale  in  the  Hudson  River  Indian  Language/'  ^  *'  Dying  American 
Speech  Echoes  from  Connecticut"  (with  Mr  Speck),^  "A  Modem 
Delaware  Tale/**  and  **The  Religion  of  the  Eastern  Algonquins."  * 

CARL  LUMHOLTZ 

Within  a  month  after  the  New  York  meeting  of  the  Americanists, 
Dr  Lumholtz's  Unkncnun  Mexico  appeared  in  this  country  in  two 
handsomely  illustrated  volumes,  followed  in  1903  by  editions 
issued  in  London  and  Christiania,  in  1904  by  a  Swedish  edition  pub- 
lished in  Stockholm,  and  in  1905  by  a  Spanish  edition  issued  in 
New  York  at  the  expense  of  the  Mexican  Government,  translated 
by  Dr  Balbino  Davalos.  Dr  Lumholtz's  previous  investigations 
under  the  auspices  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History 
resulted  in  1904  in  the  publication  of  "  Decorative  Art  of  the  Huichol 
Indians."  ^  At  a  meeting  held  by  the  Norwegian  Geographical 
Society  in  May  last,  Dr  Lumholtz  was  awarded  the  gold  medal  of 
the  Society  in  recognition  of  his  scientific  explorations. 

H.  S.    HALBERT 

Among  students  of  the  Southern  Indians  during  the  historical 
period  no  one  has  been  more  active  than  Mr  H.  S.  Halbert,  of 
Mississippi.  Mr  Halbert  has  been  engaged  during  the  last  two 
years  in  writing  a  history  of  the  Choctaw  Indians  east  of  the  Missis- 
sippi from  the  year  1540,  the  time  of  the  DeSoto  invasion,  to  1900. 
In  this  work  he  has  included  a  large  body  of  folklore  collected 
during  twenty  years'  association  with  the  Mississippi  Choctaw. 
The  creation  legend  of  this  tribe  has  already  been  published  by 
Mr  Halbert  in  the  Publications  of  the  Mississippi  Historical  Society, 
as  have  also  several  papers  on  the  identification  of  early  Indian 
village  sites.  It  is  expected  that  the  Choctaw  memoir  will  be 
ready  for  publication  next  year. 


^American  Anthropologist^  v,  p.  193-212,  1903. 

2  Ibid.,  VI,  p.  18-45,  1904- 

^'Ibid.,  VII,  p.  74-84,  1905. 

*  Proc.  American  Philosophical  Society^  Philadelphia,  XLII,  p.  346-52,  1903. 

*Ibid.,  XLI,  p.  19-34,  1902. 

•Hastings'  Dictionary  of  Religions  (in  preparation). 

^  Memoirs  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  Anthropology,  vol.  n. 


5 so  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

MARY    ALICIA    OWEN 

This  active  student  of  Indian  lore,  resident  at  St  Joseph,  Mo.,  has 
devoted  her  energies  to  an  endeavor  to  localize  tales  and  legends 
heard  at  the  council  fires  of  the  Indians  in  Iowa,  Nebraska,  and 
Kansas  (Tama,  Nemaha,  Wolf  River,  and  Big  Soldier  River  reser- 
vations), whenever  those  tales  and  legends  have  to  do  with  what  was 
Blacksnake  hills  and  is  now  St  Joseph,  Missouri.  Blacksnake  hills 
was  neutral  ground  to  all  the  tribes  until  the  Sauk  and  Foxes  settled 
on  it  after  Tecumseh's  war  in  the  early  years  of  the  19th  century, 
and  the  section  in  which  Miss  Owen  is  especially  interested  is  rich 
in  Indian  tradition.  The  results  of  some  of  her  studies  appear  in 
an  interesting  volume,*  published  in  1904. 

ALTON  H.  THOMPSON 

Dr  Thompson,  of  Topeka,  Kansas,  has  continued  his  studies 
of  the  teeth  of  the  ancient  Peruvians,  Mexicans,  and  mound  build- 
ers, with  reference  to  a  system  of  ethnographic  odontography, 
having  in  view  the  determination  of  racial  differences  in  the  form 
and  features  of  these  organs.  His  recent  work  has  consisted  of  the 
collation  of  his  observations  on  some  hundreds  of  skulls  and  the 
classification  of  anatomical  variations  for  comparison  with  future 
observations  on  other  races.  No  deductions  respecting  the  constancy 
of  any  special  features  that  can  be  considered  racial  have  as  yet  been 
drawn  from  the  limited  material  classified,  unless  it  is  the  excessive 
smallness  of  the  molars  in  the  Mexicans,  which  is  so  constant  as  to 
have  the  appearance  of  racial  significance. 

FRANCES    DENSMORE 

The  work  of  Miss  Densmore,  of  Red  Wing,  Minnesota,  during 
recent  years  has  been  almost  entirely  in  the  field  of  primitive  music, 
and  the  most  important  result  that  she  has  obtained  has  been  the 
formulation  of  a  working  hypothesis  on  the  development  of  music 
as  a  means  of  expression.  During  the  Exposition  at  St  Louis  in 
1904  she  studied  the  music  of  the  Filipinos,  finding  that  it  belongs 
to  a  period  of  development  preceding  that  of  the  American  Indians.* 


1  "  Folk-lore  of  the  Musquakie  Indians  of  North  America  and  Catalogue  of  Musqua- 
kie  Beadwork  and  other  Objects  in  the  Collection  of  the  Folk-I-,ore  Society."  Published 
for  the  Folk-Lore  Society  by  David  Nutt,  Ix>ndon,  1904. 

*  Miss  Densmore's  article  on  this  subject  will  appear  in  the  American  Anthropolo- 
gist^ vol.  VIII,  no.  4,  Oct.-Dec,  1906. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  55 1 

During  the  present  year  Miss  Densmore  learned  some  of  the  songs 
of  the  Grand  Medicine  Society  of  the  Ojibwa  of  Minnesota,  among 
whom  she  made  ethnological  observations  also,  embracing  some  of 
their  dances,  various  games,  and  races. 

GEORGE    BIRD    GRINNELL 

Dr  Grinnell  has  continued  his  studies  among  western  tribes, 
chiefly  among  the  Cheyenne,  from  whom  he  has  collected  material 
pertaining  to  their  history  and  to  their  primitive  customs  and  beliefs. 
In  connection  with  this  work  he  has  procured  a  number  of  folk 
stories,  and  has  acquired  a  collection  of  primitive  utensils,  some  of 
which  are  in  his  possession,  while  others  are  deposited  in  the  Ameri- 
can Museum  of  Natural  History.  Several  brief  papers  by  Dr  Grin- 
nell have  appeared  during  this  period  in  the  American  Anthropolo- 
gist and  in  the  Journal  of  American  Folk-Lore, 

p.  S.  SPARKMAN 

Among  the  younger  students  of  aboriginal  American  linguistics 
is  Mr  P.  S.  Sparkman,  of  Valley  Center,  California,  who  in  1899 
began  to  reduce  to  writing  the  language  of  the  San  Luis  Rey  (or 
Luisefio)  Indians  of  southern  California,  a  task  that  has  recently 
been  completed.  A  beginning  of  the  results  of  Mr  Sparkman's 
studies  has  been  published  under  the  title  "  Sketch  of  the  Grammar 
of  the  Luisefio  Language  of  California."  ^ 

The  above  summary  tells,  in  some  instances  all  too  briefly,  of 
the  chief  progress  that  has  been  made  in  American  anthropology 
since  the  International  Congress  of  Americanists  last  convened  in 
the  New  World.  A  full  record  of  the  progress  is  not  possible  within 
these  brief  limits  of  space  ;  and  indeed  in  some  cases  it  has  not  been 
practicable  even  to  summarize  work  that  has  been  accomplished  or 
to  give  an  outline  of  projected  plans.  The  anthropological  results 
of  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition  are  of  far-reaching  im- 
portance and  would  here  be  reviewed  were  it  not  for  the  fact 
that  the  PIxposition  is  still  fresh  in  the  minds  of  most  American- 
ists and  its  extensive  exhibits  have  so  often  and  so  recently  been 

*  American  Anthropologist,  vol.  vil,  p.  656-^62,  1905. 


552  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

described.  The  benefits  that  have  accrued  to  anthropology  from 
the  founding  of  the  Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington  in  1902 
have  been  touched  on  in  mentioning  the  individual  work  of  various 
anthropologists ;  but  there  are  other  institutions,  like  the  Hispanic 
Society  of  New  York  and  the  St  Louis  Public  Museum  —  the 
former  established  through  the  munificence  of  Mr  Archer  M.  Hunt- 
ington, the  latter  a  natural  outgrowth  of  the  Louisiana  Purchase 
Exposition  —  that  are  as  yet  too  young  to  be  enrolled  among  the 
working  institutions,  although  giving  promise  of  accomplishing  great 
things  by  the  time  the  Americanists  again  meet  on  American  shores. 

Long'outgrown  the  infantile  stage  is  the  Carnegie  Museum  of 
Pittsburg  with  its  increasing  collections  and  the  promise  of  important 
things  to  be  accomplished  by  its  Department  of  Anthropology,  with 
Mr  C.  V.  Hartman  at  its  head.  The  New  York  State  Museum, 
at  Albany,  has  continued  the  publication  of  its  series  of  Bulletins, 
noteworthy  among  which  are  the  treatises  on  archeological  topics 
by  Rev.  W.  M.  Beauchamp.  Various  historical  societies,  in  addi- 
tion to  those  above  mentioned,  have  done  excellent  work,  chiefly  in 
the  collection  and  display  of  local  objects  of  antiquity  and  in  enlight- 
ening the  public  as  to  their  former  use.  Among  these  are  the 
Missouri  Historical  Society,  whose  president,  Dr  C.  A.  Peterson 
of  St  Louis,  has  stimulated  interest  in  archeology  by  reason  of  his 
personal  researches  in  that  direction.  Among  the  individuals  whose 
activities  have  been  only  casually  mentioned,  or  have  not  been 
referred  to  at  all,  yet  whose  personal  studies  and  observations  are 
not  less  important,  are  : 

Mr  A.  H.  Blackiston,  who  has  made  interesting  observations 
on  archeological  remains  of  northwestern  Mexico,  some  of  the  results 
of  which  have  been  published  in  scientific  periodicals,  including  the 
American  Anthropologist, 

Mr  Charles  P.  Bowditch,  of  Boston,  who  has  continued  his 
studies  of  the  Maya  calendar  system  and  has  published  several  con- 
tributions to  the  knowledge  of  the  subject. 

Mr  David  I.  Bushnell,  of  St  Louis,  who  has  made  important 
excavations  in  the  now  celebrated  McEvers  mound,  but  whose  final 
report  on  the  subject  has  not  yet  been  published. 

Mr  David  I.  Bushnell,  Jr,  whose  studies  and  photographs  of 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  553 

American  Indian  objects  in  European  collections,  and  of  the  re- 
mains of  Swiss  lake-dwellings,  have  formed  the  subject  of  several 
interesting  and  instructive  articles  in  recent  numbers  of  the  Ameri- 
can Anthropologist, 

Dr  George  F.  Kunz,  who  has  continued  investigations  of  the 
occurrence  of  jade,  jadeite,  and  other  precious  or  semi-precious 
stones  and  their  use  by  aboriginal  peoples.  The  publication  of  the 
most  beautiful  and  most  expensive  work  ever  issued  in  America, 
if  not  in  the  world  —  The  Catalogue  of  the  Heber  R.  Bishop  Jade 
Collection  —  was  the  direct  result  of  Mr  Kunz's  interest  and  coop- 
eration. 

The  Duke  of  Loubat,  who,  in  addition  to  the  establishment  of 
a  chair  of  American  archeology  in  Columbia  University,  has  con- 
tinued the  publication,  in  facsimile,  of  known  Mexican  codices  and 
has  thus  placed  in  the  hands  of  students  the  much  needed  materials 
for  further  elucidating  the  problems  of  the  Mexican  calendar  and 
ceremonial  systems. 

Mr  J.  D.  McGuiRE,  of  Washington,  who  has  been  engaged  in 
compiling  exhaustive  data  on  the  customs  of  smoking  and  the  uses 
of  tobacco  among  the  American  aborigines. 

Dr  C.  Hart  Merriam,  of  the  Biological  Survey,  Washington, 
whose  primary  interest  is  in  biological  subjects  but  who  has  devoted 
much  study  to  California  ethnology  and  linguistics,  and  from  whom 
we  may  hope  to  receive  some  of  the  fruits  in  the  near  future. 

Mr  William  Nelson,  of  Paterson,  New  Jersey,  a  well  known 
student  and  writer  on  the  early  Indian  history  and  onomatology  of 
his  state.  In  1904  Mr  Nelson  published  Personal  Names  of  Indians 
of  Nro)  Jersey,  Being  a  list  of  Six  Hundred  and  Fifty  such  Names^ 
Gleaned  mostly  from  Indian  Deeds  of  the  Seventeenth  Century. 

Dr  John  B.  Nichols,  of  Washington,  who  has  devoted  special 
attention  to  the  numerical  proportion  of  the  sexes  at  birth  and  who 
expects  to  publish  soon  a  memoir  on  this  subject. 

Dr  T.  Mitchell  Prudden,  of  New  York,  whose  investigations 
of  Southwestern  archeology  have  extended  our  knowledge  of  the 
distribution  of  the  aboriginal  remains  in  the  Pueblo  area,  and  whose 
collections  have  enriched  the  Yale  University  Museum,  as  before 
mentioned. 

AM.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  8 — 36 


554  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Mr  Horatio  N.  Rust,  of  South  Pasadena,  Cal.,  some  of  the 
results  of  whose  investigations  of  the  ethnology  and  archeology  of 
southern  California  have  been  published  in  these  pages,*  while 
others  will  shortly  appear. 

Professor  Frederick  Starr,  whose  cooperation  aided  in 
making  the  anthropological  display  of  the  St  Louis  Exposition 
a  noteworthy  success  and  whose  collections  have  formed  an  impor- 
tant addition  to  the  treasures  of  the  Field  Museum  of  Natural  History. 
Professor  Starr  is  now  engaged  in  research  in  Central  Africa,  the 
anthropological  work  of  the  University  of  Chicago  being  now  in 
charge  of  Dr  George  A.  Dorsey. 

Rev.  Anselm  Weber  and  his  confreres,  of  St  Michael  Mission, 
Arizona,  whose  studies  of  the  Navaho  tribe  and  its  language  will 
eventually  form  an  important  contribution  to  American  ethnology 
and  linguistics. 

Dr  Harris  H.  Wilder,  of  Smith  College,  Northampton,  Mass., 
^ho  has  found  the  opportunity  to  conduct,  partly  in  association  with 
Miss  Inez  L.  Whipple,  studies  in  the  epidermic  ridges  and  the  con- 
figuration upon  the  palmar  and  plantar  surfaces.*  Dr  Wilder  has 
also  made  interesting  experiments  in  the  restoration  of  dried  human 
tissues,*  has  conducted  excavations  in  an  aboriginal  cemetery  in 
North  Hadley,  Mass.,*  and  has  investigated  numerous  shell-mounds 
on  the  shores  of  Casco  bay,  Maine,  including  the  islands  and  main- 
land. These  excavations  have  produced  a  small  collection  for  Smith 
College. 

The  summary  would  scarcely  be  complete  without  mention  of 
the  work  of  some  of  our  photographers  and  that  of  a  coterie  of 
artists  whose  aim  is  the  faithful  portrayal  of  the  aborigines  and 
their  customs.  The  result  is  a  rapidly  growing  pictorial  record  of 
the  Indians,  the  importance  of  which  to  the  future  student  cannot 
be  estimated. 


*See  vol.  VII,  688,  and  vol.  viii,  28. 

^American  Anthropolopsty  VI,  244-293,   April-June,  1904. 

'Ibid.,  I-17,  Jan.-Mar.,  1904. 

*Ibid.,  VII,  295-300,  April-June,  1905. 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY 


555 


Index  of  Individuals  and  Institutions 


Abbott,  W.  L.,  455,  456 

Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of 
Philadelphia,  530 

Adler,  Cyrus,  458 

AiMES,  H.  H.  S.,  503 

Alaska  Commercial  Company,  489 

American  Anthropological  Associa- 
tion, 442,  493»  5oi»  504,  522,  552 

American  Antiquarian  Society,  508 

American  Association  for  the  Ad- 
vancement OF  Science,  443,  522 

American  Ethnological  Society,  500, 
501 

American  Exploration  Society,  479 

American  Folk-Lx)re  Society,  477, 494, 

American  Museum  of  Natural   His- 
tory, 467,  477»  549,  551 
American   Philological  Association, 

443 

Anthropological  Society  of  Wash- 
ington, 498,  500,  544 

Archaeological  Institute  of  Amer- 
ica, 443,  493,  503 

Ball,  Dr,  541 

Bandelier,  a.  F.,  467,  471,  472 

Barrett,  S.  A.,  448,  485,  487»  502 

Barrows,  D.  P.,  525 

Barry,  P.,  502 

Bates,  Wm.  N.,  483 

Bauer,  G.,  538 

Beauchamp,  W.  M.,  552 

Becker,  F.  J.,  520 

Beckwith,  Paul,  458,  500 

Bell,  J.  M.,  502 

Beloit  College,  513,  514 

Beni- Hassan  Excavations  Committee, 
465 

Berkeley  Folk-Lore  Club,  493 

Berlin,  A.  F.,  523 

Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop  Musuem,  529 

Bishop,  Heber  R.,  553 

Blackiston,  A.  H.,  456,  552 

Blackman,  L.  G.,  529 

Boas,  Franz,  442,447»  448,  449,4So»  45  ^ 
452,466,  467,  468,  469,  471,  472,  503 
Bogoras,  W.,  472 
Bolton,  F.  E.,  520,  521 
Bolton,  H.  E.,  448 
BoococK  Library,  464 
Booth,  Henry,  538 
BowDiTCH,  C.  P.,  461,  504,  552 
Boyd,  Harriet  A.,  446,  480,  483 
Brady,  W.  J.,  520 
Breton,  Adela  C,  483 
Brigham,  W.  T.,  529 


I 


Brinton,  D.  G.,  481,  482 

Brittin,  L.  H.,  538 

Brockett,  Paul,  458 

Brooklyn  Institute  Museum,  473 

Broomall,  H.  L.,  524,  525 

Brower,  J.  v.,  519 

Brown,  C.  F.,  502 

Brown,  Jacob  B.,  524,  525 

Buckalew,  J.  M.,  524 

Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  444 

447.  454»  455.  467,  508,  533 
Bureau  of  Missions,  471 
Burnett,  Swan  M.,  499 
BusHNELL,  D.  I.,  552 
BusHNELL,  D.  I.,  Jr.,  461,  552 
Carnegie  Institution,  467,  470,  477, 

478,  534,  552 

Carnegie  Museum,  552 

Carroll  College,  513,  514,  515 

Carroll,  Mitchell,  493 

Casanowicz,  I.  M.,  458,  500 

Chamberlain,  A.  F.,  448,  495,  496,  501, 
503,  509 

Chamberlin,  T.  C,  541 

Chapman,  Mrs  E.  M.,  455 

Chapman,  J.  W.,  468 

Chicago  University,  475,  554 

Christie,  E.  B.,  528 

Clark,  A.  H.,  458 

Clark  University,  495 

Clavel,  M.,  503 

Clay,  A.  T.,  483 

CoE,  Kate  Foote,  465 

Cole,  F.  C,  478 

Columbia  University,  466,  553 

Comer,  George,  468 

Cooke,  G.  H.,  543 

CoviLLE,  F.  v.,  457 

Crocker  Fund,  489,  490 

CULIN,  Stewart,  448,  452,  473,  522 

Cummings,  R.  F.,  477,  478 

CusHiNG,  F.  H.,  532 

Dall,  W.  H.,  448 

DAvALOS,  Balbino,  549 

Davenport  Academy  of  Sciences,  521 

Davis,  N.  deG.,  491 

Dawes,  Anna  L.,  448 

Delaware  County  Institute  of  Sci- 
ence, 524 

Densmore,  Frances,  550 

Dixon,  R.  B.,  442,  443,  448,  449,  461, 
462,  468,  472,  485,  486,  487,  488, 

494,  502 
D'Ooge,  M.  L.,  505 
DoRSEY,  G.  A.,  442,  443,  448,  474,  477, 

478,  501,  502,  522,  554 


556 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


DORTCH,  J.  H.,  448 

Drexel,  Lucy  Wharton,  482 

DuBois,  Constance  G.,  468,  485,  488,  502 

Eames,  W.,  448 

Easby,  a.  R.,  525 

East  Asiatic  Committee,  471 

Egypt  Exploration  Fund,  464,  479 

Egypt  Research  Account,  479 

EuoT,  C.  W.,  461 

Emerson,  Alfred,  483,  491 

Emmons,  G.  T.,  472,  538 

Ethnological  and  ARCHiCOLOGicAL 
SuRVEYt)F  California,  484, 485, 488 

Ethnological  Survey  for  the  Philip- 
pine Islands,  525 

Evans,  A.  J.,  482 

Farabee,  W.  C.,  460,  461,  462 

Farrand,  L.,  448,  466,  467,  503 

Ferris,  H.  B.,  463 

Fkwkes,  J.  W.,  446,  447,  450,  451,  452, 

455»  456,  458,  499,  500 
Field,  Marshall,  478 
Field  Museum  of  Natural  History, 

474,  554 
Fishberg,  Maurice,  501,  548 

Fisher,  C.  S.,  483 

Fletcher,  Alice  C,  448,  452,  461,  499, 

502,  545 

Funders-Petrie,  W.  M.,  482 

Flint,  J.  M.,  446,  458. 

FUNT,  Weston,  499 

Folkmar,  Daniel,  528 

Fortier,  a.,  502 

Foster,  J.  W.,  504 

Fowke,  G.,  448,  456,  498,  533 

FRfeMONT,  J.  C,  506 

Furness,  William  H.,  3d,  481,  483,  525 

Gallatin,  Albert,  500,  509 

Gates,  P.  G.,  456,  457 

Gerard,  W.  R.,  547 

Getman,  A.  \V.,  538 

Gilbert,  G.  K.,  445 

Goddard,  p.  E.,  448,  449,  470,485,  486, 

489,  502 
Golder,  F.  a.,  502 
Gordon,  G.  B.,  443,  480,  481,  483 
Green,  F.  N.,  491 
Grenfell,  B.  p.,  482,  491 
Grinnell,  G.  B.,  448,  502,  551 
Gruener,  Theodore,  465 
Hagar,  Stansbury,  466,  540 
Halbert,  H.  S.,  549 
Hale,  E.  E.,  508,  509 
Hales,  Henry,  538 
Hall,  Edith  H.,  483 
Hall,  G.  Stanley,  497 
Hamilton,  F.  A.,  502 
Hamilton,  J.  C,  502 
Harris,  I.  H.,  455 
Hartman,  C.  v.,  552 


Harvard   Anthropological   Society, 

462 
Harvard  University,  458,  482,  511 
Haupt,  Paul,  447,  458 
Hayden,  H.  E.,  523,  524 
Haynes,  Henry  W.,  508 
Hearst,  Phoebe  A.,  483,  484,  485,  489, 

491 
Heierlei,  J.,  455 
Hemenway,  Augustus,  461 
Hemenway,  Mary,  459 
Henshaw,  H.  W.,  448 
Hewett,  Edgar  L.,  446,  448,  450,  452, 

455.  504.  507 
Hewitt,  J.  N.  B.,  450,  452,  499,  500 

Heye,  George  G.,  537 
HiLDER,  F.  F.,  455 
Hill,  A.  J.,  519 

HiLPRECHT,  H.  v.,  480,  482,  483 
Hispanic  Sowety,  552 
Hodge,  F.  W.,  442,  443,  447,  452,  500 
hohman,  j.  g.,  502 

Holmes,  W.  H.,  445,  446,  447,  450,  452, 
453,  455»  456,  457,  45^,  499,  5^4, 

541 

HoLST,  N.  O.,  542 

Hondo,  Professor^  524 

HOOPES,  H.  E.,  524 

HOPPIN,  Benjamin,  465 

Hough,  Walter,  446,  449,  450,  455,  456, 

457,  458,  499,  500,  523 
Hrdlicka,  a.,  446,  449,  452,  453,  456, 

457,  458,  472,  488,  499,  541 

HUBBELL,  J.  L.,  538 
HUCKERBY,  T.  T.,  539 

Hudson,  J.  W.,  474 

Hummel,  Charles,  455 

Hunt,  A.  S.,  491 

Hunt,  George,  472 

Huntington,  Archer  M.,  552 

Huntington  California    Expedition, 

468 
Huntington,  G.  S.,  467 
Hutchison,  P.  A.,  502 
Hyde  Expedition,  470 
Hyde,  B.  Talbot  B.,  442 
Iowa   Anthropological    Association, 

520 
Iowa  State  Historical  Society,  520 
Iowa  State  University,  521 
Ireland,  Allayne,  475 
Jamf^,  J.  L.,  477 
James,  Mrs  Julian,  456 
James,  Sarah  L.,  500 
Jamestown  Exposition,  511 
Jenings,  F.  H.,  446 
Jenkins,  Elizabeth  F.,  465 
JENKS,  A.  E.,  525,  527 
Jf^up,  Morris  K.,  472 
Jesup  North  Pacific  Expedition,  469 


RECENT  PROGRESS  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY 


557 


jochelson,  w.,  472,501 

Johnston,  W.  W.  ,  499 

Jones,  Joseph,  538 

Jones,  William,  449,  466,  470,  478,  500 

Jordan,  D.  S.,  507 

Jordan  and  Evermann,  544 

Judy,  H.  B.,  473 

Keeler,  Charles,  494 

Keller,  A.  G.,  463,  464 

Kelsey,  F.  W.,  505 

Keppler,  Joseph,  538 

KiNNicuTT,  L.  N.,  497 

Kittredge,  G.  L.,  503 

KoBER,  G.  M.,  499 

Kroeber,  a.  L.,  443,  449,  470,472,477, 

485,  486,  487,  488.  502 
KuNZ,  G.  F.,  472,  553 
La  Flesche,  Francis,  546 
Lamb,  D.  S.,  499 
Lange,  a.  F.,  494 
Lapham,  \.  A.,  511 
Lau,  R.,  473 
Laufer,  B.,  467,  471 
Lawrence  University,  514 
Leland,  C.  G.,  548 
Leupp,  Francis  E.,  444 
Lewis,  T.  H.,  519 
Long,  M.  C.,  541 
Loos,  L  A.,  520,  521 
LouBAT,  Duke  of,  466,  553 
Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition,  442, 

451, 472,  476, 498,  528,  55o»  551,  552 
Lowell,  F.  C,  461 
Lumholtz,  Carl,  472,  549 
LuMMis,  C.  F.,  505,  507 
Lyman,  W.  D.,  508,  509 
Lythgoe,  A.  M.,  491 
McAleer,  George,  497 
McCoRMiCK,  Stanley,  477,  478 
MacCurdy,  George  G.,  442,  443,  465 
Mace,  A.  C,  491 
McGee,  W  J,  442,  443 
McGuiRE,  J.  D.,  443,  449,  458,  499,  553 
Mack  IE,  C.  P.,  538 
Maler,  Teobert,  460 
Manchester,  W.  E.,  464 
Marqueite  College,  514 
Martin,  Rudolf,  475 
Mason,  O.  T.,  449,  457,  458 
Mattern,  J.  E.,  538 
Matthews,  W.,  449,  486,  489,  499 
Maxfield,  B.  S.,  502 
Maynard,  G.  C,  456,  458,  500 
Mead,  Frances  H.,  461 
Mearns,  Edgar  A.,  456 
Merriam,  C.  Hart,  494,  553 
Merriam,  J.  C,  485,  494 
Mefchnikoff,  Elie,  446 
Miguel,  Jean,  455 
Miller,  E.  Y.,  446,  527 


Miller,  M.  G.,  530 

Miller,JM.  L.,  525,  528 

Millington,  W.  H.,  502 

Mills,  W.  C.,  509 

Milwaukee- Downer  College,  514 

Milwaukee  Public  Museum,  515,  5x7 

Minnesota  Historical  Socity,  5x8 

Mississippi  Historical  Society,  549 

Missouri  Historical  Society,  536,  552 

Mitchell,  E.  C,  518 

Montgomery,  Henry,  547 

MooNEY,  James,  451,  452,  474,  499,  500 

Moore,  Clarence  B.,  465,  530 

MOOREHEAD,  \V.  K.,  497 
MOSELEY,  W.   H.,  465 

MOller,  Friedrich,  545 

Museum-Gates  Expedition,  455,  457 

Mutch,  James,  468 

National  Museum,  444,  449,  452,  453 

Nelson,  E.  W.,  455 

Nelson,  William,  553 

Newcombe,  C.  F.,  474,  477,  478 

Newell,  W.  W.,  502,  503 

New  York  Academy  of  Sciences,  500, 
50X 

New  York  State  Museum,  552 

Nichols,  J.  B.,  500,  553 

NiCHOi-SON,  Grace,  465 

NuTTALL,  Zclia,  461,  489,  546 

Office  of  Indian  Affairs,  444 

Ohio  State  ARCHi«OLOGiCAL  and  His- 
torical Society,  509,  510 

Osterhout,  L  S.,  523 

Owen,  C.  L.,  474 

Owen,  Mary  A.,  550 

Paarmann,  J.  H.,  520 

Palmer,  F.  M.,  505,  506 

Palmer.  T.  C,  524 

Peabodv,   Charles,  461,   462,  494,  497 

503.  508 
Peabody,  George,  458, 
Peabody  Museum,  458,  546 
Peabody,  Robert  S.,  497 
Pepper,  G.  H.,  470,  489 
I   PERfez,  Angel,  527,  528 
Peterson,  C.  A.,  552 
Peterson,  J.,  485 
Pheian,  James  D.,  493,  507 
Philippine  Museum,  528 
Phillips  Academy,  497 

I     PiTTIER  DE  FABREGA,   H.,  456,  502,  544 

I  Powell,  J.  \V.,  445,  447,  499 
Prince,  J.  D.,  473,  548 
Prudden,  T.  Mitchell,  465,  553 
Putnam,  F.  W.,  442,  443,  461,  462,  467, 

482,  484,  485,  493,  494,  504,  506 
Radcliffe  Anthropological  Club,  463 
Ramsey,  W.  M.,  483 
Ranke,  Herman,  483 
Reed,  W.  A.,  527 


558 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


Reisner,  G.  a.,  491,  492 

Reynolds,  M.  A.  S.,  523,  524 

Ripley,  W.  Z.,  466 

RiPON  College,  514 

RiTTER,  W.  £.,  494 

ROCKHILL,  W.  W.,  446 

Rosen,  Eric  von,  446 

RuMSEY,  C.  £.,  490 

Russell,  Frank,  452,  502 

Rust,  H.  N.,  554 

Ryerson,  M.  a.,  477 

Saeger,  R.  B.,  483 

Safpord,  W.  E.,  445,  500,  543 

St  Clair,  H.  H.,  2d,  450 

Saint  Francis  Seminary,  513 

St  Louis  Exposition.     Ste  Louisiana 

Purchase  Exposition. 
St  Louis  Public  Museum,  552 
Saleeby,  N.  M.,  527,  528 
Sausbury,  Stq>hen,  509 
Sapir,  E.,  450 

Sauk  County  Historical  Society,  514 
Savage,  M.  F.,  538 
Saville,  M.  H.,  443,  466,  467,  522 

SCHEERER,  Otto,  527 

ScHELLHAS,  Paul,  461 

Scripture,  E.  W.,  446 

Seaman,  Marianna  P.,  500 

Seton-Karr,  H.  W.,  455,  458 

Seymour,  T.  D.,  508 

Shambaugh,  B.  F.,  520,  521 

Shimek,  B.,  520 

SiMMS,  S.  C,  474,  477 

Sioux  City  Academy,  522 

Smillie,  T.  \V.,  458 

Smith  College,  554 

Smith,  Harlan  I.,  469,  472 

Smith,  Jane,  461 

Smithsonian  Institution,  444,  529 

Smyly,  J.  G.,  491 

Sparkman,  p.  S.,  551 

Speck,  F.  (}.,  450,  549 

Spinden,  H.  J.,  461,  462 

Spitzka,  E.  a.,  539 

Stapleton,  D.  C,  538 

Starr,  Frederick,  476,  554 

Stevenson,  Mrs  M.  C,  452,  455,  456 

Stokes,  J.  F.  G.,  529 

Stoudt,  J.  B.,  502 

Sumner,  W.  G.,  464 

Swanton,  J.  R.,  449,  452,  472,  500 

Thaw,  Mrs  William,  458 

Thomas,  Cyrus,  445,  450,  452 

Thomi*son,  a.  H.,  550 


Thompson,  E.  H.,  461,  509 

tooker,  w.  w.,  496,  547 

Toy,  C.  H.,  503 

TozzER,  A.  M.,  461,  462,  507 

Trumbull,  J.  H.,  452,  508 

Uhle,  Max,  483.  490,  544 

University  of  California,  468, 483,  546 

University  of  Chicago,  475 

University  of  Pe5insylvania,  479 

Upham,  E.  p.,  458 

Upham,  Warren,  520,  541 

Utley,  Frank,  538 

Verner,  S.  p.,  522 

VoLK,  E.,  460,  489 

Voth,  H.  R.,  474,  477 

Walker,  J.  R.,  470,  502 

Ward,  D.  J.  H.,  520,  521,  522 

Waukesha  Women's  Club,  515 

Weber,  Anselm,  554 

Wheeler,  B.  L,  507 

Whipple,  Inez  L.,  554 

White,  J.  W.,  504 

Wilder,  F.  A.,  520 

Wilder,  H.  H.,  554 

Will,  G.  F.,  461 

Willoughby,  C.  C,  461 

Wilson,  Louis  N.,  496 

Wilson,  Thomas,  499 

Winchell,  N.  H.,  519,  541 

Wintemberg,  W.  J.,  502 

WiNTHROP,  Robert  C,  459 

Wisconsin  Archeological  Society,  511 

Wisconsin  Free  Library  Commission, 

516 
Wisconsin  Natural  History  Society, 

518 
Wisconsin  State   Historical  Society, 

512,516 
Wisconsin  University,  514 
Wissler,  Clark,  466,  467,  472,  502 
Wood,  Leonard  A.,  527 
Worcester,  DeanC,  528 
Wren,  Christopher,  524 
Wrenshall,  L.  H.,  502 
Wright,  F.  B.,  543 
Wright,  G.  F.,  541 
Wright,  Harrison,  523 
Wyoming  Historical  and  Geological 

Society,  523 
Yale  University,  463,  467 
Yale  University  Museum,  464,  553 
Young,  J.  L.,  529 
Young,  W.  F.,  455 


"     I^ 


THE   MONACO    MEETING   OF   THE   INTERNATIONAL 
CONGRESS   OF  ANTHROPOLOGY  AND   PREHIS- 
TORIC  ARCHEOLOGY 

By  ADELA  C.  BRETON 

The  thirteenth  session  of  the  International  Congress  of  Anthro 
pology  and  Prehistoric  Archeology  was  held  at  Monaco  under  the 
presidency  of  Dr  E.  Hamy,  from  April  15  to  22.  Among  veter- 
ans of  the  science  present  were  Sir  John  Evans  and  Messrs  A. 
Gaudry,  Cartailhac,  Capellini,  and  Pigorini,  while  Dr  Vemeau,  the 
Abbes  de  Villeneuve  and  Breuil,  Professors  O.  Montelius,  E.  Ray 
Lankester,  S.  Reinach,  Rutot,  Dr  Capitan,  Dr  Arthur  Evans,  M.  Boule, 
and  many  others  contributed  papers  or  took  part  in  the  discussions. 

The  first  morning  meeting  was  devoted  to  eoliths  and  the  Paleo- 
lithic period,  but  several  papers  which  promised  to  be  interesting 
were  not  read.  M.  Rutot  described  his  own  conversion  from  in- 
credulity to  belief  in  the  human  origin  of  eoliths.  Sir  John  Evans 
asked  where  are  the  bones  which  should  prove  the  case.  Abbe 
Breuil  noted  the  extreme  rarity  of  any  bones  in  the  earlier  gravels. 

Dr  Bourlon  gave  an  account  of  his  digging  at  Le  Moustier,* 
where  he  found  Chellean  implements  in  the  second  layer  from  the 
top,  mixed  with  those  of  the  Madelaine  period.  As  from  their 
patina  they  were  evidently  ///  situ,  he  thinks  they  are  a  later  return 
to  the  coups  de  poing,  and  that  they  did  not  (as  had  been  suggested) 
fall  from  the  plateau  above.  M.  S.  Reinach  said  that  the  Chellean 
implement  once  discovered  (and  it  was  **  one  of  the  great  discov- 
eries of  the  world" )  continued  always,  and  other  speakers  agreed 
that  they  are  found  in  later  sites,  having  either  been  picked  up  and 
re-used,  or  the  shape  continued  by  subsequent  makers. 

A  visit  was  paid  that  afternoon  to  the  caves  of  Baousse-Rousse, 
a  mile  east  from  Menton,  in  the  limestone  cliff,  about  25  feet  above 


'  See  V Homme  Prihistoriquty  July,  1905.     The  mountains  rise  steeply  above  the 
caves,  which  face  what  was  formerly  the  only  coast  road  from  France  to  Italy. 

559 


560  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  present  sea  level.  The  Abbe  de  Villeneuve  and  M.  Boule  de- 
scribed the  Grotte  du  Prince  on  the  spot.  No  human  bones  have 
yet  been  found  in  this  cave,  although  there  are  about  sixteen /^^rj, 
or  hearths,  with  implements.     The  lower  ones  are  as  follows  : 

Tlie  Grotte  du  Priftce. — c  (pi.  xxviii  b  *).  Fauna  of  a  cold  climate* 
but  archeologically  Mousterian,  as  in  d  :  Canis  lupus,  Hyaena  spelaea, 
Cervus  tarandus,  Cervus  (Dama)  somonensis,  Cervus  elaphus,  Bison 
priscus.  Bos  primigenius,  Capra  ibex,  Ursus  spelaeus. 

D.  In  this  series  silex  begins  to  replace  the  quartzite,  grit,  etc., 
used  for  implements  in  the  lowest  beds,  and  the  hot  period  fauna 
ends.  Hippopotamus  amphibius,  Rhinoceros  merckii,  Elephas 
antiquus,  Equus  caballus,  Sus  scrofa.  A  shell.  Cassis  rufa  (Linn.), 
a  species  from  the  Indian  ocean. 

E.  The  implements  correspond  with  those  of  Tasmania.  They 
resemble  the  Mousterian,  but  the  flakes  chipped  on  both  sides, 
especially  characteristic  of  Moustier,  are  absent,  and  the  imple- 
ments seem  more  advanced  and  developed. 

Burma  GrandCy  the  next  cave,  contains  three  skeletons  found 
there.*  Then  comes  the  Grotte  du  Cavillon  (pi.  xxviii  c),  where  M- 
Riviere  found  the  skeleton  known  as  "  L'Homme  de  Menton,"  now 
in  the  museum  in  the  Jardin  des  Plantes  at  Paris,  preserved  just  as  it 
was  discovered. 

The  Grotte  des  Enfants  (pi.  xxviiic),  a  little  west  from  this,  has 
given  most  interesting  results,  having  been  excavated,  like  the  Grotte 
du  Prince,  at  the  expense  of  the  Prince  of  Monaco,  with  the  greatest 
precaution. 

B.  The  skeleton  of  a  woman  strewn  over  with  shells  ;  a  rounded 
piece  of  natural  iron  near  the  right  shoulder. 

c.  The  foyer  des  enfants,  with  children's  skeletons  discovered 
by  M.  Riviere. 

D.  Contains  very  small  and  delicate  implements,  and  flakes. 

E.  Flakes  and  implements  with  notched  sides ;  simple  flakes 
with  points  skilfully  obtained  and  often  much  retouched,  very  char- 
acteristic of  the  Paleolithic  period. 

1  The  accompanying  plan  and  sections  are  reproduced  from  the  drawings  of  M. 
Tschirret,  under  the  direction  of  M.  Boule  and  L*Abb6  de  Villeneuve,  published  in 
the  guide  leaflet  issued  by  the  Congress  for  the  use  of  the  excursionists. 

'This  cave  was  excavated  by  M.  Jullien  about  1884,  but  without  sufficient  care. 


r 


^-^ 


w*  -    -    — • 


1*-' 


'4 


■\-    *■ 


*».- 


■  \ 


■'  i 


<.. 


I  ^ 


\ 

t 

■  I 

•  f 


i 


I      IP}^ 


4 


-»      - 


A 


-  ;■-.  .n- 1    • 
|.r.      .1'.//. 


'/ 


i  u 


^ 


1' 


^» 


-    I  . 


-•./ 


*  • 


/     .•    1     ■ 
I 


■  I  m  ■  • 


r*' 


*^ 


i 
f 


BRETON]  THE  MONACO  MEETING  56 1 

F.  At  this  period  wood  must  have  been  used  for  implements. 
There  are  few  bone  objects.  Pointes  a  cran  of  silex,  mistakenly 
thought  similar  to  those  of  Laugerie  Haute,  which  are  of  the  end 
of  the  Solutrean  period. 

G.  Hammer-stones,  pierced  shells,  flattish  rubbing  pebbles,  a 
bone  implement,  and  scrapers  and  gravers  characteristic  of  the  rein- 
deer period. 

H.  Interment :  male  skeleton  lying  on  back,  at  full  length,  with 
hands  on  breast ;  small  shells  (Nassa  naritea)  around  the  head ; 
canine  teeth  of  deer  pierced  for  suspension,  and  flint  implements 
strewn  around  the  body.     Cro-Magnon  type. 

I.  Skeletons  of  an  old  woman  and  a  young  man,  lying  huddled 
together,  on  their  sides.  The  man  with  four  rows  of  the  Nassa 
shells  around  the  head  ;  flint  chips  around.     Negroid  type. 

K.  Bone  points  of  the  post-Mousterian  but  pre-Solutrean  period. 

L.  Small  whitish  flakes. 

About  seven  meters  deep  from  b  to  l. 

The  following  day's  session  was  occupied  chiefly  by  discussions 
on  these  caves. 

Dr  Vemeau  read  a  paper  on  the  peculiar  negroid  type  which  he 
proposes  to  call  "  L'Homme  de  Grimaldi,"  the  caves  being  in  the 
commune  of  Grimaldi.  The  head  is  negroid,  very  prognathous, 
with  wide  face.  The  projection  of  the  heel  is  enormous,  and  the 
long  forearms  also  arc  negroid,  but  the  pelvis  is  European  and  the 
dentition  like  the  Australian.  He  had  found  the  same  type  in 
some  ancient  burials  in  Italy,  and  even  saw  two  survivors  (not  dark 
in  color)  in  a  remote  mountain  village  near  Turin.  The  Neolithic 
negroid  type  found  in  Brittany  appears  to  be  similar.  Dr  Vemeau 
considers  that  these  cave-burials  were  undoubted  burials  in  cavities 
made  on  purpose,  and  undoubtedly  Quaternary. 

The  Anthropological  Museum  in  the  old  town  of  Monaco  con- 
tains these  skeletons  and  a  collection  of  the  contents  of  the  caves, 
labeled  and  admirably  arranged  under  the  superintendence  of  M. 
Cartailhac  and  Abbe  de  Villeneuve,  the  director.  M.  Boule  and 
Dr  Verneau  are  bringing  out  full  reports  of  the  excavations  for  the 
Prince  of  Monaco,  but  they  will  probably  be  distributed  privately 
and  not  sold. 


$62  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

M.  A.  Gaudry,  speaking  of  the  possible  cradle  of  humanity  and 
the  present  tendency  to  consider  it  Australia,  drew  attention  to  the 
arrest  of  development  in  the  fauna  of  the  southern  hemisphere  as 
evidenced  in  Australia,  Patagonia,  and  Madagascar.  He  therefore 
thinks  it  improbable  that  man  should  have  been  an  exception. 
"  Some  one  has  said,  V Homme  est  arrive  de  VAustralie  avcc  son 
chien.  It  is  more  likely  that  he  went  to  Australia  and  took  his 
dog  with  him." 

Dr  Capitan  gave  a  vividly  descriptive  lecture,  with  lantern  slides, 
on  the  Prehistoric  Caves  with  Decorated  Sides,  of  which  1 5  are  now 
known  —  ten  in  France,  four  in  Spain,  and  one  in  Italy.  His 
illustrations  (from  the  carefully  drawn  copies  by  the  Abbe  Breuil  and 
from  photographs)  were  chiefly  from  the  caves  of  Combarelles,  Font- 
de-Gaume,  Marsoulas,  and  Pair-non-Pair.  The  mammoth,  bison, 
reindeer,  cave-lion,  bear,  and  horse  are  all  represented  in  these 
wonderful  incised  drawings  and  must  have  been  known  to  the  artists 
who  reproduced  them  so  well.  The  caves  are  winding  passages  in 
calcareous  rock,  that  of  Combarelles  being  283  meters  long.  The 
drawings  usually  begin  at  some  distance  from  the  entrance  and  are 
most  numerous  at  the  far  end.  As  few  carnivorous  animals  are 
among  them,  it  is  supposed  that  they  were  made  by  a  race  of  hun- 
ters to  invoke  the  deity  to  send  them  plenty  of  game. 

The  Bronze  age  in  Sweden  was  the  subject  of  a  discourse  by 

■ 

Professor  O.  Montelius,  with  slides  illustrating  the  different  methods 
of  interment.  He  distinguishes  three  periods,  and  in  each  the  male 
and  female  burials  differ  in  detail. 

M.  Dechelette  spoke  on  the  distribution  of  deposits  or  caches  of 
the  Bronze  age  in  France,  of  which  620  are  known,  mainly  on  the 
west  side  near  the  Atlantic  coast  and  the  English  channel.  There  are 
few  near  the  Pyrenees  and  the  Mediterranean.  The  distribution  of 
gold  ornaments  in  France  follows  that  of  bronze,  and  a  great  quantity 
of  gold  objects  has  been  found  in  Brittany. 

Ancient  African  Sites  was  the  subject  of  papers  by  M.  Debruge 
and  M.  Flamand,  and  the  latter  noted  the  contact  between  the  in- 
terior of  Libya  and  Egypt  in  the  Neolithic  period.  Mousterian 
implements  have  been  found  in  situ,  but  as  yet  not  any  of  Solutrean 
type. 


/. 


V  V 


"v: 


*.-i. 


*■  **.. 


•  ,.» 


^  •  « p » 


^ 

^ 


... 


BRETON]  THE  MONACO  MEETING  563 

Dr  Montane,  of  Cuba,  said  that  primitive  man  there,  as  shown 
in  the  cave  burials,  was  of  a  negroid  type  similar  to  that  of  Grimaldi. 

Dr  Allen  Sturge,  of  29  Boulevard  de  Dubouchage,  Nice,  in- 
vited the  members  to  visit  his  magnificent  collection  of  stone  imple- 
ments, and  distributed  an  interesting  descriptive  catalogue  of  the 
more  important  objects. 

The  social  side  of  the  Congress  included  an  evening  reception 
by  the  Prince  of  Monaco  in  his  historic  palace,  and  an  opera  and  a 
concert  at  the  Casino  of  Monte  Carlo. 

There  was  an  excursion  to  Grasse,  under  the  guidance  of 
M.  P.  Goby,  to  see  several  dolmens  and  fortified  sites  in  that 
neighborhood. 

The  next  meeting  of  the  Congress  will  be  held  at  Dublin  in 
1909. 

Bath,  England. 


THE  STORY   OF  THE  ANTHROPOLOGICAL   SOCIETY 

OF  WASHINGTON » 

By  DANIEL  S.   LAMB 

One  of  the  duties  of  the  President  of  this  Society  is  to  deliver,  at 
the  first  meeting  in  February,  an  address  on  some  anthropological 
subject.  Inasmuch  as  a  history  of  the  Society  has  never  been 
written  and  as  this  is  the  twenty-seventh  year  of  its  existence,  I  have 
prepared  a  brief  account  of  its  activities  during  that  period  to  serve 
as  my  presidential  address. 

Omitting  the  National  Institute,  which  was  founded  in  1841  and 
passed  out  of  existence  twenty  years  later,  there  was  only  one 
scientific  society  in  Washington,  so  far  as  I  am  aware,  prior  to  1871. 
This  was  the  Medical  Society,  incorporated  in  18 19  and  therefore 
approaching  its  centennial.  The  Philosophical  Society  was  estab- 
lished in  1 87 1,  and  the  Anthropological  Society  in  1879.  In  1880 
the  Biological  Society  was  founded  ;  the  Chemical  and  Entomolog- 
ical Societies  in  1884;  the  National  Geographic  Society  in  1888, 
the  Geological  Society  in  1893,  the  Columbia  Historical  Society  in 
1894,  the  Society  of  Foresters  in  1900,  the  Botanical  Society  in 
1 90 1,  and  the  Washington  Society  of  the  Archaeological  Institute 
of  America  in  1902,  making  twelve  scientific  societies,  all  of  which 
are  now  affiliated  with  the  Washington  Academy  of  Sciences.  It 
is  not  difficult  to  understand  how  the  successive  establishment  of 
other  societies,  the  functions  of  some  of  which  are  more  or  less 
related  to  anthropology,  drew  away  a  portion  of  the  membership 
of  the  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington. 

The  following  advertisement  appeared  in  the  newspapers  of 
Washington,  February  7,  1879: 

*'Many  persons  interested  in  American  Archaeology  have  expressed 
a  desire  for  an  organization  in  this  city  to  promote  study  and  diffuse 
knowledge  upon  the  subject.     All  willing  to  join  an  archaeological  associ- 


*  Presidential  address,  somewhat  abbreviated,  delivered  May  9,  1905. 

564 


LAMB]         ANTHROPOLOGICAL   SOCIETY  OF  WASHINGTON  565 

ation  are  requested  to  attend  a  meeting  at  the  Smithsonian  Institution  on 
Monday  evening  the  loth  inst.  at  7^  o'clock  for  a  conference  upon  the 
subject  and  the  formation  of  such  a  Society." 

This  announcement  was  signed  by  Dr  J.  M.  Toner,  Prof.  Otis 
T.  Mason,  and  Col.  Garrick  Mallery,  U.  S.  A. 

Twenty-five  persons,  responding  to  the  call,  met  in  the  regent's 
room  in  the  South  Tower  of  the  Smithsonian  building  on  the  date 
named.  Those  who  attended  were  Dr  A.  Wellington  Adams,  then 
living  in  Washington,  but  soon  afterward  removed  to  St  Louis ; 
Mr  S.  Yorke  Atlee ;  Prof.  Spencer  F.  Baird,  secretary  of  the 
Smithsonian  Institution ;  Mr  Otis  Bigelow,  a  banker ;  Mr  George 
H.  Boehmer,  of  the  Smithsonian  International  Exchanges ;  Mr  E. 
A.  Burdick,  of  the  Pension  Office ;  Mr  Frank  Hamilton  Gushing, 
of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology ;  Dr  Wills  de  Hass,  temporarily  con- 
nected with  the  same  bureau ;  Dr  Robert  Fletcher,  of  the  Library 
of  the  Surgeon  General's  Office ;  Prof.  G.  Brown  Goode,  assistant 
secretary  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution  in  charge  of  the  National 
Museum  ;  Mr  John  C.  Lang,  an  antiquarian  ;  Col.  Garrick  Mallery, 
of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology ;  Prof  Otis  T.  Mason,  then  of  Co- 
lumbian College,  afterward  and  now  curator  in  the  National 
Museum ;  Dr  James  E.  Morgan,  a  well-known  physician  ;  Mr  P. 
W.  Norris,  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology ;  W.  W.  Reisinger,  then 
Lieutenant,  afterward  Commander,  U.  S.  N.;  Dr  Elmer  E. 
Reynolds,  of  the  Pension  Bureau  ;  Mr  William  J.  Rhees,  of  the 
Smithsonian  Institution ;  Dr  Miles  Rock,  a  civil  engineer ;  Mr 
Lenox  W.  Simpson ;  Dr  J.  E.  Snodgrass,  well-known  in  Washing- 
ton ;  Dr  J.  M.  Toner,  a  celebrated  physician,  historian,  and  biblio- 
phile ;  Mr  Edwin  P.  Upham,  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution ;  Prof. 
Lester  F.  Ward,  of  the  Geological  Survey ;  and  Mr  Joseph  M. 
Wilson. 

Dr  Toner  presided  at  the  meeting  and  Professor  Mason  acted  as 
secretary.  Messrs  Toner,  De  Hass,  Mason,  and  Mallery  were  ap- 
pointed a  committee  to  draft  a  constitution  and  to  report  at  a  meet- 
ing to  be  conducted  at  the  same  place,  February  17th.  The  meet- 
ing was  held,  the  committee  reported,  and  the  constitution  was  in 
part  adopted.  There  was  some  discussion  as  to  a  name  for  the 
society  ;  some  favored  the  title  "  The  Archeological  and  Ethnolog- 


566  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

ical  Society,'*  but  the  name  "The  Anthropological  Society  of 
Washington  '*  was  finally  adopted,  the  fact  that  the  Archaeological 
Institute  of  America  was  then  in  process  of  organization  in  Bos- 
ton lending  weight  to  the  selection  of  our  present  designation. 

The  object  of  the  Society,  as  stated  in  the  constitution,  was  *'  to 
encourage  the  study  of  the  natural  history  of  man,  especially  with 
reference  to  America,"  and  included  Archeology,  Somatology, 
Ethnology  and  Philology.  Afterward  Archeology  and  Ethnology 
were  dropped,  and  Sociology,  Psychology,  and  Technology  were 
substituted.  Still  later  the  sections  were  rearranged  as  :  a.  Soma- 
tology ;  by  Psychology ;  r,  Esthetology ;  d.  Technology ;  e^  Soci- 
ology ;  /,  Philology  ;  g,  Sophiology. 

In  1882,  and  again  in  1899,  some  radical  changes  were  made 
in  the  constitution,  and  minor  modifications  during  the  interim. 
The  duties  of  the  officers  were  much  the  same  as  they  are  now, 
except  in  the  case  of  the  curator,  who  had  charge  of  all  the  anthro- 
pological material  contributed  to  the  Society,  and  not  deposited  in 
either  the  National  Museum  or  the  Army  Medical  Museum  ;  he 
preserved  all  books,  pamphlets,  photographs,  and  clippings  (keep- 
ing a  record  of  them)  and  kept  a  card  index  of  anthropologic 
data  to  which  members  were  expected  to  contribute.  Later  the 
card  index  was  discontinued.  The  constitution  made  it  the  duty 
of  all  members  to  seek  to  increase  and  perfect  the  materials  for 
anthropological  study  in  the  national  collections  at  Washington ; 
after  having  been  shown  to  the  Society  and  a  record  made  of  them, 
they  were  to  be  deposited  as  stated  —  the  crania  and  other  somatic 
specimens  in  the  Army  Medical  Musem,  the  remaining  objects  in 
the  National  Museum.  A  few  years  ago,  however,  the  crania  and 
other  specimens  sent  by  the  Society  to  the  Medical  Museum,  ex- 
cept such  as  exhibited  disease  or  injury,  were  transferred  to  the 
National  Museum. 

It  was  provided  that  all  business  of  the  Society  should  be  con- 
ducted by  a  council,  afterward  called  a  board  of  managers.  In  this 
way  the  Society's  meetings,  except  the  annual  meetings  when  officers 
were  elected,  have  been  devoted  entirely  to  anthropologic  work, 
and  precious  time  has  not  been  wasted  in  discussing  business 
matters. 


LAMB]         ANTHROPOLOGICAL   SOCIETY  OF  WASHINGTON  567 

Theoretically  the  vice-presidents  were  then,  as  now,  the  officers 
on  whom  mainly  depended  the  work  of  the  Society.  They  presided 
over  their  respective  sections  and  represented  them  in  the  council, 
and  papers  pertaining  to  the  subject  of  a  particular  section  were  re- 
ferred to  the  council  by  the  vice-president  representing  that  section. 
Through  him  also  the  section  was  required  to  keep  the  Society  in- 
formed as  to  the  progress  of  research  in  its  particular  field,  to  make 
special  investigations  when  required  by  the  council,  to  announce  in- 
teresting discoveries,  to  collect  specimens,  manuscripts,  publications, 
newspaper  clippings,  etc.,  and  in  every  way  to  foster  its  own  branch 
of  the  work. 

Later,  the  constitution  was  so  amended  as  to  require  each  vice- 
president  to  deliver  annually  an  address  on  some  subject  pertaining 
to  his  special  field.  At  present  he  is  required  to  keep  the  Society 
informed  of  the  progress  of  research  in  his  section,  to  make  special 
investigations  when  requested  by  the  board  of  managers,  and  to 
foster  in  every  way  the  work  of  the  Society ;  and  he  is  made  re- 
sponsible for  the  program  of  one  meeting  each  year,  to  be  devoted 
to  the  particular  subject  intrusted  to  his  section.  While  the  rule 
is  an  excellent  one  in  theory,  in  practice  it  has  not  always  been 
strictly  adhered  to. 

At  the  initial  gathering  there  was  much  discussion  as  to  the  fre- 
quency of  meetings ;  it  was  finally  decided  to  meet  twice  a  month. 
The  season  began  October  ist  and  ended  July  ist,  but  this  arrange- 
ment was  not  a  success,  and  later  the  period  was  changed  to  include 
from  November  to  May  inclusive.  The  meetings  were  originally 
held  on  the  first  and  third  Tuesdays  of  the  month  ;  in  recent  years 
these  were  changed  to  every  alternate  Tuesday,  beginning  with  the 
first  Tuesday  in  November.  The  first  meeting  in  February  was  set 
apart  for  the  address  of  the  president  of  the  previous  year;  at  first, 
he  was  limited  in  subject  to  the  work  of  the  Society  during  his  in- 
cumbency, but  afterward  his  choice  of  subjects  was  unrestricted. 

At  the  third  preliminary  meeting,  February  24,  1879,  ^^^  ^^^" 
stitution  was  adopted  as  a  whole  and  the  following  officers  were 
elected :  President^  Major  J.  W.  Powell ;  Vice-presidents,  Dr  J.  M. 
Toner,  Dr  George  A.  Otis,  U.  S.  A.,  Col.  Garrick  Mallery,  and  Mr 
Wills  De  Hass ;   Corresponding  Secretary,  Prof.  O.  T.  Mason ;  Re- 


568  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

cording  Secretary^  Dr  E.  R.  Reynolds ;  Treasurer,  Mr  John  C.  Lang ; 
Curator,  Mr  Frank  H.  Gushing ;  Members  of  the  Council  at  Large ^ 
Mr  A.  S.  Gatschet,  Lieut.  W.  W.  Reisinger,  U.  S.  N.,  Mr  G.  K. 
Gilbert,  Dr  Gharles  A.  White,  Dr  Thomas  Antisell,  and  Mr  J.  M. 
Wilson. 

The  office  of  President  has  been  occupied  as  follows :  Major 
Powell  served  nine  terms  in  all,  1 879-1 883,  1 884-1 887,  and  in 
1895;  Gol.  Garrick  Mallery  in  1883;  Dr  Robert  Fletcher,  three 
terms,  1888  to  1890;  Dr  J.  C.  Welling,  two  terms,  1891-1892; 
Prof.  O.  T.  Mason,  two  terms,  1893- 1894;  Prof.  Lester  F.  Ward, 
1896;  Dr  Frank  Baker,  1897;  Dr  W  J  McGee,  three  terms, 
1 898-1900;  Prof.  W.  H.  Holmes,  two  terms,  1901-1902;  Miss 
Alice  C.  Fletcher,  1903  ;  and  the  writer  in  1904  and  for  the  first 
session  of  1905. 

I  have  said  that  the  tenth  of  February  is  the  date  from  which 
the  Society  counts  its  anniversaries,  this  being  the  date  of  its  initial 
meeting  in  1879.  The  Directory  of  the  Washington  Academy  of 
Sciences  and  its  Affiliated  Societies  gives  February  17th  as  the  date 
of  organization,  which  is  true  only  in  so  far  that  the  constitution 
was  partially  adopted  on  that  day. 

The  Directory  states  also  that  there  were  1 7  original  members, 
but  as  a  matter  of  fact  there  is  no  record  of  any  membership  before 
February  24,  1879,  for  which  date  I  find  recorded  the  names  of 
28  persons.  Apparently  each  of  these  28  was  as  much  a  founder 
as  any  other  of  the  number.  At  least  16  of  the  original  members 
are  dead,  namely,  Adams,  Antisell,  Bigelow,  Gushing,  De  Hass, 
Goode,  Lang,  Mallery,  Morgan,  Norris,  Otis,  Powell,  Reisinger, 
Rock,  Shoemaker,  and  Toner.  Nine  are  known  to  survive :  Burdick, 
Robert  Fletcher,  Gatschet,  Gilbert,  Gore,  Mason,  Reynolds,  Ward, 
and  White. 

The  Society  having  been  duly  organized,  the  first  regular  meet- 
ing was  held  March  4,  1879.  The  first  paper  was  read  by  Frank 
H.  Gushing  on  '*  Relic  Hunting,"  and  Professor  Mason  was  the  first 
to  pay  dues.  The  meetings  at  first  were  held,  by  courtesy  of  Secre- 
tary Baird,  in  the  Regent's  room  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  but 
on  February  i,  1881,  they  were  transferred  to  the  lower  lecture  hall 
of  the  Medical  department  of  Columbian  University,  or,  as  the  de- 


LAMB]         ANTHROPOLOGICAL   SOCIETY  OF   WASHINGTON  569 

partment  was  generally  called,  the  National  Medical  College,  at 
1325  H  St.,  N.  W.  Here  the  Society  continued  to  meet  until  April 
3,  1883,  when  by  invitation  of  the  Surgeon  Greneral,  U.  S.  A.,  it  met 
in  the  library  of  the  Army  Medical  Museum,  then  in  the  old  Ford's 
Theatre  building  on  Tenth  street.  The  Society  again  changed  its 
place  of  meeting  December  2,  1884,  to  the  lecture  hall  of  Colum- 
bian University,  at  15th  and  H  streets,  N.  W.  Since  April  5,  1887, 
it  has  met  in  the  assembly  room  of  the  Cosmos  Club,  the  old  Dolly 
Madison  house,  corner  of  Madison  place  and  H  street.  Occasion- 
ally, when  large  audiences  were  expected,  meetings  have  been  con- 
ducted elsewhere. 

On  March  2,  1880,  Major  Powell  delivered  his  first  annual  ad- 
dress as  president,  on  the  subject  "  Evolution  in  Language.*'  The 
membership  of  the  Society  then  numbered  63.     On  February  3, 

1880,  an  important  step  was  taken  by  the  Society  in  appointing  a 
committee  to  report  the  most  expedient  method  of  exploring  and 
mapping  the  shell-heaps  and  other  aboriginal  remains  along  the 
Chesapeake  and  its  tributaries. 

In  Major  Powell's  second  annual  address,  delivered  February  i, 

1 88 1,  "  On  Limitations  to  the  Use  of  Some  Anthropologic  Data," 
he  gave  a  resume  of  the  work  of  the  Society  for  the  preceding  two 
years  and  concluded  by  stating  that,  in  view  of  the  worthlessness  of 
a  vast  body  of  anthropological  material,  '*  anthropology  needs 
trained  devotees  with  philosophic  methods  and  keen  observation  to 
study  every  tribe  and  nation  of  the  globe  almost  dc  novo  ;  and  from 
materials  thus  collected  a  science  might  be  established."  This  and 
the  preceding  annual  address  form  part  of  the  Abstract  of  Transac- 
tions of  the  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington,  D,  C,  with  the 
Annual  Address  of  the  President,  for  the  First  Year,  ending  January 
20,  1 88  a,  and  for  the  Second  Year,  ending  January  18,  188 1.  Pre- 
pared by  J,  IV.  Poivell,  Including  the  constitution  and  list  of  mem- 
bers this  pamphlet  contains  150  pages.  It  was  printed  in  1881  at 
the  joint  expense  of  Major  Powell  and  the  Society,  and  was  reprinted 
by  the  Smithsonian  Institution  in  1883  as  part  of  its  Miscellaneous 
Collections  (publication  no.  502). 

About  this  time  the  council  appointed  a  committee  on  communi- 
cations, which  has  been  a  feature  of  the  Society's  organization  to 
this  day. 


570  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  Transactions  of  the  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington 
for  the  First  Three  Years  of  its  Organization  (142  pages,  8®)  was  pub- 
lished in  1882,  with  the  cooperation  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution. 
In  addition  to  the  Transactions,  the  pamphlet  contains  a  list  of 
officers  and  members  and  the  amended  constitution,  but  it  lacks  the 
informal  discussions  and  notes  on  the  presentation  of  specimens  that 
add  so  much  to  the  interest  of  the  minutes.  There  are  occasional 
discrepancies  between  the  written  minutes  and  the  published  account ; 
in  these  cases  I  have  accepted  the  latter  as  more  likely  to  be  correct. 

The  third  annual  address  by  President  Powell,  delivered  Febru- 
ary 7,  1882,  bears  the  title  "Outlines  of  Sociology;"  this  consti- 
tuted also  one  of  the  Saturday  lectures  delivered  at  the  National 
Museum  in  April,  1882,  under  the  auspices  of  the  Anthropological 
and  Biological  Societies  of  Washington. 

On  May  i6th  of  this  year  Major  Powell  laid  before  the  Society 
a  project  for  forming  an  Academy  of  Sciences,  as  prepared  by  com- 
mittees of  the  Anthropological,  Biological  and  Philosophical  soci- 
eties. Action  in  the  matter  was  successively  postponed  until  No- 
vember 21,  1 89 1,  when  it  was  announced  that  the  three  societies 
had  not  been  able  to  agree  on  a  plan  and  that  the  joint  committee 
had  adjourned  sine  die. 

On  November  6,  1883,  Major  Powell  delivered  his  long-de- 
ferred annual  address  on  "  Human  Evolution."  Volume  II  of  the 
Transactiofis,  covering  the  period  from  February  i,  1882,  to  May 
15,  1883,  and  including  this  address,  was  printed  by  the  society  in 
1883  with  the  cooperation  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  which 
issued  it  as  a  part  of  its  Miscellaneous  Collections  (publication  no. 
544;  xiii  +211  pages,  8°). 

On  October  11,  1884,  the  Society  was  honored  by  the  presence 
of  the  well-known  English  anthropologist,  Prof  Edward  B.  Tylor, 
of  Oxford  University.  The  meeting,  which  was  largely  attended, 
was  held  at  Columbian  University,  and  Professor  Tylor' s  theme 
was,  "  How  the  Problems  of  American  Anthropology  Present 
Themselves  to  the  English  Mind." 

On  February  3,  1885,  President  Powell  presented  his  annual 
address  on  the  subject  "  From  Savagery  to  Barbarism."  The  mem- 
bers of  the  Philosophical  and   Biological  societies  were  invited  to 


LAMB]         ANTHROPOLOGICAL   SOCIETY  OF  WASHINGTON  5/1 

attend.  With  the  cooperation  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution  the 
Society  published,  in  1885,  Volume  III  of  its  Transactions^  cover- 
ing the  period  from  November  6,  1883,  to  May  12,  1885.  This 
volume  (xxii  +  204  pages,  8°)  was  issued  in  1886  as  a  part  of  the 
Miscellaneous  Collections  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution  (publication 
no.  630). 

On  March  16,  1886,  President  Powell  delivered  his  annual  ad- 
dress, entitled  "  From  Barbarism  to  Civilization/*  It  appears  that 
no  presidential  address  was  delivered  in  1887. 

On  February  15,  1887,  the  Society  was  honored  with  the  pres- 
ence of  another  celebrated  English  anthropologist,  Dr  Alfred  Rus- 
sel  Wallace.  The  meeting  was  held  at  Columbian  University,  and 
the  subject  of  Dr  Wallace's  address  was  "  Social  Economy  versus 
Political  Economy."  The  members  of  the  Philosophical,  Biolog- 
ical, Chemical  and  Women's  Anthropological  societies  were  invited 
to  attend. 

Colonel  Mallery  submitted  to  the  Society  April  10,  1887,  a 
plan  of  incorporation,  which  was  adopted;  and  on  December  13 
the  Society  became  incorporated,  as  "  The  Anthropological  Society 
of  Washington,"  for  the  term  of  1,000  years.  As  only  eighteen  of 
these  years  have  passed,  the  society  is  yet  quite  in  its  infancy.  The 
incorporators  were  Messrs  Powell,  Fletcher,  Mason,  Mallery,  Seely, 
Gore,  Henshaw,  Hoffman,  Thomas  Wilson,  J.  C.  Pilling,  Holmes, 
and  Ward.  Half  this  number  (Powell,  Mallery,  Seely,  Hoffman, 
Wilson,  and  Pilling)  have  died. 

The  special  object  of  the  incorporation  was  to  make  possible  the 
publication  of  a  periodical  magazine  and  other  works  relating  to 
anthropology,  and  the  disposal  of  such  publications  by  sale  or 
otherwise.  The  incorporation  was  followed  in  a  few  weeks  by  the 
appearance  of  the  first  number  of  The  American  Anthropologist^ 
dated  January,  1888,  and  containing  96  pages,  8°.  The  honor  of 
first  place  therein  was  given  to  Dr  James  C.  Welling,  president  of 
Columbian  University,  and  later  president  of  the  Society,  whose 
paper  bears  the  title,  "The  Law  of  Malthus."  The  magazine  was 
published  under  the  auspices  of  the  Society,  and  was  printed  by 
Judd  &  Detweiler  of  Washington.  The  first  editorial  committee 
consisted  of  Messrs.  Gore,  Hampson,  Henshaw,  Mason,  Matthews, 


572  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Proudfit,  and  Seely.  Hampson  was  given  charge  of  communica- 
tions and  correspondence,  but  died  a  few  months  afterward,  being 
succeeded  by  Henshaw.  For  some  years  a  brief  record  of  the 
transactions  of  the  Society  was  published  in  this  magazine. 

Early  in  1888  a  series  of  evening  lectures  was  begun  under  the 
auspices  of  the  Society.  The  first  was  by  Prof.  William  Libbey, 
of  Princeton  University,  on  the  subject  of  "  Southeastern  Alaska 
and  its  People."  I  do  not  know  of  any  other  lectures  in  this  course. 
President  Powell  delivered  his  presidential  address  on  March  6,  in 
the  lecture  hall  of  Columbian  University,  on  the  subject  "  Competi- 
tion as  a  Factor  in  Human  Evolution." 

About  the  middle  of  April  of  this  year  there  was  a  meeting 
of  a  joint  committee  of  the  Anthropological,  Biological,  Chemical, 
National  Geographic,  and  Philosophical  societies,  which  recom- 
mended that  a  Joint  Commission,  to  consist  of  three  representatives 
from  each  of  the  five  societies,  be  formed  to  consider  questions  of 
common  interest,  "  that  the  function  of  the  commission  should  be 
advisory,  except  that  it  might  execute  instructions  on  general 
subjects  and  in  special  cases  from  two  or  more  of  the  participating 
societies,  provided  that  no  society  should  be  bound  by  the  com- 
mission to  any  action  to  which  it  (the  society)  had  not  given 
instruction." 

Dr  Robert  Fletcher  does  not  appear  to  have  presented  a  presi- 
dential address  in  1889  or  1890,  but  on  April  21,  1891,  he  delivered 
an  address  on  "The  New  School  of  Criminal  Anthropology."  On 
May  3,  1892,  Dr  Welling  delivered  his  address  on  *' The  Law  of 
Torture,  A  Study  in  the  Evolution  of  Law." 

A  committee  on  Place  Names  in  the  District  of  Columbia  made 
a  report  on  December  13,  1892,  which  gave  rise  to  an  interesting 
discussion,  after  which  the  report  was  adopted.  Mr  W  J  McGee 
read  an  appropriate  paper  on  **  The  Principles  of  Nomenclature.*' 
The  next  three  meetings  were  devoted  to  a  symposium  on  the 
question,  "Is  Simplified  Spelling  Feasible?"  Among  those  who 
participated  were  Prof.  F.  A.  Marsh  and  Prof  W.  D.  Owen,  of 
Lafayette  College  ;  Dr  A.  R.  Spofibrd,  of  the  Library  of  Congress ; 
Dr  William  T.  Harris,  Commissioner  of  Education ;  Assistant  Secre- 
tary Willits,  of  the  Department  of  Agriculture  ;  Dr  Alexander  Mel- 


LAMB]         ANTHROPOLOGICAL   SOCIETY  OF   WASHINGTON  5/3 

ville  Bell ;  President  Gallaudet  of "Gallaudet  College  for  the  Deaf; 
Dr  John  M.  Gregory,  of  the  Civil  Service  Commission ;  Prof.  Lester 
F.  Ward,  Mr  E.  T.  Peters,  Col.  Weston  Flint,  and  Major  Powell. 
The  discussion  was  closed  by  Dr  Spofford.  The  meetings  aroused 
intense  interest  and  form  an  important  feature  of  the  work  of  the 
Society ;  they  were  followed  by  a  large  accession  to  the  membership. 

On  February  14,  1893,  at  Columbian  University,  Mr  Frank  H. 
Cushing  addressed  the  Society  on  "the  Mytho-sociologic  Organiza- 
tion of  the  Cult  Societies  of  Zuni,"  in  which  he  told  of  his  own  initia- 
tion into  the  Priesthood  of  the  Bow.  The  lecture  was  illustrated 
with  lantern  slides  and  its  popularity  was  attested  by  an  audience  of 
379  persons.  Some  time  previous  to  Mr  Cushing's  initiation,  Dr 
H.  C.  Yarrow  told  me  that  in  order  to  procure  admission  to  this 
priesthood  it  would  be  necessary  for  Cushing  to  show  at  least  one 
scalp,  and  asked  me  if  I  would  obtain  one.  I  understand  that  the 
scalp  had  its  appropriate  part  in  the  ceremony  of  initiation. 

Dr  Welling  delivered  his  presidential  address.  May  16,  1893,  on 
"The  Last  Town  Election  in  Pompeii.'*  On  successive  Saturday 
afternoons  during  this  spring  a  series  of  eight  lectures  was  given  at 
the  National  Museum  by  members  of  the  Anthropological  Society 
and  under  its  auspices,  the  average  attendance  being  342.  The 
honor  of  the  first  lecture  was  accorded  to  the  writer,  following  whom 
were  Dr  D.  K.  Shute,  Prof.  Lester  F.  Ward,  Major  Powell,  Professor 
Mason,  Dr  D.  G.  Brinton  of  Philadelphia,  Mr  McGee,  and  Dr 
Thomas  Wilson.  Mr  McGee's  lecture  on  '*  The  Earth  the  Home 
of  Man ''  and  Prof  Ward's  on  "  The  Status  of  the  Mind  Problem  " 
were  printed  by  the  Society  as  Special  Papers,  i  and  2. 

In  1893,  a  member,  Dr  Robert  H.  Lamborn,  of  New  York, 
offered  the  Society  the  sum  of  ^250  to  be  awarded  as  prizes  "for 
the  clearest  statements  of  the  elements  that  go  to  make  up  the  most 
useful  citizen  of  the  United  States,  regardless  of  occupation."  The 
Society  arranged  to  grant  two  prizes,  and  competition  was  open  to 
every  one  ;  a  limit  of  3,000  words  was  made,  and  the  papers  were 
to  be  in  the  hands  of  the  secretary  by  November  i,  but  the  time 
was  afterward  extended  to  March  i,  1894.  The  commissioners  of 
award  were  Dr  D.  G.  Brinton  as  an  anthropologist ;  President  Gil- 
man,  of  Johns  Hopkins  University,  as  an  educator;  Chief  Justice 


574  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Fuller,  of  the  United  States  Supreme  Court,  as  a  jurist ;  Vice- 
president  Stevenson  as  a  statesman  ;  and  Dr  Lambom.  More  than 
fifty  essays  were  received ;  the  successful  competitors  were  Prof. 
Simon  Newcomb,  first  prize,  and  Mr  W  J  McGee,  second  prize. 
The  announcement  of  the  award  was  made  and  the  papers  were 
read  May  20,  1894. 

November  27,  1893,  a  joint  meeting  of  the  Anthropological 
Society  of  Washington  and  the  Woman's  Anthropological  Society 
of  America  was  held  at  Columbian  University  in  honor  of  Mrs 
Zelia  Nuttall,  and  although  the  weather  was  inclement  there  was  a 
large  attendance.  Professor  Mason  presided,  and  Mrs  Nuttall  was 
introduced  by  Miss  Alice  C.  Fletcher,  president  of  the  Woman's 
society.  Mrs  Nuttall's  subject  was  "  The  Mexican  Calendar  Sys- 
tem." Brief  addresses  were  also  made  by  Mrs  Caroline  Dall,  Dr 
Anita  Newcomb  McGee,  and  Mr  Frank  H.  Cushing.  A  reception 
followed  the  meeting. 

January  30,  1894,  Professor  Mason  delivered  his  presidential 
address,  the  subject  being  "Technogeography.**  During  the 
spring,  from  February  1 1  to  May  26,  another  scries  of  Saturday 
lectures  was  given  at  the  National  Museum  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Anthropological  and  Greological  societies.  Of  these  lectures 
four  were  on  somatologic  topics,  by  Surgeon  General  Sternberg, 
Dr  Frank  Baker,  Mr  F.  A.  Lucas,  and  Mr  W.  Woodville  Rock- 
hill  ;  four  were  devoted  to  general  geology,  by  Dr  George  H. 
Williams,  Dr  George  F.  Becker,  Mr  Bailey  Willis,  and  Mr  Marius 
R.  Campbell ;  then  followed  the  field  meeting  of  the  National 
Geographic  Society,  and  the  course  was  concluded  with  five  lectures 
on  dynamic  anthropology  by  Holmes,  Cushing,  Mallery,  Dr  Cyrus 
Adler,  and  Mr  John  W.  Hoyt. 

On  February  4,  1895,  Professor  Mason  read  a  paper  on  **  Simi- 
larities in  Culture,"  which,  apparently,  was  his  presidential  address. 
In  1895  and  1896  the  Joint  Commission  of  the  Scientific  Societies, 
representing  the  Anthropological,  Chemical,  Entomological,  Geo- 
logical, National  Geographic,  and  Philosophical  societies,  printed  in 
folder  form  an  advance  monthly  program  of  the  meetings  of  the  indi- 
vidual societies.  The  first  issue  was  for  April,  1895  ;  the  last  was 
for  May,  1896. 


LAMB]         ANTHROPOLOGICAL   SOCIETY  OF   WASHINGTON  575 

A  joint  meeting  of  the  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington 
and  the  Woman's  Anthropological  Society  was  held  April  9,  1895, 
the  program  consisting  of  a  symposium  in  Folklore,  in  which  Dr 
Washington  Matthews,  Miss  Elizabeth  Bryant  Johnston,  and  Col. 
Weston  Flint  took  part.  On  the  23d  another  joint  meeting  was  held, 
in  which  Mrs  M.  P.  Seaman  and  Mr  Frank  H.  Gushing  were  the 
speakers.  A  third  joint  meeting,  continued  from  the  other  two,  was 
held  May  14,  when  Dr  W.  J.  Hoffman,  Mercy  S.  Sinsabaugh,  and 
Ellen  P.  Cunningham  presented  papers.  At  these  meetings  Miss 
Fletcher  presided. 

A  joint  meeting  of  all  the  scientific  societies  of  Washington  was 
held  January  14,  1896,  at  Builders*  Exchange  hall,  to  honor  the 
memory  of  Dana,  Pasteur,  Helmholtz,  and  Huxley.  Addresses  were 
made  by  Major  Powell,  Surgeon  General  Sternberg,  Prof.  T.  G. 
Mendenhall,  and  Dr  Theodore  Gill.  On  February  4  Major  Powell 
delivered  his  presidential  address  under  the  auspices  of  the  Joint 
Commission,  at  Builders'  Exchange  hall.  His  subject  was  "The 
Seven  Illusions  of  Science." 

In  January  of  this  year  The  American  Anthropologist  was  changed 
from  a  quarterly  to  a  monthly  magazine.  Under  the  auspices  of 
the  Joint  Commission  another  series  of  Saturday  lectures  at  the 
National  Museum  was  given,  from  April  4  to  May  23,  those  taking 
part  being  T.  S.  Palmer,  L.  O.  Howard,  F.  A.  Lucas,  J.  W.  Powell, 
O.  T.  Mason,  Gardiner  G.  Hubbard,  J.  Walter  Fewkes,  and  W  J 
McGee.     The  subjects  covered  a  wide  range. 

On  February  2,  1897,  Prof  Lester  F.  Ward  delivered  his  presi- 
dential address  at  Builders'  Exchange  hall,  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Joint  Commission,  on  the  subject  "  Religion  in  Science." 

In  the  latter  part  of  1897,  apparently  at  the  initiative  of  the 
National  Geographic  Society,  the  subject  of  the  Joint  Commission 
was  much  discussed.  A  committee  representing  several  of  the 
societies  met  December  13th,  when  it  was  resolved  that  the  "Joint 
Commission  "  be  changed  to  the  **  Washington  Academy  of  Sci- 
ences," which  should  assume  independent  function  and  have  power 
to  add  to  its  members.  The  Academy  was  accordingly  formed,  and 
on  February  24,  1898,  Major  Powell  was  nominated  by  the  Anthro- 
pological Society  as  one  of  the- vice-presidents  of  the  new  organiza- 


576  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

tion.  The  first  meeting  of  the  Academy  was  held  February  16; 
Prof.  J.  R.  Eastman  was  elected  president,  Prof.  G.  K.  Gilbert, 
secretary,  and  Mr  Bernard  R.  Green,  treasurer.  The  final  meet- 
ing of  the  Joint  Commission  was  held  March  22. 

On  March  19,  Dr  Frank  Baker  delivered  his  presidential  ad- 
dress on  "  Primitive  Man,"  under  the  auspices  of  the  Washington 
Academy  of  Sciences. 

At  the  winter  meeting  of  Section  H  of  the  American  Associa- 
tion for  the  Advancement  of  Science  a  committee  was  appointed  to 
consider  the  question  of  an  anthropological  journal ;  and  a  com- 
mittee, consisting  of  President  McGee  and  Dr  Frank  Baker  (chair- 
man of  the  editorial  board  of  The  American  Anthropologisf)^  was 
appointed  by  the  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington  to  coope- 
rate with  the  committee  of  Section  H.     It  had  long  been  felt  that 
the  needs  of  anthropology  in  America  had  outgrown  the  media  of 
publication,  and  that  with  its  limited  financial  resources  the  Anthro- 
pological Society  could  not  afford  to  increase  the  size  of  its  maga- 
zine, or  make  it  national  in  scope.     There  was  consequently  much 
discussion  at  the  meetings  of  the  board  of  managers,  during  the 
autumn  and  winter  of  1898,  respecting  the  advisability  of  transfer- 
ring the  publication  of  the  journal  to  private  hands,  and  before  the 
close  of  the  year  plans  were  perfected  to  this  end.     It  was  suggested 
by  some  that  the  name   of  the  journal   be  changed ;  but,  largely 
through  the  efforts  of  Major  Powell,  the  Board  agreed  that  the  old 
name  should  be  preserved,  and  as  the  support  of  the  Society  was 
necessary  to    success,  the    name  American  Anthropologist  —  Nctv 
Series  was  finally  adopted.     In  order  that  a  legal  contract  could 
be  made,  two  prominent  anthropologists,  one  of  them  a  member  of 
the   Anthropological    Sodety,  became    constructive    owners,    and 
Messrs  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  of  New  York,  were  selected  as  pub- 
lishers.    Toward  the  end  of  the  year  a  prospectus  was  prepared  by 
the  founding  committee  and  steps  were  taken  at  once  to  carry  the 
project  into   effect.     As   the   last   number  of  the  monthly  issue, 
namely,  that  for  December,  1898  (volume  xi,  no.  12)  went  to  press, 
the  first  number  of  the  new  quarterly,  that  for  January-March,  1899, 
was  being  printed.    The  editorial  board  of  the  new  journal  consisted 
of  Baker,   Boas,   Brinton,    Dawson  of  Canada,   Dorsey,   Holmes, 


LAMB]         ANTHROPOLOGICAL  SOCIETY  OF   WASHINGTON  S77 

Hodge,  Powell,  and  Putnam.  The  Anthropological  Society  agreed 
to  subscribe  for  a  sufficient  number  of  copies,  at  a  reduced  rate,  to 
supply  its  members,  but  assumed  no  further  financial  obligations 
connected  with  the  journal. 

On  November  25,  1898,  the  Society  invited  the  members  of  the 
Woman's  Anthropological  Society  of  America  to  become  mem- 
bers of  this  Society,  and  on  January  3,  1899,  forty-nine  members 
of  the  Woman's  Society  were  elected.  President  McGee  delivered 
his  annual  address,  February  28,  1899,  on  "The  Trend  of  Human 
Progress,*'  under  the  auspices  of  the  Washington  Academy  of 
Sciences,  at  Columbian  University.  On  April  26,  there  was  a  joint 
meeting  of  the  Anthropological  Society  and  the  Medical  Society  in 
the  rooms  of  the  latter.  The  subject  was  "  The  Spanish-American 
War:  Gunshot  Wounds."  Those  who  participated  were  Drs 
George  M.  Kober,  L.  A.  La  Garde,  W.  H.  Borden,  and  E.  L. 
Munson. 

On  February  13,  1900,  Mr  McGee  delivered  his  second  presi- 
dential address,  on  *'  The  Cardinal  Principles  of  Science,"  under 
the  auspices  of  the  Academy,  at  Columbian  University ;  and  on 
February  26,  1901,  his  third  presidential  address  was  given  under 
the  same  auspices,  and  at  the  same  place,  on  **  Man's  Place  in  Na- 
ture." In  March  of  the  latter  year  a  letter  was  received  from  the 
Sodete  d' Anthropologic  de  Paris,  suggesting  an  interchange  of  com- 
munications. The  proposal  was  accepted,  and  on  December  17,  a 
paper  that  had  been  received  from  M.  Paul  Sebillot,  on  "The  Wor- 
ship of  Stones  in  France,"  was  read.  Mr  McGee  was  authorized 
to  send  a  paper  on  behalf  of  the  Washington  Society,  which  paper 
was  later  published  by  the  Societe  d*  Anthropologic  under  the  title 
"  Germe  d'industrie  de  la  pierre  en  Amerique."  In  March,  1901, 
the  board  directed  that  a  quarterly  abstract  of  the  proceedings  of 
the  Society  should  be  sent  to  the  American  Anthropologist, 

On  February  26,  1902,  Mr  W.  H.  Holmes  delivered  his  presi- 
dential address  at  Columbian  University  under  the  auspices  of  the 
Academy,  his  subject  being,  "Sketch  of  the  Origin,  Development, 
and  Probable  Destiny  of  the  Races  of  Men."  Mr  Holmes'  second 
presidential  address,  on  "A  Genetic  View  of  Men  and  Culture," 
was  delivered  February  3,  1903,  at  the  same  place.     During  1 903 


5/8  AMEKICAX  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8.  1906 

there  was  much  informal  discussion  in  regard  to  the  preser\'ation  of 
antiquities  in  the  United  States,  and  the  matter  came  formally  before 
the  Society  December  i,  when  a  committee  was  appointed  to  con- 
sider the  subject.  This  committee  reported  March  8,  1904.  recom- 
mending the  support  of  a  bill  then  before  Congress. 

Miss  Fletcher,  who  ser\'ed  as  President  for  1903—04,  was  un- 
able, because  of  illness,  to  present  her  annual  address. 

During  the  period  of  my  own  presidency,  which  beg^an  Januarj' 
12,  1904,  the  only  matter  of  special  interest  besides  that  of  the 
preservation  of  antiquities,  just  mentioned,  was  a  change  in  the  by- 
laws, by  which  the  annual  meeting  for  the  presentation  of  reports 
and  the  election  of  officers  was  made  the  last  meeting  in  May  in- 
stead of  the  first  meeting  in  Januar}*.  The  object  of  this  amend- 
ment was  to  enable  the  incoming  president  to  take  advantage  of  the 
summer  interval  in  planning  the  work  of  the  Societ>'  for  the  suc- 
ceeding session. 

Some  time  after  the  founding  of  the  Societ>%  apparently  in  18S1, 
the  constitution  was  written  in  a  book  and  the  signatures  of  some 
members  arc  appended  ;  but  some  did  not  sign  at  all,  and  only  six 
members  signed  after  1884. 

In  reviewing  the  records  of  the  Society  I  find  that  479  persons 
have  joined  as  active  members,  137  have  been  elected  as  corre- 
sponding members,  and  'j}^  as  honorary  members.  Some  active 
members  hitcr  became  corresponding  members  by  reason  of  change 
of  residence,  or  o\  occupation,  or  both  ;  and  a  few  who  at  first  were 
corresponding  (^r  honorary  members  afterward  became  active  mem- 
bers. Of  the  active  members  16  per  cent  were  physicians  ;  8  jx^r 
cent  were  women  ;  6  per  cent  were  connected  with  the  Geological 
Survey  ;  5  j)er  cent  were  associated  with  the  Smithsonian  Institu- 
tion and  National  Museum  ;  5  per  cent  with  the  Bureau  of  Ameri- 
can I'.thnology  ;  5  i>er  cent  were  army  officers  ;  3  per  cent,  lawyers  ; 
2.5  per  cent.  rlerg\'nien  ;  2.5  per  cent,  naval  officers;  2  per  cent 
were  enij)lo\es  of  the  Pension  Office,  and  2  per  cent  were  connected 
with  tile  Department  of  Agriculture. 

During  tlie  twent\'-six  years  of  its  existence  730  papers  have 
been  read,  of  wliich  at  least  70  per  cent  have  been  published  ;  74 
persons  who  were  not  members  of  the  Society  have  presented 
pai)ers. 


LAMB]         ANTHROPOLOGICAL  SOCIETY  OF  WASHINGTON  579 

Professor  Mason  appears  to  have  read  the  largest  number  of 
papers  presented  by  one  individual ;  Mr  Holmes  comes  next,  and 
Major  Powell  third.  Most  members  have  read  only  a  few  papers, 
or  none ;  they  have  doubtless  been  good  listeners,  however,  and  in 
that  way  have  lent  encouragement.  Moreover,  many  took  part  in 
discussions  or  casually  presented  some  matter  of  interest  of  which 
little  or  no  record  appears. 

Of  the  members  who  have  died,  the  following  may  be  named 
as  having  contributed  especially  to  the  life  and  work  of  the  Society  : 
Dr  James  C.  Welling,  who  was  president  for  two  years.  Col.  Gar- 
rick  Mallery,  Col.  Franklin  A.  Seely,  Rev.  James  O.  Dorsey,  James 
C.  Pilling,  Capt.  John  G.  Bourke,  U.  S.  A.,  Dr  G.  Browne  Goode, 
Assistant  Secretary  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  Dr  Walter  J. 
Hoffman,  Mr  Frank  H.  Gushing,  Col.  Frank  F.  Hilder,  Dr  Thomas 
Wilson,  Major  J.  W.  Powell,  who  served  as  president  for  many 
terms,  and  Dr  Washington  Matthews,  U.  S.  A.  As  obituary 
notices  of  all  these  have  appeared  in  the  American  Anthropologist 
it  is  unnecessary  here  to  give  further  details. 

Washington,  D.C. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 

Archaological  Researches  in  Costa  Rica,  By  C.  V.  Hartman.  Publi- 
cation of  the  Royal  Ethnological  Museum  in  Stockholm.  Stockholm : 
1 90 1.     4°,  196  pp.,  maps,  87  plates. 

This  elaborate  and  carefully  prepared  volume  is  based  partly  on  the 
collections  from  Costa  Rica  now  in  the  Royal  Ethnological  Museum  of 

o 

Stockholm  made  by  Ake  Sjorgren,  Esq.,  at  whose  expense  Mr  Hartman' s 
explorations  were  conducted  and  the  results  published. 

Mr  Hartman  divides  his  exploration  into  two  periods,  to  each  of 
which  he  devotes  a  section  of  the  book :  A^  Researches  on  the  E^t 
Coast,  and  By  Researches  on  the  Highland  plains  in  the  Province  of 
Cartago.  These  researches  occupied  the  space  of  a  year  during  1896  and 
1897,  the  sites  being  situated  on  or  near  the  linfc  of  the  railroad. 

The  most  notable  site  examined  in  the  coast  region  was  that  at 
Mercedes,  where  the  group  of  earthworks  marking  an  ancient  center  of 
religious  activity  was  subjected  to  an  investigation  that  yielded  a  number 
of  important  results.  Two  of  thq  great  stone  images  found  lying  on  the 
slopes  of  the  principal  mound  were  proved  to  have  stood  upon  the  plat- 
form on  top  of  the  mound  where  in  all  probability  they  were  objects  of 
worship.  These  figures,  which  are  of  severe  and  dignified  expression,  are 
among  the  few  examples  of  nude  sculpture  in  Central  America.  The 
treatment  of  the  nude  is  very  creditably  performed.  The  sculpture  is 
characterized  by  strength  rather  than  by  refinement,  and  though  lacking 
in  grace  these  statues  exhibit  a  great  deal  of  expression  and  succeed 
admirably  in  conveying  the  impression  of  power.  The  site  at  Mercedes 
must  have  been  an  important  center  for  the  cultivation  and  exercise  of 
the  sculptor's  art,  since  the  contents  of  the  workshop  excavated  by  Dr 
Hartman  bear  witness  at  once  to  the  variety  of  subjects  treated  and  the 
activity  with  which  the  work  was  prosecuted.  While  the  eastern  coast  is 
remarkable  for  the  quantity  and  excellence  of  its  sculpture,  the  art  of 
pottery  making  was  not  so  well  developed  as  on  the  highlands. 

The  graves,  of  which  a  number  were  opened  at  Mercedes  and  other 
sites  on  the  eastern  coast,  were  built  underground,  the  walls  being  con- 
structed of  small  stones  carefully  laid  together  without  cutting,  and  the 
top  and  bottom  of  flat  limestone  slabs.     Scarcely  a  trace  of  bone  was 

580 


BOOK  RE  VIE  WS  5  8 1 

found  in  these  graves,  but  all  contained  pottery  which  in  its  general  char- 
acter resembles  the  pottery  of  Nicaragua.  The  pottery  of  the  highlands 
shows  less  of  foreign  characters,  but  presents  on  the  contrary  quite  dis- 
tinctive types.  Especially  characteristic  is  the  pottery  with  painted 
decorations,  which  presents  an  interesting  study  in  conventionalized  ani- 
mal forms  as  applied  to  pottery  decoration.  The  ruling  motive  in  this 
body  of  ornament  is  an  animal  form  which  passes  through  a  series  of 
transformations  until  a  conventional  pattern  is  produced,  which  is  used 
both  entire  and  in  parts  and  forms  a  large  proportion  of  the  decoration 
on  this  pottery. 

The  relationship  between  the  arts  of  the  Guetares  and  those  of  other 
Central  American  peoples  is  completely  in  harmony  with  what  is  known 
of  their  history  and  affinities.  These  arts  are  distinctly  Chapanecan  and 
closely  allied  with  those  of  the  region  about  Lake  Managua  on  the  one 
hand  and  those  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Chiriqui  lagoon  on  the  other. 
While  many  of  the  elements  which  are  common  to  these  three  culture 
centers  are  found  also  in  the  Uloa  valley,  evidences  of  contact  between 
the  culture  of  the  Guetares  and  that  of  the  more  cultivated  Mayas  are 
almost  totally  lacking.  The  most  striking  feature  of  the  Guetare  culture 
is  beyond  doubt  the  sculpture  in  stone,  which  excels  that  of  all  other 
Central  American  people  except  the  Mayas,  and  the  bold  attempt  at 
rendering  the  nude  is  especially  worthy  of  note.  The  stone  cists  of  the 
highland  district  described  by  Mr  Hartman,  who  opened  several  hundreds, 
are  quite  identical  with  tombs  found  in  Missouri  and  Tennessee  —  con- 
structed of  natural  slabs  of  limestone  set  on  edge,  with  other  slabs  for  top 
and  bottom.  The  small  size  of  most  of  these  is  regarded  by  Mr  Hartman 
as  evidence  that  they  served  for  secondary  burials,  a  theory  which  is  quite 
in  keeping  with  what  is  known  of  the  burial  customs  of  the  Guetares,  as 
is  also  the  opinion  that  the  raised  terraces  in  which  the  tombs  are  found 
served  as  the  foundations  of  dwellings  within  which  the  dead  were  buried. 
Within  recent  times  the  natives  of  this  region  lived  two  or  three  families 
together  in  houses  of  poles  and  thatch,  and  buried  their  dead  beneath  the 
floors.  G.  B.  Gordon. 

Anfange  der  Kunst  im  Urwald,  Indianer-Handzeichnungen  avf 
seinen  Reisen  in  Brazilien  gesammeit.  Von  Dr  Theodor  Koch- 
GrCnberg.  Berlin :  Ernest  Wasmuth,  1905.  8°,  xv,  70,  viii 
pp.,  plates,  figures,  map. 

The  author  presents  a  collection  of  native  drawings  of  the  Indian 
tribes  of  the  upper  Rio  Negro,  and  the  Rio  Yapura.     During  a  stay  of 


582  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

some  years  in  Brazil  Dr  Koch-Griinberg  has  cultivated  friendly  relations 
with  the  native  artists  and  has  elicited  their  curiosity  while  they  have 
commanded  his  admiration. 

The  plates  reproduce  in  the  main  drawings  of  wild  beasts,  birds,  and 
fishes;  plants  and  smaller  animals  are  rare.  Men,  women,  and  chil- 
dren engaged  in  hunting,  fishing,  and  the  pursuits  of  daily  life  are  rep- 
resented, while  there  is  a  notable  absence  of  scenes  of  combat.  Plans  of 
houses,  and  maps,  astronomical  charts,  and  conventional  or  convention- 
alized decoration  in  great  variety  are  also  given.  Peculiarities  of  primi- 
tive drawing  are  the  representation  in  the  same  picture  of  the  same  object 
in  more  than  one  plane,  the  omission,  addition,  or  separation  of  p>arts  of 
the  body,  and  a  quality  of  transparency  in  solid  objects. 

The  drawings  are  possibly,  the  author  concludes,  an  outgrowth  of  the 
desire  for  representation  and  communication  rather  than  for  esthetic  sat- 
isfaction. The  recognition  of  animal,  bird,  or  fish,  and  of  sex  depends 
on  a  quite  naive  but  natural  drawing  of  the  significant  feature  or  features. 

The  paper  and  printing  of  the  book  are  a  subject  of  congratulation  ; 
this  work  is  the  forerunner  of  others  pertaining  to  the  same  tribes. 

C.  Peabodv. 

Kinderzeichnungen  bis  zum  14.  Lebensjahr,  Mit  ParalUUn  aus  der 
Urgeschichte^  Kunstgeschichte  und  Volkerkunde,  Von  Dr  Sieg- 
fried Levinstein.  Mit  einem  Anhang  von  Dr.  Phil.  LL.  D.  Karl 
Lamprecht.  Leipzig:  R.  Voigtlander,  1905.  8^,3,  119,  xv  pp., 
85  pi.,  18  tables. 

In    comparison   with  the    foregoing,   this  highly  detailed   study  of 
drawings  of  primitive  children  of  civilization  is  exceedingly  interesting. 
There  are  seventy-three  plates,  and  almost  every  form  of  childish  endeavor 
in  art  is  represented.     The  human  form,  animals  and  plants,  scenes  and 
illustrations  of  tales  and  ideas  are  attempted  in  turn. 

Tables  are  presented  graphically  showing  the  progress  in  detail  with 
advancing  age,  the  variation  between  the  sexes,  the  struggle  for  per- 
spective, the  proportion  of  choice  of  important  features  in  illustration, 
etc. 

The  superfluous  features,  the  **  mixed  profile,"  transparency,  incom- 
plete or  absent  outlines,  are  all  strikingly  suggestive  of  true  primitive 
art.  Plates  of  reproductions  of  the  latter  (^c.  g.,  5,  6,  7,  8)  are  inserted  • 
they  are  drawn  from  both  ethnological  and  archeological  sources.  Chap- 
ter VII  is  devoted  to  Eskimo  child-drawings. 

More  investigation  of  this  kind  is  very  much  desired. 

C.  Peabodv. 


BOOK  REVIEWS  583 

SOME   NEW  BOOKS 

Annales  du  Mus^e  du  Congo.  Ethnographic  et  Anthropologic. 
S6rie  III.  Notes  analytiqucs  sur  Ics  collections  ethnographiques  du 
Mus^e  du  Congo.  Tomcl.,  fasc.  11.  La  Religion.  Bruxelles:  Spineux 
et  C*%  1906.     4®,  pp.  145-316,  pis.  xxii-Lxii. 

Batres,  Leopoldo.  La  Ldpida  Arqueol6gica  dc  Tepatlaxco-Orizaba* 
Mexico:  Tipografia  dc  Fidencio  Soria,  1905.     Sm.  4°,  19  pp.,  16  pi. 

Batres,  Leopoldo.  Teotihuacdn  6  la  Ciudad  Sagrada  de  los  Tolteca. 
Por  Leopoldo  Batres,  Inspector  General  y  Conservador  dc  los  Monu- 
mentos  Arqueol6gicos  de  la  Republica  Mexicana.  Mexico,  D.  F. :  Im- 
prenta  de  Hull,  1906.     Sm.  4°,  27  p.,  4  fig. 

Batres,  Leopoldo.  Teotihuacan.  Mexico,  D.  F. :  Imprenta  de 
Fidencio  S.  Soria,  1906.  Sm.  4°,  30  p.,  44  pi.;  and  Appendix,  10 
pi.  with  descriptions. 

Boas,  Franz.  The  Measurement  of  Variable  Quantities,  (Archives 
of  Philosophy,  Psychology  and  Scientific  Method,  No.  5.  Columbia 
University  Contributions  to  Philosophy  and  Psychology,  vol.  xiv,  No.  2.) 
New  York:  The  Science  Press,  June  1906.     8°,  2  11.,  52  p. 

Contains  the  introduction  to  a  course  on  the  statistical  treatment  of  biological  and  psy- 
chological measurements,  which  the  author  has  given  for  ten  years  at  Columbia  Univer- 
sity. *  *  The  form  selected  for  the  demonstration  of  the  principles  of  measurement  of  vari- 
ables was  chosen  on  account  of  the  limited  mathematical  preparation  of  students  who  have 
devoted  themselves  to  the  study  of  anthropol(^[y,  biology,  and  psychology,  which  made  it 
necessary  to  avoid,  so  far  as  feasible,  all  application  of  the  calculus.*' 

BowDiTCH,  Charles  P.  Mayan  Nomenclature.  Privately  printed. 
Cambridge:  The  University  Press,  1906.     8°,  11  p. 

Boyle,  David.  Annual  Archaeological  Report,  1905.  Being  part 
of  Appendix  to  the  Report  of  the  Minister  of  Education,  Ontario. 
Toronto:  Printed  and  Published  by  L.  K.  Cameron,  1906.     8°,  249  p. 

Cantares  en  idioma  Mexicano.  Reproduccion  facsimiliaria  del 
manuscrito  original  existente  en  la  Biblioteca  Nacional  que  se  imprime 
por  acuerdo  del  Sr.  Gral.  Don  Manuel  Gonzalez  Cosio,  Secretario  de 
Fomento,  en  el  taller  de  fototipia  del  mismo  ministerio,  bajo  la  direccion 
del  Dr.  Antonio  Peftafiel.  Mexico :  Oficina  Tipografica  de  la  Secretaria 
de  Fomento,  1904  [1906].     4°,  27  pp.  text,  86  11.  facsimile. 

Frazer,  J.  G.  Adonis.  Attis.  Osiris.  Studies  in  the  History  of 
Oriental  Religion.     London:  Macmillan  and  Co.,  Ltd.,  1906.     8°,  xvi, 

339  P- 

Hewett,  Edgar  L.     Antiquities  of  the  Jemez  Plateau,  New  Mexico. 

Smithsonian  Institution,  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  Bulletin  32. 


584  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Washington:  Government  Printing  Office,  1906.     8®,   54  p.,  i  L,  17 
pi.  and  ma])s. 

Instituts  Solvay.     Travaux  de  Tlnstitut  de  Sociologie.      Notes  et 
M^moires.     Bruxelles  and  Leipzig :  Misch  &  Thron,  Miteurs.      Sm.  4^. 

Contents : 

FtLsc  I.     Note  sur  des  formales  d'introdaction  k  P^Dergitiqae  physio-  et  psycbo- 
sociologiqiie,  par  E.  Solray,  1906.     (126  pp.) 

Fasc  2.     Esqoisse  d'ane  sociologie,  par  £.  Wazweiler,  1906.     (306  pp. ) 

Fasc  3.     Les  origines  natorelles  de  la  propri^t^  :  Essai  de  sociologie  compar^e,  par 
R.  Petmcci,  1905.     (xvii,  246  pp. ) 

Fasc  4.     Sur  qaelqoes  erreurs  de  mithode  dans  T^tude  de  I'hoinine  priniitif :  Notes 
critiques,  par  L.  Wodon,  1 906.     (36  pp.) 

Fasc  5.  L' Aryen  et  Tanthroposociologie :  Etude  critique,  par  le  ]>  K.  Hovui, 
1906.     (117  pp.) 

Fasc.  6.  Mesure  des  caftacit^s  intellectuelle  et  ^nergitique,  par  Ch.  Henry,  avec  one 
remarque  additionnelle  (Sur  T interpretation  sociologique  de  la  distributioci  des  salaires) 
par  E.  Wazweiler,  1906.     (75  pp.,  i  1.) 

Fasc.  7.  Origine  polyphyl6tique,  homotypie  et  non-comparabilit6  des  socj^l^s  ani- 
males,  par  R.  Petrucd,  1906.     (viii,  126  pp.) 

Internationaler  Amerikanisten-Kongress.  Vierzehnte  Tagiing. 
Stuttgart,  1904.  Berlin,  Stuttgart,  Leipzig:  Verlag  von  W.  Kohlham- 
mer,  1906.  8°,  2  pts.,  Ixxxvii,  703  pp.,  4  pis.;  suppl.,  87  pp.,  6  pis., 
chart. 

KOnigliche  Museen  zu  Berlin.  Verzeichnis  der  in  der  Formerei  der 
K5nigl.  Museen  Kaufiichen  Gibsabgiisse.  (Prahistonsche,  Ethnologische 
und  Anthropologische  Gegenstande. )  Berlin  :  Herausgegeben  von  der 
General-Verwaltung,  1906.     8°,  v,  52  pp. 

Rouillard,  EuGfeNE.  Noms  geographiques  de  la  Province  de  Que- 
bec et  des  Provinces  maritimes  empruntes  aux  langues  sauvages.  Avec 
carte  indiquant  les  territoires  occup^s  autrefois  par  les  races  aborigtoes. 
Etymologic,  traduction  et  orthographe.  Qu<^bec  :  Ed.  Marcotte,  82,  rue 
Saint-Pierre,  1906.     8°,  no  pp.,  map. 

Roy,  Pierre-Georges.  Les  noms  geographiques  de  la  Province  de 
Quebec.     l>evis  :    1906.     8°,  514  pp. 

Thurston,  Edgar.  Ethnographic  Notes  in  Southern  India. 
Madras:  Printed  by  the  Superintendent,  Government  Press,  1906.  8®, 
viii,  580  pp.,  40  pis. 

Will,  G.  F.,  tf//^/ Spinden,  H.  J.  The  Mandans.  A  Study  of  their 
Culture,  Archaeology  and  language.  Papers  of  the  Peabody  Museum 
of  American  Archaeology  and  Ethnology,  Harvard  University.  Cam- 
bridge, Mass.  :  Published  by  the  Museum,  August,  1906.  8°,  pp.  -yg— 
219,  4  maps,  15  pis.,  16  figures. 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 
Conducted  by  Dr  Alexander  F.  Chamberlain 

TOoTE. Authors,  especially  those  whose  articles  appear  in  journals  and  other 

aerials  not  entirely  devoted  to  anthropology,  will  greatly  aid  this  department  of  the 
American  Anthropologist  by  sending  directly  to  Dr  A.  F.  Chamberlain,  Clark  University, 
Worcester,  Massachusetts,  U.  S.  A.,  reprints  or  copies  of  such  studies  as  they  may  desire 
to  have  noticed  in  these  pages.  —  Editor.] 


GENERAL 

A.  (G.)  Elis^e  Reclus.  (Ymer,  Stock- 
holm, 1905,  XXV,  325-329,  portr. )  Bio- 
graphical sketch,  with  appreciation  of 
scientific  labors. 

Andr^  (R. )  Mythologischer  Zusammen- 
hang  zwischen  der  Alten  und  Neuen  Welt. 
(Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  89- 
90. )  Brief  r^sum^  and  critique  of  Ehren- 
reich*s  Die  My  then  und  Legenden  der 
sUdamerikanischen  Urolker  (Berlin, 
106  p.,  1905). 

B.  (Z.)  A  fbldrajz  halottai  1905-ben. 
(F6ldr.  K6zlem.,  Buda-Pest,  1905, 
XXXIII,  407-418. )  Treats  of  geograph- 
ical necrology  for  1905.  Brief  sketches 
of  A.  Bastian,  W.  T.  Blanford,  V.  B. 
Dejt^ri,  Comte  P.  de  Brazza,  J.  Edkins, 
E.  A.  Gregory,  P.  M.  I^ssar,  E.  Reclus, 
E.  Richter,  F.  von  Richthofen,  Tippoo 
Tip. 

Balfour  (H.)  President's  address.  (J. 
Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  1905,  xxxv,  13- 
19.)  Discusses  activity  of  the  sodety, 
publications  of  members,  anthropology 
in  universities,  physical  deterioration, 
etc.  Advocates  the  adoption  in  anthro- 
pology of  "a  binominal,  or  better  still, 
a  trinominal  system  of  nomenclature, 
combined  with  a  well-organized  system 
of  registration." 

Bethe  (K. )  Mythus,  Sage,  M&rchen. 
(Hess.  Bl.  f.  Volksk.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  iv, 
97-142. )  Discusses  the  nature  and 
characteristics  of  myth,  sage  and  vidr- 
chen,  Dr  B.  considers  a  vidrchen  to  be 
**  the  common  property  of  all  of  the 
many  peoples  of  Asia,  Europe,  and  at 
least  the  North  of  Africa," — an  inter- 
national being  that  takes  on  nationality, 
so  that,  whether  it  be  Finn  or  German, 
the  folk -soul  lies  in  it.      The  ni&rchen 


has  eternal  youth.  The  sage  is  bound 
(not  free  like  the  mSrchen)  to  places, 
customs,  times  ;  it  tells  not  of  <<  a  king," 
but  of  **King  Gunther,"  not  of  "a 
castle,"  but  of  "Troy  castle."  It  has 
not  the  charmingly  indefinite  "once  upon 
a  time."  The  myth  can  arise  from  any 
of  the  several  equally  justified  roots  of 
religion,  cult  of  the  dead,  ensoulment  of 
nature,  etc.,  perhaps  even  fetishism. 
Mdrchen^  sage,  and  myth  have  all  had 
to  do  one  with  another  and  the  web  of 
their  interweaving  is  often  most  beautiful. 

Broomall  (H.  L. )  The  significance  of 
errors  in  speech.  ( Proc.  Del.  Co.  Inst. 
Sci.,  Media,  Pa.,  1906,  i,  no.  2,  30-45.) 
According  to  the  author,  the  evolution  of 
language  is  "  imitation  modified  by  in- 
creasing significance  and  decreasing  ef- 
fort." From  this  "  errors  "  arise  (many 
examples  are  given).  Every  correct 
form  of  language  was  or  will  be  an  error 
and  every  error  was  once  correct  or  rep- 
resents forms  that  will  sometime  be  cor- 
rect. The  error  is  only  an  error  in  time. 
It  is  the  sign  of  life.  By  it  the  living 
language  is  distinguished  from  the  dead. 
English  abundantly  exemplifies  this. 

Conybeare  (F.  C. )  Die  jungfrfluliche 
Kirche  und  die  jungfr&uliche  Mutter. 
Eine  Studie  Uber  den  Ursprung  des 
Mariendienstes.  (Arch.  f.  Religsw., 
Lpzg.,  1905,  VIII,  373-389;  1906,  IX, 
73-86. )  Treats  of  the  development  of 
the  idea  (in  a  mythoplastic  age)  of  the 
church  personified  as  a  virgin,  a  virgin 
bride,  the  first-bom  of  God,  the  oldest 
of  all  things,  domina  mater  ecclesia,  the 
spiritual  mother  of  Christ,  the  bride  of 
God,  the  bride  of  Christ,  etc.  The 
early  hymnology  uses  these  expressions 
of  the  church  and  not  of  Mary  —  Mari- 
olatry  comes  later. 


AM.   ANTH  .  N.   S..  8 — ^38. 


585 


586 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


DeHaan  ( J. )  Over  den  dood.  ( Natuurk. 
Tijdschr.  v.  Nederl. -Indie,  Weltevreden, 
1905,  dl.  Lxv,  61-73. )  Discusses  views 
of  various  philosophers  and  men  of  sci- 
ence concerning  death,  particularly  the 
recent  view  of  Bolk,  who  distinguishes 
sexual  and  somatic  death  among  the 
higher  animals.  The  natural  death  of 
the  human  being  is  sex-death. 

Dieterich  (A. )  Hermann  Usener.  (Arch, 
f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  viii,  i-xi, 
portr. )  Appreciative  sketch  of  life  and 
scientific  activities  (d.  Oct.  21,  1905). 
Among  Usener' s  chief  works  were : 
Kallone  (1867),  Italische  Mythen 
{  1875 ),  Epicurea  ( 1887 ),  GotUrnamm 
<l896),  Sintflutsage  (1899),  Dreiheit 
( 1903).  Usener  was  a  great  philologist 
and  a  pioneer  in  the  science  of  religion. 

Drews    (P.)      Das   Abendmahl   und   die 
Dilmonen.    (Hess.  Bl.  f.  Volksk.,  Lpzg., 
1905*  IV,  176-205.)     Treats  of  the  folk- 
lore of  the  Lx)rd's  Supper,  particularly 
in  regard  to  its  protective  power  against 
demons.     Nowhere  else  was  the  collision 
of  Christian-divine  and  heathen-demoni- 
■acal  power  so  marked  as  in  the  Lord's 
Supper, — fear  of  profanation  of  the  ele- 
ments, etc.,  and  the  incoming  of  mortal 
sin,  accidents  of  handling  and  partaking, 
participation  of  the  ungodly  and  the  un- 
worthy, cup  and  water,  etc.     Belief  in 
the  demon  onset  has  passed  largely,  but 
the  customs  and  rules  remain. 

Fdrteckning  ofver  vetenskapliga  skrifter 
af  professor  Hjalmar  Stolpe.  (Ymer, 
Stockholm,  1905,  xxv,  445-446. )  List 
of  scientific  writings  (37  items,  1872- 
1904^  of  the  late  H.  Stolpe. 

FUrst  (  K.  M.  )  Om  Aldersanatomi.  (Ibid.^ 
76-89. )  General  discussion  of  the 
growth  of  the  body  and  its  organs  ac- 
cording to  age — stature,  head  measure- 
ments, internal  organs,  skeleton,  blood, 
etc.  The  divisions  of  life  recognized 
are  :  childhood  { 1-15  or  16  years),  youth 
(15-20  or  25  ),  adult  age  (  20-25-45-50), 
age  of  regression  (50-65-70),  senility 
(70  and  over). 

Geddes  (J.)  Simpler  spelling.  (Educa- 
tion, Boston,  1906,  XXVI,  repr.  p.  1-9.) 
Argues  for  a  *•  universal  alphabet  that 
will  be  itscil.  * '  With  a  universal  alphabet 
spelling  reform  will  come  of  itself.  Re- 
forms in  other  lands  are  noted. 

Goldstein  ( F. )  Die  Menschenopfer  im 
Lichte  der  Politik  und  der  Staatswissen- 
schaft.  (Globus,  Brnschvvg.,  1906, 
LXXXIX,  37-41. )  Discusses  the  sacrifice 
of  human  beings  past  and  present  (ancient 


Mexican  priestly  offerings,  sacrifices  of 
war-prisoners,  cruel  punishment  of  do- 
mestic and  foreign  enemies,  criminals, 
etc.,  infanticide,  sacrifice  of  widows, 
slaves, etc. ).  So  far  as  politics  are  con- 
cerned, according  to  G.  the  object  of 
human  sacrifice  was  the  punishment  in 
the  most  cruel  way  possible  of  enemies 
and  the  spreading  abroad  of  fear,  in 
order  to  make  easier  the  ruling  of  the 
many.  Infanticide  and  slave  sacrifices 
probably  served  private  economic  ends. 

Hall  (G.  S. )  The  undeveloped  races  in 
contact  with  civilization.  (Bull.  Wash. 
Univ.  Assoc,  St  Louis,  1906,  iv,  145- 
150. )  Abstract  of  lecture.  Argues 
against  man  as  exterminator,  the  exhaus- 
tion and  depletion  of  indigenous  papula- 
tions (e.  g.  in  Congo)  by  the  whites 
and  the  making  over  of  others  (Ameri- 
can Indian)  into  *< a  cheap  imitation  of 
the  white  man,"  the  deej)ening  of  the 
color  line  against  the  negro,  etc. 

Ingegnieros  (J. )  D'une  classification  des 
criminels  fondle  sur  la  psychopathologie. 
(Rev.  Scient.,  Paris,  1906,  v«  s.,  v, 
648-651.)  Outlines  a  psychopatholog- 
ical  classification  of  criminals.  The  di- 
visions are  :  I.  Moral  anomalies  (dis- 
thimic)  *,  2.  intellectual  anomalies  (dis- 
gnosic)  ;  3.  volitional  anomalies  (dis- 
boulic).  Each  of  these  has  three  subdi- 
visions :  Congenital,  acquired,  transitory. 
Besides  these  three  groups  there  is 
another  including  composite  types. 

Knapp(C.)  Elisee  Reclus.  (Bull.  Soc. 
Neuchat.  de  G6ographie,  Neuchatel, 
1905,  XVI,  310-316.)  Biographical 
sketch  and  appreciation  of  chief  works 
of  great  Belgian  geographer  and  ethnog- 
rapher. 

Le  Double  (M.)  L'<^volution  des  os  de 
la  face.  (Rev.  Scientif.,  Paris,  1906, 
v«  s.,  548-556,  584-590-)  Treats  of 
the  evolution  of  the  bones  of  the  face  in 
the  animal  series  and  in  man,  variations 
and  abnormalities  of  growth,  monstrosi- 
ties, etc.  Dr  L.  attributes  the  slow  and 
progressive  reductions  in  the  dimensions 
of  the  raaxillaries  to  the  struggle  between 
the  brain  and  the  jaw,  effect  of  milder 
manners  (choice  of  food,  cooking,  etc.) 
on  the  size  and  volume  of  the  teeth  ;  also 
to  hereditary  selection. 

Lehmann  (E. )  Teufels  Grossmutter. 
(Arch.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  vill, 
41 1-430. )  Treats  of '•  the  devil's  grand- 
mother" in  literature,  viarchen^  myths, 
etc.,  particularly  Teutonic  (with  ana- 
logues elsewhere). 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


587 


Lombroso  (C.)  A  propos  des  caract^res 
d^gin^ratifsdu  crime  et  du  g6nie.  ( Rev. 
Scient.y  Paris,  1906,  v«  s.,  v,  795.) 
Note  in  reply  to  M.  Le  Double's  remarks 
in  a  previous  number.  Lombroso  main- 
tains that  physical  malformations  **are 
only  exUrnal  signs,  not  corollaries." 
Genius,  with  crime  and  madness,  is  a 
branch  of  the  tree  of  epilepsy— a  fertile, 
even  wonderful,  product  of  epileptic  de- 
generation. 

Y.  Lnscban  (F. )  Ueber  ein  rachitisches 
Schimpanseeskelett.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Ber- 
lin, 1906,  XXXVIII,  1 15-120,  4  pi.) 
Describes,  with  measurements,  the  skel- 
eton of  a  male  chimpanzee  ca.  15  years 
old  (long  in  the  Dresden  Zodlogical  Gar- 
den), the  skull  and  pelvis  of  which  are 
particularly  rachitic.  This  skeleton  is 
compared  with  that  of  a  sound  adult 
animal  of  the  same  size. 

Mantegazza  (P.)  II  preteso  pregiudizio 
delle  razze.  (A.  p.  I'Antrop.,  Firenze, 
1905,  XXXV,  303-310. )  Critique  of  Fi- 
not's  recent  volume  Li  P^^jf*]?^  des  races 
(inspired  *<by  the  fatal  and  mad  word 
equality  "  ).  M.  does  not  agree  with  Fi- 
not's  conclusions  that  **  the  psychology  of 
peoples  demonstrates  their  mental  unity,** 
and  <  ^  the  virtues  and  vices  of  a  race  are 
but  the  effects  of  historical  circumstances 
or  of  the  influence  of  environment.** 

Darwin dopo cinquant*  anni.    (Ibid., 

311-322. )  Sums  up  the  results  of  Dar- 
win* s  views  and  influence — the  **  temple 
of  evolution ' '  has  not  remained  quite  as 
it  was  built.  **  Evolution  **  is  too  Eng- 
lish, too  utilitarian,  and  <<  natural  selec- 
tion *'  has  been  **  overworked.** 

Parsons  ( Elsie  C. )  The  religious  dedica- 
tion of  w^omen.  (Amer.  J.  Sociol., 
Chicago,  1906,  XI,  585-622.)  Dis- 
cusses this  topic  from  the  crudest  form 
(wives  of  the  gods  among  the  natives  of 
Guinea )  to  the  modern  nun  and  Protest- 
ant church-goer.  Author  holds  that  in 
the  phenomena  involved  **we  discover 
one  of  the  many  impressive  series  of  so- 
cial factors  which  have  contributed  so 
richly  to  the  development  of  human  per- 
sonality.*' When  woman  was  a  chattel, 
male  ownership  kept  her  chaste,  and 
**now  religion  seems  to  safeguard  the 
products  of  a  social  means  that  is  out- 
grown. '  * 

Parsons  (F.  G.)  and  Box  (C.  R.)  The 
relation  of  the  cranial  sutures  to  age. 
(J.  Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  1905,  xxxv, 
30-38. )  Gives  results  of  examination 
of  82  skulls,  mostly  of  lower  and  mid- 


dle class  English  people  (from  St  Thomas 
Hospital)  with  respect  to  ectocranial  and 
entocranial  sutures  —  ages  of  subjects 
17-85.  Authors  agree  with  Picozzo  as 
to  earlier  obliteration  in  males.  The 
lambdoid  closes  later  than  the  coronal 
and  sagittal  as  a  rule.  Signs  of  a  me- 
topic  suture  occurred  in  6  skulls.  Ab- 
sence of  internal  obliteration  indicates 
an  age  below  30,  while  after  60  all  the 
internal  sutures  have  disappeared.  Ecto- 
cranial sutures  are  usually  open  under  30 
and  obliteration  commences  below  the 
stephanion. 

Pradel  (F. )  Der  Schatten  im  Volksglau- 
ben.  (Mitt.  d.  Schles.  Ges.  f.  Volksk., 
Breslau,  1904,  H.  xii,  1-36.)  Inter- 
esting discussion  of  the  shadow  in  folk- 
lore, —  shadow  as  soul,  under- world  of 
shadows,  shadowlessness  of  spirits  and 
elves,  shadow  as  essential  part  of  man, 
fear  of  loss  of  shadow  under  the  equator 
(Amboyna,  Old  Calabar,  etc.),  correla- 
tion of  j>ower  and  strength  with  shadow, 
shadow  as  protective  *  *  demon, '  *  form  of 
shadow,  loss  of  shadow  (Peter  Schlemihl 
cycle),  shadow  as  "haunt,**  magic  con- 
nected with  shadow  (stepping  on,  urina- 
ting on),  shadow  in  oaths  and  legal  lore, 
deflling  of  water  through  shadow,  medi- 
cinal virtue  and  evils  of  tree-shadows, 
etc.,  pregnancy  caused  by  shadow  of 
leaf  (Tahiti ),  proverbs  and  sayings  about 
the  shadow,  riddles,  etc.  Widespread 
is  the  idea  that  man' s  shadow  is  his  soul. 

Kopflose   Menschen  und   Tiere   in 

Mythe und  Sage.  (Ibid.,  37-42. )  Gives 
numerous  references  to  the  many  and 
widespread  myths  and  stories  concerning 
headless  men  (often  with  head  under 
arm)  and  animals.  Horses  in  particular 
appear  headless  in  association  with  the 
headless  wild  huntsmen.  Dr  P.  sug- 
gests as  sources  of  such  myths  not  de- 
capitation (the  spirit  of  the  beheaded 
was  regarded  as  headless),  but  ancient 
burial  customs  (separation  of  head  from 
body  before  cremation,  inhumation,  etc. ). 
The  idea  was  then  carried  over  to  animals. 

Reid  (C.  A.)  The  biological  foundations 
of  sociology.  ( Amer.  J.  Sociol. ,  Chicago, 
1906,  XI,  532-544. )  Dr  R.  argues  that 
**  races  evolve  only  when  placed  under 
influences  which,  because  injurious  to  the 
individual,  weed  out  the  weak  and  the 
unfit,  and  leave  the  race  to  the  strong  and 
flt.*'  This  accounts  for  tall  and  robust 
negroes,  fine  Chinese  race  (city-life  for 
ages).  Human  beings  develop  under 
three    stimuli :     nutrition,    use,   injury. 


588 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


Races  can  be  improved  only  by  breeding 
favorably-varying  individuals.  There  is 
no  reason  why  we  should  not  rival,  and 
even  surpass  the  Greeks.  Improved  en- 
vironment and  selective  breeding  will  do 
it. 

Setzins  (G. )  Hjalmar  Stolpe.  (Ymer, 
Stockholm,  1905,  XX v,  5-16,  3  fgs. ) 
Appreciative  sketch  of  life,  scientific  ac- 
tivities, etc.,  of  H.  Stolpe,  best  known 
by  his  Development  of  primitive  orna- 
ment (1890- 1 891),  and  Studies  in 
American  ornament  (1896). 

Schlaginthaufen  (O. )  Das  Hautleisten- 
system  der  Pnmatenplanta  unter  Mitbe- 
rilcksichtigung  der  Palma.  (Morphol. 
Jahrb.,  Lpzg.,  1904,  xxxiii,  577-671  ; 
1905,  XXXIV,  I- 125,  194  fgs.)  In  this 
valuable  and  detailed  monograph,  based 
on  the  investigations  of  the  soles  of  330 
Simiae  and  Prosimiae  and  of  365  human 
soles  ( European  278,  West  African  negro 
51,  Papuan  24,  Japanese,  Chinese, 
East  Indian  12),  with  examination  of 
all  the  previous  literature  on  the  subject 
(bibl.  109  titles,  pages  608-612),  Dr 
S.  presents  a  thorough -going  study  of 
the  cutaneous  crests  and  furrows  of  the 
sole  (the  palm  also  is  considered) 
among  the  primates  and  several  human 
races  —  macroscopic  and  microscopic  as- 
pects, embryology,  physiology,  topog- 
raphy (in  detail  with  statistics),  etc.  In 
certain  peculiarities  man  and  the  Ca- 
tarrhine  monkeys  belong  together  (e.  g., 
the  triradius,  ti3,  never  occurring  typi- 
cally in  the  Platyrrhines).  The  gorilla, 
the  orang,  and  the  chimpanzee  resemble 
man  in  diverse  ways  (which  is  really 
nearest  cannot  yet  be  determined).  In 
man  race-differences  occur.  The  Maya- 
Indians  (Wilder)  are  more  primitive 
than  the  West  .African  Negroes  (S. ). 
The  Papuans  of  northern  New  Guinea 
depart  most  from  the  original  type. 
The  most  primitive  elements  are  the 
"insula;  primarite,"  from  which  the 
crests,  etc.,  develop. 

Simmel  (G. )  The  sociology'  of  secrecy 
and  of  secret  societies.  (Amer.  J. 
Sociol.,  Chicago,  1906,  .\l,  441-498.) 
Discusses  friendship,  marriage,  secrecy 
as  a  sociological  technique  ( e.  g.,  in 
commerce),  reciprocal  confidence  (pro- 
tective character),  reticence  on  an  ob- 
jective basis  (secret  societies  of  the  Mo- 
luccas, Gallic  druids,  etc.),  correlation 
of  secrecy  and  individualistic  separate- 
ness,  gradual  initiation,  ritual,  etc.  The 
secret  element   in  societies  is  a  primary 


sociological  fact,  the  secret  society  is  a 
secondary  stnictore.  Secret  assodatioDS 
have  always  had  a  significant  r6le  in 
political  aristocracies.  The  secret  society 
seems  dangerous  because  it  is  secreL 

Singer  ( H. )  Der  Stand  der  geograph- 
ischen  Erforschung  der  deutscfaen 
Schutzgebiete.  (Globus,  Bmschwg., 
1906,  Lxxxix,  77-82.)  R^sum^s  re- 
cent geographical  literature  concerning 
the  German  colonies  and  protectorates 
in  various  parts  of  the  world. 

Starbird  (K.  S.)  The  ethnolc^'cal  in 
Matthew  Arnold.  (Bull.  Wash.  Univ. 
Assoc.,  St  Louis,  1906,  iv,  11 2-1 2 1.) 
Arnold's  use  of  ethnological  terms  seems 
a  mere  rhetorical  flourish,  but  he  used 
this  device  ^'because  he  felt  instinctively 
a  fundamental  relation  between  the  prod- 
ucts of  a  literary  man  and  the  life  of 
that  man,  between  the  literary  output  of 
an  age  and  some  characteristic  move- 
ment of  that  age,  and  between  literature 
as  a  whole  and  life  as  a  whole.''  He 
hits  off  easily  the  distinctive  marks  of  a 
race.  One  idea  pervades  his  work  —  let 
us  perfect  our  race. 

Swift  (E.  J.)  The  school  and  the  indi- 
vidual. (Ibid.,  122-141.)  Protests 
against  ''the  dominant  sin  of  the  school- 
master, the  attempt  to  make  children 
homogeneous. ' '  Cites  examples  of  chil- 
dren who  resented  direction  and  coercion. 

Tjeenk  Willink  (H.  D.)  Mammalia 
voorkomende  in  Nederlandsch- Indie. 
(Natuurk.  Tijdsch.  v.  Nederl-Indie, 
Weltevreden.  1905,  dl.  LXV,  154-345.) 
This  valuable  monograph  on  the  mam- 
malia of  the  Dutch  East  Indies  includes 
notes  on  the  anthropomorphic  apes,  the 
Hylobates,  Cercopitheci,  etc.  The  local 
names  are  given.  The  maias  ( as  the 
Dayaks  called  the  orang^  constructs  a 
••nest"  in  the  trees  in  which  it  sleeps 
at  night  —  Dr  Buttikofer  found  so  many 
of  these  as  to  lead  him  to  believe  that  the 
creature  sometimes  built  a  new  one  every 
night.     An  index  of  names  is  added. 

Vram  (U.  G.)  Metodo  per  determinare 
I'inclinazione  dell' orbita.  (A.  d.  Soc. 
Rom,  di  Antrop.,  1906,  xii,  195-196.) 
Briefly  describes  an  easy  method  of  find- 
ing the  horizontal  inclination  of  the  orbit. 

Warren  (S.  II.)  On  the  origin  of 
••eolithic  "  flints  by  natural  causes,  espe- 
cially by  the  foundering  of  drifts.  (J. 
Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  1905,  xxxv,  337- 
364,  I  pi.)  Treats  of  classes  of 
* 'eoliths'*  (battered  surfaces,  flaked  sur- 
faces, chipped  edges)  and    the  possible 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


589 


means  of  their  formation  :  human  agency; 
water-abrasion  by  wave-action ;  water- 
abrasion  by  streams,  rivers  and  floods ; 
soil-abrasion  ;  the  drag  of  ice  ;  wear  and 
tear  on  the  surface  of  the  ground.  The 
pressure-chipped  **  eoliths  '*  occur  abund- 
antly in  hill-drifts  of  paleolithic  age,  but 
are  rare  in  the  contemporary  valley 
gravels.  W.  does  not  accept  the  theory 
of  eolithic  man,  believing  these  forms  to 
be  the  result  of  natural  action.  Discus- 
sion by  others,  pages  359-363. 

Weidemann  (A.)  Alphabet.  (Arch.  f. 
Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  viii,  552-554.) 
Notes  on  the  **  magic  **  of  the  24  letters, 
the  **  mystery**  of  the  alphabet,  etc.,  in 
Greek  and  early  Christian  thought.  In 
the  early  Coptic  period  24  personalities 
developed  out  of  the  alphabet. 

Wittrock  ( K.  J.  H. )  De  olika  slagen  af 
folkm&ngdskartor.  (Ymer,  Stockholm, 
1905,  XXV,  428-444.)  Treats  of  the 
different  types  of  maps  of  density  of  pop- 
ulation. 

EUROPE 

Abercromby  (J.)  The  chronology  of 
prehistoric  glass  beads  and  associated 
ceramic  types  in  Britain.  (J.  Anthr. 
Inst.,  Lend.,  1905,  xxxv,  256-265,  5 
pis.)  Enumerates  37  finds  of  prehis- 
toric glass  beads  (particularly  ribbed, 
notched  beads  of  opaque  blue  vitreous 
paste)  in  connection  with  pottery,  etc., 
in  British  barrows.  The  long  ribbed 
and  globular  vitreous  beads  (found  with 
cinerary  urns  with  overhanging  rims)  were 
imported  into  Britain  ca.  900  (or  800)- 
600  B.  c,  during  part  of  the  Hallstatt 
period  of  central  Europe. 

Bates  (W.  N. )  A  signed  amphora  of 
Meno.  (Amer.  J.  Archseol.,  Norwood, 
Mass.,  1905,  IX,  1 70-181,  2  pi.,  6  fgs.) 
Describes  a  red-figured  amphora  bearing 
the  signature  of  the  new  painter  Meno, 
an  Athenian,  not  otherwise  known,  ca. 
510  R.  c,  and  trained  in  the  black-fig- 
ured school.  I  le  was  possibly  the  grand- 
father of  Meno,  the  accuser  of  Phidias. 
On  one  side  are  Leto,  Apollo,  and  Ar- 
temis, and  on  the  other  side  of  the  vase 
a  warrior  leading  horses.  The  vase  is 
now  in  the  museum  of  the  University  of 
Pennsylvania — it  came  from  some  town 
in  Etruria.  Meno  has  some  resemblances 
to  Andocid'^s  in  style,  etc. 

Baur  (P.)  Tityros.  (Ibid.,  157-165,  i 
pi.,  I  fg. )  Describes  a  terra-cotta  fig- 
ure (local  Theban  ware,  middle  of  fifth 
century,  B.  c. ),  now  in  the  Boston  Mu- 


seum of  Fine  Arts,  "representing  one 
of  those  mythical  combinations  of  animal 
and  man  so  peculiar  to  Greek  religious 
thought"  —  an  ithyphallic  goat-man,  a 
demon  closely  related  to  the  Pan  and 
Satyr  type.  Only  five  specimens  of  the 
type  of  this  statuette  are  known  (2  from 
Thebes,  2  from  Locris,  I  from  Rhodes). 
An  appropriate  appellation  is  Tit3rros, 
for  the  goat-man  demon  had  phallic  and 
other  kindred  associations. 

Beddoe(J.)  Colour  and  race.  (J.  Anthr. 
Inst.,  Lx>nd.,  1905,  xxxv,  219-250,  2 
pi.,  I  fg. )  Discusses  color  as  a  race- 
mark,  drawbacks  to  its  use  (change  with 
age,  fugitiveness  after  death,  operation 
of  various  forms  of  selection,  personal 
equation),  systems  of  classification,  rela- 
tive values  of  hair  and  iris  color,  effects 
of  geographical  situation,  migration,  etc. 
The  maps  of  Dr  B.  show  the  distribution 
of  color  and  race  in  central  Europe  and 
in  the  British  Isles  (tables  of  pigmenta- 
tion). Dr  B.  regrets  "the  diminution 
of  the  old  blond  lympho-sanguine  stock, 
which  has  hitherto  served  England*  well 
in  many  ways,  but  is  apparently  doomed 
to  give  way  to  a  darker  and  more  mobile 
type,  largely  the  offspring  of  the  prole- 
tariat, and  more  adapted  to  the  atmos- 
phere of  great  cities.'*  The  brunet  type 
is  not  gaining  in  Scandinavia,  but  the 
growth  of  towns  may  induce  a  change. 
In  southern  Europe  the  blond  seems  to 
persist  only  by  constant  reinforcement 
from  the  north.  There  are  reasons  for 
believing  that  man  in  Europe  had  origin- 
ally red  hair. 

Biehringer  (F.)  Die  Sage  von  Hero  und 
Leander.  (Globus,  Brnschwg.,  LXXXIX, 
1906,  94-97.)  Discusses  the  Hero- Lean- 
der legend  and  its  distribution(see  alsojel- 
linek's  Die  Sage  von  Hero  und  Leander 
in  der  Dichtung^  Berlin,  1890)  in  Eu- 
rope ^particularly  in  Teutonic  countries). 
The  legend  may  be  of  Indian  origin, 
though  this  is  by  no  means  certain. 

Blaschke  (E.)  Weinachtsherligeromt  ei 
der  Schwenzer  Schmiede  vor  30  Jahren. 
(Mitt.  d.  Schles.  Ges.  f.  Volksk.,  Bres- 
lau,  1904,  H.  XII,  103-107.)  Describes 
Christmas  customs  of  30  years  ago  in 
Schwenz,  district  of  Glatz. 

Bore  ( E. )  Tidsbilder  fr&n  det  forna  Gelli- 
vare.  (Svenska  Landsm&l,  Stockholm, 
1904,  27-41.)  Notes  on  folk-life  in 
(lellivare,  a  parish  in  the  extreme  north 
of  Sweden  :  Fairs  in  1 860 -1870,  famine 
among  the  Lapps,  ecclesiastical  festival 


590 


AMEKICAX  ANTHROPOLOGIS7 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


in  1890,  the  catechizing  tours  of  the  curt 
of  Gellivare  in  Karungi. 

Bnmimid  (J. )  Kameni  spomenici  hrvats- 
koga  narodnoga  Muzeja  u  Zagrebu. 
( Vjesn.  hrvat.  Arheol.  Dnistva,  Zaghreb, 
1905,  N.  s.,  VIII,  35-106,  132  fgs. )  De- 
scribes and  figures  nos.  58-189  of  stone 
statues,  sculptures,  inscriptions,  etc. 
(Roman,  (Ireek,  etc.)  in  the  Croatian 
National  Museum  at  Zaghreb  (Agram). 

Starine  ranijega  srednjega  vijeka  iz 

Hrvatske  i  Slavonije.  ( Ibid.,  208-220, 
8  fgs.)  Treats  of  anti(]uities  (bronze 
fibulx,  etc. )  of  the  early  Middle  Ages 
in  Croatia  and  Slavonia,  specimens  of 
which  are  in  the  Croatian  National  Mu- 
seum. 

WW' 

Nekoliko  nasasca  novaca  na  skupu 


u  Hrvatskoj  i  Slavoniji.  (Ibid.,  176- 
'92,  7  fgs.  )  Treats  of  nos.  18-25  of 
numismatic  fmds  (Italian,  African,  liun- 
garian,  Teutonic,  etc. )  in  Croatia  and 
Slavonia. 

Caskey  (L.  D. )  Notes  on  inscriptions 
from  Kleusis  dealing  with  the  building 
of  the  porch  of  Philon.  ( Amer.  J.  Ar- 
chceol.,  Norwood,  Mass.,  1905,  ix,  147- 
156,  I  pi. )  Treats  of  6  inscriptions 
and  the  data  to  be  obtained  therefrom. 
The  restorers  reproduced  the  building 
substantially  as  it  was  before  its  destruc- 
tion ;  though  the  workmanship  is  Roman, 
the  forms  are  those  of  the  fourth  century 
H.  c,  copying  the  best  perio<i  of  (ireek 
architecture,  as  was  the  custom  of  the  age. 

Diehl  ( — )  Kleinerc  volkskundlichc  Nlit- 
teilunjjen  aus  Archivjilion.  (llrss.  Bl. 
f.  Volksk.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  IV,  206-210.) 
Treats  ot  St  John's  day  celebration  in 
Dreicicli  in  1578,  cemeteries  in  lOll  and 
1 7 10,  votive  oflerings  in  1628,  a  witch  of 
1663. 

Dieterich  (A.)  Griecliische  und  rviinischc 
Religion.  (Arch.  f.  Keligsw.,  Lj^/j;., 
1906,  VIII,  474-510.)  Resumes  and 
criti(|ues  of  recent  works  (1903-1905) 
relating  to  (Ireek  and  Roman  religion, 
including  IIarris<^n's  Prolt;^onuuii  to  the 
Study  of  (/tt'il:  /uw'ixn'fi  (  CamhriHge, 
1903),  l-'ra/er's  Enr!y  History  of  t/ir 
A'hii;s//f'/>  (Lond.,  1905),  Reinach's 
CultcSy  fiiythis  et  prh'i;ions  (t.  I,  Paris, 
( 1905  ),  (le  Visser's  Die  uioht  ni,)i>ohcn- 
^tstiii'tii^cn  Cotter  iler  (iriee/ien  ( 1  .eiden, 
1903),  Rloomfield's  Cer/>en/s,  the  J\>,;  of 
Jlades  (Chicago,  1905),  Foucart's  Le 
eulte  tie  Diotiysos  en  Attique  ( Paris, 
1904),  Dccharme's  La  eritii/ue  ties  tra- 
ditions re/ii^ieuses  ehez  /es  Ones  [  Paris, 
1904),  De  Marchi's  //  eu/to  privato  di 


Romaantica  (Milmiio,  1903),  Camoot's 
Die  MysUrien  des  Ali/Jkra  (Leipzig, 
1903),  Lodus-Anrich's  £h'e  Anflnge 
des  Heiligenkults  in  der  christlichen 
Kir c he  (Tubingen,  1 904),  and  Pblitis* 
Thesaurus  of  Modem  Greek  Folk  Ideas 
(1904). 

FoMlim  (A.)  The  theatre  at  Sikyoo. 
(Amer.  J.  Archseol.,  Norwood,  Mass., 
1905,  XX,  263-276,  2  pi.,  3  fgs.)  De- 
scribes investigations  made  in  the  sum- 
mer of  1898,  with  restoration  of  certain 
parts.  The  object  of  one  reconstruction 
was  to  deepen  the  stage  according  to  the 
method  adopted  at  Priene — **it  is  of 
Roman  origin  and  may  date  from  the 
period  when  Sikyon  superseded  Corinth 
in  political  significance." 

Frasseto  (F. )  Sopra  due  crani  rinvenati 
nelP  antico  sepolcreto  di  Bovolone  Ver- 
onese attribuito  ai  terramaricoli.  (A. 
d.  Soc.  Rom.  di  Anlrop.,  1906,  xii. 
145-153.)  Describes  two  male  skulls 
(indexes,  75.2  and  70.7)  in  the  Florence 
Anthropological  Museum,  exhumed  in 
1876  in  the  Veronese  cemetery  of  Bovo- 
lone, attributed  to  prehistoric  terramari- 
coli^ but  really  Ligurian.  Dr  F.  thinks 
that  the  terramaricoli  were  IJgwians, 
the  terramare  being  •*  stations.** 

Crani  nnvenuti  in  tombe  etnische. 

(Ibid.,    155-182,    6    fgs.)       Describes, 
with    measurements    15    skulls   (3  pen- 
tagonoid,  4  ovoid,  8  ellipsoid  ;   12  male, 
3  female )  from  Etruscan  tombs  —  sutures 
and  special   In^nes  are  examined  in  the 
second  part  of  the  article,  pages  177- 182 
(the  occipital  presents  the  most  variations 
and    anomalies).      Dr  A.   considers    the 
Ktruscan  (  Italy)  a  mixed  people,  a  view 
in  harmony  with  linguistic  and  archeo- 
logical    facts.      Like    the    Italians,    they 
belongeil    to    the     Mediterranean    race. 
They  arrived  in  Italy  in  the  8th  century, 
K.  (  ,     ( )f  the  crania  here  considered  10 
have  cephalic  indexes  under  76. 

Fiirst  (C.  M.)  Skeleltfynd  i  pmtlJlndska 
grafvar  fran  den  yngre  jflrnAldern. 
(Vnier,  Stockholm,  1 905,  xxv,  372- 
401,  20  fgs. )  Describes,  with  details  of 
measurements,  crania  and  other  skeletal 
remains  of  three  men  and  two  women 
from  the  iron  age  cemetery  at  As  in 
Jamtland  (  see  Kjellmarky  K. ).  Another 
grave  contained  the  skeletons  of  two 
young  children.  In  all  5  males,  3  fe- 
nialcs,  and  2  children  are  referred  to. 
Of  the  male  skulls  two  are  dolichoce- 
phalic, one  mesocephalic,  the  female 
dolichocephalic.     Height    (estimated)  : 


CHAMBERLAINj 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


591 


males  1620-17 10  mm-*  females  1500- 
1580.  The  dolichocephalic  crania 
represent  the  characteristic  Scandinavian 
type  of  the  period.  The  mesocephalic 
skull  resembles  the  coast-type  from 
mediaeval  Trondhjem  —  a  mixed,  or  for- 
eign, element. 

Oiuff rida-Ruggeri  ( V. )  Elenco  del  mater- 
iale  scheletrico  prebtorico  e  protostorico 
del  Lazio.  (A.  d.  Soc.  Rom.  di  An- 
trop.,  1906,  XII,  183-189.)  Treats  of 
a  male  skeleton  (skull  mesocephalic) 
from  an  eneolithic  grave  near  Sgurgola, 
two  male  skulls  from  an  artificial  eneo- 
lithic grotto  at  Cantalupo  Mandela  ( in- 
dices 70.97  and  86.54),  a  male  brachy- 
cephalic  skull  from  the  tombs  of  the 
Esquiline,  an  imperfect  male  skeleton 
from  Gabii  (with  excessive  development 
of  forearm ) .  The  skull  from  Sgurgola  is 
colored  red  on  forehead  and  face. 

Cro-Magnon,  Crenelle  e  i  loro  meticci. 

(Ibid.,  219-221.)  Criticizes  Houz^'s 
account  of  the  mktis  of  Cro-Magnon  and 
Crenelle,  said  to  be  represented  by  the 
skull  from  Sclaigneaux.  What  has 
really  happened  in  these  regions  is  a 
mixture  of  races  giving  rise  to  an  in- 
crease of  brachycephals. 

Oobat  (T. )  Un  antique  nom  topogra- 
phique  de  Li^ge,  Merchoul.  (Bull. 
Inst.  Arch^ol.  Li^geois,  Li^ge,  1905, 
XXXV,  141-154.)  Discusses  the  etymol- 
ogy of  the  local  name  Merchoul  in 
Li^ge  (several  derivations  have  been  put 
forth).  The  word  is  not  derived  from 
Matricula^  but,  as  the  form  Merdecoul 
indicates,  refers  to  the  deposit  of  human 
ordure. 

Gu8iDde(K. )  Ueber  Mundartengrenzen 
im  Kreise  Oels.  ( Mitt.  d.  Schles.  Ces. 
f.  Volksk.,  Breslau,  1904,  H.  xii,  86- 
88. )  Gives  specimens  of  the  diphthong- 
izing dialect  from  Great  and  Little  Z51I- 
nig  —  5  brief  "  summer  songs,"  6  lulla- 
bies, and  a  few  superstitions. 

Haas  (A.)  FUnf  Sagen  aus  dera  Riesen- 
gebirge.  (Ibid.,  91-94.)  Five  short 
tales  (Night-hunter,  **  Candlestick," 
Will-o'-the-wisp,  Digging  for  Treasure, 
the  "  Bierwfitzel  ")  collected  in  Brilck- 
enberg  in  1904. 

Hartung  ( C. )  Einiges  neuere  iiber  das 
antike  und  das  heutige  Rom.  (Mitt.  d. 
K.-K.  Geogr.  Ges.  in  Wien,  1906, 
xux,  118-136,  2  fgs. )  Notes  on  the 
forums,  the  baths  of  Diocletian,  Cara- 
calla,  and  Agrippa,  the  Porta  Pia  (Mich- 
elangelo), various  palazzi,  the  Capitol, 
temple  of  Vesta,  recent  excavations  at 


the  base  of  the  statue  of  Domitian,  on  the 
Palatine,  etc. 

Hastings  ( H.  R. )  A  bronze  age  *  <  pocket' ' 
from  Avgo,  Crete.  (Amer.  J.  Archseol., 
Norwood,  Mass.,  1905,  ix,  271-285,  i 
pi.  6  fgs.)  Describes  an  interesting 
"pocket"  of  28  objects  (knife-blades, 
tweezers,  hooks,  rings  of  bronze,  gems, 
beads,  etc.)  of  the  bronze  age  (early 
Mycenaean)  found  on  the  hill  of  Trapezi 
above  the  church  of  Avgo  in  eastern 
Crete  in  March,  1903.  They  may  be 
part  of  the  funerary  objects  belonging  to 
the  grrave  (or  graves)  of  the  occupants  of 
.  the  ** Mycenaean  farmhouse"  discovered 
by  Miss  Boyd  in  190 1  close  to  the  Avgo 
church. 

Hellmich  (M. )  Sagen  aus  den  Kreisen 
Glogau,  Falkenberg  and  Griinberg. 
(Mitt.  d.  Schles.  Ges.  f.  Volksk.,  Bres- 
lau, 1904,  H.  XII,  94-97.)  From  brief 
tales  concerning  the  **Feenst-Weiber," 
devil-stone,  **  black  ditch,"  water- 
maiden. 

Hellquist  ( E. )  Svenska  sjdnamn.  ( Sven- 
ska  LandsmAl,  Stockholm,  1903- 1 905, 
XX,  3-610,  1-32.)  Exhaustive  alpha- 
betic list  (A-S)  of  Swedish  lake-names, 
with  historical,  etymological,  and  gram- 
matical notes.  A  valuable  contribution 
to  the  literature  of  geographic  names. 

Hemnaim  (F. )  Eine  Geisterbannung  im 
Schlosse  zu  Darmstadt,  17 1 7-17 18. 
(Hess.  Bl.  f.  Volksk.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  iv, 
167-176. )  Describes  in  detail,  with  cita- 
tions from  contemporary  accounts,  excom- 
munications of  spirits  at  the  castle  of 
Darmstadt  in  17 1 7  and  17 18. 

Hippe  (H. )  Volksttimliches  aus  einem 
alten  Breslauer  Tagebuche.  ( Mitt.  d. 
Schles.  Ges.  f.  Volksk.,  Breslau,  1904, 
H.  XII,  79-85).  Cites  from  a  Breslau 
diary  of  1640-1669  in  Latin  belonging 
to  the  then  rector  of  the  gymnasium, 
Elias  Maior,  various  items  of  folk  custom 
and  belief:  Ultare  Sunday,  Christmas 
bells.  Wandering  Jew,  exhibitions  of 
dancing  bears,  horse-races,  races  of 
women  in  1666,  protection  of  workmen 
against  ill-repute  as  gallows-makers,  etc. 

Hoffler    (V. )      Prethistorijsko    groblje   u 

Smiljanu   Gospica.     (Vjesn.  hrvat.  Ar- 

V 

heol.  Drustva,  Zaghrcb,  1905,  N.  s., 
viii,  193-203,  6  fgs. )  Treats  of  the  pre- 
historic cemetery  (22  graves)  at  Smiljan 

near  Gospic  and  the  objects  discovered 
therein  —  bronze  fibulae,  coils,  bracelets, 
etc. ;   amber  beads  and  other  ornaments. 

Olovna  plodca  sa  zavjetnim  relijefom 


592 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


iz  Srpske  Mitrovice.  (Ibid.,  1 18-128, 
8  fgs. )  Describes  a  votive  relief-plate  of 
lead  from  Servian  Metrovica  compared 
with  other  like  objects  of  Roman  type 
from  Petrovaca,  etc. 

Olovna  plocica  sa   relijefom  iz  Di- 

vosa.  (Ibid.,  204-207,  2  fgs.)  De- 
scribes a  lead  relief-plate  from  Divos. 

Johnnaon  ( F. )  S&gner  fr&n  (^stra  Gumge. 
(Svenska  LandsmAl,  Stockholm,  1904, 
108-1 15. )  Clives  texts  of  9  brief  histor- 
ical tales  ( 17th  century,  relating  to  Dan- 
ish-Swedish war),  from  the  district  of 
Sdinge  in  northern  Scania.  Also  ' '  pact 
between  a  peasant  and  the  devil/*  from 
Emitsli^v. 

KAlile(B. )  Der KagnarOkmythus.  (Arch, 
f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  viii,  431-455  J 
1906,  IX,  61-72.)  Chiefly  a  r6sum6 
and  critique  of  the  views  of  Dr  Axel 
Olrik  as  expressed  in  his  Cm  Ra^^narok 
(1902),  with  notices  of  subse(iuent  lit- 
erature of  the  subject.  K.  agrees  with 
O.  in  considering  the  poem  essentially 
heathen,  but  differs  from  him  as  to  the 
Christian  influence. 

Der  hOchste  Name.     (Ibid.,  556- 

558. )  Points  out  that  the  belief  in  the 
power  of  *'the  highest  name"  is  also 
found  in  Old  Icelandic  literature. 

Karo  (G. )  Archftologische  Funde  und 
Forschungen.  (Ibid.,  511-525,  I  pi. 
3  fgs.)  Treats  of  Evans*  explorations 
in  Knosos,  Doerpfeld's  in  Phaistos,  and 
those  of  the  Italian  expedition  on  the 
Hagia  Triada  hill  west  of  Phaistos,  itself, 
the  chief  objecls  discovered,  graves  and 
buildings  examined,  etc. 

Kent  ( K.  ( '». )  The  city  gates  of  Deme- 
Irias.  (Amer.  J.  Arch;\.*ol.,  Norwood, 
Mass.,  1905,  IX,  166-169,  3  fgs.) 
Notes  on  Thessalian  and  Magnesian 
gates  of  Deinetrias  (founded  ca.  2(jo 
B.  C. ),  near  the  nicKlern  Thessalian  city 
of  Voh).  K.  concludes  that  the  main 
gate  of  Demelrias  was  where  the  city 
walls  once  stcnxl  ;  these  have  now  en- 
tirely disappeared. 

KjcUmark  (K.)  Ktt  graflRllt  fr;\n  den 
yngre  jarn.lldern  i  As  i  jSmtland. 
(Ymer,  Stockholm,  1905,  XXV,  35i-37i» 
32  fgs. )  Describes  excavations  (4  men's 
2  women's,  ami  one  child's  grave)  at  a 
cemetery  of  the  younger  iron  age  near 
As  in  f.lmtland,  the  objects  discovered 
(iron  axes  and  knives,  bells,  bit,  rings, 
sword,  etc.  ;  bronze  buckles,  sword-hilt, 
etc.  ;  bead  necklaces ;  bits  of  silver, 
and     silver     coins  —  Swedish,     Anglo- 


Saxon,  etc.,  994-1035),     also  hnman 
remains.     See  /^Ury/  (C  Af,^. 

L«wis  (A.  L.)  Prehistoric  remains  in 
Cornwall.  Pbrt  2,  West  ComwalL  (J. 
Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  1905,  xxxv,  427- 
434,  2  fgs.)  Treats  of  the  "Dance 
Maen'*  or  "Dawns  Maen,"  a  stone 
circle  near  Penzance  ;  the  "  Nine  Blaid- 
ens  *'  at  Boscawen-an,  three  miles  from 
the  first ;  "  Lanjron  Quoit  "  and  "  Chan 
Quoit*';  the  "Tregaseal  Dancing 
Stones";  the  "  Men-an-Tol,"  on  the 
moors  north  of  Lanyon  Qaoit,  and  near 
it  the  "  Men  Scryffys*'  ;  the  Boskednan 
circle,  the  ZennorQuoit,"  and  the  "  Mnl- 
fra  Quoit*';  the  beehive  chambers  at 
Chrysoister,  Gulval  ;  the  Trencrom  hill- 
fort  ;  the  subterranean  passages  and 
chambers  at  Cambrae,  and  the  "  Fog- 
ou"  near  the  "Dance  Maen." 

M ehlis  (C. )  Die  neolithische  Ansiedelang 
an  der  Eyersheimer  Milhle  in  der  P&lz. 
(Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  57- 
59,  II  fgs.)  Describes  briefly  objects 
found  at  the  Eyersheim  neolithic  "sta- 
tion "  — stone  axes  (jadeite  and  sjrenite), 
"  amulets,"  pottery  fragments  (some  70 
were  found)  with  little  ornamentation. 
The  culture-data  here  indicate  the  end  of 
the  neolithic  period  in  the  region  of  the 
middle  Rhine  (left)  and  transition  to  the 
metal  period. 

Nehring  ( W. )  Die  slovenische  Volkslie- 
der.  (Mitt.  d.  Schles.  Ges.  f.  Volksk., 
Breslau,  1904,  ii.  xii,  44-^1.)  R6- 
sum^  and  critique  of  Dr  K.  Strekelj's 
monumental  S/i^rns^f  ntiro,/pt^  pesmi  ( 2 
vols.,  Larbach,  1895-1903),  with  notices 
of  previous  literature  of  the  subject. 
Professor  vS's  work  contains  1006  narra- 
tive (epic)  and  3722  lyric  songs.  The 
epic  songs  are  richer  in  content  and  per- 
haps more  varied  as  to  motive. 

Nichols  ( M.  L. )  Geometric  vases  from 
Corinth.  (Amer.  J.  Archseol.,  Nor- 
wood, Mass.,  1905,  IX,  411-421,  6  pi., 
4  fgs.).  Treats  of  16  geometric  vases 
discovered  in  1S98-1899  near  the  center 
of  Peirene,  "resembling  most  closely 
those  found  in  the  lowest  geometric  layer 
at  Eleusis,"  and  belonging  probably  to 
the  tenth  century  B.  c,  immediately 
post-Mycens?an.  This  find,  according  to 
Miss  N.,  is  "one  more  link  in  the  chain 
of  evidence  in  favor  of  the  spread  of  the 
Dorian  influence  along  the  Isthmus  into 
Attica."  Nothing  Mycen;van  has  yet 
been  found  at  Corinth.  The  style  of 
decoration  is  very  simple. 

Nilsson  ( A. )    Aril,  spis  och  ugn.     ( Ymer, 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


593 


Stockholm,  1905,  xxv,  193-214,  30 
fgs. )  Treats  of  hearth,  fire-place,  and 
oven,  old  and  new  in  various  parts  of 
Sweden. 
Olbrich  ( C. )  Die  Freimaurer  im  deutschen 
Volksglauben.  (Mitt.  d.  Schles.  Ges.  f. 
Volksk.,  Breslau,  1904,  H.  XII,  61-78.) 
R^sum^s  German  folk -beliefs  concern- 
ing freemasons.  Their  **  never-ending 
work  to  escape  death,"  "magic"  attri- 
butes, lore  relating  to  symbols  of  the 
craft,  connection  with  spirits  and  with 
the  devil,  etc.  Old  heathen  lore  has 
caused  much  to  pass  over  to  the  folk- 
ideas  about  freemasons,  aided  by  their 
secret  doings  and  the  fact  that  their  great 
festival  day  is  June  24,  St  John's  day, 
near  the  summer  solstice  and  rich  in 
folk-lore  and  mystic  beliefs. 

V  V 

Pacala  ( V. )  A  Nagyszeben  vid^ki  resin- 
arok  lakdhelye  6s  ^letviszonyai.  ( F6ldr. 
KSzlem.,  Budapest,  1905,  xxxiii,  307- 
325.  350-367.  13  %s. ).  Treats  of  the 
life  and  activities  of  the  people  of  Resinar 
near  Nagyszeben — dwellings,  dress  and 
ornament,  weddings,  disease  and  death, 
funerals,  feasts  and  festivals,  agriculture 
and  related  pursuits,  trade,  etc.  Old 
customs  and  rites  are  dying  out.  The 
"Bethlehem  singers**  at  Christmas  and 
other  similar  practices  at  Easter  still  sur- 
vive. The  wedding  ceremonies  also  are 
interesting. 

Pugh  (W.)  Cockney  children's  games 
and  chanties.  (Grand  Mag. ,  Lond. ,  1906, 
*^'»  595"599' )  Gives  **  reminiscences  of 
a  writer  who  was  once  himself  a  London 
Arab,  and  speaks  out  of  the  fulness  of 
knowledge."  Most  of  the  chanties  are 
used  "as  accompaniments  to  the  innu- 
merable variants  of  *  Kiss-in-the-Ring.*  " 

R.  (C.)  Pr&historischer  Bergbau  auf  dem 
Mitterberge  bei  Bischofshaven.  (Globus, 
Brnschwg.,  1906,  IJCXXIX,  90-92.)  Brief 
account  of  the  numerous  remains  of  pre- 
historic (bronze  and  iron  age)  copper- 
mining  on  the  Mitterberg  near  MUhlbach 
in  the  Salzburg  Alps. 

Renard  (L.)  Exploration  d*un  cimeti^re 
franc  h.  Latinne.  (Bull.  Inst.  Arch6ol. 
Li^geois,  Li^ge,  1905,  xxxv,  155-162, 
I  pi.,  I  fg.)  Brief  description  of  9  tombs 
and  contents  explored  by  the  author  and 
M.  E.  Daim  Rigot  in  1901-1903  at 
Chapelle  St  Maur,  Latinne.  The  ceme- 
tery dates  from  the  Frankish  period  ( V-VI 
century  A.  D.)  and  no  Christian  orna- 
ments or  symbols  were  discovered ;  the 
funerary  objects  were  poor  and  the  pot- 
tery crude. 


Rapport  sur  les  recherches  et  les 

fouilles  ezicut^es  en  1905  par  I'lnstitut 
Arch^ologique  Li^geois.  (Ibid.,  347- 
360,  I  pi.,  3  fgs.)  Brief  account  of  ex- 
cavations at  Fonthoz  (Frankish  ceme- 
tery), Waterschejd  (Hallstatt  incinera- 
tion), Fraiture  (Belgo- Roman  tumulus), 
Grivegn^e  (IV-V  century  A.  D.),  Vervoz 
(Belgo- Roman),  Java  (Frankish  ceme- 
tery), Herstal  (Roman  coins),  etc. 

ReTentlow  (C.  D.)  Ringsjdfynden. 
(Ymer,  Stockholm,  1905,  xxv,  156- 
172,  13  fgs. )  Treats  of  the  finds  (flints, 
axes  of  stone,  implements  of  horn,  pot> 
tery,  fragments,  etc.)  at  the  "stations" 
on  Lake  Ring,  the  inhabitants  of  which 
were  probably  "  lake-dwellers,"  or  lived 
on  rafts  (a  folk  of  hunters  and  fishers). 
No  remains  of  cereals  were  found,  but 
hazel-nut  shells,  raspberry-seeds,  fruit- 
stones,  etc.  They  seem  to  have  been 
"  half- nomadic  lake-dwellers."  Some 
of  the  axes  are  of  the  type  belonging  to 
the  older  kitchen  middens  of  Denmark. 

Robarts  ( N.  F. )  Notes  on  a  recently 
discovered  British  camp  near  Walling- 
ton.  (J.  Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  I905, 
xxxv  ;  387-397,  8  fgs. )  Describes  ex- 
cavations and  lists  objects  found  (cake 
of  copper,  earthenware  loom-weights 
and  perforated  tiles,  animal  bones,  pot- 
tery, meal ing-st ones,  flints,  partly  cal- 
cined skeleton  of  child,  remains  of  cre- 
mations, etc.).  The  fragpments  of  red 
Samian  ware  (ra.  100  A.  D. )  found 
near  by,  as  well  as  those  of  a  "late 
Celtic"  {ca.  50  B.  c. )  pedestal  urn, 
may  be  much  later  than  the  camp  itself. 
The  remains  are  those  of  "a  British 
camp,  probably  the  headquarters  of  the 
Bibroci." 

Rogers  (J.  D. )  The  meaning  of  nTPrOS 
in  two  Teian  inscriptions.  (Amer.  J. 
Archaeol.,  Norwood,  Mass.,  1905,  IX, 
422-426. )  Argues  for  some  connection 
between  the  Teian  blocks  and  the  Tripyor 
of  the  Teian  inscriptions.  Perhaps  these 
blocks  were  used  for  deme  lists,  arid 
"citizens  of  a  certain  tower  are  not 
those  resident  in  or  near  a  tower,  of  the 
city  walls,  but  those  enrolled  in  the 
deme  register,  called  Tzvpyo^  because  of 
its  fantastic  shape  which  attracted  atten- 
tion and  determined  ultimately  the  popu- 
lar designation." 

Scholz  (O. )  Schlesische  Tinze.  ( Mitt, 
d.  Schles.  Ges.  f.  Volksk.,  Breslau, 
1904,  H.  XII,  88-91).  Describes  peas- 
ant dance  (minuet),  p>easant  minuet  (by 
four    couples),    "Tanzt    och    mit    der 


594 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


Muhme,'*  **  O  du  lieber  Augustin,'* 
Maidens'  dance,  from  the  Jauer  district 
in  Silesia. 

Schulte  ( O. )  Spottnamen  und  -Verse  auf 
Ortschaften  im  ndrdlichen  Oberhessen. 
(Hess.  Bl.  f.  Voldsk.,  Lpzg.,  1905,  iv, 
142-167.)  Cites  the  blason  populaire 
relating  to  more  than  100  places  in 
northern  upper  Hesse.  Among  the 
types  or  groups  of  these  names  and 
verses  are  those  attributing  droll  or  fool- 
ish things  to  the  inhabitants,  those  refer- 
ring to  the  economic  situation  of  the 
place,  those  dealing  with  the  moral  qual- 
ities of  the  people,  those  based  on  pecu- 
liar pronunciations,  etc. ,  thos^  nicknames 
for  which  no  explanation  is  apparent,  those 
**  wandering  verses '  *  applied  again  and 
again  with  mere  change  of  name  of  place, 
the  blason  populaire  of  towns  and  cities, 
those  verses,  etc.,  referring  to  the  various 
places  in  a  parish,  etc.  On  pages  165- 
166  examples  of  incorrect  and  correct 
interpretations  are  given. 

Siebourg  (M. )  Zwei  griechische  Gold- 
tSnien  aus  der  Sammlung  C.  A.  Niessen 
in  Koln.  (Arch.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg., 
1906,  VIII,  390-410,  2  fgs. )  Describes 
and  discusses  two  gold  head-bands  with 
Greek  inscriptions  from  Bfit  Djibrfn  (the 
ancient  Baitogabra)  between  Jerusalem 
and  Ascalon  in  Judea.  The  significance 
of  death-wreaths  and  the  accompanying 
inscriptions  is  considered  at  some  length 
—  the  inscriptions  indicate  folk-belief  in 
communication  with  the  dead.  Some 
heathen  formulce  have  been  taken  over 
by  Jews  and  Christians. 

Siebs  (T. )  Ruf,  Sang  und  Spruch  beim 
Aus-  und  Eintrieh  des  Viehs.  (Milt.  d. 
Schles.  Cies.  f.  Volksk.,  Hreslau,  1904, 
H.  XII,  97-102.)  Treats  of  the  lan- 
guage used  to  call  and  drive  away  cattle, 
etc.,  in  Seidort"  in  the  Hirschberg  dis- 
trict. Specimens  of  the  narrative  songs 
used  with  the  call  are  also  cited. 

Stuart  f  D.  R.  )  Imperial  method  of  in- 
scription on  restored  buildings  :  Augus- 
tus and  Hadrian.  (Anier.  J.  Archaol., 
Norwood,  Mass,.  1905,  ix,  427-449.) 
Hadrian  "acted  with  a  chivalrous  regard 
for  the  memory  of  the  founder  that 
matched  or  even  surpassed  the  respectful 
attitude  of  Augustus."  S.  hnds  evidence 
that  C.  I.  L.  VI,  31060  cannot  be  con- 
nected with  the  Palatine  Temple  of  Vic- 
tory and  used  as  a  proof  of  restoration  by 
Augustus,  and  that  the  letters  of  the  in- 
scription  of  Agrippa   on    the   Pantheon 


date  back  to  Hadrian's  restoration  and 

no  farther. 

STensto  (£. )  Ordspr&k,  ordstflv  ock 
tales&tt  fr&n  nord6stra  Sm&land.  (Sven- 
ska  LandsroAl,  Stockholm,  1904,  42- 
65.)  Gives  list  in  dialect  (alphabetic 
according  to  chief  word )  of  500  proverbs, 
sayings,  refrains,  figures  of  speech,  rid- 
dles, prayers,  formulae,  etc.,  imai  the 
northwestern  part  of  the  province  of 
Sm&land  in  Sweden. 

Tonka  ( O.  S. )  A  new  kalos-artist : 
Phrynos.  ( Amer.  J.  Archaeol.,  Norwood, 
Mass.,  1905,  IX,  288-293,  5  fgs. )  Dis- 
cusses two  fragments  of  a  Greek  kylix 
(belonging  to  the  cycle  of  the  L^ser 
Masters),  with  bust  of  woman,  profile 
to  left.  These  with  a  British  Museum 
kylix  (Stroibos  vase)  the  author  con- 
siders to  be  the  work  of  a  new  kalos- 
artist  Phrynos,  whose  "  love  name  *'  was 
Stroibos. 

Usener  ( H. )  Quellenverehrung.  ( Arch, 
f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  viii,  559-560.) 
Cites  evidence  for  Low  Saxon  spring 
and  fountain  cult  as  late  as  the  second 
half  of  the  i6th  century. 

Vasic  (M. )     Bronsani  sud  iz  Viminadja. 

(Vjesn.  hrvats.  Archeol.  Dnistva,  Zagh- 
reb,  1905,  N.  s.,  VIII,  148-158,  4  figs.) 
Describes  a  bronze  vessel  ( bust  of  young 
satyr)  from  a  grave  at  Kostolca,  the  old 
Roman  colony  of  Viminacium. 
Visor.     (Svenska   Landsm&I,    Stockholm, 
1904,  66-72,  121-133.)     Gives  texts  of 
20    l)allads,    love-songs,    etc.,    collected 
chiefly  by  L.  F.  Raaf  in  the  district  of 
Vdre,  Ostergothland. 

Vram  ( U.  G. )  Frammenti  scheletrici  in 
tombe  cristiane  presso  Niksii,  Monte- 
negro. (A.  d.  S(:)c.  Rom.  di  Antrop., 
1906,  XII,  191-194. )  Describes  briefly 
with  measurements  fragments  of  3  skele- 
tons from  a  Christian  cemetery  at  Kocani 
near  Niksii  in  Montenegro. 

Weissenberg  (S. )  Speise  und  GebSck 
bei  den  siidrussischen  Juden  in  ethnolo- 
gischen  Heziehung.  (Globus,  Bruschwg., 
1906,  Lxxxix,  25-30,  5  fgs. )  Treats  of 
implements  for  salting  meat  and  methods 
of  preparing  it,  use  of  cooking  vessels, 
hand-washing,  meals  and  meal-times 
holiday  fare,  favorite  foods,  fasts,  baking 
bread,  its  forms,  etc.  (the  bird  is  a  favor- 
ite motive  in  Jewish  cult  and  domestic 
furniture),  among  the  South  Russian 
Tews. 

Wigstrom  (E.),  Nyblin  (A.  G.),  ock 
Lampa  (S. )     Seder  ock  bruk  friLn  olika 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


595 


landskap.  (Svenska  Landsm&l,  Stock- 
holm, 1904,  116-120.)  Notes  on 
Christmas  and  Easter  customs  in  Scania, 
Bleking,  N&rke,  and  Gottland,  peasant 
wedding  and  dance  in  N&rke,  etc. 

Wigstrdm  (Eva^.  Folktro  ock  s&gner. 
(Ibid.,  309-404.)  Nos.  906-1313  of 
brief  legends  and  folk-beliefs  from  vari- 
ous parts  of  Sweden. 

Wiklund  (K.  B.)  Ortnamnen  p&  1904 
irs  Norrbottenskarta.  (Ymer,  Stock- 
holm, 1905,  XXV,  90-103.)  Discusses 
the  orthography  of  place-names  on  the 
1904  map  of  Norrbothnia.  Place-names 
should  be  written  according  to  the  laws 
of  the  language  spoken  by  the  people 
proper  to  the  region  —  Swedish,  Finn- 
ish, Lapp,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Spriken   i    Finland,    1880-1900. 

(Ibid.,  132-149,  3  maps).  Discusses, 
with  detailed  statistics,  the  distribution 
of  languages  in  Finland  from  1886  to 
1900.  During  this  period  the  percent- 
age of  Finnish-speaking  people  increased 
from  85.29  percent  to  86.75  I>^rcent, 
the  percentage  of  Swedish-speaking  de- 
creasing from  14.32  percent  to  12.89 
percent,  although  an  actual  increase  in 
numbers  occurred.  The  numbers  of 
Lapps  rose  from  961  to  1,336  ;  Russians 
from  4,195  to  5,939;  Germans  from 
1,720  to  1,925.  There  were  in  1900  ca. 
2,000  Gypsies,  at  least  1, 100  Jews,  102 
Tatars,  some  Esths,  Polacks,  Letts,  etc., 
besides  scatterings  of  various  other  Euro- 
pean nationalities. 

Wilke  (A.  G.)  Zur  Entstehung  der 
Spiral-Dekoration.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin, 
1906,  xxxviii,  1-33,  76  fgs.)  Discusses 
the  origin  of  the  spiral  decoration  on 
ceramic  objects,  etc.,  from  prehistoric 
central  Europe,  particularly  Butmir. 
The  place  of  origin  of  this  motif  was 
southern  Hungary  (Transylvania  and 
Butmir  in  particular)  ;  the  motif  arose 
through  the  shifting  against  one  another 
of  concentric  semi-circles  (the  art  of  cen- 
tral Europe  ca.  2500  B.  c);  this  accounts 
for  the  appearance  of  the  meander  and 
spiral  ornaments  in  widely  separated 
places  having  no  intercourse  with  one 
another. 

Zielinski  ( T. )  Hermes  und  die  Hermetik . 
(Arch.  f.  Religsw.,  Leipzig,  1905,  viii, 
321-372;  1906,  IX,  25-60.)  In  this 
detailed  discussion  of  Hermes  and  the 
origin  of  Hermetic  doctrine,  philosophy, 
cosmogony,  etc.  (there  are  three  dog- 
matic layers  of  Hermetic,  literature  ;  a 
higher  and  a  lower  Hermetics),  the  author 


comes  to  the  conclusion  that  *' Hermet- 
ics spread  from  Arcadia  over  Cyrene  to 
Egypt." 

AFRICA 

Biasutti  (R.)  "Crania  y^gyptiaca." 
Esame  di  42  crani  di  Egiziani  antichi 
conservati  nella  collezione  del  Museo 
Naxionale  d'  Antropologia,  Firenze. 
(A.  p.  I'Antrop.,  Firenze,  1905,  xxxv, 
323-362).  Describes,  with  details  of 
measurements,  42  ancient  Egyptian 
skulls  of  diverse  provenience  (Cro-Mag- 
non type  I,  Mediterranean  31,  Austro- 
African  7,  nannocephalic  2,  brachy- 
cephalic  i).  The  alleged  negroid  ele- 
ment is  discussed.  B.  concludes  that 
the  population  of  ancient  Egypt  was  very 
heterogeneous,  having  in  the  lowest 
stratum  a  notable  proportion  of  **  Austro- 
African"  (Bushmanoid)  with  some 
traces  of  nannocephalic,  pigmy  tjrpes. 
The  brachycephalic  element,  unlike  the 
Cro-Magnon  (very  old)  and  the  prevail- 
ing Mediterranean  type,  entered  Egypt 
only  in  the  historic  period.  Other  negroid 
traces  are  very  rare  and  sporadic.  The 
indigenousness  and  development  in  situ 
of  the  ancient  Egyptians  are  justified  by 
the  African  origin  of  the  primitive  fond. 

Binetsch  ( G. )  Beantwortung  mehrerer 
Fragen  liber  unser  Ewe-Volk  und  seine 
Anschauungen.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin, 
1906,  xxxviii,34-40. )  Answers  to  ques- 
tions concerning  :  Name,  word  for  God 
{Afa7i'u)j  creation-legend  (first  human 
beings  came  from  sky  in  basket),  soul 
(heaven  not  so  good  a  place  as  earth  for 
man),  spirit,  love  and  worship  (sacrifices, 
etc.),  idols  (provincial,  town,  house; 
good  and  bad  spirits),  sorcery,  rain- 
making,  sacred  animals  ( leopard,  hyena, 
crocodile,  dog,  cat ;  with  some  tribes 
sheep,  goat,  and  white-tailed  black 
monkey),  mystic  ceremonies,  witchcraft. 

Dennett  ( R.  E. )  Notes  on  the  philosophy 
of  the  Bavili.  (J.  Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond., 
1905,  xxxv,  48-55.)  Treats  of  cosmo- 
logical  ideas  (everything  is  a  manifesta- 
tion oi  A'zambi)y  temporal  ideas  (months, 
seasons),  the  categories  (6  —  water, 
earth,  fire,  motion,  fruitfulness,  life), 
the  sacred  groves  (6  groups  of  4  each, 
corresponding  to  the  categories).  The 
author  believes  that  **  beyond  fetishism 
.  .  .  there  is  a  higher  form  of  religion 
among  the  Bairli  (of  Luango),  which  is 
connected  with  certain  symbols  in  the 
form  of:  (i)  sacred  groves,  (2)  sacred 
lands  and  rivers,  (3)   sacred  trees,  (4) 


596 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


sacred  animals,  (5)  omens,  and  (6)  the 
seasons."  There  are  six  sets  of  24  sym- 
bols each. 

Fritsch  ( G ) .  Die  Buschm&nner  der  Kala- 
hari von  S.  Passarge.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Ber- 
lin, 1906,  XXXVIII,  71-79.)  Critique 
(severe  in  places)  of  Passarge' s  article 
on  the  Kalahari  Bushmen  in  Mitt.  a.  d. 
deutschgn  Schutzgebuten  for  1905.  Dr 
F.  believes  that  the  so-called  ancient  and 
mighty  Bushman  kingdom  of  Chief 
**Dukiiri"  belongs  to  the  realm  of 
fable.  The  hair  system  of  the  short 
primitive  peoples  of  central  and  south- 
ern Africa  is  considered  ( embryonal  ves- 
tiges, etc.). 

Gcntz  (It.)  Die  Bureneinwanderung 
nach  unseren  deutschen  Kolonien.  ( Glo- 
bus, Bmschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  53-55.) 
Discusses  recent  Boer  immigration  into 
German  South  Africa.  A  great  Boer 
settlement  in  Madagascar  was  planned, 
but  not  favored  by  the  French  govern- 
ment. 

Gottschling  (£. )  The  Bawenda :  a 
sketch  of  their  history  and  customs.  (J. 
Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  1905,  xxxv,  365- 
386,  I  pi.  I  fg. )  Treats  of  name  (people 
of  Wenda,  their  former  home)  ;  history 
(European  settlers  not  allowed  previous 
to  1872;  kingdoms,  chiefs)  ;  nationality 
(author  speaks  of  mixture  of  Asiatic 
blood),  appearance  and  character,  hab- 
its of  life  (dwellings,  food,  drink,  etc., 
sleeping,  agriculture,  pastimes,  trades, 
warj;  curriculum,  vitce  (birth,  education, 
declaration  of  manhood  and  puberty,  en- 
gagement and  marriage,  family  life, 
daily  routine  of  work,  meals,  pleasures, 
illness,  death  and  burial);  tribal  consti- 
tution (royalty,  f>ower  of  chief,  taxation, 
division  of  country);  administration  of 
justice  (courts,  punishment,  peculiar 
laws);  religious  customs  (gods,  priests 
and  witch  doctors,  places  of  worship,  sac- 
rifices and  prayers,  superstitious  cus- 
toms); knowledge  of  nature  and  natural 
phenomena  (astronomy,  time-reckoning, 
meteorology,  geology,  botany,  zoology, 
etc.);  proverbs  and  adages  (author  pos- 
sesses ca.  600);  language  (clearly  Bantu, 
but  a  distinct  dialect  of  the  stock). 

Grant  ( W. )  Magato  and  his  tribe.  ( Ibid., 
266-270. )  Brief  sketch  of  Magato, 
called  by  Europeans  the  "  Lion  of  the 
North,"  paramount  chief  of  the  Mavenda 
in  1894,  and  his  people  (circumcision- 
rites,  houses,  animal-killing,  social  code, 
counting,  religion — no  superstitious 


ideas  concerning   snakes — ''bride   pur- 
chase  *  * ) . 

Hall  ( R.  N. )     Stone  fort  and  pits  on  the 
Inyanya  estate,  Rhodesia.     (Ibid.,  92- 
102,  2  pi.,  4  fgs. )     Gives  descriptions, 
plans,  and   measurements.      Remains  of 
old  aqueducts  and  hill  terraces  occur  in 
large  numbers  throughout  Inyanya  —  the 
former  are  said  to  be  <*a  marvel  to  all 
modem   engineers  who   insj>cct  them." 
These  remains  *'  have  no  similitude  what- 
ever to  the  remains  of  ancient  buildings 
found  in  any  other  part  of  Rhodesia." 
Many  of  the   trees   found   in  this   area 
**are  not  indigenous  to  S.   E.  Africa," 

HArtter  (G.)  Sitten  und  Gebr&uche  der 
Angloer,  Ober-Guinea.  (Z.  f.  Ethn., 
Berlin,  1906,  xxxviii,  40-51.)  Treats 
of  protective  ceremonies  for  infants, 
naming,  visit  of  mother  to  fetish-pnest, 
determination  of  what  ancestor  is  rein- 
carnated in  child,  education,  marriage 
( seclusion  of  bride,  concubinage,  wedded 
life  and  widowhood),  sickness  and  dis- 
ese  (caused  by  spirits),  and  their  cure- 
bay  sorcery,  death  and  burial,  punish 
ment  of  spendthrift  heirs  and  debtors 
(nephew  inheritance  obtains),  etc. 

Der  Fischfang  im  Evheland.    (Ibid., 

51-63.)  Describes  fishing  in  sea,  la- 
goons, rivers  —  much  of  their  knowledge 
of  the  art  has  been  derived  from  the 
natives  of  Accra  and  the  Fantis  (also 
from  the  Europeans).  Implements  used 
are  hooks  (introduced  by  Europeans), 
spears,  several  varieties  of  nets,  basket- 
trap,  etc.  Water-poisoning  is  also  in 
use.  At  pages  62-63  ^-'>  ^  ^'st  of  the 
Ehve  names  of  edible  and  inedible  tishes. 
Spielc  der  Evheer.    (Ibid.,  64-70.) 


Describes  kpcfudeshia  (a  stone-passing 
and  guessing  game  for  children  ;  pataprg 
(a  word-game),  afutiti  (a  leaping  over 
obstacles),  miaivo  ^vr^e  mleU  (a  break- 
ing into  a  circle  game),  ve  or  didada 
(gambling  game  with  fruit  thrown  on 
mat),  hodada  (played  with  4  cowrie- 
shells),  atidada  (something  like  Ger- 
man *♦  Miihlezieben  "  ),  etc.  Of  games 
of  foreign  origin  are  noted  cards  and  a 
ball-game. 
Klose  (H.)  Musik,  Tanz  und  Spiel  in 
Togo.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906, 
LXXXIX,  9-13,  7i-75»  13  fgs.)  Treats 
of  the  war-drums  of  the  Ewe,  the  fetish- 
drums  of  the  great  idol  Wurup)ong  in 
Kunya,  their  uses  and  the  dances  con- 
nected therewith,  the  signal  drums  and 
their  "language";  the  drums  of  Ho 
adorned  with  trophies  of  human  skulls. 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


597 


traveling  Haussa  dance  girls  and  singers, 
etc.  ;  the  war-drums  of  the  Haussa ;  the 
drums  and  other  musical  instrimients, 
**  bands,"  etc.,  of  the  people  of  Bassari ; 
the  mask-dance  of  the  Anago,  gambling 
games  and  songs  of  various  sorts  (par- 
ticularly the  adi)y  children* s  games,  etc. 

Loir  (A.)  L' alimentation  des  indigenes. 
(Rev.  Scient.,  Paris,  1906,  v«  s.,  v, 
590-592.)  Dr  L.  thinks  (he  saw  the 
Kaffirs  of  S.  Africa  in  1902)  that  "the 
deplorable  condition  of  these  natives  is 
due  to  defect  of  alimentation  '*  —  some- 
thing like  beri-beri  or  scurvy  is  epidemic 
among  the  coolies.  Sudden  changes  in 
food  and  modes  of  nourishment  are 
dangerous  for  these  people.  Mine  and 
prison  fare  soon  kill  them,  or  nearly  so. 
The  native  menu  is  always  best. 

Myers  ( C.  S. )  Contributions  to  Egyptian 
anthropometry.  II.  The  comparative 
anthropometry  of  the  most  ancient  and 
modem  inhabitants.  (J.  Anthr.  Inst., 
Lond.,  1905,  XXXV,  8<>-^i,  6  curves.) 
Discusses  measurements  and  indices,  vari- 
ability, frequency-distributions,  correla- 
tion, of  prehistoric  skulls  from  Nakada 
and  the  heads  of  fellahin  conscripts  from 
Kena  and  Girga,  * 'living  under  similar 
conditions  and  in  the  same  region  of  the 
valley  of  the  Nile  as  did  their  Nakada 
ancestors  about  5000  B.  c.  M.  con- 
cludes that  "there  is  no  evidence  that 
the  *  prehistoric '  and  the  modem  popu- 
lation of  southem  "Upper  Egypt  differ 
in  physical  measurements. '  *  The  homo- 
geneity of  the  Egyptians  there  is  the 
same  as  it  was  7000  years  ago. 

Randall-Maclver  ( D. )  The  manufacture 
of  pottery  in  Upper  Egypt.  (Ibid., 
20-29,  6  pi. )  Describes  the  three  kinds 
of  pottery  (hajmatilic,  painted,  house- 
hold —  the  first,  original  in  Nubia ;  the 
second,  confined  to  two  or  three  places 
between  AssuAn  and  Keneh  ;  the  third, 
manufactured  everywhere  north  of  As- 
suftn  but  foreign  to  Nubia)  chiefly  made 
in  Upper  Egypt  to-day.  Comparison 
with  ancient  Egyptian  pottery  is  reserved 
for  another  article.  The  processes  of 
making  are  noted  with  some  detail. 

Reinsch  ( P.  vS. )  The  negro  race  and 
European  civilization.  (Amer.  J.  So- 
ciol. ,  Chicago,  1905,  xi,  145-167.)  Dis- 
cusses race-mixture,  type  of  civilization, 
social  organization,  slavery,  lack  of  me- 
chanical arts  ("greatest  deficiency  of 
the  negro  race  " ),  rudimentary  art-sense, 
expertness  in  oratory  with  rich  folklore, 
fetishism  (intellectual  life  chiefly  taken 


up  with  this ) .  Low  stage  of  culture  among 
African  negroes  "due  rather  to  social, 
political  and  climate  conditions  than  to 
the  physiological,  p>ersonal  incapacity  of 
the  negro.'*  The  "missionary-made** 
man  is  not  the  ideal.  An  economic 
foundation  for  African  culture  is  neces- 
sary ;  in  creating  this  European  influence 
may  succeed,  but  permanent  bondage 
under  the  whites  is  the  wrong  way. 

Schenk  (A.)  Note  sur  dix  cr&nes  du 
Congo  Frangais.  Tribu  des  Yeveng ; 
race  des  Fang.  ( Bull.  Soc.  NeuchAt.  de 
G^ogr.,  Neuchatel,  1905,  xvi,  296-303.) 
Brief  description,  with  measurements,  of 
10  Fang  skulls  (6  male)  from  the 
Yeveng  tribe  in  French  Congo,  collected 
by  Father  Trilles.  All  are  dolichoceph- 
alic. 

Torday  ( E. )  and  Joyce  ( T.  A. )  Notes  on 
the  ethnography  of  the  Ba-mbala.  (J. 
Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  1905,  xxxv,  398- 
426,  3  pi. )  Treats  of  migrations,  re- 
.  semblances  between  the  Ba-Mbala  (a 
Bantu  people  of  the  Inzia-Kwilu  region) 
and  the  tribes  of  Portuguese  West  Africa, 
clothing  and  ornament  (red  body-paint- 
ing, scarification  at  puberty,  tattooing 
simple  and  rare),  food  (salt  used  as 
money  ;  geophagy  and  cannibalism  com- 
mon ;  drunkenness  a  sign  of  wealth), 
fishing  and  hunting  (rather  poor  shots), 
crafts  (basketry  learned  from  the  Ba- 
Yanzi,  pottery  made  by  women,  metal- 
lurgy, house-building,  etc.),  trade  (shell- 
money,  markets,  credit-system),  social 
organization  ("  communism  with  a  strong 
flavoring  of  anarchy"  ;  unit  is  village 
community,  with  chief  holding  position 
by  wealth  ;  muriy  a  special  class ;  mar- 
riage, child  and  adult),  slavery  (three- 
fourths  slaves),  property  ( renting  of  land 
unknown),  education  and  psychology 
(children  precocious,  geographical 
knowledge  and  memories  good,  arith- 
metic poor),  message- arrows,  music  (no 
foreign  songs  sung),  justice  (=  "pala- 
ver"—  round  this  their  whole  life 
centers),  war,  poison  ordeal,  death  and 
burial  (children  before  puberty,  plants, 
food,  and  weapons  have  no  soul),  re- 
ligion ( moloki  a  malevolent  being ; 
mapuans,  fetishes),  reproduction,  ab- 
normalities, language  (vocabulary,  pages 
421-426). 

Traeger  (P.)  Die  Troglodyten  des  Mat- 
mata.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin,  1906, 
XXXVIII,  100-114,  17  fgs. )  Account 
of  visit  in  1903  to  the  troglodytes  of  the 
Matmata    mountains    in    south    Tunis, 


598 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


their  houses,  dress,  physical  characters 
( projecting  ears  are  possibly  due  to  head 
covering),  customs,  etc.  The  inhabit- 
ants represent  Arabized  (clothing,  cus- 
toms, speech)  Berbers.  The  houses 
number  200  with  a  population  of  some 
1200.  Hamy  seeks  to  identify  the 
houses  of  M^dinine  with  Sallust's  mapa- 
iia.  In  any  case  these  cave-dwellings 
are  very  old. 

Trilles  (  H. )  Proverbes,  l^gendes  et  con- 
tes  Fang.  (Bull.  Soc.  Neuchat.  de 
Geogr.,  Neuchatel,  1905,  xvi,  49-294 
pp.,  5  pi. )  In  this  interesting  and  rather 
comprehensive  monograph  Father  Tril- 
les, after  an  ethnographic  introduction, 
treats  of  proverbs  and  sayings  (67-1 1 1 ), 
religious  legends  and  origin-myths  (128- 
170),  nature-myths  (170-180),  wonder- 
tales  ( 180-205  —  giant  and  dwarf  stories 
abound),  animal-stories  (205-246  —  the 
tortoise  and  elephant  cycles),  moral 
tales  (247-284).  In  all,  the  French 
texts  of  34  legends  and  tales  are  given, 
and  at  pages  287-294  native  texts  with 
interlinear  translations  of  four.  The 
proverb  is  Fang  philosophy,  history, 
morals,  religion  ( e.  g.,  **to  live  with 
one's  wife's  relatives  is  to  become  a 
child  again").  Meal-time  (6  p.  m. )  is 
the  story-hour.  The  tale-tellers  are 
wandering  bands  and  old  men.  The 
animal-tales  have  two  cycles,  that  of 
the  tortoise,  typifying  the  wisdom  of 
the  little,  and  that  of  the  elephant,  typi- 
fying the  wisdom  of  the  big.  The  Fang 
are  a  tine  African  people  of  Bantu  stock, 
cannibals,  but  eating  only  prisoners. 

Villattes  Forschungen  in  der  Sahara. 
(Globus,  Brn.schwg.,  1906.  LXXXIX, 
55-57,  I  fg.  )  Resumes  hrictly  the  ex- 
plorations of  N.  Villatte,  t)ie  scientific 
member  of  the  Sahara  expedition  (1904) 
of  Captain  LajKTJnne  in  the  region 
toward  the  Niger.  At  the  wells  of 
Timissao  was  found  a  grotto  with  Tama- 
shek  inscriptions  and  drawings  of  ani- 
mals (cattle,  camels,  ostriches). 

Wheelwright  (C.  \.)  Native  circumci- 
sion lodges  in  the  Zoutpansberg  district. 
(J.  Anthr.  Inst.,  Ixnid.,  1905,  xxxv, 
251-255.)  Docrihes  the  "  lodges"  or 
"schools"  (  thrre  arc  three  grades  of 
teachers  with  diflVrent  functions)  as  ob- 
served among  the  Bavenda  in  1904,  and 
the  ceremonies  in  connection  therewith. 
They  were  originally  held  in  April  or 
Mav  at  intervals  of  five  vears.  Native 
public  o[)inion  drives  many  to  submit  to 
the    rites   (great   secrecy  is  maintained) 


and  many  Christian  natives  break  away 
from  the  mission  stations  to  join  the 
*' schools,'*  which  usually  last  three 
months. 

White  ( F. )  Notes  on  the  great  Zimbabwe 
elliptical  ruin.  (Ibid.,  39-47,  6  pi.) 
Author  gives  results  (descriptions,  meas- 
urements, etc.)  of  survey  made  by  him 
in  1903,  compared  with  the  data  of  Bent 
and  Swan,  etc.  W*s  observations  throw 
out  altogether  the  ••cubit  theory"  of 
Bent  and  Swan  and  show  how  little 
foundation  there  is  for  the  view  that  the 
builders  were  Semitic  (Arabs),  and  that 
sun-worship  had  here  reached  an  ad- 
vanced stage.  The  plans  of  the  build- 
ers, whoever  they  were,  •«  are  quite 
wanting  in  symmetry  or  in  evidence  of 
careful  design.'* 

Willoughby  (W.  C.)     Notes  on  the  to- 
temism  of  the  Becwana.      (Ibid.,   295- 
314.)     Treats  of  words  used  to  express 
the   totem   idea,    tribal    totems,    animal 
totems  (especially  crocodile  and  hare), 
cattle  in  Becwana  life  and  customs  (ox 
sacrifice,  etc.),  purification  of  warriors, 
marriage     ceremonies,    prerc^ratives     of 
chiefs,  children's  play,  oaths,  plant  and 
cereal  totems,  New  Year's  purification, 
etc.     W.  states  that  though  every  Bec- 
wana   tribe    has   its  present-day  totem 
(and    every  small  boy  knows  what    his 
tribal  totem  is),  yet  it  is  decadent,  and 
these  totems  have  practically  no  influence 
upon  their  great  rites  and  everyday  cus- 
toms.     The  central  place  in  all  the  ritual 
of   the    greater   ceremonies    is  taken   by 
cattle.      The  most  valuable  evidence  for 
plant -totems  (veneration  of  lerotse   and 
Kaftir-corn)  is  to  be  found  in  the  initia- 
tion ceremony  for  girls. 

ASIA 

Adachi  ( B.  unJ  V. )  Die  Handknochen 
der  japaner.  (Mitt.  d.  Med.  Fac.  d. 
K.-Jap.  Univ.  zu  Tokyo,  1905,  vi,  349— 
375,  6  pi.)  In  this  eighth  contribution 
to  the  anatomy  of  the  Japanese,  Dr  and 
Mrs  A.  give  the  results  of  their  examin- 
ation of  the  bones  of  the  hand  of  25  adult 
Japanese  (m.  15,  w.  10)  and  10  adult 
Europeans  (m.  4,  w.  2,  ?  4)  — the  vari- 
ous bones  are  studied  in  detail,  with 
measurements.  The  hand-bones  of  the 
Japanese  are  shorter  and  proportionally 
thicker  than  those  of  Eurof>eans  ;  the 
articular  surfaces  are  more  curved,  more 
extended,  more  rarely  split,  etc.  ( the 
articular  surface  is  more  curved  and  ex- 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


599 


tensive  in  women);  the  basal  and  ter- 
minal phalanges  are  relatively  long,  the 
metacarpal  and  the  middle  phalanx 
shorter  in  Japanese  hands  ;  the  terminal 
phalanx  is  slimmer  and  more  pointed. 
Slimness  or  thickness  of  hand  and  finger 
bones  cannot  be  explained  as  being  due 
to  work,  though  the  differences  in  artic- 
ular surfaces  doubtless  are.  The  fine 
work,  however,  of  the  Japanese  is  more 
a  product  of  experience  than  of  particular 
finger- forms.  So,  too,  perhaps  the  stiff 
European  hand.  Japanese  children  can 
often  press  their  fingers  back  to  touch  the 
fore- arm. 

Brockelmann  ( C. )  Ein  Tieropfer  in  der 
georgischen  Kirche.  (Arch.  f.  Religsw., 
Lpzg.,  1906,  VIII,  554-556.)  Calls  at- 
tention to  the  fact  that  (as  noted  by  the 
Patriarch  Macarius  of  Antioch  in  1671) 
the  sacrifice  of  animals  lasted  in  the 
Georgian  churches  till  far  on  in  the  sev- 
teenth  century. 

Butler  ( H.  C. )  Preliminary  report  of  the 
Princeton  University  expedition  to  Syria. 
(Amer.  J.  Archzeol.,  Norwood,  Mass., 
1905,  IX,  389-400. )  Brief  account  of  in- 
vestigations of  1904  at  Bosra,  Si',  Umm 
idj-Djimftl,  the  *Ala  country,  il-AndarIn 
(the  ancient  city  of  Androna),  Kerratin 
(almost  as  extensive  as  il-Andarin),  the 
group  of  towns  in  the  northern  end  of  the 
Djebel  Barlsha,  etc.  Hundreds  of  in- 
scriptions were  copied,  squeezes  of  archi- 
tectural details  made,  also  hundreds  of 
photographs. 

Dhonne  ( P. )  La  terre-mdre  chez  les  As- 
syriens.  ( Arch.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906, 
VIII,  550-552.)  Points  out  traces  in 
cuneiform  texts  of  the  tradition  of  the 
earth-mother  among  the  Babylonians  and 
Assyrians  (e.  g.,  in  part  of  the  myth  of 
Ea  and  Atarhasis). 

Falk  (A.)  Om  utvecklingen  af  kSnne- 
domen  om  Kaspiska  hafvet.  (Ymer, 
Stockholm,  1905,  xxv,  36-75. )  Sketches 
the  development  of  our  knowledge  of  the 
Caspian  sea,  from  the  time  of  the  geog- 
rapher, Hecatieus  of  Miletus,  down. 

Fraenkel  ( S. )  Ausorientalischen  Quellen. 
(Mitt.  d.  Schles.  Ges.  f.  Volksk.,  Bres- 
lau,  1904,  H.  XII,  42-44.)  Cites  from 
various  authorities  data  concerning  the 
"fire  ordeal"  and  "witchcraft"  in 
Arabia. 

Karutz  ( R. )  Von  Buddhas  heiliger  Fuss- 
spur.  (Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1906, 
Lxxxix,  21-25,  45-49»  '  %•)  R6sum6s 
data  concerning  the  sacred  footprints  of 
Buddha  in  various  parts  of  India  (some 


are  not  reputed  to  be  old ;  the  famous  one 
of  Ceylon  is  "father"  of  many).  Also 
detailed  description  of  an  ebony  plate 
copy  (now  in  the  Ltibeck  Ethnological 
Museum)  of  the  footprint  according  to 
Siamese  symbolic  lore  (108  figures  are 
on  it). 

Littmann  (E.)  Inscriptions.  (Amer.  J. 
Archaeol.,  Norwood,  Mass.,  1905,  ix, 
400-410.)  Treats  briefly  of  the  in- 
scriptions collected  by  the  Princeton  Uni- 
versity exp>edition  of  1904  in  Syria  — 
Latin  45,  Greek  776,  Nabatsean  105, 
SafaTtic  1,295,  Syriac  65,  Arabic  138, 
Hebrew  i.  Many  of  the  Latin,  Greek, 
and  Nabatsean  inscriptions  are  epitaphal 
and  funerary.  The  new  Safaitic  inscrip- 
tions add  much  to  our  knowledge  of  the 
life  and  language  of  the  ancient  northern 
Arabs  (new  names  of  deities  and  tribes 
occur). 

Peters  (J.  P.)  The  palace  at  Nippur 
Babylonian,  not  Parthian.  (Ibid.,  450- 
452. )  Criticizes  views  of  Hilprecht  and 
Marquand.  P.  considers  the  palace  Par- 
thian, ca.  1200  B.  c.  Greek  (Mycenaean) 
influences  are  apparent  in  the  architecture. 

Robinson  ( D.  M. )  Greek  and  Latin  in- 
scriptions from  Si  nope  and  environs. 
( Ibid.,  294-333. )  Reproduces  and  dis- 
cusses 79  Greek  and  Latin  inscriptions 
and  17  others  from  elsewhere  mentioning 
Sinopeans  —  about  one-half  were  dis- 
covered by  the  author  in  1 903.  These 
consist  of  inscriptions  on  vase-handles, 
dedications,  on  sarcophagi,  gravestones, 
etc.     The  8  Latin  inscriptions  are  new. 

Rose  (H.  A.)  Hindu  pregnancy  obser- 
vances in  the  Punjab.  (J.  Anthr.  Inst., 
Lond.,  1905,  XXXV,  271-278.)  Treats 
of  Hindu  "  rites,  some  of  which  appear 
to  be  relics  of  an  old  custom  of  re-mar- 
riage during  the  first  pregnancy  "  ;  strict 
taboo  on  first  menstruation  after  mar- 
riage, observances  at  mid-pregnancy,  the 
kanjt  and  de70&-dh&mi  of  the  seventh 
month,  the  ceremonies  of  the  eighth 
month  {athwdnsdy  mdwali)^  taboos 
during  eclipses,  rites  to  avoid  abortion. 

Muhammadan  pregnancy  observances 

in  the  Punjab.  (Ibid.,  279-232.) 
Treats  of  the  observances  of  the  seventh 
month  {satwahirty  safw&nsd)  and  ninth 
month  (naumdsd).  In  Delhi  many 
elaborate  customs  (some  borrowed  from 
the  Hindus)  connected  with  pregnancy 
survive.  Thin  milk  in  the  mother's 
breasts  presages  a  boy.  Many  food 
taboos  exist. 

Volland  (L>r)     Bilder  aus  Armenien  und 


6oo 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


Kurdistan.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906, 
Lxxxix,  41-44,  7  fgs. )  Notes  on  the 
tells  of  the  plain  of  Charput,  ruins  of  old 
Malatia  ;  modem  Malatia  and  Charput. 

INDONESIA,  AUSTRALASIA, 
POLYNESIA 

Foy(W.)  Australien,  1903-04.  (Arch. 
L  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  viii,  526- 
549. )  Reviews  and  r^sum^s  of  liter- 
ature :  Spencer  and  Gillen*s  The  Norths 
em  Tribes  of  Central  Australia  ( Lond., 
1904),  Hewitt's  The  Native  Tribes  of 
South- East  Australia  (Lond.,  1 904), 
and  various  articles  by  Mathews,  Roth, 
Clements,  Peggs,  and  others. 

Giglioli  (E.  II.)  II  tavau  danaro  o 
valuta  di  penne  rosse  dall  *Isola  Deni 
o  S.  Cruz,  Melanesia.  (A.  p.  TAntrop., 
Firenze,  1905,  xxxv,  389-392,  I  fg.) 
Describes  from  specimens  in  the  museum 
in  Florence  the  tavau ^  a  sort  of  *  *  money '  * 
of  red  feathers,  in  use  on  the  island  of 
Sta  Cruz,  Melanesia.  This  "money" 
is  kept  wound  on  two  bark  rings,  the 
feathers  being  attached  to  a  body  made 
from  strips  of  pandanus  leaves ;  various 
ornaments  of  shell,  pieces  of  mother-of- 
pearl,  etc.,  are  attached.  The  orna- 
mented part  is  8  mm.  long  and  57  mm. 
wide. 

Haddon  (E.  B.)  The  dog-motive  in 
Ik>rncan  art.  (J.  Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond., 
1905,  1 13-125,  19  fgs.)  Discusses 
the  (log-motive  in  the  tattoo-patterns, 
baml)oo-carvinjTs,  etc.,  of  the  Hahau- 
Kenyah-Kayans,  etc.,  of  liorneo,  and 
the  nio<lificationsof  it  hy  the  Kalamantan, 
who  havf  absorlied  some  of  their  culture. 
Mr  II.  thinks  this  motive  originated 
with  the  Itahau-Kenyah-Kayansand  was 
carried  with  them  in  their  mij;rations  — 
in  Sarawak  the  dog's  head  appears  con- 
ventionalized as  a  rosette.  Among  the 
Kalaniantans  the  dog -motive  is  looked 
u|X)n  as  a  prawn  ;  hy  the  Ihansof  Rejan 
as  a  scorpion. 

Lang  (A.)  The  primitive  and  the  ad- 
vanced in  toteniism.  (I];id.,  315-336.) 
Discus'ies  the  question  whether  the  Cen- 
tral and  Nortliern  Australian  tribes  (as 
Professor  Spencer  believes),  or  those  of 
S.  K.  Australia  on  the  Murrav  and  Dar- 
ling  rivers  are  **the  most  primitive  (the 
word  docs  not  refer  to  material  progress) 
in  religion  and  in  social  organization." 
L.  holds  that  the  totemism  ot  the  Central 
Australian  Arunta,  contra  Spencer,  is 
not  at  all  primitive,  but  has  been  modi- 


fied by  the  stooe  amulet  and  rancana- 
tion  belief. 

Laidi(R. )  Ein  neuer  Beitnig rar  Kimde 
der  Eingeborenen  Westaustnlkns. 
(Mitt.  d.  k.-k.  Gcogr.  Ges.  id  Wicn, 
1906,  XLix,  137-141.)  RdsDzii^  the 
data  (furnished  by  Robert  Austin)  in  W. 
E.  Roth's  «  Notes  of  Savmge  Life  m  the 
Early  Days  of  West  Australia  "  (Frt, 
Roy,  Soe,  Qnsid,,  1903,  XVII  pt.  2,45- 
69),  relating  to  physical  characters,  dis- 
ease, hunting  and  fishing,  food,  moral 
ideas,  education  and  disposition,  death 
and  spiritism. 

lAng  Roth  (H.)  Tatu  in  the  Society 
islands.  (J.  Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  XXXT, 
283-294,  3  pis.)  General  descriptian, 
instruments  and  pigments  used,  age  at 
operation,  method  of  tatu,  origin  of  the 
custom  (for  women  it  is  a  mark  of  pu- 
berty and  for  men  a  seal  of  manhood  and 
the  performance  of  duties ),  the  decay  of 
the  art  (due  to  the  missionaries). 

Mathewi  (R.  H.)  Sociology  of  some 
Australian  tribes.  (J.  &  Fkoc  R.  See. 
N.  S.  W.,  Sydney,  1906,  xxxix,  104- 
123.)  Treats  of  the  Wombaia  of  the 
Northern  territory,  the  Wongaibon  00 
the  Lachlan  river,  Barkunjee  of  western 
New  South  Wales,  the  first  more  in 
detail  (subdivisions,  marriage-sections, 
marriage -sequences  and  progeny-names). 
Mr  M.  is  of  opinion  that  *' neither  pro- 
miscuous intercourse  of  the  sexes,  nor 
...  *  group  marriage '  have  ever  ex- 
isted among  the  social  institutions  of  the 
alx)rigines  of  Australia.  * '  Also  •  *  the  di- 
visions into  cycles,  phratries,  and  sections 
have  not  been  deliberately  formulated, 
with  intent  to  prevent  consanguineous 
marriages  and  incest,  but  have  been  de- 
veloped in  accordance  with  surrounding 
circumstances  and  conditions  of  life." 
lie  criticizes  S{>encer  and  Gillen's  and 
Ilowitt's  recognition  of  "two  exc^- 
mous  groups,"  substituting  therefor  two 
principal  divisions.  Among  the  Won- 
gaibon, Barkunjee,  etc.,  **  exogamy  is 
entirely  absent." 

Ethnological  notes  on  the  aboriginal 

tribes  of  Queensland.  (  Proc.  and  Trans. 
Roy.  Cicogr.  Soc.  Austral.,  Brisbane, 
1905,  XX,  49-75).  Treats  of  the  sociol- 
ogy of  the  Wonkamurra,  Murawurri, 
IJadyeri  (at  pages  55-65,  grammar  and 
vocabulary),  Inchalachee,  succession  of 
totems,  e4c.  Also  in  reply  to  **  grossly 
inaccurate  statements  of  Professor  Bald- 
win Spencer,"  Mr  M.  again  emphasizes 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


6oi 


devolution  of  section  names  through  the 
mother,  and  the  absence  of  exogamy. 

Ethnological  notes  on  the  aboriginal 

tribes  of  Western  Australia.  (Ibid., 
1904,  XIX,  43-72,  2  pi.)  Treats  of 
rock  carvings  and  paintings  ( on  Depuch 
island  there  are  hundreds  of  carvings), 
organization  (several  systems  —  the 
tuar  the  most  primitive),  initiation  cere- 
monies, superstitions  (prowling  mal- 
evolent spirits,  food -supply  ceremonies, 
serpent  monsters,  man-^ieaJiqc;  creature, 
delaying  darkness,  stopping  rain,  etc.), 
language  (brief  vocabularies  from  Roe- 
bume  district  and  Lower  Fitzroy  river). 

Ethnological  notes  on  the  aboriginal 

tribes  of  New  South  Wales  and  Victoria. 
(J.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  W.,  Sydney,  1904, 
XXXVIII,  203-381).  This  article,  with 
some  additions,  has  been  reprinted  ( Syd- 
ney, 1905,  XIV,  183,  4  fgs. ).  It  contains 
a  mass  of  information  concerning  socio- 
logical and  marriage  institutions,  lan- 
guage, food  regulations,  sorcery  and 
magic,  initiation  and  other  ceremonies, 
mythology,  and  folklore  (some  20  tales, 
pages  135-174,  177-183),  etc.  The 
bibliography  (pages  ix-xiv)  shows  Mr 
M.  to  have  published  95  different  articles 
relating  to  the  Australian  aborigines. 
The  pirHmbir  or  "avenging  expedi- 
tion '*  of  the  natives  of  S.  E.  New  South 
Wales  is  described  by  the  author  for  the 
first  time  (pages  37-50)  with  some  de- 
tail. At  page  103  we  learn  of  the  exist- 
ence among  many  tribes  of  "a  hybrid 
tongue  or  jargon,  comprising  a  short 
code  of  words,  by  means  of  which  a  moth- 
er-in-law can  carry  on  a  limited  conver- 
sation in  the  presence  of  her  son-in-law, 
respecting  some  of  the  events  of  daily 
life."  Some  sections  of  this  monograph, 
the  author  expects,  "will  completely 
revolutionize  all  the  old  school  notions 
respecting  the  organization  of  Australian 
tribes,"  and,  "it  will  be  evident  that 
the  old  women's  yams  about  *  marriage 
by  elopement,'  'marriage  by  capture,' 
and  *  group  marriage'  are  practically  im- 
possible as  fundamental  matrimonial  laws 
in  aboriginal  society." 

Roth  ( W.  E. )  Notes  on  government, 
morals  and  crime.  (N.  Queensld.  Eth- 
nogr.  Bull.,  No.  8,  Brisbane,  1906,  pp. 
12,  4  pi.).  Treats  of  assembly  of  eld- 
ers, camp  council,  rights  and  powers  of 
individual,  sex  relations,  obscenity  (sod- 
omy, masturbation,  bad  language)  lazi- 
ness, falsehood,  gluttony,  resp>ect  for  old 
age,  treatment  of  non-tribesmen,  saluta- 


tion (kissing  fairly  rare ;  much  formal- 
ity), trespass,  inheritance,  crimes  against 
the  person  and  against  property,  prop- 
erty-marks and  "message-sticks,"  expi- 
ation. The  "message-sticks'*  are  dis- 
cussed in  detail,  with  many  figures.  Dr 
R.  believes  that  "  the  marks  on  the  so- 
called  *  message-sticks  '  do  not  convey 
the  slightest  intimation  of  any  commimi- 
cation."  They  merely  accentuate  the 
b<ma  fides  of  the  messenger. 

Stepban  {Dr)  Anthropologische  An- 
gaben  iiber  die  Barriai,  Neupommem. 
(Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  14- 
'5,  I  %• )  Describes,  with  table  of  meas- 
urements, three  Barriai  young  men  (20- 
23  years)  from  New  Pomerania.  Cephalic 
indices,  mesocephalic  and  dolichoceph- 
alic ;  stature  of  tallest,  1700 ;  of  shortest, 
1595  mm. 

Thomaa  ( N.  W. )  Australian  canoes  and 
rafts.  (J.  Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  1905, 
XXXV,  56-79,  3  pi.,  2  fgs.).  This  valua- 
ble article,  with  abundant  bibliographical 
references,  discusses  types,  distribution, 
construction  and  furnishings,  use  and 
methods  of  propulsion,  etc.,  of  the  bark 
canoes,  dug-outs,  logs  and  rafts  used  for 
navigation  by  Australian  aborigines.  In 
the  west  and  south  navigation  and  even 
swimming  are  said  to  have  been  un- 
known. A  list  of  canoe-names  is  given 
(73-77).  The  one-piece  bark  canoe  is 
probably  original  in  Australia  ;  the  sewn- 
bark  type,  limited  to  the  northern  region, 
may  have  been  imported  ;  the  dug-out  of 
the  Blue  mountains  is  probably  native  ; 
the  out- rigger  is  of  Papuan  origin.  T. 
thinks  the  Tasmanians  reached  that 
island  by  canoes  (they  resemble  the  Sen 
balsas),  not  by  land. 

AMERICA 

Bourne  ( E.  G. )  The  travels  of  Jonathan 
Carver.  (Amer.  Hist.  Rev.,  N.  Y., 
1906,  XI,  289-302.)  Discusses  the  life 
and  activities  of  Carver,  the  character 
and  sources  of  his  famous  book  of  travels, 
suspected  as  early  as  1789  of  being  a 
mere  compilation.  Prof.  B.  is  of  opin- 
ion that  the  evidence  here  presented 
makes  it  clear  that  "the  Travels  of  Jona- 
than Carver  can  no  longer  be  ranked  as 
an  authentic  record  of  the  observations 
of  the  supposed  author.  In  its  present 
form  the  Travels  is  the  work  of  the  edi- 
tor, Dr.  John  Coakley  Lettsom,  who 
was  a  voluminous  and  facile  writer  and 
the  charitable  friend  of  Carver." 


6o2 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


Buihee  (F.  A.)  Communistic  societies 
in  the  United  States.  (Polit.  Sci.  Q., 
Boston,  1905,  XX,  625-664.)  Crit- 
ical historical  study  of  the  various  groups 
(Owenite,  Fourierite,  recent  socialistic 
and  communistic,  religious,  etc. )  of  com- 
munistic societies  in  the  United  States, 
1 732-1900,  their  origin,  and  the  causes  of 
their  successes  and  failures.  LacIc  of 
elasticity  needful  for  the  free  play  of  in- 
dividual desires  is  a  marked  cause  of  non- 
success.  Dr  B.  has  noted  about  100  of 
these  attempts  at  communistic  life  in  the 
United  States. 

Bushnell  (  D.  I.,  Jr]  Appunti  sopra  alcuni 
oggetti  dell'  America  del  Nord  esistenti 
nel  Museo  Antropologico  di  Firenze.  ( A. 
p.  I'Antrop.,  Firenze,  1905,  XX v,  363- 
382. )  Describes  various  ethnological 
objects  from  North  America  now  in  the 
Anthropological  Museum  in  Florence : 
Grooved  stone  axes,  celts,  •*  banner 
stones,"  other  stone  objects,  chipped 
stone  implements,  disks,  pipes  (Sioux 
and  Ojibwa),  pottery  fragments,  hats 
(Haida),  moccasins  (Algonquian,  etc.), 
ornaments  and  decorations  in  skin,  etc., 
knife  sheaths,  wampum  and  bead-work, 
lacrosse-racket  (Ojibwa), ornaments,  etc., 
of  the  missionary  era  (Tadousac).  See 
also  American  Anthropologist^  1906,  N. 
s.,  VIII,  243-255. 

Friederici  (G. )  Der  TrSnengruss  der 
Indianer.  (Globus,  Brnschwg,  1906, 
LXXXix,  30-31.)  Treats,  with  numer- 
ous references  to  literature  of  subject, 
greeting  guests  and  strangers  by  weeping 
and  sighing,  a  custom  found  both  in 
South  America  (Charruas,  Tupi,  I.en- 
guas)  and  in  North  America  (Texas, 
Caddoan  tribes,  Sioux,  etc.  ).  F.  con- 
siders this  greeting  nothing  more  than  a 
senselessly  exaggerated  and  degenerate 
form  of  courtesy  •'  raised  to  the  highest  " 
power. 

Ueber  eine  als  Couvade    gedeutete 

Wiedergeburlszeremonie  bei  den  Tupi. 
(Ibid.,  59-60. )  Discusses  an  old  custom 
(he  who  has  killed  an  enemy,  is,  at  the 
cannibal  feast,  made  to  lie  still  in  a  ham- 
mock, given  a  little  bow  and  arrow  to 
shoot  at  a  wax  target  ;  also  given  a  new 
name,  etc. )  reported  by  Hans  Stade  ; 
also  the  name-giving  ceremonies  of  the 
Tupi  —  these  are  **  due  to  fear  of  the 
spirit  of  the  slain. ' '  Ethnologic  parallels 
from  the  Aztecs  and  Pueblo  Indians  are 
cited. 

Gann  (T.  W. )  The  ancient  monuments 
of  northern   Honduras  and  the  adjacent 


parts  of  Yucatan  and  Guatemala,  the 
former  civilization  in  these  parts  and  the 
chief  characteristics  of  the  races  now  in- 
habiting them  ;  with  an  account  of  a  visit 
to  the  Rio  Grande  ruins.  (J.  Anthr. 
Inst.,  Lond.,  1905,  xxxv,  103-112,  i 
fg. )  Notes  on  buildings  within  mounds, 
stone-faced  pyramids,  ovoid  underground 
chambers,  former  civilization  (no  met- 
als), pottery  (3  sorts),  burial  customs, 
religion,  physical  characters  of  modem 
Mayas,  language,  native  arts  and  agri- 
culture, influence  of  white  civilization 
(altogether  evil)  —  visit  to  ruins,  **  good 
specimen  of  Toltec  architecture.** 

Giuffrida-Ruggeri  (V.)  GPindigeni  del 
Sud-America  centrale  fotografati  dal 
Boggiani.  (A.  p.  PAntrop.,  Firenze, 
1905,  XXXV,  383-387,  I  pi. )  Notes  on 
the  Boggiani  collection  of  photographs 
of  Indians  of  central  S.  America  ( See 
American  Anthropologist^  1 905,  N.  s., 
VII,  325 ).  Facial  and  other  peculiarities 
are  discussed —  **  the  secondiary  (or  ter- 
tiary )  sexual  characters  are  well  marked 
in  the  faces  of  these  Indians.** 

Hill  Tout  (C. )  Report  on  the  ethnolc^ry 
of  the  StatlumH  of  British  Columbia. 
(J.  Anthr.  Inst.,  Lond.,  1905,  xxxv, 
126-218.)  In  this  important  mon- 
ograph are  treated  ethnography  and  soci- 
ology (list  of  30  settlements),  marriage 
(nearness  of  blood  the  only  bar),  dwell- 
ings, food,  dress,  puberty  (StatlumH 
customs  sui  generis) ^  mortuary  (taboos 
and  prohibitions)  and  birth  customs, 
"salmon  ceremonies,"  totemism  (per- 
sonal is  earlier),  nomenology  (system  of 
naming  true  source  of  group  names), 
crests  (from  earlier  personal),  time-divis- 
ions, sundry  beliefs  and  superstitions, 
linguistics  ( 1 56-177),  myths  and  tradi- 
tions (177-205  —  English  texts  of  7 
native  texts,  interlinear  translation  and 
free  rendering  of  2),  vocabulary  (206- 
218)  of  some  850  words.  With  regard 
to  totemism  and  certain  magical  cere- 
monies there  are  striking  resemblances 
between  these  Indians  and  the  Arunta, 
etc.,  of  central  Australia.  The  StatlumH 
were  once  a  strong  and  p>opulous  Salish 
tribe. 

MacCurdy  (G.  G. )  Archaeological  re- 
searches in  Costa  Rica.  (Ibid.,  437- 
442,  2  pi.,  3  fgs. )  Critical  r^sum^  of 
Hartman's  Arch<Tological  Researches  in 
Costa  Rica  (Stockholm,  1901). 

Nordenski51d  (E.)  Beitrige  zur  Kennt- 
nis  einiger  Indianerst&mme  des  Rio 
Madre  de  Dios-Gebietes.    (Ymer,  Stock- 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


603 


holm,    1905,   XXV,   265-312,   35  fgs.) 
Gives  ethnological  results  of  expedition 
of    1904-05    among    the     Tambopata- 
Guarayo,    Yamiaca,   etc.,    of  the    Rio 
Madre  de  Dios  country.     Tribal  nomen- 
clature   and    distribution,    organization 
(chiefdom  important),    language  (brief 
vocabularies     of    Tambopata-Guarayo, 
Arasa,  Yamiaca,  Atsahuaca,  Tuyoneiri 
—  the  first  two  are  Tacana,  the  third  and 
fourth  Pano,  the  last  neither  Tacana  nor 
Pano),  physical  characters,  war,  friend- 
ly intercourse,  migrations  and  agriculture 
(fields  widely   scattered),    fishing    and 
hunting  (few  tame   animals),   weapons 
(bow  and  arrow  in  detail),  houses  (each 
tribe  has  several  dwelling-places  in  con- 
nection with  its  various  fields),  family 
(small,    monogamous),    fire  and    food- 
preparation    (vegetable   food   most  im- 
portant ;  eat  all  day),  disease  and  death, 
etc.,   (dysentery;    clean,    daily   baths; 
not  cannibals),  clothing  and   ornament 
(ornaments  on  cotton  shirts  few  ;  hunt- 
ing trophies  worn  ;  nose-piercing  ;  neck- 
laces),   dance  and   song   with   feather- 
dress,    painting   face   and    body,    ham- 
mocks and  basketry,  drawings  (Yamiaca 
drawings  on  clothes,  walls,  etc.,  due  to 
more  contact  with   whites),  hospitality 
(marked;  no  word  for    ** thank   you," 
no  handshake,  only  nodding  with  head 
as  greeting).     N.  has  found  out  much 
that  is  new  about  these   ''wild  Chun- 
chos.** 

Ethnographische  und  arch&ologische 


Forschungen  im  Grenzgebiet  zwischen 
Peru  und  Bolivia,  1904-1905.  (Z.  f. 
Ethn.,  Berlin,  ipois,  xxxviii,  80-99,  20 
fgs. )  Treats  of  the  Quechua  Indians  of 
the  borderland  between  Peru  and  Bolivia 
and  the  results  of  archeological  investi- 
gations (chu/pas,  burial-caves,  etc.)  on 
the  eastern  slopes  of  the  Andes.  Among 
the  objects  found  were  bronze  needles  ( to- 
pos)  with  llama-heads  or  leaf  heads,  such 
as  are  still  used  by  Quechua  women,  pes- 
tles, pottery  fragments  —  sometimes  quite 
modem  objects  ( later  additions  to  orig- 
inal votive  gifts).  In  one  burial  cave 
were  200  skeletons,  in  one  chulpa  16  ; 
few  had  but  one.  Certain  old  Quechua 
customs  ( dances,  burial  of  property  with 
dead,  foundation-sacrifice,  ** magic"  for 
dry  weather,  making-sick,  etc. )  are  no- 
ticed. The  **  wild  "  Indians  or  Chun- 
chos  are  briefly  considered. 
Palmer  (T.  C. )  Indian  implements  col- 
lected on  the  river  shore  at  Chester, 
1893  to  1897.     (Proc.   Del.   Co.   Inst. 


Sci.,  Media,  Pa.,  1906,  I,  no.  2,  26-28, 
I  fg. )  Describes  briefly  a  collection  of 
arrow  heads  f  1 10  in  number),  **  reject " 
clippings  and  flakes,  pottery  fragments, 
piece  of  slate  gorget,  scraper,  hammer, 
axes,  etc.,  presented  by  the  author  to  the 
museum  of  the  Society.  A  large  num- 
ber of  the  arrow-heads  are  of  the  **  white 
flint"  so  common  along  the  Delaware. 
In  the  angle  between  the  river  and  La- 
mokin  run  once  stood  an  Indian  village. 

Seler  ( £. )  Das  Dorfbuch  von  Santiago 
Guevea.  Sine  zapotekische  Handschrift 
aus  der  Mitte  des  sechzehnten  Jahr- 
hunderts.  (Z.  f.  Ethn.,  Berlin,  1 906, 
XXXVIII,  121-155,  36  fgs.)  Describes 
and  discusses  (hieroglyphics,  names, 
numbers,  words,  etc.)  a  Zapotec  Ms. 
of  1540  (from  two  copies,  one  at  Guevea, 
one  in  the  Mexican  National  Museum). 
Three  languages  appear,  Aztec,  Zapotec, 
Spanish.  The  upper  half  of  the  leaf 
contains  the  hieroglyphics  of  the  place 
and  those  of  19  points  around  it ;  the 
lower  pictures  of  the  people  presenting 
tribute  to  the  kings. 

Sergi  (G.)  Contributo  all'  antropologia 
Americana.  (A.  d.  Soc.  Rom.  di.  An- 
throp.,  1906,  XII,  197-204,  I  pi.) 
Treats  of  three  American  types  of  crania : 
Ancient  Peruvian,  which  has  negroid  or 
oceanic  pigmoid  elements  (cranial  form, 
capacity,  stature)  due  to  trans- Pacific  im- 
migrants —  this  skull  is  Spkenoides  par- 
vus peruvianus ;  modem  Bolivian  In- 
dian ( Ovoides  bolivianus)^  with  Melan- 
esian  aflinities ;  mound-builder  skull 
with  central  Asiatic  relations.  Prof.  S. 
sees  two  pre-Columbian  currents  of  im- 
migration into  America,  one  Oceanic, 
the  other  Asiatic. 

Simmons  ( H.  G. )  Eskim&emas  foma 
och  nutida  utbredning  samt  deras  van- 
dringsv&gar.  (Ymer,  Stockholm,  1905, 
XXV,  173-192,  map,  6  fgs.)  Discusses 
former  and  present  distribution  and  mi- 
grations of  the  Eskimo  tribes,  with  refer- 
ences to  recent  authorities,  particularly 
Boas  and  Thalbitzen — the  map  is  modi- 
fied from  that  of  the  latter  (it  shows 
regions  now  uninhabited  by  Eskimo  but 
containing  evidences  of  their  former  resi- 
dence :  Southeast  coast  of  Labrador, 
east  coast  of  Greenland,  the  Arctic  archi- 
pelago between  Greenland,  Baflin  Land 
and  Victoria  Land,  and  a  portion  of  the 
extreme  N.  E.  Asiatic  coast).  One  of 
the  notable  Eskimo  "ruins"  is  **Eski- 
mopolis"  on  Buchanan  Strait,  visited  by 
the  author  in  1899.     S.  considers  rash 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


604 

lh«  concliuioiit  of  Slorm  >iid  iMchsen  I 
u  to  the  ptst-Nonemen  popuUdon  of 
Labrador  by  the  Eskimo. 

Smith  (K.  I.)     Recent archxotogical  dis-    ' 
MTeries      in     nortbvmtem     America. 
(Ball.  Amer.  Geogr.  Soc.,  N.  V.,  1906,    I 
xxxviii,    repr.   pp.    1-9.)  SBmmarixes   | 
briefly  eiplorationi  (1897-99,  19°3)  of  • 
village  ailea  and  gtaves  in  the  southeni    I 
ioterior  of  Britiih  Columbia  and  tbe  in- 
terior of  Washington  \    shell-heaps   and    | 
caiiTU  on  tbe  coail  of  British  Columbia 
and   Washington  ;   sites  along   the   Co- 
lumbia river,  between  Portland  and  the    ' 
coast.      Mr  S.  found  that  the  interior  S.    '' 
British   Columbia  culture  was   a 
that  of  the  coast  another  unit,  whi 
central  Washington    was  a  culture 
fering  in  some  respects  ftom  both. 
Lillooet  valley  shows  influences  of  both 
coast  and  interior.     The  material  culture 
of  tbe  prehistoric  people  resembled  that 
of  the  Indians  of  to-day  ;  inter-tribal  in 
terfcrence  was  greater  in  earlier  times. 

WMt  (G.  A.)  The  aboriginal  pipes  of 
Wisconsin.  (Wise  Archeol.,  Madison, 
1905.  IV,  47-171.  17  Pl..  305  ffs-) 
This  valuable  and  exhaustive  monograph 
treats  of  tomahawk  pipes  (author  be-  , 


[«.  ...  8.  1906 


.lieves  that  "most  of  the  metal  artibccs 
found  in  Wisconsin,  commonly  attributed 
to  French  origin,  were  really  made  by 
the  British  and  Dutch  "  ),  other  metallic 
pipes,  clay  and  pottery  trade  pipes,  pot- 
tery pipes  (native  pipes  comparatively 
few,  pot-making  more  developed  here), 
stone  pipes,  Sioaan  pipes  (calumets), 
"Micmac"  ppes,  portrait  pipes  (stone 
pipes  with  carved  human  heads  most 
common  form  of  effigy  pipe  in  W. ), 
etiigy  and  emblematic  pipes  (compara- 
tively few),  "bridegroom"  or  double- 
Stemmcd  pipes  (one  bowl  with  two  stem- 
holes),  "flalform"  or  "monitor"  pipes 
(nearly  all  surface  liruis)  of  various  types, 
handled  pipes  (22  examples, 'no  two  (J 
same  pattern),  disk  pipes  of  three  varie- 
ties, high -bowled,  pot-shaped,  rase- 
shaped,  square -bowled,  ovoid,  lens- 
shaped,  keel -shaped,  double  conoidat 
pipes,  pebble  pipes  ("mdcsl  pipe  form 
imaginable  "),  tube  pipes,  peculiar  tuties, 
California  tulie  pipes,  etc  A  number  <^ 
the  Wisconsin  pipes  are  evidently  exotics 
(due  to  barter,  trade,  conquest).  "  In- 
dian tobacco"  of  several  sorts  (kinnikin- 
nik,  etc.)  was  used  by  the  aborigine*  of 
Wisconsin,  but  "tobacco,  as  we  now 
know  it,  was  introduced  by  the  whites." 


ANTHROPOLOGIC   MISCELLANEA 

The  Agamemnon  of  ^schylns.  —  On  June  i6  and  19,  1906,  in  the 
new  Stadium  of  Harvard  University  the  Agamemnon  of  -^schylus  was 
given  in  Greek  by  students  of  the  University.  The  rounded  end  of  the 
Stadium,  where  was  seated  the  audience,  was  separated  from  the  remain- 
der by  the  scene  representing  the  palace  of  the  king  at  Argos.  The 
effect  aimed  at  was  that  of  a  Greek  theater  of  the  Fourth  Century  B.  C. 
Before  the  portico  of  the  palace,  which  was  raised  but  a  few  inches  from 
the  ground,  was  the  round  orchestra  for  the  chorus,  who  marched  but  did 
not  dance. 

The  color-scheme  and  polychromic  decoration  of  the  scene  repre- 
sented perhaps  all  that  both  archeology  and  weathering  suggest  to  the 
modem  savant  and  traveler. 

The  pronunciation  of  Greek  used  stood  well  the  test  of  speech  and 
singing ;  the  only  possible  exception  was  the  diphthong  ew,  which  came 
perilously  near  degenerating,  or  disintegrating,  into  two  sounds. 

The  acting,  and  the  enunciation  and  execution  of  the  music  were 
excellent.  The  composition  of  the  music  was  a  work  of  great  cleverness, 
if  not  of  very  great  talent.  Given  the  strictest  construction  of  Greek 
meter,  allowing  little  but  simple  2-  and  3 -timed  rhythms,  given  a  chorus 
of  men's  voices  alone  and  an  unyielding  impression  of  melancholy  to 
produce  with  them,  given  an  orchestra  of  clarinets,  bass-clarinet,  and 
bassoon  alone  as  accompaniment,  Mr  EUerton  Lodge,  the  composer,  yet 
achieved  dignity  and  variety  and  above  all  an  effect  that  should  not 
be  made  ridiculous  by  the  towering  solemnity  of  the  awful  tragedy  itself. 
Avoiding  the  pitfalls  of  an  archeological  following  of  the  Greek  "  modes,* * 
Mr  Lodge  yet  introduced  a  certain  haunting  effect  into  the  melodies  that 
cannot  have  been  far  removed  from  the  original.  The  absolute  lack  of 
the  4 -measured  repeated  phrasing  of  Frage  und  Antwort  was  a  delight  to 
the  modern  ear  and  a  lesson  to  the  modern  composer  who  thus  far  has 
failed  to  realize  the  undeveloped  capacity  for  rhythm  of  the  human  mind. 

As  an  archeological  reproduction  the  rendering  of  the  Agamemnon 
was  noteworthy,  and  the  profound  impressiveness  created  by  it  only 
proved  once  more  the  essential  sameness  of  the  human  dramatic  appre- 
ciation independent  of  time  and  place.  C.  Peabody. 

605 


6o6  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Recent  Researches  by  the  University  of  California.  —  During  the 
field  season  of  1906  the  Department  of  Anthropology  of  the  University 
of  California  carried  on  the  following  investigations  in  connection  with 
the  Ethnological  and  Archaeological  Survey  of  the  State.  Dr  A.  L. 
Kroeber  made  ethnological  studies  among  the  Yurok,  Yokuts,  and  Mohave 
Indians.  Dr  P.  £.  Goddard  investigated  the  little-known  and  almost 
extinct  Athapascan  groups  situated  between  the  Hupa  and  the  Wailaki. 
Mr  S.  A.  Barrett  studied  the  Pomo  and  Miwok  Indians.  Dr  R.  B.  Dixon 
investigated  the  ethnology  and  particularly  the  language  of  the  Chimariko, 
who  although  now  reduced  to  only  four  survivors  constitute  an  entirely 
distinct  linguistic  stock.  Miss  Constance  Goddard  DuBois  collected  in- 
formation among  the  Mission  Indians,  particularly  in  regard  to  the  cere- 
monies and  myths  of  the  Luisefios.  Dr  J.  C.  Merriam,  with  the  assis- 
tance of  Messrs  E.  L.  Furlong,  N.  C.  Nelson,  and  A.  V.  Wepfer,  did 
reconnoissance  work  in  several  caves  in  Shasta  county  in  continuation  of 
previous  researches  bearing  on  the  antiquity  of  man,  and  systematically 
explored  two  shell -mounds  on  San  Francisco  bay.  Mr  Joseph  Peterson 
made  archeological  investigations  in  eastern  Arizona.  In  continua- 
tion and  development  of  the  researches  of  the  late  Dr  Washington 
Matthews,  whose  notes  and  manuscripts  are  in  the  keeping  of  the  Uni- 
versity, Dr  Goddard  also  conducted  studies  among  the  Navaho  and 
Apache. 

The  American  Ethnological  Society  of  New  York  is  about  to  begin 
a  series  of  publications  which  is  to  contain  authentic  material  collected 
among  native  tribes  of  America.  The  volumes  are  to  appear  at  irregular 
intervals.  Notwithstanding  the  large  amount  of  work  that  has  been  done 
in  American  ethnology,  comparatively  little  material  has  been  collected 
regarding  the  customs,  beliefs,  and  ideas  of  the  natives,  in  their  own 
words.  Most  of  our  collections  have  been  obtained  indirectly  through 
the  assistance  of  interpreters,  or  are  discussions  of  information  collected 
from  individuals  more  or  less  familiar  with  English  or  with  the  trade  jar- 
gon. Knowledge  possessed  by  the  Indians  is  of  great  importance  as  well 
to  the  ethnologist  as  to  the  student  of  the  early  history  of  the  American 
continent.  For  this  reason  authentic  records  of  information  given  by  the 
Indians  seem  to  be  of  prime  importance  for  a  thorough  study  of  these 
subjects.  The  American  Ethnological  Society,  in  beginning  its  series  of 
publications,  is  desirous  of  collecting  and  preserving  for  future  use  such 
records,  and  it  is  hoped  that  this  undertaking  will  meet  with  the  support 
of  the  public.  The  following  volumes  are  in  preparation,  and  will  be 
published  by  E.  J.  Brill,  of  Leiden,  Netherlands: 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  607 

Vol.  I.  William  Jones,  Ph.D.,  Research  Assistant,  Carnegie  Institution  : 
Fox  Texts.  A  collection  of  historical  tales,  myths,  and  accounts  of  per- 
sonal religious  experiences  collected  among  the  Fox  Indians,  a  branch  of 
the  Algonquian  stock.  Recorded  in  original  text,  and  published  with 
translations.     (In  press.) 

Vol.  1 1.  Edward  Sapir  :  The  Upper  Chinook,  An  account  of  the  Chinook 
Indians  of  upper  Columbia  river,  and  a  collection  of  myths  and  personal 
accounts.     Original  texts  and  translations.     (In  press.) 

Vol.  III.  Roland  B.  Dixon,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Anthropology,  Harvard 
University  :  Myths  of  the  Maidu  Indians  of  California, 

Vol.  IV.  Franz  Boas,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Anthropology,  Columbia  Uni- 
versity :  Myths  of  the  Tsimshian  Indians  of  British  Columbia. 

Vol.  V.  Roland  B.  Dixon,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Anthropology,  Harvard 
University  :  Myths  of  the  Shasta  Indians  of  Northern  California. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  following  collections  also  will  be  published  at  an 
early  date : 

Livingston  Farrand,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Anthropology,  Columbia  Univer- 
sity :    The  Alsea  Indians  of  Oregon. 
H.  H.  St  Clair,  2d  :    Texts  collected  among  the  Coos  Indians  of  Oregon. 

The  price  will  be  approximately  ^2.00  for  a  volume  of  300  pages, 
and  proportionately  for  larger  or  smaller  volumes.  It  is  hoped  to  bring 
out  about  two  volumes  a  year.  Communications  may  be  addressed  to 
Mr  Harlan  I.  Smith,  Corresponding  Secretary  of  the  American  Ethnolog- 
ical Society,  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  New  York  City. 

Virginia  Manuscripts.  —  The  Department  of  Archives  and  History 
of  the  Virginia  State  Library,  in  charge  of  Mr  John  P.  Kennedy,  state 
librarian,  has  recently  issued  a  most  valuable  Calendar  of  Transcripts  and 
Other  Historical  Manuscripts  in  possession  of  the  department.  The  work 
of  classifying  and  cataloguing  the  material  has  been  in  progress  about  five 
years,  with  the  result  that  more  than  177,000  documents  are  now  readily 
available  in  a  series  of  more  than  3,500  uniform  labeled  boxes.  Special 
acknowledgment  is  made  of  the  services  of  Mr  Andrew  C.  McLaughlin 
and  assistants  of  the  Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington  in  the  listing  of 
Virginia  manuscripts  in  the  London  Record  Office.  The  collection  is 
particularly  rich  in  material  on  the  land  claims,  wars,  treaties,  and  gen- 
eral governmental  relations  of  the  early  Indian  tribes. 

James  Mooney. 

German  Anthropological  Societies. — The  Thirty-eighth  general  meet- 
ing of  the  German  Anthropological  Societies  and  the  Fifth  joint  meeting 


• 


6o8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

of  the  Anthropological  Societies  of  Germany  and  Austria  will  be  held  at 
Cologne  in  August,  .1907.  It  is  proposed  to  make  of  this  meeting  an 
international  congress  by  bringing  together  the  most  celebrated  anthro- 
pological societies  and  investigators  of  all  lands.  The  Cologne  Anthro- 
pological Society  extends  an  invitation  to  all  American  anthropologists 
and  institutions  interested  in  anthropology,  to  be  present  at  the  congress, 
and  assures  those  who  contemplate  attending  that  their  stay  in  the  old 
city  of  Cologne  on  the  Rhine  will  never  be  forgotten.  The  Society  will 
soon  issue  a  program  of  the  proceedings ;  meanwhile  it  announces  that  the 
greatest  possible  amount  of  time  during  the  meeting  will  be  devoted  to 
the  eolithic  question.  After  the  congress  an  excursion  of  two  or  three 
weeks  in  the  Netherlands  and  France  in  all  probability  will  be  given, 
during  which  the  places  of  greatest  interest  from  an  anthropological  point 
of  view  will  receive  especial  attention.  If,  however,  visitors  should  prefer 
to  make  a  tour  of  Germany,  the  Societies  will  consider  the  possibility  of 
carrying  out  any  proposals  to  that  end  that  it  may  receive.  Communica- 
tions may  be  addressed  to  the  Cologne  Anthropological  Society  (C. 
Rademacher,  Rektor),  Zugweg  44,  Cologne,  Germany. 

Monsieur  Edouard  Piette,  the  well  known  writer  on  prehistoric 
archeology,  died  at  the  Chateau  de  la  Cour  des  Pr^s  (Rumigny,  Ar- 
dennes), June  5th,  1906,  in  his  80th  year.  Four  years  ago  Judge  Piette 
gave  his  incomparable  collection,  chiefly  from  the  caverns  of  southern 
France,  to  the  Musee  des  Antiquit^s  nationales  at  St  Germain -en -La ye, 
near  Paris. 

According  to  the  London  Tunes  an  opinion  has  been  widely  ex- 
pressed, both  in  Oxford  and  elsewhere,  that  the  services  rendered  to 
archeology  by  Dr  Arthur  John  Evans  should  be  commemorated  by  a  por- 
trait to  be  deposited  in  the  Ashmolean  Museum,  of  which  for  nearly  a 
quarter  of  a  century  he  has  been  keeper.  The  discoveries  at  Knossos 
are  alone  more  than  sufficient  to  justify  this  step  ;  but  Dr  Evans'  achieve- 
ments as  a  numismatist,  historian,  and  traveler  have  also  earned  for  him 
the  admiration  of  scholars.  It  is  felt,  moreover,  that  no  more  appropriate 
place  for  a  memorial  of  him  could  be  selected  than  the  institution  which 
has  been  raised,  in  the  period  during  which  he  has  presided  over  it,  and 
mainly  as  the  result  of  his  energy,  generosity  and  tact,  to  a  place  in  the 
front  rank  among  European  museums.  A  committee,  of  which  Dr 
G.  A.  Macmillan  (St  Martin's  street,  London,  W.  C.)  is  the  honorary 
treasurer,  has  been  formed  to  promote  the  object  in  view.  The  portrait 
will  be  painted  by  Sir  W.  B.  Richmond,  and  a  reproduction  in  photo- 
gravure will  be  sent  to  every  subscriber. 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  609 

A  COURSE  of  illustrated  lectures  on  "  The  Logical  Evolution  of  Indus- 
tries '*  will  be  given  by  Mr  Harlan  I.  Smith,  of  the  American  Museum  of 
Natural  History  of  New  York,  to  the  normal  domestic  art  students  at  Pratt 
Institute,  Brooklyn,  during  the  school  year  1906-07.  The  purpose  of 
the  course  is  to  acquaint  these  prospective  teachers  of  handwork,  with 
primitive  arts  and  tools,  that  they  may  more  adequately  instruct  ele- 
mentary school  children  in  the  simple  forms  of  the  industrial  processes  of 
modem  life.  The  students  will  prepare  for  these  weekly  lectures  by 
a  course  of  reading  in  the  anthropological  journals  and  in  books  on  primi- 
tive peoples  recommended  by  the  lecturer.  Essays  on  special  topics  will 
be  prepared  by  the  students  from  this  reading  and  the  lecture  material, 
so  that  the  value  of  the  lecture  course  will  be  strengthened  through  in- 
dividual student  work. 

The  senate  of  London  University  has  received  from  Mr  Martin 
White  two  further  donations  —  one  to  provide  a  salary  of  ;;^2oo  a  year 
for  Dr  Edward  Westermarck,  university  lecturer  in  sociology,  for  a  further 
period  of  five  years,  the  other  an  additional  sum  of  ^^700  for  the  estab- 
lishment for  five  years  of  two  scholarships  a  year,  each  of  the  annual  value 
of  ;^35  and  tenable  for  two  years.  In  connection  with  Mr  White's  bene- 
faction, special  courses  will  be  delivered  during  the  session  1906-07,  on 
ethnology  by  Dr  A.  C.  Haddon,  F.R.S.,  and  on  psychology  by  Dr 
J.  W.  Slaughter,  Ph.D.  (Clark). 

Rev.  S.  p.  Verner,  who  has  recently  returned  from  Africa,  desires 
in  these  pages  to  disavow  the  sensational  statements  that  have  recently 
appeared  in  the  public  press  respecting  the  African  pygmy  and  Mr  Verner* s 
late  expedition.  Men  of  science  have  grown  accustomed  to  such  news- 
paper accounts  of  alleged  discoveries  and  have  learned  to  disregard  them ; 
others  are  requested  to  take  no  account  of  the  stories  alluded  to,  but  to 
await  an  announcement  which  Mr  Verner  promises  to  make  regarding  his 
expedition,  in  a  forthcoming  issue  of  the  American  Anthropologist, 

A  NEW  MUSEUM  is  to,be  built  on  Audubon  Park  Terrace,  155th  St., 
west  of  Broadway,  New  York,  for  the  American  Numismatic  and  Archaeo- 
logical Society,  of  which  Mr  Archer  M.  Himtington  is  president.  ITie 
edifice  will  be  39.8  feet  front  and  63.3  feet  deep,  of  concrete  construc- 
tion. It  will  be  three  stories  in  the  classic  style,  with  Ionic  columns. 
The  main  floor  and  the  second  story  will  be  devoted  to  the  library,  the 
meeting  halls,  and  exhibition  galleries.    The  building  is  to  cost  $55,000. 

The  first  meeting  of  the  California  Branch  of  the  American  Folk- 
Lore  Society  during  1906-07  was  held  in  South  Hall,  University  of  Cali- 


6 10  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOL OGIST  [n.  s.,  8, 1906 

fornia,  Berkeley,  on  September  11.  Professor  A.  L.  Kroeber  spoke  on 
"  California  Indian  Myths  and  Songs,"  with  illustrations  on  the  grapho- 
phone. 

• 

Dr  J.  Walter  Fewkes,  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology, 
Washington,  will  spend  the  autumn  and  winter  in  archeological  researches 
in  Arizona.  Mrs  Matilda  Coxe  Stevenson,  of  the  same  Bureau,  has  been 
engaged  since  spring  in  studying  the  natives  of  the  pueblo  of  Taos, 
northern  New  Mexico. 

We  learn  from  Nature  that  the  museum  of  the  University  of  Otago, 
New  Zealand,  has  been  enriched  by  the  gift  of  a  large  series  of  ethno- 
logical objects  from  Mr  and  Mrs  James  Mills.  The  collection,  which 
consists  chiefly  of  weapons,  mostly  Polynesian,  was  made  about  twenty- 
five  years  ago. 

Dr  Alexander  F.  Chamberlain,  of  Clark  University,  will  deliver 
the  next  course  of  popular  scientific  lectures  at  Weeks  Institute,  Clinton, 
Mass.,  on  the  first  three  Fridays  of  November,  1906.  The  subject  is 
*'The  American  Indians." 

The  title  of  honorary  curator  has  been  conferred  by  the  Cincinnati 
Museum  Association  on  Mr  Philip  M.  Hinkle,  who  has  imdertaken  the 
care  of  its  collections  relating  to  American  archeology.  With  him  are 
associated  Mr  Frederick  W.  Hinkle  and  Dr  G.  B.  Rhodes. 

Dr  Karl  von  den  Steinen  has  retired  from  an  associate  professor- 
ship of  ethnology  in  the  University  of  Berlin  and  the  curatorship  of  the 
Museum  of  Ethnology  in  order  to  devote  his  attention  to  scientific  explor- 
ation. 

At  a  meeting  of  the  officers  and  council  of  the  Nor>vegian  Geo- 
graphical Society,  in  Christiania,  on  May  19,  the  gold  medal  of  the 
Society  was  awarded  to  Dr  Carl  Lumholtz  for  his  scientific  explorations. 

We  regret  to  announce  the  death,  at  Berlin,  on  July  19th,  of  Dr 
Albert  Voss,  director  of  the  department  of  prehistorics  in  the  Konigliches 
Museum  fiir  Volkerkunde. 

Professor  Marshall  H.  Saville,  of  Columbia  University  and  the 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  has  recently  returned  to  New  York 
after  conducting  explorations  in  Ecuador  and  Colombia  during  the  summer. 

Invitations  have  been  extended  by  the  Ober-Biirgermeister  of  the 
city  of  Cologne,  Germany,  to  attend  the  opening  of  the  new  Rauten- 
strauch-Foest  Museums  (Museum  fiir  Volkerkunde)  on  November  12th. 


American  Anthropologist 


NEW  SERIES 


Vol.  8  Octqber-December,  1906  No.  4 

THE   MUSIC   OF  THE  FILIPINOS 
By   FRANCES   DENSMORE 

Introduction 

During  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition  at  St  Louis  in  1904 
I  made  a  careful  study  of  the  native  music  in  the  Philippine  section, 
receiving  in  my  work  the  cordial  encouragement  and  cooperation  of 
Dr  Albert  Ernest  Jenks,  ethnologist  in  charge  of  the  exhibit.  For 
many  years  I  have  been  a  student  of  Indian  music  and  expected  to 
find  some  similarity  between  the  music  of  the  two  races,  but  a  few 
hours  among  the  Filipinos  showed  that  their  music  belongs  to  a 
period  of  development  more  primitive  than  that  of  the  American 
Indian,  and  that  it  lies  very  near  the  beginning  of  musical  expression. 

My  first  inquiry  was  for  the  music  of  primitive  worship,  but  at 
that  time  no  trace  of  this  had  been  found  among  either  the  Negritos 
or  the  Igorot,  while  the  Moros,  being  Mohammedan,  had  passed 
the  primitive  religious  state.  I  believe  that  continued  study  would 
have  discovered  religious  music  among  these  people,  but  my  time 
was  limited  and  I  was  unable  to  make  the  investigation. 

Another  phase  of  primitive  music  which  I  did  not  hear  was  the 
industrial  music.  I  was  told  that  in  the  Islands  both  the  Negritos 
and  the  Igorot  sing  as  they  plant  the  rice,  but  this  music  was  not 
available  for  study  at  St  Louis. 

For  these  reasons  the  very  important  subjects  of  religious  and 
industrial  music  are  not  considered  in  this  paper  either  directly  or  in 
their  bearing  on  general  musical  development,  but  I  believe  that 
the  music  which  I  heard  and  analyzed  is  characteristic  of  a  period 
of  development  preceding  that  of  worship  or  of  toil. 

AM.  AMTH.,  H.  S.,  8— 40.  ^^  ^  " 


6l2  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

During  my  stay  at  St  Louis  I  collected  observational  data  from 
which  I  have  formed  certain  hypotheses  concerning  the  origin  and 
development  of  music,  and  I  take  the  liberty  of  summarizing  the 
data  and  stating  these  hypotheses  at  the  beginning  of  my  p^aper  in 
order  that  the  method  of  grouping  the  facts  in  the  paper  itself  may 
be  the  more  apparent. 

Four  villages  were  closely  studied  :  the  Negrito,  the  Igorot,  the 
Samal  Moro,  and  the  Lanao  Moro,  these  being  the  most  primitive 
tribes,  and  entirely  distinct  in  culture  and  customs.  In  the  last 
three  named  I  found  vocal  and  instrumental  music  cultivated  as 
separate  arts,  the  songs  being  without  accompaniment,  while  in  the 
Negrito  village  the  rhythm  of  one  of  the  songs  was  marked  by  hand- 
clapping  and  a  hiss  as  well  as  by  a  stroke  on  a  gong  ;  the  former 
being,  of  course,  a  more  rudimentary  accompaniment  than  the  gong 
because  it  is  a  more  direct  physical  response  to  the  rhythmic  physi- 
cal impulse. 

I  found  but  two  forms  of  melody -producing  instruments  in  use, 
the  others  being  percussion  instruments  which  were  used  in  pro- 
ducing a  variety  of  rhythms. 

With  one  exception  the  songs  which  I  heard  were  improvised  in 
both  words  and  melody.  This  was  my  conclusion  from  close  ob- 
servation which  later  was  confirmed  by  an  interpreter.  Prominent 
among  these  improvised  songs  were  those  of  love  and  of  grief, 
which  formed  an  interesting  subject  for  study  as  they  were  without 
rhythm  in  the  usual  sense  of  the  term.  The  expression  of  any  liv- 
ing thought  contains  a  certain  rhythm,  whether  that  expression  be 
in  a  free  poetic  form  or  in  esthetic  prose,  yet  it  is  often  impossible 
to  measure  that  rhythm  by  any  metrical  unit.  It  is  a  vibration 
which  we  feel  but  cannot  analyze.  We  seem  to  realize  that  its  unit 
is  too  large  for  us  to  grasp.  Such  was  the  rhythm  of  the  Moro 
love  songs  and  the  Negrito  dirge. 

There  is  undeniably  a  phase  of  primitive  music  in  which  the  idea 
to  be  expressed  is  so  simple  and  the  mental  and  physical  states  are 
so  perfectly  balanced  that  the  musical  expression  of  the  idea  takes 
the  simple  rhythm  of  the  physical  organism.  This  phase  was  promi- 
nent in  the  Philippine  villages ;  but  it  was  my  privilege  to  hear  also 
the  songs  which  arose  from  primitive  emotions,  and  the  rhythm  of 


DENSMORE]  THE  MUSIC  OF  THE  FILIPINO^  613 

these  was  as  free  and  unrestrained  as  the  elemental  natures  from 
which  they  sprang. 

In  the  Philippine  villages  I  found  four  forms  01  musical  expres- 
sion, which  I  have  arranged  in  what  seems  to  me  the  probable  order 
of  development,  though  this  must  remain  a  matter  of  speculation  : 
1st,  instrumental  music  ;  2d,  unaccompanied,  improvised  song  ;  3d, 
accompanied,  improvised  song  ;  4th,  a  repeated  melody  with  instru- 
mental accompaniment. 

First.  Assuming  a  state  01  content  to  be  the  primary  condition 
of  humanity  —  a  content  without  ambition,  struggle,  or  aspiration 
—  the  regular  banging  upon  something  that  resounds  is  a  natural 
expression  of  the  physical  organism.  When  this  state  of  content 
changes  to  excitement  the  banging  becomes  more  emphatic  and  the 
rhythmic  unit  is  developed  by  a  stronger  accent  upon  alternate 
beats,  expressing  the  physical  agitation.  When  the  mental  element 
becomes  a  factor  the  rhythm  used  is  triple  as  well  as  double,  while 
in  his  *'  mystery  songs,"  with  their  groping  toward  the  supernatural, 
the  American  Indian  uses  rhythms  of  5  or  7,  often  alternating  these 
with  measures  of  2,  3,  or  4  counts.  All  this  indicates  that  primitive 
rhythm  is  a  means  of  expression,  being  directly  affected  by  the  idea 
in  the  mind  of  the  performer. 

Second,  Next  in  order  I  have  placed  the  unaccompanied  impro- 
vised song,  believing  that  the  release  of  the  voice  as  a  means  of  ex- 
pression comes  first  through  emotional  impetus.  A  child  gives 
vocal  expression  to  its  emotions  before  it  develops  the  faculty  of 
speech.  In  Lord  Monboddo's  Origin  of  Langtiage  (vol.  i,  p.  469) 
Dr  Blacklock  says : 

The  first  language  among  men  was  music  :  before  our  ideas  were  ex- 
pressed by  articulate  sounds  they  were  communicated  by  tones  varied 
according  to  different  degrees  of  gravity  and  acuteness. 

From  my  own  study  and  observation  I  believe  that  the  begin- 
ning of  vocal  music  is  a  call  or  cry,  and  that  when  this  is  con- 
sciously prolonged,  repeated,  and  elaborated  because  it  is  found  a 
satisfactory  means  of  expression,  the  art  of  vocal  music  is  bom.  I 
am  strongly  inclined  to  the  opinion  that  vocal  music  originates  in 
the  love  call,  and  that  its  second  phase  is  the  cry  of  the  second 
emotion  —  grief  After  these  would  come  the  instinctive  search 
for  a  supernatural  cause,  with  the  introduction  of  the  religious  ele- 


6 14  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8, 1906 

ment  Driven  from  the  Eden-state  of  happiness,  there  follows  the 
life  of  toil,  in  which  the  rhythm  of  labor  tends  to  develop  the 
rhythm  of  musical  expression,  while  the  supplicating  of  mysterious 
Forces,  with  their  personification  and  propitiation,  tends  to  deepen 
the  emotional  element.  From  this  point  the  musical  develop- 
ment is  largely  molded  by  the  religious  element,  the  influence  of 
which  can  scarcely  be  overestimated. 

Third.  The  accompanied  improvised  song  must  of  course  contain 
a  unit  of  rhythm  since  it  conforms  to  a  rhythmic  accompaniment 
Our  opinion  as  to  whether  the  rhythmic  song  precedes  or  follows 
the  emotional  expression  must  depend  on  whether  we  believe  the 
free  use  of  the  voice  arises  first  from  physical  or  from  emotional 
impulse.  It  seems  natural  to  suppose  however  that  the  emotions 
would  be  the  first  expression  of  primitive  natures.  In  either  case 
it  is  evident  that  the  rhythm  of  the  song  is  determined  by  the  idea 
in  the  mind  of  the  singer.  The  Filipinos  told  me  that  in  their  ac- 
companied improvised  songs  they  converse  on  everyday  matters, 
indicating  that  melody  is,  to  them,  a  natural  means  of  expression. 
It  is  easy  to  understand  how  a  conventional  rhythm  can  be  organ- 
ized from  a  free  rhythm,  but  less  easy  for  me  to  believe  that  the 
impassioned  cadences  of  the  emotional  songs  could  be  evolved  in 
a  people  of  such  rudimentary  culture  and  effort,  from  a  set  rhythmic 
form.  Such  passionate  rhythm  must  always  be  spontaneous.  The 
white  race  has  well-nigh  lost  the  ability  to  produce  it,  and  it  would 
be  doubly  difficult  to  primitive  natures  that  were  accustomed  first 
to  singing  in  regular  rhythm.  For  these  reasons  I  believe  that  the 
song  without  rhythmic  unit  precedes  in  point  of  development  the 
song  in  regular  rhythm. 

Fourth.  The  ability  to  mentally  retain  a  melody  and  to  repeat  it 
at  will  is  a  much  higher  acquirement  than  the  original  production 
of  a  melody.  When  the  melody  can  be  voluntarily  repeated,  w^ith 
instrumental  accompaniment,  it  is  readily  elaborated,  and  musical 
progress  begins  to  assume  tangible  form. 

The  Negrito  Music 

In  describing  the  music  of  the  Philippine  villages,  the  first  con- 
sidered will  be  that  of  the  Negritos,  one  of  the  most  primitive  tribes 
in  the  Islands.     Here  is  to  be  found  the  music  of  a  people  in  whom 


DENSMORE]  THE  MUSIC  OF  THE  FILIPINOS  615 

the  human  seems  absolutely  blended  with  the  animal  life.  Their 
first  impulse  when  attacked  is  to  run  away  or  to  hide  ;  they  hunt 
with  bow  and  arrow,  and  use  a  knife  only  in  cutting  up  game ;  the 
pet  monkey  is  their  only  domesticated  animal ;  they  draw  them- 
selves up  by  their  arms  like  monkeys,  and  the  lines  of  their  bodies, 
especially  in  dancing,  suggest  the  pictures  of  fauns  and  satyrs  by 
which  the  ancients  expressed  their  idea  of  a  semi-human  race.  As 
previously  stated,  no  form  of  worship  had  been  found  among  them. 
All  these  facts  are  very  important  in  studying  their  musical  develop- 
ment. 

The  gentleman  in  charge  of  the  village  had  been  with  the  natives 
several  years  in  the  Islands  and  was  familiar  with  their  customs. 
I  received  much  assistance  from  him  and  from  a  young  Negrito  who 
spoke  English  brokenly.  They  told  me  that  the  Negritos  have 
three  songs,  the  Amba^  the  Uso^  and  the  Undas,  the  first  being  an 
expression  of  general  happiness,  the  second  a  love  song,  and  the 
third  a  funeral  song.  They  are  invariably  named  in  this  order, 
and  reflect  the  life  of  the  primitive  people.  Here  are  expressed 
the  primary  emotions,  which  form  the  basis  of  all  music  not 
religious. 

The  only  repeated  melody  which  I  found  in  the  four  Philippine 
villages  was  the  Amba  of  the  Negritos,  both  the  words  and  the 
music  of  the  Uso  and  the  Undas  being  improvised.  The  Negritos 
are  naturally  a  gentle  people.  Their  native  mountains  provide 
them  with  the  necessaries  of  life,  and  their  "  song  of  happiness,"  by 
much  repetition  and  a  little  reaching  out  after  new  requirements,  has 
become  crystalized  into  a  remembered  melody,  but  the  emotions  of 
love  and  sorrow  are  still  too  wild  and  uncontrolled  to  follow  twice 
the  same  melodic  path  in  their  vocal  expression. 

This  is  the  music  of  the  Amba : 


When  sung  in  this  form  the  intonation  was  correct,  the  tone  pure 
and  sweet.  Soon  they  began  to  vary  the  melody  by  introducing 
ornamentation,  and  in  multiplying  these  embellishments  the  correct- 


6 1 6  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOL  OGIST  [k.  s.,  8, 1906 

ness  of  intonation  was  lost,  so  that  at  the  close  of  the  song  they 
were  singing  very  much  "out  of  tune."  The  following  memo- 
randum indicates  the  changes  introduced  : 


\^  j'l.^n  i-^\f^','\^.r,  j-g^ 


This  was  sung  frequently  every  day,  the  time  being  marked  by 
striking  copper  gongs  and  by  a  sharp  clapping  of  the  hands,  the 
singers  dancing  as  they  sang.  I  was  told  that  the  music  of  the 
Amba  is  always  the  same  but  that  the  words  are  impromptu  and 
concern  the  interest  of  the  hour.     The  young  Negrito  said  : 

In  Amba  we  say  **  we  very  glad  on  this  day,"  one  man  he  say  "  I 
very  glad  on  this  day,"  everybody  say  ''we  all  glad  on  this  day." 
Sometimes  we  sing  it  for  wedding.  Maybe  sing  what  we  do  all  day,  or 
we  sing  "  how  funny  that  fat  American  looks  sitting  in  comer  of  theater." 
In  Amba  we  sing  all  about  people  who  come  to  look  at  dances. 

The  Uso  is  primarily  a  courting  song  sung  by  a  man  and  a 
woman  alternately,  but  it  is  used  on  any  holiday  and  may  be  sung 
by  any  number  of  people,  the  subject  of  the  song  remaining  the 
same.  I  was  told  that  a  man  and  a  woman  sometimes  reviewed 
the  story  of  their  own  courtship  by  means  of  this  song,  which 
always  took  the  form  of  a  musical  conversation.  The  identity  of 
the  son^  seemed  to  consist  in  this  conversational  form,  in  the  sub- 
ject-matter, and  in  the  peculiar  accompaniment  which  was  always  the 
same,  the  melody,  as  previously  stated,  being  improvised.  As  usu- 
ally presented  the  Uso  was  given  by  four  women  accompanied  by 
two  players  on  the  gongs,  who  marked  the  time  with  four  beats 
to  the  measure ;  all  four  of  the  dancers  marked  the  time  with  a 
handclap  on  the  ist  and  3d  counts  of  the  measure;  two  of  the 
dancers  sang  alternately  and  the  other  two  gave  a  sharp  hiss  on  the 
2d  and  4th  counts,  occasionally  varying  it  by  a  sharp  da  in- 
stead of  S'S.  At  frequent  intervals  those  who  were  singing  the 
musical  conversation  exchanged  parts  with  those  who  were  giving 
the  vocal  accompaniment,  without  interrupting  the  movement  of 
the  dance. 


DENSMORE] 


THE  MUSIC  OF  THE  FILIPINOS 


617 


This  is  the  memorandum  of  the  accompaniment  to  the  Uso^  x 
indicating  a  handclap : 


4 
4 


X     S-S   X     s-s 


X     S-S   X     s-s 


X    s-s  X    s-s 


&c 


A  decided  emphasis  was  given  the  first  of  each  measure. 
The  following  is  a  memorandum  of  the  music  of  the  Uso : 


i 


-^- 


■^- 


The  young  Negrito  told  me  that  the  Undas  meant  "  somebody 
dead."  The  music  was  full  of  wild  pathos.  In  the  middle  of  the 
little  theater  sat  the  man  who  took  the  part  of  the  bereaved,  and  the 
villagers  came,  singing  the  Undas,  to  lay  a  little  gift  on  the  bow  and 
arrows  beside  him.  I  was  told  that  in  the  Islands  no  one  is  too  poor 
to  bring  a  gift,  though  it  be  only  a  few  grains  of  rice.  One  by  one 
they  came  and  went,  singing  their  wild  sweet  song,  but  the  man  did 
not  lift  his  head  or  heed  their  pitiful  little  gifts  of  comfort.  It  was 
intensely  dramatic. 

The  Negritos  sing  as  they  plant  their  rice,  scattering  the  rice  to 
the  rhythm  of  the  song,  and  they  sing  as  they  rest  from  their  work  in 
the  evening,  but  as  the  Amba,  Uso,  and  Undas  were  invariably  men- 
tioned as  their  **  three  songs,"  I  infer  that  the  others  were  simply 
a  rhythmic  comment  on  the  interest  of  the  hour,  song  being  an  in- 
stinctive form  of  expression. 

The  Negritos  have  three  musical  instruments  :  the  copper  gong, 
the  ba?tsi  or  flute,  and  the  barimbo  or  jewsharp.  In  addition  to 
these  I  found  a  violin  in  the  museum,  which  was  of  Negrito  manu- 
facture and  made  entirely  of  bamboo.  It  was  interesting,  but  too 
plainly  a  copy  to  be  of  significance  in  this  connection. 

The  Negrito  gongs  used  at  St  Louis  were  of  Chinese  manufacture, 
those  beaten  from  the  native  copper  being  considered  too  valuable 
to  be  taken  from  the  Islands,  though  a  few  excellent  specimens  were 
shown  in  the  museum.    The  gongs  used  in  the  village  were  flat,  about 


6l8  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

ten  inches  in  diameter,  with  straight  sides  of  about  two  inches.  The 
players  were  always  seated,  holding  the  gong  in  the  lap  and  striking 
it  with  the  palms  of  the  hands,  used  alternately.  The  bansi^  or 
flute,  consists  of  a  section  of  bamboo  about  two  and  a  half  feet  long, 
which  is  held  upright,  the  performer  blowing  across  the  opening  at 
the  top,  the  lower  end  being  closed :  there  are  four  finger  holes  on 
the  upper  side  and  one  for  the  thumb  on  the  lower  side.  Only  one 
man  played  this  curious  instrument  —  Ybag,  one  of  the  oldest  men  in 
the  village. 

<  -      -      -       -  '  \  BLX>WN  HERE 

Fig.  17. — Negrito  dansi. 

He  bent  lovingly  over  his  instrument,  resting  the  pointed  end  on 
the  ground  and  holding  it  firmly  between  his  toes. 

The  music  played  on  this  instrument  varied  greatly  with  the  mood 
of  Ybag.  I  was  fortunate  in  hearing  him  one  sunny  morning  when 
he  was  in  the  best  possible  form.  The  tone  he  produced  was  al- 
ways sweet  and  correct  in  intonation,  but  on  this  particular  morn- 
ing I  heard  him  play  more  than  once  the  following  cadenza  : 

J-  .  -fJffiH.  J. 


This  is  the  more  remarkable  as  it  presents  a  major  scale  with  an 
ascending  seventh,  only  one  tone  (the  6th)  being  omitted.  This 
succession  of  tones  does  not  appear  in  the  recorded  music  of  the 
white  race  until  the  close  of  the  Sixth  century  a.d.,  when  we  find 
it  as  the  6th  Gregorian  Tone.  The  Negrito  player  could  scarcely 
have  learned  it  from  music  heard  after  reaching  St  Louis,  as  it  is 
not  probable  that  the  construction  of  his  instrument  would  permit 
the  playing  of  more  than  one  series  of  tones  upon  it.  This  almost 
complete  major  scale  was  not  found  in  the  other  villages.  Thus  it 
is  shown  that  the  most  primitive  people  available  for  study  were 
doing  by  musical  instinct  what  the  natives  in  a  more  advanced  state 
failed  to  accomplish  and  what  man  in  a  still  higher  stage  of  progress 
does  through  volition. 


DENSMORE] 


THE  MUSIC  OF  THE  FILIPINOS 


619 


The  barimbo^  or  jewsharp,  consists  of  a  strip  of  bamboo  about 
ten  inches  long,  with  two  slits  cut  in  one  end  forming  a  '*  tongue/' 
the  strip  being  trimmed  away  so  that  the  projecting  tongue  can  be 
twanged  with  the  fingers,  as  the  instrument  is  held  before  the  lips. 
The  best  player  was  a  woman,  who  readily  consented  to  play  for 
me,  and  from  her  work  I  noted  the  following  rhythms  : 

:i 


1: 


She  was  considered  a  good  performer  and  I  realized  her  profi- 
ciency when  a  Mangyan  was  brought  forward  —  sole  representative 
of  a  tribe  even  more  primitive  than  the  Negrito.  He  willingly 
played  on  the  barimbo^  but  gave  only  an  even  rhythm,  thus  : 


4 
4 


&c. 


When  questioned  about  the  music  of  his  tribe  he  said  they  sing 
but  once  and  that  is  at  courting  time.  A  strange  people,  allied  to 
those  animals  whose  love  call  is  their  only  attempt  at  music ! 

The  Igorot  Music 

The  Igorot  music  will  now  be  considered.  This  represents  the 
music  of  a  people  in  whom  progress  along  all  lines  has  begun.  The 
Igorot  are  men  of  moderate  stature  who  fight  aggressively,  weave, 
and  work  in  metals.  They  cultivate  the  soil  intelligently  and  are 
industrious  in  their  toil.  The  carabao  is  domesticated,  also  the 
chicken,  dog,  and  hog,  all  being  used  for  food ;  the  chicken  and 
the  dog  are  killed  ceremonially  and  used  in  the  ceremonial  feasts. 

There  were  three  Igorot  villages  at  St  Louis :  the  Bontoc,  the 
Suyac,  and  the  Tinguianese,  the  inhabitants  coming  of  course  from 
their  respective  localities  in  the  Islands.  I  was  able  to  note  the  dif- 
ference in  the  music  of  these  villages  before  being  aware  that  they 
represent  distinct  divisions  of  the  Igorot  tribe.  The  principal  features 
of  musical  development  were  however  common  to  all. 


620 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


The  instrumental  music  will  be  noted  first.  This  conasts  chiefly 
of  the  gongs  used  in  dances,  each  dancer  carrying  a  gong  suspended 
by  a  loop  of  cord  from  his  left  hand  and  striking  it  with  a  stick  held 
in  his  right,  the  dancers  moving  in  a  circle  counter-clockwise.  There 
seemed  to  be  no  leader  in  the  movement  of  the  dance,  but  there 
was  evidently  a  leader  in  the  music,  the  others  being  divided  into 
groups  of  two  or  three  and  playing  a  slightly  different  division  of  the 
double  rhythm.  The  gongs  were  similar  to  those  used  by  the 
Negritos,  but  varied  in  diameter  from  about  nine  to  twelve  inches. 
By  striking  near  the  edge  of  the  gong  a  tone  was  produced  about  a 
major  third  higher  than  that  produced  when  the  gong  was  struck  in 
the  middle  ;  this  enabled  the  players  to  produce  a  variety  of  effects. 
On  one  occasion  the  leader  played  emphatically  the  following  — 


^^ 


f 


p^ 


&0. 


the  others  playing  slightly  different  divisions.     Soon  another  player 
joined  the  circle  and  boldly  gave  out  this  theme  — 


4=fc: 


J3^-.4^ 


&0. 


whereupon  the  first  leader  dropped  back  into  the  accompaniment, 
l^he  following  rhythms  also  were  noted : 


^^7- 


&C. 


2. 


-%^^ 


^^ 


-2; — ^- 


^^ 


— =1- 


* 


t^ 


&o. 


This  style  of  instrumental  music  was  common  to  all  three  villages. 
In  the  Tinguianesc  village  I  happened  on  a  primitive  music  lesson, 
in  which  one  man  was  teaching  two  others  to  play  on  the  gongs, 
using  alternately  a  drumstick  and  the  flat  of  the  hand.  These  gongs 
were  about  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  the  stick  about  eight 
inches  long.    The  pupils  were  so  slow  and  stupid  that  I  was  able  to 


densmore] 


THE  MUSIC  OP  THE  FILIPINOS 


621 


make  the  following  memorandum  before  their  lesson  was  finished. 
The  usual  sign  indicates  an  eighth  rest,  f  indicates  a  beat  with  the 
stick,  and  —  a  beat  with  the  flat  of  the  hand,  the  first  and  third 
counts  being  strongly  accented. 


4 
4 


fr 


rr 


^r 


If 


^v. 


The  only  triple  rhythm  was  heard  in  the  accompaniment  of  a 
dance  given  by  a  man  and  a  woman  to  the  music  of  two  gongs  and 
a  small  drum.  It  was  given  at  sunset  and  suggested  a  ceremony, 
as  the  woman  danced  with  arms  extended  and  palms  raised,  and 
the  man  with  arms  extended  and  palms  turned  downward.  This 
was  the  rhythm  of  the  gongs  : 


These  various  examples  of  rhythm  are  interesting,  as  they  show 
conclusively  that  among  the  Igorot  rhythm  is  studied,  elaborated, 
and  accurately  taught  entirely  apart  from  vocal  music. 

The  museum  contained  several  Igorot  flutes  (of  which  I  saw  none 
in  use)  and  also  several  bamboo  instruments  used  by  the  Igorot 
to  mark  the  time  in  their  singing  as  they  go  to  and  from  the  rice 
fields.  These  resemble  tuning  forks  and  vary  from  eight  to  fourteen 
inches  in  length.  They  are  played  by  holding  the  closed  end  in  the 
right  hand  and  striking  the  prongs  against  the  left  palm.  The  sound 
is  said  to  be  rather  pleasant  as  the  singers  come  home  through  the 
twilight. 


Fig.  18.  —  Bamboo  instrument  used  by  the  Igorot  for  marking  time. 

Another  crude  attempt  at  instrumental  music  deserves  mention 
—  the  6oys  museek.  It  was  perhaps  the  most  primitive  stringed 
instrument  ever  made,  for  it  had  the  earth  for  its  body.  Its  one 
string  was  a  fiber  of  bamboo  about  45  inches  long,  the  ends  wrapped 


\ 


622  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  \».  s.,  8,  1906 

around  stones  and  firmly  imbedded  in  the  ground.  Under  this 
string,  near  the  middle,  the  boy  had  dug  a  hole  in  the  ground 
about  the  size  of  a  quart  cup,  lining  it  neatly  with  stones.  Over 
the  top  of  this  hole  he  had  placed  a  round  piece  of  tin,  on  which 
rested  the  little  stick  which  formed  the  "  bridge "  and  supported 
the  string  at  such  an  interval  that  the  two  ends  gave  tones  a  major 
third  apart.  A  little  boy  twanged  this  most  happily,  and  sang  a 
little  Igorot  song.  In  answer  to  my  question  he  said  it  was  bofs 
museek. 

The  vocal  music  of  the  Igorot  compared  with  that  of  the  Negrito 
presents  striking  differences.  Instead  of  freely  running  over  a  scale 
of  seven  tones  the  former  concentrates  his  interest  and  emphasis  on  a 
single  tone,  and  by  short  melodic  excursions  along  the  "  line  of 
least  resistance,"  returning  quickly  to  this  fundamental  tone,  he 
produces  a  succession  of  tones  which  resemble  a  melody.  This 
music  shows  that  mental  control  and  concentration  have  begun,  but 
that  culture  has  not  progressed  to  a  point  which  permits  the  memoriz- 
ing of  a  melody.  Dr  Jenks  told  me  that  during  his  residence  in 
the  Islands  he  had  spent  many  weary  hours,  notebook  in  hand, 
trying  to  write  down  the  "songs'*  of  the  Igorot,  but  he  could  not 
find  that  they  ever  sang  the  same  melody  twice.  This  is  the  more 
perplexing  as  they  sing^with  great  freedom  and  confidence,  even 
singing  in  three  or  four  **  parts.**  My  experience  was  the  same  as 
that  of  Dr  Jenks.  By  closest  observation  I  could  detect  no  definite 
repetition  in  this  strange  ensemble  music,  but  the  songs  in  all  the 
villages  invariably  ended  with  the  progression  I,  2,  or  Do  Re^  the 
latter  being  strongly  accented.  This  was  given  by  the  leader  of 
the  song  and  seemed  to  be  a  signal  for  the  singing  to  cease.  My 
explanation  is  that  the  Igorot  singers  weave  together  in  an  impromptu 
way  certain  progressions  familiar  by  long  use,  these  progressions 
being,  as  indicated,  those  easiest  and  most  natural  for  the  voice. 
The  Igorot  are  a  people  who  are  obliged  to  work  hard  for  a 
livelihood,  the  part  of  the  country  in  which  they  live  being  not 
easily  cultivated,  as  rice  paddies  must  be  made  by  building  terraces 
or  dams  on  the  mountain  sides.  Their  custom  of  sallying  forth 
with  baskets  to  collect  the  heads  of  their  enemies  furnishes  almost 
the  only  relief  to  their  monotonous  lives.     This  condition  forms  a 


DKNSMORE]  THE  MUSIC  OF  THE  FILIPINOS  623 

great  contrast  to  the  idyllic  lives  of  the  Negritos,  who  dance  to  the 
music  of  the  flute,  and  hide  behind  trees  when  attacked  by  an 
enemy.  The  sternness  of  Igorot  life  does  not  tend  to  encourage 
the  expression  of  emotion  through  improvised  song,  and  we  are  not 
surprised  to  find  their  vocal  music  reflecting  the  conditions  of  their 
general  culture. 

The  interesting  question  arises :  Does  not  their  singing  indicate 
what  the  line  of  least  resistance,  psychologically,  may  be  ?  And 
we  are  interested  to  learn  that  for  them  it  constitutes  the  pentatonic 
scale,  which  has  long  been  known  to  underlie  the  oldest  music  of  the 
Scotch,  Irish,  Chinese,  and  of  the  North  American  Indians.  After 
leaving  the  fundamental  tone  the  voice  most  readily  and  often  took 
the  interval  of  the  6th,  descending  to  the  5th ;  the  3d  was  often 
used,  and  the  2d  but  seldom  except  for  the  ending  of  the  song. 

Whenever  a  dance  was  finished  the  singers  seated  themselves  on 
their  upturned  gongs  and  began  a  kind  of  vocal  "tuning  up'*  pre- 
paratory to  the  song,  members  of  the  group  singing  stray  phrases 
exactly  as  members  of  the  orchestra  **  run  over"  their  instruments 
before  coming  on  the  stage.  It  was  in  this  **  tuning  up  "  that  the 
voices  were  used  most  freely,  the  muscles  of  the  body  being  relaxed 
after  the  dance,  and  the  voices  not  yet  strained  to  the  conscious 
effort  of  song.     I  heard  one  man  sing  the  following  — 


ii 


X 


tE^?E^3EEE3^3 


this  being  the  pentatonic  scale  with  only  one  tone  omitted. 

Soon  the  regular  song  began  with  the  usual  emphatic  Do.  The 
leader  sang  the  melody  while  each  of  the  others  sang  independently, 
though  occasionally  two  would  choose  the  same  phrase.  With  the 
long  tones  of  the  melody  these  accompanying  voices  interjected 
shorter  phrases  resembling  those  used  in  the  melody  itself  These 
phrases  were  given  with  a  vociferous  accent,  the  syllable  cha  and  a 
vigorous  jerk  of  the  head,  so  the  effect  suggested  an  obligato  by 
barking  dogs.  Here  was  the  strong  sense  of  rhythm,  the  pentatonic 
scale,  the  ability  to  sing  in  "parts,"  and  evident  enjoyment  in  the 
performance,  but  it  was  a  musical  void.  The  following  is  a  typical 
Igorot  song : 


624 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8»  1906 


m 


&     "^ 


:r=A 


m 


3^ajij..r:j 


i 


-^    -S:    -^ 


P 


i 


H-— 


-♦-- 


-d»- 


^^--f^ 


J 


T^ 


The  vocal  music  of  the  Igorot  suggests  the  rhythmic  swing  of 
manual  labor  carried  on  for  many  hours  of  every  day  :  it  seems  to 
proceed  from  the  same  source  as  primitive  instrumental  music  and 
to  be  an  expression  of  physical  impulse  rather  than  of  emotion. 

Quite  different  from  these  wordless  songs  was  a  song  which  I 
heard  at  twilight  and  which  the  guard  told  me  was  sung  at  no  other 
time.  It  was  in  the  Tinguianese  village  and  was  led  by  Antonio, 
whose  tattoo  showed  him  to  be  an  accomplished  and  successful 
head-hunter.  This  song  evidently  contained  words  and  was 
improvised,  but  unfortunately  I  was  unable  to  secure  the  help  of 
an  interpreter  in  the  Igorot  study.  I  noted  about  twenty  lines  of  the 
words,  or  syllables,  and  the  result  shows  a  frequent  recurrence  of 
many  syllables  which  may  be  short  words. 

Antonio  sang  one  line,  then  all  the  chorus  responded,  then  he 
sang  the  next  line,  and  so  on.  Soon  a  woman  took  his  place  as 
leader.     This  was  the  opening  of  the  song  : 

Pau  ne  e  tantah  (chorus) 
Pa  ne  tab  we  ah      ** 
Tha  ne  ya  thung     *' 
Tha  ne  ku  e  na.       ** 

The  form  reminds  one  of  the  Bcncdicitc,  a  form  which  was  used 
by  the  Jewish  church  many  centuries  before  Christ.  This  seems  to 
indicate  that  it  is  an  intuitive  and  primary  form  of  musical  expres- 
sion.    There  was  rhythm  in  the  melody,  but  the  rhythmic  periods 


DENSMORE]  THE  MUSIC  OF  THE  FILIPINOS  625 

were  long  and  swinging  ;  perhaps,  like  the  Amba  of  the  Negrito,  it 
was  a  musical  comment  on  the  events  of  the  day,  or  it  may  have 
constituted  a  ceremony. 

The  Moro  Music 

The  music  of  the  Moros  presents  another  step  in  musical  develop- 
ment, for  they  have  conceived  the  desire  to  hear  several  rhythms  at 
the  same  time,  elaborating  the  rhythmic  idea  beyond  the  accom- 
plishment of  the  Igorot  which  consists  simply  in  combining  subdi- 
visions of  even  rhythmic  beats.  In  attempting  to  express  this  desire 
there  was  no  ability  to  fit  together  the  various  rhythms  and  the 
Moro  orchestras  consisted  of  several  instruments  playing  at  the 
same  time,  but  each  independent  of  all  the  others.  Primitive  life  is 
strongly  individual  in  many  respects,  cooperation  and  the  blending 
of  individual  aims  in  a  unity  of  effort  marking  the  beginning  of 
social  and  economic  progress.  The  Samal  and  Lanao  Moro  are 
Mohammedan  peoples  and  are  governed  by  sultans  and  dattos. 
There  has  been  some  advance  among  them  along  all  lines,  and 
this  is  reflected  in  their  musical  efforts. 

The  Samal  Moro  were  first  studied.  These  people  live  beside 
the  sea  and  pursue  the  peaceful  vocation  of  fishermen.  Their 
orchestra  consisted  of  two  gongs  the  size  of  soap  kettles,  suspended 
from  the  rafter  of  a  bamboo  house ;  two  drums  about  20  inches  high 
and  10  inches  in  diameter,  held  between  the  knees  and  struck  with 
the  palm  of  the  hand  ;  one  small  drum  struck  with  a  stick ;  and  a 
set  of  eight  gongs  ranged  on  a  low  frame  and  played  like  a  xylo- 
phone. Some  of  the  instruments  were  played  in  triple  and  some  in 
quadruple  time,  but  I  was  unable  to  detect  any  consonance  among 
them.  Close  and  long-continued  observation  failed  to  find  these 
various  rhythms  coinciding  at  any  point,  or  uniting  to  form  longer 
rhythmic  units. 

The  white  man  takes  a  musical  measure  and  divides  it  in  various 
ways,  often  having  difficulty  in  handling  or  combining  the  rhythms 
produced  ;  the  primitive  musicians  work  from  a  different  standpoint. 
From   my   observation  I   am    convinced   that   the   rhythms   have 

* 

originally  no  connection  with  one  another,  but  by  repetition  in  con- 
cert they  come  eventually  to  coincide  at  certain  points.     Every 


626  AAfERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

Student  of  primitive  music  is  aware  that  uncivilized  peoples  handle 
combinations  of  rhythm  in  a  way  that  bewilders  a  civilized  musician, 
playing  "three  against  four,"  "seven  or  five  against  two,"  and 
alternating  with  "  two  against  three,"  changing  all  the  rhythms  ac- 
cording to  their  fancy.  This  was  noticed  especially  in  the  Dahomey 
and  similar  villages  at  the  World's  Fair  in  Chicago.  The  Mores 
have  not  reached  the  Dahomey  grade  of  proficiency,  and  their 
rhythms  are  still  in  a  cheerful  chaos. 

The  Moro  gongs  are  all  of  the  same  general  shape  and  have  each 
a  knob  on  the  top  which  is  bright  and  shining  from  use.     The  two 
l^rge  gongs  were  struck  with  a  short  stick  and  played  by  one  per- 
former ;  the  tone  of  these  gongs  was  very 
penetrating,  and  it  is  said  that  they  are 
used  in  the  Islands  for  sending  messages 
from  one  village  to  another.     Dr  Jenks 
told  of  an  occasion  on  which  he  wished 
to  summon    hastily  some   men    from  a 
Fig.  19—  Outline  of  a        settlement  several  miles  away.     A  native 

Moro  gong.  . 

woman  struck  one  of  these  gongs  m  a  pecu- 
liar way,  transmitting  his  message,  and  in  a  short  time  the  desired 
number  of  men  arrived  from  the  distant  village.  The  two  gongs 
in  the  orchestra  were  a  major  third  apart,  and  the  following  could 
be  heard  all  day  in  that  part  of  the  Exposition  grounds  : 


k..-^ 


p^ 


X^- 


t=^ 


&0. 


The  instrument  resembling  a  xylophone  played  a  melody,  but  careful 
observation  failed  to  detect  a  recurrence  of  melody,  although,  as  in 
the  case  of  the  Igorot  songs,  there  was  a  uniformity  of  ending,  a  cer- 
tain progression  played  on  this  instrument  seeming  to  be  a  signal 
for  the  music  to  cease.  This  instrument  was  played  with  great  free- 
dom, and  yet  there  was  no  consonance  of  rhythm  between  it  and 
either  the  gongs  or  the  drum.  The  instrument  consisted  of  eight 
gongs,  varying  from  six  to  ten  inches  in  diameter,  ranged  on  a  frame 
about  eighteen  inches  high,  the  player  sitting  on  a  low  bench  and 
playing  the  gongs  by  striking  the  knobs  with  two  short  sticks  held 


DKNSMORE]  THE  MUSIC  OF  THE  FILIPINOS  627 

one  in  each  hand.  The  gongs  rested  on  stout  cords  stretched 
between  the  ends  of  the  frame,  and  supported  by  crossbars  between 
the  gongs.  Contrary  to  our  custom  the  highest  tones  were  at  the 
player's  left  hand.     I  noticed  that  the  **  selection  *'  always  ended 

C'^^C^^C^    r^    c^    r^     r^      c-^ 

D  D 

Fig.  20.  —  Moro  gong  instrument. 

on  a  gong  near  the  middle  of  the  row,  and  so  began  to  listen  there 
for  a  keynote.  By  experimenting  with  these  gongs  in  the  absence 
of  the  natives  I  made  the  remarkable  discovery  that  here  too  was  a 
groping  toward  the  pentatonic  scale.  The  gongs  are  purchased 
from  the  Chinese  and  a  person  selecting  them  might  not  have  a 
large  number  from  which  to  choose  ;  this  might  account  for  some 
deviation  from  true  pitch.  Dr  Jenks  and  I  wished  to  give  a  Moro 
an  opportunity  to  select  a  set  of  gongs  from  the  collection  in  the 
museum  in  order  to  see  what  his  choice  would  be,  but  we  were 
unable  to  carry  out  this  plan,  which  would  have  been  most 
interesting. 

There  were  two  of  these  instruments  in  the  Samal  Moro  village. 
The  tones  of  one  were  as  follows  (making  allowance  for  lack  of 
absolute  correctness  of  pitch),  placed  in  the  key  of  G  for  conve- 
nience and  clearness,  the  highest  tones  being  at  the  player's  left 

hand : 

DBAGDCAG 

The  tones  of  the  pentatonic  scale  of  G  would  of  course  be  :  G  A 
B  D  E  G.  Although  C  is  present,  the  other  tones  are  in  most 
cases  doubled.     The  melody  ended  on  G. 

The  other  instrument  approached  the  minor  mode  and  contained 
these  tones : 

B        G        C        B        A        G«         G1         C 

In  this  case  the  melody  ended  on  either  A  or  C.  There  were  two 
women  who  played  this  instrument ;  the  younger  woman  ended  her 

AM.  ANTH.,  M.  B.,  S— 4Z. 


628  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOZ.  OGIST  [n.  s.,  8, 1906 

melody  with  B  C,  accenting  the  C,  while  the  elder  woman  with  an 
unhappy  face  always  ended  hers  B  C  A.  I  could  detect  the  dif- 
ference in  the  playing  of  these  two  without  seeing*  the  orchestra. 
Here,  as  among  the  Igorot  singers,  was  a  bewildering*  profusion  of 
apparent  melody,  and  I  resolved  to  investigate  more  closely.  It 
was  of  course  useless  to  question  them,  even  through  an  interpreter, 
so  I  sought  Mr  Lewis,  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  village,  and  told 
him  that  I  wanted  to  take  a  lesson  on  this  instrument  in  order  to 
find  out  the  system  underlying  it.  He  summoned  Simaya,  the 
younger  of  the  performers,  who  readily  consented  to  instruct  me. 
We  went  into  the  little  theater  and  I  sat  beside  her  while  she  placed 
a  "drumstick"  in  each  of  my  hands,  then  guided  my  hands  by 
holding  them  in  hers.  Imagine  my  astonishment  when  she  taught 
me  to  play  in  four  grades  of  difficulty !  Here  was  another  instance 
of  music  as  an  intelligently  taught,  practised,  and  cultivated  art 
before  there  was  the  ability  to  compose  and  remember  a  melody. 
In  the  easiest  grade  I  was  taught  to  keep  the  right  hand  on  one 
tone  while  the  left  moved  about,  the  hands  striking  alternately,  the 
right  hand  of  course  furnishing  a  kind  of  **  pedal  point  "  in  the 
bass.  When  I  had  apparently  gained  her  idea  she  released  her 
hold  of  my  hands  and  merrily  motioned  me  to  try  alone.  Some- 
times she  would  take  the  sticks  herself  and  play  a  little  to  show 
me,  then  handing  them  back  for  me  to  try  alone.  The  second 
grade  of  difficulty  transferred  the  repeated  note  to  the  left  hand  or 
treble  part.  In  the  third  grade  botJi  hands  moved  about  but  the 
tones  were  of  equal  length.  In  the  fourth  grade  there  were  sub- 
divisions of  the  tones  —  rapid  runs  and  little  trills  —  the  hands  still 
striking  alternately  but  with  a  degree  of  virtuosity  that  was  paralyz- 
ing. I  gave  up  in  despair,  especially  as  another  Moro  had  befjun 
banging  on  the  big  kettle-drums  that  hung  over  my  head  and 
the  lesson  ended  in  much  merriment.  However.  I  had  gained  mv 
point.  The  closest  observation  failed  to  detect  any  dissatisfaction  on 
the  part  of  my  teacher  with  my  improvisations  as  Jfic/odv,  and  I  felt 
confirmed  in  my  opinion  that  her  own  work  consisted  of  im- 
promptu combinations  of  melodic  phrases. 

Mr  Lewis  gave  me  most  cordial  cooperation  in  my  study  of  Moro 
music.     He   had  been  with  these  people  in  the  islands   for  four 


DENSMORE]  THE  MUSIC  OF  THE  FILIPINOS  629 

years  and  they  had  built  a  railroad  under  his  direction.  He  said  that 
he  found  them  good  laborers ;  but  in  answer  to  my  question  stated 
that  he  had  never  heard  them  sing,  though  they  sometimes  gave  a 
kind  of  **  A-hoy-ye,"  or  call,  when  out  in  their  fishing  boats.  I  re- 
marked that  primitive  people  usually  have  some  songs,  and  Mr  Lewis 
called  his  "  house  man,"  asking  him  in  Spanish  whether  the  Moros 
have  any  songs.  The  prompt  reply  was  that  they  have  many 
songs. 

Later  Mr  Lewis  introduced  me  to  Datto  Fecundi  —  the  only 
datto  in  the  village.  Mr  Lewis  explained  my  wish  and  the  datto 
promised  that  some  of  his  wives  should  sing  for  me  at  eight  the 
next  morning,  before  the  crowds  arrived.  At  the  appointed  hour 
Mr  Lewis  and  myself  were  seated  on  the  datto's  bamboo  porch,  but 
the  favorite  wives  were  reluctant  to  perform.  It  required  much 
patience  and  a  great  deal  of  talking  to  persuade  them.  Beside  me 
sat  a  little  woman  with  dark  eyes  and  whimsical  face ;  she  sat  curled 
up,  with  her  back  to  the  group  and  her  elbows  on  the  railing,  look- 
ing out  across  the  little  lagoon.  Suddenly  she  began  to  sing.  Her 
song  was  a  wild  sweet  melody  with  long  passionate  cadences  and 
the  prolonged  vowel  syllables  that  characterize  the  music  of  the 
seafolk.  When  it  was  finished  she  dropped  her  head  with  its 
tumbled  black  hair  upon  her  folded  arms.  I  waited  breathlessly. 
Soon  she  raised  her  head  and  sang  again,  more  sweetly  than  before, 
seeming  to  look  beyond  the  little  lagoon  to  the  broad  waters  of  her 
island  home.  It  was  most  fascinating  music  !  I  had  brought  a 
box  of  chocolates  and  under  their  encouragement  the  situation  be- 
came less  strained,  another  "favonte  wife**  joining  the  first  in  a 
series  of  duets.  When  the  little  concert  was  finished  I  asked  some 
questions  through  an  interpreter  and  was  told  that  these  were  all 
love  songs,  and  were  "made  up  as  they  go  along  —  always  differ- 
ent.'* I  was  told  further  that  the  best  musician  was  she  who  could 
"  make  up  music  '*  the  best.  They  said  that  at  home  these  love 
songs  often  would  be  sung  by  a  man  and  a  woman.  The  use  of  the 
love  songs  freely  by  the  women  suggests  quite  a  development  of 
music  as  a  cultivated  art,  for  do  not  our  own  women-singers  use  the 
love  songs  in  their  recitals  ?  Yet  the  Moro  and  the  Negrito  songs 
were  primarily  an  expression  of  emotion  by  means  of  improvised 


630  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

music,  and  in  each  instance  the  manner  of  life  was  reflected  in  the 
song,  the  Negrito's  being  a  suggestion  of  the  bird  notes  of  the 
mountain,  while  the  Moro's  love  song  echoed  the  roll  of  the  sea. 
I  wish  I  knew  whether  the  Igorot  in  the  mechanical  rhythm  of  his 
work-a-day  life  sings  of  love  ! 

Next  to  the  Samal  Moro  village  was  that  of  the  Lanao,  or  Lake 
Moro,  who  live  inland ;  these  people  are  much  fiercer  than  their 
sea-faring  relatives.  Five  sultans  of  this  tribe  were  in  St  Louis  and 
each  brought  only  a  few  wives,  while  none  of  the  dattos,  or  subchiefs, 
were  brought.  The  village  was  not  open  to  the  public,  as  the  only 
man  who  could  control  these  wild  people  had  been  called  east  by  a 
death  in  his  family.  Dr  Jenks  took  me  into  the  village.  We  were 
the  only  white  people  there,  but  were  perfectly  safe,  as  the  sultans 
are  devoted  to  Dr  Jenks ;  he  told  me,  however,  that  they  had  tried 
twice  to  kill  their  keeper  since  leaving  the  Islands  and  that  in  the 
whole  world  there  is  probably  no  tribe  more  wicked  and  barbarous 
than  these  people.  Yet  their  faces  were  especially  smiling,  and  they 
certainly  looked  happier  than  their  gentler  kin.  I  noticed  the  same 
thing  in  regard  to  Antonio,  the  Igorot  whose  tattooing  showed  that 
he  had  chopped  off  many  heads.  He  was  nearly  always  smiling 
cheerfully,  but  it  made  me  shiver  when  he  looked  in  my  direction. 

The  five  sultans  were  most  obsequious  when  Dr  Jenks  intro- 
duced me  to  each  in  turn.  He  explained  my  desire  to  hear  their 
music,  and  they  replied  that  the  big  gongs  were  all  in  the  house 
where  a  slave  wife  had  died  the  day  before  and  where  they  had  been 
having  funeral  music,  but  that  the  instruments  in  question  should 
be  brought  to  the  theater  as  soon  as  possible. 

Meantime  Dr  Jenks  and  I  inspected  the  xylophone  in  the  theater, 
which  resembled  those  in  the  Samal  Moro  village,  but  contained 
nine  gongs  instead  of  eight  and  had  the  highest  tones  at  the  player's 
right  instead  of  at  his  left  hand.  The  gongs  were  more  nearly  true 
to  pitch  and  to  the  pentatonic  scale  than  the  others,  but  the  second  of 
the  scale  was  in  the  upper  octave.  This  again  may  have  been  due 
to  a  scarcity  of  material  from  which  to  select  the  set.  These  were 
the  intervals  of  the  Lanao  Moro  instrument : 

-GA^CE         GACD 


densmore]  the  music  OF  THE  FILIPINOS  63 1 

The  pentatonic  scale  on  C  would  of  course  comprise  the  tones 
C     D     E     G     A     C. 

At  last  the  large  gongs  arrived  and  the  sultans  said  that  I  should 
first  hear  a  song.  A  woman  seated  herself  near  one  of  the  doors 
of  the  theater.  Her  head  was  covered  by  a  yellow  silk  scarf  and 
she  held  the  end  of  it  before  her  face  as  she  sang.  The  music  was 
different  from  any  heard  previously,  and  more  nearly  resembled  the 
long-drawn-out  chanting  of  some  ceremony,  having  a  steady  swing 
and  more  measured  cadence.  Suddenly  two  Moro  warriors  sprang 
forward  from  the  other  doors  with  a  shriek  such  as  I  hope  I  may 
never  hear  again ;  it  was  like  the  shriek  of  a  wild  animal  in  a  rage. 
They  came  together  with  a  bang,  clashing  their  shields  and  fighting 
until  one  shield  was  shattered.  I  was  told  that  this  too  was  an  im- 
provised love-song,  and  I  infer  that  the  course  of  true  love  in  Min- 
danao is  indeed  strenuous. 

The  orchestral  music  was  similar  to  that  in  the  Samal  Moro 
village,  but  the  melody  of  the  xylophone  was  more  fiercely  ag- 
gressive and  there  was  no  mistaking  the  fact  that  it  was  in  the 
major  key. 

Both  the  Moro  villages  are  Mohammedan,  and  I  believe  that 
longer  study  would  have  revealed  interesting  native  music  in  con- 
nection with  their  religious  ceremonials — for  instance:  The  dead 
slave-wife,  Dodoa,  was  buried  in  Calvary  cemetery,  St  Louis,  and 
at  her  grave  the  Moros  chanted  a  recital  of  the  virtues  of  the  dead 
woman  and  a  prayer  to  Allah.  Knowing  their  limitations,  it  is 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  music  of  this  chant  was  improvised 
and  that  a  correct  record  of  it  would  throw  light  on  the  question 
of  the  sequence  of  tones  intuitively  followed  in  the  expression  of  this 
emotion.  It  would  be  interesting  to  compare  such  a  record  with  the 
Undas  of  the  Negrito  and  the  funeral  wail  of  the  American  Indian. 

The  Bagobos  had  not  arrived  when  I  was  in  St  Louis,  so  I  was 
unable  to  include  them  in  my  study.  This  was  a  matter  of  regret 
to  me,  as  they  are  said  to  be  especially  musical. 

The  music  of  the  Visayans  was  pleasing,  but  showed  Spanish 
influence  too  strongly  to  be  of  interest  in  connection  with  my  pres- 
ent studies. 


63  2  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOL  OGJST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

The  native  music  of  the  Filipinos  will  soon  pass  away.  Beyond 
the  bamboo  paling  of  the  Igorot  village  were  the  white  tents  of  the 
Philippine  constabulary,  and  there  at  set  of  sun  a  band  of  Filipinos 
played  our  own  national  anthem,  while  hundreds  of  Filipinos  in 
khaki  saluted  the  American  flag  as  it  was  slowly  lowered.  So  the 
sunset  gun  is  measuring  the  days  until  all  the  Filipino  music  shall 
be  merged  at  last  in  The  Star-spangled  Banner. 

Red  Wing, 
Minnesota. 


AN  ANCIENT   MEGALITH  IN  JALAPA,  VERA  CRUZ 

By  J.  WALTER  FEWKES 

On  my  visit  to  Mexico  in  1905*  I  saw  in  the  court-yard  of  the 
Preparatory  School  at  Jalapa  an  ancient  sculptured  stone  of  more 
than  passing  interest*.  I  learned  that  this  stone  was  presented  to 
the  school  by  Sr  Teodoro  Dehesa,  Governor  of  Vera  Cruz,  and  it  is 
said  to  have  been  found  near  Tuxpan  in  that  state.^  Through  the 
kindness  of  the  Governor  I  obtained  the  photograph  reproduced  in 
the  accompanying  plate  xxix. 

I  did  not  make  an  exact  measurement  of  this  megalith,  but  the 
bas-relief  figures  on  it  are  little  less  than  four  feet.  It  is  made  of 
soft,  light  gray  stone,  and  is  nearly  rectangular  in  shape,  but  slightly 
broader  at  one  end  than  at  the  other ;  it  was  evidently  once  buried 
in  the  ground  about  one-third  its  length.  The  edges  and  top  are 
straight  and  smooth.  The  general  shape  of  the  megalith  and  the 
figures  thereon  suggest  that  it  was  one  of  a  series  of  upright  stones 
standing  in  row,  like  those  on  each  end  of  the  stairway  of  the 
** palace"  at  Palenque.  The  stone  sculpturing  on  one  face  is  an 
excellent  specimen  of  the  artistic  work  of  the  eastern  or  coast  peo- 
ples of  aboriginal  Mexico.  In  some,  perhaps  in  most,  particulars, 
the  technique  is  Aztec,  but  in  others  more  Huaxtec  or  Maya. 

I  am  acquainted  with  two  published  figures  of  the  Jalapa  mega- 
lith. One  of  those  is  given  by  Mrs  Nuttall  in  her  interesting  article, 
"  A  Penitential  Rite  of  the  Andent  Mexicans,*'  *  in  which  she  points 
out  that  the  human  figure  so  conspicuous  upon  its  face  probably 
represents  a  priest  making  the  sacrifice  of  drawing  blood  from  his 
tongue  by  piercing  it  with  a  sharpened  stick.  In  the  same  paper 
(p.  4)  Mrs  Nuttall  refers  to  the  megalith  in  question  as  follows : 

According  to  Sahagun  the  priests  fasted  during  the  four  days  preceding  this 
festival  and  at  noon  blew  conch-shells,  flutes,  and  whistles,  and  then  passed 


1  This  visit  was  made  possible  by  an  allotment  of  funds  by  the  Smithsonian  Institution. 

'  According  to  Sefior  Leopoldo  Batres  it  was  found  at  Quilozintla,  Vera  Cruz. 

^  Archaological  and  Ethnological  Papers  of  the  Peabody  Museum^  i,  no.  7,  fig.  I. 

633 


634  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

slender  twigs  or  sticks  through  their  tongues.  An  interesting  bas-relief  pre- 
served at  Jalapa  illustrates  this  painful  rite,  the  most  graphic  description  of  which 
is  given  by  Friar  Mendieta  in  his  Historia  Ecclesiastica  Indiana  (cap.  xvii). 

A  second  figure  of  the  megalith,  taken  from  the  same  photo- 
graphic negative  as  the  one  here  reproduced,  was  published  by 
Senor  Leopoldo  Batres  in  1905.*  The  manuscript  of  the  present 
paper  had  been  sent  to  the  printer  and  the  plate  that  accompanies 
it  printed  before  I  knew  of  Senor  Batres'  article.  In  his  brief 
description  of  the  megalith,  called  by  him  the  **  Estela  de  Quilo- 
zintla,"  Sefior  Batres  identifies  the  human  figure  as  the  god  Ehecatl, 
and  the  reptile  as  Quetzalcoatl,  the  latter  so  placed  as  to  receive  the 
blood  from  the  tongue  of  the  former  in  a  penitential  rite. 

Quotations  from  several  older  writers  given  by  Mrs  Nuttall  leave 
no  doubt  of  the  validity  of  her  interpretation  of  the  action  of  the 
priest  figured  on  the  stone  under  consideration.  It  is  more  espe- 
cially the  object  of  this  article  to  discuss  and  interpret  these  sym- 
bols of  the  man  and  the  animal  with  a  view  to  the  identification  of 
the  supernatural  being  to  which  they  refer. 

The  sculptor  has  cut  in  bas-relief  on  the  surface  of  this  stone 
two  figures,  one  of  which  represents  a  human,  the  other  a  reptilian, 
being.  It  would  appear  from  the  almost  identical  s)mibolism  on 
the  heads  of  these  two  figures  that  one  represents  an  anthropo- 
morphic and  the  other  a  zoomorphic  personation  of  the  same  con- 
ception —  a  supernatural  being.  In  other  words,  the  one,  a  priest, 
is  making  an  offering  to  the  other  —  a  god  personated  by  the  reptile. 

The  figure  of  the  priest  appears  to  be  standing  on  the  body  and 
tail  of  the  symbolic  animal  which  raises  its  head  to  his  breast.  Close 
comparison  of  the  cephalic  symbolism  of  these  two  figures  reveals  a 
suggestive  similarity  of  the  bonnet  of  the  priest  to  the  head  of  the 
reptile  —  a  resemblance  indicating  that  the  figures  are  closely  re- 
lated. The  natural  interpretation  of  this  relation  is  that  the  priest 
personates  the  same  supernatural  being  as  that  symbolically  rep- 
resented by  the  reptile.  The  main  part  of  the  bonnet,  exclusive  of 
feather  adjuncts,  resembles  the  upper  part  of  the  head  of  the  reptile 
near  by.  We  detect  a  curved  snout,  which  recalls  the  long  nose  of 
certain  Mayan  figures,  a  circular  eye,  and  the  line  of  the  upper  jaw  at 

^  La  Ldpida  Arqueologica  de  Tepatlaxco- Orizaba^  Mexico,  1 905. 


FEWKES]  AN  ANCIENT  MEGALITH  IN  JALAPA  635 

one  end  of  which  (that  corresponding  to  the  angle  of  the  jaw)  is  a 
tooth  curving  backward.  A  similar  curved  tooth  is  repeated  at  the 
end  of  what  appears  to  be  a  second  parallel  lip,  in  which  the  place  for 
teeth  is  occupied  by  a  row  of  circles,  each  with  a  central  dot.  An 
unusual  appendage  occupies  the  position  on  the  rear  of  the  head- 
dress near  which  one  would  naturally  expect  to  find  the  ear.  This 
is  an  incomplete  circular  disk  with  notched  margin,  from  which 
hangs  a  curved  body  commonly  represented  in  idols  from  the  Vera 
Cruz  region.  The  structure  and  significance  of  this  will  appear 
later  in  comparative  studies  of  the  same  structure  in  the  reptilian 
figure. 

The  association  of  a  reptile  and  a  priest  wearing  a  bonnet  with 
reptilian  symbolism  recalls  figures  of  men  and  serpents  in  some  of  the 
Mayan  codices.  For  instance,  we  find  several  leaves  of  the  Codex 
Cortesianus  given  up  to  a  series  of  pictures  of  serpents  accompanied 
by  men  wearing  helmet  masks  with  a  symbolism  almost  identical 
with  the  heads  of  the  surrounding  reptiles.  These  men  are  identi- 
fied by  Dr  Schellhas  as  belonging  to  the  group  designated  by  him 
God  B.^  It  is  probable  that  they  represent  priests  personating  the 
same  god  that  is  represented  zoomorphically  by  the  accompanying 
serpent.  Precisely  in  the  same  way  the  human  figure  on  the  Tux- 
pan  megalith  may  represent  a  priest  personating  the  same  super- 
natural being  as  the  adjacent  reptilian  monster. 

Brief  mention  of  certain  common  symbolic  features  in  the  two 
figures  may  be  made  before  we  consider  their  identification.  The 
human  figure  naturally  claims  our  attention  first.  Its  left  side  is 
shown  in  the  relief  and  the  right  leg  is  extended  somewhat  in  ad- 
vance of  the  left  as  if  the  person  were  walking.  The  most  striking 
object  connected  with  this  figure  is  the  sharpened  stick  grasped  in 
the  hands  and  drawn  through  the  tongue.  As  before  stated,  the 
attitude  of  the  figure  is  that  of  a  priest  drawing  blood  from  his 
tongue,  while  the  reptile  before  him  evidently  represents  symbolic- 
ally the  being  to  which  he  is  sacrificing.     The  priest  is  destitute  of 


'  The  majority  of  the  figures  in  both  Aztec  and  Mayan  codices  represent  not  gods,  but 
priests  personating  supernatural  beings.  The  artist  who  made  them  drew  masked  men 
he  had  seen  in  ceremonial  dances,  just  as  the  Hopi  make  paintings  of  men  in  ceremonial 
paraphernalia  personating  their  kachinas. 


636  AMERICAN  ANTHR0P0L0GIS7  [n.  s.,  8, 1906 

clothing  with  the  exception  of  a  breech -cloth,  the  ends  of  which 
hang  from  the  belt  in  front.  There  are  sandals  on  the  feet,  and 
between  the  legs  a  small  mammal  ^  and  two  circles  which  are  cut  in 
low  relief.  This  is  an  Aztec  figure  and  may  refer  to  the  date  of  the 
manufacture  of  the  megalith  or  of  the  building  of  some  pueblo  in 
the  neighborhood. 

Above  the  head  and  before  the  face  of  the  priest  there  is  a  row 
of  circles  bounded  by  raised  bands  similar  to  the  ornamentation  on 
the  body  of  the  reptile.  This  series  of  circles  ends  abruptly  in  the 
upper  right-hand  comer  of  the  megalith,  as  if  it  were  formerly  con- 
tinued on  an  adjoining  stone  when  in  situ.  There  is  likewise  a  series 
of  faintly  incised  figures  on  the  surface  of  the  megalith  between  the 
row  of  circles  just  referred  to  and  its  edge. 

It  would  be  instructive  to  find  out  whether  this  stone  once  stood 
in  line  with  others,  forming  a  series  on  the  face  of  each  of  which 
were  sculptured  a  priest  and  an  accompanying  reptile.  If  so,  the 
resemblance  to  figures  in  the  Codex  Cortesianus  would  be  even 
more  striking. 

The  main  characteristic  of  the  human  figure,  the  one  which 
reveals  the  identity  of  his  symbolism  with  that  of  the  accompanying 
reptile,  is  an  elaborate  ceremonial  bonnet  with  pendant  feathers  and 
other  adjuncts.  This  object  is  tied  to  the  head  by  a  strap  or  band 
passing  under  the  chin.  From  this  bonnet  a  ** trailer"  made  of 
feathers  bound  together  extends  down  the  back  of  the  priest  almost 
to  his  feet.  To  the  top  of  the  bonnet  is  attached,  at  the  middle,  a 
pointed  object  placed  horizontally.  This  extends  into  two  feathers 
fastened  to  the  blunt  or  rear  end.  The  perspective  of  the  bundle 
of  feathers  called  the  trailer  of  the  bonnet  is  more  or  less  faulty,  a 
rear  view  being  shown  instead  of  a  side  view  as  would  be  more 
natural  when  seen  laterally. 

This  may  be  a  good  point  at  which  to  say  something  concerning 
the  decorations  on  the  legs  and  arms  of  the  priest.  It  is  not  clear 
to  me  whether  these  ornamentations  should  be  regarded  as  body 
painting  or  tattooing,  but  they  are  probably  intended  for  one  or  the 
other  rather  than  for  clothing.  The  designs  represented  are  not 
especially  noteworthy,  but  it  is  interesting  to  observe  that  circular 


*  Sefior  Batres  suggests  that  the  animal  is  an  ocelot. 


FEWKES]  AN  ANCIENT  MEGALITH  IN  JALA  PA  637 

figures  and  dots  appear  at  the  joints  and  elbow,  and  that  these  are 
repeated  at  the  waist,  knees,  and  ankles  as  well  as  at  the  wrists.  In 
other  words,  wherever  there  are  joints,  circles  are  represented.  This 
may  be  a  symbolic  way  of  depicting  the  articulations  at  these  places, 
in  which  event  the  circles  may  be  regarded  as  parallel  with  the  fig- 
ures of  eyes  found  in  similar  positions  in  drawings  made  by  the  North- 
west Coast  Indians. 

As  the  figure  of  the  animal  is  represented  with  a  leg,  it  is  evi- 
dently a  lizard-hke  being  rather  than  a  serpent.  This  leg  rises 
from  the  center  of  a  disk  notched  at  the  periphery,  like  that  on  the 
bonnet  of  the  priest,  but  relatively  smaller.  It  takes  the  place  of  the 
curved  body  that  hangs  down  at  the  side  of  the  neck  in  the  case  of 
the  bonnet.  The  leg  is  provided  with  curved  claws  which  grasp  an 
unknown  body.  ^ 

The  head  and  mouth  of  this  animal  are  especially  reptilian.  The 
lower  jaw  curves  outward  and  downward  and  is  armed  with  rows 
of  rectangular  teeth.  A  tongue  projects  beyond  the  mouth  opening. 
The  upper  jaw  likewise  has  teeth  rectangular  in  profile  and  curving 
upward.  At  its  extremity  it  is  armed  with  a  single  tooth  project- 
ing outward.  There  is  a  curved  appendage,  probably  dental,  ex- 
tending backward  at  the  angle  of  the  jaw,  recalling  a  structure  in 
the  same  position  in  the  bonnet  worn  by  the  priest.  The  body  of 
the  reptile  is  serpentine,  with  the  surface  marked  by  a  row  of  circles 
and  curved  bodies  on  the  margin,  representing  curled  ends  of  feath- 
ers. 

The  body  terminates  in  a  circle  from  which  extend  parallel  lines 
representing  feathers.  Below  the  horizontal  part  of  the  serpent's 
body  there  are  several  thorns  similar  to  those  in  the  hands  of  figures 
of  priests  in  some  of  the  codices,  performing  the  penitential  rite. 

The  significant  association  of  the  anthropomorphic  and  zoomorphic 
figures  on  this  megalith  recalls  that  of  certain  drawings  ascribed  to 
the  "God  B'*  and  the  serpent  in  the  Codex  Cortesianus.  This 
parallelism  is  emphasized  by  ah  examination  and  comparison  of  a 
structure  in  the  mouth,  common  to  both.  I  refer  to  the  **  tooth  " 
at  the  angle  of  the  jaw.  This  backward-pointing  organ  is  one  of 
the  distinguishing  characters  of  the  mask  and  cephaloglyph  of  the 
**  God  B  "  in  the  codices,  especially  in  the  Cortesianus-Troano.     It 


638  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

is  found  also  in  the  serpent  figures  that  accompany  the  ''  God  B  ** 
in  these  codices. 

In  the  figures  of  both  priest  and  reptile  on  the  Tuxpan  megalith 
a  similar  backward-curving  object  occurs  in  the  angle  of  the  jaw ; 
the  possession  of  this  organ  increases  my  belief  that  the  figure  in 
bas-relief  on  the  stone  corresponds  to  that  called  in  the  codices 
the  **  God  B."  If  this  identification  is  reliable,  several  interesting 
questions  suggest  themselves.  There  is  little  doubt  that  the  megalith 
was  carved  by  Totonac  or  Huaxtec  sculptors,  and  its  technique 
shows  marked  affiliation  with  work  of  the  Maya,  who  were  linguis- 
tically allied  to  those  peoples.  It  has  little  in  common  with  Aztec 
work,  so  pronounced  in  the  Teayo  ruin,  except  in  the  animal  figure 
between  the  feet.  The  similarity  of  the  figures  in  bas-relief  to 
son^e  of  those  representing  the  "God  B"  of  the  Codex  Cortesia- 
nus-Troano  would  seem  to  indicate  that  this  codex  is  Totonac 
or  Huaxtec. 

There  is  considerable  resemblance  also  between  the  figure  of  the 
reptile  cut  on  the  face  of  the  megalith  and  certain  reptiles  in  the 
Codex  Nuttall.  Seler  *  has  brought  together  those  to  which  I  refer, 
and  others  of  similar  form,  and  concludes  that  they  represent  Xiuh- 
coatl,  the  Fire  Snake.  This  would  lead  us  of  course  to  regard  the 
figure  of  the  me^^^alith  as  Aztec  rather  than  as  Huaxtec.  I  am  in- 
clined to  believe  that  the  reptilian  monster  on  the  megalith  repre- 
sents a  sky  god  allied  to  Quetzalcoatl  and  that  the  human  figure 
represents  a  priest  of  that  god.  One  objection  to  the  identification 
of  the  human  figure  as  a  priest  of  Xiucutli,  or  Xiuhcoatl,  is  the  form 
of  the  gorget  or  ornament  suspended  from  the  neck  and  hanging 
on  the  breast.  The  megalith  figure  bears  what  is  apparently  the 
cross-section  of  a  conch-shell,  the  recognized  symbol  of  the  God 
of  Air,  Quetzalcoatl.  The  figures  identified  by  Dr  Seler  as  Xiucu- 
tli have  on  the  breast  in  place  of  this  gorget  another  of  rectangular 
form  with  terraced  extensions  at  each  corner.  While  the  head  of 
the  reptile  on  the  same  stone  closely  resembles  figures  of  Xiuhcoatl, 
the  Fire  Serpent  of  Seler,  the  bonnet  of  the  priest  is  more  Hke  known 


'  Das   Pitlquei^efdss   der   Bilimek' schen   Sammlung.     Gesammelte  Abhandl.,   Bd. 
n,  P-  937. 


FEWKES]  AN  ANCIENT  MEGALITH  IN  JALAPA  639 

figures  of  the  head  of  Quetzalcoatl.  It  may  be  that  this  fact  and 
the  possibility  that  both  reptile  and  priest  personate  the  same  god 
have  some  importance  in  showing  the  identity  of  Quetzalcoatl  and 
Xiuhcoatl  or  that  XiuhcoatI  is  but  another  attributal  name  of  the 
former  god.  I  fail  to  find  the  characteristic  symbolism  of  Ehecatl 
in  this  serpent  figure. 

In  briefly  summing  up  the  results  of  my  studies  of  this  mega- 
lith, I  find  that  the  two  figures  on  it  are  connected,  one  represent- 
ing a  priest  performing  a  rite  of  blood-letting  from  the  tongue,  the 
other  a  zoomorphic  personation  of  a  supernatural  being.  Both 
represent  the  same  god.  The  similarity  of  the  bonnet  of  the  priest 
and  the  head  of  the  serpent  to  those  of  the  priest  with  the  helmet  of 
the  "  God  B*'  and  the  serpentine  personation  of  the  same,  together 
with  their  association  in  both  cases,  shows  some  connection  or  implies 
that  the  human  figure  on  the  Tuxpan  megalith  represents  a  priest 
personating  Schellhas'  **  God  B,"  generally  called  Quetzalcoatl. 

Bureau  of  American  Ethnology, 
Washington,  D.  C. 


REMAINS  OF  PREHISTORIC  MAN  IN  THE  DAKOTAS* 

Bv  HENRY   MONTGOMERY 

The  work  of  exploration  of  the  remains  of  prehistoric  man  in 
Dakota  Territory  was  begun  by  me  in  the  summer  of  1883,  and 
since  then  I  have  completed  the  exploration  of  40  of  the  ancient 
artificial  mounds  in  that  region,  have  inspected  the  exterior  of  very 
many  others,  and  have  examined  numerous  specimens  obtained  from 
the  latter.  Twenty-four  of  the  mounds  explored  were  in  Ramsey 
county,  8  were  in  Benson  county,  6  in  Walsh  county,  and  2  in 
Grand  Forks  county.  Others  studied  to  some  extent  were  in  these 
and  other  counties  of  what  is  now  North  Dakota,  and  still  others 
were  on  the  Fort  Sisseton  reservation  and  elsewhere  in  South 
Dakota. 

These  mounds  may  be  classified  as  follows : 

1.  Burial  mounds. 

2.  Ceremonial  or  feast  mounds. 

3.  Beacon  mounds. 

There  were  37  burial  mounds,  2  probably  ceremonial,  and  only 
I  beacon  mound. 

I .  Burial  Mounds :  tlicir  Stntctun\  Situation,  and  Contents,  — 
Of  the  burial  mounds,  or  mounds  of  sepulture,  there  are  two  or 
more  kinds,  namely  : 

(a)  The  ordinary  burial  mound  of  most  frequent  occurrence,  of 
which  external  views  arc  shown  in  plate  xxx,  a.  This  consists  of  a 
circular,  rounded,  or  conical  heap  of  earth,  mostly  rich  black  soil 
from  the  prairie,  clothed  with  grass  and  rising  generally  to  a  height 
of  several  feet  above  the  surrounding  land.  The  height  ranges 
from  a  few  inches  to  more  than  12  feet,  and  the  diameter  from  30 
to  90  feet.  Doubtless  these  mounds  were  originally  much  higher, 
the  winds  and  rains  having  reduced  their  height  very  considerably. 
There  is  good  reason  to  believe  that  a  large  number  of  them  have 

^  Read  before  the  Anthropological  Society  of  Washington,  March  13,  1906. 

640 


MONTGOMERY]       PREHISTORIC  MAN  IN  THE  DAKOTAS  64 1 

been  worn  down  to  the  surrounding  level,  and  therefore  are  not  likely 
ever  to  be  discovered.  All  burial  mounds  of  class  a  examined  bore 
evidence  of  having  been  blown  or  washed  toward  the  southeast,  as 
might  be  expected  where  the  prevailing  winds  are  from  the  north- 
west. In  each  such  mound  one  or  more  burial  pits  occur,  in  which 
human  skeletons  and  various  implements,  ornaments,  and  other 
articles  are  found.  If  but  one  burial  pit  occurs,  it  is  nearly  always 
centrally  situated.  If  two  or  more  pits  occur  in  one  mound  they  are 
all  excentric  in  situation,  and  from  a  few  inches  to  several  feet  distant 
one  from  another.  The  pit  or  burial  chamber  is  circular.  In  only  one 
case  have  I  seen  it  vary  from  the  cylindrical  form,  and  in  this  instance 
it  was  merely  a  little  irregular.  I  have  never  found  one  to  be  rec- 
tangular or  square.  It  is  a  well-like  excavation  in  the  ground,  hav- 
ing a  calcareous  bottom  and  wall,  and  sometimes  also  a  calcareous 
covering  consisting  of  a  whitish-yellow  layer  an  inch  or  two  in  thick- 
ness. The  lining  as  well  as  the  covering  is  a  mixture  of  lime  and 
clay.  The  bottom  of  the  chamber  was  overspread  with  bark  of  some 
tree,  often  the  elm  ;  and  upon  this  bark  rested  almost  a  foot  of  finely 
pulverized  yellow  clay,  which  in  turn  was  surmounted  by  rich,  black 
soil  similar  to  that  constituting  the  general  soil  of  the  region.  The 
pit  ranged  from  3  feet  to  7  feet  5  inches  in  diameter,  the  average  being 
about  3  J^  or  4  feet.  Its  depth  ranged  from  2  to  4  feet,  while  its 
bottom  was  often  6  or  8  feet  or  more  below  the  summit  of  the 
tumulus.  In  my  work  of  excavation  I  proceeded  to  dig  the  sod 
and  earth  from  the  surface  of  the  mound  to  a  depth  of  about  one 
foot,  over  an  area  1 5  feet  in  diameter,  with  the  center  of  the  mound 
for  its  center.  Then  another  thickness  of  similar  size  was  removed, 
and  thus  the  depth  of  the  excavation  was  increased  foot  by  foot, 
always  keeping  a  level  floor  in  order  that  the  situation  of  the  burial 
chamber  or  chambers  might  be  more  readily  determined.  *  Wood 
was  found  from  a  foot  to  three  feet  down.  This  consisted  of  poles, 
the  trunks  of  young  trees,  principally  elm  and  oak,  varying  in  di- 
ameter from  3  to  10  inches,  charred  at  their  ends  and  over  their 
entire  surfaces.  When  the  yellow  subsoil  was  reached  it  was  care- 
fully scraped  off"  to  the  depth  of  two  or  three  inches,  when  the  pit  or 
grave  was  at  once  perceived  as  a  circular  area  of  soft  black  soil 
surrounded  by  yellowish-white  clay.     This  is  shown  in  plate  xxx,  b^ 


642  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [m.  s.,  8,  1906 

which  represents  a  mound  on  section  12,  range  65,  township  153, 
on  the  west  side  of  Creel's  bay,  Devils  lake,  Ramsey  county. 
This  view  was  taken  immediately  after  the  location  of  the  pit 
and  before  any  of  its  contents  had  been  disturbed  I  then  pro- 
ceeded to  remove  the  loose  black  earth,  and  soon  came  to  the 
yellow  clay,  a  human  skeleton,  an  earthenware  urn,  a  shell  scoop 
or  spoon,  a  birch-bark  basket,  a  turtle-shell,  and  several  shells  of 
large  Unios.  The  skeleton  was  generally  found  in  a  crouching 
posture,  with  the  back  against  the  wall  and  the  face  toward  the 
center,  the  ossa  innominata  upon  the  tarsal  bones,  and  the  should- 
ers, head,  and  hands  upon  the  knees.  It  occasionally  happened 
that  the  weight  of  the  overlying  wood  and  earth  had  forced  the 
skull  and  upper  parts  of  the  body  forward  or  to  one  side,  but  the 
position  in  which  the  pelvic  and  leg  bones  and  the  lumbar  and 
sacral  vertebra:  were  found,  in  all  cases  determined  the  original 
position  of  the  whole  body.  The  utensils,  ornaments,  and  trinkets 
were  usually  found  beneath  the  skull  and  the  chest.  Occasionally, 
however,  an  urn  was  found  in  the  upper  part  of  the  burial  pit,  and 
in  one  instance  an  urn  containing  decomposed  twigs  and  leaves  was 
found  immediately  above  the  pit. 

The  preservative  properties  of  the  yellow  clay  are  more  effectual 
than  those  of  the  black  soil,  and  this  perhaps  may  be  a  reason  for 
the  use  of  the  former  in  the  manner  stated. 

(b)  The  second  kind  of  burial  mound  in  several  respects  re- 
sembles the  one  just  described,  but  differs  in  having  no  burial 
chambers  and  no  wood,  in  the  skeletons  being  greatly  broken  and 
defective,  and  in  the  bones  being  much  scattered  throughout  the 
mound. 

(c)  There  is  perhaps  a  third  variety  of  burial  mound  in  this  dis- 
trict. The  principal  characteristic  by  which  it  is  distinguished  from 
the  second  class  (b)  is  the  possession  of  a  layer  of  yellow  clay  two  or 
three  inches  thick,  which  extends  through  the  greater  part  of  the 
tumulus  and  seems  to  overlie  human  bones.  This  may  correspond 
in  some  measure  to  the  covering  of  the  pit  or  to  the  pit  itself,  de- 
scribed in  the  first  class  (a).  In  this  last  class  (c),  however,  there  is 
no  real  chamber  or  excavation,  and  the  layer  of  yellow  clay  is  found 
two  or  three  feet  above  the  original  surface  of  the  ground. 


MONTGOMERY]      PREHISTORIC  MAN  IN  THE  DAKOTAS  643 

All  the  burial  mounds  contain  near  the  surface  numerous  bones 
of  bison,  deer,  and  other  animals,  which  have  been  broken  as  if  in 
the  process  of  making  use  of  the  flesh  as  food. 

2.  Ceremonial  or  Feast  Mounds,  —  These  had  no  burial  pits,  but 
contained  pieces  of  partially  burnt  bones  of  men  and  beasts. 

3.  Beacon  Mounds,  —  One  mound  in  Benson  county  consists 
largely  of  burnt  clay. 

The  location,  dimensions,  and  contents  of  a  few  of  the  mounds 
are  here  given  ; 

Mounds  in  Ramsey  County 

These  were  situated  on  high  ground  on  the  north  side  of  Devils 
lake,  the  surface  of  which  is  about  1,430  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  sea. 

Mounds  on  Section  7j,  Range  dj,  Township  i^j 

Mound  7.  — This  mound  was  circular  in  form,  60  feet  in  diam- 
eter and  5  feet  in  height,  but  as  it  had  been  cultivated  for  a  garden  and 
a  green-house  its  height  and  internal  structure  could  not  be  ascer- 
tained with  accuracy.  The  burial  pits  were  only  partially  made 
out.  Considerable  quantities  of  wood  and  charcoal  were  unearthed, 
the  wood  consisting  of  poles  charred  on  their  surfaces  and  at  their 
extremities.  Besides  these  poles  the  following  were  taken  from 
this  mound  : 

{a)  Fifteen  human  skeletons.  Of  these  only  a  few  were  in  good 
enough  condition  to  admit  of  being  removed.  The  antero-posterior 
diameter  of  one  of  the  skulls  found  here  measures  7.75  inches, 
and  its  transverse  diameter  5.875  inches;  hence  the  cranial  index 
is  75.8  and  the  skull  is  mesocephalic. 

{b)  One  urn  or  vase  of  pottery,  in  a  perfect  state  of  preservation. 
It  is  3  J^  inches  high  ;  its  greatest  width  is  4j^  inches,  while  the 
diameter  of  its  flaring-rimmed  mouth  is  3  ^  inches.  The  mouth  is 
circular  and  the  external  surface  is  ornamented  by  a  continuous, 
winding  groove  extending  ten  times  around  the  vessel  from  the  rim 
to  the  center  of  the  bottom,  where  it  terminates  in  a  cross.  The 
material  of  which  the  urn  is  made  appears  to  be  fine-grained.  This 
specimen  was  found  close  to  a  woman's  skull.      Indeed  every 

AM.  AMTM.,  N.  S.,  8—49. 


644  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

earthen  vessel  of  this  kind  thus  far  discovered  has  been  found  with  a 
skeleton  having  all  the  characters  of  that  of  a  female. 

{c)  One  copper  socket  for  the  handle  of  a  knife.  This  has  cop- 
per rivets  and  several  rivet-holes.  It  is  4^  inches  in  length,  and 
is  I J^  inch  wide  at  one  end  and  ^  inch  wide  at  the  other. 

{d)  Three  stone  pipes  of  different  sizes,  but  similar  in  pattern 
and  material.  All  are  made  of  catlinite,  often  known  as  red  pipe- 
stone,  and  all  are  straight  bowls  without  stems. 

{i)  Two  spear-heads  made  of  a  variety  of  quartz  between  agate 
and  flint.  These  spear-heads  are  translucent  and  their  workman- 
ship is  of  high  order.  The  smaller  of  the  two  is  shown  full  size  in 
plate  XXXII,  a.  Its  length  is  53/16  inches  and  its  greatest  width  2^ 
inches.     It  is  deeply  barbed  at  the  base  and  serrated  along  the  edges. 

(/)  Two  shell  scoops  or  spoons,  made  from  Unio  or  freshwater 
mussel  shells.  The  length  of  one  of  these  is  4^  inches  and  its 
width  2  yi  inches  ;  it  is  formed  from  the  valve  of  the  shell.  It  has 
a  short  handle  cut  upon  it,  and  notches  on  the  margin.  It  some- 
what resembles  the  scoop  commonly  used  by  druggists. 

ijg)  Several  Unio  valves  without  cutting  or  other  ornamentation. 

The  following  were  found  near  the  top  of  the  mound : 

{K)  One  oblong  gray  sandstone,  grooved  deeply  on  one  side, 
perhaps  intended  for  use  in  sharpening  bone  awls,  needles,  and 
skewers. 

(?)  One  round  stone  much  like  a  concretion. 

Moufid  2,  —  The  second  mound  on  this  section  of  land  possessed 
a  well-defined  burial  pit  with  only  a  few  bones  in  it. 

Mound  J,  —  The  third  mound  was  40  feet  in  diameter  and 
about  4  feet  in  height.  It  contained  a  well-defined  pit  5  feet  8 
inches  in  diameter  and  2  feet  10  inches  in  depth.  The  total  depth 
of  the  pit  from  the  summit  of  the  mound  was  7  feet.  The  con- 
tents of  this  chamber  were  the  fragments  of  an  urn,  apparently 
broken  by  a  badger,  one  birch-bark  basket,  one  Unio  valve,  and 
four  human  skulls  in  a  poor  state  of  preservation. 

Mound  4.. — The  next  mound  on  this  section  had  a  grave  the 
bottom  of  which  was  six  feet  beneath  the  surface  of  the  mound. 
It  contained  a  small  catlinite  pipe  (pi.  xxxiii,  //),  also  a  bone  fishing- 
spear  with  three  tines  (pi.  xxxiv,  i),  and  two  human  skeletons. 


MONTGOMERY]       PREHISTORIC  MAN  IN  THE  DAKOTAS  645 

Mounds  on  Section  12 y  Range  dj",  Township  1^3 

Mound  I  had  a  distinct  pit  containing  one  human  skeleton,  and 
a  birch-bark  basket  with  rows  of  holes  for  thread. 

Mound  2  contained  two  burial  pits  about  1 5  inches  apart  One 
of  these  was  4  feet  in  diameter,  the  other  41^  feet.  From  them 
were  taken  several  human  skeletons,  three  broken  pottery  vessels, 
and  three  baskets  of  birch-bark  showing  rows  of  holes  where  stitches 
of  some  kind  of  thread  had  formerly  been.  Plate  xxxii,  c,  shows 
one  of  these  baskets,  half  its  diameter. 

Mound  J  measured  30  feet  in  diameter  and  4  feet  in  height. 
Numerous  charred  poles  were  found  from  a  foot  to  two  feet  beneath 
the  surface.  There  was  one  circular  chamber  with  a  diameter  of  3 
feet  and  a  depth  of  2  feet  10  inches.  The  depth  of  the  pit  from  the 
summit  of  the  mound  was  more  than  6  feet.    This  pit  contained  : 

(a)  One  complete  skeleton  of  a  man  upward  of  six  feet  in 
height.  It  was  plainly  in  a  crouching  posture  with  the  back  against 
the  wall.  The  cranial  index  is  78.4.  In  close  proximity  to  this 
skeleton  there  were  found  the  following : 

(6)  One  flat  piece  of  catlinite,  or  red  pipestone,  having  the  fig- 
ure of  an  animal  carved  on  each  side  (pi.  xxxii,  d,  e).  One  of  the 
carvings  is  probably  intended  to  represent  a  beaver,  and  the  carv- 
ing on  the  other  side  of  the  stone  represents  a  buffalo  cow  with 
open  mouth,  and  having  the  "  line  of  life  "  drawn  from  the  mouth 
toward  the  heart. 

(c)  Two  pieces  of  broken  pottery  urns. 

(d)  Two  complete  pearly  shell  rings  ornamented  with  copper, 
and  pieces  of  two  similar  pearl  rings.  Each  ring  measures  i  ^ 
inch  in  entire  width,  and  the  width  of  the  shell  itself  is  three- 
sixteenths  of  an  inch.  The  metal  decoration  is  a  thin,  flattened 
piece  of  native  copper,  somewhat  ribbon-shaped,  half  an  inch  in 
width  and  i  yi  inch  in  length,  and  wrapped  around  the  ring  at  its 
thickest  part. 

(e)  One  shell  spoon  or  scoop. 
(/)  One  Unio  shell. 

(g)  One  univalve  marine  shell  {Marginella  apicind),  perforated 
and  probably  intended  for  a  pendant  or  bead. 


646  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8, 1906 

(A)  One  tine  of  a  deer's  antler,  perforated  by  an  ellipsoid  aperture. 

{i)  A  piece  of  a  large  fossil  Ammonite  shell,  a  fossil  plentiful  in 
the  bad-lands  of  South  Dakota. 

(7')  There  were  also  a  complete  human  skull  and  some  ribs  in 
the  same  chamber,  directly  opposite  the  man's  skeleton  previously 
mentioned.     These  bones  are  probably  those  of  a  woman. 

Mound  6. — This  mound  had  a  circular  burial  pit  containing  three 
human  skeletons ;  one  earthen  urn  having  a  continuous  spiral 
groove  running  around  it  and  terminating  at  the  center  of  the  under 
surface  (pi.  xxxi,  rf,/);  one  copper  bead  (pi.  xxxiv,/);  two  catlinite 
pipes  ;  three  small  bone  needles ;  five  large  bone  tubes,  or  beads, 
or  perhaps  pipe-stems,  made  from  the  wing-bones  of  a  lai^e  bird, 
probably  the  pelican  ;  one  bone  spear,  with  hooks  or  tines  on  one 
side ;  one  horn  implement,  curiously  cut  and  carved  ;  one  small  per- 
forated antler ;  one  larger  perforated  antler;  and  a  small  heap  of 
red  paint.  One  of  the  stone  tobacco  pipes  is  5^  inches  in  length, 
and  both  exhibit  distinct  evidences  of  use  in  the  smoking  of  to- 
bacco, possibly  the  species  Nicotiana  rusticutn. 

Mound  on  Section  6,  Range  64^  Township  i^J 

This  mound  contained  charred  poles  at  the  usual  depth,  and  one 
circular  burial  pit  about  3^  feet  in  diameter  and  2  feet  in  depth. 
In  the  pit  were  two  decomposed  human  skeletons  ;  one  broken  bone 
article,  probably  a  bracelet ;  and  one  clay  pipe  bowl,  light  gray  in 
color,  apparently  baked,  showing  marks  of  use.  This  pipe  was 
straight  and  somewhat  like  the  cathnite  pipes  in  general  shape.  It 
exhibits  somewhat  better  workmanship  than  the  large  clay  pipe 
found  on  Sully's  hill  near  Fort  Totten.     (See  pi.  xxxiii,  i). 

Mounds  on  Section  /p,  Range  dj,  Township  i^j 

Mound  I  contained  no  definite  grave  or  pit  and  no  wood,  but  it 
bore  evidences  of  fire  in  the  presence  of  a  hard,  nearly  circular  bed 
of  ashes  and  charcoal  about  five  feet  in  diameter.  Several  human 
bones  were  scattered  throughout  the  mound,  but  none  of  them  had 
been  burnt.  Among  the  things  found  in  this  mound  may  be  men- 
tioned two  large  beads  made  from  the  columella  of  a  heavy  marine 
shell,  perhaps  Busy  con  (pi.  xxxiv,  d). 


PrPES    FftOM    NORTH    0»KOT*  MOUNDS 
a.  Plpc-boolDlcdllnitc.      ft.  PleceBrcaillniKpliM-bawlirhichbid  bencDi  off  twTDrE  burial,     t.  Cat- 
Jinlie  pipe,  i^  ID,  in  length,      d.  Lirfc  bowl  of  catlinlK|dpt,  io){  IB,  long;  from  RamKy  county,      r.  Cil- 

at>oul4i<i.     f.  Clay  pipe,  bent:    length  j  In. ;   fauod  In  borial  [dl  In  Ben»n  county.     A.  Calliniit  pipe- 
bowl,  i>i  in.  long,      i.  Smighi  bowl i:!' clny  pipe:  length  iH  in.;    found  in  burial  pit  in  Ramiey  CDuniy, 


!    ( 


t    ; 


MONTGOMERY]       PREHISTORIC  MAN  IN  THE  DAKOTAS  647 

Mounds  2  and  3  were  each  about  30  feet  in  diameter  and  2  feet 
high.     They  were  connected  by  a  short  earthen  ridge. 

Mounds  on  Section  18 y  Range  dj,  Township  755 

Two  mounds  on  this  section  were  connected  by  a  wide  ridge  1 10 
feet  in  length.  One  of  these  mounds  had  a  burial  pit  which  con- 
tained human  skeletons,  and  large  marine  shell  beads  made  from 
the  columella  of  a  gasteropod  shell,  probably  Busy  con  perversum. 

Mounds  in  Benson  Counit 
Mounds  on  Range  6^,  Township  1^2 

Mound  I  was  on  Sully's  hill,  immediately  south  of  Devils  lake, 
and  about  145  feet  above  the  level  of  the  latter.  It  had  charred 
wood,  and  two  circular  burial  pits  that  had  been  excavated  in  shale. 
One  pit  contained  four  human  skeletons,  four  perforated  marine 
shell  beads  (pi.  xxxiv,  ^),  fifteen  pearly  shell  pendants,  and  two 
large  marine  shell  beads,  similar  to  those  found  on  Section  19, 
Range  63,  previously  described.  The  other  pit  contained  nine 
human  skeletons,  greatly  decomposed,  and  one  large,  curved,  clay 
pipe  about  five  inches  in  length  (pi.  xxxiii,  g  ). 

Mound  2  had  two  burial  pits  containing  four  human  skeletons, 
greatly  decomposed. 

Mound  5  had  at  a  depth  of  two  feet  a  bed  of  ashes,  charcoal, 

charred  and  partly  burnt  wood,  and  many  charred  and  partially 

burnt  bones  of  man  and  other  animals.     The  greater  part  of  a 

human  skull,  also  burnt,  was  removed  by  me  from  this  bed,  as  well 

as  partly  burnt  jaws  and  skulls  of  bears  and  other  animals.     All 

these  were  in  the  ash  bed,  which  was  about  six  feet  in  diameter  and 

occupied  the  center  of  the  tumulus.     No  chamber  or  pit  was  found, 

although  a  thorough  and  extended  exploration  of  the  mound  was 

made.     It  appeared  to  me  that  the  contents  of  this  mound  indicated 

feasting  of  some  kind  —  whether  cannibalistic  feasts  or  religious  rites 

once  held  upon  the  mound,  it  may  be  difficult  to  determine.     The 

mound  externally  had  the  shape  and  appearance  of  a  typical  burial 

mound. 

Mounds  on  Range  64,  Township  1^2 

Mound  I  was  circular  in  form,  30  feet  in  diameter  and  5  feet  in 
height ;  it  occupied  a  conspicuous  position  on  the  south  of  Devils 


648 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[if.  s.,  8,  1906 


lake.  Sod  and  black  soil  to  the  depth  of  a  foot  were  removed  from 
the  surface,  and  then  red,  burnt  clay  more  than  a  foot  in  depth  was 
discovered.  This  latter  extended  over  a  large  part  of  the  mound. 
A  little  charcoal  was  found,  and  a  very  small  quantity  of  half-burnt 
wood  ;  but  there  were  no  human  remains.  This  I  regarded  as  a 
beacon  mound  for  the  purpose  of  signaling  by  means  of  a  bonfire. 
A  long  earthen  ridge,  3  feet  high  and  3  feet  wide,  occurred  within 
twelve  feet  of  this  tumulus,  on  the  side  remote  from  the  lake. 

Oblong  or  elongate  mounds  occurred  also  east  of  Fort  Totten. 

Mounds  in  Walsh  Couniy 

Mounds  on  Section  J2y  Range  ^^^  Township  !§§ 

There  were  thirty-five  mounds  and  four  long  ridges  or  embank- 
ments situated  near  the  head  of  Forest  river.  Not  all  of  these  are 
indicated  on  the  accompanying  plan  (figure  21).     A  noticeable  feat- 


I'k;.  21. —  Plan  of  inouiuls  and  ridges  near  Forest  river,  Walsh  county,  North  Dakota. 

urc  of  llicsc  mounds  was  their  great  width,  many  of  them  ranging 
from  60  to  90  feet  in  diameter.  A  number  of  them  were  elongate. 
Another  cliaracteristic  was  the  connection  of  some  of  these  mounds 
by  lon^  low  ridges  or  embankments.  Some  of  the  latter  were 
of  .L^reat  length,  bein^  respectively  1,1 18  feet,  2,064  feet,  and  2,688 
feet  long.      The  ridges  ran  in   a  direct  line  to  the  center  of  the 


OBJECTS  OF   ANTLER,   BONE,  SHEl 


1    DAKOTA    MOUNOS 


t.  P<uly  ibcll  I 
piece  of  copper 


'ed  line  of  ■  deer'*  uider.  d.  Bod  made  Train  ihe 
unmepli,  perfontcd  «id  notched;  [ound  with  ihe  h 
■  be«.|.  f.  Smell  marine  ihelU  peribrtled  by  grind 
ece.     I.  Bone  fiihing  ipeu. 


MONTGOMERY]      PREHISTORIC  MAN  IN  THE  DAKOTAS  649 

mound  in  the  case  of  all  the  five  mounds  considered.  Similar  but 
shorter  connecting  ridges  occurred  in  Benson  and  Ramsey  counties. 

Mound  I  had  a  diameter  of  90  feet  and  a  height  of  1 2  feet.  A 
thin  layer  of  yellow  clay  was  discovered  four  or  five  feet  beneath 
the  surface ;  this  covered  an  area  twenty  feet  in  diameter.  Of  about 
a  dozen  human  skeletons  only  three  were  in  condition  to  be 
removed.  In  addition  to  these  there  were  twenty-two  pearly  shell 
rings  with  one  oblong  piece,  four  beads  of  a  heavy  marine  shell, 
two  large  birch-bark  baskets,  one  pipe  made  from  a  large  antler  or 
bony  horn  and  somewhat  pear-shaped,  and  a  small  heap  of  sticky 
clay,  soapstone,  and  red  ocher.  Two  of  the  rings  are  shown  in 
plate  XXXIV,  // ;  they  probably  formed  part  of  a  necklace. 

Similar  oblong  shell  pieces  were  found  in  two  pits  in  the  mounds 
in  Benson  county.     The  horn  pipe  is  represented  in  plate  xxxiii,/. 

Mound  2  was  connected  with  Mound  i  by  a  ridge  or  embankment 
242  feet  long  and  14  feet  wide.  It  was  connected  with  another 
mound  also  by  a  ridge  2,064  feet  long  and  12  feet  wide.  The 
ridges  were  nearly  3  feet  high  when  first  observed  by  the  writer  in 
1883,  but  tillage  had  reduced  their  height  to  about  15  inches  six 
years  later. 

Mound 5  contained  charred  wood  and  two  burial  pits.  The  latter 
were  each  about  4  feet  in  diameter  and  2  J^  feet  in  depth.  The 
bottom  of  each  pit  was  about  7  ^  feet  below  the  mound's  summit  ; 
and  the  pits  were  about  9  inches  apart.  One  of  them  contained 
four  human  skeletons,  a  heap  of  red  ocher  more  than  a  pound  in 
weight,  and  a  copper  article.  The  other  pit  had  bark  covering  the 
bottom,  and  contained  nine  human  skeletons,  one  marine  shell  bead, 
and  a  perforated  antler. 

Mounds  in  Grand  Forks  County 

Mounds  on  Range  50,  Township  I^i 

Mound  /,  in  the  city  of  Grand  Forks  and  on  the  left  bank  of  Red 
river,  when  first  seen  by  the  Hon.  M.  L.  McCormack  in  1870  was 
twelve  feet  high ;  but  after  many  years  of  cultivation  its  height  be- 
came reduced  to  about  six  feet  in  1888,  when  I  undertook  its 
exploration.  Its  diameter  was  seventy-five  feet.  No  burial  pit  or 
wood  was  found,  but  it  contained  bones  representing  twelve  human 


650  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s.,  8,  1906 

skeletons,  overlaid  with  two  inches  of  yellow  clay.  As  the  owner 
desired  the  soil  of  this  mound  for  the  improvement  of  a  neighbor- 
ing lawn,  under  the  direction  of  the  writer  the  mound  was  com- 
pletely removed  and  it  yielded  more  than  six  hundred  two-horse 
wagon  loads  of  black  soil. 

In  Roberts,  Brown,  Marshall,  and  other  counties  of  South  Da- 
kota there  have  been  numerous  earth  tumuli  very  similar  to  those 
of  Ramsey,  Walsh,  and  other  northern  counties. 

When  the  military  post  Fort  Sisseton  existed  in  South  Dakota 
upward  of  forty  tumuli  were  counted  within  a  few  miles  thereof. 
They  occurred  in  groups  of  four  to  seven,  situated  upon  small 
natural  elevations.  Their  average  diameter  was  about  forty-five 
feet,  and  the  human  skulls  and  other  objects  which  the  writer  has 
seen  taken  from  them  bore  close  resemblance  to  those  taken  from 
the  tumuli  previously  described. 

The  foregoing  are  examples  of  the  mounds  of  the  Northwest. 
They  show  considerable  care  and  intelligence  on  the  part  of  those 
who  reared  them.  By  means  of  wooden,  stone,  and  bone  implements 
their  builders  succeeded  in  digging  smooth-walled,  regularly-formed 
circular  graves,  and  in  interring  their  dead  in  a  manner  much  better 
calculated  to  preserve  indefinitely  the  bodies  and  their  accompani- 
ments than  the  methods  practised  by  many  civilized  peoples  at  the 
present  time.  The  interior  of  the  mounds  was  extremely  dry  in 
every  instance  ;  this  was  due  to  the  mode  of  structure  and  partly 
also  to  the  climate.  A  striking  feature  to  be  observed  here  is  the 
uniformity  in  the  structure  of  many  of  the  mounds. 

Measurements  of  many  crania  show  the  mesocephalic  index. 

The  builders  of  the  mounds  procured  the  copper  from  Michigan 
or  its  vicinity,  and  the  catlinite  from  Minnesota.  They  obtained 
some  of  the  shells  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  or  the  Pacific  ocean, 
probably  through  trade,  and  the  remaining  shells  were  taken  from 
the  rivers.  The  bark  of  the  birch  tree  was  transported  one  hundred 
or  two  hundred  miles.  The  catlinite  pipes  are  all  of  one  shape, 
straight  and  stemless.  Some  of  the  cut  pieces  of  hollow  wing- 
bones  of  the  larger  birds  may  have  served  as  stems.  The  clay 
pipes  are  of  two  forms,  straight  and  curved.     These  and  the  antler 


MONTGOMERY]       PREHISTORIC  MAN  IN  THE  DAKOTAS  65 1 

pipes  seem  to  have  been  fewer  in  number  than  those  made  of  catlin- 
ite.  The  pottery  is  confined  to  urns ;  these  were  fairly  plentiful, 
however,  and  they  appear  to  have  been  all  or  nearly  all  in  perfect 
condition  at  the  time  of  their  interment.  It  is  worthy  of  note  that 
no  pottery,  broken  or  otherwise,  was  found  upon  the  surface  of  the 
ground. 

Both  in  their  pottery  and  in  their  mode  of  burial  the  prehistoric 
mound-builders  of  the  Dakotas  differed  very  widely  from  the  prehis- 
toric people  of  Utah  and  the  Southwest.  That  they  were  akin  in 
culture  to  the  mound-builders  of  the  Mississippi  valley  there  can  be 
no  doubt ;  yet  they  differed  from  them  in  some  respects.  In  their 
pottery,  as  pointed  out  by  Professor  Holmes,  and  in  their  straight 
tubular  pipes,  they  possessed  types  peculiar  to  themselves.  They 
also  occasionally  reared  elongated  mounds  and  they  connected 
some  of  their  tumuli  by  very  long  earthen  ridges. 

The  Museum, 

University  of  Toronto. 


.n 


THE  DIALECTIC  DIVISIONS  OF  THE  MOQUELUMNAN 

FAMILY    IN    RELATION   TO   THE   INTERNAL 

DIFFERENTIATION  OF  THE  OTHER  LIN- 

GUISTIC  FAMILIES  OF  CALIFORNIA 

By  a.  L.  KROEBER 

As  a  linguistic  area  California  is  noted  for  the  number  of  its  dis- 
tinct stocks  or  families.  With  a  few  doubtful  exceptions  these  fam- 
ilies stand  practically  as  they  were  originally  determined,  and  the 
most  recent  investigations  as  yet  give  but  little  indication  that  their 
number,  which  is  above  twenty,  will  be  materially  reduced  through 
the  discovery  of  identities  resulting  from  deeper  study. 

As  to  the  number  and  nature  of  the  subdivisions  of  these  fami- 
lies there  is  however  still  much  confusion.  Comparatively  abun- 
dant material  in  the  form  of  vocabularies  has  been  extant  for  many 
years,  but  the  character  of  this  material  is  such  as  to  give  rise  to  as 
many  doubts  as  positive  determinations.  The  vocabularies  were 
collected  at  different  places  and  at  different  times  by  various  observ- 
ers, many  of  them  untrained,  using  the  crudest  orthographies,  and 
at  times  very  imperfectly  acquainted  with  the  modes  of  life  and  the 
ideas  that  shape  and  condition  the  vocabulary  of  any  people.  In 
many  cases  it  is  therefore  not  impossible  that  dissimilar  vocabu- 
laries represented  similar  or  even  identical  dialects.  Instances  of 
this  sort  are  not  lacking,  as  is  witnessed  by  the  several  Wishosk  or 
Wiyot  vocabularies,  which  are  only  interpretations  of  one  undiffer- 
entiated language.  On  the  other  hand,  until  direct  evidence  has 
been  brought  to  the  contrary,  it  is  always  possible  that  the  dissimilar 
word-lists  represent  dialects  that  are  actually  different.  Between 
these  two  possibilities  there  is  little  room  for  any  certainty  in  each 
case  until  more  satisfactory  information  has  become  available. 

On  the  one  hand  there  has  been  a  tendency  among  scholars  not 
personally  acquainted  with  the  native  languages  of  California,  to 
regard  the  families  of  the  state,  which  in  their  territorial  extent  and 

652 


kroebkr]  the  MOQUELUMNAN  family  653 

the  number  of  individuals  comprised  by  them  are  often  more  nearly 
the  equivalent  of  the  language  or  dialect  elsewhere,  as  the  repre- 
sentatives of  such  less  fundamental  divisions,  which  through  pecu- 
liarities of  culture  or  environment  have  in  California  become  differ- 
entiated into  distinct  stocks.  Following  out  this  view  it  is  tacitly 
assumed  that  the  California  families  show  no  noteworthy  internal 
differentiations,  and  that  the  total  number  of  dialects  occurring  in 
the  state  is  virtually  summed  up  by  the  number  of  linguistic 
families.  On  the  other  hand  the  diversity  in  point  of  families,  the 
apparent  differences  between  published  vocabularies  of  the  same 
family,  as  well  as  general  statements  by  observers  who  have  made 
no  linguistic  records,  have  given  rise  to  the  idea  that  the  diversity 
of  families  is  only  indicative  of  a  more  general  and  much  greater 
diversity  of  speech.  According  to  this  view  the  families  are  sub- 
divided into  languages,  and  these  into  dialects,  making  the  total  of 
varying  forms  of  speech  in  the  state  an  enormous  number.  Bear- 
ing on  this  question,  the  present  paper  summarizes  the  results  of  re- 
cent study  of  several  California  families,  with  especial  reference  to 
conditions  existing  in  one  of  their  number  —  the  Moquelumnan  — 
that  is  among  the  least  known,  and  with  a  view  to  determining  as 
far  as  is  possible  at  present  the  nature  and  degree  of  the  internal  or 
dialectic  differentiation  of  families  throughout  the  state. 

The  Maidu,  who  adjoin  the  Moquelumnan  people  on  the  north, 
according  to  Professor  R.  B.  Dixon  speak  three  well-marked  dia- 
lects or  languages,  which  he  has  named  northeastern,  northwestern, 
and  southern.  Within  each  of  these  three  dialects  local  differen- 
tiations are  very  slight.  For  exact  knowledge  of  the  degree  of 
difference  between  the  three  dialects,  and  of  such  minor  variations 
as  there  may  be  within  each,  it  will  be  necessary  to  await  the  publi- 
cation of  the  results  of  Professor  Dixon's  linguistic  investigations. 

The  Shasta  and  Achomawi  of  northeastern  California  have  re- 
cently been  united  by  Professor  Dixon  into  a  single  family.* 
Within  this  family  he  recognizes  six  subdivisions,  several  of  them 
on  the  verge  of  extinction  and  surviving  in  only  a  partial  state. 
Two  of  these  divisions  fall  within  the  limits  of  the  former  Achomawi 


>  See  American  Anthropologist ^  19051  vil,  213. 


6S4  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

and  four  within  the  former  Shasta  family.  The  brief  vocabularies 
which  he  has  published  in  support  of  his  unification  show  all  six 
subdivisions  to  be  so  markedly  different  from  one  another  as  to  con- 
stitute true  languages.  According  to  Professor  Dixon's  personal 
statement,  however,  none  of  these  six  languages  appears  to  have 
been  appreciably  differentiated  into  dialects. 

In  northwestern  California  are  situated  several  families  of  unusu- 
ally small  territorial  extent :  the  Yurok,  Karok,  Wishosk,  and 
Chimariko.  The  principal  body  of  the  Yurok,  occupying  all  the 
territory  along  the  Klamath  and  part  of  that  on  the  coast,  speak  a 
uniform  dialect.  In  the  strip  of  coast  extending  southward  from 
the  mouth  of  the  Klamath  there  are  three  dialects,  at  Gold  Bluff, 
Orick,  and  Trinidad,  successively  more  divergent  from  the  principal 
form  of  Yurok  speech.  The  differences  are,  however,  not  very 
'  great,  and  even  the  Trinidad  dialect  was  intelligible  to  the  river 
Yurok.  The  Karok  possessed  a  uniform  dialect  over  the  greater 
part  of  their  territory.  Those  in  the  north  about  Happy  Camp 
are  said  to  have  spoken  a  quite  distinct  dialect,  which  does  not  ap- 
pear even  to  have  been  recorded.  This  dialect  is  said  to  have  been 
at  least  partly  unintelligible  to  the  main  body  of  the  Karok,  and 
must  thus  be  regarded  as  constituting  a  separate  language  within 
the  family.  Nothing  is  said  by  the  Indians  of  any  intermediate 
forms  of  speech  connecting  the  two  languages.  The  Chimariko, 
who  were  a  small  body  of  people,  spoke  only  one  dialect.  The 
same  is  true  of  the  Wishosk,  who,  though  probably  more  numer- 
ous, also  occupied  a  restricted  territory. 

As  to  the  Athabascan  dialects  of  northwestern  California  avail- 
able information  is  lacking.  Professor  P.  E.  Goddard,  who  has 
made  a  special  study  of  these  languages,  groups  the  Hupa  and  a 
few  of  the  neighboring  Indians  into  a  dialectic  division  more  or  less 
divergent  from  the  remaining  dialects. 

Southward  of  this  region,  in  and  about  Mendocino  county,  are 
the  Yuki,  whose  speech  has  four  principal  forms.  In  a  detached 
territory  in  the  south  are  the  Wappo,  who  apparently  have  been 
separated  from  the  other  Yuki  for  a  long  period,  as  their  language 
is  very  distinct.  They  are  aware  of  many  similarities  existing 
between  their  speech  and  the  Yuki  proper,  but  cannot  understand 


KROEBER]  THE  MOQUELUMNAN  FAMILY  655 

the  latter.  The  Wappo  themselves  distinguish  four  dialects  of 
their  language,  but  Mr  S.  A.  Barrett,  who  has  carefully  examined 
these  dialects,  fails  to  find  any  appreciable  difference  between  them. 

The  main  body  of  the  Yuki  speak  three  dialects  :  that  of  the  Yuki 
proper,  the  adjacent  Huchnom,  and  the  coast  Yuki.  The  coast 
Yuki  are  separated  from  the  Yuki  proper  by  Athabascans,  and 
their  dialect  has  the  appearance  of  being  a  comparatively  recent 
but  rapidly  diverging  offshoot  from  that  of  the  Yuki.  Within  the 
Yuki  proper  there  are  several  minor  dialectic  variations  the  degree 
of  which  has  not  been  determined,  though  it  does  not  appear  to  be 
considerable. 

Adjoining  the  Yuki  on  the  south  are  the  Pomo,  whose  dialects 
have  been  carefully  determined  by  Mr  S.  A.  Barrett.  He  has 
found  seven  of  these  dialects,  which  differ  to  such  a  degree  in  the 
forms  of  many  of  their  words,  and  show  distinct  radicals  for  so 
many  other  words,  that  they  should  perhaps  be  considered  lan- 
guages rather  than  dialects.  With  the  exception  of  one  slight  sub- 
dialect  he  finds  no  diversification  of  any  of  these  seven  languages. 
This  is  the  more  noteworthy  as  a  number  of  distinct  villages  or 
political  units  were  comprised  under  each  language,  and  as  several 
of  the  languages  extended  over  territories  of  quite  diverse  environ- 
ment, such  as  the  coast  and  the  interior.  Mr  Barrett's  study  was 
made  with  the  special  purpose  of  determining  the  total  amount  of 
dialectic  variation  existing  within  the  family,  and  has  been  exhaustive. 
While  his  results  cannot  be  expected  to  apply  to  all  other  families 
of  the  state,  they  are  no  doubt  indicative  of  conditions  existing  in 
a  number  of  them. 

Among  the  Wintun  no  such  systematic  studies  have  been  made 
as  among  most  of  the  families  heretofore  enumerated.  Partial 
investigations  however  reveal  three  well-marked  groups.  The 
central  one  of  these  occupies  very  nearly  the  territory  covered  by 
Glenn  and  Tehama  counties ;  the  other  two  occupy  all  the  Wintun 
area  respectively  to  the  north  and  south.  It  does  not  appear  that 
there  were  any  considerable  differentiations  within  each  of  these 
three  dialects  or  languages. 

The  Washo,  who,  though  primarily  a  Nevada  people,  occupied 
a  limited  territory  in  east  central  California,  are  said  by  themselves 
to  have  spoken  one  language  without  dialectic  modifications. 


656  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

On  reviewing  the  information  thus  available  as  to  the  northern 
part  of  the  state,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  internal  differentiation  of 
the  families  is  much  less  than  has  often  been  assumed.  Several 
families  are  without  dialects  and  none  show  more  than  six  or  eight. 
It  is  especially  noteworthy  that  in  most  cases  the  dialects  are  on 
the  one  hand  quite  sharply  distinct  from  one  another,  and  on  the 
other  show  but  little  or  no  internal  variation.  The  statements  fre- 
quently made  as  to  the  change  of  native  languages  encountered 
every  few  miles  as  one  travels  in  California,  with  a  constant  gradual 
increase  of  differences,  are  thus  on  the  whole  unfounded  so  far  as 
northern  California  is  concerned. 

In  the  central  and  southern  parts  of  the  state  a  smaller  number 
of  families  occupy  a  larger  territory.  In  several  of  these  a  greater 
number  of  dialects  occur  than  in  any  family  of  northern  California. 
Several  stocks  are  so  much  reduced  in  numbers  that  it  is  doubtful 
whether  the  total  number  of  their  dialects  and  the  degree  of  simi- 
larity and  dissimilarity  of  these  can  be  ascertained. 

This  is  the  case  among  the  Costanoan  stock,  which  inhabited  the 
coast  region  between  San  Francisco  and  Monterey.  Vocabularies 
have  been  published  or  procured  from  the  Indians  at  the  seven 
Spanish  missions  in  this  territory,  which  show  that  distinct  dialects 
were  spoken  at  each  of  these  places.  There  is  every  indication  that 
the  total  number  of  dialects  in  the  family  was  larger.  The  infor- 
mation that  there  is  or  that  can  still  be  obtained  however  represents 
only  points  or  isolated  limited  portions  of  an  area,  so  that  the  exact 
determination  of  the  dialectic  groups  of  the  stock  and  of  their  sub- 
divisions cannot  be  attempted. 

The  Esselen  family,  which  consisted  of  a  small  number,  of  people 
inhabiting  a  restricted  territory  on  the  coast  south  of  Monterey,  is 
now  extinct.  There  is  nothing  to  show  that  this  language  was 
dialectically  modified. 

The  Salinan  family,  south  of  the  Costanoan  and  Esselen,  is  also 
very  little  known.  The  native  speech  at  the  two  missions  in  Salinan 
territory,  San  Miguel  and  San  Antonio,  was  different.  The  two 
dialects  could  not  have  been  altogether  mutually  intelligible.  There 
is  nothing  to  indicate  that  there  were  any  other  Salinan  dialects,  but 
on  the  other  hand  it  cannot  be  stated  positively  that  such  other 
dialects  were  lacking. 


KROKBER]  THE  MO  QUEL  UMNAN  FAMILY  657 

The  Chumash,  the  next  family  southward  along  the  coast,  pos- 
sessed a  considerable  number  of  dialects.  Five  of  these  are  known, 
those  of  San  Luis  Obispo,  Santa  Inez,  Santa  Barbara,  San  Buena- 
ventura, and  Santa  Cruz  island.  The  San  Luis  Obispo  form  of 
speech  was  very  different  from  all  the  others,  and  must  have  con- 
stituted a  separate  language.  There  is  every  indication  that  the 
total  number  of  Chumash  dialects  was  greater  than  the  number  of 
those  known,  and  it  would  probably  be  no  exaggeration  to  say  that 
there  were  ten  or  more.  The  precise  interrelations  and  grouping 
of  these  are  undetermined. 

South  of  the  Chumash  the  coast  and  considerable  areas  inland 
are  held  by  Indians  of  the  Shoshonean  and  Yuman  families,  both 
of  which  are  principally  extra-Californian.  Both  families  show  con- 
siderable modifications  within  the  state.  Among  the  Yuman  peo- 
ple, for  instance,  the  speech  of  the  Mohave  and  Yuma  of  the  Colo- 
rado river  is  distinct  from  that  of  the  Diegueno  and  other  groups 
of  the  coast  and  interior,  but  the  degree  of  difference  between  the 
several  dialects  existing  within  each  of  these  two  divisions,  and  their 
relation  to  other  divisions  of  the  family,  have  not  been  exactly  de- 
termined. The  Shoshonean  languages  of  California  were  consid- 
erably diversified,  evidently  to  a  much  greater  degree  than  the 
Shoshonean  languages  spoken  elsewhere.  Of  eight  principal  dia- 
lectic groups  or  branches  into  which  it  is  possible  at  present  to  clas- 
sify the  Shoshonean  family,  four  are  confined  to  California,  while 
two  others  occur  both  within  and  without  the  state.  At  least  part 
and  perhaps  all  of  these  dialectic  groups  are  again  differentiated. 
Thus  the  southernmost  group  comprises  the  Luiseno,  Agua  Cali- 
ente,  and  Cahuilla  languages,  which  are  nearly  unintelligible  to  one 
another,  besides  the  dialects  of  San  Juan  Capistrano  and  San  Jacinto. 
No  complete  investigation  of  the  Shoshonean  dialects  of  California 
has  however  been  made,  so  that  it  is  impossible  to  state  the  amount 
of  diversity  within  the  several  dialectic  groups  or  the  total  number 
of  dialects. 

The  Yokuts  family,  which  occupied  the  territory  immediately 
south  of  the  Moquelumnan  stock,  differed  from  the  majority  of  the 
families  of  California  in  that  its  members  were  not  socially  and  po- 
Htically  organized  into  village  units  but  into  small  tribes.     What 


658  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s..  8,  1906 

is  even  more  distinctive  is  that  each  of  these  tribes,  of  which  there 
were  at  least  forty,  possessed  a  dialect  of  its  own.  There  appears 
to  have  been  no  exception  to  this  condition.  The  dialects  differed 
both  in  the  forms  of  certain  words  and  more  particularly  in  fre- 
quently using  different  words  to  express  the  same  idea.  Within 
certain  related  groups  of  dialects  the  differences  were  however  not 
extensive.  There  were  six  such  groups.  Within  each  group  there 
was  practical  mutual  intelligibility,  and  even  individuals  belong- 
ing to  distinct  groups  could  in  most  cases  have  largely  understood 
one  another.  These  determinations  rest  upon  vocabularies  procured 
in  the  same  manner  and  in  the  same  orthography  from  twenty 
tribes,  representing  all  of  the  six  groups  mentioned.  It  does  not 
appear  that  any  of  the  extinct  dialects  belonged  to  other  groups 
than  the  six  that  are  known. 

The  Moquelumnan  family  is  of  interest  because  its  principal  body 
is  situated  between  the  Maidu  and  the  Yokuts,  two  stocks  that 
show  entirely  different  conditions  as  regards  their  dialectic  differen- 
tiation :  the  Maidu  family  on  the  north  having  three  well-marked 
dialects,  apparently  without  significant  sub-dialectic  divisions,  and 
without  relation  of  the  political  unit  —  the  village  —  to  the  dialect ; 
while  the  Yokuts  family  shows  at  least  forty  dialects  falling  into 
several  groups,  or,  it  might  be  said,  six  principal  dialects,  each  dif- 
ferentiated into  a  number  of  sub-dialects  corresponding  exactly 
with  the  unit  of  political  organization,  the  tribe.  The  environment 
of  the  three  stocks  is  similar,  all  being  situated  on  the  western 
slope  of  the  Sierra  Nevada,  between  the  crest  of  this  range  and  the 
north -south  river  system  longitudinally  bisecting  the  San  Joaquin - 
Sacramento  valley. 

The  Moquelumnan  family  was  originally  included  with  the  Costa- 
noan  in  the  so-called  Mutsun,  named  after  the  language,  or  more 
probably  the  village,  at  the  mission  of  San  Juan  Bautista.  The 
Moquelumnan  family,  as  at  present  generally  recognized,  consists  of 
two  detached  divisions,  the  principal  one  occupying  the  territory  in 
the  San  Joaquin  valley  and  on  the  slope  of  the  Sierra  Nevada  that 
has  been  mentioned,  the  other  a  smaller  territory  on  and  near  the 
coast  north  of  San  Francisco.  This  smaller  division  comprises 
three  dialects,  determined  by  Mr  Barrett.    These  dialects  are  spoken 


KROEBER]  THE  MOQUELUMNAN  FAMILY  659 

in  two  separate  areas.  Of  these  two  areas  one  is  near  Clear  lake, 
the  other  north  of  San  Francisco  bay.  The  speech  in  the  two 
areas  is  distinct,  but  that  of  the  area  near  San  Francisco  bay  is  sub- 
divided into  two  dialects,  the  extent  of  one  covering  the  greater 
part  of  Marin  county,  the  other  being  confined  to  the  immediate 
vicinity  of  Bodega  bay.  These  three  northwestern  Moquelumnan 
dialects  together  form  a  unit  as  compared  with  all  those  of  the  larger 
body  in  the  interior,  as  might  be  expected  from  their  geographical 
relation. 

The  people  of  the  principal  division  of  the  Moquelumnan  family 
call  themselves  by  some  form  of  the  name  Miwok,  under  which 
they  have  most  frequently  been  known.  They  occupy  one  of  the 
largest  territories  held  by  a  single  family  in  California,  extending 
from  the  Consumnes  river  on  the  north  to  the  Fresno  and  Chow- 
chilla  in  the  south.  The  miscellaneous  published  vocabularies 
show  considerable  differences  in  this  area,  but  as  a  body  are  open 
to  the  objections  that  have  been  described.  Incidentally  to  investi- 
gations among  neighboring  families,  the  author  has  obtained  half  a 
dozen  list  of  words  from  the  Miwok  in  different  portions  of  their 
territory,  particularly  the  extreme  north  and  south.  Comparison 
of  these  with  one  another,  and  in  part  with  the  published  vocabu- 
laries, brings  out  at  least  certain  features  of  the  distribution  of  the 
Miwok  dialects. 

Preeminently  it  appears  that  the  language  of  the  people  inhabit- 
ing the  plains  along  the  lower  Consumnes  and  Mokelumne  differed 
most  markedly  from  the  speech  of  all  the  other  Miwok  known. 
This  divergent  group  was  in  contact  with,  or  propinquity  to,  the 
southern  Maidu  and  Wintun,  the  northeastern  Costanoan  people, 
and  the  detached  branch  of  the  Yokuts  known  as  Chulamni  or 
Cholovone,  who  inhabited  the  region  about  Stockton.  The  group 
comprised  the  Mokelumni  and  Mokosumni,  on  the  lower  courses  of 
the  streams  bearing  similar  names,  and  the  Ochekhamni,  of  unknown 
but  probably  adjacent  habitat,  besides  perhaps  other  divisions.  Its 
extension  southward  is  not  known.  As  compared  with  this  north- 
western group  in  the  valley,  all  the  remaining  Miwok  appear  to 
form  a  comparative  unit,  from  the  Koni  between  the  upper  Consumnes 
and  Mokelumne  to  the  Pohonichi  on  Fresno  river.     This  larger 

AM    ANTH.,  N    S.,  &-43. 


66o 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


unit  shows  only  one  marked  subdivision.  The  speech  in  the  north- 
em  part  of  the  territory  differs  somewhat  from  that  in  the  south. 
Within  the  northern  area  there  are  no  differences  of  moment  between 
the  Koni  at  lone  in  Amador  county  and  the  dialect  of  Angels  Camp 
in  Calaveras  county  in  the  Stanislaus  drainage.  The  Tuolumne 
vocabulary  published  in  Powers'  '*  Tribes  of  California  "  shows  the 
same  form  of  speech  to  have  prevailed  at  least  as  far  south  as  this 
river.  As  against  this  northern  unit,  the  author's  vocabularies  from 
Merced  and  Fresno  rivers  also  present  a  practical  uniformity.  It  is 
probable  that  there  were  slight  differentiations  within  each  of  these 
two  groups,  but  as  to  such  nothing  can  be  affirmed  in  the  present 
state  of  knowledge.  A  full  linguistic  survey  by  a  single  investigator 
must  be  made  to  elucidate  this  matter.  Such  a  survey  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  of  the  University  of  California  is  at  present 
undertaking.  Until  the  results  of  this  investigation  shall  become 
available,  it  can  be  stated  that  there  appear  to  be  but  three  well- 
marked  Miwok  dialects :  one,  the  most  divergent,  in  the  northern 
plains,  a  second  in  the  northern  and  central  foot-hills  and  moun- 
tains, and  a  third  in  the  south,  and  that  the  diversification  within 
each  of  these  dialects  or  languages  appears  to  be  of  comparatively 
little  moment.  It  will  therefore  be  seen  that  the  dialectic  relations 
of  the  Miwok  people  resemble  those  of  their  northern  neighbors, 
the  Maidu,  and  not  those  of  the  Yokuts  to  the  south. 


1 

"  MOKBLUMNi" 

San  Joaquin  Co. 

kenatu 

"  Koni  " 
Amador  Co. 

luti 

Angels  Camp 
Calaveras  Co. 

kene 

YOSBMITB 

Mariposa  Co 

kefie 

"  POHONICHI  " 

Madera  Co. 

kefie 

2 

oyoko 

otiko 

otiko 

otiko 

otiko 

3 

teloko 

tolokocu 

tolokocu 

'  tolokot 

tolokot 

4 
5 

oiceko 
kacoko 

oyisa 
macoka 

oyisa 
macoka 

oyisa 
inahoka 

oyisa 
mahoka 

6 

temepu 

temoka 

temoka 

temoka 

temoka 

7 

kenekak 

kenekakw 

kenekak /V 

titawa 

titawa 

8 

kawinta 

kawinta 

kawinta 

kawinta 

kawinta 

9 

woe 

woe 

woe 

eliwa 

eliwa 

10 

ekuke 

naatca 

naatca 

naatca 

naatca 

person 

iniw" 

iniw// 

miwtt 

wiwsu 

miw/V 

man 

cawe 

nafia 

nafia 

nafia 

nafia 

eye 

welai 

Q,U\.U 

c^ntw 

x^nt// 

h/V'nt// 

kroeber] 


THE  MOQUELUMNAN  FAMILY 


66 1 


"  MOKBLUMNI " 

San  Joaquin  Co. 

"Kom" 
Amador  Co. 

Angbls  Camp 
Calaveras  Co. 

YOSBMITB 

Mariposa  Co. 

**  POHONICHl  " 

Madera  Co. 

mouth 

lupe 

OWO 

awo 

awo 

OWO 

nose 

huk 

huku 

nito 

nito 

nito 

foot 

kolo 

kolo 

hate 

hate 

hate 

bone 

kiwa 

k^tcitcu 

ktttcitcu 

ktttcitc 

k«tcitc 

land 

wall 

wali 

wali 

tole 

tole 

smoke 

kali 

hakisu 

hakisu 

hakisa 

hakisa 

ashes 

sike 

yoli 

sike 

sike 

sike 

rock 

kulu 

cawa 

cawa 

cawa,hawa  hawa 

wood 

tumai 

cucu 

cucu 

ciicu,  xiixu  hiihu 

red 

wetete 

weteti 

weteti 

yotcotci 

yotcotci 

white 

pututu 

keleli 

keleli 

pasasi 

pasasi 

black 

kululu 

kululi 

kululi 

tuhuxi 

tuhuxi 

large 

teme 

utu 

uXu- 

oyani 

oyani 

good 

welwel 

gutci 

gutci 

icutu 

tcutu 

eat 

tcam- 

ii^u 

iiwu 

iiwu 

UVfU 

north 

tela-wit 

tam- 

tam- 

tam- 

south 

yak-wit 

tcum- 

tcum- 

tcum- 

east 

huke-wit 

hisu- 

hicu- 

hihu- 

west 

etca-wit 

olowi- 

olowi- 

olowi- 

In  the  apparently  rigid  restriction  of  the  northern  plains  or 
Mokelumni  dialect  to  the  valley,  there  appears  however  to  be  a 
similarity  to  conditions  existing  among  the  Yokuts.  In  the  latter 
family  the  six  dialectic  groups  are  with  scarcely  an  exception  each 
confined  either  to  the  level  valley  or  to  the  foot-hills.  Even  more 
is  it  found,  when  the  interrelations  of  the  six  Yokuts  groups  are 
examined,  that  they  fall  into  two  principal  divisions,  one  consisting 
of  two  valley  groups,  the  other  of  four  foot-hill  groups.  Among 
the  Maidu  the  dialects  bear  no  such  relation  to  the  topographical 
environment.  The  southern  Maidu  dialect  extends  from  the  Sac- 
ramento river  to  the  crest  of  the  Sierras,  and  the  northwestern  is 
situated  both  in  the  plains  and  in  the  foothills.  It  is  not  impossible 
that  the  plains  dialect  of  the  Miwok,  which  so  far  is  known  only 
from  the  north,  extended  to  the  southern  limits  of  Miwok  territory. 
Very  few  plains  Miwok  still  survive  and  from  none  of  them  except 
those  in  the  extreme  north  do  vocabularies  appear  to  have  been 
obtained.  While  there  is  no  direct  evidence  to  support  this  suppo- 
sition of  a  fundamental  distinction  between  the  Miwok  dialects  of 


662  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  plains  and  of  the  mountains  along  their  whole  north-south  ex- 
tension, yet  the  analogous  condition  existing  among  the  Yokuts 
makes  it  a  possibility  that  should  not  be  lost  sight  of.  If  on  the 
other  hand  the  plains  group  at  present  represented  by  the  Mokelumni 
dialect  shall  be  found  not  to  extend  southward  to  the  limit  of  Miwok 
territory,  its  divergence  from  the  main  stem  of  Miwok  speech  must 
probably  be  laid  to  the  influence  of  its  geographical  position  in 
proximity  to  languages  of  four  other  families. 

An  exhaustive  study  of  the  Miwok  dialects  will  also  make  clearer 
the  relations  existing  in  California  generally  between  the  smallest 
linguistic  unit  and  the  smallest  political  or  social  unit.     As  has  been 
said,  in  the  territory  north  of  the  Miwok,  as  among  the  Maidu  and 
Pomo,  this  political  unit  is  the  village.     It  is  the  site  of  the  village 
and  not  any  social  organization  that  gives  the  name  to  a  group  of 
people.     At  the  same  time  there  is  no  direct  relation  between  the 
village  and  the  dialect,  as  each  dialect  usually  comprises  a  number  of 
separate  villages.    Among  the  Yokuts  it  is  the  tribe  or  body  of  people, 
and  not  the  locality  or  territory  occupied  by  them,  that  gives  them 
their  name,  and  at  the  same  time  the  dialect  and  tribe  are  coincident. 
While  the  Miwok  in  this  respect  seem  to  agree  more  nearly  with 
their  northern  neighbors,  there  are  certain  indications  or  at  least 
possibilities  that  they  approximated   the  Yokuts  in  some  respects. 
Thus  while  over  the  greater  part  of  their  territory  their  names  for 
one  another  seem  to  have  been  largely  the  indefinite  **  northerners," 
**  southerners,"   ^'easterners,"  and  **  westerners "  that  any  loosely 
organized  people  might  apply  to  its  neighbors,  there  yet  are  a 
number  of  names,  especially  in  the  north,  that  are  given  by  the 
Indians  as  if  they  referred  to  tribes.     Such  are  Mokelumni,  Moko- 
sumni,  Lelamni,  Tawalimni,  Sakayakumni,  and  W^alalshimni.     It  is  of 
course  not  excluded  that  these  apparent  tribal  names  will  on  close 
examination  prove  to  be  only  place  names,  as  has  so  often  been 
the  case  in  the  study  of  California  ethnology.     At  the  same  time 
the  uniform  ending  of  most  of  these  names,  and  its  similarity  to  a 
frequent  ending  of  Yokuts  tribal  names,  make  this  seem  less  prob- 
able than  would  otherwise  be  the  case.      It   is  only  necessary  to 
compare  with  the  Miwok  names  just  given  the  Yokuts  Chulamni, 
Tulamni,  Yaulamni,  Wiikchamni,  Telamni,  Choinimni,  and  Chukai- 


KROEBER]  THE  MOQUELUMNAN  FAMILY  663 

mina.  At  the  same  time  this  ending  -amni^  -umm,  or  -/;;/;//  is  found 
also  among  the  southern  Maidu  on  names  that  apparently  refer  to 
village  sites  and  not  to  bodies  of  people.  Such  are  Yukulme, 
Sekumne,  and  Yalisumni,  given  on  Professor  Dixon's  recent  map 
of  the  Maidu. ^  The  fact  that  this  ending  should  have  a  similar  use 
in  three  unrelated  stocks  is  of  itself  of  much  interest  and  significance, 
and  when  better  understood  should  not  only  throw  new  light  on  the 
historical  relations  of  these  bodies  of  people,  but  elucidate  their 
political  organization  and  its  relation  to  their  dialectic  differentiations. 

Affiliated  Colleges,  University  of  California, 
San  Francisco. 


'  Bulletin  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History ^  vol.  XVil,  pt.  3,  1905. 


HOPI   CEREMONIAL  FRAMES   FROM   CANON    DE 

CHELLY,   ARIZONA 

By  J.    WALTER   FEWKES 

On  a  visit  to  the  Museum  of  the  Brooklyn  Institute  in  December 
last,  I  became  greatly  interested  in  two  ethnological  specimens  ob- 
tained by  Mr  Stewart  Culin  in  Caiion  de  Chelly/  Arizona.      These 
objects,  to  which  I  have  briefly  referred  in  my  article  on    Hopi 
Shrines,^  undoubtedly  belong  to  the  Pueblo  culture.     They  are 
not  duplicated  in  other  collections,  and  have  a  much  greater  interest 
than  attaches  to  their  rarity,  for  they  seem  to  verify  a  legend,  cur- 
rent in  the  East  Mesa  pueblos  of  the  Hopi,  of  the  former  habitation 
and  migration  of  one  of  their  important  clans.     They  consist  of 
wooden  frames  with  sliding  appendages,  handles,  and  symbolic  at- 
tachments.    Their  general  appearance  is  shown  in  the  accompany- 
ing illustrations  (figures  22  and  23). 

Mr  Culin  informs  me  that  these  frames  were  found  with  certain 
fragments  of  masks,  a  brief  account  of  which  has  been  published  * 
in  a  notice  that  gives  also  a  Navaho  legend  regarding  the  origin  of 
the  masks  and  closes  with  a  suggestion  that  they  once  belonged  to 
the  Asa  clan,  a  Tanoan  people  now  domiciled  in  the  Hopi  pueblo  of 
Sichomovi,  who  are  known  to  have  lived  at  Zufii  and  to  have 
sojourned  in  the  Cafion  de  Chelly  for  several  years.*  No  reference 
to  these  frames  is  made  in  Mr  Culin's  account,  and  as  the  evidence 
of  Asa  ownership  which  they  furnish  is  corroborative  and  more  de- 

*  These  objects  were  purchased  from  Mr  C.  L.  Day  by  Mr  Culin,  curator  of  ethnology 
of  the  Brooklyn  Institute  Museum,  to  whom  I  am  indebted  for  many  kindnesses  in  the 
preparation  of  this  notice. 

^American  Aftt/iro/>oloi;isty  VI I,  April-June,  1906. 

3  **  Hopi  Indian  Masks  from  a  Cave  in  the  Canon  de  Chelly,  Arizona,"  Bulletin  of 
the  Brooklyn  Institute ^  Jan.  6,  1906. 

*  "  The  Kinship  of  a  Tanoan-speaking  Community  in  Tusayan,"  American  Anthro- 
pnloi:^ist,  1894,  VIII,  p.  164-165  :  "It  is  likewise  said  that  after  they  (the  Asa)  had 
lived  some  time  with  the  Hopi  a  number  of  them  wandered  off  to  the  Tseyi  [**  Chelly  **] 
Canon  and  intermarried  with  Athapascan  (Navaho)  tribes." 

664 


ii 


FEWKES] 


HOPI  CEREMONIAL  FRAMES 


66s 


cisive  than  that  aflforded  by  the  fragments  of  masks,  I  have  ventured 
to  supplement  and  support  by  additional  facts  the  notice  referred  to. 
An  examination  of  one  of  these  frames  shows  its  general  form  as 
given  in  the  figure,  in  which  a^  a!  is  a  wooden  bar,  apparently  in  one 
piece,  in  which  are  cut  two  slots  (^,  V\  This  bar  has  a  round 
handle  (r)  midway  of  its  length,  opposite  a  terrace  (rf)  symbolizing 


a 


a 


Fig.  22.  —  Frame  carried  by  Vaya  priest     (Brookl3ni  Institute  Museum. ) 

a  rain  cloud.  Two  pendants  (^,  ^')  slide  freely  in  the  slots  (^,  ^), 
so  that  if  the  bar  be  moved  violently  sidewise,  these  appendages 
strike  the  ends  and  the  middle,  making  a  noise  and  suggesting  a 
rattle.  Similar  frames  still  used  by  the  Hopi  in  ceremonies  at  their 
East  Mesa  villages  were  figured  several  years  ago  in  a  picture  of  a 
priest  introduced  in  my  account  of  "  The  Lesser  New  Fire  Ceremony 
at  Walpi,"  and  later  reproduced  in  a  series  of  native  drawings  of 
Hopi  kachinas.^  These  illustrations  represent  masked  men  called 
Sumaikoli  and  Kawikoli,  accompanied  by  priests  known  as  Yayas 
bearing  in  their  hands  similar  frames. 

Apparently  Mrs  Stevenson  refers  to  frames  of  identical  shape  in 

^American  Anthropologist^  1901,  n.  s.,  ni,  438,  pi.  xi;   also  Twenty-first  An- 
nual Report  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology ^  pi.  zxxiv,  xxzv. 


666 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.»  S»  1906 


her  description  of  the  Shumaakwe  ceremony  at  Zuni.^ 
as  follows  : 


She  writes 


A  charm  fashioned  of  wood  and  similar  to  one  of  the  bars  of  the  suspended 
form  above  the  altar  is  carried  by  a  young  man  whenever  the  Shuznai^koli  ap- 
pears, the  bearer  manipulating  the  bar  before  the  god,  which  appears  to  have 
mystic  control  over  the  Shumai^oli.  The  writer  has  observed  the  same  thing 
among  the  Hopi  Indians. 


a 


^ 


Fig.  23.  —  Frame  carried  by  Yaya  priest ;  length  24  in.     (Brooklyn  Institute  Mu- 
eum,  cat.  no.  5633.) 

The  same  author  says  also  : 

Whenever  he  [the  charm-bearer]  waves  the  charm  the  Shumai^koli  backs 
off  a  distance  and  then  starts  forward  while  the  charm-bearer  vigorously 
manipulates  the  charm  to  draw  the  god  to  him. 

And  later : 

The  charm-bearer  stands  south  of  her  [the  female  leader],  facing  east, 
and  holds  his  charm  above  his  face  with  his  left  hand  and  shakes  a  small  gourd 
rattle  with  his  right,  while  he  sings  a  low  chant,  reminding  one  of  the  intoning 
of  a  Catholic  priest.  2 


^  Twenty-third  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology y^t.  540,  543, 

548-549- 

*  The  Saiapa  who  accompany  the  Zuni  Shumaikoli  correspond  in  some  respects  to  the 
Kawikoli  of  the  Hopi.  The  Zuni  Shumaikoli  is  of  course  the  same  as  the  Walpi 
Sumaikoli. 


FEWKES]  HOPI  CEREMONIAL  FRAMES  667 

It  appears  that  the  main  purpose  of  the  ceremony  of  the  Sumai- 
koli  of  the  Hopi  and  its  equivalent,  the  Shumaikoli  at  Zuni,  is  the 
same.  Both  are  fire  rites;  both  were  derived  from  Rio  Grande 
pueblos. 

The  true  significance  of  these  frames  is  unknown,  but  the  respect 
paid  to  them  seems  to  indicate  that  they  are  something  more  than 
rattles  of  unusual  shape.  In  her  representations  of  the  Shumaakwe 
altar  Mrs  Stevenson  figures  a  cross  hanging  above  it,  made  of  two  * 
of  these  frames  united,  a  symbol  that  the  Hopi  would  interpret  as 
a  sky,  star,  or  four-world-quarter  symbol. 

Of  the  nature  of  the  rites  that  are  performed  when  these  objects 
are  employed  we  may  judge  in  part  from  a  study  of  both  Hopi  and 
Zuni  variants  of  the  Sumaikoli  ceremony.  The  ceremony  recalls 
in  several  particulars  the  Fire  dance  of  the  Navaho. 

The  Yaya  priesthood  claim  wonderful  magic  powers  in  control- 
ling fire '  and  say  they  are  able  to  cure  certain  bodily  ailments  with  its 
products  —  heat,  ashes,  and  smoke.  Their  patroness  is  the  Spider- 
woman,  but  they  worship  also  the  Sky-god,  symbolized  by  the  Sun, 
and  Masauu,  the  God  of  Death.  They  call  upon  ancestral  beings, 
known  as  Sumaikoli,  distributed  in  the  four  cardinal  directions,  to 
bring  rain,  and  in  the  course  of  their  rites  they  make  prayer-offerings 
to  all  these  supernaturals. 

The  important  point  to  be  considered  regarding  these  frames  is 
their  clan  ownership.  We  know  that  their  modem  representatives 
belong  to  the  Yaya  priesthood,  hence  it  is  desirable  to  discover  the 
clan  kinships  or  affiliations  of  this  fraternity.     The  Yaya  were  intro- 

^  Note  that  two  of  these  frames  were  found  together  in  the  Cafion  de  Chelly  cave. 
This  would  imply  that  they  were  sometimes  fastened  together  in  the  form  of  a  cross,  as 
at  Zufii ;  but  their  handles  show  that  they  were  carried  in  the  hand  as  seen  in  Hopi  pic- 
tures of  the  Yaya  priests.  They  were  apparently  rattles,  suggesting  the  mairacas  used 
for  bells  in  Latin  American  countries  on  Good  Friday.  These  mairacas  are  commonly 
carried  in  the  hands  and  are  used  during  the  tenebne^  but  sometimes,  as  at  Jalapa,  Mexico, 
the  matraca  is  placed  in  the  church  belfry.  It  is  a  large  wheel  with  a  clapper,  and 
when  turned  can  be  heard  all  over  the  city. 

*I  need  not  here  relate  the  many  stories  of  handling  fire,  with  accompanying  necro- 
mancy, that  the  Yaya  ascribe  to  their  ancients.  They  even  claim  to  be  able  to  eat  fire, 
or  to  put  live  coals  into  their  mouths,  which  may  well  be  doubted.  Their  claim  to  cure 
bodily  ailments  with  fire  reminds  one  of  the  principle  ** similia  similibus  curan/ur.** 
Burning  sensations  of  the  skin  supposed  to  be  due  to  fire  are,  they  hold,  cured  by  fire  and 
its  products. 


668 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8y  1906 


duced  into  Walpi  by  either  Keresan  or  Tanoan  clans,  either  directly 
or  by  way  of  Zufii,  and  this  introduction  is  commonly  said  to  have 
taken  place  in  comparatively  modem  times.  The  Asa  clan,  who 
claim  that  their  ancestors  lived  in  the  Canon  de  Chelly,  are  of 

Tanoan  origin  and  are  said  to  have  been  related  to  the 

aTewa  of  Hano  and  of  the  Rio  Grande  pueblos.  The 
presumption  is  reasonable  that  these  frames  were  Asa 
property.  If  such  be  the  case  the  exact  site  of  the 
habitation  of  this  clan  in  the  Canon  de  Chelly  may 
be  determined  by  the  situation  of  the  cave  in  which 
the  Sumaikoli  paraphernalia  were  found.  But  the  fact 
must  not  be  overlooked  that  the  present  Sumaikoli 
chief  is  a  member  of  the  Badger  clan  *  who  are  closely 
associated  with  the  other  Tanoan  peoples.  Moreover, 
there  are  two  sets  of  Sumaikoli  paraphernalia  on  the 
East  mesa :  one  at  Walpi,  the  other  at  Hano.  .The 
latter,  formerly  owned  by  the  Sun  clan,  may  have 
been  brought  by  the  ancestors  of  the  Hano  clans 
directly  from  the  Rio  Grande. 

According  to  Museum  Notes  (the  article  above 
cited),  there  were  other  ceremonial  paraphernalia  found 
in  a  bag  with  these  fragments.  What  light  do  they 
throw  on  the  clan  ownership  of  the  specimens  here 
considered  ?  One  of  these  objects  is  a  peculiarly  fer- 
ruled  stick  (figure  24)  the  use  of  which  is  problem- 
atical. This  stick  is,  I  believe,  a  Sumaikoli  standard, 
which  was  placed  at  the  entrance  to  the  room  where 
the  altar  of  this  ceremony  was  erected,  for  a  similar 
standard  is  still  used  at  Walpi  when  the  Sumaikoli  is 
celebrated.  The  modern  representative  consists  of 
two  ferruled  sticks  with  facets  at  the  ends.  One  of 
these  is  like  the  above-mentioned  specimen,  the  other 
has  a  hollow  gourd  attached  at  one  end.  When  the 
secret  rites  are  in  progress  these  sticks  are  stuck  in 
the  straw  covering  of  the  kiva  to  indicate  that  such 


Fig.  24.  — 

Sumaikoli 
standard  ; 
length  34  in. 
(Brooklyn  In- 
stitute Muse- 
um,   cat.    no. 

5631.) 


*  The  Badger  clan  is  sometimes  called  a  Hanumnyamu,  or  Tewa  people,  akin  to  the 
Asa  and  Hano  clans.  It  was  associated  with  the  former  in  founding  Sichomovi  after  the 
return  from  the  Canon  de  Chelly. 


FE\yKEs]  HOPI  CEREMONIAL  FRAMES  669 

rites  are  taking  place  in  the  room  below.  The  Canon  de  Chelly 
stick  is  much  more  elaborate  than  the  standard  now  used  at  Walpi 
and  may  have  served  for  another  purpose.* 

The  evidence  drawn  from  the  fragments  of  masks  found  with 
their  frames  coincides  with  that  of  the  latter,  for  like  them  the 
masks  are  preeminently  those  of  Keresan  and  Tanoan  peoples. 
According  to  the  article  cited  these  masks  belong  to  the  Humis 
and  Shalako  kachinas,  both  of  which  were  introduced  into  the  Hopi 
pueblos  from  the  Rio  Grande. 

The  Humis,  or  Hemis,  kachina  among  the  Hopi  is  said  to  have 
been  derived  from  Jemez,  New  Mexico.  Naturally  it  is  a  favorite 
with  both  the  Badger  and  the  Asa,  as  well  as  with  all  other  clans 
of  eastern  origin.  The  material  from  the  Caiion  de  Chelly  is  a 
framework  and  a  painted  skin,  its  former  cover,  that  has  been  identi- 
fied as  the  "tablet"  '  of  a  Humis-kachina  helmet. 

A  Shalako  mask  also  is  mentioned  as  having  been  found  with 
the  Humis  mask.  This  mask  I  have  not  seen,  but  as  the  Zuni 
Shalako  at  Sichomovi  was  introduced  from  the  former  pueblo 
about  forty  years  ago  by  the  Badger  clan,  the  occurrence  in  the  cave 
of  a  fragment  of  a  mask  with  other  dance  paraphernalia  of  the 
Badger  and  Asa  clans  is  readily  explained.  The  Hopi  Shalako  was 
brought  to  Walpi  by  clans  from  the  ancient  settlements  along  the 
Little  Colorado. 

The  Sumaikoli  frames  and  standard,  together  with  the  masks  and 
other  paraphernalia  found  in  the  Cafion  de  Chelly  cave,  verify  the 
legends  of  a  comparatively  late  occupancy  of  certain  cliff-dwellings 
in  this  region  by  people  from  the  East  mesa.  They  point  distinctly 
to  the  Asa  clan  as  their  probable  owners.  Taken  in  connection  with 
other  evidences  they  support  the  conclusion  that  some  of  the  cliff- 
houses  of  that  canon  were  inhabited  in  comparatively  recent  time. 
The  so-called  Hopi  pottery  found  in  the  cafton  is  not  unlike  that 
now  manufactured  by  Tewa  potters ;  and  to  these  people,  no  doubt, 
can  be  traced  the  peach  tree  and  the  presence  of  sheep,  both  of 


1  A  similar  problematical  object  was  found  at  Sikyatki  and  another  at  Awatobi,  which 
would  further  indicate  eastern  influences  in  these  pueblos. 

'  These  tablets  are  now  generally  made  of  thin  boards,  but  formerly  they  were  manu- 
factured of  skin  or  cloth  stretched  over  a  support. 


670  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

which  prove  post-Spanish  occupancy  by  them  01  this  section.  I 
believe  the  specimens  above  considered  are  most  instructive  verifi- 
cations of  Asa  and  Badger  clan  traditions. 

It  might  pertinently  be  asked,  "  Why  could  not  these  objects 
have  been  derived  from  Zuiii  or  possibly  directly  from  the  Rio 
Grande  pueblos,  in  both  of  which  localities  the  Sumaikoli  culture 
exists  and  in  some  of  which  similar  paraphernalia  are  still  used  ?" 
Migratory  bands  were  continually  passing  near  the  entrance  to  the 
canon  where  the  paraphernalia  were  found,  in  their  journey  from  the 
Rio  Grande  region  to  the  Hopi  pueblos,  and  some  of  these  migrants 
may  have  lagged  behind  or  tarried  there  for  a  longer  or  shorter  time, 
and  may  have  left  some  of  their  religious  paraphernalia  in  that 
region.  While  no  evidence  afforded  by  the  specimens  makes  this 
supposition  impossible,  the  Navaho  legend  that  led  to  the  discovery 
of  these  objects  is  so  explicit  that  we  must  conclude  that  the 
descendants  of  their  owners  now  inhabit  pueblos  on  the  East  mesa. 
Although  the  Asa  tradition  of  their  life  in  Canon  de  Chelly  is  cir- 
cumstantial, it  is  not  impossible,  considering  the  kinship  of  the  clans, 
that  some  of  the  Badger  people  accompanied  the  Asa  when  the 
latter  sought  a  home  in  that  place.  At  least  we  may  definitely  say 
that  the  frames,  standard,  and  fragments  of  masks  here  considered 
formerly  belonged  to  Hopi  rather  than  to  Zuni  or  Rio  Grande 
people,  but  that  the  clans  which  owned  them  originally  came  from 
the  pueblos  of  the  latter.  Although  there  is  strong  evidence  that 
these  frames  pertain  to  the  Asa  and  Badger  clans,  it  has  not  yet 
been  conclusively  shown  which  of  these  people  introduced  them 
into  the  East  Mesa  pueblos. 

Strictly  speaking,  these  objects  are  not  distinctly  characteristic  of 
the  most  ancient  Hopi,  but  belong  to  that  early  culture  widely 
spread  over  the  Southwest  from  which  the  Hopi  have  derived  much 
of  their  mythology  and  ritual.  They  were  introduced  from  those 
eastern  pueblos  which  have  contributed  to  the  Hopi  the  major 
portion  of  their  religious  paraphernalia,  as  well  as  prayers  and 
songs,  and  their  introduction  is  so  recent  that  even  the  clans  which 
brought  them  are  not  wholly  unknown. 

Bureau  of  American  Ethnology, 
Washington,  D.  C. 


THE  SLOANE  COLLECTION  IN  THE  BRITISH  MUSEUM 

Bv  DAVID  I.    BUSHNELL,  Jr 

In  1753  the  British  Nation  acquired  by  purchase  the  large  and 
varied  collections  belonging  to  Sir  Hans  Sloane,  forming  the  nucleus 
of  the  British  Museum.^ 

The  old  manuscript  catalogue  of  the  collection  contains  many 
quaint  and  interesting  entries,  often  including  brief  though  com- 
prehensive descriptions  of  the  objects.  Unfortunately  dates  are 
seldom  given,  but  we  must  remember  that  all  the  material  was 
brought  to  England  before  1753  and  that  some  specimens  may 
have  been  obtained  during  the  seventeenth  century. 

Under  the  heading  of  "  Miscellanies  '*  are  records  of  more  than 
two  thousand  objects,  gathered  from  various  parts  of  the  world, 
including  many  from  the  colonies  of  Virginia,  South  Carolina,  and 
New  England,  from  the  Iroquois  country,  and  the  region  about 
Hudson  bay.  Many  of  the  specimens  called  for  in  the  catalogue  no 
longer  exist,  a  fact  to  be  regretted  by  all  interested  in  American 
ethnology,  especially  as  old  material  from  the  eastern  part  of  the 
country  is  so  scarce. 

The  object  of  this  article  is  to  make  known  and  describe  such 
specimens  belonging  to  this  old  collection  as  now  remain  in  the 
British  Museum,  all  of  which  are  here  figured.  There  are,  however, 
some  stone  implements,  —  axes,  arrowheads,  etc.  —  belonging  to  the 
collection,  that  were  brought  from  the  colonies.  To  these  I  shall 
not  refer,  as  many  similar  objects  are  preserved  in  various  collections, 
and  as  the  ones  just  mentioned  are  of  no  special  value.  Nor  shall 
I  deal  with  certain  specimens  from  the  northern  Eskimo,  from  the 
region  of  Davis  strait. 

Before  describing  the  existing  specimens,  it  will  probably  be  of 
interest  to  quote  certain  notes  in  the  catalogue,  for  although  the 
material  is  lost,  it  may  be  of  assistance  in  future  work  to  know  that 

*  Sec  note  by  the  late  Dr  Thomas  Wilson  in  American  Anthropologist ^  "i  ?•  '90» 
1900.  —  Editor. 

671 


6/2  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

certain  things  were  used  at  one  time  by  the  Indians  along  the 
Atlantic  coast.  In  copying  the  entries  I  have  followed  the  original 
spelling  and  have  recorded  also  the  number  of  the  object  as  it  is 
entered  in  the  catalogue. 

Objects  Catalogued  but  no  Longer  Existing 

From   Virginia 

p/j  A  Virginia  girdle  made  of  some  rush  or  other  such  like  vegetable. 

1 41 1  An  Indian  shoe  from  Virginia  w^  rattles  &  dy'd  porcupine  quills. 

J412  The  same  w*out  rattles. 

Ij6g  A  Strum  Strump  made  of  a  round  large  gourd. 

1370  A  basket  of  canes  from  the  same  [Virginia] . 

There  are  several  references  to  strings  of  wampum,  "  Indian 
money,'*  from  Virginia  and  elsewhere ;  but  I  shall  not  quote  them 
in  detail. 

From  South  Carolina 

The  colony  of  South  Carolina  was  well  represented  in  the  col- 
lection, and  fortunately  one  of  the  most  interesting  objects,  which 
will  be  described  later,  has  been  preserved  to  the  present  day. 
Other  entries  in  the  list  are : 

J4j8    A  negro  drum  from  South  Carolina,  by  Mr  Standish. 
/2j/     A  Maracca  or  rattle  of  a  gourd  made  use  of  by  the  Indians  of  Carolina 
in  their  triumphs,  calumets  etc.,  from  Col  Nicholson. 

This  was  probably  the  form  of  rattle  shown  in  White's  drawings 
which  were  reproduced  by  De  Bry  as  plates  xvii  and  xviii  in  Hariot's 
Virgi)iia  (1588).     The  text  describing  the  first  of  these  plates  reads  : 

.  .  .  holding  a  certaine  fruite  in  their  hands  like  unto  a  rownde  pompion  or  a 
gourde,  which  after  they  have  taken  out  the  fruits,  and  the  seedes,  then  fill 
with  small  stons  or  certayne  bigg  kemells  to  make  the  more  noise  .   .    . 

The  maracca  is,  according  to  Strachey,  **  a  rattle,  such  as  they  use 
in  their  ceremonies,  made  of  a  goard,  chmgawivonawky  ^ 

1226     An  Indian  bowl  w^  \s^^  they  play  at  bowls  made  of  a  gray  sand  stone, 

hollowed  from  Col  Nicholson. 
148^;     An  Indian  fann  made  of  canes  some  colored  black,  from  Carolina,  by 

Mr  Dering. 
14S6     Another  made  of  rushes. 

'  See  note  2,  page  679. 


BUSHNELL]  THE  SLOANE  COLLECTION  673 

1203  An  Indian  apron  from  South  Carolina  made  of  the  bark  of  the  wild 
mulberry  tree,  this  kind  of  cloth  with  a  kind  of  basket  they  make  with 
splitt  cane  are  the  only  mechanical  arts  worth  notice. 

This  reference  at  once  recalls  a  paragraph  written  by  an  English 
traveler  who  visited  the  Carolinas  some  years  after  the  *'  apron  "  was 
collected.  In  referring  to  the  Catawba  Indians,  whose  villages  were 
near  the  boundary  between  North  and  South  Carolina,  he  wrote : 

The  only  manufacture  that  I  can  discover  among  them  is  that  of  party- 
coloured  little  baskets,  table-mats,  made  of  straw,  and  chips,  or  splits  of  dif- 
ferent coloured  wood  ;  and  an  ill-formed  kind  of  a  half-baked  earthen  ware.^ 

/(55J    A  girdle  made  of  Porcupine  quills  dyed  red  and  black  from  Carolina 

made  by  the  Indians. 
ijyi    A  Cherokee  Indian  garter  made  of  the  ravelings  of  the  cadene  *  they 

buy  of  the  English.     From  Mr  Dering  of  South  Carolina. 

It  is  interesting  to  know  that  the  custom  of  raveling  a  piece  of 
European  cloth  and  using  the  threads  in  native  weaving  was  fol- 
lowed at  so  early  a  day.  This  suggests  the  use  of  bayeta  by  the 
Navaho. 

The  following  entries  in  the  catalogue,  relating  to  the  use  of 
buffalo  hair  by  the  Carolina  Indians,  are  most  interesting : 

72/ J  A  rope  for  tying  anything.  Made  of  the  hair  of  the  head  of  the  Amer- 
ican bufalo.     Described  by  Mr  Hennepin. 

1216  The  same  hair  dyed  red  and  yellow,  tyed  in  tufts  on  a  string,  as  an 
ornament  for  the  Carolina  Indians. 

i6j6  A  pair  of  garters  made  of  the  same  [quills]  and  BufTalos  hair,  from 
the  same  [Carolina] . 

The  following  reference  is  of  equal  interest ;  although  no  locality 
is  given,  the  girdle  probably  came  from  Carolina : 

Jjjd    A  girdle  made  of  Bufalos  hair  and  porcupine  quills. 

Buffalo  hair  was  evidently  used  by  many  tribes,  from  the  At- 
lantic to  the  Rocky  mountains,  for  making  cords  and  blankets,  and, 
as  is  shown  above,  tufts  of  it  were  dyed  and  used  as  ornaments. 
When  Charlevoix  reached  the  village  of  the  Kaskasquias  (Kaskas- 
kia)  on  the  Mississippi,  during  the  autumn  of  172 1,  he  wrote : 

'J.  F.  D.  Smyth,   A  Tour  in  the  United  States  of  America^  London,  1784,  p.  193. 
2  A  sort  of  inferior  Turkish  carpet  imported  from  the  Levant. 


674  AMERICAS  AXTHROPOLOGJST  [x.  s.,  8w  1906 

Their  women  are  very  neat-handed  and  indnstrioos.  Tber  spin  the  wool 
of  the  bufialo  whkh  they  make  as  fine  as  Fngiish  sheep.  ...  erf*  this  they 
manufacture  stufis  which  are  dyed  black,  yellow  or  a  deep  red.* 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  hair  was  dyed  )reIlow  and  red 
also  by  the  Carolina  Indians,  as  has  been  previously  statecL  That 
blankets  were  woven  of  twisted  cords  of  buf&lo  hair  is  noted  by 
Hunter : 

The  hair  of  the  buflfalo  and  other  animals  is  sometimes  manufactured  into 
blankets,  the  hair  is  first  twisted  bv  hand  and  nound  into  balls.' 

Hunter,  of  course,  refers  to  the  tribes  inhabitiii^  the  country  west 
of  the  Mississippi,  more  particulariy  to  the  Osage. 

One  more  quotation  will  be  of  interest  as  showing  the  similarity 
of  the  work  of  the  eastern  and  the  far  western  tribes.  Harmon,  in 
describing  certain  customs  of  "the  Assiniboins,  Rs^d  Indians, 
Black  feet  and  Mandans,"  wrote  : 

They  do  not  often  use  bridles,  but  guide  their  horses  with  halters,  made  of 
ropes,  which  are  manufactured  from  the  hair  of  the  bu&loe,  which  are  very 
strong  and  durable.* 

From  New  England 

Formerly  the  collection  was  rich  in  material  from  New  England, 
but  with  the  exception  of  three  objects  which  are  to  be  described 
later,  all  have  disappeared.  However,  I  shall  copy  from  the  cata- 
logue the  entries  referring  to  New  England  specimens,  as  many 
include  some  interesting  notes. 

I J  28  An  Indian  breast  plate  which  they  wear  when  they  go  to  warr  or  at 
any  great  feast  —  made  of  shells  out  of  the  up  country-  fresh  u-atcr  lakes. 
with  the  collar  consisting  of  blue  and  white  shells,  where  of  four  blue  ones 
make  a  penny  and  six  white  ones.  They  drill  the  holes  i*ith  the  point 
of  a  sharp  flint  &  worle  them  round  on  a  fine  gritt\-  stone.  From  New 
England,  by  Mr.  Jno.  Winthrop. 

This  would  certainly  have  been  a  most  interesting  specimen,  but 
like  many  others  it  has  been  lost.  The  *'  collar  consisting  of  blue 
and  white  shells,  where  of  four  blue  ones  make  a  penny  and  six 

^  Q\\?ix\t.\o\x^  Journal  of  a  Voyagf  to  Xorth  America^  London,  1761,  ll,  p.  222. 
*John  D.  Hunter,  Memoirs  of  a  Captivity^  etc.,  London,  1 824,  p.  289. 
*  Daniel  \V.  Harmon,  A  Journal  of  Voyages  and  Travels  in  tht  Interior  of  Xortk 
America,  Andover,  1 820,  p.  336. 


BUSHNELL]  THE  SLOANE  COLLECTION  6/5 

white  ones,"  was  without  doubt  formed  of  wampum  beads.  The 
next  sentence,  which  describes  the  method  of  making  the  beads, 
contains  valuable  information  : 

I72g  An  Indian  spoon  &  bowl  made  of  the  knot  of  a  tree,  which  they  bum 
hollow  &  then  smooth  and  polish  with  a  sharp  flint  and  then  soak  it  in 
their  minerall  springs  to  dye  it.  out  of  this  they  eat  their  suckatash  which 
is  venison,  fish  and  indian  com  boiled  together. 

\1730  A  spoon,  described  later.] 

I7J2    A  bundle  of  Indian  candles  or  splints  of  pitch  tree. 

j/jj  An  Indian  box  made  of  the  bark  of  the  birch  tree  by  the  Indians  and 
dyed  by  the  spaw  water  springs. 

^7JS  A  fine  large  Indian  basket  made  by  an  Indian  Queen,  by  Mr  Winthrop 
from  New  England. 

[//jd  A  fish -line,  described  later.] 

iyj8  An  Indian  Mattump  or  braided  strap  w»  w**^  they  tye  their  children  to 
the  bark  of  a  tree  as  soon  as  bom.    from  M'  Winthrop  from  New  England. 

ijjg    An  Indian  Calumet  or  stone  pipe  of  peace. 

1740  Glue  made  of  deers  horns  &  fishes  sounds  by  the  Indians  in  America 
to  glue  the  feathers  into  their  arrows. 

1741  A  square  piece  of  shell  worn  as  an  ornament  by  the  Indians  &  for- 
merly current  at  3  shillings  in  money  among  the  Indians. 

The  eleven  specimens  referred  to  above  were  obtained  from  the 
Indians  of  New  England  by  John  Winthrop  of  the  Plymouth  colony. 

18 ig    A  hollow  trunc,  canes  &  spears  of  wood  for  fishing,    from  New  England. 
1820    A  very  large  bow  &  arrows  from  New  England — by  Capt.  Walker. 
1202    A  red  liquor  used  by  the  Indians  in  New  England  for  curing  dropesy, 

likely  to  be  from  the  fruits  of  the  Solanum  bacciferum  racemosum. 
183s    ^^  Indian  stone  pestle  made  to  beat  (in  a  trough  made  of  wood,  burnt 

and  hollowed  by  them)  Indian  com  to  make  nocekee} 

The  last  entries  to  be  copied  from  the  catalogue  are  two  relating 
to  Iroquois  material : 

123    A  childs  shoe  of  the  Iroquois  made  of  the  maiz  or  Indian  com  dyed. 
204    A  double  cord  made  of  the  nerves  of  the  Orignac  *  w*^  is  thread  with 
which  they  sew  and  adjust  the  heads  of  their  arrows. 


1  Ndkekick :  *  *  Indian  com  parched  in  the  hot  ashes  .  .  .  afterward  beat  to  powder. '  * 
—  Roger  Williams.     The  nocake  of  William  Wood.  —  Editor. 

'Or  orignal^  from  the  Basque  word  oreHa  or  oriHa^  referring  to  the  deer  family. 
The  term  was  transferred  to  America,  where  it  became  used  specifically  for  the  moose 
information  from  Mr  J.  N.  B.  Hewitt  of  the  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology). 

AiM.  ANTH.,  N.  S..  8-44. 


6/6  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Existing  Objects 

I  shall  now  describe  the  existing  specimens,  seventeen  in  num- 
ber, beginning  with  that  from  Virginia.  Unfortunately  only  one 
piece  remains  in  the  British  Museum  to  represent  the  first  English 
colony  in  North  America. 

From  Virginia 

ij68  An  Indian  drum  made  of  a  hollowed  tree  carved,  the  top  being 
brac'd  with  peggs  and  thongs,  w^  the  bottom  hollow,  from  Virginia,  by 
Mr  Clerk. 

This  most  interesting  old  specimen  is  formed  of  a  single  piece 
of  wood.  The  extreme  height  is  400  mm. ;  the  diameter  of  the 
head  or  top  averages  245  mm. ;  the  diameter  of  the  base  is  140 
mm.  The  thickness  of  the  wood  forming  the  body  of  the  drum  is 
about  20  mm.,  but  the  perforation  through  the  base  is  about  70 
mm.  in  diameter,  allowing  the  wooden  wall  to  be  about  35  mm. 
thick.  The  head  of  the  drum  is  formed  of  a  piece  of  untanned 
deerskin,  passing  over  the  outer  edge  of  the  wood,  and  then  once 
around  a  hoop  or  band  formed  apparently  of  a  root  of  a  pine  or  a 
cedar  tree,  a  section  of  which  is  about  10  mm.  in  diameter.  About 
80  mm.  below  the  top  of  the  drum,  and  placed  equidistant,  are  six 
perforations  passing  obliquely  through  the  wooden  wall.  Fitted 
into  these  perforations  are  movable  pegs,  about  140  mm.  in  length. 
The  upper  or  exposed  ends  of  these  pegs  terminate  in  a  bulge,  or 
bulb,  with  a  groove  at  the  base.  Many  narrow  bands  of  cedar  (?) 
bark,  attached  to  the  hoop  around  the  head  of  the  drum,  pass  in  turn 
over  the  tops  of  the  pegs.  To  tighten  the  head  it  was  necessary  only 
to  tap  the  pegs,  a  very  simple  and  ingenious  device.  As  the  heads  of 
the  pegs  are  much  **  mushroomed,"  it  is  evident  the  drum  was  often 
used.  The  decoration  is  in  carving  ;  probably  no  colors  were  used. 
It  is  singular,  however,  that  the  surface  should  have  been  covered 
with  a  thick,  gummy  substance.  Much  of  this  remains  and  is 
clearly  shown  in  the  illustration  (plate  xxxv).  Although  this  drum 
is  described  in  the  old  catalogue  as  being  of  Indian  origin,  it  was 
more  probably  made  by  negroes,  and  may  even  have  been  taken  to 
Virginia  from  Africa. 

In  the  British  Museum  is  a  large  drum  from  Ashanti,  brought 


OBUM  FROM  vlfiOINI* 


bushnell] 


THE  SLOANE   COLLECTION  6y7 

from  Kumassi  by  Lieutenant  Colonel  Wolscy  in  1896.'  This  piece, 
shown  in  figure  25,  is  850  mm.  high  ;  the  diameter  of  the  top  is 
400  mm.     Of  course  the  base  is  hollow.     The  great  similarity 


Fig.  1$.  —  Drum  brought  fcom  Ashanti,  W«it  Africa,  in  1899.     Shown  Tor  compari- 
son with  tbe  Virginia  drum  illustrated  in  plate  Xxxv. 

>  Adescriptionof  the  use  of  drumsoftbbronn  will  be  found  in  The  Sugt  of  Kumassi, 
by  Lady  Hodgson  (London,  190)).  An  interesting  plate  facing  page  362  of  this  book 
shows  ■  group  of  natives  with  seveml  audi  instnunents. 


1 

t 


678  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,   8,  1906 

between  this  and  the  Virginia  specimen  leaves  little  doubt  as  to  the 
origin  of  the  latter. 

From  South  Carolina 

Formerly  the  collection  was  rich  in  material  from  the  colony  of 
South  Carolina,  but  now  only  one  basket  and  two  pipes  are  to  be 
found.  The  basket  however  is  a  most  valuable  and  interesting 
piece,  and  is  probably  a  unique  example. 

121S  A  large  Carolina  basket,  made  by  the  Indians  of  splitt  canes,  some 
parts  of  them  being  dyed  red,  by  the  fruit  of  the  Solanutn  magnum  Vir- 
ginianum  .  .  .  mbrum,  and  black.  They  will  keep  anything  in  than 
from  being  wetted  by  the  rain.  From  Coll.  Nicholson,  Governor  of  South 
Carolina,  whence  he  brought  them. 

Sir  Francis  Nicholson,  by  whom  this  and  other  spedmens  were 
brought  to  England  from  the  colony  of  South  Carolina,  was  bom 
in  1660  and  died  in  1728.  He  was  colonial  governor  of  South 
Carolina  from  1721  to  1725,  returning  to  England  in  June  of  the 
latter  year,  and  evidently  taking  the  basket  with  him. 

The  dimensions  of  this  rare  old  piece  are:  length  520  mm., 
greatest  width  about  165  mm.,  and  average  depth  95  mm.  This 
basket  is  of  the  type  described  by  Adair  *  as  being  used  in  Carolina 
about  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  century.  The  description  as 
given  by  him  applies  perfectly  to  the  British  Museum  specimen, 
therefore  I  quote  it  in  full : 

They  make  the  handsomest  clothes  baskets  I  ever  saw,  considering 
their  materials.  They  divide  large  swamp  canes  into .  long,  thin,  narrow 
splinters,  which  they  dye  of  several  colours,  and  manage  the  workmanship  so 
well,  that  both  the  inside  and  outside  are  covered  with  a  beautiful  variety  of 
pleasing  figures,  and,  though  for  the  space  of  two  inches  below  the  upper  edge 
of  each  basket,  it  is  worked  into  one,  through  the  other  parts  they  are  worked 
asunder,  as  if  they  were  two  joined  a-top  by  some  strong  cement.  A  large 
nest  consists  of  eight  or  ten  baskets,  contained  within  each  other.  Their  dimen- 
sions are  different,  but  they  usually  make  the  outside  basket  about  a  foot  deep, 
a  foot  and  a  half  broad,  and  almost  a  yard  long  .  .  .  Formerly,  those  baskets 
which  the  Cheerake  made  were  so  highly  esteemed  even  in  South  Carolina, 
the  politest  of  our  colonies,  for  domestic  usefulness,  beauty,  and  skilful  variety, 
that  a  large  nest  of  them  cost  upwards  of  a  moidore. 


'James  Adair,  History  of  the  North  American  Indians^  London,  1775,  P»  424. 


OBJECTS  BROUBHT  FROM  SOUTH  CAROLINA  \^ 


BUSHNELL]  THE  SLOANE   COLLECTION  679 

From  this  last  statement  by  Adair  we  may  consider  this  basket 
as  having  been  made  by  the  Cherokee,  from  whom  it  was  probably 
obtained.  There  is  a  note  in  Lawson's  History  which  probably  refers 
to  baskets  of  this  form  ;  if  so,  it  shows  them  to  have  been  made  away 
from  the  coast. 

A  great  way  up  in  the  Country,  both  Baskets  and  Mats  are  made  of  the 
split  Reeds,  which  are  only  the  outward  shining  part  of  the  cane.  Of  these  I 
have  seen  Mats,  Baskets  and  Dressing-Boxes,  very  artificially  done.^ 

This  basket  is  formed  of  two  distinct  parts,  similar  in  shape 
though  differing  in  size.  Both  parts  are  made  with  the  rims  somewhat 
smaller  than  the  lower  portions,  causing  them  to  fit  securely  when 
the  smaller  is  forced  into  the  larger.  Strips  of  cane  of  two  thick- 
nesses are  used  in  the  weaving,  thereby  allowing  different  patterns  to 
be  formed  on  the  inside  and  outside.  The  two  distinct  parts  of  the 
basket  are  interwoven  for  a  distance  of  some  two  inches  from  the 
edge,  causing  it  to  be  more  rigid  and  firm.  The  colors  of  the  strips 
are  black  and  a  dark  red,  both  of  which  are  dyed,  also  the  natural 
yellowish  brown.  The  patterns  are  formed  either  by  various  styles 
of  weaving  or  by  different  arrangements  of  the  three  colors. 

1214  Another  [pipe]  with  an  extant  square  piece  cutt  in  the  shape  of  the 
butt  end  of  a  gunn. 

Made  of  a  dark  steatite.  Extreme  length,  200  mm. ;  height  of 
bowl  above  base,  47  mm. ;  diameter  of  bowl,  20  mm.,  and  of  open- 
ing for  the  stem  7  mm.  This  pipe  is  the  upper  of  the  two  speci- 
mens shown  in  plate  xxxvi. 

1221  The  same  [tobacco  pipe]  of  a  white  marble  or  sope  stone  differ- 
ently figured,  w'  the  pipe  [stem]  of  cane  coloured  w'  spirall  red  stripes. 
There  belongs  to  these  some  times  a  Maraca '  or  calabash  or  gourd  w*^ 
something  to  rattle  in  it  and  five  or  6  feathers  of  the  white  headed  Eagle 
on  a  string.     From  Col.  Nicholson  of  South  Carolina. 


*  John  Lawson,  History  of  Carolina ^  London,  1 7 14,  p.  189. 

*The  name  matraca  is  applied  in  Porto  Rico  to  rattles  made  from  the  calabash  tree, 
Crescentia  cujete^  and  also  to  Crotalaria  retusa^  the  ripe  seeds  of  which  become  loosened 
and  rattle  in  the  pod.  —  Cook  and  Collins,  Economic  Plants  of  Porto  Rico,  Cont.  U,  S. 
Nat,  Herbariunty  viii,  no.  2,  187,  1903.     The  word  is  of  Arawak  origin. 


♦ 
t 


I 


680  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

A  very  good  example  of  an  old  steatite  pipe.  The  extreme  length 
is  243  mm. ;  the  diameter  of  opening  for  the  stem,  only  6  mm*  A 
small  projection  above  the  end  of  the  stem  is  perforated,  as  may  be 
seen  in  the  illustration. 

From  the  Iroquois 

Several  excellent  examples  of  old  Iroquois  weaving  remain  in 
the  collection,  to  which  I  shall  now  refer. 

J/J  A  cord  made  of  hemp  and  porcupine  quills  died .  from  the  Iroquois 
by  the  Indian  Kings  —  given  me  by  Mr  Middleton  —  for  tying  their 
prisoners. 

Mr  (later  Captain)  Middleton,  referred  to  in  this  and  other  entries 
in  the  catalogue,  was  first  employed  by  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company 
in  1 720;  he  returned  to  England  in   1742,  at  which  time,  it  is  safe 
i  to  assume,  he  brought  the  material  described  in  the  lists.      This 

cord,  no.  573,  is  just  5  meters  in  length,  woven  evidently  of  native 
flax.  In  the  middle  is  a  band  530  mm.  in  length  and  40  mm.  in 
width,  one  side  of  which  is  decorated  with  porcupine-quill  em- 
broidery applied  in  a  manner  similar  to  the  decoration  on  the  small 
bag,  no.  203.  The  quills  are  of  three  colors  —  red,  black,  and  white. 
While  the  decorated  band  is  of  very  fine  weave,  the  cord  attached 
to  each  end  is  very  coarse,  being  composed  of  ten  or  twelve  strands 
braided  flat.  The  cords  where  they  are  attached  to  the  band  are 
about  25  mm.  in  width,  but  they  taper  to  two  strands  which  are 
separate  for  a  distance  of  400  mm.  from  the  ends,  thus  forming  two 
distinct  cords.     (See  plate  xxxvii.) 

^Y4     The  same  of  a  courser  sort  w'  out  the  quills. 

This  cord  is  a  trifle  longer  than  the  other,  being  5.12  meters  in 
length.  The  flat  band  in  the  middle  is  350  mm.  in  length  and  about 
50  mm.  in  width  ;  it  is  closely  woven,  but  is  not  decorated  in  any 
way.  The  flat  braided  cords  are  attached  to  the  ends  of  the  band  ; 
both  taper  to  single  strands. 

A  cord  similar  to  this  is  figured  by  Morgan,*  whose  description 
is  here  given  in  full : 

'  Lewis  H.  Morgan,  League  of  the  Iroquois^  Rochester,  185 1,  p.  365. 


IRDQUOIS  BURDEN  STRAPS  AND  SMALL  BAO 


BUSHNILL]  THE  SLOANE  COLLECTION  68 1 

The  burden-strap  is  worn  around  the  forehead,  and  lashed  to  a  litter,  which 
is  borne  by  Indian  women  on  their  back.  It  is  usually  about  fifteen  feet  in 
length,  and  braided  into  a  belt  in  the  centre,  three  or  four  inches  wide.  Some 
of  these  are  entirely  covered  upon  one  side  with  porcupine  quill-work,  after 
various  devices,  and  are  in  themselves  remarkable  products  of  skilful  industry. 
The  braiding  or  knitting  of  the  bark  threads  is  effected  with  a  single  needle  of 
hickory.  .  .  .  Of  all  their  fabrics,  there  is  no  one,  perhaps,  which  surpasses 
the  porcupine>quill  burden*  strap,  in  skill  of  manufacture,  richness  of  material, 
or  beauty  of  workmanship. 

It  is  certainly  interesting  to  see  how  closely  this  description  ap- 
plies to  the  British  Museum  specimens,  although  they  were  collected 
more  than  a  century  before  Morgan's  account  was  written. 

20J    An  I  ndian  purse  made  by  the  Huron  Savages  of  Canada  with  the  crin 
or  hair  of  the  Orignac  *  w«**  they  dye  with  roots. 

This  small  bag,  of  Huron  make,  is  125  mm.  square;  the  bag 
proper,  however,  is  only  95  mm.  deep,  as  an  open  band  some  30 
mm.  wide  passes  around  the  top  or  opening  (pi.  xxxvii).  It  is  made 
of  native  flax,  in  a  simple  basket  weave.  The  outside  is  covered 
with  split  porcupine  quills,  some  white,  some  brown,  and  others  of 
a  yellowish  color,  arranged  in  a  simple  design.  The  quills  are  fas- 
tened by  being  passed  under  and  around  the  outer  woof  cords.  The 
cords  forming  the  open  band  are  covered  with  quills  dyed  red.  It 
will  be  observed  that  the  description  in  the  catalogue  wrongly  iden- 
tifies the  split  porcupine-quills  as  the  hair  of  the  orignal,  or  moose. 

From  Hudson  Bay 

The  following  specimens  are  described  in  the  catalogue  as 
having  come  from  Hudson  bay.  They  were  probably  obtained  from 
Indians  trading  at  some  of  the  company's  posts,  but  it  is  not  pos- 
sible to  say  by  what  tribe  they  were  made. 

206s    Thirty  basketts  made  w*  Birch  Bark  and  adorned  w'  Porcupines  quils, 
given  me  by  Capt  Middleton  who  brought  them  from  Hudson's  Bay. 

This  nest  of  30  bark  baskets,  all  similar  in  form  and  decoration 
and  all  well  made,  is  a  very  interesting  piece  of  work  (pi.  xxxviii). 
Around  the  top  or  upper  edge  of  each  basket  are  strips  of  roots  or 
twigs  bound  with  narrow  split  pieces  of  spruce  roots.     Through 

*  See  note  2,  p.  675. 


682  AMERICAS  ANTHROPOLOGIST  (k.  s.,  S^  1906 

this  band  or  binding  pass  porcupine  quills  dyed  red.  This  rim  is 
divided  into  four  sections  by  quills  which  take  the  place  of  the 
spruce-root  binding.  These  quills  are  not  dyed,  but  both  the  dark- 
and  the  light-colored  ones  are  used.  The  smallest  basket  of  the 
nest  has  a  maximum  diameter  of  95  mm.  and  a  depth  of  32  mm. 
The  greatest  diameter  of  the  lai^est  one  is  300  mm.  and  the  depth 
about  86  mm.     All  the  baskets  fit  closely  one  into  the  other. 

201  A  small  racquette  &   [or]   small  snow  shoe  made  by  the  savages  of 
Canada  w*  w*"  they  walk  on  the  snow.     Sent  by  M'  ViUannont. 

202  The  same. 

This  is  a  pair  of  small  snow  shoes,  or,  to  be  more  exact,  models 
of  snow  shoes,  of  the  usual  Algonquian  type.  Length,  420  mm. ; 
width,  140  mm. 

2040    A  cradle  w^  a  pair  of  shoes  (?)  from   Hudson's  Bay,  by  M'  Cotts 

Surgeon. 

A  very  small  cradle  board  made  of  white  cedar;  extreme  length, 
373  mm.,  width,  147  mm.  A  narrow  strip  of  cedar,  curved  and 
attached  to  the  board  proper,  forms  the  frame  over  which  the 
tanned  buckskin  is  laced.  The  skin,  which  is  fringed,  was  originally 
wrapped  with  porcupine  quills  colored  red,  but  little  of  the  wrap- 
ping now  remains.  Across  the  back  of  the  board  is  a  narrow  band 
of  skin  to  which  are  attached  twenty  strands  of  colored  glass  beads ; 
to  the  end  of  each  strand,  which  is  about  40  mm.  long,  is  fastened 
a  small  tuft  of  dyed  hair.     (Plate  xxxviii.) 

The  last  specimen  shown  in  plate  xxxviii  is  a  very  interesting 
belt: 

204J     A  belt  adorned  with  quills  of  birds  or  porcupines. 

This  object  is  made  of  a  heavy,  tanned  skin,  with  a  decoration  in 
quillwork.  The  length  is  720  mm.  and  the  width  43  mm.  The 
manner  in  which  the  quills  are  arranged  and  fastened  is  rather 
unusual.  First,  strips  of  bark  or  roots,  averaging  about  4.5  mm. 
in  width,  were  closely  and  evenly  wrapped  with  quills  ;  these  strips, 
ei^ht  in  number,  were  then  fastened  to  the  band  of  skm,  the  edges 
of  which  were  stitched  with  quills  colored  red.  The  colors  of  the 
quills  used  in  this  piece  of  work  are  the  same  as  those  on  the  thirty 


i' 

■ 

SSOWSHUHS,  CXADLH-anAKIi.  AKD    Bfl 

OBJECTS  FROM  HUDSON  B*V 


BUSHNKLL]  THE  SLOANE  COLLECTION  683 

baskets,  and  there  is  something  similar  in  the  work.  As  will  be 
seen  in  the  illustration  the  ornamentation  is  separated  into  two  parts, 
between  which  are  two  rows  of  small  white  glass  beads.  Pieces  of 
wood  about  5  mm.  in  diameter  are  fastened  to  each  end  of  the  belt. 

From  New  England 

As  has  been  shown  elsewhere  in  this  article,  the  colonies  of 
New  England  were  well  represented  in  the  Sloane  collection,  but 
of  all  the  specimens  mentioned  in  the  catalogue  only  three  now 
exist  in  the  British  Museum.  It  is  gratifying  however  to  have 
these,  as  they  are  objects  of  special  interest. 

7J^    A  combe  made  of  a  moose  horn  from  the  east  parts  of  New  England, 
used  amongst  the  native  Indians. 

This  is  certainly  a  strange  type  of  comb  and  is  probably  a  unique 
specimen  (pi.  xxxix).  It  is  formed  of  a  piece  of  moose  antler,  not 
more  than  4  mm.  in  thickness,  but  the  extreme  length  is  440  mm. 
The  eleven  teeth  at  the  end  are  each  about  58  mm.  long.  In- 
cised lines  and  carving,  producing  a  zigzag  design  in  relief,  form 
the  only  ornamentation.  The  sunken  portion  of  the  decoration  as 
well  as  the  straight  lines  are  filled  with  a  red  substance,  probably 
ocher.     Near  the  lower  end  is  one  small  perforation. 

lyjo  An  Indian  Spoon  made  of  the  breast  bone  of  a  pinguin '  made  by 
Papenau, — anno  1702. — an  Indian  whose  Squaw  had  both  her  Legs 
gangren'  d  and  rotted  off  to  her  knees  and  was  cured  by  bathing  in  balsam 
water  made  by  Winthrop  Esq.  of  New  England.'  The  method  was  thus : 
He  ordered  two  oxe  bladders  to  be  filled  w^  his  Rare  Balsamick  Liquor, 
made  warm  and  the  stumps  put  into  the  Bladers  w'  the  water  kept  con- 
stantly blood  warm  and  the  leggs  were  perfectly  cured  in  a  few  days 
time. 

Such  is  the  inscription  written  on  the  inside  of  the  spoon.  The 
ink  has  turned  brown  with  age,  as  the  words  were  written  probably 
more  than  two  centuries  ago,  when  the  spoon  was  obtained  from 


1  Mr.  H.  W.  Henshaw  of  the  U.  S.  Biological  Survey  identifies  this  bird  with  the 
great  auk  or  garefowl  {^Alca  impennis)^  which  ranged  as  far  south  as  Massachusetts  and 
became  extinct  about  1844.  Mr.  Henshaw  adds  that  the  Indians  knew  this  bird  well 
and  undoubtedly  killed  large  numbers  for  food,  as  many  of  the  bones  have  been  found  in 
kitchen-middens.  —  Editor. 


684  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

the  Indian  Papenau.  This  is  probably  the  only  specimen  of  the 
sort  in  existence  today,  and  it  may  well  have  been  the  ordinary  form 
of  spoon  made  and  used  by  the  Indians  of  New  England.  The 
length  of  this  specimen  is  104  mm.  and  its  greatest  width  is  41  mm. 
Through  the  larger  end  are  three  small  perforations.  Probably 
threads  of  flax,  or  sinew,  passing  through  the  perforations,  bound 
the  spoon  to  a  wooden  or  a  bone  handle.     (See  plate  xxxix.) 

The  third  New  England  specimen  in  the  collection  is  a  fish-line  : 

iyj6  A  fishing  line  made  of  the  wild  Indian  hemp,  w*  the  shank  bone  of  a 
fawn  which  ser\'es  both  as  hook  and  bait.  The  fish  biting  at  it  swallow- 
ing it  down. 

This  line  belongs  to  the  collection  sent  by  John  Winthrop  from 
New  England  and,  according  to  the  old  label  attached  to  the  specimen, 
was  made  and  used  by  the  Indians  of  that  region.  The  entire  length 
of  the  cord  is  1 3.6  meters,  and  of  the  bone  120  mm.  As  both  ends 
of  the  bone  have  been  cut  away,  it  forms  a  tube  through  which  the 
cord  passes.  The  end  of  the  cord  is  then  tied,  forming  in  this  way 
a  loop  through  the  bone ;  unfortunately  this  is  not  shown  in  the 
illustration  (pi.  xxxix).  There  is  nothing  to  indicate  how  or  where 
the  sinker  was  attached. 

Other  Objects 

Only  two  objects  now  remain  to  be  described.  There  is  no  way 
of  ascertaining  from  what  part  of  America  these  came,  although 
they  were  obtained  probably  from  the  northern  Indians.  These 
specimens  are  shown  on  plate  xxxix  with  the  New  England 
material. 

J7^  A  long  thin  piece  of  wood  like  a  lath  shaped  like  a  knife  with  a  handle 
which  one  of  the  Indian  Kings  thrust  down  his  throat.  'Tis  used  as  a 
remedy  to  cause  vomiting  as  a  proang  [?]  tho'  it  did  not  cause  him  to 

vomit. 

This  most  unusual  but  not  unknown  object  is  made  of  hickory. 
Both  ends  are  broken  ;  the  part  remaining  is  5 1 5  mm.  in  length,  with 
an  average  width  of  14  mm.  and  a  thickness  of  2  mm.  It  is  very 
doubtful  whether  these  sticks  were  used  for  the  purpose  described, 
but  rather  were  employed  in  ceremonies  such  as  those  performed  by 


^«^ 

P 

1 

^^   ^ 

^ 

-^^ 

^B     /j^^^H 

»         -'':>; 

,^^^■1 

'rl> . 

i^ 

••1^>J: 

■ll-'fL  ilUlB 

3 

4 

_ 

■rf-'"= 

1; 

\^V 

;^- 

^^^ 

s 

2 

. 

^ 

OBJECTS  BROUSHT  TO  ENGLAND  Fi 


BUSHNKLL]  THE  SLOANE  COLLECTION  685 

the  present  Zuni  Indians  and  by  the  ancient  inhabitants  of  the  West 
Indies. 

Another  more  perfect  piece  is  : 

i^j2    An   instrument  for  cleaning  the  stomach  used   by   the   Indians   of 
America. 

This  object  also  is  made  of  hickory ;  it  is  evidently  entire  and 
perfect.  The  length  is  820  mm.,  the  average  width  15  mm.,  and 
the  thickness  about  2  mm. 

In  this  article  I  have  described  all  the  specimens  from  the  Amer- 
ican colonies  remaining  in  the  British  Museum  as  part  of  the  original 
Sloane  collection.  Before  bringing  the  paper  to  a  close  I  desire  to 
express  my  indebtedness  to  Mr  Chas.  H.  Read  and  Mr  T.  A.  Joyce, 
of  the  British  Museum,  without  whose  assistance  it  could  not  have 
been  prepared. 

London, 

England. 


A  CACHE  OF  STONE  BOWLS  IN  CALIFORNIA 

By  HORATIO  N.  RUST* 

Mr  H.  W.  Hunt,  of  San  Fernando,  California,  has  been  tilling  for 
several  years  the  site  of  an  old  Indian  village,  and  in  doing  so  has 
unearthed  fragments  of  not  fewer  than  thirty  Indian  bowls,  but  no 
whole  specimen.  A  short  time  ago,  while  plowing,  he  encountered 
a  stone,  and  in  digging  it  out  discovered  a  cache  of  twenty-one  sand- 
stone bowls  (see  plate  xl)  carefully  packed  together  in  a  space  not 
exceeding  four  by  five  feet.  On  Mr  Hunt's  invitation  I  personally 
examined  the  contents  of  this  interesting  cache,  finding  the  bowls 
quite  symmetrical  and  all  except  one  in  perfect  condition. 

These  utensils  measure  about  lO  inches  in  greatest  diameter,  and 
from  7  to  lo  inches  across  the  bottom  ;  they  are  about  ij^  inch  in 
thickness  at  rim.  A  shallow  groove  is  cut  in  the  edge  of  the  rim  of 
each  vessel,  in  which  shell  beads  are  set  in  asphaltum.  About  mid- 
way in  the  inside  of  one  of  the  bowls  a  series  of  holes,  about  one-fourth 
of  an  inch  in  depth  and  diameter,  is  cut,  and  in  each  of  these 
holes  a  shell  bead  is  set  in  asphaltum.  These  inset  beads  represent 
the  only  attempt  at  ornamentation. 

After  carefully  examining  the  field  in  which  these  vessels  were 
found  I  reached  the  conclusion  that  the  thirty  broken  bowls  indi- 
cated the  former  occupancy  of  the  site  by  a  village  of  considerable 
size,  and  that  they  had  been  broken  by  an  enemy  rather  than 
through  use.  I  was  led  also  to  the  belief  that  the  villagers  had 
been  killed  and  many  of  their  vessels  destroyed,  but  that  the  pred- 
atory enemy  had  failed  to  find  the  cache  of  bowls,  which  had  been 
secreted  by  their  owners  in  fear  of  such  an  attack. 

This  conclusion  was  reached  in  view  of  the  experience  gained 
from  the  examination  of  many  village  sites  in  California.  On  one 
occasion,  at  a  site  south   of  San   Jacinto   mountain,   I   discovered 

^  As  this  paper  is  going  to  press,  word  is  received  of  the  unfortunate  death  of  the 
author  at  his  home  in  South  Pasadena,  California,  on  November  14.  —  Editor. 

686 


.  ..In  M\  ' 

f 

Mm 

1^ 

». 

flH^^fl 

m 'm 

1    )  •-, 

ft 

■^■J 


RUST]  A   CACHE   OF  STONE  BOWLS  68/ 

twenty-five  stone  mortars,  within  the  radius  of  a  mile,  all  of  which 
had  been  broken  by  violence,  evidently  by  an  enemy  for  the  purpose 
of  depriving  the  villagers  of  an  important  means  of  preparing  food. 
Beside  these  mortars  I  found  a  slab  of  green  talc,  about  8  by  1 5 
inches,  and  three  slabs  of  sandstone  of  about  the  same  width  and 
length  and  i  J^  inch  in  thickness.  Fragments  of  similar  sandstone 
slabs  have  been  found  near  the  same  site,  but  no  pestles  or  other 
artifacts  that  had  not  been  broken,  a  circumstance  that  would  seem 
to  indicate  that  everything  had  been  either  stolen  or  deliberately 
destroyed. 

South  Pasadena, 
California. 


\ 


A  PIMA-MARICOPA  CEREMONY 
By  HERBERT  BROWN 

The  Harvest  or  Com  festival  of  the  Pima  and  the  Maricopa 
Indians,  known  to  them  as  Pan-neech,  or  Wild  Pastime,  is  no  longer 
observed  by  them,  nor  do  I  know  that  it  has  been  observed  for  the 
last  twenty-five  or  thirty  years.  Although  known  as  a  harvest 
festival  it  was  indulged  in  on  all  important  occasions  to  the  extent 
of  one  or  more  times  a  year.  Any  event  of  note  in  tribal  life  was 
generally  so  celebrated  —  an  abundant  harvest;  a  successful  raid 
against  the  Apache ;  the  killing  of  any  of  the  many  predatory 
bands  of  renegade  Indians  which  at  that  time  infested  almost  all 
sections  of  the  country.  Whatever  the  occasion,  the  festival  was 
the  signal  for  a  great  gathering.  I  was  told  that  at  one  time  there 
were  no  fewer  than  4,ocx>  Indians  present  —  Pima,  Maricopa,  and 
Papago.  I  can  not  now  recall  the  reason  for  the  celebration  and 
my  notes  fail  to  aid  me  in  the  matter. 

These  celebrations  invariably  took  place  in  the  mesquite  forest 
north  of  the  old  Casa  Grande  ruins,  south  of  the  village  of  Black- 
water  on  the  Gila.  A  circle  of  ground,  some  half  an  acre  in  extent, 
was  cleared  of  underbrush  and  logs.  A  ridge  of  loose  earth  eight 
or  ten  inches  high  marked  the  exterior  boundary  of  the  circle. 
Near  the  center  of  the  circle  was  a  great  heap  of  dry  wood  from 
which  a  fire,  in  the  center,  was  kept  continually  burning.  At  a 
sufficient  distance  from  the  pile  of  wood  a  trench,  about  8  feet  long, 
6  feet  wide,  and  4  feet  deep,  was  dug  for  the  accomodation  of  the 
musicians,  some  six  in  number,  three  of  whom  beat  drums  and 
three  rasped  the  bottoms  of  upturned  flattish  baskets  upon  which 
had  been  spread  a  layer  of  wax,  an  exudation  from  the  mesquite. 
This  when  rubbed  with  a  bone  produced  a  sound  somewhat  between 
a  squawk  and  a  shriek.  The  drums  were  made  of  Cottonwood  logs 
carefully  burned  out,  over  each  end  of  which  was  stretched  a  piece 
of  half-tanned  deerskin.     The  musicians  kept  time  to  a  tune  that 

688 


<> 


BROWN]  A  PIMA-MARICOPA   CEREMONY  689 

varied  only  according  to  the  intensity  of  the  requirements ;  they 
were  in  place  and  at  work  some  time  before  the  performance  com- 
menced. At  a  given  signal  the  music  stopped  and  two  of  the  tallest 
and  most  athletic  young  Indians  walked  into  the  ring.  They  were 
naked  save  for  a  strip  or  thong  of  buckskin  about  the  loins  which  was 
used  for  the  purpose  of  binding  to  them  wooden  phalli.  These  in- 
struments were  about  six  or  seven  inches  long  and  so  bound  that 
they  stood  erect  from  the  bodies  of  the  wearers.  Each  man  in  his . 
right  hand  carried  a  large  stone  phallus,  twelve  or  fourteen  inches  in 
length  ;  the  left  hands  were  pressed  tightly  against  their  buttocks. 
Each  took  a  position  at  the  opposite  end  of  the  trench  in  which  the 
musicians  sat.  After  regarding  each  other  for  a  time,  the  one 
nearest  the  fire  said,  '*  We  are  here."  The  other  made  answer, 
''Why  are  we  here?"  The  first  replied,  '*  You  will  learn  soon." 
Each  then  planted  the  stone  phallus  in  an  upright  position  at  his 
feet  and  sprang  out  of  the  circle.* 

On  his  reappearance  each  man  carried  in  his  right  hand  a  slender 
stick,  about  four  feet  long,  tipped  with  feathers  of  the  wild  turkey. 
They  were  immediately  followed  by  nine  other  young  men,  all 
naked  as  the  leaders  and  with  wooden  phalli  bound  against  their 
bodies,  but  differing  from  the  latter  in  having  their  bodies  painted  in 
alternate  stripes  of  black  and  white.  The  leaders  raised  their  wands 
and  kept  time  with  the  music,  which  had  recommenced  on  their 
return,  and  all  sang  in  that  low  tone  peculiar  to  Indians.  With  one 
in  the  lead  the  other  ten  danced  in  pairs.  After  circling  the  fire 
several  times,  the  last  pair  dropped  out  and  squatted  in  a  half  sitting 
posture  near  one  of  the  stone  phalli.  At  each  successive  turn  two 
more  would  be  similarly  seated,  six  circling  one  emblem  and  five 
the  other.  At  the  appointed  time  the  sixth  man  sprang  erect  with 
a  yell  and  stood  behind  the  musicians,  which  place  and  position  he 
occupied  during  the  remainder  of  the  ceremonies.  The  other  ten 
sprang  erect  in  pairs,  that  is  one  from  each  group,  and  as  they  met 
they  went  through  the  various  forms  of  men  and  animals  in  the  act 


1  Interesting  in  this  connection  is  the  finding  by  the  Hemenway  Expedition  in  the 
prehistoric  pueblo  ruins  of  the  Salado  valley,  within  the  Pima  country  in  southern  Ari- 
zona, in  1887-88,  of  several  phalli,  usually  of  tufa,  although  not  so  large  as  those  here 
described.  —  Editor. 


,1 


690  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

of  copulation.  This  was  continued,  for  probably  half  an  hour  or 
more,  to  the  delight  and  approval  of  the  interested  mass  of  half- 
naked  humanity  that  packed  the  outer  edge  of  the  circle.  The 
actors  then  disappeared  as  suddenly  as  they  had  come,  with  the 
exception  of  the  man  standing  erect  behind  the  musicians.  In  a 
few  minutes  they  again  returned,  minus  the  wooden  phalli  but  naked 
as  before  except  for  a  strip  of  buckskin  or  of  trader's  calico  thrown 
across  the  shoulders.  The  two  leaders  continued  to  keep  time  with 
their  feather-tipped  sticks,  while  the  other  eight  gathered  handfuls 
of  earth  and  threw  it  on  one  another,  all  the  time  singing  and 
dancing  around  the  fire,  then  jumped  through  the  blazing  mass, 
circled,  and  danced  again.  This  last  performance  however  was 
more  of  a  run  than  a  dance,  and  more  of  a  yell  than  a  song.  It 
was  repeated  five  or  six  times.  At  the  end  of  the  last  round  the 
two  leaders  separated  and  stood  each  by  one  of  the  two  stone  phalli. 
After  regarding  each  other  for  a  few  moments  in  silence,  they  seized 
the  two  emblems  and  ran  out  of  the  ring.  The  other  eight  followed 
in  single  file,  hopping  one  after  the  other  in  toad-like  fashion. 
As  they  passed,  the  man  standing  behind  the  musicians  threw  a 
double  handful  of  earth  on  each.  He  then  disappeared.  After  this 
all  who  wished  passed  into  the  circle  and  danced  as  long  as  they 
pleased. 

Yuma, 

Arizona. 


•^ 


THE  FIFTEENTH  INTERNATIONAL  CONGRESS  OF 

AMERICANISTS 

By  GEORGE  GRANT  MACCURDY 

The  Fifteenth  International  Congress  of  Americanists  was  held 
in  the  Parliament  building,  Quebec,  September  loth  to  15th,  1906. 
About  250  members,  active  and  associate,  were  in  attendance,  and 
the  local  interest  in  the  proceedings  was  very  gratifying.  The  Con- 
gress meets  every  two  years,  the  places  of  meeting  alternating  be- 
tween Europe  and  the  Western  Hemisphere.  The  Quebec  Con- 
gress had  a  local  coloring  all  its  own,  due  to  the  presence  of  so 
many  missionaries  from  various  parts  of  Canada,  whose  contribu- 
tions on  the  tribes  among  whom  they  are  laboring  were  of  special 
interest. 

England  was  represented  by  Drs  A.  C.  Haddon,  of  Cambridge, 
and  D.  Randall-Mad ver,  of  Oxford ;  France  by  Professor  Leon 
Lejeal,  of  the  College  de  France,  and  Comte  de  Perigny ;  Germany 
by  Professor  and  Mrs  Eduard  Seler  and  Dr  Paul  Ehrenreich,  all  of 
the  University  of  Berlin ;  Mexico  by  Sefior  Leopoldo  Batres,  Con- 
servator-general of  the  Archeological  Monuments  of  the  Republic, 
and  Seiior  Santiago  Sierra.  The  United  States  was  not  so  well 
represented  as  it  should  have  been,  those  present  coming  chiefly 
from  Harvard  and  Yale  universities.  New  York,  Philadelphia,  and 
Washington.  Canadian  interest  and  pride  in  the  Congress  were 
shown  by  the  presence  of  many  missionaries,  as  has  been  said,  and 
by  the  loyal  support  of  Quebec.  The  program  included  91  papers, 
but  only  about  half  of  these  were  read. 

The  Congress  was  formally  opened  on  Monday  morning  by  Sir 
Louis  A.  Jette,  Lieutenant-Governor  of  the  Province  of  Quebec, 
and  addresses  of  welcome  were  made  by  representatives  of  the  Gov- 
ernment and  of  the  City  of  Quebec.  The  reading  of  papers  began 
on  Monday  afternoon  and  continued  until  noon  on  Saturday  fol- 
lowing. 

AM    ANTH.,  N    S.,  ft-45.  ^' 


I 

I 

f 

I 

I 

I 


692  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOI.  OGIST  [K.  s.,  8, 1906 

The  opening  paper  by  Professor  Rivard  was  on  the  "French 
Dialects  in  Canada."  Canadian  French  is  neither  classic  French, 
corrupt  French,  nor  a  homogeneous  patois,  but  a  mode  of  speech 
both  regional  and  uniform  with  the  characters  of  the  various /o/^^ 
incorporated  into  the  popular  French  tong^ue  of  northern  France. 
Professor  A.  F.  Chamberlain's  first  paper  was  on  a  similar  subject 
— "  The  Vocabulary  of  Canadian  French."  He  discussed  Indian 
loan-words,  English  loan-words,  words  French  in  form  but  having 
meanings  peculiar  to  Canada,  old  French  words  obsolete  in  France 
but  preserved  in  Canada,  French  dialect  words  surviving  in  Canada, 
"  Canadianisms  "  proper  (/.  ^.,  words,  etc.,  created  de  taute  piece  v^ 
Canada),  the  language  of  the  fishermen,  etc.,  of  the  Gulf  of  St  Law- 
rence, the  speech  of  the  Acadians,  of  the  heUntants^  foresters,  lum- 
bermen, etc.,  the  language  of  the  voyageurs^  coureurs  des  bois, 
hunters,  trappers,  etc.,  of  the  interior,  and  that  of  the  settlers  in  the 
great  Northwest.  The  vocabulary  exhibits  in  marked  fashion  the 
influence  of  environment. 

Professor  E.  L.  Stevenson's  two  interesting  communications 
were  on  the  subject  of  cartography  and  both  were  illustrated  by 
means  of  large  photographic  reproductions  of  early  maps.  In 
"  Comparative  Fallacies  of  Early  New- World  Maps,"  a  chart  was 
exhibited  to  show,  by  means  of  superposition,  the  more  striking 
fallacies  of  the  first  maps.  Error  in  location  is  often  strangely  ex- 
cessive as  to  both  latitude  and  longitude,  the  reasons  for  this 
being  sometimes  obvious  but  often  obscure.  Very  many  of  the 
most  important  early  maps  of  the  New  World  now  known  have  been 
brought  to  light  within  the  last  few  years.  The  most  recent  dis- 
covery is  a  fine  specimen  of  the  work  of  Hondius.  A  facsimile  of 
this  was  exhibited  for  the  first  time. 

There  was  an  evening  session  on  Monday  at  which  two  valuable 
papers  were  presented,  both  being  illustrated  by  numerous  lantern 
slides.  Senor  Leopoldo  Batres  described  his  excavations  at  Teoti- 
huacan,  and  Father  Jones  identified  the  sites  of  Huron  and  Petun 
villages  at  the  time  of  the  Recollet  and  Jesuit  missions,  1615—50. 

Tuesday's  sessions  were  devoted  to  Mexico  and  Yucatan  the 
Isthmus  and  South  America.  Professor  Seler  described  "  Two 
Specimens   from    the  Collection   Sologuren,   Oaxaca,"    exhibiting 


MACCURDY]  INTERNATIONAL  CONGRESS  OF  AMERICANISTS         693 

colored  drawings  of  the  same.  M.  Alphonse  Gagnon  sought  to 
trace  the  origin  of  the  civilization  among  the  ancient  races  of  Mexico 
and  Central  America.  In  his  opinion  it  came  from  India  or  Chaldea 
by  way  of  Ceylon,  Indo-China,  Java,  and  Polynesia. 

Dr  Alfred  M.  Tozzer  pointed  out  ''Some  Survivals  of  Ancient 
Forms  of  Culture  among  the  Mayas  of  Yucatan  and  the  Lacandones 
of  Chiapas."  The  Maya  of  to-day  are  Catholics,  but  they  still 
retain,  in  a  modified  form,  a  considerable  number  of  their  old  beliefs 
and  customs.  The  Lacandones,  being  comparatively  free  from 
outside  influence,  have  preserved  many  of  their  ancient  customs. 
These  include  pilgrimages  to  ruined  cities,  where  they  offer  incense 
to  the  gods.  An  elaborate  ceremonial  of  the  renewal  of  the  incense 
burners  is  clearly  a  survival  of  a  rite  mentioned  by  Landa.  Idols 
are  anointed  with  blood  drawn  from  the  ear.  Names  and  attributes 
of  deities  recorded  by  early  Spanish  writers  have  survived,  but  no 
knowledge  of  the  hieroglyphic  writing  exists. 

The  paper  by  Dr  George  Grant  MacCurdy  dealt  with  '*  The 
Armadillo  Motive  in  the  Ancient  Ceramic  Art  of  Chiriqui."  In  the 
collection  belonging  to  the  Yale  University  Museum,  the  treatment 
of  the  armadillo  includes  all  the  steps  from  realism  on  the  one  side 
to  highly  conventionalized  forms  on  the  other.  It  appears  as 
supports  for  tripods,  as  a  shoulder  ornament  on  vases,  as  handle 
decorations,  and  as  ornamental  features  on  the  necks  of  vases.  In 
many  instances  no  trace  of  the  armadillo  as  a  recognizable  unit 
remains.  In  its  stead,  symbols  representing  the  foot,  eye,  tail,  or 
carapace  are  employed  either  separately  or  in  pleasing  combinations. 
Tail  or  carapace  symbols  are  often  carried  in  meander  around  the 
necks  of  vases,  each  angular  space  being  marked  by  a  foot,  or  an 
eye  symbol.  The  armadillo  is  so  dominant  a  factor  in  the  so- 
called  biscuit  or  terra-cotta  group  of  pottery  that  the  latter  might 
well  be  called  the  armadillo  group  instead.  A  study  of  the  series 
leads  one  to  the  conclusion  that  many  purely  decorative  motives 
had  their  origin  in  some  life  form  or  in  elements  thereof.  In  Egypt 
it  seems  to  have  been  the  lotus ;  in  Chiriqui  it  was  preeminently 
the  armadillo. 

Professor  Lejeal  presented  a  joint  communication   by  himself 
and  M.  Eric  Boman  on  "  The  Calchaqui  Question."     Their  con- 


694  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

elusions,  very  different  from  those  of  Professor  Juan  B.  Ambrosetti, 
are  that  the  Calchaqui  culture  is  closely  related  to  the  Andean 
culture  with  its  center  in  Peru. 

Miss  Adela  Breton,  of  Bath,  England,  offered  two  papers.  Her 
"  Note  on  Xochicalco  "  was  read  by  Dr  Gordon,  and  her  excellent 
copies  of  the  wall-paintings  of  Chichen  Itza  were  exhibited  by  Dr 
Tozzer,  who  followed  with  his  own  notes  on  "  The  Maya  Language 
Spoken  in  Yucatan,"  in  which  he  pointed  out  the  occurrence  of  an 
inclusive  and  an  exclusive  first  person  in  these  dialects. 

Dr  George  B.  Gordon's  subject  was  **  The  Serpent  Motive  in 
the  Ancient  Art  of  Central  America  and  India."  This  motive  is  so 
persistent  in  Central  American  and  Mexican  art  as  to  form  not  less 
than  three-fourths  of  all  the  ornament.  The  original  model  was 
the  rattlesnake.  In  the  art  of  India,  the  serpent  occupies  a  position 
scarcely  less  prominent  than  that  found  in  Central  America ;  but 
the  serpent  image  undergoes  fewer  changes  that  would  tend  to 
disguise  its  identity  or  affect  the  stability  of  the  type.  Dr  Gordon's 
conclusions  are  that  the  resemblances  are  striking  rather  than  pro- 
found, and  not  such  as  to  justify  a  belief  in  an  intimate  relation 
between  the  cultures  of  the  two  countries  or  a  historic  connection 
between  the  two  decorative  systems. 

One  communication  by  Professor  Seler  has  already  been  men- 
tioned. He  presented  four  more  on  Friday  morning,  all  of  them 
accompanied  with  drawings  or  lantern  slides.  The  figures  on  the 
two  reliefs  from  Huilocintla,  District  of  Tuzpan,  State  of  Vera  Cruz, 
represent  Quetzalcoatl  torturing  himself  by  passing  a  thorny  stick 
through  a  hole  in  his  tongue.  Under  the  title  of  *'  Studies  among 
the  Ruins  of  Yucatan,"  Dr  Seler  described  the  maison  du  Nain  at 
Uxmal,  which  he  believ^es  to  have  been  a  temple  dedicated  to  the 
divinity  of  the  planet  Venus.  Professor  Seler's  other  contributions 
were  on  **  Parallels  in  Mayan  Manuscripts  "  and  **  The  Reliefs  in  the 
Temple  of  the  God  of  Pulque  at  Tepoztlan,  State  of  Morelos,  Mexico." 
He  gave  also  brief  abstracts  of  a  paper  by  Dr  Karl  Sapper,  of 
Tubingen,  on  "  Choles  and  Chorties,"  and  of  one  by  Dr  \V.  Leh- 
mann  of  Berlin  on  the  "  Ancient  Mexican  Mosaics  in  the  Berlin 
Museum  of  Ethnology." 

Father  J.  Jette's  contribution  on  *'  The  Social  Condition  of  the 


MACxnjRUY]  INTERNATIONAL  CONGRESS  OF  AMERICANISTS         695 

Tena,"  an  Alaskan  tribe  living  on  the  Yukon  river,  was  read  by 
Father  Turgeon  of  Quebec.  The  Rev.  John  W.  Chapman  of 
Anvik,  Alaska,  read  some  interesting  notes  on  the  Athapascan 
tribe  of  Anvik,  giving  texts  of  traditions  with  translations,  and  a 
detailed  description  of  the  Festival  of  Masks  as  celebrated  during 
the  winter  of  1905. 

Dr  Roland  B.  Dixon  gave  the  results  of  his  studies  on  the 
"  Linguistic  Relationships  within  the  Shasta-Achomawi  Stock,"  in 
which  it  was  shown  that  the  Shasta  group  includes  five  well-differ- 
entiated languages  —  the  Shasta,  Achomawi,  Atsugewi,  New  River, 
and  Konomihu.  Their  affinity  was  demonstrated  by  lexical  com- 
parisons, and  a  number  of  regular  phonetic  changes  were  traced. 

Wednesday  morning's  session  included  two  valuable  contributions 
to  the  subject  of  Indian  music.  The  first  of  these,  by  Dr  Ernest 
Gagnon,  dealt  with  "  Music  among  the  Indians  of  Canada,''  and  the 
second,  by  Miss  Natalie  Curtis,  related  to  "  Indian  Song  and  its 
Place  in  the  Life  of  the  Indian."  In  order  to  illustrate  its  character 
and  beauty.  Miss  Curtis  sang,  to  the  delight  of  the  audience :  (i) 
Hogan  Biyin,  the  "  holy  song  "  of  the  Navahos ;  (2)  Iruska,  a  war- 
dance  song  of  the  Pawnees ;  (3)  Ockaya,  corn-grinding  song  of 
Zuni  women  ;  (4)  Pumuch-Tawi,  lullaby  of  the  Hopi  pueblos ;  and 
(5)  Poli'Tiwa^  butterfly-dance  song  of  the  Hopi  pueblo  of  Oraibi. 

Keen  interest  was  manifested  in  "  A  Key  to  the  Industrial  and 
Social  Evolution  of  the  American  Indian,"  by  Mrs  Charlotte  Osgood 
Mason,  and  "An  Effort  to  Encourage  Indian  Art,"  by  Miss  A.  de 
Cora,  whose  experiences  as  a  teacher  at  the  Carlisle  School  were 
set  forth. 

Dr  Ales  Hrdlicka  opened  Thursday's  session  with  "  A  Resume, 
from  the  Standpoint  of  Various  Skeletal  Remains  that  Suggest,  or 
are  Claimed  to  Represent,  an  Early  Man  on  this  Continent."  It 
was  a  careful  examination,  viewed  from  the  physical  standpoint,  of 
the  merits  as  to  antiquity  of  the  Calaveras  skull,  Trenton  skull  and 
bones,  Lansing  skeleton,  and  the  fossil  human  bones  from  Florida, 
and  included  the  first  detailed  report  concerning  the  Florida  speci- 
mens. Dr  Hrdlicka  would  not  assign  any  of  the  remains  in  ques- 
tion to  a  remote  past.  They  belong  anatomically  to  the  living  type 
of  Indian. 


696  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8,  1906 

Dr  N.  E.  Dionne  gave  translations  of  the  Lord's  Prayer  into 
various  Indian  tongues  of  Canada  and  pointed  out  that  the  Indian 
takes  great  pains  to  conserve  the  purity  of  his  native  language. 

Father  Morice  read  a  paper  on  "The  Position  of  Woman 
among  the  Tinne,"  which  was  followed  by  Father  Hugolin's  paper 
on  "  L'idee  spiritualiste  et  Tidee  morale  chez  les  Chippewas." 

In  his  discussion  of  "  The  Principles  of  Government  among  the 
Indians  of  Canada,"  Dr  J.  E.  Roy  noted  the  existence  of  hereditary 
castes  among  certain  tribes ;  and  touched  upon  their  ideas  of  law 
justice,  ownership  of  the  soil,  rules  of  the  chase,  marriage,  social 
condition  of  woman,  etc. 

Of  special  moment  and  timely  was  the  discussion  of  *'  Ethno- 
logical Problems  in  Canada,"  by  Professor  Franz  Boas,  who  pointed 
out  many  problems  yet  to  be  solved.  The  linguistic  subdivisions 
of  the  Algonquian  and  Athapascan  tribes  are  not  suflficiently  known  ; 
and  extended  collections  of  linguistic  material  from  the  Salish  and 
the  Nootka,  as  well  as  from  the  northern  branches  of  the  Kwaldutl 
of  British  Columbia,  should  be  made.  There  are  still  many 
obscure  points  relative  to  the  distribution  of  the  Cree  tribes.  The 
Athapascan  tribes  of  the  Mackenzie  river  offer  many  interesting 
problems,  as  do  the  North  Pacific  Indians.  The  relationship  be- 
tween the  eastern  and  the  western  Eskimo  and  their  ancient  distribu- 
tion northward  require  further  study.  Archeological  investigation 
of  the  extreme  northwestern  Arctic  region  is  of  special  importance 
if  we  are  to  determine  the  influence  of  the  Indian  and  of  the  Asiatic 
cultures  on  the  western  Eskimo. 

**  Ponca  Grammar  "  was  the  subject  of  a  second  paper  by  Pro- 
fessor Boas.  The  Ponca  are  a  branch  of  the  Siouan  linguistic 
stock.  Ponca  texts,  published  by  the  late  James  Owen  Dorsey 
furnished  material  for  a  grammatical  discussion  which  included  the 
phonetic  system,  prefixes,  suffixes,  the  articles,  demonstratives  and 
pronouns. 

A  paper  by  Father  Padfique  dealt  with  "The  Characteristic 
Traits  of  the  Micmacs,'*  among  whom  he  has  labored  as  a  mission- 
ary. While  it  never  has  been  numerous,  the  tribe  is  in  no  danger 
of  becoming  extinct.  The  Micmacs  are  peace-lovers  and  faithful  to 
the  French,  who  were  the  first  whites  known  to  them. 


MACCURDY]  INTERNA  TIONAL  CONGRESS  OF  AMERICANISTS         697 

Dr  J.  S.  Schmidt's  communication  on  "  The  Chase  as  Practised 
among  the  Indians  of  Anticosti "  was  read  by  Dr  Dionne.  "  The 
Genius  of  the  Algonquian  Language "  was  discussed  by  Father 
George  Le  Moyne.  His  conclusions  were  that  the  sounds  employed 
by  the  Algonquian  are  more  like  the  French  than  the  English. 
From  the  phonetic  viewpoint,  Algonquian  is  more  pleasing  to  the 
ear  than  are  the  Eskimo  and  other  languages  of  the  North. 

"The  Diffusion  of  Culture  in  the  Plains  of  North  America  "  was 
discussed  by  Dr  Clark  Wissler.  Dependence  on  the  buffalo,  the 
use  of  skin  tents,  the  dog-travois,  absence  of  weaving,  use  of  the 
circular  shield,  occurrence  of  the  sun  dance,  and  a  peculiar  style  of 
decorative  art,  all  characterize  the  plains  culture.  The  Plains  In- 
dians may  be  divided  into  three  groups  :  those  of  the  Missouri,  those 
of  the  plateaus,  and  those  of  the  Great  Plains.  The  ceremonials  of 
all  have  certain  traits  in  common. 

Dr  Charles  Peabody  gave  a  resume  of  a  communication  from 
Dr  George  F.  Kunz  relative  to  "  The  Heber  R.  Bishop  Collection 
of  Jade  and  the  Catalogue  Illustrating  the  Same."  Dr  Walter 
Hough  performed  a  similar  service  for  Mr  James  Mooney,  giving  a 
summary  of  the  paper  by  the  latter  on  "  The  Cheyenne." 

Dr  Hough  presented  two  papers  of  his  own.  The  first  of  these 
was  based  on  "  The  Field-work  of  the  Gates  Expedition  of  the 
U.  S.  National  Museum  to  the  Head-waters  of  the  Gila-Salt  and  San 
Francisco  Rivers,  in  New  Mexico  and  Arizona."  Numerous  lantern 
slides  gave  illustrations  of  the  ancient  pueblos,  caves,  cliff-dwellings, 
etc.,  of  this  region. 

Dr  Hough's  second  theme  was  "  Two  Great  Culture  Plants,"  in 
which  he  attempted  to  show  the  intimate  and  even  essential  relation- 
ship between  human  culture  and  the  vegetal  environment.  The  two 
plants  selected  were  the  palm  and  the  agave,  the  latter  influencing 
American  (Anahuac)  civilization  especially. 

A  second  paper  by  Dr  Gordon  on  "  An  Engraved  Bone  found 
in  an  Indian  Grave  at  Cincinnati,  Ohio,"  is  to  be  noted.  The  speci- 
men in  question  was  found  in  1801.  The  engraving  is  believed  to 
be  a  representation  of  the  puma. 

Other  papers  read  were  **  The  Iroquois  of  Caughnawaga,"  by 
the  Abbe  J.  G.  Forbes ;  **  The  Language  of  the  Tinne,"  by  Father 


698  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [N.  s,,  8,  1906 

Legoff ;  and  "  Cheyenne  Grammar,"  by  Rev.  Rudolph  Petter.  In 
the  absence  of  the  Abbe  Guindon,  his  communication  on  "  Poetic 
Adaptations  of  Algonquian  Myths"  was  presented  by  Father  Du- 
paigne,  who  also  read  for  Father  Rousseau  the  latter's  very  interest- 
ing contribution  relative  to  the  "  Manners  and  Customs  of  the 
Hochelagas  of  the  time  of  Jacques  Cartier." 
The  following  papers  were  read  by  title : 

M.  L*ABB^  GossELiN  :  Quelques  notions  sur  les  Sauvages  du  Mississippi 
au  commencement  du  XVIII*  si^cle,  d*apr^s  les  lettres  des  missionaires  du 
temps,  conserv6es  dans  les  archives  du  S^minaire  de  Quebec. 

M.  LE  BARON  M.  DE  ViLLiERS  DU  Terrage  :  Un  rappoft  du  Chevalier  dc 
KerI6rec,  gouverneur  de  la  Louisiane  fran9aise  (1758). 

Dr  Jules  Humbert  :  Les  plans  de  colonisation  espagnole  au  V6n6zu61a 
et  en  Guyane. 

Dr  C.  F.  Newcombe  :  The  Haida  Indians  of  Queen  Charlotte  Islands. 

Father  £.  David  :  Les  Montaignais  du  Labrador  et  du  Lac  Saint-Jean. 

Dr  Berthold  Laufer  ;  (a)  The  Introduction  of  Maize  into  Eastern 
Asia.     (^)  Note  on  the  Introduction  of  the  Peanut  into  China. 

Mr  George  G.  Heye  :  Exhibition  of  Archeological  Specimens  from  the 
Northwest  Coast  of  Ecuador. 

M.  LE  COMTE  de  Charencey  :  Deux  contes  receuillis  chez  les  Indiens 
d*Oaxaca  par  M.  Belmar. 

Rev.  Leopold  Ostermann  :  The  Navaho  Noun. 

Dr  George  A.  Dorsey  :  (d)  Presentation  of  a  Pawnee  Star  Chart,  {b) 
A  Preliminary  Account  of  the  Morning  Star  Sacrifices  among  the  Pawnees. 
{c)  The  Social  Organization  of  the  Skidi  Pawnee. 

Mr  George  H.  Pepper  :  Navaho  Blankets. 

Father  Ronald  :  £tude  sur  la  tribu  des  Cris. 

Father  Hugonard  :  Les  Cris  des  Prairies. 

Miss  Marthe  W.  Beckwith  :  Dance  Forms  of  the  Moqui  and  Kwakiutl 
Indians. 

M.  l'abb^  E.  Gauvreau  :  Religion  des  Dakotas  et  des  Assiniboines. 

Dr  Cyrus  Thomas  :  Some  Suggestions  in  regard  to  Primary  Indian  Mi- 
grations in  North  America. 

Dr  a.  L.  Kroeber  :  The  Ceremonial  Organization  of  the  Plains  Indians 
of  North  America. 

Dr  p.  E.  Goddard  :  Assimilation  to  Environment  as  Illustrated  by  Atha- 
pascan Peoples. 

M.  l'abb6  a.  Mantel  :  fetude  de  philologie  compar6e  sur  Taffinite  des 
langues  algique's  avec  les  langues  indo-europ6ennes. 

Professor  J.  Dyneley  Prince  :  A  Micmac  Manuscript. 

Mr  Waldemar  Jochelson  :  The  Former  and  Present  Underground 
Dwellings  of  the  Tribes  of  Northeastern  Asia  and  Northwestern  America. 


MACCURDY]  INTERNA  TIONAL  CONGRESS  OF  AMERICANISTS         699 

Dr  William  Jones  :  Death  and  Funeral  among  the  Sauk  and  Fox. 

Mr  James  Mooney  :  The  Decrease  of  Indian  Population. 

£tude  sur  les  Ab^nakis  de  la  Province  de  Qu6bec,  par  un  Ab6naki. 

Miss  Constance  Goddard  Dubois  :  (a)  Dieguefto  Myths  and  their  Con- 
nection with  those  of  the  Mohaves.  (^)  Two  [types  of  Dieguefto  Religious 
Dances,  the  Old  and  New,  in  Southern  California. 

M.  Jules  Geddes  :  L' importance  de  I'unit^  phon6tique. 

Mr  J.  N.  B.  Hewitt  :  Proposed  International  Phonetic  Conference  to 
Adopt  a  Universal  Alphabet. 

Mr  Teobert  Maler  :  Presentation  de  photographies  du  monument  du 
Yucatan. 

Members  of  the  Congress  received  gifts  of  various  publications. 
The  Government  of  Quebec  presented  two  volumes,  one  on  Noms 
geographiques  de  la  province  de  Quebec  et  des  pramftces  ntaritimes 
empruntes  aux  langues  sauvages,  by  M.  Eugene  Rouillard,  and  the 
other  on  Les  noins  geograptiiques  de  la  province  de  Quebec ^  by  Dr 
Pierre-Georges  Roy.  The  Government  of  Ontario  gave  copies  of  its 
Annual  Archaeological  Report  (1905),  the  work  of  many  contribu- 
tors, especially  of  Professor  Boas.  Seiior  Leopoldo  Batres  presented 
a  memoir  relative  to  the  explorations  undertaken  by  the  government 
of  Mexico  at  Teotihuacan.  Four  other  publications  by  Senor  Batres, 
dealing  chiefly  with  work  in  governmental  inspection  and  preserva- 
tion of  archeological  monuments,  were  distributed.  The  University 
of  Pennsylvania  dedicated  Volume  11,  part  i.  Transactions  of  the 
Department  of  Archeology,  Free  Museum  of  Science  and  Art,  to 
the  Congress  ;  and  the  American  Anthropological  Association  sent 
a  review  of  the  "  Recent  Progress  in  American  Anthropology " 
since  the  New  York  Congress  of  October,  1902.^ 

Professors  F.  W.  Putnam  and  John  C.  Merriam  gave  copies  of 
their  recent  publications  on  "  Cave  Explorations  in  California."  * 
Other  papers  presented  were  by  Professor  Lejeal  on  the  Congress 
of  Stuttgart ;  Mr  C.  P.  Bowditch  on  "  Maya  Studies  "  ;  Mrs  Zelia 
Nuttall  on  **  Unsolved  Problems  in  Mexican  Archeology  "  ;  *  and 
Mr  Francis  La  Flesche  on  "  The  Medicine  Man." 

On  Wednesday  afternoon  Lady  Jette  gave  a  garden  party  at 


1  Reprinted  from  the  American  Anthropologist^  July-September,  1906. 
'Ibid.,  April-June,  1906. 
*Ibid.,  January-March,  1906. 


700  AMERKAlf  AlfTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s..  8,  1906 

Spencer  Wood,  official  residence  of  his  Honor,  the  Lieutenant-Gov- 
ernor of  the  Province  of  Quebec ;  and  on  Thursday  evening  there 
was  a  reception  at  the  University  of  Laval,  given  by  the  rector  and 
professors.  The  Mayor's  soiree  in  honor  of  the  Congress  was  held 
at  Kent  House,  Montaioren<7  Falls,  on  Friday. 

Among  the  resolutions,  the  following  was  passed:  "The  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Americanists  has  learned  with  great  r^ret  that 
Dr  Albert  5.  Gatschet  has  been  compelled  to  give  up  the  continua- 
tion of  his  important  investigations  which  he  has  carried  on  for 
many  years,  and  expresses  its  admiration  for  the  great  services 
which  he  has  rendered  to  Americanistic  studies,  particularly  to 
those  of  Indian  languages  and  of  the  ethnography  of  North 
America." 

At  the  final  session  on  Saturday  morning,  under  the  presidency 
of  Dr  Robert  Bell,  it  was  voted  to  hold  the  next  Coi^ress  at  Vienna 
in  1908.  Many  members  remained  to  take  part  in  the  excursions 
of  Saturday  afternoon,  Sunday,  and  Monday. 

Among  those  who  contributed  largely  to  the  success  of  the 
Quebec  meeting,  the  services  of  Mgr  J.  C.  K.  Laf]amme,  Professoi 
Franz  Boaz,  Dr  N.  E.  Dionne  and  M.  Alphonse  Gagnon  deserve 
special  mention. 


Senor  Licenciado  Don  Alfredo  Chavero  died  in  the  City  of 
Mexico,  October  24,  1906. 

Senor  Chavero  was  beyond  question  the  dean  of  Mexican 
archeologists ;  but  not  only  as  an  archeologist  was  he  prominent  — 
he  was  a  lawyer  of  eminence,  an  active  politician,  a  man  of  affairs, 
a  brilliant  orator,  and  a  successful  writer. 

Bom  in  the  City  of  Mexico,  February  i,  1841,  Alfredo  Chavero 
began  the  active  practice  of  law  in  his  native  city  at  the  early  age 
of  twenty  years,  and  in  the  year  of  his  majority,  1862,  was  elected 
a  deputy  to  Congress.  He  was  a  liberal  in  politics,  and  was  associ- 
ated with  President  Juarez  during  the  period  of  the  French  invasion 
of  Mexico  under  Maximilian.  After  the  fall  of  the  empire,  in  1867, 
he  entered  journalism,  thus  beginning  his  career  as  a  man  of  letters. 
Not  being  in  sympathy  with  the  administration  of  President  Lerdo  de 
Tejada,  he  went  to  Europe,  returning  when  Lerdo  de  Tejada's  term 
of  office  ceased,  and  serving  under  the  new  administration  as  sub- 
secretary  to  the  Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs.  In  1871  he  became 
governor  of  the  Federal  District,  and  for  many  years,  until  his  death, 
was  a  member  of  the  Chamber  of  Deputies,  over  which  he  presided 
at  various  times.  He  was  long  regarded  as  the  most  brilliant 
speaker  in  that  body. 

Notwithstanding  the  demands  of  his  political  offices,  Sefkor 
Chavero  found  time  to  devote  attention  to  numerous  educational, 
administrative,  and  judicial  organizations.  He  was  professor  of 
administrative  law  in  the  School  of  Commerce,  a  member  of  the 
commission  that  formed  the  commercial  code,  a  director  of  the 
School  of  Commerce  and  of  the  College  of  Peace,  Comptroller  of 
the  National  Bank,  a  member  of  the  permanent  Arbitration  Board 
at  the   Hague,  a  member  of  the  Pan-American  Congress  held  in 

701 


702  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  {v.  %.,  8,  1906 

Mexico,  the  perpetual  secretary  of  the  Statistical  and  Geographical 
Society  of  Mexico  for  more  than  forty  years,  the  director  of  the 
National  Museum  of  Mexico  in  1903,  and  the  holder  of  various  other 
positions  of  national  importance.  Seiior  Chavero  was  a  founder  of 
the  American  Anthropological  Association,  and  a  member  of  the 
editorial  board  of  the  American  Anthropologist  from  the  time  it  be- 
came the  Association's  official  organ.  He  was  also  a  member  of 
the  Societe  des  Americanistes  de  Paris  and  of  the  American  Anti- 
quarian Society,  and  a  corresponding  member  of  the  Real  Academia 
Espafiola  de  la  Historia.  He  was  president  of  the  Mexican  dele- 
gation to  the  Thirteenth  International  Congress  of  Americanists 
held  at  New  York  in  1902,  and  was  one  of  the  speakers  on  the  sub- 
ject of  archeology  at  the  International  Congress  of  Arts  and  Sci- 
ences held  at  the  Saint  Louis  Exposition  in  1904.  On  both  of 
these  occasions  he  made  many  warm  friends  in  this  country  by  his 
genial  and  courteous  manner. 

Notwithstanding  the  many  duties  which  Seiior  Chavero  was  called 
on  to  perform  as  a  leading  man  of  affairs,  he  found  time  to  exer- 
cise his  talent  as  a  historian  and  an  archeologist,  and  even  to  enter 
the  field  of  dramatic  literature.  He  was  among  the  first  students 
of  modem  times  to  make  a  careful  comparative  study  of  the  Mexican 
calendar  system,  and  it  is  due  to  his  activity  that  the  works  of 
Duran,  Ixtlilxochitl,  and  Camargo  have  been  published.  The  fol- 
lowing is  a  fairly  complete  list  of  Senor  Chavero's  anthropological 
publications : 

Calendario  Azteca.  (Appendix  to  Diccionaho  Geografico  Estadlstico  de 
la  Republics  Mexicana,  Tomo  III,  entrega  108,  Mexico,  1875.) 

Calendario  Azteca :  Ensayo  Arqueologico.     ad  ed.,  Mexico,  1876. 

Sahagun,  Estudio.      Mexico,  1877. 

Explicacion  del  C6dice  Geroglifico  de  Mr  Aubin.  (Appendix  to  His- 
toria de  las  Indias  de  Nueva  EspaRa,  by  Duran,  Tomo  II,  Mexico 
1880.) 

La  Piedra  del  Sol :  Estudio  Arqueologico.  (Anales  del  Museo  Nacional 
Mexico,  1880-1901.) 

Mexico  a  Travis  de  los  Siglos.  Tomo  I,  Historia  Antigua  y  de  la  Con- 
quista.      Barcelona,  1884. 

AntigQedades  Mexicanas.  (Text,  with  an  explanation  of  the  Lienzo  of 
Tlaxcala,  Mexico,  1891.) 


SAViLLE]  ALFREDO  CHAVERO  703 

Los  Dioses  Astron6micos  de  los  antiguos  Mexicanos.     (Appendix  to  In- 

terpretacion  del  Codice  Borgiano,  by  J.  L.  Fabrega.     Anales  del 

Museo  Nacional,  Mexico,  1900.) 
Pinturas  Jeroglificas.     Two  parts.     Mexico,    1900-01.     (The  original 

codex  reproduced  by  Sefior  Chavero  in  Part  2  was  presented  by  him 

to  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History  at  the  time  of  meeting 

of  the  International  Congress  of  Americanists  at  New  York,  1902.) 
Calendario  6  Rueda  del  Afto  de  los  Antiguos  Indios.     Estudio  Crono- 

16gico.     Mexico,  1901. 
Calendario  de  Palemke  :  Los  Signos  de  los  Dias.     Mexico,  1902. 
Palemke  Calendar :  The  Signs  of  the  Day.     (Transactions  International 

Congress  of  Americanists,  New  York,  1902.) 
Calendario  de  Palemke:    Los  Signos   de  las  Veintenas.     (Anales  del 

Museo  Nacional,  Mexico,  1903.) 
Apuntes  Viejos  de  Bibliografia  Mexicana.     Mexico,  1903. 
El  Monolito  de  Coatlinchan.     (Anales  del  Museo  Nacional,  Mexico. 

Also  separate  edition,  1904.) 
Bibliographic  Notes  on  Morfi,  Vega,  Tovar,  Veytia.     (Anales  del  Museo 

Nacional,  Mexico,  1903,  1904,  1905.) 
Editor  of — 
Obras  Historicas  de  Don  Fernando  de  Alva  Ixtlilxochitl.     Two  volumes. 

Mexico,  1892. 
Historia  de  Tlaxcala,  by  Camargo.     Mexico,  1892. 

American  students  always  found  it  a  great  pleasure  to  meet 
Seiior  Chavero,  especially  in  his  home  in  Mexico,  surrounded  by  the 
books  relating  to  Mexican  history  which  he  loved  and  knew  so  well. 
In  his  death  American  archeology  and  early  history  have  lost  one 
of  their  oldest  and  most  devoted  workers. 

Marshall  H.  Saville. 


yl. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 

TraiU  des  variations  des  as  de  la  face  de  rhomme^  et  de  Icur  signification 
au  point  de  vue  de  V  anthropologic  zoologique.  Pax  M.  le  Dr  A.  F. 
Le  Double.     Paris:    Vigot  Fr^res,  1906.    8®,  xx,  471  pp.,  163  figs. 

The  present  work  of  Professor  Le  Double  is  one  of  a  series  by  the 
same  author  dealing  with  variation.  Like  the  preceding  volume  on 
variations  in  the  bones  of  the  cranial  vault,  already  reviewed  in^these 
pages  (vol.  VI,  no.  5),  this  represents  the  first  important  effort  toward  a 
r^sum6  of  the  entire  subject,  supplemented  with  personal  observations. 

In  his  preface  the  author  enumerates,  with  some  superfluity,  his  ser- 
vices to  science.  The  treatment  of  the  variations  of  the  nasal  bones  occu- 
pies 37  pages  of  the  text ;  of  the  lachrymal  bone,  34  ;  inferior  turbinated, 
8;  vomer  8;  palate  bones,  26;  malar,  52;  superior  maxilla,  141  ;  and 
inferior  maxilla,  71.  Pages  379-408  comprise  Dr  Le  Double's  conclu- 
sions, and  pages  411-442  contain  additions  to  his  previous  work  on 
cranial  variations. 

The  volume  is  well  worth  perusal,  or  rather  consultation,  although  the 
ever-present  ego  interferes  somewhat  with  the  reading.  Facial  variations 
are  classed,  on  the  basis  of  their  etiology,  into  ( i )  reversive,  ( 2 )  those 
due  to  ossification  in  an  aponeurosis  or  a  ligament,  (3)  those  due  to  vas- 
cular, nervous,  tendinous,  or  glandular  pressure,  (4)  those  due  to  a 
retardation  or  insufficiency  of  ossification,  (5)  those  that  are  the  eflfect  of 
physiological  or  pathological  dystrophy,  and  (6)  monstrosities.  The 
discussion  of  the  variations  of  each  bone  proceeds  according  to  a  definite 
sequence,  which  facilitates  reference  to  any  particular  feature  ;  and  the 
numerous  bibliographical  references  will  prove  of  service  to  the  student. 

Among  the  defects  of  the  work  are  the  incomplete  treatment  of  cer- 
tain features,  and  at  least  in  some  cases  a  lack  of  thoroughness  in  the 
digestion  of  the  material.  The  arguments  of  the  author  also  are  not 
always  fortunate  ;  thus,  for  instance,  the  teeth  of  the  Australians  fp. 
215,  403)  are  not  **  enormous,**  compared  with  those  of  whites. 
Finally,  the  fulness  of  the  bibliographical  references,  and  many  of  the 
illustrations,  leave  much  to  be  desired. 

The  next  work  promised  by  Professor  Le  Double  will  be  devoted  to 
a  study  of  the  variations,  through  excess,  of  the  hair  of  the  human  body. 

A.  Hrdlicka. 
704 


BOOK  RE  VIE  WS  705 

Tribes  of  the  Columbia  Valley  and  the  Coast  of  Washington  and  Oregon. 
By  Albert  Buell  Lewis.  Memoirs  of  the  American  Anthropo- 
logical Association,  Vol.  i,  part  2.  Lancaster,  Pa.  :  The  New  Era 
Printing  Co.,  1906.     8®,  56  p. 

The  ethnology  of  no  region  of  the  Pacific  coast  north  of  Mexico  has 
been  more  neglected  than  that  embraced  in  the  states  of  Washington  and 
Oregon.  Thanks  to  the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of 
Science,  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  the  Bureau  of  Amer- 
ican Ethnology,  and  the  individual  work  of  Krause,  we  are  in  possession 
of  a  number  of  extended  treatises  on  the  tribes  of  British  Columbia  and 
Alaska  ;  while  California  has  been  the  subject  of  Powers'  pioneer  work, 
and  of  notable  reports  within  the  last  few  years  by  Kroeber,  Dixon,  and 
Goddard.  In  spite  of  excellent  detail  work  by  Gibbs,  Eels,  Gatschet, 
Boas,  and  Farrand,  no  such  exhaustive  treatises  exist  however  for  the 
intermediate  region.  All  the  more  interest  and  importance  therefore 
attach  to  the  paper  before  us,  which  at  once  puts  the  student  in  touch 
with  all  the  scattered  references  to  the  people  of  this  area  and  through  its 
copious  bibliography  and  footnotes  enables  him  to  refer  to  the  original 
sources  at  pleasure. 

The  general  results  of  Dr  Lewis*  investigation  are  about  such  as  might 
have  been  anticipated  from  what  we  know  of  the  tribes  north  and  south. 
He  finds,  as  in  the  region  immediately  to  the  north,  that  the  main  dis- 
tinction of  culture  is  between  the  coast  and  the  interior  separated  by  the 
Cascade  mountains,  and  that  each  resembles  the  corresponding  area  in 
British  Columbia  and  Alaska,  minor  variations  being  noted  between  Puget 
sound  and  the  Columbia  valley.  In  southern  and  southwestern  Oregon 
however  Dr  Lewis  finds  two  smaller  cultural  areas,  intermediate  between 
the  cultural  area  of  California  and  those  of  the  interior  plateau  and  the 
coast  respectively.  Finally,  and  perhaps  most  interesting  of  all,  he  finds  a 
small  independent  cultural  area  in  the  Willamette  valley,  in  the  region 
occupied  by  the  Kalapuya  tribes.  This,  while  within  easy  reach  of  the 
true  coastal  culture,  resembles  rather  that  of  the  interior,  thus  showing  a 
striking  conservatism  on  the  part  of  the  Kalapuya  people. 

Not  only  has  Dr  Lewis  in  this  treatise  saved  other  ethnologists  an  im- 
mense amount  of  work,  but  he  has  laid  an  indispensable  basis  for  further 
field  explorations.  The  comparative  meagerness  of  our  knowledge  of 
these  tribes  after  so  thorough  an  investigation  also  points,  as  Dr  Lewis 
notes  in  concluding,  to  the  imperative  necessity  for  immediate  field  investi- 
gations of  the  few  fast-decreasing  tribal  remnants  in  this  comer  of  the 
United  States.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  some  of  our  institutions  will  awake 
to  the  need  while  there  is  yet  time.  J.  R.  Swanton. 


706  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s.,  8, 1906 

The  Universal  Kinship.  By  J.  Howard  Moore,  Instructor  in  Zoology, 
Crane  Manual  Training  High  School,  Chicago.  Chicago :  Charles 
Kerr  &  Co.,  1906.     8°.     329  p. 

As  its  name  implies,  the  main  thesis  of  this  book  is  the  absolute  com- 
munity in  origin  and  continuous  interdei>endence  of  all  life.  The  author 
makes  the  usual  comparison  between  man  and  other  animals  on  the  physi- 
cal, intellectual,  and  moral  sides,  and  proves  —  as  has  been  done  many 
times  before  —  that  there  is  no  impassable  gulf  between  them.  He 
spares  no  opportunity  to  denounce  the  overweening  self-conceit  of  the 
animal  man  in  arrogating  to  himself  a  higher  place  in  creation  than  his 
"humbler  brothers,"  as  well  as  his  thoughtlessness  and  cruelty  in  deal- 
ing with  them. 

If  Mr  Moore's  work  helps  in  any  way  toward  a  kinder  treatment  of 
our  animal  friends  and  servants,  it  is  in  so  far  commendable.  Its  failing, 
as  in  the  case  of  so  many  works  of  similar  nature,  is  that  in  sweeping 
away  impassable  gulfs  it  ignores  real  differences.  Thus,  after  we  have 
proved  that  no  impassable  gulf  exists  between  man  and  the  other  animals, 
we  still  have  to  admit  that  there  is  a  difference  between  them,  nor  can  this 
difference  be  swept  away  by  anatomical  comparisons  and  psychological 
investigations.  It  simply  is.  In  the  same  way,  after  we  have  shown  that 
species  in  general  are  not  immutable,  we  have  not  proved  thereby  that 
they  are  not  different,  and  the  nature  of  the  difference  between  the  snail 
and  the  snake,  the  wolf  and  the  worm,  is  just  what  we  want  to  know.  We 
must  also  raise  a  protest  against  the  extremes  to  which  the  biological 
brotherhood  idea  tends  to  be  carried.  We  wish  our  **  humbler  brothers  '  * 
well,  but  it  will  be  some  time  before  we  see  the  duty  or  the  expediency 
of  sitting  down  to  lunch  in  company  with  centipedes  and  tigers,  or  of 
keeping  house  from  choice  with  cockroaches  and  rats. 

J.     R.    SWANTON. 

The  Northern  Maidu.  By  Roland  B.  Dixon.  Bulletin  of  the  Ameri- 
can Museum  of  Natural  History,  Vol.  xvii,  part  in,  pp.  119-346. 
New  York,   1905. 

Much  concerning  the  aboriginal  life  and  customs  of  a  Califomian  peo- 
ple, the  remnant  of  whom  are  rapidly  being  merged  into  civilization,  has 
been  rescued  in  the  nick  of  time  by  the  efforts  of  Dr  Dixon,  made  pos- 
sible by  the  generosity  of  Mr  Archer  Huntington.  The  Maidu,  like  the 
inhabitants  of  the  northwestern  portion  of  California,  were  but  slightly 
touched  by  Spanish  influence,  and  the  explorers  and  trappers  who  passed 
through  their  territory  did  little  to  alter  the  primitive  state  in  which  they 


BOOK  REVIEWS  JOJ 

lived.  It  was  not  until  the  discovery  of  gold  in  1849  that  the  destruction 
of  the  primitive  habits  and  culture  of  the  Maidu  began.  Not  only  may 
the  world  congratulate  itself  that  sufficient  interest  has  been  aroused  to 
accomplish  this  work  while  there  are  those  of  the  Maidu  still  living  who 
remember  the  period  before  white  occupancy,  but  it  may  count  itself  for- 
tunate that  this  task  has  fallen  into  the  hands  of  a  student  of  sufficient 
sympathy,  patience,  and  breadth  of  view  to  cover  the  whole  field  of  in- 
terest and  to  unearth  the  details  which  are  so  essential  to  the  proper 
understanding  of  native  peoples. 

After  a  brief  geographical  and  historical  survey,  Dr  Dixon  devotes 
about  a  hundred  pages  of  text  and  pen  drawings  to  a  description  of  the 
material  culture  of  the  Maidu.  He  has  classified  the  objects  which  they 
possessed  according  to  the  material  of  which  they  consisted  —  stone,  cor- 
dage, basket  materials,  feathers,  etc.  Under  clothing  and  personal 
adornment  we  are  shown  in  drawings  the  snow-shoes  and  toilet  articles 
used  in  the  region.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  such  straightforward  and  thor- 
ough statements  of  the  facts  concerning  the  wearing  of  objects  which 
were  a  source  of  discomfort  rather  than  comfort,  the  tattooing  of  the  face, 
etc.,  may  some  time  make  possible  an  explanation  of  the  purpose  in  social 
and  sexual  affairs  which  the  rendering  of  one's  self  hideous  really  has. 

The  dwellings  and  dance  houses  are  of  the  type  prevailing  generally 
in  the  central  portion  of  California.  The  food  supply,  and  weapons  and 
means  of  defense,  the  two  most  important  material  factors  which  deter- 
mine not  only  the  density  of  the  population  but  the  very  existence  of  a 
people,  are  given  due  attention. 

At  this  precise  moment,  the  account  Dr  Dixon  gives  us  of  the  social 
organization  of  the  Maidu  and  their  practices  at  the  birth,  puberty,  and 
death  of  individuals  is  especially  welcome.  The  implements  of  war  and 
chase  were  the  private  property  of  the  men,  the  household  utensils  that 
of  the  women ;  but  the  land  and  streams,  with  the  fish,  deer,  and  vege- 
table products  in  and  upon  them  were  the  property  of  small  communities, 
the  boundaries  of  whose  holdings  were  carefully  marked.  The  Maidu, 
in  common  with  other  peoples  of  the  Pacific  coast,  have  many  strict 
taboos  and  ceremonies  connected  with  child-birth,  puberty,  menstrua- 
tion, and  death.  While  some  of  these  still  await  an  adequate  explana- 
tion, others  are  perfectly  consistent  with  the  belief  the  Maidu  avow,  in 
common  with  most  primitive  peoples,  in  a  soul  existing  before  the 
birth  of  the  individual,  capable  of  temporary  separation  from  the  body 
during  life,  and  surviving  afler  death,  when,  unless  proper  precautions 
are  taken,  it  may  linger  about  its  former  abode,  bringing  misfortune  upon 

MA,  ANTH.,  N.  t.,  8-^|6. 


708  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  [n.  s..  8.  191 

the  living.  After  its  departure  to  the  world  of  ghosts  it  may  still  \ 
reached  by  means  of  gifts  and  vocal  utterances.  This  latter  belief  b 
given  rise  among  the  Maidu  to  an  elaborate  and  highly  iaterestiDg  cen 
mony  in  which  annually  many  costly  offerings  are  made  to  the  dead. 

The  shamans  among  the  Maidu  are  those  who  have  attached  to  then 
selves  certain  spirits  as  helpeis,  and  who  are  able  in  dreams  to  obtain  froi 
spirits  and  ghosts  such  information  as  may  be  in  their  keeping.  The; 
shamans  are  capable  of  both  removing  and  restoring  the  sou],  thus  pr< 
ducing  death  or  health  at  will.  As  is  so  generally  the  custom  in  Nort 
America,  semi-material  objects  bearing  the  same  relation  to  the  re: 
object  that  souls  do  to  men  are  removed  from  the  body  of  the  sick  b 
means  of  sucking. 

The  larger  ceremonies  of  the  Maidu,  usually  consisting  in  part  ( 
dancing,  were  held  during  the  winter  months.  Of  especial  interest  an 
importance  is  the  secret  society  into  which  most  bo}^  were  initiate 
during  adolescence,  the  leaders  of  which  were  most  influential  in  al 
matters  pertaining  to  the  interests  of  the  people, 

Dr  Dixon  finds  diversity  within  this  region  increasing  as  he  move 
from  the  material  objects  to  religious  beliefs  and  practices,  a  thing  quit 
true  in  other  parts  of  the  state.  Indeed,  he  concludes  that  variety  ii 
culture  is  one  of  the  most  striking  features  of  the  region.  Since  this  i 
the  case  such  a  detailed  study  and  record  of  this  people  is  most  welcome 
P.  E.  Goddard. 
SOME    NEW    PUBLICATIONS 

Codex  Borgia,  Eine  altmexicanische  Bilderschrift  der  Bibliothel 
der  Congregatio  de  Propaganda  Fide.  Herausgegeben  auf  Kosten  Seine 
Excellenz  des  Herzogs  von  Loubat,  Correspondirenden  Mitgliedes  de 
Instiiut  de  France.  Erlautert  von  Dr.  Eduard  Seler.  Band  II.  Berlin 
1906.     4°,  310  pp.,  pi.  29-76. 

Gehonimo's  Story  of  His  Life.  Taken  down  and  Edited  by  S.  M 
Barrett.      New  York:    Dulfield  &  Co.,  1906.     n°,  xxvii,  ai6  p.,  ills. 

JuDD,  Maby  Catherine;  Wigwam  Stories  told  by  North  Americai 
Indians.  With  illustrations  by  .\ngel  de  Cora.  Boston  :  Ginn  &  Co. 
1906.     12°,  ix,  278  p.,  ills. 

MO1.LER,  W.  Max.  Egyptological  Researches.  Results  of  a  Joume 
in  1904.      Washington  :  Carnegie  Institution,  1906.      4°,  62  pp.,  log  pi 

Skeat,  Walter  William,  and  Blagden,  Charles  Otto,  Pagai 
Races  of  the  Malay  Peninsula.  In  Two  Volumes.  London  :  Macmillai 
&Co.;  New  York:  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1906.     8°,  xl,  724;    x,  855  p 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 
Conducted  by  Dr  Alexander  F.  Chamberlain 

[Note.  —  Authors,  especially  those  whose  articles  appear  in  journals  and  other 
serials  not  entirely  devoted  to  anthropology,  will  greatly  aid  this  department  of  the 
American  Anthropologist  by  sending  directly  to  Dr  A.  F.  Chamberlain,  Clark  University, 
Worcester,  Massachusetts,  U.  S.  A.,  reprints  or  copies  of  such  studies  as  they  may  desire 
to  have  noticed  in  these  pages.  —  Editor.] 


general 

Ahlenius  (K.)  Friedrich  Ratzel  och 
hans  antropogeograBska  l&robyggnad. 
(Ymer,  Stckhlm.,  1906,  xxvi,  36-57.) 
Sketches  the  scientific  labors  of  Ratzel 
and  his  anthropogeographical  theories, 
with  notes  on  his  chief  publications. 

Bair  (J.  H. )  Education  .and  medical  ad- 
vancement as  precluding  any  further 
mental  and  physical  evolution  of  the  hu- 
man race.  (Univ.  of  Colo.  Stud.,  Boul- 
der, 1905,  II,  223-236.)  Prof.  B.  ar- 
gues that  <'all  progress  upward,  so  far 
as  the  individual  is  concerned,  in  bodily 
fitness  and  brain  capacity,  tends  to  be  re- 
tarded by  means  of  man's  arbitrary  ar- 
rangements in  the  form  of  education  and 
science.**  New  factors  that  will  save  the 
race  are  needed.  Something  can  still  be 
done  in  the  way  of  developing  sentiments 
and  ideals  along  the  lines  pursued  by 
Burbank  in  the  vegetable  world. 

Backer  (A.)  Ein  Pestsegen.  (A.  f.  Re- 
ligsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  IX,  290-291.)  Dis- 
cusses the  Zacharius  plague-prayer , -}- 
zia  4-  dia  -f  biz  -f-  sab  -f  2  -f  hgf  4-  hfrs, 
used  after  the  pest  of  1547. 

Capitan  (L.)  Le  XIII*  Congr^s  inter- 
national d' anthropologic  et  d'arch^ol- 
ogie  pr^historiques.  (R.  de  I'fec.  d'An- 
throp.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  212-216.) 
Brief  account  of  proceedings  at  Congress 
held  at  Monaco,  April  16-22,  1906. 
(See  American  Anthropologist^  vii,  no. 
3,  1906.) 

Le  Congr^s  international  d*  an- 
thropologic pr^historique  de  Monaco. 
(Ibid.,  261-282).  R^sum^s  papers  and 
discussions  relating  to  the  prehistoric  in 
the  region  about  Monaco — eoliths,  Qua- 
ternary classificatiou,  African  archeology, 
art  of  cave-man,  transition  from  paleo- 
lithic to  neolithic,   origin   of   neolithic 


culture,  protohistoric  Mediterranean 
civilizations,  Hallstatt  and  La  T^ne  cul- 
ture, etc.  M.  Montana  exhibited  some 
pre-Columbian  remains  from  a  cave  at 
Sancti-Spiritus,  in  Cuba  —  of  the  skulls 
some  are  negroid,  others  Mexicanoid. 
—     et  Amaud    d'Agnal    (M.)     Un 


curieux  mode  d* importation  de  silex 
taill^s  d*Orient  en  France.  (Ibid.,  69- 
72,  9  fgs. )  Treats  of  flints  found  in 
sacks  of  beans  imported  into  France  from 
Syria  and  other  parts  of  Asia  Minor. 
They  are  quite  numerous  and  add  to  the 
difficulties  of  exactness  in  silexology. 
Ton  Duhn  fF.)  Rot  und  Tot.  (A.  f. 
Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  ix,  1-23.)  Treats 
of  the  collocation  and  contrast  of  "  red 
and  dead  (death)**  in  folk-thought  and 
in  the  ceremonies  and  rituals  of  various 
tribes  and  peoples  of  all  ages  and  coun- 
tries. Ancient  red-painted  coflfin  boards 
from  the  Mediterranean  region,  red 
swaddling-clothes  for  the  dead  in  ancient 
Greece  and  New  Zealand,  red  as  death- 
color  in  India,  painting  skeletons  red,  an 
old  and  widespread  practice  ( from  pre- 
historic Europe  to  the  American  Indians), 
painting  of  marble  heads  and  statues  in 
ancient  Greece,  red  as  life-color  (the 
corpse  or  skeleton  is  given  the  appear- 
ance of  life),  smearing  with  blood,  as  in 
fetish  (in  Africa  blood  is  the  sacrifice  that 
reconstitutes  life),  red  as  symbol  of  the 
power  and  pulsing  of  human  life  and 
energy.  The  Mediterranean  region 
alone  offers  much  evidence  as  to  these 
ideas,  which  go  back  to  very  ancient 
times.  Red-painting  of  bones,  v.  D. 
thinks,  cannot  be  always  explained  as 
transference  from  painting  of  the  skin, 
clothes-color,  etc.  To  the  literature 
cited  should  be  added  Hrdlicka*s  paper 
in  iht  American  Anthropologist^  in,  701. 


709 


7IO 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.      S.y       8,        1906 


Xekirt  (M.)  Zur  Geschichte  imd  Me- 
tbode  der  Wirtschmftsgeograpbie.  (Glo- 
l>tis,  Bnucbwg.,  19^,  Lxxxix,  159- 
161. )  R^sum^  and  critiqae  of  Dr  Alois 
Kraus's  Versuch  einer  Geschichte  der 
Handeh'  und  WirtschaftsgeographU 
(Fraokf.  a.  M.,  1905^. 

Fitchtr  ( E. )  Ueber  Pigment  in  der  men- 
schlichen  G>njunctiva.  (Verb.  d.  Anat. 
Ges.  zu  Genf,  1905,  xix,  140-144,  i  fg.) 
Gives  results  of  examination  of  the  pig- 
mentation of  the  conjunctiva  in  20  Ger- 
mans (Baden),  one  Italian,  one  Japanese 
and  one  Chinese,  one  Hindu,  two  Mela- 
nesians,  and  two  Negroes.  The  Italian 
and  the  Germans  had  no  trace  of  pig- 
ment. The  order  as  to  quantity  of  pig- 
mentation is  Negro,  Melanesian,  Hindu, 
Chinese,  Japanese  (very  little).  These 
facts,  according  to  F.,  support  the 
Schwalbe  theory  of  the  originally  dark 
skin  of  man ;  indicating  also  that  the 
European  lost  pigment  first. 

Oiuffrida-Ruggeri  ( V. )  In  occasione  delle 
onoranze  a  Cesare  Lombroso.  Antro- 
pologia  normale  e  antropologia  crimi- 
nale.  (A.  d.  Soc.  Rom.  di  Antrop., 
1906,  XII,  335-337. )  Discusses  relation 
of  normal  and  criminal  anthropology. 
The  somatic  and  psychic  study  of  the 
degenerates  of  higher  races  is  useful  for 
comparison  with  the  corresponding  data 
concerning  the  lower  races  of  man.  The 
nexus  of  the  somatic  and  the  psychic 
belongs  to  both. 

II  maggior  peso  dell' encefalo  fem- 

minile  dimostrato  da  Angelo  Messedaglia 
(Ibid.,  338-339).  Cites  from  a  MS. 
work  on  Calcolo  dei  vaiore  medii  left  by 
the  well-known  statistician,  Prof.  A. 
Messadaglia  (d.  1901),  of  which  one 
chapter,  Critica  dflla  teoria  de  QueteUt 
su  i^uomo  medio^  has  been  published  by 
Prof.  Viola  in  the  appendix  to  his  Uomo 
medio  Veneto  (Padova,  1905),  his 
demonstration  of  the  fact  that  the  female 
brain  is  proportionately  (as  to  stature) 
heavier  than  the  male. 

Herv6  (G. )  De  Charles  Estienne  et  de 
quelques  Recettes  et  Superstitions  m6di- 
cales  au  XVI«  sidcle.  (R.  de  I'fec. 
d'Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  133- 
139.)  Cites  from  the  V an^^ricu/ture  ft 
villi  son  rusti(jue  of  Charles  Estienne, 
published  in  French  in  1564  and  in  Latin 
as  Pra'dium  rusticum  some  time  pre- 
viously, "remedies  which  the  farmer 
ought  to  know  for  the  diseases  of  his 
people  " —  some  35  items.  Estienne  was 
humanist,  grammarian,  physician. 


*'  of  the  folk 
As    symbol 


Hopf  (L. )  Ueber  Jogendspiele  bei  Tieren 
und  Mensdben.  (Corr.-BL  d.  I>.  Ges. 
f.  Anthrop.,  MOnchen,  1905,  xxxvi, 
46.)  Discusses  briefly  plaj-theories, 
that  of  Groos  in  particnlar.  The  acme 
of  play  is  reached  in  the  riddles,  gmmes, 
etc.,  oif  children. 

Landrita  (M. )  Lamarck  et  ses  pricw- 
senrs.  (R.  de  r6c.  d'Anthrop.  de 
Paris,  1906,  XVI,  152-169.)  Article 
from  a  forthcoming  volume  by  the 
author  on  Lamarck^  U  fondateur  du 
transformisme.  Treats  of  Maapertias, 
Diderot,  Robinet,  Buffon,  etc 

Lasch  ( R. )  Einige  besondere  Arten  der 
Verwendung  des  Eies  im  Volksglauben 
und  Volksbrauch.  (Globus,  Bmschwg., 
1906,  Lxxxix,  101-105.)  Treats  of 
the  egg  as  food  of  the  dead  and  as 
grave-gift,  as  oracle  and  in  fortune-telling 
and  prophes3ring,  as  sjrmbol  of  betrothal 
and  in  wedding  ceremonies,  puberty- 
customs,  etc.  The  egg  plays  an  im- 
portant rOle  in  the  «  magic 
and  of  primitive  peoples, 
the  egg  has  largely  lost  its  mag;ic  and 
uncanny  significance.  But  many  relics 
of  the  old  powerful  "egg  charm"  still 
remain. 

Lehmann-Nitsche  (R.)  Paliloanthropol- 
ogie.  Ein  Beitrag  zur  Einteilung  der 
anthropologischen  Disriplinen.  (Ibid., 
222-224.)  Discusses  briefly  paleoan- 
thropology and  its  place  in  anthropologi- 
cal science.  According  to  Dr  L..-N.*s 
classification,  paleoanthropology  treats 
of  the  extinct  forms  of  the  human  race, 
has  two  divisions  (physical,  psychic), 
each  of  these  having  also  a  zoo-  and  a 
phylo-  subdivision.  Anthropology  itself 
is  similarly  divided. 

Schadeltypen    und    Rassensch&del. 

(A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Bmschwg.,  1906,  n. 
F.,  V,  110-115.)  Discusses  views  of 
Blumenbach,  Nystrflm,  Bartels,  Virchow, 
Rieger,  Rebentisch,  Ranke,  Papillault, 
etc.  There  are  infantile,  adult  and 
senile  varieties  of  the  age  skull-type  ; 
there  are  also  individual  skull-types  and 
sexual  skull -types  ;  physiological  or  bio- 
logical skull-types  ;  culture  skull-typ>es  ; 
race  skull -types.  In  America  there  is 
not  merely  polytypy  in  skull -forms  but 
even  poikilotypy.  From  various  stand- 
points one  and  the  same  skull  can  be 
biological,  sexual,  racial,  etc.,  in  type. 

ManouTrier  (E. )  Une  application  an- 
thropologique  ^  Tart  militaire.  ( R.  de 
rfec.  d'Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi, 
93-101.)     R6sum6s  M.*s  Z^  r/tfw^w^n/ 


CHAMBERLAIN  ] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


711 


des  hommes  et  la  marche  dans  Pin/an- 
teru  (Paris,  1905,  pp.  98),  which  has 
also  appeared  in  vol.  xxxviii  of  the 
Revue  d*infanUrie,  The  reform  pro- 
posed is  simply  to  arrange  the  infantry 
in  each  section  according  to  the  length 
of  their  legs,  the  short-legs  preceding. 
(L. )     Conclusions    g^n^rales    sur 


Tanthropologie  des  sexes  et  applications 
sodales,  II.  (Ibid.,  249-260.)  Argues 
that  the  rOle  of  science  in  politics  and 
sociology  is  exactly  the  same  as  in  medi- 
cine and  hygiene.  Political  and  socio- 
logical science  ought  to  adapt  itself  to 
the  nature  of  psychological  facts  by  the 
same  right  and  in  the  same  way  as  the 
art  of  medicine  adapts  itself  to  the  ne- 
cessities imposed  by  biological  chem- 
istry. 

T.  Mengdan  ( W. )  Bericht  Uber  den  Ersten 
Intemationalen  Arch&ologischen  Kon- 
gress  in  Athen  im  April  1905.  (St2gb. 
d.  Ges.  f.  Gesch.,  u.  s.  w.,  Riga,  1905 
[1906],  101-112.^  Brief  account  of 
papers  and  proceedmgs  of  the  First  Inter- 
national Archeological  Congress,  Athens, 
1905. 

M&ller  (E.)  Om  de  &ldsta  m&nniskora- 
sema.  (Ymer,  Stckhlm.,  1906,  xxvi, 
1 21-138,  I  fg. )  Treats  of  the  problem 
of  the  oldest  human  race  (Neanderthal, 
Spy,  Trinil,  Krapina,  etc. )  M.  con- 
cludes that  all  the  highest  developmental 
forms  in  the  organic  realms,  the  Pithe- 
canthropus ^  Homo  primigenius^  and  Homo 
sapiens^  are  ramifications  from  a  com- 
mon, undifferentiated  primitive  form, 
about  which  we  lack  all  knowledge. 

Nilsson  (M.  P.)  Totenklage  und  Tra- 
gOdie.  (A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906, 
IX,  286-287. )  Resume  of  an  article  in 
Swedish  in  Comment,  philology  in  hon, 
Joh.  Paulson  (GOteborg,  1905).  Ac- 
cording to  N.  one  of  the  roots  of  the 
tragedy  lies  in  the  death-lament  over  the 
dead  hero-god  ;  thus  grief  and  pain  were 
always  characteristic  of  it.  Its  name 
comes  from  the  fact  that  the  orgiasts 
clothed  themselves  in  the  skin  of  the 
slain  animal,  usually  a  goat. 

Oberhnmmar  (E.)  AnfSnge  der  Vdlker- 
kunde  in  der  bildenden  Kunst.  (Corr.- 
Bl.  d.  D.  Ges  f.  Anthrop.,  MUnchen, 
1905,  XXXVI,  127-130.)  Treats  of  the 
beginnings  of  ethnology  in  the  pictorial 
art  of  prehistoric  man  ( femme  au  renne 
and  "  bison-hunter  '*  of  Laugerie-basse), 
primitive  peoples  (Australia,  Africa, 
America),  ancient  civilized  races  (China, 
Japan,    India,  £^pt,   Greece,  Rome). 


There  is  rich  material  for  study  in  this 
direction. 

Perusini  ( G. )  Sui  caratteri  detti  < '  degen- 
erativi''  delle  sopracdglia,  vortici  ao- 
praccigliari  e  sopracciglio-frontali.  (A. 
d.  Soc.  Rom.  di  Antrop.,  1906,  xii, 
279-292,  3  pi.,  bibliogr.)  Treats  of  the 
so-called  ** degenerative"  characters  of 
the  eye-brows  (vortices,  etc.) — meet- 
ing eye-brows  are  credited  in  folk- 
thought  and  proverbs  of  several  countries 
to  witches  and  persons  with  sexual  ap- 
petites. Some  of  the  phenomena  in 
question  are  residua  of  embryonic  dis- 
positions, others  chance  or  individual 
facts  of  no  << degenerative"  significance. 

Preusa  (K.  T.)  Religionen  der  Natur- 
vdlker.  Allgemeines  1904-05.  (A.  f. 
Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  ix,  95-114.) 
R6sum6- reviews  of  recent  works  on 
primitive  religion  by  Hubert  and  Mauss 
(magic),  Marett  (spell  and  prayer), 
Beck  (imitation),  Frobenius  (sun-god), 
Ehrenreich  ( comparative  American 
mythology ) ,  Dieterich  ( mother-earth  ) , 
and  several  by  Dr  P.  himself  ( origins  of 
religion  and  art,  influence  of  nature  on 
religion,  etc.). 

Raband  (E. )  Anomalie  de  la  deuxi^me 
circonvolution  pariitale.  (R.  de  1'^. 
d' Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  291- 
293*  1  %•)  Describes  a  large  fossa^ 
<* parietal  fossa"  it  might  be  called,  in 
the  brain  of  a  man  who  died  of  general 
paralysis.  This  may  be,  according  to 
Dr  R.,  a  new  degeneration-stigma, 
though  other  explanations  are  possible. 

Radamachar  (L.)  Walfischmythen.  (A. 
f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  ix,  248-252.) 
Discusses  the  widespread  myth  of  the 
man  swallowed  by  a  fish,  recently  em- 
phasized  by  Frobenius  in  his  monograph 
on  the  sun-god.  R.  cites  also  the  tale 
in  Lucian  overlooked  by  F.,  comparing 
it  with  Polynesian,  Livonian,  Angolan, 
Greek,  Magyar  and  other  versions. 

Ranka  (K.  E. )  Die  Theorie  der  Korrel- 
ation.  (A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Bmschwg., 
1906,  N.  F.,  IV,  168-202,  6  fg.)  R*s- 
umi  and  demonstration  of  the  theory  of 
correlation  as  developed  in  the  works  oC 
Galton,  Pearson  and  Yule. 

Ranard  (L. )  Henri  Schuermans.  No-^ 
tice  biographique.  ( Bull.  Inst.  ArchioL 
Liigois,  Li^ge,  1905,  xxxv,  325-345, 
portr. )  Sketch  of  life,  appreciation  and 
list  of  publications  of  the  Belgian  arche- 
ologist  and  epigrapher,  H.  Schuermans 
(1822-1905) 


712 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


R^tex  (B. )  Der  Einfluss  des  Alters  der 
Matter  auf  die  Kdrperh5he.  Eine  an- 
thropologisch-soziologische  Studie.  (A. 
f.  Anthrop.,  Bmschwg.,  1906,  N.  F.,  iv, 
160-167.)  Cites  Riccardi,  R&cz,  Dun- 
can, K^zm&rszky,  Deniker,  etc  Dr  R. 
concludes  that  the  younger  the  mother 
the  smaller  the  child,  the  older  the  taller 
—  individually  and  racially. 

Sadhaus  (S. )  Lautes  and  leises  Beten. 
(A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  ix,  185- 
200.)  Treats  of  loud  and  low  prayer 
among  the  nations  of  antiquity  ( Romans, 
Greeks,  Hebrews,  etc.).  The  low 
or  silent  prayer  is  widespread  and  typical 
in  the  realm  of  charms  and  magic. 
Loud  prayer  is  the  older,  corresponds 
to  more  primitive  ideas  of  the  relation  of 
man  to  the  gods,  and  is  known  to  all  the 
ancient  nations.  Prayer  aloud  persists 
still  in  Italy,  etc.  Silent  prayer  repre- 
sents rather  a  modem  idea,  in  some  re- 
spects. 

Thoroddsen  (T. )  Endnu  nogle  Ord  om 
Landsbro-Hypotesen.  (Ymer,  Stock- 
holm, 1906,  XXVI,  93-101.)  Discusses 
post-glacial  land  communication  by  way 
of  the  North  Atlantic  and  replies  to  arti- 
cle by  H.  G.  Semmons.  If  the  land- 
bridge  existed  in  the  time  of  the  kitchen- 
midden  people  of  Scotland,  etc.,  they 
could  have  passed  northward  over  the 
Faroes  and  Iceland  to  Greenland. 

Thali6    (H.)     Le  terrain  mystique.     (R. 
de   rfec.    d'Anthrop.    de    Paris,    1906, 
XVI,  217-227.)     Chapter  II  of  a  forth- 
coming volume   on  La  mystique  pathol- 
ogiijue.      Emphasizes  the  early  time  of  I 
life  at  which  the  signs  of  degeneration  | 
appeared  and  the  precocity  of  the  mani-  I 
festations   of  diseased  mysticism.     Nu- 
merous instances  are  cited  of  mystics  of 
both  sexes  exhibiting  pathological  traits. 

von  TOrOk  (A.)     Versuch  einersystemat-  ' 
ischcn   Charakteristik  des  Kephalindex. 
(A.    f.   Anthrop.,   Bmschwg.,   1906,   N. 
F.,  IV,  no- 129. )     The    author  outlines 
a  scheme  based  on  consideration  of  ex- 
tent    of    variation    of    greatest    length, 
greatest    breadth,    and    greatest    height 
(Virchow)  of  skull,  by  which  any  skull  I 
of  any  race  can  be  characterized  at  once  j 
in   reference  to  these  three  dimensions,   | 
and  found  to  be  really  long,  short,  etc.    i 
Pages  II 9- 1 29  are  occupied  by  a  table 
for  using  the  system. 

Walcher  ( G. )  Ueber  die  Entstehung  von 
Brachy-  und  Dolichocephalie  durch  will- 
kiirliche  Beeinflussung  des  kindlichen 
SchSldels.       (Corr.-Bl.    d.     D.    Ges.    f. 


Anthrop.,  MQnchen,  1905,  xxxvi,  43- 
45,  I  fg. )  Reprint^  from  the  Zblt,  f, 
GyndkoL^  1 905. 

EUROPE 

Andrae  ( A. )  Hausinschriften  aus  deutscfa- 
en  Stfldten  und  Ddrfem.  (Globus, 
Bmschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  181-189.) 
Cites  numerous  house-inscript  ions 
(mostly  in  German  dialects,  some  in 
Latin,  etc )  from  some  50  German  towns 
and  villages.  They  belong  to  the  i6th, 
17th  and  1 8th  centuries,  and  are  some- 
times accompanied  by  house-marks. 

da  Aranzadi  (T. )  Zur  Ethnographie  des 
Ochsenjoches  und  zur  Baskenkunde. 
(Ibid.,  298.)  Adds  to  data  in  previous 
article  of  Prof.  Braungart,  concerning 
the  ox-yokes  of  the  Basques  ( the  chflu-- 
acteristic  one  is  a  horn-yoke  with  two 
pointed  bows),  etc.  The  name  of  the 
hazel  ( urra )  is  older  in  place  names  than 
those  of  the  oak  and  the  walnut.  Olive 
and  vine  are  lacking  in  place  names, 

Bailly  (F.)  Notice  sur  les  andennes 
mesures  de  Bourgogne.  (Mim.  Soc 
d'Archdol.  de  Beaune,  1904  [1906], 
XXIX,  223-306.)  Interesting  historical 
and  explanatory  account  of  the  old  meas- 
ures (for  liquids  and  semi-liquid  sub- 
stances) and  weights,  etc.,  of  Burgundy. 

Bardon  (L.)  /*/ Bouysaonie  (J.  et  A.) 
Outils  ^caill^s  ]>ar  percussion.  (  R.  de 
r£c.  d'Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi, 
170-175,  4  fgs. )  Treats  of  fragments 
and  flakes  of  flint,  tools  produced  by  f)er- 
cussion,  retouched  pieces,  etc.,  from  the 
Coumbo-del-Bouiton  in  Corr^ze.  These 
flaked  tools  occur  most  frequently  in  the 
old  strata  of  the  "glyptic"  age,  being 
absent  from  the  typical  Magdalenian. 

BXrwinkel  (/?r)  Die  KorpergrSsse  der 
Wehrpflichtigen  der  Unterherrschaft  des 
FUrs  tentums  Schwarzburg-Sonder- 
hausen.  (A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Bmschwg., 
1905,  N.  s.,  IV,  41-47,  3  maps.)  Gives 
results  of  measurements  of  height  of  9,608 
recruits  (1872-1901)  from  two  towns 
and  48  other  places.  The  average  stature 
is  167. 1,  rather  higher  than  that  for  the 
neighboring  districts.  No  influence  of 
calcareous  areas  on  stature  is  noticed, 
nor  of  lowland  and  plateau. 

Blumml  (E.  K.)  Germanische  Toten- 
lieder,  mit  besonderer  Beriicksichtigung 
Tirols.  (Ibid.,  v,  149-181.)  After  a 
general  discussion  of  Teutonic  songs  on 
death   and   related   folk -verse  of  other 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


713 


peoples  —  many  titles  dating  1430- 
179 1  A.  D.y  are  cited  —  the  author  treats 
of  Tirolese  death -songs  ( those  in  which 
the  dead  man  speaks,  those  in  which  the 
survivors  speak,  soul-songs  in  which  the 
bettering  of  the  fate  of  the  dead  is  asked), 
their  motives,  etc.  At  pages  1 69-1 81 
texts  of  41  Tirolese  and  2  Styrian  songs 
are  given  (chiefly  dating  ca.  1 880). 

Brenil  (H.)  Rhinoceros  grav^  surschiste 
de  la  Grotte  du  Trilobite,  &  Arcy-sur- 
Cure,  Yonne.     (R.  de  I'fec.  d'Anthrop. 

.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  242-246,  4  fgs. ) 
Treats  of  a  large  fragment  of  schist 
having  on  it  3  figures  of  parts  of  rhi- 
noceroses on  one  side  (also  head  of 
goat),  and  on  the  other  a  second  sketch 
of  a  rhinoceros.  The  period  to  which  it 
belongs  is  probably  the  transition  from 
the  Aurignacian  to  the  Solutrean. 

Broadwood  (Lucy  E. )  A  Swiss  charm. 
(Folk-Lore,  Lond.,  1906,  XVI,  465- 
467.)  Describes  a  Latin  cross,  made 
of  the  Spiracea  aruncus  and  Astrantia 
major  (whose  crimson  flower  is  thought 
to  be  stained  by  the  blood  of  Jesus) 
on  the  eve  of  St  John  by  the  peasants  of 
the  Val  de  Morgias  on  the  Savoy  border 
of  the  canton  of  Valais. 

T.  Brninlngk  (H. )  Das  Aquamanile  im 
Dommuseum  zu  Riga.  (Stzgb.  d.  Ges. 
Gesch.,  u.  s.  w.,  Riga,  1905  [1906], 
6-12,  I  pi.)  Describes  the  only  speci- 
men so  far  known  of  an  aquamanile  (of 
the  lion  type)  from  the  Baltic  provinces, 
found  near  the  village  of  Palloper. 

Capitan  (L.),  Breuil  (H.),  Bourrinet 
(— )  et  Payrony  (--).  L*abri  Mige, 
une  station  magdal^nienne  ^  Teyjat, 
Dordogne.  (R.  de  I'fec.  d'Anthrop.  de 
Paris,  1906,  XVI,  196-212,  9  fgs.) 
Describes  the  "station"  of  the  reindeer 
age  (no  traces  of  change  of  lowering  of 
temperature  ;  horse  and  bison  rare,  deer 
absent)  and  Magdalenian  epoch  at  Teyjat 
in  Dordogne,  discovered  in  1903,  and 
the  finds  since  made  (bones  of  ani- 
mals; human  tools,  weapons,  etc.,  of 
flint,  horn,  bone,  carved  "bfttons"  and 
other  art  objects,  etc. ).  The  ornamen- 
tation of  these  firagments  of  bone  objects 
(all  appear  to  have  been  violently 
broken)  consists  of  various  marks,  geo- 
metrical designs  (some  perhaps  "prop- 
erty marks,"  "artists'  signatures,"  or 
something  of  the  sort),  figures  of  seals 
and  other  animals.  Up  to  the  present 
but  five  carvings  of  seals  have  been 
found  —  at  Duruthy,  de  la  Vache,  Gour- 
dan,  Brassempouy,  Montgaudier. 


Comxnoiit  ( M. )  Les  dicouvertes  ricentes 
A  Saint-Acheul.  L'Acheulien.  (Ibid., 
228-241,  19  fgs.  ^  Treats  of  term 
"  Acheulean  "  and  change  in  meaning  in 
the  last  30  years.  Author  distinguishes 
"the  old  Acheulean,"  characterized  by 
oval  flints,  and  '*  the  more  recent  Acheu- 
lean" marked  by  lanceolate  flints  finely 
retouched.  The  manner  of  prehension  of 
these  implements  is  indicated  (man  of 
this  period  was  probably  ambidextrous). 
Besides  the  large  Acheulean  flints  there 
are  also  small  ones. 

Ton  Domaszewski  (A.)  Die  Schutz- 
gdtter  von  Mainz  (A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg., 
1906,  IX,  149-158,  I  pi.)  Treats  of 
the  figures  of  deities  on  the  four  sides  of 
a  dice-formed  stone  found  in  1889  in  the 
canal- works  at  Mayence,  and  belonging 
to  Roman  times  —  serving  probably  as 
base  for  a  Jupiter  column,  but  richer 
and  finer  than  similar  bases.  The 
deities  figured  are /Diana  and  Silvanus, 
the  typical  Roman  Genius  and  Fortuna, 
Apollo  and  Salus,  Mercury  and  Victoria. 

Dusaand  (R.)  La  civilisation  prihel- 
linique  dans  les  Cyclades.  (R.  del' fee. 
d'Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  105-132, 
18  fgs.)  Treats  of  the  primitive  tombs 
of  the  Cyclades,  pre- Hellenic  ruins  of 
Thera  (Santorin),  temple-cavern  on 
Cynthos  (Delos),  commerce  in  obsidian 
in  the  ^gean  and  the  foundation  of 
Phylacopi  (Melos),  the  three  superim- 
posed cities  on  the  site  of  Phylacopi, 
bronze-age  Cycladean  pottery,  primitive 
^gean  vessels  (boats).  According  to 
D. ,  while  the  ^gean  sea  has  not  been 
the  oldest  cradle  of  civilization,  it  has 
been  the  scene  of  its  most  brilliant  and 
most  powerful  development  —  "all 
branches  of  human  intelligence  pro- 
gressed there — Greece  created  the  be- 
ginnings of  rational  science,  divorced 
from  mystery  and  magic."  The  first 
culture  impulse  came  from  Egypt  to 
Crete,  then  by  way  of  the  Cyclades  to 
continental  Greece.  Outside  their  rOle 
as  continuers  and  adapters  of  culture, 
"the  Greeks  instituted  the  scientific 
method,  this  is  their  lasting  honor." 

Faular  ( B. )  Die  Holz-  und  Kohlentrans, 
portmittel  im  sttdlichen  Tessin.  (Schw- 
Arch.  f.  Volksk.,  Basel,  1 906,  x,  I-21. 
41  fgs.)  Treats  of  the  transportation  of 
wood  and  coal  in  the  southern  Ticino. 

Fonrdrigniar  ( fe. )  L'  iclairage  des  grottes 
pal^olithiques  devant  la  tradition  des 
monuments  andens.  (R.  de  I'fec.  d'An- 
throp.  de  Paris,    1906,  xvi,  325-336, 


7H 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8»  1906 


4  (gs. )  From  ccmsideration  of  the  meth- 
ods oflighting  modern  cellars  and  subter- 
ranean buildings,  foresters'  cabins,  Mero- 
vingian houses,  edifices  of  antiquity  in 
the  Mediterranean  region,  etc,  F.  con- 
cludes that  the  cave-dwellings  of  pre- 
historic man  were  illuminated  by  direct 
daylight  by  openings  with  the  use  per- 
haps of  some  primitive  reflector.  It  is 
certainly  hard  to  believe  that  the  cave- 
sculptures  and  paintings  were  made  by 
fire  or  lamp  light. 

GftBter  (M.)  The  legend  of  Merlin. 
(Folk-Lore,  Lond.,  1906,  xvi,  407- 
427. )  Discusses  the  account  of  Geofirey 
of  Monmouth  and  cites  evidence  to  prove 
that  "Vortigem  and  Merlin  are  here  the 
late  and  somewhat  confused  outcome  of 
a  more  ancient  Oriental  tale  which  be- 
longs to  the  cycle  of  King  Solomon  and 
Ashmedai  or  Asmodeus."  G.  quotes  a 
legend  from  an  old  Roumanian  MS., 
which  •*  will  prove,  I  hope,  the  existence 
of  the  missing  link  between  the  Oriental 
tale  and  the  western  Christian  counter- 
part, and  indicate  the  way  and  the  pos- 
sibility how  such  legends  could  have 
become  known  to  the  monks  in  the 
West.'*  Here,  just  as  elsewhere,  the 
base  metals  of  spurious  and  wondrous 
tales  have  been  alchemized  into  immortal 
poems,  older  Oriental  tales  have  been 
transformed  by  lesser  geniuses  into 
romantic  poems.  In  a  note  appended  to 
G.'s  paper,  Miss  Jessie  L.  Weston  dis- 
sents from  his  view  that  the  prose 
romances  preceded,  and  were  the  sources 
of,  the  poetical,  this  idea  being  con- 
trary to  the  main  body  of  expert  opinion. 
See  also  p.  463. 

Giuffrlda-Ruggeri  (V.)  Cranes  euro- 
p^ens d^forraes.  ( R.  del' fee.  d' Anthrop. 
de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  316-324.)  Dis- 
cusses the  questions  raised  by  the  de- 
formed skulls  found  in  Reihem^rdbfry 
German  graves  of  the  Middle  Ages  :  the 
voluntary  or  involuntary  nature  of  the 
Rtihengraher  deformation,  the  relation 
of  these  deformed  skulls  to  the  European 
**macrocephals,"  nature  and  origin  of 
this  macrocephaly,  origin  and  relations 
of  the  Toulousan  deformation,  etc.  Dr 
G. -R.  sees  in  European  deformed  skulls 
**  no  voluntary  ethnic  deformation,  but 
only,  as  P'6r6  has  said,  the  isolated 
victims  of  an  absurd  custom." 

Gdssler  ( — )  Die  wichtigsten  Probleme 
der  griechischen  Urgeschichte.  (Corr.- 
Bl.  d.  D.  Ges.  f.  Anthrop.,  1905,  xxxvi, 
45-46. )     Discusses  results  of  Cretan  in- 


vestigatioiis.  The  tnositioo  from  M^gBSKA. 
to  Mycenean  culture  occurred  diTenely 
according  to  locality.  The  Mjrcencan 
and  the  Homeric  boose  diflfered  consid- 
erably, the  Utter  being  the  stirriTal  of  a 
primitive  simpler  t3rpe.  The  Carians 
were  probably  the  creators  of  this  older 
Cretan  culture. 

HIberlin  (Z>r)  Brennmaterial  und  Feo- 
erherd  auf  den  Halligen  der  Nordsee. 
(Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1906,  LXXXIX,  177- 
178.)  Treats  of  Hre-material  and  fire- 
place on  the  low  bles  of  the  North  Sea« 
There  are  no  trees  ^except  a  few  in  gar- 
dens). Cow-dung  IS  an  important  *<fire 
wood.** 

Hagen  (K.)  Frilhgeschichtliche  Viefa- 
schellen  im  Norden.  (Corr.-Bl.  d.  D. 
Ges.  f.  Anthrop.,  Miinchen,  1906, 
XXXVI,  134-136.)  Treate  of  early  his- 
torical cow-bells  in  Northern  Germany 
(e.  g.^  of  the  late  Roman  period,  found 
near  \Vester-Wanna,  in  an  urn -cemetery 
since  1901).  References  toother  finds 
are  given.  Roman  influence  is  seen  in 
more  than  one  kind  of  cow-bell  in  Switz- 
erland, Germany,  etc. 

Hansmann  (R.)  Ein  Bronze- Depotfimd 
mit  einer  rdmischen  Bronze- Lampe,  ge- 
funden  zu  Kawwast  bei  Dorpat.  ( Stzgb. 
d.  Ges.  f.  Gesch.,  u.  s.  w.,  Riga,  1905 
[1906],  64-74,  I  pi.)  DescHbes  the 
bronze  objects  (including  a  Roman 
bronze  lamp,  a  unicum  from  thts  part  of 
Europe)  found  at  Kawwast  in  the  parish 
of  Mairen- Dorpat  in  1902.  A  find  of  Ro- 
man objects  here  is  remarkable. 

Hertzog  (  A. )  Die  drei  Tannen  des  Theo- 
baldusfestes  zu  Thann.  (Corr.-Bl.  d. 
D.  Ges.  f.  Anthrop.,  Munchen,  1 905, 
XXXVI,  41-43.)  Describes  the  celebra- 
tion of  St  Theobald's  day   (July    i )   at 

Thann  and  the  fire  of  the  three  firs the 

survival  of  an  old  heathen  Teutonic  rite. 

Hdfler  (  M. )  Das  Haaropfer  in  Teigform. 
(A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Brnschwg.,  1906,  n. 
F.,  IV,  130-148,  50  fgs. )  Interesting 
and  valuable  contribution  to  the  litera- 
ture of  sacrificial  objects.  Names,  typi- 
cal forms,  strewing  with  poppy-seed,  salt, 
coloring  with  violet,  time  of  gift  (All 
Souls,  New  Year,  death-occasions),  etc., 
show,  according  to  H.,  that  in  the  cue 
or  plait  cakes  and  bread  known  in  Ger- 
many, etc.,  especially,  we  see  the  sym- 
bol or  rudiment  of  the  older  hair-offering, 
so  widespread  in  the  world. 

Vogelgeback.   (Globus,  Brnschwg., 

1906,  Lxxxix,  221-222,  6  fgs. )    Refers 
to  German  baked  objects  in  the  form  of 


\\. 


\ 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


7IS 


birds  as  models  for  those  made  by  the 
South  Russian  Jews.  According  to  H., 
the  idea  behind  most  of  these  confections 
is  the  <<soul  bird.*' 

St.  Lucia,  auf  Germanischen  Boden. 


(A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  ix,  253- 
261.)  Treats  of  St  Luda  (d.  300  a.d.; 
her  day  is  Dec.  13)  and  the  ceremonies 
and  folk-lore  relating  to  her  and  her  day 
in  Teutonic  countries — plants  of  medici- 
nal value  named  after  her,  cross  of  St 
Lucy  as  amulet,  **  little  Yule,"  **  Lucy 
meals"  and  offerings  to  souls  of  dead, 
relations  to  the  fates,  etc.  According  to 
H.,  *'St.  Lucy's  day  illustrates  how 
stubbornly  certain  folk  ideas  (mytholog- 
ical and  religious)  cling  to  the  periods  of 
the  year  connected  with  cults  of  the  dead 
or  of  souls." 

Kaxarow(G.)  Thrakisches.  (Ibid.,  287- 
289. )  Discusses  the  views  of  Kick,  etc., 
concerning  the  relationship  of  the  early 
inhabitants  of  Thrace  with  the  Pelas- 
gians,  peoples  of  Asia  Minor,  etc.,  place- 
names,  deities,  phallus-cult. 

iaippel(M.)  et  Rabaad(6.)  H^rai- 
m^lie  thoracique  droite.  (R.  de.  r£c. 
d'Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  141- 
151,  3  fgs.)  Treats  of  a  case  of  right 
thoracic  hemimelia  in  a  youth  of  17 
years,  with  discussion  of  the  nature  and 
origin  of  hemimelia.  The  authors  reject 
all  theories  hitherto  put  forward  in  ex- 
planation of  the  phenomenon,  but  incline 
to  attribute  it  to  localized  general  action. 

Knpka  (P.)  Neolithische  Funde  von 
Ameburg.  (Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin, 
XXXVIII,  164-165,  5  fgs.)  Describes 
briefly  the  finds  ( ornamented  clay  vessel, 
and  other  ceramic  fragments,  a  bone  awl, 
stone  prisms,  etc.)  at  a  neolithic  ''sta- 
tion" at  Ameburg. 

Ein  wendischer  Grabfund  von  Wahr- 

burg.  (Ibid.,  165-166,  3  fgs.)  Notes 
on  the  finds  made  in  1905  in  a  Wendish 
grave  (pottery  fragments,  iron  spurs, 
knife,  etc.)  at  Wahrburg  and  now  in  the 
Stendal  museum. 

Ein   inknistiertes   Tinegef^   von 

Onglingen-SUd.  ( Ibid.,  227-228,  2  fgs. ) 
Describes  an  incrusted  La  T^ne  urn  from 
a  burial-place  at  the  village  of  Onglin- 
gen,  district  of  Stendal  —  all  others 
found  were  unomamented.  Incrusted 
La  T^ne  vessels  have  as  yet  been  rarely 
observed.  Some  of  the  customary  La 
Tine  metal  objects  accompanied  the 
urns. 

Eine  Tineume  aus  dem  GriLberfelde 

bei  Erzleben,  Kreis  Oiterburg.    (Ibid., 


229. )  Note  on  a  fine  specimen  of  a  La 
Tine  urn  from  Erxleben,  ¥rith  the  well- 
known  suspended  triangle  motif  of  orna- 
mentation. In  the  urn  were  calcined 
bones  on  which  rested  a  bronzeheaded 
iron  needle. 

Kaclagan  (R.  C.)  Additions  to  the 
*•  Games  of  Argyleshire. ' *  { Folk- Lore, 
Lond.,  1906,  XVI,  439-460.)  Cites 
additional  items  concerning:  Minnea- 
chan,  noise-machines  (srannair,  sucker, 
cowrie),  ^pain-giving,  puzzles,  riddles, 
rhymes,  counting-out  rhymes,  children's 
rhymes,  lullabies. 

Mahondeail  ( P.  -G. )  Documents  pour  ser- 
vir  &  I'etnologie  de  la  Corse.  TR.  de 
r£c.  d'Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi, 
177-195.)  Based  on  measurements  of 
354  adult  male  Corsicans  — stature  is  dis- 
cussed in  detail,  and  compared  with  the 
head-measurements  given  in  a  previous 
article.  Two  distinct  groups  exist,  one 
of  tall  stature  in  the  highest  mountainous 
regions  especially,  the  other  short  and 
disseminated  over  all  the  island. 

T.  Majewsld  (E. )  Ueber  eine  neuent- 
deckte  polnische  schnur-keramische 
Gnippe  mit  Schnurwellenverzierung. 
(Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  xxxviii,  221- 
227,  15  fgs.)  Describes  a  species  of 
pottery-ornamentation — "straight  or 
wavy  horizontal  ribbon  type'  *  —  repre- 
sented on  more  than  200  vessels  from 
over  20  neolithic  "stations"  in  south- 
em  Poland.  Comparable  to  the  Polish 
neolithic  combination  of  horizontal  and 
wavy  lines  are  the  decorations  on  vessels 
from  Zernki  Dolne  (dating  a.  d.  ). 
Some  relationship  may  exist  between 
them. 

Mehlis  (C. )  Der  Bronzezeitfund  von 
Klingenmiinster  i.  d.  Pfalz  und  der 
"Goldene  Hut"  von  Schifferstadt. 
(A.  f.  Anthrop.  Bmschwg.,  1906,  N.  F., 
IV,  287-292,  10  fgs. )  Treats  of  the 
find  of  the  bronze  age  (daggers,  celt, 
axe,  needles,  ear-ring,  and  several  frag- 
ments of  vessels)  from  tumulus-graves  at 
Klingenmiinster  examined  in  1904  ;  also 
a  bronze  knife  found  near  Silz  in  1900. 
The  "  golden  hat"  of  Schifferstadt  was 
found  in  1835  —  it  is  probably  the 
head-covering  of  a  chief  of  the  middle  of 
the  bronze  age. 

Diebemalten  Kiesel  von  «Bdhl" 

bei  Neustadt  a.  d.  Hart.  (Globus, 
Bmschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  170-177, 
I  pi.,  I  fg.,  map.)  Discusses  in  detail 
the  painteid  pebbles  found  in  1905  at  the 
neolithic  "station"   of  "BOhl"   near 


716 

Neustadt,  the  place  and  condittoni  of 
th«ir  diMOrery,  Brcheolt^ical  data,  etc. 
The  only  other  '•  pdoled  pebbles" 
known  are  those  of  Mos-d'Aiil.  The 
mark)  on  (he  BShI  pebbles  <(Tikingly 
resemble  those  on  pollery  from  Nnqada 
and  Ballas  (ancient  Egypt),  certain 
Cretan  pictography,  etc.  There  seems 
to  be  no  doubt  of  the  genuineness  of 
these  objects  and  their  discovery  in  the 
Rhine  country  is  of  great  cultural  signili- 

Msyar  ( E. )  Handsibeiten  der  letti- 
scben  Bevdlkerung  auf  der  Kurischen 
Nehrnng,  (Ibid.,  317,  I  fg.)  Figures 
and  describes  a  pair  of  woolen  gloves, 
called  limdt,  very  brilliant  in  colors. 
The"KuTes"  and  the  Lithuanians  have 
a  very  marked  color  and  form  sense.  Red 
and  white  are  used  for  various  purposes. 

d«  Moititlet  (A.)  Iji  pietre-folle  de 
Bournand  el  lea  dolmens  du  diparle- 
ment  dc  la  Vienne.  (R.  de  l'6c.  d'An- 
throp.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  28a-i88,  2 
fgs. )  Lists  129  dolmens  of  the  depart- 
ment of  Vienne  (of  which  some  fifty 
have  disappeared,  and  others  are  partly 
in  ruins),  with  special  account  of  La 
Pierre- Follf  des  Ormeaux  near  Bour- 
naud,  one  of  the  most  curious  and  im- 
portant of  these  monuments.  Among 
the  names  of  these  dolmens  are  :  Pierre- 
Levie,  Pierre-Fade,  Pierre- Couverte, 
Pierre-Folle,  Pierre- Soupfie,  Pierre- 
P*ze,  etc. 

L'aliee     couverte      de     Coppifre. 

Seine-et-Oise.  (Ibid,,  297-3'5.  =5 
fgs.)  DescribfS  the  "covered  way"  of 
Coppidte,  discovered  in  1S91,  with  de- 
tailed account  of  investigations  made 
since  (in  sll  209  objects  — flints,  stone 
and  bone  objects,  bead?,  horn  objects, 
pierced  teeth,  shells,  etc.,  copper  and 
bronie  beads,  pottery  sherds,  bit  of 
glass,  etc.,  were  found  ).  In  the  breccia 
human    bones   occurred.      Most    of    the 

fragments  of  terra  cotta  and  pottery, 
the  piece  of  glass,  etc..  arc  of  the  Ro- 
man period.  Inhumations  were  made 
here  in  the  Robenhaus  period,  and 
again  st  the  beginning  of  the  bronze  age. 

Le  grand  menhir  de  Glomel,  COIes- 

du-Nord.  (Ibid.,  87-92,  9  fgs. )  His- 
torical-descriptive occount  of  the  great 
menhir  of  Glomel.  one  of  the  largest 
monuments  of  the  kind  in  France  and 
one  of  the  least  known. 

Obemuier  (H. )  BcitrSge  zur  Kenntnis 
des  Quartlrs  in  den  PyrenSen.      Erster  , 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


Teil.  (A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Bmschwg.,  1906, 
N.  ?..  IV,  399-310,  3  pi.,  5  fga. )  This 
first  jpsri  of  a  study  of  the  quatemaiy  in 
(he  Pyrenees  treats  of  the  Garonae  basin 
between  Toulouse  and  Maitrcs,  the  lower 
course  of  the  Aritge,  the  old  plateaa- 
alluviumsof  the  miocene  elevations  east 
of  Toulouse,  quaternary  arcbeologial 
data  at  Toulouse,  "station"  on  or  id 
Huvioglacial  terraces,  "stations"  witb- 
oul  immediate  stialigraphic  relation  to 
fluviatile  terraces  ;  other  quartzile  finds 
in  the  Miocene  at  Toulouse.  The  eri- 
dence  shows,  according  to  DrO.,  that 
the  Acheulean  population  of  Southern 
France  lived  al\er  the  third  ice-age,  aiKl 
consequently  in  the  lAss-phase  of  the 
third  inlerglacial  period.  There  arc  in- 
dications of  the  subsequent  return  of  a 
warm  fauna  into  the  Pyrenees  —  the 
Acheuleans  were  contemporaries  of  the 
reindeer,    mammoth    and    woolly    tiii- 

Zur  Eolithenfrage.      (Ibid.,  75-80, 

8  pi.,  I  fg.l  Discusses  the  geolc^cal 
"eolith  stages,"  and  concludes  that 
the  "eoliths"  of  Rutot  are  not  much 
older  human  artifacts  than  those  of  the 
Chellean  and  Acheulean  epochs. 

Peredoliky  (W.)  Dessin  figuratif  sur 
une  poterie  de  I'tpoque  ntolithique. 
(R.  de  I'fec.  d' Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906 
XVI,  73-86,  6  fgs. )  Treats  of  the  frag- 
ments of  a  vase  with  ornamental  designs 
on  the  surfoce,  from  the  neolithic 
"  station  "  at  the  head  of  the  river  Vol- 
kov  ( near  r_ake  Ilmen  in  Russia)  found  in 
1904  — this  region,  rich  in  evidences  of 
human  activity,  was  first  explored  in 
t886.  The  find  is  unique  and  indicates 
the  existence  of  decorative  pottery  in 
this  region  in  the  first  half  of  the  neo- 

Peiko  (G.  A.I  Die  Riesengrotte  bei 
Triest,  — Opcina.  (Globus,  Bmschwg., 
1906,  i.x.\xix,  151-157.3  fgs.,  map.) 
The  immense  grollo  of  Opcina,  near 
Trieste,  has  been  visited  and  used  by  man 
in  prehistoric  and  in  Roman  times,  as 
rich  remains  of  pollery  sherds,  animal 
bones,  flints,  and  also  Roman  coins  and 
inscriptions,  indicate. 

PilM  {— )  Zur  Lehre  vora  Selbstmord. 
(Jhrb.  f.  Psychiatrie.  Berlin.  1905,  xxv[, 
294ir.)  Based  on  data  concerning 
1671  (male  IZ45,  female  426)  subjects 
in  the  K.  K.  Inst.  f.  gerichtt.  Medizin 
in  Vienna.  Seasonal  influence  is  not 
marked  —  the  highest  month,  however, 
Is  May.     About  7  percent  of  the  men 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


717 


and  13  percent  of  the  women  committed 
suicide  before  the  2 1st  year,  and  over  50 
percent  of  the  women  before  the  31st. 
According  to  P.,  sexual  conditions  pecu- 
liar to  women  are  important  factors  in 
suicide  —  some  22  percent  suffered  from 
affections  of  the  genital  organs. 

TOn  Pratt  ( H. )  MHTHP.  BruchstUcke 
zur  griechischen  Religionsgeschichte. 
(A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  ix,  87-94. ) 
Treats,  in  a  fragmentary  fashion,  of  the 
Greek  cult  of  Meter  —  the  Meter- 
Phallus  cult  corresponds  to  mother-right 
and  group-marriage,  etc.  —  then  of  the 
effects  of  father-right  and  the  connection 
of  the  idea  of  the  mother-goddess  and 
the  agrarian  (afterward,  the  sexual), 
the  introduction  of  the  idea  of  the  beauti- 
ful into  mythology.  The  husbandless 
Meter  belongs  to  the  age  of  group-mar- 
riage. 

Reindl  (J.)  Die  letzten  Spuren  urftltes- 
ten  Ackerbaues  in  SUdbayem.  (Globus, 
Bmschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  189-190.) 
Treats  briefly  of  the  traces  of  the  earliest 
primitive  agriculture  in  southern  Bavaria. 

Seger  (H.)  Die  Steinzeit  in  Schlesien. 
(A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Bmschwg.,  1906,  N.  F. 
V,  116-141,  10  pi.,  48  fgs.)  Treats  of 
the  stone-age  << station**  of  Jordansmiihl 
and  the  remains  (house-pits,  human 
skeletons,  graves,  flints  and  stone  imple- 
ments, copper  ornaments,  beads,  objects 
of  bone,  horn,  etc.,  pottery  plain  and 
ornamented)  then  discovered  there,  1898- 

1905,  also  other  finds  of  the  Jordans- 
miihl type  (Worschwitz,  Brockau, 
Ottitz),  the  Bschanz  type  (vase)  and 
related  vessels,  etc.  In  1902  two  animal 
graves  were  found  at  J.  — no  evidence  of 
the  horse. 

Sergi  ( G. )  Qualche  determinazione  sulla 
cronologia  delPuomo  quatemario  in 
Europa.     (A.  d.  Soc.  Rom.  di  Antrop., 

1906,  XII,  299-307.)  The  conclusions 
given  in  a  chapter  of  the  author's  forth- 
coming book,  V  Europa  preistoricay 
with  chronological  table  of  Quaternary 
man.  S.  thinks  that  Homo  europeus  (or 
primigenius)  of  the  Neander-Spy  type 
continued  to  exist  till  the  third  inter- 
glacial  epoch,  during  which  last  period 
the  Homo  eurafricanus  migrated  into 
Europe  from  Africa,  favored  by  forest 
and  climate.  Man  himself  is  a  product 
of  the  Tertiary. 

W.  (R. )  Die  Hochzeitsgebraiiche  der 
Setud.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906, 
LXXXIX,  257.)  Transcribes  from  the 
second  volume    of   Setukeste    Laulud, 


the  monumental  work  of  Dr  Jakob 
Hurt,  the  Esthonian  folk-lorist,  the  ac- 
count of  the  wedding  ceremonies  of  the 
Setud,  the  Greek-Orthodox  Elsthonians 
(as  distinguished  from  the  Protestant 
Elsthonians  of  Livonia).  Hurt  (pages 
461-499)  gives  details  of  these  rites,  etc. 

Waldeyer  (  —  )  Ueber  das  Stillen  der 
Kinder  durch  die  Mutter.  (Corr.-Bl.  d. 
D.  Ges.  f.  Anthrop.,  Miinchen,  1906, 
XXXVI,  130-132.)  Discusses  the  preva- 
lence of  feeding  the  infant  by  others  than 
the  mother,  particularly  in  upper  Ba- 
varia, where  the  mother-feeding  is  not 
customary  among  the  country  population, 
but  is  rather  looked  on  as  improper. 

Weniger(L. )  Feralis  exercitus.  (A.  f. 
Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  ix,  201-247.) 
This  interesting  and  valuable  monograph 
on  *<  spirit-armies,"  discusses  in  detail 
the  '*  black  host  *'  of  the  Teutonic  Harii 
and  the  "white  host"  of  the  Greek 
Phoceans.  The  former  are  said  by 
Tacitus  to  have  frightened  their  enemies 
by  using,  in  addition  to  their  natural 
fierceness,  such  artificial  aids  as  black 
shields,  painted  bodies,  dark  nights  for 
battles,  thus  simulating  the  aspect  and 
action  of  the  spirits  of  the  dead.  The 
Phoceans,  Herodotus  records,  made 
similar  night-attacks,  after  having 
painted  themselves  white  with  gypsum. 
Both  have  like  origins,  resting  upon  the 
same  superstition,  imitation  of  the  rdle 
of  the  dead  —  in  the  case  of  the  Harii 
of  Wodan's  <'  host,"  in  the  case  of  the 
Phoceans  of  Dionysos  and  his  Thiasotes. 

Zaborowaki  (S.)  Rapports  du  gothique 
et  du  lithuanien  et  de  celui-ci  avec  le 
grec.  (R.  de  I'fec.  d* Anthrop.  de 
Paris,  1906,  XVI,  247-248.)  Cites  ex- 
istence of  Teutonic  borrowings  from 
Lithuanian  {e,  p-.,  Hanf  tJidi  perhaps 
ApM)  and  Greek  loan-words  in  Lithu- 
anian (e.  g.y  gelezisy  '*iron"  =  Greek 
;ifaAxof,  **  copper  "  ).  According  to  Z., 
the  Greek  and  Latin  words  for  hemp 
{cannabis)  are  of  Lithuanian  origin. 
Archeological  evidence  (bronze  objects, 
coins,  etc. )  of  Greek  relations  with  the 
Baltic  country  also  exists — at  least  as 
early  as  the  fourth  century  B.  c 

Pourlenomd*  "Aryen."  (Ibid., 

294-296. )  Argues  for  the  name  Aryan 
as  better  than  Indo-German  or  Indo" 
European,  The  Aryanization  of  Asia 
may  well  be  remembered  in  the  name  of 
the  great  people  who  originated  in 
Europe. 


i 


7" 

Zbi BukMknnd*.  (Globiu,  Bnuchwg., 
1906,  Lxxxix,  126-117.)  Brief  rt- 
tamt  of  Dr.  Teloloro  de  Annudi  j 
UnunuDo's   Titslat  dt  la  Iradid6n  del 

putbh  vatie  ( San  Sebudan,  190S ) , 
three  esuyi,  trailing,  mpectiTcly,  of 
Buqae  place-nunei,  phjnicat  uilhio- 
pology,  ox -yokes.  Dr  de  A.  claimi 
thai  "  the  Basque  type  ii,  of  all  huoiaD 
races,  moil  removed  from  the  quad- 
ruped." 

AFRICA 

Ankermuui  (B. )  Ueber  den  gegen- 
wirtigen  Stand  der  Ethnographie  der 
SUdhRirte    Afrikas.     (A.    f.    Anthrop., 

Bnischwg.,  1906,  N.  F.,  IV,  a4i-2S6,  5 
pi.,  17  fgs.)  R*5un,*5  our  knowledge 
of  the  ethnogiaphy  of  Bantu  South 
Africa.  Treats  of  races  and  languages 
(language  of  pygmies  and  Buibmen  un- 
related, Hottentots  dislioct  physically 
from  Bushmen  and  Pygmies,  Bantu 
physically  a  much  mixed  race),  Bantu- 
tribei  (descriptive  list),  Bantu- culture 
(agriculture  except  the  Herero,  culture- 
plants,  domestic  animals,  hunting  aod 
fishing,  cannibalism,  intoxicants,  water- 
pipe  of  Asiatic  origin,  tobacco,  habita- 
tions of  three  types,  furniture  and 
utensils,  clothing  and  ornament,  painting 
and  tattooing,  hair-dress,  bodily  defor- 
mations, weapoTvs  and  warfare,  tools  and 
implements,  iron -working,  etc.,  pottery 
of  no  high  development,  wood-carving, 
textile  art,  baslietry  and  matting,  weav- 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


"ig. 


rell  developed,  money  of 


kinds,  social  otganiutt ion,  classes,  slavety, 
chiefs,  lotemgroups,  crimes  and  punish- 
ments, family  and  woman's  life,  children, 
puberty-ceremonies,  property  and  in- 
heritance, burial,  religion  on  animistic 
basis,  cult  of  spirits,  folk-literature), 
Bantu  otigins  and  migrations.  Dr  A. 
thinks  thai  n  homogeneous  Bantu  type 
DO  longer  exists,  has.  perhaps,  never 
existed.  Also  that  some  connection 
exists  between  African  and  Oceanic  cul- 
ture. Evidence  of  Hamitic  influence 
occurs  throughout  the  Bantu  area. 
Aus  der  Vorielt  des  Nigcrgebietes.  (Glo- 
bus, Brnschwg..  1906,  LXXXIX,  140- 
141.)  Based  on  the  article  of  Lieut. 
Desplagnes  in  La  Giografihit  for  Feb- 
ruary, 1906,  giving  an  account  of  his 
archeolc^ical  and  ethnographical  investi- 
gations   in    the     Niger    country.      The 


tomuli  of  the  lake-region  of  the  middle 
Niger  ( TeprescDting  tbc  cnltnn  of  the 
tnedueral   Ghanata  Idogdoia ),    the  pre- 


hiMoric  uid  protohisl 


the  centnl  Niger  valley  ("sutinci," 
stone  mcmnments,  monoliths  with  sculp- 
ture*, mini  of  Kokis,  the  first  capital  of 
the  Sooga  kingdom,  Berber  and  Negro 
grave*,  etc.],  the  present  ond  former  dis- 
tribution of  tribes  and  peoples,  are  coo- 
sidered.  These  investigationa  are  im- 
portant for  the  history  of  the  Negro  race 
in  West  Africa  and  their  contact  with 
the  Berbers,  Arabs,  etc 
Bleber  (F.  J. )  Reiseejndrilcke  und  wirt- 
ichaftliche  Bedbachtungcn  ana  Gallolacd 
und  KaSa.  (Ibid.,  117^123,  IJ3-139, 
13  fgs.,  map.)      Gives  account   of  eipe- 


Gallaland, 


1905. 


Contains  notes  on  the  Kaffitcho  (clothing 
religion),  Ometi,  etc.,  agricultnre,  in. 
dustries,  etc,  of  various  tribes  and 
towns.  KafTa,  B.  thinks,  may  become  a 
second  Rhodesia. 

Carton  (Z>r)  Le  Dar-el-Acheb,  Dougga. 
(Rec  d.  Notes  et  M«m.  Soc.  Ardiiol. 
du  Dip.  de  Conitantine,  1905  [1906], 
4'  s.,  VIII,  61-65,  4  Pl- )  Brief  accomit 
of  the  Dar-el-Acbeb  of  Dugga,  perhaps 
a  sort  of  mactllum,  of  Roman  origin. 

Quatritme    AriDuaire    d' Epigraph  ie 

Africaine,  1904-1905.  (Ibid.,  135- 
163. )  Gives,  with  indexes  of  names, 
stamps,  gods,  emperors,  religions,  office* 
and  functions,  army,  buildings,  geo- 
graphic names,  localities,  etc.,  men- 
tioned, the  African  {Latin,  Greek,  Punic, 
Ljbyan)  inscriptions  published  in  vari- 
ous journals,  etc.,  in  1904-5. 

Debrage  (A.)  Bougie.  Compte  rendu 
des  fouilles  faites  en  1904'  (Ibid..  67- 
laj,  3  pi.,  35  fgs.)  Gives  accounts  of 
the  investigations  and  finds  made  at 
Bougie  in  1904  —  the  rock  shelter, 
fishing  station  of  Pic  des  Singes  (  pottery, 
bone  and  ivory  objects,  polished  bone, 
beads,  rude  statuettes,  flints,  ornaments, 
—  beads,  etc.,  —  copper  implements, 
minerals,  etc.),  the  tumulus  of  the  Pic 
des  Singes  and  the  contents  (vases, 
grinding  stones,  few  animal  bones)  of 
the  15  "hearths."  The  fishing-station 
appears  to  belong  to  the  era  of  transition 
between  stone  and  metal.  The  tumulus 
represents  ihc  first  (very  ancient)  period 
of  Berber  occupancy,  with  perhaps  some 
traces  of  their  predecessors. 

Dennett  (R.  E.)  Bavili  notes.  (Folk- 
Lore,  Lond.,  1905,  xvi,  371-406,  4 
pi. )     Treats  of   ideas   about    the    soul 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


719 


(shadow,  revenanty  intelligence,  voice 
or  soul  of  dead,  mirror,  photography), 
fetishes  (family  fetishes,  personal  charms, 
"figures  of  the  people,"  nail -fetishes), 
wizard-exposure  story,  xina  or  prohibi- 
tion (nine  classes,  the  last  of  these  being 
a  *<  summed-up  class'*  of  the  animals, 
etc.,  concerned,  parts  only  are  xina^ — a 
long  list  is  given),  etc.  The  Bavili  are 
known  also  as  the  Fjort ;  they  are  a  Bantu 
people. 

-  Notes  from  southern  Nigeria. 
(Ibid.,  pp.  434-439.)  Treats  o( ezimi\ 
or  *<  making  father,"  a  ladies'  dance, 
secret  societies,  marriage  and  birth  cus- 
toms of  the  people  about  the  city  of 
Benin,  etc. 

Donmergne  ( F. )  Nouvelles  contributions 
au  pr^historique  de  la  province  d'Oran. 
(Bull.  Soc.  Geogr.  et  Arch^ol.,  Oran, 
1905,  XXV,  399-412.)  Enumerates  85 
**  stations,"  with  finds  of  rude  flints  and 
also  fragments  of  polished  axes.  Fire- 
places and  tumuli  have  also  been  discov- 
ered. At  AIn  Guettara  two  Chellian 
axes  were  found.  Many  of  the  *<  sta- 
tions "  were  reported  for  the  first  time. 

F  r B. )  Randall-Mad ver  aber  die  Ruinen 
des  Maschonalandes.  (Globus,  Bm- 
schwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  283-284. )  R^- 
sumis  R.-M.'s  article  on  the  ruins  in 
Mashonaland  in  the  Geographical  Jour- 
nal for  April,  1906. 

Osell  (S. )  L'ftge  de  la  pierre  dans  la 
region  de  Bordj-Menalel  et  sur  la  cdte. 
(Rec.  d.  Not.  et  M6m.  Soc.  Archtol.  du 
D6p.  de  Constantine,  1906,  4*  s.,  viii, 
9-19,  6  pi. )  Treats  of  stone  imple- 
ments from  the  region  of  Bordj-Menalel 
and  the  adjacent  coast.  By  the  shore  of 
the  sea  <*  primitive  men  had  cut  flint  in 
colossal  abundance  and  used  it  for  tools 
and  weapons."  Localities  noted  are 
Settara,  near  Cape  Djinet,  Minerville,  etc. 

A  Cissi  municipium  (Ibid.,  19-21, 

I  fg. )  Notes  on  Djinet,  the  Roman 
Cissi  municipium  —  Berber  station,  Car- 
thaginian emporium,  Roman  city,  and 
the  finds  there  made  the  last  year  (re- 
mains of  stone  buildings,  pottery,  lead 
vase,  coins  of  Juba  II  (collection  of  an 
amateur  of  the  time),  deformed  bronze 
objects,  a  human  skeleton,  part  of  a 
white  marble  stele  with  Latin  inscrip- 
tion), etc. 

Mosalque  romaine  de  Sila.     (Ibid., 

1-7,  I  pi. )  Describes  a  Roman  mosaic 
found  at  Sila,  one  of  the  castella  belong- 
ing to  the  Roman  Cirta,  The  art  is 
poor  and  belongs  to  the  third  or  fourth 


century.  The  m^^/i/isScylla  personified, 
but  not  the  Homeric  conception. 

Oatmann  (B.)  Trauer-  und  Begrftbnis- 
sitten  der  Wadschagga.  (Globus, 
Bmschwg.,  1906,  LXXXIX,  197-200.) 
Treats  in  detail  of  death,  mourning, 
burial  customs,  etc.,  among  the  Wajagga, 
a  Bantu  people.  Death  is  a  two-sided 
phenomenon,  —  release  from  earthly 
troubles,  fear  of  the  world  of  ghosts. 
Women  are  the  mourners.  The  cere- 
monies last  for  days.  The  family,  in  the 
broad  sense,  is  the  school  of  all  virtues 
and  to  it  the  native  owes  his  burial  (<*a 
friend  cannot  bury  you,"  says  a  proverb 
of  the  country). 

Hemtaim  (D.  R. )  Neues  fiber  die  Busch- 
mftnner.  (Ibid.,  285-287.)  Risumis 
S.  Passarge's  recent  monograph  on  the 
Bushmen  of  the  Kalahari. 

HingUiifl  (U.)  Inscriptions  in^dites  de  la 
province  de  Constantine  pendant  I'ann^e 

1905.  (Rec.  d.  Notes  et  Mim.  Soc. 
Archiol.  du  Dip.  de  Constantine,  1905 
[1906],  4«  s.,  VIII,  243-259.)  Repro- 
duces 170  unpublished  inscriptions  from 
Announa  ( Thibilis ),  Khemissa  ( Thurbur- 
sicum  Numidarum),  ATn-el-Bordj,  Con- 
stantine (Cirta),  in  the  province  of  Con- 
stantine. 

Hnguet  (J.)  Les  Oulad  Nail,  nomades 
pasteurs.  (R.  de  I'fec.  d'  Anthrop.  de 
Paris,  1906,  XVI,  102-104.)  Treats 
briefly  of  the  Oulad  Nail,  pastoral  no- 
mads of  Algeria,  their  migrations,  etc. 

Jacqnot  (L.)  Dessins  rupestres  de  Mo- 
gh'ar,  sud  Oranais.  (Ibid.,  289-291,  2 
fgs. )  Notes  on  rock -carvings  of  animals 
(elephant,  buffalo,  goat,  some  birds)  and 
a  wirrwarr  of  lines  and  curves,  from 
Mogh'ar  in  southern  Oran  (Algeria). 

J0I7  ( C.  A. )  Thurbursicum  Numidarum, 
Khemissa.  (Rec.  d.  Notes  et  Mim. 
Soc.  Archtol.  du  Dip.  de  Constantine, 
1905  [1906],  4*  s.,  VIII,  165-192,  18  pi., 
I  fg. )  Treats  of  the  ruins  of  Khemissa, 
the  Thuhursicum  Numidarum  of  the 
Romans, — theater,  nympheum,  forum 
novum,  baths,  arch  of  triumph  of  Sep- 
timus Severus,  platea  vetus,  temple, 
curia,  tribune,  public  treasury,  basilica, 
inscriptions,  etc. 

T.  Kleist  ( — )  E.  F.  Gautiers  Durchquer- 
ung  der  Sahara.     (Globus,  Bmschwg., 

1906,  LXXXIX,  319-321.)  Emphasizes 
the  scientific  results  of  Gautier's  trans- 
Sgharan  expedition  of  1 904- 1 905.  There 
is  evidence  that  the  whole  Sahara,  from 
Algiers  to  the  Sudan,  was  once  a  land 
well-watered,  and  thickly  populated  by 


720 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


'[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


agricultural  tribes.  Traces  of  these  tribes 
are  found  in  rock- inscriptions,  graves, 
mortars  and  grinding  stones,  flints,  ar- 
rowheads, etc. 

▼on  Lnsdiaii  (F. )  Ueber  die  ethnolo- 
gische  Stellung  dieser  <*  Abessinier.*' 
(Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1906,  xxxviii, 
159-161. )  Points  out  that  the  so-called 
"  Abyssinians  "  of  the  Castan  Panopti- 
cum  are  most  of  them  Somals  —  the 
group  includes  also  Gal  las,  a  few  east 
Sudanese  Negroes  and  Egyptians.  In 
the  discussion,  Hr.  O.  Neumann  added 
to  Dr  V.  L.'s  observations.  One  of  the 
women  in  the  *< Abyssinian  village" 
gave  birth  to  a  child,  which  Dr  v.  L. 
saw  on  the  fourth  day  after:  '< the  skin- 
color  was  the  same  dark-gray  as  that  of 
the  mother  (only  the  vola  and  planta 
were  still  dark-red) ;  the  gluteal  region 
was  very  dark -gray.  According  to  the 
nurse  the  color  at  birth  was  the  same. 

Merder  (£. )  La  race  berb^re,  veritable 
population  de  I'Afrique  septentrionale. 
(Rec.  d.  Notes  et  M^m.  Soc.  Arch6ol. 
du  D^p.  de  Constantine,  1905  [1906], 
4*  s.,  VIII,  23-59.)  Historical-ethno- 
graphic sketch  of  the  Berber  peoples. 
According  to  M.,  the  Berbers  have  in- 
habited N.  Africa  from  the  remotest 
antiquity,  and  have  continued  to  live, 
never  ceasing  to  absorb  other  peoples 
and  undergoing  frequent  renascences. 
Their  treatment  by  the  Romans  and  their 
history  down  to  the  13th  century  a.  I), 
in  particular  are  considered,  lists  of  the 
various  tribes,  etc.,  being  given.  The 
mountains,  the  littoral,  the  desert,  almost 
all  Morocco,  is  still  Berber  —  the  Arabs 
were  largely  assimilated. 

Moszeik  (O. )  Die  Malereien  der  Busch- 
manner  in  Siid-Afrika.  (Intern.  A.  f. 
Ethnogr.,  Leiden,  1906,  xvill,  1-44, 
3  pi.,  I  fg. )  This  monograph,  edited 
by  Dr  S.  Levinstein,  who  also  adds  an 
afterword  (pp.  41-44)  is  based  on  ob- 
servations of  Dr  M.  during  a  long  resi- 
dence in  the  l^ushman  country.  Follow- 
ing topics  are  treated :  Generalities, 
sandstone  caves  (the  most  fertile 
**  finds"),  age  of  paintings  (three 
periods:  i,  rude  figures  of  unknown 
animal  forms ;  2,  animal  forms,  deeper 
in  color  and  representing  the  best  art 
period,  in  red  and  yellow  ;  3,  inartistic 
human  figures,  representing  perhaps  a 
period  of  decadence  ;  those  paintings  in 
which  the  horse  figures  cannot  be  earlier 
than  the  eighteenth  century  ;  some,  how- 
ever, are  many  centuries  older),  material 


uid  utensils,  colors,  technique,  perspec- 
tive, relation  to  ancient  Egyptian  paint- 
ings (both  represented  animals  better 
than  men),  motives  (animals  appear  in 
numerous  characteristic  poses,  species 
easily  recognizable,  sex  likewise,  ana- 
tomic  detail  ;  human  head  poorly  made ; 
figures  of  inanimate  objects  rare,  sym- 
bolic representations  also  seldom  occur ; 
groups  relaHvely  rare),  etc.  Dr  L. 
disagrees  with  Dr  M.  as  to  the  theory  of 
decadence  in  the  human  figures.  The 
period  of  true  artistic  development  is  to 
be  seen  in  the  early  fragmentary  repre- 
sentations. Perspective  and  color  first 
develop  in  the  period  of  "  narrative  pk- 
tures."  Parallels  of  Bushman  art  are  to 
be  sought  in  the  eflforts  of  prehistoric 
men  and  of  modem  children,  not  in  the 
products  of  civilized  Egypt  and  Japan. 
Relations  of  Bushmen  with  Pygmies  are 
still  to  be  proved. 

PapilUnlt  (G. )  La  forme  du  thorax  chez 
Ics  Hovas  et  chez  des  n^gres  africains 
ct  malgaches.  Contribution  ik  T^tude 
de  I'indice  thoracique.  (R.  de  Pfec. 
Anthrop.  de  Paris,  1906,  xvi,  63-68.) 
Gives  results  of  thoracic  measurements  of 
18  negroes,  35  Malagasy  and  25  Hovas— 
the  thoracic  index  rises  with  the  ad- 
mixture of  negro  blood.  Relation  of 
trunk  to  limb  is  also  considered.  Phylo- 
gcnetically  the  thorax  flattens  from  the 
monkeys  and  anthropoids  to  man.  Onto- 
genetically,  the  index  decreases  from 
fetus  to  adult,  rising,  however,  some- 
what in  old  age.  This  flattening  of  the 
thorax  (seen  in  3  Americans  measured 
by  P.  in  particular)  is  both  an  evolutive 
and  a  functional  superiority. 

Pa88Arge(S.)  Der  palSLolithische  Mensch 
an  den  Viktoriaftllen  des  Sambesi. 
(Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  loS. ) 
Notes  on  the  observations  of  Fielden  in 
Nature  (vol.  73,  Nr.  1882)  on  paleo- 
lithic man  at  the  Victoria  Falls  of  the 
Zambesi.  The  relation  between  the 
Kalahari  sand  and  the  boulders  must  de- 
termine whether  the  flints  in  question  are 
late  Tertiary  or  much  more  recent. 

Robert  (A.)  Notes  sur  quelques  vestiges 
antiques  d^couverts  dans  la  commune 
mixte  des  Maadid.  (Rec,  d.  Notes  et 
M6m.  Soc.  Arch^ol.  du  D6p.  de  Con- 
stantine, 1905  [1906],  4<"s.,  viii,  239- 
241.)  Brief  accounts  of  several  I^tin 
inscriptions,  a  mosaic  from  the  ruins  of  a 
Roman  city  near  C6rez,  a  red -earth  vase 
and  contents  from  the  Roman  ruins  near 
the  well  of  El-Anasser. 


CHAMBERLdllN] 


PERIODICAL  LITEHATUHS 


Koqovtto    (M.)      Laoteme     de     bronze 

Cvcnuit  du  cimedire  paleo  d'AIn-el- 
nt,  doiur  des  Atcida,  enviroDS  de 
Souk-Ahras.  (Ibid.,  319-158,  3  fgs.) 
DMcribea  B  bcooze  Untem,  resembling 
one  figured  on  the  column  of  Trojan  (in 
*  DocluTDal  se*-scene),  from  the  pagan 
cemelery  of  AIn-el-Hout,  near  Souk- 
Ahras,  exhumed  in  1904- 

8cIwni(J.)  StieifzUge  in  Oran  im  Sommer 
1904.  (Globns,  Bmschwg.,  1906, 
Lxxxix,  136-337,  349-253. )  These 
noles  of  travel  in  Oran  refer  here  and 
there  to  the  population  (of  the  Oases 
Figutg,  Dourssa,  etc. ),  and  give  also  an 
account  of  Beduin  sheik  and  bis  people.    ' 

ScUllins  (C.)  Tambenna.  (Ibid.,  361- 
364,  6  fgs. ).  Describes  the  Tamberma 
people  of  German  Togo,  their  rouud- 
tower  houses,  etc.  These  are  one  of  the 
sb;  "  wild  "  tribes  of  the  country. 

Schfltu  (W.)  Der  ElefaDt  in  Bridsch- 
Ostafrika  und  Uganda.  (Ibid.,  141- 
144.  )  Contains  some  notes  on  methods 
of  hunting  and  trapping  the  elephant,  in 
use  among  the  native  tribes  (Kikujia, 
Masai,  Waifamba).  Author  advocates  a 
government  monopoif  of  elephant.hunt- 
ing. 

SpiesalbetE  (W.)  Die  Symbolik  des 
Salbens  bei  den  Agyptem.  (A.  (. 
Religsw.,  Lpig.,  I9«S,  IX,  143-144.) 
Argues  rubbing,  smearing  and  anointing 
with  oil  were,  in  ancient  Egypt,  pro- 
tective ceremonies,  even  when  applttt^  to 


Spleaa  (C. )  Bedeutung  einiger  Stldte- 
und  Dorfbamen  in  Deutich-Togo. 
(Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906,  lxxxix, 
139-I4I. )  Gives  the  etymology  of  some 
40  names  of  towns  and  villages  in  the 
German  Togo  country,  —  the  capital  is 
Lome,  "  little  market-place." 

Studlngn  (P.)  Verschiedene  aus 
Hebron  stammende  Glaasachen,  nament- 
licb  Annringe,  sowie  auch  glSseme 
Annrtnge  aus  Nupe.  (Z.  f.  Ethnol., 
Berlin,  1906,  xxxviii,  331-333. )  Notes 
on  glass  bracelets,  etc.,  from  Hebron  in 
Palestine  and  from  the  Nupe  country  in 
Africa —  tradition  in  the  Sudan,  etc., 
attributes  these  objects  to  "Jews." 
The  Hebron  and  Nupe  glass-rings  strik- 
ingly resemble  each  other. 

VaI  (A.)  Monuments  et  inscriptions  llby- 
ques  rclev£s  dans  tes  mines  de  Tir-Kab- 
bine  utuies  sur  le  leiriloire  de  la  Com' 
mune  mixte  de  AIn-M'lila.  [Rec.  d. 
Notes  el  M£m.  Soc.  Aicbiol.  du  Dtp.  de 


Berber  people  of  the  region  of  Aln- 
M'  lila  (once  611ed  with  populous  Roman 
towns),  the  monoliths  and  other  stone 
monuments,  their  inscriptions,  etc.,  in 
the  ruins  of  Tir-Kabbine,  where  once 
was  an  ancient  city.  Turrii  Casarii,  J. 
thinks,  was  south  of  Signs. 

Vortlwh(H.)  DicNegerderGoldkUste. 
I.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906,  LXXXIX, 
177-3S3,  393-397,  34  fgs.)  Treats  of 
physical  characters,  clothing,  intellect 
and  character,  family  manners  and  cus- 
toms, public  life,  market,  travel,  political 
and  state  relations,  folk-music  (in  some 
detail).  DrV.  notes  the  early  decline 
of  facial  traits,  especially  in  women  who 
have  home  children  ;  superstition  linked 
with  fetish- worship  ;  imagination  and 
power  of  oratory  ;  gesture  and  feature- 
play  ;  dressing  men  as  women  and  vice 
versa  at  funerals  (among  the  Bagoro)  ; 
little  reputation  of  family  and  public 
life ;  night  quieter  than  day  ;  existence 
of  many  petty  kings  (the  eldest  sister  of 
dead  king  has  great  influence)  ;  drums 
chief  musical  instruments  (children  make 
them  out  of  bottles),  wooden  xylophone, 
horns,  etc.  The  natives  take  well  to 
European  instruments  and  to  the  singing 
in  church  and  school. 

WalMenboni  (J.)  Tierkutt  in  Afrika. 
Eine  ethnologisch-kulturbistorische  Un- 
tersuchung.  (Intern.  A.  f.  Elhnogr., 
Leiden,  1904,  XVII,  91-175,  3  pi.,  with 
maps. )  This  monograph,  with  maps  of 
distribution  of  the  various  animals  wor- 
shipped, bibliography,  indexes  of  names 
and  subjects,  treats  of  the  facts  concern- 
ing cults  of  animals  in  Africa,  their  or- 
igin, evolution,  etc.  The  topics  conud- 
ered  are  the  animal-cult  of  African  prim- 
itive peoples  and  their  animal  sacrifices, 
animal-cult  of  the  ancient  Egyptians 
(either  an  old  local  inheritance  or  the 
result  of  exaggerated  speculation  based 
on  nature-observation),  etc.  In  animal 
sacriRce  the  essential  and  precious  thing  is 
the  blood,  not  the  animal  itself.  Accord- 
the  basal  idea  that  gave  rise 


o  the  cult  of 


nalsi 


ing  idea  within  himself  of  a  world-soul." 
The  cult  r^ion  of  no  animal  corresponds 
with  the  area  of  its  geographical  distri- 
bution. Some  notable  animals  (t.  g., 
giraffe,  weaver-bird,  ostrich)  have  given 
rise  lo  no  cult- 
Wlntamltl  (M.)  Zut  Volkskunde  der 
Intel    Soqotra.      (Globus,    Bmscbwg., 


722 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


1906,  Lxxxix,  301-302.)  Gives  brief 
account  of  the  folk-lore  material  (tales, 
songs,  sayings,  riddles,  etc ;  sereral  are 
dted)  in  D.  H.  Mailer's  SoqotritexU 
(Wien,  1905),  with  comparative  refer- 
ences. 

ASIA 

A.  (B. )  Eine  religiose  Bewegung  im 
Altai.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906, 
LXXXIX,  220-221.)  Gives  a  brief  ac- 
count, after  Klemenz  and  Ackerblom,  of 
the  religious  movement  begun  in  1904, 
by  an  old  Kalmuck  of  the  Altai  named 
Tshetjt  Tshelp&nov,  whose  interpreter 
and  helper  was  his  adopted  daughter,  a 
bright  and  eloquent  girl  of  14  years.  He 
preached  the  coming  end  of  the  world, 
attacked  shamanism  and  its  bloody  sacri- 
fices. The  Russians  opposed  the  move- 
ment by  force  and  the  ** prophet**  was 
imprisoned. 

Birkner  (F. )  Beitrftge  zur  Rassenan- 
atomie  der  Chinesen.  (A.  f.  Anthrop., 
Bmschwg.,  1905,  N.  F.,  IV,  1-40,  20  pi., 
13  ^S^*)  Describes  with  measurements, 
head  and  face  forms  of  six  Chinese  heads 
and  treats  the  thickness  of  the  soft  parts 
of  the  same,  also  the  musculature  of  the 
head  in  three  Chinese  heads.  This 
article  deals  in  part  with  the  same  data 
as  were  published  in  the  author*  s  Habili- 
tationssckrift  of  1 904.  See  American 
Anthropologist^  I905i  N.  s.,  vil,  346. 

Haut  und     Ilaare  bei    sechs  Chi- 

nesenkSpfen.  ( Ibid.,  v,  142- 148,  2  fgs. ) 
Treats  of  the  skin  (color,  thickness, 
papillae)  and  hair  (number,  cross-section 
and  thickness,  grouping)  of  six  heads  of 
Chinese.  As  compared  with  Europeans 
the  Chinese  head-skin  is  more  richly  pig- 
mented, also  thicker  ;  the  hair  is  thicker 
and  rounder. 

Bogoraa  (W. )  Religious  ideas  of  primitive 
man,  from  Chukchee  material.  (Intern. 
Amerik.-Kongr.  Stuttgart,  1904,  1906, 
XIV,  129-135.)  English  original,  of 
which  a  French  version  was  noticed  in 
American  Anthropologist ^    1 905,   N.   S., 

VH,  347. 
Boz(E. )  Shanghai  folk-lore.  (J.China 
Br.  Roy.  As.  Soc,  Shanghai,  1905, 
xxxvi,  130-156.)  Second  part  of  a 
collection  of  folk-lore  items  from  the 
Chinese  of  Shanghai — the  author  is  a 
missionary  of  the  better  class.  Festivals 
(New  Year,  Lanterns,  Spring,  Summer, 
etc.),  * 'magic"  and  folk-medicine,  super- 
stitions concerning  animals  (tiger,  dog, 
goat,  rat,  raven,  etc.,  snakes),  the  writ- 


ings of  the  Christimiis  (eflicaciofis  in  dis- 
ease against  eril  spirits,  etc),  are  con- 
sidered. 

Dttck*  (W. )  Feuerlrageln  and  Meteor- 
iten  in  looi  Nacfat.  (Globus,  Bmschwg., 
1906,  LXXXIX,  I5S-I59.^  Calls  atten- 
tion to  several  passages  id  the  AraHan 
Nights  referring  to  fire-bftlls,  naeteorites, 
etc  Out  of  meteoric  iron  **  hxAj  soimds  *' 
may  have  been  fabricated. 

Fraenlnl  (a )  Zur  Fabel  von  Wolf  and 
Kranich.  (Z.  <L  Deutscfaen  morgenL 
Ges.,  1905,  Lxviii,  798.  )  ates  a  Jew- 
ish variant  (lion  and  partridge)  of  the 
fable  of  the  wolf  and  the  crane. 

Goldfteiii  (F.)  Der  Monotheismns  Ka- 
naans.  (Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1 906, 
LXXXIX,  234-235.)  Author  concludes 
that  in  pre-exile  times  the  Canaanite 
sUte-religion  was  poljrtheistic,  in  post- 
exile  times  monotheistic,  while  in  Chris- 
tian times  the  appeal  was  made  to  Moses 
and  hb  law. 

Habenr  (K.  A.)  Votive  and  Weihega- 
ben  der  Japaner.  (Corr.-Bl.  d.  D.  Ges. 
f.  Anthrop.,  Miinchen,  1906,  xxxvi, 
'32-I33-)  Brief  account  of  mother's 
offerings  of  votive  Sgures  for  her  child, 
fishermen's  offerings  of  little  boats,  nets, 
etc.,  phallic  offerings,  animal  ofierii^s, 
pictures,  etc  (e.  g.,  in  the  Akusa  temple 
m  Tokio)  in  Japan. 

JOCheltOil  (W.)  Ueber  asiatische  und 
amerikanische  Elemente  in  den  Mythen 
der  Koriaken.  (Intern.  Amerik.- 
Kongr.  Stuttgart,  1904,  1906,  xiv, 
1 19-127. )  Treats  of  Asiatic  and  Ameri- 
can elements  in  the  myths  of  the  Koryaks 
based  on  material  collected  during  the 
Jesup  expedition  of  1 900-1 901.  Of  the 
122  episodes  or  tales  (out  of  139)  most 
commonly  occurring  in  Koryak  myths 
83  percent  are  met  with  in  the  |m>-ths 
of  the  N.  A.  Indians,  29  percent  in 
those  of  the  Eskimo,  and  only  18  per- 
cent in  the  traditions  and  tales  of  the 
Mongol -Turkic  peoples  and  the  Old 
World.  The  American  element  in 
Koryak  myths  resembles  in  form  the 
tales  of  the  Athapascans,  in  content 
those  of  the  Tlingit.  These  resem- 
blances, J.  holds,  are  clearly  due  to 
close  relationship  of  the  Indians  and  the 
peoples  of  N.  E.  Siberia  in  past  times,  if 
not,  perhaps,  to  some  extent  at  least,  to 
a  common  origin  of  both. 

Jochelson-Brodsky  (Dina).  Zur  Topo- 
graphic des  weiblichen  KSrpers  nordost- 
sibirischer  Volker.  (A.  f.  Anthrop., 
Bmschwg.,  1906,  N.  F.,  V,  1-58,  4  pi., 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


723 


map,  14  fgs.,  9  tables.)     Based  on  the 
author's  special   measurements   (details 
of  30  items  are  given)  of  30  Tungus,  32 
Yukagir  and  66  Yakut  women,  besides 
other    measurements  of    720   Koryaks, 
Tunguses  and  Yukagirs  (men,  women 
and  children),  in  1900-1902   in  N.   £. 
Siberia.     Stature,  cephalic  index,  head- 
diameters,  anatomical  facial  index,  jugal 
width  of  face,  head-heights,  nose-meas- 
urements, shoulder-height  and  breadth, 
manubrium-height,  location  of  mammae 
and    of   navel,    height    of    symphysis, 
length  of  trunk,  pelvic  measurements,  legs 
and  arms,    feet  and  hands,  and  finger- 
reach,    are    considered    in     particular. 
Yakut   women   are   not    different   from 
other    Turko-Mongolian    peoples ;    the 
Tunguses  (men  and  women)  measured 
differ  from  other  Tungus  tribes  by  their 
mesocephaly  and  smaller  stature  ;   the 
Yukagirs  have  the  smallest  stature  of  the 
Paleoasiatic    groups    investigated,     the 
Kamchadales  the  lowest  cephalic  index, 
the  Chukchee  (closest  to  the  Indians) 
the  tallest  stature  and  broadest  heads  ; 
the  Asiatic  Eskimo  are  shorter  than  those 
of  Alaska,  but  somewhat  taller  than  the 
Chukchee,  while  their    cephalic   index 
resembles  that  of  the  Alaskan  Eskimo. 
All  absolute  values  are  smaller  in  women 
and  also  most  relative  values.     The  rela- 
tive height  of  the  mammae  is  like  that  of 
European  women ;  in  peoples  with  short 
stature  the  trunk    is    relatively    longer 
than  in  those  with  tall ;  the  relation  of 
pelvic  distances  to  stature  is  constant. 
This  monograph  is  a  very  good  piece  of 
work,  exemplifying  the  value  of  women 
as  field- workers  in  anthropology. 

Kahle  (B. )  Zur  verschluckten  Schlange. 
(Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix, 
112.)  Cites  a  parallel  to  the  <<  swallowed 
snake"  legend  from  the  region  of  the 
Araxes  in  Transcaucasia. 

Mesaing  (O. )  Ueber  den  Gebrauch  des 
Opiums  bei  den  Chinesen.  (Z.  f. 
Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1906,  xxxviii,  205-219, 
2  maps. )  Treats  of  the  history  of  the 
introduction,  use,  effects,  etc.,  of  opium 
in  China.  The  chief  centers  of  opium 
cultivation  are  in  Yunnan  (since  ca, 
1850),  Szechuan,  Kwe-Chu,  etc.  In 
Szechuan  50  percent  of  the  male  popu- 
lation smoke  opium  (urban  20  percent, 
rural  50  percent).  ^  Many  women  smoke  ; 
whether  children  inherit  the  vice  is  not 
proved.  One  of  the  notable  effects  of 
opium- indulgence  is  a  tendency  to 
suicide.     The  new  "  China  for  the  Chi- 


nese''  movement  will  succeed  in  sup- 
pressing opium  more  than  ever. 
de  Moraes  (W.)  Os  nomes  geographicos 
japonezes.  (faol.  Soc.  de  Geogr.,  Lis- 
boa,  1906,  161-165.)  Discusses  spell- 
ing, pronunciation,  meaning,  etc.,  of 
Japanese  geographical  names.  Based  on 
Takashika  Okishio's  Map  of  Japan  re- 
vised by  MuUer. 
Niehua  (Helene)  Zenana-Leben  in 
Ostindien.  (Globus,  Brnschwg.,  1906, 
LXXXIX,  247-249,  5  fgs. )  Treats  of  the 
zenana  ( **  women's  apartment  "  )  life  of 
the  rich  Hindus  and  Mohammedans  (the 
author  spent  many  years  in  India).  The 
daughter-in-law  is  more  subject  to  the 
mother-in-law  here  than  anywhere  else 
on  the  globe.  Ornaments  are  profuse. 
The  Hindu  mother  really  acquires  posi- 
tion through  the  possession  of  a  son. 
Oppert  (G. )  Ueber  die  indischen  Farias. 
(A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Brnschwg.,  1906,  N.  F., 
IV,  I49-I59>)  Historical-ethnograph- 
ical sketch  (origin  and  meaning  oiParia^ 
divisions,  varieties,  etc. )  There  are  two 
sorts  of  Farias^  outcast  Hindus  and  peo- 
ple whose  forefathers  were  the  andent, 
independent  Dravidians.  The  Partem 
are  susceptible  of  culture  and  have  a 
better  future  before  them,  if  properly 
treated  and  educated. 

Ein  indischer    Pilgerstab.      (Z.    f. 

Ethnol.,    Berlin,    xxxviii,    161-163.) 
Describes    a    Hindu  pilgrim's  staff  of 
paldsa  wood,  well-made,  with  the  month- 
names  inscribed  on  its  eight  sides.     The 
author  adds  notes  on  the  divisions  of 
time  among  the  Hindus. 
Sandler  ( A. )    Medizinische  Bibliographie 
fUr  Syrien,  Palftstina  und  Cypem.     (Z. 
d.  Deutschen  Palftstinaver.,  Berlin,  1905, 
xxviii,  131-146.)     Alphabetical  list  of 
literature  relating  to  the  diseases  occur- 
ring   in  Syria,    Palestine  and    Cyprus, 
folk-medicine,  superstitions,  etc. 
Schultx  (Dr)     Noch   ein  Steinnagel  aus 
Samoa.      (Globus,    Brnschwg.,      1906, 
Lxxxix,  145,  1  fg.)    Describes  a  **  stone 
nail,"  found  beneath  the  surface  on  the 
Vailele  plantation,  near  Apia.     Such  im- 
plements may  have  been  used,  according 
to  native  belief  and  tradition,  in  the  con- 
struction of  the  great  canoes  and  houses 
of  important  chiefs ;  afterwards  for  other 
purposes  as  tools  or  '<  magic  *'  objects. 
Schwally  (F.)     Die   biblischen  SchOpf- 
ungsberichte.     (A.  f.  Religsw.,  Lpzg., 
1906,  IX,  159-175.)     Discusses  the  two 
accounts  in  Genesis  of  the  creation  of  the 
I       world,     their     mythological    relations. 


AM.  ANTM.,  If.  S.,  8^ 


4* 


724 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  1906 


origins,  etc.  S.  recognizes  the  androg- 
ynous Adam  and  the  production  of  the 
animal- world  of  Eden  as  Jahve's  attempts 
to  provide  a  companion  for  Adam  — 
Eve  is  ultimately  made  from  him.  A 
Fiji  mjrth  is  cited  in  comparison. 

Sternberg  (L.)  Bemerkungen  fiber  Be- 
ziehungen  zwischen  der  Morphologic 
der  giljakischen  und  amerikanischen 
Sprachen.  (Intern.  Amerik.-Kongr. 
Stuttgart,  1904,  1906,  XIV,  137-140.) 
Points  out  10  items  of  resemblance  in 
morphology  between  the  Giliak  and 
American  Indian  languages,  as  against 
the  Ural-Altaic  :  Use  of  prefixes  as  well 
as  suffixes,  incorporation  of  pronouns  in 
verb  and  noun  in  certain  cases,  use  of 
pleonastic  pronouns  or  numerals  with 
class  nouns,  use  of  pleonastic  auxiliaries 
with  even  active  verbs  in  some  cases, 
formation  of  many  conjugational  forms 
by  adverbial  post-positions,  use  of  conju- 
gations in  which  the  first  person  singu- 
lar and  all  three  persons  plural  have  one 
form  and  the  second  and  third  persons 
singular  another  (cf.  Klamath,  which  has 
other  peculiarities  resembling  Giliak), 
easy  change  by  verbal  sufHxes  of  adjectives 
as  well  as  nouns  into  verbs,  the  form  and 
position  of  the  direct  object  with  respect  to 
the  verb  resembles  American  "incorpor- 
ation,** use  of  several  classes  of  cardinal 
numbers  (for  human  beings,  animals, 
trees,  etc. ) . 

Vollers  ( K. )  Die  solare  Seite  des  alttes- 
tamentlichen  Gottesbegriffes.  (A.  f. 
Religsw.,  Lpzg.,  1906,  ix,  176-184.) 
Treats  of  the  linguistic  and  other  evi- 
dence (Kebh6dh  Jahwae,  etc.)  of  solar 
elements  in  the  Old  Testament  idea  of 
God. 

Wada  (T. )  Die  Schmuck-  und  Edelsteine 
bei  den  Chinesen.  (Mitt.  d.  Deutsche 
Ges.  f.  Natur-  u.  Volkerk.  Ostasiens, 
Tokio,  1905,  X,  1-16,  6  pi.)  Treats  of 
the  use  of  stone  jewels  and  ornaments  by 
the  Chinese,  their  history,  introduction 
into  the  country,  manufacture,  symbolism, 
etc.  —  particularly  the  famous  yu 
(nephrite,  jadeite,  etc.),  the  source  of 
which  has  been  Khotan.  Central  Asia 
is  also  the  source  of  many  other  jewels. 
The  author  errs  in  attributing  high  ap- 
preciation of  jade  to  the  Chinese  alone, 
and  in  positing  a  mass-influence  for  over 
2,000  years  of  Malays  in  s.  E.  China. 

Wehrll  (H.  J.)  Beitrag  zur  Ethnologic 
der  Chingpaw  (Kachin)  von  Ober-Bur- 
ma.  (Intern.  A.  f.  Ethnogr.,  Leiden, 
1904-5,  XVI,   Suppl.,   xvi,   1-83,  5  pi.. 


map. )  Ethnological  sketch  of  the 
Kachin  of  upper  Burma,  based  on  in- 
vestigations made  in  1897  ^"^  ^^  litera- 
ature  (bibliogr.  59  titles)  of  the  subject. 
Name,  relations  with  Europeans,  history 
and  prehistory,  origin- legends,  tribal  di- 
visions, physical  characters  (great  varia- 
tion) endowment  and  capacity,  family- 
organization,  relationship  names,  political 
organization  (bachelor's  house,  slaves, 
law,  war,  etc. ),  material  culture  (hab- 
itations, clothing,  food,  industries,  trade), 
intellectual  culture  (religious  ideas,  nnt- 
cult,  mythology  and  legends,  spirit-lore, 
shamans  and  spirit-sacrifices,  shamans  as 
doctors  and  prophets),  customs  and 
usages  (birth  and  name- giving,  weddings, 
death  and  burial,  bonds  and  oaths), 
*< science"  and  other  knowledge  (knot- 
ted cords,  numeral-system,  time-reckon- 
ing, etc. ).  The  Kachin  are  a  people  in 
many  respects  primitive,  in  others  clearly 
showing  influence  of  higher  races  (cul- 
turally). 

INDONESIA,    AUSTRALASIA, 
POLYNESIA 

Beobachtungen  der  Danielsschen  Expedi- 
tion nach  Britisch-Neuguinea.  (Globus, 
Bmschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  302-303.) 
Contains  a  few  notes  on  the  native  tribes, 
from  the  account  of  the  Daniels  expedi- 
tion in  the  Geographical  Journal  for 
March  and  April,  1906. 

Bllder  von  der  Gazelle-Halbinsel.  (Ibid., 
200-205,  5  fgs. )  Contains  some  notes 
on  the  natives.  The  illustrations  repre- 
sent some  Baining  criminals,  a  scaffold 
in  honor  of  the  dead  in  Matupi,  a  trade- 
canoe,  a  death  memorial  hut. 

Cheyalier  (H.)  Les  charrues  des  Indes 
n6erlandaises.  (Intern.  A.  f.  Ethnogr., 
Leiden,  1905,  xvii,  188-193,  2  pi.) 
Describes  briefly  the  native  plows  used 
in  Java,  Sumatra,  Bali,  Celebes,  the 
Philippines,  of  which  specimens  exist  in 
the  Hamburg  Ethnographic  Museum, 
the  museums  of  Leiden,  Amsterdam, 
Trocadero  (Paris),  etc.  One  of  the 
Javan  plows  is  very  simple  ;  three  sorts 
(Batak,  Toba,  Bencoolen)  occur  in  Su- 
matra ;  the  Bali  plough  is  of  clever  con- 
struction ;  the  Macassar  plow  resem- 
bles the  Bali,  but  is  simpler. 

Fischer  (H.  \V. )  Een  houten  klopper 
om  boombast  te  bewerken  van  het 
eiland  Nias.  (Ibid.,  222,  i  fg.)  Brief 
note  on  a  wooden  beater  for  working 
bark,  from  the  island  of  Nias. 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL   LITERATURE 


725 


OnMMiliJUl  (J.)  Het  njirami  of  de  jaar- 
lijksche  reiniging  van  de  erfwapens  en 
andere  poes&k&'s in  Midden- Java.  ( Ibid. , 
81-90.)  Describes  the  njirami  or 
yearly  cleansing  of  hereditary  weapons 
and  other  heirlooms  in  central  Java. 

Tan  HOerell  (G.  W.  W.  C. )  Het  paard 
in  de  Gorontalosche  landschappen. 
(Ibid.,  177-182,  I  pi.)  Treats  of  the 
horse  (use,  accouterments,  etc.)  among 
the  natives  of  the  Garontalo  country  in 
Celebes,  where  the  author  resided  1885- 
189 1.  In  the  toeti  or  legendary  histories 
of  the  Gorontalo  tribes,  the  horse,  called 
now  wadalot  is  not  spoken  of.  Horse- 
eating  is  common  in  several  parts  of 
Celebes. 

■  Zittend    Ravana-beeld    op  gevleu- 

gelde  Raksasa.  (Ibid.,  221,  I  fg. )  Note 
on  a  Balinese  figure  of  Havana  sitting  on 
the  back  of  a  winged  Raksasa. 

Der       Kris     von      SUd-Celebes. 

(Ibid*,  1906,  XVIII,  64-67,  7  fgs.)  De- 
scribes the  South  Celebean  kris  (in 
Macassar  sela)^  which  in  the  handle, 
sheath,  carrying,  etc.,  differs  from  the 
forms  in  use  in  Java  and  other  parts  of 
the  East  Indian  archipelago.  Von  H. 
sees  in  the  handle  of  the  South  Celebean 
kris,  not  a  modified  Garuda  form,  but  a 
stylized  dog- penis,  a  relic  of  the  cult  of 
ancestors.  This  is  reasonable,  since  up 
to  the  present  no  Hindu  sculptures, 
tjandisy  or  other  antiquities  have  been 
discovered  in  Celebes. 

Mailer  (J.  W. )  De  Manpurengkk-feesten 
in  de  Minahassa.  (Ibid.,  1905,  xvii, 
222-224. )  Describes,  with  text  of  ac- 
companying songs  and  free  Malay  ren- 
dering, the  manpurengke  festivals  of  the 
Ajermadidi  of  Minahassa,  Celebes,  as 
seen  by  the  author.  They  are  night- 
feasts  held  to  celebrate  any  interesting 
incident  in  a  family. 

Parkinson  (R.)  Baumrindenkleidung  in 
Deutsch  Neu-Guinea.  (Ibid.,  222. ) 
Reply  to  observation  of  P.  Schmidt  re- 
garding information  received  from  mis- 
sionary, duly  acknowledged  by  P. 

SduneltZ  (J.  D.  E.)  Beitrage  zur  Eth- 
nographie  von  Neu-Guinea.  X.  Die 
St&mme  in  der  Nachbarschaft  des  Me- 
rauke-Flusses.  (Ibid.,  194-219,  6  pi., 
18  fgs.)  Treats  of  the  Tugeri  tribes 
about  the  Merauke  river  in  New  Guinea. 
Food  and  narcotics  and  objects  used  in 
connection  therewith  (no  pottery  ;  co- 
coanut  water-holders),  clothing  and 
ornament  (hair,  ear,  nose,  breast,  arm, 
hip,    pudenda),   houses   and    furniture, 


hunting  and  fishing,  transportation 
(baskets,  dug-outs),  weapons  (clubs, 
bow-and -arrow),  signs  of  peace,  etc., 
music,  dance  and  accompaniments 
C dance-clubs,"  wooden  figures  of  ani- 
mals), burial.  Based  on  the  De  Jong 
collection  in  the  Leiden  Museum. 

XI.    Zwei  Gegenst&nde  von  Niederl. 


Nord  Neu-Guinea.  (Ibid.,  219-220,  2 
fgs. )  Notes  on  an  ornamented  palm- 
wood  bow  and  a  carving  of  a  human 
bust-figure  in  brown  hard  wood. 

Schmidt  (P.  W.)  Die  Mon-Khmer- 
Volker,  ein  Bindeglied  zwischen  V5l- 
kem  Zentralasiens  und  Austronesiens. 
(A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Brnschwg.,  1906,  N.  F., 
V,  59-109,  3  fgs.)  Argues  that  the 
Mon-Khmer  peoples  of  Farther  India 
are  a  link  between  the  peoples  of  Central 
Asia,  such  as  the  Indian  Munda,  Khasi, 
etc.,  with  whom  go  also  the  Nicobar, 
Semang,  Senoi — and  the  **  Austrone- 
sian"  (used  by  S.  for  **  Malayo- Poly- 
nesian) peoples  of  the  Pacific.  The 
whole  group  S.  designates  ** Austral'* 
(Austrisch)  with  **  Austroasiatic"  and 
**  Austronesian  "  branches.  Pages  82- 
109  are  occupied  with  the  demonstration 
of  grammatical,  morphological,  and  lexi- 
cal afHnities  between  Nicobar-Mon- 
Khmer  and  Khasi,  Santal  and  Mon- 
Khmer- Khasi -Nicobar,  and  the  **Aus- 
tronesian"  and  **  Austroasiatic  "  lan- 
guages generally. 

Schwarz  (J.  A.  T.^  Ethnographica  uit 
de  Minahassa.  (Intern.  A.  f.  Eth- 
nogr.,  Leiden,  1906,  xviii,  44-63,  3 
pi. ,  9  fgs. )  Treats  of  the  watu  pini- 
wctengaHy  or  **  stone  where  the  division 
took  place,"  six  photographs  in  which 
figure  old  Minahassa  clothing,  etc.,  the 
weaving  of  wa'u  and  lanut,  five  old 
Minahassa  sinikd'dafiy  or  priestly  staves. 

Sierich  (O. )  Samoanische  M&rchen. 
(Ibid.,  1905,  XVII,  182-188.)  Nos. 
xxiii-xxvii  of  Samoan  mSrchen, — 
native  text  and  German  version.  Also 
native  texts  of  four  brief  children's 
songs. 

Thomas  (N.  W. )  The  religious  ideas  of 
the  Arunta.  (Folk-I^re,  Lond.,  1906,. 
XVI,  428-433. )  Discusses  the  religious 
ideas  of  the  Australian  Arunta  as  set 
forth  in  Spencer  and  Gillen's  recent 
work  and  cites  information  recently  re- 
ceived by  the  author  from  M.  Strethlow,. 
a  German  missionary  at  Ilermannsburg, 
who  is  **a  master  of  their  language." 
T.  finds  no  support  for  the  theory  that 
these  ideas  of  the  Arunta  are  the  product 


726 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  s.,  8,  i< 


of  Giristian  influence,  and  it  is  not 
proved  that  they  are  derived  from 
neighboring  tribes.  They  are  possibly 
in  process  of  evolution  by  a  portion  of 
the  tribe  as  a  substitute  for  a  primitive 
atheism. 
Volz  (W.)  BeitrSLge  zur  Anthropologic 
and  Ethnographic  von  Indoncsien.  II. 
Zur  Kenntnis  der  Mcntawci-Inseln. 
(A.  f.  Anthrop.y  Broschwg.,  1906,  N.  F., 
I^»  93-109,  3  pi.,  14  f . )  Based  on  a 
visit  to  the  Mentawei  islands,  ofT  Su- 
matra, in  1900.  Treats  of  physical 
characters  ( measurements  of  19  men  and 
6  women),  tattooing  (7  parts  of  body  in 
men,  3  in  women ;  V.  considers  tattoo- 
ing not  <*  clothing,"  but  outlining  of  the 
anatomical  parts  of  the  body, —  *'  inter- 
pretations ' '  are  later  and  often  mis- 
taken), artificial  deformations  (filing 
teeth,  depilation  of  body),  clothing 
(European  dress  is  becoming  more  and 
more  common  with  the  women),  cocoa- 
nut  protectors  of  three  sorts.  The 
Mentawei  islanders  seem  to  be  homoge- 
neous, mesocephalic,  Mongoloid  people, 
closely  resembling  the  Bomean  Dyaks 
physically,  as  well  as  in  the  use  of  tattoo- 
ing, etc.  V.  speaks  unfavorably  of 
Maas's  recent  work  on  these  people, 
Bei  liebenswurdigen  Wilden  (Beilin, 
1902). 

AMERICA 

Anf&nge  der  Kunstim  Urwald.  (Globus, 
Brnschwg.,  1906,  Lxxxix,  105-108, 
2  fgs. )  R6sum6s  Dr  Theodor  Koch- 
Griinberg's  Anfdnge  der  Kunst  im 
Urwald  {V>tx\\T\y  1906,  pp.  xv,  70;  63 
pi.),  which  contains  numerous  drawings 
made  by  the  Indians  of  the  upper  Negro- 
Yapura  region  in  Brazil.  (See  Afturi- 
can  Anthropologist^  1 906,  vill,  581. ) 

Bandolier  ( A.  F. )  Ueber  Trepanieren 
unter  den  heutigen  Indianern  Bolivias, 
(Intern.  Amerik.-Kongr.  Stuttgart, 
1904,  1906,  XIV,  81-89. )  This  article 
is  identical  in  content  with  the  author's 
paper  *•  Aboriginal  Trephining  in  Bo- 
livia," published  in  the  American  An- 
thropologist, 1904,  VI,  440-446. 

Bloch  (1.)  Der  Ursprung  der  Syphilis, 
Morbus  Americanus.  (Ibid.,  57-79-) 
Brings  together  old  and  new  evidence, 
historical,  osteological,  etc.,  to  show  the 
American  origin  of  syphilis,  which  Dr 
B.  thinks  is  now  scientifically  proved. 
Numerous  authorities  are  cited.  See 
also  a  later  volume  on  the  same  topic  by 
Dr  Bloch,   and  compare    Bourne,    Col- 


umbus, Ramon  Pane,  etc.    (Am.  Ant 
Soc.,  1906). 

Boas  ( F. )  Physical  types  of  the  Indii 
of  Canada.  (Ann.  Arch.  Rep.  Q 
1905,  Toronto,  1906,  84-S8.)  Brie 
descril)csthe  Eskimo,  North  Paci6ccoa 
western  plateau  and  Mississippi  vail 
types,  of  which  the  second  is  remarkal 
variable.  The  New  England  type 
intermediate  (skull-diameters)  betwe 
the  Eskimo  and  the  Mississippi  vail 
types.  A  distinct  type  may  also  ex 
on  the  southern  part  of  the  Pacific  coa 
The  Indians  of  the  southern  interior 
British  Columbia  resemble  rather  tho 
of  the  plains.  The  Aleutians  differ  fire 
the  Alaskan  Eskimo  in  skull-type.  A 
cording  to  Dr  B.,  **  we  must  consid 
the  inhabitants  of  N.  E.  Asia  and 
America  as  a  unit  divided  into  a  gre 
many  distinct  typws,  but  belonging 
one  and  the  same  of  the  large  divisioi 
of  mankind." 

The   Indian  languages  of  Cat^i^a. 

(Ibid.,  88-106.)  Sketches  the  cbi 
grammatical  and  morphological  chara 
ters  of  the  Eskimoan,  Athapascai 
Algonquian,  Iroquoian,  Kitunahan  ( Ko 
tenay),  Salishan,  Wakashan,  Tsimshiai 
and  Haidan  languages.  Dr  B.  hole 
that  a  generalized  view  of  the  type  < 
American  languages  {e,  r,,  as  all  *<i] 
corporating,"  **polysynthetic,**  etc.) 
not  admissible,  "a  great  variety  of  forms 
actually  occurring. 

The     Eskimo.      (Ibid.,     107-116. 


Treats  briefly  environmental  condition 
occupations  (very  uniform),  inventior 
(remarkably  ingenious),  hunting  an 
fishing,  habitations,  lamp  (most  impoi 
tant  of  household  belongings),  implc 
ments  and  instruments,  dogs  and  sled 
clothing,  decorative  art  ( not  remarkabl 
developed,  on  the  whole  —  foreign  in 
fluences  noticeable),  social  organizatio 
(very  simple),  marriage  (both  polygam 
and  polyandry  occur),  religious  ideas  an< 
practices  (shamanism,  taboos,  witchcraft 
slight  ritualistic  development,  mytho 
logic  concepts  meager  and  unsystematic 
few  creation  legends,  folk-lore  rich 
essentially  human  and  dealing  chief!; 
with  exploits  of  heroes,  deeds  of  shamans 
village-events),  etc.  The  Eskimo  havi 
been  influenced  by  the  Indians  and  havi 
influenced  the  N.  E.  Siberian  f>eoples. 
—  The  Salish  tribes  of  the  interior  0 
British  Columbia.  (Ibid.,  219-225. 
Treats  briefly  habitat,  occupations  (hunt 
ing  and   fishing),    clothing,   habitation 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 


727 


(pennanent  house  is  semi-subterranean 
lodge),  ornamentation,  weapons,  games, 
decorative  art  (slightly  developed), 
painting  (crude),  social  organization 
(very  loose),  potlatch  (copied  fix>m  coast 
tribes  by  those  of  more  western  plateau), 
burial,  religious  concepts  and  practices 
(religious  ideas  simpler  than  those  of 
coast  Indians,  puberty  ceremonials 
quite  complex),  spirit-lore,  mythology 
(coyote  is  central  figure  ;  thunder-bird  ; 
transformer- tales).  Previous  Salish  cul- 
ture was  even  simpler  than  the  present. 
Influence  of  coast  Indians  and  Plains 
tribes  has  occurred.  The  more  com- 
plex social  and  religious  elements  on  the 
plateaus  are  of  foreign  origin. 

—  The  tribes  of  the  North  Pacific  coast 
(Ibid.,  235-249.)  Discusses  briefly 
economic  conditions  and  industries,  habi- 
tations, furniture  and  utensils,  weapons, 
food,  decorative  art  (**  practically  all 
objects  utilized  are  elaborately  decorated ; 
animal  motives  almost  entirely'*),  social 
organization  ( very  complex  with  remark- 
able diflierences  among  various  tribes ; 
great  influence  of  Tlingit  and  Haida 
group  S3rstem  on  their  immediate  neigh- 
bors ;  influence  of  crests  on  development 
of  semi-realistic  art,  religious  significance 
of  crest),  barter  and  exchange,  **  pot- 
latch'*  and  symbolic  property,  super- 
natural beings,  secret  societies  and  their 
rituals,  dances,  etc.,  pantomimic  per- 
formances of  family  legends,  mytholog- 
ical concepts  ( cluster  about  raven),  cos- 
mogonic  ideas  and  traditions,  etc.,  of  the 
Tlingit,  Haida,  Tsimshian,  KwakiutI, 
Bellacoola,  Coast-Salish  and  Nootka 
tribes.  In  the  southern  group  the  char- 
acteristic features  of  North  Pacific  coast 
culture  are  weakest. 

Bolle  (C.)  Farbige  Arbeiter  und  Land- 
wirte.  ( Globus,  Bmschwg.,  1906, 
LXXXix,  253-256.)  Treats  of  the  col- 
ored laborers  and  their  relation  to  their 
employers  and  to  the  economic  system  of 
the  country  (particularly  in  Brazil,  where 
the  author  has  spent  most  of  his  life). 
B.  concludes  that  a  benevolent  and  sym- 
pathetic patriarchal  system  would  best 
suit  laborers  and  planters.  But  peoples 
must  not  be  ruled  by  laws  antagonizing 
their  nature,  traditions,  etc. 

Boyle  (D*)  Notes  on  some  specimens. 
(Ann.  Arch.  Rep.  Ont.  1905,  Toronto, 
1906,  10-33,  41  fgs.)  Treats  of  flints, 
including  <*the  most  northerly  Ontario 
aboriginal  relic  in  the  Museum"  (a 
"  fish-cleaner"  from  I^ke  Temagami)  ; 


clay  and  stone  pipes,  clay  pots  (a  large 
perfect  specimen  and  a  toy  one)  ;  curved 
copper  tool  from  Simcoe  county  ;  Sioux 
pictograph  on  buflalohide  and  Blood  In- 
dian drawing  on  rawhide. 
—  The  making  of  a  Cayuga  chief. 
(Ibid.,  56-59.)  Note  on  chief-making 
among  the  Cayugas  of  Tuscarora  town- 
ship in  May,  1905,  with  reprint  of  Hale's 
description  from  the  Iroquois  Book  of 
Rites.  Also  note  on  adoption  (Dr  B. 
was  adopted  in  1892).  The  chief- 
making  was  disappointing,  <*  after  read- 
ing the  highly,  but  probably  not  too 
highly  colored  description  [of  Hale]." 
European    contact   and    the   intro. 


duction  of  disease  among  the  Indians- 
(Ibid.,  59-65.)  Chiefly  a  defence  of 
John  McLean,  one  of  the  pioneers  of  the 
N.  W.,  as  to  his  "religious  character." 
The   Iroquois.     (Ibid.,    146-158.) 


Treats  chiefly  of  the  **priscan  home" 
of  the  Iroquois,  legends  and  theories  re- 
lating thereto  —  Cusick  in  particular. 
Dr  B.  favors  a  southern  origin  (Ken- 
tucky and  southern  Ohio)  for  the  Iro- 
quois ;  also  thinks  that  the  enmity  of  the 
Micmacs  and  the  Iroquois  was  a  chief 
cause  of  the  northern  migration  of  both. 

Chamberlain  (A.  F.)  The  Beothuks  of 
Newfoundland.  (Ibid.,  1 17-122. )  An- 
thropological and  ethnological-historical 
sketch,  r^sum^ing  our  knowledge  of  these 
extinct  Indians,  whose  language  forms  a 
distinct  stock. 

Indians  of  the  eastern  provinces  of 

Canada.  (Ibid.,  122-136.)  Anthro- 
pological and  ethnological  account  of 
the  Micmac  and  closely  related  tribes, 
Montagnais,  Naskapi,  etc.  R^sum^s 
present  knowledge. 

The  Kootenay  Indians.   (Ibid.,  178- 


187. )  Anthropological  and  ethnological 
sketch  r^sum^ing  present  knowledge  of 
these  Indians  whose  language  forms  a 
distinct  stock.     See  also  p.  97. 

Cringan  (A.  T. )  Indian  music.  (Ibid., 
1 58-161. )  Based  on  analysis  of  numer- 
ous Iroquois  songs,  which  reveals  **many 
striking  peculiarities  of  rhythm  and  ton- 
ality." Indian  music  is  decidedly  un- 
conventional ;  the  rhythm  is  often  exceed- 
ingly complicated.  The  earlier  Indian 
melodies  seem  to  have  developed  from  a 
simple  combination  of  the  first,  third,  and 
fifth  tones  of  the  scale. 

FiiCher  (J.)  Die  Kartographische  Dar- 
stellung  der  Entdeckungen  der  Norman- 
nen  in  Amerika.  (Intern.  Amerik.- 
Kongr.      Stuttgart,    1904,     1 906,    XI  v, 


1  m 


I 


728 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  190^ 


31-39* )  Discusses  the  types  of  maps  of 
Greenland,  going  back  to  Claudius  Clav- 
ius  ( who  had  been  in  that  country  him- 
self) and  to  Donnus  Nikolaus  Germanus. 
Of  the  first  or  "correct**  type  6  large 
and  7  small  MS.  maps  are  known.  Dr 
F.  still  doubts  Columbus*  direct  knowl- 
edge of  Norse  discoveries. 

Fraaa  (E. )  Vergleichung  der  amerikan- 
ischen  und  europ&ischen  Juraformation. 
(Ibid.,  41-45.)  Compares  the  Ameri- 
can and  European  Jura  formations.  In 
the  Jura  period  when  all  Europe  was  an 
archipelago  in  a  great  ocean  America 
was  already  a  great  continent. 

Fric  (V.)  Eine  Pilcomayo-Reise  in  den 
Chaco  Central.  (Globus,  Bmschwg., 
1906,  Lxxxix,  213-220,  229-234,  15 
fgs.,  map.)  Gives  results  of  journey  on 
the  Pilcomayo  in  the  central  Chaco  in 
1 903- 1 904.  Notes  on  the  Pilagi  (mar- 
riage presents  and  ornamental  motifs 
hunting  wasp  honey,  the  pacund  or 
widows'  duel,  prayer  to  the  new  moon, 
clothing  and  ornament,  fire-making,  in- 
toxicants, character,  family  life,  war, 
etc  ^    1*oba«  etc 

0«rard'(  W.  R. )  The  "  Virginia  * '  pototo. 
(Scientif.  Amer.,  N.  Y.,  1906,  xcv, 
187. )  Interesting  account  of  the  various 
names  of  the  potatoes  (sweet  and  com- 
mon) and  of  the  other  tuberous  plants 
with  which  they  were  confused  by  the 
early  colonists,  explorers,  and  writers. 
In  particular  the  native  names  of  six 
subterranean  vegetable  products  used  as 
food  by  the  Renape  Indians  of  Roanoke 
island  are  etymologized.  The  p>otato 
was  not  introduced  from  Virginia  into 
Ireland,  as  is  commonly  believed,  but  the 
specimens  that  reached  the  latter  were 
taken  from  the  cargo  of  a  captured  Spanish 
vessel  home-bound  from  Santo  Domingo. 

Giuffrida-Ruggeri  (V.)  Un  cranio  Gua- 
yachi,  un  cranio  (incompleto)  Ciamacoco 
e  un  cranio  Fuegino.  (A.  d.  Soc. 
Rom.  di  Antrop.,  1906,  Xli,  235-254,  2 
pi. )  Describes,  with  measurements,  a 
Guayaki  (female)  and  an  imperfect 
Samuco  (male)  skull,  both  collected  by 
Boggiano  (indices  77  and  76.2)  ;  also  a 
male  Fuegian  skull  (index  84.9)  col- 
lected by  the  Salesian  missionary  Bou- 
vaire.  Dr  G.-R.  seems  to  recognize  in 
the  Fuegians,  Pampeans,  etc.,  a  South 
American  type  (mesocephalic  in  primi- 
tive form)  with  •*  pre-Mongolian  "  aftini- 
ties. 

Quattroscheletridi  Indiani  Cavinas, 

Sud-Araerica   Centrale.       (Ibid.,     259- 


277.)  Describes,  with  measurements,  foil] 
skeletons  (3  females,  I  male)  of  th< 
Bolivian  tribe  of  Cavinas,  who  originall) 
inhabited  the  left  bank  of  the  river  Madrc 
de  Dios, —  collected  by  ProC  L.  Balzan. 
The  four  skulls  resemble  one  anothei 
much  and  <*  represent  a  pure  nucleus," 
from  the  craniometrical  point  of  view. 

Hamy  ( E.  T. )  Le  centenaire  du  retour 
en  Europe  d*  Alexandre  de  Humboldt  et 
d*Aimi  Goujaud  de  Bonpland,  3  aoAt 
1804.  (Intern.  Amer.-Kongr.,  Stutt- 
gart, 1904,  1906,  XIV,  xxxv-xlvii.) 
Gives  an  account  of  Humboldt  and  Bon- 
pland and  their  scientific  investigations 
in  America. 

Hill-Tout  (C. )  The  Salish  tribes  of  the 
coast  and  lower  Fraser  delta.  (Ann. 
Arch.  Rep.  Ont.  1905,  Toronto,  1906, 
225-235. )  Treats  of  social  organization 
and  customs  (classes  and  castes,  name- 
giving,  marriage),  religious  beliefs  and 
practices  (totem-crests,  belief  in  protect- 
ing spirits  the  chief  feature  of  Salish 
religion,  guardian  spirits  acquired  by 
dreams  and  visions,  religious  ideas  not 
ethical  or  moral,  no  idea  of  Supreme 
Being,  spirit-lore),  material  culture 
(habitations,  food,  dress,  etc. ). 

Jones  (W.)  Central  Algonkin.  (Ibid., 
136-146.)  Treats  of  the  social,  ma- 
terial and  religious  life  of  the  Ojibwa  in 
their  larger  aspects  ;  society,  government 
(loose  even  at  the  first  advent  of  the 
French),  property  (rights  vaguely  de- 
fined), dwellings  (bark  house  and  oval 
lodge),  food  (mostly  cooked  ;  they  were 
**  a  typical  people  of  the  woods  *' ),  fire 
(bow-drill,  flint  and  tinder),  clothing, 
weaving  (heddle-loom),  transportation 
( **  packing  "  with  tump-line,  toboggan, 
snow-shoe,  canoe),  games  (original  of 
lacrosse,  woman's  ball,  throwing-stick, 
dolls,  etc.),  weapons  (bow-and-arrow, 
clubs),  picture  writing  on  birch-bark, 
religion  (**  firm-belief  in  omnipresent 
cosmic  mystery*,"  mythology  rich  in 
characters,  the  **  great  one  **  was  Nana- 
bozho)  and  religious  practices  (healing 
sick,  sleight  of  hand,  power  of  prophecy, 
miiitu'iii'in).  On  the  theory  of  getting 
possession  of  the  soul  the  Ojibwa  hunted 
for  game. 

Kapff  (E.)  Anteil  der  WUrttembergei 
an  der  Kolonisation  Amerikas.  ( Intem. 
Araerik.-Kongr.  Stuttgart,  1904,  1906, 
XIV,  xlviii-lvii. )  Treats  of  the  share  ol 
Wurttembergers  in  the  settlement  ol 
America  —  Ehinger  and  Rentz  in  Santc 


chamberlain] 


PERIODICAL    LITERATURE 


729 


Domingo,  Ehinger  and  Sailer  in  north- 
ern S.  America  (1528)  ;  the  mass-immi- 
gration of  1709  in  New  York,  Pennsyl- 
vania, and  the  Carolinas,  and  the 
subsequent  one  of  171 7.  The  Suabian 
communities  founded  by  Rapp,  etc.,  are 
also  referred  to.  Leutzer,  who  painted 
"  Washington  crossing  the  Delaware," 
was  a  Suabian. 

Koeh-Orfinberg  (T.)  Die  Maskent^ze 
der  Indianer  des  oberen  Rio  Negro  und 
Yapuri.  (A.  f.  Anthrop.,  Bmschwg., 
1906,  N.  F.,  IV,  293-298,  5  fgs.)  Brief 
descriptions  of  the  mask-dances  ( butter- 
fly, wood-spirits,  jaguar)  of  the  Kob^ua 
Indians  of  the  upper  Rio  Negro  and 
Yapuri.  The  butterfly,  taldlako^  is  one 
of  the  most  dangerous  spirits;  likewise 
the  spiker,  nii^koy  and  a  leaf-insect, 
budyauobo.  Feared  also  are  the  anthro- 
pomorphic wood-demons  Makuko  and 
Kohdkd  and  their  wives.  The  text  of 
the  jaguar-song  is  given.  Dr  K.  thinks 
the  object  of  these  mask-dances  is  to 
drive  away  spirits  and  to  produce  fer- 
tility. While  among  the  Indians  of  this 
region,  1 903- 1905,  he  obtained  some 
130  masks,  of  which  80  are  different, 
Indicating  the  large  number  of  demons 
represented  in  these  ceremonies. 

"—  Die  Indianerst&mme  am  oberen 
Rio  Negro  und  Yapurd,  und  ihre  sprach- 
liche  Zugehdrigkeit.  (Z.  f.  Ethnol., 
Berlin,  1906,  xxxviii,  166-205,  i  pi., 
'5  %S'>  map-)  Describes  briefly  the 
Indian  tribes  which  the  author  has  him- 
self visited  or  from  which  he  has  col- 
lected linguistic  material.  The  peoples 
concerned  belong  to  at  least  6  distinct 
stocks :  Arawakan  ( Bar6,  Baniva, 
Uarekena,  Yaviteros,  Tariana,  and 
numerous  other  tribes)  ;  Betoyan  (Tu- 
cano,  Uanana  or  K6titia,  Kob^ua  or 
Hfth&naua,  Koroa,  Makuna,  P^puli- 
hfth&naua,  U^is5nd!,  Uaiana,  M5xd^, 
Pamo4,  etc.)  ;  Makuan  (numerous  tribes 
wandering  between  the  Caiary  and  its 
tributaries  and  between  the  Rio  Negro 
and  the  Yapura  —  a  new  linguistic 
stock)  ;  Cariban  (Um^ua,  Hianukata, 
Carijona,  and  others)  ;  Miranhan  (tribes 
centering  on  the  Rio  Cauiuary  and  west- 
ward between  the  Yapura  and  the  I(;a)  ; 
and  Uitolan  (neighbors  of  the  Miranhan, 
numerous  tribes  between  the  upper 
Yapurd  and  Iga,  particularly  on  the  Rio 
Carapani  and  the  Igaraparana  —  an- 
other new  linguistic  stock ) .  Pages  1 90- 
203  are  devoted  to  language,  brief  vo- 
cabularies of  8  Arawakan,  1 1  Betoyan, 


I  Cariban,  3  Makuan,  and  2  Miranhan 
dialects  being  given. 

Mercante  (V.)  Investigaciones  cranio- 
mitricas  en  las  escuelas  nacionales  de  La 
Plata.  (Arch,  de  Pedag.  y  Ciencas 
afines.  La  Plata,  1906,  I,  41-79.) 
Gives  three  measurements  (ant. -post, 
max.  transv.,  bizygom. )  of  652  male  and 
549  female  pupils  between  the  ages  of  6 
and  20  years  in  the  Normal  School,  Col- 
egio  Nacional  and  Escuela  Graduada 
Anexa,  representing  descendants  of  the 
numerous  nationalities  now  present  in 
Argentina.  The  variation  in  the  ex- 
tremes of  the  cephalic  index  is  great,  but 
the  general  type  is  brachycephalic,  the 
proportion  of  dolichocephalic  being  very 
small.  The  girls  are  more  brachy- 
cephalic. 

Meyer  (H. )  Die  Vorzeit  des  Menschen 
im  tquatorialen  Andengebiet.  ( Intern. 
Amerik.-Kongr.  Stuttgart,  1904,  1906, 
XIV,  47-56. )  In  the  Andean  highlands 
no  traces  of  diluvial  man  have  yet  been 
found,  the  oldest  human  relics  in  the 
equatorial  region  here  indicating  a  more 
advanced  culture  than  that  of  Pampean 
man  (associated  with  the  remains  of  ex- 
tinct mammals).  These  relics  the  au- 
thor attributes  to  *'the  Quitu,  who  in- 
habited this  plateau  before  the  Cara  and 
the  Inca."  Man  took  possession  of  these 
regions  in  the  beginning  of  the  present 
post-glacial  period. 

Nielsen  ( Y. )  Die  illtesten  Verbindungen 
zwischen  Norwegen  und  Amerika. 
(Ibid.,  91-99.)  Discusses  the  Norse 
voyages  to  America  and  the  contact  of 
the  explorers  with  the  aborigines  and  the 
references  to  the  latter  in  the  old  text. 
Dr  N.  believes  that  **in  the  eleventh 
century  the  coasts  of  Nova  Scotia  were 
inhabited  by  Eskimo"  ;  also  that  the 
voyage  of  King  Harold  Haardraade  was 
to  Vinland,  not  to  Greenland.  The 
people  of  Markland,  Vinland,  Green- 
land, were  all  Eskimo,  but  in  Nova  Sco- 
tia, etc.,  Indian  tribes  may  have  been 
their  close  neighbors. 

OUhausen  (  —  )  Ueber  Wurfspeere  von 
einem  der  Indianersttmme  am  Ucayali, 
(Z.  f.  Ethnol.,  Berlin,  1906,  xxxviii, 
229-231.)  Treats  of  seven  throwing- 
spears  from  Indian  tribes  on  the  Yu- 
cayali  and  now  in  the  Royal  Ethno- 
logical Museum.  They  resemble  the 
spears  brought  from  the  Yapur&  by  Dr 
Koch,  and  their  points  are  brown  from 
urali  poison. 

PreuM  (K.  T.)     Religionen  der  Natur. 


I    ■ 


730 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  19 


TOlker.    Amerika.       (A.    f.    Religsw., 
Lpzg.,   1906,  IX,   1 14-142. )     Risumis 
reviews  of  recent  books  and  monographs 
on   the   religion   and  mythology  of  the 
Indians  of  North,  Central,  and  South 
America,  by  Hill-Tout  (Siciatl),  God- 
dard(Hupa),  Dixon  (Maidu),  Kroeber 
(California  culture-types),  Owens  (Mus- 
quakie  :  Sauk  and  Fox),  Kroeber  (Ara- 
paho  social  organization),  Dorsey  (Ara- 
paho    sun  dance),    Fletcher     (Pawnee 
Hako  ceremony),  Voth  (Oraibi   Oiq5l 
ceremony),    Fewkes   (Hopi    Katcinas), 
Seler    (Mexican    codex,  representations 
of  sacrifices  on  monuments,  etc. ),  Ehren- 
reich    (primitive    myths   of    America), 
Bandelier   (Titicaca    myths   and    tradi- 
tions). 
Rage    (W. )      Bin   Globus    von    Gemma 
Frisius.         (Intern.        Amerik.-Kongr. 
Stuttgart,  1904,  1906,  XIV,  3-10.)    De- 
scribeis  a  globe  by  Gemma  Frisius  (r<z. 
1550 ),  the   South   American   names  on 
which  are  of  particular  interest,  belong- 
ing with  those  on  the  Mercator  map  of 
1 54 1,  and  of  the  mapf>emonde  of  Vopell. 
Sapper  ( K. )     Der  Einfluss  des  Menschen 
auf   die    Gestaltung   des    mexikanisch- 
mittelamerikanischen     Landschaftbildes. 
(Globus,    Brnschwg.,     1906,    Lxxxix, 
149-152.)     The  earliest  advent  of  man 
in  this  region  is  post-diluvial.     The  land 
was  populated   partly   from  the   north, 
partly  from  the  south  —  the  old  **  civ- 
ilized "  i>eoples  (Aztecs,   Mayas)  being 
of  northern  origin.     Much  change  in  the 
aspect  of  the  country  was  due  to  the  pur- 
suit of  agriculture ;  but  great  alteration  oc- 
curred through  the  Spanish  conquest,  by 
disturbance  of  native  settlements  and  by 
the  introduction  of  domesticated  animals 
and   plants.     Increase   of  population  in 
the  nineteenth  century  and  the  inroads 
of  modern  culture  (industrial  and   eco- 
nomical in   particular)  have  also  made 
significant  changes. 
Solberg  ( O. )     Ueber  die  BiVhos  der  Hopi. 
(A.   f.   Anthrop.,   Hmschwg.,    1905,    N. 
s.,   IV,  48-74,   3  pi.,  14  fgs.)     Treats, 
on  basis  of  author's  observations  in  the 
winter  of  1903-4,  the  syml)olism  of  the 
hahos   of   the    Hopi    (Mocjui)    Indians, 
particularly    of     the     pueblos     of     Mi- 
shongnovi  and  vShipaulovi  (his  chief  in- 
formant   was  Sikydpiki,  the  old  Snake- 
chief    of   the    latter).      Material,    form, 
color,  etc.,  are  discussed.     S.   does   not 
agree  with  P'ewkes'  interpretation  of  the 
bahos  as  symbolic  corn-offerings,  etc. 
Stolpe    (H.)     Ueber   die    Forschungser- 


gebnisse   der    schwedischen    Gr5nlao 

Expedition  vom  Jahre    1899.      (Inter 

Amerik.-Kongr.   Stutt^rt,    1904,   190 

XIV,    101-105,   5   pl- )    R^sum^s  resui 

of  the  Swedish  inTestigations  of  1S99 

Eskimo    remains    (6    <*  stations"    we 

found,  the  one  at  Cape  Mary  on  Clave 

ing    island    contained    a    multitude 

graves  —  the    last    living    Eskimo    w 

seen  there  in  1823  and  the    disappea 

ance  of  the  tribe  is  unexplained )  on  tl 

N.   E.  coast  of  Greenland  between  7c 

and  75®  lat.     The  finds  include  grave 

ruins  of  winter  and  traces  of   sunmx 

dwellings,      lamps,     women's      knive 

wooden    shovels,     knives    of    iron    an 

bone,  kayak-scraf>ers,  tools  of  bone  an 

walrus  teeth,  harpoon  and  spear  point 

bows  and  arrows,  thro  wing-sticks,  Xo\ 

human    and     animal     figures,     etc.     . 

wooden  bowl  in  the  grave  of  a  girl  coi 

tained    dolls,    a    woman's    knife,     eti 

Most   interesting   of    all    perhaps    wei 

some  miniature  models  of  winter-hoftst 

made  by  children.     Dr  S.  believes  thi 

the  Eskimo  reached  N.  E.  Greenland  b 

the  same  northern  route   as  the  Arcti 

wolf  and  the  muskox. 

Thomas     (C.)     Historical     account     [< 

the  Indians  of  Canada].     (Ann.    Arcl 

Rep.    Ont.     1905,   Toronto,    1906,  71 

83.)     Historical   notes  on    the    India 

stocks  and  tribes  of  Canada,  particularl 

the  Algonquian  and   Iroquoian.     Dr  1 

believes  that  the  Indians  of  the  Atlanti 

section   came  from  the  northwest  —  th 

region  north  of    L.    Superior    was   on 

great  center  of  distribution.      Man  prot 

ably  first  appeared  in  North  America  o 

the  N.  W.  coast  in  the  p>ost-gIacial  ag< 

and  the  Eskimo  had  reached  Greenlan 

and  the  Algonquians  the  Atlantic  coast  b 

the  tenth  century  at  least. 

Varona    (E.    J.)      Cuba     precolumbini 

(Rev.  Fac.  l^etr.  y  Ci.,    Habana,  190^ 

II,  1 56- 1 6 1.)     Brief  general  discussioi 

with  references  to  Bachiller  y  Morale 

rather    chaotic     Cuba     Primitiva^    Co 

nilliac's  Anthropoloi^f  des  Antilles^  c 

Anna's  La  fdbula  df  los  CaribeSy  etc. 

Wolkenhauer  (A.)    War  die  magnetiscl 

Deklination  vor  Kolumbus   erster  Rei: 

nach    Amerika    tats^chlich    unbekannt 

( Intern.  Amerik.-Kongr.  Stuttgart,  19a 

1906,  XIV,  11-29.)     Discusses  views  ' 

Bertelli,  d'Avezacs,  Hellmann,  etc.     I 

\V.  seeks  to  prove  that  **the  compuiss 

of  Columbus  afford  palpable  proof  for 

knowledge  of  magnetic  declination,"  1 

d'Avezacs  maintained. 


ANTHROPOLOGIC   MISCELLANEA 

The  Archeological  Congress  at  Vannes.  —  The  second  congress  of 
the  Prehistoric  Society  of  France  was  held  August  21-26  in  the  capital 
of  the  Department  of  Morbihan,  the  classic  land  of  megalithic  monu- 
ments, at  any  rate  so  far  as  France  is  concerned.  The  attendance  ex- 
ceeded that  of  the  very  successful  first  congress  held  at  P^rigueux  last 
year.  Nature  (London,  October.  4,  1906)  gives  the  following  report 
of  the  congress : 

The  inaugural  meeting  at  10  a.  m.  on  Tuesday,  August  21,  was  graced 
by  the  presence  of  prominent  citizens.  Speeches  were  made  by  the  Mayor 
of  Vannes,  Senator  Riou,  Professor  Adrien  de  Mortillet,  president  of  the 
congress,  and  by  Dr  Marcel  Baudouin,  the  secretary,  who  insisted  on  the 
need  of  providing  a  special  building  to  house  the  rich  collections  of  the 
Soci^t^  polymathique,  and  on  the  desirability  of  creating  a  national 
Megalithic  park  comparable  to  the  Yellowstone  National  Park  of  the 
United  States.  The  president  of  the  local  committee,  M.  Morio,  wel- 
comed the  congress  in  the  name  of  the  Soci6t6  polymathique,  the  museum 
of  which  was  much  admired  by  the  parties  which  visited  it  in  the  after- 
noon. It  includes  collections  from  the  principal  tumuli  of  the  neighbor- 
hood, excavated  by  the  society  during  its  many  years  of  existence ;  there 
are,  for  example,  the  splendid  necklaces  of  callaTs  beads,  a  fine  series  of 
fibrolite  axes,  curious  stone  disks,  scarcely  found  outside  this  area,  and 
huge  polished  celts.  In  the  evening  M.  Riou  gave  a  reception  at  the 
Maine,  and  various  toasts  were  proposed. 

The  numerous  papers  and  the  lively  discussions  attest  the  success  of 
the  congress.  M.  Rutot,  the  curator  of  the  Royal  Museum  of  Brussels, 
led  off  with  a  consideration  of  the  question  of  the  Paleolithic  bed  of 
ELavre  ;  he  maintained  that  there  was  no  question  of  displacement ;  what 
had  taken  place  was  a  falling  in  of  the  superincumbent  earth  and  erosion 
of  the  cliff.  Dr  Joussel  then  described  a  new  prehistoric  bed  discovered 
at  La  Long^re,  near  Nogent-le-Notrou  (Eure-et-Loire),  where  objects  of 
varying  appearance  and  disputable  age  have  been  found,  assigned  by  the 
author  to  the  Fl^nusien  age  of  Rutot.  M.  Hue  brought  forward  a  new 
method  of  measuring  the  skulls  of  Canidse,  which  M.  Baudouin  urged  all 
archeologists  to  apply  to  the  measurement  of  other  animals.  Dr  Gueb- 
hard  appealed  to  the  archeologists  of  the  world  to  bring  into  existence  a 

731 


, 


732 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[N.  S.,  8,  I' 


map  of  prehistoric  monuments,  the  preliminary  step>s  toward  which  h^ 
been  made  by  the  Soci6t6  prthistorique  de  Paris. 

Two  long  sittings  were  held  on  the  morning  and  evening  of  the  seco 
day.  The  first  subject  was  the  Paleolithic  age  of  Brittany,  introduced 
M.  Sageret,  of  Camac,  who  was  followed  by  MM.  de  Mortillet,  Rut< 
and  Baudouin,  who  showed  why  beds  of  this  epoch  are  rare :  the  Neolitl 
period  has  attracted  more  attention  in  Brittany  (Mortillet)  ;  Brittany 
only  the  central  area  of  Quaternary  Brittany,  which  was  united  to  t 
British  Isles  until  the  Magdalenian  period  (Rutot),  and  to  a  southweste 
continent  which  survives  in  Bell -He,  Quiberon,  Houat,  etc.  (Baudouii 
Some  stones  of  this  period  were  exhibited  by  M.  Landren,  of  St  Nazaii 
under  the  name  of  eoliths  ;  the  Rennes  flints  of  M.  Pavot  were  not  r^ard 
as  of  prehistoric  character.  Dordogne,  the  scene  of  the  last  congre 
next  claimed  the  attention  of  the  meeting.  M.  I'Abb^  Chastaii 
offered  some  remarks  on  the  hammers  for  use  with  bones  discovered  in  t 
cave  of  Le  Moustier,  and  M.  de  Ricard  directed  attention  to  the  n< 
Magdalenian  station  of  Rocheyral,  Dr6me  valley.  Finally,  M.  de  Mc 
tillet  brought  into  prominence  the  Placard  cave  (Charente),  and  t 
various  industries  there  practised  ;  in  this  connection  there  arose  a  d 
cussion  on  the  pre-Solutrian  age  of  M.  TAbb^  Breuil,  for  which  1 
Rutot  and  TAbb^  Chastaing  took  up  the  cudgels. 

M.  Rutot  spoke  on  the  question  of  the  Micoque  beds,  on  the  Ytihi 
after  dealing  with  the  Str^pyien  of  France.  He  showed  that  the  Chellc 
Moustdrien  of  Micoque  was  in  reality  Str^pyien,  and  that  this  stage  f< 
between  the  Chelleen  and  the  Mesvinien,  and  not  between  the  Chelle< 
and  the  Moust^rien.  M.  Feuvrier  (of  Dole)  directed  attention  to 
Magdalenian  cave  in  the  Jura,  and  M.  J.  Dharvent  exhibited  a  sculptun 
flint  of  the  Moust^rien  age. 

On  Wednesday  evening  Neolithic  problems  were  approached  •  amoi 
the  papers  were  those  of  Dr  Martin,  on  the  false  tumulus  of  La  Mot 
Beudron  (Deux-S^vres)  ;  M.  Goby,  on  the  tumuli  of  the  districts  of  \ 
Vallier  de  Thiay,  St  C^zaire,  and  Grasse  (Alpes  Maritimes)  ;  and  ^ 
Roerich,  of  St  Petersburg,  on  sculptured  Neolithic  flints.  M.  Rutot  the 
turned  to  the  Fl^nusien,  or  lower  Neolithic,  in  France  and  showed  th 
traces  could  be  found  from  one  end  of  France  to  the  other.  Dr  Mont 
lius  then  gave  a  summary  exposition  of  the  Stockholm  collections  fro; 
the  Robenhausen  and  other  periods. 

On  the  morning  of  Thursday  the  pottery  of  the  dolmens  came  up  f< 
discussion  ;  M.  Fourdrignier,  of  Paris,  showed  that  the  study  of  finge: 
prints  might  be  of  value,  but  it  was  pointed  out  that  the  informatio 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  733 

could  throw  little  light  on  questions  of  race.  Other  papers  were  those 
of  M.  Goby,  on  the  dolmen  pottery  of  the  Grasse  district,  and  the  mica- 
ceous pottery  of  Camp  du  Bois-du-Rouret  (Alpes  Mari times).  After  a 
remarkable  paper  by  Dr  Stjema  on  the  Scandinavian  origin  of  the  Bur- 
gundians  came  papers  on  megalithic  monuments,  among  them  those  of 
Dr  Jousset,  on  the  Carnacean  age  of  Perche  ;  Dr  Coutil,  on  megalithic 
monuments  in  Normandy ;  M.  Jos^  Fortes,  on  megalithic  sculptures  in 
Portugal ;  M.  Tavar^s  de  Proen^a,  on  the  classification  of  Portuguese 
dolmens ;  M.  Coutil,  on  his  exploration  and  restoration  of  the  tumulus 
of  Fontenay-le-Marmion  (Calvados)  in  1904  and  1906.  Important 
communications  were  read  by  Dr  Waldemar  Schmidt,  on  megalithic 
monuments  in  Denmark ;  by  Dr  Montelius,  on  the  same  in  Sweden ;  by 
Dr  Baudouin,  on  five  years*  excavations  and  restorations  of  the  mega- 
liths of  Vendue.  A  popular  evening  lecture  on  the  dolmens  of  Brit- 
tany, illustrated  by  lantern -slides,  had  already  been  given  in  the  theater 
on  the  previous  evening. 

On  Thursday  evening  the  subject  of  prehistoric  gold  in  Brittany  and 
Vendue  was  treated  by  Count  Costa  de  Beauregard  and  Dr  Baudouin,  and 
much  was  said  on  the  significance  of  menhirs  and  of  the  alignments. 
For  M.  de  Paniagua  they  are  evidence  of  a  phallic  cult,  for  M.  Rutot 
they  are  sign -posts,  for  M.  Montelius  and  for  Dr  Baudouin  tombstones, 
and  the  last  view  finds  support  in  the  results  of  the  excavations  of  Dr 
Baudouin  and  M.  Hue.  The  views  on  the  alignments  were  varied ;  they 
were  ex-votos^  and  they  were  connected  with  the  Trojan  war ;  but  the 
majority  hesitated  to  express  an  opinion.  M.  le  Rouzic,  Dr  Baudouin, 
and  others,  subject  to  more  extensive  researches  in  Brittany  and  else- 
where, were  disposed  to  connect  them  with  a  solar  cult.  Among  other 
papers,  Dr  Atgier  discussed  the  megalithic  enclosures,  and  M.  de  Cl6r- 
ambant  galgals,  or  cairns,  in  Indre-et-Loire. 

M.  de  Villemereuil  proposed  a  motion  on  the  State  protection  of 
megaliths.  Speaking  generally,  it  may  be  said  that  both  the  discussions 
and  the  numerous  papers  were  of  much  interest,  and  the  meetings  were 
attended  by  more  than  a  hundred  members. 

The  following  three  days  were  taken  up  with  excellently  organized 
excursions ;  weather,  vehicles,  meals,  and  speeches,  all  were  of  the  best, 
and  more  than  a  hundred  took  part  in  each  excursion.  The  first  day  was 
consecrated  to  the  Gulf  of  Morbihan,  and  among  the  objects  visited  were 
the  cromlechs  of  Kergonan,  the  tumulus  of  Gavr'inis,  and  the  magnificent 
dolmens  of  Locmariaquer,  including  the  largest  known  menhir.  On  the 
second  day  visits  were  paid  to  the  little-known  alignments  of  St  Pierre,  in 


\ 


734  AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST  \v.  s.,  8,  1906 

Quiberon,  and  of  Erdeven,  and  to  the  dolmens  of  Roch-en-Aud,  Crocuno, 
Rondossec,  etc. 

The  third  day  was  reserved  for  Camac  and  its  marvelous  alignments, 
Menec,  Kermario,  and  Kerlescant.  .Worthy  of  special  mention  were  the 
visits  to  the  tumulus  of  Moustoir- Camac,  and  to  the  Miln  Museum,  where 
the  secretary  of  the  congress  paid  a  well-deserved  tribute  to  the  brilliant 
efforts  of  the  regretted  founder  and  his  enthusiastic  and  devoted  pupil,  M. 
le  Rouzic.  Finally,  a  visit  was  rendered  to  the  splendid  tumulus  of  St 
Michel-Caraac,  so  well  cared  for  by  M.  d' Ault  du  Mesnil,  president  of  the 
Megalithic  Monuments  Commission,  who  himself  acted  as  guide. 

In  the  course  of  the  three  days  numerous  speeches  were  made  by  foreign 
members,  who  were  roused  to  enthusiasm  alike  by  the  monuments  and  by 
the  organization  of  the  gathering.  Mention  must  be  made  of  the  utter- 
ances of  M.  Rutot,  on  the  Gulf  of  Morbihan ;  of  Dr  Baudouin,  on  sub- 
merged megaliths  in  Brittany  and  Vendue,  and  on  the  technique  of 
restorations ;  and  of  the  erudition  of  M.  de  Mortillet,  as  well  as  of  the 
demonstrations  of  MM.  d'Ault  du  Mesnil  and  le  Rouzic  ;  the  latter  also 
spoke  in  the  Miln  Museum  on  the  alignments  of  Camac,  and  on  his 
researches  on  the  spot. 

As  the  scene  of  the  next  congress  in  1907  Abbeville  was  suggested  by 
more  than  one  speaker.  Before  the  congress  separated,  the  healths  of  M. 
de  Mortillet,  Dr  Baudouin,  and  M.  Giraux  were  proposed  in  eulogistic 
terms.  As  M.  Rutot  said,  a  society  that  has  been  able  to  accomplish  so 
much  in  its  infancy  will  do  much  more  in  its  maturer  years,  and  this  was 
equally  the  ojiinion  of  the  foreign  savants  who  attended  the  meeting. 

The  "Omaha  Man."  —  .And  now  comes  another  "early  man,"  this 
time  from  Nebraska,  regarding  which  Messrs  E.  H.  Barbour  and  H.  B. 
Ward,  of  the  University  of  Nebraska,  address  the  following  communica- 
tion to  Science  under  date  of  October  27  : 

In  a  circular  moimd  recently  opened  on  a  Loess  hill  north  of  Florence, 
near  Omaha,  Nebraska,  various  skeletal  parts,  and  ei^jht  human  skulls  of  a 
primitive  type  were  exjiosed.  The  credit  of  the  discovery  belongs  to  Mr 
Robert  F.  Gilder,  of  (Imaha,  who  described  and  figured  the  skulls  In  the 
World -Hcrahl,  October  21. 

Thai  there  was  intrusive  burial  in  this  mound  is  apparent  from  die  fact 
that  the  skulls  found  below  a  layer  of  burned  clay  are  of  a  much  more  primi- 
tive type  than  those  found  above  it.  Already  live  skulls  have  been  taken  from 
the  lower  level,  and  three  from  the  upper,  and  others  are  in  evidence  and  will 
be  dug  out  later.  Those  of  the  upper  layer  probably  belonged  to  Indians  of  a 
later  period,  and  may  be  left  out  of  account  for  the  present.     The  skulls  of  the 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  735 

lower  layer  are  low-browed  and  inferior,  the  superciliary  ridges  being  thick 
and  protruding,  the  distance  through  the  temples  narrow,  and  the  frontal 
eminences  being  as  feebly  developed  as  in  Neanderthal  man.  The  low  arch 
of  the  skull  is  not  the  result  of  head-binding,  but  is  normal  and  characteristic 
as  is  evidenced  by  five  crania,  two  of  which  are  fairly  complete.  Unfortu- 
nately the  occiput  is  fragmentary  or  wanting  in  the  specimens  now  at  hand. 

The  skulls  are  brachycephalic,  and  extremely  narrow  in  transverse  diam- 
eter through  the  temples,  expanding  rapidly  at  the  parietals.  Length  of  skull 
182  mm.  ;  minimum  breadth  93  mm.  ;  maximum  breadth  160  mm. 

In  shape  and  size  the  mandible  agrees  well  with  that  of  modem  man, 
although  the  following  marked  differences  are  to  be  noted  :  the  bone,  particu- 
larly in  the  region  of  the  symphysis,  is  far  heavier,  the  muscular  scars  more 
prominent,  and  the  third  molar  in  each  case  is  ground  to  the  very  gum,  while 
the  second  and  third  are  ground  in  a  diminishing  ratio.  The  canines  are  weak 
and  scarcely  distinguishable  from  the  incisors,  and  the  space  between  the 
molars  and  the  base  of  the  coronoid  is  wide. 

The  limb  bones  indicate  a  stature  of  six  feet,  the  femora  being  somewhat 
stronger,  and  the  humeri  being  somewhat  weaker  than  might  be  expected. 
The  femora,  which  are  massive,  manifest  an  interior  curvature  more  pro- 
nounced than  ordinary,  and  in  cross  section  they  appear  triangular  through 
the  great  development  of  the  linea  aspera,  all  muscular  scars  and  tuberosities 
are  noticeably  prominent,  the  scar  for  ligamentum  teres  being  elliptical  in  out- 
line, deep  and  nearly  twice  as  long  as  broad. 

The  skulls  of  the  Nebraska  man  seem  to  be  inferior  to  those  of  the  mound 
builder,  but  for  the  present  at  least  will  be  viewed  as  early  representatives  of 
that  tribe  \sic\ . 

In  corroboration  are  the  flint  implements  or  chips  found  associated  with 
the  skulls  and  bones,  and  the  mode  of  burial.  As  work  progresses  a  detailed 
illustrated  report  will  be  made. 

Robert  C.  H.  Brock,  a  generous  patron  of  the  science  of  anthropology, 
died  in  Philadelphia,  August  8,  1906.  Mr  Brock  was  born  in  Philadel- 
phia, July  26,  1 86 1,  and  was  educated  at  Dr  Ferris*  School  in  Philadel- 
phia.  Saint  Paul's  School  in  Concord,  New  Hampshire,  and  at  Worcester 
College,  Oxford,  England.  He  studied  law  in  the  office  of  the  Honorable 
George  M.  Dallas,  and  was  admitted  to  the  bar  in  1884.  He  became  a 
partner  in  the  firm  of  W.  H.  Newbold's  Son  and  Company,  bankers,  in 
1888,  and  retired  in  1894.  He  then  traveled  in  Europe  to  regain  his 
health,  which  had  become  impaired,  and  on  his  return  devoted  himself  to 
scientific  and  charitable  pursuits.  As  a  member  of  the  board  of  managers 
of  the  Department  of  Archaeology  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  he 
took  an  active  interest  in  the  Free  Museum  of  Science  and  Art,  to  which 
he  made  large  gifts  —  notably  his  very  valuable  collection  of  gold  and 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[n.  s.,  8,  1906 


silver  coins.  Mr  Brock  was  vice-president  for  Penosylvania  of  the 
Archaeological  Institute  of  America,  a  director  of  the  Academy  of  Fine 
Arts  of  Philadelphia,  a  manager  of  the  Franklin  Institute,  and  a  member 
of  the  American  Philosophical  Society  and  of  many  other  scientiiic  and 
literary  organizations.  In  1904  he  was  elected  colonel  of  the  Second 
Regiment,  N.  G.  P.,  which  office  he  held  until  the  time  of  his  death. 

Mr  Brock  was  a  man  of  wide  culture  and  warm  sympathies,  and  his 
early  death  is  deeply  mourned  by  his  many  friends. 

Stewart  Culin. 

£cole  d'Aatbropoli^e.  —  The  thirty-first  year  of  the  £^Ie  d'An- 
thropologie  at  Paris  began  November  5,  1906.  The  courses  for  the  year 
include  the  following : 

M.  L.  Capitan,  professor :  The  Bases  of  Prehistory.     Industry,  Art. 

M.  Georges  Herv^,  professor:  (i)  The  Negro  Problem  in  the 
United  States.     (3)  History  of  Ethnology  in  the  iSth  Century. 

M.  P.  -G.  Mahoudeau,  professor  :  Origin  of  Man.  Our  Zoological 
Neighbors  1  the  Simians  and  the  Anthropoids. 

M.  L.  Manouvrier,  professor:  Psychologic  Physiology. 

M.  Adrien  de  Mortillet,  professor:  Comparative  Study  of  Prim- 
itive Industries,  Ancient  and  Modem. 

M.  G.  Papillault,  professor :  Societies  among  Primitive  Peoples. 

M.  Franz  Schrader,  professor :  The  Impulse  of  the  Cosmic  Medium 
and  the  Evolution  of  Cosmologic  Thought. 

M.  S.  Zacokowski,  professor:  Europe:  Origin  of  Nations,  Lan- 
guages, Manners.     The  Mediterranean  Shore:    Pre-Aryans,  Eiirafricans. 

M.  J.  HuGUET,  adjunct  professor:  Religion  and  Superstitions  in 
Ethiopia,  the  Eastern  Coast  of  Africa,  and  the  Lake  Region. 

M.  E,  Rahaod  :  adjunct  professor:  Anatomical  Bases  of  Theories 
Relative  to  Criminality. 

The  following  comijjimentary  courses  will  also  be  given  ; 

M.  LE  Dr  R.  Vernf.au  :  The  Quaternary  Races  of  Europe.  The 
Negroid  Race  of  Grimaldi  and  the  Race  of  Cro-Magnon. 

M.  LE  Dk  R.  Anthony  :  The  Morphology  of  the  Brain  in  Man  and 
the  Apes. 

M.  LE  Dr  a.  Marie;   Comparative  Psychopathology. 

M.  R.  Dussaud  :   Mycenian  Culture  in  Rhodes  and  Cyprus. 

Joint  Meeting  of  Anthropologists. — The  annual  meetings  of  the 
American  Anthropological  Association  and  of  the  American  Folk-Lore 
Society  will  be  held  at  Columbia  University,  New  York  City,  beginning 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  737 

December  27,  1906,  in  affiliation  with  Section  H  of  the  American  Asso- 
ciation for  the  Advancement  of  Science.  Members  are  cordially  invited 
to  be  present  and  to  contribute  papers  on  subjects  connected  with  their 
respective  fields  of  research.  Titles  should  be  sent  to  Dr  George  Grant 
MacCurdy,  Secretary  of  the  American  Anthropological  Association,  Yale 
University  Museum,  New  Haven,  Conn. 

Exploration  of  the  Station  at  La  T6ne.  —  The  Historical  Society 
of  the  Canton  of  Neuchdtel  has  planned  a  thorough  and  systematic  ex- 
ploration of  the  station  at  La  T6ne.  Work  is  to  be  begun  in  March, 
1907,  and  continued  until  the  entire  site  has  been  thoroughly  ex- 
amined. It  is  expected  that  several  years  will  be  required  to  complete 
the  work,  as  it  will  not  be  possible  to  make  excavations  during  the 
seasons  of  high  water.  The  last  work  of  any  consequence  was  in  1883, 
at  which  time  much  valuable  material  was  recovered.  The  estimated 
cost  of  the  exploration  is  placed  at  20,000  frs.,  which  is  to  be  provided 
partly  by  the  city  of  Neuchatel  and  the  Historical  Society,  together  with 
a  special  grant  from  the  Swiss  government.  All  objects  discovered 
during  the  exploration  are  to  be  deposited  in  the  Mus^e  Historique, 
Neuchatel.  D.  I.  B.,  Jr. 

Horatio  Nelson  Rust.  —  We  regret  to  record  the  death,  on  Novem- 
ber 14,  1906,  at  the  age  of  seventy-eight  years,  of  Horatio  Nelson  Rust, 
at  his  home  in  South  Pasadena,  California.  Major  Rust  was  the  son  of 
Nelson  Rust,  a  Connecticut  abolitionist,  and  was  himself  the  friend  and 
companion  of  John  Brown  and  a  veteran  of  the  Civil  War.  For  many 
years  he  had  been  actively  interested  in  Southwestern  archeology  and 
ethnology,  and  had  made  important  archeological  collections,  especially  in 
southern  California.  He  was  a  member  of  the  American  Anthropological 
Association  and  a  contributor  to  the  American  Anthropologist,  His  last 
endeavor  of  a  scientific  character  is  the  brief  article  that  appears  in  the 
current  issue. 

Major  Rust  was  bom  in  Amherst,  Mass.,  May  11,  1828,  and  was 
educated  in  the  public  schools  and  in  Amherst  Academy.  His  early 
years  were  spent  as  a  druggist  and  a  farmer  in  his  native  state  ;  later  he 
traveled  in  the  interest  of  several  business  firms.  At  the  breaking  out  of 
the  Civil  War  he  offered  his  services  and  was  assigned  to  the  medical 
department,  serving  as  acting  surgeon  in  the  engagements  at  City  Point 
and  before  Petersburg.  At  the  close  of  the  war  he  settled  in  Chicago, 
where  he  was  engaged  in  commercial  pursuits  until  1881,  when  he  re- 
moved to  southern  California  where  he  established  a  ranch  that  became 
one  of  the  show  places  of  South  Pasadena,  being  visited  by  many  tourists. 


73» 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


(N.  s.,  8,  1906 


hfajor  Rust  was  a  warm  friend  of  the  Mission  Indians  and  did  mucli  to 
alleviate  their  sufTerings.  He  was  interested  in  educational  matteisand 
was  largely  instrumental  in  the  founding  of  the  Pasadena  Public  Libiary, 
of  which  he  was  chosen  president.  He  was  twice  married  —  in  1851  to 
Fidelia  Humphrey,  who  died  in  1899,  afterward  to  Miss  Hattie  S.  Elliott. 
His  wife  and  five  children  survive  him. 

George  W.  H.  Stoucb,  Lieutenant  Colonel,  U.  S.  A.,  retired,  was 
bom  in  Gettysburg,  Pa.,  March  3,  1842,  and  died  in  Washington, 
D.  C. ,  November  11,1 906.  Shortly  after  the  outbreak  of  the  Civil  War, 
when  but  nineteen  years  of  age,  he  enlisted  in  the  1 1  th  U.  S.  Infantry,  was 
promoted  for  gallant  conduct  at  ChaDcellorsvitle,  prostrated  later  by 
typhoid  fever,  seriously  wounded  at  Gettysburg,  and  came  out  at  the 
close  of  the  war  as  a  commissioned  officer  in  the  3d  U.  S.  Infantry,  to  be 
assigned  at  once  to  active  duty  on  the  Indian  frontier,  where  he  spent 
most  of  the  remaining  years  of  his  life  up  to  his  final  prostration  a  few 
months  ago,  due  directly  to  his  old  wound. 

The  passing  away  of  Colonel  Stouch  loosens  another  of  the  few  re- 
maining links  which  bind  the  present  to  the  past  of  the  great  Western 
Plains.  His  personal  acquaintance  included  Colonel  William  Bent,  of 
Bent's  yort,  John  S.  Smith,  the  old-time  Cheyenne  trader.  Lone  Wolf, 
Little  Raven,  Roman  Nose,  Dull  Knife,  and  a  score  of  other  lamous 
chiefs  and  frontiersmen  of  forty  years  ago.  He  commanded  a  company 
of  regulars  at  the  great  treaty  of  Medicine  Lodge  in  1867,  the  first  treaty 
by  which  the  wild  Cheyenne,  Kiowa,  Arapaho,  and  Comanche  recog- 
nized ihe  ])Ower  of  ihc  U.  S.  Government  and  consented  to  come  upon 
reser\'at!ons.  This  was  perhaps  the  largest  Indian  gathering  in  the  his- 
tory of  the  Plains,  there  being  about  5,000  Indians  in  attendance,  besides 
some  600  whites,  incUiding  commissioners,  military,  and  civilians.  The 
Colonel's  description  of  the  defiant  entry  of  the  Cheyenne  on  this  occa- 
sion was  graphic  ^charging  down  in  military  order,  every  man  mounted, 
painted,  and  stripped  to  the  G-string,  swinging  his  rifle  above  his  head, 
with  a  belt  of  cartridges  around  his  naked  waist  and  another  wrapped  in 
bracelet  fashion  around  his  arm.  Before  a  year  had  passed  the  Colonel's 
command  was  fighting  these  same  Cheyenne  along  the  Kansas  frontier. 
In  all  these  dangers  and  alarms  his  young  wife  was  alwaj^  near  his  side. 
Incidental  to  this  campaign  was  the  heroic  stand  on  Arickaree  Fork  by 
Colonel  (General)  Forsyth,  who  also  has  passed  away  within  a  few  weeks, 
fifty  men  against  five  hundred  for  a  whole  week  until  help  arrived.  In 
1894-98  Colonel  Stouch  acted  as  agent  for  the  Northern  Cheycnnes  and 
Crows  of  Montana.  On  December  15,  1898,  he  was  put  on  the  retired 
jist  for  disability.     From  January  1,  1900,  until  the  beginning  of  his 


ANTHROPOLOGIC  MISCELLANEA  739 

final  illness  in  the  summer  of  1906  he  served  in  the  same  capacity  with 
the  Southern  Cheyenne  and  Arapaho  in  Oklahoma,  being  thus  brought 
into  daily  friendly  contact  with  the  chiefs  and  warriors  whom  he  had 
formerly  met  in  battle.  His  honorable  record  of  forty-five  years  as  a  soldier 
is  a  matter  of  official  history.  In  his  dealings  with  Indians,  both  as  mili- 
tary officer  and  as  agent,  he  was  sympathetic  and  firm  in  exactly  the  right 
proportion  to  command  affection  and  respect.  No  man  in  the  service 
understood  better  the  character  and  customs  of  the  Indian,  or  could  uti- 
lize this  knowledge  to  better  advantage  to  produce  results.  As  a  man  he 
was  consistent  and  upright,  conscientious  and  exact,  kindly  and  helpful,  in 
all  relations  of  life.     He  is  survived  by  his  widow,  a  son,  and  a  daughter. 

James  Moonev. 

The  courts  have  handed  down  a  decision  favorable  to  the  Univer- 
sity of  Rochester,  to  which  Lewis  H.  Morgan,  who  died  a  quarter  of  a 
century  ago,  bequeathed  the  sum  of  $75,000  for  the  higher  education  of 
women.  It  would  seem  natural  that  Mr  Morgan's  estate  should  have 
been  bequeathed  for  the  purpose  of  perpetuating  the  notable  anthropo- 
logical work  to  which  he  devoted  his  life,  save  for  the  fact,  which  is  not 
generally  known,  that  he  lost  a  brilliant  daughter  a  few  years  before  his 
own  death,  a  sad  occurrence  that  no  doubt  determined  the  purpose  of 
his  generous  bequest. 

On  the  occasion  of  its  recent  quatercentenary  the  degree  of  Doctor 
of  Laws  was  conferred  by  the  University  of  Aberdeen  on  the  following, 
together  with  many  others :  J.  Deniker,  librarian  of  the  Museum  of  Nat- 
ural History,  Paris ;  Arthur  J.  Evans,  keeper  of  the  Ashmolean  Museum, 
Oxford ;  Harald  Hofiding,  professor  of  philosophy,  Copenhagen  ;  Com- 
mandatore  Rudolfo  Lanciani,  professor  of  ancient  topography.  University 
of  Rome ;  W.  M.  Flinders  Petrie,  professor  of  Egyptology,  University 
College,  London  ;  and  Salomon  Reinach,  professor  of  archeology,  Paris. 

The  following  grants  have  been  made  by  the  general  committee  of 
the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science  for  research  under 
the  section  of  Anthropology :  Excavations  in  Crete,  ;;^ioo  ;  Glastonbury 
lake  village,  J[^7p  ;  Excavations  on  Roman  sites  in  Britain,  J[^i^\  Anthro- 
pometric investigations,  £,^1^  17s.,  3d.;  Age  of  stone  circles,  £^Z'> 
Anthropological  photographs,  J[^'^^  3s.,  6d. 

The  following  officers  of  the  California  Branch  of  the  American 
Folk- Lore  Society  have  been  elected  for  1906-07  :  President^  Charles 
Keeler ;  First  Vice-president^  John  Fryer ;  Second  Vice-president ^  W.  F. 
Bade  ;   Treasurer ^  S.  A.  Barrett ;  Secretary y  A.  L.  Kroeber ;  CouncilorSy 

A  M.  ANTH.,  N.  S.,  8-48. 


740 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


[S.  s..  8,  1 


Charles  F.  Luminis,  W.  C.  Mitchell,  Hn  Thomas  B.  Bishop,  John 
IkUtzkc,  C.  Han  Merriam,  E.  J.  Molera. 

A  CoRKEcnoN' :  Ad  unfortunate  mistake  occurs  in  the  footnote 
the  first  page  of  Miss  Breton's  account  of  the  International  CoDgres 
Anthropcdogy  and  Prehistoric  Archeology,  published  io  the  July-Septt 
ber  issue  of  the  American  Antkropolo^st.  The  statement  that  " 
nxHintains  rise  steeply  above  the  caves,"  etc.,  refers  to  the  cares 
Baouss^-Rouss6  near  Menton,  not  to  those  of  Le  Moustier. 

Tbe  orst  two  n'vubers  of  Voliuue  I  of  TTte  Old  North-  West  Lt 
lets,  published  by  Atkinson,  Meotzer  &  Grover,  under  the  auspices 
the  Chicago  History  Teachers'  Association,  cooast  of  "The  Last  T 
Journeys  of  Father  Marquette,"  by  Edwin  Erie  Sparks,  and  "  Mane 
and  Customs  of  the  Western  Indians,"  by  Charles  W.  Mann. 

Dr  T.  Mitchell  Prldden's  On  the  Great  American  Plateau  :  W 
derings  among  Canyons  and  Butles  in  the  Land  of  the  Cliff  Dweller  i 
the  Indian  of  To-day  is  announced  among  the  &U  publications  of  Geo 
P.  Putnam's  Sons,  New  York. 

Dr  D.  Randall-MacIver,  of  Oxford,  gave  a  lecture  under 
auspices  of  the  American  Ethnological  Society  at  the  American  Muse 
of  Natural  History,  on  October  29,  on  "The  Ethnolc^  and  Archeoh 
of  North  and  South  Africa." 

Mr  Ijjcis  J.  DE  MiLHAu,  A.B.  (Hanard,  '06),  and  Mr  John 
Hastings,  A.B.  (Harvard,  '05),  A.M.  (Hanard,  '06)  have  been  . 
pointed  members  of  the  Peabody  Museum  staff  as  ethnologists  of 
South  American  Expedition. 

Mr  O.  G.  LiBBV,  secretary  of  the  State  Historical  Society  of  No 
Dakota,  at  Bismarck,  has  commenced  a  preliminarj-  historical  sun'ey  of 
state  for  the  purpose  of  locating  its  archeological  and  historical  materi; 

The  seventh  annual  Huxley  memorial  lecture  of  the  Anthropologi 
Institute  of  Great  Britain  was  given  on  November  i  by  Professor  W. 
Flinders  Pelrie,  F.R.S.,  on  the  subject  of  "  Migrations," 

Dr  Arni)lei  Jacorf,  [irofessor  of  zoology  in  the  School  of  Forestry 
Tharandi,  has  been  appointed  director  of  the  Zoological  and  Ethnologi 
Museum  at  Dresden,  in  succession  to  Dr  A.  B.  Meyer. 

Professor  Adolk  FuRTw.iiNGLER  has  been  appointed  conserv'atoi 
the  Konigliche  Antiquarium  at  Munich,  succeeding  the  late  Professor 
von  Christ. 

Dr  William  Sedgwick,  known  for  his  studies  of  heredity,  died 
London,  October  23,  aged  eighty-five  years. 


INDEX   TO   AUTHORS   AND   TITLES 


(Consult  also  the  List  of  Names  appearixg  in  "Recent  Prog- 
ress IN  American  Anthropology/'  pages  556-558.) 


Adams,  Herbert  Baxter,  prize,  438 

Agamemnon  of  i^schylus,  605 

American  Anthropological  Associa- 
tion, Ithaca  meeting  of,  208 

American  anthropology,  recent  progress 
in,  441 

American  antiquities,  preservation  of,  109, 
206,433 

American  Association  of  Museums,  424 

American  Ethnological  Society,  pub- 
lications by,  606 

American  Folk-Lore  Society,  California 
branch,  203,  609,  739 

American  Museum  of  Natural  His- 
tory, Bowdoin  collection,  206 

— ,  Report  for  1905,  429 

American  Numismatic  and  Archeolog- 
ICAL  Society,  new  museum  of,  609 

Americanists,  6fteenth  international  con- 
gress ol^  691 

Amur  valley,  lower,  exploration  of,  276 

Anthropological  bibliography,  sugges- 
tions concerning,  196 

Anthropological  literature,    171,    391, 

585.  709 

Anthropological  Society  of  Wash- 
ington, itory  of  the,  564 

Anthropologists,  joint  meeting  of,  736 

Anthropology,  American,  recent  prog- 
ress in,  441 

— ,  criminal,  international  Congress  of,  205 

— ,  first  chair  of,  in  South  America,  203 

— ,  notes  on,  325 

Anthropos,  new  Austrian  journal,  205 

Antiquities,  American,  preservation  of, 
109,  ao6,  433 

Archbological  Congress  at  Vannes,  731 

Archeological  specimens  from  lower 
Columbia  valley,  298 

Archeology,  Mexican,  unsolved  problems 
10,133 

— y  notes  OD,  325 

Arizona,  Cafton  de  Chelly,  Hopi  cere- 
monitl  frames  from,  664 

— ,  notes  CD  the  Pima  of,  39 

AXy  stonei  a  remarkable,  200 

BaNDKUBR,  AdoLPH  F.  Traditions  of  pre- 
oolnmbian  earthquakes  and  volcanic 
ernptions  in  western  South  America,  47 


Berkeley  Folk-Lore  Club,  203,  437 
Bibliography,    anthropological,    sugges- 
tions concerning,  196 
Bishop  Jade  Collection,  catalog  of  the, 

420 
Blackiston,  a.  H.     Ruins  of  the  Cerro 

de  Montezuma,  256 
Bowi^,  stone,  cache  of,  in  California,  686 
Breton,  Adela  C.     Monaco  meeting  of 
the  International  Congress  of  Anthro- 
pology  and    Prehistoric  Archeology, 

559,  740 

Brewster,  E.  T.  Note  on  the  determi- 
nation of  sex  in  man,  236 

British  Museum,  Sloane  collection  in  the, 
671 

Brock,  Robert  C.  H.,  obituary  of,  735 

Brown,  Herbert.  A  Pima-Maricopa 
ceremony,  688 

Burkitt,  Robert.  A  stone  ruin  at  Se- 
tsak,  Guatemala,  13 

Burnett,  Swan  Moses,  obituary  of,  200 

Bushneli^  David  I.,  Jr.  North  Amer- 
ican ethnographical  material  in  Italian 
collections,  243  ;  Relics  of  early  man 
in  western  Switzerland,  i ;  The  Sloane 
collection  in  the  British  Museum,  671 

Cache  of  stone  bowls  in  California,  686 
California,  cache  of  stone  bowls  in,  686 
— ,  evidence  of  the  work  of  man  from  Qua- 
ternary caves  in,  229 
— ,  folk-lore  meetings  in,  203,  435 
— ,  linguistic  families  of,  652 
— ,  recent  cave  exploration  in,  221 
— ,  State  University,  gift  to,  207 
CA5iON    de    Chelly,    Hopi    ceremonial 

frames  from,  664 
Cave  exploration  in  California,  recent, 

221,  229 
Ceremonies,    Indian,    in  Oklahoma  and 

Indian  Territory,  193 
Ceremony,  a  Pima-Maricopa,  688 
— ,  puberty,  of  the  Mission  Indians,  28 
Cerro  de  Montezuma,  ruins  of,  256 
Chamberlain,   A.     F.     Anthropological 
literature,  171,  39^  585.  .709  J  First 
chair     of    anthropology    in    South 
America,    203 ;    Lectures  by,    610; 
Publications  of  Dr  V.  GiufTrida-Rug- 


741 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


CuAVSBO,  Alfredo,  obliiurf  of,  701 
Ckeyknne  jtrauD  dudo,  15 
Columbia  vallit,  noteworthj  archeolog- 
ioU  qMdmeDi  from,  298 

CONGCtl  III  l'ALUANCE  I^ANgAISE,  439 
^  PKtHISTOBIQUI  DI  FKANCI,  439,  73 1 

CONGRiss  or  AUEBICANISTS,  fourteenth 
*<**>oi>>  439  ;  nfteenlh  lenion,  691 

of  anthlofolocy  and  prehistoric 

Archiologv,  559,  740 

—  OF  Criminal  Anthropology,  105 
Criuinal   Anthropology,  coogreu  of) 

305 
CVUN,  Stewart.     Robeit  C.  H.  Brock, 

735  i  HUlDULr  Stolpe,  150 
CuHMiNus,  Robert  Y.,  440 

DakotaS,  Tenwini  of  prehistotic  man  io 

the,  640 
Densmore,  Frakcrs.    The  mtuic  of  the 

FiliptDOi,  611 
Donaldson,  Hemkv  H.,  440 
Doesev,  George  A.      Ametkui    Ana- 

dation  of   HuseuiDS,    414 ;   PawDce 

w«i  tald,  337 

Earthquakes,  precolumbiui,  in  wesleni 
South  Amenca,  tradition*  of,  47 

—  ID  the  Southwest,  436 

C/»LE  D'AnTHROPOLOCIE,  736 

EuKRsoN,     Nathan  I BL     B.      Unwritten 

literature  of  Hawaii,  371 
Eruptions,    Tolcanic,   in    western    Soutli 

America,  tnditions  of,  47 
Ethnographical  MATERIAL^  North  Atnet- 

icsn,  in  Ilaliui  collections,  143 
EthnocraI'Hy,  Inieniational   Bureau  of, 

416 
Ethnological  Survey,  Philippine,  194 
Evans,  Arthur  John,  memorial  to,  60S 
Exploration  of  the  lower  Amur  valley, 

276 
->-  of  the  station  at  L«  T^ne,  737 

Farabf.f.,  W.  C,  Amazon  expedition  of, 

439 
Fewkks,  J.  Walter.  An  ancient  mega- 
lith  in  Jalapa.  Vera  Cruz,  633  ;  Eipe- 
dition  Io  Ariiona,  610  ;  Hopi  cere- 
monial frames  frooi  Canon  de  Chelly, 
664 1  Hopi  shrines  near  the  East 
mesa,  Ariiona,  346  ;  The  sun's  influ- 
ence on  the  form  of  Hopi  pueblos,  S8 
Field  Museum  of  Natural  History, 

428,  440 
FlLtPlNos,  music  of  the,  611 
Flint,  Wf^ton,  obituary  of,  436 
Folk-lore  meetings  in  California,  103,  435 


FowKt,    GUEAHD.     Eiploratioo    of   1 

lower  Anoi  lallej,  176 
Frtbderici,  Georc,  204,  439 
Frobenius,  L.,  307 

Game,  tang'-ga,  a  Riilippine  pa-ma'-' 

83 
Gardens  of  the  New  England  lodiam,  t 
Grrmak  anthropological  wcietles,  607 

GlDDINOS,  FRAHKUH  H.,  44O 

Giuffkida-Rugcrri,  v.,  publicalicBis  i 

Gordon,  G.  B.,  delegate  to  Mmuco  Cc 

gre*s,los 
GlRENLAND,  Icelandic  colony  in,  263 
Grinheix,    George    Bird.      Cheyea 

Mream  Dames,  15 
GuAXeMALA,  5e-tiak,  a  stone  niin  at, 

Hawaii,  unwrinen  literatDre  of,  371 
Hearst,    Phiebe,   gill    to   UDiversity 

California,  207 
Hbwktt,  Edgar  L.     Departure  for  Me 
ico,   207;  Origin  of  Ibe  Dame  NaTab 
193;  Preicmtion  of  American  antiqi 

HiNKLS,  Philip  M.,  610 
History  of  Reugions  Club,  432 
HiTZ,  John.     Helen  Keller,  308 
Hodgson,  Richard,  death  o(  202 
Holmes,  W.  H.     Certain  notched  or  in 

loped   stone    tablet*  of   the   mono 

builders,  101 
Hopi   ceremonial   frames  from   CafloD  ■ 

Chelly,  664 

—  pueblos,  sun's  influence  on  the  form  < 

88 

—  shrines  near  the  East  mesa.  346 
Hough,  Walter.    EarthquBltes and  trit 

movements  in  the  Southwest.  436 
Hrdlicka,  Ales.     Notes  on  the  Pima 


Icelandic  colony  in  Greenland,  z6z 
Igorotes,  measurements  of,  194 

Indian  Territory,  Indian  ceremonies  i 

193 
International  Bureau  of  Ethnognpb 


International  congress.    Sti  Congre; 

Italian   collections.   North    Americ 

ethnographical  material  in,  143 

Jalapa,  Vera  Crui,  ancient  megalith  i 

633 
Jenks,   Albert   Ernest.     Note   regai 

ing.    438 ;    Tang'-ga,    a    Fhilippi 

pa-ma'-to  game,  81 


INDEX  TO  AUTHORS  AND    TITLES 


743 


Keller,  Helen,  308 

Krauss,  Friederich  S.,  folk-lore  library 
of,  202  ! 

Kroeber,  a.  L.  203,  207,  435.  437; 
Dialectic  divisions  of  the  Moquel unman 
family  in  relation  to  the  internal  differ- 
entiation of  the  other  linguistic  families 
of  California,  652  ;  Measurements  of 
Igorotes,  194 

KUNZ,  Geurur  F.  Catalog  of  the  Bishop 
jade  collection,  420 

Lamb,  Daniel  S.  The  story  of  the  An- 
thropological Society  of  Washington, 

564 
La  T^e,  exploration  of  the  station  at,  737 

Linguistic  families  of  California,  652 

London  University,  donations  to,  609 

Lowber,  J.  W.,  440 

IjOWERY,  Woodbury,  obituary  of,  437 

MacCurdy,  George  Grant.  Fifteenth 
International  Congress  of  American- 
ists, 691 

Man,  early,  relics  of,  in  western  Switzer- 
land, I 

— -  evidence  of  the  work  of,  from  caves  in 
California,  229  • 

—  in  Nebraska,  734 

—  note  on   the  determination  of  sex   in, 

236 
—1  prehistoric,  remains  of,  in  the  Dakotas, 

604 
Megalith,  ancient,  in  Jalapa,  Vera  Cruz, 

633 

Merriam,  John  C.  Recent  cave  explora- 
tion in  California,  221 

Mesa  Verde  National  Park,  creation  of, 
426 

Mexican  archeology,  unsolved  prob- 
lems in,  133 

Mission  Indians,  puberty  ceremony  of,  28 

Missouri  Historical  Society,  204,  434 

Monaco  meeting  of  the  International 
Congress  of  Anthropology  and  Prehis- 
toric Archeology,  559,  740 

Montgomery,  Henry.  Remains  of  pre- 
historic man  in  the  Dakotas,  640 

Mooney,  James.  Friederich  S.  Krauss, 
202;  George  W.  H.  Stouch,  738, 
Publications  of  Lieut.  Georg  Frieder- 
id,  204  ;  Virginia  manuscripts,  607 

Moore,  Clarence  B.,  440 

Moquelumnan  family,  dialectic  divisions 
of  the,  652 

Morgan,  Lewis  H.,  bequest  by,  739 

Mound-builders,  certain  notched  or  scal- 
loped stone  tablets  of  the,  loi 

Mounds,  Indian,  preservation  of,  206 

Music  of  the  Filipinos,  611 


Navaho,  origin  of  the  name,  193 
Nebraska,  supposed  early  man  in,  734 
New    England    Indians,    houses    and 

gardens  of  the,  115 
North  American  ethnographical  material  in 

Italian  collections,  243 
Northwestern  America,  a  remarkable 

pipe  from,  y^ 
Norwegian  Geographical  Society,  610 
Nuttali.,   Zelia.     Some  unsolved  prob- 
lems in  Mexican  archeology,  133 

Obst,  Hermann,  death  of,  440 
Oklahoma,  Indian  ceremonies  in,  192 
••Omaha  Man,"  734 
Oxford   University  diploma  in  anthro- 
pology, 206 

Pawnee  war  tales,  337 
Peabody,  C,  205,  440  ;  Notes  on  anthro- 
pology,   and   archeology,    325 ;   The 
Agamemnon  of  i'Eschylus,  605 
Peabody  Museum,  Far  low  collection,  206 
Philippine  Ethnological  Survey,  194 
Philippine  pa-ma^-to  game,  82 
PiETTE,  Edouard,  death  of,  608 
Pima-Maricopa  ceremony,  688 
Pima  of  Arizona,  notes  on  the,  39 
Pipe,    a    remarkable,    from    northwestern 

America,  33 
Pnom  Penh,  archeological  museum  at,  205 
Powhatan  name  for  Virginia,  23 
PKECOLU.MBIAN  earthquakes  in  western 

South  America,  traditions  of,  47 
Prehistoric  man  in  the  Dakotas,  remains 

of,  640 
Preservation  of   American    antiquities, 
109,  206,  433 

Problems,  unsolved,  in  Mexican  archeol- 
ogy, 133 
Prudden,  T.  Mitchell,  438,  740 

Puberty  ceremony  of  the  Mission  In- 
dians, 78 

Pueblos,  Hopi,  sun*s  influence  on  the 
form  of,  88 

Putnam,  F.  W.,  432 ;  Evidence  of  the 
work  of  man  on  objects  from  Quater- 
nary caves  in  California,  229 

Putnam,  William  Clement,  obituary  of, 
199 

Quaternary  caves  in  California,  evidence  ot 
the  work  of  man  on  objects  from,  229 

Relics  of  early  man  in  western  Switzer- 
land, I 
Ruin,  stone,  at  Se-tsak,  Guatemala,  13 
Ruins  of  the  Cerro  de  Montezuma,  256 


744 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 


i 


Rust,  Horatio  N.  Cache  of  stone  bowls 
in  California,  686  ;  Death  of,  737  ; 
Puberty  ceremony  of  the  Mission  In- 
dians, 28 

Saint  Louis  Public  Museum,  197 

San  Francisco  disaster,  431 

Savii.i.e,  Marshall  H.,  610;  Alfredo 
Chavero,  701 

Se-tsak,  (luatemala,  stone  ruin  at,  13 

Sex,  note  on  the  determination  of,  237 

S1.0ANE  coi-LFXTiON  in  the  British  Mu- 
seum, 671 

Smith,  Haklan  I.  A  remarkable  pipe 
from  northwestern  America,  33  ;  Lec- 
tures by,  609 ;  Noteworthy  archeolog- 
ical  specimens  from  lower  Columbia 
valley,  298 

South  America,  first  chair  of  anthro- 
pology in,  203 

— ,  traditions  of  precolumbian  earthquakes 
and  volcanic  eruptions  in,  47 

Southwest,  earthquakes  and  tribal  move- 
ments in  the,  436 

Spanc,  Charles  S.,  collection  of,  206 

Speck,  Frank  G.  Indian  ceremonies  in 
Oklahoma  and  Indian  Territory,  192 

Spitz K A,  Edward  Anthony,  440 

StefAnsson,  VilhjAlmur.  The  Ice- 
landic colony  in  Greenland,  262 

Steinen,  Karl  von  den,  207,  610 

Stein er,  Roland  B.,  death  of,  204 

Stolpe,  Hjalmar,  150 

Stone  ax,  a  remarkable,  200 

Stone  b<>wi_s,  cache  of,  in  California,  686 

Stone  tablets,  certain  notched  or  scal- 
lo[)e(l,  of  the  mound-builders,  loi 

Stouch,  George  W.  II.,  obituary  of,  738 

Stream  names,  Cheyenne,  15 


Sun's  influence  on  the  form  of  Ho 

pueblos,  88 
Switzerland,  relics  of  early  man  in,  I 


Tablets,  stone,  certain  notched  or 
loped,  of  the  mound- builders,  lOl 

Tang^-ga,  a  Philippine  pa-ma^-to  game,  1 

TooKER,  William  Wallace.     Th«  Pbi 
hatan  name  for  Virginia,  23 

Tribal  movements  in  the  Southwest,  4; 

Uhle,  Max,  resignation  of,  202 
United  States  National  Museum,  43 
Universitv'  of  California,   recent  i 

searches  by  the,  606 
University  of  Otago,  New  Zealand,  6 

Vannes,  Archeological  Congress  at,  731 
Vera  Cri'Z  (  Jalapa),  an  ancient  megali 

in.  559 
Verner,  S.  p.,  609 

ViRCHOW,  Rudolf,  memorial  to,  206 

Virginia  manuscripts,  607 

Virginia,  the  Powhatan  name  for,  23 

Volcanic  eruptions  in  South  Americ 

traditions  of,  47 

Voss,  Albert,  death  of,  610 

White,  Martin,  609 
WiLLOUGHBV,  Charles  C.     Houses  ai 
gardens  of  the  New  England  Indian 

WiNSOR,  Justin,  prize,  438 

Wisconsin     Archeohwical     Societ 

preservation  of  mounds  by,  206 
Wood,  Charles  James,  deadi  of,  439 

Vale  University,  gifts  to,  207 


AMERICAN  ANTHROPOLOGIST 

MEW  8ES1ES 

IVaMnfivn,  anJ  iht  AmtricaK  £l6Malfjpcjl  SmSety  t^  XeW  iWk 
V.  W.  HCH^GE,  emar:  VASH»OTaa,  D.  C 

CONTENTS 

1*^ Jfiwic </ /A/  fiiSfiinar.     Fkanccs  DENaUOKt  ftn 

'  AneifU     Afrga/M    /•    /a/afia,    ''Swa    Cnu.       J.    VVahhk     i  e^»t.t-- 

(PUTtXXIX.)  -  .  .  , ■         -   ^W 

Mm-  4^  /'rtAi'thvff   Afail    i»   /Af    OaifttK.      Hrkicv    Mo:<t(khjkry. 
L(rLATKS  xxx-xxxiv.  >  I       ..  '       .  64g' 

^'aUrtic  Dmrinnt  ff  thr  MofUflumjiaH  /•'■aii»'(r  iu  ^tlallaa  h  Af  Jh.- 
W4trnal  Oifftrtntidtifn  of  tht  'OtAtr  JLifrpiftlir  fami^f  -/  Cat{fiirtua, 

fA.  L..  Krorbed 6ji 

<^C*mna»fQ{/'raiiinfrtm  Cn&fH  ./t  C^tl/t,.jfrit,»ta.  J.  Waltkk  Fk«K.K  d(t4 
7^^  SiMine  C<ti/eeii»n  in  Ikt  British  Ataseitm.      David  f.  BtfeSKCU.,  >|t. 

^l>i.aTV!>  xxxv-HXXlKJ      ...,,..--    ffTi 
.-t  Gw*^  afSimt  SffWit  i»  Ca/(fivm',i.     Hwurio  X.  Robt.     f  n.M  ■         . 
A  Pima-Af.iricpfhi  CrrrmoHjr.     HastntncTBhOWIt 
7^.*     F^.'f^ilh    taltri^iUiatwl    Otngrtti    •/  Am.-tunniih      Ceuri  .    ' 

"I      '""I'lLl.V       .  .  .  _  fi7i 

■'■rA     MaJUNAIxH.  dAViM  ;oi 

,,iv*        .         .    -     .         .  .704 

^'■'H  Ni.v  i'untioi'nom         .        .  .....  70H 

CciuoDiCki.  Ln-KKATDRS-    CoD'tiKied  by  Dr  AtKVtttW  ^  CUAMSRni-AiK.  7t>v 
AfcriiKoi-ouwR.' MisccLLAUCA  731 

IS&lOi;  TO  V™.1'MR  S  .  .  .  ,  .  .    7  ■  i 

nmLinnd  nvAcnsLV  *<ic  m: 

AMERICAS  ANTHR0P01«0GICAI.  ASaOCIATION 

ljutCLnw,  r*-,  O.  S.  A,,  TiiB  sr«w  S*ju  Ititntwc  Cottrwiir 

t'-mtni  &innc«ii  A«nUi  WikLMH  Wmli*  k  lif*. 

•(  Kmci  u..  HatMt,  Union.  W.  C 

A«Mi* {•* tWimmr  1  RtnL  U',  HimumW, 

kubmniption  in  tb«  Unli«d  9t»»»,  Can*4«.  and  Matita  t   Par  HurabM,  8t  aj  i 
Pn  Yui.  Cfjis  BU.    AU  other  tubsertpiiaBai  pec  Nnmbu, 


American  Anthropologist] 


RAuaUBJB 


The  Aus»)»H  AsTHROKitooi^r  (h'^wSUtti-f)  if  publilhed  qUM 
rach  uumlier  cuiUaining  ftbout  iHa  OcUvo  patf«B.  with  JlluctiiUom,  I 
iii|[  an  oouuiJ  vulume  of  7}li  fa^^;. 

'I'bc  cdltont  ultii  tn  niube  the  jotimat  a  mcdiur 
bdwecn  otuiknu  of  all  litaut.Le<  ©f  Anthro)»olo!g)>  Its  conicnu  ciplwin- 
(i)  hjtih-irni'lc  |<a)X!n.  [icrtainki|:  to  all  |iaru of  the  donutn  of  AnlhrO> 
poln^y,  liic  teciiutiul  tupcrt.  U>ing  litnitttd  in  oumLier  uu)  length-,  ^»^ 
brioK'T  coniribuituns  cm  aTithrn|ir>Iogk  nub)cci«,  iacludritK  docuwon  wtd 
ctHTt^fuiiKlenre ;  (3)  rcviewioranihnpolofjn  llterauin*;  (-4)  comments  ' 
on  prriodlcjJ  liiemurE,'  ;  aiirl  fj)  niJtior  noit;^  and  ncwv 

The  tldiuirlal  Eluord  |uvr  uudertaketi,  tndiviflull)- anil  culln--tively, 
to  caiT)'  otiT  the  |Mf)ioar  or  th«  journal  sod  to  render  11  rcjiriiTeni^iitrc 
of  ihe  SdcDwof  AmtiT(i)4)lt'^,  and  «c|}c«ially  uf  Aathfotwlo):}-  tn 
Atnifiica-     The  Jourtul  ib  coiiducici]  under  ilie  aiuiiicn  uf  the  A  "^^ 

AmnittirauKiiCAL  Ait^iL-UTinii,  and  d  ii  the  m^n  sbu  of  the  / 
KiUioicAL  SooETv  UF  WAiHiNiTiuK  aud  of  ihc  Ahehiuk  E-n 

ILAL  ilClETV  (J  New  Yoflt 

'Dm  Cifininiitee  ou  PtdiUuiuon  earnesUy  invite  ihe  coaperatuin  of  all 
ftiudenis  uf  Anihra|Milo}'>'-  Alttioush  cnatrilnitions  suh«altted  for  iiuliU- 
caiUtn  arc  tevluwed,  so  Gu  u  poa&Ibh-,  by  mcmliea  of  the  Commltiee, 
the  -cuairibuuin  of  acccftled  arifcles  an  alone  rc%|io(u>h]K  for  opiiiioiif 
eiptnsvd. 

The  (>ut{ioae  vi  the  Aui:kica7>;  ARTiwflmtjjGist  ts  to  disscmiaair  a» 
widclv  as  iiractiLablc.  for  the  osc  of  ^chobra  and  *iiulent]>,  ihc  rcsulo  al 
anthropulogtc  tnvcstij^lions.  Id  txsa  in  whirji  itic  malL-rial  ftmii  the 
AxniROPutjiciin*  can  be  otjlizcd  to  admits^  tn  Kunm-ction  with  aa- 
ihrupologic  worl:,  the  (Jonuniiicc  will  he  ptrparrd,  nnlers  there  mny  be 
s|^i^dal  reasons  to  tlic  ctinlrary,  10  give  pcriiiKiiion  rnr  the  use  of  auch 
oiaiemL 

Aiiihori  and  pabtMlieTs  arc  tnv-itcd  >o  send  to  the  Kditor,  for  edi- 
Itmal  coonttenition  in  Ihc  AUf.ltlCA}*  A^iIlu»l>Otj>aUT,  works  of  scieo- 
ttfic  characlcr  that  arc  hlielf  to  [irart:  of  intcmt  to  the  mdcrx  uf 
Ibc  Joiimal.  Pendtllcab  of  anlhrQpolujiotl  interest  deu^ned  for  review 
should  be  ami  to  Dr  A.  F.  Chnmberlain,  Clark  Unlrersity.  Wor«:«»ter, 
MsMKrhtuett*. 

All  cunirlbutiati*  lu  tJie  ttifleulnc  kod  all  comspoo^ciKe  of  >n  edttmiat 
naluic  ilwulcl  be  kJ(L-c»ml  to  the  edtlM.  Mr  P.  W.  HODOB.  i)u  P  nntr, 
-A.  W..  WaihlDKiun.  D.  C. 

Cucreipondonct  ponainln;  u-  tubtai^'ikin'-  »bati|d  be  ajdrencd  AH  B  R  - 
\CfiU  ANTHROfOLi^QICT.  «i  North  Queca  St.,  Lanuttter,  Pa_,  ot  t«  Ui 
B,  TAUBOT  B.  I-tVDEi,  TrcBsisu  b(  the  AmeiJcae  ArthrapohigKat  A 
ation.  MJ  Filih  A»rni>c.  M«w  Ywv  City.  «-  Y. 


i 


American 
anthropological  association 


OJF/C£HS 

hr/fVfv/.-  F,  W.  PoTNA«.  CtiMlor  of  ihe  Hubody  Mus«utn,   tiattvd 
Uatvnnty,  CiinbridK^,  Man. 

Kt-Pretidenl,  ipo6 :  Glor-je  A.   Dijksev,  Cuntlor  of  Atilhrapalogy, 
I  Field  MiwRun  o(  N'uunl  Histury,  Qilc^go,  Illinobi. 
^r-J'rM'(fenf,  iffo; .-  Kiss  Autx  C    FLKtoiKN,  cx-Preddent  of  iSc 

Antltropoluglcal  Society  of  \Vashin]|(on. 
^te-PraiJfrtti^oS .-  vr.  H.  llaLMa,  Chief  of  lbs  Duresa  of  Atnerican 
I  £ihaulL)(;y,  Wiutiinsian,  D.  C- 

Wre-PrtttiUitt,  i^o^ .-  Kranz  Bo«,  Profcwir  of  Anthropoloey,  Colum- 
I  bia  Unifcmily,  N«w  York  City. 

\naary ;  UtOUnt  Grakt  MacCukov,  Cnraior  of  AolbnipolOgy,  Vttle 
lUuvenity  liliwuni.  licit  Haven,  Cooa. 

iHHrtr :  B.  't'AUWT  B.  HvDt,  S4'  Fifth  awntie,  Neur  York  City. 
rr  F.  W.  HoDOE,  133X  Patrcet,  N.  W.,  WRahlngioD,  D.  C. 


COAfM/Tf£:E  OsV  PifnUCAttOX 
F.  W.  PUTNAM.  Ckain-n«  t*  t^tit. 
F.  W.  HODGK.  St^rHan  a  ^Uit, 

AN  H.  AMIIlUMK'ni,  Mtnso  Naciomai,  Ihiwo*  Ann,  AfuanrmcA. 
^AMK  UAKl'.K,  SurmiuKiA^  iKmnmus,  WAinifCOTah,  t).  tl 

KSZ  BOAS,  CiituuiuA  Uhivwuitv,  Ki:w  Voiu. 
jLVUD  BOVLC,  bRf Akntsjrr  M' EM'CA-nori,  ro»o)(TC^  CakaoA. 

XANDEK  F.  CHAMBERLAIN,  CtAfttt  UMIVXUITV,  WOKcnmk,  lUst. 
IbFRSDO  CIIAVKKtl,  Cxrt  ur  Mmco. 

WAItr  CULIN,  BlugitLyN  iMTiTtrt  kluinv. 
Hauit  A.  JJOEtsKY,  Fixi«  UivMCM  o*  IjAn'UL  Mutukv.  Cuiuui. 
r.  ^'ALTEB  FEWKES,  iTiAeAD  ur  Amkniuam  tm^twox.  WAWinttmui,  0.  C 
AUCe  C  FLRTCMKR.  VtJ.mm  MimirM,  CAMRftitsk.  MA3Mcilin«TT>^ 
JbBORCE  IIVKON  liORDON.  U.iivuuity  uf  PBrmvLvAMA,  ntiLAii»u>HiA. 
.  n,  IHjLMCS.  llu«tAt'  nf  AuuucAN  LTitvdUMiv,  WA^tuuiRmn/,  W,*: 

11.  ViJN    IHCniA'C,  MUIEU    PaVU^A,    t^AO  PAULO*  BuUl. 

A.  L.  KKOEKEK.  AmuAiKuCoiJ.iwa,  SANpMKiatgO|.CAUmu)OA< 
KClUOLtO  LKXX,.  SAniAou  ut  Cuiif,  Cbile. 
W  J  ticGBE,  AAun  liMiu  Vvujc  UiawM,  St  LonLii  Uifu 
CUARL£S  FKAUODV,  PiiiLun  Acaouv,  AxDorva,'  UMk